B ENGINE
SECTION
ACC
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
A
ACC
C
D
E
CONTENTS
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... 2
Removal and Installation .......................................... 2
REMOVAL ............................................................. 2
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 2
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 4
Accelerator Control ................................................... 4
PEDAL TRAVEL .................................................... 4
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ACC-1
2005 Altima
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
PFP:18005
EBS00J8R
REMOVAL
1.
2.
a.
b.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector.
Pull the connector lock back to unlock the connector from the
accelerator pedal position sensor as shown.
Pull up on the connector to disconnect it from the accelerator
pedal position sensor as shown.
LBIA0333E
3.
Remove the upper accelerator pedal nuts and lower accelerator
pedal bolt.
LBIA0334E
4.
Remove the accelerator pedal and accelerator position sensor assembly.
● For electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-571, "ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION SENSOR" (QR25DE), EC-1286, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR"
(VQ35DE).
CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor
from the pedal assembly.
● Avoid impact from dropping during handling.
● Keep the pedal assembly away from water.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should
be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
LBIA0334E
Revision: March 2005
ACC-2
2005 Altima
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
●
Check that the accelerator pedal moves through the full specified distance of pedal travel.
Pedal travel “A”
A
: 52.6 - 58.2 mm (2.07 - 2.29 in)
ACC
C
LBIA0062E
CAUTION:
When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform the
“Accelerator pedal released position learning”. Refer to EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position
Learning" (QR25DE), EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" (VQ35DE).
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ACC-3
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accelerator Control
PFP:00030
EBS00J8S
PEDAL TRAVEL
LBIA0062E
Accelerator pedal - total travel “A”
Revision: March 2005
52.6 - 58.2 mm (2.07 - 2.29 in)
ACC-4
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
ACS
AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
F
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)..... 2
Description ............................................................... 2
G
H
I
J
ACS
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ACS-1
2005 Altima
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Description
PFP:18930
EKS008U9
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" (QR engine models), EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (VQ engine
models).
Revision: March 2005
ACS-2
2005 Altima
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
SECTION
AT
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
A
B
AT
D
E
CONTENTS
RE4F04B
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................ 8
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ......................... 8
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 10
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 10
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System
of A/T and Engine .................................................. 10
Precautions ............................................................ 10
Service Notice or Precautions ................................ 12
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 13
PREPARATION ......................................................... 14
Special Service Tools ............................................. 14
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 17
OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................. 18
A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 18
Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 19
Cross-sectional View .............................................. 20
Hydraulic Control Circuit ........................................ 21
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 22
Control System ....................................................... 31
Control Mechanism ................................................ 33
Control Valve .......................................................... 37
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 39
Introduction ............................................................ 39
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 43
CONSULT-II Function (TCM) ................................. 43
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ........... 54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION ............. 59
Introduction ............................................................ 59
Work Flow .............................................................. 63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...... 65
A/T Fluid Check ...................................................... 65
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 65
Stall Test ................................................................. 68
Revision: March 2005
Line Pressure Test .................................................. 71
Road Test ............................................................... 72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 88
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 88
TCM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 98
CAN Communication ............................................ 101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY .... 102
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 102
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 103
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 105
Description ............................................................ 105
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105
Possible Cause ..................................................... 105
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 105
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 107
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 108
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT ...................................................................111
Description .............................................................111
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................111
Possible Cause ......................................................111
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ....................................................................111
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS .............................. 113
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 115
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 117
Description ............................................................ 117
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 117
Possible Cause ..................................................... 117
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 117
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ........................ 119
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 120
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 122
Description ............................................................ 122
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 122
Possible Cause ..................................................... 122
AT-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 122
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ......................... 123
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 124
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................. 126
Description ............................................................ 126
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 126
Possible Cause ..................................................... 126
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 126
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ......................... 128
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 131
Description ............................................................ 131
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 131
Possible Cause ..................................................... 131
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 131
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ........................ 133
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 134
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 136
Description ............................................................ 136
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136
Possible Cause ..................................................... 136
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 136
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ........................ 138
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 139
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ................ 141
Description ............................................................ 141
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141
Possible Cause ..................................................... 141
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 141
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ........................ 143
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 148
Description ............................................................ 148
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 148
Possible Cause ..................................................... 148
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 148
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 150
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 151
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 153
Description ............................................................ 153
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153
Possible Cause ..................................................... 153
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 153
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 155
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 156
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 161
Description ............................................................ 161
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161
Possible Cause ..................................................... 161
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 161
Revision: March 2005
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 163
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 164
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 167
Description ............................................................ 167
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 167
Possible Cause ..................................................... 167
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 167
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 169
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 170
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 172
Description ............................................................ 172
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172
Possible Cause ..................................................... 172
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 172
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 174
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 175
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] ........................................................................ 177
Description ............................................................ 177
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 178
Possible Cause ..................................................... 178
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 178
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ............................... 180
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 181
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE ...................................................................... 183
Description ............................................................ 183
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 183
Possible Cause ..................................................... 183
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 183
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 185
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 186
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 188
Description ............................................................ 188
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188
Possible Cause ..................................................... 188
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 188
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 190
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 191
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE).192
Description ............................................................ 192
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 192
Possible Cause ..................................................... 192
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 192
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ......................... 194
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 195
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ................... 199
Description ............................................................ 199
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199
Possible Cause ..................................................... 199
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure ................................................................... 199
AT-2
2005 Altima
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ...................... 201
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 202
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ............... 203
Description ........................................................... 203
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ........................ 204
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 205
Component Inspection ......................................... 206
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT
(ROM) ..................................................................... 207
Description ........................................................... 207
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 207
Possible Cause .................................................... 207
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure .................................................................. 207
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 208
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) ......................... 209
Description ........................................................... 209
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 210
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............211
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC .......................211
1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not
Come On .............................................................. 215
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position. 217
3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed .............................................. 218
4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ............................ 219
5. Large Shock. N → R Position .......................... 221
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position. 223
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1
Position ................................................................ 226
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ................. 229
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ..................................................... 232
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ......................... 235
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 .......................... 238
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...................... 241
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ........... 243
14. Lock-up Is Not Released ................................ 245
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Braking D4 → D3 ) ................................................ 246
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ..................... 248
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → 33 , When A/T Selector
Lever D → 3 ......................................................... 249
18. A/T Does Not Shift: 33 → 22 , When Selector
Lever 3 → 2 Position ............................................ 250
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector
Lever 2 → 1 Position ............................................ 251
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. 252
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP &
3 Position Switches Circuit Checks), and Throttle
Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
Sensor] Circuit Check .......................................... 252
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 258
Description ........................................................... 258
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 258
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ................................ 259
Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............ 260
Component Inspection ......................................... 261
Revision: March 2005
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 263
Control Device ...................................................... 263
Control Cable ........................................................ 264
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 265
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 265
Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 267
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ............. 267
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment . 267
Control Cable Adjustment ..................................... 268
Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ................ 268
AIR BREATHER HOSE .......................................... 270
Air Breather Hose - Air Duct Side ......................... 270
Air Breather Hose - Transaxle Side ...................... 271
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................... 273
Removal ............................................................... 273
Inspection ............................................................. 273
Installation ............................................................ 274
OVERHAUL ............................................................ 275
Components ......................................................... 275
Oil Channel ........................................................... 278
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 279
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 280
Disassembly ......................................................... 280
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ..................... 296
Manual Shaft ........................................................ 296
Oil Pump ............................................................... 299
Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 303
Control Valve Upper Body .................................... 312
Control Valve Lower Body .................................... 316
Reverse Clutch ..................................................... 318
High Clutch ........................................................... 321
Forward and Overrun Clutches ............................ 326
Low & Reverse Brake ........................................... 333
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ...................................................... 335
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and
Bearing Retainer ................................................... 339
Band Servo Piston Assembly ............................... 344
Final Drive ............................................................ 349
ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 354
Assembly (1) ......................................................... 354
Adjustment (1) ...................................................... 355
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 360
Adjustment (2) ...................................................... 367
Assembly (3) ......................................................... 369
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 376
General Specifications .......................................... 376
Shift Schedule ...................................................... 376
Stall Revolution ..................................................... 376
Line Pressure ....................................................... 377
Control Valves ...................................................... 377
Accumulator .......................................................... 377
Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 378
Final Drive ............................................................ 380
Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ............................ 380
Input Shaft ............................................................ 381
Reduction Pinion Gear ......................................... 381
Band Servo ........................................................... 382
AT-3
2005 Altima
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Output Shaft ......................................................... 382
Bearing Retainer ................................................... 383
Total End Play ....................................................... 383
Reverse Clutch End Play ...................................... 383
Removal and Installation ...................................... 383
Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 383
Solenoid Valves .................................................... 383
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 384
Revolution Sensor ................................................ 384
Dropping Resistor ................................................. 384
Turbine Revolution Sensor (Power Train Revolution
Sensor) ................................................................. 384
RE5F22A
INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 385
Alphabetical Index ................................................ 385
DTC No. Index ...................................................... 386
PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 387
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 387
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System
of A/T and Engine ................................................. 387
Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement. 388
Precautions ........................................................... 389
Service Notice or Precautions .............................. 391
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 391
PREPARATION ....................................................... 392
Special Service Tools ........................................... 392
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 395
A/T FLUID ............................................................... 396
Changing A/T Fluid ............................................... 396
Checking A/T Fluid ............................................... 396
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 397
Cross-Sectional View ............................................ 397
Shift Mechanism ................................................... 398
TCM Function ....................................................... 415
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................. 416
CAN Communication ............................................ 416
Line Pressure Control ........................................... 417
Shift Control .......................................................... 417
Lock-Up Control .................................................... 419
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 421
Introduction ........................................................... 421
OBD-II Function for A/T System ........................... 421
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II .......... 421
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............... 421
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 424
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 425
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 425
Fail-Safe ............................................................... 425
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and
Accurate Repair .................................................... 428
A/T Electrical Parts Location ................................. 433
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 434
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................. 435
Check Before Engine is Started ............................ 439
Check at Idle ......................................................... 439
Revision: March 2005
Cruise Test - Part 1 ............................................... 441
Cruise Test - Part 2 ............................................... 442
Cruise Test - Part 3 ............................................... 443
Shift Schedule ....................................................... 444
Symptom Chart ..................................................... 445
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ......... 452
CONSULT-II Function (TCM) ................................ 455
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ......... 461
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 464
Description ............................................................ 464
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 464
Possible Cause ..................................................... 464
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 464
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN .............................. 465
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 466
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 467
Description ............................................................ 467
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 467
Possible Cause ..................................................... 467
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 467
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 468
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR ............................. 469
Description ............................................................ 469
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 469
Possible Cause ..................................................... 469
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 469
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 470
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.471
Description ............................................................ 471
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 471
Possible Cause ..................................................... 471
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 471
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 472
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 473
Component Inspection .......................................... 475
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT .................................................................. 476
Description ............................................................ 476
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 476
Possible Cause ..................................................... 476
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 476
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 477
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 478
Component Inspection .......................................... 480
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE ............................................................ 481
Description ............................................................ 481
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 481
Possible Cause ..................................................... 481
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 481
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP ............................ 482
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 483
Component Inspection .......................................... 485
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT ......................................................................... 486
Description ............................................................ 486
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 486
Possible Cause ..................................................... 486
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 486
AT-4
2005 Altima
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSC ........................... 487
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 488
Component Inspection ......................................... 489
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT ............................... 490
Description ........................................................... 490
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 490
Possible Cause .................................................... 490
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 490
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSATC ....................... 491
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 492
Component Inspection ......................................... 493
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE ........................................................... 494
Description ........................................................... 494
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 494
Possible Cause .................................................... 494
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 494
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 494
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................ 496
Description ........................................................... 496
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 496
Possible Cause .................................................... 496
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 496
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ........................ 497
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 498
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 499
Description ........................................................... 499
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 499
Possible Cause .................................................... 499
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 499
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ........................ 501
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 503
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 505
Description ........................................................... 505
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 505
Possible Cause .................................................... 505
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 505
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ........................ 507
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 509
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION .................511
Description ............................................................511
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................511
Possible Cause .....................................................511
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................511
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ........................ 513
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 514
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION ................ 516
Description ........................................................... 516
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 516
Possible Cause .................................................... 516
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 516
Wiring Diagram — AT — 5THSIG ........................ 518
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 520
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 522
Description ........................................................... 522
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 522
Possible Cause .................................................... 522
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 522
Revision: March 2005
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 523
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 524
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) ................................. 525
Description ............................................................ 525
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 525
Possible Cause ..................................................... 525
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 525
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/A ............................. 526
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 527
Component Inspection .......................................... 529
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 530
Description ............................................................ 530
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 530
Possible Cause ..................................................... 530
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 530
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 531
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 532
Component Inspection .......................................... 534
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 535
Description ............................................................ 535
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 535
Possible Cause ..................................................... 535
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 535
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 536
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 537
Component Inspection .......................................... 539
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C ............... 540
Description ............................................................ 540
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 540
Possible Cause ..................................................... 540
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 540
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/C .......................... 541
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 542
Component Inspection .......................................... 544
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON. 545
Description ............................................................ 545
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 545
Possible Cause ..................................................... 545
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 545
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/CS ........................ 546
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 547
Component Inspection .......................................... 549
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D ............... 550
Description ............................................................ 550
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 550
Possible Cause ..................................................... 550
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 550
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/D .......................... 551
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 552
Component Inspection .......................................... 554
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E ............... 555
Description ............................................................ 555
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 555
Possible Cause ..................................................... 555
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 555
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/E ........................... 556
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 557
Component Inspection .......................................... 559
AT-5
2005 Altima
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) ............................... 560
Description ............................................................ 560
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 560
Possible Cause ..................................................... 560
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 560
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/B ............................. 561
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 562
Component Inspection .......................................... 564
DTC P0780 SHIFT ................................................... 565
Description ............................................................ 565
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 565
Possible Cause ..................................................... 565
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 565
Wiring Diagram — AT — SFTFNC ....................... 566
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 568
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) .............. 569
Description ............................................................ 569
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 569
Possible Cause ..................................................... 569
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 569
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/C ............................. 570
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 571
Component Inspection .......................................... 573
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C STUCK ON .............................................. 574
Description ............................................................ 574
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 574
Possible Cause ..................................................... 574
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 574
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/CS .......................... 575
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 576
Component Inspection .......................................... 578
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT ... 579
Description ............................................................ 579
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 579
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 579
Possible Cause ..................................................... 579
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 579
Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW .......................... 580
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 582
Component Inspection .......................................... 584
Position Indicator .................................................. 584
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL ............ 585
Description ............................................................ 585
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 585
Possible Cause ..................................................... 585
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 585
Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN ........................ 586
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 588
Component Inspection .......................................... 589
DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
SYSTEM .................................................................. 590
Description ............................................................ 590
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 591
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on .... 591
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 593
Revision: March 2005
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ....... 593
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 594
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) .......................... 595
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position.596
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 597
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 598
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 598
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 599
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 600
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 601
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ............................. 602
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 603
Lock-up Is Not Released ....................................... 604
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ................... 605
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear .............. 606
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear .............. 607
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear ............. 607
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear ............. 608
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 609
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate ................. 610
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 612
Control Device ...................................................... 612
Control Cable ........................................................ 613
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 614
Description ............................................................ 614
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location .......... 614
Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 615
Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............. 616
Component Inspection .......................................... 617
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 619
Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 619
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ............. 619
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 619
ATF Cooler ............................................................ 620
ATF Cooler Valve .................................................. 620
Control Cable Adjustment ..................................... 621
Side cover ............................................................. 622
Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 622
Terminal Cord Assembly ....................................... 622
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................ 624
Removal ................................................................ 624
Inspection After Removal ...................................... 624
Installation ............................................................. 625
OVERHAUL ............................................................. 626
Components .......................................................... 626
Locations of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and
Thrust Washers ..................................................... 632
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 633
Disassembly .......................................................... 633
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 652
Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake .............. 652
One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd
Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 ........... 658
Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ....................... 660
Differential Gear Assembly ................................... 665
ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 668
Assembly (1) ......................................................... 668
Adjustment ............................................................ 675
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 676
AT-6
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 692
General Specifications ......................................... 692
Shift Schedule ...................................................... 692
Stall Speed ........................................................... 694
Line Pressure ....................................................... 694
Time Lag .............................................................. 694
Shift Solenoid Valves ........................................... 694
Solenoid Valves .................................................... 695
Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 695
Final Drive ............................................................ 697
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 698
Turbine Revolution Sensor ................................... 698
Revolution Sensor ................................................ 698
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-7
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX
[RE4F04B]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
PFP:00000
ECS0095J
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-188, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE"
ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST*1
Reference page
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
AT-126
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
AT-131
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
AT-136
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
AT-141
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
AT-153
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
AT-111
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
AT-122
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
AT-161
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
AT-183
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
AT-105
SFT SOL A/CIRC*2
P0750
AT-167
SFT SOL B/CIRC*2
P0755
AT-172
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
AT-148
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2
P1705
AT-177
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3
P0720
AT-117
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
AT-188
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
Revision: March 2005
AT-8
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX
[RE4F04B]
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
A
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST*1
Reference page
P0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-105
P0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-111
P0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3
AT-117
P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
AT-122
P0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-126
P0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-131
P0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-136
P0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-141
P0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-148
P0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-153
P0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-161
P0750
SFT SOL A/CIRC*2
AT-167
P0755
SFT SOL B/CIRC*2
AT-172
P1705
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2
AT-177
P1760
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
AT-183
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
AT-188
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-9
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE4F04B]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
ECS0095K
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine
ECS0095L
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM or
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precautions
●
ECS0095M
Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM.
Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
SEF289H
Revision: March 2005
AT-10
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE4F04B]
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
A
B
AT
AAT470A
D
●
Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal
inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly
or not. Refer to AT-32, "INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM" .
E
F
G
MEF040DA
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts
from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
SAT964I
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation
of the transaxle.
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to AT-12,
"ATF COOLER SERVICE" .
After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF.
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-11
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[RE4F04B]
Service Notice or Precautions
ECS0095N
FAIL-SAFE
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of 1, 2 or D. The customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned ON following Fail-Safe operation, A/T check (position) indicator lamp blinks for
about 8 seconds. [For “TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure (No Tools)”, refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .]
The blinking of the A/T check (position) indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be
cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “Work Flow” (Refer to AT-63, "Work Flow" ).
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
●
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.
●
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
●
External leaks in the hub weld area.
●
Converter hub is scored or damaged.
●
Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.
●
Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
●
Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.
●
Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses
have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)
●
Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.
●
Internal failure of stator roller clutch.
●
Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
●
Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are
worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
●
The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
●
The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
●
Transaxle failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate
lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
●
Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter
clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic,
such as taxi, delivery or police use.
ATF COOLER SERVICE
If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
●
●
●
–
–
–
A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the A/T check (position) indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to
the table on AT-44 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-41 to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when
the A/T check (position) indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
park/neutral position (PNP) switch
A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up).
Revision: March 2005
AT-12
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE4F04B]
●
*: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-53, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" .
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
ECS0095O
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-13
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE4F04B]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
ECS0095P
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV381054S0
(J-34286)
Puller
●
Removing differential side oil seals
●
Removing differential side bearing outer
race
●
Removing idler gear bearing outer race
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30 in)
NT414
ST33400001
(J-26082)
Drift
●
Installing differential side oil seal
(RH side)
●
Installing oil seal on oil pump housing
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
NT086
(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 (J-34301-1)
Oil pressure gauge
2 (J-34301-2)
Hoses
3 (J-34298)
Adapter
4 (J-34282-2)
Adapter
5 (790-301-1230-A)
60° Adapter
6 (J-34301-15)
Square socket
Measuring line pressure
AAT896
ST27180001
(J-25726-A)
Puller
Removing idler gear
a: 100 mm (3.94 in)
b: 110 mm (4.33 in)
c: M8 x 1.25P
NT424
ST23540000
(J-25689-A)
Pin punch
Removing and installing parking rod plate and
manual plate pins
a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia.
b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT442
ST25710000
(J-25689-A)
Pin punch
Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of
transaxle case
a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia.
NT410
Revision: March 2005
AT-14
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE4F04B]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV32101000
(J-25689-A)
Pin punch
●
Removing and installing manual shaft retaining pin
●
Removing and installing pinion mate shaft
lock pin
A
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
B
AT
NT410
KV31102400
(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
●
Removing and installing clutch return
springs
●
Installing low and reverse brake piston
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
D
E
NT423
KV40100630
(J-26092)
Drift
●
Installing reduction gear bearing inner race
●
Installing idler gear bearing inner race
a: 67.5 mm (2.657 in) dia.
b: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.
c: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia.
G
H
NT107
ST30720000
(J-25405 and J-34331)
Bearing installer
F
Installing idler gear bearing outer race
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
I
J
NT115
ST35321000
(
—
Drift
Installing output shaft bearing
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
)
K
L
NT073
—
(J-34291-A)
Shim setting gauge set
●
Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and
oil pump thrust washer
●
Selecting side gear thrust washer
NT101
ST33230000
(J-25805-01)
Drift
Installing differential side bearing inner race
(RH side)
a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
NT084
Revision: March 2005
AT-15
2005 Altima
M
PREPARATION
[RE4F04B]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-34290)
Shim selecting tool set
Selecting differential side bearing adjusting
shim
NT080
ST3306S001
(J-22888-D)
Differential side bearing puller set
1 ST33051001
(J-22888-D)
Puller
2 ST33061000
(J-8107-2)
Adapter
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge
1 GG91030000
(J-25765-A)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
Removing differential side bearing inner race
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
c: 130 mm (5.12 in)
d: 135 mm (5.31 in)
e: 100 mm (3.94 in)
AMT153
Checking differential side bearing preload
NT124
ST35271000
(J-26091)
Drift
Installing idler gear
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
NT115
—
(J-39713)
Preload adapter
●
Selecting differential side bearing adjusting
shim
●
Checking differential side bearing preload
NT087
Revision: March 2005
AT-16
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE4F04B]
Commercial Service Tools
ECS0095Q
A
Tool name
Description
Puller
●
Removing idler gear bearing inner race
●
Removing and installing band servo piston
snap ring
B
AT
NT077
Puller
Removing reduction gear bearing inner race
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
D
E
NT411
Drift
Installing needle bearing on bearing retainer
a: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
F
G
NT083
Drift
H
Removing needle bearing from bearing retainer
a: 33.5 mm (1.319 in) dia.
J
NT083
Drift
I
Installing differential side bearing outer race
(RH side)
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
K
L
NT083
Power tool
●
Removing transaxle assembly
●
Removing transaxle oil pan
●
Removing transaxle case and cover
M
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
AT-17
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location
PFP:00000
ECS0095R
WCIA0535E
Revision: March 2005
AT-18
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Circuit Diagram
ECS0095S
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0136E
Revision: March 2005
AT-19
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Cross-sectional View
ECS0095T
SCIA3174E
1.
Band servo piston
2.
Reverse clutch drum
3.
4.
Oil pump
5.
Brake band
6.
Converter housing
Reverse clutch
7.
High clutch
8.
Front planetary gear
9.
Low one-way clutch
10. Rear planetary gear
11. Forward clutch
12. Overrun clutch
13. Low & reverse brake
14. Output gear
15. Idler gear
16. Forward one-way clutch
17. Pinion reduction gear
18. Final gear
19. Differential case
20. Input shaft
21. Torque converter
22. Side cover
23. Transaxle case
Revision: March 2005
AT-20
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Hydraulic Control Circuit
ECS0095U
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LCIA0040E
Revision: March 2005
AT-21
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Shift Mechanism
ECS0095V
CONSTRUCTION
SAT998I
1.
Torque converter
2.
Oil pump
3.
Input shaft
4.
Brake band
5.
Reverse clutch
6.
High clutch
7.
Front sun gear
8.
Front pinion gear
9.
Front internal gear
10. Front planetary carrier
11. Rear sun gear
12. Rear pinion gear
13. Rear internal gear
14. Rear planetary carrier
15. Forward clutch
16. Forward one-way clutch
17. Overrun clutch
18. Low one-way clutch
19. Low & reverse brake
20. Parking pawl
21. Parking gear
22. Output shaft
23. Idle gear
24. Output gear
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components
Abbr.
Function
Reverse clutch 5
R/C
To transmit input power to front sun gear 7 .
High clutch 6
H/C
To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10 .
Forward clutch 15
F/C
To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch
16 .
Overrun clutch 17
O/C
To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13 .
Brake band 4
B/B
To lock front sun gear 7 .
Forward one-way clutch 16
F/O.C
When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13
from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.
Low one-way clutch 18
L/O.C
To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.
Low & reverse brake 19
L & R/B
To lock front planetary carrier 10 .
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
Band servo
Shift position
Reverse
clutch
5
High
clutch
6
Forward
clutch
15
Overrun
clutch
17
2nd
apply
3rd release
4th
apply
Forward
oneway
clutch
16
Low
oneway
clutch
18
Low &
reverse
brake
19
Remarks
PARK POSITION
P
R
Lockup
O
Revision: March 2005
O
AT-22
REVERSE
POSITION
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Band servo
Shift position
Reverse
clutch
5
High
clutch
6
Forward
clutch
15
Overrun
clutch
17
2nd
apply
3rd release
4th
apply
Forward
oneway
clutch
16
Low
oneway
clutch
18
Low &
reverse
brake
19
A
Lockup
B
NEUTRAL
POSITION
N
D*4
1st
O
*1D
2nd
O
*1 A
O
*1 A
*2C
C
*3C
C
3rd
O
O
4th
O
C
1st
O
D
2nd
O
A
1st
O
O
2nd
O
O
B
AT
B
B
B
*5O
O
O
B
B
2
1
Remarks
O
B
B
O
B
O
Automatic
shift
1⇔2⇔3
⇔4
D
Automatic
shift
1⇔2⇐3
E
Locks (held
stationary) in
1st speed
1⇐2⇐3
F
*1: Operates when selector lever is set in 3 position.
*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when selector lever is set in 3 position.
*5: Operates when selector lever is set in 3 position.
O: Operates
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-23
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
POWER TRANSMISSION
P and N Positions
SAT991I
●
●
P position
Similar to the N position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear to
mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
N position
Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate.
Revision: March 2005
AT-24
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
11 Position
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WCIA0355E
●
Forward clutch
●
Low one-way clutch
●
Forward one-way clutch
●
Overrun clutch
●
Low and reverse brake
Engine brake
As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse
brake.
This is different from that of D1 , 21 , and 31 .
K
L
Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-25
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
D1 and 21 Positions
WCIA0356E
●
Forward one-way clutch
●
Forward clutch
●
Low one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
(Engine brake)
Revision: March 2005
Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these
three clutches.
D1 : Overdrive control switch OFF and throttle opening is less than 3/16
21 : Always engaged
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way
clutch.
AT-26
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
D2 , 32 , 22 and 12 Positions
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WCIA0357E
●
Forward clutch
●
Forward one-way clutch
●
Brake band
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal
gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and
forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.
32 : Gear selector lever is set in 3 position and throttle opening is less than 3/16
32 , 22 and 12 : Always engaged
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-27
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
D3 and 33 Positions
WCIA0358E
●
High clutch
●
Forward clutch
●
Forward one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
Revision: March 2005
Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary
carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way
clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.
D3 and 33 : Selector lever is set in 3 position and throttle opening is less than 3/16
AT-28
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
D4 Position
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WCIA0360E
●
High clutch
●
Brake band
●
Forward clutch (Does not affect
power transmission)
Engine brake
Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front
internal gear (output) turn faster.
At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake
can be obtained when decelerating.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-29
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
R Position
WCIA0359E
●
Reverse clutch
●
Low and reverse brake
Engine brake
Revision: March 2005
Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.
Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction.
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained
when decelerating.
AT-30
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Control System
ECS0095W
A
OUTLINE
The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the
optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS
TCM
ACTUATORS
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor]
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor (VHCL/S SE-1)
Vehicle speed sensor (VHCL/S SE-2)
3 position switch
ASCD control unit
Stop lamp switch
Turbine revolution sensor
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Overrun clutch control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CAN communication line control
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T check (position) indicator
lamp
B
AT
D
E
CONTROL SYSTEM
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LCIA0041E
Revision: March 2005
AT-31
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
●
Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
●
Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
●
Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM
Sensors and solenoid valves
Input
Output
Function
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM.
Throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor]
Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.
Engine speed signal
Receives signal from ECM and controls lock-up control solenoid valve.
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Detects transaxle fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.
Revolution sensor (VHCL/S SE-1)
Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.
Vehicle speed sensor (VHCL/S SE-2)
Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution
sensor (installed on transaxle) malfunctions.
3 position switch
Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to D4 (overdrive) position, to the TCM.
ASCD control unit
Sends the cruise signal and D4 (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD
control unit to TCM.
Stop lamp switch
Send the lock-up release signal to the TCM at time of D4 (lock-up).
CAN communication
In CAN communication, control units are connected to 2 communication lines
(CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transaxle with less
wiring.
Shift solenoid valve A/B
Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent
from TCM.
Line pressure solenoid valve
Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation
to a signal sent from TCM.
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a
signal sent from TCM.
A/T check (position) indicator lamp
Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction.
CAN communication
In CAN communication, control units are connected to 2 communication lines
(CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transaxle with less
wiring.
Revision: March 2005
AT-32
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Control Mechanism
ECS0095X
A
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics.
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve
to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.
B
Normal Control
AT
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable
clutch operation.
D
E
SAT003J
F
Back-up Control (Engine brake)
If the selector lever is shifted to 2 position while driving in D4 (O/D)
or D3 , great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to
deal with this driving force.
G
H
I
SAT004J
J
During Shift Change
The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change
in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid
valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock.
K
L
M
SAT005J
At Low Fluid Temperature
●
Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch
engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize
shifting quality.
Revision: March 2005
AT-33
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
●
The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent
shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transaxle fluid
when temperature is low.
SAT006J
●
Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the
throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.
SAT007J
SHIFT CONTROL
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and the ECM (throttle
opening). This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy.
Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to ON, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the
shift valve.
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the ECM (throttle opening) and revolution sensor to select
the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM.
SAT008J
Revision: March 2005
AT-34
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions
A
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve
D 1 , 21 , 11
D 2 , 22 , 12
D3
D4 (O/D)
N-P
A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Control of Shift Valves A and B
B
AT
D
E
SAT009J
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift
valves A and B.
The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure
applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.
F
G
LOCK-UP CONTROL
H
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from
the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pressure signal which controls the lock-up piston.
I
Conditions for Lock-up Operation
When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected
values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
Selector lever
D position
3 position
Gear position
D4
3
Vehicle speed sensor
More than set value
ECM (throttle opening)
Less than set opening
A/T fluid temperature sensor
J
K
L
More than 40°C (104°F)
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
M
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM.
The plunger closes the drain circuit during the OFF period, and
opens the circuit during the ON period. If the percentage of OFF-time
increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and
pilot pressure remains high.
SAT010J
Revision: March 2005
AT-35
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the
ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.
OFF-time INCREASING
↓
Amount of drain DECREASING
↓
Pilot pressure HIGH
↓
Lock-up RELEASING
SAT011J
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation
AAT155A
LOCK-UP RELEASED
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot
pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to
move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked.
LOCK-UP APPLIED
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and
becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and
converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter
clutch piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up.
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL)
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits
engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because
the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective.
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions
SAT014J
Selector lever position
Gear position
D
D1 , D2 , D3
2
21 , 22
1
11 , 12
Revision: March 2005
AT-36
Throttle opening
Less than 3/16
At any position
2005 Altima
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
A
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal
transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine
brake control).
When this solenoid valve is ON, the pilot pressure drain port closes.
When it is OFF, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve ON pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve.
B
AT
SAT015J
D
Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation
When the solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control
valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not
engage.
When the solenoid valve is OFF, pilot pressure is not generated. At
this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by
spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun
clutch to engage.
In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed
down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
SAT016J
Control Valve
ECS0095Y
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES
Valve name
Function
Pressure regulator valve, plug and sleeve
plug
Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions.
Pressure modifier valve and sleeve
Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all
driving conditions.
Pilot valve
Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up
mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing.
Accumulator control valve
Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
Manual valve
Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.
Shift valve A
Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A
to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th →
3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.
Revision: March 2005
AT-37
2005 Altima
L
M
OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Valve name
Function
Shift valve B
Simultaneously switches two oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in
relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th →
3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.
Overrun clutch control valve
Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously
with application of the brake band in D4 . (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch
engages during D4 .)
“1” reducing valve
Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-shifting from the 1 position 12 to 11 .
Overrun clutch reducing valve
Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In 1 and 2 positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase
the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.
Torque converter relief valve
Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.
Torque converter clutch control valve, plug
and sleeve
Activates or inactivates the lock-up function.
Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up
system.
1-2 accumulator valve and piston
Dampens the shock encountered when 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides
smooth shifting.
3-2 timing valve
Switches the pace that oil pressure is released depending on vehicle speed; maximizes
the high clutch release timing, and allows for soft down shifting.
Shuttle valve
Determines if the overrun clutch solenoid valve should control the 3-2 timing valve or the
overrun clutch control valve and switches between the two.
Cooler check valve
At low speeds and with a small load when little heat is generated, saves the volume of
cooler flow, and stores the oil pressure for lock up.
Revision: March 2005
AT-38
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
PFP:00000
A
ECS0095Z
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM (transaxle control B
module) in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T check (position) indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. AT
For details, refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Function for A/T System" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System
ECS00960
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
D
E
F
ECS00961
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
G
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below.
I
MIL
Items
One trip detection
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750
X
Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755
X
Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor — DTC: P1705
X
Except above
J
Two trip detection
K
X
L
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
M
ECS00962
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
(
With CONSULT-II or
GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710,
P0720, P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
●
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●
Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
Revision: March 2005
AT-39
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
in the following page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after
the last detection of a DTC.
BCIA0030E
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
Items
Freeze frame data
2
3
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
Revision: March 2005
AT-40
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as A
described following.
●
If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
●
When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode B
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
AT
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! .
●
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
●
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
D
●
Freeze frame data
●
1st trip freeze frame data
●
System readiness test (SRT) codes
E
●
Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
●
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
Touch “ENGINE”.
Touch “SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS”.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-41
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
7.
Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
WCIA0361E
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
1.
2.
3.
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-55, "OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the
diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-65, "How to Erase DTC" .
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
1.
2.
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the
diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
Revision: March 2005
AT-42
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
1.
2.
ECS00963
The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition
switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for
checking the lamp.
● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" .
(Or see EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .)
When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
should go off.
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For details,
refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! .
CONSULT-II Function (TCM)
A
B
AT
D
SAT964I
ECS00964
E
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
TCM diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status
suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is
displayed.
Displays TCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
ECU PART NUMBER
G
Displays TCM input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
FUNCTION TEST
F
H
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG".
TCM part number can be read.
I
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (AT-44, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" ), place check marks for results on the “Diagnostic Worksheet”, AT-60,
"DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provide following the items.
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
–
Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
–
Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
–
Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II
unit.
Revision: March 2005
AT-43
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)
1.
Touch on CONSULT-II, touch "START (NISSAN BASED
VHCL)", and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch
“A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-102, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER
SUPPLY" . If result is NG, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY
ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
BCIA0029E
2.
Touch “SELF DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs “Real Time Diagnosis”.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
SAT987J
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF
DIAGNOSIS” test mode)
“A/T”
Available by A/T check
(position) indicator
lamp or “A/T” on
CONSULT-II
Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,
TCM does not receive the correct
voltage signal (based on the gear
position) from the switch.
—
P0705
●
TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor.
X
P0720
●
TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor.
X
—
●
A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
—
P0731*1
A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
—
P0732*1
A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
—
P0733*1
A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
—
P0734*1
Malfunction is detected when...
●
PNP SW/CIRC
Revolution sensor
VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T
OBD-II (DTC)
“ENGINE”
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit
—
TCM self-diagnosis
“ENGINE” on
CONSULT-II or GST
VEH SPD SEN/
CIR AT
Vehicle speed sensor (Meter)
VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR
—
A/T 1st gear function
—
A/T 1ST GR
FNCTN
A/T 2nd gear function
—
●
A/T 2ND GR
FNCTN
A/T 3rd gear function
—
●
A/T 3RD GR
FNCTN
A/T 4th gear function
—
Revision: March 2005
●
A/T 4TH GR
FNCTN
AT-44
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF
DIAGNOSIS” test mode)
“A/T”
TCM self-diagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
Available by A/T check
(position) indicator
lamp or “A/T” on
CONSULT-II
Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if
electrical circuit is good.
—
P0744*1
TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.
X
TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.
X
TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.
X
TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.
X
TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.
X
●
TCM receives an excessively low
or high voltage from this sensor
X
P1705
●
TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the ECM.
X
P0725
●
TCM receives an excessively low
or high voltage from the sensor.
X
P0710
K
●
The ECM-A/T communication line
is open or shorted.
X
U1000
L
●
TCM does not receive proper voltage signal from sensor
X
—
M
●
TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning
—
—
●
TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning
—
—
●
TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
—
—
Malfunction is detected when...
“ENGINE”
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
●
—
A/T TCC S/V
FNCTN
Shift solenoid valve A
SHIFT SOLENOID/V A
●
SFT SOL A/CIRC
Shift solenoid valve B
SHIFT SOLENOID/V B
●
SFT SOL B/CIRC
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OVERRUN CLUTCH S/
V
●
O/R CLUCH SOL/
CIRC
T/C clutch solenoid valve
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V
●
TCC SOLENOID/
CIRC
Line pressure solenoid valve
LINE PRESSURE S/V
●
L/PRESS SOL/
CIRC
Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor]
THROTTLE POSI SEN TP/SEN/CIRC A/T
Engine speed signal
ENGINE SPEED SIG
“ENGINE” on
CONSULT-II or GST
A
B
AT
P0750
D
P0755
E
P1760
F
P0740
G
P0745
H
I
J
A/T fluid temperature sensor
BATT/FLUID TEMP
SEN
ATF TEMP SEN/
CIRC
Engine control
A/T COMM LINE
—
Turbine revolution sensor
TURBINE REV
TCM (RAM)
CONTROL UNIT
(RAM)
—
TCM (ROM)
CONTROL UNIT
(ROM)
—
TCM (EEP ROM)
CONT UNIT(EEP
ROM)
Revision: March 2005
—
AT-45
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF
DIAGNOSIS” test mode)
“A/T”
OBD-II (DTC)
Available by A/T check
(position) indicator
lamp or “A/T” on
CONSULT-II
Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,
This is not a malfunction message
(Whenever shutting off a power
supply to the TCM, this message
appears on the screen.)
X
—
No failure has been detected.
X
X
Malfunction is detected when...
“ENGINE”
Initial start
INITIAL START
TCM self-diagnosis
●
—
No failure
(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDICATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED**)
●
“ENGINE” on
CONSULT-II or GST
X: Applicable
−: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL
if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
*2: Refer to EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T)
Monitor item
Item
Display
Vehicle speed sensor 1
(A/T)
(Revolution sensor)
VHCL/S
SE·A/T
[km/h] or
[mph]
Vehicle speed sensor 2
(Meter)
VHCL/S
SE·MTR
[km/h] or
[mph]
Throttle position sensor
[accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]
A/T fluid temperature
sensor
Battery voltage
Engine speed
THRTL POS
SEN [V]
FLUID TEMP
SE
[V]
BATTERY
VOLT
[V]
ENGINE
SPEED
[rpm]
Turbine revolution sensor
TURBINE
REV
Overdrive control
switch
OVERDRIVE
SW
[ON/OFF]
Revision: March 2005
TCM
Input
signals
X
Main
signals
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
Description
Vehicle speed computed from signal of
revolution sensor is
displayed.
●
When racing engine in N or P
with vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data may not indicate 0
km/h (0 mph).
●
Vehicle speed computed from signal of
vehicle speed sensor
is displayed.
●
Vehicle speed display may not
be accurate under approx. 10
km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary.
●
Throttle position sensor signal voltage is
displayed
●
A/T fluid temperature
sensor signal voltage
is displayed.
●
Signal voltage lowers
as fluid temperature
rises.
●
Source voltage of
TCM is displayed.
●
Engine speed, computed from engine
speed signal, is displayed.
●
Engine speed display may not
be accurate under approx. 800
rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm
even when engine is not running.
●
Checks changing
speed then performs
oil pressure control
and torque down
control
●
ON/OFF state computed from signal of
3 position switch is
displayed.
—
—
X
—
—
AT-46
Remarks
●
—
X
X
Selection
from
menu
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Monitor item
Item
PN position (PNP)
switch
R position switch
D position switch
2 position switch
1 position switch
ASCD cruise signal
ASCD OD cut signal
Kickdown switch
Stop lamp switch
Display
PN POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
R POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
D POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
2 POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
1 POSITION
SW
[ON/OFF]
ASCD·CRUIS
E
[ON/OFF]
ASCD·OD
CUT
[ON/OFF]
KICKDOWN
SW
[ON/OFF]
TCM
Input
signals
X
●
X
Vehicle speed
Throttle position
[Accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor]
Revision: March 2005
—
●
X
X
X
X
—
VEHICLE
SPEED
[km/h] or
[mph]
THROTTLE
POSI
[/8]
—
—
—
Status of ASCD
cruise signal is displayed.
ON ... Cruising state
OFF ... Normal running state
—
—
●
Selector lever position data, used for
computation by
TCM, is displayed.
●
Vehicle speed data,
used for computation by TCM, is displayed.
●
Throttle position
data, used for computation by TCM, is
displayed.
X
AT-47
ON/OFF status,
computed from signal of kickdown SW,
is displayed.
ON/OFF status is
displayed.
ON ... Brake pedal is
depressed.
OFF ... Brake pedal
is released.
X
F
G
H
I
Status of ASCD OD
release signal is displayed.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not
released
●
—
—
E
●
—
X
ON/OFF state computed from signal of
D position SW is displayed.
ON/OFF status,
computed from signal of 1 position SW,
is displayed.
—
—
D
●
—
AT
ON/OFF state computed from signal of
R position SW is displayed.
ON/OFF status,
computed from signal of 2 position SW,
is displayed.
●
X
ON/OFF state computed from signal of
PN position SW is
displayed.
●
●
X
Remarks
B
—
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
SLCT LVR
POSI
Description
●
X
Selector lever position
Main
signals
A
Selection
from
menu
J
K
●
This is displayed even when no
kickdown switch is equipped.
L
M
●
A specific value used for control is displayed if fail-safe is
activated due to error.
●
A specific value used for control is displayed if fail-safe is
activated due to error.
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Monitor item
Item
Gear position
Display
TCM
Input
signals
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
Shift solenoid valve A
LINE PRES
DTY
[%]
TCC S/V
DUTY
[%]
—
—
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OVERRUN/C
S/V
[ON/OFF]
Self-diagnosis display
lamp [A/T check (position) indicator lamp]
SELF-D DP
LMP
[ON/OFF]
Torque converter slip
ratio
TC SLIP
RATIO [0.000]
Torque converter slip
speed
Voltage [V]
Revision: March 2005
X
TC SLIP
SPEED [rpm]
—
—
—
●
Gear position data
used for computation by TCM, is displayed.
●
Control value of line
pressure solenoid
valve, computed by
TCM from each input
signal, is displayed.
●
Control value of
torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve, computed by
TCM from each input
signal, is displayed.
X
●
Control value of shift
solenoid valve A,
computed by TCM
from each input signal, is displayed.
●
Control value of shift
solenoid valve B,
computed by TCM
from each input signal, is displayed.
●
Control value of
overrun clutch solenoid valve computed
by TCM from each
input signal is displayed.
●
Control status of A/T
check (position) indicator lamp is displayed.
●
Ratio of engine revolution to input shaft
revolution of torque
converter.
●
Difference in revolution between input
shaft revolution and
torque converter
input shaft revolution.
●
Value measured by
voltage probe is displayed.
—
—
X
—
SHIFT S/V B
[ON/OFF]
—
Description
X
SHIFT S/V A
[ON/OFF]
—
Shift solenoid valve B
Selection
from
menu
GEAR
—
Line pressure duty
Main
signals
X
—
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
AT-48
Remarks
●
Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit
is disconnected.
The OFF signal is displayed if
solenoid circuit is shorted.
●
Display does not indicate
engine is stopped even if 0 rpm
— this is not a malfunction.
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Monitor item
Item
Display
TCM
Input
signals
Main
signals
A
Selection
from
menu
Description
B
●
Frequency [Hz]
—
—
DUTY-HI
—
—
DUTY-LOW
—
—
PLS WIDTH-HI
—
—
PLS WIDTH-LOW
—
—
Remarks
Value measured by
pulse probe is displayed. If measurement is impossible,
"#" sign is displayed.
"#" sign is also displayed at the final
data value until the
measurement result
is obtained.
●
Duty cycle value for
measurement probe
is displayed.
●
Measured pulse
width of measurement probe is displayed.
AT
D
E
F
G
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
: Option
H
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to Data
link connector, which is located in left side dash panel.
I
J
K
L
LCIA0042E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine)
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
AT-49
2005 Altima
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
5.
Touch “A/T”.
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
BCIA0031E
7.
Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).
SAT018K
8.
Touch “START”.
SAT589J
Revision: March 2005
AT-50
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
9.
Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
A
B
AT
SAT019K
D
●
When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
E
F
G
SAT591J
H
10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may
exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
I
J
K
SAT592J
L
M
SAT593J
Revision: March 2005
AT-51
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with
instructions displayed.
SAT594J
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
SAT595J
13. CONSULT-II procedure ended.
SAT596J
SAT593J
If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
Revision: March 2005
AT-52
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
DTC work support item
Description
Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed.
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
●
●
Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed.
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
●
●
Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)
●
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
●
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
B
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
●
Shift solenoid valve A
●
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
●
Line pressure solenoid valve
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can
be confirmed.
●
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
●
Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)
●
●
●
●
AT
D
Shift solenoid valve A
E
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed.
TCC S/V FNCTN P0744
Shift solenoid valve A
●
●
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
A
●
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed.
3RD GR FNCTN P0733
Check item
Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-53
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in left side dash panel.
LCIA0042E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “A/T”.
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch “CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR”.
Refer to LAN-16, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor" .
BCIA0031E
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
ECS00965
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)
Refer to EC-140, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-54
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
A
Refer to EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
B
1. CHECK A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
3.
4.
Move selector lever to P position.
Start engine and warm it up to normal engine operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Wait 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
AT
D
E
LCIA0043E
Does A/T check (position) indicator lamp come on for about 2
seconds?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Stop procedure. Perform AT-215, "1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" before proceeding.
F
5.
G
H
I
WCIA0458E
J
2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Push and hold shift lock button.
Depress the brake pedal, then move gear selector lever from P
to 3 position.
Wait 3 seconds.
K
L
M
WCIA0344E
5.
6.
Move selector lever to 2 position.
Release brake pedal.
>> GO TO 3.
LCIA0046E
Revision: March 2005
AT-55
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Move selector lever to 1 position.
Depress brake pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
The A/T check (position) indicator lamp will begin to flash.
>> GO TO 4.
LCIA0047E
4. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CODE
Check A/T check (position) indicator lamp.
Refer to AT-56, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE" .
>> DIAGNOSIS END
WCIA0458E
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
A/T check (position) indicator lamp:
All judgement flickers are the same.
1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
LCIA0049E
LCIA0050E
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK.
Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others.
3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
LCIA0051E
LCIA0052E
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
Revision: March 2005
Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-177, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]".
AT-56
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
A/T check (position) indicator lamp:
A
5th judgement flicker is longer than others.
4th judgement flicker is longer than others.
B
AT
LCIA0053E
LCIA0054E
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .
Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .
6th judgement flicker is longer than others.
7th judgement flicker is longer than others.
D
E
LCIA0055E
F
LCIA0056E
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-183, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE" .
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or
disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-148, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" .
8th judgement flicker is longer than others.
9th judgement flicker is longer than others.
G
H
I
LCIA0057E
LCIA0058E
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power
source circuit is damaged.
Þ Go to AT-111, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-122, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
J
10th judgement flicker is longer than others.
11th judgement flicker is longer than others.
K
L
LCIA0059E
Revision: March 2005
M
LCIA0060E
Turbine revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-203, "DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" .
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-161, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE" .
AT-57
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
A/T check (position) indicator lamp:
12th judgement flicker is longer than others.
LCIA0061E
The ECM-A/T communication line is open or shorted.
Þ Go to AT-188, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Flickers as shown below.
Lamp turns off.
LCIA0062E
LCIA0063E
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, and 3 position switch circuit is
disconnected or TCM is damaged.
Þ Go to AT-252, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate
(PNP & 3 Position Switches Circuit Checks), and Throttle
Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor]
Circuit Check" .
Battery power is low.
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
Battery is connected conversely.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second
Revision: March 2005
AT-58
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
[RE4F04B]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
Introduction
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, ECM
(throttle opening) or park/neutral position (PNP) switch and provides
shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc.
PFP:00000
A
ECS00966
B
AT
D
SAT631IA
E
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only, may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-63, "Work Flow" .
F
G
H
SAT632I
I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” like the
example on page AT-61 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
J
K
L
SEF234G
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-59
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
[RE4F04B]
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information from Customer
KEY POINTS
WHAT ........ Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN ........ Date, Frequencies
WHERE ..... Road conditions
HOW .......... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name
MR/MS
Model & Year
VIN
Trans. model
Engine
Mileage
Incident Date
Manuf. Date
In Service Date
Frequency
❏ Continuous
Symptoms
❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position
❏ Particular position)
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd
❏ 3rd → 4th)
❏ Intermittent ( times a day)
❏ 2nd → 3rd
❏ No down-shift (❏ 4th → 3rd
❏ 3rd → 2nd
❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lockup malfunction
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip
(❏ N → D
❏ Lockup
❏ Any drive position)
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kickdown
❏ No pattern select
❏ Others
(
A/T check (position) indicator lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Revision: March 2005
)
Blinks for about 8 seconds.
❏ Continuously lit
❏ Not lit
❏ Continuously lit
❏ Not lit
AT-60
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
[RE4F04B]
Diagnostic Worksheet
1.
❏ Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints.
AT-12
2.
❏ CHECK A/T FLUID
AT-65
❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure)
❏ Fluid condition
❏ Fluid level
3.
A
B
❏ Perform STALL TEST and PRESSURE TEST.
❏ Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch
❏ Reverse clutch
❏ Forward clutch
❏ Overrun clutch
❏ Forward one-way clutch
AT-68,
AT-71
❏ Low & reverse brake
❏ Low one-way clutch
❏ Engine
❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and
brake band are OK
AT
D
E
❏ Pressure test — Suspected parts:
4.
❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures.
AT-72
41.
AT-74
Check before engine is started.
F
❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items.
❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-105
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-117 .
❏ Engine speed signal, AT-122 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor, AT-203 .
❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-161 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-167 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-172 .
❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-177 .
❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-183 .
❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) & 3 position switches circuit checks, and throttle position sensor
[accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit check AT-252 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199 .
❏ CAN communication line, AT-188 .
❏ Control unit (RAM), Control unit (ROM), AT-207 .
❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-209 .
❏ Battery
❏ Others
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-61
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
[RE4F04B]
42.
43.
Check at idle
AT-74
❏ 1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-215 .
❏ 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position, AT-217 .
❏ 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed, AT-218 .
❏ 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-219 .
❏ 5. Large Shock. N → R Position, AT-221 .
❏ 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position, AT-223 .
❏ 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 or 1 Position, AT-226 .
Cruise test
AT-76
AT-81
Part-1
❏ 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 , AT-229 .
❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-232 .
❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 , AT-235 .
❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 , AT-238 .
❏ 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-241 .
❏ 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-243 .
❏ 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-245 .
❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ), AT-246 .
Part-2
AT-84
❏ 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 , AT-248 .
❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-232 .
❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 , AT-235 .
❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 , AT-238 .
Part-3
4.
AT-86
❏ 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 When Gear Selector Lever D → 3, AT-249 .
❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-246 .
❏ 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position, AT-250 .
❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22 ), AT-246 .
❏ 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position, AT-251 .
❏ 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-252 .
❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.
❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-105
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-117 .
❏ Engine speed signal, AT-122 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor, AT-203 .
❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-161 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-167 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-172 .
❏ Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor], AT-177 .
❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-183 .
❏ Park/neutral position (PNP) & 3 position switches circuit checks, and throttle position sensor
[accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit check, AT-252 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-111 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199 .
❏ CAN communication line, AT-188 .
❏ Control unit (RAM), Control unit (ROM), AT-207 .
❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-209 .
❏ Battery
❏ Others
5.
❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
AT-265
6.
❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures.
AT-72
7.
❏ Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items.
Refer to ! Hyper-link Error ! .
! Hyper-link
Error !,
! Hyper-link
Error !
❏ DTC (P0731) A/T 1st gear function, AT-126 .
❏ DTC (P0732) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-131 .
❏ DTC (P0733) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-136 .
❏ DTC (P0734) A/T 4th gear function, AT-141 .
❏ DTC (P0744) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-153 .
Revision: March 2005
AT-62
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
[RE4F04B]
8.
9.
❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)
AT-44
AT-54
❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories.
AT-41
A
B
Work Flow
ECS00967
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
AT
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or
conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, AT-60, "Information from Customer" and AT-61, "Diagnostic WorkD
sheet" , to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-63
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
[RE4F04B]
WORK FLOW CHART
SAT086JI
*1:
AT-60
*2:
AT-61
*3:
AT-12
*4:
AT-65
*5:
AT-68, AT-71
*6:
AT-72
*7:
AT-43
*8:
AT-39
*9:
AT-39
*10: AT-105
*11: AT-209
*12: AT-211
*13: AT-252
*14: AT-88
*15: AT-41
*16: AT-105
*17: AT-192
*18: EC-54
Revision: March 2005
AT-64
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check
PFP:00000
A
ECS00968
FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface
of converter housing and transaxle case.
Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position
and wait a few minutes.
Stop engine.
B
AT
D
WCIA0053E
4.
E
Check for fresh leakage.
F
G
H
SAT288G
I
FLUID CONDITION CHECK
Fluid color
Suspected problem
Dark or black with burned odor
Wear of frictional material
Milky pink
Water contamination — Road water
entering through filler tube or breather
Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and
tacky
Oxidation — Over or under filling, —
Overheating
J
K
L
SAT638A
FLUID LEVEL CHECK
M
Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
ECS00969
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
Revision: March 2005
AT-65
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
3.
4.
Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan.
SCIA2945E
5.
6.
7.
8.
Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
SCIA2955E
SCIA2962E
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle.
Remove the banjo bolts.
Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler
Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform AT-66, "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
Revision: March 2005
AT-66
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
3.
4.
5.
Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
A
B
AT
SCIA2955E
D
E
F
G
SCIA2965E
6.
7.
H
Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
I
Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform AT-67, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE" .
8.
J
K
SCIA2966E
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
a.
L
Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.
M
SCIA2967E
Revision: March 2005
AT-67
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
b.
If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm in
size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee
filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/fluid cooler
must be replaced and the inspection procedure is ended.
SCIA2971E
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
Stall Test
ECS0096A
STALL TEST PROCEDURE
1.
Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and
oil.
SAT647B
2.
Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature
3.
4.
:50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
Set parking brake and block wheels.
Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
● It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine
rpm on indicator.
SAT513G
5.
6.
7.
Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D
position.
Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
brake.
Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release
throttle.
● During test, never hold throttle wide open for less than 5
seconds.
Stall revolution
: 2,300 - 2,750 rpm
SAT514G
Revision: March 2005
AT-68
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
8.
9.
Move selector lever to N position.
Cool off ATF.
● Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions.
A
B
AT
LCIA0064E
D
JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST
The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustrations on next
page.
In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, refer to AT-64, "WORK FLOW CHART" .
NOTE:
Stall revolution is too high in D, 2 or 1 position:
●
Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. ..... Low one-way clutch slippage
●
Slippage occurs in the following gears:
1st through 3rd gears in 3 position and engine brake functions.
1st and 2nd gears in 2 position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed
throttle). ..... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage
Stall revolution is too high in R position:
●
Engine brake does not function in 1 position. ..... Low & reverse brake slippage
●
Engine brake functions in 1 position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage
Stall revolution within specifications:
●
Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque
converter housing
CAUTION:
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally.
●
Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in D position. ..... High clutch slippage
●
Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in D position. ..... Brake band slippage
●
Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in D position, 2nd gear in 2 position, and 1st gear in
1 position.
Stall revolution less than specifications:
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-69
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
●
Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter
SAT499K
Revision: March 2005
AT-70
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
Line Pressure Test
ECS0096B
LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS
A
Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the illustration.
●
Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing
bolts.
B
AT
D
SAT301FA
LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.
E
Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and
oil.
Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes or until fluid and oil
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature
F
:50 - 80°C (122 176°F)
G
H
SAT647B
3.
Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.
I
J
K
SCIA5376E
4.
Set parking brake and block wheels.
● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
test is being performed at stall speed.
M
SAT513G
Revision: March 2005
AT-71
L
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
5.
Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
AT-71, "Line Pressure
Test"
: Refer to SDS, AT-377,
"Line Pressure"
SAT493G
JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST
Judgement
Suspected parts
Line pressure is low in all positions.
Line pressure is low in particular position.
●
Oil pump wear
●
Control piston damage
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
●
Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
●
Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve
●
Clogged strainer
●
Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
●
For example, line pressure is:
− Low in R and 1 positions, but
− Normal in D and 2 positions.
Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and
reverse brake circuit.
Refer to AT-22, "CLUTCH AND BAND CHART" .
●
A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged
●
Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
●
Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
●
Pressure modifier valve sticking
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
●
Open in dropping resistor circuit
●
Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
●
Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
●
Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
●
Pressure modifier valve sticking
●
Pilot valve sticking
At idle
Line pressure is high.
Line pressure is low.
At stall speed
Road Test
ECS0096C
DESCRIPTION
●
●
1.
2.
3.
The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of A/
T and analyze causes of problems.
The road test consists of the following three parts:
Check before engine is started
Check at idle
Cruise test
SAT786A
Revision: March 2005
AT-72
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
●
●
Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and
items to check.
Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.
Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION" and AT-211, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
SYMPTOMS" .
A
B
AT
SAT496G
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-73
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED
1. CHECK A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Park vehicle on flat surface.
Move selector lever to P position.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T check (position) indicator lamp come on for about 2
seconds?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Stop ROAD TEST. Go to AT-215, "1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .
LCIA0043E
2. CHECK A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP
Does A/T check (position) OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-61 . Refer to AT-55,
"TCM
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE
(NO
TOOLS)" .
No
>> 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
3. Go to AT-74, "2. CHECK AT IDLE" .
WCIA0458E
2. CHECK AT IDLE
1. CHECK ENGINE START
1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Move selector lever to P position.
3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
4. Turn ignition switch to START position.
5. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-217, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . Continue ROAD TEST.
LCIA0065E
Revision: March 2005
AT-74
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
2. CHECK ENGINE START
A
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC position.
2. Move selector lever to D, 1, 2 or R position.
3. Turn ignition switch to START position.
4. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-217, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . Continue ROAD TEST.
No
>> GO TO 3.
B
AT
D
LCIA0066E
E
3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1.
2.
3.
Move selector lever to P position.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Release parking brake.
F
G
H
LCIA0043E
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
6. Apply parking brake.
Yes or No
Yes
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-218, "3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or
Backward When Pushed" . Continue ROAD TEST.
No
>> GO TO 4.
I
J
K
L
SAT796A
M
4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Start engine.
2. Move selector lever to N position.
3. Release parking brake.
4. Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-219, "4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves" . Continue
ROAD TEST.
No
>> GO TO 5.
LCIA0064E
Revision: March 2005
AT-75
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
5. CHECK SHIFT LOCK
1.
Apply foot brake.
SAT797A
2. Move selector lever to R position.
3. Is there large shock when changing from N to R position?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-221, "5. Large Shock. N → R Position" . Continue
ROAD TEST.
No
>> GO TO 6.
LCIA0068E
6. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-223, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R
Position" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT799A
7. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1.
Move selector lever to D, 2 and 1 positions and check if vehicle
creeps forward.
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-76, "3. CRUISE TEST" .
No
>> Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to
AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2
or 1 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST.
LCIA0069E
3. CRUISE TEST
●
Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.
Revision: March 2005
AT-76
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
With CONSULT-II
●
●
A
Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result.
Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as
per Shift Schedule. Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule"
B
AT
D
SAT601J
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in left side dash panel.
E
F
G
H
I
LCIA0042E
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
K
L
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “A/T”.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-77
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
6.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
BCIA0031E
7.
8.
Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”.
See “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph Display”.
SAT175K
9.
Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or
“MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”.
10. Touch “Start”.
SAT973J
11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”.
SAT134K
Revision: March 2005
AT-78
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.
A
B
AT
SAT135K
D
13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”.
E
F
G
SAT987J
H
I
J
K
SAT974J
14.
15.
16.
17.
Touch “DISPLAY”.
Touch “PRINT”.
Check the monitor data printed out.
Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.
L
M
SAT975J
Revision: March 2005
AT-79
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
Without CONSULT-II
●
Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across terminals 41 (W) and 42 (B) of TCM.
LCIA0097E
Revision: March 2005
AT-80
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
Cruise Test — Part 1
A
1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION
1.
Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature
2.
3.
4.
5.
B
:50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
AT
Park vehicle on flat surface.
Set gear selector lever to D position.
Move selector lever to P position.
Start engine.
D
E
F
LCIA0043E
6.
G
Move selector lever to D position.
H
I
J
LCIA0045E
K
7.
8.
Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal
half-way.
Does vehicle start from D1 ?
L
Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
Continue ROAD TEST.
M
SAT495G
Revision: March 2005
AT-81
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
2. CHECK SHIFT UP (D1
TO D2 )
Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D1 to D2
:Refer to AT-376, "Shift
Schedule" .
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Go to AT-232, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does
Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT954I
3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2
TO D3 )
Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D2 to D3
:Refer to AT-376, "Shift
Schedule"
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT955I
4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
TO D4 )
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D3 to D4
:Refer to AT-376, "Shift
Schedule" .
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Go to AT-238, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT956I
Revision: March 2005
AT-82
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4
TO D4 L/U)
A
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Read vehicle speed, throttle opening when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when
lock-up occurs
B
:Refer to AT-376, "Shift
Schedule" .
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 6.
No
>> Go to AT-241, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" .
Continue ROAD TEST.
AT
D
SAT957I
E
6. CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP
F
Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Go to AT-243, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" .
G
7. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 L/U TO D4 )
H
1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> Go to AT-245, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" . Continue
ROAD TEST.
I
J
K
SAT958I
8. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4
1.
2.
TO D3 )
L
Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted
from D4 to D3 ?
M
Read gear position and engine speed.
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to AT-84, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
No
>> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT959I
Revision: March 2005
AT-83
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
Cruise Test — Part 2
1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION
1.
2.
3.
Confirm gear selector lever is in D position.
Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.
Does vehicle start from D1 ?
Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-248, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" .
Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT495G
2. CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3
1.
2.
3.
TO D4 TO D2 )
Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is
depressed fully?
Read gear position and throttle opening.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Go to AT-232, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does
Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT404H
3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2
TO D3 )
Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D2 to D3
:Refer to AT-376, "Shift
Schedule" .
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . Continue ROAD TEST.
SAT960I
Revision: March 2005
AT-84
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE
A
Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 .
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
B
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to AT-86, "Cruise Test — Part 3" .
No
>> Go to AT-238, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Continue ROAD TEST.
AT
D
SAT405H
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-85
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
Cruise Test — Part 3
1. VEHICLE SPEED (D4 ) POSITION
1.
2.
Confirm gear selector lever is in D position.
Using half-throttle, accelerate vehicle until it shifts into D4 .
SAT812A
3.
4.
5.
Release accelerator pedal.
Move gear selector lever from D position to 3 position while driving in D4 .
Does A/T shift from D4 to 3?
Read gear position and vehicle speed.
SAT813A
LCIA0071E
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-249, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → 33 , When A/T Selector Lever D → 3" . Continue
ROAD TEST.
2. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST.
LCIA0071E
Revision: March 2005
AT-86
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (33
1.
2.
TO 22 )
A
Move selector lever from 3 to 2 position while driving in 33 .
Does A/T shift from 33 to 22 ?
B
Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to AT-250, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: 33 → 22 , When
Selector Lever 3 → 2 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST.
AT
D
LCIA0072E
E
4. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
F
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . Continue ROAD TEST.
G
H
I
LCIA0072E
5. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22
TO 11 )
J
Move selector lever from 2 to 1 position while driving in 22 .
Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?
Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 6.
No
>> Go to AT-251, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When
Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position" . Continue ROAD TEST.
1.
2.
K
L
M
LCIA0073E
6. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
No
>> Go to AT-252, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By
Engine Brake" . Continue ROAD TEST.
LCIA0073E
Revision: March 2005
AT-87
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart
Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Items
Symptom
Condition
Torque converter
is not locked up.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
No Lock-up
Engagement/
TCC Inoperative
Torque converter
clutch piston slip.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Lock-up point is
extremely high or
low.
Shift Shock
Sharp shock in
shifting from N to
D position.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
Diagnostic Item
PFP:00000
ECS0096D
Reference Page
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
4. Engine speed signal
AT-122
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
6. Line pressure test
AT-71
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-148
8. Control valve assembly
AT-265
9. Torque converter
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-148
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Torque converter
AT-280
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-148
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
1. Engine idling rpm
EC-80
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
5. Engine speed signal
AT-122
6. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
7. Control valve assembly
AT-265
8. Accumulator N-D
AT-280
9. Forward clutch
AT-326
AT-88
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Too sharp a
shock in change
from D1 to D2 .
Condition
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Accumulator servo release
AT-280
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
6. Brake band
AT-280
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Control valve assembly
AT-265
4. High clutch
AT-321
5. Brake band
AT-280
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Control valve assembly
AT-265
4. Brake band
AT-280
5. Overrun clutch
AT-326
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-183
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
ON vehicle
1. Control valve assembly
AT-265
ON vehicle
2. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Accumulator servo release
AT-275
3. Brake band
AT-280
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Shift Shock
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Gear change
shock felt during
deceleration by
releasing accelerator pedal.
Large shock
changing from 12
to 11 in 1 position.
Too high a gear
change point from
D1 to D2 , from
D2 to D3 , from
D3 to D4 .
Gear change
directly from D1
to D3 occurs.
Improper Shift
Timing
Too high a
change point from
D4 to D3 , from
D3 to D2 , from
D2 to D1 .
Kickdown does
not operate when
depressing pedal
in D4 within kickdown vehicle
speed.
Revision: March 2005
A
EC-93
OFF vehicle
Too sharp a
shock in change
from D3 to D4 .
Reference Page
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
OFF vehicle
Too sharp a
shock in change
from D2 to D3 .
Diagnostic Item
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
AT-89
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Improper Shift
Timing
Symptom
Condition
Kickdown operates or engine
overruns when
depressing pedal
in D4 beyond
kickdown vehicle
speed limit.
ON vehicle
Gear change
from 22 to 23 in 2
position.
ON vehicle
Gear change
from 11 to 12 in 1
position.
ON vehicle
Failure to change
gear from D4 to
D3 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
No Down Shift
Failure to change
gear from D3 to
D2 or from D4 to
D2 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Failure to change
gear from D2 to
D1 or from D3 to
D1 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-183
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
8. Overrun clutch
AT-326
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. High clutch
AT-321
7. Brake band
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. Low one-way clutch
AT-280
7. High clutch
AT-321
8. Brake band
AT-280
AT-90
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Failure to change
from D3 to 22
when changing
lever into 2 position.
AT-250
No Down Shift
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Does not change
from 12 to 11 in 1
position.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Failure to change
gear from D1 to
D2 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
No Up Shift
Failure to change
gear from D2 to
D3 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
A
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-183
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
8. Brake band
AT-280
9. Overrun clutch
AT-326
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-183
B
AT
D
E
G
6. Overrun clutch
AT-326
7. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
6. Brake band
AT-280
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
6. High clutch
AT-321
7. Brake band
AT-280
AT-91
F
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Failure to change
gear from D3 to
D4 .
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
Vehicle will not
run in D and 2
positions (but
runs in 1 and R
positions).
Revision: March 2005
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
6. Brake band
AT-280
EC-93
2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-183
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
8. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
9. Brake band
AT-280
10. Overrun clutch
AT-326
1. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. Reverse clutch
AT-318
6. High clutch
AT-321
7. Forward clutch
AT-326
8. Overrun clutch
AT-326
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
ON vehicle
1. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
OFF vehicle
2. Low one-way clutch
AT-280
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Vehicle will not
run in R position
(but runs in D, 2
and 1 positions).
Clutch slips.
Very poor acceleration.
Reference Page
1. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
No Up Shift
A/T does not shift
to D4 when driving with overdrive control
switch ON.
Diagnostic Item
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
AT-92
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Vehicle will not
run in D, 1, 2
positions (but
runs in R position). Clutch slips.
Very poor acceleration.
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
Clutches or
brakes slip somewhat in starting.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
No creep at all.
AT-223, AT-226
OFF vehicle
Almost no shock
or clutches slipping in change
from D1 to D2 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. Accumulator N-D
AT-280
6. Reverse clutch
AT-318
7. High clutch
AT-321
8. Forward clutch
AT-326
9. Forward one-way clutch
AT-280
10. Low one-way clutch
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
4. Line pressure test
AT-71
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Accumulator N-D
AT-280
8. Forward clutch
AT-326
9. Reverse clutch
AT-318
10. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
11. Oil pump
AT-299
12. Torque converter
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Control valve assembly
AT-265
4. Forward clutch
AT-326
5. Oil pump
AT-299
6. Torque converter
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Accumulator servo release
AT-275
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. Brake band
AT-280
AT-93
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Almost no shock
or slipping in
change from D2
to D3 .
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Almost no shock
or slipping in
change from D3
to D4 .
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. High clutch
AT-321
6. Forward clutch
AT-326
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Control valve assembly
AT-265
5. High clutch
AT-321
6. Brake band
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
OFF vehicle
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D4
to D3 when
depressing pedal.
Slips/Will Not
Engage
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D4
to D2 when
depressing pedal.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D3
to D2 when
depressing pedal.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
6. High clutch
AT-321
7. Forward clutch
AT-326
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Brake band
AT-280
8. Forward clutch
AT-326
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-111
7. Brake band
AT-280
8. Forward clutch
AT-326
9. High clutch
AT-321
AT-94
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Races extremely
fast or slips in
changing from D4
or D3 to D1 when
depressing pedal.
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Slips/Will Not
Engage
NOT USED
Revision: March 2005
2. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. Forward clutch
AT-326
7. Forward one-way clutch
AT-280
8. Low one-way clutch
AT-280
A
B
AT
D
AT-65
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
5. Oil pump
AT-299
6. High clutch
AT-321
7. Brake band
AT-280
8. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
9. Torque converter
AT-280
10. Parking components
AT-275
1. Ignition switch and starter
SC-13
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
1. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Line pressure test
AT-71
3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
5. Engine speed signal
AT-122
6. Oil pump
AT-299
7. Torque converter
AT-280
ON vehicle
1. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
OFF vehicle
2. Parking components
AT-275
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Vehicle moves
when changing
into P position or
parking gear does
not disengage
when shifted out
of P position.
AT-65
AT-268
OFF vehicle
Transaxle noise
in P and N positions.
1. Fluid level
1. Fluid level
Vehicle will not
run in any position.
Engine starts in
positions other
than P and N.
Reference Page
2. Control cable adjustment
ON vehicle
Engine cannot be
started in P and N
positions.
AT-217
Diagnostic Item
AT-95
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Vehicle runs in N
position.
AT-219
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Vehicle braked
when shifting into
R position.
OFF vehicle
Excessive creep.
NOT USED
Engine stops
when shifting
lever into R, D, 2
and 1.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Vehicle braked by
gear change from
D1 to D2 .
Vehicle braked by
gear change from
D2 to D3 .
Vehicle braked by
gear change from
D3 to D4 .
Revision: March 2005
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
2. Forward clutch
AT-326
3. Reverse clutch
AT-318
4. Overrun clutch
AT-326
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Line pressure test
AT-71
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. High clutch
AT-321
7. Brake band
AT-280
8. Forward clutch
AT-326
9. Overrun clutch
AT-326
1. Engine idling rpm
EC-80
1. Engine idling rpm
EC-80
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-148
3. Control valve assembly
AT-265
4. Torque converter
AT-280
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Reverse clutch
AT-318
3. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
4. High clutch
AT-321
5. Low one-way clutch
AT-280
ON vehicle
1. Fluid level
AT-65
OFF vehicle
2. Brake band
AT-280
ON vehicle
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Overrun clutch
AT-326
3. Forward one-way clutch
AT-280
4. Reverse clutch
AT-318
OFF vehicle
OFF vehicle
AT-96
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Condition
2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
3. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
6. Reverse clutch
AT-318
7. High clutch
AT-321
8. Brake band
AT-280
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
10. Oil pump
AT-299
11. Torque converter
AT-280
ON vehicle
1. Fluid level
AT-65
OFF vehicle
2. Torque converter
AT-280
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment
AT-267
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-268
3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
AT-117, AT-199
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AT-183
8. Overrun clutch
AT-326
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Engine idling rpm
EC-80
3. Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor] adjustment
EC-93
4. Line pressure test
AT-71
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-161
6. Control valve assembly
AT-265
7. Oil pump
AT-299
8. Reverse clutch
AT-318
9. High clutch
AT-321
10. Brake band
AT-280
11. Forward clutch
AT-326
12. Overrun clutch
AT-326
13. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
14. Torque converter
AT-280
OFF vehicle
NOT USED
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Transaxle overheats.
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
A
AT-65
Maximum speed
not attained.
Acceleration
poor.
Engine brake
does not operate
in “1” position.
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
ON vehicle
Transaxle noise
in D, 2, 1 and R
positions.
Diagnostic Item
AT-97
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Items
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
ATF shoots out
during operation.
White smoke
emitted from
exhaust pipe during operation.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
NOT USED
Offensive smell at
fluid charging
pipe.
Engine is stopped
at R, D, 2 and 1
positions.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference Page
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Reverse clutch
AT-318
3. High clutch
AT-321
4. Brake band
AT-280
5. Forward clutch
AT-326
6. Overrun clutch
AT-326
7. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Torque converter
AT-280
3. Oil pump
AT-299
4. Reverse clutch
AT-318
5. High clutch
AT-321
6. Brake band
AT-280
7. Forward clutch
AT-326
8. Overrun clutch
AT-326
9. Low & reverse brake
AT-333
1. Fluid level
AT-65
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-148
3. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-172
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-167
5. Control valve assembly
AT-265
TCM Terminals and Reference Value
ECS0096E
PREPARATION
AAT475A
●
Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.
TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
WCIA0055E
Revision: March 2005
AT-98
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
A
(Data are reference values.)
Terminal No.
1
2
3
Wire color
G/R
W/B
G/B
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming
up engine.
1.5 - 3.0V
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming
up engine.
4 - 14V
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after
warming up engine.
0V
Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve
When A/T performs lock-up.
8 - 15V
When A/T does not perform lock-up.
0V
Line pressure
solenoid valve
AT
5*
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
6*
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
10
11
12
19
20
R/Y
R/Y
LG/B
R/Y
BR/Y
25
B
26
PU/W
27
28
P/B
Y/R
Revision: March 2005
Power source
Shift solenoid
valve B
E
F
With ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
G
With ignition switch OFF.
0V
H
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in D1 or D4 .)
Battery voltage
I
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
(When driving in D2 or D3 .)
0V
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in D1 or D2 .)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
(When driving in D3 or D4 .)
0V
K
When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates.
Battery voltage
L
When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not
operate.
0V
Power source
J
Same as No. 10
Overrun clutch
solenoid valve
—
—
M
—
PNP switch 1
position
When setting selector lever to 1 position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
0V
PNP switch 2
position
When setting selector lever to 2 position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
0V
With ignition switch OFF.
Battery voltage
With ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
Power source
(Memory back-up)
D
or
Shift solenoid
valve A
Ground
B
or
AT-99
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Terminal No.
Wire color
Item
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the
CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1
29
W
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the
vehicle diagnosis connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this
item.
Revolution sensor
When vehicle is parked.
450 Hz
Under 1.3V or
over 4.5V
30**
BR/Y
Data link connector (RX)
—
—
31**
LG
Data link connector (TX)
—
—
32
R
34
35
36
G
G/W
R/B
Ignition switch ON.
4.5 - 5.5V
Ignition switch OFF.
0V
PNP switch D
position
When setting selector lever to D position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
0V
PNP switch R
position
When setting selector lever to R position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
0V
When setting selector lever to P or N position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
0V
Sensor power
PNP switch P or N
position
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the
CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1
38
G
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the
vehicle diagnosis connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this
item.
Turbine revolution
sensor
When vehicle is parked.
39
40
240 Hz
Under 1.3V or
over 4.5V
W/G
Engine speed signal
Refer to EC-120, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE" .
PU/R
Vehicle speed
sensor
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2
MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Voltage varies
between less
than 1V and
more than
4.5V
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after
warming up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle
position.)
Fully-closed
throttle: 0.5V
Fully-open
throttle: 4V
—
—
41
W
Throttle position
sensor [accelerator pedal position
(APP) sensor]
42
B
Sensor ground
Revision: March 2005
—
AT-100
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4F04B]
Terminal No.
Wire color
Item
47
G
A/T fluid temperature sensor
48
B
Ground
Judgement
standard
(Approx.)
Condition
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
1.5V
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
0.5V
—
—
A
B
—
AT
*: These terminals are connected to the ECM.
**: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector.
CAN Communication
ECS0096F
D
For details, refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-101
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
[RE4F04B]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
PFP:00000
ECS0096G
BCWA0137E
Revision: March 2005
AT-102
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
10
R/Y
19
R/Y
25
B
28
Y/R
48
B
POWER SOURCE
POWER SOURCE
IGNITION ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION OFF
0V
IGNITION ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION OFF
0V
GROUND
—
POWER SOURCE
(MEMORY BACKUP)
B
—
AT
IGNITION ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
GROUND
A
—
Diagnostic Procedure
D
—
ECS0096H
E
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
Voltage
G
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
I
LCIA0094E
J
2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 (Y/R) and ground.
Voltage
K
: Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
WCIA0095E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
●
Fuse
●
Ignition switch
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-103
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to AT-102, "Wiring Diagram — AT —
MAIN" .
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
AT-104
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description
●
●
PFP:32006
A
ECS0096I
The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transaxle
range switch.
The transaxle range switch detects the selector lever position
and sends a signal to the TCM.
B
AT
D
WCIA0066E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0096J
Diagnostic trouble code PNP SW/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected when
TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position.
Possible Cause
F
ECS0096K
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
G
H
ECS0096L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
K
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
BCIA0030E
2.
3.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
Selector lever: 3 or D position
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
AT-105
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE4F04B]
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-106
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
ECS0096M
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0221E
Revision: March 2005
AT-107
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
26
27
34
35
36
PU/W
P/B
G
G/W
R/B
PNP SWITCH
1 POSITION
PNP SWITCH
2 POSITION
PNP SWITCH
D POSITION
PNP SWITCH
R POSITION
PNP SWITCH
P OR N POSITION
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN 1 POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN 2 POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN D POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN R POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN P OR N POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SETTING SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0096N
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 6.
2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector
lever to each position.
Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated
properly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
Revision: March 2005
AT-108
SAT701J
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE4F04B]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the following item:
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch
F29 terminals 1 (G) and 2 (R/L) and between terminals 3 (GY)
and 4 (PU/W), 5 (P/B), 6 (G), 7 (R/L), 8 (G/W) and 9 (GY/R)
while moving manual shaft through each position.
Lever position
B
AT
Terminal No.
P
3-7
R
3-8
N
3-9
D
3-6
2
3-5
1
3-4
1-2
D
1-2
WCIA0459E
E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
4. CHECK MANUAL CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT
Check PNP switch again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to
test group 1.
OK or NG
OK
>> Adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
NG
>> Repair or replace PNP switch.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
I
J
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness)
●
Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness)
●
Fuse
●
Ignition switch
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
H
AT-109
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE4F04B]
6. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26 (PU/W), 27 (P/B), 34 (G), 35 (G/W), 36 (R/B) and ground while
moving selector lever through each position.
Terminal No.
Lever Position
B=
0=
36
35
34
27
26
P, N
B
0
0
0
0
R
0
B
0
0
0
D
0
0
B
0
0
2
0
0
0
B
0
1
0
0
0
0
B
Battery voltage
0V
WCIA0461E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
7. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-105, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-110
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS0096O
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.
B
AT
D
SAT283HB
E
F
G
H
SAT021J
I
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Specification (Approximately)
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
1.5V
↓
0.5V
J
2.5 kΩ
↓
0.3 kΩ
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0096P
Diagnostic trouble code ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0710 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause
ECS0096Q
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
A/T fluid temperature sensor
M
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0096R
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
L
AT-111
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4F04B]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
BCIA0030E
BCIA0031E
2.
3.
Select "ECM INPUT SIGNALS" touch "START".
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to
maintain continuously.)
ENG SPEED: 450 rpm or more
VEHICLE SPEED: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POSI: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-112
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
ECS0096S
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0139E
Revision: March 2005
AT-113
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
42
47
B
SENSOR GROUND
G
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Revision: March 2005
—
—
IGNITION ON AND ATF TEMPERATURE IS 20°C (68°F)
1.5V
IGNITION ON AND ATF TEMPERATURE IS 80°C (176°F)
0.5V
AT-114
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4F04B]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0096T
A
1. INSPECTION START
B
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 6.
AT
2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage
E
:Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]
:Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
LCIA0090E
3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
I
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord F30 terminals 6 and 7
(component side) when A/T is cold.
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
2.5kΩ
K
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
L
M
WCIA0097E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly
(Main harness)
●
Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-115
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4F04B]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
–
Remove oil pan.
Check the following items:
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown in figure.
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
20 (68)
25kΩ
80 (176)
0.3kΩ
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
–
SAT298F
6. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 (G) and ground while
warming up A/T.
Temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]
1.5V → 0.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WCIA0462E
7. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-111, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-116
2005 Altima
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
PFP:32702
A
ECS0096U
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking
pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to
the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
B
AT
D
LCIA0070E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0096V
Diagnostic trouble code VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT with CONSULT-II or P0720 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
Possible Cause
ECS0096W
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Revolution sensor
G
H
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0096X
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
I
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
F
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
L
M
BCIA0030E
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
AT-117
2005 Altima
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4F04B]
2.
3.
Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-120, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T” with CONSULT-II.
BCIA0030E
BCIA0031E
4.
5.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-120, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-118
2005 Altima
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
ECS0096Y
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0140E
Revision: March 2005
AT-119
2005 Altima
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4F04B]
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
29
42
W
B
REVOLUTION SENSOR
DATA (DC)
VEHICLE MOVING AT 20 KM/H
(12 MPH).
USE THE CONSULT-II PULSE
FREQUENCY MEASURING
FUNCTION. A CIRCUIT TESTER
CANNOT BE USED TO TEST
THIS ITEM.
CAUTION: CONNECT THE DIAGNOSIS DATA LINK CABLE TO
THE VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR.
450 HZ
VEHICLE NOT MOVING.
LESS THAN 1.3V OR
GREATER THAN 4.5V
SENSOR GROUND
—
Diagnostic Procedure
—
ECS0096Z
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LCIA0090E
2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
●
Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution
sensor (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
LCIA0091E
3. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-117, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
AT-120
2005 Altima
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
A
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-121
2005 Altima
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description
PFP:24825
ECS00970
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS00971
Diagnostic trouble code ENGINE SPEED SIG with CONSULT-II or P0725 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM.
Possible Cause
ECS00972
Check harness or connectors. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS00973
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
BCIA0030E
BCIA0031E
2.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-122
2005 Altima
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
ECS00974
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0141E
Revision: March 2005
AT-123
2005 Altima
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA
39
W/G
EC-120, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE"
ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00975
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
Check P code.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII.
Refer to EC-67, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
OK or NG
OK (with CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 2.
OK (without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
●
2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SAT645J
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
●
Resistor and ignition coil
Refer to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-124
2005 Altima
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 39 (W/G) and ground.
Voltage
B
:0.6 (Idle speed) - 2.2V (3,000 rpm)
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
D
E
LCIA0099E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
F
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
●
Resistor and ignition coil
Refer to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
6. CHECK DTC
I
Perform AT-122, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
J
7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
K
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-125
L
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
●
PFP:31940
ECS00976
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another
self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS00977
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than
normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is
stuck open.
Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1 , 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open: 2* , 2, 3 and 3 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4* , 3, 3 and 4 positions to each gear position
above
*: P0731 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code A/T 1ST GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0731 without CONSULT-II is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
ECS00978
Check the following items.
●
Shift solenoid valve A
●
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS00979
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
AT-126
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
B
AT
BCIA0030E
4.
–
5.
–
–
6.
7.
Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position
Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
BCIA0031E
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for
“ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
No malfunction exists.
Malfunction for P0731 exists.
8.
1→2→3→4
L
2→2→3→3
4→3→3→4
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" .
SAT021J
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-127
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG
ECS0097A
LCWA0010E
Revision: March 2005
AT-128
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
11
12
R/Y
LG/B
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D4 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING
IN D2 OR D3 )
0V
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D2 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING
IN D3 OR D4 )
A
B
AT
D
0V
E
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0097B
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
–
2.
F
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Check resistance between two terminals.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Terminal No.
H
Resistance
(Approx.)
20 - 30Ω
2
1
G
Ground
I
5 - 20Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
WCIA0089E
K
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve B
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
L
–
M
WCIA0090E
Revision: March 2005
AT-129
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own
weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and
fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair control valve assembly.
SAT367H
4. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-126, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-130
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS0097C
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another B
self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction AT
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0097D
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than
normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2 , 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4, 3* , 3 and 4 positions to each gear position
above
*: P0732 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code A/T 2ND GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0732 without CONSULT-II is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
E
F
G
H
I
J
ECS0097E
Check the following items.
●
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
K
L
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0097F
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
D
AT-131
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
BCIA0030E
4.
–
5.
–
–
6.
7.
Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 50 km/h (28 to 31 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position
Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 45 to 50 km/h (28 to 31
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT134, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a
1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
SAT021J
Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
No malfunction exists
1→2→3→4
Malfunction for P0732 exists.
4→3→3→4
8.
BCIA0031E
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-132
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG
ECS0097G
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LCWA0011E
Revision: March 2005
AT-133
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
12
LG/B
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D2 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING
IN D3 OR D4 )
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0097H
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Shift solenoid valve B
Check resistance to the terminal and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B
Terminal No.
1
Ground
Resistance
(Approx.)
5 - 20Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
WCIA0091E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
–
Shift solenoid valve B
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
1.
WCIA0092E
3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own
weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and
fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-134
SAT367H
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK DTC
A
Perform AT-131, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-135
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
●
PFP:31940
ECS0097I
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another
self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band,
etc.
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0097J
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than
normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed.
Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed: 1, 1, 4* and 4 positions to each gear position
above
*: P0733 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code A/T 3RD GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0733 without CONSULT-II is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
ECS0097K
Check the following items.
●
Shift solenoid valve A
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0097L
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
AT-136
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
B
AT
BCIA0030E
4.
–
5.
–
–
6.
7.
Accelerate vehicle to 60 to 75 km/h (37 to 47 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position
Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 60 to 75 km/h (37 to 47 MPH) until
“TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT139, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a
1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
1→2→3→4
Malfunction for P0733 exists.
1→1→4→4
8.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
J
K
SAT021J
L
M
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-137
H
I
Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
No malfunction exists.
D
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG
ECS0097M
LCWA0012E
Revision: March 2005
AT-138
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
11
R/Y
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D4 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING
IN D2 OR D3 )
0V
A
B
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0097N
D
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Shift solenoid valve A
Check resistance to the terminal and ground.
E
Resistance
(Approx.)
F
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A
Terminal No.
2
Ground
20 - 30Ω
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
H
WCIA0093E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
I
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
–
Shift solenoid valve A
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
1.
J
K
L
M
WCIA0094E
3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own
weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and
fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-139
SAT367H
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-136, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-140
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS0097O
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check (position) indicator lamp is indicating another B
self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter
clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits AT
open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve
operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.
D
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
E
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
Specification
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
Lock-up OFF
↓
Lock-up ON
Approximately 4%
↓
Approximately 94%
Line pressure solenoid
valve duty
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
↓
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
Approximately 24%
↓
Approximately 95%
F
G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0097P
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much
less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.
Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear position
above
*: P0734 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code A/T 4TH GR FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0734 without CONSULT-II is detected
when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
ECS0097Q
Check the following items.
●
Shift solenoid valve A
●
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Line pressure solenoid valve
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0097R
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds before continuing.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
Revision: March 2005
AT-141
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
BCIA0030E
4.
–
5.
–
–
6.
7.
Accelerate vehicle to 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position
Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40 MPH) until
“TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”.
(It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a
1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transaxle shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
No malfunction exists
1→2→3→4
Malfunction for P0734 exists.
1→2→2→1
8.
BCIA0031E
SAT021J
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-142
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG
ECS0097S
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0142E
Revision: March 2005
AT-143
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
1
2
11
12
G/R
W/B
R/Y
LG/B
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR)
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING
1.5 - 3.0V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING
0V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING
4 - 14V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING
0V
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D4 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING
IN D2 OR D3 )
0V
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D2 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
BE IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 )
OV
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
ECS0097T
TO D4 )
During AT-81, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4
at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> GO TO 2.
SAT988H
2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test.
Engine Speed
RPM
Line Pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
D, 2 and 1 Position
R Position
Idle
500 (5.1, 73)
778 (7.9, 113)
Stall
1,233 (12.6, 179)
1,918 (19.6, 278)
Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: March 2005
AT-144
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
–
2.
A
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Check resistance between two terminals.
Solenoid valve
Terminal No.
Shift solenoid valve A
2
Shift solenoid valve B
1
B
Resistance
(Approx.)
AT
20 - 30Ω
Ground
D
5 - 20Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
E
WCIA0089E
4. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
F
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve B
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
1.
G
H
I
J
WCIA0090E
K
5. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own
weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and
fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
6. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
L
M
SAT367H
TO D4 )
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-145
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
7. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Line pressure solenoid valves
Check resistance to the terminal and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Terminal No.
4
Ground
Resistance
(Approx.)
2.5 - 5Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
WCIA0098E
8. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
–
Line pressure solenoid valves
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
1.
WCIA0099E
9. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
–
Pressure regulator valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pressure modifier valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
SAT367H
10. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
TO D4 )
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-146
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE4F04B]
11. CHECK DTC
A
Perform AT-141, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-147
2005 Altima
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
ECS0097U
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear
in D4 , by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle
speed and the ECM (throttle opening). Lock-up piston operation will
then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a
big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT283HB
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
Specification
Lock-up OFF
↓
Lock-up ON
Approximately 4%
↓
Approximately 94%
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0097V
Diagnostic trouble code TCC SOLENOID/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0740 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
ECS0097W
Check the following items.
●
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0097X
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-148
2005 Altima
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
2.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and
wait at least 1 second.
A
B
AT
BCIA0031E
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-149
2005 Altima
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
ECS0097Y
LCWA0014E
Revision: March 2005
AT-150
2005 Altima
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
3
G/B
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
WITH TORQUE CONVERTER
LOCK-UP
8 - 15V
WITHOUT TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
A
B
ECS0097Z
AT
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground.
Resistance
E
: 5 - 20Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
WCIA0100E
H
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
I
1.
2.
Remove oil pan.
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
•
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
–
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
K
L
M
WCIA0101E
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 5 and TCM harness connector terminal 3. Refer to AT-150, "Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV" .
Continuity should exist.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
AT-151
2005 Altima
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-148, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-152
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
Description
●
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS00980
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T check position indicator lamp is indicating another self- B
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter
clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits AT
open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve
operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty
D
Specification
Lock-up OFF
↓
Lock-up ON
E
Approximately 4%
↓
Approximately 94%
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS00981
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much
less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.
Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear position
above
*: P0744 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code A/T TCC S/V FNCTN with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is detected
when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
G
H
I
J
K
ECS00982
Check the following items.
●
Line pressure solenoid valve
●
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
●
Each clutch
●
Hydraulic control circuit
L
M
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS00983
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
F
AT-153
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive vehicle to decrease voltage (warm up the
fluid) or stop engine to increase voltage (cool down the fluid).
Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
BCIA0030E
4.
–
–
–
5.
Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position
TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94%
VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH)
Check that “GEAR” shows “4”.
BCIA0031E
For shift schedule, refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" .
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to
applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-376, "Shift Schedule" .
SAT021J
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-154
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG
ECS00984
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0143E
Revision: March 2005
AT-155
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
1
2
3
G/R
W/B
G/B
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR)
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING
1.5 - 3.0V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING
0V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING
4 - 14V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING
0V
WITH TORQUE CONVERTER
LOCK-UP
8 - 15V
WITHOUT TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
ECS00985
TO D4 )
During AT-81, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4
at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> GO TO 2.
SAT988H
2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test.
Engine Speed
RPM
Line Pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
D, 2 and 1 Position
R Position
Idle
500 (5.1, 73)
778 (7.9, 113)
Stall
1,233 (12.6, 179)
1,918 (19.6, 278)
Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
AT-156
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
A
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own
weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and
fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
B
AT
D
SAT367H
E
TO D4 )
F
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
G
5. CHECK DTC
H
Perform AT-153, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 11. Check for proper lock-up.
I
6. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
2.
J
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Line pressure solenoid valve
Check resistance to the terminal and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Terminal No.
4
Ground
K
Resistance
(Approx.)
L
2.5 - 5Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
M
WCIA0098E
Revision: March 2005
AT-157
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
7. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
1.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
WCIA0099E
8. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
–
Pressure regulator valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pressure modifier valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
SAT367H
9. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3
TO D4 )
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
10. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-153, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 11. Check for proper lock-up.
11. CHECK LOCK-UP
During AT-81, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T perform lock-up at
the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the
start point of this test group.
No
>> GO TO 12.
SAT989H
Revision: March 2005
AT-158
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
12. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
–
2.
A
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Check resistance to the terminal and ground.
Solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Resistance
(Approx.)
Terminal No.
5
B
Ground
AT
5 - 20Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
D
WCIA0102E
E
13. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
F
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
–
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
1.
G
H
I
WCIA0101E
J
14. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
K
1.
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-303, "Control
Valve Assembly" .
2. Check control valves for sticking.
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Torque converter clutch relief valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
L
M
SAT367H
15. CHECK LOCK-UP
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 16.
No
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-159
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE4F04B]
16. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-153, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group.
Revision: March 2005
AT-160
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS00986
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent
from the TCM.
B
AT
D
SAT283HB
E
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
Line pressure solenoid
valve duty
Specification
Small throttle opening
(Low line pressure)
↓
Large throttle opening
(High line pressure)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
F
Approximately 24%
↓
Approximately 95%
G
ECS00987
Diagnostic trouble code L/PRESS SOL/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
ECS00988
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Line pressure solenoid valve
H
I
J
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS00989
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-161
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
2.
Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.
BCIA0031E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-162
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
ECS0098A
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0144E
Revision: March 2005
AT-163
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
1
2
G/R
W/B
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE (DROPPING RESISTOR)
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING
1.5 - 3.0V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING
0V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS RELEASED WHILE DRIVING
4 - 14V
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
IS DEPRESSED WHILE DRIVING
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0098B
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 4 and ground.
Resistance
: 2.5 - 5Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WCIA0103E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
•
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
–
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
WCIA0099E
Revision: March 2005
AT-164
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE AND DROPPING RESISTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 4 (G/R) and TCM harness
connector terminal 2 (W/B).
Resistance
B
: 10 - 15Ω
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
D
WCIA0105E
E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
F
Check the following items:
●
Dropping resistor
●
Check resistance between two terminals.
Resistance
G
:10 - 15Ω
Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal
cord assembly (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
H
I
WCIA0362E
J
5. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 1. Refer to AT-163, "Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV" .
K
L
Continuity should exist.
3. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
6. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-161, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: March 2005
AT-165
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-166
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS0098C
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch,
vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
B
AT
D
SAT283HB
E
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
F
ECS0098D
Diagnostic trouble code SFT SOL A/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0750 without CONSULT-II is detected when
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
ECS0098E
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Shift solenoid valve A
G
H
I
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0098F
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
J
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-167
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4F04B]
2.
3.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transaxle to shift 1 → 2
(“GEAR”).
BCIA0031E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-168
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
ECS0098G
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LCWA0017E
Revision: March 2005
AT-169
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
11
R/Y
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D4 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING
IN D2 OR D3 )
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0098H
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 2 and ground.
Resistance
: 20 - 30Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WCIA0106E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Operation check
•
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
–
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
WCIA0094E
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 11. Refer to AT-169, "Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A" .
Continuity should exist.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
AT-170
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK DTC
A
Perform AT-167, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
B
5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
AT
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-171
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4F04B]
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description
PFP:31940
ECS0098I
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch,
vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening). Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
SAT283HB
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0098J
Diagnostic trouble code SFT SOL B/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P0755 without CONSULT-II is detected when
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
ECS0098K
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Shift solenoid valve B
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0098L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-172
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4F04B]
2.
3.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transaxle to shift 1 → 2
→ 3 (“GEAR”).
A
B
AT
BCIA0031E
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-173
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
ECS0098M
LCWA0018E
Revision: March 2005
AT-174
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
12
LG/B
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B IS OPERATING (DRIVING IN D1
OR D2 )
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
BE IS NOT OPERATING (DRIVING IN D3 OR D4 )
0V
A
B
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0098N
D
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 1 and ground.
Resistance
E
F
: 5 - 20Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
G
H
WCIA0107E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
I
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Operation check
•
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
–
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
J
K
L
M
WCIA0092E
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between terminal cord harness connector terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 12. Refer to AT-174, "Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B" .
Continuity should exist.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
AT-175
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-172, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-176
2005 Altima
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
[RE4F04B]
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
(APP) SENSOR]
PFP:22560
Description
A
ECS0098O
The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls throttle position. This system
also uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a
throttle control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal
position signal is sent to the ECM.
B
AT
D
LCIA0067E
E
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor]
Condition
Specification
Fully-closed throttle
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle
Approximately 4V
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-177
2005 Altima
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
[RE4F04B]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0098P
Diagnostic trouble code TP SEN/CIRC A/T or P1705 with CONSULT-II, or 3rd judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the ECM.
Possible Cause
ECS0098Q
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0098R
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Touch "SELECTION FROM MENU".
Touch "THRTL POS SEN".
Touch "START"
Accelerator pedal condition
THRTL POS SEN
Fully released
Less than 4.7V
Partially depressed
0.1 - 4.6V
Fully depressed
1.9 - 4.6V
If the check result is NG, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
BCIA0030E
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Touch "SELECTION FROM MENU"
Touch "VHCL SPEED SE" and "THRTL SEN 1".
Touch "START".
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 3
consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS 1: Approximately 3V or less
Selector lever: D position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
BCIA0031E
Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
Revision: March 2005
AT-178
2005 Altima
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
[RE4F04B]
Selector lever: D position
A
B
AT
BCIA0030E
D
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
H
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-179
2005 Altima
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
ECS0098S
BCWA0145E
Revision: March 2005
AT-180
2005 Altima
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
32
41
42
IGNITION SWITCH ON
4.5 -5.5V
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
0V
A
R
SENSOR POWER
W
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
IGNITION ON AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS DEPRESSED
SLOWLY AFTER WARMING UP
ENGINE
FULLY CLOSED THROTTLE:
0.5V
FULLY OPEN THROTTLE:
4V
SENSOR GROUND
—
—
B
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0098T
B
AT
D
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
E
Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULTII.
Refer to EC-128, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)"
OK or NG
OK (with CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-204, "DTC
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC-542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" . If CAN communication line is detected, GO TO AT-188, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
●
2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
K
:Approximately 0.5V
:Approximately 4V
L
M
LCIA0090E
AT-181
H
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness for short or open between ECM and
TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit.
Revision: March 2005
G
I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle
Fully-open throttle
F
2005 Altima
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 (W) and 42 (B) while
accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve :Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve
:Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness for short or open between ECM and
TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit.
LCIA0100E
4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-182
2005 Altima
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS0098U
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch,
overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and ECM (throttle opening).
The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled.
B
AT
D
SAT283HB
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0098V
Diagnostic trouble code O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC with CONSULT-II or P1760 without CONSULT-II is detected
when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Possible Cause
F
ECS0098W
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
G
H
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0098X
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always
turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
I
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Touch "MAIN SIGNALS".
Touch "START".
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
with selector lever in D position.
L
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-183
2005 Altima
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
5.
Release accelerator pedal completely with selector lever in 3
position. Verify operation of "OVERRUN/C S/V".
BCIA0031E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-184
2005 Altima
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
ECS0098Y
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0053E
Revision: March 2005
AT-185
2005 Altima
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
20
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
BR/Y
WHEN OVERRUN CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE OPERATES
BATTERY VOLTAGE
WHEN OVERRUN CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE DOES NOT
OPERATE
0V
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0098Z
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminal
3 (component side) and ground.
Resistance
: 20 - 30Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LCIA0092E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
–
Operation check
•
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
–
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
LCIA0093E
3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness connector terminal 3 and TCM harness connector terminal 20. Refer to AT-185, "Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV" .
Continuity should exist.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
AT-186
2005 Altima
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK DTC
A
Perform AT-183, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
B
5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
AT
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-187
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE4F04B]
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:23710
ECS00990
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS00991
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code A/T COMM LINE or U1000 with CONSULT-II and 12th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control unit.
Possible Cause
ECS00992
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS00993
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
BCIA0031E
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch "ON".
Revision: March 2005
AT-188
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE4F04B]
2.
3.
Wait at least 6 seconds or start engine and wait at least 6 seconds.
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
A
B
AT
LCIA0075E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-189
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN
ECS00994
BCWA0146E
Revision: March 2005
AT-190
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE4F04B]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS00995
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected.
Yes or No
Yes
>> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
No
>> INSPECTION END
B
AT
D
E
PCIA0061E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-191
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
PFP:31940
Description
ECS00996
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.
SAT283HB
SAT021J
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Specification (Approximately)
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
1.5V
↓
0.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
2.5 kΩ
↓
0.3 kΩ
ECS00997
Diagnostic trouble code BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause
ECS00998
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS00999
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Start engine.
Revision: March 2005
AT-192
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
2.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
A
B
AT
BCIA0030E
D
3.
Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12
MPH).
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
H
Start engine.
Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)" .
I
J
K
L
WCIA0056E
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-193
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
ECS0099A
BCWA0147E
Revision: March 2005
AT-194
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
10
R/Y
POWER SOURCE
19
R/Y
POWER SOURCE
28
Y/R
POWER SOURCE
(MEMORY BACKUP)
42
B
SENSOR GROUND
47
G
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
DATA (APPROX.)
IGNITION ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION OFF
0V
IGNITION ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION OFF
0V
IGNITION ON
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
—
A
B
AT
—
D
IGNITION ON WITH ATF TEMPERATURE AT 20°C (68°F)
1.5V
IGNITION ON WITH ATF TEMPERATURE AT 80°C (176°F)
0.5V
Diagnostic Procedure
E
ECS0099B
F
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
G
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage
H
:Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]
:Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
LCIA0090E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
L
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
●
Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-159, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-195
M
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals 10
(R/Y), 19 (R/Y), 28 (Y/R) and ground.
Voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
LCIA0094E
4. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal 28 (Y/
R) and ground.
Voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WCIA0095E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness)
●
Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly F30 terminals 6 and 7 (component side) when A/T is cold.
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
Cold 20°C (68°F)
2.5kΩ
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK (without CONSULT-II) >> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
LCIA0095E
Revision: March 2005
AT-196
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
–
•
A
Remove oil pan.
Check the following items:
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Check resistance between two terminals while changing temperature as shown.
Temperature °C (°F)
B
AT
Resistance (Approx.)
20 (68)
2.5kΩ
80 (176)
0.3kΩ
D
Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
OK or NG
OK (without CONSULT-II) >> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
–
E
SAT298F
8. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal 47 and
ground while warming up A/T.
G
H
3.
4.
5.
Temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]
1.5V → 0.5V
I
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 42 and ground. Refer to AT194, "Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS" .
Continuity should exist.
J
WCIA0044E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
K
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
L
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
●
Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-159, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M
10. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-192, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 11.
Revision: March 2005
AT-197
2005 Altima
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4F04B]
11. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-198
2005 Altima
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
[RE4F04B]
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
Description
PFP:24814
A
ECS0099C
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent
from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
B
AT
D
WCIA0463E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0099D
Diagnostic trouble code VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
Possible Cause
F
ECS0099E
Check the following items.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Vehicle speed sensor
G
H
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0099F
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
If conducting this “DTC Confirmation Procedure” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
K
L
M
BCIA0030E
2.
Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16
MPH).
BCIA0031E
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
Start engine.
Revision: March 2005
AT-199
2005 Altima
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
[RE4F04B]
2.
3.
Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)" .
WCIA0058E
Revision: March 2005
AT-200
2005 Altima
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
ECS0099G
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0148E
Revision: March 2005
AT-201
2005 Altima
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
[RE4F04B]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0099H
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
LCIA0090E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Voltage
:Voltage varies between less than 1V and
more than 4.5V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SAT356JA
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" .
●
Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-199, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-202
2005 Altima
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
[RE4F04B]
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
Description
PFP:31935
A
ECS0099I
The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic
transaxle. The vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) is
located on the output side of the automatic transaxle. With the two
sensors, input and output rpms are accurately detected. The result is
optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting.
B
AT
D
LCIA0076E
E
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: TURBINE REV
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.
: 10th judgement flicker
Check items (Possible cause)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Turbine revolution sensor
G
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5
seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25
MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening
greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more
than 5 seconds.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25
MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening
greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to AT-55, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)" .
H
I
J
BCIA0030E
AT-203
K
L
M
BCIA0031E
LCIA0096E
Revision: March 2005
F
2005 Altima
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T
ECS0099J
BCWA0149E
Revision: March 2005
AT-204
2005 Altima
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC)
A
WHEN MOVING AT 20 KM/H (12
MPH), USE THE CONSULT-II
PULSE FREQUENCY MEASURING FUNCTION.*1
38
G
TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (SIGNAL)
CAUTION:
CONNECT THE DIAGNOSIS
DATA LINK CABLE TO THE
VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR.
*1: A CIRCUIT TESTER CANNOT
BE USED TO TEST THIS ITEM.
WHEN VEHICLE IS PARKED.
42
B
SENSOR GROUND
B
240 Hz
AT
D
UNDER 1.3V OR OVER 4.5V
—
Diagnostic Procedure
—
E
ECS0099K
F
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “TURBINE REV” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
G
H
I
J
K
SAT740J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check frequency between TCM terminal 38 and ground.
Frequency
L
M
: Approximately 240 Hz when driving
20 km/h (12 MPH)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WCIA0108E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check harness for short or open between TCM and turbine revolution sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-205
2005 Altima
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-203, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminal for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
ECS0099L
TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
●
Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3.
Terminal No.
Resistance (Approx.)
1
2
No continuity
1
3
No continuity
2
3
2.4 - 2.8 kΩ
LCIA0077E
Revision: March 2005
AT-206
2005 Altima
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
[RE4F04B]
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description
PFP:31036
A
ECS0099M
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
B
AT
D
SAT574J
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
ECS0099N
Diagnostic trouble code CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) with CONSULT-II is detected when
TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM).
Possible Cause
ECS0099O
Check TCM.
G
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure
ECS0099P
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
F
H
I
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
A/T with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
J
K
L
BCIA0030E
3.
Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
M
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
AT-207
2005 Altima
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
[RE4F04B]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0099Q
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
3. Perform AT-207, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Confirmation Procedure" .
4. Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Replace TCM.
No
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
AT-208
2005 Altima
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
[RE4F04B]
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Description
PFP:31036
A
ECS0099R
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
B
AT
D
SAT574J
E
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
Check item (Possible cause)
●
F
TCM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
H
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine.
I
1.
J
BCIA0030E
3.
K
Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
L
M
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
AT-209
2005 Altima
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
[RE4F04B]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS0099S
1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds.
Perform AT-209, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
Yes
>> Replace TCM.
No
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
AT-210
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC
PFP:00007
A
ECS0099T
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0150E
Revision: March 2005
AT-211
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
26
27
34
35
36
PU/W
P/B
G
G/W
R/B
Revision: March 2005
PNP SWITCH
1 POSITION
PNP SWITCH
2 POSITION
PNP SWITCH
D POSITION
PNP SWITCH
R POSITION
PNP SWITCH
P OR N POSITION
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN 1 POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN 2 POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN D POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN R POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN P OR N POSITION
BATTERY VOLTAGE
IGNITION ON AND SELECTOR
LEVER IN OTHER POSITIONS
0V
AT-212
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BCWA0151E
Revision: March 2005
AT-213
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MEASURED BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND 25 OR 48 (TCM GROUND)
TERMINAL WIRE COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (APPROX.)
30
BR/Y
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
—
—
31
LG
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
—
—
32
R
Revision: March 2005
SENSOR POWER
IGNITION SWITCH ON
4.5 - 5.5V
IGNITION SWITCH OFF
0V
AT-214
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
1. A/T Check (Position) Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
ECS0099U
SYMPTOM:
A/T check (position) indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition
switch to ON.
A
B
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1.
2.
AT
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM terminals 10 (R/Y), 19 (R/Y), and
28 (Y/R) and ground.
Voltage
D
: Battery voltage
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
F
LCIA0094E
G
2. CHECK POWER SOURCE STEP 2
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 (Y/R) and ground.
Voltage
H
: Battery voltage
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
J
K
WCIA0095E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
L
Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness)
Refer to AT-102, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .
●
Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-215
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals 25,
48 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. Refer to AT-102, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .
SAT515J
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Harness and fuse for short or open between ignition switch and A/T check (position) indicator lamp (Main
harness)
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
●
Harness for short or open between A/T check (position) indicator lamp and TCM
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-216
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position
ECS0099V
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P or N position.
●
Engine can be started with selector lever in D, 2, 1 or R position.
B
1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
F
G
WCIA0059E
H
2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Check for short or open of park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2. Refer to
SC-16, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
I
J
3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
K
Check starting system. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-217
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed
ECS0099W
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in P position.
1. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components. Refer to AT-275, "OVERHAUL" and AT280, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SAT282F
Revision: March 2005
AT-218
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves
ECS0099X
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting N position.
B
1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
AT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
F
G
WCIA0059E
2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
H
Check control cable. Refer to AT-264, "Control Cable" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
I
3. ADJUST CONTROL CABLE
J
Adjust control cable.
K
>> Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
L
M
SCIA3156E
4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
Revision: March 2005
AT-219
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
SAT171B
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Disassemble A/T.
Check the following items:
–
Forward clutch assembly
–
Overrun clutch assembly
–
Reverse clutch assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-220
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
5. Large Shock. N → R Position
ECS0099Y
A
SYMPTOM:
There is large shock when changing from N to R position.
B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor,
line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
AT
D
E
WCIA0060E
F
2. CHECK DAMAGED CIRCUIT
G
Check damaged circuit.
>> Refer to AT-111, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-161, "DTC
P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" or AT-177, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" .
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
H
I
J
K
L
LCIA0067E
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
M
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to
AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SAT494G
Revision: March 2005
AT-221
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-222
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position
ECS0099Z
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting R position.
B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
AT
D
E
SAT638A
F
2. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION
G
Check stall revolution with selector lever in 1 and R positions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
OK in 1 position, NG in R position>> GO TO 3.
NG in both 1 and R positions>> GO TO 4.
H
I
SAT493G
J
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly
–
Torque converter
–
Reverse clutch assembly
–
High clutch assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-223
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly
–
Torque converter
–
Reverse clutch assembly
–
High clutch assembly
–
Low & reverse brake assembly
–
Low one-way clutch
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to
AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
SAT494G
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following item:
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-224
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
B
AT
D
SAT171B
E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly
–
Torque converter
–
Reverse clutch assembly
–
High clutch assembly
–
Low & reverse brake assembly
–
Low one-way clutch
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
G
H
I
J
K
L
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
M
10. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
F
AT-225
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position
ECS009A0
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting D, 3, 2 or 1 position.
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
SAT638A
2. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION
Check stall revolution with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT68, "Stall Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SAT493G
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly
–
Forward clutch assembly
–
Forward one-way clutch
–
Low one-way clutch
–
Low & reverse brake assembly
–
Torque converter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-226
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
A
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to
AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
B
AT
D
SAT494G
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
E
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following item:
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
G
H
I
6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
J
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
K
L
M
SAT171B
Revision: March 2005
AT-227
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
–
Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Oil pump assembly
–
Forward clutch assembly
–
Forward one-way clutch
–
Low one-way clutch
–
Low & reverse brake assembly
–
Torque converter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-228
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
ECS009A1
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise test — Part 1.
B
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-223, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" .
AT
D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0720
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A" , AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B"
or AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
F
G
WCIA0061E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
I
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
J
K
L
LCIA0067E
4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
M
Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in D position.
Refer to AT-71, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SAT494G
Revision: March 2005
AT-229
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Forward clutch assembly
–
Forward one-way clutch
–
Low one-way clutch
–
High clutch assembly
–
Torque converter
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SAT171B
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damage parts.
1.
2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-230
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
A
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
B
9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
AT
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-231
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2
ECS009A2
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed.
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed.
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 3, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ”
OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
WCIA0059E
3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-117,
"DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
circuits.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
LCIA0067E
Revision: March 2005
AT-232
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
B
AT
D
SAT171B
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Servo piston assembly
–
Brake band
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
F
G
H
I
J
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
K
1.
2.
Remove control valve. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
Revision: March 2005
AT-233
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
9. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-234
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
ECS009A3
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed.
B
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Are 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 3, 2 or 1 Position and 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 AT
OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
D
No
>> Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
E
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
F
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
I
WCIA0059E
J
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
K
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
L
M
LCIA0067E
Revision: March 2005
AT-235
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SAT171B
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Servo piston assembly
–
High clutch assembly
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-236
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
A
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-237
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
ECS009A4
SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed.
●
A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur.
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 3, 2 or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ”
OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-226, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in D, 3, 2 or 1 Position" and AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
With CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits?
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
●
Overdrive control switch
●
A/T fluid temperature sensor
●
Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
●
Shift solenoid valve A or B
WCIA0059E
Vehicle speed sensor·MTR
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-111, "DTC
P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT"
, AT-117, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-167, "DTC P0750
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-172, "DTC P0755
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
●
WCIA0062E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
LCIA0067E
Revision: March 2005
AT-238
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
A
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
B
AT
D
SAT171B
E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Servo piston assembly
–
Brake band
–
Torque converter
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-239
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-240
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
ECS009A5
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit.
Refer to AT-148, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
AT
D
E
WCIA0063E
F
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
G
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
H
I
LCIA0067E
J
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
K
Remove control valve. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check following items:
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Torque converter relief valve
–
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
L
M
4. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: March 2005
AT-241
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
5. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-242
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
ECS009A6
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.
B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit
after cruise test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-122,
"DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
AT
D
E
WCIA0064E
F
2. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
G
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
I
J
SAT171B
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
K
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-243
2005 Altima
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-244
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
14. Lock-up Is Not Released
ECS009A7
A
SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
1. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR] CIR-
B
CUIT
AT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122,
P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC-542, "DTC P2122, P2123
APP SENSOR" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
F
G
LCIA0078E
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
I
J
3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-245
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )
ECS009A8
SYMPTOM:
●
Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 .
●
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when A/T selector lever is in 3 position.
●
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from D to 2 position.
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve
circuit after cruise test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT183, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
WCIA0065E
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
Check throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]. Refer to EC-204, "DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR" and EC542, "DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor [accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor].
LCIA0067E
3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SAT171B
Revision: March 2005
AT-246
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
1.
2.
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Overrun clutch reducing valve
–
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch assembly
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
B
AT
D
E
F
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Overrun clutch reducing valve
–
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
G
H
I
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
J
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
K
7. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
L
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-247
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1
ECS009A9
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2.
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0720
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-167, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A" , AT-172, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B"
or AT-199, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
WCIA0061E
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to AT-229, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-248
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → 33 , When A/T Selector Lever D → 3
ECS009AA
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to 33 when changing A/T selector lever from D → 3 position.
B
1. CHECK 3 POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to 3 position switch circuit?
AT
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to 3 position switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check 3 position switch circuit. Refer to AT-105, "DTC
P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
No
>> Go to AT-235, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
D
E
F
WCIA0059E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-249
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
18. A/T Does Not Shift: 33 → 22 , When Selector Lever 3 → 2 Position
ECS009AB
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 33 to 22 when changing selector lever from 3 to 2 position.
1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> Go to AT-232, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does
Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" .
WCIA0059E
Revision: March 2005
AT-250
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position
ECS009AC
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from 2 to 1 position.
B
1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
AT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP)
switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
F
G
WCIA0059E
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
H
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
I
J
K
LCIA0073E
3. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
L
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-251
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
ECS009AD
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 .
1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-246, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .
No
>> Go to AT-223, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" .
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP & 3 Position Switches Circuit
Checks), and Throttle Position Sensor [Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor] Circuit Check
ECS009AE
SYMPTOM:
A/T check (position) indicator lamp does not come on in TCM
self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good.
WCIA0066E
LCIA0079E
LCIA0067E
DESCRIPTION
●
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transaxle range switch. The transaxle range switch
detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
3 position switch
Revision: March 2005
AT-252
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
●
Detects the A/T selector lever in 3 position and sends a signal to the TCM.
Throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor]
The throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] is part of the system that controls
the throttle position. This system also uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a throttle
control motor and throttle position sensors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-253
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The diagnostic procedure includes inspection for the 3 position switch circuit.
1. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out P/N, R, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position.
Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated
properly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SAT701J
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
–
Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch
F29 terminals 1 (G) and 2 (R/L) and between terminals 3 (GY)
and 4 (PU/W), 5 (P/B), 6 (G), 7 (R/L), 8 (G/W) and 9 (GY/R)
while moving manual shaft through each position.
Lever position
Terminal No.
P
3-7
R
3-8
N
3-9
D
3-6
2
3-5
1
3-4
1-2
1-2
WCIA0459E
If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to
step a.
–
If OK on step b, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
–
If NG on step b, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral
position (PNP) switch terminals. Refer to step a.
–
If OK on step d, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-267, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP)
Switch Adjustment" .
–
If NG on step d, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness)
●
Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
–
Revision: March 2005
AT-254
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
3. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26 (PU/W), 27 (P/B), 34
(G), 35 (G/W), 36 (R/B) and ground while moving selector lever
through each position.
B
AT
Terminal No.
Lever Position
36
35
34
27
26
P, N
B
0
0
0
0
R
0
B
0
0
0
D
0
0
B
0
0
2
0
0
0
B
0
1
0
0
0
0
B
D
E
F
Voltage:
B : Battery voltage
0 : 0V
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
H
WCIA0461E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-255
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
–
Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals 1 (G) and 2 (R/L), and between terminals 3 (G/Y) and 4
(PU/W), 5 (P/B), 6 (G), 7 (R/L), 8 (G/W) and 9 (GY/R) while
moving manual shaft through each position.
Lever position
Terminal No.
P
3-7
R
3-8
N
3-9
D
3-6
2
3-5
1
3-4
1-2
1-2
WCIA0459E
If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to
step a.
–
If OK on step b, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-268, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
–
If NG on step b, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral
position (PNP) switch terminals. Refer to step a.
–
If OK on step d, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-267, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP)
Switch Adjustment" .
–
If NG on step d, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch (Main harness)
●
Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
–
5. CHECK 3 POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”.
Check the signal of the 3 position switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
SAT645J
Revision: March 2005
AT-256
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4F04B]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the following items:
●
3 position switch M34.
–
Check for continuity between terminals 1 (L/W) and 2 (B) with
selector lever in 3 position.
●
Harness for short or open between meter and 3 position switch
(Main harness)
●
Harness of ground circuit for 3 position switch (Main harness) for
short or open
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
D
WCIA0464E
E
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]
Perform throttle position sensor [accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor] inspection. Refer to AT-177,
"DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR]" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
F
●
8. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
G
H
1. Perform TCM input/output inspection. Refer to AT-99, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE"
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Inspect TCM terminals and related wiring harnesses for damage or loose connections. Repair or
replace damaged parts.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-257
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
●
●
PFP:34950
ECS009AF
The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
ECS009AG
LCIA0082E
Revision: March 2005
AT-258
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
ECS009AH
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0222E
Revision: March 2005
AT-259
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values
ECS009AI
SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
WCIA0465E
SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Data are reference values.
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
(+)
(-)
1 (W)
8 (B)
Power source
2 (L)
8 (B)
Detent switch (key)
3 (L/W)
4 (R/G)
8 (B)
8 (B)
Detention switch
(for shift)
Stop lamp switch
5 (P)
8 (B)
Vehicle speed signal
6 (G)
8 (B)
Ignition signal
7 (R/W)
8 (B)
9 (G/W)
10 (W/G)
8 (B)
–
8 (B)
8 (B)
Shift lock solenoid
Condition
Always
Battery voltage
When selector lever is not in "P" position with key inserted
Battery voltage
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When selector lever is not in "P" position
Battery voltage
When selector lever is in "P" position
Approx. 0V
When brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
When brake pedal is released
Approx. 0V
—
—
Ignition switch: “ON”
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: “OFF”
Approx. 0V
When the brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: "ON" and vehicle speed is less than 8 km/
h (5 MPH)
Approx. 0V
Always
Approx. 0V
Ground
Key lock signal
Judgement standard
When the selector lever is set to a position other than the
“P” position
Battery voltage for approx.
0.1 sec. (Note)
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When the selector lever is set to the“ P” position
Battery voltage for approx.
0.1 sec. (Note)
Except the above
Approx. 0V
Key unlock signal
NOTE:
Make sure that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it
should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms.
Revision: March 2005
AT-260
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Component Inspection
ECS009AJ
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
A
Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
B
●
AT
Connector No.
Terminal No.
M34
9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground)
D
SCIA3117E
DETENT SWITCH
For Key:
●
E
Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector.
Condition
When selector lever is not in "P" position
with key inserted.
Connector
No.
Terminal
No.
M34
5-6
F
Continuity
Yes
Except the above
G
No
H
SCIA3118E
I
DETENT SWITCH
For Shift:
●
Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector.
Condition
Connector
No.
Terminal
No.
M34
13 - 14
When selector lever is not in "P" position.
Except the above
J
Continuity
Yes
K
No
L
WCIA0345E
KEY LOCK SOLENOID
Key Lock
Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
●
Connector No.
Terminal No.
M26
1 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground)
WCIA0455E
Revision: March 2005
AT-261
2005 Altima
M
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Key Unlock
Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
●
Connector No.
Terminal No.
M26
2 (Battery voltage) - 1 (Ground)
WCIA0456E
KEY SWITCH
●
Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key
lock solenoid connector.
Condition
Connector No.
Terminal No.
M26
3-4
Continuity
Key inserted
Key removed
Yes
No
WCIA0457E
STOP LAMP SWITCH
●
Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch connector.
Condition
Connector No.
Terminal No.
E38
1-2
Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
Yes
No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-6,
"Inspection and Adjustment" .
WCIA0466E
Revision: March 2005
AT-262
2005 Altima
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Device
PFP:34901
A
ECS009AK
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
LCIA0084E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-263
2005 Altima
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE4F04B]
Control Cable
ECS009AL
WCIA0367E
Revision: March 2005
AT-264
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4F04B]
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
PFP:00000
A
ECS009AM
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Drain ATF from transaxle.
Remove oil pan using power tools, and gasket.
● Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
B
AT
D
SAT031J
3.
E
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
F
G
H
WCIA0071E
4.
5.
I
Remove stopper ring from terminal cord assembly harness terminal body.
Remove terminal cord assembly harness from transaxle case by
pushing on terminal body.
J
K
SAT995C
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-265
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4F04B]
6. Remove control valve assembly by removing bolts I , X and ● .
Bolt length, number and location are shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release accumulator
return spring.
7. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary.
Refer to AT-303, "Control Valve Assembly" .
SAT004F
8.
Remove servo release and N-D accumulators by applying compressed air if necessary.
NOTE:
Hold each piston with a rag.
AAT279
INSTALLATION
●
●
Set manual shaft in Neutral, then align manual plate with groove
in manual valve.
After installing control valve assembly, make sure that selector
lever can be moved to all positions.
SAT091J
Revision: March 2005
AT-266
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4F04B]
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
ECS009AN
A
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
NOTE:
Always use new sealing parts.
B
AT
D
LCIA0070E
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
ECS009AO
E
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
NOTE:
Always use new sealing parts.
F
G
LCIA0076E
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1.
2.
H
ECS009AP
Remove control cable from manual shaft.
Set manual shaft in N position.
I
J
K
SCIA3156E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts.
Insert pin into adjustment holes in both park/neutral position
(PNP) switch and manual shaft as near vertical as possible.
Reinstall any part removed.
Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to
AT-108, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SCIA3154E
Revision: March 2005
AT-267
L
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4F04B]
Control Cable Adjustment
ECS009AQ
Move selector lever from the P position to the 1 position. You should
be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt
or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control
cable needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in the P position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut.
3. Secure the manual lever.
4. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of
the arrow shown in the illustration.
Specified force
5.
6.
: 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)
Tighten control cable lock nut.
Move selector lever from P to 1 position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly.
NOTE:
● Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position.
● Make sure that the transaxle is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position.
Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement
1.
2.
SCIA3157E
ECS009AR
Remove drive shaft assembly. Refer to FAX-11, "FRONT DRIVE
SHAFT" .
Remove oil seal, using Tool
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
NOTE:
Do not reuse old seal.
SCIA5377E
3.
Install new oil seal.
NOTE:
● Apply ATF before installing.
SAT782
●
Install oil seals so dimension A is within specification
Dimension A
: −0.5 mm (−0.02 in) to 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
AAT531A
Revision: March 2005
AT-268
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4F04B]
4.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-269
2005 Altima
AIR BREATHER HOSE
[RE4F04B]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Air Breather Hose - Air Duct Side
PFP:31098
ECS009AS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION QR25DE MODELS
AIR BREATHER HOSE TO AIR DUCT SIDE
LCIA0357E
1.
Air cleaner to electronic throttle con- 2.
trol actuator tube
Air breather hose (air duct side)
3.
Oil catch tank
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to, EM-17, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the air breather hose from the oil catch tank.
Revision: March 2005
AT-270
2005 Altima
AIR BREATHER HOSE
[RE4F04B]
Installation
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not to crush or kink the air breather hose during installation
NOTE:
●
Be sure paint mark A can be seen in the clip when installing the
air breather hose to the air cleaner to electronic throttle control
actuator tube.
●
Be sure paint mark B is facing upwards and to the end of the
radius in the oil catch tank tube.
●
Insert air breather hose into oil catch tank until it reaches the
point where the winding radius stops.
B
AT
D
E
F
G
LCIA0360E
Air Breather Hose - Transaxle Side
ECS009AT
H
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (OIL CATCH TANK TO AIR DUCT)
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0368E
1.
Transaxle assembly
2.
Starter motor
4.
Oil catch tank
5.
Air breather hose (transaxle side)
3.
Left front side member
Removal
1.
Remove the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to, EM-17, "REMOVAL" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-271
2005 Altima
AIR BREATHER HOSE
[RE4F04B]
2.
3.
Disconnect the air breather hose air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube side and transaxle
side of the oil catch tank.
Remove the oil catch tank.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not crush or kink the air breather hose during installation.
NOTE:
●
The paint marks must face upwards on installation.
●
Insert air breather hose (transaxle side) B into tube stopper
when installing air breather hose to the oil catch tank.
●
Insert air breather hose (transaxle side) A into the point where
the radius stops on the air breather hose when installing to the
transaxle.
WCIA0369E
Revision: March 2005
AT-272
2005 Altima
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE4F04B]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
PFP:00000
A
ECS009AU
1.
2.
3.
Remove battery and bracket.
Remove air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" .
B
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness
connectors.
4. Disconnect harness connectors of revolution sensor, ground, vehicle speed sensor, mass air flow sensor, AT
and turbine revolution sensor.
5. Remove LH mounting bracket from transaxle and body.
D
6. Disconnect control cable at transaxle side.
7. Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "FRONT DRIVE SHAFT"
.
E
8. Drain ATF through drain plug. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T
Fluid" .
9. Remove push clips and engine undercover.
F
10. Disconnect fluid cooler piping.
11. Remove starter motor from transaxle. Refer to SC-17, "Removal
LCIA0086E
and Installation" .
G
12.
13.
14.
15.
Support engine.
Remove upper transaxle to engine bolts.
Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear cover plate and torque converter to drive plate
bolts.
NOTE:
Rotate crankshaft for access to torque convertor bolts.
H
I
J
K
WCIA0069E
L
16. Support transaxle with a jack.
17. Remove lower transaxle to engine bolts.
18. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack.
Inspection
M
ECS009AV
Check the drive plate runout as shown.
If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear.
Refer to AT-376, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
SAT977H
Revision: March 2005
AT-273
2005 Altima
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE4F04B]
Installation
ECS009AW
CAUTION:
●
When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly
during re-assembly.
●
Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive
train components.
1. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”
: 14 mm (0.55 in) or more
SAT044A
2.
Install torque converter bolts to drive plate.
NOTE:
With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check
that transaxle rotates freely without binding.
WCIA0070E
3.
Tighten transaxle to engine bolts.
Bolt No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Number of
bolts
4
1
1
2
2
1
Bolt length
″ ″ mm (in)
49 (1.93)
40
(1.57)
45 (1.77)
40
(1.57)
30
(1.18)
45
(1.77)
Tightening
torque N·m
(kg-m, ft-lb)
75
(7.7, 55)
35
(3.3, 26)
75
(7.7, 55)
43 (4.4, 32)
35
(3.6, 26)
SCIA4358E
4.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
NOTE:
●
Check fluid level in transaxle.
●
Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transaxle operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R position. A slight
shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transaxle is shifted.
●
Perform road test. Refer to AT-72, "Road Test" .
SAT638A
Revision: March 2005
AT-274
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE4F04B]
OVERHAUL
Components
PFP:00000
A
ECS009AX
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0320E
Revision: March 2005
AT-275
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE4F04B]
WCIA0370E
Revision: March 2005
AT-276
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE4F04B]
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0371E
Revision: March 2005
AT-277
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE4F04B]
Oil Channel
ECS009AY
SAT573K
Revision: March 2005
AT-278
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE4F04B]
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap
Rings
ECS009AZ
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA4972E
Revision: March 2005
AT-279
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly
1.
2.
PFP:31020
ECS009B0
Drain ATF through drain plug. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T
Fluid" .
Remove torque converter.
SAT008D
3.
a.
b.
c.
Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as
shown.
Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way
clutch spline using screwdriver.
Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.
SAT009D
4.
Remove A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube.
SAT768J
Revision: March 2005
AT-280
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
5.
6.
Set manual shaft to position P.
Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
A
B
AT
SCIA3156E
D
7.
8.
Remove oil pan using power tools, and oil pan gasket.
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of
malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
NOTE:
If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/
T. Refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" .
E
F
G
SAT003F
H
9.
a.
Remove control valve assembly according to the following procedures.
Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts I , X and ● .
I
J
K
L
M
SAT004F
Revision: March 2005
AT-281
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
b.
Remove snap ring from terminal body.
SCIA0800E
c.
Push terminal body into transaxle case and draw out terminal
cord assembly.
SCIA0801E
10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.
SAT005F
11. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston.
SAT018DA
12. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed air.
13. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston.
SAT019DA
Revision: March 2005
AT-282
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
14. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with compressed air.
A
B
AT
SAT020D
15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston.
16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transaxle
case for damage.
D
E
F
G
SAT023DA
H
17. Check accumulator return springs for damage and free length.
18. Remove lip seals.
I
J
K
SAT006F
L
19. Remove L & R oil tube and oil sleeve.
M
SAT862HA
Revision: March 2005
AT-283
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
20. Remove converter housing according to the following procedures.
a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts using power tools.
b. Remove converter housing by tapping it lightly.
SAT008F
c.
Remove O-ring from differential oil port.
SAT235F
21. Remove final drive assembly from transaxle case.
SAT228F
22. Remove differential side bearing outer race and side bearing
adjusting shim from transaxle case using Tool.
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
SCIA5378E
23. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle
case.
SAT031D
Revision: March 2005
AT-284
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
24. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter housing using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
B
AT
SCIA5379E
25. Remove oil seal from converter housing using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage case.
D
E
F
G
SAT032D
H
26. Remove differential lubricant tube from converter housing.
I
J
SAT063K
27. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures.
a. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
K
L
M
SAT225F
b.
Remove oil pump assembly, baffle plate and gasket from transaxle case.
SAT012F
Revision: March 2005
AT-285
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
c.
Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assembly.
SAT013F
28. Remove brake band according to the following procedures.
a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin using suitable
tool.
NOTE:
Do not reuse anchor end pin.
SAT014FA
b.
Remove brake band and strut from transaxle case.
SAT196F
CAUTION:
To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the
brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the figure at left.
NOTE:
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band.
SAT039D
Revision: March 2005
AT-286
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
c.
Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns.
A
B
AT
SAT040D
D
29. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse clutch
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse clutch.
E
F
G
SAT549F
b.
Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) from reverse clutch.
H
I
J
SAT566F
c.
K
Remove needle bearings from high clutch drum and check for
damage or wear.
L
M
SAT567F
d.
Remove high clutch hub and front sun gear from transaxle case.
SAT568F
Revision: March 2005
AT-287
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
e.
f.
Remove front sun gear and needle bearing from high clutch hub
and check for damage or wear.
Remove bearing race from front sun gear and check for damage
or wear.
SAT019F
30. Remove needle bearing from transaxle case and check for damage or wear.
SAT020F
31. Apply compressed air and check to see that low and reverse
brake operates.
SAT138F
32. Remove low one-way clutch and front planetary carrier assembly according to the following procedures.
a. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver.
SAT046D
Revision: March 2005
AT-288
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
b.
Remove low one-way clutch with a suitable hook made of wire.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
AAT889
c.
Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver.
H
I
J
SAT022F
d.
K
Remove front planetary carrier with low and reverse brake piston and retainer.
L
M
SAT023F
e.
Remove low and reverse brake spring retainer.
NOTE:
Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
SAT148F
Revision: March 2005
AT-289
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
f.
Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the
clockwise arrow and locks in the opposite direction.
SAT048D
g.
h.
Remove needle bearing, low and reverse brake piston and
retainer from front planetary carrier.
Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle
bearing for damage or wear.
SAT024F
i.
Check clearance between planetary gears and planetary carrier
with feeler gauge.
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
: 0.20 - 0.70 mm
(0.0079 - 0.0276 in)
: 0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit.
SAT025F
33. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transaxle case.
SAT026F
b.
Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier.
SAT027F
Revision: March 2005
AT-290
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
c.
d.
Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier assembly.
Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bearings
for damage or wear.
A
B
AT
SAT028F
e.
D
Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary carrier with feeler gauge.
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
E
: 0.20 - 0.70 mm
(0.0079 - 0.0276 in)
: 0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
F
Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allowable limit.
G
SAT054D
34. Remove rear internal gear and forward clutch hub from transaxle case.
H
I
J
SAT029F
K
35. Remove overrun clutch hub from transaxle case.
L
M
SAT030F
36. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub and check for
damage or wear.
SAT031F
Revision: March 2005
AT-291
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
37. Remove forward clutch assembly from transaxle case.
SAT032F
38. Remove needle bearing from transaxle case.
SAT033F
39. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following procedures.
a. Remove side cover bolts.
NOTE:
● Do not mix bolts A and B.
● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts.
AAT850
b.
Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer.
NOTE:
Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might come out
when removing side cover.
SAT434D
c.
Remove adjusting shim.
SAT440D
Revision: March 2005
AT-292
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
d.
Remove output shaft assembly.
A
B
AT
SAT035F
NOTE:
If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap cover with
a soft hammer to separate.
D
E
F
G
SAT435D
e.
H
Remove needle bearing.
I
J
K
SAT036F
40. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following
procedures.
a. Set manual shaft to position P to fix idler gear.
b. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a suitable punch.
L
M
SAT037F
Revision: March 2005
AT-293
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
c.
Remove idler gear lock nut using suitable tool.
NOTE:
Do not reuse idler gear lock nut.
SAT061D
d.
Remove idler gear using Tool.
Tool number
: ST27180001 (J-25726-A)
SCIA5380E
e.
f.
Remove reduction pinion gear.
Remove adjusting shim from reduction pinion gear.
SAT916D
41. Remove return spring from parking shaft with screwdriver.
42. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pawl from transaxle
case.
43. Check parking pawl and shaft for damage or wear.
WCIA0330E
44. Remove parking actuator support from transaxle case.
45. Check parking actuator support for damage or wear.
SAT066D
Revision: March 2005
AT-294
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
46. Remove side oil seal from transaxle case using suitable tool.
A
B
AT
SAT040F
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-295
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft
PFP:00000
ECS009B1
COMPONENTS
WCIA0324E
REMOVAL
1.
Remove detent spring from transaxle case.
SAT042F
2.
Drive out manual plate retaining pin using Tool.
Tool number
: ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
SCIA5381E
Revision: March 2005
AT-296
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin using Tool.
Tool number
4.
5.
A
: ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft.
Draw out parking rod from transaxle case using suitable tool.
B
AT
SCIA5382E
D
6.
7.
Pull out manual shaft retaining pin using suitable tool.
Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transaxle case.
E
F
G
SAT049F
8.
Remove manual shaft oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the transaxle case.
H
I
J
SAT080D
K
INSPECTION
●
Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
L
INSTALLATION
1.
Install manual shaft oil seal using suitable tool.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to the outer surface of new oil seal
M
SAT081D
Revision: March 2005
AT-297
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
2.
Install manual shaft and manual plate.
SCIA3287E
3.
Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transaxle case using
Tool.
Tool number
4.
: ST25710000 (J-25689-A)
Install manual shaft retaining pin up to bottom of hole using Tool.
Tool number
: KV32101000 (J-25689-A)
SCIA5383E
5.
6.
Install parking rod to parking rod plate.
Set parking rod assembly onto manual shaft and drive retaining
pin using Tool.
Tool number
: ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
NOTE:
Both ends of the pin should protrude.
SCIA5384E
7.
Drive manual plate retaining pin using Tool.
Tool number
: ST23540000 (J-25689-A)
NOTE:
Both ends of the pin should protrude.
SCIA5385E
8.
Install detent spring. Tighten detent spring bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" .
SAT042F
Revision: March 2005
AT-298
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Oil Pump
ECS009B2
A
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
SAT050FD
G
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove seal rings.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal rings.
H
I
J
SAT699H
K
2.
Loosen bolts in a crisscross pattern and remove oil pump cover.
L
M
SAT051F
3.
Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing.
SAT092D
Revision: March 2005
AT-299
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
4.
Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
SAT093D
5.
Remove oil pump housing oil seal using suitable tool.
SAT094D
INSPECTION
Oil Pump Housing, Oil Pump Cover, Inner Gear and Outer Gear
Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
Side Clearances
Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least four
places around each outside edge. Maximum measured values
should be within specified positions.
Standard clearance
: 0.030 - 0.050 mm
(0.0012 - 0.0020 in)
If clearance is less then specification, select inner and outer gear as
a set so that clearance is within specifications.
Inner and outer gear:
Refer to AT-376, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump assembly
except oil pump cover.
SAT095D
Revision: March 2005
AT-300
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing.
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
A
: 0.111 - 0.181 mm
(0.0044 - 0.0071 in)
: 0.181 mm (0.0071 in)
B
If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly except
oil pump cover.
AT
SAT096D
D
Seal Ring Clearance
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
: 0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
E
If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
F
G
SAT097D
ASSEMBLY
1.
H
Install new oil seal on oil pump housing.
Tool number
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
I
J
K
SCIA5386E
2.
L
Install new O-ring on oil pump housing.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to new O-ring.
M
SAT093D
Revision: March 2005
AT-301
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the direction of inner gear
SAT092D
4.
a.
b.
Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing.
Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly
to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil pump
housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten oil pump cover
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-299, "COMPONENTS"
.
SAT051F
5.
Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with
petroleum jelly.
CAUTION:
● Do not spread gap of the seal ring excessively while
installing, The ring may be deformed.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to new seal rings.
SAT699H
Revision: March 2005
AT-302
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Control Valve Assembly
ECS009B3
A
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SAT537K
1.
Oil strainer
2.
O-ring
3.
Snap ring
4.
Terminal body
5.
O-rings
6.
Control valve lower body
7.
Oil cooler relief valve spring
8.
Check ball
9.
Separating plate
10. Support plate
11.
Steel ball
12.
Control valve inter body
13. Pilot filter
14. Separating plate
15.
Steel ball
K
L
16. Control valve upper body
M
DISASSEMBLY
Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies.
Revision: March 2005
AT-303
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Bolt length, number and location:
Bolt symbol
Bolt length “
(in)
”
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
13.5
(0.531)
58.0
(2.283)
40.0
(1.575)
66.0
(2.598)
33.0
(1.299)
78.0
(3.071)
18.0
(0.709)
6
3
6
11
2
2
1
mm
Number of bolts
f: Reamer bolt and nut.
SAT704J
1.
Remove bolts a , d and nut f and remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.
AAT780
2.
Remove solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid
valve from control valve assembly.
SAT062F
Revision: March 2005
AT-304
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
A
B
AT
SCIA0804E
D
4.
Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts b , c and nut f .
E
F
G
SAT064FA
5.
Remove inter body from lower body.
H
I
J
SAT432D
6.
K
Turn over lower body, and remove accumulator support plate.
L
M
SAT109D
7.
8.
Remove bolts e , separating plate and separating gasket from
lower body.
Remove check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs from
lower body.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose check balls and oil cooler relief valve
springs
SAT110DA
Revision: March 2005
AT-305
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
9.
Remove inter body from upper body.
SAT065F
10. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in inter
body and then remove them.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose steel balls.
SAT705J
11. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body and then remove them.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose steel balls.
SAT771J
INSPECTION
Lower and Upper Bodies
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose these parts.
NOTE:
●
Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in lower
body.
SCIA3290E
Revision: March 2005
AT-306
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
●
Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in
upper body.
A
B
AT
SCIA3294E
D
Oil Strainer
NOTE:
Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage.
E
Shift Solenoid Valves “A” and “B”, Line Pressure Solenoid Valve, Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Valve and Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
●
●
●
●
●
●
Measure resistance.
For shift solenoid valve A, refer to AT-170, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
For shift solenoid valve B, refer to AT-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
For line pressure solenoid valve, refer to AT-164, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
For torque converter clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-151,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
For overrun clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-186, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
F
G
H
SAT283HB
I
Oil Cooler Relief Valve Spring
●
●
J
Check springs for damage or deformation.
Measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard
: Refer to AT-377, "Control
Valves" .
K
L
SAT138D
ASSEMBLY
1.
a.
Install upper, inter and lower body.
Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their
proper positions.
SAT771J
Revision: March 2005
AT-307
2005 Altima
M
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
b.
Install upper separating gasket, upper inter separating gasket
and upper separating plate in order shown in illustration.
SAT072F
c.
Install reamer bolts f from bottom of upper body. Using reamer
bolts as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set.
SAT073FA
d.
Install pilot filter.
SAT074F
e.
Place lower body as shown in illustration (side of inter body face
up). Install steel balls in their proper positions.
SAT705J
f.
Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts f as guides.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel check balls.
SAT076FA
Revision: March 2005
AT-308
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
g.
Install check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs in their
proper positions in lower body.
A
B
AT
SAT110DA
h.
D
Install lower separating gasket, lower inter separating gasket
and lower separating plate in order shown in illustration.
E
F
G
BAT002
i.
Install bolts e from bottom of lower body. Using bolts e as
guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set.
H
I
J
SAT078FA
j.
k.
Temporarily install support plates on lower body.
Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts f as guides
and tighten reamer bolts f slightly.
K
L
M
SAT126DA
Revision: March 2005
AT-309
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
2.
Install new O-rings to solenoid valves and terminal body.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to new O-rings
SCIA0804E
3.
Install and tighten bolts.
Bolt length, number and location:
Bolt symbol
Bolt length “
”
mm (in)
Number of bolts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
13.5
(0.53
1)
58.0
(2.28
3)
40.0
(1.57
5)
66.0
(2.59
8)
33.0
(1.29
9)
78.0
(3.07
1)
18.0
(0.70
9)
6
3
6
11
2
2
1
SAT704J
a.
Install and tighten bolts b to specified torque.
b
: 7 - 9 N-m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
SAT081FA
Revision: March 2005
AT-310
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
b.
Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve
to lower body.
A
B
AT
SAT062F
D
c.
Set oil strainer, then tighten bolts a , c , d and nuts f to specified
torque.
a, c, d, f
: 7 - 9 N-m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
E
F
G
SAT083FA
d.
Tighten bolts e to specified torque.
e
H
: 3.4 - 4.4 N-m (0.35 - 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 - 39.1 in-lb)
I
J
SAT084F
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-311
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Control Valve Upper Body
ECS009B4
COMPONENTS
NOTE:
Apply ATF to all components before installation.
SAT772J
1.
Upper body
2.
Cooler check valve
3.
Return spring
4.
Plug
5.
Retainer plate
6.
1-2 accumulator valve
7.
Return spring
8.
Plug
9.
Retainer plate
10. Torque converter clutch control
valve
11. Return spring
12. Torque converter clutch control plug
13. Torque converter clutch control
sleeve
14. Retainer plate
15. Torque converter relief valve
16. Return spring
17. Retainer plate
18. Return spring
19. Overrun clutch reducing valve
20. Plug
21. Retainer plate
22. Retainer plate
23. Return spring
24. Pilot valve
25. Retainer plate
26. Plug
27. 1-2 accumulator piston
28. Return spring
29. 1-2 accumulator retainer plate
30. Retainer plate
31. Plug
32. 1st reducing valve
33. Return spring
34. Retainer plate
35. Return spring
36. 3-2 timing valve
Revision: March 2005
AT-312
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
1.
A
Remove valves at retainer plates.
NOTE:
Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool.
B
AT
SCIA3294E
a.
D
Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates.
E
F
G
SAT553G
b.
Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves.
NOTE:
Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out.
H
I
J
K
SAT554G
c.
Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove
internal parts.
NOTE:
● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down and
lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.
L
M
SAT137D
Revision: March 2005
AT-313
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
INSPECTION
Valve Spring
●
Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard
●
: Refer to AT-377, "Control
Valves" .
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
SAT138D
Control Valves
●
Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do not stand the
control valve body upright.
SAT139D
1.
Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
NOTE:
● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.
SAT140DA
●
Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert
the valves into their proper positions.
SAT141D
Revision: March 2005
AT-314
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
1-2 Accumulator Valve
A
Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer
plate from opposite side of control valve body.
Install return spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plug.
●
●
B
AT
SAT142D
1.
Install retainer plates.
● While pushing plug or return spring using screwdriver, install
retainer plate.
D
E
F
G
SAT143D
H
Retainer Plate (Upper Body)
Unit: mm (in)
No.
●
Name of control valve
22
Pilot valve
30
1st reducing valve
34
3-2 timing valve
17
Torque converter relief valve
9
1-2 accumulator valve
25
1-2 accumulator piston valve
21
Overrun clutch reducing valve
5
Cooler check valve
14
Torque converter clutch control valve
Width A
Length B
I
21.5 (0.846)
J
38.5 (1.516)
K
6.0 (0.236)
SAT086F
24.0 (0.945)
L
28.0 (1.102)
Install proper retainer plates.
Refer to AT-312, "COMPONENTS" .
Revision: March 2005
M
AT-315
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Control Valve Lower Body
ECS009B5
COMPONENTS
SAT773J
1.
Lower body
2.
Retainer plate
3.
Return spring
4.
Piston
5.
Parallel pin
6.
Sleeve
7.
Return spring
8.
Pressure modifier valve
9.
Retainer plate
10. Plug
11. Shift valve B
13. Manual valve
14. Pressure regulator valve
15. Return spring
16. Spring seat
17. Plug
18. Sleeve
19. Retainer plate
20. Return spring
21. Overrun clutch control valve
22. Plug
23. Retainer plate
24. Return spring
25. Accumulator control valve
26. Plug
27. Retainer plate
28. Shift valve A
29. Return spring
30. Retainer plate
31. Shuttle valve
32. Return spring
33. Plug
34. Plug
35. Retainer plate
Revision: March 2005
AT-316
12. Return spring
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
A
Remove valves at retainer plate.
For removal procedures, refer to AT-316, "COMPONENTS" .
B
AT
SCIA3290E
INSPECTION
Valve Springs
D
E
Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure
free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard
: Refer to AT-377, "Control
Valves" .
F
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
G
H
SAT138D
Control Valves
I
Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage.
ASSEMBLY
Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to AT-316, "COMPONENTS" .
NOTE:
Apply ATF to all components before installation.
J
K
L
SCIA3290E
Retainer Plate (Lower Body)
Unit: mm (in)
No.
●
Name of control valve and plug
19
Pressure regulator valve
27
Accumulator control valve
30
Shift valve A
23
Overrun clutch control valve
2
Pressure modifier valve
35
Shuttle valve
9
Shift valve B
Width A
Length B
Type
6.0
(0.236)
28.0
(1.102)
I
—
—
II
SAT089F
Install proper retainer plates.
Refer to AT-316, "COMPONENTS" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-317
2005 Altima
M
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Reverse Clutch
ECS009B6
COMPONENTS
WCIA0372E
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
b.
c.
Check operation of reverse clutch
Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install
reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Oil seal might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SCIA3316E
2.
3.
Remove snap ring using screwdriver.
Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish
plates.
SCIA4886E
4.
Remove snap ring from reverse clutch drum while compressing return springs using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Be sure to set Tool directly over springs.
● Do not expand the snap ring excessively.
Remove spring retainer and return springs.
●
5.
SCIA5387E
Revision: March 2005
AT-318
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
6.
7.
Remove reverse clutch piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it as shown.
Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.
A
B
AT
SCIA3319E
INSPECTION
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.If damaged, replace.
D
E
Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
●
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
F
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard value
: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Wear limit
: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
●
G
If not within wear limit, replace.
H
SAT162D
I
Reverse Clutch Dish Plates
●
●
Check for deformation or damage.
Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate
●
J
: 3.08 mm (0.1213 in)
If deformed or fatigued, replace.
K
L
SAT163D
M
Reverse Clutch Piston
●
●
●
Make sure that check balls are not fixed.
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure that air leaks past ball.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install new D-ring and seal ring on piston.
NOTE:
● Take care with the direction of new oil seal.
● Apply ATF to both parts.
SCIA4887E
Revision: March 2005
AT-319
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
2.
Install piston assembly by turning it slowly.
NOTE:
● Apply ATF to inner surface of the drum.
SCIA3319E
3.
Install return springs and spring retainer on piston using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Be sure to set Tool directly over springs.
●
SCIA5387E
4.
5.
6.
Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs.
Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plates.
NOTE:
● Take care with the order of the plates
Install snap ring using screwdriver.
SCIA4886E
7.
Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
Retaining plate
: 0.5 - 0.8 mm
(0.020 - 0.031 in)
: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
: Refer to AT-378,
"REVERSE CLUTCH" .
SCIA3321E
Revision: March 2005
AT-320
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
8.
Check operation of reverse clutch using compressed air.
A
B
AT
SCIA3316E
D
High Clutch
ECS009B7
COMPONENTS
E
F
G
H
I
J
WCIA0373E
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.
K
Check operation of high clutch using compressed air.
Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft with nylon cloth.
NOTE:
Stop up hole on opposite side of input shaft with nylon cloth.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
NOTE:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Oil seal might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
L
M
SAT176D
Remove seal rings from input shaft.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal rings.
SCIA4890E
Revision: March 2005
AT-321
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
4.
Remove snap ring using screwdriver.
Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.
SAT095F
5.
Remove snap ring from high clutch drum while compressing
return springs using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Set Tool directly over springs.
● Do not expand snap ring excessively.
Remove cancel force cover and return springs.
●
6.
SCIA5388E
7.
Remove piston from high clutch drum by turning it.
SAT111F
INSPECTION
High Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
Check for deformation, replace if fatigue or damage.
NOTE:
Always replace the spring retainer and return springs as a set.
High Clutch Drive Plates
●
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard value
: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Wear limit
: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
●
If not within wear limit, replace.
SAT162D
Revision: March 2005
AT-322
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Seal Ring Clearance
●
●
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
●
A
Install new seal rings onto input shaft.
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
: 0.08 - 0.23 mm
(0.0031 - 0.0091 in)
: 0.23 mm (0.0091 in)
B
AT
If not within allowable limit, replace input shaft assembly.
SAT187D
D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install return springs and cancel force spring on piston.
E
2.
Install piston assembly by turning it slowly.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to inner surface of the drum
F
G
H
SAT111F
3.
I
Install snap ring while compressing return springs using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Set Tool directly over return springs.
J
K
L
M
SCIA5388E
CAUTION:
Do not align the snap ring gap with the spring retainer stopper.
SAT113F
4.
Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.
Revision: March 2005
AT-323
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
NOTE:
Take care of the order and direction of plates.
5.
Install snap ring using screwdriver.
SAT095F
6.
Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
: 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)
Allowable limit
: 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
Retaining plate
: Refer to AT-378, "HIGH CLUTCH" .
: Refer to AT-378, "HIGH CLUTCH" .
SCIA4892E
7.
Check operation of high clutch.
SAT196D
8.
Install seal rings to input shaft.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to the new seal rings.
● Never reuse seal rings.
SAT197D
Revision: March 2005
AT-324
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
NOTE:
Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading.
A
B
AT
SAT198D
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-325
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Forward and Overrun Clutches
ECS009B8
COMPONENTS
WCIA0374E
Revision: March 2005
AT-326
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
A
Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch.
Install bearing retainer on forward clutch drum.
Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Oil seal might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
B
AT
SAT123F
2.
3.
Remove snap ring for forward clutch.
Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for forward clutch.
D
E
F
G
SAT203D
4.
5.
H
Remove snap ring for overrun clutch.
Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for overrun clutch.
I
J
K
SAT204D
6.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum while compressing
return springs using Tool.
Tool number
L
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
● Set Tool directly over return springs.
● Do not expand snap ring excessively.
M
SCIA5389E
7.
Remove spring retainer and return springs.
NOTE:
Do not remove return springs from the spring retainer.
Revision: March 2005
AT-327
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
8.
Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from
forward clutch drum by turning it.
SAT125F
9.
Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by
turning it.
SAT126F
10. Remove D-rings and seal rings from forward clutch piston and
overrun clutch piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse D-rings and seal rings.
SCIA3046E
INSPECTION
Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
●
●
Always replace spring retainer and return springs as a set.
Check for deformation, replace if fatigue or damage.
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Drive Plates
●
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
Forward clutch
Standard value
: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Wear limit
: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
Overrun clutch
Standard value
: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Wear limit
: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
●
SAT162D
If not within wear limit, replace.
Revision: March 2005
AT-328
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Dish Plates
●
●
Thickness of dish plate
Forward clutch
Overrun clutch
●
A
Check for deformation or damage.
Measure thickness of dish plate.
B
: 2.7 mm (0.106 in)
: 2.7 mm (0.106 in)
AT
If deformed or fatigued, replace.
SAT163D
D
Forward Clutch Drum
●
●
●
Make sure that check balls are not fixed.
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of forward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball.
Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch
drum. Make sure there is no air leakage.
E
F
G
SAT213D
H
Overrun Clutch Piston
●
●
●
Make sure that check balls are not fixed.
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make
sure that air leaks past ball.
I
J
K
SAT212D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install new D-rings and seal rings on forward clutch piston and
overrun clutch piston.
NOTE:
● Take care of the direction of the new seal rings.
● Apply ATF to both parts.
M
SCIA3046E
Revision: March 2005
AT-329
L
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
2.
Install overrun clutch piston assembly on forward clutch piston
by turning it slowly.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to inner surface of the forward clutch piston.
SAT126F
3.
Install forward clutch piston assembly on forward clutch drum by
turning it slowly.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to inner surface of the drum.
SAT125F
4.
Install spring retainer assembly on overrun clutch piston.
WCIA0375E
NOTE:
Align the mark on spring retainer assembly with check ball in
overrun clutch piston.
SAT133F
Revision: March 2005
AT-330
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
5.
Install snap ring while compressing spring retainer assembly
Using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
● Set Tool directly over the spring retainer assembly.
B
AT
SCIA5389E
D
NOTE:
Do not align snap ring with the spring retainer assembly stopper.
E
F
G
SAT134F
H
6.
Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for overrun clutch and install snap ring for the overrun clutch
using screwdriver.
NOTE:
Take care of the order of the plates.
I
J
K
SAT204D
7.
Measure clearance between overrun clutch retaining plate and
snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
Overrun clutch
retaining plate
L
M
: 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
: 1.7 mm (0.067 in)
Refer to AT-379, "OVERRUN
CLUTCH" .
SAT135F
Revision: March 2005
AT-331
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
8.
Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for forward clutch and install snap ring for the forward clutches
using screwdriver.
NOTE:
Take care of the order of the plates.
SAT203D
9.
Measure clearance between forward clutch retaining plate and
snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
Forward clutch
retaining plate
: 0.45 - 0.85 mm
(0.0177 - 0.0335 in)
: 1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
: Refer to AT-378, "FORWARD
CLUTCH" .
SAT228D
10. Check operation of forward clutch.
11. Check operation of overrun clutch.
SAT123F
Revision: March 2005
AT-332
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Low & Reverse Brake
ECS009B9
A
COMPONENTS
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
WCIA0376E
DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.
b.
c.
J
Check operation of low & reverse brake.
Apply compressed air to oil hole of transaxle case.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
K
L
M
SAT147F
2.
In order to remove piston, apply compressed air to oil hole of
retainer while holding piston.
NOTE:
Apply compressed air gradually to allow the piston to come out
evenly.
SAT149F
Revision: March 2005
AT-333
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
Remove D-rings from piston and discard.
SAT150F
INSPECTION
Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
●
●
Check for deformation, replace if fatigue or damage.
Always replace the spring retainer and return springs as a set.
Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plate
●
●
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate
Standard value
: 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
Wear limit
: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
●
If not within wear limit, replace.
SAT162D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install new D-rings on piston.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to both Parts
SAT150F
2.
Set and align piston with retainer using suitable tool.
NOTE:
This operation may be required in order to engage the protrusions of the piston to the return springs correctly.
SAT323F
Revision: March 2005
AT-334
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
Install new driven plates, drive plates, retaining plate and dish
plate on transaxle case.
NOTE:
Take care with the order and direction of the plates.
A
B
AT
SAT923H
D
4.
Install snap ring using screwdriver.
E
F
G
SAT546G
5.
Measure clearance between driven plate and transaxle case. If
not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. (front
side)
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
Retaining plate
H
I
: 1.7 - 2.1 mm (0.067 - 0.083 in)
: 3.3 mm (0.130 in)
Refer to AT-379, "LOW &
REVERSE BRAKE" .
J
SAT155F
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub
K
ECS009BA
COMPONENTS
L
M
SAT975H
Revision: March 2005
AT-335
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove overrun clutch hub and thrust washer from forward
clutch hub.
SAT157F
2.
Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear.
SAT251D
3.
Remove bearing from rear internal gear.
SAT252DA
4.
Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
SAT253D
Revision: March 2005
AT-336
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
5.
Remove bearing from forward one-way clutch.
A
B
AT
SAT254DA
D
6.
Remove forward one-way clutch from forward clutch hub.
E
F
G
SAT255D
INSPECTION
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub
●
H
Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage.
I
J
K
SAT256D
Bearings and Forward One-Way Clutch
●
●
L
Check bearings for deformation and damage.
Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage.
M
SAT158FA
Revision: March 2005
AT-337
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch.
NOTE:
Take care with the direction of the forward one-way clutch.
SAT976H
2.
Install bearing on forward one-way clutch.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to the bearing.
SAT159FA
3.
Install thrust washer on rear internal gear.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
● Align hooks of the thrust washer with holes of the rear internal
gear.
SAT160F
4.
Install bearing on rear internal gear.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to the bearing.
SAT161FA
Revision: March 2005
AT-338
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
5.
Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
● Align hooks of the thrust washer with holes of the overrun
clutch hub.
● Align protrusions of rear internal gear with the holes of the
overrun clutch hub.
A
B
AT
SAT157F
D
6.
Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear.
NOTE:
● Check operation of the forward one-way clutch.
● Hold the rear internal gear and turn the forward clutch hub.
● Check forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlocking
directions as shown, if incorrect check assembly of the forward one-way clutch.
E
F
G
AAT426
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer
ECS009BB
H
COMPONENTS
I
J
K
L
M
SAT291K
Revision: March 2005
AT-339
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal rings.
SAT164F
2.
Remove output shaft bearing with screwdrivers.
NOTE:
● Do not ruse output shaft bearing.
● Be careful not damage output shaft.
SAT165F
3.
Remove snap ring from bearing retainer using suitable tool.
SAT166F
4.
Remove needle bearing from bearing retainer suitable tool.
SAT167F
Revision: March 2005
AT-340
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
5.
Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear using suitable tool.
A
B
AT
SAT168F
D
6.
Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transaxle case using
Tool.
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
E
F
G
SCIA5390E
7.
Press out reduction pinion gear bearing inner race from reduction pinion gear using suitable tool.
H
I
J
SAT169F
8.
K
Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from transaxle
case using suitable tool.
L
M
SAT319K
INSPECTION
Output Shaft, Idler Gear and Reduction Pinion Gear
●
●
Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
Check gears for wear, chips and cracks.
Bearing
NOTE:
●
Make sure bearings roll freely and free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.
Revision: March 2005
AT-341
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
●
Always replace roller bearing inner and outer races as a set.
SPD715
Seal Ring Clearance
●
●
Install new seal rings to output shaft.
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of output
shaft.
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
●
●
●
If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft.
Install new seal rings to bearing retainer.
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bearing retainer.
Standard clearance
Allowable limit
●
: 0.10 - 0.25 mm
(0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
SAT171F
: 0.10 - 0.30 mm (0.0039 - 0.0118 in)
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Press reduction pinion gear bearing inner race on reduction pinion gear using Tool.
Tool number
: KV40100630 (J-26092)
SCIA5391E
2.
Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transaxle
case.
Reduction pinion
gear bearing outer
race bolts
: 109 - 123 N-m (11.1 - 12.5 kg-m,
80 - 90 ft-lb)
SAT319K
Revision: March 2005
AT-342
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
3.
Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV40100630 (J-26092)
B
AT
SCIA5392E
4.
D
Install idler gear bearing outer race on transaxle case using
Tool.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405 and J-34331)
E
F
G
SCIA5393E
5.
Press output shaft bearing on output shaft using Tool.
Tool number
: ST 35321000 (
—
H
)
I
J
SAT863D
6.
K
Press needle bearing on bearing retainer using suitable tool.
L
M
SAT176F
7.
Install snap ring to bearing retainer using suitable tool.
SAT166F
Revision: March 2005
AT-343
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
8.
After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install
new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer.
SAT164F
NOTE:
Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from spreading.
SAT179F
Band Servo Piston Assembly
ECS009BC
COMPONENTS
WCIA0377E
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove band servo piston bolts using suitable tool.
AAT879
Revision: March 2005
AT-344
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
2.
Apply compressed air to oil hole in transaxle case to remove O/
D servo piston retainer and band servo piston assembly.
NOTE:
Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon waste.
A
B
AT
SAT093J
3.
Apply compressed air to oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer to
remove O/D servo piston from retainer.
CAUTION:
Hold O/D band servo while applying compressed air.
D
E
F
G
AAT880
4.
Remove D-ring from O/D servo piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse D-ring.
H
I
J
AAT881
5.
Remove O-rings from O/D servo piston retainer.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-ring.
K
L
M
AAT882
6.
Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer
by pushing it forward.
SAT293D
Revision: March 2005
AT-345
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
7.
Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo
piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring using suitable tool.
SAT294D
8.
Remove O/D servo return spring, band servo thrust washer and
band servo piston stem from band servo piston.
AAT883
9.
Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.
SAT296DA
10. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
SAT297D
INSPECTION
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem
●
Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
Revision: March 2005
AT-346
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
Return Springs
●
●
A
Check for deformation or damage.
Measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard
: Refer to AT-382, "Band Servo"
.
B
AT
AAT884
D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install new D-rings to servo piston retainer.
NOTE:
● Apply ATF to new D-rings.
● Pay attention to the position of each D-ring.
E
F
G
SAT297D
2.
H
Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, O/D
servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston.
I
J
K
AAT883
3.
L
Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo
piston spring retainer down, install E-ring using suitable tool.
M
SAT301D
Revision: March 2005
AT-347
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
4.
Install O-rings to servo piston retainer.
NOTE:
● Apply ATF to the new O-rings.
● Pay attention to the position of the new O-rings.
SAT296DA
5.
Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by
pushing it inward.
SAT303D
6.
Install new D-ring to O/D servo piston.
NOTE:
● Apply ATF to the new D-ring.
● Pay attention to the position of the new D-ring.
AAT881
7.
Install new O-rings to O/D servo piston retainer.
NOTE:
● Apply ATF to the new O-rings.
● Pay attention to the position of the new O-rings.
AAT882
8.
Install O/D servo piston to O/D servo piston retainer.
AAT886
Revision: March 2005
AT-348
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
9.
Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring
to transaxle case.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to O-ring of the band servo and transaxle case
A
B
AT
SAT865H
10. Install O/D servo piston assembly to transaxle case.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to O-ring of the O/D servo and transaxle case
D
E
F
G
AAT885
11. Install O/D servo piston retainer to transaxle case using suitable
tool.
Refer to AT-303, "COMPONENTS" .
H
I
J
AAT879
Final Drive
K
ECS009BD
COMPONENTS
L
M
WCIA0327E
Revision: March 2005
AT-349
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove final gear using suitable tool.
SMT505B
2.
Press out differential side bearings using Tool.
Tool number
Tool number
: ST33051001 (J-22888-D)
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mix up the right and left bearings.
SCIA5394E
3.
Remove differential side bearing outer race and side bearing
adjusting shim from transaxle case using Tool.
Tool number
:KV381054S0 (J-34286)
SCIA5378E
4.
Remove speedometer drive gear.
SAT313D
Revision: March 2005
AT-350
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
5.
Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV32101000 (J-25689-A)
B
AT
SCIA5395E
6.
7.
D
Draw out pinion mate shaft lock pin.
Remove pinion mate gears and side gears.
E
F
G
SAT316D
INSPECTION
Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case
●
●
H
Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears and pinion mate gears.
Check washers for wear.
I
J
K
SAT544F
Bearings
●
●
L
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner
race as a set.
M
SPD715
Revision: March 2005
AT-351
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
ASSEMBLY
1.
Attach side gear thrust washers to side gears, then install pinion
mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears in place.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to any parts during assembly.
SMT839
2.
Insert pinion mate shaft.
CAUTION:
When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate
thrust washers.
SMT087A
3.
Measure clearance between side gear and differential case with
washers following the procedure below using Tool:
Tool number
a.
(J-39713)
Set Tool and dial indicator on side gear.
SCIA5396E
b.
Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflection. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears.
Clearance between side
gear and differential
case with washer
c.
: 0.1 - 0.2 mm
(0.004 - 0.008 in)
If not within specification, adjust clearance by changing thickness of differential side gear thrust washers.
Differential side gear
thrust washers
Revision: March 2005
: Refer to AT-380, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR
THRUST WASHERS" .
AT-352
SMT611A
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE4F04B]
4.
Install lock pin. using Tool
Tool number
A
:KV32101000 (J-25689-A)
NOTE:
Make sure the pin is flush with case.
B
AT
SCIA5395E
D
5.
Install speedometer drive gear on differential case.
NOTE:
Align the projection of speedometer drive gear with the groove
of differential case.
E
F
G
SAT313D
6.
Press on differential side bearings using Tool.
Tool number
H
:ST33230000 (J-25805-01)
I
J
SCIA5397E
7.
Install final gear and tighten final gear bolts in a crisscross pattern to the specified torque using suitable tool. Refer to AT-349,
"COMPONENTS" .
K
L
M
SAT546F
Revision: March 2005
AT-353
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
1.
PFP:00000
ECS009BE
Install new differential side oil seals on transaxle case and converter housing using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
SCIA5399E
SAT182F
2.
Install parking actuator support to transaxle case. Tighten parking actuator support bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT275, "Components" .
NOTE:
Pay attention to the direction of the parking actuator support.
SAT183F
3.
4.
Install parking pawl on transaxle case and fix it with parking
shaft.
Install return spring.
WCIA0330E
Revision: March 2005
AT-354
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
Adjustment (1)
ECS009BF
A
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
1.
2.
Install differential side bearing outer race without adjusting shim
on transaxle case.
Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing
using suitable tool.
B
AT
D
SAT870D
3.
4.
E
Place final drive assembly on transaxle case.
Install transaxle case on converter housing. Tighten transaxle
case bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" .
F
G
SAT008F
5.
6.
Attach dial indicator on differential case at converter housing
side.
Insert Tool into differential side gear from transaxle case side.
Tool number
7.
8.
I
(J-39713)
J
Move Tool up and down and measure dial indicator deflection.
Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting
shim(s).
Suitable shim thickness = Dial indicator deflection + Specified bearing preload
Differential side bearing
preload adjusting shim
Bearing preload
K
L
: Refer to AT-380, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
: 0.05 - 0.09 mm
(0.0020 - 0.0035 in)
M
SCIA5400E
Revision: March 2005
H
AT-355
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
9. Remove converter housing from transaxle case.
10. Remove final drive assembly from transaxle case.
11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transaxle case
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and shim(s)
selected from SDS table on transaxle case.
13. Reinstall converter housing on transaxle case and tighten transaxle case bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275,
"OVERHAUL" .
SCIA5378E
14. Measure turning torque of final drive assembly using Tool.
Tool number
(J-39713)
NOTE:
Turn the final drive assembly in both directions several times
to seat the bearing rollers correctly
●
Turning torque of final
drive assembly (New
bearing)
●
●
: 0.78 - 1.54 N-m (8.0 - 15.7 kgcm, 6.9 - 13.6 in-lb)
When old bearing is being used again, turning torque will be
slightly less than above.
Make sure torque is close to the specified range.
SCIA5401E
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD
1.
2.
a.
Remove transaxle case and final drive assembly from converter
housing.
Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim using the following procedures.
Place reduction pinion gear on transaxle case as shown.
SAT332DA
b.
c.
Place idler gear bearing on transaxle case.
Measure dimensions “B” “C” and “D” and calculate dimension
“A”.
A = D − (B + C)
“A”
: Distance between the surface of idler
gear bearing inner race and the
adjusting shim mating surface of
reduction pinion gear.
SAT333DA
Revision: March 2005
AT-356
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
●
Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion
gear and the surface of transaxle case using straightedge and
depth gauge.
NOTE:
Measure dimension “B” in at least two places.
A
B
AT
SAT334DA
D
●
●
Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear
bearing inner race and the surface of transaxle case using
straightedge and depth gauge.
NOTE:
Measure dimension “C” in at least two places.
E
F
G
SAT335D
●
●
●
Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion
gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pinion gear using straightedge and depth gauge.
NOTE:
Measure dimension “D” in at least two places.
Calculate dimension “A”.
H
I
A = D − (B + C)
J
SAT336DA
d.
e.
Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and the
idler gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear using
depth gauge.
NOTE:
Measure dimension “E” in at least two places.
Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim.
L
M
Proper shim thickness = A − E − 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)*
(*: Bearing preload)
Reduction pinion gear
bearing adjusting shim
Revision: March 2005
SAT337D
: Refer to AT-381,
"REDUCTION PINION
GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
AT-357
K
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
3.
4.
5.
Install reduction gear and reduction gear bearing adjusting shim
selected in step 2-e on transaxle case.
Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.
Install idler gear on reduction gear using Tool.
Tool number
: ST35271000 (J-26091)
NOTE:
Press idler gear until idler gear fully contacts adjusting shim.
SCIA5402E
6.
Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque using suitable
tool. Refer to AT-275, "Components" .
NOTE:
Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening the lock nut.
SAT189F
7.
Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear using Tool.
Tool number
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
NOTE:
When measuring turning torque, turn the reduction pinion gear
in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque of
reduction pinion gear
: 0.05 - 0.39 N-m (0.5 - 4.0 kg-cm,
0.43 - 3.47 in-lb)
NOTE:
If turning torque is out of specification, select the correct reduction pinion gear adjusting shim.
8.
WCIA0378E
After properly adjusting turning torque, clinch idler gear lock nut
as shown.
SAT699D
Revision: March 2005
AT-358
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY
●
●
A
Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the output shaft bearing.
Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that clearance is
within specifications.
B
AT
SAT341D
1.
Install bearing retainer for output shaft using suitable tool.
D
E
F
G
SAT191F
2.
H
Install output shaft thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer.
I
J
K
SAT438D
3.
L
Install output shaft on transaxle case.
M
SAT035F
Revision: March 2005
AT-359
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
4.
Measure dimensions “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” at side cover and then calculate dimension “A” using straightedge and depth gauge.
● Measure dimension “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” in at least two places.
“A”
A=
: Distance between transaxle case fitting surface
and adjusting shim mating surface.
1
−
2
: Height of gauge
2
5.
Measure dimensions “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” and then calculate dimension “B” using straightedge and depth gauge.
● Measure “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” in at least two places.
“B”
B=
: Distance between the
end of output shaft bearing outer race and the
side cover fitting surface
of transaxle case.
2
−
3
2
6.
SAT375F
: Height of gauge
Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that output shaft
end play (clearance between side cover and output shaft bearing) is within specifications.
Output shaft end play
(A − B)
Output shaft end play
adjusting shims
7.
SAT374F
: 0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
: Refer to AT-382, "OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING
SHIMS" .
Install adjusting shim on output shaft bearing.
SAT440D
Assembly (2)
1.
ECS009BG
Apply anaerobic liquid gasket to transaxle case as shown. Refer
to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
SAT441D
Revision: March 2005
AT-360
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
2.
Set side cover on transaxle case using suitable tool.
A
B
AT
SAT442D
D
3.
Tighten side cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-275,
"Components" .
CAUTION:
● Do not mix bolts A and B.
● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts.
E
F
G
AAT850
4.
5.
Remove paper rolled around bearing retainer.
Install thrust washer on bearing retainer.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
H
I
J
SAT033F
6.
Install forward clutch assembly.
NOTE:
● Align teeth of low and reverse brake drive plates before
installing.
● Make sure that the bearing retainer seal rings have not
spread.
● If forward clutch assembly is correctly seated, points 1 and 2
are at the same level.
L
M
SAT194F
Revision: March 2005
AT-361
K
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
7.
Install thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust needle bearing.
● Pay attention to the direction of the thrust needle bearing as
shown.
SAT195F
8.
Install overrun clutch hub.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust needle bearing.
● Align the teeth of overrun clutch drive plates before installing.
SAT030F
9.
Hold forward clutch hub and turn rear internal gear.
● Check overrun clutch hub for correct directions of lock and
unlock.
● If not shown as illustrated, check installed direction of forward
one-way clutch.
SAT198F
10. Install forward clutch hub and rear internal gear assembly.
NOTE:
● Align teeth of forward clutch drive plates before installing.
● Check the three hooks of the thrust washer are correctly
aligned before installing.
SAT199F
Revision: March 2005
AT-362
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
11. Install rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear according to the following procedures.
a. Install needle bearings on rear planetary carrier.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearings.
● Pay attention to direction of needle bearings.
A
B
AT
SAT028F
b.
Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier.
NOTE:
Pay attention to direction of rear sun gear.
D
E
F
G
SAT027F
c.
Install rear planetary carrier on transaxle case.
H
I
J
SAT026F
12. Install thrust needle bearing on front planetary carrier, then
install them together on transaxle case.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing.
● Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing.
L
M
SAT380F
Revision: March 2005
AT-363
K
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
13. Install low and reverse brake piston according to the following
procedures.
a. Set and align return springs to transaxle case gutters as shown
in illustration.
SAT322F
b.
Set and align piston with retainer using suitable tool.
SAT323F
c.
Install piston and retainer assembly on the transaxle case.
NOTE:
Align bracket to specified gutter in illustration as shown.
SAT324F
d.
Check that each protrusion of piston is correctly set to corresponding return spring as follows.
NOTE:
● Push piston and retainer assembly evenly and confirm they
move smoothly.
● If they can not move smoothly, remove piston and retainer
assembly and align return spring correctly as instructed in
step “a”.
SAT325F
Revision: March 2005
AT-364
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
e.
Push down piston and retainer assembly and install snap ring
using Tool.
Tool number
A
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
B
AT
SCIA5404E
D
14. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning
carrier in the direction of the arrow shown.
E
F
G
SAT206F
H
15. Install snap ring using screwdriver.
NOTE:
Forward clutch and bearing must be correctly installed for snap
ring to fit into groove of transaxle case.
I
J
SAT046D
16. Install needle bearing on transaxle case.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing.
K
L
M
SAT020F
17. Install bearing race, needle bearing and high clutch hub on front
sun gear.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing.
SAT019F
Revision: March 2005
AT-365
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
18. Install needle bearing and high clutch drum on high clutch hub.
SAT018F
19. Install needle bearing on high clutch drum.
NOTE:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
● Pay attention to direction of needle bearing.
SAT017F
20. Remove paper rolled around input shaft.
21. Install input shaft assembly in reverse clutch.
NOTE:
Align teeth of reverse clutch drive plates before installing.
SAT016F
22. Install reverse clutch assembly on transaxle case.
NOTE:
Align teeth of high clutch drive plates before installing.
SAT015F
Revision: March 2005
AT-366
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
Adjustment (2)
ECS009BH
A
When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and reverse clutch end play.
Total end play
Reverse clutch end
play
Transaxle case
●
●
Overrun clutch hub
●
●
Rear internal gear
●
●
Rear planetary carrier
●
●
Rear sun gear
●
●
Front planetary carrier
●
●
Front sun gear
●
●
High clutch hub
●
●
High clutch drum
●
●
Oil pump cover
●
●
Reverse clutch drum
—
●
Part name
B
AT
D
E
F
TOTAL END PLAY
1.
G
Adjust total end play “T1 ”.
H
I
J
SAT213F
a.
With original bearing race installed, place Tool onto oil pump.
The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on
top of bearing race. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set
screw.
Tool number
:
—
K
L
(J-34291-A)
M
WCIA0379E
b.
Install gauging plunger into cylinder.
Tool number
:
—
(J-34290)
WCIA0380E
Revision: March 2005
AT-367
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
c.
d.
With needle bearing installed on high clutch drum, place Tool
legs on machined surface of transaxle case (with gasket). Then
allow plunger to rest on needle bearing.
Measure gap between cylinder and plunger. This measurement
should give exact total end play.
Total end play “T1 ”
●
If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of bearing race as necessary.
Available bearing race
for adjusting total end
play
2.
: 0.25 - 0.55 mm
(0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
: Refer to AT-383, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" .
SAT216F
Adjust reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ”.
SAT218F
a.
Place Tool on machined surface of transaxle case (with gasket).
Then allow gauging cylinder to rest on reverse clutch drum. Lock
cylinder in place with set screw.
Tool number
:
—
(J-34291-A)
WCIA0379E
b.
Install gauging plunger into cylinder, using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(J-34290)
WCIA0380E
Revision: March 2005
AT-368
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
c.
d.
With original thrust washer installed on oil pump, place Tool legs
onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Then allow
plunger to rest on thrust washer.
Measure gap between cylinder and plunger with feeler gauge.
This measurement should give exact reverse clutch drum end
play.
Reverse clutch drum
end play “T2 ”
●
AT
SAT221F
D
: Refer to AT-383,
"THRUST WASHERS FOR
ADJUSTING REVERSE
CLUTCH DRUM END
PLAY" .
Assembly (3)
1.
2.
B
: 0.55 - 0.90 mm
(0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of thrust washer as necessary.
Available thrust washer
for adjusting reverse
clutch drum end play
A
E
ECS009BI
Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transaxle case.
Place brake band on outside of reverse clutch drum. Tighten
anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly fitted on
reverse clutch drum.
F
G
H
I
SAT196F
3.
4.
J
Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step on
oil pump cover.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step on
reverse clutch drum.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
K
L
SAT013F
5.
6.
Install oil pump assembly, baffle plate and gasket on transaxle
case.
Tighten oil pump bolts to the specified torque.
SAT012F
Revision: March 2005
AT-369
2005 Altima
M
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
7.
Install new O-ring to input shaft.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to new O-ring.
SAT225F
8.
a.
Adjust brake band.
Tighten anchor end pin to the specified torque using suitable
tool.
Anchor end pin
b.
c.
: Refer to AT-380, "BRAKE BAND" .
Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns.
While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut.
Lock nut
: Refer to AT-380, "BRAKE BAND" .
SAT014FA
9.
Apply compressed air to oil holes of transaxle case and check
operation of brake band.
SAT397D
10. Install final drive assembly on transaxle case.
SAT228F
Revision: March 2005
AT-370
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
11. Install differential lubricant tube on converter housing. Tighten
differential lubricant tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
AT-275, "Components" .
A
B
AT
SAT063K
D
12. Install new O-ring on differential oil port of transaxle case.
E
F
G
SAT235F
H
13. Install converter housing on transaxle case.
NOTE:
Apply locking sealant to mating surface of converter housing.
Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
I
J
K
SAT371H
NOTE:
Tighten converter housing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
AT-275, "Components" .
L
M
SAT008F
Revision: March 2005
AT-371
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
14. Install accumulator piston.
a. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage.
SAT406DA
b.
Install new O-rings on accumulator piston.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to new O-rings.
Accumulator piston O-rings
: Refer to AT-377, "O-RING" .
SAT236FA
c.
Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transaxle case.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to inner surface of transaxle case.
Return springs
: Refer to AT-377,
"RETURN SPRING" .
SAT237FA
15. Install new lip seals for band servo oil holes on transaxle case.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to new lip seals.
SAT006F
16. Install L & R oil tube and oil sleeve. Tighten L & R oil tube bolts
to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" .
SAT862HA
Revision: March 2005
AT-372
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
17. Install control valve assembly.
a. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to manual valve.
A
B
AT
SAT005F
b.
c.
d.
e.
Set manual shaft in Neutral position.
Install control valve assembly on transaxle case while aligning
manual valve with manual plate.
Pass solenoid harness through transaxle case and install terminal body on transaxle case by pushing it.
Install stopper ring to terminal body.
D
E
F
G
SAT094J
f.
H
Tighten bolts I , X and ● .
Bolt length, number and location:
Bolt symbol
Bolt length “
X
●
40 (1.57)
33 (1.30)
43.5
(1.713)
5
6
2
I
”
mm (in)
Number of bolts
I
J
K
L
M
SAT004F
Revision: March 2005
AT-373
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
18.
a.
b.
c.
Install oil pan.
Attach a magnet to oil pan.
Install new oil pan gasket on transaxle case.
Install oil pan on transaxle case.
NOTE:
● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
● Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket.
d. Tighten oil pan bolts and drain plug to the specified torque.
Refer to AT-275, "Components" .
19. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
a. Set manual shaft in P position.
b. Temporarily install park/neutral position (PNP) switch on manual
shaft.
c. Move selector lever to N position.
SAT003F
SCIA3154E
d.
i.
ii.
e.
f.
Use a 4 mm (0.16 in) pin for this adjustment.
Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
Rotate park/neutral position (PNP) switch until the pin can also
be inserted straight into hole in park/neutral position (PNP)
switch.
Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch fixing bolts. Refer to
AT-275, "Components" .
Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting park/neutral
position (PNP) switch.
SCIA3622E
20. Install A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube to transaxle
case. Tighten A/T fluid charging pipe and fluid cooler tube bolts
to the specified torque. Refer to AT-275, "Components" .
SAT768J
21. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
NOTE:
● Approximately 1 liter (1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is
required for a new torque converter.
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of
fluid as was drained.
SAT428DA
Revision: March 2005
AT-374
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE4F04B]
b.
Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump.
A
B
AT
SAT429D
c.
D
Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper
position.
Distance A
E
: 14 mm (0.55 in) or more
F
G
SAT430D
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-375
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
ECS009BJ
Engine
QR25DE
Automatic transaxle model
RE4F04B
Automatic transaxle
assembly
Transaxle gear ratio
Model code number
89X05
1st
2.785
2nd
1.545
3rd
1.000
4th
0.694
Reverse
2.272
Final drive
4.425
Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid*
Recommended fluid
Fluid capacity
9.2 (9.3/4, 8.1/8)
(US qt, Imp qt)
*: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Shift Schedule
ECS009BK
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION
Throttle position
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Shift pattern
D1 → D2
D2 → D 3
D3 → D4
D4 → D3
D3 → D2
D2 → D1
Comfort
52 - 60
(32 - 37)
97 - 105
(60 - 65)
153 - 161
(95 - 100)
149 - 157
(93 - 98)
87 - 95
(54 - 59)
39 - 47
(24 - 29)
Auto power
52 - 60
(35 - 40)
97 - 105
(60 - 65)
153 - 161
(95 - 98)
149 - 157
(93 - 98)
87 - 95
(54 - 59)
39 - 47
(24 - 29)
Comfort
28 - 36
(17 - 22)
57 - 65
(35 - 40)
121 - 129
(75 - 80)
61 - 69
(38 - 43)
32 - 40
(20 - 25)
15 - 23
(9 - 14)
Auto power
38 - 46
(24 - 29)
72 - 80
(45 - 50)
121 - 129
(75 - 80)
61 - 69
(38 - 43)
43 - 51
(27 - 32)
15 - 23
(9 - 14)
Full throttle
Half throttle
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP
Unit: km/h (MPH)
Selector lever position
Shift pattern
D position
3 position
Comfort
Auto power
Comfort
Auto power
Lock-up ″ON″
86 - 94 (53 - 58)
86 - 94 (53 - 58)
86 - 94 (53 - 58)
86 - 94 (53 - 58)
Lock-up ″OFF″
65 - 73 (41 - 46)
65 - 73 (41 - 46)
83 - 91 (52 - 57)
83 - 91 (52 - 57)
NOTE:
● Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D4 position.
●
Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
●
Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
Stall Revolution
Revision: March 2005
ECS009BL
Engine
Stall revolution
rpm
QR25DE
2,300 - 2,750
AT-376
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
Line Pressure
ECS009BM
A
Line pressure
Engine speed
rpm
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
D, 2 and 1 positions
R position
QR25DE
QR25DE
Idle
500 (5.1, 73)
778 (7.9, 113)
Stall
1,223 (12.6, 179)
1,918 (19.6, 278)
B
AT
Control Valves
ECS009BN
CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Parts
Upper body
Lower body
Part No.*
Free length
Outer diameter
23
Pilot valve spring
31742-80L13
38.98 (1.535)
8.9 (0.350)
7
1-2 accumulator valve spring
31742-80L15
20.5 (0.807)
6.95 (0.274)
28
1-2 accumulator piston spring
31742-80L14
55.26 (2.176)
19.6 (0.772)
33
1st reducing valve spring
31742-80X05
27.0 (1.063)
7.0 (0.276)
35
3-2 timing valve spring
31736-01X00
23.0 (0.906)
6.65 (0.262)
18
Overrun clutch reducing valve spring
31742-80L09
37.5 (1.476)
6.9 (0.272)
16
Torque converter relief valve spring
31742-80L10
31.0 (1.220)
9.0 (0.354)
11
Torque converter clutch control valve
31742-80L16
56.98 (2.243)
6.5 (0.256)
3
Cooler check valve spring
31742-85X01
29.4 (1.157)
6.0 (0.236)
15
Pressure regulator valve spring
31742-80L01
45.0 (1.772)
15.0 (0.591)
20
Overrun clutch control valve spring
31762-80L00
21.7 (0.854)
7.0 (0.276)
24
Accumulator control valve spring
31742-80L02
22.0 (0.866)
6.5 (0.256)
29
Shift valve A spring
31762-80L00
21.7 (0.854)
7.0 (0.276)
32
Shuttle valve spring
31762-41X04
51.0 (2.008)
5.65 (0.222)
12
Shift valve B spring
31762-80L00
21.7 (0.854)
7.0 (0.276)
7
Pressure modifier valve spring
31742-80L03
30.5 (1.201)
9.8 (0.386)
3
Pressure modifier piston spring
31742-80L04
32.0 (1.260)
6.9 (0.272)
—
Oil cooler relief valve spring
31742-80L12
17.02 (0.670)
8.0 (0.315)
Accumulator
ECS009BO
O-RING
Unit: mm (in)
Part No.*
Inner diameter
(Small)
Part No.*
Inner diameter
(Large)
Servo release accumulator
31526-41X03
26.9 (1.059)
31526-41X02
44.2 (1.740)
N-D accumulator
31526-31X08
34.6 (1.362)
31672-21X00
39.4 (1.551)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
RETURN SPRING
Unit: mm (in)
Accumulator
Part number*
Free length
Outer diameter
Servo release accumulator
31605-85X00
62.8 (2.473)
21 (0.827)
N-D accumulator
31605-31X02
43.5 (1.713)
27.0 (1.063)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
AT-377
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
**: This part is for model code number ″88X02″.
Accumulator
D
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
Clutch and Brakes
ECS009BP
REVERSE CLUTCH
Model code number
89X05
Number of drive plates
2
Number of driven plates
2
Drive plate thickness
mm (in)
Driven plate thickness mm (in)
Clearance
mm (in)
Standard
1.6 (0.063)
Allowable limit
1.4 (0.055)
Standard
1.8 (0.070)
Standard
0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)
Allowable limit
1.2 (0.047)
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
6.6 (0.260)
6.8 (0.268)
7.0 (0.276)
7.2 (0.283)
7.4 (0.291)
7.6 (0.299)
7.8 (0.307)
Thickness of retaining plates
31537-89X00
31537-89X01
31537-89X02
31537-89X03
31537-89X04
31537-89X05
31537-89X06
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
HIGH CLUTCH
Model code number
89X05
Number of drive plates
3
Number of driven plates
9*1 + 1*2
Drive plate thickness
mm (in)
Driven plate thickness mm (in)
Standard
1.6 (0.063)
Allowable limit
1.4 (0.055)
Standard
*1
*2
1.4 (0.055)
2.0 (0.079)
Standard
Clearance
mm (in)
1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)
Allowable limit
2.8 (0.110)
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
3.0 (0.118)
3.2 (0.126)
3.4 (0.134)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
Thickness of retaining plates
31537-81X10
31537-81X11
31537-81X12
31537-81X13
31537-81X14
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
FORWARD CLUTCH
Model code number
89X05
Number of drive plates
5
Number of driven plates
Drive plate thickness
mm (in)
Driven plate thickness mm (in)
Clearance
mm (in)
Revision: March 2005
5
Standard
1.6 (0.063)
Allowable limit
1.4 (0.055)
Standard
1.8 (0.071)
Standard
0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335)
Allowable limit
1.85 (0.0728)
AT-378
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
3.2 (0.126)
3.4 (0.134)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
Thickness of retaining plates
31537-80L18
31537-80L17
31537-80L12
31537-80L13
31537-80L14
31537-80L15
31537-80L16
A
B
AT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
OVERRUN CLUTCH
Model code number
D
89X05
Number of drive plates
3
Number of driven plates
5
Drive plate thickness mm (in)
Driven plate thickness mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)
E
Standard
1.6 (0.063)
Allowable limit
1.4 (0.055)
Standard
1.8 (0.071)
Standard
0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
Allowable limit
F
1.7 (0.067)
Thickness of retaining plates
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
3.0 (0.118)
3.2 (0.126)
3.4 (0.134)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
31537-80L07
31537-80L08
31537-80L09
31537-80L10
31537-80L11
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
G
H
I
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
Model code number
89X05
Number of drive plates
6
Number of driven plates
6
Drive plate thickness
mm (in)
Driven plate thickness mm (in)
Clearance
mm (in)
J
K
Standard
1.8 (0.071)
Allowable limit
1.6 (0.063)
Standard
1.8 (0.071)
Standard
1.7 - 2.1 (0.067 - 0.083)
Allowable limit
L
3.3 (0.130)
Thickness
mm (in)
2.0 (0.079)
2.2 (0.087)
2.4 (0.094)
2.6 (0.102)
2.8 (0.110)
3.0 (0.118)
3.2 (0.126)
3.4 (0.134)
Thickness of retaining plates
Part number*
31667-80L00
31667-80L01
31667-80L02
31667-80L03
31667-80L04
31667-80L05
31667-80L06
31667-80L07
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
CLUTCH AND BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS
Unit: mm (in)
Parts
Part number*
Free length
Outer diameter
Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
(22 pcs)
31505-80X02
21.4 (0.843)
10.3 (0.406)
High clutch (18 pcs)
31505-89X04
20.0 (0.787)
8.3 (0.327)
Low & reverse brake (24 pcs)
31505-89X02
21.6 (0.850)
6.6 (0.260)
Revision: March 2005
AT-379
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
BRAKE BAND
Anchor end pin tightening torque
N-m (kg-m, in-lb)
4.0 - 5.8 (0.4 - 0.6, 36 - 52)
Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin
Lock nut tightening torque
2.5
N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
31 - 36 (3.2 - 3.7, 23 - 27)
Final Drive
ECS009BQ
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE
Clearance between side gear and differential case with
washer mm (in)
0.1 - 0.2 (0.004 - 0.008)
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
0.75 (0.0295)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.85 (0.0335)
0.90 (0.0354)
0.95 (0.0374)
38424-81X00
38424-81X01
38424-81X02
38424-81X03
38424-81X04
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
31438-80X00
31438-80X01
31438-80X02
31438-80X03
31438-80X04
31438-80X05
31438-80X06
31438-80X07
31438-80X08
31438-80X09
31438-80X10
31438-80X11
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
BEARING PRELOAD
Differential side bearing preload
mm (in)
0.05 - 0.09 (0.0020 - 0.0035)
TURNING TORQUE
Turning torque of final drive assembly
N-m (kg-cm, in-lb)
0.78 - 1.54 (8.0 - 15.7, 6.9 - 13.6)
Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump
ECS009BR
PLANETARY CARRIER
Clearance between planetary carrier
and pinion washer mm (in)
Standard
0.20 - 0.70 (0.0079 - 0.0276)
Allowable limit
0.80 (0.0315)
OIL PUMP
Oil pump side clearance
Revision: March 2005
mm (in)
0.030 - 0.050 (0.0012 - 0.0020)
AT-380
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
Inner gear
Thickness
mm (in)
A
Part number*
11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724)
11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720)
11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717)
Thickness of inner gears and outer gears
31346-80L00
31346-80L01
31346-80L02
B
Outer gear
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724)
11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720)
11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717)
Clearance between oil pump
housing and outer gear mm
(in)
Standard
Oil pump cover seal ring
clearance mm (in)
Standard
AT
31347-80L00
31347-80L01
31347-80L02
D
0.111 - 0.181 (0.0044 - 0.0071)
Allowable limit
0.181 (0.0071)
E
0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Allowable limit
0.25 (0.0098)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
F
Input Shaft
ECS009BS
SEAL RING CLEARANCE
Input shaft seal ring clearance
(in)
Standard
mm
G
0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091)
Allowable limit
0.23 (0.0091)
SEAL RING
H
Outer diameter mm (in)
Inner diameter mm (in)
Width mm (in)
Part number*
26 (1.024)
22.4 (0.882)
1.971 (0.078)
31525-80X02
I
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Reduction Pinion Gear
ECS009BT
TURNING TORQUE
J
Turning torque of reduction pinion gear
N-m (kg-cm, in-lb)
0.05 - 0.39 (0.5 - 4.0, 0.43 - 3.47)
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS
NO.
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number
NO.
K
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
1
5.00 (0.1969)
31439-81X00
18
5.34 (0.2102)
31439-81X17
2
5.02 (0.1976)
31439-81X01
19
5.36 (0.2110)
31439-81X18
3
5.04 (0.1984)
31439-81X02
20
5.38 (0.2118)
31439-81X19
4
5.06 (0.1992)
31439-81X03
21
5.40 (0.2126)
31439-81X20
5
5.08 (0.2000)
31439-81X04
22
5.42 (0.2134)
31439-81X21
6
5.10 (0.2008)
31439-81X05
23
5.44 (0.2142)
31439-81X22
7
5.12 (0.2016)
31439-81X06
24
5.46 (0.2150)
31439-81X23
8
5.14 (0.2024)
31439-81X07
25
5.48 (0.2157)
31439-81X24
9
5.16 (0.2031)
31439-81X08
26
5.50 (0.2165)
31439-81X46
10
5.18 (0.2039)
31439-81X09
27
5.52 (0.2173)
31439-81X47
11
5.20 (0.2047)
31439-81X10
28
5.54 (0.2181)
31439-81X48
12
5.22 (0.2055)
31439-81X11
29
5.56 (0.2189)
31439-81X49
13
5.24 (0.2063)
31439-81X12
30
5.58 (0.2197)
31439-81X60
14
5.26 (0.2071)
31439-81X13
31
5.60 (0.2205)
31439-81X61
15
5.28 (0.2079)
31439-81X14
32
5.62 (0.2213)
31439-81X62
16
5.30 (0.2087)
31439-81X15
33
5.64 (0.2220)
31439-81X63
17
5.32 (0.2094)
31439-81X16
34
5.66 (0.2228)
31439-81X64
Revision: March 2005
AT-381
2005 Altima
L
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
NO.
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number
NO.
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
35
5.68 (0.2236)
31439-81X65
50
4.70 (0.1850)
31439-85X06
36
5.70 (0.2244)
31439-81X66
51
4.72 (0.1858)
31439-83X11
37
5.72 (0.2252)
31439-81X67
52
4.74 (0.1866)
31439-83X12
38
5.74 (0.2260)
31439-81X68
53
4.76 (0.1874)
31439-83X13
39
5.76 (0.2268)
31439-81X69
54
4.78 (0.1882)
31439-83X14
40
5.78 (0.2276)
31439-81X70
55
4.80 (0.1890)
31439-83X15
41
5.80 (0.2283)
31439-81X71
56
4.82 (0.1898)
31439-83X16
42
5.82 (0.2291)
31439-81X72
57
4.84 (0.1906)
31439-83X17
43
5.84 (0.2299)
31439-81X73
58
4.86 (0.1913)
31439-83X18
44
5.86 (0.2307)
31439-81X74
59
4.88 (0.1921)
31439-83X19
45
4.60 (0.1811)
31439-85X01
60
4.90 (0.1929)
31439-83X20
46
4.62 (0.1819)
31439-85X02
61
4.92 (0.1937)
31439-83X21
47
4.64 (0.1827)
31439-85X03
62
4.94 (0.1945)
31439-83X22
48
4.66 (0.1835)
31439-85X04
63
4.96 (0.1953)
31439-83X23
49
4.68 (0.1843)
31439-85X05
64
4.98 (0.1961)
31439-83X24
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Band Servo
ECS009BU
RETURN SPRING
Unit: mm (in)
Return spring
Part number*
Free length
Outer diameter
2nd servo return spring
31605-80L05
32.5 (1.280)
25.9 (1.020)
OD servo return spring
31605-80L06
62.6 (2.465)
21.7 (0.854)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Output Shaft
ECS009BV
SEAL RING CLEARANCE
Output shaft seal ring clearance
(in)
Standard
mm
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Allowable limit
0.25 (0.0098)
SEAL RING
Outer diameter mm (in)
Inner diameter mm (in)
Width mm (in)
Part number*
33.71 (1.327)
30.25 (1.191)
1.95 (0.077)
31525-80X09
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
END PLAY
Output shaft end play
mm (in)
0 - 0.15 (0 - 0.0059)
OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.96 (0.0378)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.08 (0.0425)
1.12 (0.0441)
1.16 (0.0457)
1.20 (0.0472)
31438-80X60
31438-80X61
31438-80X62
31438-80X63
31438-80X64
31438-80X65
31438-80X66
31438-80X67
31438-80X68
31438-80X69
31438-80X70
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
AT-382
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
Bearing Retainer
ECS009BW
A
SEAL RING CLEARANCE
Standard
Bearing retainer seal ring
clearance mm (in)
0.10 - 0.30 (0.0039 - 0.0118)
Allowable limit
0.30 (0.0118)
B
Total End Play
Total end play
ECS009BX
mm (in)
0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)
AT
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
2.0 (0.079)
0.9 (0.035)
1.1 (0.043)
1.3 (0.051)
1.5 (0.059)
1.7 (0.067)
1.9 (0.075)
D
31435-80X00
31435-80X01
31435-80X02
31435-80X03
31435-80X04
31435-80X05
31435-80X06
31435-80X09
31435-80X10
31435-80X11
31435-80X12
31435-80X13
31435-80X14
E
F
G
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
H
Reverse Clutch End Play
Reverse clutch end play
ECS009BY
mm (in)
0.61 - 1.00 (0.0240 - 0.0394)
I
THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM END PLAY
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
0.80 (0.0315)
0.95 (0.0374)
1.10 (0.0433)
1.25 (0.0492)
1.40 (0.0551)
1.55 (0.0610)
1.70 (0.0669)
1.85 (0.0728)
J
31508-80X13
31508-80X14
31508-80X15
31508-80X16
31508-80X17
31508-80X18
31508-80X19
31508-80X20
K
L
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Removal and Installation
ECS009BZ
Unit: mm (in)
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter
14 (0.55)
Shift Solenoid Valves
ECS009C0
Gear position
1
2
3
4
Shift solenoid valve A
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
Solenoid Valves
Solenoid valves
ECS009C1
Resistance (Approx.)
Ω
Terminal No.
Shift solenoid valve A
20 - 30
2
Shift solenoid valve B
5 - 20
1
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
20 - 30
3
Revision: March 2005
AT-383
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4F04B]
Line pressure solenoid valve
2.5 - 5
4
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
5 - 20
5
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
ECS009C2
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Specification (Approximately)
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
1.5V
↓
0.5V
2.5 kΩ
↓
0.3 kΩ
Revolution Sensor
ECS009C3
Condition
Judgement standard
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1
450 Hz (Approx.)
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
When vehicle parks.
Under 1.3V or over 4.5V
Dropping Resistor
ECS009C4
10 - 15 Ω
Resistance
Turbine Revolution Sensor (Power Train Revolution Sensor)
Condition
ECS009C5
Judgement standard
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function.*1
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
When vehicle parks.
Revision: March 2005
240 Hz (Approx.)
Under 1.3V or over 4.5V
AT-384
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[RE5F22A]
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index
PFP:00024
A
ECS009C6
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-464 .
B
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
OBD-II
AT
Except OBD-II
Reference page
GST*1
CONSULT-II
only “TRANSMISSION”
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
P0731
AT-496
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
P0732
AT-499
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
P0733
AT-505
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
P0734
AT-511
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
P0735
P0735
AT-516
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
P0744
AT-522
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
P0710
AT-476
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
U1000
AT-464
ELEC TH CONTROL
—
P1726
AT-590
CONSULT-II
ENG SPD INP PERFOR
D
—
P0726
AT-494
P0711
P0711
AT-481
—
P0826
AT-579
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)
P0745
P0745
AT-525
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
P0775
P0775
AT-560
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
P0795
P0795
AT-569
PC SOL C STC ON
P0797
P0797
AT-574
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
P0705
AT-471
SHIFT
P0780
P0780
AT-565
SHIFT SOL A
P0750
P0750
AT-530
SHIFT SOL B
P0755
P0755
AT-535
SHIFT SOL C
P0760
P0760
AT-540
SHIFT SOL D
P0765
P0765
AT-550
SHIFT SOL E
P0770
P0770
AT-555
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
P0762
P0762
AT-545
TCM POWER INPT SIG
FLUID TEMP SEN
MANUAL MODE SWITCH
P0882
P0882
AT-585
TCM PROCESSOR
—
P0613
AT-469
TURBINE SENSOR
P0717
P0717
AT-486
VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR
—
P0500
AT-467
VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T
P0722
P0722
AT-490
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
Revision: March 2005
AT-385
2005 Altima
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[RE5F22A]
DTC No. Index
ECS009C7
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-464 .
DTC
OBD-II
Except OBD-II
CONSULT-II
GST*1
CONSULT-II
only “TRANSMISSION”
—
P0500
VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR
AT-467
—
P0613
TCM PROCESSOR
AT-469
P0705
P0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-471
P0710
P0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-476
P0711
P0711
FLUID TEMP SEN
AT-481
P0717
P0717
TURBINE SENSOR
AT-486
P0722
P0722
VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T
AT-490
—
P0726
ENG SPD INP PERFOR
AT-494
P0731
P0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-496
P0732
P0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-499
P0733
P0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-505
P0734
P0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-511
P0735
P0735
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
AT-516
P0744
P0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-522
P0745
P0745
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)
AT-525
P0750
P0750
SHIFT SOL A
AT-530
P0755
P0755
SHIFT SOL B
AT-535
P0760
P0760
SHIFT SOL C
AT-540
P0762
P0762
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
AT-545
P0765
P0765
SHIFT SOL D
AT-550
P0770
P0770
SHIFT SOL E
AT-555
P0775
P0775
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
AT-560
P0780
P0780
SHIFT
AT-565
P0795
P0795
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
AT-569
P0797
P0797
PC SOL C STC ON
AT-574
—
P0826
MANUAL MODE SWITCH
AT-579
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
Reference page
P0882
P0882
TCM POWER INPT SIG
AT-585
—
P1726
ELEC TH CONTROL
AT-590
U1000
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
AT-464
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
Revision: March 2005
AT-386
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE5F22A]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
ECS009C8
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine
ECS009C9
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-387
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE5F22A]
Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement
●
ECS009CA
When replacing A/T assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and initialize TCM if necessary.
TCM INITIALIZATION PATTERNS
TCM
A/T assembly
Erasing EEPROM in TCM
Remarks
Not required
Not required because the EEPROM in TCM is in the default
state.
Not replaced
Replaced with
new one
Not replaced
Replaced with
old one
Replaced with
new or old one
Replaced with
new or old one
Not replaced
Required because data cannot be conformed to previous
data written in the EEPROM in TCM.
Required
Replaced with
new or old one
NOTE:
“Old one” is the TCM or A/T assembly that has been used on other vehicles.
METHOD FOR TCM INITIALIZATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Set the vehicle following the items listed below.
● Ignition switch “ON”.
● Selector lever “P” or “N” position.
● Engine not running.
● Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
● Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
● Malfunction was not detected.
Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
Touch “INITIALIZATION”.
Initialize TCM following the direction in display.
Revision: March 2005
AT-388
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE5F22A]
Precautions
●
ECS009CB
A
Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative
battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM
even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
B
AT
D
SEF289H
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
E
F
G
SEF291H
●
Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal
inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly
or not. AT-453, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE".
H
I
J
K
MEF040DA
L
●
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
M
SEF217U
●
●
●
●
●
Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Use paper rags not cloth rags during work.
After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Revision: March 2005
AT-389
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE5F22A]
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transaxle.
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF.
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to AT-396, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-396, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-390
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RE5F22A]
Service Notice or Precautions
ECS009CC
A
ATF COOLER SERVICE
If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bullitens for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement, refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" .
B
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
●
●
●
●
A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through AT
the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table
on AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem- D
ories.
Always perform the procedure on AT-422, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and
avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
E
For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-668, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HAR- F
NESS CONNECTOR" .
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
ECS009CD
G
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-391
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE5F22A]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
ECS009CE
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 (J-34301-1)
Oil pressure gauge
2 (J-34301-2)
Hoses
3 (J-34298)
Adapter
4 (J-34282-2)
Adapter
5 (790-301-1230-A)
60° Adapter
6 (J-34301-15)
Square socket
Measuring line pressure
AAT896
KV311J0010
(J-45542)
Adapter
Measuring line pressure
SCIA3019E
KV991J0060
(J-45404)
Alignment tool
Adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch
SCIA3018E
ST33290001
(J-34286)
Puller
●
Removing oil pump assembly
●
Removing thrust roller bearing
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30in)
NT414
ST33400001
(J-26082)
Drift
Installing differential side oil seals
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 74 mm (1.85 in) dia.
NT086
KV31102400
(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
Removing and installing return springs
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
Revision: March 2005
AT-392
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE5F22A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST30720000
(J-25405)
Drift
●
Installing oil seal
●
Installing tapered roller bearing
A
B
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
AT
NT115
ST30612000
(J-25742-2)
Drift
Removing outer race and adjust shim
a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
D
E
NT073
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge
1 GG91030000
(J-25765-A)
Torque wrench
2 HT62940000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
3 HT62900000
(
—
)
Socket adapter
Checking differential side bearing preload
F
G
H
NT124
I
KV40102500
(J-28815)
Drift
Checking side differential bearing preload
a: 60 mm (2.362 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.772 in)
J
K
WCIA0381E
ST33061000
(J-8107-2)
Drift
●
Removing tapered roller bearing
●
Installing manual valve oil seal
L
a: 38.0 mm (1.496 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
M
NT073
KV38100500
(
—
Drift
Installing tapered roller bearing
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.362 in) dia.
)
NT115
Revision: March 2005
AT-393
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE5F22A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV40100621
(J-25273)
Drift
Installing outer race and adjust shim
a: 76 mm (2.992 in) dia.
WCIA0382E
ST30022000
(
—
Drift
Installing outer race and adjust shim
a: 56 mm (2.205 in) dia.
b: 110 mm (4.331 in) dia.
c: 15 mm (0.591 in) dia.
)
WCIA0383E
Revision: March 2005
AT-394
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RE5F22A]
Commercial Service Tools
ECS009CF
A
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
B
AT
PBIC0190E
Puller
Removing tapered roller bearing
D
E
NT077
Puller
Removing tapered roller bearings
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
F
G
NT411
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-395
2005 Altima
A/T FLUID
[RE5F22A]
A/T FLUID
Changing A/T Fluid
PFP:KLE40
ECS009CG
Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Checking A/T Fluid
ECS009CH
Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-396
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Cross-Sectional View
PFP:31036
A
ECS009CI
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA2575E
1.
Converter housing
2.
2nd brake
3.
One-way clutch No. 2
4.
Control valve assembly
5.
Side cover
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
Forward clutch
8.
Direct clutch
9.
Transaxle case cover
10. B5 brake
11. Transaxle case
12. U/D clutch
13. U/D brake
14. Final gear
15. Differential case
16. Output shaft
17. Counter driven gear
18. Counter drive gear
19. Input shaft
20. Oil pump
21. One-way clutch No. 1
22. 2nd coast brake
23. Torque converter
24. Main rear planetary gear
25. Main front planetary gear
26. U/D rear planetary gear
27. U/D front planetary gear
Revision: March 2005
AT-397
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Shift Mechanism
ECS009CJ
CONSTRUCTION
SCIA2576E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
12. Main planetary carrier
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-398
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components
Abbr.
A
Function
Forward clutch 1
F/C
Connect input shaft 20 to main rear internal gear 10 .
Direct clutch 2
D/C
Connect input shaft 20 to main sun gear 11 .
U/D clutch 3
U/D.C
Connect U/D sun gear 15 to U/D front planetary carrier 16 .
2nd coast brake 4
2nd C/B
Lock main sun gear 11 .
2nd brake 5
2nd/B
Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11 .
1st and reverse brake 6
1st & R/B
Lock main front internal gear 13 .
U/D brake 7
U/D.B
Lock U/D sun gear 15 .
B5 brake 8
B5/B
Lock U/D rear planetary carrier 18 .
One-way clutch No. 1 9
O.C1
Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11 , when 2nd brake 5 operations.
One-way clutch No. 2 10
O.C2
Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear 13 .
B
AT
D
E
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
Clutch
Shift position
F/C
1
D/C
2
Brake
U/D.C
3
2nd C/
B
4
2nd/B
5
1st &
R/B
6
F
One-way clutch
U/D.B
7
B5/B
8
O.C1
9
O.C2
10
Remarks
G
P
PARK
POSITION
R
REVERSE
POSITION
N
NEUTRAL
POSITION
H
I
1st
1⇔2
J
2nd
2⇔3
D
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔
4⇔5
3rd
3⇔4
K
L
4th
4⇔5
M
5th
M5
5th
Locks in 5th
gear*
M4
4th
Locks in 4th
gear*
M3
3rd
Locks in 3rd
gear*
M2
2nd
Locks in 2nd
gear*
M1
1st
Locks in 1st
gear*
: Operates
: In transition between applied and released.
*: Except when automated up/down shift control and up/down shift permission control are activated. Refer to AT-418, "MANUAL MODE"
.
Revision: March 2005
AT-399
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” position
Since both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
“P” position
●
●
The same as for the “N” position, both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, so torque
from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft.
The parking pole linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
SCIA2577E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-400
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“D” position 1st gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
●
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
AT
Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise.
One-way clutch No. 2 operates. (Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
D
Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
E
U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
F
U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
G
U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
Final gear clockwise.
During deceleration, main front internal gear clockwise due to rotation itself clockwise of main front small H
planetary pinion gear, but driving force loses due to free of one-way clutch No. 2. Therefore, engine brake
does not operate.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-401
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2585E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-402
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“M1” position 1st gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
●
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and one.
Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
AT
Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise.
1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear.
D
Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
E
U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
F
U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
G
U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
Final gear clockwise.
During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, H
engine brake operates.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-403
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2586E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-404
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“D”, “M2” positions 2nd gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
●
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
AT
One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
D
Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
E
U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
U/D sun gear rotates clockwise.
U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
F
B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise.
U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
G
Final gear clockwise.
During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-405
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2587E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-406
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“D”, “M3” positions 3rd gear
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
AT
One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
D
Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
E
U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise.
U/D brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D sun gear.)
U/D front planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of U/D front planetary pinion
F
gear.
15. U/D rear internal gear and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D front planetary carrier and one.
16. Final gear clockwise.
G
●
During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-407
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2588E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-408
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“D”, “M4” positions 4th gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
●
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one.
2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates.
AT
One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear.
Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
D
Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
E
U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.)
U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one.
Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one.
F
Final gear clockwise.
During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-409
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2592E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-410
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“D”, “M5” positions 5th gear
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.)
Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.)
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and main rear planetary unit rotates clockwise as one.
Main front large planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself for main rear planetary pinion gear and one, and
main front planetary unit rotates clockwise as one.
AT
6. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main front planetary unit and one.
7. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise.
8. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one.
D
9. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.)
10. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one.
11. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one.
E
12. Final gear clockwise.
●
During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore,
engine brake operates.
F
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-411
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2593E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-412
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
“R” position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
●
A
Input shaft rotates clockwise.
Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.)
Main sun gear rotates clockwise.
B
Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and
one.
AT
Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.)
Main planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear. D
Counter drive gear rotates counterclockwise for main planetary carrier and one.
Counter driven gear rotates clockwise.
U/D front internal gear rotates clockwise for counter driven gear and one.
E
U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
U/D sun gear rotates counterclockwise.
F
U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise.
B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.)
U/D rear internal gear rotates clockwise.
G
U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates clockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one.
Final gear counterclockwise.
During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, H
engine brake operates.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-413
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SCIA2594E
1.
Forward clutch
2.
Direct clutch
3.
U/D clutch
4.
2nd coast brake
5.
2nd brake
6.
1st and reverse brake
7.
U/D brake
8.
B5 brake
9.
One-way clutch No. 1
10. One-way clutch No. 2
11. Main sun gear
13. Main front internal gear
14. Main rear internal gear
12. Main planetary carrier
15. U/D sun gear
16. U/D front planetary carrier
17. U/D front internal gear
18. U/D rear planetary carrier
19. U/D rear internal gear
20. Input shaft
21. Counter drive gear
22. Counter driven gear
23. Output shaft
24. Parking gear
25. Parking pawl
Revision: March 2005
AT-414
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
TCM Function
ECS009CK
A
The function of the TCM is to:
●
Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
●
Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
●
Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
B
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS (or SIGNAL)
PNP switch
Throttle angle signal
Throttle position signal
Engine speed signal
Engine torque signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Turbine revolution sensor
Vehicle speed signal
Manual mode switch signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Þ
TCM
ACTUATORS
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Engine brake control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT-II communication line
CAN communication line
On board diagnosis
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Shift solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid valve D
Shift solenoid valve E
Pressure control solenoid valve A
Pressure control solenoid valve B
Pressure control solenoid valve C
A/T CHECK indicator lamp
Þ
D
E
F
G
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0445E
Revision: March 2005
AT-415
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Input/Output Signal of TCM
Control item
Throttle angle signal(*5)
Throttle position signal(*5)
Revolution sensor
Turbine revolution sensor
(*1) (*5)
Vehicle speed signal MTR
ECS009CL
Line
pressure
control
Vehicle
speed
control
Shift
control
Lock-up
control
Engine
brake
control
Fail-safe
function
(*3)
Self-diagnostics
function
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(*2)
X(*2)
X
X(*2)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Engine speed signals(*5)
Input
X(*4)
Engine torque signals(*5)
X
X
X
X
X
PNP switch
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(*4)
Manual mode switch
X
X
X
X
X
Stop lamp switch signal(*5)
X
A/T fluid temperature sensor
X
Operation signal(*5)
Overdrive cancel signal(*5)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X(*4)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ASCD
TCM power supply voltage signal
X
Shift solenoid valve A/B/C/D/E
Pressure control solenoid valve A
Output
Pressure control solenoid valve B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Pressure control solenoid valve C
X
X
X
(*5)
X
Self-diagnostics table
*1: Spare for revolution sensor
*2: Spare for throttle angle signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: CAN communications.
CAN Communication
ECS009CM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
For details, refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-416
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Line Pressure Control
●
●
ECS009CN
The pressure control solenoid valve A controls linear line pressure by control signal from TCM and line
pressure for clutches and brakes to reduce shift shock.
This pressure control solenoid valve A controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and
adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
SCIA2605E
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC
PATTERN
In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the pressure control solenoid valve A current and thus controls the line pressure.
Shift Control
H
I
ECS009CO
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained.
J
K
L
M
SCIA2610E
Basically TCM programmed for economy mode, but TCM changes to several shift schedule automatically
according to specified condition.
Revision: March 2005
AT-417
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SPECIAL SHIFT MODE
Upslope Mode
When TCM detects upslope from load of engine torque and decrease of acceleration, this mode changes shift
points in high-speed side according to the upslope degree and avoids busy shift of A/T.
Downslope Mode
When TCM detects downslope from increase of acceleration with accelerator full close, this mode operates
moderate engine brake by changing shift points in high-speed side.
Hot Mode Control
This control lowers ATF temperature by changing shift points when the temperature is extremely high.
MANUAL MODE
Driver oneself can select favorite gear and enjoy sports driving of manual transmission sense by shifting lever
from D position to manual mode position and + (up shift) / - (down shift). But lock-up control is operated automatically. Shift control is operated again by shifting from manual gear position to D position. Following control
is operated when manual mode.
Automated Up Shift Control
In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, up shift operate automatically, if it becomes over a constant
vehicle speed.
Automated Down Shift Control
In order to avoid the stall of the engine, down shift operate automatically, if it becomes under a constant vehicle speed.
Up Shift Permission Control
In order to avoid the stall of the engine, up shift is done only at over a constant vehicle speed.
Down Shift Permission Control
In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, down shift is done only at under a constant vehicle speed.
UP/DOWN SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the pressure to each clutch or brake in order to reduce shifting shock at each shifting (Up,
Down, Manual down, Coast down).
N-D SHIFT CONTROL
This control improves the N-D shift quality due to controlling line pressure solenoid valve according to forward
clutch piston stroke learned in N-D shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to forward clutch
at N-D shift.
N-D SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the forward clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a forward clutch engaging time and
a rotation change rate.
N-R SHIFT CONTROL
This control improves the N-R shift quality due to controlling shift pressure solenoid valve according to direct
clutch piston stroke learned in N-R shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to direct clutch
at N-R shift.
N-R SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL
This control learns the direct clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a direct clutch engaging time and a
rotation change rate.
TORQUE REDUCTION CONTROL
This control improves the shift quality due to sending torque reduction request signal from TCM to ECM and
cutting engine torque increase of shift at N-D shift, N-R shift and 1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5.
If accelerator pedal is depressed rapidly, this control establishes the upper limit value of engine torque and
avoids engine flare at 2 ⇔ 3, 3 ⇔ 4 and 4 Þ 2 of clutch to clutch shift.
Revision: March 2005
AT-418
2005 Altima
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Lock-Up Control
ECS009CP
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the pressure control solenoid valve C,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up Operation Condition Table
Selector lever
D position
M5 position
M4 position
M3 position
Gear position
5
4
5
4
3
Lock-up
×
–
×
×
×
Slip lock-up
×
×
–
–
–
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL
Lock-up Control System Diagram
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA2612E
Lock-up Released
●
K
In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
pressure control solenoid valve C and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
L
Lock-up Applied
●
In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
pressure control solenoid valve C and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Revision: March 2005
AT-419
2005 Altima
M
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the pressure
control solenoid valve C is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State
●
The current output from the TCM to the pressure control solenoid valve C is varied to steadily increase the
pressure control solenoid valve C pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put
into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control
●
In the slip region, the pressure control solenoid valve C current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low
degree of opening.
Revision: March 2005
AT-420
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
PFP:00028
A
ECS009CQ
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System
ECS009CR
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
D
E
F
ECS009CS
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
G
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
I
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
J
ECS009CT
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-II or
GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
●
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●
Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-421
2005 Altima
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-674, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
Items
1
Freeze frame data
2
3
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
●
If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
●
When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-669, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS"
.
●
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
●
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
Revision: March 2005
AT-422
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
●
●
●
●
Freeze frame data
1st trip freeze frame data
System readiness test (SRT) codes
Test values
A
B
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
●
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least AT
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “TRANSMISSION”.
D
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
Touch “ENGINE”.
E
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0354E
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
1.
2.
3.
If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-463, "Erase self-diagnosis" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped
when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-763, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-423
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-463, "Erase self-diagnosis" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped
when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Erase DTC with ECM. Refer to EC-682, "How to Erase DTC" .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
ECS009CU
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
●
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-685, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
Revision: March 2005
AT-424
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
PFP:00004
A
ECS009CV
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
B
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
AT-464 .
AT
Priority
Detected items (DTC)
1
U1000 CAN communication line
2
Except above
D
Fail-Safe
ECS009CW
The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunction in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit.
In fail-safe mode, a driving condition is selected according to the malfunctioning location, and line pressure is
set at the maximum. For this reason, the customer will be subjected to uncomfortable “slipping” or “poor acceleration” of the vehicle.
In that case, handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-429 ).
E
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
G
If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible.
NOTE:
Line pressure is set at the maximum in fail-safe mode. Although gear position differs depending on
the type of fail-safe modes, CONSULT-II indicates “5th”.
DTC
Malfunction items
H
Fail-safe*
I
P0500
Vehicle speed signal
No learning control.
P0613
TCM processor
Fail-safe mode 4
P0705
PNP switch
Fail-safe mode 4
P0710
ATF temperature sensor circuit
Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits
lock-up control.
P0711
ATF temperature sensor function
Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits
lock-up control.
P0717
Turbine revolution sensor
Fail-safe mode 1
P0722
Revolution sensor
Uses vehicle speed signal from combination meter as a substitute. Inhibits learning control.
P0726
Engine speed signal input circuit performance
Fail-safe mode 1
P0731
1st gear function
No 1st gear, no control for N-D shift.
P0732
2nd gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
P0733
3rd gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
P0734
4th gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
P0735
5th gear function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
P0744
Lock-up function
Fail-safe mode 1
P0745
Pressure control solenoid valve A
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
Revision: March 2005
F
J
K
L
M
AT-425
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
DTC
Malfunction items
Fail-safe*
Any one of fail-safe modes
P0750
Shift solenoid valve A
●
Fail-safe mode 1
●
Fail-safe mode 7. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
Any one of fail-safe modes
P0755
Shift solenoid valve B
●
Fail-safe mode 1
●
Fail-safe mode 8
Any one of fail-safe modes
P0760
P0762
Shift solenoid valve C
●
Fail-safe mode 2
●
Fail-safe mode 5
●
Fail-safe mode 9
Fail-safe mode 2. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON
Any one of fail-safe modes
P0765
Shift solenoid valve D
●
Fail-safe mode 1
●
Fail-safe mode 10. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
Any one of fail-safe modes
P0770
●
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
●
Fail-safe mode 6. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
Shift solenoid valve E
P0775
Pressure control solenoid valve B
Fail-safe mode 3
P0780
Shift function
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping.
P0795
Pressure control solenoid valve C
Fail-safe mode 1
P0797
Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON
Fail-safe mode 1
P0826
Manual mode switch
No manual mode control.
P0882
TCM power input signal
Fail-safe mode 1
P1726
Electric throttle control
●
The accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a
pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible.
●
No lock-up, no learning control.
Any one of fail-safe modes
U1000
CAN communication circuit
●
Fail-safe mode 1
●
Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch
slipping.
●
No learning control.
●
No lock-up, no learning control, no special shift mode control.
*: For fail-safe modes 1 to 10, refer to AT-426, "Fail-safe mode list" .
Fail-safe mode list
Fail-safe mode
Selector lever
position*1
Pressure control solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve
Gear
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 1
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
Revision: March 2005
AT-426
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Fail-safe mode
Selector lever
Pressure control solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve
Gear
position*1
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
3rd
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2nd
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5th
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
(2nd)*3
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4th
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
3rd
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse*2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
D position
Fail-safe mode 2
(CONSULT-II displays “8”)
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
A
B
AT
D position
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 3
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
D position
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 4
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
D
E
F
D position
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 5
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
G
H
D position
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 6
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
I
D position
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Fail-safe mode 7
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
2nd
Reverse
*2
J
K
D position
Fail-safe mode 8
(CONSULT-II displays “1”)
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
D position
Fail-safe mode 9
(CONSULT-II displays “8”)
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
D position
Fail-safe mode 10
(CONSULT-II displays “6”)
Manual mode: + (up shift)
Manual mode: - (down shift)
R position
*1: CONSULT-II indicates “5th”.
*2: Reverse gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 3.342)
*3: 3rd gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 2.301)
Revision: March 2005
AT-427
2005 Altima
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair
ECS009CX
INTRODUCTION
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed signal, throttle position sensor (accelerator pedal position
sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc.
SAT631IB
It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused
by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful
checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of
good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-429, "WORK FLOW" .
SAT632I
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on
the example (Refer to AT-430 ) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will
help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled
engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
SEF234G
Revision: March 2005
AT-428
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
WORK FLOW
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-430 ) and “Diagnostic
Worksheet” (Refer to AT-430 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
A
B
Work Flow Chart
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA0501E
*1.
AT-430
*2.
AT-430
*3.
AT-425
*4.
AT-435
*5.
AT-435, AT-437
*6.
AT-438
*7.
AT-455
*8.
AT-421
*9.
AT-424
*10. AT-464
*11. AT-590
*12.
AT-591
*13. AT-610
*14. AT-445
*15.
AT-422
*16. AT-464
*17. AT-590
*18.
EC-669
Revision: March 2005
AT-429
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer
KEY POINTS
●
WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
●
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
●
WHERE..... Road conditions
●
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name
MR/MS
Model & Year
VIN
Trans. Model
Engine
Mileage
Incident Date
Manuf. Date
In Service Date
Frequency
❏ Continuous
Symptoms
❏ Vehicle does not move.
❏ No up-shift
❏ Intermittent (times a day)
(❏ Any position
(❏ 1st → 2nd
❏ No down-shift
❏ 2nd → 3rd
(❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd
❏ Particular position)
❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th)
❏ 3rd → 2nd
❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lock-up malfunction
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip
(❏ N → D
❏ Lock-up
❏ Any drive position)
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select
❏ Others
(
)
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
❏ Continuously lit
❏ Not lit
A/T Check indicator lamp
❏ Continuously lit
❏ Not lit
Diagnostic Worksheet Chart
1
❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint.
AT-425
❏ A/T fluid inspection
2
❏ Leak (Repair leak location.)
❏ State
❏ Amount
AT-435
❏ Stall test, time lag test and line pressure test
❏ Stall test
❏ Engine
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch
❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Forward clutch
❏ Direct clutch
❏ 1st and reverse brake
3
❏ B5 brake
❏ One-way clutch No. 2
❏ Oil pump
❏ Oil strainer
❏ Oil leak for each range circuit
AT-435, AT437
❏ Time lag test
❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Forward clutch
❏ Direct clutch
❏ 1st and reverse brake
❏ One-way clutch No. 2
❏ Oil pump
❏ Oil strainer
❏ Oil leak for “D” position circuit
❏ Oil leak for “R” position circuit
❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part:
Revision: March 2005
AT-430
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items.
AT-438
A
Check before engine is started
❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-591 .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items.
AT-439
B
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-467 .
❏ TCM processor. AT-469 .
❏ PNP switch. AT-471 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-476 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-481 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-486 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-490 .
❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-494 .
❏ 1st gear function. AT-496 .
❏ 2nd gear function. AT-499 .
❏ 3rd gear function. AT-505 .
❏ 4th gear function. AT-511 .
❏ 5th gear function. AT-516 .
❏ Lock-up function. AT-522 .
❏ Shift function. AT-565 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-525 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-560 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-569 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-530 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-535 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-540 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-550 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-555 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-574 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-545 .
❏ Manual mode switch circuit. AT-579 .
❏ TCM power input signal. AT-585 .
❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-590 .
❏ CAN communication. AT-464 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
4-1.
4
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Idle inspection
4-2.
❏ Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. AT-593 .
❏ In “ P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed. AT-593 .
❏ In “N” Position Vehicle Moves. AT-594 .
❏ Large Shock “N” to “D” Position. AT-595 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. AT-596 .
❏ Vehicle does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position. AT-597 .
K
AT-439
L
Driving tests
M
Part 1
4-3.
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-598 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-598 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-599 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-600 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5. AT-601 .
❏ A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up. AT-602
❏ A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition. AT-603 .
❏ Lock-up Is Not Released. AT-604 .
Revision: March 2005
AT-431
AT-441
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Part 2
❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-598 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-598 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-599 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-600 .
AT-442
Part 3
❏ Cannot Be Changed To Manual Mode. AT-605 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear. AT-606 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear. AT-607 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear. AT-607 .
❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear. AT-608 .
❏ Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. AT-609 .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items.
AT-443
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-467 .
❏ TCM processor. AT-469 .
❏ PNP switch. AT-471 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-476 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-481 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-486 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-490 .
❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-494 .
❏ 1st gear function. AT-496 .
❏ 2nd gear function. AT-499 .
❏ 3rd gear function. AT-505 .
❏ 4th gear function. AT-511 .
❏ 5th gear function. AT-516 .
❏ Lock-up function. AT-522 .
❏ Shift function. AT-565 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-525 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-560 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-569 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-530 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-535 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-540 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-550 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-555 .
❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-574 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-545 .
❏ Manual mode switch circuit. AT-579 .
❏ TCM power input signal. AT-585 .
❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-590 .
❏ CAN communication. AT-464 .
❏ Battery
❏ Other
4
4-3
5
❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction
parts.
6
❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items.
AT-438
7
❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts.
See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.)
AT-445
8
❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM.
AT-463
Revision: March 2005
AT-432
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
A/T Electrical Parts Location
ECS009CY
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0350E
Revision: March 2005
AT-433
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Circuit Diagram
ECS009CZ
WCWA0223E
Revision: March 2005
AT-434
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis
ECS009D0
A
A/T FLUID CHECK
Fluid leakage and fluid level check
Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
●
B
Fluid condition check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Fluid status
Conceivable Cause
AT
Required Operation
Varnished (viscous
varnish state)
Clutch, brake
scorched
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
A/T main unit and the vehicle for
malfunctions (wire harnesses,
cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or
cloudy
Water in the fluid
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
places where water is getting in.
Large amount of
metal powder mixed
in
Unusual wear of
sliding parts within
A/T
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
improper operation of the A/T.
D
E
SAT638A
F
STALL TEST
Stall test procedure
1.
2.
3.
G
Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.
Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
H
I
J
SAT647B
4.
K
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
L
M
SAT513G
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the
accelerator pedal.
Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
Move the selector lever to the “N” position.
Cool down the A/T fluid.
Revision: March 2005
AT-435
SAT514G
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat step 5 through 9 with selector lever in “manual mode” and “R” positions.
Stall speed:
2,430 - 2,730 rpm
Judgement stall test
Selector lever position
D, M
H
O
O
H
Stall rotation
L
H
Possible cause
R
L
H
●
Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
●
Forward clutch (slipping)
●
One-way clutch No. 2
●
Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
●
Direct clutch (slipping)
●
1st and reverse brake (slipping)
●
Engine or torque converter one-way clutch
●
Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
●
B5 brake (slipping)
●
Oil pump
●
Oil strainer (clogging)
●
Oil leak for each range circuit
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
TIME LAG TEST
Time lag test procedure
1.
2.
3.
Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/
T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the
amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary.
Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
SAT647B
4.
5.
6.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
Engine start, apply foot brake.
Measure time lag by using stopwatch from moment when shift
lever is shifted in “N” to “D” position and “N” to “R” position until
moment slightly shock can be felt.
CAUTION:
● Make sure to take 3 measurement and take the average
value.
● Make sure to keep interval for more than one minute
between time lag tests.
(That purpose is to remove clutch/brake pressure was
left unfinished.)
Revision: March 2005
AT-436
SAT513G
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Time lag:
“N” to “D” position:
“N” to “R” position:
A
Less than 0.7 sec.
Less than 1.2 sec.
B
Judgement time lag test
Result of time lag test
Longer than standards “N” to “D” position
Longer than standards “N” to “R” position
Possible cause
●
Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator
valve malfunction)
●
Forward clutch (slipping)
●
One-way clutch No. 2
●
Oil leak for “D” range circuit
●
Line pressure is low
●
Direct clutch (slipping)
●
1st and reverse brake (slipping)
●
Oil leak for “R” range circuit
●
Oil pump
●
Oil strainer (clogging)
AT
D
E
F
LINE PRESSURE TEST
Line pressure test port
G
Location of line pressure test port is show in the figure.
H
I
J
SCIA2669E
Line pressure test procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary.
Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary.
NOTE:
The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of
driving.
Switch of A/C and light etc. are off.
After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge [SST:
(J34301-C)] and adapter [SST: (J45542)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to check no oil leak after installing oil pressure gage.
Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
SAT513G
Revision: March 2005
AT-437
2005 Altima
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
6.
7.
Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and
the stall speed.
CAUTION:
● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during
measurement.
● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed,
refer to AT-435, "STALL TEST" .
After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure
detection plug and tighten to the specified torque.
:5.9 - 8.8 N·m (0.61 - 0.89 kg-m, 53 - 77 in-lb)
SAT493G
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Line pressure
Line pressure
Engine speed
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
D, M positions
R position
At idle speed
333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57)
500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88)
At stall speed
1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202)
1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287)
Judgement of line pressure test
Judgement
Higher than standards both “D”, “M” and “R” positions
Lower than standards both “D”, “M” and “R” positions
Lower than standards only “D” position
Lower than standards only “R” position
Possible cause
●
Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction
●
Primary regulator valve malfunction
●
Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction
●
Primary regulator valve malfunction
●
Oil pump malfunction
●
B5 bake malfunction
●
Oil leak for each range circuit malfunction
●
Oil leak for “D” range circuit malfunction
●
Forward clutch malfunction
●
Oil leak for “R” range circuit malfunction
●
Direct clutch malfunction
●
1st and reverse brake malfunction
ROAD TEST
Description
●
●
1.
2.
3.
The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes.
The road test is perform in the following three stages.
Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-439 .
Check at idle. Refer to AT-439 .
Cruise test
● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-441 ,
AT-442 , AT-443 .
SAT786A
Revision: March 2005
AT-438
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
●
●
Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and
inspection items.
Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are complete.
A
B
AT
SAT496G
D
Check Before Engine is Started
ECS009D1
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds?
Yes
>> 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Perform the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to AT456 , AT-461 .
3. Go to AT-439, "Check at Idle" .
No
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-591, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" .
Check at Idle
ECS009D2
1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Park vehicle on level surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Turn ignition switch “START”.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-593, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Turn ignition switch “ACC”.
2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch “START”.
Does the engine start in either position?
Yes
>> Stop the road test and go to AT-593, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
AT-439
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Move selector lever to “P” position.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
4. Push the vehicle forward or backward.
5. Engage the parking brake.
When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move?
Yes
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves when pushed in “P” position” on the diagnostics worksheet,
then continue the road test.
No
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Start the engine.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves in “N” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
No
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “D” position.
When the transaxle is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock?
Yes
>> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
No
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS
1. Engage the brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds.
Does the vehicle creep backward?
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS
Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transaxle is put into the “D” position.
Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” positions?
Yes
>> Go to AT-441, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-442, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-443, "Cruise Test Part 3" .
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not move forward in D positions” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
Revision: March 2005
AT-440
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Cruise Test - Part 1
ECS009D3
1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid.
Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Move selector lever to “P” position.
Start the engine.
Move selector lever to “D” position.
Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle.
B
AT
With CONSULT-II
Read off the gear positions.
Starts from D1?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
D
E
F
G
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
H
3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
J
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed?
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
Revision: March 2005
AT-441
2005 Altima
I
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5
Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed?
Yes
>> GO TO 6.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
6. CHECK LOCK-UP
When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the lock-up status.
Does it lock-up?
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue
the road test.
7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD
Does it maintain lock-up status?
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “A/T hold does not lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE
Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate.
With CONSULT-II
Read the lock-up status.
Does lock-up cancel?
Yes
>> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-442 ).
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the
road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-442 ).
Cruise Test - Part 2
ECS009D4
1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1
1.
2.
Move selector lever the “D” position.
Accelerate at half throttle.
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Does it start from D1?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then
continue the road test.
Revision: March 2005
AT-442
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2
A
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D1 → D2) at
the correct speed.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
B
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed.
AT
Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then conD
tinue the road test.
3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3
Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D2 → D3) at
the correct speed.
●
Refer to AT-444 .
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed.
Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed?
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
E
F
G
H
4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE
When the transaxle changes speed D2 → D3, return the accelerator pedal.
Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake?
Yes
>> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-443 ).
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
Cruise Test - Part 3
I
J
K
ECS009D5
1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION
L
Move to manual mode from D position.
Does it switch to manual mode?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot be changed to manual mode” on diagnostics
worksheet.
2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN
During manual mode driving, is downshift from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1 performed?
With CONSULT-II
Read the gear position.
Is downshifting correctly performed?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th →
3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test.
Revision: March 2005
AT-443
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position?
Yes
>> 1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Perform the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" , AT-461, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
No
>> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue trouble diagnosis.
Shift Schedule
ECS009D6
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
D1 →D2
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
100 %
67
(42)
105
(65)
170
(106)
241
(150)
230
(143)
160
(99)
92
(57)
45
(28)
90 %
67
(42)
105
(65)
170
(106)
241
(150)
230
(143)
160
(99)
92
(57)
45
(28)
80 %
65
(40)
100
(62)
152
(94)
227
(141)
178
(111)
142
(88)
86
(53)
45
(28)
70 %
53
(33)
80
(50)
125
(78)
185
(115)
147
(91)
137
(85)
68
(42)
38
(24)
60 %
46
(29)
71
(44)
106
(66)
156
(97)
108
(67)
78
(48)
46
(29)
22
(14)
50 %
43
(27)
67
(42)
97
(60)
145
(90)
98
(61)
68
(42)
40
(25)
18
(11)
40 %
38
(24)
60
(37)
89
(55)
130
(81)
89
(55)
56
(35)
30
(19)
13
(8)
30 %
33
(21)
50
(31)
70
(43)
108
(67)
68
(42)
45
(28)
25
(16)
12
(7)
20 %
23
(14)
35
(22)
49
(30)
77
(48)
49
(30)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
10 %
17
(11)
29
(18)
39
(24)
58
(36)
44
(27)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
50 %
190 (118)
137 (85)
15%
101 (63)
72 (45)
0-8%
73 (45)
70 (43)
●
Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
●
Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
●
Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP
Accelerator angle
0 - 10 %
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Gear position
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
45 (28)
42 (26)
5th
58 (36)
55 (34)
●
Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
●
Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
Revision: March 2005
AT-444
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
●
Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
A
Symptom Chart
ECS009D7
Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
CAUTION:
Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT
section.
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
ON vehicle
With selector lever in D position, driving is
not possible.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
With selector lever in R position, driving is
not possible.
OFF vehicle
No shock at all or the clutch slips when
vehicle changes speed.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
AT-435
4. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
5. Control valve assembly
AT-622
6. Torque converter
AT-624
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
8. B5 brake
AT-660
9. One-way clutch No.2
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
AT-621, AT619
3. TCM
AT-452
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
6. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
7. Control valve assembly
AT-622
8. Torque converter
AT-633
9. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
10. 1st and reverse brake
AT-633
11. B5 brake
AT-660
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
AT-621, AT619
3. TCM
AT-452
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
6. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
8. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
9. Control valve assembly
AT-622
10. Accumulator
AT-633
AT-445
D
AT-621, AT619
AT-452
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
AT
Reference
page
3. TCM
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
B
2005 Altima
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Time lag is large. (“N” →“ D” position)
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Time lag is large. (“N” →“ R” position)
OFF vehicle
Engine does not start in “N”, “P” position.
Engine starts in positions other than “N” or
“P”.
Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N”
→ “D”, “R”.
Engine stall when vehicle slow down.
Acceleration is extremely poor.
Revision: March 2005
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. TCM
AT-452
5. Control valve assembly
AT-622
6. Accumulator
AT-633
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. TCM
AT-452
5. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
6. Control valve assembly
AT-622
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
8. 1st and reverse brake
AT-633
1. Ignition switch and starter
PG-4, SC-9
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-621
3. PNP switch
AT-471
1. Ignition switch and starter
PG-4, SC-9
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-621
3. PNP switch
AT-471
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
4. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
5. Control valve assembly
AT-622
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
4. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
5. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
6. Control valve assembly
AT-622
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
AT-621, AT619
3. Engine speed signal
AT-494
4. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
AT-446
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D1 → D2 or
from M1 → M2 .
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
6. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
7. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
8. Control valve assembly
AT-622
9. 2nd coast brake
OFF vehicle
Gear does not change from D2 → D3 or
from M2 → M3 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Gear does not change from D3 → D4 or
from M3 → M4 .
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Gear does not change from D4 → D5 or
from M4 → M5 .
OFF vehicle
AT-652, AT658
10. 2nd brake
AT-652
11. One-way clutch No.1
AT-658
12. One-way clutch No.2
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
8. Control valve assembly
AT-622
9. U/D brake
AT-633
10. B5 brake
AT-660
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
7. Control valve assembly
AT-622
8. U/D clutch
AT-633
9. U/D brake
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Control valve assembly
AT-622
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
8. 2nd coast brake
9. One-way clutch No.1
Revision: March 2005
Reference
page
AT-447
AT-652, AT658
AT-658
2005 Altima
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
In D or M range, does not downshift to 1st
gear.
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
5. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
6. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
7. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
8. Control valve assembly
AT-622
9. 2nd coast brake
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
In D or M range, does not downshift to 2nd
gear.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
In D or M range, does not downshift to 3rd
gear.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
In D or M range, does not downshift to 4th
gear.
OFF vehicle
AT-652, AT658
10. 2nd brake
AT-652
11. One-way clutch No.1
AT-658
12. One-way clutch No.2
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
8. Control valve assembly
AT-622
9. U/D brake
AT-633
10. B5 brake
AT-660
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
7. Control valve assembly
AT-622
8. U/D clutch
AT-633
9. U/D brake
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Control valve assembly
AT-622
7. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
8. 2nd coast brake
9. One-way clutch No.1
Revision: March 2005
Reference
page
AT-448
AT-652, AT658
AT-658
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Symptom
Does not lock-up or lock-up is not released.
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Engine brake does not work.
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Stop lamp switch signal
AT-610
3. ATF temperature sensor
AT-476
4. TCM
AT-452
5. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
6. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
7. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
8. Control valve assembly
AT-622
9. Torque converter
AT-624
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. TCM
AT-452
3. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
4. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
5. Control valve assembly
AT-622
6. 2nd coast brake
OFF vehicle
Shift point is high or low.
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position)
OFF vehicle
Revision: March 2005
Reference
page
AT-652, AT658
7. U/D brake
AT-633
8. B5 brake
AT-660
1. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
2. Engine speed signal
AT-494
3. Electric throttle control signal
AT-590
4. Revolution sensor
AT-490
5. TCM
AT-452
6. Control valve assembly
AT-622
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-476
5. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
6. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
7. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
8. TCM
AT-452
9. Control valve assembly
AT-622
10. Accumulator
AT-633
11. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
AT-449
2005 Altima
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Symptom
Condition
ON vehicle
Large shock. (“N” →“ R” position)
OFF vehicle
Shock is too large when shift up.
Shock is too large for coast down.
Revision: March 2005
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
Reference
page
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-476
5. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
6. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-560
7. TCM
AT-452
8. Control valve assembly
AT-622
9. Forward and direct clutch assembly
AT-633
10. 1st and reverse brake
AT-633
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-476
5. TCM power input signal
AT-585
6. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
7. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
8. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
9. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
10. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-560
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
14. TCM
AT-452
15. Control valve assembly
AT-622
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-476
5. TCM power input signal
AT-585
6. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
7. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
8. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
9. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
10. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-560
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
14. TCM
AT-452
15. Control valve assembly
AT-622
AT-450
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Symptom
Shock is too large for kick down.
Condition
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
Strange noise in “R”,“N” or“ D” position.
OFF vehicle
With selector lever in P position, vehicle
does not enter parking condition or, with
selector lever in another position, parking
condition is not cancelled.
Vehicle runs with transaxle in “ P” position.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Actual engine torque signal
AT-494
3. Turbine revolution sensor
AT-486
4. ATF temperature sensor
AT-476
5. TCM power input signal
AT-585
6. Shift solenoid valve A
AT-530
7. Shift solenoid valve B
AT-535
8. Shift solenoid valve C
AT-540
9. Shift solenoid valve D
AT-550
10. Shift solenoid valve E
AT-555
11. Pressure control solenoid valve A
AT-525
12. Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT-560
13. Pressure control solenoid valve C
AT-569
14. TCM
AT-452
15. Control valve assembly
AT-622
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. Control valve assembly
AT-622
3. Torque converter
AT-633
4. Parking component
AT-626
5. Gear system
AT-633
1. PNP switch
AT-471
2. Control cable adjustment
AT-621
3. Control valve assembly
AT-622
4. Parking component
AT-626
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. PNP switch
AT-471
ON vehicle
3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
Vehicle runs with transaxle in “N” position.
ON vehicle
AT-621, AT619
4. Line pressure test
AT-437
1. Fluid level and state
AT-435
2. PNP switch
AT-471
3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment
4. Line pressure test
Revision: March 2005
Reference
page
AT-451
AT-621, AT619
AT-437
2005 Altima
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values
ECS009D8
TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT
WCIA0447E
Revision: March 2005
AT-452
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Terminal
Item
Condition
color
A
Data (Approx.)
B
When turning ignition switch ON.
1
L/B
0 - 1.5V
A/T PV IGN relay
AT
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
3
L
CAN-H
–
–
4
P
CAN-L
–
–
5
L/Y
6
L/R
14
B
16
SB
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
P/B
G/B
L
G
OR/B
G/R
PU/W
27
Y/R
28
W
Manual mode
switch UP (+)
Selector lever: + side
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Manual mode
switch DOWN (-)
Selector lever: - side
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Ground
Manual mode
switch AUTO
Manual mode
switch MANUAL
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
ground
Always
Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position
0V
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
Battery voltage
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral)
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
When engine is running with idle speed and
setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
Selector lever: “P” and “R” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
0V
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
Revision: March 2005
G
H
J
K
Always
When engine is running with idle speed and
setting selector lever to “P” position.
AT-453
L
M
PNP switch A
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
F
I
Turbine revolution
sensor power supply
Shift solenoid
valve D
E
0V
Revolution sensor
power supply
Shift solenoid
valve B
D
Battery voltage
0V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Terminal
Wire
color
Item
29
B/W
Revolution sensor
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear.
119Hz
30
R
Turbine revolution
sensor
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear.
371Hz
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual mode
position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Selector lever: “D” and manual mode position
0V
31
32
33
34
BR
P/B
R/B
Y
PNP switch B
PNP switch C
PNP switch PN
Condition
Data (Approx.)
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
Battery voltage
Other than the above
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
Power supply
35
L/Y
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
When engine is running with idle speed and
setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
36
OR/B
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
When engine is running with idle speed and
setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the
ignition switch.
0V
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the
ignition switch.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and
setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
37
38
39
40
41
42
R/B
R/Y
R/Y
L/G
R/Y
LG
Shift solenoid
valve C
Power supply
(A/T PV IGN relay)
Power supply
(A/T PV IGN
relay)
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
Fluid temperature
sensor
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F)
4.0V
9.8 kΩ
When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F)
3.0V
4.2 kΩ
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F)
0.8V
0.54 kΩ
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F)
0.5V
0.31 kΩ
Fluid temperature
sensor ground
Revision: March 2005
Always
AT-454
0V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Terminal
Wire
color
43
PU/W
45
46
47
48
OR
W/G
BR/Y
B
Item
Data (Approx.)
Condition
A
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
When engine is running with idle speed and
setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
0V
PNP switch PA
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid
valve A
Shift solenoid
valve E
Ground
Always
B
AT
D
E
0V
CONSULT-II Function (TCM)
ECS009D9
F
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
TCM diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status
suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is
displayed.
Displays TCM input/output data in real time.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
ECU PART NUMBER
H
Displays TCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
FUNCTION TEST
I
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG".
J
TCM part number can be read.
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-456 ), place check
marks for results on the AT-430, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the
items.
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
–
Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
–
Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
–
Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II
unit.
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
Revision: March 2005
G
AT-455
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
●
1.
2.
3.
For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in driver instrument panel
(lower).
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
LCIA0042E
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
6.
Touch “TRANSMISSION”.
If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
BCIA0030E
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work item
Work item
INITIALIZATION
Condition
Under the following conditions.
●
Ignition switch “ON”.
●
Selector lever “P” or “N” position.
●
Engine not running.
●
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
●
Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
●
Malfunction was not detected.
Usage
Use to initialize TCM in a case of replacing transaxle or TCM. Refer to AT-388, "Precautions for
A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement" .
SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE
Operation procedure
1.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-456
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
2.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
NOTE:
● The details for “TIME” are as follow:
– “CRNT”: Error currently detected with TCM.
– “PAST”: Error detected in the past and memorized with
TCM.
● Touch “F.F.DATA” on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen to
display freeze frame data. Freeze frame data shows driving condition when malfunction is detected.
For freeze frame data items, refer to AT-459, "Display item list" .
A
B
AT
SCIA2741E
D
Display item list
X: Applicable
TCM self-diagnosis
—: Not applicable
E
OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT-II
screen terms)
Malfunction is detected when...
A/T CHECK
indicator
lamp*3
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
“TRANSMISSION” with
CONSULT-II
*4
lamp*1 ,
“ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II or
GST
When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications
X
VEH SPD SE/CIRMTR
●
ECM detects a malfunction in vehicle speed sensor signal,
after that TCM inputs the result by CAN communication.
X
P0500
P0500
TCM PROCESSOR
●
TCM processor is malfunctioning.
—
P0613
—
PNP SW/CIRC
●
PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern
X
P0705
P0705
●
ATF TEMP SEN/
CIRC
Normal voltage is not applied to ATF temperature sensor
due to open, short, and so on.
During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage
is excessively high or low.
X
P0710
P0710
●
FLUID TEMP SEN
●
ATF temperature signal does not change.
—
P0711
P0711*2
●
Signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to
open, short, and so on.
X
P0717
P0717
X
P0722
P0722
TURBINE SENSOR
VHCL SPEED
SEN-A/T
ENG SPD INP
PERFOR
●
Unexpected signal input during running.
●
Signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open,
short, and so on.
I
K
L
Unexpected signal input during running.
●
Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual
engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication.
X
P0726
P0726
M
A/T 1ST GR
FNCTN
●
A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0731
P0731*2
A/T 2ND GR
FNCTN
●
A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0732
P0732*2
A/T 3RD GR
FNCTN
●
A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0733
P0733*2
A/T 4TH GR
FNCTN
●
A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0734
P0734*2
A/T 5TH GR
FNCTN
●
A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
X
P0735
P0735*2
A/T TCC S/V
FNCTN
●
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is
good.
X
P0744
P0744*2
AT-457
H
J
●
Revision: March 2005
G
U1000*4
●
U1000
F
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
TCM self-diagnosis
OBD-II (DTC)
MIL indicator
Items (CONSULT-II
screen terms)
PC SOL A(L/
PRESS)
Malfunction is detected when...
●
Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
short, and so on.
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
SHIFT SOL A
SHIFT SOL B
SHIFT SOL C
SFT SOL C STUCK
ON
SHIFT SOL D
●
TCM POWER INPT
SIG
ELEC TH CONTROL
NO DTC IS
DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.
X
P0745
P0745
X
P0750
P0750
X
P0755
P0755
X
P0760
P0760
X
P0762
P0762*2
X
P0765
P0765
X
P0770
P0770
●
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
X
P0775
P0775
●
No rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting
time is long.
X
P0780
P0780*2
●
Shifting ends immediately.
●
Condition in malfunction engine revs up usually shifting.
●
Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
short, and so on.
TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with
monitor value.
X
P0795
P0795
●
●
Condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different
from monitor value, and relation between gear position
and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular.
X
P0797
P0797*2
●
Manual mode switch signal is incorrectly input due to
open, short, and so on.
—
P0826
—
●
Voltage supplied to TCM is too low.
—
P0882
P0882
●
The electric throttle control system for ECM is in a malfunction, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN commnication.
X
P1726
P1726
No NG item has been detected.
—
X
X
PC SOL C STC ON
MANUAL MODE
SWITCH
lamp*1 ,
“ENGINE” with
CONSULT-II or
GST
Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open,
short, and so on.
SHIFT
PC SOL
C(TCC&SFT)
lamp*3
“TRANSMISSION” with
CONSULT-II
●
SHIFT SOL E
PC SOL B(SFT/
PRS)
Condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor
value, and relation between gear position and actual gear
ratio is irregular.
A/T CHECK
indicator
●
*1: Refer to AT-424, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
*2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
*3: Indicate it when performing TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS). Refer to AT-461, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
*4: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-464 .
DATA MONITOR MODE
Operation procedure
1.
2.
Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
Revision: March 2005
AT-458
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Display item list
X: Standard
—: Not applicable
A
Monitor item selection
ECU
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h)
X
X
X
VHCL/S SE-MTR* (km/h)
X
—
X
Monitored item (Unit)
FLUID TEMP SE* (V)
X
—
X
FLUID TEMP* (°C)
—
—
X
COOLAN TEMP* (°C)
—
—
X
BATTERY VOLT* (V)
X
—
X
Remarks
B
Vehicle speed recognized by the
TCM.
D
Displays status of engine coolant
temperature.
Signal input with CAN communication line.
ENGINE SPEED* (rpm)
X
X
X
TURBINE REV* (rpm)
X
—
X
Turbine revolution computed from
signal of turbine revolution sensor is
displayed.
OUTPUT REV* (rpm)
—
—
X
Output revolution computed from
signal of revolution sensor is displayed.
PNP SW A* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW B* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW C* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW PA* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
PNP SW PN (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
MANU MODE SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
NON M-MODE SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
UP SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
G
H
I
J
K
DOWN SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
RANGE SLCT SW (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
Not mounted but displayed.
BRAKE SW* (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
This means stop lamp switch signal
via CAN communication line.
CLSO THL POS (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
ASCD SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
ASCD OD OFF (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
TCS GEAR HOLD (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
TCS SFT CNG (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
Requests TCM for shift schedule
change.
LOCK-UP* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
Always “ON” during lock-up, regardless of types.
SLCT LVR POSI*
—
—
X
Displays “##” in manual mode or
when unknown.
MANU GR POSI
—
—
X
Displays “##” in non-manual mode
or when unknown.
AT-459
E
F
Signal input with CAN communication line.
Revision: March 2005
AT
L
Signal input with CAN communication line.
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Monitor item selection
Monitored item (Unit)
ECU
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
Remarks
GEAR*
—
—
X
Indicates current gear position. Also
when setting in P or N position, indicate by shift solenoid valves.
Displays “##” in R position or when
unknown.
NEXT GR POSI
—
—
X
Displays “##” in R position or when
unknown.
REDCT DEM SIG (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
Displays status of engine torque
reduction demand signal.
TC SLIP RATIO
—
—
X
SLIP REV (rpm)
—
—
X
Difference between engine speed
and torque converter input shaft
speed.
Degree of opening for accelerator
recognized by the TCM.
For fail-safe operation, the specific
value used for control is displayed.
ACCELE ANGLE* (%)
X
X
X
PC SOL A OUT* (A)
—
—
X
PC SOL A MON* (A)
—
X
X
PC SOL B OUT* (A)
—
—
X
PC SOL B MON* (A)
—
X
X
PC SOL C OUT* (A)
—
—
X
PC SOL C MON* (A)
—
X
X
SFT SOL A OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL B OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL C OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL D OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL E OUT* (ON/OFF)
—
—
X
SFT SOL A MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL B MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL C MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL D MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
SFT SOL E MON* (ON/OFF)
—
X
X
ENGINE TORQUE* (Nm)
—
—
X
Signal input with CAN communication line.
TRQ REDCT REQ* (Nm)
—
—
X
Torque reduction request
TRQ LIMIT REQ* (Nm)
—
—
X
Torque limitation request
WO AT REQ TRQ* (Nm)
—
—
X
Engine torque without A/T request
G-RATE (G)
—
—
X
F-SAFE MODE (OK/1 to 10)
—
X
X
Numbers indicate types of fail-safe
modes. Refer to AT-426, "Fail-safe
mode list" .
VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF)
X
—
X
Signal input with CAN communication line.
Revision: March 2005
AT-460
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Monitor item selection
ECU
INPUT
SIGNALS
Monitored item (Unit)
SHIFT SCHDULE
MAIN SIGNALS
—
A
SELECTION
FROM
MENU
—
X
Voltage (V)
—
—
X
Frequency (Hz)
—
—
X
DUTY-HI (high) (%)
—
—
X
DUTY-LOW (low) (%)
—
—
X
PLS WIDTH-HI (ms)
—
—
X
PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms)
—
—
X
Remarks
B
The details for data of shift schedule
are as follow:
NOR: Normal mode
UP1: Upslope 1 mode
UP2: Upslope 2 mode (steeper than
“UP1”)
DOWN: Downslope mode
HOT1: Hot 1 mode
HOT2: Hot 2 mode (higher temperature than “HOT1”)
AT
D
E
Displays the value measured by the
voltage probe.
F
The value measured by the pulse
probe is displayed.
G
*: Also, the items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode of self-diagnostic results only if DTC is detected. For details,
refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test item
H
I
Test item
Condition
Description
SHIFT SOLENOID A
SHIFT SOLENOID B
Under the following conditions.
SHIFT SOLENOID C
●
Ignition switch “ON”
●
Selector lever “P” or “N” position
●
Engine not running
●
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL A
●
Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL B
●
Malfunction was not detected.*
SHIFT SOLENOID D
SHIFT SOLENOID E
J
Each shift solenoid operate ON/OFF by receiving the
drive signal.
K
Each pressure control solenoid is activated by receiving the drive signal.
L
PRESSURE CONTROL SOL C
*: Except when P0711, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P0735, P0744, P0762, P0780 or P0797 is detected.
M
NOTE:
Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, “TEST IS STOPPED” will be displayed.
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
ECS009DA
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)
Refer to EC-763, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" .
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer to EC-685, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" .
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Description
As a method for locating the suspect system, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for
the malfunction location is output and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding
DTC.
Revision: March 2005
AT-461
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Diagnostic procedure
1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position.
3. Wait 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
5. Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO AT-591, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" .
2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE
NOTE:
After turning ignition switch “ON” (at step 6), perform within 2 seconds (while A/T CHECK indicator lamp come
on.).
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Push shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.)
5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position and release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
8. Move the selector lever to “D” position and depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.)
9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.)
10. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to AT-463, "Judgement self-diagnosis code" .
If the system does not go into self-diagnostics, refer to AT-610, "TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate" .
>> DIAGNOSIS END
Revision: March 2005
AT-462
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[RE5F22A]
Judgement self-diagnosis code
When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by longer illumination of the indicator lamp.
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA2758E
K
Erase self-diagnosis
●
●
In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is
stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how
many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF.
However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by
erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-463
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE5F22A]
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:23710
ECS009DB
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009DC
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units.
Possible Cause
ECS009DD
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009DE
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 6
seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-466, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-464
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN
ECS009DF
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0187E
Revision: March 2005
AT-465
2005 Altima
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value.
Wire
Item
Terminal
color
Condition
Data (Approx.)
3
L
CAN H
–
–
4
P
CAN L
–
–
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009DG
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected.
Yes or No?
Yes
>> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
No
>> INSPECTION END
SCIA2818E
Revision: March 2005
AT-466
2005 Altima
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
Description
PFP:24814
A
ECS009DH
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication
line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM
will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009DI
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR” with CONSULT-II or 15th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input
by CAN communication) from combination meter.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
B
AT
D
ECS009DJ
E
Harness or connectors
(The signal circuit is open or shorted.)
Combination meter
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Wheel sensor
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009DK
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
G
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more
ACCELE ANGLE: 10 % or less
If DTC is detected, go to AT-468, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
BCIA0030E
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-467
2005 Altima
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
[RE5F22A]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009DL
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle, and then make sure that the values of “VHCL/S
SE-A/T” and “VHCL/S SE-MTR” are same.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
3.
SCIA2922E
2. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
3. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-467, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-468
2005 Altima
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR
Description
PFP:31036
A
ECS009DM
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
B
AT
D
SCIA2820E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009DN
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “TCM PROCESSOR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM processor is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause
F
ECS009DO
G
TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009DP
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-470, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-469
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR
[RE5F22A]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009DQ
1. CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-469, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
Is the “TCM PROCESSOR” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM.
NO
>> Inspection End.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
AT-470
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description
●
●
●
PFP:32006
A
ECS009DR
The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch.
The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
TCM judges the selector lever position by the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
Selector lever
PNP switch A
PNP switch B
PNP switch C
PNP switch PA
PNP switch PN
P
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
R
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
N
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
D
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
●
D
E
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected
when PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern.
F
ECS009DT
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.]
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure
G
ECS009DU
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AT
ECS009DS
Possible Cause
●
B
H
I
J
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Move selector lever to each position.
SLCT LVR POSI: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position
Wait for at least 5 consecutive seconds at each position.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-473, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
M
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-471
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
ECS009DV
WCWA0188E
Revision: March 2005
AT-472
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
24
31
32
33
43
OR/B
PNP switch A
BR
PNP switch B
P/B
PNP switch C
R/B
PNP switch PN
PU/W
PNP switch PA
Data (Approx.)
Selector lever: “P” and “R” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and manual mode position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Selector lever: “D” and manual mode position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
Battery voltage
Other than the above
0V
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Diagnostic Procedure
Selector
lever
“PNP SW
A”
“PNP SW
B”
“PNP SW
C”
“PNP SW
PA”
“PNP SW
PN”
P
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
R
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
N
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
D
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E
H
I
Connector No.
J
K
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Move selector lever to “P“, “R”, “N”, or “D” position and check
voltage between the TCM connector terminals and ground.
L
F57
M
Terminal (Wire color)
24 (OR/B) Ground
31 (BR) Ground
32 (P/B) Ground
33 (R/B) Ground
43 (PU/W)
- Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
SCIA2826E
R
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
N
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
D
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
D
G
SCIA2823E
P
AT
F
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Move selector lever to “P”, “N”, “R” and “D” position and check
the value of “PNP SW A”, “PNP SW B”, “PNP SW C”, “PNP SW
PA” and “PNP SW PN”.
Selector
lever
B
ECS009DW
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
AT-473
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the PNP switch connector.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminals 2, 5
and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage
2 (GY) - Ground
F29
Battery voltage
5 (G) - Ground
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminals 2, 5
and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage
2 (GY) - Ground
F29
SCIA2869E
0V
5 (G) - Ground
7. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch
● Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PNP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector and PNP switch connector.
Check continuity between TCM connector terminals 24, 31, 32,
43 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire
color)
24 (OR/B) Ground
31 (BR) - Ground
F57
32 (P/B) - Ground
43 (PU/W) Ground
Condition
Continuity
Selector lever: “P” and “R” position
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and
manual mode position
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “D” and manual
mode position
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “P” and “N” position
Yes
Other than the above
No
SCIA2827E
4.
If OK, check the following.
–
Harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
–
Open or short-circuit in the harness between combination meter and TCM.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
AT-474
2005 Altima
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
[RE5F22A]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch A, B, C, PA.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of PNP switch.
●
PNP switch. Refer to AT-475, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
5. CHECK DTC
D
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-471, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 6.
E
6. CHECK TCM
F
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
G
H
ECS009DX
PNP SWITCH
1.
Check continuity between PNP switch terminals while moving selector lever. Refer to the following table.
I
J
K
L
SCIA2825E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If NG, check again with control cable disconnected. (Refer to Step 1 above.)
If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral
position (PNP) switch terminals. (Refer to step 1 above.)
If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-619, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP)
Switch Adjustment" .
If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
Revision: March 2005
AT-475
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:31940
ECS009DY
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009DZ
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0710 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
When normal voltage not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on.
When during running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009E0
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
A/T fluid temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009E1
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Warm up engine so that engine coolant temperature is more
than 50°C (122°F).
COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F)
Maintain the following conditions for at least 16 minutes (Total).
(It is not necessary to drive vehicle.)
COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F)
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-478, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-476
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
ECS009E2
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0189E
Revision: March 2005
AT-477
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
41
Fluid temperature
sensor
R/Y
42
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F)
4.0V
9.8 kΩ
When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F)
3.0V
4.2 kΩ
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F)
0.8V
.54 kΩ
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F)
0.5V
.31 kΩ
Fluid temperature
sensor ground
LG
Data (Approx.)
Always
Diagnostic Procedure
0V
ECS009E3
1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Item name
Fluid temperature sensor
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
SCIA2870E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42
while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-477, "Wiring Diagram — AT
— FTS" .
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
Temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect the TCM connector.
5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-478
SCIA2871E
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
B
Temperature
Resistance
(Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and
ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
AT
D
4.
SCIA2872E
E
F
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
G
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
F30
Terminal
4-8
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
I
J
SCIA2873E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
L
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-479
K
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (50°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (230°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace terminal cord assembly. Refer to AT622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
WCIA0448E
6. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-476, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
ECS009E4
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal
F30
4-8
4.
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (50°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (230°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
If NG, repair and replace terminal cord assembly. Refer to AT622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
WCIA0448E
Revision: March 2005
AT-480
2005 Altima
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS009E5
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
B
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009E6
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “FLUID TEMP SEN” with CONSULT-II or P0711 without CONSULT-II is detected AT
when ATF temperature signal does not change.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009E7
D
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
A/T fluid temperature sensor
E
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009E8
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
F
G
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least
15 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
VHCL SPEED SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-483, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
BCIA0030E
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-481
2005 Altima
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTSP
ECS009E9
WCWA0190E
Revision: March 2005
AT-482
2005 Altima
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
41
Fluid temperature
sensor
R/Y
42
When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F)
4.0V
9.8 kΩ
When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F)
3.0V
4.2 kΩ
When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F)
0.8V
.54 kΩ
When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F)
0.5V
.31 kΩ
Fluid temperature
sensor ground
LG
Data (Approx.)
Always
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009EA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Fluid temperature sensor
Condition
Display value (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
F57
41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
G
H
Temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect the TCM connector.
5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
D
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42
while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-482, "Wiring Diagram — AT
— FTSP" .
Terminal (Wire color)
AT
E
SCIA2870E
Connector
B
0V
1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
Item name
A
AT-483
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA2871E
2005 Altima
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
41 (R/Y) - 42 (LG) (ground)
Temperature
Resistance
(Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
4.
Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and
ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2872E
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
F30
Terminal
4-8
Temperature
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.31 kΩ
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2873E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-484
2005 Altima
DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal)
F30
4-8
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (50°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C (230°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622,
"Terminal Cord Assembly" .
D
WCIA0448E
E
6. CHECK DTC
F
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-481, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
G
7. CHECK TCM
H
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
J
Component Inspection
ECS009EB
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8.
Connector
Terminal)
F30
4-8
4.
Temperature
Resistance
10°C (50°F)
5.80 - 7.09kΩ
110°C 230(°F)
0.23 - 0.26kΩ
K
L
M
If NG, repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
WCIA0448E
Revision: March 2005
AT-485
2005 Altima
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
●
●
PFP:31935
ECS009EC
The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm
(revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the
automatic transaxle. The revolution sensor is located on the output side of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input
and output rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal
shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting.
Hall IC is installed in turbine revolution sensor, it itself handles in
pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to
hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with input rpm speed. Size
of output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed.
SCIA2830E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009ED
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE SENSOR” with CONSULT-II or P0717 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
When signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on.
When unexpected signal input during running.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009EE
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Turbine revolution sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009EF
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
consecutive minute.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: Except 1st position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-488, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-486
2005 Altima
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSC
ECS009EG
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0191E
Revision: March 2005
AT-487
2005 Altima
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
23
30
G
R
Data (Approx.)
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear.
371Hz
Turbine revolution
sensor power supply
Turbine revolution
sensor
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009EH
1. CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”.
Monitor item
TURBINE REV
Condition
During driving (lock-up ON)
Specification
Approximately matches the
engine speed.
SCIA2924E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 23 and 30.
Data
(Approx.)
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
F57
23 (G) - 30 (R) (ground)
When moving at 20 km/h (12
MPH) in 1st gear.
371 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2925E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and turbine revolution sensor.
●
Turbine revolution sensor. Refer to AT-489, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
AT-488
2005 Altima
DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK DTC
A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-486, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
B
4. CHECK TCM
AT
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
D
E
ECS009EI
TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove turbine revolution sensor.
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity)
Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at turbine revolution sensor tip [gap
is within 5 mm (0.20 in)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self
when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot
change.
Signal
Voltage (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
F
G
H
I
SCIA2927E
J
If NG, replace turbine revolution sensor.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-489
2005 Altima
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
PFP:31935
Description
●
●
ECS009EJ
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear
parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
Hall IC is installed in revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse
of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall
effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with vehicle speed. Size of
output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed.
SCIA2830E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009EK
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T” with CONSULT-II or P0722 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
When signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on.
When unexpected signal input during running.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009EL
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Revolution sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009EM
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T”
value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-492, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive minutes.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If the check result is NG, go to AT-492, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-490
2005 Altima
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSATC
ECS009EN
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0192E
Revision: March 2005
AT-491
2005 Altima
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
22
29
L
B/W
Data (Approx.)
When turning ignition switch ON.
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear.
119Hz
Revolution sensor
power supply
Revolution sensor
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009EO
1. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-AT”.
Monitor item
VHCL/S SE-AT
Condition
Specification
Approximately matches the
speedometer reading.
During driving
SCIA2922E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start the engine.
2. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 22 and 29.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
F57
22 (L) - 29 (B/W) (ground)
Data
(Approx.)
Condition
When moving at 20 km/h
(12 MPH) in 1st gear.
119 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2928E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following.
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and revolution sensor.
●
Revolution sensor. Refer to AT-493, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
AT-492
2005 Altima
DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK DTC
A
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-490, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
B
4. CHECK TCM
AT
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
D
E
ECS009EP
REVOLUTION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove revolution sensor.
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity)
Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at revolution sensor tip [gap is within
5mm (0.20 in)].
CAUTION:
Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self
when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot
change.
Signal
Voltage (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
F
G
H
I
SCIA2927E
J
If NG, replace revolution sensor.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-493
2005 Altima
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
Description
PFP:31036
ECS009EQ
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009ER
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “ENG SPD INP PERFOR” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal
or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009ES
Harness or connectors
(The signal circuit is open or shorted.)
ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009ET
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL/S SE-A/T: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 %
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-494, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009EU
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ENGINE” with “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode in CONSULT-II. Refer to AT-455, "CONSULT-II Function (TCM)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-627, "INDEX
FOR DTC" .
● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-464,
"DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-494
2005 Altima
DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
While monitoring “ENGINE SPEED”, check for engine speed
change corresponding to “ACCELE ANGLE”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the ignition signal circuit.
● Refer to EC-1287, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
1.
2.
3.
B
AT
D
E
SCIA2929E
3. CHECK DTC
F
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-494, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-495
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
PFP:31940
ECS009EV
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
1st
A
B
C
D
E
D
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
M1
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009EW
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0731 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
●
●
ECS009EX
Shift solenoid valve A
(Off stick.)
2nd brake
2nd coast brake
One-way clutch No.1
One-way clutch No.2
Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009EY
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 1st gear position
BCIA0030E
retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED
WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-498, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-496
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG
ECS009EZ
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0193E
Revision: March 2005
AT-497
2005 Altima
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
46
W/G
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve A
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009F0
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0750. Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following item:
–
2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-496, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-498
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS009F1
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
B
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
AT
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
2nd
A
B
C
D
E
D
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
M2
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009F2
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 2ND GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0732 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
E
F
ECS009F3
G
Shift solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
Shift solenoid valve D
(On stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
U/D brake
2nd coast brake
2nd brake
One-way clutch No.1
One-way clutch No.2
B5 brake
Hydraulic control circuit
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009F4
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
D
AT-499
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 2nd position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 2nd gear position
BCIA0030E
retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED
WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-503, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-500
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG
ECS009F5
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0194E
Revision: March 2005
AT-501
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
WCWA0195E
Revision: March 2005
AT-502
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
25
26
G/R
PU/W
Shift solenoid
valve B
Shift solenoid
valve D
28
W
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
35
L/Y
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
37
R/B
Shift solenoid
valve C
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
B
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
E
F
L/G
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
45
OR
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
W/G
AT
D
40
46
A
G
H
Shift solenoid
valve A
I
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
J
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009F6
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
K
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
●
“DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
●
“DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-503
2005 Altima
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
3.
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following item:
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-499, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-504
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS009F7
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
B
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
AT
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
3rd
A
B
C
D
E
D
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
M3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009F8
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 3RD GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0733 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
H
I
J
K
ECS009FA
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 10 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd position
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
F
G
Shift solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
Shift solenoid valve D
(Off stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
B5 brake
U/D clutch
U/D brake
Hydraulic control circuit
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
2.
E
ECS009F9
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
D
AT-505
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
4.
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 3rd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692,
"VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-506
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG
ECS009FB
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0196E
Revision: March 2005
AT-507
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
WCWA0197E
Revision: March 2005
AT-508
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
25
26
35
37
G/R
PU/W
L/Y
R/B
Shift solenoid
valve B
Shift solenoid
valve D
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
Data (Approx.)
A
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
D
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
E
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
B
AT
Shift solenoid
valve C
F
40
46
L/G
W/G
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
Shift solenoid
valve A
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
G
H
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009FC
I
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
J
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
●
“DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
L
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
M
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-509
2005 Altima
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
3.
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following item:
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
–
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-505, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-510
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS009FD
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
B
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
AT
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
4th
A
B
C
D
E
D
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
M4
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009FE
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 4TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0734 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
H
I
J
K
ECS009FG
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 10 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 4th position
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
F
G
Shift solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
Forward and direct clutch assembly
U/D clutch
U/D brake
2nd coast brake
One-way clutch No.1
Hydraulic control circuit
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
2.
E
ECS009FF
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
D
AT-511
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
4.
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 4th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692,
"VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-514, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-512
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG
ECS009FH
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0198E
Revision: March 2005
AT-513
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
25
35
37
40
46
G/R
L/Y
R/B
L/G
W/G
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve B
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid
valve C
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
Shift solenoid
valve A
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009FI
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
“DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-514
2005 Altima
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
B
Check the following item:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
AT
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
D
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
E
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
4. CHECK DTC
F
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-511, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-515
2005 Altima
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
Description
●
●
PFP:31940
ECS009FJ
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fifth gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valve
Gear position
5th
A
B
C
D
E
D
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
M5
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009FK
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 5TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0735 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ECS009FL
Shift solenoid valve B
(Off stick.)
Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
Shift solenoid valve E
(On stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve B
(On stick.)
Forward and direct clutch assembly
Direct clutch
2no coast brake
One-way clutch No.1
Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009FM
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
Revision: March 2005
AT-516
2005 Altima
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
B
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at
least 12 consecutive seconds.
AT
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 5th position
[Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 5th gear position
D
BCIA0030E
retainable condition. (Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED
WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
E
If DTC is detected, go to AT-520, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
F
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-517
2005 Altima
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — 5THSIG
ECS009FN
WCWA0199E
Revision: March 2005
AT-518
2005 Altima
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0224E
Revision: March 2005
AT-519
2005 Altima
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
21
25
G/B
G/R
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
ground
Data (Approx.)
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve B
35
L/Y
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
36
OR/B
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
0V
37
40
47
R/B
L/G
BR/Y
Shift solenoid
valve C
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
Shift solenoid
valve E
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009FO
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
“DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
“DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
AT-520
2005 Altima
DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
A
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
B
Check the following item:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
AT
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
D
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
4. CHECK DTC
E
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-516, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-521
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
Description
●
●
●
ECS009FQ
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is
detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
ECS009FP
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter
clutch, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
PFP:31940
ECS009FR
Shift solenoid valve D
(Off stick.)
Pressure control solenoid valve C
(Off stick.)
Torque converter clutch
Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009FS
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Accelerate vehicle to more than 100 km/h (62 MPH) and maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 5th position
SLIP REV: Less than 100 rpm
BCIA0030E
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 5 %
LOCK-UP: ON (Refer to AT-693, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN
PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP- 9J500 Models" .)
[Vehicle speed: Constant speed of more than 100 km/h (62 MPH).]
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-524, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-522
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG
ECS009FT
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0201E
Revision: March 2005
AT-523
2005 Altima
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
Data (Approx.)
28
W
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
45
OR
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009FU
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0765. Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0795. Refer to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following item:
–
Torque converter clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-522, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-524
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
PFP:31940
Description
●
●
A
ECS009FV
The pressure control solenoid valve A is normally high, 3-port
linear pressure control solenoid.
The pressure control solenoid valve A regulates the oil pump
discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a
signal sent from the TCM.
B
AT
D
SCIA2831E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009FW
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL A(L/PRESS)” with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
G
H
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Pressure control solenoid valve A
I
ECS009FY
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
F
ECS009FX
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E
AT-525
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/A
ECS009FZ
WCWA0202E
Revision: March 2005
AT-526
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
35
40
Data (Approx.)
L/Y
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
L/G
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
B
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009G0
1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
With CONSULT-II
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Read out the value of “PC SOL A OUT” and “PC SOL A MON”.
Monitor item
●
PC SOL A OUT
●
PC SOL A MON
E
F
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
When releasing accelerator pedal with setting selector lever to “P” position.
1.00 A
When depressing accelerator pedal fully setting selector lever to “P” position.
0.32 A
G
H
SCIA2907E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire
color)
Condition
Data
(Approx.)
35 (L/Y) - 40 (L/G)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever to
“P” position.
300 Hz
J
K
SCIA2908E
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40.
Connector
Terminal (Wire
color)
F57
35 (L/Y) - 40 (L/G)
Resistance
(Approx.)
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2909E
Revision: March 2005
I
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
3.
A
AT-527
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
3-6
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2910E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
F105
1-2
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4326E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
A.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-525, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-528
2005 Altima
DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK TCM
A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
Component Inspection
ECS009G1
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
F105
1-2
4.
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
D
E
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
F
G
SCIA4326E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-529
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description
PFP:31940
ECS009G2
Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
The shift solenoid valve A is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid.
●
●
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
D1 , M 1
D2 , M 2
D3 , M 3
D4 , M4
D5 , M 5
Reverse
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009G3
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL A” with CONSULT-II or P0750 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009G4
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Shift solenoid valve A
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009G5
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-532, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-530
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
ECS009G6
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0203E
Revision: March 2005
AT-531
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
46
W/G
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve A
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009G7
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL A OUT” and
“SFT SOL A MON”.
Monitor item
●
SFT SOL A OUT
●
SFT SOL A MON
Condition
Indication
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
OFF
SCIA2874E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
46 (W/G) - Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A
operates.
(When driving in 1st gear.)
Battery
voltage
When shift solenoid valve A
does not operate.
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2875E
2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 46 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
F57
46 (W/G) - Ground
Resistance
(Approx.)
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2877E
Revision: March 2005
AT-532
2005 Altima
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
2 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
D
WCIA0449E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
F
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F100
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
I
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
K
L
SCIA4334E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve A.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-530, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-533
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
ECS009G8
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F100
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4334E
Revision: March 2005
AT-534
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS009G9
Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
The shift solenoid valve B is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
●
●
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve B
D1 , M 1
D2 , M 2
D3 , M3
D4 , M 4
D5 , M5
Reverse
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009GA
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL B” with CONSULT-II or P0755 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
B
AT
D
E
F
ECS009GB
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Shift solenoid valve B
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009GC
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd and 4th Þ 5th position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-537, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-535
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
ECS009GD
WCWA0204E
Revision: March 2005
AT-536
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
25
G/R
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
0V
A
B
Shift solenoid
valve B
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009GE
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
D
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL B OUT” and
“SFT SOL B MON”.
E
F
Monitor item
●
SFT SOL B OUT
●
SFT SOL B MON
Condition
Indication
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
OFF
G
H
SCIA2879E
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
25 (G/R) - Ground
When shift solenoid valve B
operates.
(When driving in 1st or 5th gear.)
Battery
voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate.
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
L
SCIA2880E
2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 25 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
F57
25 (G/R) - Ground
Resistance
(Approx.)
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2881E
Revision: March 2005
AT-537
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WCIA0450E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F101
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4335E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Check the following.
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve B.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
●
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-535, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-538
2005 Altima
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK TCM
A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
Component Inspection
ECS009GF
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F101
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
D
E
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
F
G
SCIA4335E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-539
2005 Altima
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Description
PFP:31940
ECS009GG
Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
●
●
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve C
D1 , M 1
D2 , M 2
D3 , M 3
D4 , M4
D5 , M 5
Reverse
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009GH
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL C” with CONSULT-II or P0760 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009GI
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Shift solenoid valve C
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009GJ
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd Þ 4th position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-542, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-540
2005 Altima
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/C
ECS009GK
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0205E
Revision: March 2005
AT-541
2005 Altima
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
37
R/B
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve C
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009GL
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and
“SFT SOL C MON”.
Monitor item
Condition
Indication
●
SFT SOL C OUT
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
ON
●
SFT SOL C MON
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
OFF
SCIA2883E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
37 (R/B) - Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
When shift solenoid valve C
operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd
or reverse gear.)
When shift solenoid valve C
does not operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
Battery
voltage
0V
SCIA2884E
AT-542
2005 Altima
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
37 (R/B) - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
SCIA2885E
E
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
4 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
G
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
I
WCIA0451E
J
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
M
1.
2.
3.
L
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F102
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4338E
Revision: March 2005
AT-543
2005 Altima
DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
[RE5F22A]
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire.
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-540, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
ECS009GM
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F102
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4338E
Revision: March 2005
AT-544
2005 Altima
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS009GN
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
B
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON AT
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
D
●
●
●
●
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve C
D1 , M 1
D2 , M 2
D3 , M3
D4 , M 4
D5 , M5
Reverse
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SFT SOL C STUCK ON” with CONSULT-II or P0762 without CONSULT-II is
detected when condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between
gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular.
●
F
G
Possible Cause
●
E
ECS009GO
ECS009GP
Shift solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
Hydraulic control circuit
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009GQ
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
I
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 3rd Þ 4th position
ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 %
If DTC is detected, go to AT-547, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-545
2005 Altima
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/CS
ECS009GR
WCWA0206E
Revision: March 2005
AT-546
2005 Altima
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
37
R/B
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
0V
A
B
Shift solenoid
valve C
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009GS
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
D
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and
“SFT SOL C MON”.
E
F
Monitor item
Condition
Indication
●
SFT SOL C OUT
When shift solenoid valve C operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.)
ON
●
SFT SOL C MON
When shift solenoid valve C does not operate.
OFF
G
H
SCIA2883E
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery
voltage
37 (R/B) - Ground
When shift solenoid valve C
operates.
(When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or
reverse gear.)
When shift solenoid valve C
does not operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
J
K
L
0V
SCIA2884E
AT-547
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
37 (R/B) - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2885E
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
4 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WCIA0451E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F102
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4338E
Revision: March 2005
AT-548
2005 Altima
DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
A
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
B
AT
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
8. CHECK DTC
F
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-545, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Component Inspection
G
ECS009GT
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F102
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
H
I
J
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
K
L
SCIA4338E
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-549
2005 Altima
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
Description
PFP:31940
ECS009GU
Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
The shift solenoid valve D is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid.
●
●
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve D
D1 , M 1
D2 , M 2
D3 , M 3
D4 , M4
D5 , M 5
Reverse
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009GV
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL D” with CONSULT-II or P0765 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009GW
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Shift solenoid valve D
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009GX
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 2nd Þ 3rd position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-550
2005 Altima
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/D
ECS009GY
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0207E
Revision: March 2005
AT-551
2005 Altima
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
26
PU/
W
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve D
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009GZ
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL D OUT” and
“SFT SOL D MON”.
Monitor item
●
SFT SOL D OUT
●
SFT SOL D MON
Condition
Indication
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
OFF
SCIA2888E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery
voltage
26 (PU/W) - Ground
When shift solenoid valve D
operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th
gear.)
When shift solenoid valve D
does not operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
0V
SCIA2889E
AT-552
2005 Altima
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 26 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
26 (PU/W) - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
SCIA2890E
E
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
G
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
I
WCIA0453E
J
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
M
1.
2.
3.
L
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F103
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4339E
Revision: March 2005
AT-553
2005 Altima
DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
[RE5F22A]
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve D.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-550, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
ECS009H0
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F103
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4339E
Revision: March 2005
AT-554
2005 Altima
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
Description
PFP:31940
A
ECS009H1
Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON
and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts
gear positions.
The shift solenoid valve E is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid.
●
●
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve E
D1
M1
D 2 , M2
D3 , M3
D4 , M 4
D5 , M 5
Reverse
OFF
(Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF
(Closed)
OFF
(Closed)
OFF
(Closed)
OFF
(Closed)
ON (Open)
●
●
–
–
ECS009H2
E
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL E” with CONSULT-II or P0770 without CONSULT-II is detected
under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
F
G
Possible Cause
●
●
AT
D
NOTE:
The condition of shift solenoid valve E is ON (Open) with shifting D2 ⇔ D3 and D3 ⇔ D4 .
On Board Diagnosis Logic
B
ECS009H3
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Shift solenoid valve E
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009H4
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
I
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Move selector lever between “N” and “R”.
SLCT LVR POSI: “N” ⇔ “R” position
If DTC is detected, go to AT-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-555
2005 Altima
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/E
ECS009H5
WCWA0208E
Revision: March 2005
AT-556
2005 Altima
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminal and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
47
BR/Y
Data (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
0V
A
B
Shift solenoid
valve E
AT
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009H6
1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
D
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL E OUT” and
“SFT SOL E MON”.
E
F
Monitor item
●
SFT SOL E OUT
●
SFT SOL E MON
Condition
Indication
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
ON
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
OFF
G
H
SCIA2895E
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Drive vehicle.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Connector
F57
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
47 (BR/Y) - Ground
When shift solenoid valve E
operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery
voltage
When shift solenoid valve E
does not operate.
J
K
L
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2896E
2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 47 and
ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
47 (BR/Y) - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2897E
Revision: March 2005
AT-557
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
5 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WCIA0452E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F104
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4340E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
Check the following.
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve E.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
●
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-555, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-558
2005 Altima
DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK TCM
A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
Component Inspection
ECS009H7
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F104
1 - Ground
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
11 - 16 Ω
4.
D
E
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
F
G
SCIA4340E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-559
2005 Altima
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
PFP:31940
Description
●
●
ECS009H8
The pressure control solenoid valve B is normally high, 3-port
linear pressure control solenoid.
The pressure control solenoid valve B controls linear shift pressure by control signal from TCM and controls 2nd coast brake
directly under 2nd, 3rd, 4th and direct clutch directly under 5th
and reverse.
SCIA2831E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009H9
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)” with CONSULT-II or P0775 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009HA
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Pressure control solenoid valve B
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009HB
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-560
2005 Altima
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/B
ECS009HC
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0209E
Revision: March 2005
AT-561
2005 Altima
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
Data (Approx.)
21
G/B
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
36
OR/B
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009HD
1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Read out the value of “PC SOL B OUT” and “PC SOL B MON”.
Monitor item
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
●
PC SOL B OUT
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
1.00 A
●
PC SOL B MON
Other than the above.
0.30 A
SCIA2907E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36.
Data
(Approx.)
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
F57
36 (OR/B) - 21 (G/B)
(Ground)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever
to “P” position.
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2911E
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
36 (OR/B) - 21 (G/B)
(Ground)
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2912E
Revision: March 2005
AT-562
2005 Altima
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 7.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F30
3-7
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
D
SCIA2913E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
F
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
F106
1-2
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
I
J
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
K
L
SCIA4341E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
B.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-560, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-563
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
ECS009HE
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
F106
1-2
4.
Condition
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Resistance (Approx.)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4341E
Revision: March 2005
AT-564
2005 Altima
DTC P0780 SHIFT
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0780 SHIFT
Description
●
●
PFP:31940
A
ECS009HF
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
B
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by
electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
–
ECS009HG
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT” with CONSULT-II or P0780 without CONSULT-II is detected under the
following conditions.
When no rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor)
and shifting time is long.
When shifting ends immediately.
When engine revs up unusually during shifting.
Possible Cause
●
●
●
●
●
●
Shift solenoid valve D
(Off error.)
Shift solenoid valve E
(Off error.)
Pressure control solenoid valve A
(On/Off error.)
Pressure control solenoid valve B
(On/Off error.)
Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On/Off error.)
Hydraulic control circuit
H
I
J
ECS009HI
WITH CONSULT-II
3.
4.
Start engine and select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP: More than 60°C (140°F)
If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid.
Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions.
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
GEAR: 1st Þ 2nd Þ 3rd Þ 4th Þ 5th position
(Vehicle speed: Refer to AT-692, "VEHICLE SPEED WHEN
SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS" .)
If DTC is detected, go to AT-568, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
F
G
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
2.
E
ECS009HH
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
D
AT-565
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P0780 SHIFT
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SFTFNC
ECS009HJ
WCWA0210E
Revision: March 2005
AT-566
2005 Altima
DTC P0780 SHIFT
[RE5F22A]
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0211E
Revision: March 2005
AT-567
2005 Altima
DTC P0780 SHIFT
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
21
26
G/B
PU/W
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
ground
Data (Approx.)
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
When shift solenoid valve D operates.
(When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve D does not operate.
0V
Shift solenoid
valve D
28
W
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
35
L/Y
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
36
OR/B
Pressure control
solenoid valve B
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
40
L/G
Pressure control
solenoid valve A
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
45
OR
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
When shift solenoid valve E operates.
(When driving in reverse gear.)
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve E does not operate.
0V
47
BR/Y
Shift solenoid
valve E
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009HK
1. CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
●
“DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2. CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs.
“DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-562, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
●
“DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●
3. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-565, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-568
2005 Altima
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE)
PFP:31940
Description
A
ECS009HL
●
●
●
●
The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid.
The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the
apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake,
and torque converter clutch.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lockup condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If
there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
B
AT
D
SCIA2833E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
–
–
ECS009HM
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)” with CONSULT-II or P0795 without CONSULT-II is
detected under the following conditions.
When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on.
When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009HN
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
Pressure control solenoid valve C
H
J
K
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
G
ECS009HO
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
3.
4.
5.
F
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
E
AT-569
2005 Altima
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/C
ECS009HP
WCWA0212E
Revision: March 2005
AT-570
2005 Altima
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
Data (Approx.)
28
W
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
45
OR
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
Diagnostic Procedure
B
AT
ECS009HQ
1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
With CONSULT-II
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”.
Monitor item
A
E
F
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
●
PC SOL C OUT
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
1.00 A
●
PC SOL C MON
Other than the above.
0.20 A
G
H
SCIA2907E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Connector
F57
J
Data
(Approx.)
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
45 (OR) - 28 (W)
(Ground)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever
to “P” position.
K
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
SCIA2914E
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
45 (OR) - 28 (W)
(Ground)
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2915E
Revision: March 2005
AT-571
I
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
2-5
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SCIA2916E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F107
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4342E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
7. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-569, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
AT-572
2005 Altima
DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT
PRESSURE)
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK TCM
A
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
Component Inspection
ECS009HR
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F107
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4.
D
E
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
F
G
SCIA4342E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-573
2005 Altima
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
Description
●
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:31940
ECS009HS
This malfunction will not be detected while the A/T CHECK indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid.
The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the
apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake,
and torque converter clutch.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lockup condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If
there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SCIA2833E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009HT
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C STC ON” with CONSULT-II or P0797 without CONSULT-II is detected
when condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between
gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular.
Possible Cause
●
●
ECS009HU
Pressure control solenoid valve C
(On stick.)
Hydraulic control circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009HV
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Run engine for at least 4 consecutive minutes at idle speed.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-576, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
BCIA0030E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
Revision: March 2005
AT-574
2005 Altima
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PC/CS
ECS009HW
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0213E
Revision: March 2005
AT-575
2005 Altima
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
Data (Approx.)
28
W
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
ground
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
0V
45
OR
Pressure control
solenoid valve C
When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position.
300Hz
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009HX
1. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”.
Monitor item
Display value
(Approx.)
Condition
●
PC SOL C OUT
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
1.00 A
●
PC SOL C MON
Other than the above.
0.20 A
SCIA2907E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start the engine.
Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Data
(Approx.)
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
F57
45 (OR) - 28 (W)
(Ground)
When engine is running with idle
speed and setting selector lever
to “P” position.
300 Hz
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SCIA2914E
2. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Condition
Resistance
(Approx.)
F57
45 (OR) - 28 (W)
(Ground)
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SCIA2915E
Revision: March 2005
AT-576
2005 Altima
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F62
2-5
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
B
AT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
D
SCIA2916E
E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
F
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
G
H
5. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F107
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
I
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
K
L
SCIA4342E
6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve
C.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-577
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON
[RE5F22A]
8. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-574, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Component Inspection
ECS009HY
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Terminal
Condition
Resistance (Approx.)
F107
1-2
Temperature: 20°C (68°F)
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
4.
If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622,
"Control Valve Assembly" .
SCIA4342E
Revision: March 2005
AT-578
2005 Altima
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:34901
A
ECS009HZ
Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch
signals to TCM.
TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter by CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch
position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-584, "Position Indicator" .
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Monitor Item
MANU MODE SW
NON M-MODE SW
UP SW
DOWN SW
Condition
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
(ON/OFF)
●
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Manual shift gate position
OFF
Other than the above
ON
Selector lever: + side
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Selector lever: - side
ON
Other than the above
OFF
●
●
D
E
F
ECS009I1
This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
Diagnostic trouble code “MANUAL MODE SWITCH” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors
manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signals, and judges as irregular when impossible
input pattern occurs.
Possible Cause
AT
Reference Value
Manual shift gate position (neutral)
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
ECS009I0
B
ECS009I2
Harness or connectors
(These switches circuit is open or shorted.)
Manual mode switch (built into A/T device)
G
H
I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
ECS009I3
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Move selector lever to “M” position (manual shift gate position).
Shift selector lever into “+ side” and “- side”.
Wait for at least 30 consecutive seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to AT-582, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
AT-579
2005 Altima
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW
ECS009I4
WCWA0214E
Revision: March 2005
AT-580
2005 Altima
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
5
6
16
19
L/Y
L/R
SB
P/B
Data (Approx.)
Manual mode
switch UP (+)
Selector lever: + side
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Manual mode
switch DOWN (-)
Selector lever: - side
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
Manual mode
switch AUTO
Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position
0V
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
Battery voltage
Manual mode
switch MANUAL
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral)
0V
Other than the above
Battery voltage
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-581
2005 Altima
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009I5
1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”,
“NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW”, “DOWN SW”.
SCIA2917E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between the TCM connector terminals and
ground.
Connector
No.
Terminal (Wire
color)
5 (L/Y) Ground
6 (L/R) Ground
F56
16 (SB) Ground
19 (P/B) Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Selector lever: + side
0V
Other than the above
Battery
voltage
Selector lever: - side
0V
Other than the above
Battery
voltage
Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position
0V
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
Battery
voltage
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral)
0V
SCIA2918E
Battery
voltage
Other than the above
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
AT-582
2005 Altima
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T DEVICE (MANUAL MODE SWITCH)
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM connector.
Check the continuity between TCM connector terminals 5, 6, 16,
19 and ground.
Connector
No.
F56
Terminal (Wire
color)
Condition
Selector lever: + side
Yes
Other than the above
No
6 (L/R) Ground
Selector lever: - side
Yes
Other than the above
No
Selector lever: “P”, “R”, “N” or “D” position
Yes
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position
No
Selector lever: Manual shift gate position (neutral)
Yes
Other than the above
No
19 (P/B) Ground
AT
Continuity
5 (L/Y) Ground
16 (SB) Ground
B
D
SCIA2919E
E
F
G
4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
I
Check the following.
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T device (manual mode switch).
●
Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of manual mode switch.
●
Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-584, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J
K
L
4. CHECK DTC
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-579, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
M
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-583
2005 Altima
DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
[RE5F22A]
Component Inspection
ECS009I6
MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between terminals.
Item
Position
Manual mode
(select) switch
Auto
UP switch
DOWN switch
Connector
Continuity
11 - 12
Manual
UP
Terminal
(Unit side)
3 - 11
M34
DOWN
8 - 11
Yes
7 - 11
WCIA0454E
Position Indicator
ECS009I7
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “TRANSMISSON” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II and read out the value of “MANU GR POSI”.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and make sure that the actual
gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually
coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear).
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
SCIA2920E
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-42, "A/T INDICATOR" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning system.
Revision: March 2005
AT-584
2005 Altima
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
[RE5F22A]
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
Description
PFP:31036
A
ECS009I8
When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the selfdiagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
●
●
ECS009I9
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.
AT
Diagnostic trouble code “TCM POWER INPT SIG” with CONSULT-II or P0882 without CONSULT-II is
detected when voltage supplied to TCM is too low.
Possible Cause
●
●
B
ECS009IA
Harness or connectors
(Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
A/T PV IGN relay
DTC Confirmation Procedure
D
E
ECS009IB
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
F
G
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in
CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Depress accelerator pedal or drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
TURBINE REV: More than 800 rpm
If DTC is detected, go to AT-588, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
K
BCIA0030E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-585
2005 Altima
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN
ECS009IC
WCWA0225E
Revision: March 2005
AT-586
2005 Altima
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
[RE5F22A]
TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground.
Wire
Item
Condition
Terminal
color
1
14
L/B
B
Data (Approx.)
A
When turning ignition switch ON.
0 - 1.5V
B
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
A/T PV IGN relay
Ground
Always
AT
0V
D
When turning ignition switch ON.
27
Y/R
Battery voltage
Power supply
(Memory back-up)
E
When turning ignition switch OFF.
Battery voltage
F
When turning ignition switch ON.
34
Y
Battery voltage
Power supply
G
When turning ignition switch OFF.
0V
H
When turning ignition switch ON.
38
R/Y
Battery voltage
Power supply
(A/T PV IGN relay)
I
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the
ignition switch.
0V
J
When turning ignition switch ON.
39
R/Y
Battery voltage
Power supply
(A/T PV IGN relay)
K
Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the
ignition switch.
0V
L
48
B
Ground
Always
0V
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-587
2005 Altima
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
[RE5F22A]
Diagnostic Procedure
ECS009ID
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
F56
1 (L/B) - Ground
0 - 1.5V
27 (Y/R) - Ground
34 (Y) - Ground
F57
Battery voltage
38 (R/Y) - Ground
39 (R/Y) - Ground
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
F56
1 (L/B) - Ground
0V
27 (Y/R) - Ground
Battery voltage
34 (Y) - Ground
0V
38 (R/Y) - Ground
0V
39 (R/Y) - Ground
0V
F57
SCIA2930E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following:
●
Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39
●
10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R]
●
Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
●
A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-589, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between TCM terminals 14 (B), 48 (B) and
ground.
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA2933E
Revision: March 2005
AT-588
2005 Altima
DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL
[RE5F22A]
4. CHECK DTC
A
Check again. Refer to AT-585, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 5.
B
5. CHECK TCM
AT
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection
D
E
ECS009IE
A/T PV IGN RELAY
1.
2.
Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1
and 2.
Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
Condition
G
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
OFF
No
3.
F
H
If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay.
SCIA1245E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-589
2005 Altima
DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23710
ECS009IF
This DTC is displayed with other DTCs regarding ECM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTCs displayed. Refer to EC-716, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
When this DTC is detected, lock-up operation and learning control are canceled.
Revision: March 2005
AT-590
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on
PFP:00007
A
ECS009IG
SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to
“ON”.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
AT
Perform the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-464, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Refer to AT-586, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" .
G
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
F56
1 (L/B) - Ground
0 - 1.5V
H
27 (Y/R) - Ground
34 (Y) - Ground
F57
Battery voltage
38 (R/Y) - Ground
I
39 (R/Y) - Ground
3.
4.
SCIA2930E
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-586, "Wiring Diagram — AT —
PWR/IN" .
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
F56
1 (L/B) - Ground
0V
27 (Y/R) - Ground
Battery voltage
34 (Y) - Ground
0V
38 (R/Y) - Ground
0V
39 (R/Y) - Ground
0V
F57
K
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following:
●
Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27
●
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39
●
10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R]
●
Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
●
A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-589, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
J
AT-591
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
Disconnect the TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between TCM terminals 14 (B), 48 (B) and
ground. Refer to AT-586, "Wiring Diagram — AT — PWR/IN" .
4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or the power
source.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SCIA2933E
5. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
6. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-592
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position
ECS009IH
A
SYMPTOM:
●
●
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position.
B
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
AT
Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
E
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
F
G
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed
H
I
ECS009II
SYMPTOM:
J
Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated,
allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed.
K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
●
Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
3. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-593
2005 Altima
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
ECS009IJ
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check the control cable.
Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
●
4. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-594
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)
ECS009IK
A
SYMPTOM:
A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
AT
D
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
F
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
G
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Accumulator. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
H
I
J
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
L
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
M
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-595
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position
ECS009IL
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION
Check the control cable and PNP switch position.
●
Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT619, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" .
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
1st and reverse brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
–
Torque convertor. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-596
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position
ECS009IM
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
AT
D
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION
Check the control cable and PNP switch position.
●
Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT619, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" .
E
3. CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT
G
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate pressure control solenoid valve A?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-525, "DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE)" .
NO
>> GO TO 4.
F
H
I
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
J
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
–
Torque convertor. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
K
L
M
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-597
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
ECS009IN
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-596, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check the line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-437, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning item. Refer to AT-438, "Judgement of line pressure test" .
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2
ECS009IO
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed.
Revision: March 2005
AT-598
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be
AT
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
D
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
E
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
5. CHECK TCM
J
K
L
M
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
ECS009IP
SYMPTOM:
The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed.
Revision: March 2005
I
AT-599
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" ,AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
ECS009IQ
SYMPTOM:
●
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed.
Revision: March 2005
AT-600
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be
AT
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
D
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
E
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
I
J
K
5. CHECK TCM
L
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5
ECS009IR
SYMPTOM:
●
The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed.
Revision: March 2005
AT-601
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refer to AT-597, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" ,AT-598, "Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1" .
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
ECS009IS
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
Revision: March 2005
AT-602
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
B
AT
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
I
J
5. CHECK TCM
K
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
ECS009IT
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds.
Revision: March 2005
D
AT-603
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Lock-up Is Not Released
ECS009IU
SYMPTOM:
The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal.
Revision: March 2005
AT-604
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
B
AT
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E
F
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
H
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
I
J
5. CHECK TCM
K
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
L
M
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode
ECS009IV
SYMPTOM:
Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used.
Revision: March 2005
D
AT-605
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the manual mode switch circuit. Refer to AT-579, "DTC P0826 MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear
ECS009IW
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
3.
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-606
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
A
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear
ECS009IX
SYMPTOM:
AT
When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
D
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
E
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
F
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
G
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
I
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
U/D clutch. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
J
K
L
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
M
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear
ECS009IY
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear.
Revision: March 2005
AT-607
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear
ECS009IZ
SYMPTOM:
When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
Revision: March 2005
AT-608
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
A
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
B
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
AT
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
2nd brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" .
–
One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-658, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake
Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.
3.
4. CHECK TCM
D
E
F
G
H
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I
J
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
K
L
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
ECS009J0
SYMPTOM:
M
No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-435, "A/T FLUID CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis.
Do the self-diagnostic results indicate shift solenoid valve E, electric throttle control system?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-555, "DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E" ,
AT-590, "DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
AT-609
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
3.
Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-622, "Control Valve Assembly" .
Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
Check the following items:
–
2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-652, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake" , AT-658, "One-Way Clutch
Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1" .
–
U/D brake. Refer to AT-633, "DISASSEMBLY" .
–
B5 brake. Refer to AT-660, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate
ECS009J1
SYMPTOM:
A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit
is good.
DESCRIPTION
●
●
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range
switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
Stop lamp switch signal
Detects the brake pedal state (stop lamp switch is ON or OFF) and sends a signal via CAN communication line to the TCM.
Closed throttle position signal
ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator pedal position sensor, and sends the signal via CAN communication line to TCM.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-471, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Revision: March 2005
AT-610
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE5F22A]
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
A
Perform self-diagnosis for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with ABS), BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (with TCS/ABS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
B
AT
3. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. Refer to EC-669, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
ITEMS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
D
E
4. CHECK DATA MONITOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
F
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TRANSMISSION” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-II.
3. Depress or release accelerator pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “CLSD THL POS”.
4. Depress or release brake pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling
action of the “BRAKE SW”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
G
H
I
J
SCIA2946E
5. CHECK TCM
K
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-452, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
6. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-464, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace the TCM.
Revision: March 2005
AT-611
2005 Altima
L
M
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Device
PFP:34901
ECS009J2
WCIA0469E
Revision: March 2005
AT-612
2005 Altima
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Control Cable
ECS009J3
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
WCIA0470E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-613
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
●
●
PFP:34950
ECS009J4
The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
ECS009J5
WCIA0468E
Revision: March 2005
AT-614
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT
ECS009J6
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCWA0186E
Revision: March 2005
AT-615
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values
ECS009J7
SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
WCIA0465E
SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE
Data are reference values.
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
(+)
(-)
1 (W)
8 (B)
2 (L)
8 (B)
Item
Power source
Detent switch (key)
4 (R/G)
8 (B)
Stop lamp switch
5 (P)
8 (B)
Vehicle speed signal
6 (G)
8 (B)
Ignition signal
7 (R/W)
8 (B)
8 (B)
–
9 (G/W)
8 (B)
10 (W/G)
8 (B)
Condition
Shift lock solenoid
Always
Battery voltage
The position when the key is inserted and the selector
lever is set to a position other than the “P” position, or
when it is shifted from the “R” to the “P” position
Battery voltage
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
When brake pedal is released
Approx. 0V
—
—
Ignition switch: “ON”
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: “OFF”
Approx. 0V
When the brake pedal is depressed
Battery voltage
Ignition switch: “ON” and vehicle speed is less than 8 km/
h (5 MPH)
Approx. 0V
Always
Approx. 0V
Ground
Key lock signal
Judgement standard
When the selector lever is set to a position other than the
“P” position
Battery voltage for approx.
0.1 sec. (Note)
Except the above
Approx. 0V
When the selector lever is set to the“ P” position
Battery voltage for approx.
0.1 sec. (Note)
Except the above
Approx. 0V
Key unlock signal
NOTE:
Make sure that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it
should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms.
Revision: March 2005
AT-616
2005 Altima
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
Component Inspection
ECS009J8
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
A
Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the
respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged.
B
●
AT
Connector
Terminal
M34
9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground)
D
SCIA3117E
DETENT SWITCH
For Key:
●
E
Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device connector.
Condition
The position when the selector lever is set
to a position other than the “P” position, or
when it is shifted from the “R” to the “P”
position
Connector
Terminal
M34
5-6
F
Continuity
Except the above
Yes
G
No
H
SCIA3118E
I
KEY LOCK SOLENOID
Key Lock
Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
●
Connector
Terminal
M26
1 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground)
J
K
L
WCIA0455E
Key Unlock
Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and
key lock solenoid connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness.
●
Connector
Terminal
M26
2 (Battery voltage) - 1 (Ground)
WCIA0456E
Revision: March 2005
AT-617
2005 Altima
M
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE5F22A]
KEY SWITCH
●
Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key
lock solenoid connector.
Condition
Key inserted
Connector
Terminal
M26
3-4
Continuity
Yes
Key removed
No
WCIA0457E
STOP LAMP SWITCH
●
Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch connector.
Condition
Connector
Terminal
E38
1-2
Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
Yes
No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-6,
"Inspection and Adjustment" .
WCIA0466E
Revision: March 2005
AT-618
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE5F22A]
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
PFP:00000
A
ECS009J9
Remove intake air duct.
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolt.
B
AT
D
BBIA0272E
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
ECS009JA
Remove battery and bracket.
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolt.
E
F
G
H
BBIA0273E
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove battery and bracket.
Remove cable from range lever.
Set range lever in neutral position.
Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number
5.
6.
ECS009JB
I
J
K
: KV991J0060 (J-45404)
Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts.
Adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch so that Tool pointer
aligns with neutral base line on park/neutral position (PNP)
switch body.
L
M
SCIA5374E
7.
8.
9.
Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts.
Reinstall range lever and cable.
Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-621, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
10. Reinstall battery and bracket.
11. Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to
AT-475, "Component Inspection" .
BBIA0274E
Revision: March 2005
AT-619
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE5F22A]
ATF Cooler
ECS009JC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain ATF. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Remove hose clamps and hoses from ATF cooler.
Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Do not reuse sealing parts.
BBIA0275E
ATF Cooler Valve
ECS009JD
Refer to the figure for ATF cooler valve and hoses removal and installation information.
SCIA2975E
1.
ATF cooler valve assembly
2.
Hose clamp
3.
Heater hose
4.
Heater pipe
5.
Outlet water hose
6.
Hose clip
7.
ATF cooler assembly
8.
Transaxle assembly
9.
Control cable bracket
10. Inlet water hose
Revision: March 2005
AT-620
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE5F22A]
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
A
Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temperature.
Dimension “A”:
More than 72.0 mm (2.835 in)
A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face
and valve shaft end face.
B
AT
SCIA2711J
2.
Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then
heat it up with temperature of over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes
more.
D
E
F
G
SCIA2993E
H
3.
Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed.
Dimension “A”:
Less than 66.5 mm (2.618 in)
A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face
and valve shaft end face.
I
J
K
SCIA2711J
Control Cable Adjustment
ECS009JE
Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should
be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt
or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control
cable needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in the P position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut.
3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of
the arrow shown in the illustration.
Specified force
4.
5.
M
BBIA0279E
: 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)
Tighten control cable lock nut.
Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly.
NOTE:
● Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position.
● Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position.
Revision: March 2005
AT-621
L
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE5F22A]
Side cover
ECS009JF
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover.
2. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
3. Remove side cover bolts and side cover.
NOTE:
Do not reuse sealing bolts.
SCIA4144E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
Control Valve Assembly
ECS009JG
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Side cover" .
Disconnect solenoid valve connectors.
Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control
valve assembly.
SCIA4151E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to AT-626, "Components" for specified torque.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
55 (2.17)
2
B
50 (1.97)
2
C
16 (0.63)
2
SCIA4152E
Terminal Cord Assembly
ECS009JH
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove PNP switch. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
Remove side cover. Refer to AT-622, "Terminal Cord Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
AT-622
2005 Altima
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE5F22A]
3.
4.
Disconnect solenoid valve connectors.
Remove terminal cord assembly.
A
B
AT
WCIA0238E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-623
2005 Altima
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE5F22A]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
PFP:00000
ECS009JI
CAUTION:
When removing the transaxle assembly from engine, be sure to remove the crankshaft position sensor from the assembly.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
2. Remove battery and bracket.
3. Remove air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
4. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness
connectors.
5. Disconnect harness connectors of revolution sensor, ground, mass air flow sensor, and turbine revolution
sensor.
6. Remove ATF cooler valve assembly bracket bolts.
7. Disconnect ATF cooler line retainers.
8. Disconnect ATF cooler lines from ATF cooler valve assembly.
9. Disconnect control cable at transaxle side.
10. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
11. Remove push clips and engine undercover.
12. Remove upper transaxle to engine bolts.
13. Support engine using suitable tool.
14. Remove drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
15. Remove crankshaft position sensor from transaxle.
16. Support transaxle with a suitable jack.
17. Remove starter motor from transaxle. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
18. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .
19. Remove rear cover plate and torque converter to drive plate
bolts.
NOTE:
Rotate crankshaft for access to torque converter to drive plate
bolts.
20. Remove lower transaxle to engine bolts.
21. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack.
22. If replacing the transaxle as a unit, remove the LH transaxle
mount from the transaxle case.
BBIA0277E
Inspection After Removal
ECS009JJ
Check the drive plate runout as shown.
If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear.
Refer to AT-692, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear
teeth.
SAT977H
Revision: March 2005
AT-624
2005 Altima
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE5F22A]
Installation
ECS009JK
A
CAUTION:
●
When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly
during re-assembly.
●
Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drive B
train components.
1. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure disAT
tance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”
: 14.0 mm (0.551 in) or more
D
E
SAT044A
2.
F
Install the torque converter to drive plate.
Torque converter to
drive plate bolts
: 49 - 58 N·m (5.0 - 5.9 kg-m,
37 - 42 ft-lb)
G
NOTE:
With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check
that transaxle rotates freely without binding.
H
I
WCIA0070E
3.
4.
Tighten bolts securing transaxle.
J
Bolt No.
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1
70 - 79 (7.2 - 8.0, 52 - 58)
55 (2.17)
2
41.2 - 52.0 (4.2 - 5.3, 31 - 38)
40 (1.57)
3
70 - 79 (7.2 - 8.0, 52 - 58)
55 (2.17)
mm (in)
K
L
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
SCIA3017E
●
●
●
●
Check fluid level in transaxle.
Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transaxle operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D and to R position. A slight shock should
be felt by hand gripping selector each time transaxle is shifted.
When replacing the A/T assembly, initialize TCM. Refer to AT388, "Precautions for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement" .
Perform road test. Refer to AT-438, "ROAD TEST" .
SAT638A
Revision: March 2005
AT-625
2005 Altima
M
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
OVERHAUL
Components
PFP:00000
ECS009JL
WCIA0334E
Revision: March 2005
AT-626
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
1.
Adjust shim
2.
O-ring
3.
Differential gear assembly
4.
O-ring
5.
Tapered roller bearing
6.
Tapered roller bearing
7.
Outer race
Compression spring
8.
O-ring
9.
10. U/D brake piston assembly
11.
U/D brake damper assembly
12. Snap ring
13. U/D brake band assembly
14.
U/D clutch assembly
15. U/D gear assembly
16. Thrust needle roller bearing
17.
Thrust bearing race
18. Seal ring
19. Transaxle case
20.
B5 brake cushion plate
21. B5 brake disc
22. Snap ring
23.
U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly
24. Thrust bearing race
25. U/D RR planetary carrier assembly
26.
Thrust needle roller bearing
27. Adjusting shim
28. Thrust bearing race
29.
B5 brake flange
30. B5 brake plate
31. O-ring
32.
Snap ring
33. Return spring
34. B5 brake piston
35.
Transaxle case cover
A
B
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-627
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
WCIA0385E
1.
Snap ring
2.
2nd brake plate
3.
Return spring
4.
O-ring
5.
Oil pump assembly
6.
Oil seal
7.
2nd brake piston
8.
2nd brake sleeve
9.
Snap ring
Revision: March 2005
AT-628
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
10. 2nd brake disc
11.
13. 2nd coast brake hub
14. Snap ring
2nd brake flange
12. One-way clutch No.1
A
15. 2nd coast brake plate
16. Snap ring
17. O-ring
18. 2nd coast brake piston
19. Return spring
20. 2nd coast brake disc
21. 2nd coast brake flange
22. Thrust washer
23. Thrust washer
24. Return spring
25. 1st and reverse brake piston
26. Thrust bearing race
27. Counter drive gear sub assembly
B
28. One-way clutch outer race sub assem- 29. Thrust washer
bly
30. Snap ring
31. Thrust bearing
32. O-ring
33. Snap ring
34. Planetary gear assembly
35. FR planetary ring gear assembly
36. Snap ring
37. 1st and reverse brake disc
38. 1st and reverse brake flange
39. 1st and reverse brake plate
40. 1st and reverse brake flange
41. One-way clutch No.2
42. Thrust bearing
43. Thrust bearing race
44. Thrust needle roller bearing
45. Seal ring
46. Forward and direct clutch assembly
47. Planetary sun gear sub assembly 48. Thrust bearing race
49. Thrust needle roller bearing
50. RR planetary ring gear assembly
AT
D
E
51. Thrust needle roller bearing
52. Thrust bearing race
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-629
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
WCIA0533E
1.
Transaxle case cover
2.
Seal ring
3.
Forward clutch accumulator piston
4.
Compression spring
5.
Accumulator cover
6.
O-ring
7.
Seal ring
8.
Range lever
9.
Washer plate
Revision: March 2005
AT-630
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
10. PNP switch
11. Lock washer
12. Parking lock pawl
13. Torsion spring No.1
14. Parking lock pawl shaft
15. Spring guide sleeve
16. Torsion spring No.2
17. Parking lockpin sub assembly
18. U/D brake apply tube sub assembly
19. Tube clamp
20. Oil reservoir plate
21. Oil cleaner magnet
22. Tube clamp
23. Differential gear lube apply tube
24. Seal ring
25. Thrust roller bearing
26. Straight screw plug
27. O-ring
28. Straight screw plug
29. Differential side oil seal
30. Torque converter
31. Transaxle housing
32. O-ring
33. O-ring
34. Spring washer
35. Hexagon bolt
36. Washer
37. ATF cooler assembly
38. gasket
39. Drain plug
40. Breather hose
41. O-ring
42. A/T fluid charging pipe
43. A/T fluid level gauge
44. Manual valve lever sub assembly
45. Parking lock rod sub assembly
46. Control valve assembly
47. Suction cover gasket
48. Suction cover
49. Side cover
50. Seal bolt
51. Governor apply gasket
A
B
AT
D
E
52. Sensor clamp
53. Terminal cord assembly
54. Transaxle lube apply tube
55. Tube clamp
56. Tube clamp
57. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly
58. Bearing race
59. Seal ring
60. Seal bolt
61. Turbine revolution sensor
62. Differential side oil seal
63. Manual valve oil seal
64. O-ring
65. Anchor bolt
66. Revolution sensor
67. Seal bolt
68. Governor apply gasket
69. Transaxle case
70. Oil reserver plate
71. Oil strainer sub assembly
72. Manual detent spring sub assembly
73. Parking lock pawl braket
74. Governor apply gasket
75. Copper washer
F
G
H
76. A/T fluid cooler tube
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-631
2005 Altima
OVERHAUL
[RE5F22A]
Locations of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers
ECS009JM
WCIA0336E
Revision: March 2005
AT-632
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly
1.
2.
PFP:31020
A
ECS009JN
Drain ATF through drain plug. Refer to MA-31, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
Remove torque converter by transaxle case it firmly and turning
while pulling straight out.
B
AT
D
SCIA4134E
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove A/T fluid level gauge.
Remove A/T fluid charging pipe.
Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe.
Remove air breather hose.
Remove A/T fluid cooler tube.
E
F
G
H
SCIA4135E
I
8.
Remove turbine revolution sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the turbine revolution sensor and
transaxle case.
J
K
L
SCIA4137E
9.
Remove revolution sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the revolution sensor and transaxle case.
M
SCIA4136E
Revision: March 2005
AT-633
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
10. Remove nut and range lever.
SCIA4138E
11. Pry off the lock washer using flat blade screwdriver.
NOTE:
Do not reuse lock washer.
SCIA4139E
12. Loosen nut and remove lock washer.
13. Remove washer plate.
NOTE:
Do not reuse washer plate.
SCIA4140E
14. Remove PNP switch from transaxle case.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
20 (0.79)
1
B
33 (1.30)
1
SCIA4141E
Revision: March 2005
AT-634
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
15. Remove hexagon bolt.
16. Remove ATF cooler assembly, washer and spring washer.
17. Remove O-rings from the ATF cooler assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse spring washer or O-rings.
A
B
AT
SCIA4142E
D
18. Remove side cover.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage side cover and transaxle case.
E
F
G
SCIA4143E
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
H
I
J
K
SCIA4144E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-635
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
19. Disconnect solenoid connectors.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
SCIA4146E
20. Remove sensor clamp tightening bolt.
SCIA4148E
21. Remove sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage A/T fluid temperature sensor.
SCIA4147E
22. Remove suction cover bolts.
SCIA4150E
Revision: March 2005
AT-636
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
23. Remove suction cover and suction cover gasket.
NOTE:
Do not reuse gasket.
A
B
AT
D
SCIA4149E
E
24. Remove control valve assembly tightening bolts from transaxle
case.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
55 (2.17)
2
B
50 (1.97)
2
C
16 (0.63)
2
F
G
SCIA4152E
25. While holding control valve assembly, disconnect parking lock
rod sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly and
remove control valve assembly.
NOTE:
Shift position is “N”.
H
I
J
K
SCIA4153E
L
26. Remove governor apply gaskets.
NOTE:
Do not reuse gaskets.
M
SCIA4154E
Revision: March 2005
AT-637
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
27. Remove terminal cord assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage solenoid connectors and A/T fluid
temperature sensor.
WCIA0471E
28. Remove oil pump assembly bolts from transaxle case.
SCIA4156E
SCIA4157E
29. Remove oil pump assembly, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34280)
SCIA5359E
30. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seal.
SCIA4396E
Revision: March 2005
AT-638
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
31. Remove one-way clutch outer race sub assembly.
32. Remove thrust washer.
A
B
AT
SCIA4159E
D
33. Remove transaxle housing tightening bolts from transaxle case.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
13
B
35 (1.38)
2
C
45 (1.77)
1
D*
—
1
E
F
*:Torx bolt
G
SCIA4160E
H
I
J
SCIA5495E
K
34. Remove transaxle housing using a soft hammer.
L
M
SCIA4162E
35. Remove governor apply gasket.
36. Remove seal ring.
NOTE:
Do not reuse gasket or oil seal.
SCIA4163E
Revision: March 2005
AT-639
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
37. Remove tube clamp.
SCIA4164E
38. Remove differential gear lube apply tube, using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube
apply tube.
Be careful not to damage transaxle housing.
SCIA4165E
39. Remove oil reservoir plate.
SCIA4166E
40. Remove oil cleaner magnets from oil reservoir plate.
SCIA4167E
41. Remove differential gear assembly.
SCIA4168E
Revision: March 2005
AT-640
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
42. Remove oil strainer sub assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4169E
D
43. Remove oil reservoir plate.
E
F
G
SCIA4170E
44. Remove tube clamp.
H
I
J
SCIA4171E
45. Remove U/D brake apply tube sub assembly, using a suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage U/D brake apply tube sub
assembly.
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
L
M
SCIA4172E
46. Disconnect manual detent spring sub assembly from manual
valve lever sub assembly, using suitable tool.
SCIA4174E
Revision: March 2005
AT-641
K
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
47. Remove manual valve lever sub assembly from parking lock rod
sub assembly.
SCIA4175E
48. Remove parking lock rod sub assembly.
SCIA4176E
49. Remove bolts for manual detent spring sub assembly.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
16.7 (0.657)
1
B
14.0 (0.551)
1
SCIA4177E
50. Remove manual detent spring sub assembly.
SCIA4178E
51. Remove parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1.
SCIA4179E
Revision: March 2005
AT-642
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
52. Remove parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl.
A
B
AT
WCIA0420E
D
53. Remove parking lockpin sub assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA4181E
54. Remove spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2.
H
I
J
SCIA4182E
55. Remove manual valve oil seal, using a flat blade screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seal.
L
M
SCIA4183E
56. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race
from U/D gear assembly.
WCIA0338E
Revision: March 2005
AT-643
K
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
57. Remove U/D gear assembly.
58. Remove seal rings from U/D gear assembly.
SCIA4185E
59. Remove U/D clutch assembly.
SCIA4186E
60. Remove anchor bolt.
SCIA4193E
61. Remove U/D brake band assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
SCIA4187E
62. Remove U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing
races.
SCIA5505E
Revision: March 2005
AT-644
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
63. Remove U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
64. Remove thrust needle roller bearing adjust shims and thrust
bearing race from U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
A
B
AT
WCIA0339E
D
65. Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.
E
F
G
SCIA4190E
66. Remove U/D brake damper assembly.
67. Remove O-rings from U/D brake damper assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
H
I
J
SCIA4191E
68. Remove U/D brake piston assembly and compression spring.
69. Remove O-ring from U/D brake piston assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
K
L
M
SCIA4192E
70. Remove transaxle case cover bolts from transaxle case.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
8
B
45 (1.77)
1
C
48 (1.89)
2
D*
—
1
*:Stud bolt
SCIA4194E
Revision: March 2005
AT-645
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
WCIA0340E
71. Remove the transaxle case cover using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case cover.
SCIA4196E
72. Remove transaxle case cover.
SCIA4197E
73. Remove governor apply gaskets from transaxle case.
NOTE:
Do not reuse gaskets.
SCIA4198E
Revision: March 2005
AT-646
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
74. Remove tube clamp.
A
B
AT
SCIA4199E
D
75. Remove transaxle lube apply tube, using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage transaxle lube apply tube.
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
E
F
G
SCIA4200E
76. Remove forward and direct clutch assembly.
77. Remove thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and
seal ring from forward and direct clutch assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal ring.
H
I
J
WCIA0384E
K
78. Remove planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle
roller bearings.
L
M
SCIA5499E
79. Measure the inner diameter of planetary sun gear sub assembly
bushing, using a suitable bore gauge.
CAUTION:
Measure at different places and take an average. If it is
greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary
sun gear sub assembly.
Standard
Allowable limit
:22.200 - 22.226mm (0.8740 - 0.8750in)
:22.276 (0.8770in)
SCIA4255E
Revision: March 2005
AT-647
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
SCIA4256E
80. Remove RR planetary ring gear assembly.
81. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race
from RR planetary ring gear assembly.
SCIA4203E
82. Remove planetary gear assembly.
83. Remove thrust bearing race from planetary gear assembly.
SCIA4204E
84. Measure the inner diameter of planetary gear assembly bushing, using a suitable bore gauge
CAUTION:
Measure at different places and take an average. If it is
greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary
gear assembly.
Standard
Allowable limit
:30.056 - 30.082mm (1.1833 - 1.1843in)
:30.132 (1.1863in)
SCIA4254E
85. Remove thrust bearing.
SCIA4205E
Revision: March 2005
AT-648
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
86. Remove snap ring, using flat blade screwdriver.
A
B
AT
SCIA4206E
D
87. Remove 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake
discs and 1st and reverse brake plates.
● INSPECTION
– Check that the sliding surface of discs are not worn and burnt.
If necessary, replace them.
CAUTION:
Replace new discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in A/T
fluid.
E
F
G
SCIA4207E
88. Remove FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch
No. 2.
H
I
J
SCIA4208E
K
89. Make sure that the FR planetary ring gear assembly should turn
freely counterclockwise and should lock clockwise.
L
M
SCIA4414E
90. Remove snap ring, using a flat blade screwdriver.
SCIA4209E
Revision: March 2005
AT-649
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
91. Remove return spring.
SCIA4210E
92. While pushing the piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/
cm2 ) into the oil passage of transaxle case as shown and
remove 1st and reverse brake piston.
SCIA4211E
93. Remove O-rings from 1st and reverse brake piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
SCIA4212E
94. Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing race from counter
drive gear sub assembly.
SCIA4213E
95. Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.
SCIA4214E
Revision: March 2005
AT-650
2005 Altima
DISASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
96. Remove counter drive gear sub assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4215E
97. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case and transaxle housing, using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and transaxle
housing.
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seals.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4216E
H
I
J
SCIA4217E
K
98. Remove outer race and adjust shim from transaxle case, using
Tool.
Tool number
L
: ST30612000 (J-25742-2)
M
SCIA5360E
99. Remove thrust roller bearing from transaxle housing, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33290001 (J-34286)
NOTE:
Do not reuse thrust roller bearing.
SCIA5361E
Revision: March 2005
AT-651
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake
PFP:00000
ECS009JO
COMPONENTS
SCIA4384E
1.
Return spring
2.
Snap ring
3.
O-ring
4.
Oil seal
5.
Oil pump assembly
6.
2nd brake piston
7.
2nd brake sleeve
8.
O-ring
9.
2nd brake flange
10. 2nd brake plate
11. 2nd brake disc
12. Snap ring
13. 2nd coast brake piston
14. Return spring
15. Thrust washer
16. 2nd coast brake flange
17. 2nd coast brake plate
18. Snap ring
19. 2nd coast brake disc
20. Snap ring
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse old seal.
SCIA4396E
Revision: March 2005
AT-652
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
2.
Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4218E
D
3.
Remove snap ring, using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
E
F
G
SCIA4219E
4.
Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake disc and 2nd
coast brake plate.
H
I
J
SCIA4220E
5.
Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.
Tool number
6.
K
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
L
Remove snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.
M
SCIA5362E
7.
Remove return spring.
SCIA4222E
Revision: March 2005
AT-653
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
8.
9.
While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and
remove 2nd coast brake piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake
piston.
Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
SCIA4223E
10. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool.
SCIA4224E
11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake
plates.
SCIA4225E
12. Remove return spring.
SCIA4226E
13. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake
piston.
SCIA4227E
Revision: March 2005
AT-654
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed
air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown in the figure and
remove 2nd brake piston (With 2nd brake sleeve).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake
sleeve.
15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve.
NOTE:
Do no reuse O-rings.
A
B
AT
SCIA4228E
D
INSPECTION
●
Check that the sliding surface of disc and plate is not worn or burnt. If the disc or plate is worn or burnt,
replace it
NOTE:
Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF.
F
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
E
Install new O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF.
Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve into oil pump
assembly.
G
H
I
SCIA4229E
J
4.
Install snap ring, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly.
K
L
M
SCIA4227E
5.
Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up.
SCIA4226E
Revision: March 2005
AT-655
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
6.
Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates.
SCIA4225E
7.
Install snap ring, using suitable tool.
SCIA4224E
8.
Install new O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF.
10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly.
SCIA4230E
11. Install return spring.
SCIA4222E
12. Compress return spring, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
13. Install snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers.
SCIA5362E
Revision: March 2005
AT-656
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake disc and 2nd
coast brake plate.
A
B
AT
SCIA4220E
D
15. Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
E
16. Install snap ring, using suitable tool.
F
G
SCIA5365E
17. Set a dial indicator as shown in the figure.
H
2
18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm ) into the oil passage
as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd
brake piston moves smoothly.
Piston stroke
I
:1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in)
If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another
flange. Refer to AT-695, "2ND BRAKE" .
J
SCIA5501E
K
19. Set a dial indicator as shown in the figure.
20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage
as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check
2nd coast brake piston moves smoothly.
Piston stroke
L
:0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in)
M
SCIA4233E
21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
SCIA4218E
Revision: March 2005
AT-657
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
22. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush with the
oil pump face, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.
●
SCIA5364E
One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way
Clutch No.1
ECS009JP
COMPONENTS
SCIA4234E
1.
Thrust washer
2.
One-way clutch outer race sub assembly
4.
Thrust washer
5.
2nd coast brake hub
3.
One-way clutch No.1
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove thrust washer from one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
SCIA4235E
Revision: March 2005
AT-658
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
2.
3.
Remove 2nd coast brake hub from one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
Remove thrust washer from 2nd coast brake hub.
A
B
AT
SCIA4236E
4.
D
Remove one-way clutch No.1 from one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
E
F
G
SCIA4237E
H
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install one-way clutch No.1 into the one-way clutch outer race
sub assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not mistake the direction of one-way clutch No.1.
I
J
K
SCIA4238E
2.
3.
Install thrust washer into 2nd coast brake hub.
NOTE:
● Coat the thrust washer with grease.
● Align the tab of the washer with the hollow of the 2nd coast
brake hub.
Install 2nd coast brake hub into one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
NOTE:
While turning the 2nd coast brake hub, slide it into one-way
clutch outer race sub assembly.
Revision: March 2005
AT-659
L
M
SCIA4236E
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
4.
Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of the
washer with the hollow of the one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
SCIA4235E
INSPECTION
●
Hold one-way clutch outer race sub assembly, and check that
2nd coast brake hub should turn freely clockwise and should
lock counterclockwise.
SCIA4239E
Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake
ECS009JQ
COMPONENTS
SCIA5441E
Revision: March 2005
AT-660
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
1.
Transaxle case cover
2.
Seal ring
3.
O-ring
4.
Return spring
5.
Snap ring
6.
B5 brake piston
7.
Seal ring
8.
Bearing race
9.
U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly
10. Tube clamp
11. Forward clutch accumulator piston
12. Compression spring
13. Accumulator cover
14. O-ring
15. Seal ring
16. B5 brake cushion plate
17. B5 brake plate
18. B5 brake flange
19. Snap ring
20. B5 brake disc
A
B
AT
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove tube clamps.
D
E
F
SCIA5502E
2.
G
Remove U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly, using suitable flat
blade screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the U/D clutch apply tube sub
assembly and transaxle case cover.
H
I
J
SCIA4241E
3.
Remove bearing race and seal rings from transaxle case cover.
K
L
M
WCIA0386E
4.
5.
6.
Remove accumulator cover, compression spring and forward
clutch accumulator piston.
Remove O-ring from the accumulator cover.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Remove seal ring from the forward clutch accumulator piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal ring.
SCIA4243E
Revision: March 2005
AT-661
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
7.
Remove snap ring, using suitable flat blade screwdriver.
SCIA4244E
8.
Remove B5 brake flange, B5 brake discs, B5 brake plates and
B5 brake cushion plate.
SCIA4245E
9.
Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.
Tool number
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation.
10. Remove snap ring, using suitable tool.
SCIA5365E
11. Remove return spring.
SCIA4247E
12. While pushing B5 brake piston by hand, apply compressed air
(4Kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage as shown and remove B5 brake
piston.
SCIA4248E
Revision: March 2005
AT-662
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
13. Remove O-rings from B5 brake piston.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
14. Remove seal ring from transaxle case cover.
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal ring.
A
B
AT
D
SCIA4249E
E
INSPECTION
●
Check that the sliding surface of disc and plate is not worn or burnt. If the disc or plate is worn or burnt,
replace it
NOTE:
Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF.
ASSEMBLY
1.
3.
4.
Install new seal ring in transaxle case cover.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.
● Apply ATF to seal ring.
Install new O-rings in B5 brake piston.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
Coat the inner surface of transaxle case cover with ATF.
Press B5 brake piston into the transaxle case cover.
5.
Place return spring on B5 brake piston.
2.
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA4249E
K
L
M
SCIA4247E
6.
Compress return spring with a press, using Tool.
Tool number
7.
: KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
CAUTION:
Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation.
Install snap ring, using suitable tool.
SCIA5365E
Revision: March 2005
AT-663
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
8.
9.
Install B5 brake cushion plate.
CAUTION:
Be sure direction of B5 brake cushion plate.
Install B5 brake flange, B5 brake plates and B5 brake discs as
shown.
SCIA4245E
10. Install snap ring, using suitable flat blade screwdriver.
SCIA4244E
11. Install new O-ring in accumulator cover.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
12. Install new seal ring in forward clutch accumulator piston.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.
● Apply ATF to seal ring.
13. Install forward clutch accumulator piston, compression spring
and accumulator cover in transaxle case cover.
14. Tighten accumulator cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer
to AT-660, "COMPONENTS" .
SCIA4243E
15. Install new seal rings and bearing race in transaxle case cover.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
● Refer to ASSEMBLY to select proper bearing race.
WCIA0386E
Revision: March 2005
AT-664
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
16. Install the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly, using suitable
soft hammer.
A
B
AT
SCIA4252E
D
17. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-660,
"COMPONENTS" .
E
F
G
SCIA5502E
18. Set a dial indicator as shown.
H
19. When applying compressed air (4kg/cm2 ) into the oil passage
as shown, measure the B5 brake piston stroke and check the B5
brake piston moves smoothly.
Piston stroke
I
:2.34 - 2.70mm (0.0921 - 0.1063in)
If the B5 brake piston stroke is out standards, select another
flange. Refer to AT-696, "B5 BRAKE" .
J
SCIA5503E
Differential Gear Assembly
K
ECS009JR
COMPONENTS
L
M
SCIA4407E
Revision: March 2005
AT-665
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
1.
O-ring
2.
Tapered roller bearing
4.
Tapered roller bearing
5.
O-ring
3.
Differential gear assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove O-rings from differential gear assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse O-rings.
SCIA4408E
2.
Remove tapered roller bearings, using suitable puller and Tool.
Tool number
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
NOTE:
Do not reuse tapered roller bearings.
SCIA5366E
Revision: March 2005
AT-666
2005 Altima
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
[RE5F22A]
ASSEMBLY
1.
A
Install new tapered roller bearings in differential gear assembly,
using Tool.
Tool number
: KV38100500 ( — )
: ST33720000 (J-25405)
B
NOTE:
Do not reuse tapered roller bearings.
AT
D
E
F
G
SCIA5368E
2.
H
Install new O-rings in differential gear assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
I
J
K
SCIA4408E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-667
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
1.
PFP:00000
ECS009JS
Install new differential side oil seal into transaxle case as specified using Tool.
Tool number
Distance
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
: 3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.118 - 0.157 in)
NOTE:
Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
● Apply ATF to differential side oil seal.
●
SCIA5369E
SCIA4473E
2.
Install counter drive gear sub assembly.
SCIA4215E
3.
Install snap ring using a snap ring pliers.
SCIA4214E
Revision: March 2005
AT-668
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
4.
5.
6.
Install new O-rings in 1st and reverse brake piston.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF.
Install 1st and reverse brake piston in transaxle case.
A
B
AT
SCIA4212E
D
7.
Put return spring on 1st and reverse brake piston.
E
F
G
SCIA4210E
8.
Install the snap ring into groove while compressing the return
spring by hand with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
H
I
J
SCIA4209E
9.
Put thrust bearing race and thrust bearing on counter drive gear
sub assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust and thrust bearing race.
K
L
M
SCIA4213E
10. Install FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch
No.2.
SCIA4208E
Revision: March 2005
AT-669
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
11. Install 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake
discs and 1st and reverse brake plates.
SCIA4207E
12. Install snap ring using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA4206E
13. Set a dial indicator as shown.
14. Applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) and measure the 1st and
reverse brake piston stroke.
Piston stroke
: 1.39 - 2.21 mm (0.0547 - 0.0870 in)
In a case that is out of reference, check the following items:
● Oil pressure leak
● Damage of O-ring
● Wear damage of disc
SCIA4258E
15. Install thrust bearing.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing.
SCIA4205E
16. Install planetary gear assembly.
17. Install thrust bearing race in planetary gear assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing race.
SCIA4204E
Revision: March 2005
AT-670
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
18. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in RR
planetary ring gear assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing.
19. Install RR planetary ring gear assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4203E
D
20. Install planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller
bearing.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing.
E
F
G
SCIA5499E
21. Install forward and direct clutch assembly.
22. Install thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and new
seal ring in forward and direct clutch assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse old seal ring.
● Apply ATF to seal ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust
bearing race.
H
I
J
WCIA0384E
K
23. Check the distance of “A”.
Dimension “A”
: 50.850 - 51.825 mm
(2.0020 - 2.0404 in)
L
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust with in standards
again.
M
SCIA4259E
24. Install transaxle lube apply tube using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend and damage transaxle lube apply
tube.
SCIA4260E
Revision: March 2005
AT-671
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
25. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626,
"Components" .
SCIA4199E
26. Install new governor apply gaskets in transaxle case.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse gaskets.
● Apply petroleum jelly to gaskets.
SCIA4198E
27. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case.
SCIA4197E
28. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to
AT-626, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
8
B
45 (1.77)
1
C
48 (1.89)
2
D*
—
1
SCIA4194E
*:Stud bolt
WCIA0340E
Revision: March 2005
AT-672
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
29. Tighten anchor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
A
B
AT
SCIA4193E
30. Install new O-ring in U/D brake piston assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
31. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF.
32. Install compression spring and U/D brake piston assembly.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4192E
H
33. Install new O-rings in U/D brake damper assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
34. Install U/D brake damper assembly.
I
J
SCIA4191E
35. Install snap ring using a snap ring pliers.
CAUTION:
If the snap ring is deformed, replace it.
K
L
M
SCIA4190E
36. Install thrust needle roller bearing adjust shim and thrust bearing
race in U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to adjust shim, thrust needle roller bearing
and thrust bearing race.
37. Install U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly.
WCIA0339E
Revision: March 2005
AT-673
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
38. Install U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing
races.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.
SCIA5505E
39. Install U/D brake band assembly.
SCIA4187E
40. Install U/D clutch assembly.
SCIA4186E
41. Measure the U/D brake piston stroke applying and releasing the
compressed air (4Kg/cm2 ) as shown.
CAUTION:
Measure U/D brake piston stroke after assembling U/D
clutch assembly.
Piston Stroke
: 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661 in)
SCIA4263E
SCIA4625E
Revision: March 2005
AT-674
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
42. If the piston stroke is out of standards, select another U/D brake
piston. Refer to AT-696, "U/D BRAKE" .
A
B
AT
SCIA4264E
D
Adjustment
ECS009JT
ADJUST PRELOAD OF TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
1.
Install adjust shim and outer race in transaxle case using Tool.
Tool number
E
: KV40100621 (J-25273)
: ST30022000 ( — )
F
G
SCIA5370E
2.
3.
H
Install differential gear assembly in transaxle case.
Install transaxle housing into transaxle case.
I
J
K
SCIA4265E
4.
Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Use old self-sealing bolts during preload checking and
adjustment procedures.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
13
B
35 (1.38)
2
C
45 (1.77)
1
D*
—
1
Revision: March 2005
AT-675
L
M
SCIA4267E
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
*:Torx bolt
SCIA5495E
5.
Measure turning torque of differential gear assembly using Tool.
Tool number
6.
: KV40102500 (J-28815)
: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
Turn differential gear assembly in both directions several times
to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque
(New bearing)
: 0.7 - 1.2 N·m
(0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)
If the preload is not within specification, remove differential gear
assembly from transaxle case. Re-select adjust shim. Refer to
AT-697, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS"
.
Assembly (2)
1.
2.
SCIA5371E
ECS009JU
Remove transaxle housing and differential gear assembly from transaxle case.
Install U/D clutch assembly.
SCIA4186E
3.
4.
Install new seal rings in U/D gear assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply ATF to seal rings.
Install U/D gear assembly.
SCIA4185E
Revision: March 2005
AT-676
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
5.
Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in U/D
gear assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust
bearing race.
A
B
AT
WCIA0338E
D
a.
Make sure that measurement ″E″ is within the specifications.
Specification ″E″
: 1.269 - 1.645 mm
(0.0500 - 0.0648 in)
E
F
G
SCIA5452E
H
NOTE:
″E″ is the height between the edge of the transaxle case and the
roller part of thrust needle roller bearing.
I
J
K
SCIA5459E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AT-677
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
b.
c.
If measurement ″E″ is outside the specification, replace ″T″ with
a one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-697, "U/D
GEAR ASSEMBLY" .
CAUTION:
When adjusting ″T″, use ″S″ of thickness 0.81 mm (0.32 in).
If all of ″T″ do not fit ″E″ within the specifications, replace ″S″
with a one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-697, "U/D
RR PLANETARY RING GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY" .
CAUTION:
When adjusting ″S″, use ″T″ of thickness 0.80 mm (0.31 in).
SCIA5488E
d.
Make sure that measurement ″E″ is within specifications.
SCIA5452E
6.
Install new manual valve oil seal into transaxle case until it is
flush with the transaxle case face, using Tool.
Tool number
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
NOTE:
Do not reuse manual valve oil seal.
● Apply ATF to manual valve oil seal.
●
SCIA5486E
7.
8.
Install spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2 in transaxle
case.
Tighten spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2 torx bolt to
specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
SCIA4182E
Revision: March 2005
AT-678
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
9.
Install parking lockpin sub assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4181E
D
10. Install parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl.
E
F
G
WCIA0420E
11. Install parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1.
H
I
J
SCIA4179E
K
12. Install manual detent spring sub assembly.
L
M
SCIA4178E
13. Temporary tightening the bolts.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
16.7 (0.657)
1
B
14.0 (0.551)
1
SCIA4177E
Revision: March 2005
AT-679
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
14. Install parking lock rod sub assembly.
SCIA4176E
15. Install manual valve lever sub assembly connect parking lock
rod sub assembly to it.
SCIA4175E
16. Connect manual detent spring sub assembly to manual valve
lever sub assembly using a flat-bladed screwdriver and.
SCIA4174E
17. Tighten manual detent spring sub assembly bolts to specified
torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
SCIA4550E
Revision: March 2005
AT-680
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
18. Install U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage U/D brake apply tube sub assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4270E
D
19. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626,
"Components" .
E
F
G
SCIA4171E
20. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle case.
21. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" .
H
I
J
SCIA4170E
22. Install oil strainer sub assembly in transaxle case.
23. Tighten oil strainer sub assembly bolt to specified torque. Refer
to AT-626, "Components" .
K
L
M
SCIA4169E
24. Install differential gear assembly.
SCIA4168E
Revision: March 2005
AT-681
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
25. Install new differential side oil seal into transaxle housing as
specified using Tool.
Tool number
Distance
: ST33400001 (J-26082)
: 14.8 - 15.8 mm (0.583 - 0.622 in)
NOTE:
Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
● Apply ATF to differential side oil seal.
●
SCIA5372E
SCIA4474E
26. Install new thrust roller bearing in transaxle housing using Tool.
Tool number
:ST30720000 (J-25405)
NOTE:
Do not reuse thrust roller bearing.
SCIA5373E
27. Install oil cleaner magnets on oil reservoir plate.
SCIA4167E
28. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle housing.
29. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" .
SCIA4166E
Revision: March 2005
AT-682
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
30. Install differential gear lube apply tube using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube
apply tube.
A
B
AT
SCIA4272E
D
31. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-626,
"Components" .
E
F
G
SCIA4164E
32. Install new governor apply gasket.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse governor apply gasket.
● Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gasket.
33. Install new seal ring.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal ring.
● Apply ATF to seal ring.
H
I
J
SCIA4163E
34. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1281B) or equivalent to transaxle housing as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle housing and transaxle case.
L
M
WCIA0529E
35. Install transaxle housing in transaxle case.
SCIA4160E
Revision: March 2005
AT-683
K
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
36. Tighten transaxle housing bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" .
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolt.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
13
B
35 (1.38)
2
C
45 (1.77)
1
D*
—
1
SCIA5495E
*:Torx bolt
37. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush with oil
pump face using Tool.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
NOTE:
Do not reuse oil seal.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.
●
SCIA5364E
38. Install thrust washer and one- way clutch outer race sub assembly in oil pump assembly.
NOTE:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
SCIA4274E
39. Check the distance of “B”.
“B”
: 51.09 - 51.71 mm (2.0114 - 2.0358 in)
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards
again.
SCIA4275E
Revision: March 2005
AT-684
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
40. Place oil pump assembly through the input shaft in horizontal
position, and align the bolt holes of the oil pump assembly with
transaxle case. Lightly press oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop one-way clutch outer race sub
assembly.
A
B
AT
SCIA4276E
D
41. Tighten oil pump assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" .
E
F
G
SCIA4156E
H
I
J
SCIA4157E
K
42. Set a dial indicator as shown, move the input shaft and measure
the end play.
End play
L
: 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.00224 in)
M
SCIA4277E
If end play is out of standards, select another thrust bearing race.
Refer to AT-696, "FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY" .
WCIA0386E
Revision: March 2005
AT-685
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
43. Remove transaxle case cover.
44. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1281B) or equivalent to transaxle case cover as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended
Chemical Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle case cover and transaxle.
WCIA0530E
45. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case.
SCIA4197E
46. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to
AT-626, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse seal bolts.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
30 (1.18)
8
B
45 (1.77)
1
C
48 (1.89)
2
D*
—
1
SCIA4194E
*:Stud bolt
WCIA0340E
47. Install new governor apply gasket.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse governor apply gaskets.
● Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets.
SCIA4154E
Revision: March 2005
AT-686
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
48. Install terminal cord assembly.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to break the solenoid connector and A/T
fluid temperature sensor.
NOTE:
Apply ATF to O-ring.
A
B
AT
WCIA0471E
49. While holding control valve assembly, connect the parking lock
rod sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly.
NOTE:
Shift position is “N”.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4153E
50. Tighten control valve assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer
to AT-626, "Components" .
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
55 (2.17)
2
B
50 (1.97)
2
C
16 (0.63)
2
H
I
J
SCIA4152E
51. Install suction cover and new suction cover gasket in control
valve assembly.
NOTE:
Do not reuse suction cover gasket.
K
L
M
SCIA4149E
52. Tighten new suction cover gasket and suction cover bolts to
specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
SCIA4150E
Revision: March 2005
AT-687
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
53. Install sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor in control
valve assembly.
SCIA4147E
54. Tighten sensor clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626,
"Components" .
SCIA4148E
55. Connect the solenoid connectors.
SCIA4146E
56. Apply Liquid Gasket (Three Bond 1281B) or equivalent to side
cover as shown. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical
Products and Sealants" .
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from side
cover and transaxle case.
WCIA0531E
Revision: March 2005
AT-688
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
57. Install side cover in transaxle case.
A
B
AT
SCIA4143E
58. Tighten side cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" .
NOTE:
Do not reuse seal bolt.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4144E
59. Install new O-rings in ATF cooler assembly.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
60. Install ATF cooler assembly, washer and new spring washer.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse spring washer.
61. Tighten hexagon bolt specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
H
I
J
SCIA4142E
62. Install PNP switch to manual valve lever sub assembly.
63. Temporary tightening the bolts.
Bolt symbol
Length mm (in)
Number of bolts
A
20 (0.79)
1
B
33 (1.30)
1
L
M
SCIA4141E
64. Install washer plate and lock washer.
NOTE:
Do not reuse washer plate and lock washer.
65. Tighten nut specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
SCIA4140E
Revision: March 2005
AT-689
K
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
66. Install Tool.
Tool number
: KV991J0060 (J-45404)
67. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base
line on PNP switch body.
SCIA5374E
68. Tighten PNP switch bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-626,
"Components" .
SCIA4434E
69. Bend the lock washer using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA4139E
70. Install range lever in manual valve lever sub assembly.
71. Tighten range lever nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-626,
"Components" .
SCIA4138E
72. Install turbine revolution sensor in transaxle case.
73. Tighten turbine revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer
to AT-626, "Components" .
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal bolt.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA4137E
Revision: March 2005
AT-690
2005 Altima
ASSEMBLY
[RE5F22A]
74. Install revolution sensor in transaxle case.
75. Tighten revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT626, "Components" .
NOTE:
● Do not reuse seal bolt.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
A
B
AT
SCIA4136E
76. Install new O-ring in A/T fluid charging pipe.
NOTE:
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
77. Install A/T fluid charging pipe in transaxle housing.
78. Install A/T fluid cooler tube.
NOTE:
Do not reuse copper washer.
79. Tighten A/T fluid cooler tube union to specified torque. Refer to
AT-626, "Components" .
80. Install air breather hose.
81. Install A/T fluid level gauge.
D
E
F
G
SCIA4135E
H
82. Install drain plug in transaxle housing.
83. Tighten drain plug to specified torque. Refer to AT-626, "Components" .
NOTE:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
84. Install torque converter.
I
J
K
L
SCIA4134E
85. Check the dimension of “C”.
Dimension “C”
: 14.0 mm (0.55 in)
CAUTION:
If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards
again.
SCIA4279E
Revision: March 2005
AT-691
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
ECS009JV
Engine
VQ35DE
Automatic transaxle model
RE5F22A
Automatic transaxle model code number
9J500
8Y100
Stall torque ratio
1.8: 1
Transaxle gear ratio
1st
4.657
2nd
3.033
3rd
1.982
4th
1.342
5th
1.018
Reverse
5.114
Final drive
2.269
Recommended fluid
Fluid capacity
2.440
Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF*
7.3 (7-3/4, 6-3/8)
(US qt, Imp qt)
CAUTION:
● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF. Do not mix with other fluid.
●
Using automatic transaxle fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF will deteriorate driveability and automatic transaxle durability, and may damage the automatic transaxle, which is not covered by the warranty.
*: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Shift Schedule
ECS009JW
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 9J500 MODELS
Accelerator angle
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
D1 →D2
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
100 %
63
(39)
100
(62)
156
(97)
230
(143)
219
(136)
150
(93)
88
(55)
43
(27)
90 %
63
(39)
100
(62)
156
(97)
230
(143)
219
(136)
150
(93)
88
(55)
43
(27)
80 %
63
(39)
100
(62)
156
(97)
230
(143)
219
(136)
150
(93)
88
(55)
43
(27)
70 %
63
(39)
100
(62)
156
(97)
230
(143)
208
(129)
149
(93)
86
(53)
43
(27)
60 %
63
(39)
100
(62)
156
(97)
230
(143)
201
(125)
143
(89)
80
(50)
43
(27)
50 %
63
(39)
95
(59)
145
(90)
214
(133)
187
(116)
130
(81)
73
(45)
43
(27)
40 %
53
(33)
87
(54)
124
(77)
182
(113)
156
(97)
97
(60)
57
(35)
34
(21)
30 %
39
(24)
68
(42)
95
(59)
134
(83)
112
(70)
62
(39)
37
(23)
20
(12)
20 %
29
(18)
49
(30)
65
(40)
92
(57)
63
(39)
42
(26)
23
(14)
8
(5)
10 %
20
(12)
31
(19)
41
(25)
58
(36)
47
(29)
34
(21)
23
(14)
8
(5)
Revision: March 2005
AT-692
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS - 8Y100 MODELS
A
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
D1 →D2
D2 →D3
D3 →D4
D4 →D5
D5 →D4
D4 →D3
D3 →D2
D2 →D1
100 %
58
(36)
93
(58)
144
(89)
213
(132)
203
(126)
139
(86)
81
(50)
40
(25)
90 %
58
(36)
93
(58)
144
(89)
213
(132)
203
(126)
139
(86)
81
(50)
40
(25)
80 %
58
(36)
93
(58)
144
(89)
213
(132)
203
(126)
139
(86)
81
(50)
40
(25)
70 %
58
(36)
93
(58)
144
(89)
213
(132)
193
(120)
138
(86)
80
(50)
40
(25)
60 %
58
(36)
93
(58)
144
(89)
213
(132)
186
(116)
133
(83)
75
(47)
40
(25)
50 %
58
(36)
88
(55)
135
(84)
199
(124)
173
(108)
121
(75)
68
(42)
40
(25)
40 %
49
(30)
80
(50)
115
(71)
169
(105)
145
(90)
90
(56)
53
(33)
31
(19)
30 %
36
(22)
61
(38)
85
(53)
124
(77)
103
(64)
58
(36)
34
(21)
19
(12)
20 %
27
(17)
43
(27)
58
(36)
86
(53)
59
(37)
39
(24)
22
(14)
8
(5)
10 %
19
(12)
27
(17)
35
(22)
53
(33)
44
(27)
32
(20)
22
(14)
8
(5)
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP- 9J500 MODELS
AT
D
E
F
G
H
I
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
50 %
230 (143)
207 (129)
15%
115 (71)
74 (46)
0-8%
70 (43)
67 (42)
●
Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
●
Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
●
Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
J
K
L
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP
8Y100 MODELS
M
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
Lock-up “ON”
Lock-up “OFF”
50 %
213 (132)
192 (119)
15%
106 (66)
69 (43)
0-8%
65 (40)
62 (39)
●
Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
●
Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
●
Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
Revision: March 2005
B
AT-693
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP - 9J500 MODEL
Accelerator angle
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Gear position
0 - 10 %
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
43 (27)
40 (25)
5th
56 (35)
53 (33)
●
Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
●
Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
●
Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP - 8Y100 MODELS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.)
Accelerator angle
Gear position
0 - 10 %
Slip lock-up “ON”
Slip lock-up “OFF”
4th
40 (25)
37 (23)
5th
52 (32)
49 (30)
●
Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position.
●
Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine.
●
Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances.
Stall Speed
ECS009JX
Stall speed
2,430 - 2,730 rpm
Line Pressure
ECS009JY
Line pressure
Engine speed
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
D, M positions
R position
At idle speed
333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57)
500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88)
At stall speed
1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202)
1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287)
Time Lag
ECS009JZ
Selector lever
Time
N to D position
Less than 0.7 sec.
N to R position
Less than 1.2 sec.
Shift Solenoid Valves
ECS009K0
Shift solenoid valve
Shift position
D
M5
Remarks
A
B
C
D
E
P
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
PARK POSITION
R
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
REVERSE POSITION
N
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
NEUTRAL POSITION
1st
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
1⇔2
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
2nd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
2⇔3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
3rd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
3⇔4
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
4th
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
4⇔5
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
5th
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
5th
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
Revision: March 2005
AT-694
Automatic shift
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5
Locks in 5th gear*
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
Shift solenoid valve
Shift position
Remarks
A
B
C
D
E
A
M4
4th
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
Locks in 4th gear*
M3
3rd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
Locks in 3rd gear*
M2
2nd
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
Locks in 2nd gear*
M1
1st
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
ON (Open)
OFF (Open)
ON (Open)
Locks in 1st gear*
*: Except when automated up/down shift control and up/down shift permission control are actuated. Refer to AT-418, "MANUAL MODE" .
Solenoid Valves
Solenoid valves
Terminal
Shift solenoid valve A
(B)
1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve B
(GY)
1 - Ground
(GY)
1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve D
(L)
1 - Ground
Shift solenoid valve E
(G)
1 - Ground
Pressure control solenoid valve A
(G)
1-2
(B)
1-2
(L)
1-2
Pressure control solenoid valve B
AT
ECS009K1
Connector (Color)
Shift solenoid valve C
B
Resistance (Approx.)
11 - 16 Ω
5.0 - 5.6 Ω
Pressure control solenoid valve C
D
E
F
G
Specified resistance at 20°C (68°F).
Clutch and Brakes
ECS009K2
H
2ND BRAKE
Number of 2nd brake plates
4
Number of 2nd brake discs
4
Number of 2nd brake flange
1
Piston stroke
mm (in)
I
J
1.10 - 1.50 (0.0433 - 0.0591)
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
Thickness of 2nd brake flanges
31537-8Y011
31537-8Y012
31537-8Y013
K
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
L
2ND COAST BRAKE
Number of 2nd coast brake plates
3
Number of 2nd coast brake discs
3
Number of 2nd coast brake flange
1
Piston stroke
mm (in)
Revision: March 2005
M
0.76 - 1.44 (0.0299 - 0.0567)
AT-695
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
B5 BRAKE
Number of B5 brake plates
6
Number of B5 brake discs
6
Number of B5 brake flange
1
Number of B5 brake cushion plate
1
Piston stroke
mm (in)
2.34 - 2.70 (0.0921 - 0.1063)
Thickness
mm (in)
Part number*
5.0 (0.197)
5.1 (0.202)
5.2 (0.205)
5.3 (0.209)
5.5 (0.217)
Thickness of B5 brake flanges
31667-8Y016
31667-8Y017
31667-8Y018
31667-8Y019
31667-8Y020
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE
Number of 1st and reverse brake plates
4
Number of 1st and reverse brake discs
5
Number of 1st and reverse brake flanges
2
Piston stroke
mm (in)
1.39 - 2.21 (0.0547 - 0.0870)
FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
Thickness
mm (in)
0.81 (0.0319)
0.90 (0.0350)
1.00 (0.0400)
1.10 (0.0430)
1.20 (0.0470)
1.30 (0.0510)
1.40 (0.0550)
1.50 (0.0590)
Thickness of thrust washer races
End play mm (in)
Part number*2
31435 8Y060
31435 8Y061
31435 8Y062
31435 8Y063
31435 8Y064
31435 8Y065
31435 8Y066
31435 8Y067
0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.0224)
*2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
U/D BRAKE
Piston type
Mark
A
—
63.7 (2.508)
31615 8Y005
B
1
64.2 (2.528)
31615 8Y004
C
2
64.7 (2.547)
31615 8Y003
D
3
65.2 (2.567)
31615 8Y002
E
4
65.7 (2.587)
31615 8Y001
Piston stroke
Piston length
mm (in)
mm (in)
Part number*
5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
AT-696
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
U/D RR PLANETARY RING GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY
Thickness
mm (in)
0.81 (0.0319)
0.90 (0.0350)
1.00 (0.0400)
1.10 (0.0430)
1.20 (0.0470)
1.30 (0.0510)
1.40 (0.0550)
1.50 (0.0590)
1.60 (0.0630)
Thickness of adjust shims
A
Part number*2
31435 8Y0100
31435 8Y0101
31435 8Y0102
31435 8Y0103
31435 8Y0104
31435 8Y0105
31435 8Y0106
31435 8Y0107
31435 8Y0108
B
AT
D
*2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
U/D GEAR ASSEMBLY
Thickness
mm (in)
0.80 (0.0310)
0.90 (0.0350)
1.00 (0.0400)
1.10 (0.0430)
1.20 (0.0470)
1.30 (0.0510)
1.40 (0.0550)
1.50 (0.0590)
Thickness of thrust washers
E
Part number*2
31435 8Y021
31435 8Y068
31435 8Y069
31435 8Y070
31435 8Y071
31435 8Y072
31435 8Y073
31435 8Y074
F
G
*2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
H
PLANETARY SUN GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY
Inner diameter of planetary sun gear
sub assembly bushing mm (in).
Standard
22.200 - 22.226 (0.8740 - 0.8750)
Allowable limit
22.276 (0.8770)
I
Standard
30.056 - 30.082 (1.1833 - 1.1843)
J
Allowable limit
30.132 (1.1863)
PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
Inner diameter of planetary gear
assembly bushing mm (in).
Final Drive
ECS009K3
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS
Thickness
mm (in)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.05 (0.0413)
1.10 (0.0433)
1.15 (0.0453)
1.20 (0.0472)
1.25 (0.0492)
1.30 (0.0512)
1.33 (0.0524)
1.36 (0.0535)
1.39 (0.0547)
1.42 (0.0559)
1.45 (0.0571)
Part number*
Thickness
31438-8Y001
31438-8Y002
31438-8Y003
31438-8Y004
31438-8Y005
31438-8Y006
31438-8Y007
31438-8Y008
31438-8Y009
31438-8Y010
31438-8Y011
31438-8Y012
mm (in)
1.48 (0.0583)
1.51 (0.0594)
1.54 (0.0606)
1.57 (0.0618)
1.60 (0.0630)
1.65 (0.0650)
1.70 (0.0669)
1.75 (0.0689)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.85 (0.0728)
1.90 (0.0748)
Part number*
31438-8Y013
31438-8Y014
31438-8Y015
31438-8Y016
31438-8Y017
31438-8Y018
31438-8Y019
31438-8Y020
31438-8Y021
31438-8Y022
31438-8Y023
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
TURNING TORQUE
Turning torque of final drive assembly
Revision: March 2005
0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)
AT-697
K
2005 Altima
L
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE5F22A]
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
ECS009K4
Condition
ATF temperature
Voltage (Approx.)
Resistance (Approx.)
0°C (32°F)
4.0V
9.8 kΩ
20°C (68°F)
3.0V
4.2 kΩ
80°C (176°F)
0.8V
0.54 kΩ
100°C (212°F)
0.5V
0.31 kΩ
Turbine Revolution Sensor
ECS009K5
Condition
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body.
Signal
Voltage* (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
*: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance.
Revolution Sensor
ECS009K6
Condition
Signal
Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body.
Voltage* (Approx.)
HIGH
1.2 - 1.6V
LOW
0.4 - 0.8V
*: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance.
Revision: March 2005
AT-698
2005 Altima
J AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
ATC
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4
Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 4
General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 5
A/C Identification Label ............................................ 6
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 6
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT
CONNECTION ...................................................... 6
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7
Precautions for Servicing Compressor ................... 10
Precautions for Service Equipment ........................ 10
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT ............ 10
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ...................... 10
VACUUM PUMP ..................................................11
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .....................................11
SERVICE HOSES ................................................11
SERVICE COUPLERS ........................................ 12
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE ...................... 12
CHARGING CYLINDER ...................................... 12
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12
PREPARATION ......................................................... 13
Special Service Tools ............................................. 13
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 13
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 17
Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 17
REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 17
Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 17
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............. 17
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE .............................. 17
Component Layout ................................................. 18
LUBRICANT ............................................................. 19
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 19
LUBRICANT ........................................................ 19
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 19
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 21
Revision: March 2005
Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System ...... 21
System Construction .............................................. 21
OPERATION ....................................................... 21
TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION
ORDER ............................................................... 22
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ..................................... 22
FAN SPEED CONTROL ..................................... 23
INTAKE DOOR CONTROL ................................. 23
MODE DOOR CONTROL ................................... 23
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 23
Overview of Control system .................................... 23
Control Operation ................................................... 24
AUTO SWITCH ................................................... 25
TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ............................................... 25
FAN AUTO SWITCH ........................................... 25
FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH ..................................... 25
RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH ..................... 25
DEFROSTER SWITCH ....................................... 25
MODE DIAL ......................................................... 25
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 25
Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 26
System Description ................................................. 27
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 27
CAN Communication System Description .............. 27
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 28
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 28
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 28
SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 28
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 29
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 29
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 31
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 32
Wiring Diagram — A/C,A — ................................... 33
Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value... 37
INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL .......... 37
FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ................................... 37
ATC-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE ... 37
Operational Check .................................................. 39
CONDITIONS: ..................................................... 39
PROCEDURE: ..................................................... 39
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control ........................................................................... 41
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 41
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 41
LAN System Circuit ................................................ 42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 43
Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 46
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 46
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 47
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 48
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 48
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 49
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 49
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 50
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 51
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 51
Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 52
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 52
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 53
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 54
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 54
Blower Motor Circuit ............................................... 55
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 55
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 56
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 57
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 57
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 61
Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 62
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 62
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 63
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 63
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 66
Insufficient Cooling ................................................. 67
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 67
PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS .................... 68
PERFORMANCE CHART ................................... 70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL
PRESSURE ......................................................... 70
Insufficient Heating ................................................. 74
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 74
Noise ...................................................................... 75
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 75
Ambient Sensor Circuit ........................................... 76
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 76
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS... 76
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 76
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 78
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit ......................................... 78
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 78
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 79
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 80
Sunload Sensor Circuit ........................................... 81
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 81
SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS ............................. 81
Revision: March 2005
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................81
COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................83
Intake Sensor Circuit ...............................................84
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................84
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................84
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
FRONT AIR CONTROL .......................................87
AMBIENT SENSOR ..................................................88
Removal and Installation .........................................88
REMOVAL ............................................................88
INSTALLATION ....................................................88
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR ..............................................89
Removal and Installation .........................................89
REMOVAL ............................................................89
INSTALLATION ....................................................89
SUNLOAD SENSOR .................................................90
Removal and Installation .........................................90
REMOVAL ............................................................90
INSTALLATION ....................................................90
INTAKE SENSOR ......................................................91
Removal and Installation .........................................91
REMOVAL ............................................................91
INSTALLATION ....................................................91
BLOWER UNIT ..........................................................92
Removal and Installation .........................................92
REMOVAL ............................................................92
INSTALLATION ....................................................92
BLOWER MOTOR .....................................................93
Removal and Installation .........................................93
REMOVAL ............................................................93
INSTALLATION ....................................................93
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................94
Removal and Installation .........................................94
FUNCTION ..........................................................94
REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................94
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................94
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .................95
Removal and Installation .........................................95
REMOVAL ............................................................95
INSTALLATION ....................................................95
HEATER CORE .........................................................96
Removal and Installation .........................................96
REMOVAL ............................................................96
INSTALLATION ....................................................96
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ............................................97
Removal and Installation .........................................97
REMOVAL ............................................................97
INSTALLATION ....................................................97
MODE DOOR MOTOR ..............................................98
Removal and Installation .........................................98
REMOVAL ............................................................98
INSTALLATION ....................................................98
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ...........................................99
Removal and Installation .........................................99
REMOVAL ............................................................99
INSTALLATION ....................................................99
ATC-2
2005 Altima
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER .................................. 100
Removal and Installation ...................................... 100
REMOVAL ......................................................... 100
INSTALLATION ................................................. 100
DUCTS AND GRILLES .......................................... 101
Removal and Installation ...................................... 101
REMOVAL ......................................................... 101
INSTALLATION ................................................. 102
REFRIGERANT LINES ........................................... 103
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ............... 103
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 103
Components ......................................................... 105
Removal and Installation for Compressor —
QR25DE Models .................................................. 107
REMOVAL ......................................................... 107
INSTALLATION ................................................. 107
Removal and Installation for Compressor —
VQ35DE Models .................................................. 108
REMOVAL ......................................................... 108
INSTALLATION ................................................. 108
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch . 108
REMOVAL ......................................................... 108
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................110
INSTALLATION ..................................................110
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 111
BREAK-IN OPERATION .................................... 111
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible
Hose ......................................................................112
REMOVAL ..........................................................112
INSTALLATION ..................................................112
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible
Hose ......................................................................112
REMOVAL ......................................................... 112
INSTALLATION ................................................. 112
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 112
REMOVAL ......................................................... 112
INSTALLATION ................................................. 112
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor .................................................................. 113
REMOVAL ......................................................... 113
INSTALLATION ................................................. 113
Removal and Installation for Condenser .............. 113
REMOVAL ......................................................... 113
INSTALLATION ................................................. 114
Removal and Installation for Evaporator .............. 114
REMOVAL ......................................................... 114
INSTALLATION ................................................. 115
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve ...... 115
REMOVAL ......................................................... 115
INSTALLATION ................................................. 116
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 116
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Leak Detector ....................................................... 116
Dye Injection ......................................................... 116
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 117
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK
DETECTOR ....................................................... 117
CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 118
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 120
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ................ 120
COMPRESSOR ................................................ 120
LUBRICANT ...................................................... 120
REFRIGERANT ................................................. 120
ENGINE IDLING SPEED .................................. 120
BELT TENSION ................................................. 120
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EJS002PJ
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
EJS002PK
WARNING:
●
CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To
determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant
Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier.
●
Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
●
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed:
–
When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
–
When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
–
Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
–
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a)
recycling equipment], If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming
service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
–
Do not allow A/C lubricant to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
Contaminated Refrigerant
EJS002PL
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
●
Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
●
Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply.
●
Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
●
If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility
Revision: March 2005
ATC-4
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
●
does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In
addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN
Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precautions
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
B
EJS002PM
WARNING:
●
Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
●
Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or
air conditioning system.
●
Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
●
Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
●
Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
●
Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
●
Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
●
Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
●
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
EJS002PN
The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet
I
(UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
ATC
A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal
should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a K
future service.
Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period
L
of time cannot be removed .
Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
M
Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and HC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in R-12 A/C systems or HC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure
occurs.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-5
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
A/C Identification Label
EJS002PO
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification
label on the underside of hood.
WJIA0713E
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection
EJS002PP
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
●
Expansion valve to cooling unit
●
Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit)
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
●
●
The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of
the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing
characteristics.
The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections.
SHA815E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-6
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A
QR25DE
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0981E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-7
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
VQ35DE
WJIA0982E
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or
around, the connection.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-8
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
O-ring
size
Part number*
D
New
8
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
Former
10
J2476 89956
9.25 (0.3642)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
Former
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.091)
New
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
92195 AH300
21.8 (0.858)
2.4 (0.094)
New
12
Former
New
SHA814E
A
Connection type
16
19
Former
New
24
mm (in)
W
mm (in)
B
C
D
E
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
WARNING:
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is F
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
G
●
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber.
●
When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
H
●
After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
●
When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
I
connection.
●
Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
ATC
●
Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
●
Always replace used O-rings.
●
When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not K
to apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Lubricant name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
L
●
O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
●
When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
●
Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that M
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-9
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
●
After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
RHA861F
Precautions for Servicing Compressor
●
●
●
●
●
●
EJS002PQ
Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" .
Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both
directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is
installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour.
After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal
operation. [Gap between clutch disc and pulley is 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)]
Precautions for Service Equipment
EJS002PR
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any
refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-10
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
VACUUM PUMP
A
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into
the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off
after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
●
Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of
the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the
pump.
●
For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate
the hose from the pump.
●
If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose
from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is
open and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
B
C
D
E
F
G
RHA270D
H
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Make sure
the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service
hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant.
I
ATC
K
SHA533D
SERVICE HOSES
L
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite the manifold gauge.
M
RHA272D
Revision: March 2005
ATC-11
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
SERVICE COUPLERS
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified
lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME.
RHA274D
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EJS002PS
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-12
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EJS002PT
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
—
(J-38873-A)
Drive plate installer
Installing pulley and drive plate
C
D
E
WJIA0367E
KV99233130
(J-29884)
Pulley puller
Removing pulley
F
G
LHA172
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment
EJS002PU
H
Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant.
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubriI
cant.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
ATC
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will
occur and compressor failure will result.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
( — )
Refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
●
K
large container 1/2 in -16 ACME
S-NT196
KLH00-PAGS0
( — )
Genuine NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS
Type: Poly alkaline glycol oil (PAG),
type DH-PS
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) vane
rotary compressors (NISSAN only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp
fl oz)
S-NT197
K991J0130
(ACR2005-NI)
ACR A/C Service Center
Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
WJIA0293E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-13
2005 Altima
L
M
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector
Power supply:
●
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
AHA281A
—
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety
goggles
(J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447) qty. 24
HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant
dye
(J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner
Power supply:
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
ZHA200H
—
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak detector
Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal)
For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles
SHA438F
—
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a)
PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after
charging system with dye.)
SHA439F
—
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle
For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent
leak detection dye into A/C system.
SHA440F
—
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills.
SHA441F
Revision: March 2005
ATC-14
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses
and couplers)
Identification:
A
●
The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size: Thread size
●
1/2 in -16 ACME
B
C
D
RJIA0196E
Service hoses
●
(J-39500-72B)
High side hose
●
(J-39500-72R)
Low side hose
●
(J-39500-72Y)
Utility hose
S-NT201
(J-39500-20A)
High side coupler
●
(J-39500-24A)
Low side coupler
●
Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
●
High side hose: Red with black stripe
●
Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
●
1/2 in -16 ACME
F
G
Hose fitting to service hose:
Service couplers
●
E
Hose color:
●
M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.
H
I
S-NT202
—
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)
Capacity:
●
Air displacement: 4 CFM
●
Micron rating: 20 microns
●
Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size: Thread size
●
1/2 in -16 ACME
ATC
K
S-NT203
Commercial Service Tools
EJS002PV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-15
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
J-41810-NI
Refrigerant identifier equipment
HFC 134a (R-134a)
Checking refrigerant purity and system
contamination
RJIA0197E
Power tool
Removing bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
J-44614
Clutch disc holding tool
Holding clutch disc for removal and installation
WHA230
Revision: March 2005
ATC-16
2005 Altima
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Refrigerant Cycle
PFP:KA990
A
EJS002PW
REFRIGERANT FLOW
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil is
controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case.
Refrigerant System Protection
EJS002PX
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the ECM.
The ECM then ceases to supply power to the A/C relay which disengages and stops the compressor when
pressure on the high pressure side (as detected by refrigerant pressure sensor) is over approximately 2,746
kPa (28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below approximately 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2 , 17.4 psi).
B
C
D
E
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor.
When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 3,727 kPa (38 kg/
cm2 , 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into
the atmosphere.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
LJIA0015E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-17
2005 Altima
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Component Layout
EJS002PY
WJIA0979E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-18
2005 Altima
LUBRICANT
LUBRICANT
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
PFP:KLG00
A
EJS002PZ
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain
the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
●
Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
●
Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
B
C
LUBRICANT
Lubricant type
Part number
D
: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent
: KLH00-PAGS0
E
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation.
Start the engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
●
Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
●
A/C switch: On
●
Blower speed: Max. position
●
Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
●
Intake position: Recirculation (
)
●
Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the following table.
F
G
H
I
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system.
ATC
Amount of Lubricant to be Added
Lubricant to be added to system
Part replaced
m
Amount of lubricant
(US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
K
Remarks
Evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not replaced.
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *1
In case of refrigerant leak
●
*1:
L
M
If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed.
Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" .
Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" .
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into
the recovery/recycling equipment.
Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the
amount of lubricant drained.
Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-19
2005 Altima
LUBRICANT
7.
8.
9.
Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this
lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant
to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant
at this time.
CAUTION:
Do not add the 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor and
not the liquid tank.
RHA065DD
Revision: March 2005
ATC-20
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System
PFP:27500
A
EJS002Q0
The LAN (local area network) system consists of front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and
mode door motor.
A configuration of these components is shown in the diagram below.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0876E
System Construction
EJS002Q1
F
A small network is constructed between the front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and mode
door motor. The front air control and motors are connected by data transmission lines and motor power supply
G
lines. The LAN network is built through the ground circuits of the two motors.
Addresses, motor opening angle signals, motor stop signals and error checking messages are all transmitted
through the data transmission lines connecting the front air control and each motor.
The following functions are contained in LCUs built into the air mix door motor, intake door motor, and the H
mode door motor.
●
Address
●
Motor opening angle signals
I
●
Data transmission
●
Motor stop and drive decision
ATC
●
Opening angle sensor (PBR function)
●
Comparison
●
Decision (front air control indicated value and motor opening angle comparison)
K
L
M
WJIA0877E
OPERATION
The front air control receives data from each of the sensors. It then sends air mix door, mode door and intake
door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subse-
Revision: March 2005
ATC-21
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
quently, HOT/COLD, DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection
data is returned to the front air control.
WJIA0878E
TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER
Front air control data is transmitted consecutively to each of the door motors following the form shown in figure
below.
Start: Initial compulsory signal sent to each of the door motors.
Address: Data sent from the front air control is selected according to data-based decisions made by the air mix
door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor.
If the addresses are identical, the opening angle data and error check signals are received by the door motor
LCUs. The LCUs then make the appropriate error decision. If the opening angle data is normal, door control
begins.
If an error exists, the received data is rejected and corrected data received. Finally, door control is based upon
the corrected opening angle data.
Opening angle: Data that shows the indicated door opening angle of each door motor.
Error check: Procedure by which sent and received data is checked for errors. Error data is then compiled.
The error check prevents corrupted data from being used by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and
intake door motor. Error data can be related to the following problems.
●
Abnormal electrical frequency
●
Poor electrical connections
●
Signal leakage from transmission lines
●
Signal level fluctuation
Stop signal: At the end of each transmission, a stop operation, in-operation, or internal problem message is
delivered to the front air control. This completes one data transmission and control cycle.
WJIA0882E
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
The air mix door is automatically controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is maintained at a predetermined
value by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature and amount of sunload.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-22
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
FAN SPEED CONTROL
Blower speed is automatically controlled based on temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and air mix door position.
With fan switch set to AUTO, the blower motor starts to gradually increase air flow volume.
When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing.
A
B
INTAKE DOOR CONTROL
The intake door is automatically controlled by the: temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and ON-OFF operation of the compressor.
MODE DOOR CONTROL
The mode door is automatically controlled by the: temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature and amount of sunload.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
WJIA0879E
The ECM controls compressor operation using input signals from the throttle position sensor and front air control.
Overview of Control system
EJS002Q2
K
L
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control and outputs.
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-23
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
The relationship of these components is shown in the diagram below:
WJIA0880E
Control Operation
EJS002Q3
WJIA0875E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-24
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
AUTO SWITCH
The compressor, intake door, air mix door, mode door and blower speed are automatically controlled so that
the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator.
TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
A
B
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
FAN AUTO SWITCH
Automatically controls the blower speed.
C
FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH
Manually controls the blower speed.
In the off position, the compressor and blower are OFF, the intake door is set to the outside air position, and
the air mode doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position.
RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH
D
E
OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
DEFROSTER SWITCH
F
Positions the air mode doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
The compressor remains ON until the ignition is turned OFF.
G
MODE DIAL
Controls the air discharge through control of mode door.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
H
This switch turns the rear window defogger ON and OFF.
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-25
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Discharge Air Flow
EJS002Q4
WJIA1185E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-26
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
System Description
EJS002Q5
A
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
B
C
D
E
F
RHA044GA
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0760E
CAN Communication System Description
EJS002Q6
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
ATC-27
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00004
EJS002Q7
WORK FLOW
SHA900E
*1: ATC-39
SYMPTOM TABLE
Reference
Page
Symptom
●
A/C system does not come on.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C system.
ATC-41
●
Air outlet does not change.
●
Mode door motor does not operate normally.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. (LAN)
ATC-46
●
Discharge air temperature does not
change.
●
Air mix door motor does not operate normally.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. (LAN)
ATC-49
●
Intake door does not change.
●
Intake door motor does not operate normally.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. (LAN)
ATC-52
●
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor.
ATC-55
●
Magnet clutch does not engage.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
ATC-62
●
Insufficient cooling.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
ATC-67
●
Insufficient heating.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
ATC-74
●
Noise.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
ATC-75
Revision: March 2005
ATC-28
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EJS002Q8
A
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
QR25DE Models
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0136E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-29
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
VQ35DE Model
WJIA0137E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-30
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA1556E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-31
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram
EJS002Q9
WJWA0129E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-32
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — A/C,A —
EJS002QA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJWA0130E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-33
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0274E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-34
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJWA0132E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-35
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0133E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-36
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value
EJS002QB
A
INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL
●
Measure voltage between each terminal and body ground by following “FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE”. Refer to
ATC-37, "FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE" .
B
C
D
WJIA0762E
FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
E
F
G
H
WJIA0020E
FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Item
1
G
2
3
4
I
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Power supply for IGN
—
12
Y/R
Power supply for BAT
—
12
B
Ground
—
0
G/Y
Compressor ON signal
Ignition
switch
—
Compressor
ON
0
OFF
5
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-37
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Item
5
L/R
8
Ignition
switch
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Power supply for mode door
motor, intake door motor, and
air mix door motor
—
12
LG
In-vehicle sensor
—
0-5
9
OR/B
Ambient sensor
—
0-5
10
OR
Sunload sensor
—
0-5
11
R/Y
Light (-)
—
0
12
R/L
Light (+)
15
L/B
A/C LAN signal
17
L/Y
Fan control AMP. control signal
Lighting
switch
19
L/W
Fan ON signal
20
W/L
Power supply for IGN
21
G/W
Water temperature sensor
22
GY
Rear defrost ON signal
1st position
12
5.5
Any speed except high
2.5 - 3
High
9.- 10
Low
7.0 - 10.0
ON
0
OFF
5
Blower motor feed back
L/W
0
—
Fan speed
18
OFF
Fan
—
12
—
—
Defroster
switch
ON
0
OFF
5
24
B/Y
Sensor ground
—
0
25
R/W
Intake sensor
—
0-5
28
G/R
Power supply for A/C ON signal
30
B
Revision: March 2005
A/C PD cut
—
ATC-38
ON
4.6
OFF
0
—
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operational Check
EJS002QC
A
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
CONDITIONS:
●
Engine running and at normal operating temperature.
B
PROCEDURE:
1. Check Blower
C
1.
2.
Turn fan dial clockwise, blower should operate on low speed.
Continue turning fan dial clockwise, and continue checking
blower speeds until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on HI speed.
If NG, go to ATC-55, "Blower Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
D
E
F
WJIA0773E
2. Check Discharge Air
1.
Turn mode switch clockwise five positions.
G
H
I
WJIA0774E
2.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table.
Refer to ATC-26, "Discharge Air Flow" .
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (audio or visual
inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF
K
L
is selected.
Intake door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to ATC-46, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
M
RHA654F
3. Check Recirculation
1.
Press REC
Revision: March 2005
ATC
switch.
ATC-39
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Press REC
switch a second time.
3. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound change slightly).
If NG, go to ATC-52, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
4. Check Temperature Decrease
1. Turn the temperature dial counterclockwise to "60".
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to ATC-67, "Insufficient Cooling" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA0775E
5. Check Temperature Increase
1. Turn the temperature dial clockwise to "90".
2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to ATC-74, "Insufficient Heating" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA0772E
6. Check AUTO Mode
1.
2.
Turn mode dial to AUTO position.
Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (audio or visual
inspection).
(Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, invehicle and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to ATC-41, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" , then if necessary, ATC-62, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" .
If all operational checks are OK (symptom can not be duplicated), go
to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving condition
environment. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-28, "SYMPTOM
TABLE" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-40
WJIA0774E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control
EJS002QD
A
SYMPTOM:
●
A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0881E
*1: ATC-41
*2: ATC-39
G
*3: ATC-41
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
FRONT AIR CONTROL
H
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes
information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner
operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door
motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
Signals from various switches and Potentio Temperature Control
(PTC) are directly entered into front air control.
I
ATC
K
WJIA0762E
L
POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL (PTC)
The PTC is built into the front air control.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
M
SYMPTOM:
●
A/C system does not come on.
WJIA0793E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-41
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect front air control connector M49.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminals 1 (G), 2 (Y/R), and 20 (W/L), and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire colors
M49-1
G
M49-2
Y/R
M49-20
W/L
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
WJIA1192E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [Nos. 12 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11,
located in the fuse block (J/B)].
● If fuses are OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary.
● If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as
necessary.
2. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front air control connector M49 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Continuity
(-)
Connector - Terminal
Wire colors
M49-3
B
Body ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> ● Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT
AIR CONTROL" .
● Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WJIA1186E
LAN System Circuit
EJS002QE
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor do not operate normally.
WJIA0883E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-42
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR MOTORS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal
5 (L/R) and ground.
B
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-5
L/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR
CONTROL" .
C
D
WJIA1187E
2. CHECK SIGNAL FOR DOOR MOTORS
E
F
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 15
(L/B) and ground.
G
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
5.5V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-15
L/B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR
CONTROL" .
H
I
WJIA1196E
ATC
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MOTOR
Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 1
(L/R) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground, and between intake door motor connector
M58 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground.
K
L
Terminals
(+)
Door motors
Connector Terminal
wire colors
Mode
M40-1
L/R
Air mix
M39-1
L/R
Intake
M58-1
L/R
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
M
WJIA0038E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-43
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK SIGNAL FOR MOTOR
Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 3
(L/B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground, and between intake door motor connector
M58 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Door motors
(-)
Connector Terminal
wire colors
Mode
M40-3
L/B
Air mix
M39-3
L/B
Intake
M58-3
L/B
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body
ground
5.5V
WJIA1188E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
5. CHECK MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door motor connectors.
Check continuity between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 2 (B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector
M39 terminal 2 (B) and ground, and between intake door motor
connector M58 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Door motors
(-)
Connector Terminal
wire colors
Mode
M40-2
B
Air mix
M39-2
B
Intake
M58-2
B
Continuity
Body ground
Yes
WJIA0884E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
6. CHECK MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect and reconnect the motor connectors and confirm the motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Returns to normal operation.)
● Motor connector contacts dirty or damaged
NG
>> (Does not operate normally.)
● GO TO 7.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-44
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7. CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
A
1.
2.
Disconnect the intake door motor connector.
Reconnect the mode door motor connector and air mix door motor connector, confirm the mode door
motor and air mix door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor operate normally.)
● Replace the intake door motor. refer to ATC-97, "Removal and Installation"
NG
>> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor do not operate normally.)
● GO TO 8.
B
C
D
8. CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
1.
2.
Disconnect mode door motor connector.
Reconnect the intake door motor connector, confirm the air mix door motor and intake door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor operate normally.)
● Replace mode door motor. Refer toATC-98, "Removal and Installation"
NG
>> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor do not operate normally.)
● GO TO 9.
9. CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR AND MODE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
E
F
G
H
1. Disconnect air mix door motor connector.
2. Reconnect mode door motor connector, confirm the intake door motor and mode door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Intake door motor and mode door motor operate normally.)
● Replace air mix door motor. refer to ATC-99, "Removal and Installation"
NG
>> (Intake door motor and mode door motor do not operate normally.)
● Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" .
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-45
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Mode Door Motor Circuit
EJS002QF
SYMPTOM:
●
Air outlet does not change.
●
Mode door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1648E
*1
ATC-26, "Discharge Air Flow"
*5
ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit"
*9
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*2
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*6
ATC-84, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
*10
ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
*3
ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
*7
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*4
ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
*8
ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-46
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
A
Mode door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Mode door motor (LCU)
●
In-vehicle sensor
●
Ambient sensor
●
Sunload sensor
●
Intake sensor
B
C
D
System Operation
The front air control receives data from each of the sensors. The front air control sends air mix door, mode
door and intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door
motor LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCU's in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new
selection data is returned to the front air control.
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA0843E
Mode Door Control Specification
M
WJIA0886E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-47
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It
rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the front air
control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode
door.
WJIA0042E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor and/or air mix door motor does not operate normally.
Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" .
Revision: March 2005
ATC-48
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
EJS002QG
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Discharge air temperature does not change.
●
Air mix door motor does not operate.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0840E
*1
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*6
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*2
ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
*7
ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit"
*3
ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
*8
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*4
ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit"
*9
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*5
ATC-52, "Intake Door Motor Circuit"
*10
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-49
*11
ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Air mix door motor (LCU)
●
In-vehicle sensor
●
Ambient sensor
●
Sunload sensor
●
Intake sensor
System Operation
The front air control receives data from each of the sensors. The amplifier sends air mix door, mode door and
intake door motor opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door
motor LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new
selection data is returned to the front air control.
WJIA0841E
Air Mix Door Control Specification
WJIA0887E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-50
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motor
A
The air mix door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It
rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set
by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a
shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air
control by PBR built-in air mix door motor.
B
C
D
WJIA0044E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
E
SYMPTOM: Discharge air temperature does not change.
Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" .
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-51
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Door Motor Circuit
EJS002QH
SYMPTOM:
●
Intake door does not change.
●
Intake door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1643E
*1
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*5
ATC-84, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
*2
ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
*6
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*3
ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
*7
ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit"
*4
ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit"
*8
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-52
*9
ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
A
Intake door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Intake door motor
●
A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode motor and air mix door motor)
●
In-vehicle sensor
●
Ambient sensor
●
Sunload sensor
●
Intake sensor
B
C
D
System Operation
The intake door control determines intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the front air control is set to DEFROST, or OFF, the front air
control sets the intake door at the fresh position.
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
WJIA0806E
Intake Door Control Specification
L
M
WJIA0888E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-53
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that
air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is
conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Door position is
then fed back to the front air control by PBR built-in air mix door
motor.
WJIA0047E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Intake door motor does not operate normally.
Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit" .
Revision: March 2005
ATC-54
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Blower Motor Circuit
EJS002QI
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA1642E
*1
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*4
ATC-89, "IN-VEHICLE SENSOR",
see NO.7
*7
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*2
ATC-55, "Blower Motor Circuit", see
No.1
*5
ATC-90, "SUNLOAD SENSOR", see
NO.8
*8
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*3
ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit",
see No.6
*6
ATC-91, "INTAKE SENSOR"
*9
ATC-87, "FRONT AIR CONTROL"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-55
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Fan speed control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
A/C LAN system (PBR built-in mode door motor, air mix door motor and intake door motor)
●
In-vehicle sensor
●
Ambient sensor
●
Sunload sensor
●
Intake sensor
●
Fan control amp.
System Operation
WJIA0845E
Automatic Mode
In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control based on inputs from the
PBR, in-vehicle sensor, sunload sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor.
When the air flow is increased, the duty ratio of the blower fan motor's drive signal is changed at 8% sec. to
prevent a sudden increase in air flow.
In addition to manual air flow control and the normal automatic air flow control, starting air flow control, low
water temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting control are available.
Starting Fan Speed Control
Start Up From COLD SOAK Condition (Automatic mode)
In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 56°C (133°F), the blower will not
operate for a short period of time (up to 150 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the
ambient and engine coolant temperature.
In the most extreme case (very low ambient) the blower starting delay will be 150 seconds as described
above. After this delay, the blower will operate at low speed until the engine coolant temperature rises above
56°C (133°F), at which time the blower speed will increase to the objective speed.
Start Up From Normal or HOT SOAK Condition (Automatic mode)
The blower will begin operation momentarily after the A/C button is pushed. The blower speed will gradually
rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective
blower speed).
Blower Speed Compensation
Sunload
Revision: March 2005
ATC-56
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low
speed. The low speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of high sunload, the blower low
speed is "normal" low speed (approx. 6V). During low or no sunload conditions, the low speed will drop to
"low" low speed (approx. 5V).
A
Fan Speed Control Specification
B
C
D
WJIA0889E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Fan Control Amplifier
E
F
The fan control amplifier is located on the cooling unit. The fan control amp. receives a gate voltage from the front air control to
smoothly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 5 to the 12V
range (approx.).
G
H
I
WJIA0049E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
ATC
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under Starting
Fan Speed Control.
K
L
M
WJIA0846E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-57
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect fan control amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 3 (L/W) and ground.
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M64-3
L/W
WJIA0855E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
2. CHECK FAN FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 (L/W) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-18
L/W
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary.
WJIA1190E
3. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
Terminal
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M64-1
B
Continuity
Body ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Reconnect fan control amp. harness connector and GO
TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-58
WJIA0856E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn fan dial to any position except OFF or AUTO.
Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 2 L/Y and ground.
B
Terminal
C
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M64-2
L/Y
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace fan control amp.
2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
D
WJIA0847E
E
5. CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP. CIRCUIT BETWEEN FAN CONTROL AMP. AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control and fan control amp. harness connectors.
Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 2 (L/Y) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 17 (L/Y).
F
G
H
4.
Terminals
Connector Terminal
M64-2
Continuity
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
L/Y
M49-17
L/Y
I
Yes
WJIA0848E
ATC
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-59
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 2 (Y/R) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-2
Y/R
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal
and Installation" .
2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal.
NG
>> ● Check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace an necessary.
WJIA1197E
7. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition OFF.
Disconnect blower motor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between blower motor harness connector M62
terminal 1 (W/L) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M62-1
W/L
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and
11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
● If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-60
WJIA0056E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between blower motor harness connector M62
terminal 2 (L/W) and fan control amp. harness connector M64
terminal 3 (L/W).
B
C
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M62-2
L/W
M64-3
L/W
Continuity
D
Yes
WJIA0857E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check blower motor. Refer to ATC-61, "Blower Motor" .
1. If NG, replace blower motor.
2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
E
F
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Blower Motor
G
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
●
Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
H
I
ATC
WJIA0059E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-61
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Magnet Clutch Circuit
EJS002QJ
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA0852E
*1
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*5
ATC-84, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
*2
ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit"
*6
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *10 ATC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
*3
ATC-78, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit"
*7
ATC-62, "Magnet Clutch Circuit"
*4
ATC-81, "Sunload Sensor Circuit"
*8
ATC-70, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-62
*9
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
Front air control controls compressor operation by ambient temperature and signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control
Front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined
by a signal detected by ambient sensor.
When ambient temperature is greater than -2°C (28°F), the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when ambient temperature is less than -5°C (23°F).
B
C
D
RHA094GB
E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA0854E
1. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY IN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR
1.
2.
M
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E124 and compressor connector.
Check continuity between compressor harness connector F3
terminal 1 (Y/B) and IPDM E/R harness connector E124 terminal 33 (Y/B).
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
F3-1
Y/B
E124-33
Y/B
Yes
WJIA0722E
If OK, check harness for short to ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-63
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
Start engine and press A/C switch.
Check voltage between compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B) and ground.
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
F3-1
Y/B
WJIA0063E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check magnet clutch coil.
1. If NG, replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor
Clutch" .
2. If OK, check compressor mounting points for looseness or corrosion and repair as necessary.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUSE IN IPDM E/R
Check 10A fuse [No. 33 located at the IPDM E/R].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace fuse and check IPDM E/R for short circuit. Replace if necessary.
4. CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector M18 and front air control connectors M49 and M50.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 9 (GY), 27 (G/Y), 28 (L/W) and front air
control connector M50 terminal 22 (GY), and M49 terminals 4 (G/Y), 19 (L/W).
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M18-9
GY
M50-22
GY
M18-27
G/Y
M49-4
G/Y
M18-28
L/W
M49-19
L/W
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
WJIA1198E
ATC-64
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
A
Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70
(W) and ground.
B
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector- Terminal
F54-70
Wire color
W
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> 1. Repair harness or connector.
2. Confirm that magnet clutch operation is normal.
C
D
WJIA0748E
E
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to ATC-66, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to ATC-113, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant
Pressure Sensor"
7. CHECK COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL
Terminal
(-)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-4
G/Y
G
H
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 4
(G/Y) and ground, with A/C compressor ON and with A/C compressor OFF.
(+)
F
Body ground
I
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ATC
Compressor ON:
0V
Compressor
OFF: 5V
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> ● When compressor is ON and voltage is not approx. 0V, Replace front air control. Refer to ATC87, "Removal and Installation" .
● When compressor is OFF and voltage is not approx. 5V, BCM is malfunctioning.
WJIA0859E
M
8. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
Check CAN communication circuits between BCM to ECM and between ECM to IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-21,
"CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> ECM malfunctioning.
NG
>> Repair or replace component based on the result of diagnosis.
Revision: March 2005
L
ATC-65
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the condenser.
●
Refer to ATC-17, "Refrigerant pressure sensor" .
BBIA0027E
●
Make sure that the A/C refrigerant pressure and the sensor output voltage are within the specified range as shown in the A/C
operating condition figure.
SHA315F
Revision: March 2005
ATC-66
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Cooling
EJS002QK
A
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA1195E
*1
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*3
ATC-70, "Test Reading"
*5
ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant"
*2
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*4
EC-1327, "Component Description"
*6
ATC-68, "PERFORMANCE TEST
ANALYSIS"
*7
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR)
EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts"
(VQ)
Revision: March 2005
ATC-67
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS
WJIA0198E
*1
ATC-70, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *3
*2
ATC-70, "PERFORMANCE CHART"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-70, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE"
ATC-68
*4
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0749E
*1
ATC-110, "INSTALLATION"
*4
ATC-93, "Removal and Installation"
Revision: March 2005
*2
ATC-55, "Blower Motor Circuit"
ATC-69
*3
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR)
EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ)
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Door windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode switch
(Ventilation) set
Intake switch
(Recirculation) set
Max. speed set
(blower) speed
Engine speed
Idle speed
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator
°C (°F)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
50 - 60
60 - 70
25 (77)
10.0 - 12.3 (50 - 54)
30 (86)
13.2 - 15.3 (56 - 60)
35 (95)
17.2 - 21.0 (63 - 70)
25 (77)
12.3 - 14.9 (54 - 59)
30 (86)
15.3 - 19.3 (60 - 67)
35 (95)
21.0 - 24.4 (70 - 76)
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
50 - 70
Air temperature
°C (°F)
High-pressure (Discharge side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
30 (86)
1,220 - 1,500
(12.44 - 15.30, 176.9 - 217.5)
240 - 295
(2.45 - 3.01, 34.8 - 42.8)
35 (95)
1,360 - 1,690
(13.87 - 17.24, 197.2 - 245.1)
275 - 335
(2.81 - 3.42, 39.9 - 48.6)
40 (104)
1,500 - 1,830
(12.44 - 18.67, 176.9 - 265.4)
310 - 375
(3.16 - 3.83, 45.0 - 54.4)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE
Whenever system's high and/or low side pressure is abnormal, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (normal) pressure range. Since the standard (normal) pressure differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure
Table above.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-70
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Pressure is reduced soon after
water is splashed on condenser.
Excessive refrigerant charge in
refrigeration cycle
Air suction by cooling fan is
insufficient.
Insufficient condenser cooling
performance
↓
1. Condenser fins are clogged.
Corrective action
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
●
Clean condenser.
●
Check and repair cooling fan
as necessary.
2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan
●
Both high and low-pressure
sides are too high.
●
Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
When compressor is stopped
high-pressure value quickly
drops by approximately 196
kPa (2 kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It
then decreases gradually
thereafter.
Engine tends to overheat.
AC359A
●
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas
near the evaporator outlet.
●
Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
Evacuate repeatedly and
recharge system.
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair each engine
cooling system.
Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side
●
Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
●
Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification.
B
C
D
Poor heat exchange in condenser
(After compressor operation
stops, high pressure decreases
too slowly.)
↓
Air in refrigeration cycle
●
A
E
F
G
H
Replace expansion valve.
I
↓
1. Improper thermal valve
installation
ATC
2. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
K
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
L
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts
located between compressor
and condenser are clogged or
crushed.
●
Check and repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
AC360A
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
AC356A
Revision: March 2005
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings
Replace compressor.
No temperature difference
between high and low-pressure sides
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
packings.
Replace compressor.
ATC-71
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
●
There is a big temperature
difference between receiver
drier outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
●
Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted.
●
Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
●
●
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
Probable cause
Liquid tank inside is slightly
clogged.
High-pressure pipe located
between receiver drier and
expansion valve is clogged.
Corrective action
●
Replace desiccant assembly.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
●
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
Temperature difference
occurs somewhere in highpressure side
Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
AC353A
There is a big temperature difference between expansion
valve inlet and outlet while the
valve itself is frosted.
Low refrigerant charge
↓
Leaking fittings or components
Check refrigerant for leaks.
Refer to Checking Refrigerant
Leaks, ATC-116, "Checking for
Refrigerant Leaks" and ATC117, "Electronic Refrigerant
Leak Detector" .
Expansion valve closes a little
compared with the specification.
↓
●
1. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
Remove foreign particles by
using compressed air.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
●
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
●
Check thermo control amp.
and intake sensor operation.
●
Replace compressor.
2. Malfunctioning thermal
valve
3. Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas near
the evaporator outlet.
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
or crushed.
Air flow volume is not enough
or is too low.
Evaporator is frozen.
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side sometimes
becomes negative.
Refrigerant cycle
●
●
Air conditioning system
does not function and does
not cyclically cool the compartment air.
The system constantly functions for a certain period of
time after compressor is
stopped and restarted.
Probable cause
Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically.
↓
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
↓
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
Corrective action
●
Drain water from refrigerant
or replace refrigerant.
●
Replace desiccant assembly.
AC354A
Revision: March 2005
ATC-72
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
Leave the system at rest until
no frost is present. Start it
again to check whether or not
the problem is caused by
water or foreign particles.
●
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
Liquid tank or front/rear side of
expansion valve's pipe is
frosted or dewed.
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
↓
Expansion valve or liquid tank
is frosted.
AC362A
●
If water is the cause, initially
cooling is okay. Then the
water freezes causing a
blockage. Drain water from
refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
If due to foreign particles,
remove expansion valve
and remove the particles
with dry and compressed air
(not shop air).
●
If either of the above methods cannot correct the problem, replace expansion
valve.
●
Replace desiccant assembly.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-73
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Heating
EJS002QL
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1649E
*1
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
*4
ATC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
*2
MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant"
*5
CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING"
*3
CO-9, "CHECKING RADIATOR
CAP"
*6
ATC-42, "LAN System Circuit"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-74
*7
MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Noise
EJS002QM
A
SYMPTOM: Noise
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
SHA331F
Revision: March 2005
ATC-75
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*1
ATC-108, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*3
ATC-19, "LUBRICANT"
*2
ATC-108, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*4
ATC-39, "Operational Check"
Ambient Sensor Circuit
*5
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR)
EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts"
(VQ)
EJS002QN
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached to the front bumper reinforcement. It
detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value
which is then input into the front air control.
WJIA0097E
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The automatic amplifier includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100
seconds.
As an example, consider stopping for a cup of coffee after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient
temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because
the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted.
WJIA0862E
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ambient sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E1
terminal 1 (OR/B) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
E1-1
OR/B
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
RJIA0244E
ATC-76
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR
CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and ambient sensor harness connector
E1 terminal 2 (B).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M50-24
B/Y
A
B
C
Continuity
Connector Terminal
D
Wire color
Yes
E1-2
B
E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA0863E
F
3. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
G
Refer to ATC-76, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> Replace ambient sensor.
H
4. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M49.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 9 (OR/B) and ambient sensor harness connector
E1 terminal 1 (OR/B).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
M49-9
Wire color
OR/B
ATC
K
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E1-1
L
Wire color
Yes
OR/B
WJIA0864E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
I
ATC-77
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ambient Sensor
After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector E1, measure
resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor side, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
-15 (5)
12.73
-10 (14)
9.92
-5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
WJIA0079E
If NG, replace ambient sensor.
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
EJS002QO
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle sensor
The in-vehicle sensor is located on instrument lower panel. It converts variations in temperature of compartment air drawn from the
aspirator into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control.
WJIA0203E
Aspirator
The aspirator is located on driver's side of heater and cooling unit. It
produces vacuum pressure due to air discharged from the heater
and cooling unit, continuously taking compartment air in the aspirator.
WJIA0081E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-78
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
RHA482A
D
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted.
E
F
G
WJIA0871E
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 1 (LG) and ground.
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
5V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M32-1
LG
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
I
ATC
K
L
WJIA0082E
2. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND FRONT
AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 2 (B/Y).
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M50-24
B/Y
M32-2
B/Y
Yes
WJIA0865E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
H
ATC-79
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Refer to ATC-89, "IN-VEHICLE SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> 1. Replace in-vehicle sensor.
2. Confirm system operation.
4. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M49.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 8 (LG) and in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M32 terminal 1 (LG).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M49-8
LG
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M32-1
LG
Yes
WJIA0866E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
In-vehicle Sensor
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor, using the table
below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
-15 (5)
12.73
-10 (14)
9.92
-5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
WJIA0085E
If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-80
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Sunload Sensor Circuit
EJS002QP
A
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The sunload sensor is located on the right defroster grille. It detects
sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The
sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input
into the front air control.
B
C
D
WJIA0086E
SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS
E
The front air control also includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over
a period of time. This prevents drastic swings in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in
detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload
detected by the sunload sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily
obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly
after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly.
F
G
H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Sunload sensor circuit is open or shorted.
I
ATC
K
WJIA0869E
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect sunload sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sunload sensor harness connector M65
terminal 1 (OR) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M65-1
OR
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
5V
Revision: March 2005
M
RJIA0254E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
ATC-81
L
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND FRONT AIR
CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and sunload sensor harness connector M65 terminal 2 (B/Y).
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M50-24
B/Y
M65-2
B/Y
Yes
WJIA0868E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
3. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR
Refer to ATC-83, "Sunload Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> 1. Replace sunload sensor.
2. Confirm system operation.
4. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M49.
Check continuity between front air control connector M49 terminal 10 (OR) and sunload sensor harness connector M65 terminal 1 (OR).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M49-10
OR
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M65-1
OR
Yes
WJIA0867E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-82
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Sunload Sensor
A
Measure voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 10 and ground.
If NG, replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and
Installation" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
WJIA0872E
●
H
When checking sunload sensor, select a place where sun shines directly on it.
I
ATC
K
L
M
SHA930E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-83
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Sensor Circuit
EJS002QQ
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the
table below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
-15 (5)
12.34
-10 (14)
9.62
-5 (23)
7.56
0 (32)
6.00
5 (41)
4.80
10 (50)
3.87
15 (59)
3.15
20 (68)
2.57
25 (77)
2.12
30 (86)
1.76
35 (95)
1.47
40 (104)
1.23
45 (113)
1.04
WJIA0091E
If NG, replace intake sensor.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted.
WJIA0870E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-84
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND BODY GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake sensor connector M33 terminal 1
(R/W) and ground.
Terminal
Wire color
M33-1
R/W
B
C
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
5V
D
(+)
Connector - Terminal
A
WJIA0092E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
E
2. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal
2 (B/Y).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M50-24
B/Y
H
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M33-2
B/Y
I
Yes
WJIA0873E
ATC
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
K
3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
L
Refer to ATC-84, "Intake Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> 1. Replace intake sensor.
2. Confirm system operation.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-85
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 25 (R/W) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal
1 (R/W).
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M33-1
R/W
M50-25
R/W
Yes
WJIA0874E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control, Refer to ATC-87, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-86
2005 Altima
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:27500
A
EJS002QR
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal
1.
2.
B
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove the two screws and remove the front air control.
C
D
E
WJIA0763E
F
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-87
2005 Altima
AMBIENT SENSOR
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27722
EJS002QS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
Release the ambient sensor clip and remove the ambient sensor.
WJIA0097E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-88
2005 Altima
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27720
A
EJS002QT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the lower driver instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Remove the in-vehicle sensor screw and remove the in-vehicle
sensor.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0098E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-89
2005 Altima
SUNLOAD SENSOR
SUNLOAD SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27721
EJS002QU
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the sunload sensor and garnish.
Disconnect the connector.
Release the sunload sensor tabs to remove it from the garnish.
WJIA0099E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-90
2005 Altima
INTAKE SENSOR
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27723
A
EJS002QV
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the evaporator. Refer to ATC-114, "Removal and Installation for Evaporator" .
Release the intake sensor clip and then remove the intake sensor.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the evaporator core surface.
B
C
D
WJIA0100E
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-91
2005 Altima
BLOWER UNIT
BLOWER UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:27200
EJS002QX
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box"
Remove the ECM.
Disconnect the blower motor, intake door motor and fan control amplifier connector.
Remove the two bolts and one screw from the blower unit, then
remove the blower unit.
WJIA0101E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-92
2005 Altima
BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27226
A
EJS002QY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "Removal and Installation" .
Release the eight tabs attaching the blower motor to the blower
unit case and then remove the blower motor.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WJIA0104E
I
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-93
2005 Altima
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
PFP:27277
EJS002QZ
FUNCTION
Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean in either the recirculation mode or fresh mode by the in-cabin microfilter located in the
blower unit.
LJIA0012E
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replace the in-cabin microfilter as described in the applicable maintenance schedule.
Refer to MA-7, "SCHEDULE 1" and MA-10, "SCHEDULE 2" .
The in-cabin microfilter caution label is attached inside the glove box.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the glove box pins. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Press in the sides of the glove box door to release the glove box door from the glove box housing.
Disconnect the glove box damper cord to remove the glove box door.
Disengage the two filter cover tabs to remove the filter cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit.
Install the new in-cabin microfilter into the blower unit.
CAUTION:
● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow in the correct orientation.
● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow side of the filter
facing the rear of the vehicle.
7. Install the filter cover on the blower unit.
LJIA0013E
8. Connect the glove box damper cord to the glove box door.
9. Press in the sides of the glove box door to install the glove box
door into the glove box housing.
10. Install the glove box pins.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-94
2005 Altima
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:27110
A
EJS002R0
REMOVAL
1.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
2. Drain the engine coolant from the cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT"
(QR25DE), MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE).
3. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" .
4. Remove the fasteners and cowl top. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core pipes.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the pipe joint with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants into the system.
6. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the evaporator. Refer to ATC-103, "REFRIGERANT LINES" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the line joint with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants into the system.
7. Remove the steering member. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
8. Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "BLOWER UNIT" .
9. Disconnect the mode door motor and air mix door motor connectors.
10. Remove the heater and cooling unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
WJIA0106E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Fill the radiator with the specified water and coolant mixture. Refer to MA-16, "REFILLING ENGINE
COOLANT" (QR25DE), MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE).
●
Recharge the A/C system. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-95
2005 Altima
HEATER CORE
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
PFP:27140
EJS002R1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the heater and cooling unit. Refer to ATC-95, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY" .
Remove the heater core pipe support screws and then remove
the heater core pipe support.
WJIA0185E
3.
Remove the heater core cover screws and then remove the
heater core cover.
WJIA0127E
4.
Remove the heater core.
WJIA0186E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-96
2005 Altima
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27730
A
EJS002R2
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the screws and then remove the intake door motor from
the blower unit.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0105E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-97
2005 Altima
MODE DOOR MOTOR
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27731
EJS002R3
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect the mode door motor connector.
Remove the mode door motor screws and then remove the
mode door motor.
WJIA0109E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-98
2005 Altima
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27732
A
EJS002R4
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the driver lower instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Disconnect the air mix door motor connector.
Remove the air mix door motor screws and then remove the air
mix door motor.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0110E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-99
2005 Altima
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER
Removal and Installation
PFP:27761
EJS002R5
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Disconnect the fan control amplifier connector.
Remove the screws from the fan control amplifier and then
remove the fan control amplifier.
WJIA0111E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-100
2005 Altima
DUCTS AND GRILLES
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
PFP:27860
A
EJS002R6
Ventilator Duct, Defroster Nozzle, Defroster Ducts, and Grilles
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA0983E
1.
Center defroster nozzle
2.
Side defroster duct LH
3.
Side ventilator grille LH
4.
Center ventilator grille LH
5.
Cluster lid D
6.
Center ventilator grille RH
7.
Side ventilator grille RH
8.
Instrument panel
9.
Ventilator duct
10. Side defroster duct CENTER
ATC
K
11. Side defroster duct RH
REMOVAL
Center Ventilator Grille RH, LH
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove the two center ventilator grille screws.
Release the two tabs and then remove the center ventilator
grille.
LJIA0149E
Side Ventilator Grille LH
1.
Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Revision: March 2005
ATC-101
2005 Altima
DUCTS AND GRILLES
2.
Remove the side ventilator grille LH.
LJIA0150E
Side Ventilator Grille RH
1.
2.
Remove the instrument lower cover RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and
Glove Box" .
Remove side ventilator grille RH.
LJIA0151E
Floor Duct
1.
2.
Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-35, "FLOOR TRIM" .
Release the foam tape and slide the floor duct rearward to release it from the clips.
WJIA0115E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-102
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
PFP:92600
A
EJS002R7
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING:
Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and
throat. Remove the HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or SAE J2201 (R-134a recovery equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
B
C
D
Discharging Refrigerant
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA0614E
ATC
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
K
L
M
WJIA0615E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-103
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Discharging, Evacuating, and Recharging the A/C System
WJIA0530E
*1
ATC-19, "CHECKING AND
ADJUSTING"
*3
ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks"
*2
ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks"
*4
ATC-68, "PERFORMANCE TEST
ANALYSIS"
Revision: March 2005
ATC-104
*5
ATC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant"
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Components
EJS002R8
A
QR25DE Models
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
WJIA0981E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-105
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
VQ35DE Models
WJIA0982E
NOTE:
Refer to ATC-6, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" .
Revision: March 2005
ATC-106
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models
EJS002R9
A
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0182E
REMOVAL
G
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
5.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the compressor connector.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of
any contaminants.
Remove the compressor bolts, then remove the compressor using power tools.
I
ATC
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new
ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation.
●
After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Compressor bolts
High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts
Revision: March 2005
: 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
ATC-107
2005 Altima
K
L
M
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models
EJS002RA
WJIA0117E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" .
Remove the coolant pipe bracket bolt using power tools.
Remove the compressor mounting stud.
Disconnect the compressor connector.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of any
contaminants.
Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools, and then remove the compressor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Compressor (rear side) bolt
Compressor (front side) bolt
Compressor (front side) nut
High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts
: 56.9 - 65.7 N·m (5.8 - 6.8 kg-m, 42 - 48 ft-lb)
: 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb)
: 59.8 - 69.6 N·m (6.1 - 7.0 kg-m, 45 - 51 ft-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new
ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation.
●
After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
EJS002RB
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the compressor. Refer to (QR25DE), ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor —
VQ35DE Models" (VQ35DE).
Revision: March 2005
ATC-108
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
2.
Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using
Tool.
Tool number
3.
A
: (J-44614)
Remove the clutch disc.
B
C
WHA228
D
4.
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
E
F
G
RHA072C
5.
Remove the pulley assembly using Tool.
● Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small
adapter on the end of the compressor shaft and the center of
the puller on the small adapter as shown.
Tool number
H
I
: KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION:
To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller
claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove.
ATC
WJIA1017E
6.
7.
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
K
L
M
WHA212
Revision: March 2005
ATC-109
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
8.
Remove the three magnet coil screws and remove the magnet
coil.
WHA183
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive
grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned
with a suitable solvent before installation.
Coil
Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION:
Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the
compressor front head.
Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
WHA213
3.
Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then
install the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
Tool number
:
—
(J-38873-A)
WJIA1016E
4.
Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the original
shim(s). Press the clutch disc down using the drive plate
installer.
WHA184
Revision: March 2005
ATC-110
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
5.
Install the center bolt using Tool.
Tool number
Center bolt
●
A
: (J-44614)
: 12 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the
pulley rotates smoothly.
B
C
WHA229
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
D
Check the clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
E
: 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting
spacer and recheck the clearance.
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
WHA194
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-111
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS002RC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor.
Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-105, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of
contaminants.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Low-pressure flexible hose (evaporator side) bolt
Low-pressure flexible hose (compressor side) bolt
Low-pressure flexible hose (in-line connection) bolt
: 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m,
26 - 52 in-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m,
69 - 173 in-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m,
69 - 173 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring on the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it
for installation.
●
After recharging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS002RD
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-105, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of
contaminants.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
High-pressure flexible hose bolt
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it
for installation.
●
After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks"
.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
EJS002RE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to ATC-105, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-112
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
High-pressure pipe (evaporator side) bolt : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb)
High-pressure pipe (condenser side) bolt : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
A
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
●
After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks"
.
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
B
C
EJS002RF
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and
remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the condenser fins.
D
E
F
G
WJIA0123E
INSTALLATION
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
: 9.8 - 11.7 N·m (1.0 - 1.2 kg-m, 7.3 - 8.6 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
Removal and Installation for Condenser
EJS002RG
I
ATC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe and hose with suitable
material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants.
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
Remove the front fascia. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER" .
K
L
M
WJIA0124E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-113
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
6.
7.
Remove the mounting nuts from condenser mounting brackets.
Remove the condenser.
WJIA0125E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
High-pressure flexible hose and pipe bolt
Condenser nuts
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
: 5.0 - 6.79 N·m (0.51 - 0.69 kg-m, 45 - 60 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them after installing them.
●
When charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to ATC-116, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" .
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
EJS003GE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER
AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
NOTE:
The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access
the expansion valve.
Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the expansion valve.
Remove the center console side finisher RH. Refer to IP-15,
"Center Console" .
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument
Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Remove the ECM.
● Disconnect the ECM connector.
● Remove the wire harness from the ECM mounting bracket.
● Remove the two ECM mounting bracket nuts and disconnect
WJIA0128E
the ground wire.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-92, "BLOWER UNIT" .
Revision: March 2005
ATC-114
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
10. Remove the heater core cover.
A
B
C
WJIA0127E
D
11. Remove the evaporator cover.
E
F
G
WJIA0188E
12. Remove the evaporator.
● Remove the intake sensor.
CAUTION:
● Mark the mounting position of the intake sensor.
H
I
ATC
WJIA0190E
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve mounting bolts
L
: 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
M
EJS003GF
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER
AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
NOTE:
The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access
the expansion valve.
Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Revision: March 2005
ATC-115
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
4.
Remove the expansion valve.
WJIA0128E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve mounting bolts
: 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
EJS002RJ
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant
leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow
extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent
dye leak detector.
If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all
system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected
leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component.
CAUTION:
Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve
the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector
EJS002RK
1.
Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area
without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or TXV) leak.
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or
cloth, with the UV lamp for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent
future misdiagnosis.
4. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant
leak detector.
NOTE:
Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield
washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be
checked are clean.
Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings
and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
EJS002RL
NOTE:
This procedure is only necessary when recharging the A/C system or when the compressor has seized and
has been replaced.
1.
Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi).
Revision: March 2005
ATC-116
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459).
CAUTION:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system
connection and proceed with the service procedures.
Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side service valve.
Start the engine and switch the A/C ON and fan ON.
While the A/C is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye
through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool (J-41459), refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the low-pressure service valve.
Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system lubricant. Depending
on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from a few minutes to a few
days for the dye to penetrate the leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
EJS002RM
A
B
C
D
E
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument
is calibrated and set properly per the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance.
F
G
H
AHA281A
1.
Position the leak detector probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in)
away from the point to be checked.
I
ATC
K
L
SHA707EA
2.
M
When testing, circle each fitting completely with the leak detector probe.
SHA706E
Revision: March 2005
ATC-117
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
3.
Move the leak detector probe along the component at approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in)/sec.
SHA708EA
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette
smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the
leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn engine OFF.
2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service ports.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
c.
Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less
than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant.
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa
(3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) pressure.
Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low side (evaporator drain hose to the compressor shaft seal). Refer to ATC-105, "Components" . Clean the component
to be checked and move the leak detector probe completely around the connection/component.
Perform a leak check for the following areas:
● Compressor
● High and low-pressure hose fittings, relief valve and shaft seal.
● Liquid tank
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● Service valves
NOTE:
● Check that all the service valve caps are secure on the service valves (to prevent leaks).
● After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from the valves to prevent any false readings by the leak detector.
● Cooling unit (evaporator)
NOTE:
● With engine OFF, turn blower fan on high speed for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant
trace in the cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the
drain hose.
● Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with
water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected
leak, then repeat check as outlined above.
Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components.
If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10.
Start engine.
Set the front air control as follows;
A/C switch: ON
Mode: face
Intake position: Recirculation
Revision: March 2005
ATC-118
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
d.
e.
9.
10.
Temperature: MAX cold
Fan speed: High
Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4
through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping
the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The
pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after
refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure
side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are
more easily detected when pressure is high.
A
B
C
D
SHA839E
11. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the A/C system, check the recovery/recycling
equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the
refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity.
12. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the supply tank using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant
identifier equipment.
13. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the A/C system using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant identifier equipment.
14. Discharge the A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or
component as necessary.
15. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm there are no refrigerant leaks.
16. Conduct the A/C performance test to ensure that the system works properly. Refer to ATC-70, "PERFORMANCE CHART" .
E
F
G
H
I
ATC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
ATC-119
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
PFP:00030
EJS002RN
COMPRESSOR
Model
CALSONIC KANSEI
Type
DKS-17D
Displacement
175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3 ) / revolution
Cylinder bore × stroke
30.5 mm (1.201 in) x 21.4 mm (0.84 in)
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V
LUBRICANT
Model
CALSONIC KANSEI (type DKS-17D)
Name
NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or
equivalent
Part number
KLH00-PAGS0
Total in system
150 m
Compressor (service part) charging amount
Refer to ATC-19, "Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement" .
Capacity
(5.03 US fl oz, 5.3 lmp fl oz)
REFRIGERANT
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
0.50 ± 0.025 kg (1.10 ± 0.055 lb)
ENGINE IDLING SPEED
Refer to EC-80, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (QR25DE), EC-698, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Check" (VQ35DE).
BELT TENSION
Refer to MA-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE), or MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ35DE).
Revision: March 2005
ATC-120
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
AV
AUDIO, VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5
AUDIO ......................................................................... 6
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6
System Description .................................................. 7
BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM ............................. 7
BOSE® SYSTEM .................................................. 7
SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL
(MIDLINE SYSTEM AND BOSE SYSTEM) .......... 8
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL
SWITCHES (MIDLINE AND BOSE SYSTEM) ..... 8
Schematic ................................................................ 9
BASE SYSTEM ..................................................... 9
MIDLINE SYSTEM .............................................. 10
BOSE SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI) ......................11
BOSE SYSTEM (WITH NAVI) ............................. 12
Wiring Diagram -AUDIO- ........................................ 13
BASE SYSTEM ................................................... 13
MIDLINE SYSTEM .............................................. 16
BOSE SYSTEM .................................................. 19
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit
(Except Bose) ......................................................... 26
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit
(BOSE) ................................................................... 27
Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker
Amp. ....................................................................... 29
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch (With
NAVI) ...................................................................... 31
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ........................ 33
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
(WITHOUT NAVI) ................................................ 33
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
(WITH NAVI) ....................................................... 33
EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE ........... 33
Revision: March 2005
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ..................................... 33
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 35
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE
AND MIDLINE SYSTEM) .................................... 35
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BOSE
SYSTEM) ............................................................ 35
FOR RADIO ONLY .............................................. 37
FOR CD ONLY .................................................... 38
Noise Inspection ..................................................... 38
TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE ........ 38
Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 38
Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI) ................... 40
Steering Switch Check (with NAVI) ......................... 41
AV Switch Check (With NAVI) ................................ 42
Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation
System) .................................................................. 42
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or
Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System) ................ 43
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Speaker (Base or
Midline System) ...................................................... 45
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or
Front Tweeter (BOSE System) ............................... 47
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker
(BOSE System) ...................................................... 51
Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (BOSE System) ........................................................................ 55
Removal and Installation for Audio Unit ................. 57
Removal and Installation for Door Speaker ............ 57
Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker ....... 57
Removal and Installation for Rear Speaker ............ 57
Removal and Installation for Subwoofer Speaker... 57
Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp.... 58
Removal and Installation for AV Switch .................. 58
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio
Control Switches ..................................................... 58
AUDIO ANTENNA .................................................... 59
System Description ................................................. 59
Wiring Diagram — W/ANT — ................................. 60
AV-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Location of Antenna ................................................ 61
Window Antenna Repair ......................................... 61
ELEMENT CHECK .............................................. 61
ELEMENT REPAIR ............................................. 62
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............................................. 63
System Description ................................................. 63
TRAVEL DISTANCE ............................................ 63
TRAVEL DIRECTION .......................................... 63
MAP-MATCHING ................................................. 63
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .......... 64
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 65
BIRDVIEW™ ....................................................... 65
MAP DISPLAY ..................................................... 66
FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH ..................... 67
“VIEW” MODE ..................................................... 72
“HEADING” MODE .............................................. 73
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE ................... 73
“SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ............... 73
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ........... 73
“AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE ................................. 74
“AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE ...................... 74
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE ................................. 74
“EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE ........................ 75
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE ............................. 75
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE... 75
“SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE ........................ 75
“TRACKING” MODE ............................................ 76
GUIDANCE VOLUME ......................................... 76
DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON ........ 76
TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2 ............................................... 77
FUEL ECONOMY ................................................ 77
MAINTENANCE .................................................. 77
ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION ..................... 77
WARNING INDICATIONS ................................... 78
CAN Communication System Description .............. 78
Component Parts Location ..................................... 79
Schematic ............................................................... 80
Wiring Diagram —NAVI— ....................................... 81
Wiring Diagram — COMM — ................................. 88
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control
unit .......................................................................... 90
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control
unit .......................................................................... 92
Terminals and Reference Value for Display unit ..... 96
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch ....... 98
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................ 99
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 101
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 101
DIAGNOSIS ITEM ............................................. 101
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) ................................. 101
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 101
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 103
Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) ................................. 104
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 104
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 105
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ............................ 107
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 107
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 108
VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 108
Revision: March 2005
NAVIGATION ..................................................... 109
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 109
VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 110
HISTORY OF ERRORS ..................................... 110
DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS .......... 110
NAVIGATION ..................................................... 112
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR ........................ 114
OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 114
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 115
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI
Control Unit ........................................................... 116
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display
Control Unit ........................................................... 117
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display
Unit ........................................................................ 118
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV
Switch ................................................................... 120
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.121
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit.122
Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ... 123
Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.123
Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit .......... 123
Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit ...... 124
Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ........ 124
Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit .... 124
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) ...................... 125
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) .......................... 126
Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) ....................... 128
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and AV Switch) .................................. 130
CAN Communication Line Check ......................... 131
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map
is Not Inserted ....................................................... 131
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVDROM Map Malfunctioning or If It is Impossible to
Load Data from DVD-ROM Map ........................... 131
If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS
Antenna is Malfunctioning ..................................... 132
Operating Screen for Audio is Not Displayed When
Showing NAVI Screen ........................................... 132
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Bluish) ............................................ 134
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Reddish) ......................................... 135
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI
Screen Looks Yellowish) ....................................... 136
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look
Bluish) ................................................................... 137
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look
Reddish) ................................................................ 138
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look
Yellowish) .............................................................. 139
NAVI Screen is Rolling .......................................... 140
Guide Sound is Not Heard .................................... 142
Screen is Not Shown ............................................ 143
FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown ............... 143
AV-2
2005 Altima
Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“
*** ” is Shown) ...................................................... 143
Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ”
is Shown) ............................................................. 143
Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed is Not
Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ....................................... 144
WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown . 144
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI)
(Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) ........................... 144
Audio Does Not Work ........................................... 145
Navigation System Does Not Activate ................. 145
Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored ............ 145
Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored ........ 145
Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct . 146
Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received. 146
Driving Test .......................................................... 146
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction . 147
BASIC OPERATION ......................................... 147
VEHICLE MARK ............................................... 148
DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU
ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET ............. 148
VOICE GUIDE ................................................... 149
ROUTE SEARCH .............................................. 149
EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK
DISPLACEMENT .............................................. 150
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG ........ 153
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS ............. 153
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR
SEA ................................................................... 154
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN
RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG
PLACE ............................................................... 154
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW .................................................... 154
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS
GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN
TO CORRECT LOCATION ................................ 154
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED ............................................................. 154
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN ........ 154
Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit ................. 155
Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit ..... 156
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna ........... 156
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch. 156
Removal and Installation of AV Switch ................. 156
Removal and Installation of Display Unit .............. 156
Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit . 156
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS008RD
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EKS008RE
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-4
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EKS008RF
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
B
C
D
PBIC0191E
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-5
2005 Altima
AUDIO
AUDIO
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28111
EKS008RG
WKIA1934E
Revision: March 2005
AV-6
2005 Altima
AUDIO
System Description
EKS008RH
A
BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 15A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
●
to audio unit terminal 6.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15, and 16
●
to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of tweeter LH and RH.
B
C
D
E
F
BOSE® SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 15A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
●
to audio unit terminal 6, and
●
to Bose speaker amp. terminal 1.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
●
to speaker amp. terminal 17
●
through body ground B117.
Audio signals are supplied
●
through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15, and 16
●
to speaker amp. terminals 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, and 30.
Audio signals are amplified by the speaker amp.
The amplified audio signals are supplied
●
through speaker amp. terminals 2, 3, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, and 19
●
to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of tweeter LH and RH
●
to terminals + and - of subwoofer LH and RH.
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Satellite Radio Tuner (Pre-Wiring)
The satellite radio tuner pre-wiring allows connection of a satellite radio tuner.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 15A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 32.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 36.
Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner.
Then audio signals are supplied
●
through satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminals 21, 22, 23, and 24
●
to audio unit terminals 41, 42, 43, and 44.
Revision: March 2005
AV-7
2005 Altima
AUDIO
SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL (MIDLINE SYSTEM AND BOSE SYSTEM)
If activated, the radio output volume will be automatically adjusted to compensate for increased driving noises
at higher driving speeds.
The radio receives a vehicle speed signal from the combination meter, and selects the output volume.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES (MIDLINE AND BOSE SYSTEM)
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit
changes depending on which button is pushed.
Revision: March 2005
AV-8
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Schematic
EKS008RI
A
BASE SYSTEM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
LKWA0001E
Revision: March 2005
AV-9
2005 Altima
AUDIO
MIDLINE SYSTEM
WKWA1265E
Revision: March 2005
AV-10
2005 Altima
AUDIO
BOSE SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1266E
Revision: March 2005
AV-11
2005 Altima
AUDIO
BOSE SYSTEM (WITH NAVI)
WKWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
AV-12
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram -AUDIO-
EKS008RJ
A
BASE SYSTEM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1268E
Revision: March 2005
AV-13
2005 Altima
AUDIO
WKWA1269E
Revision: March 2005
AV-14
2005 Altima
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1270E
Revision: March 2005
AV-15
2005 Altima
AUDIO
MIDLINE SYSTEM
WKWA1271E
Revision: March 2005
AV-16
2005 Altima
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1272E
Revision: March 2005
AV-17
2005 Altima
AUDIO
WKWA1273E
Revision: March 2005
AV-18
2005 Altima
AUDIO
BOSE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1274E
Revision: March 2005
AV-19
2005 Altima
AUDIO
WKWA1275E
Revision: March 2005
AV-20
2005 Altima
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1276E
Revision: March 2005
AV-21
2005 Altima
AUDIO
WKWA1277E
Revision: March 2005
AV-22
2005 Altima
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1278E
Revision: March 2005
AV-23
2005 Altima
AUDIO
WITH NAVI
WKWA1279E
Revision: March 2005
AV-24
2005 Altima
AUDIO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1280E
Revision: March 2005
AV-25
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Except Bose)
Terminal No.
Item
Condition
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
EKS008RK
Example of symptom
+
–
1 (L/R)
Ground
Audio sound signal front LH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from front door
speaker LH or tweeter LH.
2 (L/W)
Ground
Audio sound signal front LH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from front door
speaker LH or tweeter LH.
3 (L/B)
Ground
Audio sound signal front RH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from front door
speaker RH or tweeter RH.
4 (W/B)
Ground
Audio sound signal front RH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from front door
speaker RH or tweeter RH.
5 (G)
Ground
Antenna signal
Input
ON
–
5.5V
System does not work properly.
6 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery
Input
–
–
Battery voltage
System does not work properly.
7 (R/Y)
Ground
Illumination control
Input
ON
Lighting
switch ON
(1st position)
1V → 5V
Audio unit illumination does
not function when lighting
switch is ON (position 1).
8 (R/L)
Ground
Light switch
Input
ON
Lighting
switch ON
(1st position)
5.5V
Audio unit illumination does
not function when lighting
switch is ON (position 1).
Voltage increases
as vehicle speed
sensor rotates
faster
*9 (P)
Ground
Speed signal
Input
ON
Vehicle
speed sensor rotating
10 (PU)
Ground
ACC
Input
ON
Ignition
switch ACC
or ON
Battery voltage
System does not work properly.
13 (B/Y)
Ground
Audio sound signal rear LH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear speaker
LH.
14 (G/Y)
Ground
Audio sound signal rear LH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear speaker
LH.
15 (R)
Ground
Audio sound signal rear RH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear speaker
RH.
16 (L)
Ground
Audio sound signal rear RH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear speaker
RH.
–
Refer to AV-40,
"Steering Switch
Check (Without
NAVI)" .
Steering wheel audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel audio controls
do not function.
–
Remote control
A
*75 (G)
–
Remote control
B
–
–
–
Refer to AV-40,
"Steering Switch
Check (Without
NAVI)" .
*76 (L)
–
Remote control
ground
–
–
–
Refer to AV-40,
"Steering Switch
Check (Without
NAVI)" .
*74 (R/W)
–
–
Speed dependent volume
control does not function.
*: With midline system
Revision: March 2005
AV-26
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (BOSE)
EKS008RL
A
Terminal No.
Item
+
–
Ground
Audio sound
signal front
LH (-)
Ground
Audio sound
signal front
LH (+)
3 (BR)
Ground
Audio sound
signal front
RH (-)
4 (Y)
Ground
Audio sound
signal front
RH (+)
5 (G)
Ground
6 (Y/G)
Ground
1 (B)
2 (W)
7 (R/Y)
8 (R/L)
Ground
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
5.5V
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
5.5V
No sound from front
door speaker LH or
tweeter LH.
B
Receive
audio signal
C
ON
Receive
audio signal
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from front
door speaker RH or
tweeter RH.
E
Output
Antenna
signal
Input
ON
–
5.5V
System does not
work properly.
F
Battery
Input
–
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Illumination
control
Output
ON
Lighting
switch ON
(1st position)
ON
Lighting
switch ON
(1st position)
Input
ON
Vehicle
speed sensor rotating
–
–
Input
ON
–
–
Input
Ground
Light switch
Input
9 (P)
(without
NAVI)
Ground
Speed signal
9 (B)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
Ground
10 (PU)
Ground
ACC
11
–
12 (G/W)
Ground
Amp. ON/
OFF signal
Output
ON
13 (B/R)
Ground
Audio sound
signal rear
LH (-)
Output
14 (BR)
Ground
Audio sound
signal rear
LH (+)
15 (B/W)
Ground
16 (L)
Ground
1V → 5V
Audio unit illumination does not function when lighting
switch is ON (position 1).
5.5V
Audio unit illumination does not function when lighting
switch is ON (position 1).
Voltage increases as vehicle
speed sensor rotates faster
Speed dependent
volume control does
not function.
D
G
H
I
J
AV
Revision: March 2005
Ground
(Shield
drain)
–
Ignition
switch ACC
or ON
–
Battery voltage
–
System does not
work properly.
0V
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
Ignition
switch ACC
or ON
Battery voltage
Amp. does not work
properly.
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear
speaker LH.
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear
speaker LH.
Audio sound
signal rear
RH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear
speaker RH.
Audio sound
signal rear
RH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5.5V
No sound from rear
speaker RH.
–
AV-27
2005 Altima
L
M
AUDIO
Terminal No.
+
42 (R)
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Audio left
channel
sound signal from satellite radio
tuner
Input
ON
–
41 (G)
Condition
Item
Operation
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
No sound from satellite radio tuner left
channel.
Receive
audio signal
SKIA0177E
44 (B)
43 (W)
Audio right
channel
sound signal from satellite radio
tuner
Input
ON
No sound from satellite radio tuner right
channel.
Receive
audio signal
SKIA0177E
45
–
Shield
ground
(audio signal)
46
–
Shield
ground
(data)
48 (L)
49 (OR/L)
Ground
Ground
Satellite
radio tuner
request to
audio unit
Audio RX
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Input
ON
Turn audio
unit ON
5V
ON
Operate
audio volume
Input
Satellite radio tuner
does not operate
properly.
Satellite radio tuner
audio information
does not display
properly.
SKIA4403E
50 (W/L)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Satellite radio tuner
audio information
does not display
properly.
Operate
audio volume
SKIA4402E
65 (B/R)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
Audio RX
Input
ON
Operate
audio volume
Audio does not operate properly.
SKIA4403E
Revision: March 2005
AV-28
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Terminal No.
+
–
Item
Condition
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Operation
Example of symptom
A
B
66 (BR)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
Audio TX
Output
ON
Operate
audio volume
Audio does not operate properly.
C
SKIA4402E
67
(with
NAVI)
–
72 (L/W)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
73 (R/W)
(with
NAVI)
Ground
74 (R/W)
(without
NAVI)
–
75 (G)
(without
NAVI)
76 (L)
(without
NAVI)
Shield
–
Interference and distortion heard from
speakers.
0V
ON
CD eject
signal
Input
ON
Operate
EJECT button
0V → 5V
CD will not eject
from the audio unit.
CD load signal
Input
ON
Operate
LOAD button
0V → 5V
CD will not load into
the audio unit.
Remote
control A
–
–
–
Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch
Check (Without NAVI)" .
Steering wheel
audio controls do not
function.
G
–
Remote
control B
–
–
–
Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch
Check (Without NAVI)" .
Steering wheel
audio controls do not
function.
H
–
Remote
control
ground
–
–
–
Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch
Check (Without NAVI)" .
Steering wheel
audio controls do not
function.
Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp.
Terminal No.
Item
Ignition
switch
Input
–
Operation
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Example of symptom
–
Battery voltage
System does not work properly.
–
1 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery
2 (W)
Ground
Subwoofer RH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from subwoofer
RH.
3 (L/W)
Ground
Subwoofer LH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from subwoofer
LH.
9 (L)
Ground
Rear door
speaker RH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear door
speaker RH.
10 (R)
Ground
Rear door
speaker RH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear door
speaker RH.
11 (G/Y)
Ground
Rear door
speaker LH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear door
speaker LH.
12 (B/Y)
Ground
Rear door
speaker LH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear door
speaker LH.
13 (W/B)
Ground
Front door
speaker RH and
tweeter RH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front door
speaker RH or tweeter RH.
Front door
speaker RH and
tweeter RH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front door
speaker RH or tweeter RH.
Front door
speaker LH and
tweeter LH (+)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front door
speaker LH or tweeter LH.
15 (L/W)
Ground
Ground
Revision: March 2005
AV-29
F
I
J
Condition
Signal
input/
output
E
EKS008RM
+
14 (L/B)
D
–
2005 Altima
AV
L
M
AUDIO
Terminal No.
Item
+
–
16 (L/R)
Ground
Front door
speaker LH and
tweeter LH (-)
17 (B)
Ground
Ground
Condition
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Output
ON
–
–
Operation
Receive
audio signal
–
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
5 - 7.5V
–
Example of symptom
No sound from front door
speaker LH or tweeter LH.
–
18 (B)
Ground
Subwoofer RH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
19 (L/B)
Ground
Subwoofer LH (-)
Output
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from subwoofer
LH.
23 (B/W)
Ground
Rear speaker RH
(-)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear speaker
RH.
24 (L)
Ground
Rear speaker RH
(+)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear speaker
RH.
25 (B/R)
Ground
Rear speaker LH
(-)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear speaker
LH.
26 (BR)
Ground
Rear speaker LH
(+)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from rear speaker
LH.
27 (BR)
Ground
Front speaker RH
(-)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front speaker
RH.
28 (Y)
Ground
Front speaker RH
(+)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front speaker
RH.
29 (B)
Ground
Front speaker LH
(-)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front speaker
LH.
30 (W)
Ground
Front speaker LH
(+)
Input
ON
Receive
audio signal
5 - 7.5V
No sound from front speaker
LH.
31 (G/W)
Ground
Amp. ON/OFF
signal
Input
ON
10V
System does not work properly.
Revision: March 2005
–
AV-30
5 - 7.5V
No sound from subwoofer
RH.
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch (With NAVI)
EKS008RN
A
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
1 (Y/R)
Ground
2 (PU)
3 (R/L)
4 (R/Y)
5 (B)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Battery
power
ACC signal
Illumination
signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Ignition
switch
Operation
OFF
–
ACC
–
Lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Input
Illumination
control signal
Input
Ground
–
Ground
Condition
OFF
ON
ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
Battery voltage
Turn lighting switch
OFF.
3.0V or less
Illumination control
switch is operated
by lighting switch in
1st position.
Changes between 0 and 12V.
–
0V
AV switch illumination does not
come on when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
AV switch illumination cannot be
controlled.
B
C
D
E
F
–
G
6 (PU)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
H
SKIA0175E
7
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
–
–
I
J
8 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (-)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
AV
SKIA0176E
10 (R)
11 (G)
Ground
Ground
Remote control A
Remote control B
Input
Input
ON
ON
12 (B/Y)
–
Remote control ground
–
–
13 (L/W)
Ground
CD EJECT
signal
Output
ON
Revision: March 2005
Press MODE switch
0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
0.75V
Press VOL UP
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
Press POWER
switch
0V
Press SEEK DOWN
switch
0.75V
Press VOL DOWN
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
–
–
Pressed
0V
Released
5V
AV-31
L
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
CD eject does
not function.
2005 Altima
M
AUDIO
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
+
–
14 (R/W)
Ground
Revision: March 2005
CD LOAD
signal
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
Operation
Pressed
0V
Released
5V
AV-32
CD load does
not function.
2005 Altima
AUDIO
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
EKS008RO
It can check ON/OFF operation of each switch in the audio unit (without NAVI) or AV switch (with NAVI) and
diagnose the input signals from the steering switch (with NAVI) (except TRIP on the steering wheel audio control switch).
B
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITHOUT NAVI)
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC.
Press and hold the “CLOCK” switch and turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30
clicks or more.
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA1935E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Then the self-diagnosis initiates.
I
Initially, all display segments will be illuminated.
Then the current software version will be displayed when the "TUNE UP" switch is pressed.
Then a speaker check will occur when the "TUNE DOWN" switch is pressed. The audio unit will send a J
series of three beeps to each speaker channel in the following sequence: FR→FL→RL→RR. This check
will continue until any switch (except "TUNE UP", "TUNE DOWN" or volume) is operated.
Press each audio unit switch (except "TUNE UP", "TUNE DOWN" or volume). When each switch is
AV
pressed, a series of three beeps will sound.
NOTE:
Steering wheel audio control switches (except base), "TUNE UP", "TUNE DOWN" and volume switches
L
are not included in this test.
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (WITH NAVI)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC.
Within 10 seconds press and hold the switches “PAUSE/MUTE”
and “PREV” simultaneously for 3 seconds.
Then the self-diagnosis initiates. A single beep indicates selfdiagnosis mode is active.
Press each switch and listen for beep.
NOTE:
TRIP button on steering wheel audio control switch and CD
player LOAD and EJECT buttons are not included in this test
and will not beep when pressed.
M
WKIA2679E
EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
●
Turn ignition switch OFF. Then the self-diagnosis ends. On models without NAVI, pressing the volume
switch will also exit the self-diagnosis mode.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
●
It can check for continuity of the switches by sounding the beep(s) when each audio unit switch (without
NAVI) or AV switch (with NAVI) and steering switch (with NAVI) is pressed.
Revision: March 2005
AV-33
2005 Altima
AUDIO
●
It can check for harness continuity between AV switch and steering switch (with NAVI).
Revision: March 2005
AV-34
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS008RP
The majority of the audio troubles are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.). Check the inspection items below to diagnose the malfunction.
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE AND MIDLINE SYSTEM)
Symptom
B
Possible cause
●
Inoperative
●
Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
Steering switch does not operate (with midline system)
All speakers do not sound
●
Noisy
E
Steering switch check. Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without
NAVI)" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
F
●
Audio unit
●
Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
●
Front door speaker/tweeter check. Refer to AV-43, "Sound Is Not Heard
From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System)" .
●
Rear speaker check. Refer to AV-45, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear
Speaker (Base or Midline System)" .
●
Audio unit
●
Speaker
●
Audio unit
●
Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
One or several speakers do not sound
Poor sound
D
Audio unit B+ power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
●
C
Audio unit switch. Refer to AV-33, "STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
MODE (WITHOUT NAVI)" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Audio unit presets are lost when ignition switch is
turned OFF
A
G
H
I
J
MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM)
Before proceeding on models with NAVI, confirm that other AV switch functions (except audio functions) operate. If not, refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-DiagnoAV
sis)" .
Symptom
Possible cause
●
Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
●
Audio communication line check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-42, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System)" .
●
AV switch check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-42, "AV Switch Check (With
NAVI)" .
Inoperative
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Steering switch does not operate
●
Steering switch check. Refer to AV-40, "Steering Switch Check (Without
NAVI)" or AV-41, "Steering Switch Check (with NAVI)" .
●
AV switch check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-42, "AV Switch Check (With
NAVI)" .
If above check is OK, replace audio unit.
Audio information is not displayed on screen (with
NAVI)
●
Display unit check. Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
●
Audio unit
●
BOSE speaker amp. power supply and ground circuit check. Refer to AV-38,
"Power Supply Circuit Inspection" .
●
BOSE speaker amp. ON signal
●
BOSE speaker amp.
All speakers do not sound
Revision: March 2005
AV-35
2005 Altima
L
M
AUDIO
Symptom
One or several speakers do not sound
Poor sound
Noisy
Revision: March 2005
Possible cause
●
Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-47, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front
Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System)" .
●
Rear door speaker check. Refer to AV-51, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear
Door Speaker (BOSE System)" .
●
Subwoofer check. Refer to AV-55, "Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer
(BOSE System)" .
●
Audio unit
●
BOSE speaker amp.
●
Speaker
●
Audio unit
●
BOSE speaker amp.
●
Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.)
AV-36
2005 Altima
AUDIO
FOR RADIO ONLY
Symptom
No sound
Noisy
A
Possible cause
●
Audio unit
●
Antenna feeder, wiring or connections
●
Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections
●
Audio unit
●
Audio unit case ground
●
Antenna feeder, wiring or connections
●
Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections
●
Noise prevention parts
●
Electrical equipment
●
Wire harness of each piece of electrical equipment
●
Audio unit power circuit. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit
Inspection" .
●
Audio unit
All radio stations stored in memory are deleted
B
C
D
NOTE:
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
●
Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal.
●
Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-37
2005 Altima
AUDIO
FOR CD ONLY
Symptom
Possible cause
CD cannot be inserted.
CD cannot be ejected.
●
CD
The CD cannot be played.
●
Audio unit
The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted.
Noise Inspection
EKS008RQ
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE
Occurrence condition
Occurs only when engine is ON.
Possible cause
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
●
Ignition components
A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed is
high. A booming noise occurs while the engine is
running and the lighting switch is ON.
●
Generator
●
Fuel pump condenser
●
Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
●
Motor case ground
●
Motor
●
Rear defogger coil malfunction
●
Open circuit in printed heater
●
Poor ground of antenna amplifier or
antenna feeder line
●
Ground wire of body parts
●
Ground due to improper part installation
●
Wiring connections or a short circuit
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump.
Noise only occurs when various
electrical components are operating.
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the
operation of various switches.
The noise occurs when various motors are operating.
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions.
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially
when it is vibrating excessively.
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
EKS008RR
1. CHECK FUSES
●
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit
Audio unit
AV switch (with NAVI)
BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE)
Terminals
Signal name
Fuse No.
6
Battery power
31
10
Ignition switch ACC or ON
6
1
Battery power
19
2
Ignition switch ACC or ON
6
1
Battery power
31
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-38
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
A
Disconnect audio unit, AV switch (with NAVI) or BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) connector.
Check voltage between the audio unit and ground.
B
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
Connector
Audio unit
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
6 (Y/G)
Ground
M43
10 (PU)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
C
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
D
SKIA1992E
3.
Check voltage between AV switch (with NAVI) and ground.
F
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
Connector
AV switch
OFF
ACC
ON
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
1 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
2 (PU)
Ground
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
G
M98
H
WKIA1936E
4.
I
Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) and ground.
J
Terminal No.
(+)
Unit
BOSE
speaker
amp.
(-)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
B127
1 (Y/G)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
AV
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
L
SKIA4311E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
E
Inspect audio unit case ground.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE)
harness connector B127 terminal 17 (B) and AV switch (with
NAVI) harness connector M98 terminal 5 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals.
● Repair harness, connector or audio unit case ground.
WKIA1937E
Revision: March 2005
AV-39
2005 Altima
M
AUDIO
Steering Switch Check (Without NAVI)
EKS008RS
1. CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
1.
2.
Disconnect steering switch connector M102.
Check resistance between steering switch connector terminals.
Terminal
18
14
Signal name
17
17
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Seek (down)
Depress (station) down switch.
165
Power
Depress power switch.
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
487
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
0
0
487
WKIA1938E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" .
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit and spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and audio unit harness connector terminal.
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
Audio Unit
Terminal
Connector
26 (G)
M30
75 (G)
31 (L)
M45
34 (R/W)
4.
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
76 (L)
Yes
74 (R/W)
Check continuity between audio unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1939E
Audio unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
74 (R/W)
M98
75 (G)
Ground
No
76 (L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
Revision: March 2005
AV-40
2005 Altima
AUDIO
3. SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
1.
2.
A
Disconnect spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminals.
B
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
26
M30
C
Continuity
11
31
M102
12
34
D
Yes
10
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-45, "SPIRAL CABLE" .
Steering Switch Check (with NAVI)
WKIA1940E
E
EKS008RT
F
1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
2. Operate steering switch.
Does steering switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK HARNESS
I
1.
2.
3.
J
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV switch connector and spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and AV switch harness connector terminal.
AV
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
AV switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
26 (G)
M30
L
11 (G)
31 (B/Y)
M98
34 (R)
4.
Continuity
12 (B/Y)
Yes
10 (R)
M
Check continuity between AV switch and ground.
Terminals
AV switch
Connector
WKIA1941E
—
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
10 (R)
M98
11 (G)
Ground
No
12 (B/Y)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
Revision: March 2005
AV-41
2005 Altima
AUDIO
3. SPIRAL CABLE CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect spiral cable connector.
Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminals.
Terminals
Spiral cable
Connector
Terminal
Continuity
Connector
26
M30
31
34
Terminal
11
M102
12
Yes
10
WKIA1940E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-45, "SPIRAL CABLE" .
4. CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE
Check resistance between steering switch connector terminals.
Terminal
Signal name
Seek (down)
18
14
17
17
Resistance
(Ω)
(Approx.)
Condition
Depress (station) down switch.
165
Volume (down)
Depress volume down switch.
487
Seek (up)
Depress (station) up switch.
165
Mode
Depress mode switch.
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
0
487
WKIA1938E
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" .
AV Switch Check (With NAVI)
EKS008RU
1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK
1. Perform AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
Does AV switch operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" .
Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System)
EKS008RV
1. CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE
Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-126, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning part.
●
Revision: March 2005
AV-42
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline
System)
EKS008RW
A
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
B
Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect speaker or tweeter connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and suspect speaker or tweeter harness connector terminal.
C
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
2 (L/W)
4 (W/B)
E
- (L/R)
+ (W/B)
D103
3 (L/B)
2 (L/W)
M1
4 (W/B)
F
- (L/B)
+ (L/W)
1 (L/R)
Yes
- (L/R)
G
+ (W/B)
M72
3 (L/B)
3.
Terminal
(Wire color)
+ (L/W)
D3
1 (L/R)
M43
D
Continuity
- (L/B)
H
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1220E
Audio unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
I
Continuity
—
J
2 (L/W)
1 (L/R)
M43
4 (W/B)
Ground
No
AV
3 (L/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-43
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect audio unit connector and front speaker or tweeter connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
(-)
Connector
2 (L/W)
M43
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
1 (L/R)
M43
4 (W/B)
3 (L/B)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-44
SKIA4278E
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Speaker (Base or Midline System)
EKS008RX
A
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and suspect speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
B
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
13 (B/Y)
M44
C
B22
+ (G/Y)
15 (R)
- (R)
B25
3.
D
- (B/Y)
14 (G/Y)
16 (L)
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
Yes
E
+ (L)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and ground.
F
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
—
G
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
13 (B/Y)
M44
14 (G/Y)
H
Ground
No
15 (R)
WKIA1942E
I
16 (L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-45
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect audio unit connector and rear speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal audio unit harness connector terminal with
CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
14
(G/Y)
M44
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
13
(B/Y)
M44
16 (L)
15 (R)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal
and Installation for Rear Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal
and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-46
SKIA4281E
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System)
EKS008RY
A
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal B128 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
B
C
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Speaker or tweeter
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Connector
13 (W/B)
15 (L/W)
E
- (L/B)
+ (L/W)
D3
16 (L/R)
13 (W/B)
15 (L/W)
F
- (L/R)
+ (W/B)
M72
14 (L/B)
Yes
- (L/B)
G
+ (L/W)
M1
16 (L/R)
3.
D
+ (W/B)
D103
14 (L/B)
B128
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
- (L/R)
H
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal B128 and ground.
Terminals
WKIA2018E
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
I
Continuity
—
J
13 (W/B)
14 (L/B)
B128
15 (L/W)
Ground
No
AV
16 (L/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-47
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128
terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
(-)
Connector
13 (W/B)
B128
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
14 (L/B)
B128
15 (L/W)
16 (L/R)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal
and Installation for Door Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal
and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
AV-48
SKIA4283E
2005 Altima
AUDIO
3. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
A
Disconnect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal.
B
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
BOSE speaker amp.
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
1 (B)
29 (B)
2 (W)
M43
D
30 (W)
B128
3 (BR)
4 (Y)
3.
C
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
27 (BR)
Yes
E
28 (Y)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground.
F
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
G
1 (B)
2 (W)
M43
3 (BR)
Ground
H
No
SKIA4284E
4 (Y)
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-49
2005 Altima
AUDIO
4. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal audio unit harness connector terminal with
CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
2 (W)
M43
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
1 (B)
M43
4 (Y)
3 (BR)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-58, "Removal
and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp." .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-50
SKIA4278E
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker (BOSE System)
EKS008RZ
A
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal B128 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal.
B
C
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Speaker
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Connector
9 (L)
Continuity
D
Terminal
(Wire color)
+ (G/Y)
D302
10 (R)
B128
- (B/Y)
11 (G/Y)
D202
12 (B/Y)
3.
E
Yes
+ (G/Y)
- (B/Y)
F
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128 terminal and ground.
G
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
—
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
H
9 (L)
B128
10 (R)
Ground
No
WKIA1570E
I
11 (G/Y)
12 (B/Y)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-51
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B128 and suspect speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128
terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
9 (L)
B128
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
10 (R)
B128
11 (G/Y)
12 (B/Y)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal
and Installation for Rear Speaker" or AV-57, "Removal
and Installation for Tweeter Speaker" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SKIA4314E
Revision: March 2005
AV-52
2005 Altima
AUDIO
3. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
A
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B128.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B128 terminal.
B
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
BOSE speaker amp.
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
13 (B/R)
D
26 (BR)
15 (B/W)
B128
16 (L)
3.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
25 (B/R)
14 (BR)
M44
C
23 (B/W)
Yes
E
24 (L)
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal
and ground.
F
Terminals
Audio unit
Connector
G
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
13 (B/R)
H
14 (BR)
M44
15 (B/W)
Ground
No
SKIA4315E
I
16 (L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-53
2005 Altima
AUDIO
4. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B128.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push “POWER” switch.
Check the signal at audio unit harness connector M44 terminal
with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Connector
14
(BR)
M44
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
13 (B/R)
M44
16 (L)
15 (B/W)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-58, "Removal
and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp." .
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-54
SKIA4316E
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (BOSE System)
EKS008S0
A
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector and suspect subwoofer connectors.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and subwoofer harness connector harness connector terminal.
B
C
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
B127
3.
Subwoofer
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
3 (L/W)
B26
+ (L/W)
19 (L/B)
B26
- (L/B)
2 (W)
B126
+ (W)
18 (B)
B126
- (B)
D
E
Yes
F
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and ground.
G
Terminals
BOSE speaker amp.
Connector
—
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
H
3 (L/W)
B127
19 (L/B)
Ground
No
WKIA1943E
I
2 (W)
18 (B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
● Repair harness or connector.
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-55
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Check the signal BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire
color)
(-)
Connector
18 (B)
B127
19 (L/B)
Terminal
(Wire
color)
Condition
Reference
signal
2 (W)
B127
3 (L/W)
Receive
audio
signal
SKIA0177E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Subwoofer Speaker" .
NG
>> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-58, "Removal
and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp." .
Revision: March 2005
AV-56
WKIA1944E
2005 Altima
AUDIO
Removal and Installation for Audio Unit
EKS008S1
A
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove screws using power tool and slide audio/display
assembly (with NAVI) or audio unit (without NAVI) forward.
4. Disconnect connectors and antenna cable and then remove
audio unit.
5. Remove audio unit from brackets.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
C
D
WKIA1945E
Removal and Installation for Door Speaker
E
EKS008S2
1. Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-30, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove screws and speaker.
3. Disconnect speaker connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
LKIA0057E
Removal and Installation for Tweeter Speaker
EKS008S3
J
1. Remove windshield garnish molding. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove tweeter speaker by gently prying away from A pillar.
3. Disconnect tweeter speaker connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AV
L
M
LKIA0058E
Removal and Installation for Rear Speaker
EKS008S4
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove screws and rear speaker.
3. Disconnect speaker connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, noting the following:
Rear speaker mounting screws:
: 2.7 - 3.7 N·m (0.28 - 0.38 kg-m, 24 - 33 in-lb)
Removal and Installation for Subwoofer Speaker
1.
EKS008S5
Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-57
2005 Altima
AUDIO
2. Remove screws and subwoofer.
3. Disconnect subwoofer connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, noting the following:
Subwoofer mounting screws:
: 2.7 - 3.7 N·m (0.28 - 0.38 kg-m, 24 - 33 in-lb)
LKIA0059E
Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp.
EKS008S6
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove trunk trim and trunk lid finisher. Refer to EI-37, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove screws and amp.
5. Disconnect amp. connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, noting the following:
BOSE speaker amp. mounting screws:
: 2.7 - 3.7 N·m (0.28 - 0.38 kg-m, 24 - 33 in-lb)
LKIA0062E
Removal and Installation for AV Switch
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS008S7
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove the four AV switch screws.
Carefully remove the AV switch.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1946E
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS008S8
Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove steering wheel rear cover screws and remove steering wheel rear cover.
Remove steering wheel switch assembly screws and steering
wheel switches.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1226E
Revision: March 2005
AV-58
2005 Altima
AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
System Description
PFP:28200
A
EKS008S9
With the ignition switch in ACC or ON, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the antenna amp.
When the radio switch is turned ON, antenna signal is supplied
●
through audio unit terminal 5
●
to the antenna amp. terminal 1.
Then the antenna amp. is activated.
The amplified radio signals are supplied to the audio unit through the antenna amp.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-59
2005 Altima
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram — W/ANT —
EKS008SA
LKWA0017E
Revision: March 2005
AV-60
2005 Altima
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna
EKS008SB
A
B
C
D
E
F
WKIA1947E
Window Antenna Repair
EKS008SC
G
ELEMENT CHECK
1.
Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on
each side.
H
I
J
SEL250I
●
AV
When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger.
L
M
SEL122R
Revision: March 2005
AV-61
2005 Altima
AUDIO ANTENNA
2.
If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.
SEL252I
3.
To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication
will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point.
SEL253I
ELEMENT REPAIR
Refer to GW-54, "Filament Repair" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-62
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:25915
A
EKS008SD
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of
the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle
of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS
antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and
indicated on the screen with a current-location mark.
B
C
D
WKIA1371E
E
By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the
GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
F
G
H
SEL684V
TRAVEL DISTANCE
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation
may become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function
has been adopted. Adjustments can be made in extreme cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires.
TRAVEL DIRECTION
I
J
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals AV
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
Type
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
GPS antenna (GPS information)
Disadvantage
L
●
Direction errors may accumulate when the
vehicle is driven for long distances without
stopping.
M
●
Correct direction cannot be detected when
the vehicle speed is low.
Advantage
●
Can detect the vehicle's turning angle
quite accurately.
●
Can detect the vehicle's travel direction
(North/South/East/West).
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored in
the DVD-ROM drive.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display
must be corrected manually.
CAUTION:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVDROM.
Revision: March 2005
AV-63
SEL685V
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
●
●
In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will
be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is
currently driven has been judged and the current-location mark
has been repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of
them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering
wheel and configuration of the road.
Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on
which the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map
DVD-ROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data and
the actual road pattern are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching function may find another road and position the current-location mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the
current-location mark may leap to it.
Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel
direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road
data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when
there is an excessive gap between the current vehicle position
and the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible.
SEL686V
SKIA0613E
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and controlled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 miles).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satelSEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions.
●
In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
●
There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning,
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on
the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
●
Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite
do not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves
from the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
●
Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.
Revision: March 2005
AV-64
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NAVI Control Unit
●
●
A
The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map.
Location information is shown on liquid crystal display (display
unit).
B
C
D
PKIA0248E
DVD-ROM Drive
E
Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information can
be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc.
F
G
H
PKIA0249E
Map DVD-ROM
●
●
The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information.
To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive
Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used.
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)
●
●
The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle.
The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit.
I
J
AV
BIRDVIEW™
The BIRDVIEW™ provides a detailed and easily seen display of road conditions covering the vehicle's immediate to distant area.
●
PLAN VIEW
L
M
WKIA1948E
Revision: March 2005
AV-65
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
BIRDVIEW™
WKIA1949E
Description
●
●
●
Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six vertical
grid lines indicate display depth and direction.
Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the
scale change and the view point height on the left side of the
screen.
The height of the view point increases or decreases when
“ZOOM IN” or “ZOOM OUT” is selected.
SKIA5613E
MAP DISPLAY
Function of each icon is as follows:
1. Azimuth indication.
2. Position marker.
–
The tip of the arrow shows the current location. The shaft of the
arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is traveling.
3. GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions).
4. Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale).
WKIA1950E
Revision: March 2005
AV-66
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH
Display with Pushed “DEST” button
●
A
Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON)
B
C
D
SKIA3509E
●
E
Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF)
F
G
SKIA3510E
H
The function of each icon is as follows:
Mode
Icon
Easy
Address Book
×
Favorite place can be saved to memory.
Address/Street
×
×
The destination can be searched from the address.
Point of Interest (POI)
×
×
The destination of favorite facility can be searched.
Previous Dest.
×
The previous ten destinations stored in memory are displayed.
Intersection
×
The destination can be searched from the intersection.
City
×
The destination can be searched from city name.
Map
×
The destination can be searched from the map.
Phone Number
×
The destination can be set by entering the phone number.
Home
×
Sets the home as a destination.
Help
×
Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display.
Country
×
Revision: March 2005
I
Description
Expert
×
J
AV
L
M
Select country (USA, CANADA)
AV-67
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “ROUTE” button
●
Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON)
SKIA4494E
●
Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF)
SKIA4495E
The function of each icon is as follows:
Mode
Icon
Description
Easy
Expert
Quick Stop
×
×
The selected facility is set as the destination or way point.
(Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destination has been reached.)
Where am I?
×
×
Next, current and previous street names can be displayed.
The following items can be selected.
Cancel Guidance
×
×
●
All Destinations
●
Way point
●
Not Cancel
(Displayed only when the destination area has been set.)
The following items can be selected.
×
Route Info.*
●
Complete Route
●
Turn List
●
Route Simulation
(Displayed only when the destination area has been set.)
×
Edit Route*
Help
×
Change the destination or add the transit points of the route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and the recommended route is not followed.)
Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display.
*: When in Easy Mode, “Route Info.” and “Edit Route” are not displayed.
Revision: March 2005
AV-68
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “SETTING” button
A
The function of each icon is as follows:
B
C
SKIA4496E
D
Icon
Description
Display
Settings of display can be performed.
Vehicle Electronic Systems
Settings of vehicle electrical equipment can be performed.
System Settings
Settings of linguistic select, time adjusting and beep sound can be performed.
Navigation
Settings and adjusting of navigation can be performed.
Short Menus
Easy Mode and Expert Mode can be switched.
Guidance Volume
The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be controlled by the joystick.
Help (only easy mode)
Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display.
E
F
G
Display Settings
H
How To Perform Display Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “Display” with enter button.
I
J
AV
WKIA1951E
Application Items
L
Icon
Description
Reference
page
Brightness/Contrast/Map Background
Brightness, Contrast and Map Background can be set.
AV-69
Display Off
Display sleep mode ON/OFF can be switched.
AV-69
Brightness/Contrast/Map Back ground
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Select “Brightness/Contrast/Map Background”.
●
Brightness, Contrast and Background are shown at the lower part of the screen, and it can be set with the
joystick.
Display Off
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Select “Display Off”.
●
When setting is turned on (Indicator light ON), the display will be under sleep mode.
Revision: March 2005
AV-69
2005 Altima
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Electronic Systems
WKIA1952E
Application Items
Icon
Description
Remote Unlock Driver's Door First
This option allows selection of which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation.
Keyless Remote Response — Horn
This option allows the horn chirp mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button
on the keyfob to be changed.
Keyless Remote Response — Lights
This option allows the hazard flash mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob to be changed.
Auto Re-Lock Time
This option allows the length of time before doors auto re-lock to be set.
Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights
This option allows the sensitivity of the autolights to be set.
Automatic Headlights Off Delay
This option allows the length of time before the autolights turn off to be set.
Speed Dependent Wiper
This option allows the driving speed dependent wiper function to be turned on or off.
Return All Settings Default
All settings will return to the initial conditions.
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “Vehicle Electronic Systems”.
System Settings
How To Perform System Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “System Settings”.
SKIA4536E
Revision: March 2005
AV-70
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Application Items
Icon
Description
Reference
page
Language/Unit
Settings of language or unit can be performed.
AV-71
Clock
Settings of clock can be performed.
AV-71
Beep Setting
Settings of beep sound can be performed.
AV-71
A
B
Language Setting
C
How To Perform Language Setting
1. Select "Language/Unit".
●
Language setting can be switched.
●
Unit setting can be changed.
D
E
F
SKIA2065E
Clock Settings
How To Perform Clock Setting
1. Select "Clock".
●
Select the "Hours" or "Minutes" key and tilt the joystick to the left
or the right to adjust the time.
●
Turn ON and OFF daylight saving time.
●
Select the "Auto Adjust" key. The time will be reset to the GPS
time.
●
Select the "Select Time Zone" key. The [TIME ZONE] screen will
appear.
G
H
I
J
SKIA2063E
AV
Beep Setting
How To Perform Beep Setting
1. Select “Beep Setting”.
●
When Beep Setting is on (indicator light on), a beep will sound if
the button is pushed.
NOTE:
Items in exception of Beep Setting ON/OFF.
●
An error beep.
●
An interrupted-screen beep.
L
M
SKIA4829E
Revision: March 2005
AV-71
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Navigation Setting
How To Perform Navigation Setting
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” button.
3. Select “NAVIGATION”.
SKIA0551E
Application Items
Icon
Description
Reference
page
View
Map display mode can be switched.
AV-72
Heading
Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the
actual driving direction of the vehicle.
AV-73
Nearby Display Icons*
Icons of facilities can be displayed.
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections.
AV-73
Save Current Location*
Current vehicle location can be registered in Address Book.
AV-73
Adjust Current Location*
Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker
also can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is
not matched with the actual direction.
AV-73
Auto Re-route On/Off*
ON/OFF of Auto Re-route can be switched.
AV-74
Avoid Area Setting*
A particular area can be avoided when routing.
AV-74
Clear Memory*
Address Book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted.
AV-74
Edit Address Book*
Address Book can be edited.
AV-75
GPS Information*
The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea
level) of the present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in
which the vehicle is being driven.
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position.
AV-75
Quick Stop Customer Setting*
One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop.
AV-75
Set Average Speed for Estimated
Journey Time*
Average vehicle speed can be set to calibrate estimated journey time for the
destination.
AV-75
Tracking On/Off*
Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed.
AV-76
*: Not displayed in easy mode.
“VIEW” MODE
1.
Select “Birdview™” or “Plan View” icon.
● To open the map screen display with Birdview™, select “Birdview™”.
● To open the map screen display with Plan View, select “Plan
View”.
SKIA0554E
Revision: March 2005
AV-72
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“HEADING” MODE
●
●
A
To display North up, select “North up”.
To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
B
C
SKIA0561E
D
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE
●
Select an icon to display on the map screen.
E
F
G
SKIA0562E
H
“SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE
●
The current vehicle location can be registered in “Address
Book”.
NOTE:
“Address Book” can store 50 items maximum.
I
J
AV
SKIA0556E
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE
1.
2.
3.
Move marker to correct location.
Select "SET" and the vehicle location mark will be located in current position.
Select an icon “right” or “left” to calibrate the heading direction.
(Arrow marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.)
M
SKIA0563E
Revision: March 2005
AV-73
L
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4.
Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the arrow
mark.
SKIA0564E
“AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE
●
●
To activate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “On”.
To deactivate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “Off”.
SKIA0558E
“AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE
●
Areas to avoid can be registered.
SKIA2058E
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE
●
To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area”
and “Previous Destinations”, select “Yes”.
SKIA3572E
Revision: March 2005
AV-74
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE
●
A
Edit the items registered in Address Book.
B
C
SKIA3511E
D
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE
●
Latitude, longitude, altitude, astrometric state, and satellite location are displayed as GPS information.
NOTE:
Altitude is displayed only in three-dimensional status.
E
F
G
SKIA0555E
H
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE
Select a category for the “Quick Stop” menu.
NOTE:
This only replaces the fifth position on the "QUICK STOP" menu
when "ROUTE" is pressed.
●
I
J
AV
SKIA5820E
“SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE
●
●
Set the average vehicle speed to calibrate the estimated journey
time for the destination.
Set three items: “Freeway”, “Main Roads”, and “Ordinary
Roads”.
M
SKIA0565E
Revision: March 2005
AV-75
L
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“TRACKING” MODE
To delete the tracking marks on the map, select “Off”.
●
To leave the tracking marks on the map, select “On”.
NOTE:
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the memory.
●
SKIA0559E
GUIDANCE VOLUME
Description
Following guidance volume settings can be changed.
SKIA4497E
Activation/Deactivation Setting
●
The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guidance Volume” button.
Voice Volume Setting
●
Volume of the voice can be controlled by tilting the joystick to left/right.
DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON
●
●
When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following items will display on the screen.
Warning message (if there are any) →TRIP1→TRIP2→FUEL ECONOMY→MAINTENANCE→OFF.
Display items
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Display/Setting contents
Elapsed Time
Displays driving time with a range of 0000:00:00 to
9999:59:59.
Driving Distance
[(km) or (miles)]
Displays driving distance with a range of 00000.0 to
99999.9.
Average speed
[(km/h) or (MPH)]
Displays average speed with a range of 000.0 to 999.9.
Average Fuel Economy
[(MPG) or (l/100km)]
Displays fuel economy with ignition switch ON, average
fuel economy each 30 seconds.
Distance to Empty
[(km) or (miles)]
Displays possible driving distance with remaining fuel.
Fuel Economy [(MPG)
or (l/100km)]
Displays fuel economy each approx. 100 ms.
Engine oil
Maintenance intervals of engine oil and setting of oil
change cycle.
Tire rotation
Maintenance intervals of tire and setting of tire replacement cycle.
Maintenance
Revision: March 2005
AV-76
Reference
page
AV-77
AV-77
AV-77
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2
●
●
A
Elapsed time, Driving distance and Average speed are displayed as Trip 1 information or Trip 2 information.
The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by keeping
pushing “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds.
B
C
WKIA1953E
D
FUEL ECONOMY
●
●
Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty, Fuel Economy are
displayed as Fuel Economy information.
The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by keeping
pushing “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds.
E
F
G
WKIA1954E
H
MAINTENANCE
●
Engine Oil and Tire Rotation are displayed as Maintenance
information.
I
J
AV
WKIA1955E
ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION
●
Possible to set up interval of engine oil and tire rotation by tilting
joystick right and left.
M
WKIA1956E
Revision: March 2005
AV-77
L
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WARNING INDICATIONS
Warning signal (Door switch signal) is received from BCM through
CAN communication line.
WKIA1957E
Warning indicators
Warning lamps in
instrument panel
Warning detection and cancel conditions
Detection condition
DOOR OPEN
Door
Cancel condition
Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h
(3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of
any of the doors is detected.
Cases of malfunction
Door is open
Vehicle is stopped and all the
doors lock.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008SE
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-78
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
EKS008SF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKIA1958E
Revision: March 2005
AV-79
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS008SG
WKWA1282E
Revision: March 2005
AV-80
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram —NAVI—
EKS008SH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1283E
Revision: March 2005
AV-81
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA1284E
Revision: March 2005
AV-82
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1285E
Revision: March 2005
AV-83
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA1286E
Revision: March 2005
AV-84
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1287E
Revision: March 2005
AV-85
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WKWA1288E
Revision: March 2005
AV-86
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA1289E
Revision: March 2005
AV-87
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — COMM —
EKS008SI
WKWA1290E
Revision: March 2005
AV-88
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
WKWA2975E
Revision: March 2005
AV-89
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control unit
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
EKS008SJ
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
+
–
1 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
Ground
Battery
power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
4 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
6 (PU)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
8 (P)
Voice guide
signal
ON
Press the “GUIDE/
VOICE” button.
9
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
Audio noise
interference.
14
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
Video display
interference.
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
2 (Y/R)
3 (Y/R)
7 (L)
Output
Only route guide
and operation
guide are not
heard.
SKIA0171J
15 (B)
17
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Output
NAVI screen
looks yellowish.
SKIA4979E
16 (Y)
14
RGB synchronizing
signal
Output
ON
Press the “MAP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
SKIA0164E
17
18 (R)
–
17
Shield
ground
RGB signal
(R: red)
–
Output
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Video display
interference.
–
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
SKIA4977E
21 (W)
17
RGB signal
(G: green)
Output
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
NAVI screen
looks reddish.
SKIA4978E
Revision: March 2005
AV-90
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
25 (R/L)
26 (G)
–
Illumination
signal
30 (B)
Ground
Ignition signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Ignition
switch
Operation
28 (P)
Reverse
signal
Ground
Ground
Vehicle
speed signal
Input
Input
Example of
symptom
B
Lighting switch in
1st position
Battery voltage
Lighting switch is
OFF
3V or less
ON
ON
–
Selector lever in R
position
27 (G/W)
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
ON
ON
Selector lever not in
R position
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
0V
Display unit illumination does
not change
when lighting
switch is turned
to 1st position.Navigation current location
mark does not
indicate the correct position.
The navigation
current-location
mark moves
strangely when
the vehicle is
moving backwards.
Navigation current location
mark does not
indicate the correct position.
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA1935E
43
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
44 (G)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
–
–
–
J
AV
System does not
work properly.
L
SKIA0175E
M
45 (R)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
SKIA0176E
66
67
Revision: March 2005
GPS signal
Input
ON
Connector is not
connected.
AV-91
5V
Navigation system GPS correction is not
possible.
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
EKS008SK
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
System does not
work properly.
+
–
1 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery
Power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
2 (L/W)
Ground
Power Supply (Inverter)
Output
ON
–
9V
3 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
4 (L/R)
Ground
Power Supply (Signal)
Output
ON
–
9V
5 (P/B)
Ground
(Inverter)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
Input
Selector lever in R
position
Battery voltage
Ground
Reverse
signal
Selector lever not in
R position
0V
Impossible to
gain direction of
vehicle.
6 (G/W)
ON
Screen is not
shown.
–
Screen is not
shown.
7 (P/L)
Ground
(Signal)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
10 (PU)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
12 (G)
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
ON
–
Battery voltage
Vehicle information setting is not
possible.
Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd
Battery voltage
Lighting switch position OFF
0V
14 (R/L)
16 (P)
Illumination
signal
Ground
Ground
Vehicle
speed signal
Input
Input
OFF
ON
Display unit
does not change
when lighting
switch is turned
to 1st position.
Value of vehicle
speed information is not accurately displayed.
When vehicle speed
is approx. 40 km/h
(25 MPH)
SKIA0168E
25 (L)
–
CAN-H
–
–
–
–
–
26 (P)
–
CAN-L
–
–
–
–
–
28 (PU)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
Output
ON
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0175E
29
–
Revision: March 2005
Shield
ground
–
–
–
AV-92
–
–
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
30 (LG)
–
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Signal
input/
output
Input/
output
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
–
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
System does not
work properly.
C
D
SKIA0176E
E
32 (G)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
F
SKIA0175E
33
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
–
–
G
H
34 (R)
Ground
Communication signal (–)
Input/
output
ON
System does not
work properly.
–
I
SKIA0176E
J
36 (B/W)
37
Display Communication
signal
(DCU-DSP)
Output
ON
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
Press the “TRIP”
button.
SKIA4364E
37
–
Shield
ground
37
Display Communication
signal
(DSP-DCU)
–
–
–
–
AV
L
–
M
38 (L)
Input
ON
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
Press the “TRIP”
button.
SKIA4363E
39
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
40 (B/R)
Ground
Audio TX
Communication signal
Output
ON
Operate audio
volume.
–
–
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4402E
Revision: March 2005
AV-93
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
Signal
input/
output
Ignition
switch
Operation
+
–
41
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
42 (BR)
Ground
Audio RX
communication signal
Input
ON
Operate audio
volume.
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
–
–
Audio does not
operate properly.
SKIA4403E
43 (Y)
41
RGB synchronizing
signal
Input
ON
Press the “MAP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
SKIA0164E
44 (R)
45
RGB signal
(R: red)
–
Shield
ground
Input
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
SKIA4977E
45
46 (W)
45
RGB signal
(G: green)
–
Input
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
–
–
NAVI screen
looks reddish.
SKIA4978E
47
48 (B)
–
45
Shield
ground
RGB signal
(B: blue)
–
Input
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (NAVI)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
–
–
NAVI screen
looks yellowish.
SKIA4979E
49
50 (R/L)
–
47
Shield
ground
RGB signal
(R: red)
–
Output
–
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
–
–
NAVI screen
looks bluish.
SKIA4980E
Revision: March 2005
AV-94
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Condition
Item
+
51 (B)
–
RGB area
(YS) signal
49
Signal
input/
output
Output
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Press the“TRIP”
button.
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
RGB screen is
not shown.
C
D
SKIA0162E
52 (R/W)
RGB signal
(G: green)
47
Output
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
E
Screen looks
reddish.
F
SKIA4981E
53 (W)
49
Vertical synchronizing
(VP) signal
Input
ON
Operating
screen for audio
is not displayed
when showing
NAVI screen.
–
G
H
SKIA4983E
I
54 (B)
RGB signal
(B: blue)
47
Output
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Screen looks
yellowish.
SKIA4982E
55 (R)
49
Horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal
Input
ON
AV
Operating
screen for audio
is not displayed
when showing
NAVI screen.
–
49
RGB synchronizing
signal
Output
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
SKIA0164E
Revision: March 2005
AV-95
L
M
SKIA4983E
56 (G)
J
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Display unit
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
EKS008SL
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
–
+
–
1 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
2 (L/W)
Ground
Power supply (Inverter)
Input
ON
–
9V
Screen is not
shown.
3 (L/R)
Ground
Power supply (Signal)
Input
ON
–
9V
Screen is not
shown.
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
6 (R/W)
RGB signal
(G: green)
7
Input
Screen looks
reddish.
SKIA4981E
7
8 (R)
–
Shield
ground
21
Horizontal
synchronizing (HP) signal
–
Output
–
ON
–
–
–
Operating
screen for audio
is not displayed
when showing
NAVI screen.
–
SKIA4983E
9 (B)
RGB area
(YS) signal
21
Input
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
RGB screen is
not shown.
SKIA0162E
11 (B/W)
23
Display communication
signal
(DCU-DSP)
Input
ON
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
–
SKIA4364E
13 (P/B)
Ground
(Inverter)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
14 (P/L)
Ground
(Signal)
Ground
–
ON
–
0V
–
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
17 (R/L)
7
RGB signal
(R: red)
Input
Screen looks
bluish.
SKIA4980E
Revision: March 2005
AV-96
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No. (Wire
color)
Condition
Item
+
18 (B)
–
RGB signal
(B: blue)
7
Signal
input/
output
Input
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Select “Display
Diagnosis (DCU)” of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
A
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
B
Screen looks
yellowish.
C
D
SKIA4982E
E
19 (G)
RGB synchronizing
signal
21
Input
ON
Press the “TRIP”
button.
NAVI screen is
rolling.
F
SKIA0164E
20 (W)
21
Vertical synchronizing
(VP) signal
Output
ON
Operating
screen for audio
is not displayed
when showing
NAVI screen.
–
G
H
SKIA4983E
21
22 (L)
–
Shield
ground
23
Display communication
signal
(DSP-DCU)
–
Output
–
ON
–
–
–
Though a screen
is displayed, it is
impossible to
adjust brightness.
–
I
J
AV
SKIA4363E
23
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
–
–
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-97
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Item
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation
EKS008SM
Voltage
(Approx.)
Example of
symptom
+
–
1 (Y/R)
Ground
Battery
power
Input
OFF
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
2 (PU)
Ground
ACC signal
Input
ACC
–
Battery voltage
System does not
work properly.
3 (R/L)
Ground
Illumination
signal
Lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Input
OFF
Battery voltage
AV switch illumination does not
come on when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
Turn lighting switch
OFF.
3.0V or less
Changes between 0 and 12V
AV switch illumination cannot be
controlled.
0V
–
Input
ON
Illumination control
switch is operated
by lighting switch in
1st position.
4 (R/Y)
Ground
Illumination
control signal
5 (B)
Ground
Ground
–
ON
–
6 (PU)
Ground
Communication signal (+)
Input/
output
ON
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0175E
7
–
Shield
ground
–
–
–
8 (LG)
Ground
Communication signal (-)
Input/
output
ON
–
–
–
System does not
work properly.
SKIA0176E
10 (R)
11 (G)
12 (B/Y)
Ground
Ground
–
Remote control A
Remote control B
Remote control ground
Revision: March 2005
Input
Input
–
ON
ON
–
Press MODE switch
0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
0.75V
Press VOL UP
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
Press POWER
switch
0V
Press SEEK DOWN
switch
0.75V
Press VOL DOWN
switch
2V
Except for above
5V
–
–
AV-98
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
Steering wheel
audio controls
do not function.
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EKS008SN
A
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
L
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
B
C
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
D
SKIA5291E
E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
F
SKIA5292E
G
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
H
SKIA5291E
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC)
I
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5292E
ACC
—
AV
Battery voltage
L
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
M
SKIA5291E
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: March 2005
AV-99
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
G/B
Combination switch output 2
36
G/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN− H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN− L
—
—
—
57
W
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Revision: March 2005
AV-100
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
On Board Self-Diagnosis Function
EKS008SO
A
DESCRIPTION
●
●
●
Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually.
Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each
individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and
judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the
set value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system.
B
C
DIAGNOSIS ITEM
D
Mode
Description
Self-diagnosis (DCU)
Display control unit diagnosis.
●
NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive) will not be diagnosed
when no map DVD-ROM is in it.
●
Analyzes connection between the NAVI control unit and the GPS
antenna and operation of each unit.
Self-diagnosis (NAVI)
F
On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be
checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
Display diagnosis
On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehi-
Display diagnosis
On NAVI C/U mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked
by the display of a color bar and a gray scale.
Vehicle signals
On NAVI C/U mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed
signal, light signal, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
History of Errors
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition
switch ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the
errors occurred are also displayed.
Navigation
Navigation
Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude
will be displayed.
Speed Calibration
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring
function will automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and
tire diameter caused by tire wear or low-pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather.
Angle
adjustment
Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning
angle of the car mark on the display.
Initialize
Location
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is
transported a long distance on a trailer, etc.
Display status of CAN communication.
NOTE:
Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown.
Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)
EKS008SP
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
Revision: March 2005
H
I
J
Display Longitude & Latitude
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
1.
2.
G
cle speed signal, light signalNOTE , ignition switch signal, and reverse signal.
Vehicle signals
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
E
AV-101
2005 Altima
AV
L
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
WKIA2681E
4.
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
SKIA4207E
5.
Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”.
● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
● A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision
screen indicates progress of the diagnosis.
SKIA4208E
6.
When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation
screen will be shown.
● When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen
to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or
not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on
the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS”
screen will be shown.
● When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for
the part will not appear on the screen.
SKIA4209E
Revision: March 2005
AV-102
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
7.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
A
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
B
If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
●
C
WKIA1189E
D
8.
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
● When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation/
adjustment” menu or refer to the service manual.”
● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
“DCU is abnormal”.
E
F
G
SKIA4211E
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
H
Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV-88,
"Wiring Diagram — COMM —" .
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
J
Screen switch
Switch color
DCU*
Red
×
×
Gray
x
DISPLAY
Audio unit
Navigation
GPS
antenna
Diagnosis No.
1
x
x
3
×
×
Self-Diagnosis Codes
Possible cause
Reference
page
1
Display control unit malfunction
Refer to AV-156 .
2
Display communication line between display control unit and display unit
Refer to AV-128 .
3
Audio unit power supply and ground circuit
Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit
Refer to AV-125 .
4
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit
AV communication line between display control unit and NAVI control unit
Refer to AV-125 .
AV-103
L
4
*: DCU = Display control unit
CAUTION:
●
When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" .
●
When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-143, "Screen is Not Shown" .
Revision: March 2005
AV
2
×
Diagnosis
No.
I
2005 Altima
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)
EKS008SQ
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
WKIA2681E
4.
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
SKIA4207E
5.
Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis (NAVI)”.
● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
● A bar graph will be shown on the screen to indicate progress
of the diagnosis.
SKIA4212E
Revision: March 2005
AV-104
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6.
On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
A
: Not malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
B
If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.
●
C
SKIA4214E
D
7.
Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
● When the switch is green, the following comment will be
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “Confirmation and
Adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual.”
● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”.
● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
SKIA4211E
“Center Control Unit is abnormal”.
● When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER
of NAVI was not conducted because no DVD-ROM was available.”
SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select an malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV-88,
"Wiring Diagram — COMM —" .
Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Screen switch
Diagnosis No.
Switch color
Center control unit*
Red
×
1
Gray
×
2
×
3
×
4
Yellow
×
GPS antenna
×
Reference
page
1
NAVI control unit malfunction.
Refer to
AV-156
2
No map DVD-ROM is inserted in the NAVI control unit.
Refer to
AV-131
Revision: March 2005
AV-105
G
H
I
J
AV
M
5
Self-diagnosis codes
Possible cause
F
L
*: Center Control unit = NAVI control unit
CAUTION:
●
When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV
Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" .
●
When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-143, "Screen is Not Shown" .
Diagnosis
No.
E
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
When “DVD-ROM error. Please check disc.” is shown.
1. Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system.
3
2. Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage.
3. If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the map
DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
4
If “Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance with service manual” is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3.
Refer to
AV-131
Refer to
AV-131
GPS antenna system.
1. Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable.
5
2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector, and make sure approximately 5V is supplied from the NAVI
control unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If 5V is supplied, replace the GPS
antenna. If the connection is still malfunction after the replacement of the GPS antenna, the NAVI
control unit is malfunctioning.
Revision: March 2005
AV-106
Refer to
AV-132
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
EKS008SR
OPERATION PROCEDURE
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA2681E
4.
I
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
J
AV
L
SKIA4207E
5.
6.
7.
When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial selfdiagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of
each item will become possible.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals” and “Navigation” will
become selective.
Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
M
WKIA1959E
Revision: March 2005
AV-107
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
LKIA0216E
●
When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
●
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-137, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All
Screens Look Bluish)" , AV-138, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV139, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" .
VEHICLE SIGNALS
●
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF
of lighting switch (normal setting).
● OFF: D (Day mode)
● ON: N (Night mode)
Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be
accurately displayed.
LKIA0217E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Light
IGN
Reverse
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
Revision: March 2005
Condition
–
–
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
AV-108
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
●
●
●
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
If light is NG, refer to AV-123, "Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-124, "Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
A
B
NAVIGATION
1.
2.
The initial confirmation/adjustment screen will be shown, and
items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “History of Errors”
and “Navigation” will become selective.
Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
C
D
E
SKIA4226E
F
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
G
H
I
J
AV
SKIA0362E
●
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
●
L
When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
: Screen looks bluish
: Screen looks reddish
: Screen looks yellowish
M
When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-134, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only
NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)" , AV-135, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)" and AV-139, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-109
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VEHICLE SIGNALS
●
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the system.
CAUTION:
In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF
of light switch (normal setting).
● OFF: D (Day mode)
● ON: N (Night mode)
Unless mode is in above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may
not be accurately displayed.
LKIA0217E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
–
Light
IGN
Reverse
●
●
●
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R position
–
●
Condition
–
–
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-121, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
If light is NG, refer to AV-123, "Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-123, "Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-124, "Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
HISTORY OF ERRORS
SKIA0366E
DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS
The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred during the period from when the ignition switch
is turned to ON until “Self-diagnosis” is completed.
Revision: March 2005
AV-110
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in the past which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis” must be found by diagnosing the “History of Errors”.
The History of Errors displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take
note of the following points.
●
Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the
NAVI control unit has malfunctioned.
●
Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current-location mark at the time when
the error occurred. If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of
the error occurrence may be located correctly.
●
The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is 50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the
displayed number remains 50.
When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be identified because several errors are
present, record the item, number and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the History of
Errors), then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to reproduce the malfunction. Check the History of Errors
to find the items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diagnose the item.
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
A
B
C
D
E
F
Action/symptom
Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro.
Gyro sensor
disconnected
●
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS
substrate.
GPS disconnected
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Angular velocity cannot be detected.)
G
H
●
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
I
GPS receiving status remains gray.
J
Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal
GPS substrate.
GPS transmission cable
malfunction
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
●
Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal
GPS substrate.
GPS input
line connection error
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification
GPS TCX0
over
GPS TCX0
under
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively high or low temperatures.
Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning.
GPS ROM
malfunction
GPS RAM
malfunction
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Revision: March 2005
AV-111
During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not
performed.
AV
L
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
Location detection accuracy of the navigation
system will deteriorate, depending on the error
area in the memory, because GPS cannot
make correct positioning.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
2005 Altima
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
Action/symptom
Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning.
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,
the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
GPS RTC
malfunction
Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control
unit and GPS antenna.
GPS antenna
disconnected
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna
is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has
decreased.
Low voltage
of GPS
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna
is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
●
Correct time may not be displayed.
●
After the power is turned on, the system
always takes some time until GPS positioning
becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts
positioning without re-collecting the whole satellite information when it judged the data
stored in the receiver is correct.)
●
Correct time of error occurrence may not be
stored in the ″History of Errors″.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
●
Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
●
GPS receiving status remains gray.
Malfunctioning NAVI control unit.
DVD-ROM
Malfunction
DVD-ROM
Read error
DVD-ROM
Response
Error
-
Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be
read.
●
The map of a particular location cannot be displayed.
●
Specific guidance information cannot be displayed.
●
Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty?
–
If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
–
If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth.
●
Map display is slow.
●
Perform self-diagnosis.
●
Guidance information display is slow.
When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the
symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration.
●
System has been affected by vibration.
●
NAVIGATION
1.
2.
The navigation screen will be shown, and items “Display Longitude & Latitude”, “Speed Calibration”, “Angle Adjustment” and
“Initialize Location” will become selective.
Select each switch on “NAVIGATION” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
SKIA4576E
Revision: March 2005
AV-112
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display Longitude & Latitude
●
A
Able to confirm/adjust longitude and latitude.
B
C
SKIA4575E
D
Angle adjustment
●
E
Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope.
F
G
H
SKIA0364E
Speed Calibration
●
During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and
tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other
hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with
tire chain fitted on tires.
I
J
AV
SKIA0365E
L
Initialize Location
●
This mode is for initializing the current location.
Revision: March 2005
AV-113
M
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR
EKS008SS
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Turn the audio system off.
While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
(When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be
heard.)
● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “PREV” button.
WKIA2681E
4.
5.
The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/
Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will
become selective.
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”.
SKIA4207E
6.
Display status of CAN communication.
Item
Content
Error counter
CAN_COMM
OK/NG
0-50
CAN_CIRC_1
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_2
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_3
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_4
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_5
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_6
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_7
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_8
OK/UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_9
OK/UNKWN
0-50
SKIA4288E
●
If the ignition is turned on and UNKWN is shown on the screen, the value of the counter will be up.
(MAX50)
Revision: March 2005
AV-114
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
●
●
The value of the counter does not change if the ignition changes to OFF. (MAX50)
If the counter shows the value of 50 and UNKWN is shown, the value of 50 will not be changed.
AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function
A
EKS008ST
Refer to AV-33, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-115
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS008SU
1. CHECK FUSE
●
Make sure the following fuses of the NAVI control unit are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
2 (Y/R), 3 (Y/R)
Battery power
17
6 (PU)
ACC power
6
Terminal (Wire color)
B40
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
2 (Y/R), 3 (Y/R)
B40
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
6 (PU)
WKIA1372E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between NAVI control unit and fuse.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between the following NAVI control unit and
ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
—
B40
1 (B), 4 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
SKIA4291E
Revision: March 2005
AV-116
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit
EKS008SV
1. CHECK FUSE
●
A
Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown.
B
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
1 (Y/R)
Battery power
19
10 (PU)
ACC power
6
Terminal (Wire color)
M94
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
D
F
Ignition switch position
G
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
OFF
ACC
ON
H
1 (Y/R)
M94
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
10 (PU)
I
WKIA1373E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse.
J
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
AV
Check continuity between the following display control unit and
ground.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
—
M94
3 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
SKIA4293E
Revision: March 2005
AV-117
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit
1.
EKS008SW
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-117, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair malfunctioning part.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT
Disconnect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R) and ground.
Approx. 9V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WKIA1227E
3. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2 (L/W), 4 (L/R) and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R).
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
2 (L/W)
M94
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
2 (L/W)
M93
4 (L/R)
3 (L/R)
Yes
Check continuity between display unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1229E
Display unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
2 (L/W)
M93
3 (L/R)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
Revision: March 2005
AV-118
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4.
1.
2.
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13 (P/B), 14 (P/L) and ground.
B
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
C
D
WKIA2079E
5.
1.
2.
E
CHECK HARNESS
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93
terminals 13 (P/B), 14 (P/L) and display control unit harness
connector M94 terminals 5 (P/B), 7 (P/L).
F
G
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
I
WKIA2080E
6. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
J
Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows.
1.
Terminals
Terminal (Wire color)
—
Ignition
switch
Continuity
Connector
M93
1 (B)
Ground
OFF
Yes
AV
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair harness.
M
WKIA1228E
Revision: March 2005
AV-119
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch
EKS008SX
1. CHECK FUSE
●
Make sure the following fuses of the AV switch are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
1 (Y/R)
Battery power
19
2 (PU)
ACC power
6
Terminal (Wire color)
M98
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect AV switch connector.
Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
1 (Y/R)
M98
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
2 (PU)
WKIA1960E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between AV switch and fuse.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between AV switch and ground as follows.
Terminals
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
—
M98
5 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WKIA1961E
Revision: March 2005
AV-120
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS008SY
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector, combination meter connector, display control unit connector and
shift lock control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
B41 terminal 28 (P) and combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 3 (P).
Continuity should exist.
4.
B
C
D
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
B41 terminal 28 (P) and ground.
E
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1962E
F
2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
G
Connect NAVI control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
B41 terminal 28 (P) and ground.
H
Approx. 3.5V or more
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
J
SKIA4295E
AV
3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect combination meter connector, display control unit connector and shift lock control unit connector.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B41
terminal 28 (P) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
28 (P) - Ground
: Refer to AV-90, "Terminals
and Reference Value for NAVI
Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-121
SKIA4615E
2005 Altima
L
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit
EKS008SZ
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector, combination meter connector, NAVI control unit connector and
shift lock control unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (P) and combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 3 (P).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (P) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1963E
2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (P) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
SKIA4297E
3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect combination meter connector, NAVI control unit connector and shift lock control unit connector.
Drive vehicle at a constant speed.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 16 (P) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
16 (P) - Ground
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-122
SKIA4616E
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS008T0
1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
A
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
B
Lighting switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
B41
25 (R/L)
Ground
C
1st or 2nd
position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and IPDM E/R.
Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit
D
SKIA4298E
EKS008T1
E
F
1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
G
Lighting switch position
H
(+)
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Connector
M94
14 (R/L)
Ground
1st or 2nd
position
OFF
Battery
voltage
Approx. 0V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R.
Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
J
SKIA4299E
AV
EKS008T2
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
L
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
B41 terminal 26 (G) and ground.
M
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control
unit and fuse.
SKIA4300E
Revision: March 2005
AV-123
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit
EKS008T3
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M94 terminal 12 (G) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse.
WKIA1230E
Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS008T4
1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-98, "BACK-UP LAMP" .
2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL
With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between NAVI
control unit and ground.
Terminals
Selector lever position
(+)
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Connector
B41
27 (G/W)
Ground
R-position
Other than Rposition
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
SKIA4302E
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp position relay.
Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit
EKS008T5
1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-98, "BACK-UP LAMP" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-124
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL
A
With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between display
control unit and ground.
B
Terminals
Selector lever position
(+)
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Connector
M94
6 (G/W)
Ground
R-position
Other than
R-position
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
SKIA4303E
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and back-up lamp position relay.
D
E
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control
Unit)
EKS008T6
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
F
Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-116, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
1.
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
J
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B41
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
44 (G)
M95
45 (R)
4.
Continuity
AV
Terminal
(Wire color)
32 (G)
Yes
L
34 (R)
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
M
SKIA4444E
NAVI control unit
Connector
B41
Continuity
—
Terminal (Wire color)
44 (G)
Ground
No
45 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
AV-125
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
1. Replace NAVI control unit.
2. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio
Unit)
EKS008T7
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check system of power supply and ground circuit audio unit. Refer to AV-38, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection"
.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit.
Terminals
Display control unit (+)
Audio unit (–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Connector
40 (B/R)
M95
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
65 (B/R)
M45
42 (BR)
66 (BR)
Yes
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1192E
Display control unit(+)
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
(–)
40 (B/R)
M95
42 (BR)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
AV-126
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 (BR) and ground.
B
Approx. 3.5V or more.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
D
WKIA1770E
E
4. CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Connect audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 (B/R) and ground.
G
H
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
I
J
WKIA1771E
AV
5. CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 40 (B/R) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
40 (B/R) - Ground
M
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
L
AV-127
SKIA4447E
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 42 (BR) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
42 (BR) - Ground
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
SKIA4448E
Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display
Unit)
EKS008T8
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
36 (B/W)
M95
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
11 (B/W)
M93
38 (L)
Yes
22 (L)
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA2019E
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
36 (B/W)
M95
38 (L)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 (B/W) and ground.
Approx. 3.5V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
WKIA1377E
Revision: March 2005
AV-128
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Connect display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground.
B
C
Approx. 3.5V or more.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
E
SKIA4453E
F
4. CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 36 (B/W) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
36 (B/W) - Ground
G
H
I
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
J
SKIA4452E
AV
5. CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU)
L
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
38 (L) - Ground
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
M
AV-129
SKIA4453E
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)
EKS008T9
1. CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector and AV switch connector.
Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
AV switch
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
28 (PU)
M95
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
6 (PU)
M98
30 (LG)
Yes
8 (LG)
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1964E
Display control unit
Connector
Terminal (Wire color)
Continuity
—
28 (PU)
M95
30 (LG)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU
1. Replace AV switch.
2. Connect display control unit connector and AV switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-130
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CAN Communication Line Check
EKS008TA
1. CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
A
Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-101, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" .
Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-114,
"CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR" .
B
content
Item
3.
C
Error counter
Normal condition
Error (Example)
CAN_COMM
OK
NG
0-50
CAN_CIRC_1
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_2
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_3
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_4
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_5
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_6
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_7
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_8
OK
UNKWN
0-50
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
UNKWN
0-50
D
SKIA4288E
E
F
G
Record each item display description (OK/NG/UKNWN) displayed on the following CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MONITOR Check Sheet.
H
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet
Diagnosis item
Screen display
Diagnosis item
Screen display
CAN_COMM
OK
NG
CAN_CIRC_5
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_1
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_6
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_2
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_7
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_3
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_8
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_4
OK
UNKWN
CAN_CIRC_9
OK
UNKWN
I
J
AV
>> After filling in CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is Not Inserted
L
EKS008TB
1. CHECK DVD-ROM
Make sure identified DVD-ROM map is inserted.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Insert identified DVD-ROM map.
If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVD-ROM Map Malfunctioning or If It
is Impossible to Load Data from DVD-ROM Map
EKS008TC
1. CHECK 1: DVD-ROM
Remove inserted DVD-ROM map to check that it is identified.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace identified DVD-ROM map.
Revision: March 2005
AV-131
2005 Altima
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK 2: DVD-ROM
Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace DVD-ROM map.
3. CHECK 3: DVD-ROM
Insert same DVD-ROM to make sure same diagnosis result is found as last self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace DVD-ROM map.
If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning
EKS008TD
1. CHECK GPS ANTENNA
Check cable for GPS antenna for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" .
2. CHECK BY REPLACEMENT OF GPS ANTENNA
Replace with other functional GPS antenna to try self-diagnosis again.
Result of self-diagnosis; Found same result?
Yes
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
No
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" .
Operating Screen for Audio is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen
EKS008TE
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R)
and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9 (B), 20 (W), 8 (R).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between display control unit harness connector
M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
WKIA1965E
Revision: March 2005
AV-132
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 (R) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
55 (R) - 49
B
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
D
SKIA4305E
E
3. CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 53 (W) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
53 (W) - 49
G
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
I
WKIA1773E
J
4. CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL
1.
2.
Press the “TRIP” button.
Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 (B) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
51 (B) - 49
AV
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
M
SKIA4306E
Revision: March 2005
AV-133
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)
EKS008TF
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
When the screen looks bluish.
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B40
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
18 (R)
M95
17
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
44 (R)
Yes
45
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4349E
Terminal (Wire color)
B40
18 (R)
Ground
No
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal
18 (R) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 18 (R) and 17.
18 (R) - 17
: Refer to AV-90, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control unit" .
OK or NG
SKIA4629E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-134
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)
EKS008TG
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
When the screen looks reddish.
B
C
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B40
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
21 (W)
M95
17
D
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
46 (W)
E
Yes
45
F
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B40
Continuity
—
SKIA4350E
Terminal (Wire color)
G
21 (W)
Ground
No
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal
21 (W) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 21 (W) and 17.
21 (W) - 17
J
AV
L
: Refer to AV-90, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control unit" .
M
OK or NG
SKIA4630E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-135
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish)
EKS008TH
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
●
When the screen looks yellowish.
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B40
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
15 (B)
M95
17
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
48 (B)
Yes
45
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B40
Continuity
—
SKIA4351E
Terminal (Wire color)
15 (B)
Ground
No
17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal
15 (B) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B40 terminal 15 (B) and 17.
15 (B) - 17
: Refer to AV-90, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control unit" .
OK or NG
SKIA4631E
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-136
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)
EKS008TI
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
When the screen looks bluish.
B
C
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
50 (R/L)
M93
47
D
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
17 (R/L)
E
Yes
7
F
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Continuity
—
SKIA4353E
Terminal (Wire color)
G
50 (R/L)
Ground
No
47
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks bluish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 50 (R/L) and 47.
50 (R/L) - 47
J
AV
L
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
SKIA4697E
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-137
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)
EKS008TJ
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
When the screen looks reddish.
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
52 (R/W)
M93
47
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
6 (R/W)
Yes
7
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4354E
Terminal (Wire color)
M95
52 (R/W)
Ground
No
47
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks reddish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 52 (R/W) and 47.
52 (R/W) - 47
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
SKIA4698E
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-138
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)
EKS008TK
1. CHECK RGB HARNESS
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
●
When the screen looks yellowish.
B
C
Terminals
D
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
54 (B)
M93
47
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
E
18 (B)
Yes
7
F
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
SKIA4355E
Terminal (Wire color)
M95
54 (B)
Ground
G
No
47
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
I
2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
●
J
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks yellowish.
Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 54 (B) and 47.
54 (B) - 47
AV
L
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
SKIA4356E
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-139
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVI Screen is Rolling
EKS008TL
1. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit.
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
B40
Display control unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
16 (Y)
M95
14
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
43 (Y)
Yes
41
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA2020E
NAVI control unit
Connector
Continuity
—
Terminal (Wire color)
B40
16 (Y)
Ground
No
14
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
2. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between NAVI control unit connector M95 terminals 16 (Y) and 14 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
16 (Y) - 14
: Refer to AV-90, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
SKIA4358E
Revision: March 2005
AV-140
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Check continuity between display control unit and display unit.
B
Terminals
Display control unit
Connector
Display unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
56 (G)
M95
4.
C
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
19 (G)
M93
49
D
Yes
21
Check continuity between display control unit and ground.
E
Terminals
WKIA2021E
Display control unit
Connector
M95
Continuity
—
F
Terminal (Wire color)
56 (G)
Ground
No
49
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
4. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminals 19
(G) and 21 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
19 (G) - 21
J
: Refer to AV-92, "Terminals
and Reference Value for Display Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and
Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
I
AV-141
AV
L
WKIA2022E
M
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Sound is Not Heard
EKS008TM
1. CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING
NOTE:
Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction.
●
While driving in the dark pink route, voice guide does not operate.
●
Is volume setting not switched ON?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up.
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and audio unit.
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
Audio unit
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
7 (L)
B40
4.
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
71 (L)
M45
8 (P)
Yes
69 (P)
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
WKIA1193E
NAVI control unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
—
7 (L)
B40
8 (P)
Ground
No
Ok or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
3. CHECK VOICE GUIDE
1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B40
terminal 7 (L) and 8 (P) with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope.
7 (L) - 8 (P)
: Refer to AV-90, "Terminals
and Reference Value for
NAVI Control unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and
Installation for Audio Unit" .
NG
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal
and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-142
SKIA4362E
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Screen is Not Shown
EKS008TN
1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
A
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-118, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display
Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown
1.
B
C
EKS008TO
CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
D
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
E
2. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE
F
Check display communication line. Refer to AV-128, "Display Communication Line Check (Between Display
Control Unit and Display Unit)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown)
H
EKS008TP
1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
I
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
J
AV
2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown)
EKS008TQ
1. CHECK SPEEDOMETER
Confirm that speedometer is functioning.
Is speedometer functioning?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" .
2. CHECK FUEL GAUGE
Confirm that fuel GAUGE is functioning.
Is fuel gauge functioning?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
Revision: March 2005
G
AV-143
2005 Altima
L
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown)
EKS008TR
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown
EKS008TS
1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL
Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-124, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-122, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (With NAVI) (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)
EKS008TT
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-120, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV
Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: March 2005
AV-144
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS
A
AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-115, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
B
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
C
Check display control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-117, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
D
E
4. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE
Check communication line. Refer to AV-130, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit
and AV Switch)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" .
NG
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
Audio Does Not Work
F
G
EKS008TU
H
Refer to AV-35, "Trouble Diagnosis" .
Navigation System Does Not Activate
EKS008TV
1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
I
Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-116, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI
Control Unit" .
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
AV
Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored
EKS008TW
1. CHECK BATTERY POWER
L
Check NAVI control unit battery power.
Refer to AV-116, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check NAVI control unit battery power system harness.
Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored
EKS008TX
1. CHECK BATTERY POWER
Check display control unit battery power.
Refer to AV-117, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" .
NG
>> Check display control unit battery power system harness.
Revision: March 2005
AV-145
2005 Altima
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct
EKS008TY
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-104, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
2. HISTORY OF ERRORS DIAGNOSIS
Was any error stored in AV-110, "HISTORY OF ERRORS" of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode?
YES or NO
YES >> AV-110, "DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS".
NO
>> AV-146, "Driving Test".
Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received
EKS008TZ
1. CHECK ENVIRONMENT
Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable
phone) is located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building.
OK or NG
OK
>> ● System is not malfunctioning.
The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the GPS satellite if it is shielded
by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-104, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" .
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
Driving Test
EKS008U0
1. DRIVING TEST 1
1.
Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT
LOCATION CORRECTION”.
2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark.
3. Perform the distance correction of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode.
Note: Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be
made.
4. Are symptoms malfunctioning to the AV-147, "Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction" after driving the vehicle?
YES or NO
YES >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
AV-146
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. DRIVING TEST 2
A
Did any malfunction occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed?
●
Test pattern
B
Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor.
–
Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction
Disconnect GPS antenna connector (GT5) connected to the NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current location and the direction, then drive the vehicle.
C
–
Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching
Accurately adjust the current location and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the NAVI control
unit with ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back D
in the unit, display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration.
●
Sample tests
E
–
Perform test pattern 1.
F
–
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate
G
tracking, plotting shall be made every several hundred meters (feet).
–
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate H
the rate of change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance.
Correction = A/B
A: Distance shown on the screen
I
B: Actual distance
YES or NO
YES >> ● If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again.
J
● If any error is found in the map, please contact map data supplier. Refer to Navigation System
Owner's Manual for contact information.
● Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-156, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
AV
NO
>> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system.
●
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction
EKS008U1
L
BASIC OPERATION
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
No image is shown.
Display brightness adjustment is set fully to
DARK side.
Adjust the display brightness.
No guide sound is heard.
Audio guide volume is too low or
too high.
Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX.
Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle
is driving on a dark pink route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Screen is too dark.
Motion of the image is too slow.
Temperature inside the vehicle is low.
Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear
on the screen.
Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit).
System is not malfunction.
Revision: March 2005
AV-147
M
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VEHICLE MARK
Symptom
Cause
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™
Name of the place varies with the
screen.
Some thinning of the character data is done to
prevent the display becoming to complex. In
some cases and in some locations, the display
contents may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data
processing.
System is not malfunctioning.
Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly.
Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its
ignition switch is turned to OFF.
Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition.
Screen will not switch to nighttime
mode after the lighting switch is
turned ON.
The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH
SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function.
Perform screen dimming and select the
nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel.
Current location is not displayed.
Press “MAP” button to display the current
location.
Vehicle mark will not be shown.
Current location is not displayed.
Press “MAP” button to display the current
location.
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite
mark) on the map screen stays
gray.
GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the
vehicle is in or behind a building.
Move the vehicle out to an open space.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument
panel.
Do not place anything in the center on top of
the display.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location.
Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle.
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the
map screen stays gray.
Current location is not determined.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle.
Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the deviation will be automatically adjusted.
If advancement or retard still occur, perform
the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is
always deviated to the same position.)
As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will
be released once a year.
Vehicle location accuracy is low.
Remedy
DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Destination cannot be set.
Destination to be set is on an expressway.
Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched
when re-searching the route.
The vehicle has already passed the passing point,
or the system judged so.
To include the passing points that have been
passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be displayed.
Route searching has not been done.
Set the destination and perform route
searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF.
Turn route guide ON.
Route information is not available on the dark pink
route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
(On the display, only guide signs related to the
recommended route will be shown.)
Drive on the recommended route.
After the route searching, no guide
sign will appear as the vehicle
goes near the entrance/exit to the
toll road.
Revision: March 2005
AV-148
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Automatic route searching is not
possible.
Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no
recommended route is available.
Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–
search the route manually. In this case, however, the whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour
search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that
of the previous search.
Performed search with every condition considered. However, the result is the same as that of
the previous search.
System is not malfunctioning.
Passing points cannot be set.
More than five passing points were set.
Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting point cannot be selected.
The current vehicle location is always set as the
starting point of a route.
System is not malfunctioning.
Some menu items cannot be
selected.
The vehicle is being driven.
Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then
operate the system.
A
B
C
D
E
VOICE GUIDE
Symptom
Voice guide will not operate.
Voice guide does not match the
actual road pattern.
Cause
F
Remedy
Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
even when the route on the map changes direction.
System is not malfunctioning.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route.
Return to the recommended route or research the route.
Voice guide is turned OFF.
Turn voice guide ON.
Route guide is turned OFF.
Turn route guide ON.
Voice guide may vary with the direction to which
the vehicle is turned and the connection of the
road to other roads.
Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules.
G
H
I
J
ROUTE SEARCH
Symptom
No route is shown.
Indicated route is intermittent.
Cause
Remedy
No road to be searched is found around the destination.
Find wider road (orange road or wider)
nearby and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling
direction when there are separate up and
down roads.
Starting point and the destination are too close.
Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/
time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination.
Turn the time-regulating search conditions
OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
search conditions OFF.
In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note) Therefore, the route to
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the
recommended route, it is deleted
from the screen.
Revision: March 2005
A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing
point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The
data may remain undeleted in some areas.)
AV-149
System is not malfunctioning.
2005 Altima
AV
L
M
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Symptom
Detouring route is recommended.
Cause
Remedy
In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour
route may be recommended.
Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
route).
A detour route may be shown when some traffic
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area
around the starting point or the destination.
Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route
of your choice.
In the area where highways (gray routes) are
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route
may be detouring.
System is not malfunctioning.
Landmarks on the map do not
match the actual ones.
This can be happen due to omission or error in
the map data.
As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
released once a year. Wait until the latest
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from
the starting point, passing points,
and destination.
Starting point, passing points, and destination of
the route guide were set far from the desired
points because route searching data around
these area were not stored.
Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
this road is one of the highways (gray
routes), an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT
Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V
Revision: March 2005
AV-150
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
–: While driving
ooo: Display
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
A
B
C
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
E
ELK0193D
Straight roads
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching does not work effectively enough and
distance errors may accumulate. As a
result, the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location when the vehicle is
turned at a corner.
Road configuration
ELK0194D
Zigzag roads
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.
F
G
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
H
I
J
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern
AV
When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the
map may be matched to them by mistake
and the vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct location.
L
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel
(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
ELK0197D
Revision: March 2005
AV-151
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition) –: While driving
ooo: Display
In a parking lot
SEL709V
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be
easily returned to after rotating the vehicle
on a turntable with the ignition OFF.
Place
SEL710V
Slippery roads
On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
Slopes
When parking in sloped garages, when
travelling on banked roads, or in other
cases where the vehicle turns when tilted,
an error in the turning angle will occur, and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the
road.
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
Map data
Different road pattern
(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct road.
ELK0201D
Vehicle
Use of tire chains
Revision: March 2005
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
not correctly detected, and the vehicle
mark may deviate from the correct road.
AV-152
Drive the vehicle for a while. If
the distance still deviates,
adjust it by using the distance
adjustment function. (If the tire
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
–: While driving
ooo: Display
Just after the engine is started
Continuous driving without stopping
Precautions
for driving
Abusive driving
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
speed sensor) correction is not completed,
the vehicle can lose its direction and may
have deviated from the correct location.
Wait for a short while before
driving after starting the engine.
When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and
the current-location mark may deviate from
the correct road.
Stop and adjust the orientation.
Spinning the wheels or engaging in other
kinds of abusive driving may result in the
system being unable perform correct
detection, and may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
If the accuracy of location settings is poor,
accuracy may be reduced when the correct
road cannot be found, particularly in places
where there are many roads.
Enter in the road displayed on
the screen with an accuracy of
approx. 1mm.
Caution: Whenever possible,
use detailed map for the correction.
B
C
D
E
Position correction accuracy
How to correct location
F
G
SEL701V
Direction when location is corrected
H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be
reduced afterwards.
Perform direction correction.
I
SEL702V
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG
J
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map
depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direcAV
tion correction.
●
When location correction has not been done
–
If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, or if the current-location mark becomes out of
place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. L
The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
●
When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been towed
–
Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for M
example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise
location can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the
current location.
●
When map-matching has been done
–
If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map-matching is done, the currentlocation mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a
location which is not on a road.
●
When GPS location correction has been done
–
If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS
measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected”
to a location which is not on a road.
Revision: March 2005
AV-153
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA
The navigation system moves the current-location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If
the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT
PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW
●
●
The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive
some distance for the function to work.
Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until some special feature is found.
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO
CORRECT LOCATION
●
●
●
The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark
may not be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done.
The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used.
GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped.
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED
The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen.
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows.
●
●
●
●
●
The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for
more distant areas.
Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Revision: March 2005
AV-154
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit
EKS008U2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
SKIA0389E
Revision: March 2005
AV-155
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit
EKS008U3
CAUTION:
●
Do not strike the NAVI control unit while loading the trunk and do not place heavy objects on it.
Doing so could cause improper operation or damage the system.
●
To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. Remove trunk floor carpet and trunk side finisher LH.
3. Remove retaining nuts.
4. Disconnect connectors.
5. Remove screws and brackets from NAVI control unit.
6. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1966E
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS008U4
Remove rear parcel shelf finisher.
Remove bolts.
Disconnect GPS antenna connector and remove GPS antenna.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1967E
Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch
EKS008U5
Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" .
Removal and Installation of AV Switch
EKS008U6
Refer to AV-58, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" .
Removal and Installation of Display Unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008U7
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove the audio/display assembly screws.
Disconnect connectors and remove audio/display assembly.
Remove screws and remove display unit from brackets.
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
WKIA1945E
Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit
1.
2.
EKS008U8
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Revision: March 2005
AV-156
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove daytime light control unit (Canada models only).
Remove the screws and lower the display control unit.
Disconnect connectors and remove display control unit.
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
WKIA1968E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AV
L
M
Revision: March 2005
AV-157
2005 Altima
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Revision: March 2005
AV-158
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
BCS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ........................... 3
System Description .................................................. 3
BCM FUNCTION ................................................... 3
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION..... 3
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL .................... 6
BCM STATUS CONTROL ..................................... 6
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY..... 7
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM
E/R ........................................................................ 7
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................................................... 7
CAN Communication System Description ................ 8
Schematic ................................................................. 9
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 11
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 11
ITEMS OF EACH PART ...................................... 12
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 13
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULTII (Self-Diagnosis) ................................................... 13
Configuration .......................................................... 14
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 14
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE ............ 14
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE .......... 16
Removal and Installation of BCM ........................... 20
REMOVAL ........................................................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 20
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BCS-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS008R5
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Revision: March 2005
BCS-2
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
●
PFP:284B2
A
EKS008R6
BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
B
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper
washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components.
Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM
using CAN communication.
C
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1.
2.
Description
● BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results.
● BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5)
and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
Operation description
● BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in
turn.
● If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
● At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When
voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects
voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
LIIA1323E
3.
BCM - Operation table of combination switch
● BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the following table.
Revision: March 2005
BCS-3
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
LIIA1324E
NOTE:
Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4.
Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
● When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if
OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting
switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication.
● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
Revision: March 2005
BCS-4
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LIIA1325E
I
5.
NOTE:
Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON,
electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed.
J
Operation mode
● Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
BCS
Normal status
● When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BCS-5
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
●
When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 10 ms intervals, and receives lighting
switch input only.
WKIA4000E
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H)
connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively
reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
● With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
● Control by BCM is being operated properly.
● When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
● Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is
active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
● This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
● It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
● Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
● With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
● With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
● Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
4.
Sleep status
Revision: March 2005
BCS-6
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
CAN communication is not active.
When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
Key switch and key lock solenoid
Hazard switch
Door lock/unlock switch
Front door switch (LH, RH)
Rear door switch (LH, RH)
Trunk switch and trunk release solenoid
Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
front door key cylinder switch LH
When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive
mode.
Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
●
●
●
Power door lock system. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .
Remote keyless entry system. Refer to BL-46, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" .
Power window system. Refer to GW-15, "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM" .
G
Sunroof system. Refer to RF-10, "SUNROOF" . NOTE
●
Room lamp timer. Refer to LT-115, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" .
●
Warning chime system. Refer to DI-45, "WARNING CHIME" .
●
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to LT-72, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
LAMPS" .
NOTE:
Power supply only. No system control.
●
H
I
J
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
●
●
●
●
●
●
Panic system. Refer to BL-46, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" .
BCS
Vehicle security system. Refer to BL-84, "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM" .
NVIS (NATS) system. Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Headlamp, daytime running lamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer L
to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" , LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -"
, LT-100, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS" , LT-60, "FRONT FOG LAMP" or LT-44,
"AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM" .
M
Front wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-4, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM" .
Rear window defogger system. Refer to GW-42, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
System
Remote keyless entry system
Input
Keyfob
Output
●
All door locking actuators
●
Trunk lid opener actuator
●
Turn signal lamp (LH, RH)
Power door lock system
Front power door lock/unlock
switch (LH, RH)
All door locking actuators
Power supply (IGN) to power window and
sunroof
Ignition power supply
Power supply to power window and sunroof system
Power supply (BAT) to power window and
sunroof
Battery power supply
Power supply to power window and sunroof system
Revision: March 2005
BCS-7
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System
Input
●
Key switch and key lock solenoid
●
Keyfob
●
All door switches
●
Key fob
●
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
Panic alarm
Vehicle security system
Auto light system
Battery saver control
●
Trunk lamp switch and trunk
release solenoid
●
Auto light sensor
●
Combination switch
●
Ignition switch
●
Combination switch
Output
IPDM E/R
●
IPDM E/R
●
Security indicator lamp
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R
Headlamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Tail lamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Fog lamp
Combination switch
IPDM E/R
Turn signal lamp
Combination switch
Hazard lamp
Room lamp timer
Hazard switch
●
Key switch and key lock solenoid
●
Keyfob
●
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
●
Front door switch LH
●
All door switches
●
Key switch and key lock solenoid
●
Front door switch LH
●
Combination switch
●
Key switch and key lock solenoid
●
Front door switch LH
●
Combination switch
●
Combination meter
Key warning chime
Light warning chime
Vehicle-speed-sensing intermittent wiper
●
Turn signal lamp
●
Combination meter
●
Turn signal lamp
●
Combination meter
Interior room lamp
Combination meter (warning buzzer)
Combination meter (warning buzzer)
IPDM E/R
Rear window defogger
Rear window defogger switch
IPDM E/R
Air conditioner switch signal
A/C control unit
ECM
Blower fan switch signal
A/C control unit
ECM
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008R7
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
BCS-8
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Schematic
EKS008R8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
WIWA0416E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-9
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
WIWA0417E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-10
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008R9
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Content
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
E
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
J
BCS
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-11
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
4.
Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
LKIA0169E
ITEMS OF EACH PART
NOTE:
CONSULT-II will only display systems the vehicle possesses.
Diagnostic test mode (Inspection by part)
CONSULT-II
display
System and item
Power door lock
system
DOOR LOCK
Rear defogger
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF−
DIAG
RESULTS
ECU
PART
NUMBER
ACTIVE
TEST
×
×
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Room lamp timer
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Remote keyless
entry system
MULTI REMOTE
ENT
×
×
×
Headlamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper
WIPER
×
×
Turn signal lamp
Hazard lamp
FLASHER
×
×
Blower fan switch
signal
Air conditioner
switch signal
AIR
CONDITIONER
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
×
BCM
BCM
NVIS (NATS)
IMMU
Interior lamp
battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
Trunk
TRUNK
Vehicle security
system
THEFT ALM
Retained power
control
RETAINED PWR
Oil pressure switch
SIGNAL BUFFER
Panic system
PANIC ALARM
Revision: March 2005
×
DATA
MONITOR
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
CONFIGURATION
CAN DIAG
SUPPORT
MNTR
×
×
×
BCS-12
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
A
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
B
C
D
LKIA0169E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
F
G
H
BCIA0031E
Display Item List
Item
I
Description
RESET SETTING VALUE
Return a value set with WORK SUPPORT of each system to a default value in factory shipment.
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
EKS008RA
J
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
BCS
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Connect to CONSULT-II, and select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
L
2. Select “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
3. Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
M
CONSULT-II display code
Diagnosis item
INITIAL DIAG
TRANSMIT DIAG
ECM
U1000
IPDM E/R
METER/M&A
I-KEY
Contents displayed
No malfunction>>Inspection End.
Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
BCS-13
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Configuration
EKS008RB
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
●
READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
●
WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION:
●
When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
●
Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
●
If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
●
Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-14
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
4.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
A
B
C
LKIA0169E
D
5.
Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
6.
H
Touch “L31 (SPEC1)” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to
GI-46, "Model Variation (Early production)" in GI section.
I
J
BCS
LKIA0498E
7.
Touch “READ CONFIGURATION” on “CONFIGURATION”
screen.
L
M
LKIA0172E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-15
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
8.
Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed.
Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
LKIA0504E
9.
Touch “BACK” on “READ CONFIGURATION” screen.
LKIA0500E
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-16
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
A
B
C
BCIA0029E
D
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
E
F
G
BCIA0030E
H
4.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
I
J
BCS
LKIA0169E
5.
L
Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
M
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-17
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
6.
Touch “L31 (SPEC1)” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen.
For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to
GI-46, "Model Variation (Early production)" in GI section.
LKIA0498E
7.
Touch “WRITE CONFIGURATION” on “CONFIGURATION”
screen.
LKIA0172E
8.
Touch "YES”.
For canceling, touch "NO".
LKIA0175E
9.
Using the following flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list.
Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items
shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULTII "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or
changed.
ITEM
SET VAL
KEYLESS ENTRY
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
AUTO LIGHT
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
DTRL
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
THEFT ALARM
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
NOTE:
Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation (Early production)"
in GI section.
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION:
Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is
same as the desirable configuration.
If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
Revision: March 2005
BCS-18
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
11. Touch “OK” on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
A
B
C
LKIA0484E
D
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
E
F
G
LKIA0398E
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically.
Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by
comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
H
I
J
BCS
L
M
LKIA0509E
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
LKIA0400E
Revision: March 2005
BCS-19
2005 Altima
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation of BCM
EKS008RC
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring
brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to BCS-14, "Configuration" .
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove driver lower instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove screws (2) and release BCM from steering member.
4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
LIIA1559E
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
●
When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to BCS-14, "Configuration" .
●
When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Revision: March 2005
BCS-20
2005 Altima
I BODY
SECTION
BL
BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for work ................................................ 4
Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis ................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 6
Work Flow ................................................................ 6
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 6
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 7
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 7
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 7
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 7
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 8
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 8
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 8
DOORS ................................................................. 8
TRUNK .................................................................. 9
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 9
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 9
SEATS ................................................................... 9
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 10
HOOD ....................................................................... 12
Fitting Adjustment .................................................. 12
FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT AND LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................. 12
SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................... 12
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly .......... 13
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ..... 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 14
Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................ 15
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 16
Revision: March 2005
BL-1
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 16
System Description ................................................. 17
WITH LEFT FRONT ONLY FRONT POWER
WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM ....................... 17
WITH LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM .............................. 17
OUTLINE ............................................................. 17
KEY–TRAP PREVENTIVE FUNCTION .............. 18
Schematic ............................................................... 19
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — ............................... 20
FIG. 1 ................................................................... 20
FIG. 2 ................................................................... 21
FIG. 3 ................................................................... 22
FIG. 4 ................................................................... 23
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ............... 24
Work Flow ............................................................... 24
CONSULT–II Function (BCM) ................................ 25
CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE .................................................................. 25
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 27
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 27
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 28
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 28
Door Switch Check ................................................. 30
Key Switch (Insert) Check ...................................... 32
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left front only
power window anti–pinch system) .......................... 33
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right
front power window anti–pinch system) .................. 36
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check ... 38
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH and Rear LH/
RH) ......................................................................... 39
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (With left front only power window anti-pinch
system) ................................................................... 40
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right
front power window anti–pinch system) .................. 41
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH
(With left and right front power window anti–pinch
2005 Altima
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
system) ................................................................... 43
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (With left and right front power window anti–
pinch system) ......................................................... 44
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ..................... 46
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 46
System Description ................................................. 47
INPUTS ............................................................... 47
OPERATED PROCEDURE ................................. 47
CAN Communication System Description .............. 48
Schematic ............................................................... 49
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — ............................... 50
FIG. 1 ................................................................... 50
FIG. 2 ................................................................... 51
FIG. 3 ................................................................... 52
FIG. 4 ................................................................... 53
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................ 54
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 55
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 55
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 55
CONSULT-II Application Items ............................... 56
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 56
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ................................. 58
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 58
Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 59
SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 59
Keyfob Battery and Function Check ....................... 61
Door Switch Check ................................................. 62
Key Switch (Insert) Check ...................................... 64
Trunk Release Solenoid Check .............................. 65
Check Hazard Function .......................................... 67
Check Horn Function .............................................. 67
Check Headlamp Function ..................................... 67
Check Room Lamp, Step Lamp and Ignition Key Illumination Function ................................................... 67
ID Code Entry Procedure ....................................... 68
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II ............ 68
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II ..... 70
Keyfob Battery Replacement .................................. 71
DOOR ........................................................................ 72
Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 72
FRONT DOOR .................................................... 72
REAR DOOR ....................................................... 72
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT .................................... 73
Removal and Installation ........................................ 73
Door Weatherstrip ................................................... 74
FRONT DOOR LOCK ............................................... 75
Component Structure .............................................. 75
Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 75
EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT ........ 75
Removal and Installation ........................................ 75
REMOVAL ........................................................... 75
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 76
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 76
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 76
REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................. 77
Components ........................................................... 77
Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 77
EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT ........ 77
Revision: March 2005
Removal and Installation of Door Lock ...................77
REMOVAL ...........................................................77
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................78
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................78
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................78
TRUNK LID ................................................................79
Fitting Adjustment ...................................................79
LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT .....................................................80
SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ....................80
Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Assembly ...80
Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Lock ............80
LOCK REMOVAL .................................................80
STRIKER REMOVAL ...........................................81
LOCK AND STRIKER INSTALLATION ...............81
Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Weatherstrip...81
TRUNK LID OPENER ...............................................82
Wiring Diagram — TLID — .....................................82
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................83
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM...84
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...84
System Description .................................................86
DESCRIPTION ....................................................86
POWER SUPPLY ................................................86
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM .....................................................................86
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION ..................................................................86
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION...87
PANIC ALARM OPERATION ...............................87
CAN Communication System Description ..............87
Schematic ...............................................................88
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — ..............................89
FIG. 1 ...................................................................89
FIG. 2 ...................................................................90
FIG. 3 ...................................................................91
FIG. 4 ...................................................................92
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................93
Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ........93
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................94
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ..........94
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM .......................96
Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................97
WORK FLOW ......................................................97
Preliminary Check ...................................................98
Symptom Chart .......................................................99
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check .... 100
Door Switch Check ............................................... 101
TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE
SOLENOID SWITCH CHECK ............................... 103
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK
SWITCH) SIGNAL ................................................ 104
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK ............... 105
FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK ..................................... 106
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK ..... 106
VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM
CHECK ................................................................. 106
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK ............ 106
BL-2
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ...................................................................... 107
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 107
System Description .............................................. 108
System Composition ............................................ 108
ECM Re-communicating Function ....................... 109
Wiring Diagram — NATS — ..................................110
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 111
CONSULT-II .......................................................... 111
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 111
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION ...................................................................112
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..113
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
ITEM CHART .....................................................113
Work Flow .............................................................114
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................115
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 ..........................115
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 ..........................116
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM ...................116
Diagnostic Procedure 1 .........................................117
Diagnostic Procedure 2 .........................................118
Diagnostic Procedure 3 .........................................119
Diagnostic Procedure 4 ........................................ 120
Diagnostic Procedure 5 ........................................ 121
Diagnostic Procedure 6 ........................................ 124
How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU ................... 125
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ............. 126
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — ........................... 126
Trouble Diagnoses ............................................... 127
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ............................ 127
BODY REPAIR ........................................................ 128
Body Exterior Paint Color ..................................... 128
Body Component Parts ........................................ 129
UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS .............. 129
BODY COMPONENT PARTS ........................... 131
Corrosion Protection ............................................ 133
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 133
ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX .................................. 134
UNDERCOATING .............................................. 135
Body Sealing ........................................................ 136
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 136
Body Construction ................................................ 139
BODY CONSTRUCTION .................................. 139
Body Alignment .................................................... 140
BODY CENTER MARKS ................................... 140
PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS ................. 141
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 142
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................ 143
UNDERBODY ................................................... 145
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ....................... 147
REAR BODY ..................................................... 149
Handling Precautions for Plastics ......................... 151
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS . 151
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS ...................... 152
Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel ....... 154
HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES ................................................ 154
Foam Repair ......................................................... 156
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS ................ 156
FILL PROCEDURES ......................................... 156
Replacement Operations ...................................... 157
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 157
HOODLEDGE ................................................... 160
HOODLEDGE (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) ..... 161
FRONT SIDE MEMBER .................................... 162
FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) ............................................................... 164
FRONT PILLAR ................................................. 165
CENTER PILLAR .............................................. 168
OUTER SILL ..................................................... 169
REAR FENDER ................................................. 170
REAR PANEL .................................................... 171
REAR FLOOR REAR ........................................ 172
REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION ................. 173
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS003H8
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for work
●
●
EIS003H9
After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check
their operation.
Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis
EIS003HA
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
Revision: March 2005
BL-4
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EIS003HB
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
SIIA0994E
BL
—
(J-43241)
Remote Keyless Entry
Tester
Used to test keyfobs
J
K
LEL946A
L
Commercial Service Tool
EIS003HC
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
M
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Revision: March 2005
BL-5
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS00486
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: March 2005
BL-6
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
F
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
BL
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
L
●
Revision: March 2005
BL-7
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS00487
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: March 2005
BL-8
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
A
B
C
D
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
E
F
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
G
H
BL
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
K
L
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: March 2005
BL-9
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS00488
LIWA0276E
Revision: March 2005
BL-10
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: March 2005
BL-11
2005 Altima
HOOD
HOOD
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:F5100
EIS003HG
LIIA1526E
FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT AND LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
Loosen the hood lock and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood becomes 1 to 1.5
mm (0.04 to 0.059 in) higher than the fender.
Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and
striker for looseness, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
Remove the hood lock, and adjust the surface height difference of the hood and fender according to the
fitting standard dimension, by rotating RH and LH bumper rubbers.
Install the hood lock temporarily, and align the hood striker and lock so that the centers of striker and lock
become vertical viewed from the front, by moving the hood lock laterally.
Revision: March 2005
BL-12
2005 Altima
HOOD
3.
4.
5.
Check that the secondary latch is properly engaged with the
secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx.
3 kg (29 N).
CAUTION:
Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or
higher.
Move the hood lock up and down so that the striker and lock are
engaged firmly with the hood closed.
Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
A
B
C
PIIA0181E
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly
D
EIS003HH
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1527E
1. Remove the nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
BL-13
2005 Altima
HOOD
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
EIS003HI
LIIA1528E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it
from the radiator core upper support and hood ledge.
Remove the screws and the hood opener.
Remove the grommet from the dash lower, and pull the hood
lock cable into the passenger compartment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, be careful not to damage (peeling) the outside of the hood lock cable.
LIIA1558E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Pull the hood lock cable through the hole in the lower dash and into the engine compartment.
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius
100 mm (3.94 in) or more.
Check that the cable is not offset from the grommet, and push
the grommet into the panel hole securely.
Apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.
PIIA0173E
Revision: March 2005
BL-14
2005 Altima
HOOD
4.
5.
Install the cable securely to the lock.
After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood
opener operation.
A
B
C
PIIA0174E
Hood Lock Control Inspection
D
EIS003HJ
CAUTION:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Check that the secondary latch is properly engaged with the
secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully check that the front
end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also check
that the hood opener returns to the original position.
E
F
G
H
PIIA0175E
3.
BL
Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply
"body grease" to the points shown in the figure.
J
K
L
PIIA0176E
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-15
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:24814
EIS003HK
LIIA1870E
Revision: March 2005
BL-16
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
System Description
EIS003HL
A
Power is supplied at all time
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 57
●
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3.
With ignition key inserted, power is supplied
●
through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
B
C
D
WITH LEFT FRONT ONLY FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM
Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of the BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and F14.
E
When the door is unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied
●
through terminal 19 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch through body grounds M57, M61
and F14
F
●
to BCM terminal 46
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17.
When the door is locked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied
G
●
through terminal 19 of main power window and door lock/unlock switch through body grounds M57, M61
and F14
●
to BCM terminal 45
H
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 18.
When the door is unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied
●
through terminal 19 power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through body grounds M57, M61 and BL
F14
●
to BCM terminal 46
J
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 20.
When the door is locked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied
●
through terminal 19 of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through body grounds M57, M61
K
and F14
●
to BCM terminal 45
●
through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 18.
L
When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 8
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and F14.
M
When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 7
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and F14.
WITH LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM
BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH as power window serial link.
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH output to
key cylinder lock/unlock switch, central lock/unlock switch and power window UP/DOWN control by key cylinder switch as DATALINE (power window serial link) to BCM.
OUTLINE
Functions available by operating the central switches on driver's door and passenger's door
●
●
Interlocked with the locking operation of central switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked.
Interlocked with the unlocking operation of central switch, door lock actuators of all doors are unlocked.
Revision: March 2005
BL-17
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Functions available by operating the key cylinder switch on driver's door
●
●
●
Interlocked with the locking operation of door key cylinder, door lock actuators of all doors are locked.
When door key cylinder is unlocked, front door lock assembly LH (actuator) is unlocked.
When door key cylinder is unlocked for the second time within 5 seconds after the first operation, door
lock actuators on all doors are unlocked.
Key–trap preventive function
When door lock switch LH or RH is operated to lock doors with ignition key put in key cylinder and any door
open, all door lock actuators are locked and then unlocked.
KEY–TRAP PREVENTIVE FUNCTION
Time chart
LIIA0165E
Revision: March 2005
BL-18
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Schematic
EIS003HM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA1027E
Revision: March 2005
BL-19
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —
EIS003HN
FIG. 1
WIWA0420E
Revision: March 2005
BL-20
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
FIG. 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0421E
Revision: March 2005
BL-21
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
FIG. 3
WIWA1017E
Revision: March 2005
BL-22
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
FIG. 4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIWA0386E
Revision: March 2005
BL-23
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
Terminal
Wire
Color
7
W/L
8
EIS003HO
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) (unlock)
OFF (neutral) → ON (unlocked)
5V → 0V
P/L
Front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) (lock)
OFF (neutral) → ON (locked)
5V → 0V
12
P/L
Front door switch RH
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0V → Battery voltage
13
R/W
Rear door switch RH
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0V → Battery voltage
22
Y/G
Power window serial link
Item
—
LIIA0166E
37
B/R
Key switch (insert)
Key inserted (ON) → Key removed from
IGN key cylinder (OFF)
Battery voltage → 0V
45
BR
Lock switch signal
Door lock and unlock switch (unlocked
→ locked)
Battery voltage → 0V
46
P
Unlock switch signal
Door lock and unlock switch (locked →
unlocked)
Battery voltage → 0V
47
SB
Front door switch LH
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0V → Battery voltage
48
R/B
Rear door switch LH
Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF)
0V → Battery voltage
57
W
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
59
G/W
Front door lock assembly LH
(actuator) (unlock)
Driver door lock knob
(locked → unlocked)
0V → Battery voltage
65
Y/R
All door lock actuator (lock)
Driver door lock knob (neutral → lock)
0V → Battery voltage
G/R
Front door lock actuator RH and
Rear door lock actuators LH/RH
(unlock)
Door lock and unlock switch (locked →
unlocked)
0V → Battery voltage
66
67
B
70
W/B
Ground
—
—
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EIS003HP
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to BL-17, "System Description" .
Perform BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check. Refer to BL-28, "BCM Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to BL-28,
"Symptom Chart" .
Does power door lock system operate normally? OK: GO TO 6, NG: GO TO 4.
INSPECTION END.
Revision: March 2005
BL-24
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
CONSULT–II Function (BCM)
EIS003HQ
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
C
D
E
CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT–II and CONSULTII CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ON
ignition switch.
F
G
H
BL
BBIA0002E
2.
J
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
BL-25
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
4.
Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
LKIA0099E
Revision: March 2005
BL-26
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
DATA MONITOR
Operation procedure
1.
2.
3.
A
Touch "DOOR LOCK" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitor all items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select and monitor the item.
4.
5.
6.
B
C
Touch "START".
If "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the desired monitor item. If "ALL SIGNALS" is selected,
all the items are monitored.
During monitoring, touching "COPY" can start recording the monitor item status.
D
E
Display item list
Monitor item "OPERATION"
Content
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
F
CDL LOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
CDL UNLOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK-SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder.
KEY CYL UN-SW
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder.
DOOR SW–DR
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW–AS
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW–RR
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW–RL
"ON/OFF"
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
G
H
BL
ACTIVE TEST
Operation procedure
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
Touch "DOOR LOCK" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation.
During the operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation.
L
Display item list
Test item
Content
ALL D/LK MTR
This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when
"ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched.
DR D/UN MTR
This test is able to check front door lock assembly LH (actuator) unlock operation. These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched.
NON DR D/UN
This test is able to check door lock actuators [except front door lock assembly LH (actuator)]
unlock operation.These actuators unlock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched.
Revision: March 2005
BL-27
2005 Altima
M
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Symptom Chart
EIS003HR
Symptom
Malfunctioning system
Power window system
Door switch check. Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch
Check" .
Key reminder door function does not operate
properly.
Key switch (Insert) check. Refer to BL-32, "Key
Switch (Insert) Check" .
—
If above systems are "OK", replace BCM. Refer
to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Power door lock does not operate with door lock
and unlock switch on main power window and
door lock/unlock switch or power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH
Door lock and unlock switch check. Refer to BL33, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left
front only power window anti–pinch system)" .
With left front only anti–
pinch system.
Door lock and unlock switch check. Refer to BL36, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left
and right front power window anti–pinch system)"
.
With left and right front
anti–pinch system.
Power door lock does not operate with driver
door lock knob switch.
Door lock actuator check –Driver–. Refer to BL38, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator)
Check" .
—
Specific door lock acutuator does not operate.
Door lock actuator check (passenger, Rear LH/
RH).Refer to BL-39, "Door Lock Actuator Check
(Front RH and Rear LH/RH)" .
—
Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check. Refer to BL-40, "Front Door Lock
Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With
left front only power window anti-pinch system)"
.
With left front only anti–
pinch system.
Power door lock does not operate with front door
lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation.
Door lock and unlock switch check. Refer to BL41, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left
and right front power window anti–pinch system)"
.
Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) check. Refer to BL-44, "Front Door Lock
Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With
left and right front power window anti–pinch system)" .
If above systems are "OK", replace BCM. Refer
to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
With left and right front
anti–pinch system.
—
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS003HS
1. CHECK FUSE
●
Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link.
Component Parts
BCM
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
57 (BAT power supply)
10A
21
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
Location
Fuse block (J/B)
Fuse and fusible link box
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
BL-28
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 57, 70
and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
( + )
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
C
( – )
57 (W)
M20
Signal name
B
Ground
70 (W/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
LIIA1252E
E
F
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
M20
G
H
Continuity
(+)
(-)
67 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
BL
LIIA1040E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-29
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Switch Check
EIS003HT
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
●
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
PIIA6222E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
M18
M19
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
(+)
Front door
switch RH
12 (P/L)
Rear door
switch RH
13 (R/W)
(–)
Ground
Front door
switch LH
47 (SB)
Rear door
switch LH
48 (R/B)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
LIIA1177E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
BL-30
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L)
1 (R/B) - 48 (R/B)
1 (R/W) - 13 (R/W)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH) or B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B18 (Rear
LH) or B116 (Rear RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48.
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
C
D
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH)
or B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B18 (Rear LH) or B116 (Rear
RH) terminal 1 and ground.
2 (SB or P/L) - Ground
1 (R/B or R/W) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist
: Continuity should not exist
B
E
LIIA1350E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
H
Disconnect door switch harness.
Check continuity between door switch connector terminals.
Terminals (Wire
color)
Front door switch
LH/RH
2 – Ground
Rear door switch
LH/RH
1 – Ground
Condition
Continuity
Open
Yes
Closed
No
Open
Yes
Closed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check door switch case ground condition.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
BL
J
K
LIIA0550E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-31
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Key Switch (Insert) Check
EIS003HU
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder :
KEY ON SW
: ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder :
●
KEY ON SW
: OFF
LIIA0169E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Connector
M18
Terminal (Wire color)
(+)
(–)
37 (B/R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0567E
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector.
Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid connector terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3–4
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. Refer to PS9, "STEERING COLUMN" .
LIIA1044E
Revision: March 2005
BL-32
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 4.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 and ground.
37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R)
37 (B/R) - Ground
B
C
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following:
● 10A fuse [No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
LIIA1255E
E
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left front only power window anti–pinch
system)
F
EIS003HV
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
G
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK :
CDL LOCK SW
●
H
BL
: ON
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK :
CDL UNLOCK SW
: ON
J
K
PIIA6538E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M19 terminals 45, 46 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(+)
46 (P)
(–)
Ground
M19
45 (BR)
Ground
Condition
M
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Door lock/unlock switch is
neutral.
Battery voltage
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to UNLOCK.
0
Door lock/unlock switch is
neutral.
Battery voltage
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to LOCK.
0
LIIA1351E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
BL-33
L
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D6 terminal 19 and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 19 and body ground.
●
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D6
19 (B) – Ground
Yes
LIIA0174E
●
Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D105
19 (B) – Ground
Yes
LIIA1587E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
BL-34
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
1.
2.
●
A
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH.
Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals.
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Terminals
17 – 19
18 – 19
Condition
Continuity
Neutral
No
Unlock
Yes
Neutral
No
Lock
Yes
B
C
D
E
LIIA0176E
F
●
Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
Terminals
18 – 19
19 – 20
Condition
Continuity
Neutral
No
Lock
Yes
Neutral
No
Unlock
Yes
G
H
BL
LIIA1588E
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-35
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti–
pinch system)
EIS003HW
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK :
CDL LOCK SW
●
: ON
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK :
CDL UNLOCK SW
: ON
PIIA6538E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition key cylinder.
2. Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/
unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after
the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
M18
(+)
(–)
22 (Y/G)
Ground
Signal
(Reference value)
LIIA0166E
PIIA6379E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for
"MULTI REMOTE ENT" with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "ACTIVE
TEST" .
When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
PIIA3080E
Revision: March 2005
BL-36
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK ANTI-PINCH SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main
power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal
14.
Connector
Terminal
M18
22 (Y/G)
Connector
Terminal
Continuity
D7
14(Y/G)
Yes
D105
11(Y/G)
Yes
B
C
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and
power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11.
D
LIIA1353E
E
F
G
H
LIIA1354E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock BL
switch RH.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-37
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check
EIS003HX
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (actuator) "ALL D/LK MTR", "DR
D/UN MTR" in ACTIVE TEST mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL27, "ACTIVE TEST" .
ALL D/LK MTR
DR D/UN MTR
: ON/OFF
: ON/OFF
WIIA0107E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and ground.
Connector
M20
Terminal
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(+)
(–)
59
(G/W)
Ground
Driver door lock knob is
turned to UNLOCK.
0 → Battery voltage
65
(Y/R)
Ground
Driver door lock knob is
turned to LOCK.
0 → Battery voltage
LIIA1355E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and
front door lock assembly LH (actuator) connector D51 terminals 1, 3
and body ground.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
59 (G/W)
M20
65 (Y/R)
59 (G/W),
65 (Y/R)
D51
Terminal
Continuity
3 (G/W)
Yes
1 (Y/R)
Yes
Ground
No
LIIA1356E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (actuator). Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
BL-38
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH and Rear LH/RH)
EIS003HY
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door lock actuators "ALL D/LK MTR", "NON DR D/UN" in
ACTIVE TEST mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "ACTIVE
TEST" .
ALL D/LK MTR
DR D/UN MTR
B
C
: ON/OFF
: ON/OFF
D
WIIA0107E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground.
Connector
M20
Terminal
F
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(+)
(–)
65
(Y/R)
Ground
Driver door lock knob is
turned to LOCK.
0 → Battery voltage
66
(G/R)
Ground
Door lock/unlock switch is
turned to UNLOCK.
0 → Battery voltage
E
G
H
BL
LIIA1357E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS
K
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and
front door lock actuator RH, rear door lock actuator LH/RH connector
D151, D205 and D305 terminals 1, 3 and body ground.
Connector
M20
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
Continuity
65 (Y/R)
D151,
D205,
D305
1(Y/R)
Yes
3(G/R)
Yes
66 (G/R)
65 (Y/R), 66
(G/R)
Ground
L
M
No
LIIA1358E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock actuator RH or rear door lock actuator LH/RH. Refer to BL-75, "Removal
and Installation" (front) or BL-77, "Removal and Installation of Door Lock" (rear).
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
BL-39
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left front only
power window anti-pinch system)
EIS003HZ
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW", "KEY CYL UN-SW") in DATA
MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK:
KEY CYL LK-SW
●
: ON
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
KEY CYL UN-SW
: ON
LIIA0188E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminals 7, 8 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(+)
7 (W/L)
(–)
Ground
M18
8 (P/L)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) is neutral.
5
Front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) is turned
to UNLOCK.
0
Front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) is neutral.
5
LIIA1359E
Front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) is turned
to LOCK.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND HARNESS
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D50 terminal 3 and
body ground.
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D50
3 (B) – Ground
Yes
LIIA1471E
Revision: March 2005
BL-40
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
A
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
B
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector terminals.
Terminals
1–3
2–3
Condition
Continuity
Key is turned to LOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to UNLOCK
Yes
Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch). Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" .
C
D
E
LIIA1586E
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (With left and right front power window anti–
pinch system)
EIS003I0
1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
F
G
H
With CONSULT-II
Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch ("LOCK SW DR/AS", "UNLK SW DR/AS") in DATA
MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK :
BL
LOCK SW DR/AS
: ON
●
When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned
to UNLOCK :
UNLK SW DR/AS
J
: ON
K
L
LIIA0172E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground.
Connector
M18
M
Terminal
(+)
(–)
22
(Y/G)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
—
LIIA0166E
LIIA1360E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
BL-41
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
2. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminal 11 and body ground.
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D7
11 (B) – Ground
Yes
LIIA0179E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main
power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal
14.
22 (Y/G) — 14 (Y/G)
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1353E
4. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch terminals.
Terminals
5 – 11
4 – 11
Condition
Continuity
Key is turned to LOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to UNLOCK
Yes
Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
OK or NG
LIIA1472E
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock
switch RH.
Revision: March 2005
BL-42
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With left and right front
power window anti–pinch system)
EIS003I1
A
1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check main power window and door lock/unlock switch ("LOCK SW DR/AS", "UNLK SW DR/AS") in DATA
MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK :
LOCK SW DR/AS
●
B
C
: ON
When main power window and door lock/unlock switch is turned
to UNLOCK :
UNLK SW DR/AS
D
: ON
E
F
LIIA0172E
G
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground.
Connector
Terminal
(+)
Condition
(–)
H
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
BL
M18
22
(Y/G)
Ground
—
J
LIIA0166E
LIIA1360E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS
Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D106 terminal 7 and body
ground.
●
Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D106
7 (B) – Ground
Yes
LIIA1475E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
BL-43
2005 Altima
M
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
1.
2.
●
Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Check continuity between switch terminals 7 and 11.
Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
Terminals
7 – 11
Condition
Continuity
Neutral
No
Lock
Yes
Unlock
Yes
LIIA1476E
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace harness.
NG
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With left and right
front power window anti–pinch system)
EIS003I2
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW", "KEY CYL UN-SW") in DATA
MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK :
KEY CYL LK-SW
●
: ON
When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK:
KEY CYL UN-SW
: ON
LIIA0188E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH GROUND HARNESS
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) connector D50 terminal 3 and body ground.
Connector
Terminals
Continuity
D50
3 (B) – Ground
Yes
LIIA1471E
Revision: March 2005
BL-44
2005 Altima
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
A
3. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH
B
Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder
switch) connector terminals.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
Key is turned to LOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to UNLOCK.
Yes
1–3
Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral.
No
Key is turned to LOCK.
Yes
2–3
C
D
E
OK or NG
LIIA1586E
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-75, "Removal and Installation" .
F
4. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER HARNESS
G
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock
switch connector D7 terminals 4, 5 and front door lock assembly LH
(key cylinder switch) connector D50 terminals 1, 2 and body ground.
H
Connector
Terminal
Connector
4 (P/L)
D7
5 (W/L)
4 (P/L),
5 (W/L)
D50
Terminal
Continuity
2 (P/L)
Yes
1 (W/L)
Yes
Ground
BL
No
J
LIIA1590E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-45
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28596
EIS003I3
LIIA2219E
Revision: March 2005
BL-46
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description
EIS003I4
A
INPUTS
Power is supplied at all times
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box).
Power is supplied at all times
●
to key switch terminal 3 and
●
to BCM terminal 57
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied
●
through key switch terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47.
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
to front door switch LH case ground.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through front door switch RH terminal 2
●
to front door switch RH case ground.
When the rear door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 13
●
through rear door switch RH terminal 1
●
to rear door switch RH case ground.
When the rear door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 48
●
through rear door switch LH terminal 1
●
to rear door switch LH case ground.
Keyfob signal is inputted to BCM.
The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the
●
power door lock
●
trunk lid opener
●
interior lamp
●
panic alarm
●
hazard and horn reminder
●
keyless power window down (open)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
OPERATED PROCEDURE
Power Door Lock Operation
BCM receives a LOCK signal from keyfob. BCM locks all doors with input of LOCK signal from keyfob.
When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver's door will be unlocked.
Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked.
Hazard and Horn Reminder
BCM output to IPDM E/R for hazard and horn reminder signal as DATA LINE (CAN H line and CAN L line).
The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode).
Revision: March 2005
BL-47
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
C mode
S mode
Remote controller
operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning lamp
flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode
With CONSULT-II
Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET".
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to Owner's Manual for instructions.
Interior Lamp Operation
When the following input signals are both supplied:
●
door switches OPEN (when all the doors are closed);
●
driver's door LOCKED;
Remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and ignition illumination (for 30 seconds) with input of
UNLOCK signal from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to LT-117, "ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION" .
Panic Alarm Operation
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns
on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to BL-84, "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM" .
Trunk Lid Opener Operation
When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent with key OFF (ignition key removed from key cylinder) from keyfob,
power is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 53
●
to trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 3.
When power and ground are supplied, trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid opens trunk lid.
Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation
When keyfob unlock switch is turned ON with ignition switch OFF, and the switch is detected to be on continuously for 3 seconds, the driver's door and passenger's door (with left and right front power window anti-pinch
system) power windows are simultaneously opened.
Power window is operated to open and the operation continues as long as the keyfob unlock switch is
pressed.
CAN Communication System Description
EIS003I5
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
BL-48
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Schematic
EIS003I6
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA1029E
Revision: March 2005
BL-49
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES —
EIS003I7
FIG. 1
WIWA0422E
Revision: March 2005
BL-50
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
FIG. 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA0423E
Revision: March 2005
BL-51
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
FIG. 3
WIWA0424E
Revision: March 2005
BL-52
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
FIG. 4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA1018E
Revision: March 2005
BL-53
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EIS003I8
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminal
Wire
Color
1
R/Y
Ignition key illumination
When doors are unlocked using
keyfob
(OFF → Unlock)
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC or ON)
Ignition switch (ACC or ON position)
12
P/L
Front door switch RH
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
13
R/W
Rear door switch RH
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
22
Y/G
Power window serial link
Item
Condition
Battery voltage → 0V
Battery voltage
—
LIIA0166E
37
B/R
38
R
Ignition key switch (insert)
Key inserted → Key removed from
key cylinder
Ignition switch (ON or START)
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
Battery voltage → 0V
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
47
SB
Front door switch LH
48
R/B
Rear door switch LH
53
P
56
P/B
57
W
59
G/W
Driver door lock actuator
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Unlock)
0V → Battery voltage
62
R/W
Step lamp LH and RH
When doors are unlocked using
keyfob
(OFF → Unlock)
Battery voltage → 0V
63
R
Room lamp
When doors are locked using keyfob → Unlocked using keyfob
(Lamp switch in "DOOR" position)
Battery voltage → 0V
65
Y/R
Door lock actuators
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Lock)
0V → Battery voltage
66
G/R
Passenger and rear doors lock
actuator
Door lock & unlock switch
(Neutral → Unlock)
0V → Battery voltage
67
B
70
W/B
Revision: March 2005
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
Trunk release solenoid
When trunk lid release solenoid is
operated using keyfob (OFF → ON)
0V → Battery voltage
Battery saver
(Interior lamp)
Battery saver operates → Does not
operate (ON → OFF)
Battery voltage → 0V
—
Battery voltage
Battery power supply
Ground
—
—
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
BL-54
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS003I9
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
C
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
D
E
EIS003IA
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
F
G
H
BL
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
J
K
L
M
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “BCM”.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
BL-55
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
6.
Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
LIIA0194E
7.
Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
BCIA0031E
CONSULT-II Application Items
EIS003IB
“MULTI REMOTE ENT”
Data Monitor
Monitored Item
Description
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
PANIC BTN
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
LK/UN BTN ON
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob.
TRUNK BTN/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON ON
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
Active Test
Test Item
Description
INT LAMP
This test is able to check interior lamp illumination operation. The interior lamp illumination is turned
on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
IGN ILLUM
This test is able to check ignition illumination operation. The ignition illumination is turned on when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Revision: March 2005
BL-56
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Test Item
Description
FLASHER RIGHT(CAN)
This test is able to check right hazard reminder operation. The right hazard lamp turns on when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
FLASHER LEFT(CAN)
This test is able to check left hazard reminder operation. The left hazard lamp turns on when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HORN
This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HEAD LAMP(HI)
This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON” on
CONSULT-II screen is touched.
A
B
C
D
Work Support
Test Item
Description
E
REMO CONT ID CONFIR
It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode.
REMO CONT ID REGIST
Keyfob ID code can be registered.
REMO CONT ID ERASUR
Keyfob ID code can be erased.
MULTI ANSWER BACK SET
Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed
when “MODE SET” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
AUTO LOCK SET
Auto locking function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when
"MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
PANIC ALRM SET
Panic alarm operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed
when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
TRUNK OPEN SET
Trunk lid opener operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed
when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
PW DOWN SET
Keyless power window down (open) operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation
mode will be changed when "MODE SET" on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-57
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Hazard and horn reminder mode
MODE 1
(C mode)
MODE 2
(S mode)
MODE 3
MODE 4
MODE 5
MODE 6
Keyfob
operation
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Hazard warning
lamp flash
Twice
Once
Twice
—
—
—
Twice
Once
Twice
—
—
Once
Horn sound
Once
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Once
—
Once
—
Auto locking function mode
Auto locking function
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
5 minutes
Nothing
1 minutes
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
0.5 seconds
Nothing
1.5 seconds
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
0.5 seconds
Nothing
1.5 seconds
MODE 1
MODE 2
MODE 3
3 seconds
Nothing
5 seconds
Panic alarm operation mode
Keyfob operation
Trunk open operation mode
Keyfob operation
Power window down operation mode
Keyfob operation
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EIS003IC
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-47, "System Description" .
Confirm that power door lock system operates normally. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .
Perform BCM power supply and ground circuit check. Refer to BL-58, "BCM Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check" .
Refer to trouble diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-59,
"Trouble Diagnoses" .
Inspection End.
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS003ID
1. CHECK FUSE
●
Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link.
Component Parts
BCM
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
Location
57 (BAT power supply)
10A
21
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
Fuse and fusible link box
11 (ACC power supply)
10A
6
Fuse block (J/B)
38 (IGN power supply)
10A
1
Fuse block (J/B)
Fuse block (J/B)
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
BL-58
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connectors M18, M20 terminals
11, 38, 57, 70 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
11 (PU)
ACC power
supply
ACC
Battery
voltage
38 (R)
IGN power
supply
ON
Battery
voltage
57 (W)
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
70 (W/B)
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
( + )
B
C
( – )
M18
Ground
M20
D
LIIA1274E
E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
H
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
BL
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
M20
Continuity
(+)
(-)
67 (B)
Ground
J
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
K
LIIA1040E
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS003IE
L
SYMPTOM CHART
NOTE:
●
Always check the "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" before troubleshooting. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" .
●
Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. Refer to BL-61, "Keyfob Battery and Function
Check" .
●
The panic alarm operation and trunk lid opener operation of remote keyless entry system do not activate
with the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
●
Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob
before replacing keyfob.
Symptom
Reference
page
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
All function of remote keyless entry system do not
operate.
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
Revision: March 2005
BL-61
BL-59
BL-68
2005 Altima
M
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Symptom
Diagnoses/service procedure
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered.
Door lock or unlock does not function.
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to
BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .)
Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob.
Room lamp, ignition illumination and step lamp
operation do not activate properly.
Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not activate
when panic alarm button is continuously pressed.
Trunk lid does not open when trunk opener button is
continuously pressed.
Revision: March 2005
Reference
page
BL-61
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Key switch (insert) check
BL-64
3. Door switch check
BL-62
4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
BL-68
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
BL-61
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
BL-68
1. Hazard reminder check
BL-67
2. Horn reminder check
BL-67
3. Door switch check
BL-62
4. Replace BCM.
BCS-20
1. Room lamp operation check
BL-67
2. Ignition illumination operation check
BL-67
3. Step lamp operation check
BL-67
4. Door switch check
BL-62
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
BL-61
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Vehicle security operation check.
Refer to Vehicle security system.
BL-84
3. Key switch (insert) check
BL-64
4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
BL-68
1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry
Tester J-43241)
BL-61
NOTE:
If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
2. Trunk release solenoid check
BL-65
3. Key switch (insert) check
BL-64
4. Replace BCM.
BCS-20
BL-60
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Keyfob Battery and Function Check
EIS003IF
1. CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY
A
Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage
B
: 2.5V - 3.0V
NOTE:
Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace battery. Refer to BL-71, "Keyfob Battery
Replacement" .
C
D
SEL237W
E
2. CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION
F
With CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should
be turned as follows.
Condition
G
Monitor item
Pushing LOCK
LK BUTTON/SIG
: ON
Pushing UNLOCK
UN BUTTON/SIG
: ON
Pushing TRUNK
TRUNK BTN/SIG
: ON
Pushing PANIC
PANIC BTN
: ON
Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK at the
same time
LK/UN BTN ON
: ON
H
BL
LIIA0195E
Without CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function using Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241.
OK or NG
OK
>> WITH CONSULT-II: Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
OK
>> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-59, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
NG
>> WITH CONSULT-II: Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-59, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
NG
>> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-70, "KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-61
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Door Switch Check
EIS003IG
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
●
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
PIIA6222E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
M18
M19
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
(+)
Front door
switch RH
12 (P/L)
Rear door
switch RH
13 (R/W)
(–)
Ground
Front door
switch LH
47 (SB)
Rear door
switch LH
48 (R/B)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
DOOR
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
LIIA1177E
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
BL-62
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
1 (R/B) - 48 (R/B)
1 (R/W) - 13 (R/W)
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH) or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear
LH) or B116 (rear RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48.
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
C
D
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH)
or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH)
terminal 1 and ground.
1 (R/B or R/W) - Ground
2 (SB or P/L) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist
: Continuity should not exist
B
E
LIIA1350E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
H
Disconnect door switch harness.
Check continuity between door switch connector terminals.
Terminals (Wire
color)
Front door switch
LH/RH
2 – Ground
Rear door switch
LH/RH
1 – Ground
Condition
Continuity
Door Open
Yes
Door Closed
No
Door Open
Yes
Door Closed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check door switch case ground condition.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
BL
J
K
LIIA0550E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-63
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Key Switch (Insert) Check
EIS003IH
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder:
KEY ON SW
: ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
●
KEY ON SW
: OFF
LIIA0169E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and
ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
M18
(+)
(–)
37 (B/R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Key is removed.
0
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA0567E
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector.
Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid connector terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3–4
Condition
Continuity
Key is inserted.
Yes
Key is removed.
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid.
LIIA1044E
Revision: March 2005
BL-64
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 4.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 and ground.
37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R)
37 (B/R) - Ground
B
C
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should not
exist
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following:
● 10A fuse [No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Trunk Release Solenoid Check
D
LIIA1255E
E
F
EIS003II
1. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER
G
Check trunk release operation with trunk lid opener switch.
NOTE:
First check trunk lid opener cancel switch position. Refer to BL-82, "TRUNK LID OPENER" .
Does trunk lid open?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check trunk release solenoid and the circuit.
H
BL
2. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR OPERATION
J
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “TRUNK/BACK DOOR” and touch “ON”.
K
Trunk release solenoid should operate.
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the
next step.
OK or NG
OK
>> Trunk lid opener actuator circuit is OK.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between BCM and
trunk lid opener actuator.
L
M
LIIA0196E
Revision: March 2005
BL-65
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
3. CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid connector.
2. While pressing keyfob release button, check voltage between trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid harness connector B32 terminal 3 and ground.
3 (P) - Ground
3.
: Battery voltage should exist.
Check continuity between trunk lamp switch and trunk release
solenoid harness connector B32 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace trunk release solenoid.
NG
>> Check the following:
1. Harness for open or short between BCM and trunk
release solenoid
2. Harness for open or short between trunk lamp switch
and trunk release solenoid and ground
3. Replace BCM
LIIA1512E
Revision: March 2005
BL-66
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Check Hazard Function
EIS003IJ
1. CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
A
Does hazard indicator flash with hazard switch?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
No
>> Check “hazard indicator.” Refer to LT-72, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS" .
B
C
Check Horn Function
EIS003IK
First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of
malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM".
1. CHECK HORN FUNCTION
Does horn sound with horn switch?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Horn circuit is OK.
No
>> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-36, "HORN" .
Check Headlamp Function
D
E
F
EIS003IL
First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of
malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM".
G
1. CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION
H
Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch ON?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Headlamp operation circuit is OK.
No
>> Check headlamp circuit. Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR BL
CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" .
Check Room Lamp, Step Lamp and Ignition Key Illumination Function
EIS003IM
1. CHECK ROOM LAMP, STEP LAMP AND IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION FUNCTION
When room lamp switch is in DOOR position, open the front door LH or RH.
J
K
Room lamp, Step lamp and ignition key illumination should illuminate.
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> Check interior lamp circuits. Refer to LT-115, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" .
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-67
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure
EIS003IN
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
●
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A
specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not
known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
●
When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased.
If five ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is
erased. If less than five codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, the
new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased.
●
Entry of a maximum of five ID codes is allowed. When more than five codes are entered, the oldest
ID code will be erased.
●
Even if the same ID code that is already in memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The
code is counted as an additional code.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “BCM”.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
BL-68
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
6.
Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
A
B
C
LIIA0194E
D
7.
Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
8.
The items shown on the figure can be set up.
“REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or
not.
● “REMO CONT ID REGIST”
Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code.
NOTE:
Register the ID code when keyfob or BCM is replaced, or
when additional keyfob is required.
● “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code.
H
●
BL
J
LIIA0207E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-69
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II
LIIA1513E
Revision: March 2005
BL-70
2005 Altima
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
NOTE:
●
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID
code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new
keyfobs must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) five times. After all ID codes are erased,
the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered.
●
When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five
ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If
less than five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is
added and no ID codes are erased.
●
If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code
entry” for each new keyfob.
●
Entry of maximum five ID codes is allowed. When more than five ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code
will be erased.
●
Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code
is counted as an additional code.
Keyfob Battery Replacement
EIS003IO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1514E
Revision: March 2005
BL-71
2005 Altima
DOOR
DOOR
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:80100
EIS003IP
WIIA0716E
a. Flush + 0.5, -1.0 mm (+0.02, -0.04 in) b. Flush + 1.0, -0.5 mm (+0.04, -0.02 in) c. 4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.18 ± 0.04 in)
d. 4.6 ± 1.0 mm (0.18 ± 0.04 in)
FRONT DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
Remove the front fender. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT FENDER" .
Loosen the bolts. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust.
REAR DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
Remove the center pillar upper and lower garnish. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .
Accessing from inside the vehicle, loosen the nuts. Open the rear door, and raise the rear door at rear end
to adjust.
Revision: March 2005
BL-72
2005 Altima
DOOR
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1.
A
Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
B
C
LIIA1516E
Removal and Installation
D
EIS003IQ
CAUTION:
●
When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to
protect the door and body.
●
When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
●
Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply "body grease".
1. Remove the door window and module assembly. Refer to GW-34, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove the door harness.
3. Remove the check link cover.
4. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar.
E
F
G
H
BL
J
LIIA1517E
5. Remove the door-side nuts and bolts, and the door assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
M
LIIA1518E
Revision: March 2005
BL-73
2005 Altima
DOOR
Door Weatherstrip
EIS003IR
WIIA0718E
1.
Glued area
Revision: March 2005
2.
Clip (Driver side: Yellow, Passenger
side: Blue)
BL-74
3.
Weatherstrip
2005 Altima
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
PFP:80502
A
EIS003IS
B
C
D
E
F
G
LIIA1519E
Inspection and Adjustment
1.
EIS003IT
Remove the front door window and front door module assembly. Refer to GW-34, "FRONT DOOR GLASS
AND REGULATOR" .
EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT
H
BL
Rotate the bushing to adjust so that the clearance between the
bushing and rod becomes as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make the clearance 0 mm (0 in) or the rod will
be pressed continuously.
●
J
K
L
SBT978
Removal and Installation
EIS003IU
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Remove the front door window and front door module assembly. Refer to GW-34, "FRONT DOOR GLASS
AND REGULATOR" .
Separate the key cylinder rod and exterior handle rod connection (on the handle) if equipped.
Remove the screws (TORX T30) and the door lock assembly.
Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
LIIA0116E
Revision: March 2005
BL-75
2005 Altima
FRONT DOOR LOCK
5.
Remove the exterior handle bolts, move the exterior handle
assembly backward, and then remove it from the panel in front
of the exterior handle escutcheon.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click
is felt.
SIIA0342E
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS003IV
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove or install the actuator with the door lock assembly removed.
1. Remove the screws and actuator from the door lock assembly.
2. Pull the actuator straight downward to separate it from the door
lock assembly.
SIIA0343E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Align the actuator pivot with the cutout on the knob lever of the door lock assembly, then assemble the
actuator.
Move the knob lever and the actuator pivot toward the lock-on direction, and check that it engages
securely.
Revision: March 2005
BL-76
2005 Altima
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
Components
PFP:82502
A
EIS003IW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
LIIA1520E
Inspection and Adjustment
EIS003IX
J
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-30, "DOOR FINISHER" .
EXTERIOR HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT
K
Rotate the bushing to adjust so that the clearance between the bushing and rod becomes as shown.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make the clearance 0 mm (0 in) or the rod will
be pressed continuously.
L
M
SBT978
Removal and Installation of Door Lock
EIS003IY
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-30, "DOOR FINISHER" .
Revision: March 2005
BL-77
2005 Altima
REAR DOOR LOCK
2.
3.
Remove the screws (TORX T30) and the door lock assembly.
Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
LIIA0117E
4.
Remove the exterior handle bolts, and move the handle backward to disengage it from the panel in front of the exterior handle
escutcheon, then remove the handle.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click
is felt.
SIIA0345E
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS003IZ
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove or install the actuator with the door lock assembly removed.
1. Remove the screws and the actuator from the door lock assembly.
2. Pull the actuator straight downward to separate it from the door
lock assembly.
SIIA0346E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Align the actuator pivot with the cutout on the knob lever of the door lock assembly, then assemble the
actuator.
Move the knob lever and the actuator pivot toward the lock-on direction, and check that it engages
securely.
Revision: March 2005
BL-78
2005 Altima
TRUNK LID
TRUNK LID
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:H4300
A
EIS003J0
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA2207E
Revision: March 2005
BL-79
2005 Altima
TRUNK LID
1.
Trunk lid assembly
2.
Rear window glass
3.
Body side outer
4.
Rear combination lamp
5.
Rear bumper fascia
a.
7.3 mm (0.29 in)
b.
3.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.14 ± 0.04 in)
c.
flush + 0.5/ -1.0 mm (+ 0.02/-0.04 in) d.
5.4 mm (0.21 in)
e.
8.2 ± 1.5 mm (0.3 ± 0.06 in)
LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
With the striker released, loosen the trunk lid hinge bolts and close the trunk lid.
Make the lateral clearance and the clearance to the rear window glass equal, and open the trunk lid to
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
Loosen the striker bolts. Raise the striker to the top position, and temporarily tighten the upper bolt at the
position.
Close the trunk lid lightly and adjust the surface height, then open the trunk lid to finally tighten the striker
bolts.
Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Assembly
EIS003J1
WIIA0544E
1.
2.
Remove the trunk lid finisher. Refer to EI-37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" .
Disconnect the connectors in the trunk lid, and remove the harness clamps to pull the harness out of the
trunk lid.
3. Remove the bolts and the trunk lid assembly.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts.
Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Lock
EIS003J2
LOCK REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the trunk lid finisher. Refer to EI-37, "TRUNK ROOM
TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" .
Separate the key cylinder rod.
After removing the harness connector, remove the bolts and the
trunk lid lock.
LIIA1523E
Revision: March 2005
BL-80
2005 Altima
TRUNK LID
STRIKER REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove the trunk rear plate and trunk rear finisher. Refer to EI37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" .
Remove the bolts and the trunk lock support from the vehicle.
After removing the harness connector, remove the bolts, and
the striker from the trunk lock support.
B
C
LIIA1524E
D
LOCK AND STRIKER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Install the trunk lid lock and striker.
After installing, close the trunk lid lightly. Perform the lock and surface height adjustment. Refer to BL-79,
"Fitting Adjustment" .
After installing, check the operation.
Removal and Installation of Trunk Lid Weatherstrip
E
F
EIS003J3
G
H
BL
J
K
L
LIIA0118E
1.
2.
3.
Install the weatherstrip from the front with the vehicle center mark aligned to the weatherstrip mark.
At rear side, align the weatherstrip seam to the center of the striker.
After installing, pull the weatherstrip lightly to check for looseness.
CAUTION:
The weatherstrip should fit tightly onto the corners and trunk lid rear plate.
Revision: March 2005
BL-81
2005 Altima
M
TRUNK LID OPENER
TRUNK LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram — TLID —
PFP:84640
EIS003J4
WIWA1019E
Revision: March 2005
BL-82
2005 Altima
TRUNK LID OPENER
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EIS003J5
A
Terminal
Wire
Color
30
R/B*1,
L/R*2
53
P
Trunk opener output
70
W/B
Battery power supply
Item
Trunk lid opener switch
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
OFF → ON
Battery voltage → 0V
When trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid is operated using keyfob trunk release button (OFF → ON)
—
0V → Battery voltage
B
C
Battery voltage
NOTE:
*1: Without trunk lid opener cancel switch.
*2: With trunk lid opener cancel switch.
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-83
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28491
EIS003J6
LIIA1397E
Revision: March 2005
BL-84
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1872E
Revision: March 2005
BL-85
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description
EIS003J7
DESCRIPTION
Setting the vehicle security system
Disarmed phase
●
When the vehicle is being driven or when doors or trunk lid is open, the vehicle security system is set in
the disarmed phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle.
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
●
The vehicle security system turns into the "pre-armed" phase when trunk lid and all doors are closed and
locked by electronic key. The security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds. Then, the system automatically shifts into the "armed" phase.
Canceling the set vehicle security system
When one of the following operations is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
1. Unlock the doors with the key or the keyfob.
2. Open the trunk lid with the key or the keyfob. When the trunk lid is closed after opening the trunk lid with
the keyfob, the system returns to the armed phase.
Activating the alarm operation of the vehicle security system
Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
When one of the following operations is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the head-lamps
for about 50 seconds.
1. Any door is opened before unlocking door with key or keyfob.
2. Door is unlocked without using key or keyfob.
3. Trunk lid is opened without using key or keyfob.
POWER SUPPLY
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to security indicator lamp terminal 1
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3
●
to BCM terminal 57
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM
The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors and trunk lid.
To activate the vehicle security system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors and trunk lid are closed
and the doors are locked.
When a door is open, BCM terminal 12, 13, 47 or 48 receives a ground signal from each door switch.
When front door LH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 14 of main power window
and door lock/unlock switch.
When front door RH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 11 of power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH.
The IPDM E/R then sends a signal to the BCM through the CAN SYSTEM.
When the trunk lid is open, BCM terminal 42 receives a ground signal
●
from terminal 1 of the trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid
●
through body grounds B7 and B19.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION
The vehicle security system is triggered by
●
opening a door
●
opening the trunk lid
Revision: March 2005
BL-86
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
unlocking door without using the key or keyfob.
The vehicle security system will be triggered once the system is in armed phase
●
when BCM receives a ground signal at terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 (door switch), 42 (trunk lamp and trunk
release solenoid switch).
Power is supplied at all times
●
to horn relay terminal 1
●
through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in fuse and fusible link box).
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
●
to headlamp high relay
●
from IPDM E/R terminal 51
●
to horn relay terminal 2.
The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds, but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
●
A
B
C
D
E
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door or the trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or keyfob.
When the key is used to unlock the driver door, BCM terminal 22 receives signal
●
from terminal 14 of the main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
When the key is used to unlock the trunk lid, BCM terminal 41 receives a ground signal from terminal 1 of the
trunk key cylinder switch (unlock switch).
When the BCM receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob, the vehicle security system
is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
F
G
H
PANIC ALARM OPERATION
Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as
required.
BL
When the remote keyless entry system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
●
to headlamp high relay
●
from IPDM E/R terminal 51
J
●
to horn relay terminal 2.
The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob.
K
CAN Communication System Description
EIS003J8
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION"
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-87
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic
EIS003J9
WIWA1020E
Revision: March 2005
BL-88
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —
EIS003JA
A
FIG. 1
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA1021E
Revision: March 2005
BL-89
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
FIG. 2
WIWA1022E
Revision: March 2005
BL-90
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
FIG. 3
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIWA1023E
Revision: March 2005
BL-91
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
FIG. 4
WIWA0427E
Revision: March 2005
BL-92
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EIS003JB
A
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ignition switch (ACC or ON)
Ignition switch (ACC or ON position)
Battery voltage
P/L
Front door switch RH
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
R/W
Rear door switch RH
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
Terminal
Wire
Color
11
PU
12
13
Item
B
C
22
Y/G
Power window serial link
D
—
E
LIIA0166E
23
G/OR
Security indicator output
OFF → ON
Battery voltage → 0V
Ignition key switch (insert)
Key inserted → Key removed from
key cylinder
Battery voltage → 0V
37
B/R
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
41
L/B
G
Trunk key cylinder
Unlocked → Neutral
Trunk switch
Trunk lid closed (OFF) → Trunk lid
open (ON)
0V → 5V
Battery voltage → 0V
42
PU/W
47
SB
Front door switch LH
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
48
R/B
Rear door switch LH
Door Closed (OFF) → Open (ON)
Battery voltage → 0V
57
W
Battery power supply
—
67
B
Ground
—
0
70
W/B
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
Wire
Color
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
22
R/L
Parking. license, and tail lamps
OFF → ON
0V → Battery voltage
27
L/W
Headlamp high (RH)
OFF → ON
0V → Battery voltage
28
G
Headlamp high (LH)
OFF → ON
0V → Battery voltage
38
B
Ground
—
0
48
L
CAN-H
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
—
—
51
G/W
ON → OFF
0V → Battery voltage
60
B
—
0
Revision: March 2005
BL-93
BL
J
EIS003JC
Terminal
Ground
H
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Horn relay
F
K
L
M
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS003JD
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the
ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
BL-94
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
4.
Touch "THEFT ALM" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
● WORK SUPPORT, DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are
available for the vehicle security system.
A
B
C
LIIA0034E
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-95
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM
Data Monitor
Monitored Item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
ACC ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
KEY CYL LK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
TRNK OPN MTR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener motor.
TRNK OPNR SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk opener switch.
TRUNK KEY SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk key cylinder switch.
LOCK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
UNLK SW DR/AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
LK BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
TRUNK BTN/SIG
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
Active Test
Test Item
Description
THEFT IND
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HEADLAMP
This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The headlamps will be activated for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HORN
This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support
Test Item
Description
SECURITY ALARM SET
This mode can confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting.
THEFT ALM TRG
The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and
erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR”
on CONSULT-II screen.
Revision: March 2005
BL-96
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EIS003JE
A
WORK FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
LIIA0123E
●
●
“POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” Diagnosis. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" .
“REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” Diagnosis. Refer to BL-46, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" .
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-97
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Preliminary Check
EIS003JF
The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED
in the following flow chart.
LIIA1525E
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart.
Revision: March 2005
BL-98
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Symptom Chart
EIS003JG
A
PROCEDURE
Diagnostic procedure
SYMPTOM
AII items
Vehicle security
system cannot be
set by ····
Lock/unlock switch
Diagnostic Procedure 1 (Door and trunk lamp and trunk release solenoid
switch check)
Refer to BL-101, "Door Switch Check" .
B
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
C
Diagnostic Procedure 7 (Door lock/unlock switch check)
Refer to BL-106, "DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK" .
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
1
Driver door outside key
Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Door key cylinder switch check)
Refer to BL-106, "FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH) CHECK" .
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
Security indicator does not turn “ON”.
Diagnostic Procedure 2 (Security indicator lamp check)
Refer to BL-103, "TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID SWITCH CHECK" .
2
Any door is opened.
F
Diagnostic Procedure 1 (Door and trunk room lamp switch check)
Refer to BL-101, "Door Switch Check" .
H
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Diagnostic Procedure 5 (Vehicle security horn alarm check)
Refer to BL-106, "VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK" .
Horn alarm
3
E
G
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
*1 Vehicle security system does
not alarm when
····
D
Vehicle security
alarm does not
activate.
Head lamp alarm
BL
If the above systems are “OK”, check horn system.
Refer to WW-36, "HORN" .
Diagnostic Procedure 6 (Head lamp alarm check)
Refer to BL-106, "VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK" .
J
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Driver door outside key
4
Vehicle security
system cannot be
canceled by ····
Trunk lid key
Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Door key cylinder switch check)
Refer to BL-106, "FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH) CHECK" .
K
If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/
unlock switch.
L
Diagnostic Procedure 4 (Trunk lid key cylinder switch check)
Refer to BL-104, "TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH)
SIGNAL" .
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
Keyfob
Check remote keyless entry function.
If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM.
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
Revision: March 2005
BL-99
2005 Altima
M
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS003JH
1. CHECK FUSE
Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link.
Component Parts
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
11 (ACC power supply)
10A
6
Fuse block (J/B)
57 (BAT power supply)
10A
21
Fuse block (J/B)
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
BCM
Location
Fuse and fusible link box
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connectors M20 terminals 57, 70
and M18 terminal 11 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
( + )
M18
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ACC power
supply
ACC
Battery
voltage
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
Battery power
supply
OFF
Battery
voltage
( – )
11 (PU)
57 (W)
Signal name
Ground
M20
70 (W/B)
LIIA1396E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
Terminals
(Wire color)
Connector
M20
Continuity
(+)
(-)
67 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
BL-100
LIIA1040E
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Door Switch Check
EIS003JI
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-27, "DATA MONITOR" .
●
When any doors are open:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
●
C
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
D
When any doors are closed:
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-RR
E
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
PIIA6222E
M18
M19
Terminals (Wire color)
Item
(+)
(–)
Condition
F
G
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12,
13, 47, 48 and ground.
Connector
B
H
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
BL
Front door
switch RH
12 (P/L)
Rear door
switch RH
13 (R/W)
Front door
switch LH
47 (SB)
Rear door
switch LH
48 (R/B)
Ground
Door
Open
↓
Closed
0
↓
Battery voltage
J
LIIA1177E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> System is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-101
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door switch and BCM.
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH)
or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH)
terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47
and 48.
1 (R/B) - 48 (R/B)
1 (R/W) - 13 (R/W)
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L)
4.
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
: Continuity should exist
Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (front LH)
or B108 (front RH) terminal 2, B18 (rear LH) or B116 (rear RH)
terminal 1 and ground.
1 (R/B or R/W) - Ground
2 (SB or P/L) - Ground
LIIA1350E
: Continuity should not exist
: Continuity should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES
1.
2.
Disconnect door switch harness.
Check continuity between door switch connector terminals.
Terminals
Rear door switch
LH/RH
1 – Ground
Front door switch
LH/RH
2 – Ground
Condition
Continuity
Door Open
Yes
Door Closed
No
Door Open
Yes
Door Closed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Check door switch case ground condition.
NG
>> Replace door switch.
Revision: March 2005
BL-102
LIIA0550E
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID SWITCH CHECK
EIS003JJ
1. CHECK TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “TRNK OPN MNTR” in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
When trunk lid is open
When trunk lid is closed
B
: TRNK OPN MNTR ON
: TRNK OPN MNTR OFF
C
D
E
WIIA0108E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 42
(PU/W) and ground.
Refer to BL-90, "FIG. 2" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
H
BL
LIIA1393E
2. CHECK TRUNK LAMP SWITCH AND TRUNK RELEASE SOLENOID
J
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid.
Check continuity between trunk lamp switch and trunk release
solenoid connector B32 terminals 1 and 2.
L
Connector
Terminals
B32
1−2
Condition
Continuity
Closed
No
Open
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following:
● Trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid ground
circuit
● Harness for open or short between trunk lamp switch
and trunk release solenoid and BCM
NG
>> Replace trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid.
Revision: March 2005
BL-103
M
LIIA1394E
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) SIGNAL
EIS003JK
1. TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH) SIGNAL CHECK
With CONSULT-II
Check trunk key cylinder switch (“TRUNK KEY SW”) in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
●
When key in key cylinder is at “NEUTRAL” position,
TRUNK KEY SW: OFF
When key is at “UNLOCK” position,
●
TRUNK KEY SW: ON
WIIA0109E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal
41(L/B) and ground.
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Neutral
5
Unlocked
0
OK or NG
OK
>> Trunk key cylinder switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LIIA1395E
2. CHECK TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK SWITCH)
1.
2.
Disconnect trunk key cylinder switch connector.
Check continuity between trunk key cylinder switch connector B34 terminals 1 and 2.
Condition
Continuity
Neutral
No
Unlocked
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following:
● Trunk key cylinder switch ground circuit
● Harness for open or short between trunk key cylinder
switch and BCM
NG
>> Replace trunk key cylinder switch.
Revision: March 2005
BL-104
LIIA0055E
2005 Altima
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
EIS003JL
1. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST
A
With CONSULT-II
Check "THEFT IND” in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
B
C
D
LIIA0044E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect BCM.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
23 and ground.
Terminal (Wire color)
Connector
M18
(+)
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
23 (G/OR)
Ground
Battery voltage
E
F
G
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Security indicator lamp is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
BL
LIIA0523E
2. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
J
Check indicator lamp condition.
Refer to BL-89, "FIG. 1" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace indicator lamp.
K
L
3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and security indicator lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and security indicator lamp harness connector
M14 terminal 2 and ground.
23 (G/OR) - 2 (G/OR)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the following:
● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between security indicator
lamp and fuse
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1873E
Revision: March 2005
BL-105
2005 Altima
M
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK
EIS003JM
1. FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) OPERATION
Check door key cylinder switch with key.
Do doors lock/unlock when using the key?
YES >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is OK.
NO
>> Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) circuit. Refer to BL-106, "FRONT DOOR
LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CHECK" .
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK
EIS003JN
1. CHECK HORN OPERATION
Check if horn sounds with horn switch.
Does horn operate?
YES >> Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and horn relay.
NO
>> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-36, "HORN" .
VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK
EIS003JO
1. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION
Check if headlamps operate with lighting switch.
Do headlamps come on when turning switch ON?
YES >> Headlamp alarm is OK.
NO
>> Check headlamp system. Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR
CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" .
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
EIS003JP
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check if power door lock operates with door lock/unlock switch.
Do doors lock/unlock when using each door lock/unlock switch?
YES >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NO
>> Refer to BL-106, "DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK" .
Revision: March 2005
BL-106
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28591
A
EIS003JQ
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1874E
Revision: March 2005
BL-107
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
System Description
EIS003JR
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) has the following immobilizer functions:
●
Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose IDs have been registered into the ECM and BCM, allow the
engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS
(NATS).
NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS
(NATS).
●
All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS)
components.
●
The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
●
When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON
position.
●
NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS)
ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software.
When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically
NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs
can be carried out.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer
to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
●
When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator
Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID, it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition
EIS003JS
The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
●
NATS ignition key
●
NATS antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder
●
Body control module (BCM)
●
Engine control module (ECM)
●
Security indicator lamp
NOTE:
The communication between ECM and BCM uses the CAN communication system.
PIIA1121E
Revision: March 2005
BL-108
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
ECM Re-communicating Function
EIS003JT
The following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only when the
ECM has been replaced with a new one which has never been energized on-board.
(In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-II is not necessary.)
NOTE:
●
When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-II
Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
●
If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work.
●
Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID.
1. Install ECM.
2. Using a registered key (*1), turn ignition switch to ON.
*1: To perform this step, use the key that has been used before performing ECM replacement.
3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
5. Start engine.
If engine can be started, procedure is completed.
If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS and initialize control
unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-109
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Wiring Diagram — NATS —
EIS003JU
WIWA1024E
Revision: March 2005
BL-110
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EIS003JV
A
Terminal
Wire
Color
21
P
23
G/OR
Item
Condition
NATS antenna amp.
Ignition switch (OFF → ON)
Security indicator lamp
Goes OFF → illuminates (Every 2.4
seconds)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Just after turning ignition switch
ON: Pointer of tester should move.
Battery voltage → 0
C
Just after turning ignition switch
ON: Pointer of tester should move.
NATS antenna amp.
Ignition switch (OFF → ON)
R
Ignition switch (ON or START)
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
57
W
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
67
B
Ground
—
0
70
W/B
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
25
Y/B
38
CONSULT-II
B
D
E
F
EIS003JW
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
G
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communications
H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BL
J
K
BBIA0002E
L
3.
Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.
Program card
: NATS (AEN04A-1) or later
M
PBR455D
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START”.
Revision: March 2005
BL-111
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
6.
Select “NATS V.5.0”.
LEL661
7.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
SEL728W
For further information, see the “CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL IVIS/NVIS”.
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE
Description
C/U INITIALIZATION
When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all
NATS ignition keys are necessary.
[(NATS ignition key/ BCM/ ECM]
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart.
Refer to BL-113, "NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART" .
NOTE:
●
When any initialization is performed, all IDs previously registered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys
must be registered again.
●
The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE
OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen.
●
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration
procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
Revision: March 2005
BL-112
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
WEL125A
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART
G
Detected items (NATS program card
screen terms)
P No.
Code
(Self-diagnostic
result of
“ENGINE”
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU
P1613
The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU communication line is detected.
BL-116
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
P1612
Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU
(In rare cases, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
not malfunctioning.)
BL-117
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
P1615
IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
verification between key ID and IMMU is NG.
BL-118
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
P1614
IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal.
BL-121
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
P1611
The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is
NG. System initialization is required.
BL-119
LOCK MODE
DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG
Revision: March 2005
P1610
—
Malfunction is detected when.....
Reference page
When the starting operation is carried out five or more
times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS
(NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the
engine from being started.
●
Unregistered ignition key is used.
●
IMMU or ECM is malfunctioning.
Any engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble
codes have been detected in ECM.
BL-113
H
BL
J
K
L
M
BL-120
BL-114
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Work Flow
EIS003JX
LIIA1152E
Revision: March 2005
BL-114
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS003JY
A
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1
Self-diagnosis related item
Symptom
Displayed “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
[P1612]
●
Security indicator
lighting up*
●
Engine cannot be
started
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
[P1615]
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
[P1614]
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
[P1611]
Security indicator lighting up*
Diagnostic Procedure
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 1
(BL-117 )
PROCEDURE 2
(BL-118 )
PROCEDURE 5
(BL-121 )
PROCEDURE 3
(BL-119 )
LOCK MODE
[P1610]
PROCEDURE 4
(BL-120 )
DON'T ERASE
BEFORE CHECKING
ENG DIAG
WORK FLOW
(BL-114 )
System
(Malfunctioning part or
mode)
Reference Part No. Of
Illustration On System
Diagram
In rare case, “CHAIN OF
ECM-IMMU” might be
stored during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning.
—
Open circuit in battery
voltage line of BCM circuit
C1
Open circuit in ignition
line of BCM circuit
C2
Open circuit in ground
line of BCM circuit
C3
Open or short circuit
between BCM and ECM
communication line
C4
C
D
E
ECM
B
BCM
A
Unregistered key
D
BCM
A
Malfunction of key ID
chip
E5
Communication line
between ANT/ AMP and
BCM:
Open circuit or short circuit of battery voltage
line or ground line
BL-115
F
G
H
BL
E1
J
E2
K
Open circuit in power
source line of ANT/ AMP
circuit
E3
Open circuit in ground
line of ANT/ AMP circuit
E4
NATS antenna amp.
E6
BCM
A
System initialization has
not yet been completed.
F
ECM
B
LOCK MODE
D
Engine trouble data and
NVIS (NATS) trouble
data have been detected
in ECM
—
*: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
Revision: March 2005
B
2005 Altima
L
M
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2
Non self-diagnosis related item
Symptom
Security indicator does not light
up*.
Diagnostic Procedure
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 6
(BL-124 )
System
(Malfunctioning part or mode)
Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram
Security indictor lamp
—
Open circuit between Fuse and
BCM
—
BCM
A
*: CONSULT-II self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”.
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
WIIA0550E
Revision: March 2005
BL-116
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Diagnostic Procedure 1
EIS003JZ
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “BCM” with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of “BCM”. Refer to BL-111, "CONSULT-II"
.
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
A
B
C
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU”
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key
registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
D
E
F
PIIA1260E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR BCM
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 and ground.
70 (W/B) – Ground
H
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following:
● 50A fusible link (letter f , located in fuse and fusible
link box)
● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM
connector
Ref. Part No. C1
BL
J
LIIA1279E
K
3. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON SIGNAL
L
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 38 and
ground.
38 (R) – Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following:
● 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM
connector
Ref. part No. C2
Revision: March 2005
M
: Battery voltage
BL-117
LIIA0527E
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BCM
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 67 and ground.
67 (B) – Ground
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness. Ref. part No. C3
LIIA1040E
5. REPLACE BCM
1.
2.
Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> BCM is malfunctioning.
No
>> ● ECM is malfunctioning.
● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
● Perform initialization or re-communicating function.
● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
● For re-communicating function, refer to BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Diagnostic Procedure 2
EIS003K0
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY”
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
PIIA1261E
Revision: March 2005
BL-118
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/
NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with reregistered NATS ignition key?
Yes
>> ● Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No
>> ● BCM is malfunctioning.
● Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation
SEL297W
Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Diagnostic Procedure 3
EIS003K1
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
B
C
D
E
F
G
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”:
Registered ID of BCM is in discord with that of ECM.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
H
BL
J
K
PIIA1262E
L
2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> ● Start engine. (END)
● System initialization had not been completed. Ref.
part No. F
No
>> ● ECM is malfunctioning.
● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Revision: March 2005
BL-119
M
SEL297W
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Diagnostic Procedure 4
EIS003K2
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed
on CONSULT-II screen.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
PIIA1264E
2. ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes
>> System is OK (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”).
No
>> GO TO 3.
3. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows the message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> System is OK.
No
>> GO TO 4.
SEL297W
Revision: March 2005
BL-120
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
4. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN
Replace BCM.
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II
shows the message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> System is OK. BCM is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A
No
>> ● ECM is malfunctioning.
● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation
Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
A
1.
2.
Diagnostic Procedure 5
B
C
D
SEL297W
EIS003K3
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
E
F
G
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO BL-115, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
H
BL
J
PIIA1263E
2. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION
Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to BL-125, "How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly.
L
M
3. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP
Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> ● Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
● Replace the ignition key.
Ref. part No. E5
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
No
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
BL-121
K
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP.
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal
1 and ground.
1 (W/L) – Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace fuse or harness. Ref. part No. E3
LIIA1280E
5. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 1
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal
2 and ground with analog tester.
2 (P) – Ground
Before inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
Voltage: Battery voltage
After inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
: Pointer of tester should move for
approx. 30 seconds, then return to
battery voltage.
Just after turning ignition switch ON
: Pointer of tester should move for
approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage.
LIIA1281E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> ● Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to
“CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Revision: March 2005
BL-122
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
6. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 2
A
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M27 terminal
4 and ground with analog tester.
4 (Y/B) –
Ground
Before inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
Voltage: Battery voltage
After inserting key into ignition key
cylinder
: Pointer of tester should move for
approx. 30 seconds, then return to
battery voltage.
Just after turning ignition switch ON
: Pointer of tester should move for
approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage.
B
C
D
LIIA1282E
E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> ● Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to
“CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
G
H
7. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
BL
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector.
Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. connector M27
terminal 3 and ground.
3 (B) – Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> ● NATS antenna amp. is malfunctioning.
Ref. part No. E6
NG
>> ● Repair or replace harness.
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization
with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
Revision: March 2005
J
BL-123
K
L
LIIA1283E
2005 Altima
M
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Diagnostic Procedure 6
EIS003K4
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
NOTE:
Refer to BL-107, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the security indicator lamp.
Security indicator lamp should light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector M14
terminal 1 and ground.
1 (Y/R) – Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1400E
4. CHECK BCM (NATS CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
Connect security indicator lamp connector.
Disconnect BCM.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and
ground.
23 (G/OR) – Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> BCM is malfunctioning.
● Replace BCM.
Ref. part No. A
● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation
LIIA0523E
Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”.
NG
>> Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and BCM (NATS control unit).
● Indicator lamp condition
Revision: March 2005
BL-124
2005 Altima
NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU
EIS003K5
A
NOTE:
●
If NVIS (NATS) IMMU is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS)
system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS
on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN
OF IMMU-KEY”.
B
C
D
SEL096WA
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-125
2005 Altima
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV —
PFP:96401
EIS003K6
LIWA0399E
Revision: March 2005
BL-126
2005 Altima
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS003K7
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver.
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.)
operates with original, hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at fault, not vehicle
related.
1. ILLUMINATION CHECK
B
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Does red light (LED) of transmitter illuminate when any button is
pressed?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
●
●
D
E
F
SEL442U
G
2. TRANSMITTER CHECK
Check transmitter with Tool*.
*:For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
OK or NG
OK
>> Receiver or hand-held transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related.
NG
>> Replace transmitter with sun visor assembly.
H
BL
3. POWER SUPPLY CHECK
J
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect transmitter connector.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between transmitter harness connector R2 terminal 1 Y/R and body ground.
K
Battery voltage should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> ● Check 10A fuse [No. 19 located in the fuse block (J/
B)]
● Harness for open or short between fuse and transmitter
M
LIIA1535E
4. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check continuity between transmitter harness connector R2 terminal
2 (B) and body ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transmitter with sun visor assembly.
NG
>> Repair harness.
LIIA1875E
Revision: March 2005
BL-127
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
BODY REPAIR
Body Exterior Paint Color
PFP:60100
EIS003K8
LIIA0126E
Color
code
Component
Description
Paint
type
Hard
clear coat
1
Bumper
fascia
2
3
4
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
Sonoma
Sunset
Code
Red
Majestic
Blue
Coral
Sand
Mystic
Emerald
Smoke
Super
Black
Sheer
Silver
Polished
Pewter
Satin
White
2M
2M
2M
2M
2M
2M
2S
2M
2M
3P
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Body
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
BQX3
Radiator
grille
Center
Black
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
Outer
Chrome
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Cr
Outside
mirror
Body
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
Base
Black
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
Body
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
Base
Black
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
AG01
Side
guard
molding
5
Door
sash
Black
tape
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
Outside
handle
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
7
Rear
Spoiler
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
8
Trunk lid
finisher
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
9
Center
mudguard
Body
color
A15
A20
BW9
C12
DY2
K11
KH3
KY1
KY2
QX3
2S: Solid Color with Clear, 2M: Metallic with Clear, 3P:3-Coat Pearl
Revision: March 2005
BL-128
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Body Component Parts
EIS003K9
A
UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1668E
Revision: March 2005
BL-129
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
2nd crossmember assembly
Front floor)
Transmission control reinforcement
Front floor reinforcement RH/LH
Lower dash assembly
Upper dash
Front cowl top
Cowl top extension bracket RH/LH
Center cowl top
Cowl top reinforcement RH/LH
Cowl top extension
Cowl top side brace RH/LH
Front side member assembly RH/LH
Side member closing plate assembly RH/LH
Lower front hoodledge assembly RH/LH
Lower rear hoodledge RH/LH
Upper hoodledge RH/LH
Front hoodledge reinforcement RH/LH
Hoodledge reinforcement gusset RH/LH
Rear hoodledge reinforcement RH/LH
Side cowl top RH/LH
Front side member extension reinforcement RH/LH
Front side member front extension RH/LH
Front inner sill reinforcement RH/LH
Inner sill RH/LH
Inner sill extension RH/LH
Front side member center extension RH/LH
Front side member rear extension RH/LH
Fuel tank protector RH/LH
Rear side member assembly RH/LH
Rear side member extension assembly RH/ LH
Rear center crossmember
Rear seat bracket
Inner rear seatbelt anchor reinforcement
Rear seat crossmember assembly
Rear seat crossmember reinforcement
Rear parking brake bracket
Front floor reinforcement assembly
Rear floor front extension
Rear floor front
Rear floor side LH
Rear floor rear
Rear floor side RH
Revision: March 2005
BL-130
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
BODY COMPONENT PARTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1669E
Revision: March 2005
BL-131
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
Standard roof
Front roof rail assembly
Front roof bow
Center roof bow assembly
Rear roof rail assembly
Roof (if equipped with sunroof)
Roof reinforcement assembly (if equipped with sunroof)
Hood assembly
Upper inner front pillar RH/LH
Lower inner front pillar RH/LH
Front fender RH/LH
Front pillar upper hinge brace assembly RH/LH
Front pillar lower reinforcement RH/LH
Front pillar lower hinge brace assembly RH/LH
Front outer sill reinforcement RH/LH
Sill outer reinforcement assembly RH/LH
Front body side outer assembly RH/LH
Front door assembly RH/LH
Rear door assembly RH/LH
Fuel door assembly
Fuel filler base assembly
Rear body side outer assembly RH/LH
Rear pillar inner reinforcement RH/LH
Outer rear wheel house RH/LH
Rear outer sill reinforcement RH/LH
Center pillar reinforcement RH/LH
Inner center pillar RH/LH
Front pillar outer reinforcement RH/LH
Roof side outer reinforcement assembly RH/LH
Rear wheelhouse outer extension assembly RH/LH
Rear wheelhouse inner assembly RH/LH
Rear seatback side support assembly RH/LH
Rear pillar inner RH/LH
Rear fender corner assembly RH/LH
Parcel shelf side RH/LH
Parcel shelf assembly RH/LH
Rear panel assembly
Trunk lid assembly
Revision: March 2005
BL-132
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Corrosion Protection
EIS003KA
DESCRIPTION
A
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in
NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-corrosive measures.
B
ANTI-CORROSIVE PRECOATED STEEL (GALVANNEALED STEEL)
To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anticorrosive precoated steel sheet has been adopted replacing conventional zinc-coated steel sheet.
Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron
alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance
with cationic electrodeposition primer.
C
D
E
PIIA0093E
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that
GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory.
F
G
PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION PRIMER
A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrodeposition primer, which provide excellent corrosion pro- H
tection, are employed on all body components.
CAUTION:
Confine paint removal during welding operations to an absolute
BL
minimum.
J
K
PIIA0095E
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built
into the vehicle at the factory.
Revision: March 2005
BL-133
2005 Altima
L
M
BODY REPAIR
ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX
To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas of
the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelf
life.
LIIA0005E
Revision: March 2005
BL-134
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
UNDERCOATING
The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chipping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating which is rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.
A
Precautions in undercoating
B
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three
way catalyst which are subjected to heat).
Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts which become hot.
Do not undercoat rotating parts.
Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
LIIA0129E
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-135
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Body Sealing
EIS003KB
DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant which has been applied to these
areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of
sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant.
WIIA0402E
Revision: March 2005
BL-136
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0406E
Revision: March 2005
BL-137
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
WIIA0130E
Revision: March 2005
BL-138
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Body Construction
EIS003KC
A
BODY CONSTRUCTION
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0131E
Revision: March 2005
BL-139
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Body Alignment
EIS003KD
BODY CENTER MARKS
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
LIIA1365E
Revision: March 2005
BL-140
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS
A mark has been placed on each body panel to indicate the parts matching positions. When repairing parts
damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle structure (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and
effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
WIIA0132E
Revision: March 2005
BL-141
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
DESCRIPTION
●
●
●
●
●
●
All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.
When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge
itself to make sure there is no free play.
When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other
side is symmetrically the same value.
The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of "X", "Y"
and "Z".
PIIA0104E
Revision: March 2005
BL-142
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MEASUREMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
WIIA0705E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-143
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
WIIA0403E
Revision: March 2005
BL-144
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
UNDERBODY
MEASUREMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA0087E
Revision: March 2005
BL-145
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
WIIA0404E
Revision: March 2005
BL-146
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
MEASUREMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1369E
Revision: March 2005
BL-147
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
WIIA0405E
Revision: March 2005
BL-148
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
REAR BODY
MEASUREMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1371E
Revision: March 2005
BL-149
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
MEASUREMENT POINTS
LIIA0066E
Revision: March 2005
BL-150
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Handling Precautions for Plastics
EIS003KE
A
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS
Abbreviation
PE
Material name
Polyethylene
Heat resisting
temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance to gasoline and
solvents
60 (140)
Gasoline and most solvents are
harmless if applied for a very
short time (wipe up quickly).
Flammable
Other cautions
B
C
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
80 (176)
Same as above.
Poison gas is emitted
when burned.
EPM/
EPDM
Ethylene Propylene (Diene) rubber
80 (176)
Same as above.
Flammable
TPO/
TPR
Thermoplastic Olefine/
Thermoplastic Rubber
80 (176)
Same as above.
Flammable
D
E
PP
Polypropylene
90 (194)
Same as above.
Flammable, avoid battery acid.
UP
Polyester thermoset
90 (194)
Same as above.
Flammable
PS
Polystyrene
80 (176)
Avoid solvents.
Flammable
ABS
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
resin
80 (176)
Avoid gasoline and solvents.
AES
Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene
80 (176)
Same as above.
PMMA
Polymethyl Methacrylate
85 (185)
Same as above.
AAS
Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene
85 (185)
Same as above.
AS
Acrylonitrile Styrene
85 (185)
Same as above.
EVA
Polyvinyl Ethyl Acetate
90 (194)
Same as above.
ASA
Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate
100 (222)
Same as above.
PPO/
PPE
Polyphenylene Oxide/
Polyphenylene Ether
110 (230)
Same as above.
PC
Polycarbonate
120 (248)
Same as above.
PAR
Polyacrylate
180 (356)
Same as above.
LLDPE
Lenear Low Density PE
45 (100)
Gasoline and most solvents are
harmless.
PUR
Polyurethane
90 (194)
Same as above.
TPU
Thermoplastic Urethane
110 (230)
Same as above.
PPC
Polypropylene Composite
115 (239)
Same as above.
Flammable
POM
Polyacetal
120 (248)
Same as above.
Avoid battery acid.
PBT+P
C
Polybutylene Terephthalate+Polycarbonate
120 (248)
Same as above.
Flammable
PA
Polyamide (Nylon)
140 (284)
Same as above.
Avoid immersing in water.
PBT
Polybutylene Terephthalate
140 (284)
Same as above.
FRP
Fiber Reinforced Plastics
170 (338)
Same as above.
PET
Polyethylene Terephthalate
180 (356)
Same as above.
PEI
Polyetherimide
200 (392)
Same as above.
F
G
H
BL
Flammable
J
K
Flammable
L
Avoid battery acid.
1.
When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics
(influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them.
2.
Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics.
Revision: March 2005
BL-151
2005 Altima
M
BODY REPAIR
LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS
LIIA0088E
Revision: March 2005
BL-152
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
WIIA0543E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-153
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel
EIS003KF
High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.
Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:
HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES
Tensile strength
373 N/mm2
(38kg/mm2 ,54klb/sq in)
Nissan/Infiniti designation
SP130
Major applicable parts
●
Front side member assembly
●
Upper hoodledge
●
Upper pillar hinge brace assembly
●
Rear side member extension
●
Other reinforcements
●
Front bumper reinforcement
●
Rear bumper reinforcement
2
785-981 N/mm
(80-100kg/mm2
114-142klb/sq in)
SP150
SP130 is the most commonly used HSS.
SP150 HSS is used only on parts that require much more strength.
Read the following precautions when repairing HSS:
1. Additional points to consider
● The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heating is not recommended since it may weaken the component.
When heating is unavoidable, do not heat HSS parts above
550°C (1,022°F).
Verify heating temperature with a thermometer.
(Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropriate.)
PIIA0115E
●
When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any
HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may cause
deformation in adjacent portions of the body. In this case,
increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pull
the HSS panel.
PIIA0116E
●
When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible. Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas
due to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum margin of 50 mm (1.97in).
PIIA0117E
Revision: March 2005
BL-154
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
●
When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possible in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to
heat.
If spot welding is impossible, use M.I.G. welding. Do not use
gas (torch) welding because it is inferior in welding strength.
A
B
C
PIIA0144E
D
●
●
2.
The spot weld on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary steel panel.
Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a
low speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase
drill bit durability and facilitate the operation.
SP150 HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/
mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2 , 114 to 142 klb/sq in), used as reinforcement in the door guard beams, is too strong to repair.
When these HSS parts are damaged, the outer panels also
sustain substantial damage; therefore, the assembly parts
must be replaced.
E
F
G
PIIA0145E
H
Precautions in spot welding HSS
This work should be performed under standard working conditions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS:
● The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according
to the metal thickness.
BL
J
PIIA0146E
●
The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no
gaps.
K
L
M
PIIA0147E
Revision: March 2005
BL-155
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
●
Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch.
Unit:mm
Thickness (t)
Minimum pitch (l)
0.6 (0.024)
0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
10 (0.39) or over
12 (0.47) or over
18 (0.71) or over
20 (0.79) or over
27 (1.06) or over
31 (1.22) or over
PIIA0148E
Foam Repair
EIS00489
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the
vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read
instructions on product for fill procedures.
FILL PROCEDURES
1.
–
–
–
–
Fill procedures after installation of service part.
Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
Clean area in which foam was removed.
Install service part.
Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service
part.
LIIA1081E
2.
–
–
–
–
Fill procedures before installation of service part.
Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
Clean area in which foam was removed.
Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE:
Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding
flange area.
Install service part.
NOTE:
Refer to label for information on working times.
LIIA1082E
Revision: March 2005
BL-156
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Replacement Operations
EIS003KG
DESCRIPTION
A
This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body
repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section.
B
Technicians are also encouraged to read Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the original functions and quality of the vehicle can be maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) contains
additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Technicians
should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repairs.
Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures may not
apply in some regions or countries.
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BL-157
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
The symbols used in this section for cutting and welding / brazing operations are shown below.
PIIA0149E
Revision: March 2005
BL-158
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
●
Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded
area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is
at position A due to the construction of the vehicle. Refer to BL165, "FRONT PILLAR" .
A
B
C
PIIA0150E
D
●
Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating
indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer
front pillar over 60 mm above inner front pillar cut position.
E
F
G
PIIA0151E
●
H
Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this
will permit service part to be accurately cut at joint position.
BL
J
K
PIIA0152E
●
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as follows.
Mark cutting lines.
A: Cut position of outer pillar
B: Cut position of inner pillar
Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar.
Cut outer pillar along groove of jig. (At position A)
Remove jig and cut remaining portions.
Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner.
L
M
PIIA0153E
Revision: March 2005
BL-159
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
HOODLEDGE
●
Work after radiator core support has been removed.
LIIA1529E
Revision: March 2005
BL-160
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
HOODLEDGE (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT)
●
A
Work after radiator core support has been removed.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1530E
Revision: March 2005
BL-161
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
FRONT SIDE MEMBER
●
Work after hoodledge and radiator core support have been removed.
LIIA0136E
Revision: March 2005
BL-162
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1372E
Revision: March 2005
BL-163
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT)
●
Work after radiator core support has been removed.
LIIA1373E
Revision: March 2005
BL-164
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
FRONT PILLAR
●
A
Work after rear hoodledge reinforcement has been removed.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1374E
Revision: March 2005
BL-165
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
LIIA1375E
Revision: March 2005
BL-166
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA1376E
Revision: March 2005
BL-167
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
CENTER PILLAR
LIIA1377E
Revision: March 2005
BL-168
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
OUTER SILL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA0142E
Revision: March 2005
BL-169
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
REAR FENDER
LIIA1378E
Revision: March 2005
BL-170
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
REAR PANEL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA0144E
Revision: March 2005
BL-171
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
REAR FLOOR REAR
●
Work after rear panel has been removed.
LIIA0145E
Revision: March 2005
BL-172
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION
●
A
Work after rear panel and rear end crossmember have been removed.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
BL
J
K
L
M
LIIA0146E
Revision: March 2005
BL-173
2005 Altima
BODY REPAIR
Revision: March 2005
BL-174
2005 Altima
F BRAKES
SECTION
BR
BRAKE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5
BRAKE PEDAL .......................................................... 6
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 6
Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
BRAKE FLUID ............................................................ 8
Checking Brake Fluid Level ..................................... 8
Changing Brake Fluid ............................................... 8
Bleeding Brake System ............................................ 8
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE ...................................... 9
Hydraulic Circuit ....................................................... 9
Front Brake Piping and Hose ................................... 9
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
Rear Brake Piping and Hose .................................. 10
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
Inspection ................................................................11
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 12
On-board Inspection ............................................... 12
LEAK INSPECTION ............................................ 12
Components ........................................................... 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 13
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 14
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 14
BRAKE BOOSTER ................................................... 15
On-vehicle Service ................................................. 15
OPERATING CHECK .......................................... 15
AIRTIGHT CHECK .............................................. 15
Removal and Installation ........................................ 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
VACUUM LINES ....................................................... 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 17
Inspection ............................................................... 18
VISUAL INSPECTION ......................................... 18
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION ............................. 18
CLZ25VD
CLZ25VE
BR-1
G
H
I
J
K
L
FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 19
Component ............................................................. 19
On-vehicle Service ................................................. 19
PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 19
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE
PAD ..................................................................... 20
Removal and Installation ........................................ 20
REMOVAL ........................................................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 21
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 21
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 22
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 23
Brake Burnishing Procedure ................................... 24
FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 25
Component ............................................................. 25
On-board Inspection ............................................... 26
Revision: March 2005
BR
2005 Altima
M
PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 26
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ................... 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION .................................................... 26
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and
Disc Rotor ............................................................... 28
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION .................................................... 28
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly ... 29
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 29
CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 29
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 30
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 30
Brake Burnishing .................................................... 31
REAR DISC BRAKE ................................................. 32
Component ............................................................. 32
On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 33
PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 33
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE
Revision: March 2005
PAD ......................................................................33
Removal and Installation .........................................34
REMOVAL ............................................................34
INSTALLATION ....................................................34
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................35
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................35
CALIPER INSPECTION .......................................36
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................36
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ...............................37
Brake Burnishing .....................................................38
DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE .............................39
Inspection ................................................................39
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......40
General Specifications ............................................40
Disc Brake ...............................................................40
Brake Pedal ............................................................41
Control Valve ...........................................................41
Brake Booster .........................................................41
BR-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EFS0045J
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
E
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
BR
harness connectors.
Precautions for Brake System
EFS0045K
Always use new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder, disc brake caliper and wheel cylinder, use clean brake fluid.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They
will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
SBR686C
●
Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
WARNING:
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
●
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
BR-3
H
I
J
K
L
EFS0045L
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
●
Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
●
For trouble diagnoses of models with ABS, refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
●
For trouble diagnoses of models with TCS even if the diagnostic items are related to the ABS system,
refer to BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
Revision: March 2005
G
2005 Altima
M
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EFS004M6
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
—
(J-46532)
Brake and clutch pedal height measurement tool
Measuring brake pedal height
LFIA0227E
Commercial Service Tools
EFS0045M
Tool name
Description
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing each brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
S-NT360
Brake fluid pressure gauge
Measuring brake fluid pressure
NT151
Power tool
Loosening nuts, bolts, and screws
PBIC0190E
PBIC0191E
Revision: March 2005
BR-4
2005 Altima
Symptom
Revision: March 2005
×
×
×
Shake
×
Shimmy, Shudder
×
×
BR-5
×
×
×
×
WHEEL HUB
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
STEERING
×
DRIVE SHAFT
Rotor thickness variation
Rotor rust
Rotor deflection
Rotor deformation
Rotor runout
Rotor damage
Rotor imbalance
Shims damaged
Noise
Pads - uneven wear
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-19, BR-38
BR-24' BR-24
BR-22, BR-37
BR-22, BR-37
BR-22, BR-37
BR-19, BR-32
BR-22, BR-37
BR-19, BR-32
BR-19, BR-33
BR-19, BR-32
Reference page
Pads - damaged
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
PFP:00003
EFS0045N
A
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
C
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2005 Altima
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BRAKE PEDAL
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment
PFP:46501
EFS0045O
Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from dash reinforcement panel using Tool. Adjust if necessary.
Tool
:
—
(J-46532)
Free height "H"
Refer to BR-41, "Brake Pedal" .
Clearance between
pedal stopper and
threaded end of stop
lamp switch and
ASCD switch "C1, C2"
0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.0291 - 0.0772 in)
Pedal height (with
engine running, brake
pedal force 490 N {50
kgf, 110 lbf}) "H"
M/T vehicle
: More than 84 mm
(3.31 in)
A/T vehicle
: More than 90.3 mm
(3.55 in)
Pedal play
3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in)
WFIA0022E
1.
2.
Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch (if equipped) by
turning 45° counterclockwise.
Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the
pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock
nut.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is
located inside the clevis.
Lock nut
3.
4.
5.
6.
: 16 - 21 N·m (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 16 ft-lb)
SBR229E
With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp
switch and the ASCD switch (if equipped) in until threaded ends
contact rubber stops.
With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch (if equipped) contacting the rubber
stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the gap (C1 , C2 ) between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification.
Check the pedal play.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released.
Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Revision: March 2005
BR-6
2005 Altima
BRAKE PEDAL
Removal and Installation
EFS0045P
A
B
C
D
E
BR
WFIA0308E
1.
Clevis Pin
2.
Stop lamp switch
4.
Snap pin
5.
Brake pedal assembly
3.
G
ASCD cancel switch
REMOVAL
H
WARNING:
Do not deform the brake tube.
1. Remove the instrument lower cover on driver side. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
2. Remove the stop lamp switch from the pedal assembly.
3. Remove ASCD switch (if equipped) from pedal assembly.
4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster.
5. Remove mounting nuts from the pedal assembly and carefully remove the brake pedal from the brake
booster.
J
K
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check brake pedal for following items.
●
Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper
●
Clevis pin deformation
●
Crack of any welded portion
●
Brake pedal bend
L
M
SBR997
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and
Adjustment" .
Revision: March 2005
I
BR-7
2005 Altima
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
Checking Brake Fluid Level
●
●
●
●
PFP:KN100
EFS0045Q
Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max and
Min lines on reservoir tank.
Visually check around the reservoir tank for leaks.
If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes
off. If not, check brake system for leaks.
LFIA0096E
Changing Brake Fluid
EFS0045R
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder.
2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector.
4. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
5. Loosen the air bleeder, depress the pedal slowly to the full stroke and then release it. Repeat the procedure every 2 or 3 seconds until the new brake fluid comes out, then close the air bleeder while depressing
the pedal. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Bleeding Brake System
EFS0045S
CAUTION:
●
Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation.
●
Fill reservoir with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system.
●
Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid.
●
Do not loosen the connecting portion of the actuator during air bleeding.
1. For models with ABS, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connectors
or battery ground cable.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
3. Fully depress brake pedal several times.
4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release
air.
5. Close air bleeder valve.
6. Release brake pedal slowly.
7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification.
Air bleeder valve
8.
9.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m,
61 - 78 in-lb)
Repeat steps 2. through 7. until no more air bubbles come out of
air bleeder valve.
Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order:
Right rear brake → Left front brake → Left rear brake → Right front brake
Revision: March 2005
BR-8
SBR419C
2005 Altima
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Hydraulic Circuit
PFP:46210
A
EFS0045T
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
WFIA0120E
K
Front Brake Piping and Hose
EFS0045U
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
●
Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
SBR419C
Revision: March 2005
BR-9
2005 Altima
L
M
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
3.
4.
5.
Remove the flare nut connecting the brake tube and hose, then
withdraw the lock spring.
Remove the connecting bolt and disconnect the brake hose
from the cylinder body.
Remove lock spring from the mounting portion of the brake tube
and the mounting portion of the strut.
WFIA0087E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Attach the brake hose to the cylinder body, then temporarily tighten the connecting bolt by hand.
CAUTION:
● Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body.
● The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected.
2. Attach the brake hose to the strut, then secure it with a lock spring.
3. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand,
then secure it with a lock spring.
4. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts.
Flare nut
Connecting bolt
5.
6.
: 14.8 - 17.6 N·m (1.5 - 1.7 kg-m,
11 - 12 ft-lb)
: 16.7 - 19.6 N·m (1.7 - 1.9 kg-m,
13 - 14 ft-lb)
Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve.
Bleed air. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
SBR686C
Rear Brake Piping and Hose
EFS0045V
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
●
Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
SBR419C
Revision: March 2005
BR-10
2005 Altima
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
3.
4.
Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring.
Remove connecting bolt and disconnect brake hose from cylinder body.
A
B
C
WFIA0088E
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
E
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand.
CAUTION:
BR
● Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body.
● The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected.
G
2. Attach the brake hose with a lock spring, then tighten the connecting bolt to the specified torque. Tighten the flare nut with a
torque wrench to the specified torque.
H
Flare nut
: 14.8 - 17.6 N·m (1.5 - 1.7 kg-m,
11 - 12 ft-lb)
Connecting bolt : 16.7 - 19.6 N·m (1.7 - 1.9 kg-m,
I
13 - 14 ft-lb)
3.
4.
Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve.
Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake
System" .
Inspection
J
SBR686C
EFS0045W
CAUTION:
If leakage occurs around hose and tube connections, retighten
or, if necessary, replace damaged parts.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, cracks, distortion, deformation, without interfering with other parts or loosening connecting parts, deterioration or other damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
2. Apply a stepping force of 784 N (80 kgf, 176 lbf) to the brake
pedal with the engine running and keep it for about 5 seconds,
then check each part for leaks.
L
M
SBR389C
Revision: March 2005
BR-11
K
2005 Altima
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
On-board Inspection
PFP:46010
EFS0045X
LEAK INSPECTION
Check for leaking in master cylinder installation surface, the reservoir tank installation surface, the reservoir
hose connections, and the brake tube connections.
Components
EFS0045Y
WFIA0037E
1.
Reservoir cap
2.
O-ring
3.
Reservoir tank
4.
Seal
5.
Cylinder body
6.
O-ring
7.
Piston stopper
8.
Secondary piston assembly
9.
Primary piston assembly
10. Stopper cap
Removal and Installation
EFS0045Z
CAUTION:
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Revision: March 2005
BR-12
2005 Altima
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove air cleaner and inlet duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-120,
"Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE).
Remove clutch fluid reservoir without disconnecting hose and position aside. Refer to CL-8, "CLUTCH
MASTER CYLINDER" .
Connect a vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal to empty fluid from the master cylinder. Remove the harness connector of the brake fluid master cylinder level sensor.
Remove brake pipe flare nuts.
Disconnect fluid level sensor.
Remove master cylinder nuts and master cylinder.
Remove reservoir tank and seals, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
A
B
C
D
E
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal.
●
Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air
comes out of master cylinder.
●
Install the brake lines to master cylinder.
●
Tighten flare nuts to specification. Refer to BR-9, "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE" .
●
Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake
System" .
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0026E
J
Disassembly and Assembly
EFS00460
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Bend claws of stopper cap outward.
K
L
M
SBR938A
2.
3.
4.
Remove piston stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder.
Remove piston assemblies.
If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually
apply compressed air through fluid outlet.
Remove the reservoir tank.
SBR231C
Revision: March 2005
BR-13
2005 Altima
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Master Cylinder Inner Wall
●
Check the inner wall of the cylinder for damage, abrasion, corrosion and pin holes. If defective, replace
the master cylinder.
Piston
●
Check for deformation of or scratches on piston cups.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston
assembly.
● Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with piston
stopper mounting hole of cylinder body.
SBR354C
2.
Install stopper cap.
Before installing stopper cap, ensure that claws are bent inward.
SBR940A
3.
4.
5.
Push reservoir tank seals into cylinder body.
Push reservoir tank into cylinder body.
Install piston stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder.
SBR435B
Revision: March 2005
BR-14
2005 Altima
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
On-vehicle Service
PFP:47200
A
EFS00461
OPERATING CHECK
1.
2.
Stop engine and depress brake pedal several times. Check that
pedal stroke does not change.
Depress brake pedal, then start engine. If pedal goes down
slightly, operation is normal.
CAUTION:
Depress brake pedal in 5 second intervals.
B
C
D
BRA0037D
E
AIRTIGHT CHECK
●
●
Start engine, and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress brake
pedal several times slowly. The pedal should go further down
the first time, and then it should gradually rise thereafter.
Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine
with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after
holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
CAUTION:
Depress brake pedal in 5 second intervals.
BR
G
H
SBR365AA
I
Removal and Installation
EFS00462
J
K
L
M
WFIA0248E
Revision: March 2005
BR-15
2005 Altima
BRAKE BOOSTER
1.
Master cylinder
2.
Reservoir tank
3.
Brake booster
4.
Gasket
5.
Nut
6.
Lock nut
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes during removal of booster.
●
Replace clevis pin if damaged.
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Take care not to damage brake booster mounting bolt thread when installing. Due to the acute
angle of installation, the threads can be damaged with the dash panel.
1. Remove air cleaner and inlet duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-17, "AIR
CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
2. Remove clutch fluid reservoir without disconnecting hose and position aside. Refer to CL-9, "CLUTCH
RESERVOIR TANK" .
3. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-12, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove vacuum hose from the brake booster. Refer to BR-17, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
6. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle.
7. Remove the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
8. Remove brake booster assembly from the engine compartment side.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Output Rod Length Check
1.
2.
3.
Apply vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.69 inHg) to brake
booster with a hand vacuum pump.
Add preload of 19.6 N (2 kg, 4.4 lb) to output rod.
Check output rod length.
Specified length
: 10.275 - 10.525 mm
(0.4045 - 0.4144 in)
SBR208E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Adjust the length of the input rod by loosening the lock nut so
that the dimensions shown match the standard value.
Standard value
●
●
●
: 125 mm (4.92 in)
Tighten the lock nut temporarily and when installing the booster
assembly in the vehicle.
Adjust the height and play of the brake pedal. Refer to BR-6,
"Inspection and Adjustment" .
Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake
System" .
SBR237EA
Revision: March 2005
BR-16
2005 Altima
VACUUM LINES
VACUUM LINES
Removal and Installation
PFP:41920
A
EFS00463
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
WFIA0409E
1.
Clamp
2.
Check valve inclusion position stamp 3.
4.
Vacuum piping
⇐
Brake booster
J
Vacuum hose
CAUTION:
●
Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer
to the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. The brake booster will not operate normally if
the hose is installed in the wrong direction.
●
Insert the vacuum hose at least 24 mm (0.94 in).
●
Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
K
L
M
SBR225B
Revision: March 2005
BR-17
2005 Altima
VACUUM LINES
Inspection
EFS00464
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check for improper assembly, damage and deteriorate.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection
Use a hand-held vacuum pump to check.
When connected to booster side:
Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa
(10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under
a vacuum of (–66.7 kPa) [(–500 mmHg),
(–19.69 inHg)]
When connected to engine side:
No vacuum will be applied
SBR844B
Revision: March 2005
BR-18
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VD]
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Component
PFP:41000
A
EFS00465
B
C
D
E
BR
G
WFIA0318E
1.
Main pin
2.
Pin boot
3.
Torque member fixing bolt
4.
Torque member
5.
Shim cover
6.
Inner shim
7.
Inner pad
8.
Pad retainer
9.
Outer pad
10. Outer shim
11. Connecting bolt
12. Copper washer
13. Main pin bolt
14. Bleed valve
15. Cylinder body
16. Piston seal
17. Piston
18. Piston boot
H
I
WARNING:
Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other
materials.
CAUTION:
●
When cylinder body is open, do not depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
●
It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder
body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
●
Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor. Always replace shims when replacing
pads.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if
a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" .
On-vehicle Service
EFS00466
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
●
Remove a wheel with the vehicle lifted up, and then check the
thickness of the pad from the inspection hole of the cylinder
body. If necessary, check it with a micrometer.
Standard pad thickness
Pad wear limit
: 11 mm (0.43 in)
: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
BRA0010D
Revision: March 2005
BR-19
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VD]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE PAD
Removal
●
●
1.
2.
If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat, replace them with new shims.
Whenever the brake pads are replaced, the inner shim, the outer shim and the shim cover have to be
replaced as a set.
Remove master cylinder reservoir cap.
Remove pin bolt, using power tool.
SBR976B
3.
Suspend the cylinder body with wire. Then remove pads with
retainers, inner and outer shims and pad return springs.
SBR932C
Installation
1.
Apply Molykote AS880N grease between pad plate and shim, shim and shim cover, and shim cover and
piston. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
2. Attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad and attach the outer shim to the outer pad.
3. Apply grease to the contact surface of pad retainer with the
pads, then attach the pad retainer and pads to the torque member. Make sure the upper pad retainer end is inserted through
the loop on the audible wear indicator as shown.
4. Install the cylinder body to the torque member.
5. Insert a main pin bolt (on the lower side) and tighten it to specification. Refer to BR-19, "Component" .
6. Inspect fluid level, then install master cylinder reservoir cap.
7. Check the brakes for drag.
CAUTION:
LFIA0226E
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24,
"Brake Burnishing Procedure" .
Removal and Installation
EFS00467
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove master cylinder reservoir cap.
Connect the vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder.
Depress the brake pedal and drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder.
Revision: March 2005
BR-20
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VD]
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove connecting bolt and torque member fixing bolts, using
power tool.
Remove the brake caliper.
Remove brake rotor.
Separate brake caliper from torque member as required.
A
B
C
WFIA0243E
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
E
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install brake rotor.
2. Install the brake caliper to torque member and tighten main pin bolt to specification, if required. Refer to BR
BR-19, "Component" .
CAUTION:
When installing the cylinder body in the vehicle, wipe oil from the seating surface of the knuckle
G
spindle washer and the mounting surface of the cylinder body.
3. Install brake cylinder body to steering knuckle and tighten torque member bolts.
4. Install brake hose to caliper and tighten connecting bolt.
H
CAUTION:
● The copper washer of the connecting bolt has to be
replaced every time the fitting is disconnected.
I
● Correctly attach the brake hose to the projecting portion
of the cylinder body.
5. Inspect brake fluid level, then install master cylinder reservoir
J
cap.
6. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake
System" .
WFIA0244E
K
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or
if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" .
L
Disassembly and Assembly
EFS00468
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Push out piston with piston boot using compressed air.
WARNING:
Do not place your fingers in front of piston.
M
SBR772
Revision: March 2005
BR-21
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VD]
2.
Remove piston seal with a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or score cylinder wall.
WFIA0029E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Caliper
CYLINDER BODY
CAUTION:
Use brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oil.
●
Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. If
any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
●
Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
TORQUE MEMBER
Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if necessary.
PISTON
CAUTION:
Piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed.
SLIDE PIN, PIN BOLT AND PIN BOOT
Check for wear, cracks or other damage. Replace if any of the conditions are observed.
Rotor
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check rotor for roughness, cracks or chips.
RUNOUT
1. Secure rotor to wheel hub with at least two nuts (M12 x 1.25).
2. Check runout using a dial indicator.
Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT
WHEEL BEARING" .
3. Change relative positions of rotor and wheel hub so that runout
is minimized.
Maximum runout
4.
: 0.07 mm (0.0028 in)
If the runout is still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car
brake lathe (“MAD, DL-8700”, “AMMCO 700 and 705” or equivalent).
Revision: March 2005
BR-22
SBR219C
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VD]
THICKNESS
Check thickness using a micrometer.
Thickness variation
(At least 8 positions)
A
: Maximum 0.015 mm
(0.0006 in)
B
If thickness variation exceeds the specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe.
Rotor thickness
repair limit
: 22.0 mm (0.866 in)
C
ASSEMBLY
1.
Apply rubber grease to new piston seal and insert seal into
groove on cylinder body.
D
E
BR
SBR574
G
H
I
J
WFIA0030E
2.
K
With piston boot fitted to piston, insert piston boot into groove on
cylinder body and install piston.
L
M
WFIA0031E
3.
Make sure piston boot is properly installed.
WFIA0032E
Revision: March 2005
BR-23
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VD]
Brake Burnishing Procedure
EFS00469
Burnish the brake contact surfaces according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing brake
rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH).
Adjust brake pedal/foot pressure so that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
Revision: March 2005
BR-24
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Component
PFP:41000
A
EFS004M9
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
WFIA0335E
1.
Union bolt
2.
Copper washer
3.
Brake hose
4.
Sliding pin bolt
5.
Sliding pin
6.
Cap
7.
Air bleeder
8.
Cylinder body
9.
Sliding pin boot
10.
Piston seal
11.
Piston
12.
Piston boot
13.
Torque member
14.
Inner shim cover
15.
Inner shim
16.
Inner pad
17.
Pad retainer
18.
Pad retainer
19.
Outer pad
20.
Outer shim
21.
Outer shim cover
22.
Torque member bolts
L
M
CAUTION:
●
Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed
air.
●
While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not
depress the brake pedal.
●
It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of the caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake
hose is not under tension.
●
Do not damage piston boot.
●
If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
●
Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads.
●
Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid.
Revision: March 2005
BR-25
K
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "Brake Burnishing" .
On-board Inspection
EFS004MA
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
●
Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body
inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary.
Standard pad thickness
Pad wear limit
: 9.5 mm (0.374 in)
: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
BRA0010D
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
EFS004MB
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove tires from vehicle using power tool.
Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
Hang the cylinder body with a wire then remove the pads, pad
retainers, and shims from the torque member.
CAUTION:
When removing the pad retainer from the torque member,
lift the pad retainer in the direction shown by the arrow
(shown in the figure) so as not to deform it.
SBR556E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply Molykote AS880N grease between pad plate and shim, shim and shim cover, and shim cover and
piston. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
CAUTION:
● When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it
does not float up higher than the torque member, as
shown in the figure.
Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach
the cylinder body to the torque member.
NOTE:
Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes
it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION:
● By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the
PFIA0273E
master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of the reservoir tank.
Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to the specified torque.
Sliding pin bolt
5.
6.
: 22 – 31 N·m (2.3 – 3.1 kg-m,
17 – 22 ft-lb)
Check brake for drag.
Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
Revision: March 2005
BR-26
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "Brake Burnishing" .
A
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BR-27
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
EFS004MC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires from vehicle with power tool.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" .
Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove caliper assembly.
Remove disc rotor.
● Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
● Align marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor.
2. Install caliper assembly to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Torque member bolts
: 137 - 176 N·m (14 - 17 kg-m,
101 - 129 ft - lb)
CAUTION:
When attaching the caliper assembly to the vehicle, wipe
any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and caliper assembly attachment surfaces.
PFIA0411E
3.
Install brake hose to the caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt
to the specified torque.
Union bolt
: 16.7 - 19.6 N·m (1.7 - 1.9 kg-m,
13 - 14 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts.
● Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the caliper
assembly attachment part.
●
PFIA0404E
4.
5.
Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "Brake Burnishing" .
Revision: March 2005
BR-28
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
EFS004MD
A
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim,
shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member.
CAUTION:
When removing the pad retainer from the torque member,
lift it in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure so
that it does not deform.
B
C
D
SBR556E
2.
3.
Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
CAUTION:
Do not get your fingers caught in the piston.
E
BR
G
H
MAA0272D
4.
I
Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a srewdriver or suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
J
K
PFIA0269E
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
M
CAUTION:
●
Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
●
Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there are
any non-standard conditions.
●
Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface
with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION:
●
Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper.
●
Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected,
replace applicable part.
Revision: March 2005
L
BR-29
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots
Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not use Nissan Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling.
1. Apply rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston seals.
SFIA0156E
2.
Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on
the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into
the cylinder body groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston boot.
SFIA0157E
3.
4.
Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston, insert into the
cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot pistonside lip into the piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
PFIA0272E
5.
6.
Attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad and the outer shim to the outer pad.
Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection
Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection
1.
Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions.
Revision: March 2005
BR-30
2005 Altima
FRONT DISC BRAKE
[CLZ25VE]
2.
Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
A
Standard value
(measured at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge)
Runout limit
: 0.07 mm (0.0028 in)
(with it attached to the vehicle) or less
3.
CAUTION:
Before measuring, make sure the axle endplay is 0 mm (0
in). Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" .
If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by
shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by
one hole.
B
C
BRA0013D
D
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness
does not meet specification, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness
Minimum thickness
Maximum uneven wear
(measured at 8 positions)
E
: 28 mm (1.10 in)
: 26 mm (1.02 in)
: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or
less
BR
G
SBR020B
Brake Burnishing
H
EFS004ME
Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors,
after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH).
Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BR-31
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
REAR DISC BRAKE
Component
PFP:44000
EFS0046A
WFIA0322E
1.
Connecting bolt
2.
Brake hose
3.
4.
Cap
5.
Air bleeder
6.
Copper washer
Sliding pin
7.
Cylinder body
8.
Piston seal
9.
Piston
10.
Piston boot
11. Retaining ring
12.
Inner shim cover
13.
Inner shim
14. Inner pad
15.
Pad retainer
16.
Outer pad
17. Outer shim
18.
Outer shim cover
19.
Sliding pin boot
20. Torque member bolts
21.
Torque member
WARNING:
Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air.
CAUTION:
●
While removing cylinder body, never depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
●
It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is
not under tension.
●
Do not damage piston boot.
●
Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads.
●
Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-38, "Brake Burnishing" .
Revision: March 2005
BR-32
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
On-Vehicle Service
EFS0046B
A
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
●
Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body
inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary.
Standard pad thickness
Pad wear limit
B
: 8.0 mm (0.315 in)
: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
C
D
BRA0010D
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE PAD
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
Remove master cylinder reservoir cap.
Remove tires from vehicle with power tool.
Remove bottom sliding pin bolt.
Hang cylinder body with a wire, and remove pads, pad retainers,
shims from torque member.
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SBR042C
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease between pad plate and shim, shim and
shim cover, and shim cover and piston. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS"
.
Attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim cover to the
outer pad.
Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach the cylinder body to the torque member.
NOTE:
Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION:
By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the
level of the surface of the reservoir tank.
Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to the specified torque.
Revision: March 2005
BR-33
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
Sliding pin bolt
6.
7.
8.
: 38 – 48 N·m (3.9 – 4.8 kg-m, 25 – 35 ft-lb)
Inspect brake fluid level, then install master cylinder reservoir cap.
Check brake for drag.
Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-38, "Brake Burnishing" .
Removal and Installation
EFS0046C
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove master cylinder reservoir cap.
Remove tires from vehicle using power tool.
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Remove connecting bolt and torque member bolts using power
tool, and remove cylinder body.
WFIA0246E
5.
Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows:
● Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged.
● Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the
adjuster hole plug.
● Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and
rotate the star wheel on the adjuster assembly in the direction
shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes.
● Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a
marker between the hub and disc rotor.
● Remove wheel nut and rotor.
WFIA0018E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
● Align marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor.
2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Torque member bolts
3.
: 71.6 – 97.0 N·m (7.3 – 9.8 kg-m, 53 – 71 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle
assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body.
Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten connecting bolt to the specified torque.
Connecting bolt
: 16.7 – 19.6 N·m (1.7 – 1.9 kg-m, 13 – 14 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the copper washer for connecting bolts.
●
Revision: March 2005
BR-34
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Add new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
5. Install master cylinder reservoir cap.
6. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" .
7. Attach the tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
CAUTION:
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or
if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-38, "Brake Burnishing" .
●
Disassembly and Assembly
2.
3.
B
C
EFS0046D
DISASSEMBLY
1.
A
Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque
member and cylinder.
Remove sliding pin boot from torque member.
D
E
Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown.
BR
G
H
SBR028A
4.
I
Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from connecting
bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
WARNING:
Do not place your finger in front of piston.
J
K
BRD0041D
5.
Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or
suitable tool, as shown.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
M
PFIA0269E
Revision: March 2005
BR-35
L
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
●
Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
●
Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace cylinder body.
●
Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface
with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION:
Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper.
Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace
applicable part.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots
Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are,
replace them.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not use Nissan Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling.
1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston seals.
SFIA0156E
2.
Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on
the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into
the cylinder body groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston boot.
SFIA0157E
Revision: March 2005
BR-36
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
3.
Apply a brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by
hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston boot.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
A
B
C
PFIA0272E
D
4.
Fix piston boot with retaining ring.
CAUTION:
● Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove.
● Do not reuse the retaining ring.
E
BR
G
SFIA0158E
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Attach the sliding pin bolt and sliding pin boot to the torque member.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the rear of the pad and to both sides
of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim
cover to the outer pad.
Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
CAUTION:
When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it
does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown
in the figure.
After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the
torque member.
Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified
torque.
H
I
J
K
L
PFIA0273E
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection
M
Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection
1.
2.
Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to the wheel hub in two or more positions.
Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
Measurement position
Runout limit (with it
attached to the vehicle)
: At a point 10 mm (0.39 in)
from outer edge of the disc.
: 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) or less
CAUTION:
Before measuring, make sure the axle endplay is 0 mm (0
in).
BRA0013D
Revision: March 2005
BR-37
2005 Altima
REAR DISC BRAKE
3.
If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor
and wheel hub by one hole.
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is
not within specification, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness
Minimum thickness
Maximum uneven wear
(measured at 8 positions)
: 9.0 mm (0.350 in)
: 8.0 mm (0.310 in)
: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or
less
SBR020B
Brake Burnishing
EFS0046E
Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors,
after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH).
Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
Revision: March 2005
BR-38
2005 Altima
DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE
DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE
Inspection
PFP:46400
A
EFS0046F
CAUTION:
●
Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder.
●
Use new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on paint areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Connect Tool to air bleeders of front and rear brakes on either
LH and RH side.
B
C
D
E
BR
SBR822BA
2.
3.
Applied pressure
(Front brake)
Output pressure
(Rear brake)
4.
G
Bleed air from the Tool.
Check fluid pressure by depressing brake pedal.
: 7,355 kPa (75 kg/cm2, 1,067 psi)
H
: 5,100 - 5,492 kPa (52 - 56 kg/cm2,
739 - 796 psi)
If output pressure is out of specification, replace dual proportioning valve.
Bleed air after disconnecting the Tool. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding
Brake System" .
I
SBR823BA
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BR-39
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
EFS0046G
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
CLZ25VD disc brake
CLZ25VE disc brake
57.2 (2.25)
57.2 (2.25)
125.6 × 46 × 11 (4.94 × 1.81 ×
0.43)
111.0 × 62.5 × 9.5 (4.37 × 2.46
× 0.37)
296 × 24 (11.7 × 0.94)
320 × 28 (12.6 × 1.10)
Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake
Pad
Length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Brake model
AD9V disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Rear brake
34.9 (1.3740)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.31)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
292 × 9 (11.5 × 0.35)
Master cylinder
Cylinder bore diameter
Control valve
Screw in type
30 × 0.4 (1.18 × 0.02)
Booster model
M215T
Brake booster
Diaphragm diameter
23.81 (15/16)
Primary
230 (9.06)
Secondary
205 (8.07)
Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS"
.
Recommended brake fluid
Disc Brake
EFS004M7
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Pad wear limit
Rotor repair limit
CLZ25VD
CLZ25VE
AD9V
2.0 (0.079)
2.0 (0.079)
1.5 (0.059)
Maximum runout
0.07 (0.0028)
0.07 (0.0028)
0.07 (0.0028)
Minimum thickness
22.0 (0.866)
26.0 (1.02)
8.0 (0.31)
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation (At least 8 positions)
Revision: March 2005
0.015 (0.0006)
BR-40
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Brake Pedal
EFS0046I
Unit: mm (in)
A
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
WFIA0022E
Free height “H”*
M/T
164.1 - 174.1 (6.46 - 6.85)
A/T
173.1 - 183.1 (6.81 - 7.21)
Clearance “C1 or C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or
ASCD switch
I
0.74 - 1.96 (0.0291 - 0.0772)
*: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad
J
Control Valve
EFS0046J
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Applied pressure (front)
7,355 (75, 1,067)
Output pressure (rear)
5,100 - 5,492 (52 - 56, 739 - 796)
Brake Booster
K
EFS0046K
L
Unit: mm (in)
Output rod length
10.275 - 10.525 (0.4045 - 0.4144)
Clevis length
Revision: March 2005
M
130 (5.12)
BR-41
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: March 2005
BR-42
2005 Altima
F BRAKES
SECTION
BRC
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
ABS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................... 5
Description ............................................................... 5
PURPOSE ............................................................. 5
OPERATION ......................................................... 5
Fail Safe ................................................................... 5
Hydraulic Circuit ....................................................... 5
System Components ................................................ 6
Control Unit .............................................................. 6
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) .......... 6
ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION ............................. 6
Wheel Sensors ......................................................... 7
CAN Communication System Description ................ 7
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 8
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ....................................................... 8
INTRODUCTION ................................................... 8
WORK FLOW ........................................................ 9
CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 10
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................... 10
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location....11
Schematic .............................................................. 12
Wiring Diagram — ABS — ..................................... 13
CONSULT–II Function (ABS) ................................. 16
ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER
MODE ................................................................. 16
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 16
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE .............. 18
DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE ......................... 19
DATA MONITOR MODE ..................................... 20
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ............................. 20
Revision: March 2005
ACTIVE TEST MODE ......................................... 21
Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II) ................... 21
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 22
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
(MALFUNCTION CODES) .................................. 22
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) ................. 23
Preliminary Check .................................................. 23
Ground Circuit Check ............................................. 25
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND ....................................... 25
Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II) ..... 25
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 25
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS ........................................................................ 27
CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and
Electric Unit (Control Unit) (With 5-speed A/T) ....... 27
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 27
Wheel Sensor or Rotor ........................................... 27
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 27
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve
Relay ...................................................................... 30
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 30
Motor Relay or Motor .............................................. 33
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 33
Abnormal Battery Voltage ....................................... 34
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 34
Controller Failure .................................................... 36
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 36
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 37
1. ABS Works Frequently ....................................... 37
2. Unexpected Pedal Action ................................... 37
3. Long Stopping Distance ...................................... 38
4. ABS Does Not Work ........................................... 38
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise .................................. 39
6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On .................................. 40
7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition
Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 41
BRC-1
2005 Altima
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WHEEL SENSORS ................................................... 42
Removal and Installation ........................................ 42
SENSOR ROTOR ...................................................... 43
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43
REMOVAL ........................................................... 43
INSTALLATION .................................................... 43
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)... 44
Removal and Installation ........................................ 44
REMOVAL ........................................................... 44
INSTALLATION .................................................... 44
TCS/ABS
PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 45
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 45
Precautions for Brake System ................................ 45
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 45
PREPARATION ......................................................... 46
Special Service Tool ............................................... 46
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 46
GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................... 47
Description .............................................................. 47
PURPOSE ........................................................... 47
ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) OPERATION .................................................................... 47
TCS (TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM) OPERATION .................................................................. 47
Fail Safe ................................................................. 47
Hydraulic Circuit ..................................................... 48
System Components .............................................. 48
Control Unit ............................................................. 49
ABS FUNCTION .................................................. 49
TCS FUNCTION .................................................. 49
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit ............................... 49
ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION ........................... 49
Wheel Sensors ....................................................... 50
CAN Communication System Description .............. 50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 51
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 51
INTRODUCTION ................................................. 51
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 52
CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 53
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET .................... 53
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 54
Schematic ............................................................... 55
Wiring Diagram — TCS — ..................................... 56
CONSULT–II Function (ABS) ................................. 59
ECU (ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE ......................................................... 59
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE ...................... 59
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE ............... 61
DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE .......................... 62
DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 63
Revision: March 2005
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE ..............................64
ACTIVE TEST MODE ..........................................65
Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II) ...................65
FUNCTION ..........................................................65
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE .......................66
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
(MALFUNCTION CODES) ...................................66
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES) .................67
Preliminary Check ...................................................67
Ground Circuit Check ..............................................69
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND ........................................69
ABS WARNING LAMP, TCS OFF INDICATOR
LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP ON/OFF TIMING...69
Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II) ......69
Symptom Chart .......................................................70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS ........................................................................71
CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and
Electric Unit (Control Unit) ......................................71
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71
Wheel Sensor or Rotor ...........................................71
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve
Relay .......................................................................74
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................74
Motor Relay or Motor ..............................................77
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................77
Abnormal Battery Voltage .......................................78
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................78
Controller Failure ....................................................80
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .............81
1. ABS Works Frequently ........................................81
2. Unexpected Pedal Action ....................................81
3. Long Stopping Distance ......................................82
4. ABS Does Not Work ...........................................82
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise ..................................83
6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When
Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...................................84
7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition
Switch Is Turned On ................................................85
8. During ABS/TCS Control, Vehicle Behavior is
Jerky .......................................................................85
WHEEL SENSORS ...................................................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
SENSOR ROTOR ......................................................88
Removal and Installation .........................................88
REMOVAL ............................................................88
INSTALLATION ....................................................88
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ...89
Removal and Installation .........................................89
REMOVAL ............................................................89
INSTALLATION ....................................................89
BRC-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EFS0046S
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
BRC
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Brake System
EFS0046T
CAUTION:
●
Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
●
Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid
leak is detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a
malfunction is detected, replace part with a new one.
●
Before working, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect
electrical connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery terminals.
●
Always torque brake lines when installing.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or
SBR686C
replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" .
WARNING:
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EFS0046U
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: March 2005
BRC-3
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
PREPARATION
[ABS]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EFS0046V
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensor
WFIA0101E
Commercial Service Tools
EFS0046W
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
S-NT360
Revision: March 2005
BRC-4
2005 Altima
GENERAL INFORMATION
[ABS]
GENERAL INFORMATION
Description
PFP:00000
A
EFS0046X
PURPOSE
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic components. It allows for control of
braking force so that locking of the wheels can be avoided.
The ABS:
●
Ensures proper tracking performance through steering wheel operation.
●
Enables obstacles to be avoided through steering wheel operation.
●
Ensures vehicle stability by preventing flat spins.
●
●
C
D
OPERATION
●
B
When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH) this system does not work.
The ABS has self-test capabilities. The system turns on the ABS warning lamp for 1 second after turning
the ignition switch ON. The system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 E
MPH). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS performs a self-test. This is a normal part of the selftest feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS warning lamp will come on.
BRC
During ABS operation, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal condition.
Fail Safe
EFS0046Y
If trouble occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp in the combination meter comes on. At the same time, the
vehicle stops the ABS control and braking becomes the same as that of a vehicle without ABS.
Hydraulic Circuit
G
EFS0046Z
H
I
J
K
L
M
SBR984D
1.
Inlet solenoid valve
4.
Pump
7.
Outlet valve
2.
Outlet solenoid valve
5.
Motor
8.
Bypass check valve
3.
Reservoir
6.
Inlet valve
9.
Damper
Revision: March 2005
BRC-5
2005 Altima
GENERAL INFORMATION
[ABS]
System Components
EFS00470
WFIA0249E
Control Unit
EFS00471
The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal
sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator
solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the solenoid
valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be
detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to
turn on. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control
unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation.
WFIA0267E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
EFS00472
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) contains:
●
An electric motor and pump
●
Two relays
●
Eight solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for
— LH front
— RH front
— LH rear
— RH rear
●
ABS control unit
These components control the hydraulic circuit that increases, holds or decreases hydraulic pressure to all or
individual wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be
replaced as an assembly.
ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION
Normal brake operation
Revision: March 2005
Inlet solenoid
valve
Outlet solenoid
valve
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
BRC-6
Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is directly transmitted to the caliper via the inlet solenoid valve.
2005 Altima
GENERAL INFORMATION
[ABS]
ABS operation
Pressure hold
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
Hydraulic circuit is shut off to hold the caliper brake
fluid pressure.
A
Pressure
decrease
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
Caliper brake fluid is sent to the reservoir via the outlet
solenoid valve. Then it is pushed up to the master cylinder by the pump.
B
Pressure
increase
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is transmitted to
caliper.
Wheel Sensors
EFS00473
The front wheel sensors consist of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a
sensor element. The element contains a magnet around which a coil
is wound. The front wheel sensors are installed on the front of the
wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a
square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed
increases.
C
D
E
BRC
LBR333
The rear wheel sensors consist of wheel hubs with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The rear wheel sensors are
installed on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel
rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency
increases as the wheel speed increases.
G
H
I
J
WFIA0033E
CAN Communication System Description
EFS0062B
K
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-7
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00000
EFS00474
INTRODUCTION
The ABS has an electronic control unit to control major functions.
The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls
operation of the actuator. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of
brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer
is a very good source of information on such problems, especially
intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what
symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS
controlled vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information.
SEF233G
SEF234G
Revision: March 2005
BRC-8
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LFIA0197E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-9
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
CLARIFY CONCERN
●
●
●
A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use the information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand
what type of trouble the customer is having.
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
LFIA0198E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-10
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EFS00475
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFIA0268E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-11
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Schematic
EFS00476
WFWA0092E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-12
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Wiring Diagram — ABS —
EFS00477
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0084E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-13
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
WFWA0152E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-14
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0093E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-15
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
CONSULT–II Function (ABS)
EFS00478
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ABS diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed.
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
ECU PART NUMBER
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or
"NG".
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
ECU (ABS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE
Ignore the ECU part number displayed in the "ECU PART NUMBER" screen. Refer to the parts catalog to
order the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Stop vehicle with engine running and touch “START (NISSAN
BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-16
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
6.
Touch “ABS”.
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
7.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
● The screen shows the detected malfunction and how many
times the ignition switch has been turned since the malfunction.
E
BRC
G
BCIA0031E
H
8.
9.
Make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.
After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic
results stored in the control unit by touching “ERASE”.
10. Check ABS warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle
over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
I
J
K
WFIA0044E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-17
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE
Diagnostic item
Diagnosed condition
Diagnostic item is detected when...
RR RH SENSOR-1
[C1101]*1
Open
●
Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is open.
RR LH SENSOR-1
[C1102]*1
Open
●
Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is open.
FR RH SENSOR-1
[C1103]*1
Open
●
Circuit for front right wheel sensor is open.
FR LH SENSOR-1
[C1104]*1
Open
●
Circuit for front left wheel sensor is open.
RR RH SENSOR-2
[C1105]*1
Short
●
Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is shorted.
RR LH SENSOR-2
[C1106]*1
Short
●
Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is shorted.
FR RH SENSOR-2
[C1107]*1
Short
●
Circuit for front right wheel sensor is shorted.
FR LH SENSOR-2
[C1108]*1
Short
●
Circuit for front left wheel sensor is shorted.
ABS SENSOR
[C1115]
Abnormal signal
●
Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of
wheel sensor.
●
Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even if control unit sends
off signal.
●
Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even if control unit
sends on signal.
Reference
Page
BRC-27
MAIN RELAY
[C1114]
Abnormal
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
BATTERY VOLT
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
High or Low
●
Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally high or low.
BRC-34
CONTROLLER FAILURE*2
[C1110]
Control Unit
●
Function of calculation in ABS control unit has malfunctioned.
BRC-36
PUMP MOTOR
[C1111]
Abnormal
●
Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted.
●
Actuator motor relay is stuck.
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000] (With 5-speed A/T)
CAN Communication
Failure
●
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
BRC-30
BRC-33
BRC-27
*1: Be sure to confirm the ABS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON after repairing the shorted sensor circuit,
but the lamp goes out when driving the vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for one minute in accordance with SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-18
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
*2: When “CONTROLLER FAILURE” is displayed, check to see if the ABS warning lamp is burned out, and check the circuit between
the ABS warning lamp and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for open or short. Then check the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and circuit.
A
DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE
1.
2.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
C
D
E
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
BRC
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II
screen.
G
H
I
BCIA0029E
5.
J
Touch “ABS”.
K
L
M
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
BCIA0031E
7.
8.
Touch “SETTING” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM” screen.
Touch “AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG” on “SET RECORDING CONDITION” screen.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-19
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
9.
Touch “START” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”.
DATA MONITOR MODE
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
Drive vehicle.
(Each wheel is rotating.)
Displays computed vehicle speed from wheel sensor signal.
Almost the same speed as speedometer.
STOP LAMP SW
Turn ignition switch ON and
depress brake pedal.
Depress the pedal: ON
Release the pedal: OFF
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
Ignition switch is turned ON or
engine is running.
Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated.
ABS is not operating: OFF
Displays ON/OFF condition of ABS actuator relay.
When turning ignition switch ON, ABS actuator relay is operated.
ACTUATOR RLY
MOTOR RELAY
Ignition switch is turned ON or
engine is running.
ABS is not operating: OFF
ABS is operating: ON
WARN LAMP
Warning lamp is turned on: ON
Warning lamp is turned off: OFF
BATTERY VOLT
Power supply voltage for control unit
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE
●
●
1.
2.
When conducting active test, vehicle must be stationary.
When ABS warning lamp stays on, never conduct active test.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
Start engine.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II
screen.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-20
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
5.
Touch “ABS”.
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
6.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
E
BRC
G
BCIA0031E
7.
H
Select active test item by touching screen.
I
J
K
WFIA0045E
8.
9.
Touch “START”.
Carry out the active test by touching screen key.
L
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
M
JUDGEMENT
Brake fluid pressure control operation
FR RH SOL
FR LH SOL
RR RH SOL
RR LH SOL
Ignition switch is turned ON.
IN SOL
OUT SOL
UP (Increase):
OFF
OFF
KEEP (Hold):
ON
OFF
DOWN (Decrease):
ON
ON
ABS actuator motor
ON: Motor runs
OFF: Motor stops
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the test starts. (TEST IS STOPPED is displayed.)
Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II)
EFS00479
When a problem occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp on the instrument panel comes on. To activate the
self-diagnostic results mode, ground the self-diagnostic (check) terminal located on data link connector. The
location of the malfunction is indicated by the ABS warning lamp flashing.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-21
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Ground terminal 9 of data link connector with a suitable harness.
Turn ignition switch ON while grounding terminal 9.
Do not depress brake pedal.
Do not start engine.
BBIA0002E
5.
6.
7.
8.
After 3.0 seconds, the ABS warning lamp starts flashing to indicate the malfunction code No. (See NOTE.)
Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code
chart. Refer to BRC-25, "Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II)" . Then make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.
After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the malfunction codes
stored in the control unit. Refer to BRC-23, "HOW TO ERASE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)" .
Repeat the self-diagnostic procedure to verify that the malfunction codes have been erased.
WFIA0267E
9. Disconnect data link connector terminal 9 from ground. The self-diagnostic results mode is now complete.
10. Verify that the ABS warning lamp remains off after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one
minute.
11. After making certain that the ABS warning lamp does not come on, test the ABS in a safe area to verify
that it functions properly.
NOTE:
The indication terminates after five minutes.
However, when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, the indication starts flashing again.
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the ABS warning lamp flashes on and off.
When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code numbers can be stored; the latest malfunction will be indicated first.
The indication begins with the start code 12. After that, a maximum of three code numbers appear in the
order of the latest one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 and the sequence is repeated
(the indication will stay on for five minutes at the most).
Refer to BRC-25, "Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II)" .
SBR457D
Revision: March 2005
BRC-22
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect data link connector terminal 9 from ground (ABS
warning lamp will stay lit).
Within 12.5 seconds, ground the data link connector terminal 9
three times. Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The ABS warning lamp turns off after the erase operation
has been completed.
Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Only the start code should appear, no
malfunction codes.
B
C
ABR256
Preliminary Check
D
EFS0047A
E
1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Low fluid level may indicate brake pad wear or leakage from a brake
line.
Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank
and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination?
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair. GO TO 2.
BRC
G
H
SBR451D
I
2. CHECK BRAKE LINE
J
Is leakage present at or around brake lines, tubes or hoses, or are
any of these parts cracked or damaged?
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair. GO TO 3.
K
L
SBR389C
3. CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATION
Check brake booster for operation and air tightness.
Refer to BR-15, "AIRTIGHT CHECK" .
Is brake booster airtight and functioning properly?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace. GO TO 4.
SBR058C
Revision: March 2005
BRC-23
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
4. CHECK BRAKE PADS AND ROTORS
Check brake pads and rotors.
Refer to BR-19, "FRONT DISC BRAKE" and BR-32, "REAR DISC
BRAKE" .
Are brake pads and rotors functioning properly?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace.
SBR059C
5. RECHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank.
Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank
and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination?
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Add brake fluid as necessary.
SBR451D
6. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Does warning lamp turn on when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
WFIA0267E
7. CHECK WARNING LAMP DEACTIVATION
Does warning lamp turn off when engine is started?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
8. DRIVE VEHICLE
Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Does warning lamp remain off after vehicle has been driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
Revision: March 2005
BRC-24
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Ground Circuit Check
EFS0047B
A
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND
●
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminals 16 (B) and 19 (B) and ground.
B
Continuity should exist.
C
D
SFIA0296E
Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II)
Code No. (No. of LED flashes)
Malfunctioning part
EFS0047C
Reference page
12
Self-diagnosis could not detect any malfunctions.
18
Sensor rotor malfunction
BRC-27
Front right sensor
BRC-27
25, 26
Front left sensor
BRC-27
31, 32
Rear right sensor
BRC-27
35, 36
Rear left sensor
BRC-27
41
Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
42
Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
45
Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
46
Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
51
Actuator rear right outlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
52
Actuator rear right inlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
55
Actuator rear left outlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
56
Actuator rear left inlet solenoid valve
BRC-30
57*
Power supply (Abnormal voltage)
BRC-34
61
Actuator motor or motor relay
BRC-33
63
Solenoid valve relay
BRC-30
71
Control unit
BRC-36
CAN communication circuit (CAN initialize, Bus-off,
Receive)
BRC-27
21, 22
77 (With 5-speed A/T)
—
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
*: Under voltage that is too low, the control unit will disable the ABS. It does not set the ABS in fail-safe condition. Instead, the ABS
becomes a conventional brake system. After the power supply has resumed, the warning lamp goes off, making it possible for the ABS
to be re-engaged.
Symptom Chart
EFS0047D
Symptom
Malfunctioning part
ABS warning lamp stays on when ignition switch is turned ON.
Control unit power supply circuit
Warning lamp bulb circuit
Control unit or control unit connector
Solenoid valve relay stuck
Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil
ABS warning lamp stays on, during
self-diagnosis.
Control unit
ABS warning lamp does not come on
when ignition switch is turned on.
Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit
Control unit
Revision: March 2005
Reference page
BRC-41
—
BRC-25
E
BRC-40
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Symptom
ABS warning lamp does not come on
during self-diagnosis.
Malfunctioning part
Control unit
Reference page
—
Pedal vibration and noise.
—
BRC-39
Long stopping distance.
—
BRC-38
Unexpected pedal action.
—
BRC-37
ABS does not work.
—
BRC-38
ABS works frequently.
—
BRC-37
Revision: March 2005
BRC-26
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
PFP:00000
CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
(With 5-speed A/T)
A
EFS0047E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
B
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. U1000
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 77
C
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-1
D
Check the self-diagnosis results.
Malfunction codes
Diagnostic trouble codes
77
U1000
E
Are any items other than above indicated in self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Repair as necessary.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
BRC
2. CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 with the ignition
switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness and connector for open and shorted circuit.
3. Check the connector housing for disconnected, loose, bent, and collapsed terminals.
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector. GO TO 3.
G
H
I
3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-2
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and turn the ignition switch ON.
2. After erasing the self-diagnosis result, start the engine to perform the self-diagnosis again.
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> System is OK.
NO
>> Refer to BRC-27, "CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
(With 5-speed A/T)" .
Wheel Sensor or Rotor
J
K
L
EFS0047F
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104, C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 or
C1115
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 21, 22, 25, 26, 31, 32, 35, 36 or 18
NOTE:
Wheel position should be identified by code No. except code No. 18 (sensor rotor).
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector
of malfunction code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-27
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect connector from wheel sensor of malfunction code No.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
4. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
3. CHECK TIRE
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel
Bearing" .
Is axial end play within specifications?
YES >> If diagnosing a front wheel sensor, GO TO 5. If diagnosing a rear wheel sensor, GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "WHEEL HUB" .
Then retest.
5. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR
Check sensor rotor for tooth damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace sensor rotor. Refer to BRC-43, "Removal and Installation" .
6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No.
Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0319E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-28
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
7. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of
malfunction code No.
Check continuity between both wiring harness ends.
Sensor
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Connector - terminal
Front LH
Front RH
Rear LH
Rear RH
Wire color
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
B
Continuity
C
Wire color
E125 - 6
G
E18 - 1
G
E125 - 7
R
E18 - 2
R
E125 - 4
B
E117 - 1
B
E125 - 5
W
E117 - 2
W
E125 - 9
P
B123 - *1
P
E125 - 8
L
B123 - *2
L
E125 - 3
PU
B122 - *1
PU
E125 - 1
LG
B122 - *2
LG
D
Yes
E
BRC
*1: Terminal 1 (early production) or terminal 2 (late production).
*2: Terminal 2 (early production) or terminal 1 (late production).
G
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-29
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay
EFS0047G
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1114, C1120, C1121, C1122, C1123, C1124, C1125, C1126 or
C1127
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 41, 42, 45, 46, 51, 52, 55, 56 or 63
1. INSPECTION START
Solenoid valve relay inspection.
WFIA0252E
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check 30A [h ] fusible link (ABS ACTR) for ABS solenoid valve relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fusible link OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
3. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 49. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 9.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-30
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
4. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Inspection End.
B
C
5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
D
Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" .
Is ground circuit OK?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair harness and connectors.
E
6. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
BRC
1.
2.
G
H
I
SFIA0300E
J
7. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK
Replace fusible link.
Does the fusible link blow out when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Inspection End.
K
L
8. CHECK RELAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and fusible link. If NG, repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> ● Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
BRC-31
M
SFIA0301E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
9. REPLACE FUSE
Replace fuse.
Does the fuse blow when the ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-32
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
Motor Relay or Motor
EFS0047H
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1111
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 61
B
1. INSPECTION START
C
ABS motor relay inspection.
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
WFIA0253E
L
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
M
Check 30A [g ] fusible link (ABS MTR) for ABS motor relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER
SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fusible link OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
3. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connectors.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-33
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
4. CHECK MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
SFIA0303E
5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" .
Is ground circuit OK?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation"
.
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
6. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK
Replace fusible link.
Does the fusible link blow when the ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Inspection End.
7. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin
terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest.
Abnormal Battery Voltage
SFIA0304E
EFS0047I
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1109
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 57
Revision: March 2005
BRC-34
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
1. INSPECTION START
A
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and
ground circuit inspection.
B
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
WFIA0207E
E
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
BRC
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End.
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
H
1.
2.
I
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY) and ground.
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
J
K
SFIA0306E
L
4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND
Refer to BRC-25, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" .
Is ground circuit OK?
YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest.
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse 49 for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-35
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[ABS]
6. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check continuity between battery and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY).
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Check battery. Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" .
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
Controller Failure
EFS0047J
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1110
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 71
1. INSPECTION START
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and
ground circuit inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
WFIA0206E
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connectors.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End.
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage. Refer to BRC-34, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" .
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair.
4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check the self-diagnosis results.
Malfunction code
71
Diagnostic trouble code
C1110
Are the above items indicated in self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation"
.
NO
>> Inspect the system according to the indicated code No.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-36
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
1. ABS Works Frequently
PFP:99999
A
EFS0047K
1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
B
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BR-39, "Inspection" .
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" .
C
D
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
E
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections.
Perform wheel sensor check.
Refer to BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" .
Are wheel sensors functioning properly?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair.
BRC
G
3. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel
Bearing" .
Is axial end play within specifications?
YES >> Go to BRC-37, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" .
NO
>> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "WHEEL HUB" .
2. Unexpected Pedal Action
H
I
EFS0047L
J
1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
K
Check brake pedal travel. Is brake pedal travel excessive?
YES
NO
>> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" .
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
SBR540A
2. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and verify that the braking force is
sufficient when the ABS is not operating. After the inspection, reconnect the connector.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in
electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" .
Revision: March 2005
BRC-37
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Ensure warning lamp remains off while driving.
Is warning lamp turned off?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELFDIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
WFIA0267E
4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections.
Perform wheel sensor check.
Refer to BRC-27, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" .
Are wheel sensors functioning properly?
YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest.
NO
>> Repair as necessary.
3. Long Stopping Distance
EFS0047M
1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Drive vehicle and check to see if stopping distance is still long.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in
electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs.
Is stopping distance still long?
YES >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-23, "Preliminary Check" .
NO
>> Go to BRC-37, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" .
NOTE:
Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
4. ABS Does Not Work
EFS0047N
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Turn ignition switch ON.
Does the ABS warning lamp activate?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
NO
>> Go to BRC-40, "6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" .
NOTE:
ABS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH).
Revision: March 2005
BRC-38
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise
EFS0047O
A
1. INSPECTION START
B
Pedal vibration and noise inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
E
SAT797A
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
BRC
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom appear only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
3. RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamp) are operated?
YES
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-37, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" .
NO
NOTE:
ABS may operate and cause vibration under any of the following conditions.
●
Applying brake gradually when shifting or operating clutch.
●
Low friction (slippery) road.
●
High speed cornering.
●
Driving over bumps and potholes.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-39
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS0047P
1. INSPECTION START
Warning lamp circuit inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
SFIA0308E
2. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 14 for ABS warning lamp. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
CIRCUIT" .
Is fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse.
3. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
E125.
Does the ABS warning lamp activate?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC44, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> GO TO 4.
WFIA0267E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and combination meter connector M24.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-12, "How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis" .
WFIA0254E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-40
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[ABS]
7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS0047Q
A
1. INSPECTION START
B
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
E
SFIA0311E
2. CHECK WARNING LAMP
BRC
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Connect suitable wire between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
Does ABS warning lamp activate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair combination meter. Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) and combination meter.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
G
H
I
SFIA0312E
J
3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
harness connector. Then retest.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation"
.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-41
2005 Altima
K
L
M
WHEEL SENSORS
[ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
PFP:47910
EFS0047R
LFIA0078E
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires making the sensor inoperative.
CAUTION:
Pull out the sensor being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten mounting
bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
●
Check if foreign objects such as iron fragments are adhered to the pick-up part of the sensor or to
the inside of the hole for mounting the sensor, or if a foreign object is caught in the surface of the
mounting for the rotor. If something wrong is found, fix it and then install the sensor.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-42
2005 Altima
SENSOR ROTOR
[ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:47970
A
EFS0047S
NOTE:
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to
FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" .
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
C
Remove the front wheel hub. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller.
D
E
BRC
LFIA0079E
INSTALLATION
G
Install the sensor rotor using a hammer and a wooden block.
●
Always replace sensor rotor with new one.
H
I
J
LFIA0083E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-43
2005 Altima
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[ABS]
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
PFP:47660
EFS0047T
LFIA0085E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disconnect negative battery cable.
Remove windshield wiper motor and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" .
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" .
Disconnect harness connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Disconnect brake pipes.
NOTE:
Make note of pipe mounting locations.
Remove nuts and bolts for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake fluid. Then bleed air from
system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
1. Position ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) in vehicle.
2. Install and tighten ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) nuts and bolts.
3. Install brake pipes to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), then tighten flare nuts. Refer to BRC-5,
"Hydraulic Circuit" .
4. Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connectors.
5. Install windshield wiper motor and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "INSTALLATION" .
6. Reconnect battery cable.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-44
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[TCS/ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EFS0047U
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
BRC
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Brake System
EFS0047V
CAUTION:
●
Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
●
To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
●
Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tube.
●
Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid
leak is detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a
malfunction is detected, replace part with a new one.
●
Before working, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect
electrical connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) or battery terminals.
●
Always torque brake lines when installing.
●
Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or
SBR686C
replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
Refer to BR-24, "Brake Burnishing Procedure" .
WARNING:
●
Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EFS0047W
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: March 2005
BRC-45
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
PREPARATION
[TCS/ABS]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EFS00629
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester
Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensor
WFIA0101E
Commercial Service Tools
EFS0062A
Tool name
Description
1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
S-NT360
Revision: March 2005
BRC-46
2005 Altima
GENERAL INFORMATION
[TCS/ABS]
GENERAL INFORMATION
Description
PFP:00000
A
EFS0047Z
PURPOSE
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic components. It allows for control of
braking force so that locking of the wheels can be avoided.
The ABS:
●
Ensures proper tracking performance through steering wheel operation.
●
Enables obstacles to be avoided through steering wheel operation.
●
Ensures vehicle stability by preventing flat spins.
●
●
C
D
ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) OPERATION
●
B
When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH) this system does not work.
The ABS has self-test capabilities. The system turns on the ABS warning lamp for 1 second after turning
the ignition switch ON. The system performs another test the first time the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 E
MPH). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS performs a self-test. This is a normal part of the selftest feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS warning lamp will come on.
BRC
During ABS operation, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal condition.
TCS (TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM) OPERATION
●
●
●
●
●
This system is designed to limit wheel slip during acceleration by changing the transmission shift schedule
(with A/T) and cutting fuel to selected engine cylinders.
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) detects drive wheel slip by comparing wheel speed signals from all 4 wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) will then determine the desired
torque reduction needed to minimize wheel spin.
The torque reduction by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) may result in a combination of
transmission shift timing adjustments (with A/T) and fuel cutoff.
The torque reduction is sent from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) through the CAN (Controller Area Network) lines to the TCM (with A/T) and the ECM. The ECM will cut fuel and/or the TCM will
change transmission shift schedule to achieve torque reduction.
The TCS will be enabled when the TCS ON/OFF switch is in the ON position (TCS OFF indicator not illuminated), and if the catalytic converter temperature is within the normal operating range.
During TCS operation, the system informs the driver of system operation by flashing the SLIP indicator
lamp.
This system has a self-diagnostic function. When the ignition switch is initially turned ON, the SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp will illuminate. If the ABS/TCS system is operating correctly, both
indicator lamps will go out as soon as the engine starts.
The TCS ON/OFF switch cancels the TCS function. The TCS OFF indicator lamp then illuminates to indicate that the TCS system is not operating.
This system utilizes a fuel-cut function to control drive torque. If fuel cut continues for an extended period
of time during high-speed operation, the catalyst may melt and deteriorate. During continued TCS operation, the system will sometimes suspend the drive torque control function, preventing catalyst damage.
Fail Safe
EFS00480
If trouble occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp in the combination meter will turn on. At the same time, the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) will disable ABS control, and braking becomes the same as that of
a vehicle without ABS.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-47
2005 Altima
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
GENERAL INFORMATION
[TCS/ABS]
Hydraulic Circuit
EFS00481
SBR984D
1.
Inlet solenoid valve
4.
Pump
7.
Outlet valve
2.
Outlet solenoid valve
5.
Motor
8.
Bypass check valve
3.
Reservoir
6.
Inlet valve
9.
Damper
System Components
EFS00482
WFIA0255E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-48
2005 Altima
GENERAL INFORMATION
[TCS/ABS]
Control Unit
EFS00483
A
ABS FUNCTION
The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal
sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator
solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay
and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in
the system, the warning lamp is turned on. In this condition, the ABS
will be disabled, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal
operation.
B
C
D
WFIA0267E
TCS FUNCTION
E
Drive wheel slippage is determined by comparing speed signals from
all 4 wheels. When the wheel slip becomes excessive, the TCS
operates, causing the SLIP indicator lamp to flash. At the same time,
a signal requesting a change in the shift schedule will be sent to the
TCM (with A/T) and a fuel-cut signal is sent to the ECM. When the
TCS ON/OFF switch is used to cancel TCS function, the TCS OFF
indicator lamp will light. (TCS does not activate.) In case of a malfunction in the TCS, both the SLIP indicator lamp and the TCS OFF
indicator lamp will light, while shutting down the TCS system operation. The vehicle will operate in the same way as a vehicle not
equipped with TCS.
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
BRC
G
H
WFIA0270E
EFS00484
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) contains:
●
An electric motor and pump
●
Two relays
●
Eight solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for
— LH front
— RH front
— LH rear
— RH rear
●
ABS control unit
These components control the hydraulic circuit. The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) directs the
actuator to increase, hold or decrease hydraulic pressure to all or individual wheels. The ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly.
ABS operation
Inlet solenoid
valve
Outlet solenoid
valve
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is directly transmitted to caliper via the inlet solenoid valve.
Pressure hold
ON (Closed)
OFF (Closed)
Hydraulic circuit is shut off to hold the caliper brake
fluid pressure.
Pressure
decrease
ON (Closed)
ON (Open)
Caliper brake fluid is sent to reservoir via the outlet
solenoid valve. Then it is pushed up to the master cylinder by pump.
Pressure
increase
OFF (Open)
OFF (Closed)
Master cylinder brake fluid pressure is transmitted to
caliper.
Revision: March 2005
J
K
L
M
ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION
Normal brake operation
I
BRC-49
2005 Altima
GENERAL INFORMATION
[TCS/ABS]
Wheel Sensors
EFS00485
The front wheel sensor units consist of a gear-shaped sensor rotor
and a sensor element. The element contains a magnet around which
a coil is wound. The front wheel sensors are installed on the front of
the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a
square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed
increases.
LBR333
The rear wheel sensor units consist of wheel hubs with a series of
internal magnets and a sensor element. The rear wheel sensors are
installed on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel
rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency
increases as the wheel speed increases.
WFIA0033E
CAN Communication System Description
EFS00486
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
BRC-50
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00000
A
EFS00487
INTRODUCTION
The ABS/TCS has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional
problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid,
or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road
test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out
what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/
TCS controlled vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information.
B
C
D
SEF233G
E
BRC
G
H
SEF234G
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-51
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
WORK FLOW
WFIA0257E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-52
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
CLARIFY CONCERN
●
●
●
A
A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern.
Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what
conditions. Use the information to reproduce the symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand
what type of trouble the customer is having.
B
C
SBR339B
D
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
LFIA0198E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-53
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EFS00488
WFIA0271E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-54
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
Schematic
EFS00489
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0087E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-55
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
Wiring Diagram — TCS —
EFS0048A
WFWA0088E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-56
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
A
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WFWA0151E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-57
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
WFWA0094E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-58
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
CONSULT–II Function (ABS)
EFS0048B
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ABS diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed.
B
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results.
C
Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
FUNCTION TEST
ECU PART NUMBER
D
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or
"NG".
E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
ECU (ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT) PART NUMBER MODE
Ignore the ECU part number displayed in the "ECU PART NUMBER" screen. Refer to the parts catalog to BRC
order the ECU.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be G
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
I
J
K
BBIA0002E
L
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Stop vehicle with engine running and touch “START (NISSAN
BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II screen.
M
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-59
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
6.
Touch “ABS”.
BCIA0030E
7.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
● The screen shows the detected malfunction and how many
times the ignition switch has been turned since the malfunction.
BCIA0031E
8.
9.
Make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.
After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic
results stored in the control unit by touching “ERASE”.
10. Check ABS warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle
over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
WFIA0044E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-60
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE
Diagnostic item
Diagnosed condition
Diagnostic item is detected when...
RR RH SENSOR-1
[C1101]*1
Open
●
Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is open.
RR LH SENSOR-1
[C1102]*1
Open
●
Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is open.
FR RH SENSOR-1
[C1103]*1
Open
●
Circuit for front right wheel sensor is open.
FR LH SENSOR-1
[C1104]*1
Open
●
Circuit for front left wheel sensor is open.
RR RH SENSOR-2
[C1105]*1
Short
●
Circuit for rear right wheel sensor is shorted.
RR LH SENSOR-2
[C1106]*1
Short
●
Circuit for rear left wheel sensor is shorted.
FR RH SENSOR-2
[C1107]*1
Short
●
Circuit for front right wheel sensor is shorted.
FR LH SENSOR-2
[C1108]*1
Short
●
Circuit for front left wheel sensor is shorted.
ABS SENSOR
[C1115]
Abnormal signal
●
Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of
wheel sensor.
●
Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even if control unit sends
off signal.
●
Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even if control unit
sends on signal.
Reference
Page
B
C
D
BRC-71
E
BRC
G
MAIN RELAY
[C1114]
Abnormal
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1120]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1121]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1122]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1123]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for front right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[C1124]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear left inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[C1125]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear left outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[C1126]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[C1127]
Abnormal
(Open, Short)
●
Circuit for rear right outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted.
(An excessively high or low output voltage is entered.)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
[C1109]
High or Low
●
Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally high or low.
BRC-78
CONTROLLER FAILURE*2
[C1110]
Control Unit
●
Function of calculation in ABS control unit has malfunctioned.
BRC-80
PUMP MOTOR
[C1111]
Abnormal
●
Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted.
●
Actuator motor relay is stuck.
Revision: March 2005
A
BRC-61
H
I
J
BRC-74
K
L
M
BRC-74
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
Diagnostic item
Diagnosed condition
Diagnostic item is detected when...
ENG SIG 1
[C1130]
Abnormal
●
Fuel cut control abnormal.
ENG SIG 2
[C1131]
Abnormal
●
Electric throttle control abnormal.
ENG SIG 3
[C1132]
Abnormal
●
ECM CAN communication abnormal.
ENG SIG 4
[C1133]
Abnormal
●
ECM communication to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) abnormal.
A/T SYSTEM (With A/T)
[C1135]
Abnormal
●
A/T data from TCM abnormal or not present.
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
CAN Communication
Failure
●
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
Reference
Page
BRC-71
*1: Be sure to confirm the ABS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON after repairing the shorted sensor circuit,
but the lamp goes out when driving the vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for one minute in accordance with SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE.
*2: When "CONTROLLER FAILURE" is displayed, check to see if the ABS warning lamp is burned out, and check the circuit between
the ABS warning lamp and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for open or short. Then check the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and circuit.
DATA MONITOR PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II
screen.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-62
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
5.
Touch “ABS”.
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
6.
Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
E
BRC
G
BCIA0031E
7.
8.
9.
H
Touch “SETTING” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM” screen.
Touch “AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG” on “SET RECORDING CONDITION” screen.
Touch “START” on “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”.
I
DATA MONITOR MODE
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
J
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
Drive vehicle.
(Each wheel is rotating.)
Displays computed vehicle speed from wheel sensor signal.
Almost the same speed as speedometer.
STOP LAMP SW
Turn ignition switch ON and
depress brake pedal.
Depress the pedal: ON
Release the pedal: OFF
ENGINE SPEED
Engine is running. (rpm)
Engine speed: 0 - 8,000 (rpm)
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
Ignition switch is turned ON or
engine is running.
Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated.
ABS is not operating: OFF
K
Displays ON/OFF condition of ABS actuator relay.
When turning ignition switch ON, ABS actuator relay is operated.
ACTUATOR RLY
MOTOR RELAY
Ignition switch is turned ON or
engine is running.
ABS is not operating: OFF
ABS is operating: ON
ABS WARN LAMP
Warning lamp is turned on: ON
Warning lamp is turned off: OFF
BATTERY VOLT
Power supply voltage for control unit
GEAR (With A/T)
Revision: March 2005
L
A/T gear position signal
detected by TCM via ECM is
displayed.
Gear position: P, N: N.P
1st: 1
2nd: 2
3rd: 3
4th: 4
BRC-63
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
OFF SW
ON/OFF condition of signal
from TCS switch is displayed.
TCS OFF S/W (all the time switch is pressed): ON
TCS OFF S/W (released): OFF
●
TCS OFF condition is displayed.
●
The condition of malfunctioning TCS is displayed.
OFF LAMP
SLIP LAMP
SLCT LVR POSI (With A/T)
TCS OFF indicator “OFF”: OFF
TCS OFF indicator “ON”: ON
The TCS functioning state is
displayed by detecting rear
wheel slip.
SLIP indicator “ON”: ON
SLIP indicator “OFF”: OFF
A/T selector lever position is
displayed.
Park: P
Reverse: R
Neutral: N
4th: 4
3rd: 3
2nd: 2
1st: 1
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE
●
●
1.
2.
When conducting active test, vehicle must be stationary.
When ABS warning lamp stays on, never conduct active test.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
Start engine.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on CONSULT-II
screen.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-64
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
5.
Touch “ABS”.
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
6.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST”.
E
BRC
G
BCIA0031E
7.
H
Select active test item by touching screen.
I
J
K
WFIA0045E
8.
9.
Touch “START”.
Carry out the active test by touching screen key.
L
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
M
JUDGEMENT
Brake fluid pressure control operation
FR RH SOL
FR LH SOL
RR RH SOL
RR LH SOL
Ignition switch is turned ON.
IN SOL
OUT SOL
UP (Increase):
OFF
OFF
KEEP (Hold):
ON
OFF
DOWN (Decrease):
ON
ON
ABS actuator motor
ON: Motor runs
OFF: Motor stops
ABS MOTOR
NOTE:
Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the test starts. (TEST IS STOPPED is displayed.)
Self-Diagnosis (Without CONSULT–II)
EFS0048C
FUNCTION
When a problem occurs in the ABS, the ABS warning lamp on the instrument panel comes on. When a problem occurs in the TCS, the TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp on the instrument panel come on.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-65
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
To activate the self-diagnostic results mode, ground the self-diagnostic (check) terminal located on data link
connector. The location of the malfunction is indicated by the ABS warning lamp or SLIP indicator lamp flashing.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Ground terminal 9 of data link connector with a suitable harness.
Turn ignition switch ON while grounding terminal 9.
Do not depress brake pedal.
Do not start engine.
BBIA0002E
5.
6.
7.
8.
After 3.0 seconds, the SLIP indicator lamp starts flashing to indicate the malfunction code No. (See NOTE.)
Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code
chart. Refer to BRC-61, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
MODE" . Then make the necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.
After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the malfunction codes
stored in the control unit. Refer to BRC-67, "HOW TO ERASE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)" .
Repeat the self-diagnostic procedure to verify that the malfunction codes have been erased.
Disconnect the data link connector terminal 9 from ground. The
self-diagnostic results mode is now complete.
10. Verify that the ABS warning lamp, TCS OFF indicator lamp and
SLIP indicator lamp remain off after driving vehicle over 30 km/h
(19 MPH) for at least one minute.
11. After making certain that the ABS warning lamp, TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp do not come on, test the
ABS/TCS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly.
NOTE:
The indication terminates after five minutes.
However, when the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, the
SLIP indication starts flashing again. The TCS OFF indicator
lamp and ABS warning lamp remain lighted.
WFIA0272E
9.
WFIA0273E
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)
1.
2.
3.
Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the ABS warning lamp or SLIP indicator lamp
flashes on and off.
When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code numbers can be stored; the latest malfunction will be indicated first.
The indication begins with the start code 12. After that, a maximum of three code numbers appear in the
order of the latest one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 and the sequence is repeated
(the indication will stay on for five minutes at the most).
Revision: March 2005
BRC-66
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
4.
Refer to BRC-61, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE" .
A
B
C
SBR457D
D
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS (MALFUNCTION CODES)
1.
Disconnect data link connector terminal 9 from ground (ABS
warning lamp will stay lit).
2. Within 12.5 seconds, ground the data link connector terminal 9
three times. Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The ABS warning lamp turns off after the erase operation
has been completed.
3. Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to BRC-22, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" . Only the start code should appear, no
malfunction codes.
After the erase operation is completed, it is necessary to repeat
the self-diagnostic procedure to verify that malfunction codes
no longer appear. Only the start code (12) should be indicated
when erase operation is completed and system is functioning normally.
NOTE:
The TCS OFF indicator lamp and ABS warning lamp remain on.
Preliminary Check
E
BRC
G
SBR631D
H
I
EFS0048D
1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
J
Low fluid level may indicate brake pad wear or leakage from brake
line.
Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank
and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination?
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair. GO TO 2.
K
L
M
SBR451D
2. CHECK BRAKE LINE
Is leakage present at or around brake lines, tubes or hoses, or are
any of these parts cracked or damaged?
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair. GO TO 3.
SBR389C
Revision: March 2005
BRC-67
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
3. CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATION
Check brake booster for operation and air tightness.
Refer to BR-15, "AIRTIGHT CHECK" .
Is brake booster airtight and functioning properly?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace. GO TO 4.
SBR058C
4. CHECK BRAKE PADS AND ROTORS
Check brake pads and rotors.
Refer to BR-19, "FRONT DISC BRAKE" and BR-32, "REAR DISC
BRAKE" .
Are brake pads and rotors functioning properly?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace.
SBR059C
5. RECHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank again.
Is brake fluid filled between MAX and MIN lines on reservoir tank
and is brake fluid clean and free of contamination?
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Add brake fluid as necessary.
SBR451D
6. CHECK WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR LAMPS ACTIVATION
Do ABS warning lamp, TCS OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator
lamp turn on when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
WFIA0273E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-68
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
7. CHECK WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR LAMPS DEACTIVATION
A
Do lamps turn off when engine is started?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
B
8. DRIVE VEHICLE
C
Drive vehicle at speeds over 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least one minute.
Do warning lamp and indicator lamps remain off after vehicle has been driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least
one minute?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Go to Self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
Ground Circuit Check
D
E
EFS0048E
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND
●
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminals 16 (B) and 19 (B) and ground.
BRC
Continuity should exist.
G
H
SFIA0296E
I
ABS WARNING LAMP, TCS OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP ON/OFF TIMING
×: ON
–: Lamp OFF
J
ABS
warning lamp
TCS OFF
indicator lamp
SLIP
indicator lamp
Remarks
When the ignition switch is OFF
–
–
–
–
After the ignition switch is turned
ON for approx. 0.5 seconds
×
×
×
–
Ignition switch ON
Approx. 0.5 seconds later
–
–
–
Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds
after the engine start.
When the TCS OFF switch turns
ON (TCS function OFF).
–
×
–
–
×
×
×
–
×
×
–
When the TCS/ABS control unit
is malfunctioning (power supply or
ground malfunction).
–
×
×
–
Condition
TCS/ABS malfunction
When the TCS is malfunctioning.
K
M
Malfunction Code Chart (Without CONSULT-II)
Code No. (No. of LED flashes)
Malfunctioning part
EFS0048F
Reference page
12
Self-diagnosis could not detect any malfunctions.
18
Sensor rotor malfunction
BRC-71
21, 22
Front right sensor
BRC-71
25, 26
Front left sensor
BRC-71
31, 32
Rear right sensor
BRC-71
35, 36
Rear left sensor
BRC-71
Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
41
Revision: March 2005
BRC-69
L
—
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[TCS/ABS]
Code No. (No. of LED flashes)
Malfunctioning part
Reference page
42
Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
45
Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
46
Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
51
Actuator rear right outlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
52
Actuator rear right inlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
55
Actuator rear left outlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
56
Actuator rear left inlet solenoid valve
BRC-74
57*
Power supply (Abnormal voltage)
BRC-78
61
Actuator motor or motor relay
BRC-77
63
Solenoid valve relay
BRC-74
71
Control unit
BRC-80
77
CAN communication circuit
(CAN initialize, Bus-off, Receive)
BRC-71
83
CAN ATMSG1 receive timeout
BRC-71
84
CAN TRQDNINH fault
BRC-71
86
CAN ETCOK fault
BRC-71
87
CAN FCOK fault
BRC-71
88
CAN CANOK fault
BRC-71
*: Under voltage that is too low, the control unit will disable the ABS. It does not set the ABS in fail-safe condition. Instead, the ABS
becomes a conventional brake system. After the power supply has resumed, the warning lamp goes off, making it possible for the ABS
to be re-engaged.
Symptom Chart
EFS0048G
Symptom
Malfunctioning part
Control unit power supply circuit
Warning lamp bulb circuit
ABS warning lamp stays on when igniControl unit or control unit connector
tion switch is turned ON.
Solenoid valve relay stuck
Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil
ABS warning lamp stays on, during
self-diagnosis.
Control unit
ABS warning lamp does not come on
when ignition switch is turned on.
Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit
Control unit
ABS warning lamp does not come on
during self-diagnosis.
Control unit
Reference page
BRC-85
—
BRC-84
—
Pedal vibration and noise.
—
BRC-83
Long stopping distance.
—
BRC-82
Unexpected pedal action.
—
BRC-81
ABS does not work.
—
BRC-82
ABS works frequently.
—
BRC-81
Revision: March 2005
BRC-70
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
PFP:00000
CAN Communication Line or ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
A
EFS0048H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1130, C1131, C1132, C1133, C1135 or U1000
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 77, 83, 84, 86, 87 or 88
B
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-1
C
Check the self-diagnosis results.
77, 83, 84, 86, 87 or 88
D
Diagnostic trouble codes
Malfunction codes
C1130, C1131, C1132, C1133,
C1135 or U1000
E
Are any items other than above indicated in self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Repair as necessary.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
BRC
2. CHECK THE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 with the ignition
switch OFF.
2. Check the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness and connector for open and shorted circuit.
3. Check the connector housing for disconnected, loose, bent, and collapsed terminals.
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector. GO TO 3.
G
H
I
3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK-2
J
1. Connect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and turn the ignition switch ON.
2. After erasing the self-diagnosis result, start the engine to perform the self-diagnosis again.
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> System is OK.
NO
>> Refer to BRC-50, "CAN Communication System Description" .
Wheel Sensor or Rotor
K
EFS0048I
L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104, C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 or
C1115
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 21, 22, 25, 26, 31, 32, 35, 36 or 18
NOTE:
Wheel position should be identified by code No. except code No. 18 (sensor rotor).
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunction code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-71
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect connector from wheel sensor of malfunction code No.
Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
4. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
3. CHECK TIRE
Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s).
4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel
Bearing" .
Is axial end play within specifications?
YES >> If diagnosing a front wheel sensor, GO TO 5. If diagnosing a rear wheel sensor, GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" . Then retest.
5. CHECK SENSOR ROTOR
Check sensor rotor for tooth damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace sensor rotor. Refer to BRC-43, "Removal and Installation" .
6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No.
Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
WFIA0319E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-72
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
7. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor connector of
malfunction code No.
Check continuity between both wiring harness ends.
Sensor
ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)
Connector - terminal
Front LH
Front RH
Rear LH
Rear RH
Wire color
Wheel sensor
Connector - terminal
B
Continuity
C
Wire color
E125 - 6
G
E18 - 1
G
E125 - 7
R
E18 - 2
R
E125 - 4
B
E117 - 1
B
E125 - 5
W
E117 - 2
W
E125 - 9
P
B123 - *1
P
E125 - 8
L
B123 - *2
L
E125 - 3
PU
B122 - *1
PU
E125 - 1
LG
B122 - *2
LG
D
Yes
E
BRC
*1: Terminal 1 (early production) or terminal 2 (late production).
*2: Terminal 2 (early production) or terminal 1 (late production).
G
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-44, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Repair the circuit.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-73
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
ABS Actuator Solenoid Valve or Solenoid Valve Relay
EFS0048J
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1114, C1120, C1121, C1122, C1123, C1124, C1125, C1126 or
C1127
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 41, 42, 45, 46, 51, 52, 55, 56, or 63
1. INSPECTION START
Solenoid valve relay inspection.
WFIA0261E
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check 30A [h ] fusible link (ABS ACTR) for ABS solenoid valve relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fusible link OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
3. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 49. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 9.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-74
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
4. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Inspection End.
B
C
5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
D
Refer to BRC-69, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" .
Is ground circuit OK?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair harness and connectors.
E
6. CHECK SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
BRC
1.
2.
G
H
I
SFIA0300E
J
7. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK
Replace fusible link.
Does the fusible link blow when the ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Inspection End.
K
L
8. CHECK RELAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 18 (Y) and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
BRC-75
M
SFIA0301E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
9. REPLACE FUSE
Replace fuse.
Does the fuse blow when the ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-76
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
Motor Relay or Motor
EFS0048K
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1111
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 61
B
1. INSPECTION START
C
ABS motor relay inspection.
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
J
K
WFIA0262E
L
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
M
Check 30A [g ] fusible link (ABS MTR) for ABS motor relay. For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER
SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fusible link OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
3. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does ABS warning lamp activate again?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-77
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
4. CHECK MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
SFIA0303E
5. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Refer to BRC-69, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" .
Is ground circuit OK?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation"
.
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
6. REPLACE FUSIBLE LINK
Replace fusible link.
Does the fusible link blow when the ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Inspection End.
7. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect battery cable and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 17 (B/Y) and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for short between ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and fusible link.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin
terminals for damage and the connection of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest.
Abnormal Battery Voltage
SFIA0304E
EFS0048L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1109
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 57
Revision: March 2005
BRC-78
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
1. INSPECTION START
A
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and
ground circuit inspection.
B
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
WFIA0208E
E
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
BRC
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End.
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
H
1.
2.
I
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY) and ground.
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
J
K
SFIA0306E
L
4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND
Refer to BRC-69, "ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND" .
Is ground circuit OK?
YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest.
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse 49 for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-79
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS
[TCS/ABS]
6. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check continuity between battery and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 15 (GY).
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Check battery. Refer to SC-4, "BATTERY" .
NO
>> Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and fuse.
If NG, repair harness or connectors.
Controller Failure
EFS0048M
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. C1110
Without CONSULT-II: Malfunction code No. 71
1. INSPECTION START
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply and
ground circuit inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
WFIA0263E
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check terminals for deformation,
disconnection, looseness or damage. Then reconnect connector.
2. Repeat self-diagnosis.
Does warning lamp activate again?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End.
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage. Refer to BRC-78, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" .
Does battery voltage exist when ignition switch is turned ON?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair.
4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
Check the self-diagnosis results.
Malfunction code
71
Diagnostic trouble code
C1110
Are the above items indicated in self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation"
.
NO
>> Inspect the system according to the indicated code No.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-80
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
1. ABS Works Frequently
PFP:99999
A
EFS0048N
1. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
B
Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
Refer to BR-39, "Inspection" .
Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" .
C
D
2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
E
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections.
Perform wheel sensor check.
Refer to BRC-71, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" .
Are wheel sensors functioning properly?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair.
BRC
G
3. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel
Bearing" .
Is axial end play within specifications?
YES >> Go to BRC-81, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" .
NO
>> Repair as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" or RAX-5, "Rear Wheel Bearing" .
2. Unexpected Pedal Action
EFS0048O
1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
H
I
J
K
Check brake pedal travel.
Is brake pedal travel excessive?
YES >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
SBR540A
2. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and verify that the braking force is
sufficient when the ABS is not operating. After the inspection, reconnect the connector.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in
electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" .
Revision: March 2005
BRC-81
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
3. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Ensure warning lamp remains off while driving.
Is warning lamp turned off?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELFDIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
WFIA0267E
4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections.
Perform wheel sensor check.
Refer to BRC-71, "Wheel Sensor or Rotor" .
Are wheel sensors functioning properly?
YES >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of
harness connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector.
Then retest.
NO
>> Repair as necessary.
3. Long Stopping Distance
EFS0048P
1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
2. Drive vehicle and check to see if stopping distance is still long.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in
electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs.
Is stopping distance still long?
YES >> Perform Preliminary Check. Refer to BRC-67, "Preliminary Check" .
NO
>> Go to BRC-81, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" .
NOTE:
Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery.
4. ABS Does Not Work
EFS0048Q
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP INDICATION
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Does the ABS warning lamp activate?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
NO
>> Go to BRC-84, "6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" .
NOTE:
ABS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h (6 MPH).
Revision: March 2005
BRC-82
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
5. Pedal Vibration and Noise
EFS0048R
A
1. INSPECTION START
B
Pedal vibration and noise inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
E
SAT797A
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
BRC
1. Apply brake.
2. Start engine.
Does the symptom appear only when engine is started?
YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
NO
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
3. RECHECK SYMPTOM
Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamp) are operated?
YES
>> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary.
>> Go to BRC-81, "2. Unexpected Pedal Action" .
NO
NOTE:
ABS may operate and cause vibration under any of the following conditions.
●
Applying brake gradually when shifting or operating clutch.
●
Low friction (slippery) road.
●
High speed cornering.
●
Driving over bumps and potholes.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-83
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
6. ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS0048S
1. INSPECTION START
Warning lamp circuit inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
WFIA0264E
2. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse No. 14 for warning lamp. For fuse layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Is fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse.
3. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
E125.
Does the ABS warning lamp activate?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BRC44, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> GO TO 4.
WFIA0267E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT
1.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and combination meter connector M24.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground.
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-12, "How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis" .
WFIA0254E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-84
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
7. ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On
EFS0048T
A
1. INSPECTION START
B
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) inspection.
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
E
WFIA0265E
2. CHECK WARNING LAMP
BRC
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125.
Connect suitable wire between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) connector E125 terminal 21 (L/B) and ground.
Does warning lamp activate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair combination meter. Check the following.
● Harness connector E125
● Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) and combination meter.
If NG, repair harness or connector.
G
H
I
SFIA0312E
J
3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) pin terminals for damage and the connection of harness
connector. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation"
.
8. During ABS/TCS Control, Vehicle Behavior is Jerky
EFS0048U
1. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-66, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS
PROCEDURE" .
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION
Perform data monitor with CONSULT-II for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-85
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[TCS/ABS]
3. ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> WITH A/T, GO TO 4. WITH M/T, GO TO 5.
4. TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform TCM self-diagnosis.
Are self-diagnosis result items displayed?
YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the
terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace the connector terminal.
6. CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION
Check the CAN communication system. Refer to BRC-50, "CAN Communication System Description" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Reconnect the connectors, and perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-86
2005 Altima
WHEEL SENSORS
[TCS/ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
PFP:47910
A
EFS0048V
B
C
D
E
BRC
LFIA0078E
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires making the sensor inoperative.
CAUTION:
Pull out the sensor being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten mounting
bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
●
Check if foreign objects such as iron fragments are adhered to the pick-up part of the sensor or to
the inside of the hole for mounting the sensor, or if a foreign object is caught in the surface of the
mounting for the rotor. If something wrong is found, fix it and then install the sensor.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
BRC-87
2005 Altima
SENSOR ROTOR
[TCS/ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:47970
EFS0048W
NOTE:
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to
FAX-5, "FRONT WHEEL BEARING" .
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the front wheel hub. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller.
LFIA0079E
INSTALLATION
Install the sensor rotor using a hammer and a wooden block.
●
Always replace sensor rotor with new one.
LFIA0083E
Revision: March 2005
BRC-88
2005 Altima
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[TCS/ABS]
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
PFP:47660
A
EFS0048X
B
C
D
E
BRC
G
H
I
LFIA0085E
REMOVAL
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
6.
Disconnect negative battery cable.
Remove windshield wiper and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" .
Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" .
Disconnect harness connectors from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Disconnect brake pipes.
NOTE:
Make note of pipe mounting locations.
Remove nuts and bolts for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake fluid. Then bleed air from
system. Refer to BR-8, "Bleeding Brake System" .
1. Position ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) in vehicle.
2. Install and tighten ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) nuts and bolts.
3. Install brake pipes to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), then tighten flare nuts. Refer to BRC-5,
"Hydraulic Circuit" .
4. Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connectors.
5. Install windshield wiper and linkage assembly. Refer to WW-28, "INSTALLATION" .
6. Reconnect battery cable.
Revision: March 2005
BRC-89
2005 Altima
L
M
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
[TCS/ABS]
Revision: March 2005
BRC-90
2005 Altima
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
SECTION
CL
CLUTCH
A
B
CL
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART ....................... 4
CLUTCH PEDAL ........................................................ 5
Components ............................................................. 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 5
On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment ..................... 6
CLUTCH FLUID .......................................................... 7
Air Bleeding Procedure ............................................ 7
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 8
Components ............................................................. 8
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ............................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
CLUTCH RESERVOIR TANK .................................. 9
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 9
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 9
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................. 9
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9
OPERATING CYLINDER ...........................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
Revision: March 2005
INSTALLATION ................................................... 11
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 11
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 11
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 12
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 12
CLUTCH PIPING ....................................................... 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM ........................... 14
Removal and Installation (5 M/T models) ............... 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
Removal and Installation (6 M/T models) ............... 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL... 18
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
REMOVAL ........................................................... 18
INSTALLATION ................................................... 18
Inspection and Adjustment after Removal .............. 19
CLUTCH DISC .................................................... 19
CLUTCH COVER ................................................ 19
FLYWHEEL ......................................................... 19
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 20
Clutch Control System ............................................ 20
Clutch Master Cylinder ........................................... 20
Clutch Operating Cylinder ...................................... 20
Clutch Disc ............................................................. 20
Clutch Cover ........................................................... 20
Clutch Pedal ........................................................... 20
CL-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
PFP:00001
ECS00939
Recommended fluid is brake fluid “DOT 3”.
●
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
●
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
●
When removing and installing clutch piping, use Tool.
●
Use new brake fluid to clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and operating cylinder.
●
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will
ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system.
WARNING:
After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do not
use compressed air.
●
Revision: March 2005
CL-2
SBR686C
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
ECS0093A
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
ST20630000
(J-26366)
Clutch aligning bar
B
Installing clutch cover and clutch disc
a: 15.8 mm (0.622 in) dia.
b: 22.9 mm (0.902 in) dia.
c: 45.0 mm (1.772 in)
CL
D
NT405
ST20050240
(
—
)
Diaphragm spring adjusting wrench
Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring of
clutch cover
a: 150 mm (5.91 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in)
NT404
E
F
G
Commercial Service Tools
ECS0093B
Tool name
Description
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing clutch piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
H
I
J
NT360
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
K
L
PBIC0190E
M
Revision: March 2005
CL-3
2005 Altima
Symptom
Revision: March 2005
Clutch grabs/chatters
Clutch pedal spongy
1
Clutch noisy
2
3
4
CL-4
CL-9
OPERATING CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged)
CL-19
CL-19
CL-19
CL-19
CL-19
CL-19
CL-19
CL-19
CLUTCH DISC (Dirty or burned)
CLUTCH DISC (Oily)
CLUTCH DISC (Worn out)
CLUTCH DISC (Hardened)
CLUTCH DISC (Lack of spline grease)
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Damaged)
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Out of tip alignment)
PRESSURE PLATE (Distortion)
FLYWHEEL (Distortion)
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
2
2
2
4
5
2
5
5
5
5
2
2
5
3
5
6
6
CL-19, "FLYWHEEL"
CL-19
CLUTCH DISC (Lining broken)
EM-71, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE),
EM-219, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE)
CL-5
MASTER CYLINDER PISTON CUP (Damaged)
CL-19
1
CLUTCH DISC (Runout is excessive)
Clutch does not disengage
CL-19
1
CLUTCH DISC (Out of true)
1
2
CL-12
1
RELEASE BEARING (Worn, dirty or damaged)
Clutch slips
2
ENGINE MOUNTING (Loose)
CL-7
CLUTCH LINE (Air in line)
SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause)
CL-6
Reference page
CLUTCH PEDAL (Inspection and adjustment)
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
PFP:00003
ECS0093C
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
2
7
2005 Altima
CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH PEDAL
Components
PFP:46540
A
ECS0093D
B
CL
D
E
F
G
WCIA0436E
1.
Clutch pedal bracket
2.
Clutch interlock switch
3.
Bushing
4.
Assist spring
5.
Bushing
6.
Snap pin
7.
Stopper rubber
8.
Clutch pedal
9.
Stopper bolt
10. ASCD clutch switch
H
11. Clevis pin
Removal and Installation
ECS0093E
I
Refer to CL-5, "Components" .
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
J
Inspect clutch for bending, damage and welding cracks. Replace if necessary.
Make sure that the assist spring and return spring have not lost their spring. Replace if necessary.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CL-5
2005 Altima
CLUTCH PEDAL
On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
a.
b.
ECS0093F
Check to see if the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore
of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch
pedal.
If the pin is not free, check that the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt is not applying pressure to the clutch pedal causing the
pin to bind. To adjust, loosen the ASCD switch or pedal stopper
bolt lock nut and turn the ASCD switch or pedal stopper bolt.
Tighten the lock nut.
Verify that the clutch pedal clevis pin floats freely in the bore of
the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch
pedal.
If the pin is still not free, remove the pin and check for deformation or damage. Replace the pin if necessary. Leave the pin
removed for step 2.
Check the clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement.
With the clutch pedal clevis pin removed, manually move the
pedal up and down to determine if it moves freely.
If any sticking is noted, replace the related parts (clutch pedal,
pedal bracket, assist spring and bushing). Reassemble the
pedal and re-verify that the clevis pin floats freely in the bore of
the pedal.
WCIA0146E
3.
Adjust the clearance “C” while fully depressing the clutch pedal
(with the clutch interlock switch) as shown.
Clearance “C”
4.
a.
b.
: 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 in)
Check the clutch hydraulic system components (clutch master
cylinder, clutch operating cylinder, Clutch withdrawal lever and
clutch release bearing) for sticking or binding.
If any sticking or binding is noted, repair or replace the related
parts as necessary.
If the hydraulic system was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" .
NOTE:
Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder
on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not
purge all of the air from the system.
SCL800
Revision: March 2005
CL-6
2005 Altima
CLUTCH FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID
Air Bleeding Procedure
PFP:00017
A
ECS0093G
NOTE:
Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or B
power bleeder will not purge all the air from the system.
●
Bleed air according to the following procedure.
●
Carefully monitor fluid level at reservoir tank during bleeding operation.
CL
●
When bleeding the air from the clutch fluid, first bleed the air from the operating cylinder air bleed valve
and then from the bleed connector air bleed valve.
1. Top off reservoir with new recommended brake fluid.
D
2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to the air bleeder valve on the
clutch operating cylinder.
E
F
G
WCIA0199E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fully depress the clutch pedal several times.
With clutch pedal depressed, open the bleeder valve to release air.
Close the bleeder valve.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of the air bleeder valve.
Air bleeder valve
7.
H
I
: 5.9 - 9.8 N·m (0.6 - 1.0 kg-m, 52 - 87 in-lb)
Perform steps 1 through 6 for bleeding air from the air bleeder
valve on the bleed connector.
J
K
L
LCIA0102E
Revision: March 2005
CL-7
2005 Altima
M
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
Components
PFP:30610
ECS0093H
WCIA0429E
1.
Clutch master cylinder
2.
Return spring
3.
Piston assembly
4.
Push rod
5.
Stopper
6.
Stopper ring
7.
Dust cover
8.
Clevis
9.
Hose clamp
10. Hose
11. Reservoir cap
12. Reservoir tank
13. Bracket
14. Nipple
15. Pin
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
ECS0093I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed
on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Remove clutch line using a flare nut wrench.
Remove hose clamp and hose from clutch master cylinder.
Remove snap pin from clevis pin, then remove clevis pin from push rod and clevis.
Remove the clutch master cylinder nuts, then remove the clutch master cylinder from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1.
Check position of clevis and push rod. If measurement is outside
standard length, adjust position of clevis and push rod.
Length “L”
2.
: 119.5 mm (4.70 in)
Connect the clutch line to the master cylinder assembly, and
hand-tighten the flare nut.
SCIA5158E
3.
Install the master cylinder assembly, tighten the nuts to specification.
Clutch master cylinder nuts
4.
5.
: 7.8 – 10.8 N·m (0.8 – 1.6 kg-m, 9 – 12 ft-lb)
Install clutch reservoir tank hose and hose clamp to the clutch master cylinder assembly.
Tighten the clutch line flare nut to specification using a flare nut torque wrench.
Revision: March 2005
CL-8
2005 Altima
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
Clutch line flare nut
6.
7.
8.
: 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 – 1.8 kg-m, 11 – 13 ft-lb)
A
Attach clevis and clevis pin to clutch pedal.
Attach snap pin to clevis pin.
Inspect and adjust the clutch pedal and bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-6, "Onvehicle Inspection and Adjustment" and CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" .
CLUTCH RESERVOIR TANK
ECS0093J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed
on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Remove the clamp, then remove the hose from the clutch reservoir tank.
Remove the clutch reservoir tank to bracket nuts, then remove the clutch reservoir tank from the vehicle.
B
CL
D
E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Install the clutch reservoir tank and nuts to the bracket and hand-tighten.
Install the hose and clamp to the clutch reservoir tank.
Tighten the clutch reservoir tank nuts to specified torque.
Reservoir tank bracket bolts
Reservoir tank to bracket nuts
(for QR25DE engine models)
(for VQ35DE engine models)
F
G
: 5.1 – 6.5 N·m (0.52 – 0.66 kg-m, 46 – 57 in-lb)
: 2.9 – 5.9 N·m (0.3 – 0.6 kg-m, 26 – 52 in-lb)
: 5.1 – 6.5 N·m (0.52 – 0.66 kg-m, 46 – 57 in-lb)
Disassembly and Assembly
H
ECS0093K
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the push rod lock nut “A”, then remove clevis and lock
nut “A” if necessary.
CAUTION:
Clutch pedal height is controlled with position of clevis and
push rod.
Remove the dust cover.
Remove the stopper ring and stopper, and remove the push rod
from the cylinder body. During removal, keep the push rod
depressed, to prevent the piston inside master cylinder from
popping out.
Remove the piston assembly from the cylinder body.
J
K
L
SCL725
M
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Inspect for the following, and replace parts as necessary.
●
Damage, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner wall
●
Damage and deformation of the reservoir tank
●
Weak spring
●
Crack and deformation of the dust cover
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply rubber lubricant to the sliding part of piston assembly, and insert piston assembly.
After installing stopper to push rod, install a new stopper ring while keeping piston assembly depressed by
hand, so that piston assembly will not pop out.
CAUTION:
Stopper ring cannot be reused. Always use a new stopper ring to assemble.
Install dust cover.
Install nipple and pin to cylinder body.
Install clevis to push rod.
Revision: March 2005
I
CL-9
2005 Altima
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
6.
Check and adjust position of clevis on push rod. After adjusting
“L”, tighten lock nut to the specified torque.
Length “L”
Lock nut “A” tightening
torque
: 119.5 mm (4.70 in)
: 7.8 - 11.8 N·m (0.8 - 1.2 kg-m,
69 - 104 in-lb)
SCIA5158E
Revision: March 2005
CL-10
2005 Altima
OPERATING CYLINDER
OPERATING CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
PFP:30620
A
ECS0093L
B
CL
D
E
F
G
WCIA0196E
1.
Cylinder body
2.
Piston spring
3.
Piston cup
4.
Piston
5.
Push rod
6.
Dust cover
7.
Air bleeder
8.
Union bolt
9.
Copper washer
10.
Clutch hose
H
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Drain brake fluid from hydraulic clutch system.
CAUTION:
Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed
on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Remove union bolt and clutch hose from operating cylinder.
Remove operating cylinder mounting bolts, and remove cylinder
from vehicle.
J
K
L
M
WCIA0197E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Install the clutch hose without twisting it.
●
The copper washer of the union bolt cannot be reused. Always use a new copper washer when
installing the clutch hose.
●
After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" .
Disassembly and Assembly
ECS0093M
DISASSEMBLY
●
Remove dust cover, and remove piston assembly from cylinder body.
Revision: March 2005
CL-11
2005 Altima
OPERATING CYLINDER
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Inspect for following, and replace parts as necessary.
●
Damage, foreign material, wear, rust, and pinholes on the cylinder inner surface, piston, and sliding part of
piston cup
●
Weak spring
●
Crack and deformation of dust cover
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
●
Apply recommended rubber grease to piston cup and piston before assembly.
Revision: March 2005
CL-12
2005 Altima
CLUTCH PIPING
CLUTCH PIPING
Removal and Installation
PFP:30650
A
ECS0093N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove fuel filter mounting bracket.
Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and
Installation" (QR25DE), EM-120, "Removal and Installation"
(VQ35DE).
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic clutch system.
CAUTION:
Do not splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause
paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas,
wash it away with water immediately.
Remove flare nut using a flare nut wrench.
Remove clutch hose and clutch tube.
B
CL
D
WCIA0437E
E
INSTALLATION
1.
When installing clutch hose to bracket, face lock plate in the correct direction as shown to secure clutch hose.
CAUTION:
Install clutch hose without twisting or bending it.
F
G
H
SCL730
2.
Tighten flare nut to the specification, using a flare nut wrench.
Flare nut
3.
: 15 - 18 N·m (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb)
J
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage flare nut and clutch tube.
Install clutch hose to operating cylinder, and tighten the union
bolt to the specified torque.
Clutch hose union bolt
4.
I
K
: 17 - 20 N·m (1.7 - 2.0 kg-m,
12 - 14 ft-lb)
L
After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system.
Refer to CL-7, "Air Bleeding Procedure" .
M
WCIA0197E
Revision: March 2005
CL-13
2005 Altima
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
Removal and Installation (5 M/T models)
PFP:30502
ECS0093O
LCIA0030E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove manual transaxle from vehicle. Refer to MT-17, "Removal and Installation" .
Move withdrawal lever enough to remove release bearing, and remove release bearing from withdrawal
lever.
Remove withdrawal lever retainer spring.
Pull out withdrawal lever and remove dust cover.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in
rotation direction, or has poor aligning function.
Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally.
Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked.
SCL733
Revision: March 2005
CL-14
2005 Altima
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
●
Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas.
●
Apply grease to the specified points as shown.
B
CL
D
E
SCL815
Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and holder
spring frictional surfaces.
●
Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to the grooves on contact surfaces of the withdrawal lever ball pin
and inner surface of release bearing; make sure that grease is flush with grooves.
●
Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to release bearing frictional surface. After grease application,
install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation.
CAUTION:
●
Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides
smoothly by operating withdrawal lever.
●
Be careful with the orientation of the installation.
●
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CL-15
2005 Altima
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
Removal and Installation (6 M/T models)
ECS00BT2
WCIA0408E
1.
Snap spring
2.
Release bearing non-separate type
4.
Withdrawal lever
5.
Dust cover
3.
Holder spring
CAUTION:
When installing the holder spring pay attention to the direction of the bearing retainer.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove manual transaxle from vehicle. Refer to MT-81, "Removal and Installation" .
Move withdrawal lever enough to remove release bearing from input shaft, then remove release bearing
from withdrawal lever.
Remove withdrawal lever snap spring.
Pull out withdrawal lever and remove dust cover.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in
rotation direction, or has poor aligning function.
Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally.
Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked.
SCL733
Revision: March 2005
CL-16
2005 Altima
CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
●
Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas.
●
Apply grease to the specified points as shown.
B
CL
D
E
SCL815
Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and holder
spring frictional surfaces.
●
Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to the grooves on contact surfaces of the withdrawal lever ball pin
and inner surface of release bearing; make sure that grease is flush with grooves.
●
Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to release bearing frictional surface. After grease application,
install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation.
CAUTION:
●
Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides
smoothly by operating withdrawal lever.
●
When assembling, make sure that both ends of the snap
spring touch the end face of the withdrawal lever.
●
Be careful with the orientation of the installation.
●
F
G
H
I
J
K
PCIB0837E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CL-17
2005 Altima
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL
Removal and Installation
PFP:30100
ECS0093P
WCIA0147E
1.
Flywheel
2.
Clutch disc
4.
Washer
5.
Main drive shaft
3.
Clutch cover
CAUTION:
●
Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent.
●
When installing, do not get grease from the main drive shaft onto the clutch disc friction surface.
●
If the flywheel needs to be removed, align the dowel pin with the smallest hole of the flywheel.
Refer to EM-78, "ASSEMBLY" in CYLINDER BLOCK (QR25DE), EM-227, "ASSEMBLY" in CYLINDER BLOCK (VQ35DE).
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the manual transaxle from the vehicle. Refer to MT-17, "Removal and Installation" (5 M/T), MT81, "Removal and Installation" (6 M/T).
Evenly loosen the bolts holding the clutch cover, using power tool. Then remove the clutch cover and the
clutch disc.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not allow grease to contaminate clutch facing.
●
Install the clutch cover and disc using Tool.
Tool number
●
: ST20630000 (J-26366)
Tighten the clutch cover bolts in two steps using the numerical
order as shown.
First step
Final step
: 10 - 20 N·m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 7 - 14 ft-lb)
: 35 - 44 N·m (3.5 - 4.5 kg-m, 26 - 32 ft-lb)
WCIA0472E
Revision: March 2005
CL-18
2005 Altima
CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER AND FLYWHEEL
Inspection and Adjustment after Removal
ECS0093Q
A
CLUTCH DISC
●
Check clutch disc for wear of facing.
Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
B
CL
D
SCL229
●
Check clutch disc for backlash of spline and runout of facing.
Maximum backlash of spline
(at outer edge of disc)
Runout limit
Distance of runout check
point (from hub center)
●
E
: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
F
QR25DE: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
VQ35DE: 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
QR25DE: 230 mm (9.06 in)
VQ35DE: 240 mm (9.45 in)
Check clutch disc for burns, discoloration or oil or grease leakage. Replace if necessary.
G
SCL221
H
CLUTCH COVER
●
Check clutch cover installed on vehicle for unevenness of diaphragm spring toe height.
Uneven limit
●
I
: 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
If out of limit, adjust the height using Tool.
Tool number
: ST20050240 (
J
— )
K
PCIB0276E
FLYWHEEL
●
●
Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Repair flywheel with emery paper.
Check the flywheel runout. Refer to EM-97, "MOVEMENT
AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL)" (QR25DE), EM-243,
"FLYWHEEL RUNOUT (M/T)" (VQ35DE).
M
SCL349
Revision: March 2005
CL-19
L
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutch Control System
PFP:00100
ECS0093R
Type of clutch control
Hydraulic
Clutch Master Cylinder
ECS0093S
Unit: mm (in)
Inner diameter
15.87 (5/8)
Clutch Operating Cylinder
ECS0093T
Unit: mm (in)
Engine
Inner diameter
QR25DE
VQ35DE
19.05 (3/4)
17.46 (11/16)
Clutch Disc
ECS0093U
Engine
QR25DE
VQ35DE
Model
240
250
240 mm × 160 mm × 3.5 mm (9.45
in × 6.30 in × 0.138 in)
250 mm × 170 mm × 3.2 mm
(9.84 in × 6.69 in × 0.126 in)
8.1 mm (0.319 in)
with 5,884 N (600 kg, 1,323 lb)
7.4 mm (0.291 in)
with 8,340 N (850 kg, 1875 lb)
Facing size (Outer dia. × inner dia. × thickness)
Thickness of disc assembly
With load
Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head
0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Facing runout limit
1.0 mm (0.039 in)
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
Distance of runout check point (from the hub center)
230 mm (9.06 in)
240 mm (9.45 in)
Maximum spline backlash (at outer edge of disc)
1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Clutch Cover
ECS0093V
Engine
QR25DE
VQ35DE
Model
240
250
5,884 N (600 kg, 1,323 lb)
8,340 N (850 kg, 1,875 lb)
38 mm (1.50 in)
40.5 (1.59 in)
Set load
Set height
Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height
1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Clutch Pedal
ECS0093W
Unit: mm (in)
Clearance “C” between pedal stopper rubber and clutch interlock
switch threaded end while clutch pedal is fully depressed.
Revision: March 2005
CL-20
0.1 - 1.0 (0.004 - 0.039)
2005 Altima
B ENGINE
SECTION
CO
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A
CO
C
D
E
CONTENTS
QR25DE
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 3
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 3
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Special Service Tools ............................................... 5
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 5
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .......................... 6
Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 6
COOLING SYSTEM .................................................... 7
Cooling Circuit .......................................................... 7
System Drawing ....................................................... 8
ENGINE COOLANT .................................................... 9
System Check .......................................................... 9
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ............ 9
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ......................... 9
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS..... 9
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP ................................ 9
CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 10
Refilling Engine Coolant ......................................... 10
RADIATOR .................................................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
INSPECTION .......................................................11
COOLINGFAN .......................................................... 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 13
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 13
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 13
Revision: March 2005
WATER PUMP .......................................................... 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 15
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING ...... 16
Removal and Installation ........................................ 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
WATER CONTROL VALVE ....................................... 18
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
REMOVAL ........................................................... 18
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 19
INSTALLATION ................................................... 19
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 20
Capacity .................................................................. 20
Thermostat ............................................................. 20
Water Control Valve ................................................ 20
Radiator .................................................................. 20
VQ35DE
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 21
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 21
Precautions for Liquid Gasket ................................ 21
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ........ 21
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE... 21
PREPARATION ......................................................... 23
Special Service Tools ............................................. 23
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 23
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS ........................ 24
Troubleshooting Chart ............................................ 24
COOLING SYSTEM .................................................. 26
Cooling Circuit ........................................................ 26
System Drawing ..................................................... 27
CO-1
F
2005 Altima
ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 28
System Check ........................................................ 28
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ........... 28
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ....................... 28
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS ... 28
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 28
CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 29
Refilling Engine Coolant ......................................... 29
RADIATOR ................................................................ 30
Removal and Installation ........................................ 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION .................................................... 30
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 31
PREPARATION ................................................... 31
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 31
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 32
INSPECTION ....................................................... 34
Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan .......... 35
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 35
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 35
COOLINGFAN ........................................................... 36
Removal and Installation ........................................ 36
REMOVAL ........................................................... 36
Revision: March 2005
INSTALLATION ....................................................36
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................36
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................36
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................36
WATER PUMP ...........................................................37
Removal and Installation .........................................37
REMOVAL ............................................................37
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................39
INSTALLATION ....................................................39
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING .......42
Removal and Installation .........................................42
REMOVAL ............................................................42
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................42
INSTALLATION ....................................................43
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING ...................44
Removal and Installation .........................................44
REMOVAL ............................................................44
INSTALLATION ....................................................44
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......45
Capacity ..................................................................45
Thermostat ..............................................................45
Radiator ..................................................................45
CO-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR25DE]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EBS00J7B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along CO
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
EBS00M84
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket sealing.
Tool number
●
●
H
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as
shown in the figure.
In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to
lightly tap the parts, to remove it.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
I
J
K
WBIA0566E
L
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper.
● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign materials.
M
PBIC0003E
Revision: March 2005
CO-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR25DE]
3.
Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions.
● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove.
WBIA0567E
As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of service manual.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation.
● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
Revision: March 2005
CO-4
SEM159F
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EBS00J7D
The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those tools illustrated here.
CO
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
WS39930000
(
—
)
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
C
D
S-NT052
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester adapter
E
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator filler
neck:
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
G
S-NT564
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
F
Removing chain tensioner cover and water
pump cover
H
I
NT046
—
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
J
K
WBIA0539E
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00J7E
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
M
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
CO-5
L
2005 Altima
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
[QR25DE]
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00012
EBS00J7F
Symptom
Poor heat transfer
Check items
Water pump malfunction
Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed
Coolant circulation
Damaged fins
Dust contamination or rock
clogging
—
Mechanical damage
Clogged radiator cooling
tube
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow
High resistance to fan rotation
Engine cooling fans
—
Damaged fan blades
Cooling system parts
malfunction
Damaged radiator shroud
—
—
—
Improper coolant mixture
ratio
—
—
—
Poor coolant quality
—
Periodic maintenance
Cooling hose
—
Loose clamp
Cracked hose
Water pump
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Loose
Poor sealing
Coolant leaks
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting
Insufficient coolant
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank
Overflowing reservoir tank
Exhaust gas leaks into
cooling system
Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket deterioration
High engine rpm under no
load
Abusive driving
Driving in low gear for
extended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
—
Overload on engine
Except cooling system
parts malfunction
Powertrain system malfunction
Installed improper size
wheels and tires
—
Dragging brakes
Improper ignition timing
Blocked radiator grille
Installed car brassiere
Blocked bumper
Blocked or restricted air
flow
Blocked radiator
Blocked condenser
Mud contamination or
paper clogging
—
Installed large fog lamp
Revision: March 2005
CO-6
2005 Altima
COOLING SYSTEM
[QR25DE]
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling Circuit
PFP:21020
A
EBS00J7G
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0143E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-7
2005 Altima
COOLING SYSTEM
[QR25DE]
System Drawing
EBS00M85
PBIC0280E
Revision: March 2005
CO-8
2005 Altima
ENGINE COOLANT
[QR25DE]
ENGINE COOLANT
System Check
PFP:KQ100
A
EBS00M86
WARNING:
●
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pres- CO
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
●
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way.
C
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
Check hoses for the following:
●
Improper attachment
●
Leaks
●
Cracks
●
Damage
●
Loose connections
●
Chafing
●
Deterioration
D
E
F
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
●
●
G
Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX
when the engine is cool.
Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little.
H
I
SMA412B
J
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using
Tool.
Tool number
K
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Testing pressure
L
: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from
the radiator.
CAUTION:
Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
M
WBIA0568E
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
1.
Inspect the radiator cap.
● Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
● Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or
the metal retainer.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
Revision: March 2005
CO-9
2005 Altima
ENGINE COOLANT
[QR25DE]
2.
Pull the negative-pressure valve to open it and check that it
closes completely when released.
● Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the
radiator cap negative-pressure valve.
● Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and
closing conditions of the negative-pressure valve.
SMA967B
3.
Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Standard: 78 – 98 kPa (0.8 – 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 – 14 psi)
Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi)
●
●
When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water or
coolant to the cap seal surface.
Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside
of the standard values.
WBIA0570E
CHECKING RADIATOR
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
●
Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
●
When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and
horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward.
●
5.
6.
Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in).
Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
Check for leaks.
Refilling Engine Coolant
EBS00M87
Changing the engine coolant is part of the required maintenance of the engine. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING
ENGINE COOLANT" .
Revision: March 2005
CO-10
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[QR25DE]
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:21400
A
EBS00T3Y
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0146E
1.
Radiator
2.
Bracket
3.
Mounting rubber
4.
A/T oil cooler hose (if equipped)
5.
Radiator hose (lower)
6.
Radiator fan assembly
7.
Reservoir tank
8.
Radiator hose (upper)
9.
Radiator filler cap
J
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to
allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way.
K
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain the coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
Remove fresh air duct. Refer to EM-17, “Removal and Installation”.
Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses.
Remove the A/T fluid cooler hoses, if equipped.
● Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
Disconnect the reservoir tank hose.
Revision: March 2005
CO-11
M
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[QR25DE]
6.
7.
8.
Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to
release the lock, as shown.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage, do not pull lock tabs excessively.
Remove the cooling fan assemly to radiator bolts.
Remove the radiator.
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and
radiator core when removing.
PBIC1216E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following.
●
Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
INSPECTION
Radiator
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows:
● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator
shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering.
Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, point the hose vertically downward.
Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
Stop washing when no more dirt flows off the radiator.
Blow air into the back side of radiator core, point the air hose vertically downward.
e.
2.
a.
Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8
in).
Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
Inspect radiator for leaks as follows:
Apply pressure using Tool.
●
Specified pressure value
: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
WARNING:
To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under
pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp.
Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well (A/T model only).
SLC933
b.
Check for leakage.
SLC934
Revision: March 2005
CO-12
2005 Altima
COOLINGFAN
[QR25DE]
COOLINGFAN
Removal and Installation
PFP:21060
A
EBS00T3Z
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur form high pressure CO
coolant escaping from the radiator
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C
Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-15, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
Remove air cleaner duct assembly. Refer to EM-17, “Removal and Installation”.
Disconnect radiator upper hose.
Disconnect fan motor connectors.
Remove radiator cooling fan assembly.
D
E
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
●
Cooling fan is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-421, DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE”.
F
Disassembly and Assembly
G
EBS00T40
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0362E
1.
Fan blade
2.
Fan shroud
3.
Fan motor
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove fans from fan motors.
Remove fan motors from fan shroud.
ASSEMBLY
Install in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: March 2005
CO-13
2005 Altima
WATER PUMP
[QR25DE]
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
PFP:21020
EBS00J7O
KBIA0154E
1.
Water pump
4.
Water pipe
2.
Gasket
3.
Water pump housing
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
1.
Drain coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
2. Remove engine undercover using power tools.
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove engine cover using power tools.
5. Remove engine coolant reservoir.
6. Remove IPDM E/R (set aside). Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
7. Remove RH wheel and tire assembly.
8. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Remove engine ground strap.
10. Remove the water pump.
NOTE:
If necessary, the generator and exhaust manifold catalytic convertor assembly must be removed to
remove the water pipe.
CAUTION:
● Handle the water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
● Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as an assembly.
Revision: March 2005
CO-14
2005 Altima
WATER PUMP
[QR25DE]
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
A
Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rusting on the
water pump body and vane.
Check that there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it
turns smoothly when rotated by hand.
If the water pump does not perform properly, replace the water
pump assembly.
CO
C
KBIA0155E
D
INSTALLATION
●
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
When inserting water pipe end to cylinder block, apply a neutral detergent to O-ring. Then insert it immediately.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
E
F
After installing the water pump, check for leaks using the radiator cap tester. Refer to CO-11, "INSPECTION" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-15
2005 Altima
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
[QR25DE]
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
Removal and Installation
PFP:21200
EBS00J7P
WBIA0010E
1.
Thermostat
2.
Engine coolant inlet
3.
Water control valve
4.
Engine coolant outlet
5.
Heater hose
6.
Engine coolant temperature sensor
7.
Heater pipe
8.
Electric throttle control actuator inlet
hose
9.
Electric throttle control actuator outlet hose
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
2. Remove radiator lower hose from the engine coolant inlet side.
3. Remove engine coolant inlet and thermostat.
Revision: March 2005
CO-16
2005 Altima
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
[QR25DE]
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
●
Place a thread so that it is caught in the valves of the thermostat.
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring.
The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the
valve opens and the falls from the thread.
Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
NOTE:
The full-open lift amount standard temperature for the thermostat is the reference value.
After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature.
Thermostat
Standard Values
Valve opening temperature
80.5 – 83.5°C (177 – 182°F)
Valve lift
More than 8 mm / 95°C (0.315 in / 203°F)
Valve closing temperature
77°C (171°F) or higher
A
CO
C
SLC252B
D
E
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install the engine coolant temperature sensor.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL
PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
●
Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of the flange
part fitting securely inside the rubber ring.
●
Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. The
position deviation may be within the range of ±10°.
●
If necessary, to install the heater pipe, first apply a mild detergent to the O-ring and then quickly insert the pipe into the housing.
G
H
I
J
PBIC0157E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-17
2005 Altima
WATER CONTROL VALVE
[QR25DE]
WATER CONTROL VALVE
Removal and Installation
PFP:21230
EBS00J7Q
WBIA0010E
1.
Thermostat
2.
Engine coolant inlet
3.
Water control valve
4.
Engine coolant outlet
5.
Heater hose
6.
Engine coolant temperature sensor
7.
Heater pipe
8.
Electric throttle control actuator inlet
hose
9.
Electric throttle control actuator outlet hose
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine cold.
1. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
2. Remove the upper radiator hose, heater pipe, electric throttle control actuator inlet hose, and heater hose.
3. Remove the engine coolant outlet.
4. Remove the water control valve.
Revision: March 2005
CO-18
2005 Altima
WATER CONTROL VALVE
[QR25DE]
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
●
●
Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the water control valve. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat
while stirring.
The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the
valve opens and the falls from the thread.
Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
NOTE:
The full-open lift amount standard temperature for the water
control valve is the reference value.
After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature.
A
CO
C
SLC252B
D
Standard values
Water Control Valve
Standard Value
Valve opening temperature
93.5° - 96.5°C (200° - 206°F)
Full-open lift amount
More than 8 mm / 108°C (0.315 in / 226° F)
Valve closing temperature
90°C (194° F) or higher
E
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install the engine coolant temperature sensor.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL
PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
●
Install the water control valve with the whole circumference of the flange part fitting securely inside the
rubber ring.
●
Install the water control valve with the up-mark facing up and the frame center part facing upwards. The
position deviation may be within the range of ±10°.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-19
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Capacity
PFP:00030
EBS00J7R
(US gal, Imp gal)
Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level)
7.6 (2, 1 5/8)
Thermostat
EBS00J7S
Valve opening temperature
80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F)
Valve lift
More than 8 mm / 95°C (0.315 in / 203°F)
Water Control Valve
EBS00J7T
Valve opening temperature
93.5-96.5°C (200-206°F)
Valve lift
More than 8 mm / 108°C (0.315 in / 226°F)
Radiator
EBS00J7U
2
Unit: kPa (kg / cm , psi)
Cap relief pressure
Standard
78 - 98 (0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14)
Limit
59 (0.6, 9)
Leakage test pressure
Revision: March 2005
157 (1.6, 23)
CO-20
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EBS00J7V
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along CO
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
EBS00M88
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket sealing.
Tool number
●
●
H
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as
shown in the figure.
In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to
lightly tap the parts, to remove it.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
I
J
K
WBIA0566E
L
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper.
● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign materials.
M
PBIC0003E
Revision: March 2005
CO-21
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
3.
Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions.
● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove.
WBIA0567E
As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of service manual.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation.
● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
Revision: March 2005
CO-22
SEM159F
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EBS00J7X
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
WS39930000
(
—
)
Tube pressure
CO
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
C
D
S-NT052
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
E
F
G
Removing chain tensioner cover and water
pump cover
H
I
NT046
—
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
J
K
WBIA0539E
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00J7Y
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
L
M
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
CO-23
2005 Altima
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
[VQ35DE]
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00012
EBS00J7Z
Symptom
Check items
Water pump malfunction
Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed
Poor heat transfer
—
Dust contamination or
paper clogging
Damaged fins
—
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling
tube
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow
High resistance to fan rotation
Fan assembly
—
Damaged fan blades
Cooling system parts
malfunction
Damaged radiator shroud
—
—
—
Improper coolant mixture
ratio
—
—
—
Poor coolant quality
—
Coolant viscosity
—
Cooling hose
Loose clamp
Cracked hose
Water pump
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Loose
Poor sealing
Coolant leaks
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting
Insufficient coolant
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank
Overflowing reservoir tank
Revision: March 2005
CO-24
Exhaust gas leaks into
cooling system
Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket deterioration
2005 Altima
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
[VQ35DE]
Symptom
Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Abusive driving
Driving in low gear for
extended time
A
CO
Driving at extremely high
speed
—
Overload on engine
Installed improper size
wheels and tires
Except cooling system
parts malfunction
C
Powertrain system malfunction
—
D
Dragging brakes
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper
E
—
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille
Blocked or restricted air
flow
Blocked radiator
Blocked condenser
Mud contamination or
paper clogging
F
—
—
G
Blocked air flow
Installed large fog lamp
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-25
2005 Altima
COOLING SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling Circuit
PFP:21020
EBS00J80
WBIA0558E
1.
Cylinder block (RH)
2. Oil cooler
3. Cylinder head (RH)
4.
Water pump
5. Radiator
6. Water inlet
7.
Thermostat
8. Cylinder head (LH)
9. Cylinder block (LH)
Revision: March 2005
CO-26
2005 Altima
COOLING SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
System Drawing
EBS00M89
A
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0562E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-27
2005 Altima
ENGINE COOLANT
[VQ35DE]
ENGINE COOLANT
System Check
PFP:KQ100
EBS00M8A
WARNING:
●
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
●
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
Check hoses for the following:
●
Improper attachment
●
Leaks
●
Cracks
●
Damage
●
Loose connections
●
Chafing
●
Deterioration
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
●
●
Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX
when the engine is cool.
Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little.
SMA412B
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using
Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Testing pressure
: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from
the radiator.
CAUTION:
Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
WBIA0568E
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
1.
Inspect the radiator cap.
● Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
● Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or
the metal retainer.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
Revision: March 2005
CO-28
2005 Altima
ENGINE COOLANT
[VQ35DE]
2.
Pull the negative-pressure valve to open it and check that it
closes completely when released.
● Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the
radiator cap negative-pressure valve.
● Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and
closing conditions of the negative-pressure valve.
A
CO
C
SMA967B
D
3.
Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
E
Standard: 78 – 98 kPa (0.8 – 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 – 14 psi)
Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi)
●
●
When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water or
coolant to the cap seal surface.
Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside
of the standard values.
F
G
WBIA0570E
CHECKING RADIATOR
H
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
●
Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
●
When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and
horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward.
●
5.
6.
Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in).
Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
Check for leaks.
Refilling Engine Coolant
J
K
L
EBS00M8B
Changing the engine coolant is part of the required maintenance of the engine. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING
ENGINE COOLANT" .
Revision: March 2005
I
CO-29
2005 Altima
M
RADIATOR
[VQ35DE]
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:21400
EBS00T52
WBIA0282E
1.
Radiator
2.
Radiator upper clip
3.
Mounting rubber
4.
A/T fluid cooler hose (if equipped)
5.
Radiator hose (lower)
6.
Radiator fan assembly
7.
Reservoir tank
8.
Radiator hose (upper)
9.
Radiator cap
10. Radiator core connection
11. Radiator drain plug
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn
to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain the coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-22, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
Remove fresh air duct. Refer to EM-120, “Removal and Installation”.
Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses.
Remove the A/T fluid cooler hoses, if equipped.
● Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
Disconnect the reservoir tank hose.
Revision: March 2005
CO-30
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[VQ35DE]
6.
7.
8.
Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to
release the lock, as shown.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage, do not pull lock tabs excessively.
Remove radiator cooling fan assembly to radiator bolts.
Remove the radiator assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and
radiator core when removing.
A
CO
C
PBIC1216E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following.
●
Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to MA-22, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
E
Installation of Radiator Upper Clip
●
1.
2.
3.
Install radiator upper clip on radiator core connection with the
following procedure:
Install the rubber on mounting pin of radiator core.
Align the radiator upper clip with the radiator core connection,
then insert the radiator upper clip straight into the radiator core
connections until a click is heard.
After connecting the radiator upper clip, use the following
method to make sure it is fully connected.
● Visually confirm that the two radiator upper clips are connected to the radiator core connections.
● Move the radiator upper clip and the radiator forward and
backward to make sure they are securely connected.
Disassembly and Assembly
F
G
H
PBIC1241E
I
EBS00T53
J
K
L
M
SLC882AB
Revision: March 2005
CO-31
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[VQ35DE]
PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
Attach the spacer to the tip of the Tool.
Spacer specification: 1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick x 18 mm (0.71 in)
wide x 8.5 mm (0.335 in) long.
Make sure that when Tool is closed dimension H′′ is approx. 7.6
mm (0.299 in).
Adjust dimension H′′ with the spacer, if necessary.
SLC655CB
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove the tank using Tool.
Tool number
: KV99103520 (
—
)
SLC903-A
●
Grip the crimped edge and bend it upwards so that Tool slips off.
CAUTION:
Do not bend excessively.
SLC893
●
2.
In areas where the Tool cannot be used, use a suitable tool to
bend the edge up.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage tank.
Remove sealing rubber.
SLC930
Revision: March 2005
CO-32
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[VQ35DE]
3.
4.
Make sure the edge stands straight up, using a suitable tool.
Remove oil cooler from tank (if equipped).
A
CO
C
SLC931
D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install the oil cooler (if equipped).
NOTE:
Pay attention to direction of conical washer.
E
F
G
SLC894
2.
H
Clean the contact portion of the tank.
I
J
K
SLC932
3.
Install sealing rubber by pushing it in with your fingers.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to twist sealing rubber gasket.
L
M
SLC917A
Revision: March 2005
CO-33
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[VQ35DE]
4.
Crimp tank in specified sequence using Tool.
Tool number
: KV99103510 (
—
)
SLC904-A
SLC896
●
In the locations where Tool cannot be used use a suitable
tool.
SLC897
5.
Make sure that the rim is completely crimped down.
Standard height “H”
6.
: 8.0 – 8.4 mm (0.315 – 0.331 in)
Confirm that there is no leakage.
Refer to CO-35, “INSPECTION”.
SLC554A
Revision: March 2005
CO-34
2005 Altima
RADIATOR
[VQ35DE]
INSPECTION
1.
A
Apply pressure using Tool.
Tool number
: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Specified pressure value
WARNING:
To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under
pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp.
CAUTION:
Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well (if equipped).
2.
CO
: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23
psi)
C
SLC933-A
Place radiator in water filled tank and check for leakage.
D
E
F
G
SLC934
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-35
2005 Altima
COOLING FAN
[VQ35DE]
COOLING FAN
Removal and Installation
PFP:21140
EBS00T54
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur form high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-22, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cold.
Remove air cleaner duct assembly. Refer to EM-120, “Removal and Installation”.
Disconnect radiator upper hose.
Disconnect fan motor connectors.
Remove radiator cooling fan assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
●
Cooling fan is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-1111, “DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE”.
Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan
EBS00T55
WBIA0362E
1.
Fan blade
2.
Fan shroud
3.
Fan motor
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove fan blade.
Remove fan motor from fan shroud.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: March 2005
CO-36
2005 Altima
WATER PUMP
[VQ35DE]
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
PFP:21020
A
EBS00J85
CO
C
D
E
F
WBIA0067E
CAUTION:
●
When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt.
●
Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
●
After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator
cap tester.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove undercover, using power tools.
Drain coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
3. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Reposition IPDM/ER aside. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
5. Remove RH wheel and tire and the splash shield.
6. Remove drive belts.
7. Remove idler pulley, then the power steering and generator adjusting bars.
8. Support engine and remove the front engine insulator and bracket. Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
11. Remove the chain tensioner assembly.
a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab.
PBIC0846E
Revision: March 2005
CO-37
2005 Altima
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WATER PUMP
[VQ35DE]
b.
Insert the stopper pin into the tensioner body hole to hold the
lever and keep the stopper tab released.
NOTE:
An allen wrench [(2.5 mm (0.98 in)] is used for a stopper pin as
an example.
SLC444B
c.
d.
e.
Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide.
Keep the slack guide pressed and hold the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through the lever
and into the tensioner body hole
Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise.
PBIC0848E
12. Remove chain tensioner.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop bolts inside chain case.
PBIC0849E
13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a gap between water
pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket.
PBIC0850E
Revision: March 2005
CO-38
2005 Altima
WATER PUMP
[VQ35DE]
14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm
(1.97 in)] into water pumps upper and lower bolt holes until they
reach the timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt
for a half turn, and pull out the water pump.
● Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket
in installation area.
● Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain.
15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.
A
CO
C
JLC357B
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
2.
Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly.
Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
E
F
G
SLC943A
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
H
Install new O-rings to water pump.
Apply engine oil and coolant to the O-rings as shown.
● Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
I
J
K
PBIC0855E
L
3.
Install the water pump.
CAUTION:
Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings
when installing the water pump.
● Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are
engaged.
● Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
Water pump bolts
M
8.5 – 10.7 N·m (0.86 – 1.10 kg-m,
75 – 95 in-lb)
SLC031B
4.
Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of chain tensioner and from installation area
of rear timing chain case.
Revision: March 2005
CO-39
2005 Altima
WATER PUMP
[VQ35DE]
5.
Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that
the timing chain on the timing chain tensioner side is loose.
NOTE:
When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be
applied to the oil hole and tensioner.
PBIC0848E
6.
Install the timing chain tensioner.
Timing chain tensioner
bolts
7.
7.0 – 9.3 N·m (0.71 – 0.95 kg-m,
62 – 82 in-lb)
Remove the stopper pin.
SLC448B
8.
a.
Install chain tensioner and water pump cover.
Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a
scraper.
Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the
front cover.
SLC446B
b.
Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent,
to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump
cover. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
SLC447B
9.
Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant"
.
10. Install idler pulley.
Idler pulley bolts
: 25 - 31 N·m (2.5 - 3.2 kg-m, 18 - 23 ft-lb)
11. Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
CO-40
2005 Altima
WATER PUMP
[VQ35DE]
●
●
Refill engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" .
After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge
air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a rattling noise.
This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.
A
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-41
2005 Altima
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
[VQ35DE]
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
Removal and Installation
PFP:21200
EBS00J86
WBIA0068E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove engine undercover using power tool.
Drain coolant from radiator. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
CAUTION:
Perform when engine is cool.
Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" .
Remove water drain plug on water pump side of the engine. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Disconnect lower radiator hose.
Remove engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly.
● Do not disassemble engine coolant inlet and thermostat.
Replace them as a unit, if necessary.
SLC962AA
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
2.
Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift.
Thermostat
Valve opening temperature
Valve lift
3.
Standard Values
82°C (180°F)
8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F)
Then check if valve closes at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening
temperature.
SLC949A
Revision: March 2005
CO-42
2005 Altima
THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING
[VQ35DE]
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
A
Install thermostat with jiggle valve facing upward.
● After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and
check for leaks.
● Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment.
Use a rag to absorb coolant.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
CO
C
SLC948A
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-43
2005 Altima
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
[VQ35DE]
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
PFP:11060
EBS00J87
WBIA0281E
1.
Water outlet
2.
Gasket
3.
O-ring
4.
Heater pipe
5.
Water connector
6.
Water bypass pipe
7.
Engine coolant temperature sensor
8.
Washer
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove engine undercover using power tools
Drain coolant from drain plugs on radiator and both sides of cylinder block. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING
ENGINE COOLANT" .
CAUTION:
Perform when the engine is cold.
Remove engine cover using power tool.
Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose.
Remove connector(s) from heater pipe.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector on water outlet.
Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water connector, and water bypass pipe nuts and bolts.
INSTALLATION
1.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
● Securely insert each hose, and install a clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe
bulge.
● When inserting a water pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring.
● Refill engine coolant. Refer to MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Revision: March 2005
CO-44
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Capacity
PFP:00100
A
EBS00J88
(US gal, Imp gal)
Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level)
CO
8.2 (2 1/8, 1 3/4)
Thermostat
EBS00J89
Valve opening temperature
C
82°C (180°F)
Valve lift
8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F)
Radiator
EBS00J8A
D
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Cap relief pressure
Standard
78 – 98 (0.8 – 1.0, 11 – 14)
Limit
59 (0.6, 9)
Leakage test pressure
E
157 (1.6, 23)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
CO-45
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Revision: March 2005
CO-46
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
DI
DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
COMBINATION METERS ........................................... 4
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 4
System Description .................................................. 4
UNIFIED CONTROL METER ................................ 4
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/
TRIP METER ........................................................ 4
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 5
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 5
TACHOMETER ..................................................... 5
FUEL GAUGE ....................................................... 5
SPEEDOMETER (WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T)..... 6
SPEEDOMETER (WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED
A/T) ....................................................................... 6
CAN Communication System Description ................ 6
Combination Meter ................................................... 7
CHECK .................................................................. 7
Schematic ................................................................ 8
Wiring Diagram — METER — .................................. 9
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination
Meter .......................................................................11
Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter .........11
SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ...........................11
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE ........11
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12
Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 12
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 13
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 14
DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ....................................... 14
Fuel System ........................................................... 14
FUEL GAUGE ..................................................... 15
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ............................. 15
Tachometer System ............................................... 16
Engine Coolant Temperature System .................... 16
Vehicle Speed System ........................................... 17
WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T ............................. 17
Revision: March 2005
WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T ...................... 17
The Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicates
Wrong Value or Varies ............................................ 18
The Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position... 18
Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 18
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK ................ 18
Removal and Installation of Combination Meter ..... 18
TRIPLE METERS ...................................................... 19
System Description ................................................. 19
TRIPLE METER .................................................. 19
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 19
FUEL CONSUMPTION GAUGE ......................... 19
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE .................................... 19
VOLTMETER ....................................................... 19
Wiring Diagram — 3METER — .............................. 21
Terminals and Reference Value for Triple Meter ... 23
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination
Meter ...................................................................... 23
Meter/Gauges Operation ........................................ 24
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ........................... 24
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE ....... 24
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 25
Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 25
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 26
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 26
Fuel Consumption Gauge Inspection ..................... 27
Oil Pressure Sensor Inspection .............................. 27
Removal and Installation of Triple Meters .............. 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 29
INSTALLATION ................................................... 29
Disassembly and Assembly for Triple Meters ......... 29
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 29
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29
WARNING LAMPS .................................................... 30
System Description ................................................. 30
OUTLINE ............................................................. 30
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ................... 30
LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL WARNING LAMP... 30
AIR BAG WARNING LAMP ................................. 30
SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP ............................. 30
DI-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP ................. 30
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ............ 30
CHARGE WARNING LAMP ................................ 31
BRAKE WARNING LAMP ................................... 31
TRUNK WARNING LAMP ................................... 31
DOOR WARNING LAMP ..................................... 31
ASCD SET INDICATOR LAMP ........................... 31
CRUISE INDICATOR LAMP ................................ 31
ABS WARNING LAMP ........................................ 31
TCS OFF WARNING LAMP ................................ 31
SLIP WARNING LAMP ........................................ 32
AT CHECK WARNING LAMP (5-SPEED A/T
MODELS) ............................................................ 32
A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP (4SPEED A/T MODELS) ........................................ 32
CAN Communication System Description .............. 32
Schematic ............................................................... 33
Wiring Diagram — WARN — .................................. 34
Terminals And Reference Value For BCM .............. 38
Work Flow ............................................................... 38
Preliminary Check .................................................. 38
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 38
Trouble Diagnosis For Door Warning Lamp ........... 39
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition
Switch ON) ............................................................. 39
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil
Pressure Is Normal) ................................................ 40
Component Inspection ............................................ 41
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ................................... 41
A/T INDICATOR ........................................................ 42
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — ................................. 42
4-SPEED A/T ....................................................... 42
5-SPEED A/T ....................................................... 43
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ........................... 44
WARNING CHIME ..................................................... 45
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 45
System Description ................................................. 45
FUNCTION .......................................................... 45
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME ...................... 46
LIGHT WARNING CHIME ................................... 46
Revision: March 2005
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ...........................46
CAN Communication System Description ..............46
Major Component Parts and Function ....................46
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — .................................47
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................49
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................50
Preliminary Check ...................................................50
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT .............................................50
CONSULT–II Function (BCM) .................................51
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
...51
DATA MONITOR ..................................................52
ACTIVE TEST ......................................................52
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ...........................53
All Warnings Are Not Operated ...............................53
Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does
Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) ..........................................................................54
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate ..................55
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................57
Seat Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................58
BOARD COMPUTER ................................................60
System Description .................................................60
FUNCTION ..........................................................60
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATION .....60
DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION ........60
TRIP DISTANCE ..................................................60
TRIP TIME ...........................................................60
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION ......................60
AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED ..............................60
HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION ...........60
CAN Communication System Description ..............61
Schematic ...............................................................62
Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — ...............................63
Trouble Diagnoses ..................................................66
SEGMENT CHECK ..............................................66
PRELIMINARY CHECK .......................................66
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE .................................66
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................67
AMBIENT SENSOR .............................................67
DI-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTION
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EKS008OV
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
EKS008OW
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
●
Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-3
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
COMBINATION METERS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:24814
EKS008OX
WKIA3380E
System Description
EKS008OY
UNIFIED CONTROL METER
●
●
●
●
Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled by the
unified meter control unit, which is built into the combination meter.
Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
Odo/trip meter segments can be checked in diagnosis mode.
Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER
●
The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by the
combination meter and the mileage is displayed.
Revision: March 2005
DI-4
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
●
Depressing the odometer/trip switch toggles the mode in the following order.
A
B
C
D
E
F
SEL175W
●
●
The odo/trip meter display mode toggling and trip display resetting can be identified by the amount of time
that elapses from pressing the odo/trip meter switch to releasing it.
When resetting with trip A displayed, only trip A display is reset (Trip B operates the same way).
H
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 21.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 22.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminals 23, 25, and 28
●
through body grounds M57, M61, and F14.
I
J
DI
L
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
M
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter for water temperature gauge with
CAN communication line.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter for tachometer with CAN communication line.
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 35
●
from terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit
●
through terminal 5 of the fuel level sensor unit and
●
through body grounds M57, M61, and F14.
Revision: March 2005
G
DI-5
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
SPEEDOMETER (WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T)
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter for
speedometer with CAN communication line.
SPEEDOMETER (WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T)
The vehicle speed sensor provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter for speedometer indication.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008OZ
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
DI-6
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
Combination Meter
EKS008P0
A
CHECK
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKIA3175E
Revision: March 2005
DI-7
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
Schematic
EKS008P1
WKWA3002E
Revision: March 2005
DI-8
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
Wiring Diagram — METER —
EKS008P2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1252E
Revision: March 2005
DI-9
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
WKWA3003E
Revision: March 2005
DI-10
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter
EKS008P3
A
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery power supply
—
—
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or
START
ON
—
Battery voltage
B
Ground
—
—
0
25
B
Ground
—
—
0
26
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
27
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
28
B
Ground
—
—
0
Terminal
Wire
color
21
Y/R
22
GY
23
35
Item
G/B
Fuel level sensor signal
36
37
B
C
D
E
Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
UNIT CHECK" .
ON
—
L/Y
Vehicle speed signal
(without TCS or 5-speed
A/T)
ON
Speedometer operated
[When vehicle speed is
approx. 20 km/h (12
MPH)]
240 Hz
PU
Ignition switch ACC or
ON
ON
—
Battery voltage
F
G
Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter
EKS008P4
SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
●
●
Odo/trip meter (board computer) segment operation can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
H
I
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the odometer/trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”.
J
NOTE:
If the diagnosis function is activated with the trip meter A displayed, the mileage on the trip meter A will
indicate 000.0 miles, but the actual trip mileage will be retained. (Trip B operates the same way.)
DI
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
While pushing the odo/trip meter switch, turn the ignition switch ON again.
Check that the trip meter displays "000.0".
L
Push the odo/trip meter switch at least 7 times within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON.
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-11
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
6.
All the segments on the odo/trip meter illuminate, and simultaneously the low-fuel warning lamp indicator illuminates. At this
time, the unified meter control unit is turned to diagnosis mode.
NOTE:
If any of the segments is not displayed, replace the combination
meter.
WKIA1867E
7.
Push the odo/trip meter switch. Each meter/gauge should indicate as shown in the figure while pushing odo/trip meter switch.
(At this time, the low-fuel warning lamp goes off).
LKIA0480E
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS008P5
Confirm the trouble symptom or customer complaint.
Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-12, "Diagnosis Flow" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the trouble symptom. Refer to DI14, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
Does the meter operate normally? Yes: Go to 5. No: Go to 2.
Inspection End.
Diagnosis Flow
EKS008P6
1. WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that warning lamps (such as MIL and oil pressure warning lamp) illuminate.
Do warning lamps illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check ignition power supply system of combination meter. Refer to DI-13, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Check" .
Revision: March 2005
DI-12
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION CHECK
A
Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
Does self-diagnosis function operate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check battery power supply of combination meter and ground system. Refer to DI-13, "Power
Supply and Ground Circuit Check" .
B
C
3. ODO/TRIP METER OPERATION CHECK
Check segment display status of odo/trip meter. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
Is the display normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
D
E
4. FUEL WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION CONFIRMATION
During fuel warning lamp check, confirm illumination of fuel warning lamp. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTION" .
Does fuel warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
5. METER CIRCUIT CHECK
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EKS008P7
1. CHECK FUSES
Check for blown combination meter fuses.
Combination meter
I
J
DI
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
19
Ignition switch ON or START
14
Ignition switch ACC or ON
6
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
G
H
During meter circuit check, confirm meter illumination. Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
Is the display normal?
YES >> Go to diagnosis results. Refer to DI-14, "DIAGNOSIS RESULTS" .
NO
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
Unit
F
DI-13
2005 Altima
M
COMBINATION METERS
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminals 21 (Y/R), 22 (GY), 37 (PU) and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
21 (Y/R)
M24
22 (GY)
OFF
ACC
ON
START
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Ground
37 (PU)
WKIA1870E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between combination meter and fuse.
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
terminals 23 (B), 25 (B), 28 (B) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
23 (B)
M24
25 (B)
Ground
Yes
WKIA1871E
28 (B)
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground harness.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
EKS008P8
DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Trouble phenomenon
Possible cause
Refer to DI-16, "Tachometer System" .
Tachometer indication is irregular.
Fuel warning lamp indication is irregular.
Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
Fuel gauge indication is irregular.
Water temperature gauge indication is irregular.
Refer to DI-16, "Engine Coolant Temperature System" .
Indication is irregular for the speedometer and odo/trip meter.
Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" .
Indications are irregular for more than one gauge.
Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination
Meter" .
A/T position indication is irregular.
Refer to DI-42, "A/T INDICATOR" .
Fuel System
EKS008P9
The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction.
Revision: March 2005
DI-14
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
FUEL GAUGE
●
●
Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank flows and the pointer may fluctuate.
If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the pointer will move slowly.
A
B
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP
Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank flows and the warning lamp ON timing may change.
C
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check meter, fuel level sensor unit and terminals (meter-side, unit-side, harness-side) for looseness or
damaged terminals.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
E
F
2. CONTINUITY INSPECTION BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor
unit connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 35 (G/B) and fuel level sensor unit harness connector B16 terminal 2 (G/B).
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 35 (G/B) and ground.
G
H
I
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
WKIA1873E
M24
35 (G/B)
B16
2 (G/B)
Yes
M24
35 (G/B)
—
Ground
No
DI
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION OF FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
M
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector
B16 terminal 5 (B) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
B16
Terminal
(Wire color)
5 (B)
(–)
Ground
Continuity
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
J
WKIA2029E
DI-15
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
4. FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
Check components. Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation For All Models Except
PZEV" or FL-8, "Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only" .
5. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION
Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and check whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the
internal components in the fuel tank.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Install the fuel level sensor unit properly.
Tachometer System
EKS008PA
1. VISUAL INSPECTION
Check if tachometer fluctuates when the engine starts.
Is the fluctuation acceptable?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. ENGINE SPEED INSPECTION
1.
2.
Select "ENGINE" on CONSULT-II.
Using "ENG SPEED" on "DATA MONITOR", compare the value
of "DATA MONITOR" with tachometer pointer of combination
meter.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
SKIA4367E
3. ECM SYSTEM INSPECTION
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-128, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (QR25DE) or EC-750,
"CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (VQ35DE).
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Go to ECM trouble diagnosis. Refer to EC-99, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (QR25DE) or EC-716,
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (VQ35DE).
Engine Coolant Temperature System
EKS008PB
1. ECM SYSTEM INSPECTION
Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-128, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (QR25DE) or EC-750,
"CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" (VQ35DE).
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Go to ECM trouble diagnosis. Refer to EC-99, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (QR25DE) or EC-716,
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (VQ35DE).
Revision: March 2005
DI-16
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
Vehicle Speed System
EKS008PC
A
WITH TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-59, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS
PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for the displayed DTC.
WITHOUT TCS OR 5-SPEED A/T
C
D
1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUITS
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove vehicle speed sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Rotate vehicle speed sensor while checking voltage between
combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 36 (L/Y)
and ECM harness connector F54 terminal 67 (B).
E
F
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
M24
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
F54
67 (B)
36 (L/Y)
G
Voltage
(Approx.)
H
0.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
I
J
DI
WKIA1872E
2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect vehicle speed sensor connector.
Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals + and
-.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Component
Terminal
Component
Terminal
Vehicle
speed
sensor
+
Vehicle
speed
sensor
–
M
Resistance
value
(Approx.)
250Ω
PKIA0555E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check harness or connector between combination meter, vehicle speed sensor and ECM.
NG
>> Replace vehicle speed sensor.
Revision: March 2005
DI-17
2005 Altima
COMBINATION METERS
The Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value or Varies
EKS008PD
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION
Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or before or after stopping.
Does the indication value vary only during driving or before or after stopping?
Yes
>> The pointer fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal.
No
>> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, and perform the trouble
diagnosis.
The Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position
EKS008PE
1. OBSERVE FUEL GAUGE
Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to FULL position?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. IDENTIFY FUELING CONDITION
Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON?
YES or NO
YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time to move
to FULL position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. OBSERVE VEHICLE POSITION
Is the vehicle parked on an incline?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. OBSERVE FUEL GAUGE POINTER
During driving, does the fuel gauge pointer move gradually toward EMPTY position?
YES or NO
YES >> Check the components. Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
NO
>> The float arm may interfere or bind with any of the components in the fuel tank.
Electrical Components Inspection
EKS008PF
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK
●
●
For removal, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation For All
Models Except PZEV" or FL-8, "Removal and Installation For
PZEV Models Only" .
Check the resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Float position
mm (in)
Terminal
2
5
Resistance value
(Approx.)
Full (1)
82.7 (3.3)
4.5 – 5.5Ω
1/2 (2)
200.3 (7.9)
31.5 – 5.5Ω
Empty (3)
325.0 (12.8)
80.0 – 83.0Ω
Removal and Installation of Combination Meter
WKIA2030E
EKS008PG
For removal and installation procedure, refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
Revision: March 2005
DI-18
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
TRIPLE METERS
System Description
PFP:24845
A
EKS00A7L
TRIPLE METER
●
●
Fuel consumption gauge, oil pressure gauge and voltmeter are
controlled by the triple meter.
Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode of combination meter.
B
C
D
WKIA3176E
E
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to triple meter terminal 1 and
●
to combination meter terminal 21.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to triple meter terminal 2 and
●
to combination meter terminal 22.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to triple meter terminal 6 and
●
to combination meter terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
●
to triple meter terminals 3 and 4 and
●
to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and F14.
F
G
H
I
J
DI
FUEL CONSUMPTION GAUGE
The fuel consumption gauge displays the average fuel consumption according to signal from the combination
meter. Average fuel consumption is calculated by signals from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
(with TCS or 5-speed A/T) or vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) and the ECM.
L
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
M
The oil pressure gauge indicates engine oil pressure.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through triple meter terminal 9
●
to oil pressure sensor terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
through triple meter terminal 11
●
to oil pressure sensor terminal 3.
Triple meter receives oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor
●
through oil pressure sensor terminal 2
●
to triple meter terminal 10.
VOLTMETER
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. While the
engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage of about 13 to 15 volts.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
Revision: March 2005
DI-19
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to triple meter terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
to triple meter terminals 3 and 4
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and F14.
●
Revision: March 2005
DI-20
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
Wiring Diagram — 3METER —
EKS00A7N
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1837E
Revision: March 2005
DI-21
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
WKWA1838E
Revision: March 2005
DI-22
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
Terminals and Reference Value for Triple Meter
EKS00A7O
A
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
1
Y/R
2
GY
Condition
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START
ON
—
Battery voltage
Ground
ON
—
0
Item
B
C
3
4
B
6
PU
ACC power supply
ACC
—
Battery voltage
7
Y
Meter serial communication
ON
—
—
9
W
Oil pressure sensor power supply
ON
—
5.5
When ignition switch is in the
ON position. (Engine stopped)
0.5
10
G
Oil pressure sensor signal
ON
Engine running. [When the oil
pressure is 60 psi (4.22 kg/
D
E
2.5
F
cm2 )]
11
SB
Oil pressure sensor ground
ON
—
Engine oil pressure is below
4.52 psi (0.318 kg/cm2 )
12
P/L
Oil pressure warn out
ON
Engine oil pressure is above
6.5 psi (0.457 kg/cm2 )
0
G
0.5
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
4
Y
21
22
Condition
EKS00A7P
I
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Meter serial communication
ON
—
—
Y/R
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
GY
Ignition switch ON or START
ON
—
Battery voltage
Ground
ON
—
0
Item
H
J
DI
23
25
B
L
28
37
PU
Ignition switch ACC or ON
ON
—
Battery voltage
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-23
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
Meter/Gauges Operation
EKS00A7R
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode of combination meter.
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the odometer/trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”.
NOTE:
If the diagnosis function is activated with the trip meter A displayed, the mileage on the trip meter A will
indicate 000.0 miles, but the actual trip mileage will be retained. (Trip B operates the same way.)
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
While pushing the odo/trip meter switch, turn the ignition switch ON again.
Check that the trip meter displays "000.0".
Push the odo/trip meter switch at least 7 times within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON.
All the segments on the odo/trip meter illuminate, and simultaneously the low-fuel warning lamp indicator
illuminates. At this time, the unified meter control unit is turned to diagnosis mode.
Push the odo/trip meter switch. Each meter/gauge should indicate as shown in the figure while pushing odo/trip meter switch.
WKIA3176E
Revision: March 2005
DI-24
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00A7T
A
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-25, "Diagnosis Flow" .
According to the symptom chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom.
Does the triple meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2.
Inspection End.
Diagnosis Flow
B
EKS00A7U
C
1. CHECK VOLTMETER OPERATION
Turn ignition switch ON.
Does voltmeter display battery voltage?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check ignition power supply system of triple meter. Refer to DI-26, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check" .
2. CHECK METER CIRCUIT
D
E
F
Check indication of each meter/gauge in self-diagnosis mode. Refer
to DI-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to DI-26, "Symptom Chart" .
NG
>> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and
Installation of Triple Meters" .
G
H
I
WKIA3176E
J
DI
L
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-25
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EKS00A7V
1. CHECK FUSES
Check for blown triple meter fuses.
Unit
Triple meter
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
19
Ignition switch ACC or ON
6
Ignition switch ON or START
14
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect the triple meter connector.
Check voltage between triple meter harness connector terminals
and ground.
Terminals
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
1 (Y/R)
OFF
ACC
ON
START
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
LKIA0527E
M99
2 (GY)
Ground
6 (PU)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between triple meter and fuse.
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99
terminals 3 (B), 4 (B) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check harness or connector.
LKIA0528E
Symptom Chart
EKS00A7W
Trouble phenomenon
Possible cause
Fuel consumption gauge is irregular.
Refer to DI-27, "Fuel Consumption Gauge Inspection" .
Oil pressure gauge is irregular.
Refer to DI-27, "Oil Pressure Sensor Inspection" .
Voltmeter is irregular.
Revision: March 2005
●
Refer to SC-21, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
●
Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation
of Triple Meters" .
DI-26
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
Fuel Consumption Gauge Inspection
EKS00A7Z
1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
A
Perform the ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-754, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the applicable parts.
B
C
2. CHECK METER SERIAL COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter and triple meter connectors.
Check continuity between combination meter connector M24
terminal 4 (Y) and triple meter connector M99 terminal 7 (Y).
D
E
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between combination meter connector M24
terminal 4 (Y) and ground.
F
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector between combination meter and triple meter.
LKIA0529E
G
H
Oil Pressure Sensor Inspection
EKS00A80
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
I
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 10 (G) and ground.
J
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
When ignition switch is in ON
position. (Engine stopped.)
0.5V
(–)
DI
L
LKIA0530E
M99
10 (G)
Ground
Engine running. [When the
oil pressure is 60 psi (4.22
2.5V
kg/cm2 )]
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and Installation of Triple Meters" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Check voltage between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal
9 (W) and ground.
Approx. 5.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace triple meter. Refer to DI-29, "Removal and
Installation of Triple Meters" .
LKIA0531E
Revision: March 2005
DI-27
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect triple meter and oil pressure sensor connectors.
Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99
terminal 9 (W) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F106
terminal 1 (W).
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99
terminal 9 (W) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
WKIA3178E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector between triple meter and oil pressure sensor.
4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99
terminal 10 (G) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F106
terminal 2 (R/L).
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99
terminal 10 (G) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector between triple meter and
oil pressure sensor.
WKIA3179E
5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between triple meter harness connector M99 terminal 11 (SB) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F106 terminal 3 (B).
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace oil pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector between triple meter and
oil pressure sensor.
WKIA3180E
Revision: March 2005
DI-28
2005 Altima
TRIPLE METERS
Removal and Installation of Triple Meters
EKS00A83
A
REMOVAL
To remove triple meters, remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
INSTALLATION
B
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly for Triple Meters
EKS00A84
DISASSEMBLY
1.
C
Remove the triple meter screws as shown, then separate from
bezel of cluster lid D.
D
E
F
LKIA0597E
ASSEMBLY
G
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-29
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
WARNING LAMPS
System Description
PFP:24814
EKS008PH
OUTLINE
With ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 22.
Ground is supplied
●
to seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 and
●
to trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 4
●
through body grounds B7 and B19,
●
to brake fluid level switch terminal 2 and
●
to washer fluid level sensor terminal –
●
through body grounds E15 and E24,
●
to fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5
●
through body grounds M57, M61 and F14.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
The malfunction indicator lamp is controlled by the ECM. During prove out or when an engine control malfunction occurs, the ECM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground
is provided to the malfunction indicator lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates.
LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL WARNING LAMP
When the washer fluid level is low, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 15
●
from washer fluid level sensor terminal +.
When power and ground are supplied, the low washer level warning lamp illuminates.
AIR BAG WARNING LAMP
During prove out or when an air bag malfunction occurs, the ground path is interrupted
●
from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit terminal 15
●
to combination meter terminal 20.
SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP
When the driver seat belt is unfastened, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 11
●
from seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1.
When power and ground are supplied, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates.
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP
The amount of fuel in the fuel tank is determined by the fuel level sensor in the fuel tank. A signal is sent
●
to combination meter terminal 35
●
from fuel level sensor unit terminal 2.
The fuel level sensor will illuminate the low fuel level warning lamp when the fuel level is low.
When power and ground are supplied, the low fuel level warning lamp illuminates.
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Low oil pressure warning lamp is controlled by the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine
room).
Low oil pressure causes oil pressure switch terminal + to provide ground to IPDM E/R terminal 57. The IPDM
E/R then signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to
the low oil pressure warning lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the low oil pressure warning lamp illuminates.
Revision: March 2005
DI-30
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
CHARGE WARNING LAMP
A
During prove out or when a generator malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 14
●
from generator terminal L.
When power and ground are supplied, the charge warning lamp and brake lamp illuminate.
B
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
When the parking brake is applied or if the brake fluid level is low, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 17
●
from parking brake switch terminal 1 or
●
to combination meter terminal 19
●
from brake fluid level switch terminal 1.
When power and ground are supplied, the brake warning lamp illuminates.
C
D
E
TRUNK WARNING LAMP
Trunk warning lamp is controlled by the BCM.
When the trunk is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 53
●
through trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 3
●
through trunk lamp switch and trunk release solenoid terminal 4
●
to body grounds B7 and B19.
The BCM then signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the trunk warning lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the trunk warning lamp illuminates.
DOOR WARNING LAMP
Door warning lamp is controlled by the BCM.
When one of the doors is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminals 12, 13, 47 or 48. The BCM then signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the door
warning lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the door warning lamp illuminates.
ASCD SET INDICATOR LAMP
The ASCD set indicator lamp is controlled by the ECM.
When the ASCD system is turned on and the speed is set, the ECM signals the combination meter (unified
meter control unit) via the CAN lines and ground is provided to the SET indicator lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the set indicator lamp illuminates.
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
CRUISE INDICATOR LAMP
The cruise indicator lamp is controlled by the ECM.
When the ASCD system is turned on, the ECM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via
the CAN lines and ground is provided to the cruise indicator lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the CRUISE indicator lamp illuminates.
ABS WARNING LAMP
When an ABS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 16
●
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) terminal 21.
When power and ground are supplied, the ABS warning lamp illuminates.
TCS OFF WARNING LAMP
When TCS OFF switch is in OFF position or a TCS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 12
●
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) terminal 5.
When power and ground are supplied, the TCS OFF warning lamp illuminates.
Revision: March 2005
DI-31
2005 Altima
M
WARNING LAMPS
SLIP WARNING LAMP
When TCS is in operation or a TCS malfunction occurs, ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 13
●
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) terminal 2.
When power and ground are supplied, the SLIP warning lamp illuminates.
AT CHECK WARNING LAMP (5-SPEED A/T MODELS)
The AT CHECK warning lamp is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module). When an A/T system
malfunction occurs, the TCM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN lines and
ground is provided to the AT CHECK warning lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the AT CHECK warning lamp illuminates.
A/T CHECK (POSITION) INDICATOR LAMP (4-SPEED A/T MODELS)
The A/T check (position) indicator lamp is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module). When an A/T
system malfunction occurs, the TCM signals the combination meter (unified meter control unit) via the CAN
lines and ground is provided to the A/T check (position) indicator lamp.
When power and ground are supplied, the A/T check (position) indicator lamp illuminates.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008PI
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
DI-32
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
EKS008PJ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA3004E
Revision: March 2005
DI-33
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —
EKS008PK
WKWA3005E
Revision: March 2005
DI-34
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1841E
Revision: March 2005
DI-35
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
WKWA1256E
Revision: March 2005
DI-36
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1257E
Revision: March 2005
DI-37
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
Terminals And Reference Value For BCM
EKS008PL
Condition
Terminal
12
13
Wire
color
P/L
R/W
Item
Front door switch RH
Rear door switch RH
Ignition
switch
OFF
OFF
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Operation
Front door switch
RH
Rear door switch RH
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
47
SB
48
53
R/B
P
Front door switch LH
Rear door switch LH
Trunk lamp switch and
trunk release solenoid
OFF
OFF
OFF
Front door switch LH
Rear door switch LH
Trunk lamp switch
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008PM
Check the trouble symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to DI-30, "System Description" .
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-38, "Preliminary Check" .
Referring to Trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the incident. Refer to DI-39, "Trouble
Diagnosis For Door Warning Lamp" .
Does warning lamp system operate normally? If it operates normally, go to step 6. If not, go to step 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EKS008PN
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown BCM fusible link.
Unit
Power source
Fusible link
BCM
Battery
f
Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fusible link.
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
DI-38
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 (W/B)
and ground. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Terminals
B
Ignition switch
position
C
D
(+)
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
OFF
Connector
M20
70 (W/B)
Ground
Battery voltage
WKIA1874E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
F
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67
(B) and body ground. Refer to PG-28, "GROUND CIRCUIT" .
G
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
M20
67 (B)
Ground
Continuity
H
Yes
I
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check harness ground circuit.
LIIA0915E
Trouble Diagnosis For Door Warning Lamp
Symptom
Door warning lamp does not illuminate with any of
doors open.
Door warning lamp illuminates constantly.
EKS008PP
DI
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
●
Check front door switches. Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" .
●
Check rear door switches. Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" .
L
If the above systems work properly, replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)
EKS008PQ
1. CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT SIGNAL
Activate IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" .
Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS OF IPDM E/R
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and perform self-diagnosis of IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "CONSULT-II
Function (IPDM E/R)" .
Self-diagnostic results content
No malfunction detected>>GO TO 3.
Malfunction detected>>Go to PG-18, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" in "IPDM E/R".
Revision: March 2005
J
DI-39
2005 Altima
M
WARNING LAMPS
3. CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT SIGNAL
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II. Operate ignition switch with "OIL
P SW" of "DATA MONITOR" and check operation status.
When ignition switch is in ON
position (Engine stopped)
When engine running
: OIL P SW CLOSE
: OIL P SW OPEN
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
LKIA0403E
4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector.
Check the following.
QR25DE models
Continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal
57 (P/L) and oil pressure switch harness connector F19 terminal
+ (P/L).
Continuity should exist.
VQ35DE models without triple meter
Continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal
57 (P/L) and oil pressure switch harness connector F106 terminal + (R/L).
WKIA3381E
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-41, "OIL PRESSURE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace oil pressure switch.
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)
EKS008PR
NOTE:
For oil pressure inspection, refer to LU-8, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" (QR25DE) or LU-21, "OIL PRESSURE
CHECK" (VQ35DE).
Revision: March 2005
DI-40
2005 Altima
WARNING LAMPS
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminal 57 (P/L) and ground.
B
C
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
D
LKIA0247E
2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
E
Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-41, "OIL PRESSURE SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace oil pressure switch.
F
Component Inspection
EKS008PS
G
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check continuity between the oil pressure switch and body ground.
Condition
Oil pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
H
Continuity
Engine stopped
Less than 29 (0.3, 4)
Yes
Engine running
More than 29 (0.3, 4)
No
I
J
ELF0044D
DI
L
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-41
2005 Altima
A/T INDICATOR
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —
PFP:24814
EKS008PT
4-SPEED A/T
WKWA1258E
Revision: March 2005
DI-42
2005 Altima
A/T INDICATOR
5-SPEED A/T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA3006E
Revision: March 2005
DI-43
2005 Altima
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
EKS008PU
1. TCM CONTROL UNIT SYSTEM INSPECTION
Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-44, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" (4speed A/T) or AT-456, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" (5-speed A/T).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to TCM trouble diagnosis.
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS INSPECTION
Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-11, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
OK or NG
OK
>> A/T indicator is OK.
NG
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
Revision: March 2005
DI-44
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:24814
A
EKS008PV
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WKIA3382E
System Description
EKS008PW
J
FUNCTION
Item
Description
DI
Ignition key warning chime
Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with key in ignition key cylinder and ignition
switch “OFF” or “ACC” position.
Light warning chime
Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with lighting switch in the 1st or 2nd position and
the key removed from the ignition switch.
Seat belt warning chime
Sounds warning chime for approximately 6 seconds after ignition switch is turned “ON” when driver
seat belt is unfastened.
NOTE:
When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime should be performed at
the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following.
1. Seat belt warning chime
2. Ignition key warning chime
3. Light warning chime
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through body grounds M57, M61, and F14.
Revision: March 2005
DI-45
2005 Altima
L
M
WARNING CHIME
When the proper signal, or combination of signals, is received by the combination meter, the warning chime
will sound.
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME
Power is supplied
●
through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
through front door switch LH case ground.
With the key inserted in the ignition switch, and the driver door open, the ignition key warning chime will
sound.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver door open, and the lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND
position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when headlamp battery saver control operates (for 5 minutes
after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.]
Signal is supplied
●
from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16
●
to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through front door switch LH terminal 2
●
through front door switch LH case ground.
With these conditions, when power and ground are supplied, the light warning chime sounds.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
With the driver seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH ON), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON.
Ground is supplied
●
to combination meter terminal 11
●
through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1
●
through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2
●
through body grounds B7 and B19.
With these conditions, when power and ground are supplied, the seat belt warning chime sounds.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008PX
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Major Component Parts and Function
Components
EKS008PY
Functions
BCM
Intermittently operates the warning chime by signals from the ignition switch, key
switch and key lock solenoid, lighting switch, front door switch LH and seat belt
buckle switch LH.
Warning chime
Generates intermittent sounds by signals from the BCM.
Revision: March 2005
DI-46
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —
EKS008PZ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1259E
Revision: March 2005
DI-47
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
WKWA1260E
Revision: March 2005
DI-48
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
Terminals and Reference Value for BCM
EKS008Q0
A
Terminal
No.
2
Condition
Wire
color
L
Item
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
Measurement method
ON
—
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
B
C
SKIA1119J
D
E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
—
F
SKIA1119J
G
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
—
H
SKIA1119J
I
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
ON
—
J
SKIA1119J
DI
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
ON
L
—
SKIA1119J
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting switch and wiper
switch are OFF.
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting switch and wiper
switch are OFF.
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
ON
—
5V or more
35
G/B
Combination switch output 2
ON
—
5V or more
36
G/W
Combination switch output 1
ON
—
5V or more
37
B/R
Key switch signal
OFF
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
47
SB
Front door switch LH signal
Revision: March 2005
OFF
5V or more
5V or more
Key is removed.
0
Key is inserted.
Battery voltage
Driver door
DI-49
ON (open)
0
OFF (closed)
5V
2005 Altima
M
WARNING CHIME
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
67
B
70
W/B
Condition
Ignition
switch
Measurement method
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
OFF
—
0
Battery power supply
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Item
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008Q1
Confirm the trouble symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-45, "System Description" .
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to DI-50, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the warning chime operate normally? Yes: Go to 6. No: Go to 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EKS008Q2
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown BCM fusible link.
Unit
Power source
Fusible link
BCM
Battery
f
Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fusible link.
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 (W/B)
and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
M20
70 (W/B)
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fusible link.
Revision: March 2005
DI-50
WKIA1874E
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
A
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67
(B) and ground.
B
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Ground
Continuity
C
Yes
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check harness ground circuit.
LIIA0915E
E
CONSULT–II Function (BCM)
EKS008Q3
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
BUZZER
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
F
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
G
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
H
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
I
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
J
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
DI
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the
L
ignition switch ON.
M
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
DI-51
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
3.
Touch “BCM”.
BCIA0030E
4.
5.
Touch “BUZZER” or “BCM”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” “ACTIVE TEST” or “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”.
WKIA2555E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch “ALL SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all selected test item related signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the specified item.
4.
5.
6.
If “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch the item desired to monitor. If “ALL SIGNALS” is
selected, all selected test item related signals are monitored.
Touch “START”.
During monitoring, touching “COPY” will print the monitored item status.
Data Monitor Item
Monitored item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
LIGHT SW 1ST
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of combination switch (lighting switch).
BUCKLE SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt buckle switch LH.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation.
During the operation check, touching “OFF” deactivates the operation.
Revision: March 2005
DI-52
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
Active Test Item (IGN KEY WARN ALM)
Test item
A
Malfunction detecting condition
This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds after
touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHIME
B
Active Test Item (LIGHT WARN ALM)
Test item
Malfunction detecting condition
C
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds after
touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHIME
Active Test Item (SEAT BELT WARN TEST)
D
Test item
Malfunction detecting condition
This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds
after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
CHIME
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
E
F
Touch “BCM” on “DIAGNOSIS ITEM SELECTION” screen.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
G
Display Item List
Items to be displayed
CONSULT-II display
Description
H
CAN communication
CAN communication [U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN communication.
CAN communication system
CAN communication system 1 to
6 [U1000]
Malfunction is detected in CAN system.
Combination switch
Diagnosis 1 - 5 systems open circuit
Malfunction is detected in combination switch system.
I
All Warnings Are Not Operated
EKS008Q4
J
1. CHIME OPERATION INSPECTION
Select “BUZZER” on CONSULT-II, and perform “LIGHT WARN
ALM”, "IGN KEY WARN ALM", or "SEAT BELT WARN TEST" active
test.
Does chime sound?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
DI
L
M
WKIA1876E
2. BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II, and perform BCM self-diagnosis.
Self-diagnostic results content
No malfunction detected>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
CAN communication or CAN communication system>> Check BCM CAN communication system. Go to
LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Diagnosis 1 - 5 systems open circuit>> Malfunction in combination switch system. Go to LT-90, "Combination
Switch Reading Function" according to self-diagnostic results.
Revision: March 2005
DI-53
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt
Warning Chime Does Operate)
EKS008Q5
1. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "DOOR SW-DR"
when the front door switch LH is operated.
When front door LH is
opened
When front door LH is
closed
: DOOR SW-DR ON
: DOOR SW-DR OFF
LKIA0335E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47
(SB) and ground.
When front door LH is
opened
When front door LH is
closed
: Approx. 0V
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WKIA1515E
2. CONTINUITY INSPECTION OF DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M19 and front door switch LH connector B8.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal
47 (SB) and front door switch LH harness connector B8 terminal
2 (SB).
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M19
47 (SB)
B8
2 (SB)
4.
WKIA1516E
Yes
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M19
47 (SB)
Ground
Continuity
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
DI-54
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH
A
Check front door switch LH.
When front door switch
LH is released
When front door switch
LH is pushed
: Continuity should
exist
: Continuity should not
exist
B
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace front door switch LH.
D
WKIA1517E
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate
EKS008Q6
1. CHECK FUSE
Check if the key switch and key lock solenoid (key detection) switch fuse is blown. Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" .
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
E
F
G
H
With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position.
Does warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Go to DI-53, "All Warnings Are Not Operated" or DI-54, "Key Warning Chime and Light Warning
Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)" .
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-55
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
3. KEY SWITCH INSPECTION
With CONSULT-II
With “BUZZER” on the data monitor, insert the key into the ignition
cylinder to check ON/OFF operation.
Switch operation
CONSULT-II display
Ignition switch (key in switch)
KEY ON SW
Ignition switch (key out of switch)
Operation
status
ON
OFF
SKIA1960E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/
R) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
M18
37 (B/R)
Ground
Key is inserted
Battery voltage
Key is removed
0V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LKIA0255E
4. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
1.
2.
Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector.
Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4.
Terminals
3
Condition
4
Continuity
Key is inserted
Yes
Key is removed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid.
Revision: March 2005
DI-56
PKIA2503E
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
5. BCM AND KEY SWITCH CONTINUITY INSPECTION
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM connector M18.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M26 terminal 4 (B/R).
B
Continuity should exist.
3.
C
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
37 (B/R) and ground.
D
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2032E
E
6. KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION
F
Check voltage between key switch and key lock solenoid harness
connector M26 terminal 3 (W) and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Check harness for open between key switch and key
lock solenoid and fuse.
H
I
WKIA1784E
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate
EKS008Q7
J
1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
Check key warning chime and seat belt warning chime functions.
DI
Do key warning chime and seat belt warning chime sound?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to DI-53, "All Warnings Are Not Operated" or DI-54, "Key Warning Chime and Light Warning
L
Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)" .
2. DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
M
With "BUZZER" on the data monitor, confirm “LIGHT SW 1ST” turns
ON/OFF when lighting switch and front fog switch are operated.
Switch operation
CONSULT-II display
Headlamp switch (1st position)
Headlamp switch (OFF)
Operation
status
ON
LIGHT SW 1ST
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
DI-57
WKIA1877E
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
3. INSPECTION BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II, and perform BCM self-diagnosis.
Self-diagnostic results content
No malfunction detected>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
CAN communication or CAN communication system>> Check BCM CAN communication system. Go to
LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Diagnosis 1 - 5 systems open circuit>> Malfunction in combination switch system. Go to LT-90, "Combination
Switch Reading Function" according to self-diagnostic results.
Seat Warning Chime Does Not Operate
EKS008Q8
1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION
1.
With key removed from the ignition switch and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd
position.
2. Return lighting switch to OFF position, and insert key into ignition switch.
Does warning chime sound for both steps?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to DI-53, "All Warnings Are Not Operated" .
2. DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
With "BUZZER" on the data monitor, confirm “BUCKLE SW ” when
the seat belt buckle switch LH is operated.
Switch operation
CONSULT-II display
Seat belt buckle switch LH (unfastened)
Seat belt buckle switch LH (fastened)
Operation
status
ON
BUCKLE SW
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
WKIA1878E
3. COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 11 (OR) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Condition
Connector
Terminal
M24
11 (OR)
(–)
Seat belt is fastened
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Ground
Seat belt is unfastened
0V
WKIA1880E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter"
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
DI-58
2005 Altima
WARNING CHIME
4. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector.
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH terminals 1
and 2.
Terminals
1
Condition
2
B
Continuity
Seat belt is fastened
No
Seat belt is unfastened
Yes
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace seat belt buckle switch LH.
WKIA1143E
E
5. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 11 (OR) and seat belt buckle switch LH harness
connector P2 terminal 1 (OR).
F
G
Continuity should exist.
3.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M24 terminal 11 (OR) and ground.
H
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1881E
J
6. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector.
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness
connector P2 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
DI
Continuity should exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
WKIA2722E
Revision: March 2005
I
DI-59
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
BOARD COMPUTER
System Description
PFP:24810
EKS008Q9
FUNCTION
The board computer can indicate the following items.
●
Outside air temperature
●
DTE (distance to empty) (without NAVI)
●
Trip distance
●
Trip time (without NAVI)
●
Average fuel consumption (without NAVI)
●
Average vehicle speed (without NAVI)
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATION
The outside air temperature indication is displayed while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Signal is supplied
●
through ambient sensor terminal 1
●
to combination meter (board computer) terminal 33.
Indication range is between -30 and 55°C (-22 and 131°F). When outside temperature is less than 3°C (37°F),
display shows ICY. In this case, the display will change to the outside air temperature mode even though the
display is showing a different mode. When outside temperature is more than 55°C (131°F), indication will be
blank. The indicated temperature is not affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following
conditions exists.
●
When vehicle speed is more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
●
The ignition switch has been turned OFF for more than 3.5 hours.
●
When outside air temperature is less than the indicated temperature.
DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION
The range indication provides the driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling.
The range is calculated by signals from the fuel level sensor unit (fuel remaining), ECM (fuel consumption)
and vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) or the ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5speed A/T). The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. When fuel remaining is less than approximately 10 (2 5/8 US gal, 2 1/4 Imp gal), the indication will blink as a warning. If the fuel remaining is less than
approximately 8 (2 1/8 US gal, 1 3/4 Imp gal), the indication will show "---". In this case, the display will
change to the DTE mode even though the display is showing a different mode. When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, DTE mode will display "---" until the vehicle is driven 500 miles (804.5 km).
TRIP DISTANCE
Trip distance is calculated by signal from the vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed A/T) or the ABS
actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/T). If trip distance is reset, trip time will be reset at the same
time.
TRIP TIME
Trip time displays cumulative ignition switch ON time. If trip time is reset, trip distance will be reset at the same
time.
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
Average fuel consumption indication is calculated by signals from the vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5speed A/T) or the ABS actuator and electric unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/T) and the ECM (fuel consumption).
The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds.
AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED
Average vehicle speed indication is calculated by running distance and running time. The indication will be
refreshed every 30 seconds. If average vehicle speed is reset, average fuel consumption will be reset at the
same time. After resetting, the display will show "---" for 30 seconds.
HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION
Indication can be changed in the following order by momentarily depressing the board computer switch or the
board computer steering switch.
Revision: March 2005
DI-60
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
Outside air temperature → dte (without NAVI) → Average fuel consumption (without NAVI) → Average vehicle
speed (without NAVI) → Trip time (without NAVI) → Trip distance.
Holding the switch for more than 0.8 second will reset the indication of the currently displayed mode (trip distance, trip time, average vehicle speed or average fuel consumption).
NOTE:
After the display changes automatically, the indication can be changed to the last mode by pushing the board
computer switch or the board computer steering switch.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008QA
A
B
C
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
Revision: March 2005
DI-61
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
Schematic
EKS008QB
WKWA3007E
Revision: March 2005
DI-62
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
Wiring Diagram — B/COMP —
EKS008QC
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1350E
Revision: March 2005
DI-63
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
WKWA3008E
Revision: March 2005
DI-64
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
DI
L
M
WKWA1262E
Revision: March 2005
DI-65
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
Trouble Diagnoses
EKS008QD
SEGMENT CHECK
The board computer segment display can be checked by entering combination meter self-diagnostic mode.
Refer to DI-11, "SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
PRELIMINARY CHECK
LKIA0061E
*1
DI-66, "DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE"
*2
DI-7, "CHECK"
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Symptom
Outside air temperature display is not displayed properly.
(It may take a short time to
steady the indication after ignition switch is turned ON.)
NOTE:
If the meter is powered up with
the ambient sensor disconnected, outside air temperature display will show "---" even
if the sensor is reconnected. In
this case, with the sensor connected, disconnect and reconnect the battery, then the
correct temperature will be displayed.
DTE (distance to empty) is not
displayed properly.)
Revision: March 2005
Possible cause
Repair order
1. Ambient sensor
1. Check ambient sensor.
2. Ambient sensor circuit
2. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor and
board computer.
3. Vehicle speed sensor signal
(without TCS or 5-speed A/T)
4. ABS actuator and electric
unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/
T)
3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor.
4. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis.
1. Average fuel consumption
display
1. Make sure fuel consumption is displayed properly. If NG, check
fuel consumption display.
2. Fuel tank gauge signal circuit.
2. Make sure fuel gauge operates properly. If NG, check fuel
gauge. Refer to DI-14, "Fuel System" .
DI-66
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
Symptom
Trip distance is not indicated
properly.
Trip time is not indicated properly.
Average fuel consumption is
not displayed properly.
Possible cause
Repair order
1. Vehicle speed sensor signal
circuit (without TCS or 5speed A/T)
2. ABS actuator and electric
unit (with TCS or 5-speed A/
T)
1. Fuse
1. Trip distance display
2. Fuel consumption signal
A
1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor.
2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis.
1. 10A fuse [No. 19 located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify battery voltage is present at combination meter terminal 21.
C
1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed
A/T) or perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis
(with TCS or 5-speed A/T).
D
2. Check CAN lines for open or short between ECM and combination meter.
Average vehicle speed is not
indicated properly.
1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
terminal 36 and vehicle speed sensor (without TCS or 5-speed
A/T) or perform ABS actuator and electric unit self diagnosis
(with TCS or 5-speed A/T).
1. Trip distance display
2. Trip time display
B
E
F
2. Make sure trip time is displayed properly. If NG, check trip time
display.
G
Electrical Components Inspection
EKS008QE
AMBIENT SENSOR
After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure
resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor harness side, using
the table below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
-15 (5)
12.73
-10 (14)
9.92
-5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
I
J
DI
L
M
WJIA0079E
If NG, replace ambient sensor.
Revision: March 2005
H
DI-67
2005 Altima
BOARD COMPUTER
Revision: March 2005
DI-68
2005 Altima
B ENGINE
SECTION
EC
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
EC
C
D
E
CONTENTS
QR
INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 15
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 15
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 17
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 21
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 21
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
A/T .......................................................................... 21
Precaution .............................................................. 21
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 24
PREPARATION ......................................................... 25
Special Service Tools ............................................. 25
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 26
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 28
System Diagram ..................................................... 28
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 29
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 31
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Speed) .................................................................... 32
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 33
Input/output Signal Chart ....................................... 33
System Description ................................................ 33
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 34
System Description ................................................ 34
Component Description .......................................... 35
CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 36
System Description ................................................ 36
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 37
Description ............................................................. 37
Component Inspection ........................................... 40
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 41
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY
(ORVR) ...................................................................... 44
System Description ................................................ 44
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 45
Component Inspection ........................................... 48
Revision: March 2005
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 50
Description .............................................................. 50
Component Inspection ............................................ 50
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ........................................................................ 52
Description .............................................................. 52
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 53
Introduction ............................................................. 53
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 53
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 54
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 67
OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 70
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 75
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 75
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 80
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ................................. 81
VIN Registration ..................................................... 92
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 93
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 93
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 93
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 99
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 99
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 105
Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 107
Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 108
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 112
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 117
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 118
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 120
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 120
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 128
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 140
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 142
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 146
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 148
Description ............................................................ 148
Testing Condition .................................................. 148
EC-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 148
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 149
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 158
Description ............................................................ 158
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 159
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 159
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160
Ground Inspection ................................................ 164
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 166
Description ............................................................ 166
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 166
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 167
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 168
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 169
Description ............................................................ 169
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 169
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 170
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 171
Component Inspection .......................................... 172
Removal and Installation ...................................... 172
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ..................... 173
Description ............................................................ 173
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 173
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 173
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 173
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 175
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 176
Component Inspection .......................................... 177
Removal and Installation ...................................... 177
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 178
Component Description ........................................ 178
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 178
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 178
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 178
Overall Function Check ........................................ 180
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 181
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 182
Component Inspection .......................................... 184
Removal and Installation ...................................... 186
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 187
Component Description ........................................ 187
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 187
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 187
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 187
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 189
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190
Component Inspection .......................................... 192
Removal and Installation ...................................... 193
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 194
Component Description ........................................ 194
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 194
Revision: March 2005
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 194
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 196
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 197
Component Inspection .......................................... 198
Removal and Installation ....................................... 198
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 199
Component Description ........................................ 199
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 200
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 201
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 202
Component Inspection .......................................... 203
Removal and Installation ....................................... 203
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 204
Component Description ........................................ 204
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.204
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 204
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 204
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 206
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 207
Component Inspection .......................................... 210
Remove and Installation ....................................... 210
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 211
Description ............................................................ 211
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 211
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 211
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 212
Component Inspection .......................................... 213
Removal and Installation ....................................... 213
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 214
Component Description ........................................ 214
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 214
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 214
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 215
Component Inspection .......................................... 216
Removal and Installation ....................................... 216
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 217
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 217
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 217
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 217
Component Inspection .......................................... 218
Removal and Installation ....................................... 218
DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 219
Component Description ........................................ 219
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.219
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 219
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 219
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 221
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 222
Component Inspection .......................................... 223
Removal and Installation ....................................... 224
DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 225
Component Description ........................................ 225
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.225
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 225
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 226
EC-2
2005 Altima
Overall Function Check ........................................ 226
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 228
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 229
Component Inspection ......................................... 231
Removal and Installation ...................................... 232
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 233
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 233
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 233
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 235
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 236
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 240
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 240
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 240
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 242
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 243
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 246
Component Description ........................................ 246
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 246
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 246
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 248
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 249
Component Inspection ......................................... 250
Removal and Installation ...................................... 250
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 251
Component Description ........................................ 251
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 251
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 251
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 252
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 253
Component Inspection ......................................... 254
Removal and Installation ...................................... 254
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 255
Component Description ........................................ 255
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 255
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 255
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 255
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 257
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 258
Component Inspection ......................................... 261
Remove and Installation ....................................... 261
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 262
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 262
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 262
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 263
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 269
Component Description ........................................ 269
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 269
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 269
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 270
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 271
Component Inspection ......................................... 272
Removal and Installation ...................................... 272
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 273
Component Description ........................................ 273
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 273
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 273
Revision: March 2005
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 273
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 275
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 276
Component Inspection .......................................... 278
Removal and Installation ...................................... 279
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 280
Component Description ........................................ 280
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 280
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 280
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 282
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 283
Component Inspection .......................................... 285
Removal and Installation ...................................... 286
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 287
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 287
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 287
Overall Function Check ........................................ 288
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 288
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 292
System Description ............................................... 292
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 292
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 293
Overall Function Check ........................................ 293
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 294
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 298
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 298
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 299
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 300
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 306
Description ............................................................ 306
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 306
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 307
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 308
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 309
Component Inspection .......................................... 311
Removal and Installation ...................................... 311
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ..................................................................... 312
Component Description ........................................ 312
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 312
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 312
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 312
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 314
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 315
Component Inspection .......................................... 317
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR ................................................................. 319
Component Description ........................................ 319
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 319
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 319
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 320
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 320
Component Inspection .......................................... 321
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
EC-3
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SENSOR .................................................................. 322
Component Description ........................................ 322
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 322
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 322
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 323
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 324
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 325
Component Inspection .......................................... 327
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR .................................................................. 328
Component Description ........................................ 328
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 328
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 328
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 329
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 330
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 331
Component Inspection .......................................... 334
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 335
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 335
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 336
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 337
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 343
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 343
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 344
Overall Function Check ........................................ 345
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 346
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 353
Component Description ........................................ 353
On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 353
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 353
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 354
Removal and Installation ...................................... 354
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 355
Component Description ........................................ 355
On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 355
Overall Function Check ........................................ 355
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 356
Removal and Installation ...................................... 356
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......... 357
Component Description ........................................ 357
On Board Diagnostic Logic ................................... 357
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 357
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 358
Removal and Installation ...................................... 358
DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 359
Description ............................................................ 359
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 359
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 359
Overall Function Check ........................................ 359
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 360
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 361
Description ............................................................ 361
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 361
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 361
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 362
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 363
Description ............................................................ 363
Revision: March 2005
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 363
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 363
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 364
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 365
Component Description ........................................ 365
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.365
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 365
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 365
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 366
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 367
Component Inspection .......................................... 369
DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 370
Component Description ........................................ 370
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 370
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 370
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 371
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ........ 373
Description ............................................................ 373
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.373
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 373
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 373
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 374
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 375
Component Inspection .......................................... 377
Removal and Installation ....................................... 377
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 378
Component Description ........................................ 378
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 378
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 378
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 379
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 380
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 382
Component Description ........................................ 382
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.382
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 383
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 384
Component Inspection .......................................... 385
Removal and Installation ....................................... 385
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR ............................................................. 386
Component Description ........................................ 386
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 386
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 386
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 387
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION .............................................................. 388
Description ............................................................ 388
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 388
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 388
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 389
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 390
Component Inspection .......................................... 393
Remove and Installation ....................................... 393
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
EC-4
2005 Altima
RELAY .................................................................... 394
Component Description ........................................ 394
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 394
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 394
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 394
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 396
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 397
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 399
Component Description ........................................ 399
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 399
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 399
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 400
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 401
Component Inspection ......................................... 402
Removal and Installation ...................................... 403
DTC P1146 HO2S2 ................................................. 404
Component Description ........................................ 404
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 404
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 404
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 405
Overall Function Check ........................................ 405
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 407
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 408
Component Inspection ......................................... 410
Removal and Installation .......................................411
DTC P1147 HO2S2 ................................................. 412
Component Description ........................................ 412
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 412
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 412
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 413
Overall Function Check ........................................ 413
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 415
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 416
Component Inspection ......................................... 418
Removal and Installation ...................................... 419
DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ................ 420
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 420
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 421
Description ........................................................... 421
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 422
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 422
Overall Function Check ........................................ 423
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 425
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 427
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 432
Component Inspection ......................................... 432
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 434
Component Description ........................................ 434
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 434
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 434
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 435
Remove and Installation ....................................... 435
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 436
Component Description ........................................ 436
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 436
Revision: March 2005
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 436
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 437
Remove and Installation ....................................... 437
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 438
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 438
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 438
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 439
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 440
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 443
Component Description ........................................ 443
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 443
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 443
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 443
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 445
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 446
Removal and Installation ...................................... 447
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 448
Component Description ........................................ 448
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 448
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 448
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 448
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 450
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 451
Removal and Installation ...................................... 452
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 453
Component Description ........................................ 453
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 453
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 453
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 453
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 455
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 456
Removal and Installation ...................................... 459
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 460
Component Description ........................................ 460
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 460
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 460
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 460
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 462
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 463
Removal and Installation ...................................... 466
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 467
Component Description ........................................ 467
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 467
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 467
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 467
Overall Function Check ........................................ 468
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 470
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 471
Removal and Installation ...................................... 472
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 473
Component Description ........................................ 473
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 473
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473
EC-5
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 474
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 476
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 477
Removal and Installation ...................................... 481
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 482
Component Description ........................................ 482
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 482
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 482
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 483
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 485
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 486
Removal and Installation ...................................... 490
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 491
Description ............................................................ 491
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 491
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 492
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 492
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 493
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 494
Component Inspection .......................................... 497
Removal and Installation ...................................... 497
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ..................................................................... 498
Component Description ........................................ 498
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 498
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 498
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 498
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 500
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 501
Component Inspection .......................................... 502
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 504
Component Description ........................................ 504
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 504
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 504
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 508
Component Inspection .......................................... 509
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 511
Component Description ........................................ 511
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 511
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 511
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 512
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 513
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 515
Component Inspection .......................................... 520
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 522
Component Description ........................................ 522
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 522
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 522
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 523
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 524
Component Description ........................................ 524
Revision: March 2005
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.524
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 524
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 524
Overall Function Check ......................................... 525
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 526
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 528
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE . 532
Component Description ........................................ 532
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.532
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 532
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 532
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 533
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 534
Component Inspection .......................................... 535
Removal and Installation ....................................... 536
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 537
Description ............................................................ 537
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.537
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 537
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 537
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 538
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 539
Component Inspection .......................................... 540
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 542
Component Description ........................................ 542
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.542
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 542
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 542
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 544
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 545
Component Inspection .......................................... 547
Removal and Installation ....................................... 548
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 549
Component Description ........................................ 549
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.549
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 549
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 549
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 551
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 552
Component Inspection .......................................... 556
Remove and Installation ....................................... 556
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 557
Component Description ........................................ 557
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.557
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 557
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 557
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 559
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 560
Component Inspection .......................................... 563
Remove and Installation ....................................... 563
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 564
Component Description ........................................ 564
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-6
2005 Altima
. 564
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 564
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 565
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 566
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 567
Component Inspection ......................................... 571
Remove and Installation ....................................... 571
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 572
Component Description ........................................ 572
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 573
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 578
Component Inspection ......................................... 581
Removal and Installation ...................................... 582
VIAS ........................................................................ 583
Description ........................................................... 583
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 584
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 585
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 587
Component Inspection ......................................... 590
Removal and Installation ...................................... 591
INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 592
Component Description ........................................ 592
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 592
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 593
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 594
Component Inspection ......................................... 597
Removal and Installation ...................................... 597
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 598
Description ........................................................... 598
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 598
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 599
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 600
Component Inspection ......................................... 603
Removal and Installation ...................................... 604
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 605
Component Description ........................................ 605
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 606
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 607
Removal and Installation ...................................... 609
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 610
Description ........................................................... 610
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 610
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ..........................................611
Component Description .........................................611
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
..611
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 612
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 614
ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 620
Component Description ........................................ 620
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 620
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 621
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 622
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 623
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 623
Revision: March 2005
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 625
Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 625
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 625
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 625
Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 625
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 625
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 625
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 625
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 625
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 625
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 625
Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 626
Injector .................................................................. 626
Fuel Pump ............................................................ 626
A
EC
C
D
E
VQ
INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 627
DTC No. Index ...................................................... 627
Alphabetical Index ................................................ 630
PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 635
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 635
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
A/T ........................................................................ 635
Precaution ............................................................ 635
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 638
PREPARATION ....................................................... 639
Special Service Tools ........................................... 639
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 641
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 642
System Diagram ................................................... 642
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 643
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 645
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Speed) .................................................................. 646
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 647
Input/Output Signal Chart ..................................... 647
System Description ............................................... 647
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 648
System Description ............................................... 648
Component Description ........................................ 649
CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 650
System Description ............................................... 650
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 651
Description ............................................................ 651
Component Inspection .......................................... 656
Removal and Installation ...................................... 657
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 657
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY
(ORVR) .................................................................... 660
System Description ............................................... 660
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 661
Component Inspection .......................................... 663
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 665
Description ............................................................ 665
Component Inspection .......................................... 665
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-
EC-7
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
NATS) ...................................................................... 667
Description ............................................................ 667
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 668
Introduction ........................................................... 668
Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 668
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 669
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 685
OBD System Operation Chart .............................. 687
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 693
Basic Inspection ................................................... 693
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 698
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ............................... 700
VIN Registration ................................................... 711
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 711
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 711
Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 712
Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 714
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 716
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 716
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 722
Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 724
Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 725
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 729
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 736
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 738
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 740
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 740
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 750
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 763
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 766
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 770
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 772
Description ............................................................ 772
Testing Condition .................................................. 772
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 772
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 773
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 782
Description ............................................................ 782
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 782
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 783
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 783
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 784
Ground Inspection ................................................ 789
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 790
Description ............................................................ 790
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 790
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 790
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 791
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 792
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ........................ 793
Description ............................................................ 793
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 793
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 794
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 794
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 795
Revision: March 2005
Component Inspection .......................................... 796
Removal and Installation ....................................... 796
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.797
Description ............................................................ 797
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.797
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 797
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 798
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 799
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 802
Component Inspection .......................................... 804
Removal and Installation ....................................... 805
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 806
Component Description ........................................ 806
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.806
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 806
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 807
Overall Function Check ......................................... 808
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 809
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 810
Component Inspection .......................................... 812
Removal and Installation ....................................... 814
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 815
Component Description ........................................ 815
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.815
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 815
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 816
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 817
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 818
Component Inspection .......................................... 820
Removal and Installation ....................................... 821
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 822
Component Description ........................................ 822
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 822
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 822
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 823
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 824
Component Inspection .......................................... 825
Removal and Installation ....................................... 825
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 826
Component Description ........................................ 826
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 826
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 827
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 828
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 829
Component Inspection .......................................... 830
Removal and Installation ....................................... 830
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 831
Component Description ........................................ 831
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.831
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 831
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 832
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 833
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 834
Component Inspection .......................................... 837
Removal and Installation ......................................
EC-8
2005 Altima
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ..................................... 838
Component Description ........................................ 838
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 838
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 839
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 839
Component Inspection ......................................... 840
Removal and Installation ...................................... 840
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ....................................... 841
Component Description ........................................ 841
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 841
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 841
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 842
Component Inspection ......................................... 843
Removal and Installation ...................................... 843
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................ 844
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 844
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 844
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 844
Component Inspection ......................................... 845
Removal and Installation ...................................... 845
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 .................................... 846
Component Description ........................................ 846
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 846
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 846
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 847
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 848
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 851
Component Inspection ......................................... 854
Removal and Installation ...................................... 855
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .................................... 856
Component Description ........................................ 856
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 856
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 856
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 857
Overall Function Check ........................................ 857
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 859
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 862
Component Inspection ......................................... 865
Removal and Installation ...................................... 867
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION .............................................................. 868
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 868
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 868
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 870
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 872
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION .............................................................. 879
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 879
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 879
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 881
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 883
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 890
Component Description ........................................ 890
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 890
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 890
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 892
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 893
Revision: March 2005
Component Inspection .......................................... 894
Removal and Installation ...................................... 894
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 895
Component Description ........................................ 895
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 895
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 895
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 896
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 897
Component Inspection .......................................... 898
Removal and Installation ...................................... 898
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 899
Component Description ........................................ 899
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 899
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 899
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 900
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 901
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 902
Component Inspection .......................................... 905
Removal and Installation ...................................... 905
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 906
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 906
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 906
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 907
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 916
Component Description ........................................ 916
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 916
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 916
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 917
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 918
Component Inspection .......................................... 920
Removal and Installation ...................................... 920
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 921
Component Description ........................................ 921
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 921
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 921
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 921
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 923
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 924
Component Inspection .......................................... 927
Removal and Installation ...................................... 927
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ........ 928
Component Description ........................................ 928
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 928
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 928
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 930
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 933
Component Inspection .......................................... 936
Removal and Installation ...................................... 936
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION ................................. 937
Description ............................................................ 937
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 939
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 939
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 939
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 941
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 942
EC-9
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ...... 945
Description ............................................................ 945
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 946
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 946
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 946
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 947
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 948
Component Inspection .......................................... 949
Removal and Installation ...................................... 951
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR ...................... 952
Component Description ........................................ 952
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 952
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 953
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 955
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 956
Component Inspection .......................................... 957
Removal and Installation ...................................... 958
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ........................................................................ 959
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 959
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 959
Overall Function Check ........................................ 960
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 961
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 964
System Description ............................................... 964
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 964
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 964
Overall Function Check ........................................ 965
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 966
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 969
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 969
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 970
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 971
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 977
Description ............................................................ 977
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 977
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 978
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 978
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 979
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 981
Component Inspection .......................................... 983
Removal and Installation ...................................... 983
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ..................................................................... 984
Component Description ........................................ 984
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 984
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 984
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 985
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 986
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 987
Component Inspection .......................................... 989
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR .................................................................. 991
Component Description ........................................ 991
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Revision: March 2005
.991
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 991
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 992
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 992
Component Inspection .......................................... 993
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR .................................................................. 994
Component Description ........................................ 994
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.994
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 994
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 995
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 996
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 997
Component Inspection .......................................... 999
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR .................................................................
1000
Component Description .......................................
1000
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1000
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1000
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1001
Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1002
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1003
Component Inspection .........................................
1007
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................
1008
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1008
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1009
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1010
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................
1016
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1016
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1017
Overall Function Check ........................................
1018
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1019
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................
1025
Component Description .......................................
1025
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1025
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1025
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1026
Removal and Installation ......................................
1026
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................
1027
Component Description .......................................
1027
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1027
Overall Function Check ........................................
1027
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1028
Removal and Installation ......................................
1028
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ..........
1029
Component Description .......................................
1029
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1029
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1029
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1030
Removal and Installation ......................................
1030
DTC P0500 VSS .....................................................
1031
Description ...........................................................
1031
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1031
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1031
Overall Function Check ........................................
1031
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1032
EC-10
2005 Altima
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1033
Description ..........................................................1033
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1033
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1033
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1034
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................1035
Description ..........................................................1035
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1035
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1035
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1036
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................1037
Component Description .......................................1037
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1037
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1037
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1037
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1038
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1039
Component Inspection ........................................1041
DTC P0605 ECM ...................................................1042
Component Description .......................................1042
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1042
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1042
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1043
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1
HEATER .................................................................1045
Description ..........................................................1045
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1045
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1045
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1045
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1047
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1050
Component Inspection ........................................1052
Removal and Installation .....................................1052
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................1053
Component Description .......................................1053
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1053
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1053
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1054
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1055
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE ....................................................................1057
Component Description .......................................1057
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1057
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1057
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1057
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1058
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1061
Component Inspection ........................................1064
Removal and Installation .....................................1065
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR ...........................................................1066
Component Description .......................................1066
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1066
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1066
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1067
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Revision: March 2005
FUNCTION .............................................................1068
Description ...........................................................1068
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1068
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1068
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1069
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1070
Component Inspection .........................................1073
Remove and Installation ......................................1073
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY ....................................................................1074
Component Description .......................................1074
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1074
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1074
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1074
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1076
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1077
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........1079
Component Description .......................................1079
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1079
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1079
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1080
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1081
Component Inspection .........................................1082
Removal and Installation .....................................1083
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ....................................1084
Component Description .......................................1084
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1084
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1084
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1085
Overall Function Check .......................................1085
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1087
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1090
Component Inspection .........................................1093
Removal and Installation .....................................1095
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ....................................1096
Component Description .......................................1096
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1096
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1096
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1097
Overall Function Check .......................................1097
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1099
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1102
Component Inspection .........................................1105
Removal and Installation .....................................1107
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ...1108
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1108
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .........................1109
Description ...........................................................1109
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1109
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1109
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1109
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ...........1110
Description ...........................................................1110
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1110
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1110
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1110
EC-11
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1111
Description ...........................................................1111
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1112
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1113
Overall Function Check .......................................1113
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1115
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1117
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ..........................1122
Component Inspection .........................................1122
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1123
Component Description .......................................1123
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1123
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1123
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1124
Removal and Installation .....................................1124
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1125
Component Description .......................................1125
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1125
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1125
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1126
Removal and Installation .....................................1126
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1127
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1127
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1127
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1128
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1129
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1132
Component Description .......................................1132
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1132
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1132
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1132
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1134
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1137
Removal and Installation .....................................1139
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1140
Component Description .......................................1140
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1140
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1140
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1140
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1142
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1145
Removal and Installation .....................................1147
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1148
Component Description .......................................1148
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1148
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1148
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1148
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1150
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1153
Removal and Installation .....................................1156
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1157
Component Description .......................................1157
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1157
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1157
Revision: March 2005
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1157
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1159
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1162
Removal and Installation ......................................1165
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1166
Component Description .......................................1166
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1166
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1166
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1166
Overall Function Check ........................................1167
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1169
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1172
Removal and Installation ......................................1174
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1175
Component Description .......................................1175
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1175
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1175
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1176
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1178
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1181
Removal and Installation ......................................1186
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 .......................1187
Component Description .......................................1187
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1187
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1187
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1188
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1190
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1193
Removal and Installation ......................................1198
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION .................................1199
Description ...........................................................1199
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1201
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1201
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1201
Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1203
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1204
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..............................
1206
Description ...........................................................
1206
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1206
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1207
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1207
Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1208
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1210
Component Inspection .........................................
1213
Removal and Installation ......................................
1213
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE .....................................................................
1214
Component Description .......................................
1214
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1214
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................
1214
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................
1215
Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1216
EC-12
2005 Altima
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1217
Component Inspection ........................................1218
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ...............1220
Component Description .......................................1220
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1220
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1220
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1221
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1222
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1223
Component Inspection ........................................1226
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................1227
Component Description .......................................1227
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1227
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1227
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1228
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1229
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1231
Component Inspection ........................................1236
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ...1238
Component Description .......................................1238
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1238
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1238
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1239
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH .....................................1240
Component Description .......................................1240
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1240
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1240
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1240
Overall Function Check .......................................1241
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1242
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1245
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1248
Component Description .......................................1248
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1248
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1248
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1248
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1249
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1250
Component Inspection ........................................1251
Removal and Installation .....................................1252
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ...............................1253
Description ..........................................................1253
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1253
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1253
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1253
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1254
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1255
Component Inspection ........................................1257
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .......................1258
Component Description .......................................1258
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1258
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1258
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1259
Revision: March 2005
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1260
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1261
Component Inspection .........................................1263
Removal and Installation .....................................1264
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................1265
Component Description .......................................1265
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1265
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1265
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1266
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1267
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1268
Component Inspection .........................................1271
Removal and Installation .....................................1271
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1272
Component Description .......................................1272
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1272
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1272
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1273
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1274
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1275
Component Inspection .........................................1278
Removal and Installation .....................................1278
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................1279
Component Description .......................................1279
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1279
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1279
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1280
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1281
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1282
Component Inspection .........................................1286
Removal and Installation .....................................1286
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1287
Component Description .......................................1287
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1288
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1293
Component Inspection .........................................1298
Removal and Installation .....................................1299
VIAS .......................................................................1300
Description ...........................................................1300
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1301
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1302
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1303
Component Inspection .........................................1306
Removal and Installation .....................................1307
INJECTOR CIRCUIT ..............................................1308
Component Description .......................................1308
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1308
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1309
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1310
Component Inspection .........................................1315
Removal and Installation .....................................1315
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ...........................................1316
Description ...........................................................1316
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
EC-13
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
1316
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1317
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1318
Component Inspection .........................................1321
Removal and Installation .....................................1321
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT 1322
.
System Description ..............................................1322
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1322
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1323
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1324
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................1327
Component Description .......................................1327
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1328
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1329
Removal and Installation .....................................1331
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ...............................1332
Description ...........................................................1332
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1332
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1332
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .........................................1333
Component Description .......................................1333
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1333
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1334
Revision: March 2005
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1336
Component Inspection .........................................
1341
ASCD INDICATOR .................................................
1343
Component Description .......................................
1343
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
1343
Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1344
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................
1345
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR .....................
1346
Wiring Diagram ....................................................
1346
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...
1348
Fuel Pressure .......................................................
1348
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................
1348
Calculated Load Value .........................................
1348
Mass Air Flow Sensor ..........................................
1348
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................
1348
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ...................
1348
EGR Temperature Sensor ....................................
1348
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater ...................
1348
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater .........................
1348
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ......................
1349
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ....................
1349
Throttle Control Motor ..........................................
1349
Injector .................................................................
1349
Fuel Pump ............................................................
1349
EC-14
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index
PFP:00024
A
UBS002NS
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
C
Reference page
U1000
1000*4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-166
U1001
1001*4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-166
P0000
0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011
0011
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
EC-169
P0037
0037
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-173
P0038
0038
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-173
P0101
0101
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-178
P0102
0102
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-187
P0103
0103
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-187
P0112
0112
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-194
P0113
0113
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-194
P0117
0117
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-199
P0118
0118
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-199
P0122
0122
TP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-204
P0123
0123
TP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-204
P0125
0125
ECT SENSOR
EC-211
P0127
0127
IAT SENSOR
EC-214
P0128
0128
THERMSTAT FNCTN
EC-217
P0138
0138
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-219
P0139
0139
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-225
P0171
0171
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
EC-233
P0172
0172
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
EC-240
P0181
0181
FTT SENSOR
EC-246
P0182
0182
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-251
P0183
0183
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-251
P0222
0222
TP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-255
P0223
0223
TP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-255
P0300
0300
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
EC-262
P0301
0301
CYL 1 MISFIRE
EC-262
P0302
0302
CYL 2 MISFIRE
EC-262
P0303
0303
CYL 3 MISFIRE
EC-262
P0304
0304
CYL 4 MISFIRE
EC-262
P0327
0327
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-269
P0328
0328
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-269
P0335
0335
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-273
Revision: March 2005
EC-15
D
E
—
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
3
Reference page
GST*2
ECM*
P0340
0340
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-280
P0420
0420
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
EC-287
P0441
0441
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
EC-292
P0442
0442
EVAP SMALL LEAK
EC-298
P0444
0444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-306
P0445
0445
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-306
P0447
0447
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-312
P0451
0451
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-319
P0452
0452
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-322
P0453
0453
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-328
P0455
0455
EVAP GROSS LEAK
EC-335
P0456
0456
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
EC-343
P0460
0460
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
EC-353
P0461
0461
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-355
P0462
0462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-357
P0463
0463
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-357
P0500
0500
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5
EC-359
P0506
0506
ISC SYSTEM
EC-361
P0507
0507
ISC SYSTEM
EC-363
P0550
0550
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
EC-365
P0605
0605
ECM
EC-370
P0705
0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-105
P0710
0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-111
5
P0720
0720
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*
AT-117
P0725
0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
AT-122
P0731
0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-126
P0732
0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-131
P0733
0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-136
P0734
0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-141
P0740
0740
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
AT-148
P0744
0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-153
P0745
0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-161
P0750
0750
SFT SOL A/CIRC
AT-167
P0755
0755
SFT SOL B/CIRC
AT-172
P1031
1031
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-373
P1032
1032
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-373
P1065
1065
ECM BACK UP/CIRC
EC-378
P1111
1111
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
EC-382
P1121
1121
ETC ACTR
EC-386
P1122
1122
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
EC-388
P1124
1124
ETC MOT PWR
EC-394
P1126
1126
ETC MOT PWR
EC-394
Revision: March 2005
EC-16
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
3
A
Reference page
GST*2
ECM*
P1128
1128
ETC MOT
EC-399
P1146
1146
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-404
P1147
1147
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-412
P1148
1148
CLOSED LOOP-B1
EC-420
P1217
1217
ENG OVER TEMP
EC-421
P1225
1225
CTP LEARNING
EC-434
P1226
1226
CTP LEARNING
EC-436
P1229
1229
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
EC-438
P1271
1271
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-443
P1272
1272
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-448
P1273
1273
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-453
P1274
1274
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-460
P1276
1276
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-467
P1278
1278
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-473
P1279
1279
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-482
P1444
1444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-491
P1446
1446
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-498
P1564
1564
ASCD SW
EC-504
P1572
1572
ASCD BRAKE SW
EC-511
P1574
1574
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
EC-522
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
NATS MALFUNCTION
EC-52
P1705
1705
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
AT-177
P1706
1706
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
EC-524
P1760
1760
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
AT-183
P1800
1800
VIAS S/V CIRC
EC-532
P1805
1805
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
EC-537
P2122
2122
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-542
P2123
2123
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-542
P2127
2127
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-549
P2128
2128
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-549
P2135
2135
TP SENSOR
EC-557
P2138
2138
APP SENSOR
EC-564
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
Alphabetical Index
UBS002NR
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-17
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
Reference page
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1271
1271
EC-443
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1272
1272
EC-448
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1273
1273
EC-453
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1274
1274
EC-460
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1276
1276
EC-467
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1278
1278
EC-473
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1279
1279
EC-482
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1031
1031
EC-373
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1032
1032
EC-373
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
0731
AT-126
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
0732
AT-131
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
AT-136
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
AT-141
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
AT-153
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
EC-542
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
EC-542
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
EC-549
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
EC-549
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
EC-564
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
EC-511
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
EC-504
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1574
1574
EC-522
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
AT-111
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
EC-537
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*4
EC-166
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*4
EC-166
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
EC-273
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
EC-420
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
EC-280
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
EC-434
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
EC-436
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
EC-262
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
EC-262
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
EC-262
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
EC-262
ECM
P0605
0605
EC-370
ECM BACK UP/CIRC
P1065
1065
EC-378
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
EC-199
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
EC-199
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
EC-211
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
EC-421
Revision: March 2005
EC-18
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
GST*
2
ECM*3
Reference page
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
0725
AT-122
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
EC-386
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
EC-388
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
EC-399
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
EC-394
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
EC-394
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
EC-335
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
EC-292
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
EC-298
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
EC-319
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
EC-322
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
EC-328
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
EC-343
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
EC-251
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
EC-251
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
EC-246
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
EC-353
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
EC-355
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
EC-357
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
EC-357
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
EC-233
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
EC-240
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
EC-219
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
EC-225
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
EC-404
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
EC-412
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
EC-173
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
EC-173
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
EC-194
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
EC-194
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
EC-214
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
EC-169
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
1111
EC-382
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
EC-361
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
EC-363
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
EC-269
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
EC-269
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
AT-161
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
EC-178
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
EC-187
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
EC-187
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
EC-262
Revision: March 2005
EC-19
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
NATS MALFUNCTION
CONSULT-II
GST*2
ECM*3
Reference page
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
BL-107
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
1760
AT-183
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
EC-524
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
AT-105
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
EC-306
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
EC-306
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
EC-491
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
EC-365
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
EC-438
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
0750
AT-167
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
0755
AT-172
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
0740
AT-148
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
EC-217
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
EC-255
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
EC-255
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
EC-204
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
EC-204
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
EC-557
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
P1705
1705
AT-177
P0420
0420
EC-287
P0720
0720
AT-117
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5
P0500
0500
EC-359
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
EC-312
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
EC-498
VIAS S/V CIRC
P1800
1800
EC-532
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*
5
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
Revision: March 2005
EC-20
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
UBS00IIV
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T
UBS002NU
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" .
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution
●
●
●
●
UBS002NV
Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
Revision: March 2005
EC-21
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
Do not disassemble ECM.
If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
Diagnostic trouble codes
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
Freeze frame data
1st trip freeze frame data
System readiness test (SRT) codes
Test values
PBIB1164E
When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
SEC406D
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded
operation of ICs, etc.
Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-120 .
Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents.
Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Revision: March 2005
EC-22
PBIB0090E
MEF040D
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
●
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
A
EC
C
SEF217U
D
●
●
When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF348N
●
●
Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
K
L
M
BBIA0081E
Revision: March 2005
EC-23
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
●
●
●
Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily.
Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
●
–
–
–
–
When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location.
Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller.
Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
SEF708Y
UBS002NW
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: March 2005
EC-24
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
UBS002NX
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
EC
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
C
D
S-NT564
KV10117100
(J-36471-A)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
E
F
S-NT379
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
G
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
H
I
S-NT636
(J-44321)
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
Checking fuel pressure
J
K
LEC642
(J-44321-6)
Fuel pressure adapter
Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector type fuel lines.
L
M
LBIA0376E
(J-44626)
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
LEM054
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine
room.
PBIC0198E
Revision: March 2005
EC-25
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV109E0010
(J-46209)
Break-out box
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
S-NT825
KV109E0080
(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
S-NT826
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name (KentMoore No.)
UBS002NY
Description
Leak detector
i.e.:(J-41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
S-NT703
EVAP service port
adapter
i.e.:(J-41413-OBD)
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter
i.e.: (J-41416)
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
S-NT815
Socket wrench
Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor
S-NT705
Revision: March 2005
EC-26
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR]
Tool name (KentMoore No.)
Description
A
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
i.e.: (J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor
EC
C
AEM488
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
Anti-seize lubricant
i.e.: (PermatexTM
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
D
E
S-NT779
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-27
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
PFP:23710
UBS002NZ
PBIB2585E
Revision: March 2005
EC-28
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
UBS002O2
A
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking condition
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
1
Heated oxygen sensor 2*
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Vehicle speed sensor*2
Vehicle speed
Air conditioner switch*2
Air conditioner operation
Battery
Battery voltage*3
ECM
function
Actuator
EC
C
D
Fuel injection & mixture ratio
control
Fuel injector
E
F
G
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.
●
During warm-up
●
When starting the engine
●
During acceleration
●
Hot-engine operation
●
When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
●
High-load, high-speed operation
●
During deceleration
●
During high engine speed operation
Revision: March 2005
EC-29
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
SEF503YB
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-443, "DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture ratio
within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
●
Deceleration and acceleration
●
High-load, high-speed operation
●
Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
●
Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
●
High engine coolant temperature
●
During warm-up
●
After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
●
When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
Revision: March 2005
EC-30
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A
EC
C
SEF337W
D
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
E
F
G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
UBS002O3
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
I
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor*1
Vehicle speed
Battery
Battery voltage*2
ECM function
Actuator
J
K
Ignition
timing control
Power transistor
L
M
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
●
At starting
●
During warm-up
●
At idle
Revision: March 2005
H
EC-31
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
At low battery voltage
●
During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
●
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed)
UBS002O5
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Input Signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Neutral position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Vehicle speed sensor*
Vehicle speed
Fuel cut
control
Fuel injector
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-29 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-32
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
[QR]
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
Input/output Signal Chart
Sensor
1
PFP:23710
A
UBS00IIX
Input Signal to ECM
Air conditioner switch*
Air conditioner ON signal
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
1
Vehicle speed sensor*
Vehicle speed
Battery
Battery voltage*2
ECM function
Actuator
EC
C
Air conditioner
cut control
Air conditioner relay
E
F
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
System Description
D
UBS00IIY
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
●
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
●
When cranking the engine.
●
At high engine speeds.
●
When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
●
When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
●
When engine speed is excessively low.
●
When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-33
2005 Altima
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
PFP:18930
UBS0034F
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
ASCD brake switch
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
Clutch pedal operation
ASCD steering switch
ASCD steering switch operation
Park/Neutral position (PNP)
switch (A/T models)
Gear position
Combination meter*
Vehicle speed
TCM*
Powertrain revolution
ASCD vehicle speed control
Electric throttle control
actuator
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
●
CANCEL switch is depressed
●
Brake pedal is depressed
●
Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
●
Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models)
If CRUISE switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and
vehicle speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing CRUISE switch
is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
●
Brake pedal is released.
●
Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
●
A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
Revision: March 2005
EC-34
2005 Altima
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
●
Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
A
Component Description
UBS0034G
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-504 .
EC
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-511 .
C
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-511 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
D
Refer to EC-511 .
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
E
Refer to EC-386 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-620 .
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-35
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[QR]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
UBS002O6
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.
Revision: March 2005
EC-36
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description
PFP:14950
A
UBS00CF3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB2037E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-37
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
BBIA0293E
NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
Revision: March 2005
EC-38
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0413E
Revision: March 2005
EC-39
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS00CF4
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1212E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1.
Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2.
Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
Vacuum:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa
(0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
−6.0 to −3.4 kPa
(−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-306
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-246 .
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-312 .
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-322 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-40
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAP SERVICE PORT
A
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
C
SEF462UC
Removal and Installation
D
UBS00CF5
EVAP CANISTER
E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
F
G
H
I
J
K
BBIA0246E
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
L
M
PBIB1384E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
UBS00CF6
CAUTION:
●
Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
●
Do not start engine.
●
Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-41
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
PEF838U
6.
7.
Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
PEF917U
8.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UC
Revision: March 2005
EC-42
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
3.
Apply battery voltage to the terminal of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system.
A
EC
C
BBIA0526E
4.
5.
6.
To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-43
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
System Description
PFP:00032
UBS00CFA
PBIB1387E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
●
Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
●
Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
●
Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
–
Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
–
Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
–
Disconnect battery ground cable.
●
Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
●
Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
●
Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
●
After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
●
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
Revision: March 2005
EC-44
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CFB
A
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
C
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
D
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
E
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
F
G
H
PBIB1213E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
I
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
L
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
M
Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
Revision: March 2005
EC-45
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1213E
3.
REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace filler neck tube.
Revision: March 2005
EC-46
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
A
Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
EC
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
C
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube.
D
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
E
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
F
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
H
I
J
K
SEF665U
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-47
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS00CFC
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" .
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0248E
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" .
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel gauge retainer.
Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Revision: March 2005
EC-48
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[QR]
d.
Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
A
EC
C
D
E
F
BBIA0248E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-49
2005 Altima
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
PFP:11810
UBS0034D
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection
UBS0034E
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
Revision: March 2005
EC-50
2005 Altima
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1.
2.
A
Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
EC
C
S-ET277
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-51
2005 Altima
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
[QR]
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Description
●
●
●
PFP:25386
UBS00IIT
If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in
the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II.
When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
SEF543X
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.
Revision: March 2005
EC-52
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
PFP:00028
A
UBS002OD
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
EC
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data
Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code
Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
Service $07 of SAE J1979
C
D
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits
Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID
Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
E
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC
1st trip DTC
Freeze Frame
data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code
SRT status
Test value
CONSULT-II
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
GST
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
ECM
×
×*
—
—
—
×
—
G
H
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-107 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic
I
UBS002OE
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable
MIL
DTC
1st trip
Items
1st trip DTC
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
—
—
—
×
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
—
—
—
×
—
×
×
—
Blinking
Blinking
Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected
×
—
—
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0304 is being detected
—
—
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-107 .)
—
Except above
—
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
EC-53
J
K
—: Not applicable
2nd trip
Lighting
up
Revision: March 2005
F
2005 Altima
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
UBS00IIS
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference
page
ECM*3
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*6
—
—
1
×
EC-166
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*6
—
—
2
—
EC-166
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
—
—
Flashing*7
EC-61
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
—
—
2
×
EC-169
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
×
×
2
×
EC-173
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
×
×
2
×
EC-173
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
—
—
2
×
EC-178
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
—
—
1
×
EC-187
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
—
—
1
×
EC-187
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
—
—
2
×
EC-194
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
—
—
2
×
EC-194
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
—
—
1
×
EC-199
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
—
—
1
×
EC-199
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
—
—
1
×
EC-204
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
—
—
1
×
EC-204
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
—
—
1
×
EC-211
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
—
—
2
×
EC-214
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
—
—
2
×
EC-217
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
—
×
2
×
EC-219
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
×
×
2
×
EC-225
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
—
—
2
×
EC-233
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
—
—
2
×
EC-240
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
—
—
2
×
EC-246
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
—
—
2
×
EC-251
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
—
—
2
×
EC-251
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
—
—
1
×
EC-255
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
—
—
1
×
EC-255
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
—
—
2
×
EC-262
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
—
—
2
×
EC-262
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
—
—
2
×
EC-262
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
—
—
2
×
EC-262
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
—
—
2
×
EC-262
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
—
—
2
—
EC-269
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
—
—
2
—
EC-269
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
—
—
2
×
EC-273
Revision: March 2005
EC-54
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference
page
A
EC
ECM*3
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
—
—
2
×
EC-280
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
×
×
2
×
EC-287
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
×
×
2
×
EC-292
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
×
×
2
×
EC-298
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
—
—
2
×
EC-306
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
—
—
2
×
EC-306
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
—
—
2
×
EC-312
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
—
—
2
×
EC-319
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
—
—
2
×
EC-322
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
—
—
2
×
EC-328
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
—
—
2
×
EC-335
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
×*4
×
2
×
EC-343
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
—
—
2
×
EC-353
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
—
—
2
×
EC-355
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
—
—
2
×
EC-357
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
—
—
2
×
EC-357
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5
P0500
0500
—
—
2
×
EC-359
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
—
—
2
×
EC-361
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
—
—
2
×
EC-363
PW STP SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
—
—
2
—
EC-365
ECM
P0605
0605
—
—
1 or 2
× or —
EC-370
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
—
—
2
×
AT-105
P0710
0710
—
—
2
×
AT-111
P0720
0720
—
—
2
×
AT-117
ENGINE SPEED SIG
P0725
0725
—
—
2
×
AT-122
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
0731
—
—
2
×
AT-126
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
0732
—
—
2
×
AT-131
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
—
—
2
×
AT-136
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
VEH SPD SEN/CIR
AT*5
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
—
—
2
×
AT-141
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
P0740
0740
—
—
2
×
AT-148
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
—
—
2
×
AT-153
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
—
—
2
×
AT-161
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
0750
—
—
1
×
AT-167
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
0755
—
—
1
×
AT-172
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1031
1031
×
×
2
×
EC-373
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1032
1032
×
×
2
×
EC-373
ECM BACK UP/CIRC
P1065
1065
—
—
2
×
EC-378
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
1111
—
—
2
×
EC-382
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
—
—
1
×
EC-386
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
—
—
1
×
EC-388
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
—
—
1
×
EC-394
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
—
—
1
×
EC-394
Revision: March 2005
EC-55
2005 Altima
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting up
Reference
page
ECM*3
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
—
—
1
×
EC-399
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
×
×
2
×
EC-404
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
×
×
2
×
EC-412
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
—
—
1
×
EC-420
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
—
—
1
×
EC-421
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
—
—
2
—
EC-434
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
—
—
2
—
EC-436
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
—
—
1
×
EC-438
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1271
1271
—
×
2
×
EC-443
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1272
1272
—
×
2
×
EC-448
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1273
1273
—
×
2
×
EC-453
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1274
1274
—
×
2
×
EC-460
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1276
1276
—
×
2
×
EC-467
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1278
1278
×
×
2
×
EC-473
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1279
1279
×
×
2
×
EC-482
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
—
—
2
×
EC-491
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
—
—
2
×
EC-498
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
—
—
1
—
EC-504
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
—
—
1
—
EC-511
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1574
1574
—
—
1
—
EC-522
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 P1615
1610 - 1615
—
—
2
—
BL-84
TPV SEN/CIRC A/T
P1705
1705
—
—
1
×
AT-177
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
—
—
2
×
EC-524
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
P1760
1760
—
—
2
×
AT-183
VIAS S/V CIRC
P1800
1800
—
—
2
—
EC-532
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
—
—
2
—
EC-537
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
—
—
1
×
EC-542
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
—
—
1
×
EC-542
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
—
—
1
×
EC-549
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
—
—
1
×
EC-549
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
—
—
1
×
EC-557
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
—
—
1
×
EC-564
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Made II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-61, "How to Display SRT Status" .
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
Revision: March 2005
EC-56
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required A
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecEC
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-65, "HOW C
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ D
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
E
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-100, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli- F
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
WITH CONSULT-II
WITH GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
NO TOOLS
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
●
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●
Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be 0.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
Revision: March 2005
EC-57
2005 Altima
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-57, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
Items
Freeze frame data
2
3
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
Revision: March 2005
EC-58
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
SRT Item
A
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indication)
Performance
Corresponding DTC
No.
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
1
Priority*
CATALYST
2
Three way catalyst function
P0420
EVAP SYSTEM
1
EVAP control system
P0442
2
EVAP control system
P0456
2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
2
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
P1278, P1279
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0139
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1146
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1147
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater
P1031, P1032
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037, P0038
HO2S
HO2S HTR
2
EC
C
D
E
F
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing
G
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
H
Example
Self-diagnosis result
All OK
Case 1
Case 2
NG exists
Case 3
Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON →
Diagnosis
← ON →
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
P0402
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
— (1)
P0402
— (0)
— (0)
OK (1)
— (1)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK
OK
—
—
P0402
—
—
—
—
P1402
NG
—
NG
NG
(Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC
—
1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
OFF
OFF
← ON →
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
Revision: March 2005
EC-59
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
●
The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
●
The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
●
When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
●
If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
Revision: March 2005
EC-60
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2320E
*1
EC-57
*2
EC-61
*3
EC-62
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
Revision: March 2005
EC-61
SEF949Z
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-59, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
Revision: March 2005
EC-62
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Driving Pattern
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2314E
Revision: March 2005
EC-63
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
●
Sea level
●
Flat road
●
Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
●
Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
●
The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
●
The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
●
The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
●
When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
●
Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
●
Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
●
The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steadystate driving.
●
If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
PBIB2244E
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
●
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
For normal acceleration in low
altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
For quick acceleration in low altitude areas
For high attitude areas
[over 1,219m (4,000 ft)]:
ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH)
km/h (MPH)
km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd
24 (15)
24 (15)
24 (15)
2nd to 3rd
28 (18)
40 (25)
40 (25)
3rd to 4th
48 (30)
57 (36)
64 (40)
4th to 5th
62 (39)
64 (40)
75 (45)
Gear change
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Revision: March 2005
EC-64
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear
km/h (MPH)
1st
50 (30)
2nd
90 (55)
3rd
—
4th
—
5th
—
A
EC
C
D
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen.
Test value (GST display)
Item
Self-diagnostic test item
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function
EVAP
SYSTEM
DTC
Test limit
Conversion
01H
Max.
1/128
02H
81H
Min.
1
P0442
05H
03H
Max.
1/128 mm2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
06H
83H
Min.
20 mV
EVAP control system (Very small leak)
P0456
07H
03H
Max.
1/128 mm
P1271
41H
8EH
Min.
5 mV
P1272
42H
0EH
Max.
5 mV
P1273
43H
0EH
Max.
0.002
P1274
44H
8EH
Min.
0.002
P1278
45H
8EH
Min.
0.004
P1276
46H
0EH
Max.
5 mV
P1276
47H
8EH
Min.
5 mV
P1279
48H
8EH
Min.
0.004
P0139
19H
86H
Min.
10mV/500 ms
P1147
1AH
86H
Min.
10 mV
P1146
1BH
06H
Max.
10 mV
P0138
1CH
06H
Max.
10 mV
P1032
57H
10H
Max.
5 mV
P1031
58H
90H
Min.
5 mV
P0038
2DH
0AH
Max.
20 mV
P0037
2EH
8AH
Min.
20 mV
TID
CID
P0420
01H
P0420
EVAP control system (Small leak)
A/F sensor 1
HO2S
Heated oxygen sensor 2
A/F sensor 1 heater
HO2S
HEATER
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
G
I
2
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
EC-65
F
H
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
Revision: March 2005
E
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5334E
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" , skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Revision: March 2005
EC-66
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
2.
3.
Perform AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to A
EC-68, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
●
If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
EC
●
The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
–
Diagnostic trouble codes
C
–
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
–
Freeze frame data
–
1st trip freeze frame data
D
–
System readiness test (SRT) codes
–
Test values
–
Others
E
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
UBS002OH
F
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-623, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
G
H
I
SEF217U
J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following 3 functions.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-67
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function
Explanation of Function
Mode I
Ignition switch in
ON position
BULB CHECK
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
Engine stopped
Engine running
Mode II
Ignition switch in
ON position
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
●
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
●
One trip detection diagnoses
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
Engine stopped
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
MIL Flashing Without DTC
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-61, "How to Display
SRT Status" .
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
●
It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●
It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
●
Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
Revision: March 2005
EC-68
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
A
EC
C
PBIB0092E
D
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
3.
Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-68, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
E
F
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" .
G
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL
H
Condition
ON
When the malfunction is detected.
OFF
No malfunction
I
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
J
K
L
M
SEF952W
Revision: March 2005
EC-69
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back-up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC69, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
●
If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
●
Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart
UBS002OI
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
●
●
●
●
●
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-53, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items
MIL (goes off)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
80 (pattern C)
80 (pattern C)
40 (pattern A)
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern B)
*1, *2
*1, *2
1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-72 .
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-74 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Revision: March 2005
EC-70
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C)
without the same malfunction. (The
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared at
the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
Revision: March 2005
EC-71
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●
The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●
The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
●
The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
●
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
●
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
●
The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
●
The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
●
The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
●
The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Revision: March 2005
EC-72
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A)
without the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
Revision: March 2005
EC-73
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
AEC574
●
●
●
The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●
The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●
The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
●
The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
Revision: March 2005
EC-74
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection
PFP:00018
A
UBS002OM
1. INSPECTION START
1.
2.
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Headlamp switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF976U
5.
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-75
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 .
1.
2.
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-76
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
EC
C
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-80 .
E
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
G
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
H
I
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
J
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
K
L
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
M
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-77
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
BBIA0005E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
Revision: March 2005
EC-78
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
A
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 .
EC
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19
NG
>> GO TO 16.
C
D
BBIA0005E
E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
F
G
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
●
I
J
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
K
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
L
M
>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END
Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END
No
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-79
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
UBS002O7
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed in “Service $01” with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1.
2.
3.
Slide the harness protector off the ignition coil No.1 to clear the
wires.
Attach timing light to the wires.
Check ignition timing.
BBIA0089E
Method B
1.
Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
BBIA0004E
2.
Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
BBIA0076E
Revision: March 2005
EC-80
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
A
EC
C
SEF166Y
D
3.
Check ignition timing.
E
F
G
BBIA0005E
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
UBS002O8
H
PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
● Battery
● Ignition system
● Engine oil and coolant levels
● Fuses
● ECM harness connector
● Vacuum hoses
● Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
● Fuel pressure
● Engine compression
● Throttle valve
● Evaporative emission system
On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.
On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position.
When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger.
Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Revision: March 2005
EC-81
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2061E
Revision: March 2005
EC-82
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
A
1. INSPECTION START
1.
2.
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
EC
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
C
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
D
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
E
Headlamp switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
F
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
G
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
H
I
SEF976U
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
5.
K
L
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-83
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under noload, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 .
1.
2.
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-84
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
EC
C
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80
E
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 .
G
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
J
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
K
L
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
M
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-85
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
BBIA0005E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-80 .
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
Revision: March 2005
EC-86
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
A
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-80 .
EC
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
C
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (With GST)>>GO TO 20.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
D
BBIA0005E
E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
F
G
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-280 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-273 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
●
I
J
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
K
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
L
M
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-87
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 21.
1.
2.
3.
20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 21.
Revision: March 2005
EC-88
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-445, "Wiring Diagram" .
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
4
2
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
EC
C
D
E
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.
2. GO TO 4.
G
H
22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
F
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
I
>> GO TO 23.
J
23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
K
>> GO TO 24.
L
24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-89
M
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
25. CHECK CO%
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN”
and “Qd”.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Idle CO: 0.3 − 9.5% and engine runs smoothly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG
>> GO TO 27.
SEF172Y
26. CHECK CO%
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
Check CO%.
Idle CO: 0.3 − 9.5% and engine runs smoothly.
7.
After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature
sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG
>> GO TO 27.
SEF982UA
27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
>> GO TO 31.
28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Replace A/F sensor 1.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30.
Revision: March 2005
EC-90
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
EC
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models).
C
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
D
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
E
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 31.
G
1.
2.
3.
30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with OD OFF (A/T models) or 4th position (M/T models).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set OD ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 31.
Revision: March 2005
EC-91
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary.
Refer toEC-95, "Fuel Pressure Check"
●
Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary.
Refer to EC-178, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" and EC-187, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
●
Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary.
Refer to EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
●
Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary.
Refer to EC-199, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" and EC-211, "DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 33.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 32.
32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM.
Refer to AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" and EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 4.
33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.
VIN Registration
UBS00IIU
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.
PBIB2242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-92
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
UBS002O9
A
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
EC
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
C
D
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
UBS002OA
DESCRIPTION
E
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
F
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning
G
H
UBS002OB
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
●
Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
●
Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
I
J
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
●
Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
●
Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F)
●
PNP switch: ON
●
Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
●
Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
●
Vehicle speed: Stopped
●
Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
Revision: March 2005
EC-93
2005 Altima
K
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
5.
Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF452Y
6.
Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
7.
8.
Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Refer to
EC-80 .
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
MBIB0238E
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
●
It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●
It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-94
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
A
EC
C
D
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications. Refer to EC-80 .
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
M/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
E
F
G
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again:
–
Engine stalls.
–
Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check
3.
4.
5.
K
L
M
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y
Revision: March 2005
J
UBS002OC
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
I
EC-95
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0229E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because L31 models do not have fuel return system.
Method A
CAUTION:
●
The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for
other purposes.
●
Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
●
Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/
C, etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes
in manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.
● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool.
● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439
N4710 or 16439 40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
PBIB0669E
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
Revision: March 2005
EC-96
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
●
Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08
in).
Tightening torque:
A
1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kgm, 9 - 13 in-lb)
Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage.
BBIA0077E
Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
EC
●
5.
6.
7.
8.
At idling:
Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
C
D
E
F
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
G
H
I
Method B
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector o-ring maintains sealability.
●
Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND
FUEL TUBE" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure
Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in the figure.
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
BBIA0436E
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage.
Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
Revision: March 2005
EC-97
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
At idling:
7.
8.
9.
Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE"
Revision: March 2005
EC-98
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
PFP:00004
A
UBS002OJ
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
EC
C
D
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
E
F
G
H
SEF233G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on EC-100 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the
example on EC-104 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
J
K
L
SEF234G
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-99
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
PBIB2267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-100
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Detailed Flow
A
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
EC
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-103, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK DTC*
1
1.
Check DTC*1 .
D
1
2.
Perform the following procedure if DTC* is displayed.
–
Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
–
Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
.)
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-108 .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
–
E
F
G
1
Symptom is described, DTC* is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
H
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
K
>> GO TO 5.
4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
L
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
J
EC-101
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-105, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
●
Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
●
Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No
>> Check according to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value?
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> GO TO 8.
SEF601Z
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according toEC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according toEC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: March 2005
EC-102
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection EC
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
C
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-142, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-120, "ECM Termi- D
nals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.
E
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
F
G
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK
H
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
I
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK
>> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and EC-65, "How to Erase DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC63, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
●
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
●
Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.
Revision: March 2005
EC-103
SEF907L
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
Revision: March 2005
EC-104
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
UBS002OK
A
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-166 .
Priority
1
Detected items (DTC)
●
U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
●
P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
●
P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
●
P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
●
P0128 Thermostat function
●
P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
●
P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●
P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
●
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
●
P0605 ECM
●
P1229 Sensor power supply
●
P1610-P1615 NATS
●
P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●
P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-105
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Priority
2
3
Detected items (DTC)
●
P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
●
P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
●
P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
●
P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve
●
P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
●
P0550 power steering pressure sensor
●
P0705-P0725, P0740-P0755, P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves
●
P1031 P1032 A/F sensor 1 heater
●
P1065 ECM power supply
●
P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
●
P1122 Electric throttle control function
●
P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
●
P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 A/F sensor 1
●
P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve
●
P1805 Brake switch
●
P0011 Intake valve timing control
●
P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
●
P0300 - P0304 Misfire
●
P0420 Three way catalyst function
●
P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
●
P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
●
P0731-P0734 A/T function
●
P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
●
P1148 Closed loop control
●
P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
●
P1564 ASCD steering switch
●
P1572 ASCD brake switch
●
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
Revision: March 2005
EC-106
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Fail-safe Chart
UBS002OL
A
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102
P0103
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0117
P0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULTII display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or START
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or START
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
EC
D
E
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running.
F
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135
Throttle position sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121
Electric throttle control actuator
(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
I
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less.
J
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
●
C
P1122
Electric throttle control function
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124
P1126
Throttle control relay
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128
Throttle control motor
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229
Sensor power supply
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Accelerator pedal position
sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by MIL lighting up when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Revision: March 2005
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-107
2005 Altima
G
H
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Symptom Matrix Chart
UBS002ON
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
1
1
2
3
2
Fuel pressure regulator system
3
3
4
4
4
Injector circuit
1
1
2
3
2
Evaporative emission system
3
3
4
4
4
Air
Positive crankcase ventilation system
3
3
4
4
4
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
3
3
Electric throttle control actuator
1
1
2
3
3
Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
3
3
1
1
Ignition circuit
1
1
2
Main power supply and ground circuit
2
2
Mass air flow sensor circuit
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
1
Ignition
Throttle position sensor circuit
Knock sensor circuit
Revision: March 2005
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
4
4
2
EC-598
4
EC-95
2
EC-592
4
4
EC-37
4
4
4
1
1
1
EC-75
2
EC-386,
EC-388 ,
EC-394 ,
EC-399
EC-50
1
1
1
1
EC-75
2
2
2
2
2
EC-572
3
3
3
3
3
3
EC-159
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
EC-178,
EC-187 ,
EC-178
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
EC-199,
EC-211
2
EC-557,
EC-255 ,
EC-204 ,
EC-434 ,
EC-436
2
3
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
1
2
EC-108
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
3
Reference
page
2
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
A/F sensor 1 circuit
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Fuel pump circuit
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
Fuel
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
ENGINE STALL
AA
Warranty symptom code
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
2
3
2
1
EC-564,
EC-542 ,
EC-549 ,
EC-438
2
2
2
2
2
EC-443,
EC-448 ,
EC-453 ,
EC-460 ,
EC-467
,EC-473
,EC-482
3
EC-269
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
A
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
2
2
EC-273
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
2
2
EC-280
Warranty symptom code
Vehicle speed signal circuit
2
3
3
Power steering pressure sensor circuit
ECM
2
2
3
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit
3
3
2
3
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
2
2
3
3
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
3
2
Electrical load signal circuit
2
2
3
3
3
Reference
page
C
D
E
EC-359
F
G
EC-365
3
3
EC-370,
EC-378
3
EC-382
1
PNP switch circuit
Air conditioner circuit
3
EC
EC-583
3
3
3
3
3
EC-524
3
3
3
3
4
EC-605
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
EC-610
3
2
ATC-28,
MTC-28
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-109
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
Fuel
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
FL-12
Fuel tank
Fuel piping
5
5
5
5
5
5
EC-593,
EM-32
5
5
Vapor lock
—
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane)
Air
—
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
—
Air duct
EM-17
Air cleaner
EM-17
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor —electric
throttle control actuator)
Electric throttle control actuator
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EM-17
5
5
EM-19
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
Cranking
EM-19
Battery
Generator circuit
Engine
Reference
page
SC-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SC-21
Starter circuit
3
SC-9
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate
6
EM-75
PNP switch
4
MT-13 or
AT-105
Cylinder head
Cylinder head gasket
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
3
EM-59
Cylinder block
Piston
4
Piston ring
Connecting rod
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
EM-75
Bearing
Crankshaft
Revision: March 2005
EC-110
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
Valve
mechanism
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
A
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
EC
Reference
page
D
E
Timing chain
EM-48
Camshaft
EM-37
Intake valve timing control
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EM-48
5
Intake valve
3
C
F
G
EM-59
Exhaust valve
Exhaust
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
H
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EM-24, EX3
5
Three way catalyst
Lubrication
Cooling
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
EM-26, LU10 , LU-11 ,
LU-5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
LU-7
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-11
Thermostat
5
CO-16
Water pump
Water gallery
CO-14
5
5
5
5
5
Cooling fan
5
2
5
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
5
5
J
K
CO-7
CO-11
L
CO-9
1
1
BL-107
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
Revision: March 2005
I
EC-111
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Engine Control Component Parts Location
UBS002OO
BBIA0405E
Revision: March 2005
EC-112
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0406E
Revision: March 2005
EC-113
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
BBIA0296E
BBIA0407E
Revision: March 2005
EC-114
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0091E
Revision: March 2005
EC-115
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
BBIA0453E
Revision: March 2005
EC-116
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Vacuum Hose Drawing
UBS002O0
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2027E
Refer to EC-28, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.
Revision: March 2005
EC-117
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Circuit Diagram
UBS002OP
BBWA1211E
Revision: March 2005
EC-118
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBWA0108E
Revision: March 2005
EC-119
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
UBS002OQ
PBIB1192E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
UBS00CC6
PREPARATION
1.
ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection,
remove glove box.
BBIA0450E
2.
3.
4.
Remove ECM harness protector.
When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with
lever as far as it will go as shown at right.
Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
SEC406D
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-120
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
1
WIRE
COLOR
B
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Body ground
A
EC
Approximately 5V
C
[Engine is running]
2
R
A/F sensor 1 heater
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
3
R
Throttle control motor power
supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
0 - 14V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
BR
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Released
G
PBIB0534E
H
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
Y
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
I
PBIB0533E
J
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
7 - 10V
11
G
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve
L
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed 2,500 rpm
M
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
12
P
Power steering pressure
sensor
●
[Engine is running]
●
Revision: March 2005
Steering wheel is being turned
Steering wheel is not being turned
EC-121
0.5 - 4.0V
0.4 - 0.8V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
1.0 - 4.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
13
W
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0526E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 3.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
14
W
PBIB0527E
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0528E
15
W
Knock sensor
[Engine is running]
●
16
35
Idle speed
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
[Engine is running]
B/Y
56
OR
75
W/L
Approximately 2.5V
A/F sensor 1
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
2 - 3V
EC-122
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
22
23
41
42
R/Y
R/B
R/L
R/W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC
(11 - 14V)
C
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
PBIB0529E
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
F
PBIB0530E
G
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
●
25
P/B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater
H
0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
1 minute under on load
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped.
[Engine is running]
●
29
Y/G
VIAS control solenoid valve
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
●
J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
[Engine is running]
●
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm
0 - 1.0V
L
32
W
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
34
Y/G
Intake air temperature
sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.
Revision: March 2005
EC-123
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
45
PU/R
●
Idle speed
●
Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
PBIB0050E
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
47
R
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
R
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
Throttle position sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0.9 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
EC-124
1.4 - 1.7V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
61
62
80
81
L/R
Y/R
G/Y
G/R
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.1V
EC
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
A
C
PBIB0521E
D
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●
●
E
Warm-up condition
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
F
PBIB0522E
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
G
Approximately 0V
H
Approximately 5V
I
[Engine is running]
67
68
B
G/R
Sensor ground
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
Throttle position sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
J
Less than 4.75V
K
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
L
[Engine is running]
70
73
W
Y
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON
(Compressor operates.)
[Engine is running]
1.0 - 4.0V
M
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with engine
coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
74
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-125
Approximately 0V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
82
83
85
WIRE
COLOR
B
G
OR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA link connector
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
86
P
CAN communication line
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 2.3V
90
R
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
94
L
CAN communication line
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 2.8V
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
99
G/Y
ASCD steering switch
CRUISE switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
101
R/G
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
102
GW
PNP switch
OR
Throttle control motor relay
Revision: March 2005
Gear position is P or N
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
104
0.28 - 0.48V
Except the above gear position
More than 2.0V
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1V
Approximately 2V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
A/T models
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
M/T models
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
EC-126
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
107
W
P/L
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
EC
0.65 - 0.87V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Engine is running]
More than 4.3V
C
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with fuel
tank temperature.
D
Approximately 0V
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
108
109
G/B*1
G/R*2
R
ASCD brake switch
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
●
Clutch pedal: Depressed (M/T)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Fully released
●
Clutch pedal: Released (M/T)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Ignition switch
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay (Self shut-off)
A few seconds after turning ignition switch
OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
More than a few seconds after turning
ignition switch OFF
G
H
0 - 1.0V
I
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
114
B/OR
Fuel pump relay
For 1 second after turning ignition switch
ON
0 - 1.0V
K
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
115
116
B
117
OR
EVAP canister vent control
valve
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
R/G
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
121
W/L
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
ECM ground
●
Idle speed
Body ground
M
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: A/T models
*2: M/T models
Revision: March 2005
EC-127
L
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)
UBS002OS
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC)
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test
This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number
ECM part number can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data
5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
6. Test values
Revision: March 2005
EC-128
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
A
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
INPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DTC*1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
×
DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
×
×
×
×
×
Mass air flow sensor
×
×
×
Engine coolant temperature sensor
×
×
×
A/F sensor 1
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2
×
×
×
Vehicle speed sensor
×
×
×
Accelerator pedal position sensor
×
×
×
Throttle position sensor
×
×
×
Fuel tank temperature sensor
×
×
×
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
×
×
×
Intake air temperature sensor
×
×
×
Knock sensor
×
Refrigerant pressure sensor
×
×
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor
signal)
×
×
Air conditioner switch
×
×
×
×
ACTIVE
TEST
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
EC
C
D
×
×
×
×
×
E
F
×
G
H
I
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch
×
×
×
Power steering pressure sensor
×
×
×
Battery voltage
×
×
Load signal
×
×
Fuel level sensor
×
×
×
ASCD steering switch
×
×
×
ASCD brake switch
×
×
×
Revision: March 2005
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
EC-129
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA
MONITOR
ACTIVE
TEST
Injector
×
×
×
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
OUTPUT
Item
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
Throttle control motor relay
×
Throttle control motor
×
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
×
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
Air conditioner relay
Fuel pump relay
×
SRT
STATUS
×
×
Cooling fan relay
×
×
×
A/F sensor 1 heater
×
×
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
×
×
×
×
VIAS control solenoid valve
×
×
×
×
×
×
EVAP canister vent control valve
×
×
Calculated load value
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-57 .
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located under LH dash panel.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
4.
Touch “START” (NISSAN BASED VHCL).
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
EC-130
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
5.
Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
A
EC
C
BCIA0030E
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
D
6.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
H
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
USAGE
I
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
●
FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN
●
THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT
●
THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT.
When clearing the coefficient of
self-learning control value
K
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
L
●
IGN SW ON
●
ENGINE NOT RUNNING
●
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
●
NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
●
M
FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
●
WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
●
WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION
Revision: March 2005
●
IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM
EC-131
J
When registering VIN in ECM
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
WORK ITEM
CONDITION
USAGE
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*
●
IDLE CONDITION
When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*
●
IDLE CONDITION
When adjusting target ignition timing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" .
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
Description
●
The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
to EC-15, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
●
“Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
One mode in the following is displayed.
“Mode 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“Mode 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
“Mode 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“Mode 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
●
The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
or [°F]
●
The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
“Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
FUEL SYS-B1
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
●
“Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
●
The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
●
The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED [km/
h] or [mph]
●
The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
●
The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
●
The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
×: Applicable
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
ENG SPEED [rpm]
×
×
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
×
×
Revision: March 2005
●
Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signals of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
EC-132
Remarks
●
Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
drops below the idle rpm.
●
If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
“Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board correction.
●
The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
×
×
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
●
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F]
×
×
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V]
×
×
HO2S2 (B1) [V]
×
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
×
×
BATTERY VOLT [V]
×
×
ACCEL SEN 1 [V]
×
×
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]
×
THRTL SEN 1 [V]
×
THRTL SEN 2 [V]
×
FUEL T/TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
×
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h] or [MPH]
×
×
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
×
×
EVAP SYS PRES [V]
FUEL LEVEL SE [V]
×
The A/F signal computed from the input
signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
●
The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 2 is displayed.
●
Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
small.
LEAN... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively large.
●
The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed.
●
The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
●
The accelerator pedal position sensor
signal voltage is displayed.
●
The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed.
●
Indicates the vehicle speed computed
from the revolution sensor signal.
●
The intake air temperature (determined
by the signal voltage of the intake air
temperature sensor) is indicated.
×
●
The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed.
×
●
The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.
●
Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
computed by the ECM according to the
signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
×
×
CLSD THL POS [ON/
OFF]
×
×
●
EC
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
●
This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
●
When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circulated, ECM
enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM
is displayed.
D
E
G
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
H
I
J
●
●
ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM
terminal voltage signal.
THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM
terminal voltage signal.
K
L
M
●
After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.
Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal.
EC-133
C
F
The fuel temperature (determined by the
signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed.
●
START SIGNAL [ON/
OFF]
Revision: March 2005
●
×
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.
A
Remarks
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
AIR COND SIG [ON/
OFF]
×
×
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
×
×
Monitored item [Unit]
PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/
OFF]
×
Description
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
●
[ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
pressure sensor as determined by the
power steering pressure sensor signal is
indicated.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON... Rear window defogger switch is
ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF... Both rear window defogger switch
and lighting switch are OFF.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch.
×
LOAD SIGNAL [ON/
OFF]
×
×
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF]
×
×
HEATER FAN SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
stop lamp switch signal.
●
Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according to
the input signals.
●
Indicates the ignition timing computed by
ECM according to the input signals.
●
“Calculated load value” indicates the
value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
●
Indicates the mass airflow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the mass air flow sensor.
●
Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value
computed by the ECM according to the
input signals.
●
The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
●
Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
advanced angle.
●
The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
●
The advance angle becomes larger as
the value increases.
●
The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
ON... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
OFF... VIAS control solenoid valve is not
operating.
INJ PULSE-B1 [msec]
×
IGN TIMING [BTDC]
×
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
PURG VOL C/V [%]
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF]
Revision: March 2005
EC-134
Remarks
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
AIR COND RLY [ON/
OFF]
×
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
×
Description
●
The air conditioner relay control condition
(determined by ECM according to the
input signals) is indicated.
●
Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to
the input signals.
●
The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
ON... Closed
OFF... Open
VENT CONT/V [ON/
OFF]
●
THRTL RELAY [ON/
OFF]
×
●
COOLING FAN
[HI/LOW/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [mile]
●
Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet.
CMPLT... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
●
Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
●
Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control
value computed by ECM according to the
input signals.
●
The current flow to the heater becomes
larger as the value increases.
●
The signal voltage from the refrigerant
pressure sensor is displayed.
●
The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
displayed.
●
The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
MAIN SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
CRUISE switch signal.
CANCEL SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
RESUME/ACCEL switch signal.
SET SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
COAST switch signal.
AC PRESS SEN [V]
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
SET VHCL SPD
[km/h] or [mph]
Revision: March 2005
×
C
D
E
F
Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
input signals).
HI... High speed operation
LOW... Low speed operation
OFF... Stop
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
ECM according to the input signals.
A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%]
EC
Indicates the throttle control motor relay
control condition determined by the ECM
according to the input signals.
●
IDL A/V LEARN [YET/
CMPLT]
A
Remarks
EC-135
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
BRAKE SW1 SW
[ON/OFF]
BRAKE SW2 SW
[ON/OFF]
Description
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch
switch signal (M/T models).
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
lamp switch signal.
●
Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
CUT...Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
●
Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
CUT...Vehicle speed decreased to
excessively low compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is
cut off.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
according to the input signal from the
TCM.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
cancel signal sent from the TCM.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
lamp determined by the ECM according
to the input signals.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
lamp determined by the ECM according
to the input signals.
VHCL SPD CUT
[NON/CUT]
LO SPEED CUT
[NON/CUT]
AT OD MONITOR
[ON/OFF]
AT OD CANCEL
[ON/OFF]
CRUISE LAMP
[ON/OFF]
SET LAMP
[ON/OFF]
Remarks
●
For M/T models always “OFF” is displayed.
●
For M/T models always “OFF” is displayed.
●
Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
be measured.
●
Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
Voltage [V]
Frequency
[msec], [Hz] or [%]
●
DUTY-HI
DUTY-LOW
Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse
width measured by the probe.
PLS WIDTH-HI
PLS WIDTH-LOW
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
ENG SPEED [rpm]
×
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
×
Revision: March 2005
MAIN
SIGNALS
×
Description
●
Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS).
●
The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor specification is displayed.
EC-136
Remarks
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
Monitored item [Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
●
×
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
“Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board correction.
The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
A
Remarks
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
●
This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
EC
C
D
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
E
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
●
FUEL INJECTION
IGNITION TIMING
POWER BALANCE
COOLING FAN
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
VIAS SOL VALVE
PURG VOL
CONT/V
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II.
JUDGEMENT
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
●
Harness and connectors
●
Fuel injector
●
A/F sensor 1
●
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
G
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Timing light: Set
●
Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Compression
●
A/C switch OFF
●
Fuel injector
●
Shift lever N
●
Power transistor
●
Cut off each injector signal one at
a time using CONSULT-II.
●
Spark plug
●
Ignition coil
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
Harness and connectors
●
Turn the cooling fan ON and OFF
with CONSULT-II.
●
Cooling fan relay
●
Cooling fan motor
●
Harness and connectors
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
Fuel injector
Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Fuel pump relay
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
Engine speed changes according to
the opening percent.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
●
Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF
with CONSULT-II and listen for
operating sound.
●
Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
●
Change the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
opening percent using CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
Engine runs rough or dies.
Cooling fan moves and stops.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
EC-137
F
H
I
J
K
L
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TEST ITEM
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
VENT CONTROL/V
V/T ASSIGN
ANGLE
CONDITION
JUDGEMENT
●
Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
●
Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Change intake valve timing using
CONSULT-II.
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
●
Harness and connectors
●
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-58, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM
Test item
Condition
PURGE FLOW P0441
EC-292
EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
EC-298
EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456*
EC-343
PURG VOL CN/V P1444
EC-491
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276
A/F SEN1
HO2S2
Reference page
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278
EC-467
EC-473
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279
EC-482
HO2S2 (B1) P0139
EC-225
HO2S2 (B1) P1146
EC-404
HO2S2 (B1) P1147
EC-412
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to L31 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
Revision: March 2005
EC-138
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
A
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
EC
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
C
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
D
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
E
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
PBIB1593E
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
F
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
G
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
H
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
I
Operation
1.
2.
“AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient
Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
“MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
Revision: March 2005
EC-139
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
PBIB0197E
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function
UBS002OT
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic service
Function
Service $01
READINESS TESTS
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
Service $02
(FREEZE DATA)
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-57, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
Service $03
DTCs
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
were stored by ECM.
Revision: March 2005
EC-140
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Diagnostic service
Function
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes:
Service $04
CLEAR DIAG INFO
●
Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
●
Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
●
Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
●
Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
●
Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
●
Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
A
EC
C
Service $06
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
D
Service $07
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
E
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve
can be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
Service $08
Service $09
—
(CALIBRATION ID)
●
Low ambient temperature
●
Low battery voltage
●
Engine running
●
Ignition switch OFF
●
Low fuel temperature
●
Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
F
G
H
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
I
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the fuse box cover.
Turn ignition switch ON.
J
K
L
BBIA0002E
4.
Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
Revision: March 2005
EC-141
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
5.
Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
SEF416S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
UBS002OU
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Tachometer: Connect
ENG SPEED
●
Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1
●
See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL
●
See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1
●
See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
COOLAN TEMP/S
●
Engine: After warming up
A/F SEN1 (B1)
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
●
Engine: After warming up
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
●
Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication.
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
11 - 14V
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
EVAP SYS PRES
●
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL
●
Ignition switch: ON → START → ON
OFF → ON → OFF
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
VEH SPEED SE
BATTERY VOLT
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*1
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*1
VEHICLE SPEED
CLSD THL POS
●
Revision: March 2005
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
LEAN ←→ RICH
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
EC-142
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
MONITOR ITEM
AIR COND SIG
P/N POSI SW
PW/ST SIGNAL
LOAD SIGNAL
IGNITION SW
HEATER FAN SW
BRAKE SW
CONDITION
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Ignition switch: ON
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
INJ PULSE-B1
IGN TIMING
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
PURG VOL C/V
INT/V TIM (B1)
Revision: March 2005
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Shift lever:
P or N (A/T model)
Neutral (M/T model)
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
(Forward direction)
OFF
Steering wheel is being turned.
ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
OFF
Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
SPECIFICATION
A
EC
C
D
E
ON → OFF → ON
Heater fan is operating.
ON
Heater fan is not operating
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Idle
2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
F
G
H
I
Idle
10° - 20° BTDC
2,000 rpm
25° - 45° BTDC
Idle
10% - 35%
2,500 rpm
10% - 35%
Idle
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
Idle
(Accelerator pedal is not depressed
even slightly, after engine starting)
0%
2,000 rpm
20 - 30%
Idle
−5° - 5°CA
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 20°CA
J
EC-143
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
INT/V SOL (B1)
AIR COND RLY
VIAS S/V
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 25% - 60%
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
ON
Idle
OFF
More than 5,000 rpm
ON
●
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●
Engine running or cranking
●
Except above conditions
OFF
VENT CONT/V
●
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
THRTL RELAY
●
Ignition switch: ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
COOLING FAN
ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
MID
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(221°F) or more
HI
●
Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no load.
●
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
TRVL AFTER MIL
●
Ignition switch: ON
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
●
Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
0 - 100%
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
Approx. 0V
●
Engine: Idle
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
SET VHCL SPD
●
Engine: Running
ASCD: Operating
The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
CRUISE switch: Pressed
ON
MAIN SW
●
Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL SW
●
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACC SW
●
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
AC PRESS SEN
VEH SPEED SE
SET SW
●
Revision: March 2005
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
ON
OFF
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has
turned ON.
0 - 65,535 km
(0 - 40,723 mile)
1.0 - 4.0V
RESUME/ACCEL switch: Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
EC-144
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
CONDITION
●
Brake pedal: Fully released
●
Clutch pedal: Fully released (M/T)
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
●
Clutch pedal: Fully depressed (M/
T)
A
ON
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch is pressed at first time
→ second time
ON → OFF
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD is operating
ON
●
When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
ASCD is not operating
OFF
●
CRUISE LAMP
●
Ignition switch: ON
EC
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
BRAKE SW2
(STOP lamp switch)
SET LAMP
Ignition switch: ON
●
SPECIFICATION
C
D
E
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-145
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002OV
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position (A/T models) or with shift lever in 1st
position (M/T models).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
SEF241Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-146
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2099E
Revision: March 2005
EC-147
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
PFP:00031
UBS002OW
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
●
B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction)
●
A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
●
MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
●
UBS002OX
Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
●
Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
●
Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
●
Transmission: Warmed-up*1
●
Electrical load: Not applied*2
●
Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
●
Inspection Procedure
UBS002OY
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SEB1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-149, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z
Revision: March 2005
EC-148
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IJ0
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2318E
Revision: March 2005
EC-149
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
PBIB2509E
Revision: March 2005
EC-150
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.
3.
Start engine.
Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-148, "Testing Condition" .
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode,
and make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because
they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value
even a little.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB2369E
2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19.
G
H
I
PBIB2332E
J
3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
K
L
M
PBIB2332E
4. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-151
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition.
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-95, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-95 . GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
2.
Check the following.
Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
Clogged fuel filter
Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-598 .)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-95 .)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1.
2.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
Revision: March 2005
EC-152
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
A
Check the following.
Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-572 .)
Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-592 .)
Intake air leakage
Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-59 .)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
EC
C
D
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
E
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 12.
F
G
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
H
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
●
For DTC P1271, refer to EC-443, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1272, refer to EC-448, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1273, refer to EC-453, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1274, refer to EC-460, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1276, refer to EC-467, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1278, refer to EC-474, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1279, refer to EC-483, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
I
J
K
L
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
M
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 15.
Revision: March 2005
EC-153
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
PBIB2332E
18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
–
–
2.
–
–
–
Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
Engine oil level is too high
Engine oil viscosity
Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
Noise from engine
Noise from transmission, etc.
Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
Valve clearance malfunction
Intake valve timing control function malfunction
Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Crushed air ducts
●
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
●
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
●
Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
Revision: March 2005
EC-154
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
A
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
C
DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
21.
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
D
E
>> GO TO 22.
22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
F
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-187 .
2. GO TO 29.
NG
>> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
G
H
I
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
J
K
L
PBIB2370E
24. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
M
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> GO TO 29.
Revision: March 2005
EC-155
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Crushed air ducts
●
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
●
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
●
Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 27.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
26. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30.
PBIB2370E
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
●
Looseness of oil filler cap
●
Disconnection of oil level gauge
●
Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
●
Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
●
Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
●
Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
●
Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-156
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[QR]
30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
A
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-157
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
PFP:00006
UBS002P0
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of Intermittent
Incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow
2
3 or 4
Situation
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than 0 or [1t].
The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5
(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10
The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002P1
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “CIRCUIT INSPECTION”,
“Ground Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-158
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
PFP:24110
A
UBS00ELQ
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1213E
Revision: March 2005
EC-159
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
1
WIRE
COLOR
B
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
109
R
Ignition switch
Idle speed
111
W/B
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
●
B
B
ECM ground
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for
ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
●
0 - 1.0V
A few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
115
116
Body ground
[Ignition switch: OFF]
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
ECM relay (Self shutoff)
DATA (DC Voltage)
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Body ground
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00ELR
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E
Revision: March 2005
EC-160
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
EC
C
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
E
F
G
H
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
I
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
J
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
L
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
M
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-161
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to EC-572, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB2028E
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
18.
PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
PBIB1191E
Revision: March 2005
EC-162
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1.
2.
3.
A
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
D
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness or connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1.
2.
3.
H
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
J
K
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
L
Check the following.
●
Harness or connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
Revision: March 2005
EC-163
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer toEC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Ground Inspection
UBS00ELS
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
●
Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Revision: March 2005
EC-164
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[QR]
Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
A
●
Clean as required to assure good contact.
●
Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
●
Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
EC
●
If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
C
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-28, "Ground Distribution" .
●
D
E
F
G
H
PBIB1870E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-165
2005 Altima
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:23710
UBS002P4
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
U1000*1
1000*1
U1001*2
DTC detecting condition
●
CAN communication
line
1001*2
UBS002P5
●
ECM cannot communicate to other control
units.
ECM cannot communicate for more than the
specified time.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
UBS002P6
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-166
2005 Altima
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002P7
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1214E
Revision: March 2005
EC-167
2005 Altima
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002P8
Go to LAN-4, "PRECAUTIONS" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-168
2005 Altima
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
Description
PFP:23796
A
UBS002P9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Vehicle speed sensor*
Vehicle speed
Intake valve
timing control
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve
*: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
PBIB0540E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
J
K
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002PA
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V SOL (B1)
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
−5° - 5°CA
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 20°CA
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 25% - 60%
EC-169
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
P0011
0011
Intake valve timing
control performance
UBS002PB
Detecting condition
There is a gap between angle of target and
phase-control angle degree.
Possible cause
●
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●
Intake valve control solenoid valve
●
Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
portion of the camshaft
●
Timing chain installation
●
Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for
intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control
The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002PC
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC382 .
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENG SPEED
500 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS
70 - 120°C (158 - 248°F)
Selector lever
P or N position
4.
5.
6.
SEF174Y
Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,800 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS
70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever
1st or 2nd position
Driving location uphill
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
7.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-170
2005 Altima
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002PD
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
EC
1.
2.
Start engine.
Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to LU-8 .
C
D
E
PBIA8559J
F
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
G
Refer to EC-172 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
H
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
I
Refer to EC-278 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
J
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
K
Refer to EC-285 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
L
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
M
Check the following.
●
Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
●
Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
PBIB0565E
Revision: March 2005
EC-171
2005 Altima
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
6. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-48 .
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-44, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean lubrication line.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158 .
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-275 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-282 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IJ1
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
PBIB0193E
4.
Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Removal and Installation
PBIB2275E
UBS00IJ2
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-172
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[QR]
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS002PM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
ECM Function
Actuator
EC
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
C
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
D
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
E
Engine speed rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600
OFF
●
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
F
ON
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002PN
H
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no load.
●
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
I
ON
J
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0037
0037
P0038
0038
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater
control circuit low
Heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater
control circuit high
UBS002PO
K
DTC detecting condition
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater.)
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
●
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
shorted.)
●
Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002PP
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: March 2005
EC-173
L
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[QR]
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-176, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-174
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002PQ
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1215E
Revision: March 2005
EC-175
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
●
25
P/B
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater
0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under on load
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped.
[Engine is running]
●
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002PR
1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0414E
4.
Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0112E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-176
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[QR]
3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and HO2S2 terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
E
Refer to EC-177, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002PS
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1.
I
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No.
Resistance
2 and 3
5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
4 and 1, 2, 3
J
K
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
L
M
SEF249Y
Removal and Installation
UBS002PT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-177
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22680
UBS002PU
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
SEC266C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002PV
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CONDITION
●
●
See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
SPECIFICATION
Idle
10% - 35%
2,500 rpm
10% - 35%
Idle
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
A)
P0101
0101
UBS002PW
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition.
Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance
problem
B)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving condition.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
●
Intake air temperature sensor
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Intake air leaks
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
●
Intake air temperature sensor
UBS002PX
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
Revision: March 2005
EC-178
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
EC
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
C
D
E
SEF174Y
F
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
G
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
H
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
I
J
K
L
M
SEF243Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-179
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
7.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1
More than 3V
THRTL SEN 2
More than 3V
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Overall Function Check
PBIB0199E
UBS002PY
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “Service $01” with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “Service $01”.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
If NG, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF534P
Revision: March 2005
EC-180
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002PZ
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1216E
Revision: March 2005
EC-181
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0.9 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.4 - 1.7V
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay (Self shutoff)
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
Power supply for
ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS002Q0
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A
>> GO TO 3.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Check the following for connections.
Air duct
●
Vacuum hoses
●
Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-182
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
E
F
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0009E
3.
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
K
Voltage: Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB2315E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●
Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-183
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-216, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-321, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-184, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002Q1
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Revision: March 2005
EC-184
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
4.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.4 - 1.7
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
A
EC
C
0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
E
F
G
H
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
I
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
Voltage V
K
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.4 - 1.7
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
J
L
0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-185
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
Removal and Installation
UBS002Q2
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-186
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22680
A
UBS002Q3
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
EC
C
D
PBIB1604E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002Q4
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CONDITION
●
●
See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
F
SPECIFICATION
Idle
10% - 35%
2,500 rpm
10% - 35%
G
H
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
Idle
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
I
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002Q5
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0102
0102
P0103
0103
K
Trouble diagnosis
name
Mass air flow sensor
circuit low input
Mass air flow sensor
circuit high input
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Intake air leaks
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Mass air flow sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002Q6
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-187
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-188
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002Q7
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1216E
Revision: March 2005
EC-189
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0.9 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.4 - 1.7V
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay (Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS002Q8
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connections.
Air duct
●
Vacuum hoses
●
Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-190
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
E
F
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0009E
3.
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
K
Voltage: Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB2315E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●
Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-191
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR POEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-192, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IJ3
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.4 - 1.7
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Revision: March 2005
EC-192
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
A
EC
C
D
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
E
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.4 - 1.7
Idle to about 4,000 rpm*
F
G
H
0.9 - 1.2 to 2.4
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation
J
K
L
M
UBS002QA
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-193
I
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS002QB
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.43
7.9 - 9.3
25 (77)
3.32
1.9 - 2.1
80 (176)
1.23
0.31 - 0.37
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake
air temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
UBS002QC
DTC detecting condition
P0112
0112
Intake air temperature sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
P0113
0113
Intake air temperature sensor circuit
high input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Intake air temperature sensor
UBS002QD
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-194
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-195
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002QE
BBWA1217E
Revision: March 2005
EC-196
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002QF
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
F
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
G
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0009E
3.
K
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
M
PBIB2321E
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-197
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-198, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002QG
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.9 - 2.1
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS002QH
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-198
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
A
UBS002QI
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
EC
C
D
SEF594K
E
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
Resistance
F
kΩ
G
H
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002QJ
I
J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
DTC Detecting Condition
P0117
0117
Engine coolant
temperature sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
P0118
0118
Engine coolant
temperature sensor circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
Possible Cause
K
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Revision: March 2005
EC-199
L
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Condition
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
START
80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Except as shown above
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002QK
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-202, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-200
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002QL
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1218E
Revision: March 2005
EC-201
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002QM
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0410E
3.
Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-202
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A
Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
C
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002QN
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
E
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
F
G
H
PBIB2005E
I
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)
2.
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
J
K
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS002QO
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
M
Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
Revision: March 2005
L
EC-203
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS002ZQ
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002ZR
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever:
D (A/T)
1ST (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
*1: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. thus it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002ZS
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
P0122
0122
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0123
0123
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002ZT
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-204
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-205
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002ZU
BBWA1219E
Revision: March 2005
EC-206
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
EC
WIRE
COLOR
R
A
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
D
More than 0.36V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
F
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
H
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
●
●
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
Engine stopped
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
I
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
J
Approximately 5V
K
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002ZV
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-207
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0006E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check the following.
Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
●
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-206
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-542
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-208
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
H
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
K
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
L
M
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
E
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-209
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS002ZW
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models).
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69 (TP
sensor 2) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation
PBIB1060E
UBS002ZX
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-210
2005 Altima
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
Description
PFP:22630
A
UBS002QP
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC
P0118. Refer to EC-199 .
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
C
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
D
E
SEF594K
F
< Reference data>
G
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage* V
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
Resistance
kΩ
H
I
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Trouble diagnosis name
P0125
0125
L
DTC detecting condition
●
Insufficient engine coolant temperature for
closed loop fuel control
●
Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
practical, even when some time has passed
after starting the engine.
Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
Thermostat
M
UBS002QR
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
K
UBS002QQ
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
J
EC-211
2005 Altima
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-212, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002QS
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-213, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-212
2005 Altima
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS002QT
A
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB2005E
E
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
F
G
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
H
UBS002QU
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
I
Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING"
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-213
2005 Altima
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS002QV
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
Intake air
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.43
7.9 - 9.3
25 (77)
3.32
1.9 - 2.1
80 (176)
1.23
0.31 - 0.37
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake
air temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0127
0127
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake air temperature
too high
UBS002QW
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Intake air temperature sensor
UBS002QX
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
a.
Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-214
2005 Altima
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the engine coolant temperature.
If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
SEF189Y
D
WITH GST
E
Follow the procedure With CONSULT-II above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002QY
F
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
K
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-216, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
M
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Refer to EC-196, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-215
2005 Altima
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS002QZ
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.9 - 2.1
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS002R0
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-216
2005 Altima
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:21200
A
UBS002R1
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
EC
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
DTC No.
P0128
0128
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
The engine coolant temperature does not
reach to specified temperature even though
the engine has run long enough.
Thermostat function
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
C
●
Thermostat
●
Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
UBS002R2
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
●
For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 68°C (154°F).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 68°C (154°F).
If it is below 68°C (154°F), go to following step.
If it is above 68°C (154°F), stop engine and cool down the
engine to less than 68°C (154°F), then retry from step 1.
Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE
E
F
G
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
D
H
I
J
K
80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF176Y
L
WITH GST
M
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002R3
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-218, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-217
2005 Altima
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS002R4
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS002R5
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-218
2005 Altima
DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS002RW
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
EC
C
D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002RX
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SPECIFICATION
F
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
G
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
HO2S2 (B1)
●
Engine: After warming up
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
H
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
LEAN ←→ RICH
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002RY
J
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
K
L
PBIB1848E
DTC No.
P0138
0138
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit high voltage
DTC detecting condition
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002RZ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: March 2005
EC-219
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-220
2005 Altima
DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002S1
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1220E
Revision: March 2005
EC-221
2005 Altima
DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002S2
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in
harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-222
BBIA0414E
2005 Altima
DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
E
4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check HO2S2 harness connector for water.
F
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
G
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
H
Refer to EC-223, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
I
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002S3
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1783E
Revision: March 2005
EC-223
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0138 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2029E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary.
7.
Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1197E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS002S4
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-224
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS002S5
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
EC
C
D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002S6
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
SPECIFICATION
F
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
G
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
HO2S2 (B1)
●
Engine: After warming up
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly
H
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly
LEAN ←→ RICH
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002S7
J
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition
such as fuel-cut.
K
L
SEF302U
DTC No.
P0139
0139
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit slow response
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
It takes more time for the sensor to respond
between rich and lean than the specified time.
EC-225
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002S8
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at lest 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II and follow
the instruction of CONSULT-II.
PBIB2374E
6.
a.
b.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until ″COMPLETED″ is displayed.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
UBS002S9
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-226
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If NG, go to EC-229, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
PBIB1197E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-227
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002SA
BBWA1220E
Revision: March 2005
EC-228
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
A
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
D
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
E
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002SB
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-229
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-233 or EC-240 .
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
BBIA0009E
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-230
BBIA0414E
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
E
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-231, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
F
G
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
H
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
I
Component Inspection
UBS002SC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
K
L
M
PBIB1783E
Revision: March 2005
EC-231
2005 Altima
DTC P0139 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2029E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 4, step 5 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1197E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS002SD
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-232
2005 Altima
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16600
A
UBS002SE
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu- EC
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
C
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
P0171
0171
Fuel injection system
too lean
ECM
function
Fuel injection control
Actuator
D
Fuel injector
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Intake air leaks
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
E
F
●
Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●
Fuel injector
●
The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large.
(The mixture ratio is too lean.)
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
Lack of fuel
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
Incorrect PCV hose connection
DTC Confirmation Procedure
G
H
UBS002SF
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
SEF215Z
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table
below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Revision: March 2005
EC-233
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
7.
8.
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be
BBIA0009E
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-236, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
Revision: March 2005
EC-234
2005 Altima
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002SG
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1221E
Revision: March 2005
EC-235
2005 Altima
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002SH
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
BBIA0409E
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1,
2, 5, 6 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-236
2005 Altima
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
A
Release fuel pressure to zero.
Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-96, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
EC
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Follow the instruction of FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.
C
5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
E
at idling:
at 2,500 rpm:
F
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
G
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST.
at idling:
at 2,500 rpm:
H
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-178 .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-237
2005 Altima
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds.Make sure that fuel sprays
out from injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIB1726E
Revision: March 2005
EC-238
2005 Altima
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-239
2005 Altima
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16600
UBS002SI
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
P0172
0172
Fuel injection system
too rich
ECM
function
Fuel injection control
DTC detecting condition
●
Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●
The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.)
Actuator
Fuel injector
Possible cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Fuel injector
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002SJ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
SEF215Z
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table
below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
7.
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Revision: March 2005
EC-240
2005 Altima
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
8.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
EC
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to ECBBIA0009E
243, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
EC-241
C
J
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-243, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
Revision: March 2005
A
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002SK
BBWA1221E
Revision: March 2005
EC-242
2005 Altima
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002SL
1. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
A
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
G
1.
2.
H
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
I
J
BBIA0409E
Continuity should exist.
4.
L
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminal 1,
2, 5, 6 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
Release fuel pressure to zero.
Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
K
EC-243
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-598 .)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace fuel pressure regulator.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
: 1.0- 4.0 g·m/sec
: 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST.
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
: 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
: 4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-178 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-244
2005 Altima
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0133E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
F
G
H
I
PBIB1986E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-592, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
K
7. CHECK INJECTOR
Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
1.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-245
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00CCN
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0391E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use
ground other than ECM, such as ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0181
0181
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit range/
performance
UBS00CCO
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
UBS00CCP
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If the “COOLANT TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result
will be OK.
If the “COOLANT TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” signal is less than
60°C (140°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-246
SEF475Y
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-247
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CCQ
BBWA1222E
Revision: March 2005
EC-248
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CCR
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
F
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
G
1.
2.
H
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
I
J
BBIA0391E
4.
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
K
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB0932E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F59, M71
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-249
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B2,M12
●
Harness connectors M70, F58
●
Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to, EC-250, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CCS
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation
UBS00CCT
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-250
2005 Altima
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
A
UBS00CCU
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
EC
C
D
BBIA0391E
E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
F
G
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
H
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use
ground other than ECM, such as ground.
SEF012P
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS00CCV
DTC detecting condition
J
Possible cause
P0182
0182
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0183
0183
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CCW
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-253, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-251
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CCX
BBWA1222E
Revision: March 2005
EC-252
2005 Altima
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CCY
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
F
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
G
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0391E
K
3.
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB0932E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M59, M71
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-253
2005 Altima
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M70, F58
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to, EC-254, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CCZ
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in
the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
If NG, replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation
UBS00CD0
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-254
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS002TF
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002TG
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
F
SPECIFICATION
G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002TH
H
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0222
0222
P0223
0223
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
1 is sent to ECM.
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
I
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
J
K
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
M
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002TI
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-255
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-256
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002TJ
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1223E
Revision: March 2005
EC-257
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
●
●
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
Engine stopped
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CVD
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-258
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0006E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check the following.
●
Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
M
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-389
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-544
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-259
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-261, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-260
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS00CVE
A
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T).
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1060E
F
G
UBS002TM
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
H
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-261
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002U3
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input Signal to ECM
Engine speed
ECM function
On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0300
0300
Multiple cylinder misfire
detected
P0301
0301
No.1 cylinder misfire
detected
P0302
0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 2 cylinder misfires.
P0303
0303
No. 3 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
P0304
0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire
detected
Multiple cylinder misfire.
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
No. 4 cylinder misfires.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Improper spark plug
●
Insufficient compression
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
The injector circuit is open or shorted
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leak
●
The ignition signal circuit is open or
shorted
●
Lack of fuel
●
Drive plate or flywheel
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Incorrect PCV hose connection
UBS00CVF
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
Revision: March 2005
EC-262
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
A
Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-263, "Diagnostic Procedure"
C
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performD
ing the following procedure is advised.
PBIB0164E
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
E
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the feaze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
F
G
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
H
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
I
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed
Time
J
Around 1,000 rpm
Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm
Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm
Approximately 3.5 minutes
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
L
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CVG
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
M
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst (manifold) and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace it.
Revision: March 2005
EC-263
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 9.
4. CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-592 .
PBIB1986E
Revision: March 2005
EC-264
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
A
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustibles.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0229E
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
H
J
K
L
M
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-572 .
Revision: March 2005
G
I
Spark should be generated.
1.
2.
3.
F
EC-265
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
7. CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-19 .
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-19 .
9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure.
Refer to EM-59, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
Standard:
1,190 kPa (12,1 kg/cm2 , 172 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
990 kPa (10,1 kg/cm2 , 144 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
10. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
Install all removed parts.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure.
At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
Revision: March 2005
EC-266
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-598, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP EC
ASSEMBLY" .)
●
Fuel lines (Refer to FL-3, "Checking Fuel Lines" .)
C
●
Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
D
12. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Perform EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
E
Items
Specifications
Target idle speed
Ignition timing
A/T
700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T
700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T
15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Follow the EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
H
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness
connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
J
K
L
BBIA0409E
M
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
Revision: March 2005
EC-267
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[QR]
15. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec:
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST.
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec:
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK CONNECTORS
Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds.
Refer to EC-178, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" and EC-187, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or replace it.
17. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-108, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
18. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 19.
19. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-268
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Component Description
PFP:22060
A
UBS002U6
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine
knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
EC
C
D
BBIA0412E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002U7
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
DTC Detected Condition
P0327
0327
Knock sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
P0328
0328
Knock sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
DTC No.
F
Possible Cause
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002U8
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-271, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
K
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-269
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002U9
BBWA1224E
Revision: March 2005
EC-270
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
15
EC
WIRE
COLOR
W
ITEM
Knock sensor
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 2.5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002UA
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
I
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
K
L
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-271
BBIA0412E
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EC-272, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace knock sensor.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002UB
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF478Y
Removal and Installation
UBS002UC
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-75, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-272
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
PFP:23731
A
UBS002UD
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder
block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
F
G
H
PBIB2382E
I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002UE
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
J
SPECIFICATION
●
Tachometer: Connect
●
Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indication.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
K
UBS002UF
L
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P0335
0335
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS) circuit
●
●
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
while the engine is running.
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
M
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
Signal plate
UBS002UG
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-273
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-276, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-274
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002UH
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1225E
Revision: March 2005
EC-275
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
14
W
PBIB0527E
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0528E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002UI
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-276
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0015E
3.
E
Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0664E
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK CKP (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-277
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace the signal plate.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002UJ
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
Revision: March 2005
EC-278
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
A
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
EC
2 (+) - 3 (-)
6.
If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
C
PBIB0564E
D
Removal and Installation
UBS002UK
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EM-75, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-279
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
PFP:23731
UBS002UL
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with
camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB0562E
PBIB2382E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P0340
0340
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
UBS002UM
●
●
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM
during engine running.
●
Camshaft (Intake)
●
Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .)
The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.
●
Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .)
●
Dead (Weak) battery
The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002UN
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-280
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-283, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-283, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
A
EC
C
SEF013Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-281
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002UO
BBWA1226E
Revision: March 2005
EC-282
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 4.0V
D
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
13
W
E
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position
sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB0526E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002UP
I
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position.
J
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
K
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
L
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-283
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0410E
3.
Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0664E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connector F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-284
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
D
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
E
Refer to EC-285, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
F
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
G
Check the following.
●
Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
●
Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
H
I
J
PBIB0565E
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002UQ
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
Revision: March 2005
EC-285
2005 Altima
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
UBS002UR
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-37, "CAMSHAFT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-286
2005 Altima
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:20905
A
UBS00CVH
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
EC
C
D
PBIB2377E
E
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P0420
0420
Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
●
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly.
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.
Possible cause
●
Three way catalyst (manifold)
●
Exhaust tube
●
Intake air leaks
●
Fuel injector
●
Fuel injector leaks
●
Spark plug
●
Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure
F
G
H
UBS00CVI
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
J
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step
12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
K
L
M
SEF189Y
PBIB1784E
Revision: March 2005
I
EC-287
2005 Altima
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[QR]
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“IMCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (it will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest step 1.
PBIB1785E
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check
UBS00CVJ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Open engine hood.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 74 and ground.
Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
PBIB1197E
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CVK
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-288
2005 Altima
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[QR]
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
A
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
C
D
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
E
F
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
G
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
I
Check for ignition timing. Refer to EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
Items
Target idle speed
Ignition timing
Specifications
A/T
700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T
700 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T
15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
J
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Follow the Basic Inspection.
L
5. CHECK INJECTORS
1.
2.
3.
M
Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-593 .
Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Perform EC-594 .
MBIB0030E
Revision: March 2005
EC-289
2005 Altima
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[QR]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
BBIA0229E
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
●
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-572 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-290
2005 Altima
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[QR]
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG
A
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-19 .
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
EC
C
D
SEF156I
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
E
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.
F
Spark should be generated.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 .
H
10. CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Disconnect ignition coil assembly harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
I
J
K
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
Trouble is fixed>>INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).
Revision: March 2005
EC-291
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:14950
UBS00CD1
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00CD2
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
DTC No.
P0441
0441
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
incorrect purge flow
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between
intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EC-292
Possible cause
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●
Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
●
Blocked rubber tube
●
Cracked EVAP canister
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
●
Blocked purge port
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CD3
A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
C
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
D
E
F
G
Selector lever
Suitable position
Vehicle speed
32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED
500 - 3,800 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 10.0 msec
Engine coolant temperature
More than 0°C
H
I
J
K
PBIB0826E
7.
If TESTING is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC294, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check
UBS00CD4
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
Revision: March 2005
EC-293
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
5.
6.
7.
Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch
ON
Headlamp switch
ON
Rear window defogger switch
ON
Engine speed
Approx. 3,000 rpm
Shift lever
Any position other than P, N or R
PBIB1109E
8.
9.
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
If NG, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CD5
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install
vacuum gauge.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
1.
BBIA0016E
5.
Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V
100%
0%
VACUUM
Should exist.
should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB1786E
Revision: March 2005
EC-294
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW
A
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE
C
EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
4. Start engine and let it idle.
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
D
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
1.
2.
3.
Vacuum should not exist.
6.
E
Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
F
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
G
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair it.
I
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1.
2.
J
Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
K
L
M
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U
Revision: March 2005
EC-295
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1786E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452, EC-322 P0453, EC-328 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-317 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
Revision: March 2005
EC-296
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
A
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace it.
EC
C
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
D
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
E
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-297
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
UBS00CD6
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0442
0442
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(negative pressure)
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
control system does not operate properly.
EC-298
Possible cause
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CD7
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●
Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
●
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
C
D
E
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Check the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
G
H
I
SEF475Y
J
K
L
M
PBIB0829E
6.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-300, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C
Revision: March 2005
EC-299
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-63 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-63
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON.
5. Select Service $07 with GST.
–
If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-300, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
–
If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-294 .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CD8
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: March 2005
EC-300
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
A
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
EC
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
C
D
BBIA0016E
E
F
G
H
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
I
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
J
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
1.
2.
●
K
L
M
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: March 2005
EC-301
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0526E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following,
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-302
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
A
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
EC
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
C
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
1.
D
PBIB1213E
E
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
F
G
H
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection
J
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
K
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
PBIB1786E
Revision: March 2005
EC-303
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
Revision: March 2005
EC-304
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
A
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
EC
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
C
CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
21.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
D
E
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
F
Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
G
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
H
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
I
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-305
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
PFP:14920
Description
UBS00CD9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed signal*2
Vehicle speed
ECM function
Actuator
EVAP canister
purge flow
control
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CDA
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PURG VOL C/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
(Accelerator pedal is not depressed
even slightly, after engine starting)
0%
2,000 rpm
20 - 30%
EC-306
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00CDB
A
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
P0444
0444
P0445
0445
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
open
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
shorted
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
An excessively high voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EC
C
D
UBS00CDC
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
E
F
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-309, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
G
H
I
J
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-307
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CDD
BBWA1227E
Revision: March 2005
EC-308
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
45
PU/R
●
Idle speed
●
Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
D
E
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
PBIB0050E
F
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
●
G
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CDE
I
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
K
L
M
BBIA0017E
4.
Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SEF206W
Revision: March 2005
EC-309
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
10A fuse
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1786E
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-310
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS00CDF
A
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
EC
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
C
D
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
E
F
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
G
H
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation
UBS00CDG
I
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-311
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14935
UBS00CDH
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnoses.
PBIB1263E
BBIA0526E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CDI
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0447
0447
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open
UBS00CDJ
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
through EVAP canister vent control valve.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
UBS00CDK
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-312
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-315, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
A
EC
C
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-313
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CDL
BBWA1228E
Revision: March 2005
EC-314
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
EC
WIRE
COLOR
OR
A
ITEM
EVAP canister vent control
valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
UBS00CDM
D
1. INSPECTION START
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
E
F
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
I
J
PBIB1787E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-315
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
BBIA0526E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0080E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness connectors F55, B105
●
IPDM E/R harness connectors E122
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-316
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
D
E
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
F
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
G
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
H
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CDN
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
K
L
M
PBIB1033E
5.
6.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Revision: March 2005
EC-317
J
PBIB1787E
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
7.
8.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
Revision: March 2005
EC-318
PBIB1034E
2005 Altima
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22365
A
UBS00CUU
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0526E
F
G
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CUV
J
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
K
UBS00CUW
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-438 .
DTC No.
P0451
0451
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor performance
Revision: March 2005
I
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
control system pressure sensor
EC-319
Possible cause
L
M
●
Harness or connectors
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CUX
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-320, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CUY
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-320
2005 Altima
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1.
A
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0526E
2.
E
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
F
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
G
Refer to EC-321, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
H
I
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-324 .
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
Component Inspection
UBS00CUZ
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-321
PBIB1200E
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25085
UBS00CDO
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0526E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CDP
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00CDQ
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-438 .
DTC No.
P0452
0452
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor low
input
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
EC-322
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CDR
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-325, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
D
E
F
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-325, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
H
I
PBIB1199E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-323
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CDS
BBWA1229E
Revision: March 2005
EC-324
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
W
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
D
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
E
●
Idle speed
C
[Engine is running]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CDT
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
K
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
L
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
M
BBIA0526E
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-325
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-326
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
H
I
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
K
Component Inspection
UBS00CDU
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-327
PBIB1200E
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25085
UBS00CDV
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0526E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CDW
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00CDX
NOTE:
If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-438 .
DTC No.
P0453
0453
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor high
input
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
EC-328
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP canister
●
Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent control valve
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CDY
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-331, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
D
E
F
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-331, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
H
I
PBIB1199E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-329
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CDZ
BBWA1229E
Revision: March 2005
EC-330
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
W
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
D
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
E
●
Idle speed
C
[Engine is running]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CE0
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
K
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
L
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
M
BBIA0526E
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-331
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-332
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
H
I
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
J
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
K
11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-333
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 13.
No
>> GO TO 15.
PBIB1213E
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CE1
EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
●
4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-334
PBIB1200E
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
A
UBS00CE2
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0455
0455
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
gross leak detected
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a very large leak
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly.
Possible cause
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Revision: March 2005
EC-335
H
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CE3
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
●
Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●
Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tighten fuel filler cap securely until reteaching sound is heard.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
SEF475Y
PBIB0829E
7.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with
CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]”
is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-337, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442, EC-300 .
SEC763C
Revision: March 2005
EC-336
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
WITH GST
A
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-63 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-63 .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON.
5. Select SERVICE $07 with GST.
●
If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-337, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●
If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-300 .
●
If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-294 .
Diagnostic Procedure
EC
C
D
UBS00CE4
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
E
F
G
H
I
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
J
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard.
K
L
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
M
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: March 2005
EC-337
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control is installed properly.
Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation"
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0016E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.
Revision: March 2005
EC-338
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
EC
C
D
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
E
4.
F
G
H
SEF200U
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-339
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0526E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
Revision: March 2005
PBIB1786E
EC-340
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
E
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
F
G
H
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
I
J
K
L
PBIB1786E
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
M
Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
Revision: March 2005
EC-341
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check refueling EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and
improper connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 20.
>> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-342
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
A
UBS00CE5
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
C
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
D
E
F
G
H
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0456
0456
Trouble diagnosis name
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (negative
pressure check)
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●
EVAP system has a very small leak.
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP system does not operate properly.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
●
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
EC-343
I
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CE6
NOTE:
●
If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
●
After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
●
If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour.
–
Fuel filler cap is removed.
–
Refilled or drained the fuel.
–
EVAP component parts is/are removed.
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool
place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output
voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the
range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then
PBIB1953E
start from step 1).
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
PBIB0837E
6.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-346, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-75, "Basic Inspection" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-344
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
●
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Overall Function Check
UBS00CE7
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
●
Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
●
Do not start engine.
●
1.
A
Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
BBIA0016E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Set the pressure pump and a hose.
Also set the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect GST and select Service $08.
Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
SEF462UI
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped
more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-346, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to next step.
Disconnect GST.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.
Revision: March 2005
EC-345
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CE8
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until reteaching sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-40, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: March 2005
EC-346
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
A
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
EC
C
D
BBIA0016E
E
F
G
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-347
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: March 2005
EC-348
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
C
D
E
BBIA0526E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
F
G
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
H
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
I
J
K
SEF200U
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
L
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-41, "Removal and Installation"
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
Revision: March 2005
EC-349
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1213E
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
●
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PBIB1786E
Revision: March 2005
EC-350
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
A
EC
C
Vacuum should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
E
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-117, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
F
G
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
H
Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
I
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
Refer to EC-250, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
K
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
M
18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-38, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
Revision: March 2005
EC-351
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-48, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-352
2005 Altima
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
A
UBS00CE9
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
EC
C
D
PBIB1218E
E
On Board Diagnostic Logic
UBS00CEA
NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected.
DTC No.
P0460
0460
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
noise
DTC detecting condition
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
to ECM.
F
G
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
H
I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CEB
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
L
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-354, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
M
SEF195Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-353
K
2005 Altima
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CEC
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO DI-7, "CHECK" .
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00CED
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY"
Revision: March 2005
EC-354
2005 Altima
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
A
UBS00CEE
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
EC
C
D
PBIB1218E
E
On Board Diagnostic Logic
UBS00CEF
NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer toEC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
DTC No.
P0461
0461
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
range/performance
DTC detecting condition
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change within the specified range even
though the vehicle has been driven a long distance.
F
G
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(the CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
H
I
J
Overall Function Check
UBS00CEG
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-12,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
L
M
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
Revision: March 2005
K
EC-355
2005 Altima
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn
ON.
Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII.
Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
If NG, go to Diagnostic Procedure EC-356 .
SEF195Y
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10. If NG, go to Diagnostic Procedure, EC-356 .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CEH
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO DI-7, "CHECK" .
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00CEI
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-356
2005 Altima
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
A
UBS00CEJ
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter. sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
EC
C
D
PBIB1218E
E
On Board Diagnostic Logic
UBS00CEK
NOTE:
If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
ECM receives two signals from the fuel level sensor circuit.
One is fuel level sensor power supply circuit, and the other is fuel level sensor ground circuit.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0462
0462
Fuel level sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
P0463
0463
Fuel level sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
F
G
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
H
I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CEL
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-358, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-357
2005 Altima
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CEM
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO DI-7, "CHECK" .
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00CEN
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-358
2005 Altima
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
DTC P0500 VSS
Description
PFP:32702
A
UBS002WL
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle
speed signal to the combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN
C
communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS002WM
DTC detecting condition
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
E
●
Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
shorted)
F
●
Vehicle speed sensor
●
Combination meter
●
P0500
0500
Vehicle speed sensor
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from
vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
even when vehicle is being driven.
D
Possible cause
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002WN
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-360, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 6,000 rpm (A/T models)
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T models)
COOLAN TEMP/S
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 70°C (158°F)
6.0 - 31.8 msec (A/T models)
5.0 - 31.8 msec (M/T models)
Selector lever
Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
6.
SEF196Y
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-360, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check
UBS002WO
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Revision: March 2005
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
H
EC-359
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine.
Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-360, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002WP
1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-17, "Vehicle Speed System" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-360
2005 Altima
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23781
A
UBS002WQ
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC dis- EC
played.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0506
0506
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system RPM lower than
expected
UBS002WR
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is less than the target idle
speed by 100 rpm or more.
Possible cause
F
●
Electric throttle control actuator
●
Intake air leak
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002WS
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-625,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J
L
M
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-361
I
K
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-362, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Revision: March 2005
H
2005 Altima
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002WT
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-362
2005 Altima
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
[QR]
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23781
A
UBS002WU
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC dis- EC
played.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0507
0507
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system RPM higher than
expected
UBS002WV
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is more than the target idle
speed by 200 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
F
●
Electric throttle control actuator
●
Intake air leak
●
PCV system
G
UBS002WW
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-625,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
5.
6.
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-364, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
J
L
M
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
I
K
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
EC-363
2005 Altima
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002WX
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
3. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-364
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:49763
A
UBS00C7X
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
EC
C
D
BBIA0415E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C7Y
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
F
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
(Forward direction)
OFF
Steering wheel is being turned.
ON
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C7Z
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-438 .
DTC No.
P0550
0550
Trouble diagnosis name
Power steering pressure
sensor circuit
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
H
I
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Power steering pressure sensor
J
UBS00C80
K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-365
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C81
BBWA1945E
Revision: March 2005
EC-366
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
12
P
A
Power steering pressure
sensor
●
Steering wheel is being turned
[Engine is running]
●
Steering wheel is not being turned
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0.5 - 4.0V
0.4 - 0.8V
D
[Engine is running]
67
68
B
G/R
Sensor ground
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
E
Approximately 5V
F
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C82
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
G
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
I
J
K
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-367
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0415E
3.
Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SEF479Y
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect TCM harness connector (A/T models).
Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 32 (A/T
models).
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and TCM (A/T models)
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-368
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
D
6. CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to EC-369, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace PSP sensor.
E
F
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
Component Inspection
UBS00C83
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and let it idle.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition
I
J
Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned fully.
0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel is not being turned.
0.4 - 0.8V
K
L
MBIB0025E
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-369
2005 Altima
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
PFP:23710
UBS002WY
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002WZ
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0605
0605
Trouble diagnosis name
Engine control module
DTC detecting condition
A)
ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
B)
ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
C)
ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
Possible cause
●
ECM
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
●
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
degrees) by the return spring.
●
ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
Malfunction A
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002X0
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-370
2005 Altima
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
EC
C
D
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
F
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
G
H
I
J
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
K
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002X1
1. INSPECTION START
L
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-370 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
With GST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $04 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-370 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-371
2005 Altima
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
2. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-372
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[QR]
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00C84
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
ECM
function
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Air fuel
ratio (A/F)
sensor 1
heater
control
EC
Actuator
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C85
C
D
E
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1031
1031
P1032
1032
Trouble diagnosis
name
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 heater
control circuit low
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 heater
control circuit high
F
0 - 100%
UBS00C86
G
DTC detecting condition
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.)
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
I
J
UBS00C87
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
With CONSULT-II
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-375, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure ″WITH CONSULT-II″ above.
Revision: March 2005
H
EC-373
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C88
BBWA1233E
Revision: March 2005
EC-374
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
2
R
A/F sensor 1 heater
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
D
PBIB1584E
E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C89
F
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-375
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[QR]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0409E
3.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
Revision: March 2005
EC-376
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[QR]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Component Inspection
EC
UBS00C8A
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
C
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F)
D
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
E
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
F
G
H
I
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation
J
UBS00C8B
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR HEATER
K
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-377
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
PFP:23710
UBS002X7
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning value memory, etc.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1065
1065
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM power supply circuit
UBS002X8
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.]
●
ECM
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
properly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002X9
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-378
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002XA
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1234E
Revision: March 2005
EC-379
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
121
WIRE
COLOR
W/L
ITEM
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002XB
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E124
●
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-380
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-378 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
C
With GST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $04 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-378 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> INSPECTION END
D
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
F
G
5. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
Perform EC-92, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
H
I
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-381
2005 Altima
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
PFP:23796
UBS002XK
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002XL
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
INT/V SOL (B1)
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 25% - 60%
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1111
1111
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit
UBS002XM
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
UBS002XN
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-384, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-382
2005 Altima
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002XO
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1235E
Revision: March 2005
EC-383
2005 Altima
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 10V
11
G
Intake valve timing
control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed 2,500 rpm
PBIB1790E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002XP
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0018E
4.
Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
●
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-384
2005 Altima
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
A
OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
E
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-385, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
F
G
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002XQ
I
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
J
K
L
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
PBIB0193E
4.
Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Removal and Installation
PBIB2275E
UBS002XR
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-385
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[QR]
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS002XS
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002XT
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1121
1121
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
actuator
DTC detecting condition
A)
Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction.
B)
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
not in specified range.
C)
ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CVM
NOTE:
●
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Shift shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait
at least 3 seconds.
4. Shift shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
7. Shift shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait
at least 3 seconds.
8. Shift shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-386
2005 Altima
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[QR]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Shift shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait
at least 3 seconds.
Shift shift lever to N, P position (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position.
Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
C
D
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002XV
F
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
G
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
H
I
J
BBIA0079E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
K
1.
2.
3.
L
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-387
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
PFP:16119
UBS002XW
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or
P1126. Refer to EC-386 or EC-394 .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002XX
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1122
1122
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
performance problem
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or
shorted)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
Electric throttle control function does not operate properly.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002XY
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-388
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002XZ
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1236E
Revision: March 2005
EC-389
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Throttle control motor
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
BR
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal is released
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
Y
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed
PBIB0533E
104
OR
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002Y0
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-390
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
A
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
EC
C
D
MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
H
I
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
L
1.
2.
M
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1171E
Revision: March 2005
EC-391
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 10A fuse.
2. Check 10A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
3
6
ECM terminal
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
BBIA0079E
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-392
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[QR]
11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
A
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
EC
C
D
BBIA0079E
E
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-393, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
F
G
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
H
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
14.
1.
2.
3.
I
REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
J
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002Y1
L
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
M
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
PBIB0095E
Remove and Installation
UBS002Y2
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-393
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[QR]
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS002Y3
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002Y4
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL RELAY
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002Y5
These self-diagnoses have one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1124
1124
P1126
1126
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
relay circuit short
Throttle control motor
relay circuit open
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
shorted)
●
Throttle control motor relay
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
open)
●
Throttle control motor relay
ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is
stuck ON.
ECM detects a voltage of power source for
throttle control motor is excessively low.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002Y6
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-394
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[QR]
With GST
A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
D
E
SEF058Y
F
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-395
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002Y7
BBWA1237E
Revision: March 2005
EC-396
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
104
EC
WIRE
COLOR
R
OR
ITEM
Throttle control motor
power supply
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
Diagnostic Procedure
C
D
UBS002Y8
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
PBIB1171E
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
J
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
L
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-397
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[QR]
4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
MBIB0028E
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-398
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS002Y9
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002YA
C
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1128
1128
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
circuit short
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects short in both circuits between
ECM and throttle control motor.
Possible cause
D
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
E
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
F
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002YB
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-401, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-399
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002YC
BBWA1238E
Revision: March 2005
EC-400
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
BR
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal is released
D
E
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
Y
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed
G
PBIB0533E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002YD
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
I
1.
2.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
K
L
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-401
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
3
6
ECM terminal
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
BBIA0006E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-402, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002YE
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
PBIB0095E
Revision: March 2005
EC-402
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
Removal and Installation
UBS002YF
A
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-403
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS002YW
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002YX
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
●
Engine: After warming up
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002YY
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2370E
DTC No.
P1146
1146
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 minimum voltage
monitoring
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
EC-404
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CVN
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR ” mode
with CONSULT-II
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of COSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
SEF174Y
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2372E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until ″COMPLETED″ is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00CVO
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-405
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T models).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If NG, go to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-406
PBIB1197E
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002Z1
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1220E
Revision: March 2005
EC-407
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002Z2
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-408
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-240 .
No
>> GO TO 3.
F
1.
2.
3.
G
H
I
BBIA0009E
K
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-409
J
BBIA0414E
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-410, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002Z3
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1783E
Revision: March 2005
EC-410
2005 Altima
DTC P1146 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A
EC
C
PBIB2029E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
D
E
F
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1197E
procedure.
If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS002Z4
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-411
2005 Altima
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC P1147 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS002Z5
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002Z6
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
●
Engine: After warming up
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly.
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002Z7
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2030E
DTC No.
P1147
1147
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 maximum voltage
monitoring
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
EC-412
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00CVP
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
SEF174Y
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2373E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until ″COMPLETED″ is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00CVQ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-413
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models) 3rd gear position (M/T
models).
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If NG, go to EC-416, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-414
PBIB1197E
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002ZA
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1220E
Revision: March 2005
EC-415
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
0 - Approximately 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002ZB
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-416
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-233 .
No
>> GO TO 3.
F
1.
2.
3.
G
H
I
BBIA0009E
K
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-417
J
BBIA0414E
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S2 terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-418, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS002ZC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1783E
Revision: March 2005
EC-418
2005 Altima
DTC P1147 HO2S2
[QR]
6.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
A
EC
C
PBIB2029E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
D
E
F
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
with OD OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1197E
procedure.
If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation
UBS002ZD
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-419
2005 Altima
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:22690
UBS002ZE
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1148
1148
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed loop control
function
DTC detecting condition
The closed loop control function does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
open or shorted.]
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
Revision: March 2005
EC-420
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
PFP:00000
A
UBS00ELG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
EC
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Cooling Fan Control
Sensor
C
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
ECM function
Actuator
D
Cooling fan
control
IPDM E/R
(Cooling fan relay)
E
F
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
G
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MID/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2313E
Revision: March 2005
EC-421
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1
2
3
Stop (OFF)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Low (LOW)
OFF
ON
OFF
Middle (MID)
OFF
OFF
ON
High (HI)
ON
OFF
ON
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals
Cooling fan speed
Middle (MID)
High (HI)
(+)
(−)
1
3 and 4
2
3 and 4
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
4
1 and 2
3 and 4
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
middle speed condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002ZJ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
AIR COND SIG
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
COOLING FAN
SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
MID
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(221°F) or more
HI
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002ZK
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
Revision: March 2005
EC-422
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
●
P1217
1217
Engine over temperature (Overheat)
Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat).
Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat).
Possible cause
A
●
Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
IPDM E/R
●
Cooling fan
●
Radiator hose
Radiator
●
Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method.
●
●
Radiator cap
●
Engine coolant is not within the specified
range.
●
Water pump
●
Thermostat
EC
C
D
For more information, refer toEC-432,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check
E
F
G
UBS00E46
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-427,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-427,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
K
L
M
SEF621W
4.
5.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
If the results are NG, go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF646X
Revision: March 2005
EC-423
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-427,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-427,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors
operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" .
If NG, go to EC-427, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-424
SEF621W
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002ZM
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1239E
Revision: March 2005
EC-425
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
BBWA1240E
Revision: March 2005
EC-426
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00E47
1. INSPECTION START
A
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
EC
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed
(LOW/MID/HI).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-429, "PROCEDURE A" .)
D
1.
2.
E
F
G
SEF784Z
3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active
Test" .
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-429, "PROCEDURE A" .)
I
J
K
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
L
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-9, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump
Revision: March 2005
EC-427
M
SLC754A
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief
pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace radiator cap.
SLC755A
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1.
2.
Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
Valve lift:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
More than 8 mm/95°C
(0.31 in/203°F)
3.
Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace thermostat
SLC343
7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-432, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-432, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-428
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
PROCEDURE A
A
1. CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E123.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
C
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
PBIB1681E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the following.
●
40A fusible link
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
G
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 16 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-429
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
BBIA0078E
2.
Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1670E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
40A fusible link
●
Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-430
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminals
3, 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
EC
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
BBIA0078E
E
8. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
F
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 13
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminals 10, 14
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
I
9. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-432, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace cooling fan motors.
J
K
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-431
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Engine
Step
OFF
1
Inspection item
●
Blocked radiator
●
Blocked condenser
●
Blocked radiator grille
●
Blocked bumper
2
●
3
4
UBS002ZO
Equipment
Standard
Reference page
●
Visual
No blocking
Coolant mixture
●
Coolant tester
50 - 50% coolant mixture
See MA-14, "ANTIFREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" .
●
Coolant level
●
Visual
Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck
See CO-10, "Refilling
Engine Coolant" .
●
Radiator cap
●
Pressure tester
59 - 98 kPa
See CO-9, "CHECKING
RADIATOR CAP" .
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
—
ON*2
5
●
Coolant leaks
●
Visual
No leaks
See CO-9, "CHECKING
COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS" .
ON*2
6
●
Thermostat
●
Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot
See CO-16, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" , and
CO-11, "RADIATOR" .
ON*1
7
●
Cooling fan
●
CONSULT-II
Operating
See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-421 ).
OFF
8
●
Combustion gas leak
●
Color checker chemical
tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative
—
ON*3
9
●
Coolant temperature
gauge
●
Visual
Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
●
Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
●
Visual
No overflow during driving
and idling
See CO-10, "Refilling
Engine Coolant" .
OFF*4
10
●
Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radiator
●
Visual
Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
See CO-9, "CHECKING
RESERVOIR LEVEL" .
OFF
11
●
Cylinder head
●
Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)
SeeEM-59, "CYLINDER
HEAD" .
12
●
Cylinder block and pistons
●
Visual
No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
See EM-75, "CYLINDER
BLOCK" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection
UBS002ZP
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
1.
2.
Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
SEF734W
Revision: March 2005
EC-432
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
Cooling fan speed
Middle (MID)
High (HI)
Cooling fan motor terminals
(+)
(−)
1
3 and 4
2
3 and 4
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
4
1 and 2
3 and 4
A
EC
C
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-433
2005 Altima
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS002ZY
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002ZZ
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1225
1225
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position
learning performance
problem
Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
UBS00300
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-435, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-434
2005 Altima
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00301
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
A
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0079E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Remove and Installation
UBS00302
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
I
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-435
2005 Altima
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00303
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00304
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1226
1226
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed throttle position
learning performance
problem
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
UBS00305
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-437, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-436
2005 Altima
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00306
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
A
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0079E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Remove and Installation
UBS00307
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
I
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-437
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16119
UBS0030G
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1229
1229
Trouble diagnosis name
Sensor power supply circuit
short
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1)
●
Power steering pressure sensor
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
ECM detects a voltage of power source
for sensor is excessively low or high.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS0030H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-440, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-438
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0030I
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1241E
Revision: March 2005
EC-439
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system
pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
R
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
68
G/R
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
90
R
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS0030J
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-440
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0811E
H
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
I
Check the following.
●
Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
90
APP sensor terminal 2
EC-551
48
EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3
EC-324
49
Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
EC-606
68
PSP sensor terminal 1
EC-366
J
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
M
Check the following.
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-609 .)
●
Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-369 .)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-334 .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning component.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-556, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-441
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-442
2005 Altima
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00C65
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C66
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C67
K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No.
P1271
1271
Trouble diagnosis
name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity
detected
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
UBS00ELH
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-443
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
SEF581Z
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
COOLANT TEMP/S
Less than 70°C (158°F)
Shift lever
Suitable position
7.
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-444
2005 Altima
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C6A
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-445
2005 Altima
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
[Engine is running]
B/Y
56
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C6B
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0411E
3.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
Revision: March 2005
EC-446
2005 Altima
DTC P1271 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
EC
C
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
F
G
H
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
K
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
L
M
UBS00C6C
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-447
2005 Altima
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00C6D
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C6E
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C6F
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No.
P1272
1272
Trouble diagnosis
name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity
detected
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
UBS00ELI
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-448
2005 Altima
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-451, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF581Z
D
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
COOLANT TEMP/S
Less than 70°C (158°F)
Shift lever
Suitable position
7.
E
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-451, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
F
G
H
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-449
2005 Altima
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C6I
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-450
2005 Altima
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
B/Y
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
56
A
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
D
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C6J
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
K
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
BBIA0411E
3.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
Revision: March 2005
EC-451
2005 Altima
DTC P1272 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00C6K
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-452
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00C6L
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C6M
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C6N
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted lean side or rich side. When the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.
DTC No.
P1273
1273
Trouble diagnosis
name
Air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 lean shift
monitoring
DTC detecting condition
●
The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/
F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a
specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
M
UBS00ELJ
WITH CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: March 2005
EC-453
L
Possible Cause
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1.
2.
K
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-456, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
PBIB2035E
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select “Service $03” with GST and make sure that DTC P0102
is detected.
7. Select “Service $04” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
11. Select “Service $07” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-456, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-454
BBIA0009E
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C6Q
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-455
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
[Engine is running]
B/Y
56
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C6R
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
BBIA0411E
Revision: March 2005
EC-456
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF215Z
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-233 .
No
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
I
J
BBIA0009E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-457
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0411E
4.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1683E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-458
2005 Altima
DTC P1273 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
EC
C
D
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
E
F
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
H
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
I
J
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
K
L
Removal and Installation
UBS00C6S
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-459
M
2005 Altima
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00C6T
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C6U
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C6V
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to the lean side or rich side. When the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifting to the rich side, the
malfunction will be detected.
DTC No.
P1274
1274
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1
rich shift monitoring
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a
specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel Injector
UBS00ELK
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-460
2005 Altima
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
A
EC
C
PBIB2035E
D
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select “Service $03” with GST and make sure that DTC P0102
is detected.
7. Select “Service $04” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
11. Select “Service $07” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
E
F
G
H
BBIA0009E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-461
2005 Altima
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C6Y
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-462
2005 Altima
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
B/Y
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
56
A
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
D
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C6Z
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
L
>> GO TO 3.
M
BBIA0411E
Revision: March 2005
EC-463
2005 Altima
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-240 .
No
>> GO TO 4.
BBIA0009E
4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
BBIA0411E
Revision: March 2005
EC-464
2005 Altima
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
C
D
PBIB1683E
E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
F
G
H
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
J
K
L
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
Revision: March 2005
EC-465
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1274 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00C70
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-466
2005 Altima
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00C71
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C72
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C73
K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No.
P1276
1276
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1
circuit high
voltage
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
UBS00ELL
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-467
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
4.
5.
6.
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
ENG SPEED
1,750 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 8.0 msec
COOLANT TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
Shift lever
D position with OD ON (A/T models)
5th position (M/T models)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from
step 2.
7.
SEF576Z
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
SEF577Z
8.
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF578Z
Overall Function Check
UBS00ELM
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times.
Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times.
Revision: March 2005
EC-468
2005 Altima
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
8.
9.
Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-471, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-469
2005 Altima
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C76
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-470
2005 Altima
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
B/Y
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
56
A
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
D
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C77
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
K
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
BBIA0411E
3.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
Revision: March 2005
EC-471
2005 Altima
DTC P1276 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00C78
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST"
Revision: March 2005
EC-472
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00C79
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C7A
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C7B
K
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
L
DTC No.
P1278
1278
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow
response
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
●
The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal
takes more than the specified time.
EC-473
M
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel Injector
●
Intake air leaks
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
PCV
●
Mass air flow sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ELN
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
PBIB0756E
7.
a.
b.
8.
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-477, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “Service $01” with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
● Intake air leaks
Revision: March 2005
EC-474
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Exhaust gas leaks
A
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Injectors
EC
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
● PCV valve
● Mass air flow sensor
C
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
D
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
E
Select “Service $07” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-477, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-475
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C7E
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-476
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
B/Y
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
56
A
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
D
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C7F
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
L
>> GO TO 3.
M
BBIA0411E
Revision: March 2005
EC-477
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-478
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF215Z
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-233 , EC-240 .
No
>> GO TO 6.
G
H
I
J
BBIA0009E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-479
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0411E
4.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-480
2005 Altima
DTC P1278 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
EC
C
D
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
E
F
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
H
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
I
J
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-184, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
K
L
11. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-50, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
M
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00C7G
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-481
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00C7H
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C7I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C7J
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signals computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
DTC No.
P1279
1279
Trouble diagnosis name
Air-fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 circuit slow
response
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
●
The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F signal
computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes
more than the specified time.
EC-482
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor heater 1
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel Injector
●
Intake air leaks
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
PCV
●
Mass air flow sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ELO
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB0756E
7.
a.
b.
8.
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
H
I
J
K
PBIB1925E
L
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “Service $01” with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
● Intake air leaks
Revision: March 2005
EC-483
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Fuel Injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
● PCV valve
● Mass air flow sensor
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
Select “Service $07” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Revision: March 2005
EC-484
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C7M
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1242E
Revision: March 2005
EC-485
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
OR/L
[Engine is running]
B/Y
56
OR
75
W/L
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
2 - 3V
2 - 3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C7N
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
BBIA0411E
Revision: March 2005
EC-486
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
A
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
C
D
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
E
F
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
G
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-487
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-65, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0172. Refer to EC-233 , EC-240 .
No
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-488
BBIA0009E
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0411E
E
4.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
G
H
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-489
2005 Altima
DTC P1279 A/F SENSOR 1
[QR]
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
5
35
6
56
2
75
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-184, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-50, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00C7O
AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-490
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920
Description
A
UBS00CEO
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Vehicle speed sensor
Vehicle speed*2
EC
ECM
function
Actuator
C
D
EVAP canister purge
flow control
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
E
F
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line.
G
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
H
I
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
J
K
L
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CEP
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
PURG VOL C/V
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
(Accelerator pedal is not
depressed even slightly, after
engine starting)
0%
2,000 rpm
20 - 30%
EC-491
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1444
1444
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid
valve
UBS00CEQ
DTC detecting condition
The canister purge flow is detected during the
specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
completely closed.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
(The valve is stuck open.)
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP canister
●
Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
UBS00CER
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
PBIB0839E
6.
7.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC494, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-494, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-492
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CES
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1227E
Revision: March 2005
EC-493
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
45
PU/R
●
Idle speed
●
Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
PBIB0050E
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00CET
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0017E
4.
Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0080E
Revision: March 2005
EC-494
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
D
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
I
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
J
K
L
BBIA0526E
2.
Check connectors for water.
M
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-495
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1786E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-497, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> GO TO 13.
PBIB1213E
Revision: March 2005
EC-496
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
A
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
EC
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
C
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
E
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
F
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CEU
H
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
I
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
J
K
L
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
M
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation
UBS00CEV
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-497
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14935
UBS00CEW
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
Control System” diagnoses.
PBIB1263E
BBIA0526E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00CEX
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1446
1446
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve close
UBS00CEY
DTC detecting condition
EVAP canister vent control valve remains
closed under specified driving conditions.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●
Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
UBS00CEZ
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
Revision: March 2005
EC-498
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
a.
b.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
Repeat next procedures 3 times.
Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-501, "Diagnostic Procedure"
SEF058Y
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
Repeat next procedure 20 times.
Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
PBIB0972E
8.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-501, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-499
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00CF0
BBWA1228E
Revision: March 2005
EC-500
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
EC
WIRE
COLOR
OR
A
ITEM
EVAP canister vent control
valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
UBS00CF1
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
D
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
Check the rubber tube for clogging.
F
G
H
BBIA0526E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
I
J
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-502, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
K
L
3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
M
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1213E
Revision: March 2005
EC-501
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
BBIA0526E
2.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CF2
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Revision: March 2005
EC-502
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[QR]
2.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
3.
4.
A
EC
C
PBIB1033E
D
5.
6.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
ON
No
OFF
Yes
7.
8.
E
Air passage continuity between A and B
F
Operation takes less than 1 second.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent
control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 5 again.
G
PBIB1787E
H
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
I
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
J
K
L
PBIB1033E
3.
Condition
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
4.
5.
M
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Operation takes less than 1 second.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
Revision: March 2005
EC-503
PBIB1034E
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25551
UBS00320
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
PBIB2533E
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00321
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
MAIN SW
●
CANCEL SW
●
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
CRUISE switch: Pressed
ON
CRUISE switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCEL switch: Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00322
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-370 .
DTC No.
P1564
1564
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
ASCD steering
switch
DTC Detecting Condition
●
An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
●
ECM detects that input signal from the
ASCD steering switch is out of the specified
range.
●
ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch
is stuck ON.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
●
ASCD steering switch
●
ECM
UBS00323
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-504
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Press CRUISE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press RESUME/ACCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then
release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release
it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-508, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-505
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00324
BBWA1243E
Revision: March 2005
EC-506
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
EC
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
99
G/Y
A
ASCD steering switch
CRUISE switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
RESUME/ACCEL switch: Pressed
C
Approximately 0V
D
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
E
Approximately 1V
F
Approximately 2V
G
Approximately 3V
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-507
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00325
1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
1.
2.
Switch
CRUISE switch
Monitor item
MAIN SW
SET/COAST
switch
SET SW
RESUME/
ACCEL switch
RESUME/ACC SW
CANCEL switch
CANCEL SW
1.
2.
Condition
Indication
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
SEC006D
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.
Switch
CRUISE switch
SET/COAST switch
RESUME/ACCEL switch
CANCEL switch
Condition
Voltage [V]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4.0
Pressed
Approx. 2.0
Released
Approx. 4.0
Pressed
Approx. 3.0
Released
Approx. 4.0
Pressed
Approx. 1.0
Released
Approx. 4.0
PBIB0311E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
19 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-508
BBIA0243E
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Combination switch (spiral cable)
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
D
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 20.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
F
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
●
Combination switch (spiral cable)
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
H
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
J
Refer to EC-509, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace ASCD steering switch.
K
L
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00326
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1.
2.
Disconnect ASCD steering switch.
Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 1 and
2 with pushing each switch.
Switch
CRUISE switch
SET SW/COAST switch
RESUME/ACCEL switch
Revision: March 2005
Condition
Resistance [Ω]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 660
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 1,480
Released
Approx. 4,000
EC-509
SEC008D
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
Switch
CANCEL switch
Condition
Resistance [Ω]
Pressed
Approx. 250
Released
Approx. 4,000
If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.
Revision: March 2005
EC-510
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS00327
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
EC
C
D
BBIA0087E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00328
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
BRAKE SW2
(STOP lamp switch)
CONDITION
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
●
Brake pedal: Fully released
●
Clutch pedal: Fully released
(M/T)
●
Brake pedal: Slightly
depressed
●
Clutch pedal: Fully
depressed (M/T)
ON
G
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly
depressed
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
F
SPECIFICATION
H
I
UBS00329
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-370 .
●
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-511
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC No.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
DTC Detecting Condition
●
A)
P1572
1572
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp
switch and the ASCD brake switch are
sent to ECM at the same time.
ASCD brake switch
●
B)
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to
ECM for extremely long time while the
vehicle is driving
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
●
Harness or connectors
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
●
Harness or connectors
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T models)
●
Stop lamp switch
●
ASCD brake switch
●
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
●
Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
●
Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
●
Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T models)
●
ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS0032A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Press CRUISE switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator
lights up.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
If DTC is detected, go to EC-515, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
PBIB2386E
5.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Depress the brake pedal for more than
5 seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
6.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-515, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-512
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0032B
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1244E
Revision: March 2005
EC-513
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
101
R/G
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
108
G/B*
1
G/R*2
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
●
Clutch pedal: Depressed (M/T)
ASCD brake switch
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Fully released
●
Clutch pedal: Released (M/T)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
*1: A/T models
*2: M/T models
Revision: March 2005
EC-514
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS0032C
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
EC
1.
2.
C
M/T models
CONDITION
INDICATION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed
OFF
When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
ON
D
E
A/T models
CONDITION
INDICATION
When brake pedal: Depress
OFF
When brake pedal: Fully released
ON
1.
2.
SEC011D
F
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
G
M/T models
H
CONDITION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed
When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
I
Battery voltage
A/T models
CONDITION
When brake pedal: Depress
When brake pedal: Fully released
J
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
MBIB0061E
Battery voltage
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-515
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
INDICATION
When brake pedal: Released
OFF
When brake pedal: Depressed
ON
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION
When brake pedal: Released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
When brake pedal: Depressed
Battery voltage
PBIB1677E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0087E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION
When clutch pedal: Released
When clutch pedal: Depressed
VOLTAGE
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
PBIB0857E
EC-516
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0088E
E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
G
H
PBIB0799E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
Revision: March 2005
EC-517
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0087E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
PBIB0857E
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-518
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
EC
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
D
E
F
BBIA0049E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
G
H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
I
J
PBIB0117E
K
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
L
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
Revision: March 2005
EC-519
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E28, M7
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS0032D
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
When brake pedal is fully released.
When brake pedal is depressed.
Continuity
Should exist.
Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
When clutch pedal is fully released.
When clutch pedal is depressed.
Continuity
Should exist.
Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,
"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC024D
Revision: March 2005
EC-520
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
When brake pedal is fully released.
When brake pedal is depressed.
EC
Continuity
Should not exist.
C
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
D
PBIB0118E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-521
2005 Altima
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:31036
UBS0032E
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS0032F
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500.
Refer to EC-359, "DTC P0500 VSS"
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-370, "DTC P0605 ECM"
DTC No.
P1574
1574
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
ASCD vehicle speed
sensor
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●
Harness or connectors
(The combination meter circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
TCM
●
Combination meter
●
Vehicle speed sensor
●
ECM
ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified range.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS0032G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine.
Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-523, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-522
2005 Altima
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS0032H
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
A
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
EC
C
2. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT”
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
D
E
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-523
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:32006
UBS0032I
When the shift lever position is P (A/T models only) or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS0032J
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
P/N POSI SW
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Shift lever:
P or N (A/T model)
Neutral (M/T model)
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1706
1706
Trouble diagnosis name
Park/neutral position
switch
UBS0032K
DTC detecting condition
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
circuit is open or shorted.]
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
UBS0032L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever)
Known-good signal
P or N position
ON
Except the above position
OFF
3.
4.
5.
If NG, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 1,500 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
3.0 - 31.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
6.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Revision: March 2005
EC-524
SEF212Y
SEF213Y
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
Overall Function Check
UBS0032M
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
Condition (Gear position)
Except the above position
3.
EC
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
P or N position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T)
A
C
Voltage V (Known good data)
Approx. 0
D
A/T: Battery voltage
M/T: Approximately 5V
E
If NG, go to EC-528, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MBIB0043E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-525
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0032N
AT MODELS
WBWA0109E
Revision: March 2005
EC-526
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
MT MODELS
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1246E
Revision: March 2005
EC-527
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
102
GW
PNP switch
Gear position is P or N
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Except the above gear position
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V
A/T models
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
M/T models
Approximately 5V
UBS00CVR
1. CONFIRM THE TRANSMISSION TYPE
Which type of transmission (A/T or M/T) is on the vehicle?
A/T or MT
A/T
>> Go to EC-528, "PROCEDURE A" .
M/T
>> Go to EC-531, "PROCEDURE B" .
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector M24.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter terminals 39, 40 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester under the following conditions.
Condition (Shift position)
Voltage
P position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
N position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Except the above position
Approximately 0 V
WBIA0640E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-528
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0439E
E
4.
Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
PBIB1881E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
10A fuse
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminals 7, 9 and combination meter terminals 39, 40.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between PNP switch and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-529
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace PNP switch.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
9. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. REPLACE CONBINATION METER
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace combination meter
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-530
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
PROCEDURE B
A
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and
ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
BBIA0438E
E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
J
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH
L
Refer to MT-13, "POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace PNP switch.
M
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-531
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14955
UBS00C7P
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
BBIA0022E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00C7Q
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VIAS S/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Idle
OFF
More than 5,000 rpm
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00C7R
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1800
1800
Trouble diagnosis name
VIAS control solenoid valve
circuit
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
VIAS control solenoid valve
An excessively low or high voltage signal is
sent to ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00C7S
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-534, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-532
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00C7T
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1256E
Revision: March 2005
EC-533
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
29
Y/G
VIAS control solenoid valve
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00C7U
1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0022E
4.
Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0173E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R connector E122
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and VIAS control solenoid valve
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-534
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
E
Refer to EC-535, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00C7V
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition
VIAS SOL VALVE
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
ON
Yes
No
OFF
No
Yes
J
K
L
M
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2505E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No
No supply
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2532E
Revision: March 2005
I
EC-535
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[QR]
Removal and Installation
UBS00C7W
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-536
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS0032P
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS0032Q
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW
C
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS0032R
E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1805
1805
Trouble diagnosis name
Brake switch
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Stop lamp switch
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for
extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
F
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be
poor.
Vehicle condition
Driving condition
When engine is idling
Normal
When accelerating
Poor acceleration
DTC Confirmation Procedure
J
UBS0032S
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Turn ignition switch ON.
Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
L
M
PBIB1952E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
I
EC-537
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0032T
BBWA1247E
Revision: March 2005
EC-538
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
101
R/G
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
UBS0032U
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal
Stop lamp
Fully released
Not illuminated
Depressed
Illuminated
F
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
I
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
J
K
L
BBIA0049E
2.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
M
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0117E
Revision: March 2005
EC-539
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
10A fuse
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E28, M7
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-540, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS0032V
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0049E
Revision: March 2005
EC-540
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Conditions
Continuity
Brake pedal fully released
Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed
A
EC
Should exist.
If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE
PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.
C
PBIB0118E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-541
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
UBS002TV
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002TW
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002TX
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-438 .
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P2122
2122
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low
input
Possible cause
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123
2123
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002TY
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Revision: March 2005
EC-542
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
A
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
C
D
SEF058Y
E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-543
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002TZ
BBWA1249E
Revision: March 2005
EC-544
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
82
83
WIRE
COLOR
B
G
EC
ITEM
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
90
R
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 0V
D
[Engine is running]
●
●
Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
Idle speed
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
G
0.28 - 0.48V
H
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
W
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
K
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002U0
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-545
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0811E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
Harness for open or short between TCM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-546
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
C
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
E
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK APP SENSOR
G
Refer to EC-571, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
H
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CVS
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
Revision: March 2005
MBIB0023E
EC-547
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[QR]
4.
5.
6.
7.
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
UBS002U2
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-548
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
A
UBS00308
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00309
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
G
H
I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS0030A
J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2127
2127
P2128
2128
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low
input
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
●
K
Harness or connectors
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS0030B
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
Revision: March 2005
EC-549
L
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-552, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-550
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0030C
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1250E
Revision: March 2005
EC-551
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
82
83
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
R
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
B
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
G
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
●
●
Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
Idle speed
90
R
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS0030D
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-552
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0812E
H
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
M
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check the following.
●
Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-544
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-396
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-553
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-554
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
12. CHECK APP SENSOR
A
Refer to EC-556, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
EC
13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
C
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
E
>> INSPECTION END
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-555
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS00CVT
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation
UBS0030F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-556
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS002T7
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002T8
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
F
SPECIFICATION
G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002T9
H
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P0221
0221
Throttle position sensor
circuit range/performance problem
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
and TP sensor 2.
I
Possible cause
Harness or connector
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
J
K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
L
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002TA
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-557
2005 Altima
M
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2.
3.
4.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-560, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-558
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002TB
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1251E
Revision: March 2005
EC-559
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
Throttle position sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
Throttle position sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
●
●
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
Less than 4.75V
Engine stopped
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002TC
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-560
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0006E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check the following.
●
Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
M
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-400
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-544
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-561
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-562
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Component Inspection
UBS002TD
A
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models).
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1), 69 (TP
sensor 2) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1060E
UBS002TE
F
G
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-563
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
UBS002TN
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS002TO
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminals voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS002TP
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-438 .
DTC No.
P2138
2138
Trouble diagnosis name
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
range/performance
problem
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
and APP sensor 2.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connector
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and
2
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-564
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS002TQ
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-567, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-565
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS002TR
BBWA1248E
Revision: March 2005
EC-566
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
EC
ITEM
CONDITION
47
R
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
82
B
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
●
83
G
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
D
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
E
Approximately 0V
Idle speed
F
90
R
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
H
0.28 - 0.48V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
I
More than 2.0V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
W
A
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
K
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
L
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS002TS
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-164, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-567
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0811E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB2039E
Revision: March 2005
EC-568
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
D
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
F
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
G
Check the following.
●
Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
H
Reference Wiring Diagram
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-566
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-400
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
K
Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
L
9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
M
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-569
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 5
and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
Harness for open or short between TCM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-571, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
Revision: March 2005
EC-570
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[QR]
15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
D
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
E
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00CVU
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
F
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
G
H
I
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-93, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation
J
K
UBS002TU
L
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-571
M
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
PFP:22448
UBS0032W
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil primary circuit. This ON-OFF operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
BBIA0004E
Revision: March 2005
EC-572
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0032X
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1252E
Revision: March 2005
EC-573
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay (Self shut-off)
A few seconds after turning ignition switch
OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
Revision: March 2005
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
EC-574
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1253E
Revision: March 2005
EC-575
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.1V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
62
81
Y/R
G/R
PBIB0521E
Ignition signal No. 1
Ignition signal No. 2
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●
●
Warm-up condition
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: March 2005
EC-576
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1254E
Revision: March 2005
EC-577
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 0.1V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
61
80
L/R
G/Y
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 4
PBIB0521E
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●
●
Warm-up condition
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00E43
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that all circuits do not produce a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB0133E
Revision: March 2005
EC-578
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
Without CONSULT-II
Let engine idle.
Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1204E
PBIB0521E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 8.
G
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
H
I
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Go to EC-159, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
J
K
MBIB0034E
5. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1, condenser terminal 2
and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-579
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connector E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
●
Harness for open or short between condenser and ground
>> Repair or replace open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-581, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace condenser.
8. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0004E
5.
Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
PBIB0138E
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connector E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-580
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
D
11. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
E
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
H
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-581, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
I
J
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
Component Inspection
UBS0032Z
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No.
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2
Except 0 or ∞
M
1 and 3
2 and 3
Except 0
PBIB0847E
CONDENSER
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-581
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
3.
Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation
UBS00330
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-29, "IGNITION COIL" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-582
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
VIAS
Description
PFP:14956
A
UBS00331
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Closed throttle position
Battery
Battery voltage*
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
ECM
function
EC
Actuator
C
VIAS
control
VIAS control solenoid valve
D
E
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB0843E
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the
effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port
including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the
signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power
valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction
resistance under high speeds.
Revision: March 2005
EC-583
2005 Altima
L
M
VIAS
[QR]
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The
vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid
valve.
BBIA0022E
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
BBIA0022E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
MONITOR ITEM
VIAS S/V
UBS00332
CONDITION
●
Revision: March 2005
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Idle
OFF
More than 5,000 rpm
ON
EC-584
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00333
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1255E
Revision: March 2005
EC-585
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
29
Y/G
VIAS control solenoid
valve
●
[Engine is running]
●
Revision: March 2005
Idle speed
Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm
EC-586
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00334
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0844E
3.
F
Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and make sure
that power valve actuator rod moves.
G
H
BBIA0023E
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that
power valve actuator rod moves.
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0023E
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-587
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
With CONSULT-II
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
1.
2.
3.
VIAS SOL VALVE
Vacuum
ON
Should exist.
OFF
Should not exist.
PBIB0844E
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2.
Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition
Vacuum
12V direct current supply
Should exist.
No supply
Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0845E
4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-117, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L
Revision: March 2005
EC-588
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
A
Refer to EC-590, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace vacuum tank.
EC
6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
D
E
F
BBIA0022E
4.
Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
G
H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
I
J
PBIB0173E
K
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R connector E122
●
10A fuse
●
Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve
L
M
>> Repair harness or connectors.
8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-589
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-590, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00335
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition
VIAS SOL VALVE
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
ON
Yes
No
OFF
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2505E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No
No supply
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2532E
VACUUM TANK
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum pump.
Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B .
PBIB0846E
Revision: March 2005
EC-590
2005 Altima
VIAS
[QR]
Removal and Installation
UBS00336
A
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-591
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
PFP:16600
UBS00337
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00338
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
B/FUEL SCHDL
CONDITION
●
See EC-148, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/
T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
INJ PULSE-B1
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
EC-592
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00339
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1257E
Revision: March 2005
EC-593
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
22
23
41
42
R/Y
R/B
R/L
R/W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
PBIB0529E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB0530E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS0033A
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-594
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
F
G
H
I
PBIB1986E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 3.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-595
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect injector harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0024E
4.
Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness connectors F12, F101
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-596
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F12, F101
●
Harness for open or short between injector and ECM
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
7. CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to EC-597, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace injector.
D
E
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
G
Component Inspection
UBS0033B
INJECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect injector harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
H
Resistance: 11.6 - 14.9Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
I
J
K
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation
UBS0033C
INJECTOR
L
Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-597
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:17042
UBS00E44
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Battery
Battery voltage*
ECM Function
Actuator
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump relay
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition
Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking
Operates.
When engine is stopped
Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above
Stops.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank.
BBIA0081E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS0033H
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
FUEL PUMP RLY
CONDITION
●
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●
Engine running or cranking
●
Except above conditions
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
ON
OFF
EC-598
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0033I
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1258E
Revision: March 2005
EC-599
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
114
B/OR
Fuel pump relay
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
More than 1 second after turning ignition switch
ON
Diagnostic Procedure
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS0033J
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
BBIA0025E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0450E
4.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 114 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2032E
Revision: March 2005
EC-600
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
C
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
D
E
WBIA0079E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the following.
●
Harness or connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
G
H
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
J
K
L
BBIA0026E
5.
Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
Battery voltage should exist for 1 second
after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
Revision: March 2005
EC-601
2005 Altima
M
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
6. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace fuse.
7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness or connectors E33, B3
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
●
>> Repair harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-603, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace condenser.
Revision: March 2005
EC-602
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Check harness continuity between
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness
connector B3 terminal 4,
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
C
D
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
BBIA0391E
E
12. CHECK FUEL PUMP
F
Refer to EC-603, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace fuel pump.
G
H
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection
I
J
UBS0033K
FUEL PUMP
1.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
K
L
M
BBIA0391E
2.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
SEC918C
Revision: March 2005
EC-603
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
CONDENSER
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation
UBS0033L
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-604
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:92136
A
UBS0033S
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
EC
C
D
WBIA0441E
E
F
G
H
SEF099X
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-605
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS0033T
BBWA1259E
Revision: March 2005
EC-606
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
49
R
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
sensor)
67
B
Sensor ground
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
D
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
70
W
Refrigerant pressure sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON
(Compressor operates.)
Diagnostic Procedure
E
1.0 - 4.0V
F
UBS0033U
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
A
G
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
H
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
PBIB1188E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-607
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
Stop engine.
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
WBIA0441E
5.
Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0085E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-608
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
C
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
E
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
H
UBS0033V
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to ATC-113, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" ,MTC-99, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-609
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
PFP:25350
UBS0033W
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS0033X
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect CONSULT-II or GST and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
Indication
Rear window defogger
switch ON
ON
Rear window defogger
switch OFF
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0103E
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions.
Condition
Indication
Lighting switch ON at 2nd
position
ON
Lighting switch OFF
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-42, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" orLT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
-" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-610
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS0033Y
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
for the ASCD function.
EC
C
D
BBIA0087E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS0033Z
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
BRAKE SW2
(STOP lamp switch)
CONDITION
●
●
●
Brake pedal: Fully released
●
Clutch pedal: Fully released (M/T)
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
●
Clutch pedal: Fully depressed (M/T)
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
F
ON
G
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-611
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00340
BBWA1260E
Revision: March 2005
EC-612
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
EC
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
101
R/G
A
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
1
108
G/B*
G/R*2
●
Brake pedal: Depressed
●
Clutch pedal: Depressed (M/T)
ASCD brake switch
Approximately 0V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Fully released
●
Clutch pedal: Released (M/T)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
*1: A/T models
*2: M/T models
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-613
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00341
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
1.
2.
M/T models
CONDITION
INDICATION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed
OFF
When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
ON
A/T models
CONDITION
INDICATION
When brake pedal: Depressed
OFF
When brake pedal: Fully released
ON
1.
2.
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
M/T models
CONDITION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal: Depressed
When clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
A/T models
CONDITION
When brake pedal: Depressed
When brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
MBIB0061E
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
EC-614
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
EC
INDICATION
When brake pedal: Released
OFF
When brake pedal: Depressed
ON
C
D
SEC013D
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION
When brake pedal: Released
F
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
When brake pedal: Depressed
G
Battery voltage
H
MBIB0060E
I
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 13.
J
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
M
BBIA0087E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION
When clutch pedal: Released
When clutch pedal: Depressed
VOLTAGE
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
PBIB0799E
EC-615
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0088E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB0799E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
Revision: March 2005
EC-616
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0087E
E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
G
H
PBIB0857E
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-617
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0049E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
PBIB0117E
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
Revision: March 2005
EC-618
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E28, M7
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
D
Refer to EC-520, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
E
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-619
2005 Altima
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
PFP:24814
UBS00342
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
●
CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
●
SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00343
Specification data are reference value.
MONITOR ITEM
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
Revision: March 2005
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch is pressed at
first time → second time
ON → OFF
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD is operating
ON
●
When vehicle is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144
km/h (89 MPH)
ASCD is not operating
OFF
EC-620
2005 Altima
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00344
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1261E
Revision: March 2005
EC-621
2005 Altima
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00345
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch is pressed at
first time → second time
ON → OFF
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD is operating
ON
●
When vehicle is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144
km/h (89 MPH)
ASCD is not operating
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001is not displayed.
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001, refer to EC-166, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
Does combination meter operate normally?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-158, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-622
2005 Altima
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[QR]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
Wiring Diagram
PFP:24814
A
UBS00ELP
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1232E
Revision: March 2005
EC-623
2005 Altima
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[QR]
BBWA1262E
Revision: March 2005
EC-624
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
PFP:00030
A
UBS0034H
Approximately 350 kPa (3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi)
Fuel pressure at idle
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Target idle speed
UBS0034I
No-load*1 [in P or N position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T)]
700±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON
In P or N position (A/T) or Neutral position
(M/T)
800 rpm or more*2
Ignition timing
In P or N position (A/T) or Neutral position
(M/T)
15°± 5° BTDC
C
D
*1: Under the following conditions:
E
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
●
Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
F
*2: It refrigerant pressure is low, the idle speed may not be increased.
Calculated Load Value
UBS0034J
Conditions
G
Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle
10 - 35
At 2,500 rpm
10 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor
H
UBS0034K
Supply voltage
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle
I
0.9 - 1.2V*
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
4.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
J
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
UBS0034L
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.9 - 2.1
80 (176)
0.31 - 0.37
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
L
UBS0034M
M
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
UBS0034N
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
2.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
UBS0034O
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
5.0 - 7.0Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
UBS00CV1
Refer to EC-278, "Component Inspection" .
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
UBS00CV2
Refer to EC-285, "Component Inspection" .
Revision: March 2005
K
EC-625
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR]
Throttle Control Motor
UBS00CV3
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Injector
UBS00CV4
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
11.6 - 14.9Ω
Fuel Pump
UBS00CV5
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Revision: March 2005
0.2 - 5.0Ω
EC-626
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index
PFP:00024
A
UBS00HZG
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
U1000
1000*4
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-790
U1001
4
1001*
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
EC-790
P0000
0000
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011
0011
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
EC-793
P0021
0021
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
EC-793
P0037
0037
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-797
P0038
0038
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
EC-797
P0057
0057
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-797
P0058
0058
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
EC-797
P0101
0101
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-806
P0102
0102
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-815
P0103
0103
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-815
P0112
0112
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-822
P0113
0113
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-822
P0117
0117
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-826
P0118
0118
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-826
P0122
0122
TP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-831
P0123
0123
TP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-831
P0125
0125
ECT SENSOR
EC-838
P0127
0127
IAT SENSOR
EC-841
P0128
0128
THERMSTAT FNCTN
EC-844
P0138
0138
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-846
P0139
0139
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-856
P0158
0158
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-846
P0159
0159
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-856
P0171
0171
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
EC-868
P0172
0172
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
EC-879
P0174
0174
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
EC-868
P0175
0175
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
EC-879
P0181
0181
FTT SENSOR
EC-890
P0182
0182
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-895
P0183
0183
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-895
P0222
0222
TP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-899
P0223
0223
TP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-899
P0300
0300
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
EC-906
P0301
0301
CYL 1 MISFIRE
EC-906
Revision: March 2005
EC-627
—
2005 Altima
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P0302
0302
CYL 2 MISFIRE
EC-906
P0303
0303
CYL 3 MISFIRE
EC-906
P0304
0304
CYL 4 MISFIRE
EC-906
P0305
0305
CYL 5 MISFIRE
EC-906
P0306
0306
CYL 6 MISFIRE
EC-906
P0327
0327
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-916
P0328
0328
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-916
P0335
0335
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
EC-921
P0340
0340
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
EC-928
P0345
0345
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
EC-928
P0400
0400
EGR SYSTEM
EC-937
P0403
0403
EGR VOL CON/V CIR
EC-945
P0405
0405
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
EC-952
P0406
0406
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
EC-952
P0420
0420
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
EC-959
P0430
0430
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
EC-959
P0441
0441
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
EC-964
P0442
0442
EVAP SMALL LEAK
EC-969
P0444
0444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-977
P0445
0445
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-977
P0447
0447
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-984
P0451
0451
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-991
P0452
0452
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-994
P0453
0453
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
EC-1000
P0455
0455
EVAP GROSS LEAK
EC-1008
P0456
0456
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
EC-1016
P0460
0460
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
EC-1025
P0461
0461
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-1027
P0462
0462
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-1029
P0463
0463
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
EC-1029
5
P0500
0500
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*
EC-1031
P0506
0506
ISC SYSTEM
EC-1033
P0507
0507
ISC SYSTEM
EC-1035
P0550
0550
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
EC-1037
P0605
0605
ECM
EC-1042
P0705
0705
PNP SW/CIRC
AT-471
P0710
0710
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
AT-476
P0711
0711
FLUID TEMP SEN
AT-481
P0717
0717
TURBINE SENSOR
AT-486
P0722
0722
VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*5
AT-490
P0731
0731
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
AT-496
P0732
0732
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
AT-499
Revision: March 2005
EC-628
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P0733
0733
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
AT-505
P0734
0734
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
AT-511
P0735
0735
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
AT-516
P0744
0744
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
AT-522
P0745
0745
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
AT-525
P0750
0750
SFT SOL A/CIRC
AT-530
P0755
0755
SFT SOL B/CIRC
AT-535
P0760
0760
SHIFT SOL C
AT-540
P0762
0762
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
AT-545
P0765
0765
SHIFT SOL D
AT-550
P0770
0770
SHIFT SOL E
AT-555
P0775
0775
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
AT-560
P0780
0780
SHIFT
AT-565
P0795
0795
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
AT-569
P0797
0797
PC SOL C STC ON
AT-574
P0882
0882
TCM POWER INPT SIG
AT-585
P1031
1031
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-1045
P1032
1032
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
EC-1045
P1051
1051
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
EC-1045
P1052
1052
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
EC-1045
P1065
1065
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
EC-1053
P1111
1111
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
EC-1057
P1121
1121
ETC ACTR
EC-1066
P1122
1122
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
EC-1068
P1124
1124
ETC MOT PWR
EC-1074
P1126
1126
ETC MOT PWR
EC-1074
P1128
1128
ETC MOT
EC-1079
P1136
1136
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
EC-1057
P1146
1146
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-1084
P1147
1147
HO2S2 (B1)
EC-1096
P1148
1148
CLOSED LOOP-B1
EC-1108
P1166
1166
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-1084
P1167
1167
HO2S2 (B2)
EC-1096
P1168
1168
CLOSED LOOP-B2
EC-1108
P1211
1211
TCS C/U FUNCTN
EC-1109
P1212
1212
TCS/CIRC
EC-1110
P1217
1217
ENG OVER TEMP
EC-1111
P1225
1225
CTP LEARNING
EC-1123
P1226
1226
CTP LEARNING
EC-1125
P1229
1229
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
EC-1127
P1271
1271
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1132
P1272
1272
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1140
Revision: March 2005
EC-629
2005 Altima
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*3
Reference page
P1273
1273
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1148
P1274
1274
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1157
P1276
1276
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1166
P1278
1278
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1175
P1279
1279
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
EC-1187
P1281
1281
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1132
P1282
1282
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1140
P1283
1283
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1148
P1284
1284
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1157
P1286
1286
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1166
P1288
1288
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1175
P1289
1289
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
EC-1187
P1402
1402
EGR SYSTEM
EC-1199
P1444
1444
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
EC-1206
P1446
1446
VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-1214
P1564
1564
ASCD SW
EC-1220
P1572
1572
ASCD BRAKE SW
EC-1227
P1574
1574
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
EC-1238
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
NATS MALFUNCTION
EC-667
P1706
1706
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
EC-1240
P1800
1800
VIAS S/V CIRC
EC-1248
P1805
1805
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
EC-1253
P2122
2122
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-1258
P2123
2123
APP SEN 1/CIRC
EC-1258
P2127
2127
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-1265
P2128
2128
APP SEN 2/CIRC
EC-1265
P2135
2135
TP SENSOR
EC-1272
P2138
2138
APP SENSOR
EC-1279
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
Alphabetical Index
UBS00HZF
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Reference page
ECM*3
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1271
1271
EC-1132
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1272
1272
EC-1140
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1273
1273
EC-1148
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1274
1274
EC-1157
Revision: March 2005
EC-630
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Reference page
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1276
1276
EC-1166
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1278
1278
EC-1175
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1279
1279
EC-1187
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1281
1281
EC-1132
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1282
1282
EC-1140
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1283
1283
EC-1148
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1284
1284
EC-1157
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1286
1286
EC-1166
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1288
1288
EC-1175
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1289
1289
EC-1187
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1031
1031
EC-1045
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1032
1032
EC-1045
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1051
1051
EC-1045
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1052
1052
EC-1045
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
0731
AT-496
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
0732
AT-499
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
AT-505
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
AT-511
A/T 5HT GR FNCTN
P0735
0735
AT-516
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
P0744
0744
AT-522
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
EC-1258
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
EC-1258
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
EC-1265
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
EC-1265
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
EC-1279
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
EC-1227
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
EC-1220
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1574
1574
EC-1238
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
AT-476
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
EC-1253
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*4
EC-790
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*4
EC-790
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
EC-921
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
EC-1108
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
EC-1108
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
EC-928
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
P0345
0345
EC-928
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
EC-1123
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
EC-1125
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
EC-906
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
EC-906
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
EC-906
Revision: March 2005
EC-631
A
ECM*3
2005 Altima
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Reference page
ECM*3
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
EC-906
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
EC-906
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
EC-906
ECM
P0605
0605
EC-1042
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
P1065
1065
EC-1053
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
EC-826
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
EC-826
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
EC-838
EGR SYSTEM
P0400
0400
EC-937
EGR SYSTEM
P1402
1402
EC-1199
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0405
0405
EC-952
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0406
0406
EC-952
EGR VOL CON/V CIR
P0403
0403
EC-945
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
EC-1111
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
EC-1066
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
EC-1068
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
EC-1079
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
EC-1074
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
EC-1074
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
EC-1008
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
EC-964
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
EC-969
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
EC-991
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
EC-994
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
EC-1000
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
EC-1016
FLUID TEMP SEN
P0711
0711
AT-481
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
EC-895
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
EC-895
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
EC-890
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
EC-1025
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
EC-1027
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
EC-1029
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
EC-1029
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
EC-868
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
EC-868
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
EC-879
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
EC-879
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
EC-846
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
EC-856
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
EC-1084
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
EC-1096
Revision: March 2005
EC-632
2005 Altima
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
Reference page
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
EC-846
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
EC-856
HO2S2 (B2)
P1166
1166
EC-1084
HO2S2 (B2)
P1167
1167
EC-1096
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
EC-797
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
EC-797
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
EC-797
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
EC-797
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
EC-822
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
EC-822
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
EC-841
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
EC-793
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P0021
0021
EC-793
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
1111
EC-1057
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P1136
1136
EC-1057
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
EC-1033
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
EC-1035
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
EC-916
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
EC-916
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
AT-525
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
EC-806
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
EC-815
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
EC-815
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
EC-906
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 - P1615
1610 - 1615
EC-667
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
EC-1240
PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)
P0775
0775
AT-560
PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)
P0795
0795
AT-569
PC SOL C STC ON
P0797
0797
AT-574
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
AT-471
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
EC-977
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
EC-977
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
EC-1206
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
EC-1037
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
EC-1127
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
0750
AT-530
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
0755
AT-535
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
P0762
0762
AT-545
SHIFT
P0780
0780
AT-565
SHIFT SOL C
P0760
0760
AT-540
Revision: March 2005
EC-633
A
ECM*3
2005 Altima
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INDEX FOR DTC
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
2
GST*
Reference page
ECM*3
SHIFT SOL D
P0765
0765
AT-550
SHIFT SOL E
P0770
0770
AT-555
TCM POWER INPT SIG
P0882
0882
AT-585
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
EC-1109
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
EC-1110
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
EC-844
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
EC-899
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
EC-899
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
EC-831
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
EC-831
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
EC-1272
TURBINE SENSOR
P0717
0717
AT-486
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
EC-959
P0430
0430
EC-959
P0500
0500
EC-1031
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
EC-984
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
EC-1214
VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*5
P0722
0722
AT-490
VIAS S/V CIRC
P1800
1800
EC-1248
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*
5
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
Revision: March 2005
EC-634
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
UBS00IIZ
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
F
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T
UBS00HZI
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" .
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution
●
●
●
●
UBS00HZJ
Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
Revision: March 2005
EC-635
2005 Altima
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
Do not disassemble ECM.
If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
Diagnostic trouble codes
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
Freeze frame data
1st trip freeze frame data
System readiness test (SRT) codes
Test values
When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with levers as far as they will go as shown in the
figure.
PBIB1164E
SEC406D
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded
operation of ICs, etc.
Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Reference Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-740 .
Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents.
Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Revision: March 2005
EC-636
PBIB0090E
MEF040D
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
●
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
A
EC
C
SEF217U
D
●
●
When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF348N
●
B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown
in the figure.
K
L
M
SEC893C
Revision: March 2005
EC-637
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ]
●
●
Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0081E
●
●
●
Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily.
Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
●
–
–
–
–
When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location.
Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller.
Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
SEF708Y
UBS00HZK
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: March 2005
EC-638
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
UBS00HZL
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
EC
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
C
D
S-NT564
KV10117100
(J-36471-A)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with
22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
E
F
S-NT379
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
G
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
H
I
S-NT636
(J-44626)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
J
K
LEM054
(J-44321)
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
Checking fuel pressure
L
M
LEC642
(J-44321-6)
Fuel pressure adapter
Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector
type fuel lines.
LBIA0376E
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room
PBIC0198E
Revision: March 2005
EC-639
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV109E0010
(J-46209)
Break-out box
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
S-NT825
KV109E0080
(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
S-NT826
Revision: March 2005
EC-640
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ]
Commercial Service Tools
UBS00HZM
A
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Leak detector
i.e.: (J-41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
EC
C
S-NT703
EVAP service port
adapter
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
D
E
F
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter
i.e.: (MLR-8382)
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
G
H
S-NT815
Socket wrench
Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor
I
J
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
i.e.: (J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor
K
L
AEM488
M
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
Anti-seize lubricant
i.e.: (PermatexTM
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
S-NT779
Revision: March 2005
EC-641
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
PFP:23710
UBS00HZT
PBIB2270E
Revision: March 2005
EC-642
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
UBS00HZW
A
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input Signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Engine speed*3
Piston position
EC
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking condition
C
D
Fuel injection
& mixture ratio
control
Fuel injector
E
3
Battery
Battery voltage*
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch*2
Air conditioner operation
Wheel sensor*2
Vehicle speed
F
G
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
I
J
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.
●
During warm-up
●
When starting the engine
●
During acceleration
●
Hot-engine operation
●
When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
●
High-load, high-speed operation
●
During deceleration
●
During high engine speed operation
Revision: March 2005
EC-643
2005 Altima
K
L
M
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
SEF503YB
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-1132, "DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture
ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
●
Deceleration and acceleration
●
High-load, high-speed operation
●
Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
●
Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
●
High engine coolant temperature
●
During warm-up
●
After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
●
When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
Revision: March 2005
EC-644
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A
EC
C
SEF179U
D
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
E
F
G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System
UBS00HZX
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
I
Input Signal to ECM
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Knock sensor
Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
Battery
Battery voltage*2
Wheel
ECM function
Actuator
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
sensor*1
J
K
Ignition timing
control
Power transistor
L
M
Vehicle speed
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
●
At starting
●
During warm-up
●
At idle
●
At low battery voltage
Revision: March 2005
H
EC-645
2005 Altima
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
●
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed)
UBS00I00
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Neutral position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Wheel sensor*
Vehicle speed
ECM function
Fuel cut control
Actuator
Fuel injector
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed over is 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-643
.
Revision: March 2005
EC-646
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
[VQ]
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor
1
PFP:23710
A
UBS00HZZ
Input Signal to ECM
Air conditioner switch*
Air conditioner ON signal
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
ECM function
Actuator
EC
C
2
Battery
Battery voltage*
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Wheel sensor*1
Vehicle speed
Air conditioner
cut control
Air conditioner relay
D
E
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
System Description
F
UBS00IIW
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
●
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
●
When cranking the engine.
●
At high engine speeds.
●
When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
●
When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
●
When engine speed is excessively low.
●
When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-647
2005 Altima
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[VQ]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
PFP:18930
UBS00IG4
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor
ASCD brake switch
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
Clutch pedal operation
ASCD steering switch
ASCD steering switch operation
Park/Neutral position (PNP)
switch
Gear position
Combination meter*
Vehicle speed
TCM* (A/T models)
Powertrain revolution
ASCD vehicle speed control
Electric throttle control
actuator
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
●
CANCEL switch is pressed
●
More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
●
Brake pedal is depressed
●
Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T)
●
Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T)
●
Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
●
TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
●
Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
●
Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
Revision: March 2005
EC-648
2005 Altima
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[VQ]
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing CRUISE
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
●
Brake pedal is released
●
Clutch pedal is released (M/T)
●
A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T)
●
Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description
A
EC
C
D
UBS00IG5
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
E
Refer to EC-1220 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
F
Refer to EC-1227 , and EC-1333 .
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
G
Refer to EC-1227 , and EC-1333 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-1253 .
H
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-1066 , EC-1068 , EC-1074 and EC-1079 .
I
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-1343 .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-649
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[VQ]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
UBS00I01
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.
Revision: March 2005
EC-650
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description
PFP:14950
A
UBS00IFV
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
D
E
F
G
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-651
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)
PBIB2502E
Revision: March 2005
EC-652
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0525E
Revision: March 2005
EC-653
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)
PBIB2504E
Revision: March 2005
EC-654
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0525E
Revision: March 2005
EC-655
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00IFW
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1212E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1.
Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2.
Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2
, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-983 .
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-898 .
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-989 .
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-999 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-656
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
EVAP SERVICE PORT
A
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
C
SEF462UA
Removal and Installation
D
UBS00IFX
EVAP CANISTER
E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
F
G
H
I
J
BBIA0246E
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
K
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve clockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
L
M
PBIB1384E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
UBS00IFY
CAUTION:
●
Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
●
Do not start engine.
●
Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
●
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
Revision: March 2005
EC-657
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
PEF838U
6.
7.
Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
PEF917U
8.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or
EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
(EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA
Revision: March 2005
EC-658
2005 Altima
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[VQ]
3.
Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP
system.
A
EC
C
D
BBIA0526E
4.
5.
6.
To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SER MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-659
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[VQ]
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
System Description
PFP:00032
UBS00IFZ
PBIB1387E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
●
Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
●
Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
●
Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
–
Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
–
Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to Fuel Pressure Release, EC-714 .
–
Disconnect battery ground cable.
●
Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
●
Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
●
Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
●
After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
●
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
Revision: March 2005
EC-660
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IG0
A
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
C
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
D
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
E
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
F
G
H
PBIB1213E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
I
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
L
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
M
Refer to EC-663, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
Revision: March 2005
EC-661
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[VQ]
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1213E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace filler neck tube.
Revision: March 2005
EC-662
2005 Altima
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[VQ]
7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
A
Refer to EC-663, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
EC
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
C
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube.
D
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
E
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
F
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
H
I
J
K
SEF665U
Component Inspection
UBS00IG1
L
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" .
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Revision: March 2005
EC-663
2005 Altima
M
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
[VQ]
d.
Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0248E
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-12, "FUEL TANK" .
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
Remove fuel gauge retainer.
Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
Put fuel tank upside down.
Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0248E
Revision: March 2005
EC-664
2005 Altima
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[VQ]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
PFP:11810
A
UBS00IG2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
D
E
F
G
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection
UBS00IG3
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
Revision: March 2005
EC-665
2005 Altima
M
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[VQ]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1.
2.
Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
Revision: March 2005
EC-666
2005 Altima
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
[VQ]
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
Description
●
●
●
PFP:25386
A
UBS00I05
If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in
the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
EC
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-107, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SysC
tem-NATS)" .
Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
D
mode with CONSULT-II.
When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
SEF543X
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
E
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-667
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction
PFP:00028
UBS00I02
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data
Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code
Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits
Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID
Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC
1st trip DTC
Freeze
Frame data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data
SRT code
SRT status
Test value
CONSULT-II
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
GST
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
ECM
×
×*
—
—
—
×
—
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-724 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic
UBS00I03
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable
MIL
DTC
1st trip
Items
—: Not applicable
1st trip DTC
2nd trip
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
—
—
—
×
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
×
—
—
—
—
—
×
—
×
×
—
Blinking
Lighting
up
Blinking
Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 is being detected
×
—
—
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0306 is being detected
—
—
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-669 .)
—
Except above
—
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
Revision: March 2005
EC-668
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Emission-related Diagnostic Information
UBS00I04
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
ECM*3
EC
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000
1000*5
—
—
1 (A/T)
2 (M/T)
× (A/T)
— (M/T)
EC-790
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1001
1001*5
—
—
2
—
EC-790
C
D
E
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0000
0000
—
—
—
Flashing*7
EC-685
INT/V TIM CONT-B1
P0011
0011
—
—
2
×
EC-793
INT/V TIM CONT-B2
P0021
0021
—
—
2
×
EC-793
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0037
0037
×
×
2
×
EC-797
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
P0038
0038
×
×
2
×
EC-797
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0057
0057
×
×
2
×
EC-797
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
P0058
0058
×
×
2
×
EC-797
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0101
0101
—
—
2
×
EC-806
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0102
0102
—
—
1
×
EC-815
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT
P0103
0103
—
—
1
×
EC-815
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0112
0112
—
—
2
×
EC-822
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0113
0113
—
—
2
×
EC-822
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0117
0117
—
—
1
×
EC-826
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0118
0118
—
—
1
×
EC-826
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0122
0122
—
—
1
×
EC-831
TP SEN 2/CIRC
P0123
0123
—
—
1
×
EC-831
ECT SENSOR
P0125
0125
—
—
1
×
EC-838
IAT SENSOR
P0127
0127
—
—
2
×
EC-841
THERMSTAT FNCTN
P0128
0128
—
—
2
×
EC-844
HO2S2 (B1)
P0138
0138
—
×
2
×
EC-846
HO2S2 (B1)
P0139
0139
×
×
2
×
EC-856
HO2S2 (B2)
P0158
0158
—
×
2
×
EC-846
HO2S2 (B2)
P0159
0159
×
×
2
×
EC-856
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1
P0171
0171
—
—
2
×
EC-868
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1
P0172
0172
—
—
2
×
EC-879
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2
P0174
0174
—
—
2
×
EC-868
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2
P0175
0175
—
—
2
×
EC-879
FTT SENSOR
P0181
0181
—
—
2
×
EC-890
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0182
0182
—
—
2
×
EC-895
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT
P0183
0183
—
—
2
×
EC-895
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0222
0222
—
—
1
×
EC-899
TP SEN 1/CIRC
P0223
0223
—
—
1
×
EC-899
MULTI CYL MISFIRE
P0300
0300
—
—
2
×
EC-906
Revision: March 2005
A
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-669
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
ECM*3
CYL 1 MISFIRE
P0301
0301
—
—
2
×
EC-906
CYL 2 MISFIRE
P0302
0302
—
—
2
×
EC-906
CYL 3 MISFIRE
P0303
0303
—
—
2
×
EC-906
CYL 4 MISFIRE
P0304
0304
—
—
2
×
EC-906
CYL 5 MISFIRE
P0305
0305
—
—
2
×
EC-906
CYL 6 MISFIRE
P0306
0306
—
—
2
×
EC-906
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0327
0327
—
—
2
—
EC-916
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1
P0328
0328
—
—
2
—
EC-916
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT
P0335
0335
—
—
2
×
EC-921
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1
P0340
0340
—
—
2
×
EC-928
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2
P0345
0345
—
—
2
×
EC-928
EGR SYSTEM
P0400
0400
×
×
2
×
EC-937
EGR VOL CON/V CIR
P0403
0403
—
—
1
×
EC-945
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0405
0405
—
—
2
×
EC-952
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0406
0406
—
—
2
×
EC-952
TW CATALYST SYS-B1
P0420
0420
×
×
2
×
EC-959
TW CATALYST SYS-B2
P0430
0430
×
×
2
×
EC-959
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON
P0441
0441
×
×
2
×
EC-964
EVAP SMALL LEAK
P0442
0442
×
×
2
×
EC-969
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0444
0444
—
—
2
×
EC-977
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P0445
0445
—
—
2
×
EC-977
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P0447
0447
—
—
2
×
EC-984
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0451
0451
—
—
2
×
EC-991
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0452
0452
—
—
2
×
EC-994
EVAP SYS PRES SEN
P0453
0453
—
—
2
×
EC-1000
EVAP GROSS LEAK
P0455
0455
—
—
2
×
EC-1008
EVAP VERY SML LEAK
P0456
0456
×*4
×
2
×
EC-1016
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH
P0460
0460
—
—
2
×
EC-1025
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
P0461
0461
—
—
2
×
EC-1027
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0462
0462
—
—
2
×
EC-1029
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC
P0463
0463
—
—
2
×
EC-1029
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6
P0500
0500
—
—
2
×
EC-1031
ISC SYSTEM
P0506
0506
—
—
2
×
EC-1033
ISC SYSTEM
P0507
0507
—
—
2
×
EC-1035
PW ST P SEN/CIRC
P0550
0550
—
—
2
—
EC-1037
ECM
P0605
0605
—
—
1 or 2
× or —
EC-1042
PNP SW/CIRC
P0705
0705
—
—
1
×
AT-471
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
P0710
0710
—
—
2
×
AT-476
FLUID TEMP SEN
P0711
0711
—
—
2
×
AT-481
P0717
0717
—
—
1
×
AT-486
VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T*
P0722
0722
—
—
1
×
AT-490
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
P0731
0731
—
—
1
×
AT-496
TURBINE SENSOR
6
Revision: March 2005
EC-670
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
A
EC
ECM*3
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
P0732
0732
—
—
1
×
AT-499
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
P0733
0733
—
—
1
×
AT-505
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
P0734
0734
—
—
1
×
AT-511
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN
P0735
0735
—
—
1
×
AT-516
A/T TCC S/U FNCTN
P0744
0744
—
—
1
×
AT-522
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0745
0745
—
—
1
×
AT-525
SFT SOL A/CIRC
P0750
0750
—
—
1
×
AT-530
SFT SOL B/CIRC
P0755
0755
—
—
1
×
AT-535
SHIFT SOL C
P0760
0760
—
—
1
×
AT-540
SFT SOL C STUCK ON
P0762
0762
—
—
1
×
AT-545
SHIFT SOL D
P0765
0765
—
—
1
×
AT-550
SHIFT SOL E
P0770
0770
—
—
1
×
AT-555
PC SOL B (SFT/PRS)
P0775
0775
—
—
1
×
AT-560
SHIFT
P0780
0780
—
—
1
×
AT-565
PC SOL C (TCC&SFT)
P0795
0795
—
—
1
×
AT-569
PC SOL C STC ON
P0797
0797
—
—
1
×
AT-574
TCM POWER INPT SIG
P0882
0882
—
—
1
×
AT-585
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1031
1031
×
×
2
×
EC-1045
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)
P1032
1032
×
×
2
×
EC-1045
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1051
1051
×
×
2
×
EC-1045
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2)
P1052
1052
×
×
2
×
EC-1045
ECM BACK UP/CIRC
P1065
1065
—
—
2
×
EC-1053
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1
P1111
1111
—
—
2
×
EC-1057
ETC ACTR
P1121
1121
—
—
1
×
EC-1066
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC
P1122
1122
—
—
1
×
EC-1068
ETC MOT PWR
P1124
1124
—
—
1
×
EC-1074
ETC MOT PWR
P1126
1126
—
—
1
×
EC-1074
ETC MOT
P1128
1128
—
—
1
×
EC-1079
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2
P1136
1136
—
—
2
×
EC-1057
HO2S2 (B1)
P1146
1146
×
×
2
×
EC-1084
HO2S2 (B1)
P1147
1147
×
×
2
×
EC-1096
CLOSED LOOP-B1
P1148
1148
—
—
1
×
EC-1108
HO2S2 (B2)
P1166
1166
×
×
2
×
EC-1084
HO2S2 (B2)
P1167
1167
×
×
2
×
EC-1096
CLOSED LOOP-B2
P1168
1168
—
—
1
×
EC-1108
TCS C/U FUNCTN
P1211
1211
—
—
2
—
EC-1109
TCS/CIRC
P1212
1212
—
—
2
—
EC-1110
ENG OVER TEMP
P1217
1217
—
—
1
×
EC-1111
CTP LEARNING
P1225
1225
—
—
2
—
EC-1123
CTP LEARNING
P1226
1226
—
—
2
—
EC-1125
SENSOR POWER/CIRC
P1229
1229
—
—
1
×
EC-1127
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1271
1271
—
×
2
×
EC-1132
Revision: March 2005
EC-671
2005 Altima
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
CONSULT-II
GST*2
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
Trip
MIL lighting
up
Reference page
ECM*3
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1272
1272
—
×
2
×
EC-1140
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1273
1273
—
×
2
×
EC-1148
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1274
1274
—
×
2
×
EC-1157
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1276
1276
—
×
2
×
EC-1166
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1278
1278
×
×
2
×
EC-1175
A/F SENSOR1 (B1)
P1279
1279
×
×
2
×
EC-1187
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1281
1281
—
×
2
×
EC-1132
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1282
1282
—
×
2
×
EC-1140
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1283
1283
—
×
2
×
EC-1148
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1284
1284
—
×
2
×
EC-1157
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1286
1286
—
×
2
×
EC-1166
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1288
1288
×
×
2
×
EC-1175
A/F SENSOR1 (B2)
P1289
1289
×
×
2
×
EC-1187
EGR SYSTEM
P1402
1402
×
×
2
×
EC-1199
PURG VOLUME CONT/V
P1444
1444
—
—
2
×
EC-1206
VENT CONTROL VALVE
P1446
1446
—
—
2
×
EC-1214
ASCD SW
P1564
1564
—
—
1
—
EC-1220
ASCD BRAKE SW
P1572
1572
—
—
1
—
EC-1227
ASCD VHL SPD SEN
P1574
1574
—
—
1
—
EC-1238
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610 P1615
1610 - 1615
—
—
2
—
EC-667
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT
P1706
1706
—
—
2
×
EC-1240
VIAS S/V CIRC
P1800
1800
—
—
2
—
EC-1248
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT
P1805
1805
—
—
2
—
EC-1253
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2122
2122
—
—
1
×
EC-1258
APP SEN 1/CIRC
P2123
2123
—
—
1
×
EC-1258
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2127
2127
—
—
1
×
EC-1265
APP SEN 2/CIRC
P2128
2128
—
—
1
×
EC-1265
TP SENSOR
P2135
2135
—
—
1
×
EC-1272
APP SENSOR
P2138
2138
—
—
1
×
EC-1279
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC need CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-677, "How to Display SRT Status"
.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
Revision: March 2005
EC-672
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd A
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-682, "HOW
EC
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-669, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
C
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
D
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-717, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupliE
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
●
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●
Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB0911E
Revision: March 2005
EC-673
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-754, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1
Items
Freeze frame data
2
3
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
Revision: March 2005
EC-674
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
SRT Item
A
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indication)
Performance
Priority*1
CATALYST
3
EVAP SYSTEM
HO2S
HO2S HTR
Three way catalyst function
Corresponding
DTC No.
P0420, P0430
3
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
2
EVAP control system
P0442
3
EVAP control system
P0456
3
A/F sensor 1
P1278, P1288
A/F sensor 1
P1279, P1289
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1146, P1166
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1147, P1167
A/F sensor 1 heater
P1031, P1032,
P1051, P1052
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037, P0038,
P0057, P0058
3
EGR function
P0400
1
EGR function
P1402
3
EGR SYSTEM
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
EC
C
D
E
F
G
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
H
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result
All OK
Case 1
Case 2
NG exists
Case 3
J
Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON →
Diagnosis
← ON →
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
P0402
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
OK (2)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
P0400
OK (1)
— (1)
— (1)
— (1)
P0402
— (0)
— (0)
OK (1)
— (1)
P1402
OK (1)
OK (2)
— (2)
— (2)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
“CMPLT”
OFF
OFF
← ON →
P0400
OK
OK
—
—
P0402
—
—
—
—
P1402
NG
—
NG
NG
(Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip)
DTC
1st trip DTC
—
1st trip DTC
DTC
(= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“INCMP”
“CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
Revision: March 2005
EC-675
I
2005 Altima
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
●
The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
●
The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
●
When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
●
If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
Revision: March 2005
EC-676
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2320E
*1
EC-673
*2
EC-677
*3
EC-678
How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the figure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
Revision: March 2005
EC-677
SEF713Y
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-675, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
Revision: March 2005
EC-678
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
Driving Pattern
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2273E
Revision: March 2005
EC-679
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
●
Sea level
●
Flat road
●
Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
●
Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
●
The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
●
The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
●
The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
●
When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
●
The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
●
Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
●
The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
●
If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times.
–
During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as
possible.
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
●
SEF414S
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
Revision: March 2005
EC-680
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
For quick acceleration in low altitude
areas and high altitude areas
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change
ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH)
CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH)
km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd
21 (13)
21 (13)
24 (15)
2nd to 3rd
37 (23)
26 (16)
40 (25)
3rd to 4th
53 (33)
44 (27)
64 (40)
4th to 5th
63 (39)
58 (36)
72 (45)
EC
C
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted sped limits and drive according to the road conditions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or los of vehicle control.
Gear
km/h (MPH)
1st
55 (35)
2nd
105 (65)
3rd
—
4th
—
5th
—
A
D
E
F
G
H
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen.
I
J
Test value (GST display)
Item
Self-diagnostic test item
DTC
Test limit
Conversion
01H
Max.
1/128
02H
81H
Min.
1
P0430
03H
02H
Max.
1/128
P0430
04H
82H
Min.
1
EVAP control system (Small leak)
P0442
05H
03H
Max.
1/128 mm2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
P0441
06H
83H
Min.
20 mV
EVAP control system (Very small leak)
P0456
07H
03H
Max.
1/128 mm2
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1)
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)
EVAP
SYSTEM
Revision: March 2005
TID
CID
P0420
01H
P0420
EC-681
2005 Altima
K
L
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
Item
Self-diagnostic test item
DTC
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
HO2S
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
HO2S
HEATER
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)
EGR
SYSTEM
EGR function
Test value (GST display)
Test limit
Conversion
8EH
Min.
5mV
0EH
Max.
5mV
43H
0EH
Max.
0.002
44H
8EH
Min.
0.002
P1278
45H
8EH
Min.
0.004
P1276
46H
0EH
Max.
5mV
P1276
47H
8EH
Min.
5mV
P1279
48H
8EH
Min.
0.004
P1281
4CH
8FH
Min.
5mV
P1282
4DH
0FH
Max.
5mV
P1283
4EH
0FH
Max.
0.002
P1284
4FH
8FH
Min.
0.002
P1288
50H
8FH
Min.
0.004
P1286
51H
0FH
Max.
5mV
P1286
52H
8FH
Min.
5mV
P1289
53H
8FH
Min.
0.004
P0138
1CH
06H
Max.
10mV
TID
CID
P1271
41H
P1272
42H
P1273
P1274
P0139
19H
86H
Min.
10mV/500 ms
P1147
1AH
86H
Min.
10 mV
P1146
1BH
06H
Max.
10 mV
P0158
24H
07H
Max.
10mV
P0159
21H
87H
Min.
10 mV/500 ms
P1167
22H
87H
Min.
10 mV
P1166
23H
07H
Max.
10 mV
P1032
57H
10H
Max.
5 mV
P1031
58H
90H
Min.
5 mV
P1052
59H
11H
Max.
5 mV
P1051
5AH
91H
Min.
5 mV
P0038
2DH
0AH
Max.
20 mV
P0037
2EH
8AH
Min.
20 mV
P0058
2FH
0BH
Max.
20 mV
P0057
30H
8BH
Min.
20 mV
P0400
31H
8CH
Min.
1°C
P0400
32H
8CH
Min.
1°C
P0400
33H
8CH
Min.
1°C
P0400
34H
8CH
Min.
1°C
P1402
35H
0CH
Max.
1°C
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Revision: March 2005
EC-682
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
A
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “TRANSMISSION”.
EC
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
C
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
D
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2274E
WITH GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-423, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Revision: March 2005
EC-683
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
2.
3.
Perform AT-424, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-686, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
●
If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
●
The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
–
Diagnostic trouble codes
–
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
–
Freeze frame data
–
1st trip freeze frame data
–
System readiness test (SRT) codes
–
Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Revision: March 2005
EC-684
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
UBS00I06
A
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-1346 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
EC
C
D
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
E
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function
Explanation of Function
Mode I
Ignition switch in
ON position
BULB CHECK
This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
F
G
Engine stopped
H
Engine running
Mode II
Ignition switch in
ON position
MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
●
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
●
One trip detection diagnoses
I
J
K
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
L
Engine stopped
M
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
MIL Flashing Without DTC
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-677, "How to Display SRT Status" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-685
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
●
It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●
It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
●
Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-677, "How to Display SRT Status" .
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1.
2.
3.
Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-686, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1346 .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL
Condition
ON
When the malfunction is detected.
OFF
No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidenRevision: March 2005
EC-686
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
A
EC
C
D
E
F
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
G
H
I
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
J
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC686, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
●
If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
●
Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
K
OBD System Operation Chart
L
UBS00I07
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
●
●
●
●
●
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-668, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.
The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
Revision: March 2005
EC-687
2005 Altima
M
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
SUMMARY CHART
Items
MIL (goes off)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear)
Fuel Injection System
Misfire
Other
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
3 (pattern B)
80 (pattern C)
80 (pattern C)
40 (pattern A)
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern C), *1
1 (pattern B)
*1, *2
*1, *2
1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-690 .
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-692 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Revision: March 2005
EC-688
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C)
without the same malfunction. (The
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared at
the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
Revision: March 2005
EC-689
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●
The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●
The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
●
The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
●
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
●
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
●
The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
●
The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
●
The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
●
The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Revision: March 2005
EC-690
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A)
without the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
Revision: March 2005
EC-691
2005 Altima
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[VQ]
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
AEC574
●
●
●
The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●
The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●
The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
●
The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
Revision: March 2005
EC-692
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Basic Inspection
PFP:00018
A
UBS00I0B
1. INSPECTION START
1.
2.
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Headlamp switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF976U
5.
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
K
L
M
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-693
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load,
then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1
minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
1.
2.
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-694
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
EC
C
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
E
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
1.
2.
F
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
G
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
J
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
K
L
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
M
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-667, "Description" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
H
EC-695
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" .
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
BBIA0032E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
Revision: March 2005
EC-696
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
A
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" .
EC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
D
BBIA0032E
E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
F
G
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
●
I
J
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
K
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-667, "Description" .
L
M
>> GO TO 4.
19. INSPECTION END
Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" .
2. INSPECTION END
No
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-697
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
UBS00HZN
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed in “Service $01” with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Method A
1.
Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
BBIA0196E
2.
Check ignition timing.
BBIA0032E
Method B
1.
Remove No.1 ignition coil.
BBIA0196E
Revision: March 2005
EC-698
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
2.
Connect No.1 ignition coil and spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.
A
EC
C
BBIA0082E
D
E
F
G
SEF166Y
3.
Check ignition timing.
H
I
J
BBIA0032E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-699
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
UBS00HZO
PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
● Battery
● Ignition system
● Engine oil and coolant levels
● Fuses
● ECM harness connector
● Vacuum hoses
● Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
● Fuel pressure
● Engine compression
● EGR volume control valve operation
● Throttle valve
● Evaporative emission system
On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.
On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while selector lever is in N position.
When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger.
Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
Revision: March 2005
EC-700
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
OVERALL SEQUENCE
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2086E
Revision: March 2005
EC-701
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. INSPECTION START
1.
2.
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.
–
–
–
–
4.
Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Head lamp switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5.
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-702
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.
2.
A
With CONSULT-II
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load,
then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
EC
C
D
E
PBIA8513J
3.
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
F
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
G
H
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1
minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
J
K
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
M
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-703
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer toEC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
●
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-704
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.
2.
A
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" .
EC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
C
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
D
BBIA0032E
E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
F
>> GO TO 12.
G
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
H
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
I
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
J
K
L
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
M
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-698, "IDLE SPEED" .
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
SEF174Y
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
Revision: March 2005
EC-705
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.
Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-698, "IGNITION TIMING" .
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
BBIA0032E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-928 .
●
Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-921 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-706
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
EC
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T).
NOTE:
C
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
D
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
E
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
F
NG
>> GO TO 21.
1.
2.
3.
20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
G
With GST
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 21.
1.
2.
3.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-707
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-1134, "Wiring Diagram" .
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
4
2
4
24
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.
2. GO TO 4.
22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 23.
23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 24.
24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26.
No
>> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-708
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
25. CHECK CO%
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DOWN”
and “Qd”.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
C
D
Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG
>> GO TO 27.
SEF172Y
F
26. CHECK CO%
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under
no load, then run engine at idle speed.
Check CO%.
Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature
sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG
>> GO TO 27.
G
H
I
J
7.
K
SEF982UA
L
M
27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
>> GO TO 31.
28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Replace A/F sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29.
With GST>>GO TO 30.
Revision: March 2005
EC-709
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 31.
1.
2.
3.
30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With GST
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position (A/T) or 5th positin (M/T).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 31.
1.
2.
3.
31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-714, "Fuel Pressure Check"
.
●
Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-806 and EC815 .
●
Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-1308 .
●
Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC826 and EC-838 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 33.
NG
>> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 32.
Revision: March 2005
EC-710
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
A
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-682, "How to Erase DTC" and AT-422, "HOW TO
ERASE DTC" .
EC
>> GO TO 4.
C
33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.
Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
D
E
>> GO TO 4.
VIN Registration
UBS00IIO
DESCRIPTION
F
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
G
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
H
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" .
Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display.
J
K
L
PBIB2242E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
UBS00HZP
DESCRIPTION
M
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
UBS00HZQ
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
Revision: March 2005
EC-711
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning
UBS00HZR
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
●
Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
●
Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
●
Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
●
Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
●
PNP switch: ON
●
Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is start the headlamp will not be illuminated.
●
Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
●
Vehicle speed: Stopped
●
Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
Revision: March 2005
EC-712
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
6.
Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF454Y
D
7.
8.
Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and make sure that idle speed
and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
E
F
G
MBIB0238E
H
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
●
It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●
It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
Revision: March 2005
EC-713
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
12. Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Idle speed
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform “Idle Air Volume Learning” all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check
UBS00HZS
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0229E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector o-ring maintains sealability.
Revision: March 2005
EC-714
2005 Altima
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[VQ]
Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.
●
Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, A
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
EC
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because L31 models do not have fuel return system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
C
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
D
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep fuel hose connections clean.
E
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure
Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure.
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
F
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
G
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for
fuel leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
H
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
LBIA0377E
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel
connection every 3 minutes.
I
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
●
7.
8.
9.
If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-715
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
PFP:00004
UBS00I08
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on EC-717 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the
example on EC-721 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
Revision: March 2005
EC-716
SEF234G
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-717
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Detailed Flow
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-720, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1.
Check DTC*1 .
2.
Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
–
Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
–
Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .)
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-725 .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
–
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-718
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A
1
1
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-722, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
C
NOTE:
●
Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
●
Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC ConfirmaE
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No
>> Check according to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
F
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
G
Perform EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
H
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
I
With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-773, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value?
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> GO TO 8.
J
K
L
SEF601Z
M
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: March 2005
EC-719
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes
>> GO TO 11.
No
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-766, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" , EC-740, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK
>> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-422, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC679, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
●
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
●
Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.
Revision: March 2005
EC-720
SEF907L
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MTBL0017
Revision: March 2005
EC-721
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
UBS00I09
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790 .
Priority
1
Detected items (DTC)
●
U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
●
P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
●
P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
●
P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
●
P0128 Thermostat function
●
P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
●
P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●
P0403 EGR volume control valve
●
P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
●
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
●
P0605 ECM
●
P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●
P1229 Sensor power supply
●
P1610 - P1615 NATS
●
P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●
P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
Revision: March 2005
EC-722
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Priority
2
3
Detected items (DTC)
A
●
P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
●
P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
P0405 P0406 EGR temperature sensor
●
P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
●
P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
●
P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve
●
P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
●
P1031 P1032 P1051 P1052 A/F sensor 1 heater
●
P1065 ECM power supply
●
P1111 P1136 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
●
P1122 Electric throttle control function
●
P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
●
P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
●
P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 P1281 P1282 P1283 P1284 P1286 P1288 P1289 A/F sensor 1
●
P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve
●
P1805 Brake switch
●
P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
●
P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
●
P0300 - P0306 Misfire
●
P0400 P1402 EGR system
●
P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
●
P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system
●
P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
●
P0710 - P0882 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
●
P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
●
P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
●
P1211 TCS control unit
●
P1212 TCS communication line
●
P1564 ASCD steering switch
●
P1572 ASCD brake switch
●
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-723
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Fail-safe Chart
UBS00I0A
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102
P0103
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0117
P0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or START
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or START
80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135
Throttle position sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121
Electric throttle control
actuator
(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), neutral position (M/T), and engine speed
will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
●
P1122
Electric throttle control
function
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124
P1126
Throttle control motor relay
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128
Throttle control motor
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229
Sensor power supply
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Accelerator pedal position
sensor
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Revision: March 2005
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-724
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Symptom Matrix Chart
UBS00I0C
A
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
1
1
2
3
2
Fuel pressure regulator system
3
3
4
4
4
Injector circuit
1
1
2
3
2
Evaporative emission system
3
3
4
4
4
Air
Positive crankcase ventilation system
3
3
4
4
4
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
Ignition
EGR
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Fuel pump circuit
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
Fuel
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
ENGINE STALL
AA
Warranty symptom code
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
4
EC
3
4
2
C
Reference page
E
F
EC-1316
4
EC-714
2
EC-1308
4
4
EC-651
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
EC-700
1
2
3
3
Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
EC-700
Ignition circuit
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
EC-1287
EGR system
Main power supply and ground circuit
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
Mass air flow sensor circuit
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
3
EC-937,
EC-1199
3
EC-783
2
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
3
EC-826,
EC-838
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
Knock sensor circuit
2
Revision: March 2005
2
EC-725
EC-1132,
EC-1140 ,
EC-1148 ,
EC-1157 ,
EC-1166 ,
EC-1175 ,
EC-1187
EC-831,
EC-899 ,
EC-1123 ,
EC-1125 ,
EC-1272
Throttle position sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
I
J
K
L
EC-806,
EC-815
1
A/F sensor 1 circuit
2
EC-945
2
H
EC-1066,
EC-1068
1
2
G
EC-665
Electric throttle control actuator
EGR volume control valve circuit
D
2
EC-1127 ,
EC-1258 ,
EC-1265
, EC-1279
1
3
EC-916
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
SYMPTOM
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
2
2
EC-921
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
3
2
EC-928
Warranty symptom code
Vehicle speed signal circuit
2
Power steering pressure sensor circuit
2
ECM
2
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit
3
2
3
3
PNP switch circuit
3
3
3
EC-1031
EC-1037
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
EC-1042,
EC-1053
3
EC-1057
3
EC-1240
1
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
2
EC-1248
3
Electrical load signal circuit
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
3
3
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit
Air conditioner circuit
3
3
4
EC-1327
3
2
2
3
3
4
3
Reference page
3
3
EC-1332
3
3
3
2
ATC-28,
MTC-28
BRC-8 or
BRC-51
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
Revision: March 2005
EC-726
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
A
Fuel
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
EC
Fuel tank
Fuel piping
5
5
5
5
5
5
F
5
5
5
5
5
5
—
EM-120
Air cleaner
EM-120
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
EM-122
1
1
Generator circuit
SC-21
1
3
Signal plate
6
EM-224
PNP switch
4
AT-471
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Cylinder head gasket
EM-200
3
Cylinder block
Piston
Piston ring
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
EM-224
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve
mechanism
Timing chain
EM-161
Camshaft
EM-182
Intake valve timing control
5
5
5
5
5
Intake valve
5
5
EM-161
5
3
EM-200
Exhaust valve
Revision: March 2005
EC-727
L
SC-9
5
4
K
SC-4
Starter circuit
Cylinder head
I
J
5
EM-122,
EM-129
1
H
EM-120
5
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
Battery
G
—
5
Air duct
Electric throttle control actuator
Engine
E
—
5
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric
throttle control actuator)
Cranking
D
EM-147
Valve deposit
Air
Reference
page
FL-12
5
Vapor lock
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane)
C
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
5
5
5
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
5
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
5
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
AE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
AD
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
AC
IDLING VIBRATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
AB
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
AA
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
Exhaust
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
SYMPTOM
AF
AG
AH
AJ
AK
AL
AM
HA
5
5
5
Reference
page
EM-134,
EX-6
Three way catalyst
Lubrication
Cooling
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EM-138,
LU-24 , LU23 , LU-27
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
LU-20
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-30
Thermostat
5
CO-42
Water pump
Water gallery
CO-37
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
CO-44
Cooling fan
5
CO-31
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant
5
CO-28
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS)
1
1
BL-107
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
Revision: March 2005
EC-728
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Engine Control Component Parts Location
UBS00I0D
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0454E
Revision: March 2005
EC-729
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
BBIA0527E
Revision: March 2005
EC-730
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
PBIB1686E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-731
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
BBIA0455E
Revision: March 2005
EC-732
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0457E
Revision: March 2005
EC-733
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
BBIA0458E
Revision: March 2005
EC-734
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBIA0459E
Revision: March 2005
EC-735
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Vacuum Hose Drawing
UBS00HZU
SE-R MODELS
PBIB2501E
Refer to EC-642, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.
Revision: March 2005
EC-736
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
EXCEPT SE-R MODELS
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2503E
Refer to EC-642, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.
Revision: March 2005
EC-737
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Circuit Diagram
UBS00I0E
BBWA1584E
Revision: March 2005
EC-738
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1590E
Revision: March 2005
EC-739
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
UBS00I0F
PBIB1192E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
UBS00I0G
PREPARATION
1.
2.
ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection,
remove glove box.
Remove ECM harness connector.
BBIA0450E
3.
4.
When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with
levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
SEC406D
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
1
WIRE
COLOR
B
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Body ground
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
2
W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
Revision: March 2005
EC-740
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
A
EC
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
BR
Throttle control motor (Close)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Released
C
D
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
Y
Throttle control motor (Open)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
F
PBIB1105E
G
[Engine is running]
6
R/L
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met
–
Engine: after warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
H
0 - 1.0V
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm
[Engine is running]
10
Y
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
K
7 - 12V
L
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
M
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
7 - 12V
11
R/L
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB1790E
Revision: March 2005
EC-741
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
12
W
Power steering pressure sensor
●
Steering wheel: Being turned
[Engine is running]
●
Steering wheel: Not being turned
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
0.5 - 4.5V
0.4 - 0.8V
Approximately 10V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
13
W
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB1042E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 4.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
14
W
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB1040E
15
W
Knock sensor
[Engine is running]
●
16
OR
35
W/R
56
LG/R
75
LG
17
18
19
20
P/B
LG
L
L/W
Idle speed
Approximately 2.5V
Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EGR volume control valve
Revision: March 2005
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
EC-742
0.1 - 14V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC
(11 - 14V)
C
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
21
22
23
L/W
R/Y
R/B
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
SEC984C
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
F
SEC985C
G
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
24
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
H
I
PBIB1584E
[Engine is running]
25
P/B
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met
–
Engine: after warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
J
0 - 1.0V
K
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm
[Engine is running]
●
29
Y/G
VIAS control solenoid valve
W
EVAP control system pressure sensor
Revision: March 2005
Idle speed
Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600
rpm
[Ignition switch: ON]
EC-743
L
M
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
32
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
1.0 - 4.0V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
33
R/Y
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
PBIB1040E
34
Y/G
Intake air temperature sensor
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
40
41
42
PU/R
R/L
R/W
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
[Engine is running]
44
W
Electronic controlled engine
mount-1
●
[Engine is running]
●
Revision: March 2005
Idle speed
Except the above
EC-744
0 - 3.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
BATTERY VOLTAGE
EC
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
45
PU/R
C
Idle speed
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
F
SEC991C
G
47
R
Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
R
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
H
I
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
Throttle position sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
K
Less than 4.75V
L
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
P/L
EGR temperature sensor
M
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm
[Ignition switch: ON]
54
1.0 - 1.2V
1.6 - 2.0V
Less than 4.5V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
EGR system is operating
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
55
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
–
Revision: March 2005
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
EC-745
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
OR/B
Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
PU
76
BR
77
G/W
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PU/W
L/R
Y/R
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
[Engine is running]
60
61
62
DATA (DC Voltage)
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0 - 0.3V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm
SEC987C
[Engine is running]
63
W/R
Electronic controlled engine
mount-2
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
●
Except the above
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
67
68
B
R
Sensor ground
Sensor power supply
(PSP sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
70
73
W
Y
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON
(Compressor operates.)
[Engine is running]
EC-746
1.0 - 4.0V
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
engine coolant temperature.
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
[Engine is running]
74
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
–
EC
0 - Approximately 1.0V
C
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
D
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
79
80
81
GY/R
GY
G/R
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
E
0 - 0.3V
F
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
G
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
H
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm
I
SEC987C
J
[Engine is running]
82
B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
K
[Engine is running]
83
85
G
OR
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
Data link connector
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected
Approximately 0V
L
Approximately 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
86
P
CAN communication line
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V
Output voltage varies with the
communication status
90
R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
94
L
CAN communication line
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
Revision: March 2005
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
EC-747
More than 2.0V
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
99
G/Y
ASCD steering switch
MAIN switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/G
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
102
104
G/R
(A/T)
G/W
(M/T)
OR
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
PNP switch
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Shift lever: Except above
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
Approximately 1V
Approximately 3V
Approximately 2V
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
107
W
P/L
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Engine is running]
More than 4.3V
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with fuel
tank temperature.
[Ignition switch: ON]
108
109
G/B
(A/T)
G/R
(M/T)
R
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
●
Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly
depressed (M/T)
ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
●
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully
released (M/T)
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
●
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Revision: March 2005
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Ignition switch
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
111
Approximately 0V
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
EC-748
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
A
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
113
B/OR
Fuel pump relay
For 1 second after turning ignition switch
ON
EC
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
115
116
B
B
ECM ground
117
OR
EVAP canister vent control
valve
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
121
W/L
Power supply for ECM (Backup)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
●
Idle speed
C
Body ground
E
F
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-749
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)
UBS00I0H
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC)
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test
This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number
ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
●
Diagnostic trouble codes
●
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
●
Freeze frame data
●
1st trip freeze frame data
●
System readiness test (SRT) codes
●
Test values
Revision: March 2005
EC-750
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
A
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
INPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DTC*1
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
DATA
MONITOR
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
ACTIVE
TEST
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
×
×
×
×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
×
×
×
×
Mass air flow sensor
×
×
×
Engine coolant temperature sensor
×
×
×
A/F sensor 1
×
×
×
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2
×
×
×
×
×
Wheel sensor
×
×
×
Accelerator pedal position sensor
×
×
×
Throttle position sensor
×
×
×
Fuel tank temperature sensor
×
×
×
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
×
×
×
Intake air temperature sensor
×
×
×
EGR temperature sensor
×
×
×
Knock sensor
×
Refrigerant pressure sensor
×
×
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor
signal)
×
×
×
×
×
C
D
×
E
F
×
G
H
I
J
×
×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
×
×
×
Stop lamp switch
×
×
×
Power steering pressure sensor
×
×
×
Battery voltage
×
×
Load signal
×
×
Air conditioner switch
Fuel level sensor
×
×
×
ASCD steering switch
×
×
×
ASCD brake switch
×
×
×
ASCD clutch switch
×
×
×
Revision: March 2005
EC
EC-751
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
DATA
MONITOR
ACTIVE
TEST
Fuel injector
×
×
×
Power transistor (Ignition timing)
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Item
WORK
SUPPORT
DTC*1
Throttle control motor relay
×
Throttle control motor
×
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
×
FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
Air conditioner relay
Fuel pump relay
OUTPUT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DATA
MONITOR
(SPEC)
×
×
Cooling fan relay
×
×
×
×
EGR volume control valve
×
×
×
×
A/F sensor 1 heater
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
×
×
×
×
VIAS control solenoid valve
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
EVAP canister vent control valve
×
Electronic controlled engine mount
×
Calculated load value
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUPPORT
×
×
×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-674 .
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near
the hood opener handle.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
Revision: March 2005
EC-752
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
4.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
A
EC
C
BCIA0029E
D
5.
Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
E
F
G
BCIA0030E
6.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
H
I
J
BCIA0031E
K
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
WORK ITEM
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
CONDITION
●
USAGE
FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN
●
THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT
●
THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT.
When clearing the coefficient of
self-learning control value
Revision: March 2005
EC-753
2005 Altima
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
WORK ITEM
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
CONDITION
USAGE
CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
●
IGN SW ON
●
ENGINE NOT RUNNING
●
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
●
NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
●
FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
●
WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
●
WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION
●
IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM
When registering VIN in ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*
●
IDLE CONDITION
When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*
●
IDLE CONDITION
When adjusting target ignition timing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" .
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
Description
●
The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
to EC-627, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
●
“Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
One mode in the following is displayed.
“Mode2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“Mode3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
“Mode4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“Mode5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
●
The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
or [°F]
●
The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
●
“Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
●
“Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●
The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
●
The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED [km/
h] or [mph]
●
The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
FUEL SYS-B1
FUEL SYS-B2
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
Revision: March 2005
EC-754
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Freeze frame data
item*
Description
A
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
●
The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F]
●
The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
EC
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
C
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
×: Applicable
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
ENG SPEED [rpm]
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
×
×
×
×
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
×
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
×
The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed.
●
Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM,
prior to any learned on board correction.
●
●
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F]
×
×
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V]
×
×
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V]
×
HO2S2 (B1) [V]
×
HO2S2 (B2) [V]
×
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN]
×
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN]
×
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
×
×
BATTERY VOLT
[V]
×
×
ACCEL SEN 1 [V]
×
×
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]
×
THRTL SEN 1 [V]
×
THRTL SEN 2 [V]
×
FUEL T/TMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
×
Revision: March 2005
●
×
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
×
Indicates the engine speed computed from
the signal of the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) and camshaft position sensor
(PHASE).
The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
Remarks
●
Accuracy becomes poor if engine
speed drops below the idle rpm.
●
If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
●
The A/F signal computed from the input
signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
●
The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 2 is displayed.
●
Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
●
The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination
meter is displayed.
●
The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
●
The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed.
●
The throttle position sensor signal voltage
is displayed.
●
The fuel temperature (determined by the
signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature
sensor) is displayed.
EC-755
When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
E
F
G
H
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
●
This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
I
●
When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
The engine coolant temperature
determined by the ECM is displayed.
J
The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.
●
D
K
L
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
●
ACCEL SEN2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ECM terminal voltage signal.
●
THRTL SEN2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ECM terminal voltage signal.
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
×
×
EGR TEMP SEN
[V]
×
×
EVAP SYS PRES
[V]
Monitored item
[Unit]
Description
●
The intake air temperature (determined by
the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated.
●
The signal voltage of EGR temperature
sensor is displayed
×
●
The signal voltage of EVAP control system
pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE
[V]
×
●
The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor
is displayed.
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
●
×
×
Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals
of engine speed and battery voltage.
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF]
●
×
×
Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed
by ECM according to the accelerator pedal
position sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF]
●
×
×
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
conditioner switch as determined by the air
conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
×
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
●
[ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
system (determined by the signal voltage
of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch
and lighting switch are OFF.
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
×
×
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
×
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater
fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
×
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop
lamp switch signal.
●
Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according to
the input signals.
●
Indicates the ignition timing computed by
ECM according to the input signals.
●
“Calculated load value” indicates the value
of the current air flow divided by peak air
flow.
●
Indicates the mass air flow computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of the
mass air flow sensor.
●
Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input
signals.
●
The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec]
×
×
INJ PULSE-B2
[msec]
IGN TIMING
[BTDC]
×
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
PURG VOL C/V
[%]
Revision: March 2005
EC-756
Remarks
●
After starting the engine, [OFF] is
displayed regardless of the starter
signal.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated.
●
When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
EGR VOL CON/V
[step]
×
●
INT/V TIM (B1)
[°CA]
●
INT/V TIM (B2)
[°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
●
INT/V SOL (B2) [%]
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
●
The air conditioner relay control condition
(determined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
●
The control condition of the electronic controlled engine mount (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
IDLE: Idle condition
TRVL: Driving condition
●
●
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
ECM according to the input signals.
I/P PULLY SPD
[rpm]
●
Indicates the engine speed computed from
the turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h] or [MPH]
●
Indicates the vehicle speed computed from
the revolution sensor signal.
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
Revision: March 2005
H
I
J
L
The control condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
HI: High speed operation
MID: Middle speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
G
The control condition of the EVAP canister
vent control valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
●
COOLING FAN
[HI/MID/LOW/OFF]
F
K
Indicates the throttle control motor relay
control condition determined by the ECM
according to the input signals.
×
E
Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the
input signals.
●
THRTL RELAY
[ON/OFF]
D
The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating.
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not
operating.
×
C
Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
advanced angle.
●
×
EC
The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
The advance angle becomes larger as the
value increases.
ENGINE MOUNT
[IDLE/TRVL]
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]
Indicates the EGR volume control value
computed by the ECM according to the
input signals.
●
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF]
A
Remarks
EC-757
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
●
Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not
been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has
already been performed successfully.
●
Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
●
A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals.
●
The current flow to the heater becomes
larger as the value increases.
●
The signal voltage from the refrigerant
pressure sensor is displayed.
●
The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
●
The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
MAIN SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN
switch signal.
CANCEL SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/
COAST switch signal.
BRAKE SW1
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
switch signal.
●
Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
●
Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
according to the input signal from the TCM.
AT OD CANCEL
[ON/OFF]
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
cancel signal sent from the TCM.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
lamp determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
●
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
determined by the ECM according to the
input signals.
IDL A/V LEARN
[YET/CMPLT]
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [mile]
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
[%]
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
[%]
AC PRESS SEN
[V]
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
SET VHCL SPD
[km/h] or [mph]
VHCL SPD CUT
[NON/CUT]
LO SPEED CUT
[NON/CUT]
CRUISE LAMP
[ON/OFF]
SET LAMP
[ON/OFF]
Revision: March 2005
EC-758
Remarks
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
ECM
INPUT
SIGNALS
Monitored item
[Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
A
Remarks
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec],
[Hz] or [%]
●
DUTY-HI
Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse
width measured by the probe.
DUTY-LOW
PLS WIDTH-HI
●
Only # is displayed if item is unable
to be measured.
●
Figures with #s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an
actual piece of data which was just
previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
EC
C
D
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
E
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
ECM
input
signals
Monitored item [Unit]
Main
signals
Description
●
ENG SPEED [rpm]
×
×
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]
×
×
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor specification is displayed.
●
Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board correction.
●
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
×
Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
●
×
F
Remarks
The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.
G
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
H
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
I
●
When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
J
●
This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
K
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
●
FUEL INJECTION
IGNITION TIMING
POWER BALANCE
L
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II.
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Timing light: Set
●
Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
●
A/C switch: OFF
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
JUDGEMENT
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
Engine runs rough or dies.
Cut off each injector signal one at
a time using CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-759
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
●
Harness and connectors
●
Fuel injector
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Compression
●
Fuel injector
●
Power transistor
●
Spark plug
●
Ignition coil
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
TEST ITEM
CONDITION
●
COOLING FAN*
●
●
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
EGR VOL
CONT/V
VIAS SOL VALVE
ENGINE
MOUNTING
PURG VOL
CONT/V
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
VENT CONTROL/V
V/T ASSIGN
ANGLE
●
JUDGEMENT
●
Harness and connectors
●
Cooling fan motor
●
IPDM E/R
●
Harness and connectors
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
Fuel injector
Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Fuel pump relay
EGR volume control valve makes
an operating sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
EGR volume control valve
Solenoid valve makes the operating
sound.
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
●
Harness and connectors
●
Electronic controlled engine
mount
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
●
Harness and connectors
●
Solenoid valve
●
Harness and connectors
●
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Ignition switch: ON
Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II.
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●
Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●
Change the EGR volume control
valve opening step using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.
●
Ignition switch: ON
●
Turn electronic controlled engine
mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with
the CONSULT-II.
●
Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
●
Change the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
opening percent using CONSULT-II.
Cooling fan moves and stops.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
Electronic controlled engine mount
makes the operating sound.
Engine speed changes according to
the opening percent.
●
Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
●
Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
●
Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●
Change intake valve timing using
CONSULT-II.
CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-674, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
Revision: March 2005
EC-760
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode
EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM
A/F SEN1
Test item
Condition
PURG FLOW P0441
EC-964
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
EC-969
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456*
EC-1016
PURG VOL CN/V P1444
EC-1206
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276
EC-1166
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286
EC-1166
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/1279
EC-1175, EC-1187
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/1289
HO2S2 (B1) P0139
HO2S2
EGR SYSTEM
Reference page
A
EC
C
D
EC-1175, EC-1187
EC-856
HO2S2 (B1) P1146
EC-1084
HO2S2 (B1) P1147
EC-1096
HO2S2 (B2) P0159
EC-856
HO2S2 (B2) P1166
EC-1084
HO2S2 (B2) P1167
EC-1096
EGR SYSTEM P0400
EC-937
EGR SYSTEM P1402
EC-1199
E
F
G
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to L31 models but appears in DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode screens.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-761
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
SEF705Y
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
Revision: March 2005
EC-762
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Operation
1.
2.
A
“AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
EC
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to "INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS" in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
D
“MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for furE
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB0197E
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function
UBS00I0I
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
SEF139P
Revision: March 2005
EC-763
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode
Function
Service $01
READINESS TESTS
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
Service $02
(FREEZE DATA)
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-674, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
Service $03
DTCs
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes:
Service $04
CLEAR DIAG INFO
●
Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
●
Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
●
Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
●
Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
●
Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
●
Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
Service $06
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
Service $07
(ON BOARD TESTS)
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the EVAP canister vent control
valve can be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
Service $08
Service $09
—
(CALIBRATION ID)
●
Low ambient temperature
●
Low battery voltage
●
Engine running
●
Ignition switch OFF
●
Low fuel temperature
●
Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
BBIA0002E
Revision: March 2005
EC-764
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
A
EC
C
SEF398S
D
5.
Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
E
F
G
SEF416S
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-765
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
UBS00I0J
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED
●
Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1
See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL
See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1
A/F ALPHA-B2
See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
COOLAN TEMP/S
●
Engine: After warming up
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
11 - 14V
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
EGR TEMP SEN
●
Engine: After warming up
Less than 4.5V
EVAP SYS PRES
●
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL
●
Ignition switch: ON → START → ON
OFF → ON → OFF
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
VEH SPEED SE
BATTERY VOLT
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
AIR COND SIG
P/N POSI SW
PW/ST SIGNAL
●
●
●
●
●
Revision: March 2005
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Ignition switch: ON
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5 V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
LEAN ←→ RICH
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
Steering wheel: Not being turned
(Forward direction)
OFF
Steering wheel: Being turned
ON
EC-766
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
MONITOR ITEM
LOAD SIGNAL
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
IGNITION SW
●
Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON
BRAKE SW
●
Ignition switch: ON
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
IGN TIMING
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
PURG VOL C/V
EGR VOLCON/V
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
VIAS S/V
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
A
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
OFF
EC
ON → OFF → ON
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
Idle
2.0 - 3.0 msec
C
D
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
Idle
13° - 18° BTDC
2,000 rpm
25° - 45° BTDC
Idle
5% - 35%
2,500 rpm
5% - 35%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
E
F
G
H
I
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
—
Idle
0 step
Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
rpm quickly
10 - 55 step
Idle
−5° - 5°CA
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 30°CA
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
J
EC-767
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
MONITOR ITEM
AIR COND RLY
ENGINE MOUNT
CONDITION
●
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates)
ON
Idle (with vehicle stopped)
IDLE
Except above conditions
TRVL
●
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●
Engine running or cranking
●
Except above conditions
OFF
VENT CONT/V
●
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
THRTL RELAY
●
Ignition switch: ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
COOLING FAN
ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
MID
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(221°F) or more
HI
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
–
Engine: After warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
●
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
●
Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
TRVL AFTER MIL
●
Ignition switch: ON
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
●
Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
0 - 100%
●
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
Approx. 0V
●
Engine: Idle
●
Air conditioner switch: ON
●
Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
SET VHCL SPD
●
Engine: Running
ASCD: Operating.
The preset vehicle speed is
displayed.
MAIN SW
Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed
ON
●
MAIN switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
I/P PULLY SPD
VEHICLE SPEED
AC PRESS SEN
VEH SPEED SE
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
●
●
●
Revision: March 2005
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
ON
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has
turned ON.
0 - 65,535 km
(0 - 40,723 mile)
1.0 - 4.0V
EC-768
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW1
BRAKE SW2
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
CONDITION
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
A
Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal:
Fully released
ON
Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal:
Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
ON → OFF
●
Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD is operating
ON
●
When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
ASCD is not operating
OFF
EC
C
D
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-769
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I0K
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
SEF241Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-770
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB1594E
Revision: March 2005
EC-771
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description
PFP:00031
UBS00I0L
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
●
B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction)
●
A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
●
MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition
●
UBS00I0M
Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
●
Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
●
Transmission: Warmed-up*1
●
●
Electrical load: Not applied*2
●
Engine speed: Idle
*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
●
Inspection Procedure
UBS00I0N
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-773, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z
Revision: March 2005
EC-772
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I0O
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2268E
Revision: March 2005
EC-773
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
PBIB2548E
Revision: March 2005
EC-774
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
DETAILED PROCEDURE
A
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
3.
Start engine.
Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-772, "Testing Condition" .
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within
the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1
minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB2369E
2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19.
G
H
I
PBIB2332E
J
3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
K
L
M
PBIB2332E
4. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-775
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition.
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-714, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-714 . GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
2.
Check the following.
Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
Clogged fuel filter
Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1316 .)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-714 .)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1.
2.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
Revision: March 2005
EC-776
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
A
Check the following.
Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-1287 .)
Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1308 .)
Intake air leakage
Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-200 .)
If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
EC
C
D
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
E
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 12.
F
G
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
H
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
●
For DTC P1271, P1281, refer to EC-1132, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1272, P1282, refer to EC-1140, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1273, P1283, refer to EC-1148, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1274, P1284, refer to EC-1157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1276, P1286, refer to EC-1166, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1278, P1288, refer to EC-1176, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
●
For DTC P1279, P1289, refer to EC-1188, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
I
J
K
L
13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
M
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 15.
Revision: March 2005
EC-777
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Stop the engine.
Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
PBIB2332E
18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
–
–
–
–
–
2.
–
–
–
–
Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
Engine oil level is too high
Engine oil viscosity
Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
Noise from engine
Noise from transmission, etc.
Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
EGR valve stuck
Valve clearance malfunction
Intake valve timing control function malfunction
Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
Revision: March 2005
EC-778
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
A
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Crushed air ducts
●
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
●
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
●
Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
EC
C
D
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
E
F
G
Stop the engine.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
H
I
22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1.
2.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-815 .
2. GO TO 29.
NG
>> GO TO 23.
J
K
L
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
M
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
Revision: March 2005
EC-779
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
24. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> GO TO 29.
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Crushed air ducts
●
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
●
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
●
Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 27.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
26. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30.
PBIB2370E
Revision: March 2005
EC-780
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
[VQ]
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
A
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
●
Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
EC
●
Looseness of oil filler cap
●
Disconnection of oil level gauge
●
Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
C
●
Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
●
Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
D
●
Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts
●
Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
E
>> GO TO 30.
F
29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
G
H
30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-781
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[VQ]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
PFP:00006
UBS00I0P
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow
2
3 or 4
Situation
The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5
(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10
The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I0Q
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS".
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , "HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS", “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Repair or replace connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-782
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram
PFP:24110
A
UBS00I0R
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1554E
Revision: March 2005
EC-783
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
1
WIRE
COLOR
B
ITEM
ECM ground
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
109
R
Ignition switch
Idle speed
0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
●
111
W/B
B
B
ECM ground
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
115
116
Body ground
[Ignition switch: OFF]
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
DATA (DC Voltage)
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Body ground
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00I0S
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E
Revision: March 2005
EC-784
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
E
F
G
H
BBIA0437E
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
L
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
M
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-785
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to EC-1287, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB1915E
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
12.
PBIB1630E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
Revision: March 2005
EC-786
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness or connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VII
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
D
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
F
G
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
H
Check the following.
●
Harness or connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK 15A FUSE
J
1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
K
L
15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-787
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> GO TO 17.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-788
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[VQ]
Ground Inspection
UBS00I0T
A
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti- EC
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
C
●
Remove the ground bolt or screw.
●
Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
D
●
Clean as required to assure good contact.
●
Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
●
Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
●
If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the E
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
F
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-28, "Ground Distribution" .
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB1870E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-789
2005 Altima
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ]
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:23710
UBS00I0U
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis
name
U1000*1
1000*1
U1001*2
DTC detecting condition
●
CAN communication
line
1001*2
UBS00I0V
●
ECM cannot communicate to other control
units.
ECM cannot communicate for more than the
specified time.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. (A/T)
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. (M/T)
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
UBS00I0W
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-792, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-790
2005 Altima
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I0X
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1264E
Revision: March 2005
EC-791
2005 Altima
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I0Y
Go to LAN-4, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-792
2005 Altima
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
[VQ]
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
Description
PFP:23796
A
UBS00I0Z
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Piston position
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Wheel sensor*
Vehicle speed
ECM function
Intake valve
timing control
Actuator
EC
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN Communication line
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
PBIB1389E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
J
K
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I10
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
−5° - 5°CA
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 30°CA
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
EC-793
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
UBS00I11
Detecting condition
P0011
0011
(Bank 1)
P0021
0021
(Bank 2)
Intake valve timing
control performance
There is a gap between angle of target and
phase-control angle degree.
Possible cause
●
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●
Intake valve control solenoid valve
●
Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
portion of the camshaft
●
Timing chain installation
●
Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for
intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items
Intake valve timing control
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I12
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1111 or P1136. Refer to EC-1057 .
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S
60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
More than 3.38 msec
Shift lever
P or N position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T)
4.
5.
6.
PBIB0164E
Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-795, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS
70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Shift lever
1st or 2nd position
Driving location uphill
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
Revision: March 2005
EC-794
2005 Altima
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
[VQ]
7.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-795, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I13
EC
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1.
2.
Start engine.
Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
KG
>> Go to LU-21, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
C
D
E
F
PBIA8559J
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
G
Refer to EC-796, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
H
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
I
Refer to EC-927, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
J
K
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-936, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
L
M
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following.
●
Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
●
Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
SEC905C
Revision: March 2005
EC-795
2005 Altima
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
[VQ]
6. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" .
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-187, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean lubrication line.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-923 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-930 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IIP
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
PBIB0193E
4.
Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Removal and Installation
PBIB2275E
UBS00IIQ
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-796
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Description
PFP:226A0
A
UBS00I14
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
ECM function
Actuator
EC
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
C
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600
OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
F
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I15
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
H
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
–
Engine: After warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
●
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
P0037
0037
(Bank 1)
P0057
0057
(Bank 2)
P0038
0038
(Bank 1)
P0058
0058
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis
name
Heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater
control circuit low
Heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater
control circuit high
Revision: March 2005
I
ON
J
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
D
UBS00I16
DTC detecting condition
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater.)
EC-797
K
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
●
Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
shorted.)
●
Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
L
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I17
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11.0V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-802, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-798
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I18
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1663E
Revision: March 2005
EC-799
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
25
P/B
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–
Engine: after warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●
Revision: March 2005
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
EC-800
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1664E
Revision: March 2005
EC-801
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
6
R/L
●
Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–
Engine: after warming up
–
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I19
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-802
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
BBIA0467E
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
K
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
L
M
PBIB0541E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-803
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0037, P0038
25
1
1
P0057, P0058
6
1
2
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Refer to EC-804, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I1A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1.
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No.
Resistance
1 and 4
5.0 - 7.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 and 1, 3, 4
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
3 and 1, 2, 4
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB0542E
Revision: March 2005
EC-804
2005 Altima
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00I1B
A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-805
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22680
UBS00I1C
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIB1604E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I1D
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
Idle
5% - 35%
2,500 rpm
5% - 35%
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
A)
P0101
0101
UBS00I1E
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition.
Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance
problem
B)
Revision: March 2005
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving condition.
EC-806
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
●
Intake air temperature sensor
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Intake air leaks
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
●
Intake air temperature sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I1F
A
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
C
D
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
E
F
G
SEF174Y
H
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
I
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
J
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
K
L
M
SEF243Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-807
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
7.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1
More than 3V
THRTL SEN 2
More than 3V
Shift lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
Overall Function Check
PBIB0199E
UBS00I1G
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select Service $01 with GST.
Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
If NG, go to EC-810, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF534P
Revision: March 2005
EC-808
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I1H
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1271E
Revision: March 2005
EC-809
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00I1I
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A
>> GO TO 3.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
Air duct
●
Vacuum hoses
●
Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-810
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
F
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
G
1.
2.
H
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
I
J
BBIA0035E
3.
K
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB2261E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●
Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-811
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-825, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-993, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-812, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I1J
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Revision: March 2005
EC-812
2005 Altima
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
4.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
A
EC
C
1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
E
F
G
H
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
I
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
Voltage V
K
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
J
L
1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-813
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00I1K
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-814
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22680
A
UBS00I1L
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
EC
C
D
PBIB1604E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I1M
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
MAS A/F SE-B1
CONDITION
F
SPECIFICATION
See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
CAL/LD VALUE
MASS AIRFLOW
Idle
5% - 35%
2,500 rpm
5% - 35%
G
H
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
Idle
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
I
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I1N
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0102
0102
P0103
0103
Trouble diagnosis
name
Mass air flow sensor
circuit low input
Mass air flow sensor
circuit high input
K
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Intake air leaks
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Mass air flow sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Mass air flow sensor circuit
Revision: March 2005
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
EC-815
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I1O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-818, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-818, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-818, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-816
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I1P
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1271E
Revision: March 2005
EC-817
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
51
W
Mass air flow sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00I1Q
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 3.
P0103 >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
Air duct
●
Vacuum hoses
●
Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Reconnect the parts.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-818
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
F
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
G
1.
2.
H
Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
I
J
BBIA0035E
3.
K
Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB2261E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●
Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-819
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-812, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I1R
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition
MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB2371E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
5.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Revision: March 2005
EC-820
2005 Altima
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[VQ]
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 to 4 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
A
EC
C
D
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
E
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition
Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)
Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.)
1.0 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.)
1.6 - 2.0
Idle to about 4,000 rpm
F
G
H
1.0 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system parts
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Perform step 2 and 3 again.
If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation
J
K
L
M
UBS00I1S
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-821
I
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00I1T
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
25 (77)
3.32
1.94 - 2.06
80 (176)
1.23
0.295 - 0.349
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
UBS00I1U
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0112
0112
Intake air temperature sensor
circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113
0113
Intake air temperature sensor
circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
●
Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
UBS00I1V
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-824, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-822
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I1W
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1272E
Revision: March 2005
EC-823
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I1X
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0035E
3.
Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SEF040S
Revision: March 2005
EC-824
2005 Altima
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
E
Refer to EC-825, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I1Y
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
I
Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and
6 under the following conditions.
J
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.94 - 2.06
K
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
L
PBIB1604E
M
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00I1Z
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-825
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00I20
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
Engine coolant temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage* V
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
Resistance
kΩ
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I21
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble Diagnosis Name
DTC Detecting Condition
Possible Cause
P0117
0117
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0118
0118
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Condition
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START
40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
START
80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
Except as shown above
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.
Revision: March 2005
EC-826
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I22
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-829, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
D
E
SEF058Y
F
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-827
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I23
BBWA1273E
Revision: March 2005
EC-828
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I24
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
G
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0036E
3.
Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
K
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
M
PBIB0080E
Revision: March 2005
EC-829
2005 Altima
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-830, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I25
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00I26
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-44, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-830
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00I27
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I28
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
CONDITION
F
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I29
H
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0122
0122
P0123
0123
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
I
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
J
K
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
M
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-831
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I2A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-834, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-832
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I2B
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1555E
Revision: March 2005
EC-833
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
More than 0.36V
Approximately 5V
UBS00I2C
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-834
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0233E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
M
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-833
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-1267
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-835
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-837, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-836
2005 Altima
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I2D
A
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set Shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1170E
F
G
UBS00I2E
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
H
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-837
2005 Altima
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00I2F
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-826, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
−10 (14)
4.4
7.0 - 11.4
20 (68)
3.5
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
2.2
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.9
0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I2G
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0125
0125
Trouble diagnosis name
Insufficient engine coolant temperature for
closed loop fuel control
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
●
Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
practical, even when some time has passed
after starting the engine.
●
Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
EC-838
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
●
Thermostat
2005 Altima
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I2H
A
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-839, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
D
E
F
SEF174Y
G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I2I
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
H
I
J
K
L
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-840, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-839
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For circuit, refer to EC-828, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I2J
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant temperature
2.
°C (°F)
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00I2K
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-44, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-840
2005 Altima
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
A
UBS00I2L
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
EC
C
D
PBIB1604E
E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
F
kΩ
25 (77)
3.32
1.94 - 2.06
80 (176)
1.23
0.295 - 0.349
G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
H
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0127
0127
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake air temperature
too high
UBS00I2M
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
J
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Intake air temperature sensor
K
UBS00I2N
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
a.
Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-841
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check the engine coolant temperature.
If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-842, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF189Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I2O
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-843, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Refer to EC-823, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-842
2005 Altima
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I2P
A
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.94 - 2.06
EC
If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
C
D
PBIB1604E
E
F
G
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
H
UBS00I2Q
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
I
Refer to EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-843
2005 Altima
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:21200
UBS00I2R
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
DTC No.
P0128
0128
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
The engine coolant temperature does not
reach to specified temperature even though
the engine has run long enough.
Thermostat function
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Thermostat
●
Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
●
Engine coolant temperature sensor
UBS00I2S
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
●
For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than
60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following
conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE
80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-844, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF176Y
WITH GST
1.
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I2T
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-845, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-844
2005 Altima
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I2U
A
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB2005E
E
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.0
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
F
G
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
H
SEF012P
Removal and Installation
UBS00I2V
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
I
Refer to CO-44, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-845
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS00I2W
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I2X
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I2Y
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
DTC No.
P0138
0138
(Bank 1)
P0158
0158
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit high voltage
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
EC-846
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I2Z
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-851, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
C
D
E
SEF174Y
WITH GST
F
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-847
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I30
BANK 1
BBWA1276E
Revision: March 2005
EC-848
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
A
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
–
C
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
D
E
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-849
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1556E
Revision: March 2005
EC-850
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
W
A
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
–
C
D
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
E
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
F
UBS00I31
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
G
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
I
J
K
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-851
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3.
Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BBIA0467E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-852
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
74
2
1
P0158
55
2
2
C
Continuity should exist.
2.
D
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0138
74
2
1
P0158
55
2
2
F
Continuity should not exist.
G
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
I
Check heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
K
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
L
Refer to EC-854, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
M
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-853
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I32
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
SEF174Y
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-854
2005 Altima
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
EC
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
C
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
D
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
F
Removal and Installation
UBS00I33
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
G
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-855
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS00I34
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I35
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I36
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the
sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving
condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
DTC No.
P0139
0139
(Bank 1)
P0159
0159
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit slow response
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
It takes more time for the sensor to respond
between rich and lean than the specified time.
EC-856
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I37
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2374E
9.
a.
b.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00I38
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-857
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
If NG, go to EC-862, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-858
PBIB1607E
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I39
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1276E
Revision: March 2005
EC-859
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-860
Approximately 0V
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1556E
Revision: March 2005
EC-861
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
W
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00I3A
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-862
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
BBIA0035E
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-868, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-879, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-863
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0467E
4.
Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-864
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0139
74
2
1
P0159
55
2
2
C
Continuity should exist.
2.
D
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P0139
74
2
1
P0159
55
2
2
F
Continuity should not exist.
G
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
I
Refer to EC-865, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
J
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I3B
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
SEF174Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-865
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Revision: March 2005
EC-866
2005 Altima
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00I3C
A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-867
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16600
UBS00I3D
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor
Input signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
A/F sensor 1
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM function
Fuel injection control
DTC detecting condition
P0171
0171
(Bank 1)
P0174
0174
(Bank 2)
Fuel injection system too
lean
●
Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●
The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
Actuator
Fuel injector
Possible cause
●
Intake air leaks
●
A/F sensor 1
●
Fuel injector
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
Lack of fuel
●
Mass air flow sensor
●
Incorrect PCV hose connection
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I3E
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
SEF968Y
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
Revision: March 2005
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
EC-868
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
7.
8.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
BBIA0035E
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
K
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-872, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-869
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I3F
BANK 1
BBWA1557E
Revision: March 2005
EC-870
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1558E
Revision: March 2005
EC-871
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I3G
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-872
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0235E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
E
G
H
I
J
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
K
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
L
M
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-873
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1316, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
●
Fuel lines (Refer to MA-24, "Checking Fuel Lines" )
●
Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-806 .
7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.
With GST
Install all removed parts.
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK (P0171)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0174)>>GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-806 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-874
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0133E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-875
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I
1.
2.
3.
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Disconnect harness connector F44, F101
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0472E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters)
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB2595E
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
With triple meters
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
1
23
3
3
22
5
7
21
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
Without triple meters
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-876
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
10. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II
A
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound.
EC
C
D
PBIB2596E
E
With triple meters
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+)
(–)
1
6
1
3
6
3
5
6
7
F
G
Without triple meters
H
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
I
J
Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
K
11. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR
L
1.
2.
M
Start engine.
Listen to injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer
to EC-1308 .
PBIB1986E
Revision: March 2005
EC-877
2005 Altima
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
12. CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2.
Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIB1726E
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-878
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16600
A
UBS00I3H
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu- EC
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
C
Sensor
A/F sensor 1
DTC No.
P0172
0172
(Bank 1)
P0175
0175
(Bank 2)
Input signal to ECM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel injection system too
rich
ECM function
Fuel injection control
Actuator
Fuel injector
D
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
A/F sensor 1
●
Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●
Fuel injector
●
The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
E
F
UBS00I3I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
G
H
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
SEF968Y
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
7.
8.
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
Revision: March 2005
EC-879
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
If engine starts, go to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
BBIA0035E
to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-883, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
Revision: March 2005
EC-880
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I3J
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1557E
Revision: March 2005
EC-881
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1558E
Revision: March 2005
EC-882
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I3K
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
A
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
G
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-883
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0235E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-884
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
A
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
EC
At idling: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
C
D
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-1316, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
E
F
>> Repair or replace.
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
G
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
H
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-806 .
J
7. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
K
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
L
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
M
OK or NG
OK (P0172)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0175)>>GO TO 11.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-806 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-885
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-886
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I
1.
2.
3.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Disconnect harness connector F44, F101
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0472E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters)
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
G
H
I
PBIB2595E
J
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
With triple meters
L
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
1
23
3
3
22
5
7
21
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
M
Without triple meters
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-887
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
10. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound.
PBIB2596E
With triple meters
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+)
(–)
1
6
1
3
6
3
5
6
7
Without triple meters
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
11. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR
1.
2.
Start engine.
Listen to injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer
to EC-1308 .
PBIB1986E
Revision: March 2005
EC-888
2005 Altima
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[VQ]
12. CHECK INJECTOR
A
1.
Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 13.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC
C
D
E
F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-889
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
UBS00I3L
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0391E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0181
0181
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit range/
performance
UBS00I3M
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
UBS00I3N
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to EC-893, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-893, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-890
SEF174Y
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
WITH GST
A
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-891
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I3O
BBWA1559E
Revision: March 2005
EC-892
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I3P
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
G
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0391E
3.
K
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB0932E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-893
2005 Altima
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness connectors M70, F58
●
Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I3Q
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove fuel level sensor unit.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I3R
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-894
2005 Altima
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22630
A
UBS00I3S
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
EC
C
D
BBIA0391E
E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68)
3.5
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
2.2
0.79 - 0.90
F
G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
H
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
SEF012P
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS00I3T
DTC detecting condition
J
Possible cause
P0182
0182
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0183
0183
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I3U
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-897, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-895
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I3V
BBWA1559E
Revision: March 2005
EC-896
2005 Altima
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I3W
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0437E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
G
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
H
I
J
BBIA0391E
3.
K
Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB0932E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-897
2005 Altima
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
[VQ]
4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B2, M12
●
Harness connectors M70, F58
●
Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I3X
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
Remove fuel level sensor unit.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.3 - 2.7
50 (122)
0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I3Y
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-898
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00I3Z
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I40
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
CONDITION
F
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I41
H
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0222
0222
P0223
0223
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
1 is sent to ECM.
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
I
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
J
K
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
M
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-899
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I42
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-902, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-900
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I43
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1591E
Revision: March 2005
EC-901
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
More than 0.36V
Approximately 5V
UBS00I44
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-902
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0233E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E
H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
M
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-901
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-1267
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-903
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-837, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-904
2005 Altima
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I45
A
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set Shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1170E
F
G
UBS00I46
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
H
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-905
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I47
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Input Signal to ECM
Engine speed
ECM function
On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P0300
0300
Multiple cylinder misfire
detected
Multiple cylinder misfire.
P0301
0301
No.1 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
P0302
0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire
detected
P0303
0303
No. 3 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
P0304
0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 4 cylinder misfires.
P0305
0305
No. 5 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 5 cylinder misfires.
P0306
0306
No. 6 cylinder misfire
detected
No. 6 cylinder misfires.
No. 2 cylinder misfires.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Improper spark plug
●
Insufficient compression
●
Incorrect fuel pressure
●
The injector circuit is open or shorted
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leak
●
The ignition signal circuit is open or
shorted
●
Lack of fuel
●
Signal plate
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Incorrect PCV hose connection
UBS00I48
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
Revision: March 2005
EC-906
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
A
Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-907, "Diagnostic Procedure"
C
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performD
ing the following procedure is advised.
PBIB0164E
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
E
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed
Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
F
G
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
H
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
I
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed
Time
J
Around 1,000 rpm
Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm
Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm
Approximately 3.5 minutes
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
L
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I49
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
M
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace it.
Revision: March 2005
EC-907
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1.
2.
With CONSULT-II
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 10.
Revision: March 2005
EC-908
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
4. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I
1.
2.
3.
A
Stop engine.
Disconnect harness connector F44, F101.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0472E
E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters)
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
G
H
PBIB2595E
I
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
With triple meters
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
1
23
3
3
22
5
7
21
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
L
M
Without triple meters
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
Revision: March 2005
EC-909
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound.
PBIB2596E
With triple meters
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+)
(–)
1
6
1
3
6
3
5
6
7
Without triple meters
Harness connector F101 terminal
Cylinder
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer to EC-1308 .
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-III
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
Start engine.
Listen to injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTOR CIRCUIT, refer
to EC-1308 .
PBIB1986E
Revision: March 2005
EC-910
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
A
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0229E
F
G
H
I
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1287, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
Revision: March 2005
K
L
M
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
2.
3.
J
EC-911
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
9. CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-26 .
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 10.
SEF156I
10. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 .
11. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-200, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
Standard:
1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum:
981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each
cylinder:
98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
12. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
Install all removed parts.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
Revision: March 2005
EC-912
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-1316, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●
Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
●
Fuel lines (Refer to MA-24, "Checking Fuel Lines" )
●
Fuel filter for clogging
EC
C
>> Repair or replace.
14. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
D
Check the following items. Refer to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
Items
E
Specifications
Target idle speed
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Follow the EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-913
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
15. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0235E
3.
4.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
5.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.
16. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1.
Revision: March 2005
EC-914
2005 Altima
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[VQ]
17. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
A
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
EC
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec:
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec:
C
at idling
at 2,500 rpm
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-806, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
E
18. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
F
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-725, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
G
19. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
H
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
I
J
>> GO TO 20.
20. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-915
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Component Description
PFP:22060
UBS00I4A
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
BBIA0067E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I4B
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC detected condition
P0327
0327
Knock sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328
0328
Knock sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●
Knock sensor
DTC No.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
UBS00I4C
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-918, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-916
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I4D
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1585E
Revision: March 2005
EC-917
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
15
WIRE
COLOR
W
ITEM
Knock sensor
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.5V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I4E
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
BBIA0067E
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors F26, F301
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-918
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ]
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
A
Refer to EC-920, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace knock sensor.
EC
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
C
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
D
E
F
G
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
H
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
I
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
K
L
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F26, F301
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground
M
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-919
2005 Altima
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I4F
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
PBIB2327E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I4G
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-224, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-920
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
PFP:23731
A
UBS00I4H
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
F
G
H
PBIB2326E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I4I
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENG SPEED
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0335
0335
Trouble diagnosis name
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS) circuit
UBS00I4J
DTC detecting condition
●
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
●
The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
while the engine is running.
●
J
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
L
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●
Signal plate
UBS00I4K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-921
K
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-924, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-924, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-922
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I4L
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1286E
Revision: March 2005
EC-923
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 1.6V
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
13
W
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
Approximately 1.4V
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB1042E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I4M
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-924
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0461E
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 (A/T models) or 1 (M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB2328E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 (A/T models) or 3 (M/T models) and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-925
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-927, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace the signal plate.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-926
2005 Altima
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I4N
A
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0563E
5.
F
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
G
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
H
I
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I4O
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
J
Refer to EM-138, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" .
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-927
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
PFP:23731
UBS00I4P
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of
camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB0562E
PBIB2326E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
P0340
0340
(Bank 1)
P0345
0345
(Bank 2)
DTC detecting condition
●
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
UBS00I4Q
●
●
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
during engine running.
●
Camshaft (Intake)
●
Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .)
The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.
●
Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .)
●
Dead (Weak) battery
The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I4R
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
EC-928
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-933, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
A
EC
C
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-929
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I4S
BANK 1
BBWA1560E
Revision: March 2005
EC-930
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 4.0V
D
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
33
R/Y
E
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB1040E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-931
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1288E
Revision: March 2005
EC-932
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
1.0 - 4.0V
D
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle
14
W
E
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB1040E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I4T
I
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position.
J
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
K
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
L
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-933
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0462E
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1)
●
Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
●
Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors F58, M70
●
Harness connectors F301, F26 (bank 1)
●
Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-934
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank 2) and CMP sensor (PHASE)
EC
terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1)
●
Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ECM
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-936, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
H
I
10. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
J
Check the following.
●
Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
●
Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
K
L
M
SEC905C
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-935
2005 Altima
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I4U
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
Remove the sensor.
Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5.
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-)
Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I4V
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-182, "CAMSHAFT" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-936
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
Description
PFP:14710
A
UBS00I4W
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
voltage*2
Battery
Battery
Air conditioner switch*1
Air conditioner operation
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Electrical
load*1
ECM function
Actuator
EC
C
D
EGR volume
control
EGR volume control valve
E
F
Electrical load signal
Wheel sensor*1
Vehicle speed
TCM*1 (A/T models)
Gear position, shifting signal
G
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
H
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions.
●
Engine stopped
●
Engine starting
●
Engine idling
●
Low engine coolant temperature
●
Excessively high engine coolant temperature
●
High engine speed
●
Wide open throttle
●
Low battery voltage
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB1843E
Revision: March 2005
EC-937
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR volume control valve
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W
EGR Temperature Sensor
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEF599K
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
4.59
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
2.32
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.62
0.011 - 0.014
*: This data is reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
SEF068X
Revision: March 2005
EC-938
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I4X
A
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EGR TEMP SEN
EGR VOL CON/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
No load
SPECIFICATION
Less than 4.5V
Idle
0 step
Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
quickly
10 - 55 step
EC
C
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I4Y
If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sensor under the condition that calls for EGR, a
low-flow malfunction is diagnosed.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P0400
0400
EGR function (Close)
No EGR flow is detected under the condition that calls for EGR.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
E
Possible cause
Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
EGR volume control valve stuck closed
●
Dead (Weak) battery
●
EGR passage clogged
●
EGR temperature sensor and circuit
●
Exhaust gas leaks
F
G
H
UBS00I4Z
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II even though DTC work
support test result is NG.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then
stop engine immediately.
●
For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or higher.
I
J
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Confirm “COOLAN TEMP/S” value is within the range listed
below.
COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and
allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to
lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means other
than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
SEF013Y
When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 70°C (158°F),
immediately go to the next step.
Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and then stop vehicle with engine running.
Revision: March 2005
EC-939
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
7.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 8.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions until
“TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
4.0 - 9.0 msec
Shift lever
Suitable position
8.
SEF845Y
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC942, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check engine coolant temperature in Service $01 with GST.
Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize.
Do not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may
produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
Start engine and let it idle monitoring the engine coolant temperature value. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.
Engine speed: 1,200 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Shift lever: Suitable position
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-942, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-940
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I50
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1561E
Revision: March 2005
EC-941
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
17
18
19
20
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
LG
L
L/W
ITEM
EGR volume control valve
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
0.1 - 14V
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00I51
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
1.
2.
Start engine.
Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks.
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace exhaust system.
Revision: March 2005
EC-942
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
2. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0249E
E
4.
Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB0627E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
EGR volume control valve
17
6
18
3
19
4
20
1
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-943
2005 Altima
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
5. CHECK EGR PASSAGE
Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace EGR passage.
6. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
7. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P 0405, P0406. Refer to EC-953, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-944
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Description
PFP:14710
A
UBS00I52
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
voltage*2
Battery
Battery
Air conditioner switch*1
Air conditioner operation
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Electrical
load*1
ECM function
Actuator
EC
C
D
EGR volume
control
EGR volume control valve
E
F
Electrical load signal
Wheel sensor*1
Vehicle speed
TCM*1 (A/T models)
Gear position, shifting signal
G
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
H
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions.
●
Engine stopped
●
Engine starting
●
Engine idling
●
Low engine coolant temperature
●
Excessively high engine coolant temperature
●
High engine speed
●
Wide open throttle
●
Low battery voltage
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB1843E
Revision: March 2005
EC-945
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR volume control valve
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I53
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EGR VOL CON/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
No load
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0 step
Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
quickly
10 - 55 step
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I54
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0403
0403
Trouble diagnosis name
EGR volume control valve circuit
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
EGR volume control valve
An improper voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I55
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 10 times.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-948, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-946
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I56
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1669E
Revision: March 2005
EC-947
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
17
18
19
20
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
LG
L
L/W
ITEM
EGR volume control valve
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
0.1 - 14V
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I57
1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0249E
4.
Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0627E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-948
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
EGR volume control valve
17
6
18
3
19
4
20
1
EC
C
D
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
F
4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
G
Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
H
I
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
J
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I58
K
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-949
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
3.
Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2
and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)]
4.
5.
6.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove EGR volume control valve.
Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control
valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
SEF605Y
7.
Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
SEF015Y
8.
Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
SEF560W
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-950
2005 Altima
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
3.
Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2
and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
A
Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)]
4.
5.
6.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove EGR volume control valve.
Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control
valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON and OFF.
EC
C
D
E
F
G
SEF605Y
7.
Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position.
H
I
J
SEF560W
Removal and Installation
K
UBS00I59
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EM-126, "EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE" .
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-951
2005 Altima
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:14710
UBS00I5A
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEF599K
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
4.59
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
2.32
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.62
0.011 - 0.014
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
SEF068X
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0405
0405
P0406
0406
Trouble Diagnosis Name
EGR temperature sensor
circuit low input
EGR temperature sensor
circuit high input
Revision: March 2005
UBS00I5B
DTC Detecting Condition
An excessively low voltage from the EGR
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even
when engine coolant temperature is low.
An excessively high voltage from the EGR
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even
when engine coolant temperature is high.
EC-952
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
shorted.)
●
EGR temperature sensor
●
Malfunction of EGR function
●
Harness or connectors
(The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
open.)
●
EGR temperature sensor
●
Malfunction of EGR function
2005 Altima
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I5C
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0405
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 50°C
(122°F).
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool
the engine down.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
C
D
E
SEF174Y
F
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
G
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0406
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F).
H
I
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to 50
step and check “EGR TEMP SEN” indication.
“EGR TEMP SEN” indication should decrease to less than 1.0V.
If the check result is NG, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to the following step.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,200 - 2,800 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
4 - 9 msec
Shift lever
Suitable position
8.
J
K
L
SEF015Y
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
PBIB0164E
With GST
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Select Service $01 with GST and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
Revision: March 2005
EC-953
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
Engine speed
1,200 - 2,800 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Shift lever
Suitable position
4.
5.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-956, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-954
2005 Altima
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I5D
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1562E
Revision: March 2005
EC-955
2005 Altima
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I5E
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0505E
3.
Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
PBIB2329E
Revision: March 2005
EC-956
2005 Altima
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
D
4. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
E
Refer to EC-957, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EGR temperature sensor.
F
5. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
G
Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
H
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
I
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
J
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I5F
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1
and 2 as shown in the figure.
K
L
M
PBIB2330E
Revision: March 2005
EC-957
2005 Altima
DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR
[VQ]
4.
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.011 - 0.014
If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.
SEF068X
Removal and Installation
UBS00I5G
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EM-126, "EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-958
2005 Altima
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:20905
A
UBS00I5H
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
EC
C
D
PBIB2377E
E
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
P0420
0420
(Bank 1)
P0430
0430
(Bank 2)
DTC detecting condition
●
Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
●
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly.
Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.
Possible cause
●
Three way catalyst (manifold)
●
Exhaust tube
●
Intake air leaks
●
Fuel injector
●
Fuel injector leaks
●
Spark plug
●
Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure
F
G
H
UBS00I5I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
J
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
Revision: March 2005
I
EC-959
K
L
M
SEF189Y
2005 Altima
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ]
8.
Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
SEF533Z
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
SEF534Z
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-961, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check
UBS00I5J
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Open engine hood.
Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank
1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-961, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB1108E
Revision: March 2005
EC-960
2005 Altima
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I5K
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
A
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
EC
C
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
D
E
F
G
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
H
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
I
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
J
K
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
Items
L
Specifications
Target idle speed
A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Follow the EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-961
2005 Altima
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ]
5. CHECK INJECTOR
1.
2.
Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-1309 .
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Perform EC-1310, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1172E
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
BBIA0229E
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
●
Revision: March 2005
EC-962
2005 Altima
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[VQ]
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and EC
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1287 .
D
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG
E
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-26, "Changing Spark Plugs
(Platinum - Tipped Type)" .
NG
>> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 9.
F
G
SEF156I
H
9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.
Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.
I
J
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-26 .
K
10. CHECK INJECTOR
L
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Reconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).
Revision: March 2005
EC-963
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:14950
UBS00I5L
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I5M
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
DTC No.
P0441
0441
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
incorrect purge flow
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between
intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●
Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
●
Blocked rubber tube
●
Cracked EVAP canister
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
●
Blocked purge port
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
UBS00I5N
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
Revision: March 2005
EC-964
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
EC
Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
C
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
D
Shift lever
Suitable position
Vehicle speed
32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED
500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.3 - 9.0 msec
Engine coolant temperature
70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
E
F
G
H
I
PBIB0826E
7.
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC966, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check
UBS00I5O
J
K
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
L
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine (TCS switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch
ON
Headlamp switch
ON
Rear window defogger switch
ON
Engine speed
Approx. 3,000 rpm
Shift lever
Any position other than P, N or R
M
PBIB1109E
8.
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
Revision: March 2005
EC-965
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
9.
If NG, go to EC-966, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I5P
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V
100%
Vacuum
Should exist.
0%
Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB1678E
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6.
Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-966
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPO- EC
RATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
C
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair it.
1.
2.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1.
2.
D
Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
E
F
G
SEF367U
H
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
I
J
K
SEF368U
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
L
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
M
PBIB1678E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Revision: March 2005
EC-967
2005 Altima
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-995 , P0453 EC-1001 .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Replace it.
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-968
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
A
UBS00I5Q
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
C
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
D
E
F
G
H
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0442
0442
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(negative pressure)
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
control system does not operate properly.
EC-969
I
Possible cause
J
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
K
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
L
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I5R
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●
Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
PBIB0829E
6.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C
Revision: March 2005
EC-970
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
WITH GST
A
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-679 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-679 .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
5. Select Service $07 with GST.
● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0441, EC-966 .
Diagnostic Procedure
EC
C
D
UBS00I5S
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
F
G
H
SEF915U
I
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
J
K
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
L
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
M
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-656, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: March 2005
EC-971
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0506E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
(SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: March 2005
EC-972
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
C
D
E
BBIA0526E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for
more details.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
(SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
G
●
H
I
J
K
SEF200U
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
L
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-657, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
Revision: March 2005
EC-973
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1213E
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
●
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PBIB1678E
Revision: March 2005
EC-974
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
A
EC
C
Vacuum should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
E
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
F
G
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
H
Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
I
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
K
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
M
18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
Revision: March 2005
EC-975
2005 Altima
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-663, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-976
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
PFP:14920
Description
A
UBS00I5T
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor*2
Vehicle speed
ECM function
Actuator
C
D
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
E
F
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
G
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
H
I
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
J
K
L
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I5U
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
PURG VOL C/V
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-977
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0444
0444
P0445
0445
UBS00I5V
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
open
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
shorted
An excessively high voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
UBS00I5W
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-981, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-978
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I5X
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1563E
Revision: March 2005
EC-979
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
45
PU/R
Idle speed
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
SEC990C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
SEC991C
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: March 2005
EC-980
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I5Y
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
A
CUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0507E
4.
F
Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
PBIB0148E
I
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness connectors F44, F101
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
J
K
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-981
2005 Altima
M
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F101, F44
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1678E
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-982
2005 Altima
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I5Z
A
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
EC
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
C
D
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
E
F
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
G
H
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I60
I
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-983
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14935
UBS00I61
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
PBIB1263E
BBIA0526E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I62
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0447
0447
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open
Revision: March 2005
UBS00I63
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
through EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-984
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I64
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-987, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-985
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I65
BBWA1665E
Revision: March 2005
EC-986
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
EC
WIRE
COLOR
OR
A
ITEM
EVAP canister vent control
valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
UBS00I66
D
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
E
F
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
I
J
PBIB1679E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-987
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
BBIA0526E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0152E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness connectors F55, B105
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-988
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
D
E
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
F
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
G
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
H
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I67
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
K
L
M
PBIB1033E
5.
6.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Revision: March 2005
EC-989
J
PBIB1679E
2005 Altima
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
8.
Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
Revision: March 2005
EC-990
PBIB1034E
2005 Altima
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:22365
A
UBS00I68
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
EC
C
D
E
BBIA0526E
F
G
H
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I69
J
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
K
UBS00I6A
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-1127 .
DTC No.
P0451
0451
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor performance
Revision: March 2005
I
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
control system pressure sensor
EC-991
Possible cause
L
M
●
Harness or connectors
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I6B
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-992, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I6C
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-992
2005 Altima
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1.
A
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0526E
2.
E
Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
F
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
G
Refer to EC-993, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
H
I
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-996 .
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
Component Inspection
UBS00I6D
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-993
PBIB1173E
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25085
UBS00I6E
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0526E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I6F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I6G
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-1127 .
DTC No.
P0452
0452
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor low
input
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
EC-994
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I6H
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-997, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
D
E
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-997, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
I
J
K
PBIB1110E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-995
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I6I
BBWA1666E
Revision: March 2005
EC-996
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
W
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
D
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
E
●
Idle speed
C
[Engine is running]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I6J
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
M
BBIA0526E
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-997
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-998
2005 Altima
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
H
I
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
K
Component Inspection
UBS00I6K
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-999
PBIB1173E
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25085
UBS00I6L
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0526E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I6M
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EVAP SYS PRES
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I6N
NOTE:
If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-1127 .
DTC No.
P0453
0453
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
pressure sensor high
input
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
EC-1000
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP canister
●
Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I6O
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
Wait at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1003, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 10 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1003, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
K
PBIB1110E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1001
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I6P
BBWA1666E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1002
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
A
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
32
W
EVAP control system pressure sensor
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
D
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
Approximately 0V
E
●
Idle speed
C
[Engine is running]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I6Q
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2.
Check sensor harness connector for water.
M
BBIA0526E
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1003
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1004
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors B105, F55
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
H
I
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
J
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
K
11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-1007, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1005
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 13.
No
>> GO TO 15.
PBIB1213E
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1006
2005 Altima
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00I6R
A
Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
EC
Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
C
EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg)
Voltage V
Not applied
1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)
2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
D
E
PBIB1173E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1007
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
UBS00I6S
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0455
0455
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP control system
gross leak detected
DTC detecting condition
EVAP control system has a very large leak
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly.
Possible cause
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1008
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I6T
A
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
●
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC
properly.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
C
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
D
placed on flat level surface.
●
Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E
Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB0829E
7.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-1010, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442 EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C
Revision: March 2005
EC-1009
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-679 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-679 .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
5. Select Service $07 with GST.
● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-1010, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-971 .
● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-966 .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I6U
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-656, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1010
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
A
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORA- EC
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
C
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
D
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
E
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
F
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-657, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
G
H
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
I
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SER MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
J
K
L
BBIA0506E
M
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1011
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
1.
2.
●
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
(SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: March 2005
EC-1012
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
C
D
E
BBIA0526E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R
MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
G
●
H
I
J
SEF200U
K
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
PBIB1678E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1013
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
PBIB1678E
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1014
2005 Altima
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
A
Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
EC
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
C
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
D
E
19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 20.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
F
G
H
Refer to EC-663, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
I
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1015
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:14950
UBS00I6V
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
DTC No.
P0456
0456
Trouble diagnosis name
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (negative
pressure check)
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●
Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●
Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●
Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●
Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.
●
EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●
EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●
EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●
EVAP system has a very small leak.
●
Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●
EVAP system does not operate properly.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●
Fuel tank temperature sensor
●
O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●
ORVR system leaks
●
Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●
Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
EC-1016
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
CAUTION:
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
the MIL may come on.
●
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●
Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I6W
NOTE:
●
If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
●
After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
●
If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour.
–
Fuel filler cap is removed.
–
Refilled or drained the fuel.
–
EVAP component parts is/are removed.
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
C
D
E
F
G
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB0837E
6.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1019, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-693, "Basic Inspection" .
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1017
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
Overall Function Check
UBS00I6X
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
●
Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
●
Do not start engine.
●
1.
Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
BBIA0506E
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Set the pressure pump and a hose.
Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect GST and select Service $08.
Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-1019, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to next step.
Disconnect GST.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1018
SEF462UI
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I6Y
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
EC
C
D
SEF915U
E
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
F
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
G
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
H
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
I
J
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-656, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1019
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654,
"EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0506E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
PEF917U
4.
Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
(SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
SEF200U
Revision: March 2005
EC-1020
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
1.
2.
A
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
C
D
E
BBIA0526E
3.
Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R
MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
G
●
H
I
J
SEF200U
K
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
L
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-657, "Removal and Installation" .
●
EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1021
M
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1213E
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
●
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PBIB1678E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1022
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Stop engine.
Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
A
EC
C
Vacuum should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
E
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
F
G
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
H
Refer to EC-983, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
I
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
Refer to EC-894, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
K
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
M
18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-652, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (SE-R MODELS)" or EC-654, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING (EXCEPT SE-R MODELS)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 19.
NG
>> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 20.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1023
2005 Altima
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
[VQ]
20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-660, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 21.
NG
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 22.
NG
>> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-663, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 23.
NG
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-18, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 24.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1024
2005 Altima
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
A
UBS00I6Z
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
EC
C
D
BBIA0081E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I70
NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-790 .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected.
DTC No.
P0460
0460
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
noise
DTC detecting condition
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
to ECM.
F
G
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
H
I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I71
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
L
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1026, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SEF195Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1025
K
2005 Altima
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I72
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-14, "Fuel System" .
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00I73
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1026
2005 Altima
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
A
UBS00I74
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
EC
C
D
BBIA0081E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I75
NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
DTC No.
P0461
0461
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
range/performance
DTC detecting condition
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change within the specified range even
though the vehicle has been driven a long distance.
F
G
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
H
I
J
Overall Function Check
UBS00I76
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-12,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
L
M
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
K
EC-1027
2005 Altima
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ]
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII.
Touch ON and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) and stop it.
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during
step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
If NG, go to EC-1028, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF195Y
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10. If NG, go to EC-1028, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I77
1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-14, "Fuel System" .
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00I78
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1028
2005 Altima
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:25060
A
UBS00I79
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
EC
C
D
BBIA0081E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I7A
NOTE:
If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
DTC No.
P0462
0462
P0463
0463
Trouble diagnosis name
Fuel level sensor circuit
low input
Fuel level sensor circuit
high input
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
G
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Combination meter
●
Fuel level sensor
UBS00I7B
J
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1030, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SEF195Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
H
I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
EC-1029
2005 Altima
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I7C
1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Go to DI-16, "Tachometer System" .
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00I7D
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1030
2005 Altima
DTC P0500 VSS
[VQ]
DTC P0500 VSS
Description
PFP:32702
A
UBS00I7E
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communiC
cation line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
UBS00I7F
DTC detecting condition
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
E
●
Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
shorted)
F
●
Wheel sensor
●
Combination meter
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
●
P0500
0500
Vehicle speed sensor
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from
vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
even when vehicle is being driven.
D
Possible cause
DTC Confirmation Procedure
G
UBS00I7G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine.
Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,600 - 6,000 rpm (A/T, 6M/T)
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (5M/T)
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
4.4 - 31.8 msec (A/T)
5.3 - 31.8 msec (M/T)
Shift lever
Except P or N position (A/T)
Except Neutral position (M/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
6.
SEF196Y
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check
UBS00I7H
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1031
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DTC P0500 VSS
[VQ]
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine.
Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-1032, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I7I
1. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
(models with TCS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
(models without TCS) or BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to DI-7, "Combination Meter" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1032
2005 Altima
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23781
A
UBS00I7J
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
EC
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0506
0506
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system RPM lower than
expected
UBS00I7K
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is less than the target idle
speed by 100 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
E
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
●
Intake air leak
F
UBS00I7L
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1348,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
G
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1034, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
M
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1033
2005 Altima
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I7M
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1034
2005 Altima
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
[VQ]
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Description
PFP:23781
A
UBS00I7N
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
EC
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P0507
0507
Trouble diagnosis name
Idle speed control system RPM higher than
expected
UBS00I7O
DTC detecting condition
The idle speed is more than the target idle
speed by 200 rpm or more.
E
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
●
Intake air leak
●
PCV system
F
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I7P
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-1348,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
H
I
J
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
K
Open engine hood.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1036, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1035
2005 Altima
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I7Q
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Discover air leak location and repair.
3. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Stop engine.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1036
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:49763
A
UBS00I7R
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
EC
C
D
BBIA0241E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I7S
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
PW/ST SIGNAL
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
F
SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel: Not being turned
(Forward direction)
OFF
Steering wheel: Being turned
ON
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I7T
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-1127 .
DTC No.
P0550
0550
Trouble diagnosis name
Power steering pressure sensor circuit
DTC detecting condition
An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
H
I
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Power steering pressure sensor
J
UBS00I7U
K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1039, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1037
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I7V
BBWA1586E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1038
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
12
W
A
Power steering pressure
sensor
●
Steering wheel: Bbeing turned
[Engine is running]
●
Steering wheel: Not being turned
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0.5 - 4.5V
0.4 - 0.8V
D
[Engine is running]
67
68
B
R
Sensor ground
Sensor power supply
(PSP sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
E
Approximately 5V
F
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I7W
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
H
I
J
K
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1039
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0241E
3.
Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SEF479Y
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to EC-1041, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace PSP sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1040
2005 Altima
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[VQ]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I7X
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
C
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and let it idle.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition
D
Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned.
0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: Not being turned.
0.4 - 0.8V
E
F
MBIB0126E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1041
2005 Altima
DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ]
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description
PFP:23710
UBS00I7Y
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I7Z
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P0605
0605
Trouble diagnosis name
Engine control module
DTC detecting condition
A)
ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
B)
ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
C)
ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
Possible cause
●
ECM
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
●
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
degrees) by the return spring.
●
ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
Malfunction A
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I80
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1042
2005 Altima
DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC
C
D
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
F
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1043, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
G
H
I
J
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
K
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I81
1. INSPECTION START
L
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-1042 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
With GST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $04 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-1042 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1043
2005 Altima
DTC P0605 ECM
[VQ]
2. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1044
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00I82
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
ECM function
Actuator
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control
EC
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
C
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
D
UBS00I83
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
0 - 100%
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1031
1031
(Bank 1)
P1051
1051
(Bank 2)
P1032
1032
(Bank 1)
P1052
1052
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
E
SPECIFICATION
UBS00I84
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
G
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 heater control circuit
low
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
1 heater control circuit
high
The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal
range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater.)
The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal
range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
A/F sensor 1 heater
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
shorted.)
●
A/F sensor 1 heater
I
UBS00I85
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
With CONSULT-II
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1050, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-1045
H
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1046
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I86
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1274E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1047
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
2
W
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Revision: March 2005
EC-1048
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1564E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1049
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
24
R/G
A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
PBIB1584E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I87
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1050
2005 Altima
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0235E
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1051
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[VQ]
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Component Inspection
UBS00I88
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation
UBS00I89
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1052
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
PFP:23710
A
UBS00I8A
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning value memory, etc.
EC
C
D
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1065
1065
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM power supply circuit
UBS00I8B
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.]
●
ECM
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
properly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
G
UBS00I8C
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F
H
I
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1055, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1053
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I8D
BBWA1667E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1054
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
121
EC
WIRE
COLOR
W/L
A
ITEM
Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
UBS00I8E
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
D
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
G
MBIB0026E
H
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E124
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1055
2005 Altima
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-1053 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
1.
2.
3.
4.
With GST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select Service $04 with GST.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-1053 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. REPLACE ECM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace ECM.
Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-109, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
Perform EC-711, "VIN Registration" .
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1056
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
PFP:23796
A
UBS00I8F
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
EC
C
D
PBIB1842E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I8G
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
Idle
0% - 2%
2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 50%
G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1111
1111
(Bank 1)
P1136
1136
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve circuit
F
SPECIFICATION
UBS00I8H
DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
Possible cause
I
●
Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
●
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
J
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I8I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1061, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1057
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I8J
BANK 1
BBWA1565E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1058
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
7 - 12V
11
R/L
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 1)
E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
F
PBIB1790E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1059
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1566E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1060
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
7 - 12V
10
Y
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 2)
E
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
F
PBIB1790E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
G
UBS00I8K
1. INSPECTION START
H
Which malfunction (P1111 or P1136) is duplicated?
P1111 or P1136
P1111 >> Go to EC-1062, "PROCEDURE FOR P1111" .
P1136 >> Go to EC-1063, "PROCEDURE FOR P1136" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1061
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
PROCEDURE FOR P1111
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0065E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness connectors F44, F101
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1062
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F101, F44
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-1064, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
D
E
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
G
PROCEDURE FOR P1136
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
I
J
K
BBIA0065E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
M
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1063
L
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 10 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-1064, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I8L
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal
Resistance
1 and 2
7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 or 2 and ground
∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1064
PBIB0193E
2005 Altima
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
4.
Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
A
EC
C
PBIB2275E
D
Removal and Installation
UBS00I8M
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1065
2005 Altima
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[VQ]
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00I8N
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I8O
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1121
1121
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
actuator
DTC detecting condition
A)
Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction.
B)
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
not in specified range.
C)
ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed
1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I8P
NOTE:
●
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and
wait at least 3 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
7. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and
wait at least 3 seconds.
8. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1067, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1066
SEF058Y
2005 Altima
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[VQ]
With GST
A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EC
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and
wait at least 3 seconds.
Shift selector lever to P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/
T).
Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1067, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
D
E
SEF058Y
F
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I8Q
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
G
H
I
J
K
BBIA0242E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
L
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1067
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
PFP:16119
UBS00I8R
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or
P1126. Refer to EC-1066 or EC-1074 .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I8S
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1122
1122
Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
performance problem
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or
shorted)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
Electric throttle control function does not operate properly.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I8T
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1070, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1068
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I8U
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1567E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1069
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
WIRE
COLOR
R
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
BR
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Released
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
Y
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
104
OR
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I8V
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1070
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
A
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
EC
C
D
MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
G
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
H
I
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
L
1.
2.
M
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1171E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1071
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ]
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
3
6
ECM terminal
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
BBIA0233E
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1072
2005 Altima
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[VQ]
11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
A
1.
2.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
EC
C
D
BBIA0242E
E
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-1073, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
F
G
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
H
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
I
14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I8W
L
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
M
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
PBIB0095E
Remove and Installation
UBS00I8X
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1073
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[VQ]
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00I8Y
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I8Z
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL RELAY
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I90
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1124
1124
P1126
1126
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
relay circuit short
Throttle control motor
relay circuit open
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
shorted)
●
Throttle control motor relay
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
open)
●
Throttle control motor relay
ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is
stuck ON.
ECM detects a voltage of power source for
throttle control motor is excessively low.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I91
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1077, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-1074
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[VQ]
With GST
A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
EC
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1077, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
D
E
SEF058Y
F
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1075
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I92
BBWA1568E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1076
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
3
104
EC
WIRE
COLOR
R
OR
ITEM
Throttle control motor relay
power supply
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor relay
Diagnostic Procedure
C
D
UBS00I93
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
PBIB1171E
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
J
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
L
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1077
2005 Altima
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[VQ]
4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace 15A fuse.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch
Voltage
OFF
Approximately 0V
ON
Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
MBIB0028E
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1078
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[VQ]
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00I94
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I95
C
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1128
1128
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
circuit short
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects short in both circuits between
ECM and throttle control motor.
Possible cause
D
●
Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
E
FAIL-SAFE MODE
F
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I96
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
G
H
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1081, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J
K
L
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1079
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I97
BBWA1569E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1080
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]
4
BR
Throttle control motor
(Close)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Released
D
E
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
5
Y
Throttle control motor
(Open)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
G
PBIB1105E
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I98
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
I
1.
2.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
K
L
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1081
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal
3
6
ECM terminal
Continuity
5
Should not exist
4
Should exist
5
Should exist
4
Should not exist
BBIA0233E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-1082, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I99
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3.
4.
5.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
PBIB0095E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1082
2005 Altima
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00I9A
A
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1083
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS00I9B
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I9C
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I9D
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is
sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E
DTC No.
P1146
1146
(Bank 1)
P1166
1166
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 minimum voltage
monitoring
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
EC-1084
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I9E
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2372E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1090, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00I9F
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1085
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
If NG, go to EC-1090, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1086
PBIB1607E
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I9G
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1276E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1087
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-1088
Approximately 0V
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1556E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1089
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00I9H
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1090
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-879 .
No
>> GO TO 3.
F
1.
2.
3.
G
H
I
BBIA0035E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1091
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0467E
4.
Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1092
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1146
74
2
1
P1166
55
2
2
C
Continuity should exist.
2.
D
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1146
74
2
1
P1166
55
2
2
F
Continuity should not exist.
G
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
I
Refer to EC-1093, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
J
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I9I
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
SEF174Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-1093
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1094
2005 Altima
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00I9J
A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1095
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Component Description
PFP:226A0
UBS00I9K
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00I9L
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Warm-up condition
●
After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
SPECIFICATION
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I9M
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the
sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
PBIB2162E
DTC No.
P1147
1147
(Bank 1)
P1167
1167
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor
2 maximum voltage
monitoring
Revision: March 2005
DTC detecting condition
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
EC-1096
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●
Heated oxygen sensor 2
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00I9N
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB2373E
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-1102, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check
L
M
UBS00I9O
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1097
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
7.
8.
Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If NG, go to EC-1102, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1098
PBIB1607E
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00I9P
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1276E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1099
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
74
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
EC-1100
Approximately 0V
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1556E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1101
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
55
W
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met
–
0 - Approximately 1.0V
After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1minute under no load
[Engine is running]
78
B
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
UBS00I9Q
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1102
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-868 .
No
>> GO TO 3.
F
1.
2.
3.
G
H
I
BBIA0035E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1103
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0467E
4.
Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1104
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1147
74
2
1
P1167
55
2
2
C
Continuity should exist.
2.
D
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Terminals
DTC
Bank
ECM
Sensor
P1147
74
2
1
P1167
55
2
2
F
Continuity should not exist.
G
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
I
Refer to EC-1105, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
J
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
K
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00I9R
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
SEF174Y
Revision: March 2005
EC-1105
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
6.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
7.
Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB2163E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
PBIB1607E
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●
Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●
Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1106
2005 Altima
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00I9S
A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1107
2005 Altima
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
[VQ]
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:22690
UBS00I9T
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P1148
1148
(Bank 1)
P1168
1168
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed loop control
function
DTC detecting condition
The closed loop control function for bank 1
does not operate even when vehicle is driving
in the specified condition.
The closed loop control function for bank 2
does not operate even when vehicle is driving
in the specified condition.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
open or shorted.]
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1108
2005 Altima
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
[VQ]
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
PFP:47850
A
UBS00I9U
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
EC
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I9V
C
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis.
D
DTC No.
P1211
1211
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS control unit
DTC detecting condition
ECM receives a malfunction information from
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
●
TCS related parts
UBS00I9W
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
F
G
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1109, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
H
I
J
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00I9X
L
Go to BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1109
2005 Altima
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
[VQ]
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
PFP:47850
UBS00I9Y
NOTE:
If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00I9Z
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis.
DTC No.
P1212
1212
Trouble diagnosis name
TCS communication
line
DTC detecting condition
ECM can not receive the information
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” continuously.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
●
Dead (Weak) battery
UBS00IA0
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1110, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IA1
Go to BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1110
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
Description
PFP:00000
A
UBS00IA2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
EC
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Cooling Fan Control
Sensor
C
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Wheel sensor
Vehicle speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch
Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure
ECM function
Actuator
D
Cooling fan
control
IPDM E/R
(Cooling fan relay)
E
F
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
G
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
The ECM control cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
H
Cooling Fan Operation
I
J
K
L
M
PBIB2375E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1111
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1
2
3
Stop (OFF)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Low (LOW)
OFF
ON
OFF
Middle (MID)
OFF
OFF
ON
High (HI)
ON
OFF
ON
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals
Cooling fan speed
Middle (MID)
High (HI)
(+)
(−)
1
3 and 4
2
3 and 4
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
4
1 and 2
3 and 4
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
middle speed condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IA3
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
AIR COND SIG
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
COOLING FAN
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF
OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less
OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C
(219°F)
MID
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
(221°F) or more
HI
EC-1112
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IA4
A
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
EC
indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
●
P1217
1217
Engine over temperature (Overheat)
Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat).
Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat).
Possible cause
C
●
Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Cooling fan
●
IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
●
Radiator hose
Radiator
●
Engine coolant level was not added to the
system using the proper filling method.
●
●
Radiator cap
●
Engine coolant is not within the specified
range.
●
Water pump
●
Thermostat
D
E
F
For more information, refer to EC-1122,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-22, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check
G
H
I
UBS00IA5
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
J
K
L
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
M
SEF621W
Revision: March 2005
EC-1113
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
4.
5.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
If the results are NG, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF646X
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-1117,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors
operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test"
If NG, go to EC-1117, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1114
SEF621W
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IA6
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1668E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1115
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
BBWA1571E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1116
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IA7
1. INSPECTION START
A
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
EC
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and let it idle.
Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed
(LOW/MID/HI).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1119, "PROCEDURE A" .)
D
1.
2.
E
F
G
SEF784Z
3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-21, "Auto Active
Test" .
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1119, "PROCEDURE A" .)
I
J
K
4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
L
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-28, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" .
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump
Revision: March 2005
EC-1117
M
SLC754A
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief
pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace radiator cap.
SLC755A
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1.
2.
Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
Valve lift:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
More than 8.6 mm/95°C
(0.339 in/203°F)
3.
Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace thermostat
SLC343
7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-830, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-1122, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1118
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
PROCEDURE A
A
1. CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E123.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
C
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
PBIB1681E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the following.
●
40A fusible link
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
G
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121, E124.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 16, 38, 60 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
K
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1119
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
BBIA0066E
2.
Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1670E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
40A fusible link
●
Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1120
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0066E
2.
E
Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminals 3, 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
F
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
8. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
H
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 13
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminals 10, 14
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
J
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
9. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
L
Refer to EC-1122, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace cooling fan motors.
M
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-15, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1121
2005 Altima
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[VQ]
Main 12 Causes of Overheating
Engine
Step
OFF
1
Inspection item
●
Blocked radiator
●
Blocked condenser
●
Blocked radiator grille
●
Blocked bumper
2
●
3
●
4
●
UBS00IA8
Equipment
Standard
Reference page
●
Visual
No blocking
—
Coolant mixture
●
Coolant tester
50 - 50% coolant mixture
MA-14
Coolant level
●
Visual
Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck
CO-28
Radiator cap
●
Pressure tester
59 - 98 kPa
CO-28
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
ON*2
5
●
Coolant leaks
●
Visual
No leaks
CO-28
ON*2
6
●
Thermostat
●
Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot
CO-42
ON*1
7
●
Cooling fan
●
CONSULT-II
Operating
See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-1111 ).
OFF
8
●
Combustion gas leak
●
Color checker chemical
tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative
—
ON*3
9
●
Coolant temperature
gauge
●
Visual
Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
●
Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
●
Visual
No overflow during driving
and idling
CO-28
OFF*4
10
●
Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radiator
●
Visual
Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
CO-28
OFF
11
●
Cylinder head
●
Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)
EM-200
12
●
Cylinder block and pistons
●
Visual
No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
EM-224
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-24, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection
UBS00IA9
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
1.
2.
Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Cooling fan speed
Middle (MID)
High (HI)
Cooling fan motor terminals
(+)
(−)
1
3 and 4
2
3 and 4
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
4
1 and 2
3 and 4
SEF734W
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1122
2005 Altima
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00IAA
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IAB
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
F
DTC No.
P1225
1225
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position
learning performance
problem
Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
G
UBS00IAC
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H
I
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1124, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1123
2005 Altima
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IAD
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0242E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00IAE
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1124
2005 Altima
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
A
UBS00IAF
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IAG
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
F
DTC No.
P1226
1226
Trouble diagnosis name
Closed throttle position
learning performance
problem
DTC detecting condition
Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
G
UBS00IAH
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H
I
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1126, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1125
2005 Altima
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IAI
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct.
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0242E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
UBS00IAJ
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1126
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
On Board Diagnosis Logic
PFP:16119
A
UBS00IAK
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
EC
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
P1229
1229
Sensor power supply
circuit short
ECM detects a voltage of power source for
sensor is excessively low or high.
●
Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor is
shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1)
C
D
E
●
Power steering pressure sensor
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
G
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IAL
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
I
J
K
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1129, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1127
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IAM
BBWA1303E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1128
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
48
R
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
49
R
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
68
R
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
90
R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
C
D
E
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IAN
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
F
G
H
I
J
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1129
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0811E
3. CHECK
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
90
Sensor terminal
APP sensor terminal 2
Reference Wiring Diagram
EC-1128
48
EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3
EC-996
49
Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
EC-1328
68
PSP sensor terminal 3
EC-1038
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following.
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-993, "Component Inspection" .)
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-66, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .)
●
Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1041, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning component.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-1263, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1130
2005 Altima
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[VQ]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
D
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1131
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00IAO
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IAP
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IAQ
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No.
P1271
1271
(Bank 1)
P1281
1281
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit no activity detected
DTC detecting condition
●
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IAR
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1132
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-1137, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF581Z
D
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
Shift lever
Suitable position
7.
E
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-1137, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
F
G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1133
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IAS
BANK 1
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1134
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
W/R
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1135
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1136
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
PU
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IAT
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1137
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0235E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
●
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1138
2005 Altima
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank1
Bank 2
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IAU
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1139
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00IAV
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IAW
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IAX
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No.
P1272
1272
(Bank 1)
P1282
1282
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit no activity detected
DTC detecting condition
●
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IAY
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1140
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-1145, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
A
EC
C
SEF581Z
D
ENG SPEED
1,000 - 3,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.5 - 9.0 msec
Shift lever
Suitable position
7.
E
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-1145, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
F
G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1141
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IAZ
BANK 1
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1142
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
W/R
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1143
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1144
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
PU
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IB0
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1145
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0235E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
●
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1146
2005 Altima
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
M
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IB1
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1147
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00IB2
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IB3
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IB4
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No.
P1273
1273
(Bank 1)
P1283
1283
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
lean shift monitoring
DTC detecting condition
●
The output voltage computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side
for a specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
UBS00IB5
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1148
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1153, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
EC
C
SEF968Y
D
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
11. Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1153, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
E
F
G
H
BBIA0035E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1149
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IB6
BANK 1
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1150
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
W/R
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1151
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1152
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
PU
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IB7
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
L
M
BBIA0234E
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1153
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-868 .
No
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1154
BBIA0035E
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0235E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB1683E
I
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
L
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1155
2005 Altima
DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IB8
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1156
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00IB9
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IBA
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IBB
K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to the LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No.
P1274
1274
(Bank 1)
P1284
1244
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
rich shift monitoring
DTC detecting condition
●
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side
for a specified period.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
L
Possible Cause
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
UBS00IBC
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1157
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1162, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF968Y
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
11. Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1162, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1158
BBIA0035E
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IBD
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1159
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
OR
[Engine is running]
W/R
56
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EC-1160
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1161
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
[Engine is running]
PU
76
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IBE
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
BBIA0234E
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1162
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172 or P0175. Refer to EC-879 .
No
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
I
J
BBIA0035E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1163
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0235E
3.
Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness connector.
5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1683E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1164
2005 Altima
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IBF
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1165
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
UBS00IBG
The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
SEF579Z
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IBH
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IBI
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No.
P1276
1276
(Bank 1)
P1286
1286
(Bank 2)
Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit high voltage
DTC detecting condition
●
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/
F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IBJ
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1166
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4.
5.
6.
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-1172, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
A
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
C
ENG SPEED
1,750 - 3,200 rpm
Vehicle speed
More than 64 km/h (40MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL
1.0 - 8.0 msec
Shift lever
D position (A/T)
5th position (M/T)
D
E
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from
step 2.
SEF576Z
F
7.
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
G
H
I
SEF577Z
8.
9.
J
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
K
L
SEF578Z
Overall Function Check
UBS00IBK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit.
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
Set D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 for 5 times.
Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 for 5 times.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1167
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
8.
9.
Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
Make sure that no DTC is displayed.
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-1172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1168
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IBL
A
BANK 1
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1169
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 3.1V
OR
[Engine is running]
W/R
56
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
Revision: March 2005
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
EC-1170
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1171
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
[Engine is running]
PU
76
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IBM
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1172
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
A
Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0235E
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
H
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
J
K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1173
2005 Altima
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
Continuity should exist.
4.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IBN
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1174
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00IBO
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IBP
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
J
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IBQ
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P1278
1278
(Bank 1)
P1288
1288
(Bank 2)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow response
Revision: March 2005
●
The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
signal takes more than the specified time.
EC-1175
K
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
PCV
●
Mass air flow sensor
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IBR
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
PBIB0756E
7.
a.
b.
8.
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0758E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1176
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “Service $01” with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
EC
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
C
● Intake air leaks
● Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
D
● Lack of fuel
● Fuel injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
E
● PCV valve
● Mass air flow sensor
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
F
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
G
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
Select “Service $07” with GST.
H
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1181, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1177
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IBS
BANK 1
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1178
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
W/R
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1179
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1180
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
PU
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IBT
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
L
M
BBIA0234E
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1181
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1182
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
BBIA0035E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-868, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-879, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 6.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1183
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0235E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1184
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-812, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1185
2005 Altima
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
11. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-665, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IBU
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1186
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
PFP:22693
A
UBS00IBV
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
EC
C
D
SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
F
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IBW
I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
A/F SEN1 (B1)
A/F SEN1 (B2)
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Maintaining engine speed at
2,000 rpm
J
Fluctuates around 1.5V
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IBX
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the air fuel ration A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and
load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether
the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P1279
1279
(Bank 1)
P1289
1289
(Bank 2)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow response
Revision: March 2005
●
The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
signal takes more than the specified time.
EC-1187
K
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
●
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
●
Fuel pressure
●
Fuel injector
●
Intake air leaks
●
Exhaust gas leaks
●
PCV
●
Mass air flow sensor
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IBY
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
PBIB0756E
7.
a.
b.
8.
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E
9.
Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to
EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-1193, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0758E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1188
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “Service $01” with GST.
Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
EC
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
C
● Intake air leaks
● Exhaust gas leaks
● Incorrect fuel pressure
D
● Lack of fuel
● Fuel injector
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
E
● PCV valve
● Mass air flow sensor
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
F
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
G
Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
Select “Service $07” with GST.
H
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1193, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1189
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IBZ
BANK 1
BBWA1267E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1190
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
16
35
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
W/R
LG/R
75
LG
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 3.1V
OR
56
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.6V
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 2.3V
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1191
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
BANK 2
BBWA1572E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1192
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
57
58
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
PU
BR
77
G/W
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 2.6V
OR/B
76
A
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 2.3V
Approximately 3.1V
D
Approximately 2.3V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IC0
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
G
H
I
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
J
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
K
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
L
M
BBIA0234E
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1193
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1194
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
EC
C
D
E
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-682, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
BBIA0035E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-868, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-879, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No
>> GO TO 6.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1195
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0235E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
15A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1196
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
2
75
5
35
6
56
1
76
2
77
5
57
6
58
Bank 1
Bank 2
C
D
E
F
Continuity should exist.
4.
G
Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1
Bank 2
H
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
A/F sensor 1 terminal
ECM terminal
1
16
1
76
2
75
2
77
5
35
5
57
6
56
6
58
I
J
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
L
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
M
Refer to EC-1052, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-820, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace mass air flow sensor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1197
2005 Altima
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1
[VQ]
11. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-665, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
UBS00IC1
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-134, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST"
Revision: March 2005
EC-1198
2005 Altima
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
Description
PFP:14710
A
UBS00IC2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*2
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Gear position
voltage*2
Battery
Battery
Air conditioner switch*1
Air conditioner operation
Power steering pressure sensor
Power steering operation
Electrical
load*1
ECM function
Actuator
EC
C
D
EGR volume
control
EGR volume control valve
E
F
Electrical load signal
Wheel sensor*1
Vehicle speed
TCM*1 (A/T models)
Gear position, shifting signal
G
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
H
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions.
●
Engine stopped
●
Engine starting
●
Engine idling
●
Low engine coolant temperature
●
Excessively high engine coolant temperature
●
High engine speed
●
Wide open throttle
●
Low battery voltage
I
J
K
L
M
SEF551W
Revision: March 2005
EC-1199
2005 Altima
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR Volume Control Valve
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.
SEF552W
EGR Temperature Sensor
The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEF599K
EGR temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
MΩ
0 (32)
4.59
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
2.32
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.62
0.011 - 0.014
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
SEF068X
Revision: March 2005
EC-1200
2005 Altima
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IC3
A
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
EGR TEMP SEN
EGR VOL CON/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
(M/T)
●
No load
SPECIFICATION
Less than 4.5V
Idle
0 step
Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
quickly
10 - 55 step
EC
C
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IC4
If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition that does not call for EGR, a high-flow
malfunction is diagnosed.
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
●
P1402
1402
EGR function (Open)
EGR flow is detected under the condition
that does not call for EGR.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
●
EGR volume control valve leaking or
stuck open
●
EGR temperature sensor
: −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)*
: Less than 4.8V
WITH CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
Revision: March 2005
G
EC-1201
H
I
J
K
L
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park the
vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to
stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine coolant temperature or EGR temperature with a fan or means other than
SEF202Y
ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
*: Although CONSULT-II screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it.
1.
2.
3.
F
UBS00IC5
NOTE:
●
Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F).
Therefore, it will be better to turn ignition switch ON (start engine) at the engine coolant temperature below
30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation procedure.
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●
Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
●
Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must be
verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II before
starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of range
below, the test cannot be conducted.
COOLAN TEMP/S
EGR TEMP SEN
E
Possible cause
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
4.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
60 seconds or more.)
PBIB1600E
5.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition OFF and cool the engine coolant temperature to the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Retry from step 1.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC1204, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn ignition switch ON and select Service $01 with GST.
Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F).
Check that voltage between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature
sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
Stop engine.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1204, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1671E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1202
2005 Altima
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IC6
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1561E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1203
2005 Altima
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
17
18
19
20
WIRE
COLOR
P/B
LG
L
L/W
ITEM
EGR volume control valve
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
54
P/L
EGR temperature sensor
DATA (DC Voltage)
0.1 - 14V
Less than 4.5V
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
EGR system is operating
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
Approximately 0V
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00IC7
1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0249E
4.
Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0627E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1204
2005 Altima
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION
[VQ]
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
EC
C
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
EGR volume control valve
17
6
18
3
19
4
20
1
D
E
F
G
H
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
J
Refer to EC-949, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace EGR volume control valve.
K
L
5. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-957, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EGR temperature sensor.
M
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1205
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920
Description
UBS00IC8
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*1
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Battery
Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
2
ECM function
Actuator
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
Vehicle speed
Wheel sensor*
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IC9
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
PURG VOL C/V
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
Idle
0%
2,000 rpm
—
EC-1206
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ICA
A
DTC No.
P1444
1444
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid
valve
DTC detecting condition
The canister purge flow is detected during the
specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
completely closed.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
●
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
(The valve is stuck open.)
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP canister
●
Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
EC
C
D
UBS00ICB
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
E
F
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Touch “START”.
G
H
I
J
K
L
PBIB0839E
6.
7.
Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC1210, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
Select Service $07 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1210, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1207
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ICC
BBWA1563E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1208
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
[Engine is running]
●
Idle speed
E
45
PU/R
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
SEC990C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
F
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
G
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
H
SEC991C
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
I
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
K
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1209
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ICD
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0507E
4.
Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0148E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness connectors F44, F101
●
IPDM E/R harness connector E122
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1210
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F101, F44
●
Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
EC
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
D
E
F
G
BBIA0526E
2.
Check connectors for water.
H
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
I
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
J
Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
K
L
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
M
PBIB1678E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1211
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-1213, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-989, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 12.
No
>> GO TO 14.
PBIB1213E
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1212
2005 Altima
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
A
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ICE
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
C
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
D
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100%
Yes
0%
No
E
F
PBIB0149E
G
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
H
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No supply
No
I
J
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation
UBS00ICF
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
K
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1213
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14935
UBS00ICG
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
PBIB1263E
BBIA0526E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ICH
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VENT CONT/V
CONDITION
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1446
1446
Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister vent control valve close
Revision: March 2005
UBS00ICI
DTC detecting condition
EVAP canister vent control valve remains
closed under specified driving conditions.
EC-1214
Possible cause
●
EVAP canister vent control valve
●
EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●
Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
●
EVAP canister is saturated with water
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ICJ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
6.
7.
a.
b.
A
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
Repeat next procedures 3 times.
Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1217, "Diagnostic ProceSEF058Y
dure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
Repeat next procedure 20 times.
Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
PBIB0972E
8.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1215
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ICK
BBWA1665E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1216
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
117
EC
WIRE
COLOR
OR
A
ITEM
EVAP canister vent control
valve
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
UBS00ICL
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
D
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
F
G
H
BBIA0526E
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
I
J
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-1218, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
K
L
3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1213E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1217
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
EVAP canister for damage
●
EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-999, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ICM
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
PBIB1033E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1218
2005 Altima
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
[VQ]
5.
6.
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V
A
Air passage continuity between A and B
ON
No
OFF
Yes
EC
C
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7.
8.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 5 again.
PBIB1679E
D
Without CONSULT-II
1.
2.
E
Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
F
G
H
PBIB1033E
I
3.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
J
Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No
OFF
Yes
K
Operation takes less than 1 second.
4.
5.
L
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Perform step 3 again.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1219
PBIB1034E
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25551
UBS00ICN
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
PBIB2533E
Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ICO
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
MAIN SW
●
CANCEL SW
●
RESUME/ACC SW
SET SW
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
MAIN switch: Pressed
ON
MAIN switch: Released
OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed
ON
CANCEL switch: Released
OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Pressed
ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Released
OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
ON
SET/COAST switch: Released
OFF
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ICP
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-1042.
DTC No.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
DTC Detecting Condition
●
P1564
1564
ASCD steering
switch
●
●
Revision: March 2005
Possible Cause
An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM.
●
ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD
steering switch is out of the specified range.
Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
●
ASCD steering switch
●
ECM
ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is
stuck ON.
EC-1220
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ICQ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Wait at least 10 seconds.
Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1223, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
C
D
E
F
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1221
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ICR
BBWA1660E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1222
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
99
G/Y
ASCD steering switch
MAIN switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Diagnostic Procedure
C
Approximately 0V
D
Approximately 4V
Approximately 0V
E
Approximately 1V
F
Approximately 3V
G
Approximately 2V
UBS00ICS
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
H
I
J
K
L
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1223
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
1.
2.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
Monitor item
MAIN SW
CANCEL SW
RESUME/ACC SW
Condition
Indication
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
Pressed
ON
Released
OFF
SEC006D
SET/COAST switch
1.
2.
SET SW
Without CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
SET/COAST switch
Condition
Voltage [V]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 1
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 3
Released
Approx. 4
Pressed
Approx. 2
Released
Approx. 4
PBIB0311E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
19 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
BBIA0243E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1224
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Combination switch (spiral cable)
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
D
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 20.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
F
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
G
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Combination switch (spiral cable)
●
Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
H
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
J
Refer to EC-1226, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace steering wheel.
K
L
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1225
2005 Altima
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00ICT
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1.
2.
Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch
MAIN switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch
SET/COAST switch
Revision: March 2005
Condition
Resistance [Ω]
Pressed
Approx. 0
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 250
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 1,480
Released
Approx. 4,000
Pressed
Approx. 660
Released
Approx. 4,000
EC-1226
PBIB2331E
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS00ICU
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
EC
C
D
BBIA0087E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ICV
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch)
CONDITION
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
F
SPECIFICATION
Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal:
Fully released
ON
Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal:
Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ICW
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-1042
●
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC No.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
DTC Detecting Condition
●
A)
P1572
1572
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp
switch and the ASCD brake switch are
sent to ECM at the same time.
ASCD brake switch
●
B)
Revision: March 2005
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to
ECM for extremely long time while the
vehicle is driving
EC-1227
I
J
K
L
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
●
Harness or connectors
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
●
Harness or connectors
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T models)
●
Stop lamp switch
●
ASCD brake switch
●
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
●
Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
●
Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
●
Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T models)
●
ECM
2005 Altima
M
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00ICX
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●
Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine (TCS switch OFF).
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights
up.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the
following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
5.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1231, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever
Suitable position
Driving location
Depress the brake pedal for more than
five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned vehicle speed.
6.
PBIB2386E
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1231, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1228
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00ICY
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1587E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1229
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/G
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON]
108
G/B
(A/T)
G/R
(M/T)
ASCD brake switch
Revision: March 2005
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
●
Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly
depressed (M/T)
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
●
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully
released (M/T)
EC-1230
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ICZ
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1.
2.
3.
A
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION
EC
C
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
D
M/T models
E
CONDITION
INDICATION
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal: Fully released
F
G
H
VOLTAGE
I
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
M/T models
J
CONDITION
VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
Approximately 0V
K
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models)>>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models)>>GO TO 8.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1231
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
PBIB1677E
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0087E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed
Clutch pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
PBIB0857E
EC-1232
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0088E
E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
G
H
PBIB0799E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1233
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0087E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
PBIB0857E
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1234
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
EC
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
D
E
F
BBIA0049E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
G
H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
I
J
PBIB0117E
K
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
L
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1235
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E28, M7
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-1236, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00ID0
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
Should exist.
Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Clutch pedal: Fully released
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
Should exist.
Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,
"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC024D
Revision: March 2005
EC-1236
2005 Altima
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
EC
Continuity
Should not exist.
C
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
D
PBIB0118E
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1237
2005 Altima
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:31036
UBS00ID1
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00ID2
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500.
Refer to EC-1031, "DTC P0500 VSS"
●
If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-1042, "DTC P0605 ECM"
DTC No.
P1574
1574
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
ASCD vehicle speed
sensor
DTC Detecting Condition
ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified range.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible Cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●
Combination meter
●
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
●
Wheel sensor
●
TCM (A/T models)
●
ECM
UBS00ID3
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1239, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1238
2005 Altima
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00ID4
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
A
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-425, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
EC
C
2. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
(models with TCS).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
(models without TCS) or BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
D
E
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
F
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1239
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:32006
UBS00ID5
When the shift position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00ID6
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
P/N POSI SW
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
ON
Shift lever: Except above
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No.
P1706
1706
Trouble diagnosis name
Park/neutral position
switch
UBS00ID7
DTC detecting condition
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
circuit is open or shorted.]
●
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
●
Combination meter (A/T models)
●
TCM (A/T models)
UBS00ID8
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Shift lever)
Known-good signal
P or N position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T)
ON
Except the above position
OFF
3.
4.
5.
If NG, go to EC-1245, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED
1,400 - 6375 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S
More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL
2.0 - 31.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE
More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Shift lever
Suitable position
6.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1245, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1240
SEF212Y
SEF213Y
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
Overall Function Check
UBS00ID9
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1.
2.
Condition (Shift lever)
Except the above position
3.
EC
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
P or N position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T)
A
C
Voltage (Known good data)
Approx. 0V
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
If NG, go to EC-1245, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MBIB0043E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1241
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IDA
A/T MODELS
BBWA1589E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1242
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
102
G/R
A
PNP switch
Shift lever: P or N
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Shift lever: Except above
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1243
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
M/T MODELS
BBWA1588E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1244
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
102
G/W
A
PNP switch
Shift lever: Neutral
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Shift lever: Except above
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure
D
UBS00IDB
A/T MODELS
E
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Refer to AT-425, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
F
G
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 33 and combination meter terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
J
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
K
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
L
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between TCM and combination meter
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1245
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
7. REPLACE COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connector F58, M70
●
Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1246
2005 Altima
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[VQ]
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH
A
Refer to MT-77, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace PNP switch.
EC
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
C
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1247
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
PFP:14955
UBS00IDC
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve actuator. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
BBIA0045E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IDD
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VIAS S/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IDE
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1800
1800
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit
An excessively low or high voltage signal
is sent to ECM through the valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
VIAS control solenoid valve
UBS00IDF
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1250, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1248
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IDG
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1573E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1249
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
29
Y/G
VIAS control solenoid valve
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600
rpm.
0 - 1.0V
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IDH
1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0045E
4.
Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB0173E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R connector E122
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1250
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
E
Refer to EC-1251, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
F
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IDI
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition
VIAS SOL VALVE
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
ON
Yes
No
OFF
No
Yes
I
J
K
L
M
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2505E
With GST
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No
No supply
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2532E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1251
2005 Altima
DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[VQ]
Removal and Installation
UBS00IDJ
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-129, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1252
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS00IDK
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IDL
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW
C
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IDM
E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC No.
P1805
1805
Trouble diagnosis name
Brake switch
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●
Stop lamp switch
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for
extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
F
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition
Driving condition
When engine is idling
Normal
When accelerating
Poor acceleration
DTC Confirmation Procedure
I
J
UBS00IDN
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Turn ignition switch ON.
Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1255, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1253
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IDO
BBWA1574E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1254
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/G
A
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
UBS00IDP
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
E
1.
2.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal
Stop lamp
Fully released
Not illuminated
Slightly depressed
Illuminated
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
I
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
J
K
L
BBIA0049E
2.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
M
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0117E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1255
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
10A fuse
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E28, M7
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-1257, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1256
2005 Altima
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00IDQ
A
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0049E
2.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Conditions
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
3.
E
Continuity
F
Should not exist.
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.
G
PBIB0118E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1257
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
UBS00IDR
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IDS
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IDT
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-1127 .
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
P2122
2122
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low
input
Possible cause
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
●
Harness or connectors
(The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123
2123
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1258
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IDU
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1261, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1259
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IDV
BBWA1284E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1260
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Engine is running]
82
B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
C
Approximately 0V
D
[Engine is running]
83
G
A
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
E
90
R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
H
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
I
More than 4.3V
J
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IDW
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
K
L
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1261
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0811E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1262
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
C
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
E
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK APP SENSOR
G
Refer to EC-1263, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
H
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
L
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IDX
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
Revision: March 2005
MBIB0023E
EC-1263
2005 Altima
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
4.
5.
6.
7.
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
UBS00IDY
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1264
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
A
UBS00IDZ
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IE0
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
G
H
I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IE1
J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2127
2127
P2128
2128
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low
input
An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
Possible cause
●
K
Harness or connectors
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
●
ELectric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1265
2005 Altima
L
M
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IE2
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1268, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1266
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IE3
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1302E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1267
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
R
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
82
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
83
G
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90
R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
More than 4.3V
UBS00IE4
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1268
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
A
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0812E
H
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to wiring diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
K
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-1267
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-1274
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1269
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-905, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1270
2005 Altima
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
12. CHECK APP SENSOR
A
Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
EC
13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
C
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
E
>> INSPECTION END
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IE5
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
J
K
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
M
UBS00IE6
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1271
L
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:16119
UBS00IE7
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IE8
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
More than 0.36V
●
Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IE9
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No.
P2135
2135
Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle position sensor
circuit range/performance problem
DTC detecting condition
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
and TP sensor 2.
Possible cause
●
Harness or connector
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted)
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1272
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IEA
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1275, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST
G
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1273
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IEB
BBWA1575E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1274
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
EC
WIRE
COLOR
R
A
ITEM
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
50
W
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1
D
More than 0.36V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
F
[Engine is running]
66
B
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
G
[Ignition switch: ON]
69
R
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2
H
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
●
Engine stopped
●
Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
Diagnostic Procedure
I
More than 0.36V
J
Approximately 5V
UBS00IEC
K
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1275
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0233E
3.
Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-1274
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-1267
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-1271, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1276
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
E
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
H
I
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
K
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
L
Refer to EC-1278, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
M
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1277
2005 Altima
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00IED
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T).
Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released
More than 0.36V
Fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
Fully released
Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed
More than 0.36V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
6.
7.
8.
If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
PBIB1170E
UBS00IEE
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-122, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1278
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:18002
A
UBS00IEF
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the acceleraEC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IEG
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
CONDITION
●
ACCEL SEN1
ACCEL SEN2*
CLSD THL POS
●
●
SPECIFICATION
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.56 - 0.96V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 4.0V
Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
G
H
I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
UBS00IEH
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-1127 .
DTC No.
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
●
P2138
2138
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
range/performance
problem
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
and APP sensor 2.
●
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and
2
●
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-1279
K
L
Harness or connector
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Revision: March 2005
J
2005 Altima
M
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
DTC Confirmation Procedure
UBS00IEI
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-1282, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1280
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IEJ
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1283E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1281
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
47
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
R
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
82
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
83
G
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90
R
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
91
OR
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
98
W/B
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
106
W
Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Engine stopped
●
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Diagnostic Procedure
More than 4.3V
UBS00IEK
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1282
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0028E
3.
Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0811E
H
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
J
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
K
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
L
1.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB0812E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1283
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal
Sensor terminal
Reference Wiring Diagram
91
APP sensor terminal 1
EC-1281
47
Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1
EC-1274
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-1278, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
2.
3.
Replace electric throttle control actuator.
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1284
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 83, APP sensor terminal 4 EC
and ECM terminal 82.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
D
E
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
F
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
H
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
J
K
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
L
M
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-1286, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1285
2005 Altima
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
[VQ]
15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IEL
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal
Accelerator pedal
Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released
0.65 - 0.87V
Fully depressed
More than 4.3V
Fully released
0.28 - 0.48V
Fully depressed
More than 2.0V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
MBIB0023E
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
Perform EC-711, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
Perform EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
Perform EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
UBS00IEM
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1286
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
PFP:22448
A
UBS00IEN
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
C
D
E
BBIA0244E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1287
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IEO
BBWA1576E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1288
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
111
W/B
ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
R/G
R/G
Power supply for ECM
For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
119
120
A
More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0 - 1.5V
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1289
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
BBWA1311E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1290
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
C
[Engine is running]
60
61
62
DATA (DC Voltage)
PU/W
L/R
Y/R
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0 - 0.3V
D
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
E
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
F
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
G
SEC987C
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1291
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
BBWA1312E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1292
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
A
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
C
[Engine is running]
79
80
81
DATA (DC Voltage)
GY/R
GY
G/R
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
0 - 0.3V
D
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
E
SEC986C
0.1 - 0.6V
F
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
G
SEC987C
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IEP
I
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 4.
J
K
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
L
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
M
PBIB0133E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1293
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
Let engine idle.
Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
1.
2.
PBIB1186E
SEC986C
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 10.
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Go to EC-783, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
MBIB0034E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1294
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0044E
E
4.
Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
G
H
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
K
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
L
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
M
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1295
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-1298, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
4.
5.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
BBIA0244E
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F43, F201
●
Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1296
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 13.
C
D
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors F43, F201
●
Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
G
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
H
I
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
>> GO TO 15.
J
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
Check the following.
Harness connectors F43, F201
●
Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
●
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-1298, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1297
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
Component Inspection
UBS00IEQ
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. (Polarity)
Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2
Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
2 and 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Except 0
If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
If OK, go to next step.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils.
Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked.
Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
PBIB0847E
BBIA0229E
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
PBIB2325E
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is 13 mm or less, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
●
CONDENSER
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1298
2005 Altima
IGNITION SIGNAL
[VQ]
3.
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance
A
: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
EC
C
PBIB0794E
D
Removal and Installation
UBS00IER
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-144, "IGNITION COIL" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1299
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
VIAS
Description
PFP:14956
UBS00IES
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Mass air flow sensor
Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal position
Battery
Battery voltage*
ECM function
VIAS control
Actuator
VIAS control solenoid valve
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
PBIB1822E
When the engine is running at medium speed, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid
valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes
the power valve.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the total length of passage A and passage B. This long intake manifold provides increased amount of intake air, which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque.
When engine is running at low or high speed, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid
valve and the power valve is opened.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the length of passage B. This shortened intake manifold length results in enhanced engine output due to reduced suction resistance under high
speeds.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The
vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid
valve.
BBIA0045E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1300
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
A
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve actuator. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
EC
C
BBIA0045E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IET
E
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
VIAS S/V
CONDITION
●
Engine: After warming up
D
SPECIFICATION
1,800 - 3,600 rpm
ON
Except above conditions
OFF
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1301
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IEU
BBWA1313E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1302
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
●
29
Y/G
A
VIAS control solenoid valve
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
C
0 - 1.0V
D
[Engine is running]
●
Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600
rpm.
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IEV
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
E
F
G
H
I
J
BBIA0252E
Without CONSULT-II
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev engine up to 3,600 rpm and make sure that power valve
actuator rod moves.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.
K
1.
2.
L
M
BBIA0046E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1303
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
With CONSULT-II
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Start engine and let it idle.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
BBIA0253E
VIAS SOL VALVE
Vacuum
ON
Should exist.
OFF
Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Start engine and let it idle.
Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
BBIA0254E
5.
Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition
Vacuum
12V direct current supply
Should exist.
No supply
Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1304
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
A
1.
2.
Stop engine.
Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-736, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair hoses or tubes.
EC
C
D
SEF109L
E
5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
Refer to EC-1306, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace vacuum tank.
F
G
6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
I
J
K
BBIA0045E
4.
Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
L
Voltage: Battery voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB0173E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1305
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
IPDM E/R connector E122
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-1306, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IEW
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition
VIAS SOL VALVE
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
ON
Yes
No
OFF
No
Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2505E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1306
2005 Altima
VIAS
[VQ]
Without CONSULT-II
A
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions.
Condition
Air passage continuity
between A and B
Air passage continuity
between A and C
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No
No supply
No
Yes
EC
C
Operation takes less than 1 second.
PBIB2532E
D
VACUUM TANK
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum tank.
Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B.
E
F
G
PBIB0846E
Removal and Installation
H
UBS00IEX
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
I
Refer to EM-129, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1307
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
PFP:16600
UBS00IEY
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IEZ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
B/FUEL SCHDL
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
See EC-772, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
●
Engine: After warming up
●
Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
Neutral (M/T)
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
No-load
Revision: March 2005
Idle
2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm
1.9 - 2.9 msec
EC-1308
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IF0
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1577E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1309
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
21
22
23
L/W
R/Y
R/B
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEC985C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
40
41
42
PU/R
R/L
R/W
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
SEC984C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●
Warm-up condition
●
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEC985C
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IF1
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1310
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
1.
2.
EC
C
D
E
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1311
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
3. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-I
1.
2.
3.
Without CONSULT-II
Stop engine.
Disconnect harness connector F44, F101.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0472E
4.
Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 6 (with triple meters) or 5 (without triple meters)
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB2595E
Voltage: Battery voltage
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and ECM as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
With triple meters
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
1
23
3
3
22
5
7
21
Cylinder
Harness connector F44
terminal
ECM terminal
1
6
23
3
2
22
5
1
21
Without triple meters
Continuity should exist.
8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1312
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and fuse
●
Harness for open or short between harness connector F101 and injector
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
D
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each injector operating sound.
E
F
G
H
PBIB2596E
I
With triple meters
Cylinder
Harness connector F101 terminal
(+)
(–)
1
6
1
3
6
3
5
6
7
J
K
Without triple meters
Cylinder
L
Harness connector F101 terminal
(+)
(–)
1
5
6
3
5
2
5
5
1
M
Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1313
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTOR-III
1.
2.
3.
Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
Start engine.
Listen to injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.
Clicking noise should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PBIB1986E
7. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect injector harness connector.
BBIA0237E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
PBIB0582E
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness connectors F44, F101
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1314
2005 Altima
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[VQ]
9. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
D
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
E
Check the following.
Harness connectors F101, F44
●
Harness for open or short between injector and ECM
●
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
11. CHECK INJECTOR
H
Refer to EC-1315, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace injector.
I
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
J
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
K
Component Inspection
UBS00IF2
INJECTOR
1.
2.
L
Disconnect injector harness connector.
Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.5 - 15.5Ω [at 10 - 88°C (50 - 190°F)]
M
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation
UBS00IF3
INJECTOR
Refer to EM-147, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1315
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[VQ]
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Description
PFP:17042
UBS00IF4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed*
Battery
Battery voltage*
ECM Function
Actuator
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump relay
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition
Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking
Operates.
When engine is stopped
Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above
Stops.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank.
BBIA0081E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IF5
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
FUEL PUMP RLY
CONDITION
●
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●
Engine running or cranking
●
Except above conditions
Revision: March 2005
SPECIFICATION
ON
OFF
EC-1316
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IF6
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1578E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1317
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
DATA (DC Voltage)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
113
B/OR
Fuel pump relay
For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON.
Diagnostic Procedure
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
UBS00IF7
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
BBIA0510E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1318
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[VQ]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
C
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
D
E
PBIB1926E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
F
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
G
H
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage:
J
K
Battery voltage should exist for 1 second
after ignition switch is turned ON.
L
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
M
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace fuse.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1319
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[VQ]
7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E33, B3
●
Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-1321, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 11.
NG
>> Replace condenser.
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Disconnect harness connectors E33, B3
Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and
fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B3 terminal 4, “fuel
level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> GO TO 12.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1320
BBIA0391E
2005 Altima
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[VQ]
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E33, B3
●
Harness for open or short between “fuse level sensor unit and fuse pump” and harness connector B3
●
Harness for open or short between “fuse level sensor unit and fuse pump” and ground
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK FUEL PUMP
D
Refer to EC-1321, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 14.
NG
>> Replace fuel pump.
E
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection
G
UBS00IF8
H
FUEL PUMP
1.
2.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 1 and 3.
I
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
J
K
SEC918C
L
CONDENSER
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance
M
: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation
UBS00IF9
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Revision: March 2005
EC-1321
2005 Altima
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
[VQ]
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
System Description
Sensor
Input Signal to ECM
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Wheel sensor*
Vehicle speed
PFP:11270
UBS00IFA
ECM function
Engine mount
control
Actuator
Electronic controlled engine
mount
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The
control system has 2-step control [Soft/Hard]
Vehicle condition
Engine mount control
Idle (with vehicle stopped)
Soft
Except above conditions
Hard
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IFB
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
ENGINE MOUNT
CONDITION
●
Revision: March 2005
Engine: After warming up
SPECIFICATION
Idle (with vehicle stopped)
IDLE
Except above conditions
TRVL
EC-1322
2005 Altima
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IFC
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1579E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1323
2005 Altima
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Engine is running]
44
W
Electronic controlled engine
mount-1
●
Idle speed (with vehicle stopped)
[Engine is running]
●
Except above conditions
[Engine is running]
63
W/R
Electronic controlled engine
mount-2
●
Idle speed (with vehicle stopped)
[Engine is running]
●
Except above conditions
Diagnostic Procedure
DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 3.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
0 - 3.0V
UBS00IFD
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II and touch “ON/OFF” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount and rear electronic controlled
engine mount for about 0.5 seconds according to the switching
condition of “ENGINE MOUNTING”.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SEC237C
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Make sure that gear position is P or N.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Change the engine speed from idle to more than 1,000 rpm and then return to idle (with vehicle stopped).
4. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount and rear
electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5 seconds when changing engine speed.
It is better to hear the operating sound around the left side front wheel house.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1324
2005 Altima
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
[VQ]
4. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front and rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector.
EC
C
D
BBIA0528E
3.
Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
E
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
G
H
SEC920C
I
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E20, F32
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open and short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
L
SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and electronic engine mount terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal
Front electronic controlled engine mount
terminal
Rear electronic controlled engine mount
terminal
44
1
1
63
2
2
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1325
2005 Altima
M
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
[VQ]
7. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
Visually check front and rear electronic controlled engine mount.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace front or rear electronic controlled engine mount.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1326
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
PFP:92136
A
UBS00IFE
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
EC
C
D
WBIA0441E
E
F
G
H
SEF099XA
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1327
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IFF
BBWA1580E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1328
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
49
R
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
67
B
Sensor ground
●
Warm-up condition
●
Idle speed
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
D
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
70
W
Refrigerant pressure sensor
●
Warm-up condition
●
Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
(Compressor operates.)
Diagnostic Procedure
E
1.0 - 4.0V
F
UBS00IFG
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
A
G
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
H
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
I
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
PBIB1188E
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
L
1.
2.
3.
Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-789, "Ground Inspection" .
M
BBIA0437E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground connections.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1329
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
WBIA0441E
3.
Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0188E
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1330
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[VQ]
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
A
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> GO TO 8.
C
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
D
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E19, F33
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
E
F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
G
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
H
UBS00IFH
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
I
Refer to ATC-113, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1331
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[VQ]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
PFP:25350
UBS00IFI
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IFJ
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
LOAD SIGNAL
CONDITION
●
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or
Lighting switch: 2nd position
ON
Rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch: OFF.
OFF
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IFK
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following
conditions.
Condition
Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON
ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0103E
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions.
Condition
Indication
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position
ON
Lighting switch: OFF
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-42, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)"
TEM -" .
or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS-
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: March 2005
EC-1332
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
PFP:25320
A
UBS00IFL
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
EC
C
D
BBIA0087E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IFM
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM
BRAKE SW1
(ASCD brake switch)
BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch)
CONDITION
●
●
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: ON
SPECIFICATION
Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal:
Fully released
ON
Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal:
Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1333
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IFN
BBWA1581E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1334
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMINAL
NO.
EC
WIRE
COLOR
ITEM
CONDITION
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
101
R/G
A
Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
DATA (DC Voltage)
C
Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
108
G/B
(A/T)
G/R
(M/T)
ASCD brake switch
●
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
●
Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly
depressed (M/T)
Approximately 0V
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F
[Ignition switch: ON]
●
Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
●
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully
released (M/T)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1335
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IFO
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released
ON
M/T models
CONDITION
INDICATION
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed
OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
M/T models
CONDITION
VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models)>>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models)>>GO TO 8.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1336
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION
EC
INDICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released
OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
ON
C
D
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION
Brake pedal: Fully released
E
F
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
G
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 13.
H
I
PBIB1677E
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
K
L
M
BBIA0087E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed
Clutch pedal: Fully released
VOLTAGE
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
PBIB0857E
EC-1337
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0088E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB0799E
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
●
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-1341, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1338
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
C
D
BBIA0087E
E
4.
Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
G
H
PBIB0857E
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
I
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
J
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E21, F34
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1339
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-1341, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace ASCD brake switch.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0049E
3.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> GO TO 14.
PBIB0117E
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●
Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
●
10A fuse
●
Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
>> GO TO 16.
Revision: March 2005
EC-1340
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
A
Check the following.
●
Harness connectors E28, M7
●
Harness connectors M71, F59
●
Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
D
Refer to EC-1341, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 18.
NG
>> Replace stop lamp switch.
E
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
UBS00IFP
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
J
Should exist.
Should not exist.
K
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
L
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition
Clutch pedal: Fully released
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed
M
Continuity
Should exist.
Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,
"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
SEC024D
Revision: March 2005
EC-1341
2005 Altima
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[VQ]
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Condition
Brake pedal: Fully released
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Continuity
Should not exist.
Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
PBIB0118E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1342
2005 Altima
ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ]
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
PFP:24814
A
UBS00IFQ
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
EC
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
C
●
CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
●
SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of
ASCD setting.
D
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-648, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
UBS00IFR
E
Specification data are reference value.
MONITOR ITEM
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD is operating
ON
●
When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
ASCD is not operating
OFF
ON → OFF
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1343
2005 Altima
ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ]
Wiring Diagram
UBS00IFS
BBWA1582E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1344
2005 Altima
ASCD INDICATOR
[VQ]
Diagnostic Procedure
UBS00IFT
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
A
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
MONITOR ITEM
CRUISE LAMP
SET LAMP
CONDITION
SPECIFICATION
●
Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time
→ at the 2nd time
ON → OFF
●
MAIN switch: ON
ASCD is operating
ON
●
When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89 MPH)
ASCD is not operating
OFF
EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-790, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
F
G
H
Does combination meter operate normally?.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to DI-7, "Combination Meter" .
I
J
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-782, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1345
2005 Altima
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[VQ]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
Wiring Diagram
PFP:24814
UBS00IFU
BBWA1583E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1346
2005 Altima
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[VQ]
A
EC
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
BBWA1320E
Revision: March 2005
EC-1347
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
PFP:00030
UBS00IG6
Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
UBS00IG7
Target idle speed
No-load*1 [in P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T)]
A/T: 675±50 rpm
M/T: 625±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON
In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T)
700 rpm or more
Ignition timing
In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T)
15° ± 5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions:
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
●
Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value
UBS00IG8
Conditions
Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle
5 - 35
At 2,500 rpm
5 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor
UBS00IG9
Supply voltage
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle
1.0 - 1.2V*
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
UBS00IGA
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
25 (77)
1.94 - 2.06
80 (176)
0.295 - 0.349
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Temperature °C (°F)
UBS00IGB
Resistance kΩ
20 (68)
2.1 - 2.9
50 (122)
0.68 - 1.00
90 (194)
0.236 - 0.260
EGR Temperature Sensor
UBS00IIR
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance MΩ
0 (32)
0.73 - 0.88
50 (122)
0.074 - 0.082
100 (212)
0.011 - 0.014
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
UBS00IGC
2.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
UBS00IGD
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Revision: March 2005
5.0 - 7.0Ω
EC-1348
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ]
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
UBS00IGE
A
Refer to EC-927, "Component Inspection" .
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
UBS00IGF
EC
Refer to EC-936, "Component Inspection" .
Throttle Control Motor
UBS00IGG
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
C
Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Injector
UBS00IGH
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 -140°F)]
D
11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump
UBS00IGI
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
E
Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EC-1349
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ]
Revision: March 2005
EC-1350
2005 Altima
I BODY
SECTION
EI
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions .............................................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ............................................... 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..... 5
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9
CLIP AND FASTENER ..............................................11
Description ..............................................................11
FRONT BUMPER ..................................................... 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 16
Removal and Installation ........................................ 16
FRONT GRILLE ........................................................ 18
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
UPPER FRONT GRILLE ..................................... 18
LOWER FRONT GRILLE .................................... 18
COWL TOP ............................................................... 19
Removal and Installation ........................................ 19
Revision: March 2005
FRONT FENDER ...................................................... 20
Removal and Installation ........................................ 20
FENDER PROTECTOR ............................................ 21
Removal and Installation ........................................ 21
MUDGUARD ............................................................. 22
Removal and Installation ........................................ 22
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER ...................................... 23
Removal and Installation ........................................ 23
REAR AIR SPOILER ................................................ 24
Removal and Installation ........................................ 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSTALLATION ................................................... 25
DRIP MOLDING ........................................................ 26
Removal and Installation ........................................ 26
ROOF SIDE MOLDING ............................................. 27
Removal and Installation ........................................ 27
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ..................................... 28
Removal and Installation ........................................ 28
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................. 28
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................... 28
SIDE GUARD MOLDING .......................................... 29
Removal and Installation ........................................ 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 29
INSTALLATION ................................................... 29
DOOR FINISHER ...................................................... 30
Removal and Installation ........................................ 30
FRONT DOOR .................................................... 30
REAR DOOR ....................................................... 31
BODY SIDE TRIM ..................................................... 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32
CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH ................. 33
CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH .................. 33
REAR PILLAR FINISHER ................................... 33
DASH SIDE FINISHER ....................................... 33
REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER .......................... 34
Removal and Installation ........................................ 34
FLOOR TRIM ............................................................ 35
Removal and Installation ........................................ 35
HEADLINING ............................................................ 36
Removal and Installation ........................................ 36
EI-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER ...... 37
Removal and Installation ........................................ 37
Revision: March 2005
EI-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EIS003MB
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
B
C
D
E
F
G
EIS003MC
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may
H
get in the way with cloth.
When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape.
Keep removed parts protected with cloth.
EI
If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.
If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.
Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.
J
After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.
Remove stains in the following way.
K
Water-soluble stains:
Dip a cloth in warm water, and squeeze tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the L
stain with the cloth. Next, dip the soft cloth in fresh water, and then squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the
detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-3
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EIS003MD
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
SBT839
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit
Repairing the cause of noise
SBT840
Commercial Service Tools
EIS003ME
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Revision: March 2005
EI-4
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS003MF
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to EI-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
EI
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
J
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
K
defining the noise.
–
Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
–
Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
–
Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
–
Knock — (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
–
Tick — (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
–
Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
–
Buzz — (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: March 2005
EI-5
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
●
Close a door.
●
Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
●
Rev the engine.
●
Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
●
At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
●
Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners
can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing
the noise.
● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
● Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to EI-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25
mm (0.59 x 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
●
●
Revision: March 2005
EI-6
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50
mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS0058Y
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
H
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
EI
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
J
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by K
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
L
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
M
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Revision: March 2005
EI-7
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: March 2005
EI-8
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS003MH
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
LIWA0276E
Revision: March 2005
EI-9
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SBT844
Revision: March 2005
EI-10
2005 Altima
CLIP AND FASTENER
CLIP AND FASTENER
Description
●
●
PFP:76906
A
EIS003MI
Clips and fasteners in EI section correspond to the following numbers and symbols.
Replace any clips and/or fasteners which are damaged during removal or installation.
Symbol
No.
Shapes
B
Removal & Installation
C
C101
D
SBF302H
SBF367BA
C103
E
F
G
SBT095
SBF423H
H
C203
EI
SBF258G
LIIA0236E
J
C205
K
MBT080A
SBF638CA
L
C206
M
MBF519B
MBF520B
SBF104B
SBF147B
CE103
Revision: March 2005
EI-11
2005 Altima
CLIP AND FASTENER
Symbol
No.
Shapes
Removal & Installation
CE107
SBF411H
SBF767B
SBF174D
SBF175DA
SBF648B
SBF649B
SBF151D
SBF259G
SBF145B
SBF085B
SBF078B
SBF992G
CE117
CF110
CF118
CG101
CS101
Revision: March 2005
EI-12
2005 Altima
CLIP AND FASTENER
Symbol
No.
Shapes
Removal & Installation
A
B
CR103
C
SBF768B
SBF770B
D
Metal Clip
E
WBT072
WBT073
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-13
2005 Altima
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
PFP:F2022
EIS003MJ
WIIA0497E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
Front bumper supports
2.
Energy absorbing foam
3.
Lower radiator grille (if equipped)
4.
Upper radiator grille
5.
Fog lamp (if equipped)
6.
Front bumper fascia
7.
Front bumper reinforcement
Remove front fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "FENDER PROTECTOR" .
Remove engine under cover.
Remove upper front (and lower front if equipped) radiator grille. Refer to EI-18, "FRONT GRILLE" .
Remove fog lamp if equipped. Refer to LT-70, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove front bumper fascia clips and screws, then remove front bumper fascia.
Remove energy absorbing foam.
Revision: March 2005
EI-14
2005 Altima
FRONT BUMPER
7. Remove front bumper reinforcement.
8. Remove front bumper supports.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-15
2005 Altima
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
PFP:H5022
EIS003MK
WIIA0492E
Revision: March 2005
EI-16
2005 Altima
REAR BUMPER
1. Remove LH and RH rear combination lamps. Refer to LT-114, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP" .
2. Remove LH and RH splash shields (if equipped).
3. Remove rear bumper fascia.
4. Remove energy absorbing foam.
5. Remove rear bumper reinforcement.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-17
2005 Altima
FRONT GRILLE
FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
PFP:62310
EIS003ML
WIIA0494E
1.
Clip
2.
Upper front grille
4.
Lower front grille
5.
Bumper fascia
3.
Screw
UPPER FRONT GRILLE
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the upper clips.
Release the lower tabs from the bumper fascia, then remove the upper front radiator grille.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LOWER FRONT GRILLE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove engine under cover.
Remove the upper screws.
Release the lower tabs from the bumper fascia, then remove the lower front radiator grille.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-18
2005 Altima
COWL TOP
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
PFP:66100
A
EIS003MM
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0068E
Remove both the right and left wiper arms. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper
Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" .
2. Release the clips and remove the cowl top seal.
3. Release the clips and remove the cowl top cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
1.
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-19
2005 Altima
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
Removal and Installation
PFP:63100
EIS003MN
LIIA0151E
1. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EI-14, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove center mud guard. Refer to EI-22, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove front fender.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-20
2005 Altima
FENDER PROTECTOR
FENDER PROTECTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:63840
A
EIS003MO
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
LIIA0075E
1. Remove screw from center mudguard.
2. Remove pushpins.
3. Remove fender protector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-21
2005 Altima
MUDGUARD
MUDGUARD
Removal and Installation
PFP:63854
EIS003MP
WIIA0495E
1. Remove screws.
2. Remove center mudguard.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-22
2005 Altima
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER
Removal and Installation
PFP:84810
A
EIS003MQ
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0070E
1. Remove trunk lid finisher (if equipped).
2. Remove nuts.
3. Remove license lamp finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-23
2005 Altima
REAR AIR SPOILER
REAR AIR SPOILER
Removal and Installation
PFP:K6030
EIS0058X
All except SE-R model
LIIA2204E
1.
Rear air spoiler assembly
4.
High mounted stop lamp harness
2.
Gasket
3.
Nut
SE-R model
WIIA0498E
1.
Clips
2.
Rear air spoiler assembly
3.
Foam tape
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove trunk lid finisher (if equipped). Refer to EI-37, "TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER" .
Disconnect high mounted stop lamp connector.
For all models except SE-R, remove the nuts and carefully lift the rear air spoiler from the gaskets.
For SE-R models, using a trim stick, carefully release the clips and pry foam tape free from trunk lid surface.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage painted surfaces during removal of, or releasing adhesive backed foam
tapes.
Revision: March 2005
EI-24
2005 Altima
REAR AIR SPOILER
5.
Release the high mounted stop lamp harness grommet from trunk lid, then remove rear air spoiler.
A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
●
Before installing rear air spoiler, clean the surface where it will be mounted with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface.
●
Before installing, be sure there are no gaps or waves in the foam tape where the surfaces meet.
●
During installation, be sure grommet of high mounted stop lamp harness is fully seated into trunk lid opening prior to final rear air spoiler placement.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-25
2005 Altima
DRIP MOLDING
DRIP MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:76810
EIS003MR
LIIA0076E
1. Using a trim stick or equivalent, disconnect drip moulding starting at the front working rearward.
2. Remove drip molding.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Insert drip molding onto clips starting at rear working forward.
Revision: March 2005
EI-26
2005 Altima
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:73854
A
EIS003MS
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0209E
1. Lift and twist roof side molding up from rear edge.
2. Disconnect clips, and remove roof side molding.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Engage roof molding clips starting at the rear.
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-27
2005 Altima
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:82820
EIS003MT
LIIA0071E
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
1. Open windows fully.
2. Remove screw on front edge.
3. Lift and twist from rear side, disconnect clips from flange and pull molding out backwards.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
1. Open windows fully.
2. Lift and twist from rear side, and disconnect clips from flange.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-28
2005 Altima
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:76840
A
EIS003MU
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0072E
G
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints.
●
Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape.
1. Heat molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun.
2. Using a trim stick, gently lift an end of the molding and cut away tape to remove molding.
3. Remove all remaining traces of tape and adhesive.
H
EI
J
INSTALLATION
On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200 or C-100 or equivalent.
●
The repair parts are also attached with double-faced adhesive tape.
●
To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new doublefaced tape to the molding.
1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface.
2. Using a heat gun, heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F).
3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface.
4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lb-f) to press molding to door surface.
NOTE:
For maximum adhesion, allow vehicle to set without washing for 24 hours after installation.
●
Revision: March 2005
EI-29
2005 Altima
K
L
M
DOOR FINISHER
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
PFP:80900
EIS003MV
FRONT DOOR
LIIA0077E
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove step lamp lens and disconnect step lamp.
Remove screw cover and pull cup mat.
Remove screws.
Disconnect and remove switch plate.
● Remove screw beneath switch plate.
5. Remove door finisher.
6. If necessary, remove inner corner cover from door finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-30
2005 Altima
DOOR FINISHER
REAR DOOR
A
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0078E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove screw cover.
Remove screws.
Disconnect and remove switch plate.
Remove door finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
EI
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-31
2005 Altima
BODY SIDE TRIM
BODY SIDE TRIM
Removal and Installation
PFP:76913
EIS003MW
CAUTION:
●
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes.
●
When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
garnish.
LIIA0079E
1.
Front pillar garnish
2.
Dash side finisher
3.
Front kicking plate
4.
Center pillar lower garnish
5.
Rear kicking plate
6.
Rear body side welt
7.
Rear pillar finisher
8.
Seat belt shoulder anchor cover
9.
Center pillar upper garnish
10. Front body side welt
Revision: March 2005
EI-32
2005 Altima
BODY SIDE TRIM
CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH
Removal and Installation
A
1. Remove front and rear kicking plate.
2. Remove center pillar lower garnish.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH
Removal and Installation
C
1. Remove seat belt shoulder anchor. Refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to EI-33, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH" .
3. Remove bolt covers and bolts.
4. Remove center pillar upper garnish.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D
E
REAR PILLAR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove bolt cover and bolt.
2. Remove rear pillar finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
DASH SIDE FINISHER
Removal and Installation
G
1. Remove front kicking plate.
2. Remove dash side finisher.
CAUTION:
Insert screw driver rolled with cloth between panel on vehicle
and clips (as indicated with arrow), and disconnect clips.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
H
EI
J
K
SIIA0810E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EI-33
2005 Altima
REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER
REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER
Removal and Installation
PFP:79910
EIS003MX
LIIA0080E
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove rear seat. Refer to SE-22, "REAR SEAT" .
Remove rear seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to SB-5, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" .
Remove rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
If equipped, remove high mounted stop lamp and disconnect
connectors.
SIIA0820E
5. Remove halo trim.
6. Remove rear parcel shelf trim.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-34
2005 Altima
FLOOR TRIM
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
PFP:74902
A
EIS003MY
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
WIIA0496E
1.
Carpet
4.
Service mat brackets
2.
Driver foot rest (if equipped)
3.
J
Rear seat cushion hooks
1. Remove front seats. Refer to SE-15, "FRONT SEAT" .
2. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-22, "REAR SEAT" .
3. Remove lower body side trim. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
4. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
5. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-4, "SEAT BELTS" .
6. Remove service mat brackets.
7. Remove driver foot rest (if equipped).
8. Remove rear seat cushion hooks.
9. Remove carpet.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-35
K
L
M
2005 Altima
HEADLINING
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
PFP:73910
EIS003MZ
LIIA0082E
1.
Headlining
2.
Assist grips
3.
Sunroof welt
4.
Sunvisors
5.
Map lamp
6.
Storage compartment
7.
Sunvisor clips
8.
Dome lamp
CAUTION:
Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance.
1. Remove front and center pillar garnish. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove front and rear door welts. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
4. Remove assist grips.
5. Remove interior lamp.
6. Remove map lamp.
7. Remove storage bin.
8. Remove sunvisors and clips.
9. Remove windshield garnish molding. Refer to EI-32, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
10. Remove sunroof welt (if equipped).
11. Remove clips attached to roof.
12. Open left rear door and remove headlining through door opening.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EI-36
2005 Altima
TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER
TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER
Removal and Installation
PFP:84920
A
EIS003N0
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EI
J
WIIA0493E
1.
Trunk room lamp
2.
Trunk floor carpet
3.
Hole cover
4.
Spare tire cover
5.
Trunk floor board, RH
6.
Trunk floor board, LH
7.
Box assembly
8.
Trunk side finisher, RH
9.
Trunk side finisher, LH
10. Trim clip
11. Trim clip (2 piece)
12. Trunk net hook
13. Trunk net hook
14. Trunk net
15. Trunk net, RH
16. Trunk net, LH
17. Trunk finisher, rear
18. Rear trunk plate
19. Trim clip
20. Trunk lid finisher (if equipped)
21. Trim clip
Revision: March 2005
EI-37
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TRUNK ROOM TRIM & TRUNK LID FINISHER
Revision: March 2005
EI-38
2005 Altima
B ENGINE
SECTION
EM
ENGINE MECHANICAL
A
EM
C
D
E
CONTENTS
QR25DE
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 5
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 5
Precautions for Draining Coolant ............................. 5
Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping .............. 5
Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ............. 5
Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ......................................................................... 5
Precautions for Assembly and Installation ............... 5
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................... 6
Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 6
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 6
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 6
PREPARATION ........................................................... 8
Special Service Tools ............................................... 8
Commercial Service Tools .......................................11
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 13
NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise ................... 13
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause
of the Symptom. ..................................................... 14
DRIVE BELTS ........................................................... 15
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 15
Tension Adjustment ................................................ 15
Removal and Installation ........................................ 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner ..................................................................... 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................... 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 17
REMOVAL ........................................................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT ...... 18
Revision: March 2005
INTAKE MANIFOLD ................................................. 19
Removal and Installation ........................................ 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 21
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 23
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST .......................................................................... 24
Removal and Installation ........................................ 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 25
INSTALLATION ................................................... 25
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ................................. 26
Removal and Installation ........................................ 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 27
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 28
IGNITION COIL ......................................................... 29
Removal and Installation ........................................ 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 29
INSTALLATION ................................................... 29
SPARK PLUG ........................................................... 30
Removal and Installation ........................................ 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ........................ 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32
REMOVAL ........................................................... 32
INSTALLATION ................................................... 33
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 34
ROCKER COVER ..................................................... 35
Removal and Installation ........................................ 35
REMOVAL ........................................................... 35
INSTALLATION ................................................... 35
CAMSHAFT .............................................................. 37
Removal and Installation ........................................ 37
REMOVAL ........................................................... 37
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 39
EM-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INSTALLATION .................................................... 42
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................... 44
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
(INT) OIL GROOVE ............................................. 44
Valve Clearance ...................................................... 45
INSPECTION ....................................................... 45
ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 46
TIMING CHAIN .......................................................... 48
Removal and Installation ........................................ 48
REMOVAL ........................................................... 49
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 52
INSTALLATION .................................................... 52
OIL SEAL .................................................................. 56
Removal and installation of Valve Oil Seal ............. 56
REMOVAL ........................................................... 56
INSTALLATION .................................................... 56
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ............. 57
REMOVAL ........................................................... 57
INSTALLATION .................................................... 57
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal .............. 58
REMOVAL ........................................................... 58
INSTALLATION .................................................... 58
CYLINDER HEAD ..................................................... 59
On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 59
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ......... 59
Removal and Installation ........................................ 61
REMOVAL ........................................................... 62
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 62
INSTALLATION .................................................... 63
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 64
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 64
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 65
Inspection After Disassembly ................................. 66
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ........................ 66
VALVE DIMENSIONS .......................................... 66
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE .............................. 66
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ......................... 66
VALVE SEAT CONTACT ..................................... 68
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ........................... 68
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ......................... 69
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE
SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................... 69
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ................................................ 71
Removal and Installation ........................................ 71
REMOVAL ........................................................... 72
INSTALLATION .................................................... 73
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 73
CYLINDER BLOCK ................................................... 75
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 75
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 76
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 78
How to Select Piston and Bearing .......................... 83
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 83
HOW TO SELECT A PISTON ............................. 83
HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING ...................................................................... 84
Revision: March 2005
HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING .................86
Inspection After Disassembly ..................................89
CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE ....................89
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ...........90
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ...........90
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE .....................91
PISTON RING END GAP ....................................91
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION .......91
CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ........92
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ...........................................92
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ......................93
INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING .......................................................................93
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE ...94
OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL ......................................................................95
OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN ......95
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT .................................................................95
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ....................................95
OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD
BEARING .............................................................96
OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING ...............96
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ................97
OUTER DIAMETER OF LOWER CYLINDER
BLOCK BOLT .......................................................97
OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD
BOLT ....................................................................97
MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T
MODEL) ...............................................................97
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......99
Standard and Limit ..................................................99
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................99
DRIVE BELTS ......................................................99
INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD ...................................................................99
SPARK PLUG ......................................................99
CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 100
VALVE ................................................................ 100
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ......... 103
CYLINDER BLOCK ............................................ 104
PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN ...... 105
CONNECTING ROD .......................................... 105
CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 106
MAIN BEARING ................................................. 107
CONNECTING ROD BEARING ......................... 108
VQ35DE
PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 109
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 109
Precautions for Drain Coolant ............................... 109
Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ........... 109
Precautions for Removal and Disassembly .......... 109
Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ...................................................................... 109
EM-2
2005 Altima
Precautions for Assembly and Installation ........... 109
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................110
Precautions for Liquid Gasket ...............................110
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......110
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..110
PREPARATION ........................................................112
Special Service Tools ............................................112
Commercial Service Tools .....................................115
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................117
NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise .................117
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause
of the Symptom. ....................................................118
DRIVE BELTS ..........................................................119
Checking Drive Belts .............................................119
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................. 120
Removal and Installation ...................................... 120
REMOVAL ......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION ................................................. 120
CHANGING AIR CLEANER ELEMENT ............ 120
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR ........................ 122
Removal and Installation ...................................... 122
REMOVAL ......................................................... 123
INSTALLATION ................................................. 124
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ......................... 126
Removal and Installation ...................................... 126
REMOVAL ......................................................... 127
INSTALLATION ................................................. 127
INTAKE MANIFOLD ............................................... 129
Removal and Installation ...................................... 129
REMOVAL ......................................................... 130
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 131
INSTALLATION ................................................. 131
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............. 132
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST ....................................................................... 134
Removal and Installation ...................................... 134
REMOVAL ......................................................... 135
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 136
INSTALLATION ................................................. 136
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ............................... 138
Removal and Installation ...................................... 138
REMOVAL ......................................................... 138
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 141
INSTALLATION ................................................. 141
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............. 143
IGNITION COIL ....................................................... 144
Removal and Installation ...................................... 144
REMOVAL ......................................................... 144
INSTALLATION ................................................. 144
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) ........... 145
Removal and Installation ...................................... 145
REMOVAL ......................................................... 145
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 146
INSTALLATION ................................................. 146
Revision: March 2005
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ...................... 147
Removal and Installation ...................................... 147
REMOVAL ......................................................... 147
INSTALLATION ................................................. 148
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 149
ROCKER COVER ................................................... 150
Removal and Installation ...................................... 150
REMOVAL ......................................................... 150
INSTALLATION ................................................. 151
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE ............................... 152
Removal and Installation ...................................... 152
REMOVAL ......................................................... 153
INSTALLATION ................................................. 157
TIMING CHAIN ........................................................ 161
Components ......................................................... 161
POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET . 163
Removal ............................................................... 164
Inspection ............................................................. 171
Installation ............................................................ 172
CAMSHAFT ............................................................ 182
Removal and Installation ...................................... 182
REMOVAL ......................................................... 183
INSTALLATION ................................................. 184
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ..................... 187
Inspection after Installation ................................... 190
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
(INT) OIL GROOVE ........................................... 190
Valve Clearance ................................................... 191
CHECKING ....................................................... 191
VALVE ADJUSTING .......................................... 194
OIL SEAL ................................................................ 195
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal ........... 195
REMOVAL ......................................................... 195
INSTALLATION ................................................. 195
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ........... 195
REMOVAL ......................................................... 195
INSTALLATION ................................................. 197
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal ............ 198
REMOVAL ......................................................... 198
INSTALLATION ................................................. 198
CYLINDER HEAD ................................................... 200
On-Vehicle Service ............................................... 200
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ....... 200
Removal and Installation ...................................... 201
REMOVAL ......................................................... 201
INSTALLATION ................................................. 204
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 212
DISASSEMBLY ................................................. 213
ASSEMBLY ....................................................... 213
Inspection After Disassembly ............................... 215
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ...................... 215
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE ............................ 215
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ....................... 215
VALVE SEAT CONTACT ................................... 217
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ......................... 217
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ....................... 218
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE
SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................. 218
EM-3
2005 Altima
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
ENGINE ASSEMBLY .............................................. 219
Removal and Installation ...................................... 219
REMOVAL ......................................................... 220
INSTALLATION .................................................. 222
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .............. 222
CYLINDER BLOCK ................................................. 224
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 224
DISASSEMBLY ................................................. 225
ASSEMBLY ....................................................... 227
Inspection ............................................................. 234
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ........ 234
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ................... 234
PISTON RING END GAP .................................. 235
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ..... 235
CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING
DIAMETER (BIG END) ...................................... 236
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ......................................... 236
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION .................... 237
INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUS-
Revision: March 2005
ING ..................................................................... 237
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE . 237
CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 239
BEARING CLEARANCE .................................... 239
DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT (A/T) .......................... 243
FLYWHEEL RUNOUT (M/T) .............................. 243
OIL JET .............................................................. 244
OIL JET RELIEF VALVE .................................... 244
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 245
Standard and Limit ................................................ 245
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 245
DRIVE BELT ...................................................... 246
INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD ................................................................. 246
SPARK PLUG .................................................... 246
CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 247
VALVE ................................................................ 247
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ......... 251
CYLINDER BLOCK ............................................ 251
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN ...... 252
CONNECTING ROD .......................................... 253
CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 254
AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING ............................. 255
CONNECTING ROD BEARING ......................... 255
MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS .................. 256
BEARING CLEARANCE .................................... 256
EM-4
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR25DE]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EBS00J49
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EM
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
E
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
F
Precautions for Draining Coolant
●
EBS00J4A
Drain coolant when engine is cooled.
G
Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping
●
●
●
Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
Release fuel pressure before any removal or disassembly.
After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage.
Precautions for Removal and Disassembly
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EBS00J4C
EBS00J4D
Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way,
and replace if necessary.
Precautions for Assembly and Installation
●
H
When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely,
avoid forceful operations.
Use maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.
Cover openings of engine system with tape or equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly.
When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally
opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, follow the specifications.
Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement
●
EBS00J4B
EBS00J4E
Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts.
When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the
ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, follow the specifications.
Always replace the old with a new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction
and blockage.
Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust.
Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well.
Bleed the air trapped within the system after draining the coolant.
Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine
stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections.
After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems
for leakage or rattles.
Revision: March 2005
EM-5
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[QR25DE]
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
EBS00J4F
Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts.
Cylinder head bolts
Lower cylinder block bolts
Connecting rod cap bolts
Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angular
tightening)
Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil.
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
EBS00J4G
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
and remove the sealant using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
●
In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer
to lightly tap (1) the cutter where the RTV Silicone Sealant is
applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the cutter (2) by tapping
on the side.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed
screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
PBIC0002E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering
to the gasket application surface and the mating surface.
● Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket
application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating
surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign
materials.
Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
PBIC0003E
Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified
location.
Tube presser
●
●
●
●
●
WS39930000 (
–
)
If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove.
As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the
holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of this manual.
Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component.
If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
Do not retighten after the installation.
Revision: March 2005
EM-6
EMA0622D
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[QR25DE]
●
After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12,
"RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
A
EM
C
SEM159F
D
CAUTION:
Follow all specific instructions in this manual.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-7
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EBS00J4H
The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
S-NT046
ST0501S000
Engine stand assembly
1. ST05011000
( — )
Engine stand
2. ST05012000
( — )
Base
Disassembling and assembling
NT042
KV10106500
( — )
Engine stand shaft
NT028
KV10115300
( — )
Engine sub-attachment
ZZA1078D
KV10116200
(J-26336-B)
Valve spring compressor
1. KV10115900
(J-26336-20)
Attachment
Disassembling valve mechanism
NT022
KV10112100
(BT-8653-A)
Angle wrench
Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder
head, etc.
S-NT014
KV10107902
(J-38959)
Valve oil seal puller
Removing valve oil seal
S-NT011
Revision: March 2005
EM-8
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10115600
(J-38958)
Valve oil seal drift
Installing valve oil seal
Use side A.
a: 20 (0.79) dia.
d: 8 (0.31) dia.
b: 13 (0.51) dia.
e: 10.7 (0.421) dia.
c: 10.3 (0.406) dia.
f: 5 (0.20) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
S-NT603
EM03470000
(J-8037)
Piston ring compressor
Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore
D
E
S-NT044
ST16610001
(J-23907)
Pilot bushing puller
Removing crankshaft pilot bushing
F
G
H
S-NT045
WS39930000
( — )
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
I
J
S-NT052
16441 6N210
(J-45488)
Quick connector release
Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG:
Part No. 16441 6N210)
K
L
PBIC0198E
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen
sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
NT636
KV10117100
(J-36471-A)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor
For 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
NT379
Revision: March 2005
EM-9
2005 Altima
M
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-44626)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1
LEM054
—
(J-46535)
Drive belt tension releaser
Releasing drive belt tension
WBIA0536E
Revision: March 2005
EM-10
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00J4I
A
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Pulley holder
Crankshaft pulley removing and installing
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
b: 8 mm (0.31 in) dia.
EM
C
D
NT628
Crank puller
Crankshaft pulley removing
E
F
ZZA0010D
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plug
G
H
S-NT047
Valve seat cutter set
Finishing valve seat dimensions
I
J
S-NT048
Piston ring expander
Removing and installing piston ring
K
L
S-NT030
Valve guide drift
M
Removing and installing valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia.
b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
S-NT015
Valve guide reamer
1: Reaming valve guide inner hole
2: Reaming hole for oversize valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
d1 : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
d2 : 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia.
S-NT016
Revision: March 2005
EM-11
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new heated oxygen sensor
(Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.)
a: J-43897-18 [18 mm (0.71 in) dia.] for zirconia heated oxygen sensor
b: J-43897-12 [12 mm (0.47 in) dia.] for titania heated oxygen sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads
AEM489
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
TP55 Torx® plus Bit
Removing and installing M/T flywheel bolts
LBIA0284E
E20 Torx® Socket
(J-45816)
Removing and installing A/T drive plate bolts
LBIA0285E
Revision: March 2005
EM-12
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[QR25DE]
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise
PFP:00003
A
EBS00J4J
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0069E
Revision: March 2005
EM-13
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[QR25DE]
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom.
EBS00J4K
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.
2. Confirm the type of noise.
3. Specify the operating condition of engine.
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Operating condition of engine
Location
of noise
Top of
engine
Rocker
cover
Cylinder
head
Type of
noise
Front of
engine
Timing
chain
cover
Front of
engine
Reference page
After
warmup
When
starting
When
idling
When
racing
While
driving
Ticking or
clicking
C
A
—
A
B
—
Tappet
noise
Valve clearance
EM-45
Rattle
C
A
—
A
B
C
Camshaft
bearing
noise
Camshaft journal clearance
Camshaft runout
EM-40
EM-39
—
Piston pin
noise
Piston and piston pin
clearance
Connecting rod bushing clearance
EM-92
EM-92
A
Piston
slap noise
Piston-to-bore clearance
Piston ring side clearance
Piston ring end gap
Connecting rod bend
and torsion
EM-91
EM-91
EM-91
EM-91
Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small
end)
Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end)
EM-92
EM-92
EM-96
EM-95
Slap or
knock
Crankshaft pulley
Cylinder
block
(Side of
engine)
Oil pan
Source of
noise
Before
warmup
—
Slap or
rap
A
A
—
—
—
B
B
B
B
Check item
Knock
A
B
C
B
B
B
Connecting rod
bearing
noise
Knock
A
B
—
A
B
C
Main
bearing
noise
Main bearing oil clearance
Crankshaft runout
Timing chain cracks
and wear
Timing chain tensioner
operation
Tapping or
ticking
A
A
—
B
B
B
Timing
chain and
chain tensioner
noise
Squeaking or fizzing
A
B
—
B
—
B
Drive belts
(Sticking
or slipping)
Drive belts deflection
Creaking
A
B
A
B
A
B
Drive belts
(Slipping)
Idler pulley bearing
operation
Squall
Creak
A
B
—
B
A
B
Water
pump
noise
Water pump operation
A: Closely related
B: Related
Revision: March 2005
C: Sometimes related
EM-48
EM-15
CO-7
—: Not related
EM-14
2005 Altima
DRIVE BELTS
[QR25DE]
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
PFP:02117
A
EBS00J4L
EM
C
D
E
F
G
SBIA0234E
NOTE:
On vehicles not equipped with A/C, there is an idler pulley in the position for the drive belt routing.
WARNING:
Inspect the drive belt only when the engine is stopped.
●
Make sure that the stamp mark of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the usable range.
NOTE:
● Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be A.
● Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks.
● If the indicator is out of allowable use range or belt is damaged, replace the belt.
Tension Adjustment
●
H
I
J
K
EBS00J4M
Belt tension is not manually adjustable, it is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner.
L
Removal and Installation
EBS00J4N
REMOVAL
1.
While securely holding the hexagonal part in pulley center of
drive belt auto-tensioner, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) using Tool.
Tool number
2.
●
3.
:
—
M
(J-46535)
CAUTION:
● Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may
occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off.
● Do not loosen the auto-tensioner pulley bolt. (Do not turn
it counterclockwise.) If turned counterclockwise, the
complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit,
WBIA0561E
including pulley.
Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter through the rear of tensioner into retaining boss to
lock tensioner pulley.
Leave tensioner pulley arm locked until belt is installed again.
Loosen auxiliary drive belt from water pump pulley in sequence, and remove it.
Revision: March 2005
EM-15
2005 Altima
DRIVE BELTS
[QR25DE]
INSTALLATION
1.
Hook the auxiliary drive belt onto all of the pulleys except for the water pump pulley. Hook the drive belt
onto water pump pulley last.
CAUTION:
Confirm belts are completely set on the pulleys.
2. Release tensioner, and apply tensions to belt.
CAUTION:
● Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally
comes off.
● Do not loosen the auto-tensioner pulley bolt. (Don't turn it counterclockwise. If turned counterclockwise, the complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including pulley.
3. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise several times to equalize tension between each pulley.
4. Confirm tensions of belt at indicator is within the allowable use range. Refer to EM-15, "Checking Drive
Belts" .
Removal and Installation of Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
EBS00J4O
SBIA0235E
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
The complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including the pulley.
1. Remove the front RH engine cover.
2. Remove the drive belt EM-15, "Removal and Installation" .
● Insert a rod approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) in diameter through the rear of tensioner into the retaining
boss to lock tensioner pulley.
3. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner, with power tool.
CAUTION:
Do not loosen the auto-tensioner pulley bolt. (Don't turn it counterclockwise. If turned counterclockwise, the complete auto-tensioner must be replaced as a unit, including pulley.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
●
If there is damage greater than peeled paint, replace drive belt auto-tensioner units
●
Install the drive belt auto-tensioner carefully so not to damage the water pump pulley.
●
Do not swap the pulley between the new and old auto-tensioner units
Revision: March 2005
EM-16
2005 Altima
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
[QR25DE]
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
PFP:16500
A
EBS00J4P
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LBIA0068E
K
1.
Resonator
4.
Mass air flow sensor
7.
Air cleaner case mounting bracket
2.
Air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube
3.
Grommet
5.
Air cleaner case (upper)
6.
Air cleaner case (lower)
8.
Resonator in fender
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector.
Disconnect the tube clamp at the electronic throttle control actuator and the fresh air intake tube.
Remove air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper), with mass air flow
sensor attached.
Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary.
CAUTION:
Handle the mass air flow sensor with care:
● Do not shock it.
● Do not disassemble it.
● Do not touch the internal sensor.
Remove the resonator in the fender, as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-17
2005 Altima
M
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
[QR25DE]
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and raise the air cleaner case (upper).
Remove the air cleaner element.
Install a new air cleaner element.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-18
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[QR25DE]
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal and Installation
PFP:14003
A
EBS00J4Q
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WBIA0472E
K
1.
Cylinder head assembly
2.
PCV hose
3.
Intake manifold collector
4.
Gasket
5.
Electric throttle control actuator
6.
Intake manifold support
7.
Vacuum reservoir tank
8.
VIAS control solenoid valve
9.
Intake manifold
L
10. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid
M
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot.
1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Drain coolant when engine is cooled. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
3. Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove air cleaner case and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Disconnect the following components at the intake side:
● PCV hose
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
● Electric throttle control actuator
● Brake booster vacuum hose
Revision: March 2005
EM-19
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[QR25DE]
6.
Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side.
● Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick
connector.
Tool number
: — (J-45488)
WBIA0148E
a.
Remove quick connector cap.
LBIA0090E
b.
c.
d.
7.
a.
b.
With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool
onto fuel tube.
Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes
no further. Hold the Tool on that position.
CAUTION:
Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector.
Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further.
Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube.
CAUTION:
● Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as
WBIA0473E
shown.
● Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
● Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
● Avoid fire and sparks.
● Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
When removing fuel hose quick connector at vehicle piping side, perform as follows.
Remove quick connector cap.
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
tube. (The figure is shown for reference only.)
● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and
pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect
them by pulling.
CAUTION:
● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte etc. from getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-20
SFE562A
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[QR25DE]
Do not remove the remaining retainer on tube.
A
● When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one.
Retainer color: Green.
● To keep clean the connecting portion and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them
completely with plastic bags or something similar.
EM
8. Loosen mounting bolts diagonally, and remove the electric throttle control actuator.
CAUTION:
C
Handle carefully to avoid any damage.
9. Disconnect intake manifold collector harness, and vacuum hose.
CAUTION:
D
Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
10. Remove intake manifold collector mounting bolts on the support, using power tools.
11. Loosen the mounting bolts and nuts in the order shown to
E
remove the intake manifold collector, using power tools.
●
F
G
WBIA0018E
H
12. Loosen the bolts in the order shown to remove the intake manifold assembly, using power tools.
I
J
K
WBIA0019E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
L
Surface Distortion
●
Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect surface distortion
of intake manifold collector and intake manifold surface.
M
Standard
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
WBIA0020E
INSTALLATION
●
Install the intake manifold bolts and nuts in the reverse order of removal, following the tightening
sequences below.
Revision: March 2005
EM-21
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[QR25DE]
Tightening Intake Manifold Bolts and Nuts
●
Tighten in numerical order as shown.
CAUTION:
After tightening No.5, retighten the No.1 mounting bolt to specification.
WBIA0021E
Tightening Intake Manifold Collector Bolts and Nuts
●
Tighten in numerical order as shown.
CAUTION:
After tightening No.7, retighten the No.1 mounting bolt to specification.
LBIA0069E
Installation of Electric Throttle Control Actuator:
●
Tighten the mounting bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps.
●
After installation perform procedure in EM-23, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" .
CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (ENGINE SIDE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and
there is no damage to them.
Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube tip end.
Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube.
● Insert fuel tube into quick connector until the top spool on fuel
tubes is inserted completely and the second level spool is
positioned slightly below the quick connector bottom end.
CAUTION:
● Hold at position "A" as shown, when inserting the fuel
tube into the quick connector.
● Carefully align to center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to the O-ring inside the quick connector.
● Insert the fuel tube until you hear a “click” sound and
KBIA0272E
actually feel the engagement.
● To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step.
Before clamping the fuel hose with the hose clamp, pull the quick connector hard by hand, holding at the
"A" position, as shown. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come off of the
fuel tube.
NOTE:
Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb).
Revision: March 2005
EM-22
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[QR25DE]
5.
6.
Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint.
● Direct arrow mark on quick connector cap to upper side (fuel
hose side).
Install fuel hose to hose clamp.
A
EM
C
KBIA0298E
D
CONNECTING QUICK CONNECTOR ON THE FUEL HOSE (VEHICLE PIPING SIDE)
1.
2.
Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector, and
there is no damage to them.
Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube.
● Insert fuel tube until a click is heard.
● Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint. Direct
arrow mark on quick connector cap upper side.
● Install fuel hose to hose clamp.
E
F
G
H
PBIC0662E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows:
1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight.
CAUTION:
Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot.
● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after
finishing repairs. Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-23
2005 Altima
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
[QR25DE]
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
PFP:14004
EBS00J4R
PBIC0279E
1.
Exhaust manifold and three way cat- 2.
alyst assembly
Exhaust manifold gasket
4.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
Heated oxygen sensor
5.
3.
Exhaust manifold cover (upper and
lower)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the engine undercover using power tools.
Disconnect the electrical connector of heated oxygen sensor 1 or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, and unhook
the harness from the bracket and middle clamp on the cover.
Remove the heated oxygen sensor 1 or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 using Tool.
Tool numbers
:
—
(J-44626)
: KV10117100 (J-36471-A)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor or air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor.
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor which has been dropped from a height of more
than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Remove the lower exhaust manifold covers.
Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the upper exhaust manifold cover.
●
4.
5.
6.
Revision: March 2005
EM-24
WBIA0474E
2005 Altima
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
[QR25DE]
7.
8.
Loosen the nuts in the sequence as shown, on the exhaust
manifold and three way catalyst.
Remove the exhaust manifold and three way catalyst assembly
and gasket. Discard the gasket.
A
EM
C
WBIA0022E
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
●
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of exhaust manifold fitting surface.
Limit
E
: 0.7 mm (0.0276 in)
F
G
KBIA0046E
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following.
I
Tightening Exhaust Manifold Nuts
●
Tighten the nuts in the numerical order shown, to specification.
After tightening No.5, retighten No.1 and then No.3 to specification.
J
K
L
WBIA0023E
Installation of A/F Sensors and Heated Oxygen Sensors
Clean the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor threads with the Tool, then apply the anti-seize lubricant to
the threads before installing the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensors.
Tool number
a: J-43897 - 18
b: J-43897 - 12
CAUTION:
Do not over-tighten the A/F sensors and heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the
A/F sensors and heated oxygen sensors, resulting in a malfunction and the MIL coming on.
Revision: March 2005
EM-25
2005 Altima
M
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[QR25DE]
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Removal and Installation
PFP:11110
EBS00J4S
WBIA0218E
1.
Oil dipstick tube
2.
Oil pan, upper
3.
Cylinder block
4.
Oil filter
5.
Oil pickup screen
6.
Drain plug
7.
Oil pan, lower
8.
Rear plate cover
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot.
1. Remove the engine under covers on both sides, using power tool.
2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
3. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove power steering hose bracket from rear of collector.
5. Support the engine from above and underneath with suitable hoist and floor jack.
6. Remove the front suspension member for clearance to remove the oil pan. Refer to FSU-15, "REMOVAL"
.
7. Remove the lower oil pan bolts. Loosen the bolts in the order
shown, using power tool.
LBIA0070E
Revision: March 2005
EM-26
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[QR25DE]
8.
Remove the lower oil pan using Tool.
NOTE:
Tap gently to cut sealant around the pan; do not damage the
mating surface using Tool.
Tool number
A
EM
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
C
WBIA0475E
D
9. Remove the oil pickup screen.
10. Remove rear plate cover, and four engine-to transaxle bolts, using power tool.
E
11. Loosen the upper oil pan bolts in the order shown to remove
upper oil pan, using power tool.
F
G
H
LBIA0072E
12. Remove upper oil pan using Tool.
NOTE:
Tap gently to cut sealant around the pan; do not damage the
mating surface using Tool.
Tool number
I
J
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
K
WBIA0475E
L
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
Clean the oil pickup screen to remove any foreign material.
M
INSTALLATION
1.
a.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Paying attention to the following.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent, to the upper
oil pan. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" , and EM-6, "Precautions for Liquid
Gasket" .
● Install the two new O-rings in the upper oil pan.
SBIA0253E
Revision: March 2005
EM-27
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[QR25DE]
b.
Tighten the upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown.
● Bolt No.10,11,18 indicate a double tightening in the sequence
of bolt No.s 1, 2, 3.
NOTE:
Refer below for specified bolt sizes:
M6 × 20 mm (0.79 in): No.19, 20
M8 × 25 mm (0.98 in): No.1, 3, 4, 9
M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No.2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 17
M8 x100 mm (3.97 in): No.12, 13, 14, 15, 16
LBIA0073E
c.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent to the lower
oil pan. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" , and EM-6, "Precautions for Liquid
Gasket"
SBIA0254E
d.
Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in the numerical order shown.
● Wait at least 30 minutes after the oil pans are installed before
filling the engine with oil.
LBIA0074E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
Check for any engine oil leaks with the engine at operating temperature and running at idle.
Revision: March 2005
EM-28
2005 Altima
IGNITION COIL
[QR25DE]
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation
PFP:22448
A
EBS00J4T
EM
C
D
E
F
WBIA0024E
1.
Ignition coil
2.
Spark plug
3.
Rocker cover
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
G
Remove the engine cover.
Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil.
Remove the ignition coil.
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock it.
I
J
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-29
2005 Altima
SPARK PLUG
[QR25DE]
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
PFP:22401
EBS00J4U
WBIA0024E
1.
Ignition coil
2.
Spark plug
3.
Rocker cover
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the spark plug with a suitable spark plug wrench.
Temperature range
NGK
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
SEM294A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Use standard type spark plug for normal conditions.
The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
●
Frequent engine starts.
●
Low ambient temperatures.
The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as:
●
Extended highway driving.
●
Frequent high engine revolution.
●
Revision: March 2005
EM-30
2005 Altima
SPARK PLUG
[QR25DE]
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plugs. Replace
as necessary.
A
EM
C
SMA773C
D
If plug is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time
: less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi)
: less than 20 seconds
E
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between
change intervals.
Gap (nominal)
F
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
G
H
SMA806CA
I
INSTALLATION
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-31
2005 Altima
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[QR25DE]
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
PFP:16600
EBS00J4V
WBIA0147E
1.
Fuel hose
2.
Intake manifold
3.
Sub-harness
4.
Fuel tube
5.
Clip
6.
O-ring
7.
Fuel injector
8.
Insulator
CAUTION:
●
Apply new engine oil to parts before installing the parts, as shown above.
●
Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the fuel hose quick connector at the fuel tube side. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
CAUTION:
● Prepare a container and cloth for catching any spilled fuel.
● This operation should be performed in a place that is free from any open flames.
Revision: March 2005
EM-32
2005 Altima
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[QR25DE]
While hoses are disconnected seal their openings with vinyl bag or similar material to prevent
foreign material from entering them.
A
Remove the intake collector. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Disconnect sub-harness for injector at engine front side, and remove it from bracket.
EM
Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, then remove fuel tube
and fuel injectors as an assembly.
Remove the fuel injectors from the fuel tube.
C
● Release the clip and remove the fuel injector.
● Pull fuel injector straight out of the fuel tube.
● Be careful not to damage the nozzle.
D
● Avoid any impact, such as dropping the fuel injector.
● Do not disassemble or adjust the fuel injector.
●
4.
5.
6.
7.
KBIA0239E
E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Install new O-rings on the fuel injector.
● Lubricate the O-rings lightly with new engine oil.
● Be careful not to scratch it during installation. Also be careful not to twist or stretch the O-ring.
If the O-ring was stretched while it is attached, do not insert it into the fuel tube immediately.
Install the fuel injector into the fuel tube with the following procedure:
● Do not reuse the clip, replace it with a new one.
● Insert the new clip into the clip mounting groove on fuel injector.
● Insert the clip so that projection "A" of fuel injector matches
notch "A" of the clip.
Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
● Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
● Insert fuel injector so that projection "B" of fuel injector
matches notch "B" of the clip.
● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on the clip.
● Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel
injector does not rotate or come off.
Install fuel tube assembly.
Insert the tip of each fuel injector into intake manifold.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
KBIA0240E
b.
Tighten the bolts in two steps in the numerical order as shown.
Fuel tube assembly bolts
Step 1
: 9.3 - 10.8 N·m (0.95 - 1.1 kg-m, 83 - 95 in-lb.)
Step 2
: 20.6 - 26.5 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb.)
KBIA0239E
Revision: March 2005
EM-33
2005 Altima
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[QR25DE]
CAUTION:
●
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel
leakage.
5. Install the intake collector. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
6. Connect the fuel hose quick connector. Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows:
1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight.
CAUTION:
Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot.
● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC93, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after
finishing repairs. Refer to EC-93, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-34
2005 Altima
ROCKER COVER
[QR25DE]
ROCKER COVER
Removal and Installation
PFP:13264
A
EBS00J4W
EM
C
D
E
F
WBIA0153E
1.
PCV valve
4.
Rocker cover gasket
2.
Oil filler cap
3.
G
Rocker cover
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the PCV hose and breather hose from the rocker cover.
Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown using power
tool.
Remove the rocker cover. Remove the oil filler cap and PCV
valve if necessary, to transfer to the new rocker cover.
I
J
K
L
WBIA0025E
M
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply RTV Silicone Sealant to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps
below:
Revision: March 2005
EM-35
2005 Altima
ROCKER COVER
[QR25DE]
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer
to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
Refer to illustration “a” to apply sealant to joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head.
Refer to illustration “b” to apply sealant in a 90° degree angle to
the illustration “a”.
Install the rocker cover.
● The rocker cover gasket must be securely installed in the
groove in the rocker cover.
●
a.
b.
2.
WBIA0164E
3.
Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps, in the numerical
order as shown.
Rocker cover bolt
tightening 1st step
Rocker cover bolt
tightening 2nd step
: 1.0 - 2.9 N·m (0.1 - 0.3 kg-m,
9 - 26 in-lb)
: 7.4 - 9.3 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m,
65 - 82 in-lb)
WBIA0071E
4.
5.
Connect the PCV hose and breather hose to the rocker cover. If necessary, install the oil filler cap and
PCV valve and lubricate the PCV valve O-ring with new engine oil.
Install the ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-36
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
PFP:13001
A
EBS00J4X
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WBIA0304E
K
1.
Camshaft brackets (1 - 5)
2.
Washer
3.
Front cover (partial view)
4.
Chain guide
5.
Chain tensioner
6.
O-ring(s)
7.
Chain tensioner spring
8.
Chain tensioner plunger
9.
IVT control solenoid valve
10. IVT control cover
11. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
12. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
13. Valve lifter
14. Camshaft (EXH)
15. Camshaft (INT)
16. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front right side tire and wheel using power tool.
Remove the RH splash shield using power tool.
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the coolant overflow reservoir tank.
Disconnect variable timing control solenoid harness connector.
Revision: March 2005
L
EM-37
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
7.
Loosen the bolts in the order as shown.
WBIA0027E
●
Remove the IVT control cover by cutting the sealant using
Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
WBIA0475E
8.
a.
b.
Set the No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke with the
following procedure:
Open the splash cover on RH under cover.
Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise, and align mating marks for
TDC with timing indicator on front cover, as shown.
KBIA0190E
c.
At the same time, make sure that the mating marks on camshaft
sprockets are lined up with the yellow links in the timing chain,
as shown.
● If not, rotate crankshaft pulley one more turn to line up the
mating marks to the yellow links, as shown.
KBIA0115E
9.
Pull the timing chain guide out between the camshaft sprockets through front cover.
Revision: March 2005
EM-38
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
10. Remove camshaft sprockets with the following procedure.
CAUTION:
● Do not rotate the crankshaft or camshaft while the timing
chain is removed. It causes interference between valve
and piston.
NOTE:
● Chain tension holding work is not necessary. Crankshaft
sprocket and timing chain do not disconnect structurally while
front cover is attached.
a. Line up the mating marks on camshaft sprockets with the yellow
links in the timing chain, and paint an indelible mating mark on
the sprocket and timing chain link plate.
b. Push in the tensioner plunger and hold. Insert a stopper pin into
the hole on tensioner body to hold the chain tensioner. Remove
the timing chain tensioner.
● Use a wire with 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter for a stopper pin.
c. Secure the hexagonal part of camshaft with a suitable tool.
Loosen the camshaft sprocket mounting bolts and remove the
camshaft sprockets.
A
EM
C
KBIA0049E
D
E
F
G
KBIA0048E
H
11. Loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in the order as shown, and
remove the camshaft brackets and camshafts.
● Remove No.1 camshaft bracket by slightly tapping it with a
rubber mallet.
12. Remove the valve lifters.
● Check mounting positions, and set them aside in the order
removed.
I
J
K
WBIA0028E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Runout
1.
2.
3.
L
Put the camshaft on a V-block supporting the No.2 and No.5
journals.
Set the dial gauge vertically on the No.3 journal.
Turn camshaft in one direction by hand, and measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauge total indicator reading.
Standard
M
: Less than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
PBIC0038E
Revision: March 2005
EM-39
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
Camshaft Cam Height
1.
Measure the camshaft cam height.
Standard intake cam height
Standard exhaust cam height
2.
: 45.665 - 45.855 mm
(1.7978 - 1.8053 in)
: 43.975 - 44.165 mm
(1.7313 - 1.7388 in)
If wear is beyond the limit, replace the camshaft.
PBIC0039E
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal
●
Measure the outer diameter of the camshaft journal.
Standard No.1 outer
diameter
Standard No.2, 3, 4, 5,
outer diameter
: 27.935 - 27.955 mm
(1.0998 - 1.1006 in)
: 23.435 - 23.455 mm
(0.9226 - 0.9234 in)
PBIC0040E
Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket
●
Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts to the specified torque following the tightening pattern as shown. Refer to Step 4 of EM-42,
"INSTALLATION" , of ″CAMSHAFT″ for the specified torque
sequence.
SBIA0255E
●
Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter of camshaft
bracket.
Standard
No.1
Standard
No.2, 3, 4, 5
: 28.000 - 28.021 mm (1.1024 - 1.1032 in)
: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 in)
PBIC0041E
Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance
●
(Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal)
Standard
●
: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in)
When out of the specified range above, replace either or both the camshaft and the cylinder head assembly.
Revision: March 2005
EM-40
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
NOTE:
Inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. If the camshaft
bracket is out of specification, replace the whole cylinder head assembly.
A
Camshaft End Play
1.
Standard end
play
2.
3.
EM
Install a dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the
camshaft. Measure the end play with the dial gauge while moving the camshaft forward and backward (in direction to axis).
C
: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in)
If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and
measure again.
If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder
head assembly.
D
PBIC0042E
E
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
1.
2.
3.
Install the camshaft in the cylinder head.
Install the camshaft sprocket on the camshaft.
Measure camshaft sprocket runout while turning the camshaft
by hand.
Runout
4.
F
G
: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
If it exceeds the specification, replace camshaft sprocket.
H
I
KBIA0181J
J
Valve Lifter
●
Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or
cracks, replace as necessary.
K
L
M
KBIA0182E
Valve Lifter Clearance
Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter
●
Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter.
Valve lifter
outer diameter
●
: 33.965 - 33.980 mm (1.3372 - 1.3378 in)
If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter.
JEM798G
Revision: March 2005
EM-41
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
Valve Lifter Bore Inner Diameter
●
Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore
of cylinder head.
Standard
●
: 34.000 - 34.021 mm (1.3386 - 1.3394 in)
If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly.
PBIC0043E
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance
●
(Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) – (outer diameter of valve lifter)
Standard
●
: 0.020 - 0.056 mm (0.0008 - 0.0022 in)
If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install the valve lifter.
● Install them in the same position from which they were removed.
Install the camshafts.
● The distinction between the intake and exhaust camshafts is
in a difference of shapes of the back end:
Intake: Signal plate for the camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Exhaust: Cone end shape
KBIA0246E
●
Install camshafts so that the dowel pins on the front side are
positioned as shown.
KBIA0051E
3.
Install camshaft brackets.
● Install by referring to identification mark on upper surface
mark.
● Install so that identification mark can be correctly read when
viewed from the exhaust side.
SBIA0256E
Revision: March 2005
EM-42
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
Install No. 1 camshaft bracket as follows.
– Apply sealant to No.1 camshaft bracket as shown.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer
to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
CAUTION:
● After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive sealant leaking from part “A” (both on right and left sides).
●
A
EM
C
SBIA0257E
D
●
●
Apply sealant to camshaft bracket contact surface on the front
cover backside.
Apply sealant to the outside of bolt hole on front cover.
E
F
G
SBIA0258E
●
H
Position the No.1 camshaft bracket near the mounting position, and install it without disturbing the sealant applied to the
surfaces.
I
J
K
SBIA0259E
4.
Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in four steps in the order as
shown.
L
Step 1 (bolts 9 - 11) : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8) : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Step 3 (bolts 1 - 11) : 5.9 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Step 4 (bolts 1 - 11) : 9.0 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.2 kg-m,
80 - 104 in-lb)
CAUTION:
After tightening camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off
excessive sealant from the parts listed below.
● Mating surface of rocker cover.
● Mating surface of front cover, when installed without the front cover.
Revision: March 2005
EM-43
M
SBIA0255E
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
5.
Install camshaft sprockets.
● Install them by lining up the mating marks on each camshaft
sprocket with the ones painted on the timing chain during
removal.
● Before installation of chain tensioner, it is possible to re-match
the marks on timing chain with the ones on each sprocket.
CAUTION:
● Aligned mating marks could slip. Therefore, after matching them, hold the timing chain in place by hand.
● Before and after installing chain tensioner, check again to
make sure that mating marks have not slipped.
Camshaft sprocket mounting bolts
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
c.
KBIA0115E
: 128 - 156 N·m (13 - 16 kg-m,
94 - 115 ft-lb)
Install chain tensioner.
CAUTION:
● After installation, pull the stopper pin off completely, and make sure that the tensioner is fully
released.
Install chain guide.
Install IVT control cover with the following procedure.
Install IVT control solenoid valve to intake valve timing control
cover.
Install O-ring to front cover side.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant to the positions as shown
in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL
PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
SBIA0260E
d.
Install IVT control cover.
● Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
9. Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to EM-45, "Valve
Clearance" .
10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
KBIA0085E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
EBS00J4Y
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE
CAUTION:
●
Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT II
and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-169, "DTC P0011
IVT CONTROL" .
●
Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil.
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "ENGINE OIL" .
2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while
checking.
a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors if practical.
3. Remove IVT control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-37, "CAMSHAFT" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-44
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
4.
5.
6.
7.
Crank engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out
from IVT control cover oil hole. End cranking after checking.
A
WARNING:
Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.).
EM
CAUTION:
● Engine oil may squirt from IVT control solenoid valve
installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to preC
vent engine oil from splashing on worker, engine components and vehicle.
KBIA2683E
● Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components
D
such as drive belts or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil.
Clean oil groove between oil strainer and IVT control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from
E
IVT control cover oil hole. Refer to LU-5, "LUBRICATION SYSTEM" .
Remove components between IVT control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check
each oil groove for clogging.
F
● Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to LU-5, "LUBRICATION SYSTEM" .
After inspection, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Valve Clearance
EBS00J4Z
INSPECTION
●
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform this inspection as follows after removal, installation, or replacement of the camshaft or any valverelated parts, or if there are any unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time
(starting, idling, and/or noise).
Warm up the engine, then stop it.
Remove front RH engine under cover using power tool.
Remove the rocker cover using power tool.
Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation" .
Turn crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when
viewed from front) to align TDC identification mark (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
G
H
I
J
K
L
KBIA0190E
5.
At this time, check that the both intake and exhaust cam lobes of
No. 1 cylinder face outside.
● If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
KBIA0400J
Revision: March 2005
EM-45
2005 Altima
M
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
6.
By referring to the figure (locations indicated with black arrow),
measure valve clearances with a feeler gauge at locations
marked X as shown in the table below.
● No.1 cylinder compression TDC.
Cylinder
Valve
Measurable
No.1
INT
No.2
EXH
INT
×
×
×
EXH
No.3
INT
No.4
EXH
INT
EXH
x
KBIA0248E
●
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between valve
and camshaft.
Valve clearance standard:
Cold
Intake
: 0.24 - 0.32 mm (0.009 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Hot*
Intake
: 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
: 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in)
7.
8.
*Reference data at approximately 80°C (176°F)
CAUTION:
If inspection was carried out with cold engine, check that
values with fully warmed up engine are still within specifications.
Turn crankshaft one complete revolution (360°) and align mark on crankshaft pulley with pointer.
By referring to the figure (locations indicated with black arrow),
measure valve clearances with a feeler gauge at locations
marked X as shown in the table below.
● No.4 cylinder compression TDC.
Cylinder
Valve
No.1
INT
Measurable
EXH
No.2
INT
EXH
x
No.3
INT
×
KBIA0185E
No.4
EXH
INT
EXH
x
×
KBIA0249E
9.
If out of specifications, adjust as follows.
ADJUSTMENT
●
●
1.
2.
3.
Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter.
The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-37, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are outside the standard.
Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters with a
micrometer.
KBIA0057E
Revision: March 2005
EM-46
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[QR25DE]
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
A
● Valve lifter thickness calculation.
t = t1 + (C1 - C2)
t = Thickness of replacement valve lifter.
t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter.
EM
C1 = Measured valve clearance.
C2 = Standard valve clearance.
● Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp
C
marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder).
Stamp mark 696 indicates a thickness of 6.96 mm (0.2740 in)
Available thickness of valve lifter: 26 sizes with a range of
D
6.96 to 7.46 mm (0.2740 to 0.2937 in), in steps of 0.02 mm
(0.0008 in), when assembled at the factory.
Install the selected valve lifter.
E
Install camshaft.
Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns.
Check that valve clearances for cold engine are within specificaKBIA0119E
F
tions, by referring to the specified values.
After completing the repair, check valve clearances again with the specifications for warmed engine. Use
a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between the valve and camshaft. Make sure the values are
within specifications.
G
Valve clearance standard:
Cold
Intake
: 0.24 - 0.32 mm (0.009 - 0.013 in)
Exhaust
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
Hot*
Intake
: 0.32 - 0.40 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
: 0.33 - 0.41 mm (0.013 - 0.016 in)
H
I
*: Reference data at approximately 80°C (176°F)
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-47
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
TIMING CHAIN
Removal and Installation
PFP:13028
EBS00J50
WBIA0305E
1.
Oil rings
2.
Camshaft sprocket (INT)
3.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
4.
Chain tensioner
5.
Spring
6.
Chain tensioner plunger
7.
Timing chain slack guide
8.
Timing chain
9.
Front cover
10. Chain guide
11. IVT solenoid valve
12. IVT cover
13. Engine mounting bracket
14. Crankshaft pulley bolt
15. Crankshaft pulley
16. Front oil seal
17. Balancer unit timing chain tensioner
18. Oil pump drive spacer
19. Crankshaft sprocket
20. Timing chain tension guide
21. Balancer unit timing chain
22. Balancer unit
CAUTION:
Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation.
Revision: March 2005
EM-48
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
A
Support the engine and transaxle assembly with suitable tools.
Remove RH splash shield.
Remove the upper and lower oil pan, and oil strainer. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal" .
Remove engine cover.
Disconnect variable timing control solenoid harness connector.
Remove engine ground.
Remove the coolant overflow reservoir tank.
Position the RH engine compartment fuse and relay box aside.
Remove the RH engine mount and bracket. Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" .
Loosen bolts in the numerical order as shown.
EM
C
D
E
F
G
WBIA0027E
H
a.
Remove the IVT (intake valve timing) control cover using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
I
J
K
WBIA0475E
12. Pull chain guide between camshaft sprockets out through front cover.
L
13. Set the No.1 cylinder at TDC on the compression stroke with the
following procedure:
a. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise and align the mating
marks to the timing indicator on the front cover.
M
KBIA0190E
Revision: March 2005
EM-49
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
b.
At the same time, make sure that the mating marks on the camshaft sprockets are lined up as shown.
● If not lined up, rotate the crankshaft pulley one more turn to
line up the mating marks to the positions as shown.
KBIA0115E
14. Remove crankshaft pulley with the following procedure:
a. Hold the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool, then loosen the
crankshaft pulley bolt, and pull the pulley out about 10 mm (0.39
in).
KBIA0077E
b.
Attach suitable pulley puller in the M 6 (0.24 in diameter) thread
hole on crankshaft pulley, and remove crankshaft pulley using a
suitable puller.
KBIA0078E
15. Remove the front cover with the following procedure:
a. Loosen the bolts in the reverse order as shown, and remove
them.
b. Remove the front cover.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage the mounting surface.
16. If the front oil seal needs to be replaced, lift it out with a screwdriver to remove it.
WBIA0032E
Revision: March 2005
EM-50
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
17. Remove timing chain with the following procedure:
a. Push in the tensioner plunger. Insert a stopper pin into the hole
on the tensioner body to hold the chain tensioner.
● Use a wire of 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter as a stopper pin.
b. Remove the chain tensioner.
A
EM
C
KBIA0048E
c.
Secure hexagonal part of the camshaft with a wrench and
loosen the camshaft sprocket bolt and remove the camshaft
sprocket for both camshafts.
CAUTION:
● Do not rotate the crankshaft or camshafts while the timing chain is removed. It can cause damage to the valve
and piston.
D
E
F
G
KBIA0049E
H
18. Remove the chain slack guide, tension guide, timing chain, and oil pump drive spacer.
19. Remove the timing chain tensioner for the balancer unit with the
following procedure:
a. Lift the tensioner lever up, and release the ratchet claw for
installation.
b. Push tensioner sleeve in, and hold it.
c. Matching the hole on lever with the one on body, insert a stopper
pin to secure tensioner sleeve.
d. Remove the timing chain tensioner for the balancer unit.
20. Remove timing chain for balancer unit and crankshaft sprocket.
I
J
K
KBIA0121E
L
21. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown, and remove balancer
unit.
● Use Torx socket (size E14)
CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble balancer unit.
M
KBIA0122E
Revision: March 2005
EM-51
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Timing Chain
Check the timing chain for cracks or serious wear. If a defect is
detected, replace it.
PBIC0282E
Balancer Unit Bolt Outer Diameter
●
●
●
Measure outer diameters (d1, d2) at the two positions as shown.
Measure d2 within the range A.
If the value difference (d1 - d2) exceeds the limit (a dimension
difference is large), replace it with a new one.
Limit
: 0.15 mm (0. 0059 in) or more
KBIA0126E
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
●
There may be two color variations of the link marks (link colors) on the timing chain.
●
There are 26 links between the gold/yellow mating marks on the timing chain; and 64 links between the
camshaft sprocket gold/yellow link and the crankshaft sprocket orange/blue link, on the timing chain side
without the tensioner.
1. Make sure the crankshaft key points straight up.
2. Install the balancer unit and tighten the bolts in the numerical
order as shown:
CAUTION:
● When reusing a bolt, check its outer diameter before
installation. Refer to EM-52, "Balancer Unit Bolt Outer
Diameter" .
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
CAUTION:
● Check tightening angle with an angle wrench or a protractor. Do not make judgment by visual check alone.
● Apply new engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts.
Balancer unit bolts
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3 (Loosen in reverse
order or tightening)
KBIA0122E
: 45.2 - 51.0 N·m (4.6 - 5.2
kg-m, 34 - 37 ft-lb)
: 90° - 95° degrees rotation
(Target: 90° degrees)
: 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb)
WBIA0154E
Revision: March 2005
EM-52
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
Step 4
Step 5
3.
: 45.2 - 51.0 N·m (4.6 - 5.2
kg-m, 34 - 37 ft-lb)
: 90° - 95° degrees rotation
(Target: 90° degrees)
A
EM
Install the crankshaft sprocket and timing chain for the balancer
unit.
● Make sure that the crankshaft sprocket is positioned with mating marks on the block and sprocket meeting at the top.
● Install it by lining up mating marks on each sprocket and timing chain.
C
D
E
KBIA0123E
4.
5.
Install timing chain tensioner for balancer unit.
NOTE:
Chain guide and tensioner move freely with the staking pin as
the axle. Therefore, bolt hole position of the three points could
be changed during removal. If points change, temporarily tighten
the two bolts on the chain guide and move the tensioner to
match the bolt holes.
● Be careful not to let mating marks of each sprocket and timing
chain slip.
● After installation, make sure the mating marks have not
slipped, then remove stopper pin and release tensioner.
F
G
H
KBIA0124E
Install timing chain and related parts.
● Install by lining up mating marks on each sprocket and timing
chain as shown.
NOTE:
Before installing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the
position of mating mark on timing chain for that of each sprocket
for alignment.
CAUTION:
For the above reason, after the mating marks are aligned,
keep them aligned by holding them with a hand.
● Before and after installing chain tensioner, check again to
make sure that mating marks have not slipped.
● After installing chain tensioner, remove stopper pin, and make
sure the tensioner moves freely.
● To avoid skipped teeth, do not move crankshaft and camshaft
until front cover is installed.
J
K
L
M
SBIA0265E
Revision: March 2005
EM-53
I
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
6.
Install new front oil seal to front cover, using suitable tool
● Install new oil seal in until it is flush with front end surface of
front cover.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to cause damage to circumference of oil
seal.
SBIA0266E
7.
a.
b.
c.
Install front cover with the following procedure:
Install O-rings to cylinder head and cylinder block.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to positions
specified in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED
CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
Make sure the mating marks on the timing chain and each
sprocket are still aligned. Then install the front cover.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage the front oil seal during installation with the front end of the crankshaft.
SBIA0267E
d.
e.
Tighten front cover bolts in the numerical order as shown.
After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified
torque.
Front cover bolts : 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb)
8.
CAUTION:
Wipe off any excess sealant leaking at the surface for
installing the oil pan.
Install the chain guide between the camshaft sprockets.
KBIA0083E
Revision: March 2005
EM-54
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[QR25DE]
9.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Install IVT cover with the following procedure:
Install IVT solenoid valves to IVT cover.
Install new oil rings to the intake camshaft sprocket insertion points on IVT control cover backside.
Install new O-ring to front cover.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT cover as shown.
● Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to positions specified in the figure. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
A
EM
C
D
E
SBIA0260E
e.
Tighten the IVT cover bolts in the numerical order as shown.
IVT cover bolts
F
: 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m,
9-10 in-lb)
G
H
KBIA0085E
I
10. Insert crankshaft pulley by aligning with crankshaft key.
● Tap its center with a plastic hammer to insert.
● Do not tap the belt hook.
11. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolts.
● Secure crankshaft pulley with a pulley holder to tighten the bolt.
● Perform angle tightening with the following procedure:
a. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of bolts.
b. Tighten to initial specifications:·
Crankshaft pulley bolt initial tightening
J
K
L
: 37.3 - 47.1 N·m (3.8 - 4.8 kg-m, 28 - 34 ft-lb)
c.
Apply a paint mark on the front cover, mating with any one of six
easy to recognize stamp marks on bolt flange.
d. Turn crankshaft pulley bolt another 60° to 66° degrees [Target:
60° degrees].
● Check vertical mounting angle with movement of one stamp
mark.
12. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of
removal.
M
SBIA0268E
Revision: March 2005
EM-55
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[QR25DE]
OIL SEAL
Removal and installation of Valve Oil Seal
PFP:00100
EBS00J51
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-37, "REMOVAL" .
Remove valve lifter. Refer to EM-37, "REMOVAL" .
Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center. This prevents valve
from dropping inside cylinder.
CAUTION:
When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front cover with the timing chain.
Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
WBIA0477E
5.
Remove valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
WBIA0478E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
Press in valve oil seal to the position shown using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10115600 (J-38958)
WBIA0479E
3.
Installation of the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-56
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[QR25DE]
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
EBS00J52
A
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the following parts:
● Engine under cover using power tools.
● Drive belts. Refer to EM-15, "DRIVE BELTS" .
● Crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Remove front oil seal from front cover.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch front cover.
EM
C
D
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable
tool.
E
F
G
SBIA0266E
H
●
Install new oil seal in the direction shown.
I
J
K
SEM715A
2.
Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-57
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[QR25DE]
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
EBS00J53
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-17, "Removal and Installation" (M/T), AT-273, "REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" (A/T).
Remove flywheel (MT) or drive plate (AT).
Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear oil seal retainer.
WBIA0204E
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable drift.
● Install new oil seal in the direction shown.
SEM715A
●
Press fit new oil seal straight using a suitable drift, to avoid
causing burrs or tilting.
SBIA0280E
●
Press in the new oil seal to the specified depth as shown.
SBIA0281E
2.
Installation of the remaining components in reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-58
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:11041
A
EBS00J54
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Warm up the engine to full operating temperature.
EM
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder.
Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" .
C
Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-ll).
Disconnect the fuel injector harness connector to avoid any residual fuel injection during the measurement.
D
Install the compression tester with the adapter into the spark
plug hole.
E
F
G
KBIA0130E
H
●
Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark
plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 in) in diameter. Otherwise,
it may be caught by cylinder head during removal.
I
J
K
SEM387C
7.
With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to the “START” position to crank over
the engine. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform
these steps to check each cylinder.
L
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / rpm
M
Standard
Minimum
1,250 (12.8, 181.3) / 250
1,060 (10.8, 153.7) / 250
Difference limit between cylinders
100 (1.0, 14) / 250
CAUTION:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine cranking speed.
●
If the engine speed is out of specified rpm range, check the battery. Check engine speed again with a fully
charged battery.
●
If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again.
●
If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole
of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
●
If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn or damaged. Check the
piston rings and replace if necessary.
●
If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
Revision: March 2005
EM-59
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
●
8.
If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low
even after the addition of engine oil, the head gasket is leaking. In such a case, replace the cylinder head
gasket.
Install spark plug, ignition coil and harness connectors.
Revision: March 2005
EM-60
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
Removal and Installation
EBS00J55
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0225E
1.
Ignition coil
2.
Spark plug
3.
Oil filler cap
4.
PCV valve
5.
Rocker cover
6.
Rocker cover gasket
7.
Valve spring retainer
O-ring
8.
Valve collet
9.
10. Valve spring
11.
Valve oil seal
12. Valve guide
13. Spark plug tube
14. Cylinder head bolt
Revision: March 2005
EM-61
15. Cylinder head gasket
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
16. Valve seat (EXH)
17. Valve (EXH)
19. Valve seat (INT)
20. Cylinder head
18. Valve (INT)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the camshafts. Refer to EM-37, "CAMSHAFT" .
Remove spark plugs. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front suspension member refer to FSU-15, "FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER" .
Position the power steering pump and reservoir aside.
Disconnect the A/C compressor and position it out of the way with wire.
Remove cylinder head loosening bolts in the order as shown,
using power tool.
If necessary to transfer to new cylinder head or remove for
reconditioning, remove the intake manifold collector, intake manifold, and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-64, "Disassembly and
Assembly" .
WBIA0033E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts
●
Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening method. Whenever the size difference
between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones.
Limit (d1 - d2)
●
: 0.23 mm (0.0091 in) or less
If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other than
d2, use it as d2 point.
KBIA0189E
Revision: March 2005
EM-62
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
INSTALLATION
A
1.
Install a new cylinder head gasket.
2.
Follow the steps below to tighten the cylinder head bolts in the
numerical order as shown.
CAUTION:
● If cylinder head bolts are re-used, check their outer diameters before installation. Refer to EM-62, "Outer Diameter
of Cylinder Head Bolts" .
Step a
Step b
Step c
Step d
Step e
: 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb)
: Loosen to 0 N·m in the reverse order of
tightening.
: 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)
: 75° clockwise
: 75° clockwise
EM
C
D
KBIA0058E
E
Apply new engine oil to the threads and the seating surfaces
of bolts.
CAUTION:
Check and confirm the tightening angle by using angle
wrench or protractor. Avoid judgment by visual inspection
without the tool.
●
Tool number
F
G
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
H
WBIA0033E
I
J
K
L
WBIA0155E
3.
Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-63
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
Disassembly and Assembly
EBS00J56
WBIA0310E
1.
Valve collet
2.
Valve spring retainer
3.
Valve spring (with valve spring seat)
4.
Valve oil seal
5.
Valve guide
6.
Cylinder head
7.
Valve seat (INT)
8.
valve (INT)
9.
Valve (EXH)
10. Valve seat (EXH)
11. Spark plug
12. Spark plug tube
CAUTION:
●
When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting
surfaces with new engine oil.
●
Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces when installing the cylinder head, camshaft
sprocket, crankshaft pulley and camshaft bracket.
●
Attach tags to valve lifters so all parts are assembled in their original position.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove the valve lifter.
● Confirm installation point.
Remove the valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring
using Tool.
Tool number
3.
4.
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
CAUTION:
Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring.
Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove
valve.
● Inspect valve guide clearance before removal. Refer to EM66, "VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE" .
● Confirm installation point.
Remove valve oil seal using Tool.
Revision: March 2005
EM-64
WBIA0477E
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
Tool number
5.
6.
7.
8.
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
A
When valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-68, "VALVE
SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
When valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-66, "VALVE
GUIDE REPLACEMENT" .
Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
Remove spark plug tubes, if necessary using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage cylinder head.
● Do not remove spark plug tube if not necessary. Once
removed, the spark plug tube cannot be reused because of deformation.
EM
C
WBIA0478E
D
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Tool number
4.
E
Install valve guide. Refer to EM-66, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" .
Install valve seat. Refer to EM-68, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
Install new valve oil seal using Tool.
F
: KV10115600 (J-38958)
Install valve.
● Install larger diameter to intake side.
G
H
WBIA0479E
I
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a.
b.
c.
Install valve spring.
● Install smaller pitch (valve spring seat side) to cylinder head
side.
● Confirm the identification color of the valve spring:
Intake: blue
Exhaust: yellow
Install valve spring retainer.
Install valve collet using Tool.
● Compress valve spring with valve spring compressor. Install
valve collet with magnet hand.
● Tap stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to
check its installed condition.
Install valve lifter.
Install spark plug tube.
Remove old liquid gasket from cylinder head side mounting
hole.
Apply liquid gasket all around on spark plug tube with a 12 mm
(0.47 in) width from edge of spark plug tube on the press fit side.
● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to
MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Press fit spark plug tube so that height is to ″H″ as shown.
Press fit height ″H″ standard
value
J
K
L
WBIA0072E
M
: 38.55 - 38.65 mm
(1.518 - 1.522 in)
SBIA0252E
CAUTION:
● When press fitting be careful not to deform spark plug tube.
● After press fitting, wipe off any protruding liquid gasket on top surface of cylinder head.
Revision: March 2005
EM-65
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
10. Install spark plug using suitable tool.
Inspection After Disassembly
EBS00J57
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
1.
2.
Wipe off oil and remove water scale deposits, old gasket, old
sealer, and carbon with a scraper.
CAUTION:
Use care not to allow gasket debris to enter passages for oil
or water.
At each of several locations on bottom surface of cylinder head,
measure distortion in six directions.
Limit
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less
PBIC0075E
VALVE DIMENSIONS
Check dimensions of each valve. Refer to EM-100, "VALVE" .
SEM188A
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
Perform this inspection before removing the valve guide.
1. Make sure that the valve stem diameter is within the specification.
2. Push the valve out by approximately 15 mm (0.59 in) toward the combustion chamber side to measure the
valve's run-out volume (in the direction of dial gauge) with dial gauge.
3. Half of the run-out volume accounts for the valve guide clearance.
Intake valve clearance
Exhaust valve clearance
: 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 0.0021 in) or less
: 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 0.0025 in) or less
PBIC0077E
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized (0.2 mm, 0.008 in) valve guide.
Revision: March 2005
EM-66
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
1.
To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C
(230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
A
EM
C
SEM008A
D
2.
Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2.2 ton-force)
pressure] or hammer and suitable tool.
E
F
G
SEM931C
3.
Intake and exhaust valve guide
hole diameter (Service)
4.
H
Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable reamer.
: 10.175 - 10.196 mm
(0.4006 - 0.4014 in)
I
Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking
in heated oil.
J
K
SEM932C
5.
Press valve guide from camshaft side to dimensions as shown.
L
M
PBIC0078E
Revision: March 2005
EM-67
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
6.
Apply finish to valve guide using suitable reamer.
Intake and exhaust
: 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 0.2369 in)
SEM932C
VALVE SEAT CONTACT
NOTE:
After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are
within specifications, perform this procedure:
●
Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of
valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the seat
surface.
●
Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference.
●
If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has NG conditions even after the re-check,
replace the valve seat.
SBIA0322E
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
When valve seat is removed, replace with an oversized [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] valve seat.
1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess
in the cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this.
2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat.
Intake
Exhaust
●
: 37.000 - 37.016 mm (1.4567 - 1.4573 in)
: 32.000 - 32.016 mm (1.2598 - 1.2605 in)
Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
This will enable the valve seat to fit correctly.
SEM795A
3.
Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking
in heated oil.
SEM008A
4.
Use valve seats cooled well with dry ice. Force fit valve seat into cylinder head.
CAUTION:
Avoid directly touching the cold valve seats.
Revision: March 2005
EM-68
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
5.
Finish the seat to the specified dimensions using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
When using valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle
with both hands. Then, press on the contacting surface all
around the circumference to cut in a single drive. Improper
pressure on the cutter or cutting many different times may
result in a defective valve seat.
A
EM
C
SEM934C
D
Grind to obtain the dimensions indicated as shown.
Standard
D1 dia.
D2 dia.
D3 dia.
D4 dia.
D5 dia.
D6 dia.
E
: 33.5 mm (1.3189 in)
: 35.1 - 35.3 mm (1.382 - 1.390 in)
: 39.0 - 39.2 mm (1.535 - 1.543 in)
: 28 mm (1.10 in)
: 29.9 - 30.1 mm (1.177- 1.185 in)
: 33.5 - 33.7 mm (1.319 - 1.327 in)
F
G
SBIA0226E
6.
7.
Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting.
Check again for normal contact.
H
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
Set try square along the side of the valve spring and rotate the
spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of the
spring and the try square.
Limit
I
: 1.9 mm (0.0748 in)
J
K
PBIC0080E
L
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD
Check valve spring pressure with valve spring seat installed at specified spring height. Replace if not within
specifications.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the valve spring seat.
SEM113
Revision: March 2005
EM-69
2005 Altima
M
CYLINDER HEAD
[QR25DE]
STANDARD
Free height
Installation height
Installation load
Height during valve
open
Load with valve open
Revision: March 2005
INTAKE (identification color: blue)
EXHAUST (identification color: yellow)
44.84 - 45.34 mm (1.7654 - 1.7850 in)
45.28 - 45.78 mm (1.7827 - 1.8024 in)
35.30 mm (1.390 in)
35.30 mm (1.390)
151 - 175 Nm (15.4 - 17.8 kg-force, 34 - 39 lb-force)
151 - 175 Nm (15.4 - 17.8 kg-force, 34 - 39 lb-force)
24.94 mm (0.9819 in)
26.39 mm (1.0390 in)
358 - 408 N (36.5 - 41.6 kg-force, 80 - 92 lb-force)
325 - 371 N (33.1 - 37.8 kg-force, 73-83 lb-force)
EM-70
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[QR25DE]
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:10001
A
EBS00J58
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0221E
1.
LH transaxle mounting insulator (A/T) 2.
LH transaxle mounting bracket (M/T) 3.
LH transaxle mounting insulator (M/T)
4.
RH engine mounting insulator
Rear engine mounting insulator (orient by direction mark)
Front suspension member
7.
Front engine mounting insulator (orient by direction mark)
Revision: March 2005
5.
EM-71
6.
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[QR25DE]
WARNING:
●
Place chocks at the front and back of the rear wheels.
●
For engines not equipped with slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in the parts
catalog.
CAUTION:
●
Do not start working until the exhaust system and coolant are cool.
●
If items or work required are not covered by the engine main body section, refer to the applicable
sections.
●
Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-40, "LIFTING POINT" .
●
In removing the drive shaft, be careful not to damage the grease seals on the transaxle.
●
Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the
assembly.
●
Be sure not to damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Disconnect the fuel rail at the fuel hose quick connector (engine side). Refer to EM-19, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
Drain the engine oil. Refer to MA-18, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Remove the engine hood assembly. Refer to BL-13, "Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly" .
Remove the battery, battery hold downs, and battery tray.
Disconnect the engine room harness from the engine side and position it aside. Disconnect the engine
harness ground connections. Access the connector through the glove box opening.
Disconnect the MAF sensor electrical connector.
Remove the air duct and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the heater hoses.
Remove engine cover using power tool.
Remove the engine coolant reservoir tank, radiator and radiator fan assembly. Refer to CO-11, "Removal
and Installation" .
Disconnect and set aside the IPDM/ER and remove the IPDM/ER bracket. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
Remove the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal" .
Remove the engine under covers and splash shield using power tool.
Dismount the A/C compressor with piping connected and secure with wire to the radiator support.
Disconnect the engine wiring harness retainers and ground strap.
Remove clutch operating cylinder from transaxle, and move it aside (M/T models).
Disconnect the transaxle shift controls.
Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the left and right drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Dismount the power steering pump with piping connected and position it aside with wire.
Install engine slingers into front left cylinder head and rear right
cylinder head.
● Use alternator bracket bolt holes for the front slinger.
● Use the proper slingers and bolts as described in the Parts
Catalog.
Slinger bolts front
Slinger bolts rear
Revision: March 2005
: 51.0 - 64.7 N·m (5.2 - 6.5 kg-m,
38 - 47 ft-lb)
: 24.5 - 31.4 N·m (2.5 - 3.2 kg-m,
18 - 23 ft-lb)
EM-72
SBIA0271E
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[QR25DE]
25. Support engine and transaxle assembly with engine lifting equipment from the top with the vehicle raised
on a hoist.
A
26. Remove RH engine mounting insulator and bracket.
27. Remove LH transaxle mounting insulator through-bolts.
EM
28. Lower the engine and transaxle assembly from the engine compartment.
29. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
30. Separate engine and transaxle.
C
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0036E
●
●
Do not allow oil to get on mounting insulators. Be careful not to damage mounting insulators.
If parts have a direction mark (arrow) this indicates front of the vehicle, and the parts must be installed
according to the identification mark.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
Revision: March 2005
EM-73
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[QR25DE]
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points.
Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant.
Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
After cooling down engine, again check oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Other oils and fluids*
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
—
Leakage
—
Fuel
Exhaust gas
*Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
Revision: March 2005
EM-74
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
CYLINDER BLOCK
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:11010
A
EBS00J59
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0481E
1.
Cylinder block
2.
O-ring
3.
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
4.
Knock sensor
5.
Oil pressure switch
6.
Lower cylinder block
7.
Lower cylinder block bolt
8.
Snap ring
9.
Connecting rod
10. Connecting rod bearing
11. Connecting rod bearing cap
12. Connecting rod bearing cap bolt
13. Piston
14. Oil ring
15. Second ring
16. Top ring
17. Piston pin
18. Main thrust bearing
19. Main bearing upper
20. Crankshaft
21. Main bearing lower
22. Crankshaft rear oil seal
23. Pilot converter (A/T only)
24. Crankshaft signal plate
25. Drive plate
26. Reinforcement plate
27. Flywheel
28. Cylinder block heater (if equipped)
Revision: March 2005
EM-75
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
CAUTION:
Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the engine and transaxle as an assembly from the vehicle, and separate the transaxle from the
engine. Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" .
Mount the engine on a suitable engine stand.
Drain any remaining engine oil and coolant from the engine.
Remove the following components and associated parts.
● Exhaust manifold and three way catalyst assembly. Refer to EM-24, "Removal and Installation" .
● Intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-19, "Removal and Installation" .
● Intake manifold and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-19, "Removal and Installation" .
● Ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation" .
● Front cover, timing chain, and balancer unit. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation" .
● Cylinder head. Refer to EM-61, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the sensor and do not drop the sensor.
Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS).
CAUTION:
● Avoid impacts such as a dropping.
● Do not disassemble.
● Keep it away from metal particles.
● Do not place sensor close to magnetic materials.
WBIA0482E
7.
8.
Remove the flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (A/T models).
Hold the crankshaft with a stopper plate and use a suitable tool
to remove the bolts.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage the flywheel contact surface for
the clutch disc.
NOTE:
● The flywheel two-block construction allows movement in
response to transmission side pressure, or when twisted in its
rotational direction, therefore, some amount of noise is normal.
KBIA0062E
Remove pilot converter using Tool (A/T models).
WBIA0483E
Revision: March 2005
EM-76
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
9.
a.
Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies.
A
Position the crankshaft and corresponding connecting rod, to be
removed, to the bottom dead center stroke.
b. Remove the connecting rod cap. Number the cap so it can be
assembled in the same position.
EM
c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out of the top of the cylinder block. Number the piston and rod so it can be assembled in the same
C
position.
● Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly,
PBIC0259E
check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-90,
D
"CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" .
10. Remove the connecting rod bearings. If reusing, number them so they can be assembled in the same
position and direction.
E
CAUTION:
● When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order.
11. Remove the piston rings from the piston.
F
● Use a piston ring expander.
CAUTION:
● When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damG
age the piston.
● Be careful not to damage piston rings by expanding them
excessively, if reusing them.
H
● Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side
clearance. Refer to EM-91, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" .
PBIC0087E
I
12. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows.
a. Using a snap ring pliers, remove the two snap rings.
J
K
L
PBIC0260E
b.
M
Heat the piston to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F) with a heat gun, or
equivalent.
PBIC0261E
Revision: March 2005
EM-77
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
c.
Push out piston pin with a punch of an outer diameter of approximately 19 mm (0.75 in).
PBIC0262E
13. Remove the lower cylinder block bolts.
● Before loosening the lower cylinder block bolts, measure the
crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-89, "CRANKSHAFT
SIDE CLEARANCE" .
● Loosen them in the order as shown to remove them.
WBIA0037E
14. Remove the lower cylinder block.
● Cut the Silicone RTV Sealant and remove the lower cylinder
block from the cylinder block, using Tool.
Seal cutter
KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mounting surface.
SBIA0275E
15. Remove the crankshaft.
CAUTION:
● Do not damage or deform the signal plate while mounted on the crankshaft.
● When setting the crankshaft on a flat surface, use a block of wood to avoid interference
between the signal plate and the surface.
● Do not remove signal plate unless it is necessary.
16. Pull the rear oil seal out of the rear end of the crankshaft.
CAUTION:
Do not to damage the crankshaft or cylinder block when removing the rear oil seal.
NOTE:
When replacing the rear oil seal without removing the cylinder block, use a screwdriver to pull it out from
between crankshaft and block.
17. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and lower cylinder block.
CAUTION:
Identify and number the bearings, if reusing them, so that they are assembled in the same position
and direction.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Using compressed air, clean out the coolant and oil passages in the cylinder block, the cylinder bore and
the crankcase to remove any foreign material.
Revision: March 2005
EM-78
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
CAUTION:
Use approved safety glasses to protect your eyes.
2. Install the drain plugs on the cylinder block.
● Apply Silicone RTV Sealant.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer
to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
● Replace the copper washers with new ones.
A
EM
C
D
WBIA0159E
3.
a.
b.
Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings.
Remove dust, dirt, and oil from the bearing mating surfaces of
the cylinder block and lower cylinder block.
Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 main bearing
journal on the cylinder block.
● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside).
E
F
G
PBIC0264E
c.
4.
Install the main bearings paying attention to their position and
direction.
● The main bearing with an oil hole and groove goes on the cylinder block. The one without them goes on the lower cylinder
block.
● Only the main bearing (on the cylinder block) for No. 3 journal
has different specifications.
● Before installing the bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing
friction surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface,
but thoroughly clean it.
SBIA0277E
● When installing, align the bearing stopper to the notch.
● Make sure that the oil holes on the cylinder block and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned.
Install the signal plate to the crankshaft.
Signal plate bolts
a.
b.
5.
Revision: March 2005
EM-79
I
J
K
L
M
: 12 - 14 N·m (1.22 - 1.43 kg-m,
9 - 10 ft-lb)
Position the crankshaft and signal plate using a positioning
dowel pin, and tighten the bolts to specification.
Remove the dowel pin.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove dowel pin before installing the crankshaft.
NOTE:
Dowel pins for the crankshaft and signal plate are supplied as a
set for each.
Install the crankshaft onto the cylinder block.
● While turning the crankshaft by hand, check that it turns smoothly.
H
SBIA0278E
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
6.
Install the lower cylinder block.
● Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to positions as shown.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
NOTE:
Cylinder block and lower cylinder block are machined together.
Neither of them can be replaced separately.
CAUTION:
After the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied, the lower cylinder
block installation must be finished within 5 minutes.
7.
a.
b.
Tighten lower cylinder block bolts in the numerical order as
shown and according to the following steps:
Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the bolts.
Tighten bolts No. 1 - 10 only in the order as shown, to specification below.
First tightening,
bolts 1 - 10 only
c.
: 36.3 - 42.2 N·m (3.7 - 4.3 kgm, 27 - 31 ft-lb)
Tighten bolts No. 1 - 10 only in the order as shown, to specification below.
CAUTION:
Check tightening angle. Do not make judgment by visual inspection.
Tool number
: 60° - 65° degrees rotation
(target: 60° degrees)
Tighten bolts No. 11 - 22 only in the order as shown, to specification below.
Third tightening,
bolts 11 - 22 only
●
●
●
8.
KBIA0063E
: KV 10112100 (BT-8653-A)
Second tightening,
bolts 1 - 10 only
d.
WBIA0160E
: 19.6 - 24.5 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m,
15 - 18 ft-lb)
Wipe off completely any protruding Silicone RTV Sealant on
the exterior of engine.
Check crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-89, "CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE" .
After installing the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand.
WBIA0484E
Install the rear oil seal.
● Press the oil seal between cylinder block and crankshaft with
a suitable drift.
● Be careful not to touch the grease on the oil seal lip.
● Be careful not to cause scratches or burrs when pressing in
the rear oil seal.
SBIA0280E
Revision: March 2005
EM-80
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
●
Press in rear oil seal to the position as shown.
A
EM
C
SBIA0281E
D
9.
a.
b.
c.
Install the piston to the connecting rod. Assemble the components in their original positions.
Using a snap ring pliers, install the snap ring to the grooves of the piston's rear side.
● Insert the piston pin snap ring fully into groove.
Install the piston to the connecting rod.
● Using a heat gun, heat the piston [approximately 60° - 70 C° (140° - 158 °F)] until the piston pin can be
pushed in by hand without excessive force. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and the connecting rod.
● Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the
oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown.
Install the piston pin snap ring into the front of the piston.
● Check that the connecting rod moves smoothly.
E
F
G
H
I
PBIC0099E
10. Using a piston ring expander, install the piston rings. Assemble
the components in their original positions.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the piston.
● Position each ring with the gap as shown, referencing the piston front mark as the starting point.
● Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward.
Stamped mark
: A (top ring)
: 2A (second ring)
K
L
M
PBIC0100E
11. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the
connecting rod cap. Assemble the components in their original
positions.
● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil
to the bearing friction surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the
back surface, but thoroughly clean the back.
● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing stopper protrusion with the notch of the connecting rod to install.
● Check the oil holes on the connecting rod and those on the
corresponding bearing are aligned.
PBIC0266E
Revision: March 2005
EM-81
J
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
12. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft. Assemble the components in their original positions.
Tool number
: EM03470000
Rotate the crankshaft so the pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed is at the bottom dead center position.
● Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and
crankshaft pin.
● Match the cylinder position number with the cylinder No. on
the connecting rod for installation.
● Using a piston ring compressor, install the piston with the front
WBIA0485E
mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod
big end.
13. Install the connecting rod caps. Assemble the components in
their original positions.
● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting
rod with those on the cap to install.
●
SBIA0282E
14. Tighten the connecting rod bolt as follows:
Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting rod
bolts.
CAUTION:
Check tightening angle. Do not make judgment by visual
inspection.
Tool number
Stage 1
Stage 2
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
: 18.6 - 20.6 N·m (1.9 - 2.1 kg-m,
14 - 15 ft-lb)
: Rotate bolts 85° - 95° degrees
(target 90° degrees)
WBIA0163E
Check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-90, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" .
● After tightening the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly.
15. Install flywheel (M/T Models), or drive plate (A/T Models).
● Install drive plate, reinforcement plate and pilot converter as
shown.
● Using a drift with 33 mm (1.30 in) diameter, push pilot converter into the end of the crankshaft.
●
KBIA0075E
Revision: March 2005
EM-82
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
16. Install the knock sensor.
● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder
block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor.
● Install the knock sensor with the connector facing lower left by
45° as shown.
● Do not tighten the bolts while holding the connector.
● Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other
parts.
Knock sensor bolt
A
EM
C
: 15.7 - 26.5 N·m (1.6 - 2.7 kg-m,
12 - 19 ft-lb)
KBIA0069E
D
CAUTION:
If the knock sensor is dropped, replace it with new one.
17. Install the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Crankshaft position sensor bolt
E
: 5.4 - 7.3 N·m (0.55 - 0.75 kg-m, 48 - 65 in-lb)
F
18. Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
How to Select Piston and Bearing
EBS00J5A
DESCRIPTION
Selection points
Between cylinder block to
crankshaft
G
Selection parts
Selection items
Main bearing grade (bearing
thickness)
Main bearing
Selection methods
Determined by match of cylinder block bearing housing
grade (inner diameter of housing) and crankshaft journal
grade (outer diameter of journal)
Between crankshaft to connecting rod
Connecting rod bearing
Connecting rod bearing grade
(bearing thickness)
Combining service grades for
connecting rod big end inner
diameter and crankshaft pin
outer diameter determine connecting rod bearing selection
Between cylinder block to piston
Piston and piston pin assembly
(The piston is available
together with piston pin as an
assembly)
Piston grade (piston outer
diameter)
Piston grade = cylinder bore
grade (inner diameter of bore)
*Between piston to connecting
rod
—
J
K
—
HOW TO SELECT A PISTON
When New Cylinder Block is Used:
Check the cylinder bore grade on rear left side of cylinder block, and select a piston of the same grade.
Revision: March 2005
I
L
—
*For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod.
(Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference.
●
The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition.
This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
●
For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the
measurement with the values of each selection table.
●
For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the
selective fitting parts, refer to the text.
●
H
EM-83
2005 Altima
M
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
If there is a corrected stamp mark on the cylinder block, use it as
a correct reference.
●
SBIA0283E
WBIA0074E
When a Cylinder Block is Reused:
1.
2.
Measure the cylinder block bore inner diameter.
Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the cylinder bore inner
diameter of the "Piston Selection Table". Select the piston of the same grade.
Piston Selection Table
Unit: mm (in)
Grade number (Mark)
2 (or no mark)
3
Inner diameter of cylinder bore
89.010-89.020 (3.5043-3.5047)
89.020-89.030 (3.5047-3.5051)
Outer diameter of piston
88.990-89.000 (3.5035-3.5039)
89.000-89.010 (3.5039-3.5043)
NOTE:
●
The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.
●
The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts,
no grades can be selected. Only 0 grade is available.
HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING
When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used:
1.
Apply big end inside diameter grade stamped on connecting rod
side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table".
SBIA0282E
Revision: March 2005
EM-84
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
2.
3.
4.
Apply pin diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to
the column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column
in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
Apply the symbol obtained to connecting rod bearing grade table
to select.
A
EM
C
KBIA0073E
D
When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused:
1.
Measure dimensions of the big end inner diameter of connecting rod and outer diameter of crankshaft pin
individually.
2. Apply the dimension measured to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table" below.
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
KBIA0147E
Revision: March 2005
EM-85
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table
Grade
Upper / Lower thickness mm (in)
Identification color
0
1
2
3
1.499 / 1.495
(0.0590 / 0.0589)
1.503 / 1.499
(0.0592 / 0.0590)
1.507 / 1.503
(0.0593 / 0.0592)
1.511 / 1.507
(0.0595 / 0.0593)
Black
Brown
Green
Yellow
Undersize Bearing Usage Guide
●
●
When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearing, use undersize
(US) bearing.
When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and grind the
crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
Bearing Undersize Table
Unit: mm (in)
Size U.S.
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
1.624 - 1.632 (0.0639 - 0.0643)
CAUTION:
In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, do not
damage the fillet R (All crankshaft pins).
KBIA0148E
HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used:
1.
"Main Bearing Selection Table" rows correspond to bearing
housing grade on rear left side of cylinder block.
● If there is a corrected stamp mark on the cylinder block, use it
as a correct reference.
SBIA0283E
2.
Apply journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side
to column in "Main Bearing Selection Table".
KBIA0073E
3.
4.
Find value at crossing of row and column in "Main Bearing Selection Table".
CAUTION:
● There are two main bearing selection tables. One is for odd-numbered journals (1, 3, and 5) and
the other is for even-numbered journals (2 and 4). Make certain to use the appropriate table.
This is due to differences in the specified clearances.
Apply the symbol obtained to "Main Bearing Grade Table" to select.
NOTE:
● Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower.
Revision: March 2005
EM-86
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused:
1.
2.
3.
Measure inner diameter of cylinder block main bearing housing and outer diameter of crankshaft journal.
Apply measurement in above step 1 to the "Main Bearing Selection Table".
Follow steps 3 and 4 in “When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used”.
Main Bearing Selection Table (No.1, 3, and No.5 journals)
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
KBIA0149E
Revision: March 2005
EM-87
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
Main Bearing Selection Table (No.2,and 4 journals)
KBIA0150E
Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals)
Unit: mm (in)
Grade number
Thickness
Identification color
(UPR / LWR)
0
1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778)
Black
1
1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779)
Brown
2
1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779- 0.0780)
Green
3
1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781)
Yellow
4
1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783)
Blue
5
1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784)
Pink
6
1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785)
Purple
7
1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786)
Orange
Revision: March 2005
EM-88
Remarks
Grade and color are the same
for upper and lower bearings.
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
UPR
1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778)
LWR
1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779)
UPR
1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779)
LWR
1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780)
UPR
1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780)
LWR
1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781)
UPR
1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781)
LWR
1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783)
UPR
1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783)
LWR
1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784)
UPR
1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784)
LWR
1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785)
UPR
1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785)
LWR
1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786)
Black / Brown
A
Brown / Green
EM
Green / Yellow
Yellow / Blue
Grade and color are different
for upper and lower bearings.
C
D
Blue / Pink
Pink / Purple
E
Purple / Orange
F
Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide
Use undersize (U.S.) bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification.
●
When using undersize (U.S.) bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with the bearing installed and
grind journal until oil clearance falls within specification.
Bearing Undersize Table
●
G
H
Unit: mm (in)
Size U.S.
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
2.106 - 2.114 (0.0829 - 0.0832)
I
CAUTION:
Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in
order to use an undersize bearing (all journals).
J
KBIA0148E
Inspection After Disassembly
EBS00J5B
CRANKSHAFT SIDE CLEARANCE
●
●
L
Using a dial gauge, measure the clearance between the thrust
bearings and the crankshaft arm when the crankshaft is moved
fully forward or backward.
Standard
Limit
M
: 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in)
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace the thrust bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace the
crankshaft.
PBIC0268E
Revision: March 2005
K
EM-89
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE
●
Measure side clearance between connecting rod and crankshaft
arm using a feeler gauge.
Standard
Limit
●
: 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
: 0.50 mm (0.0197 in)
If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace the connecting
rod bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit,
replace the crankshaft also.
KBIA0071E
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
Diameter of Piston Pin Bore
●
Measure the diameter of piston pin bore using an inside
micrometer. Refer to EM-105, "Available Piston" .
PBIC0116E
Outer Diameter of Piston Pin
●
Measure outer diameter of piston pin using a micrometer. Refer
to EM-105, "Piston Pin" .
PBIC0117E
Piston to Piston Pin Clearance
(Piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin bore diameter) – (Outer diameter
of piston pin)
Standard
●
●
●
: 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in)
If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both of piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each parts.
Refer to piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin
assembly. Refer to EM-83, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" .
Refer to connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod. Refer to EM-84, "HOW TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-90
WBIA0074E
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
NOTE:
●
The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston
pin) grade are provided only for the parts installed at the plant.
For service parts, no grades can be selected. Only 0 grade is
available.
●
Refer to EM-92, "CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)" for the values for each grade at the plant.
●
Regarding marks on piston head, Refer to EM-83, "HOW TO
SELECT A PISTON" .
A
EM
C
SBIA0282E
D
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
●
●
Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove
using a feeler gauge. Refer to EM-105, "Available Piston" .
If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly.
E
F
G
SEM024AA
H
PISTON RING END GAP
●
●
●
Check if inner diameter of cylinder bore is within specification.
Refer to EM-94, "PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE"
.
Insert piston ring until middle of cylinder with piston, and measure gap using a feeler gauge. Refer to EM-105, "Available Piston" .
If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the
limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized
piston and piston ring.
I
J
K
SEM822B
L
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
●
Check with connecting rod aligner. Refer to EM-105, "CONNECTING ROD" .
M
SEM003F
Revision: March 2005
EM-91
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
●
If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
SEM038F
CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END)
●
Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing
installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified
torque, measure the connecting rod big end inner diameter
using an inside micrometer. Refer to EM-105, "CONNECTING
ROD" .
PBIC0119E
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)
Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End)
●
Measure inner diameter of bushing. Refer to EM-105, "CONNECTING ROD"
PBIC0120E
Outer Diameter of Piston Pin
●
Measure outer diameter of piston pin. Refer to EM-105, "Piston
Pin" .
PBIC0117E
Revision: March 2005
EM-92
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)
A
(Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin)
Standard
●
●
: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in)
EM
If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly.
If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the "Piston Selection Table" to select the piston corresponding to the
applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to
EM-83, "HOW TO SELECT A PISTON" .
C
SBIA0282E
Factory Installed Parts Grading:
●
Service parts apply only to grade 0.
D
E
Unit: mm (in)
Grade
0
1
Connecting rod small end
inner diameter
20.000 - 20.006
(0.7874 - 0.7876)
20.006 - 20.012
(0.7876 - 0.7879)
Piston pin outer diameter
19.989 - 19.995
(0.7870 - 0.7872)
19.995 - 20. 001
(0.7872 - 0.7874)
Piston pin bore diameter
19.993 - 19.999
(0.7871- 0.7874)
19.999 - 20.005
(0.7874 - 0.7876)
F
G
WBIA0074E
H
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION
●
●
Using a scraper, remove gasket on the cylinder block surface,
and also remove oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow gasket debris to enter the oil or coolant passages.
Measure the distortion on the block upper face at some different
points in 6 directions.
Limit
●
I
J
K
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If out of the distortion limit, replace the cylinder block.
PBIC0121E
L
INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING
●
●
Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed
and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-78,
"ASSEMBLY" .
Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main
bearing housing.
Standard
●
: 58.944 - 58.967 mm (2.3206 - 2.3215 in)
If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and lower cylinder block assembly.
NOTE:
These components cannot be replaced as a single unit because
they were processed together.
Revision: March 2005
M
EM-93
PBIC0269E
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
Inner Diameter of Cylinder Bore
●
●
●
Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-ofround and taper at 6 different points on each cylinder. (X and Y
directions at A, B and C). The Y axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine.
NOTE:
When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at
B position. Refer to EM-104, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
If the measured value rebore exceeds the limit, or if there are
scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone the
inner wall.
An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston,
rebore the cylinder so that the clearance of the piston cylinder
satisfies the standard.
Over size (OS)
SBIA0284E
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Outer Diameter of Piston
●
Measure piston skirt diameter using a micrometer. Refer to EM105, "Available Piston" .
PBIC0125E
●
Measure point (distance from the top): 42 mm (1.65 in)
Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance
Calculate by outer diameter of piston skirt and inner diameter of cylinder (direction X, position B).
(Clearance) = (Inner diameter of cylinder) – (Outer diameter of piston skirt).
●
Standard
Limit
●
: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in)
: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly.
Reboring Cylinder Bore
1.
Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”.
Rebored size calculation: D = A + B - C
D: Bored diameter
A: Piston diameter as measured
B: Piston-to-bore clearance (standard value)
C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
2.
3.
●
●
Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted
in final assembly.
Cut cylinder bores.
When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter
at a time.
Revision: March 2005
EM-94
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
4.
5.
●
Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance.
Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.
Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
A
OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL
●
EM
Measure outer diameter of crankshaft journals.
Standard
: 54.955 - 54.979 mm (2.1636 - 2.1645 in)
C
OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN
●
Measure outer diameter of crankshaft pin.
Standard
D
: 44.956 - 44.974 mm (1.7699 - 1.7706 in)
E
F
PBIC0270E
G
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT
●
●
●
Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown on
each journal and pin using a micrometer.
Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in dimensions
between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B".
Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between "A"
and "B" at "X" and "Y".
Limit
Out-of-round (X - Y)
Taper (A - B)
H
I
: 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
: 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
J
PBIC0128E
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
●
●
●
K
Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on
both ends of the crankshaft.
Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal.
While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer
on the dial gauge, the total indicator reading.
Limit
L
M
: Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
PBIC0271E
Revision: March 2005
EM-95
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Method of Measurement
●
Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the
cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque.
Using a inside micrometer measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing.
(Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod bearing) –
(Outer diameter of crankshaft pin)
Standard
Limit
●
: 0.028 - 0.045 mm (0.0011 - 0.0018 in)
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized bearing. Refer to EM-84, "HOW
TO SELECT A CONNECTING ROD BEARING" .
PBIC0119E
Method of Using Plastigage
●
●
●
●
Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of
each bearing completely.
Cut the Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and
place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap,
and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never rotate the crankshaft.
Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the
scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width.
EM142
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the method by
calculation.
OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING
Method of Measurement
●
Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and bearing cap. Measure the main bearing inner diameter
with the bearing cap bolt tightened to the specified torque.
(Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of main bearing) – (Outer diameter of crankshaft journal)
Standard:
No. 1, 3, and 5 journals
No. 2 and 4 journals
Limit
●
: 0.012 - 0.022 mm (0.0005 - 0.0009 in)
: 0.018 - 0.028 mm (0.0007 - 0.0011 in)
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If the measured value exceeds the limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing inner diameter
and crankshaft journal outer diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Refer to EM-86,
"HOW TO SELECT A MAIN BEARING" .
Method of Using Plastigage
●
●
●
●
Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and the surfaces
of each bearing completely.
Cut the Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and
place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
Tighten the main bearing bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never rotate the crankshaft.
Remove the bearing cap and bearings, and using the scale on
the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width.
EM142
Revision: March 2005
EM-96
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the "Method by
Calculation".
A
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING
●
Standard
●
EM
When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude.
C
: There must be crush height.
If the standard is not met, replace main bearings.
D
SEM502G
E
OUTER DIAMETER OF LOWER CYLINDER BLOCK BOLT
●
●
●
●
Perform only with M10 (0.39 in) bolts.
Measure outer diameters (d1, d2) at two positions as shown.
Measure d2 at a point within area A as shown.
When the value of d1- d2 exceeds the limit (a large difference in
dimensions), replace the bolt with a new one.
Limit
F
G
: 0.13 mm (0.0051 in)
H
I
PBIC0272E
J
OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLT
●
●
Measure outer diameter (d) at position as shown.
When “d” exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace
the bolt with a new one.
Limit
K
L
: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) or less
M
PBIC0273E
MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODEL)
NOTE:
●
Inspection for double mass flywheel only.
●
Do not disassemble double mass flywheel.
Flywheel Deflection
●
Measure deflection of flywheel contact surface to the clutch with a dial gauge.
Revision: March 2005
EM-97
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[QR25DE]
●
Measure runout at 210 mm (8.27 in) dia.
Limit
●
Measure axial displacement at 250 mm (9.84 in) dia.
Limit
●
: 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less under no
load
: 1.3 mm (0.051 in) or less under 100N
(22.48 lb) force
When measured value exceeds the limit, replace the flywheel
with a new one.
SBIA0287E
Movement Amount in Rotation Direction
●
1.
●
2.
3.
4.
Check the movement amount in the following procedure.
Install a bolt to clutch cover mounting hole, and place a torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel
center line.
Tighten bolt to keep it from loosening at a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb).
Put a mating mark on circumferences of the two flywheel
masses without applying any load (measurement standard
points).
Apply a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) in each direction, and
mark the movement amount on the mass on the transmission
side.
Measure dimensions of movement amounts A and B on circumference of the flywheel on the transmission side.
Standard
●
: 35 mm (1.38 in) or less
When measured value is outside the standard, replace flywheel.
Revision: March 2005
EM-98
SBIA0288E
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
PFP:00030
A
EBS00J5C
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
cm3
Bore and stroke
(in3
In-line 4
EM
2,488 (151.82)
)
mm (in)
89.0 x 100 (3.50 x 3.94)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Compression
Number of piston rings
C
2
Oil
D
1
Compression ratio
9.5:1
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm
Standard
1,250 (12.8, 181.3)
Minimum
1,060 (10.8, 153.7)
Differential limit
between cylinders
E
F
100 (1.0, 14)
G
H
Valve timing
I
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
224°
244°
0°
64°
3°
41°
J
K
DRIVE BELTS
Tension of drive belts
Auto adjustment by auto tensioner
L
INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Description
Surface distortion
Limit
Intake manifold collector
0.1 (0.004)
Intake manifold
0.1 (0.004)
Exhaust manifold
0.3 (0.012)
M
SPARK PLUG
Unit: mm (in)
Make
Type
NGK
Standard
PLFR5A-11
Hot
PLFR4A-11
Cold
PLFR6A-11
Gap (nominal)
Revision: March 2005
1.1 (0.043)
EM-99
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
CYLINDER HEAD
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0283E
Description
Limit
Head surface distortion
0.1 (0.004)
VALVE
Valve Dimensions
Unit: mm (in)
SEM188
Valve head diameter “D”
Valve length “L”
Valve stem diameter “d”
Valve seat angle “α”
Intake
35.5 - 35.8 (1.398 - 1.409)
Exhaust
30.5 - 30.8 (1.201 - 1.213)
Intake
97.16 (3.8252)
Exhaust
98.82 (3.8905)
Intake
5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354)
Exhaust
5.955 - 5.970 (0.2344 - 0.2350)
Intake
45°15′ - 45°45′
Exhaust
Valve margin “T”
Intake
1.1 (0.043)
Exhaust
1.3 (0.051)
Valve Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Cold* (reference data)
Hot
Intake
0.24 - 0.32 (0.009 - 0.013)
0.32 - 0.40 (0.013 - 0.016)
Exhaust
0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013)
0.33 - 0.41 (0.013 - 0.016)
*: Approximately 20°C (68 °F)
Revision: March 2005
EM-100
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
Available Valve Lifter
A
EM
C
D
KBIA0119E
Thickness
mm (in)
Identification mark (Stamp)
6.96 (0.2740)
696
6.98 (0.2748)
698
7.00 (0.2756)
700
7.02 (0.2764)
702
7.04 (0.2772)
704
7.06 (0.2780)
706
7.08 (0.2787)
708
7.10 (02795)
710
7.12 (0.2803)
712
7.14 (0.2811)
714
7.16 (0.2819)
716
7.18 (0.2827)
718
7.20 (0.2835)
720
7.22 (0.2843)
722
7.24(0.2850)
724
7.26 (0.2858)
726
7.28 (0.2866)
728
7.30(0.2874)
730
7.32 (0.2882)
732
7.34 (0.2890)
734
7.36 (0.2898)
736
7.38 (0.2906)
738
7.40 (0.2913)
740
7.42 (0.2921)
742
744 (0.2929)
744
7.46 (0.2937)
746
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Valve Spring
Free height standard
mm (in)
Pressure standard
N (kg, lb) at height mm (in)
Out-of-square
Intake
44.84 - 45.34 (1.7654 - 1.7850)
Exhaust
45.28 - 45.78 (1.7827 - 1.8024)
Intake and Exhaust
mm (in)
Installation height mm (in)
Revision: March 2005
151 - 175 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39) at 35.30 (1.390)
1.9 (0.0748)
Intake
35.30 (1.390)
Exhaust
35.30 (1.390)
EM-101
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
Installation load N (kg - force, lb - force)
Height during valve open mm (in)
Load with valve open N (kg - force, lb - force)
Intake
151 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39)
Exhaust
151 (15.4 - 17.8, 34 - 39)
Intake
24.94 (0.9819)
Exhaust
26.39 (1.0390)
Intake
358 - 408 (36.5 - 41.6, 80 - 92)
Exhaust
325 - 371 (33.1 - 37.8, 73 - 83)
Valve Lifter
Unit: mm (in)
Description
Standard
Valve lifter outer diameter
33.965 - 33.980 (1.3372 - 1.3378)
Lifter lifter bore inner diameter
34.000 - 34.021 (1.3386 - 1.3394)
Clearance between lifter and lifter guide
0.020 - 0.056 (0.0008 - 0.0022)
Valve Guide
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0184E
Description
Valve guide
Outer diameter
Inner diameter (Finished size)
Standard
Service
10.023 - 10.034
(0.3946 - 0.3950)
10.223 - 10.234
(0.4025 - 0.4029)
6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369)
9.975 - 9.996
(0.3927 - 0.3935)
Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter
Interference fit of valve guide
10.175 - 10.196
(0.4006 - 0.4014)
0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Standard
Valve guide clearance
Projection length “L”
Revision: March 2005
Intake
0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) or less
Exhaust
0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025) or less
Intake
10.1 - 10.3 (0.398 - 0.406)
Exhaust
10.0 - 10.4 (0.394 - 0.409)
EM-102
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
Valve Seat
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
D
PBIC0284E
Description
Cylinder head seat recess diameter
(D)
Valve seat interference fit
Standard
Service
Intake
36.500 - 36.516 (1.4370 - 1.4376)
37.000 - 37.016 (1.4567 - 1.4573)
Exhaust
31.500 - 31.516 (1.2402 - 1.2408)
32.000 - 32.016 (1.2598 - 1.2605)
Intake
F
0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044)
Exhaust
Valve seat outer diameter (d)
E
0.084 - 0.116 (0.0033 - 0.0046)
Intake
36.597 - 36.613 (1.4408 - 1.4415)
37.097 - 37.113 (1.4605 - 1.4611)
Exhaust
31.600 - 31.616 (1.2441 - 1.2447)
32.100 - 32.116 (1.2638 - 1.2644)
G
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
Unit: mm (in)
H
Standard
Camshaft runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.04 (0.0016)
I
J
K
L
SEM671
Cam height “A”
Intake
45.665 - 45.855 (1.7978 - 1.8053)
Exhaust
43.975 - 44.165 (1.7313 - 1.7388)
Outer diameter of camshaft journal
No. 1
27.935 - 27.955 (1.0998 - 1.1006)
No. 2, 3, 4, 5
23.435 - 23.455 (0.9226 - 0.9234)
Inner diameter of camshaft bracket
No.1
28.000 - 28.021 (1.1024 - 1.1032)
No.2, 3, 4, 5
23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260)
Camshaft journal clearance
0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034)
Camshaft end play
0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074)
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
*: Total indicator reading
Revision: March 2005
EM-103
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0281E
Surface distortion
Limit
0.1 (0.004)
Standard
Cylinder bore
Inner diameter
Grade No. 2
89.010 - 89.020 (3.5043 - 3.5047)
Grade No. 3
89.020 - 89.030 (3.5047 - 3.5051)
Wear limit
0.2 (0.008)
Out-of-round (X − Y)
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
Taper (C − A)
Less than 0.01 (0.0004)
Main journal inner
diameter grade
(Without bearing)
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
Difference in
inner diameter
between cylinders
Standard
Revision: March 2005
58.944 - 58.945 (2.3206 - 2.3207)
58.945 - 58.946 (2.3207 - 2.3207)
58.946 - 58.947 (2.3207 - 2.3207)
58.947 - 58.948 (2.3207 - 2.3208)
58.948 - 58.949 (2.3208 - 2.3208)
58.949 - 58.950 (2.3208 - 2.3209)
58.950 - 58.951 (2.3209 - 2.3209)
58.951 - 58.952 (2.3209 - 2.3209)
58.952 - 58.953 (2.3209 - 2.3210)
58.953 - 58.954 (2.3210 - 2.3210)
58.954 - 58.955 (2.3210 - 2.3211)
58.955 - 58.956 (2.3211 - 2.3211)
58.956 - 58.957 (2.3211 - 2.3211)
58.957 - 58.958 (2.3211 - 2.3212)
58.958 - 58.959 (2.3212 - 2.3212)
58.959 - 58.960 (2.3212 - 2.3213)
58.960 - 58.961 (2.3213 - 2.3213)
58.961 - 58.962 (2.3213 - 2.3213)
58.962 - 58.963 (2.3213 - 2.3214)
58.963 - 58.964 (2.3214 - 2.3214)
58.964 - 58.965 (2.3214 - 2.3215)
58.965 - 58.966 (2.3215 - 2.3215)
58.966 - 58.967 (2.3215 - 2.3215)
58.967 - 58.968 (2.3215 - 2.3216)
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
EM-104
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
PISTON, PISTON RING, AND PISTON PIN
Available Piston
A
Unit: mm (in)
EM
C
D
PBIC0188E
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Standard
E
Grade No. 1
88.980 - 88.990 (3.5031 - 3.5035)
Grade No. 2
88.990 - 89.000 (3.5035 - 3.5039)
Grade No. 3
89.000 - 89.010 (3.5039 - 3.5043)
0.20 (0.0079) oversize (service)
89.180 - 89.210 (3.5110 - 3.5122)
“H” dimension
G
42 (1.65)
Piston pin bore diameter
Grade No. 0
19.993 - 19.999 (0.7871 - 0.7874)
Grade No. 1
19.999 - 20.005 (0.7874 - 0.7876)
Standard
Piston clearance to cylinder block
F
H
0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012)
Limit
0.08 (0.0031)
I
Piston Ring
Unit: mm (in)
Side clearance
End gap
Standard
Limit
Top
0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031)
0.11 (0.0043)
2nd
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
0.10 (0.0039)
Oil ring
0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053)
—
Top
0.21- 0.31 (0.0083 - 0.0122)
0.54 (0.0213)
2nd
0.32 - 0.47 (0.0126 - 0.0185)
0.67 (0.0264)
Oil (rail ring)
0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236)
0.95 (0.0374)
K
L
M
Piston Pin
Unit: mm (in)
Piston pin outer diameter
Grade No.0
19.989 - 19.995 (0.7870 - 0.7872)
Grade No.1
19.995 - 20.001 (0.7872 - 0.7874)
Piston to piston pin clearance (Standard)
Piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance
0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002)
Standard
0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007)
CONNECTING ROD
Unit: mm (in)
Center distance
143.00 - 143.10 (5.63 - 5.63)
Bend [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
Connecting rod small end inner diameter
Revision: March 2005
22.000 - 22.012 (0.7874 - 0.7879)
EM-105
J
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
Connecting rod small end inner
diameter*
Grade No. 0
20.000 - 20.006 (0.7874 - 0.7876)
Grade No. 1
20.006 - 20.012 (0.7876 - 0.7879)
Connecting rod big end inner diameter
Side clearance
48.000 - 48.013 (1.8898 - 1.8903)
Standard
0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Limit
Connecting rod bearing housing
0.50 (0.0197)
Grade No. 0
Grade No. 1
Grade No. 2
Grade No. 3
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 5
Grade No. 6
Grade No. 7
Grade No. 8
Grade No. 9
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
48.000 - 48.001 (1.8898 - 1.8898)
48.001 - 48.002 (1.8898 - 1.8898)
48.002 - 48.003 (1.8898 - 1.8899)
48.003 - 48.004 (1.8899 - 1.8899)
48.004 - 48.005 (1.8899 - 1.8899)
48.005 - 48.006 (1.8899 - 1.8900)
48.006 - 48.007 (1.8900 - 1.8900)
48.007 - 48.008 (1.8900 - 1.8901)
48.008 - 48.009 (1.8901 - 1.8901)
48.009 - 48.010 (1.8901 - 1.8902)
48.010 - 48.011 (1.8902 - 1.8902)
48.011 - 48.012 (1.8902 - 1.8902)
48.012 - 48.013 (1.8902 - 1.8903)
*: After installing in connecting rod
CRANKSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
SEM715
SEM645
Pin journal dia. “DP”
Revision: March 2005
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
44.974 - 44.973 (1.7706 - 1.7706)
44.973 - 44.972 (1.7706 - 1.7705)
44.972 - 44.971 (1.7705 - 1.7705)
44.971 - 44.970 (1.7705 - 1.7705)
44.970 - 44.969 (1.7705 - 1.7704)
44.969 - 44.968 (1.7704 - 1.7704)
44.968 - 44.967 (1.7704 - 1.7704)
44.967 - 44.966 (1.7704 - 1.7703)
44.966 - 44.965 (1.7703 - 1.7703)
44.965 - 44.964 (1.7703 - 1.7702)
44.964 - 44.963 (1.7702 - 1.7702)
44.963 - 44.962 (1.7702 - 1.7702)
44.962 - 44.961 (1.7702 - 1.7701)
44.961 - 44.960 (1.7701 - 1.7701)
44.960 - 44.959 (1.7701 - 1.7700)
44.959 - 44.958 (1.7700 - 1.7700)
44.958 - 44.957 (1.7700 - 1.7700)
44.957 - 44.956 (1.7700 - 1.7699)
EM-106
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
Main journal dia. “Dm” grade
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
54.979 - 54.978 (2.1645 - 2.1645)
54.978 - 54.977 (2.1645 - 2.1644)
54.977 - 54.976 (2.1644 - 2.1644)
54.976 - 54.975 (2.1644 - 2.1644)
54.975 - 54.974 (2.1644 - 2.1643)
54.974 - 54.973 (2.1643 - 2.1643)
54.973 - 54.972 (2.1643 - 2.1642)
54.972 - 54.971 (2.1642 - 2.1642)
54.971 - 54.970 (2.1642 - 2.1642)
54.970 - 54.969 (2.1642 - 2.1641)
54.969 - 54.968 (2.1641 - 2.1641)
54.968 - 54.967 (2.1641 - 2.1641)
54.967 - 54.966 (2.1641 - 2.1640)
54.966 - 54.965 (2.1640 - 2.1640)
54.965 - 54.964 (2.1640 - 2.1639)
54.964 - 54.963 (2.1639 - 2.1639)
54.963 - 54.962 (2.1639 - 2.1639)
54.962 - 54.961 (2.1639 - 2.1638)
54.961 - 54.960 (2.1638 - 2.1638)
54.960 - 54.959 (2.1638 - 2.1637)
54.959 - 54.958 (2.1637 - 2.1637)
54.958 - 54.957 (2.1637 - 2.1637)
54.957 - 54.956 (2.1637 - 2.1636)
54.956 - 54.955 (2.1636 - 2.1636)
Center distance “r”
EM
C
D
E
F
G
49.60 - 50.04 (1.9528 - 1.9701)
Out-of-round (X − Y)
Standard
Less than 0.005 (0.0002)
Taper (A − B)
Standard
Less than 0.005 (0.0002)
Runout [TIR*]
Limit
Free end play
A
H
Less than 0.05 (0.002)
Standard
0.10 - 0.26 (0.0039 - 0.0102)
Limit
I
0.30 (0.0118)
*: Total indicator reading
J
MAIN BEARING
Unit: mm (in)
K
L
M
SEM685D
Grade number
Thickness
Identification color
(UPR / LWR)
0
1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778)
Black
1
1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779)
Brown
2
1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780)
Green
3
1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781)
Yellow
4
1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783)
Blue
5
1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784)
Pink
6
1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785)
Purple
7
1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786)
White
Revision: March 2005
EM-107
Remarks
Grade and color are the same
for upper and lower bearings.
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
UPR
1.973 - 1.976 (0.0777 - 0.0778)
LWR
1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779)
UPR
1.976 - 1.979 (0.0778 - 0.0779)
LWR
1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780)
UPR
1.979 - 1.982 (0.0779 - 0.0780)
LWR
1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781)
UPR
1.982 - 1.985 (0.0780 - 0.0781)
LWR
1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783)
UPR
1.985 - 1.988 (0.0781 - 0.0783)
LWR
1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784)
UPR
1.988 - 1.991 (0.0783 - 0.0784)
LWR
1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785)
UPR
1.991 - 1.994 (0.0784 - 0.0785)
LWR
1.994 - 1.997 (0.0785 - 0.0786)
Black / Red
Red / Green
Green / Yellow
Grade and color are different
for upper and lower bearings.
Yellow / Blue
Blue / Pink
Pink / Purple
Purple / Orange
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Size U.S.
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
2.106 - 2.114 (0.0829 - 0.0832)
Main journal diameter
Grind so that bearing clearance is the
specified value.
Bearing Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Main bearing oil clearance
No.1, 3, and 5
0.012 - 0.022 (0.0005 - 0.0009)
No.2 and 4
0.018 - 0.028 (0.0007 - 0.0011)
Limit
0.1 (0.004)
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Grade number
Thickness
mm (in)
Identification color (mark)
0
1.499 - 1.495 (0.0590 - 0.0589)
Black
1
1.503 - 1.499 (0.0592 - 0.0590)
Brown
2
1.507 - 1.503 (0.0593 - 0.0592)
Green
3
1.511 - 1.507 (0.0595 - 0.0593)
Yellow
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Size U.S.
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
1.624 - 1.632 (0.0639 - 0.0643)
Crank pin journal diameter
Grind so that bearing clearance is the
specified value.
Bearing Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Connecting rod bearing clearance
Revision: March 2005
Standard
0.028 - 0.045 (0.0011 - 0.0018)
Limit
0.10 (0.0039)
EM-108
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EBS00J5D
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EM
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
E
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
F
Precautions for Drain Coolant
●
EBS00J5E
Drain coolant when engine is cooled.
G
Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping
●
●
●
Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
Release fuel pressure before disassembly.
After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage.
Precautions for Removal and Disassembly
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EBS00J5G
EBS00J5I
Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.
When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the
ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, do exactly as specified.
Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction
and blockage.
Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust.
Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well.
Release air within route after draining coolant.
Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine
stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections.
Revision: March 2005
EM-109
I
J
K
L
EBS00J5H
Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way,
and replace if necessary.
Precautions for Assembly and Installation
●
H
When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely,
avoid forceful or uninstructed operations.
Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.
Cover openings of engine system with tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly.
When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally
opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be
used where noted in the step.
Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement
●
EBS00J5F
2005 Altima
M
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
●
After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems
for leakage.
Parts Requiring Angular Tightening
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
EBS00J5J
Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts:
Cylinder head bolts
Main bearing cap bolts
Connecting rod cap nuts
Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angular
tightening)
Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil.
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
EBS00MXT
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface
and remove the sealant using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
●
In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer
to lightly tap (1) the cutter where the RTV Silicone Sealant is
applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the cutter (2) by tapping
on the side.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed
screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering
to the gasket application surface and the mating surface.
● Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket
application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating
surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign
materials.
Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
PBIC0003E
Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified
location.
Tube presser
●
●
●
●
●
WS39930000 (
–
)
If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove.
As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the
holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of this manual.
Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component.
If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
Do not retighten after the installation.
Revision: March 2005
EM-110
WBIA0567E
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
●
After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12,
"RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
A
EM
C
SEM159F
D
CAUTION:
Follow all specific instructions in this manual.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-111
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EBS00J5L
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST0501S000
(
—
)
Engine stand assembly
1 ST05011000
(
—
)
Engine stand
2 ST05012000
(
—
)
Base
Disassembling and assembling
NT042
Engine and transmission assembly removal
KV101J0010
(J-47242)
Engine support table
WBIA0658E
KV10106500
(
—
)
Engine stand shaft
NT028
KV10117000
(J-41262)
Engine sub-attachment
KV10117000 has been replaced with
KV10117001 (KV10117000 is no longer in
production, but it is usable).
NT373
KV10117001
(
—
)
Engine sub-attachment
Installing on the cylinder block
NT372
ST10120000
(J-24239-01)
Cylinder head bolt wrench
Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt
a: 13 (0.51) dia.
b: 12 (0.47)
c: 10 (0.39)
Unit: mm (in)
NT583
Revision: March 2005
EM-112
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10116200
(J-26336-A)
Valve spring compressor
1 KV10115900
(J-26336-20)
Attachment
Disassembling valve mechanism
A
EM
C
NT022
KV10107902
(J-38959)
Valve oil seal puller
Removing valve oil seal
D
E
S-NT011
(J-39386)
Valve oil seal drift
F
Installing valve oil seal
G
H
NT024
EM03470000
(J-8037)
Piston ring compressor
Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore
I
J
NT044
ST16610001
(J-23907)
Pilot bushing puller
Removing crankshaft pilot bushing
K
L
NT045
—
(J-47128)
Seal installer
Installing rear main seal
M
LBIA0452E
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
NT046
Revision: March 2005
EM-113
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
WS39930000
(
—
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
)
NT052
KV10112100
(BT-8653-A)
Angle wrench
Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder
head, etc.
NT014
—
(J-44626)
Air fuel sensor Socket
Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio A/F sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
LBIA0444E
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen
sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
NT636
KV10117700
(J-44716)
Ring gear stopper
Removing and installing crankshaft pulley
NT822
KV10109300
Pulley holder
a: 68 mm (2.68 in)
b: 8 mm (0.31 in)
NT628
Revision: March 2005
EM-114
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00J5M
A
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(BT-3373-F)
Belt tension gauge
Checking drive belt tension
EM
C
AMA126
Power tool
D
Loosening bolts and nuts
E
F
PBIC0190E
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plug
G
H
NT047
Valve seat cutter set
Finishing valve seat dimensions
I
J
NT048
Piston ring expander
Removing and installing piston ring
K
L
NT030
Valve guide drift
Removing and installing valve guide
Intake & Exhaust:
a = 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia.
b = 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
NT015
Valve guide reamer
Reaming valve guide 1 or hole for oversize
valve guide 2
Intake & Exhaust:
d1 = 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
d2 = 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia.
NT016
Revision: March 2005
EM-115
2005 Altima
M
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use
with anti-seize lubricant shown below.)
a = J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia oxygen sensor
b = J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania oxygen sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads
AEM489
KV991J0100
(J-46531)
T55 Torx® Bit
Removing and installing A/T drive plate and
M/T flywheel bolts
LBIA0286E
Revision: March 2005
EM-116
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[VQ35DE]
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise
PFP:00003
A
EBS00J5N
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SEM706G
Revision: March 2005
EM-117
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[VQ35DE]
Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EBS00J5O
Locate the area where noise occurs.
Confirm the type of noise.
Specify the operating condition of engine.
Check specified noise source. Repair or replace the identified part as necessary.
Operating condition of engine
Location
of noise
Top of
engine
Rocker
cover
Cylinder
head
Crankshaft pulley
Cylinder
block
(Side of
engine)
Oil pan
Front of
engine
Timing
chain
cover
Front of
engine
Type of
noise
Source of
noise
Reference page
Before
warmup
After
warmup
When
starting
When
idling
When
racing
While
driving
Ticking or
clicking
C
A
—
A
B
—
Tappet
noise
Valve clearance
EM-191
Rattle
C
A
—
A
B
C
Camshaft
bearing
noise
Camshaft journal clearance
Camshaft runout
EM-182
Slap or
knock
—
A
—
B
B
—
Piston pin
noise
Piston and piston pin
clearance
Connecting rod bushing clearance
EM-200
A
Piston
slap noise
Piston-to-bore clearance
Piston ring side clearance
Piston ring end gap
Connecting rod bend
and torsion
EM-224
Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small
end)
Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end)
EM-224
Slap or
rap
A
—
—
B
B
Check item
Knock
A
B
C
B
B
B
Connecting rod
bearing
noise
Knock
A
B
—
A
B
C
Main
bearing
noise
Main bearing oil clearance
Crankshaft runout
EM-224
B
Timing
chain and
chain tensioner
noise
Timing chain cracks
and wear
Timing chain tensioner
operation
EM-161
C
Drive belts
(Sticking
or slipping)
Drive belts deflection
Tapping or
ticking
A
A
—
B
B
Squeaking or fizzing
A
Creaking
A
B
A
B
A
B
Drive belts
(Slipping)
Idler pulley bearing
operation
Squall
Creak
A
B
—
B
A
B
Water
pump
noise
Water pump operation
A: Closely related
B: Related
Revision: March 2005
B
—
C: Sometimes related
B
—
EM-119
CO-37
—: Not related
EM-118
2005 Altima
DRIVE BELTS
[VQ35DE]
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
PFP:02117
A
EBS00J5P
EM
C
D
E
F
LBIA0076E
1.
2.
3.
Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one.
Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway between pulleys as shown.
Rotate the crankshaft pulley two times then check the belt tension using Belt Tension Gauge (BT3373-F
or equivalent).
NOTE:
Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold.
Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications.
Belt Deflection and Tension
Used belt
Power steering
pump
Limit
After adjustment
7 (0.28)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
11 (0.43)
7.3 - 8.0
(0.29 - 0.31)
Applied pushing
force
Unit: mm (in)
Tension adjustment*
I
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Used belt
New belt
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
6.5 - 7.2
(0.26 - 0.28)
196 (20, 44)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
98 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
Revision: March 2005
H
J
Deflection adjustment
Alternator and
air conditioning
compressor
G
EM-119
2005 Altima
K
L
M
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
[VQ35DE]
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
PFP:16500
EBS00J5Q
WBIA0524E
1.
Resonator
2.
Air cleaner to electric throttle control
actuator tube
3.
Grommet
6.
Air cleaner case (lower)
4.
Mass air flow sensor
5.
Air cleaner case (upper)
7.
Air cleaner case mounting bracket
8.
Resonator in fender
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor.
Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator and at the fresh air intake tube.
Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow
sensor attached.
Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary.
CAUTION:
Handle mass air flow sensor with care.
● Do not shock it.
● Do not disassemble it.
● Do not touch its sensor.
Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
1.
Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and lift up the air cleaner case (upper).
Revision: March 2005
EM-120
2005 Altima
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
[VQ35DE]
2.
3.
4.
Remove the air cleaner element.
Install a new air cleaner element.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-121
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
[VQ35DE]
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:14010
EBS00J5R
WBIA0592E
Revision: March 2005
EM-122
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
[VQ35DE]
1.
Electric throttle control actuator
2.
Intake manifold collector (upper)
3.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
4.
Intake manifold collector (lower)
5.
Power valve
6.
VIAS control solenoid valve
7.
Vacuum tank
8.
Service port
9.
Fuel hose
10. Gasket
11. EGR temperature sensor
12. EGR tube (to lower intake manifold
collector)
13. EGR volume control valve
14. EGR tube (to exhaust manifold)
15. EGR volume control valve bracket
16. Intake manifold collector (lower)
support bracket
17. EGR volume control valve cover
EM
C
REMOVAL
D
WARNING:
●
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot.
●
The gasket for intake manifold collector (upper) is secured together with intake manifold collector
(lower) bolt. Thus, when replacing only the upper gasket the lower gasket must also be replaced.
1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and
Linkage" .
3. Remove the engine cover using power tool.
4. Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air
intake tube as an assembly.
Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
6. Disconnect the following:
● Power brake booster vacuum hose
● Coolant hoses from the intake manifold collector
● Swirl control vacuum lines to power valve and intake manifold
collector upper
● Fuel injector electrical connectors
● PCV hose
● Electric throttle control actuator electrical connector
● EVAP canister purge hose
● EGR temperature sensor electrical connector
CAUTION:
● Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material.
7. Remove the EGR tube (to lower intake manifold collector) nuts.
WBIA0326E
8. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket from the rear of the
intake manifold collector.
9. Remove the EVAP canister purge volume solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside.
10. Remove the VIAS control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside.
11. Remove the vacuum tank.
12. Remove the intake manifold collector support bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector using
power tool.
Revision: March 2005
A
EM-123
2005 Altima
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
[VQ35DE]
13. Loosen the intake manifold collector bolts in the order as shown
using power tool, and remove the intake manifold collector and
gasket.
WBIA0285E
14. If necessary, remove the electric throttle control actuator bolts in
the order as shown and remove the electric throttle control actuator.
CAUTION:
● Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator.
● Do not disassemble.
SEM711G
15. If necessary, remove the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts
in the order as shown, using power tool and remove the intake
manifold collector.
CAUTION:
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle
control actuator, if installed.
SEM712G
16. If necessary, remove power valve bolts in the order as shown
and remove the power valve.
NOTE:
The power valve must be held in the closed position during
installation.
17. If necessary remove the following components:
● Vacuum tank
● VIAS control solenoid valve
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
SEM714G
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following:
NOTE:
After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows:
1. Perform the ″Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning″ when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
2. Perform the ″idle Air Volume Learning″ when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-124
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
[VQ35DE]
●
If necessary, install power valve bolts in the order as shown.
Power valve bolts
A
: 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m,
13 - 15 ft-lb)
EM
C
SEM714G
●
D
If necessary, tighten the intake manifold collector pipe bolts in
the order as shown.
Intake manifold
collector pipe bolts
: 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m,
13 - 15 ft-lb)
E
F
G
SEM712G
●
If necessary, install the electric throttle control actuator bolts in
the order as shown. Install gasket with three protrusions facing
down.
Electric throttle control actuator bolts
H
: 7.2 - 9.6 N·m (0.74 - 0.97 kg-m,
64 - 84 in-lb)
I
J
SEM711G
●
K
Install the intake manifold collector bolts in the order as shown.
Intake manifold
collector bolts
: 17.6 - 21.6 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m,
13 - 15 ft-lb)
L
M
SEM713G
Revision: March 2005
EM-125
2005 Altima
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ35DE]
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Removal and Installation
PFP:14710
EBS00J5S
WBIA0591E
1.
Gasket
2.
EGR temperature sensor
3.
EGR tube (to lower intake manifold
collector)
4.
EGR volume control valve
5.
EGR tube (to exhaust manifold)
6.
EGR volume control valve bracket
7.
Coolant lines
8.
EGR volume control valve cover
Revision: March 2005
EM-126
2005 Altima
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ35DE]
REMOVAL
A
Remove the engine cover using power tool.
Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air
intake tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and
Installation" .
EM
3. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
CAUTION:
C
Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign
material.
4. Disconnect the EGR temperature sensor electrical connector
D
and bracket.
5. If necessary, remove the EGR temperature sensor.
6. Disconnect the EGR volume control valve electrical connector.
E
7. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector) bolts at the
intake manifold collector.
8. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector) bolts at the
F
EGR volume control valve and remove the tube.
9. Loosen the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting.
G
10. If necessary remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) as folWBIA0326E
lows:
a. Remove the front cowl grille. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and
H
Installation" .
b. Remove the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and
Linkage" .
I
c. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting.
d. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1).
J
e. Remove the RH heat shield.
f. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to exhaust manifold fitting.
11. Disconnect the coolant lines at the EGR volume control valve.
K
12. Remove the EGR volume control valve bolts and the valve.
1.
2.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-127
2005 Altima
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[VQ35DE]
●
Install the RH heat shield bolts.
RH heat shield
bolts
: 5.1 - 6.5 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m,
46 - 57 in-lb)
LBIA0346E
Revision: March 2005
EM-128
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[VQ35DE]
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal and Installation
PFP:14003
A
EBS00J5T
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0166E
1.
Electric throttle control actuator
2.
Intake manifold collector (upper)
3.
EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
4.
Intake manifold collector (lower)
5.
Power valve
6.
VIAS control solenoid valve
7.
Fuel tube
8.
Fuel damper
9.
Vacuum tank
Revision: March 2005
EM-129
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[VQ35DE]
10. Intake manifold
11. Service port
13. O-ring
14. Fuel damper
12. Gasket
REMOVAL
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot.
1. Remove the engine cover with power tool.
2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air intake tube as an assembly.
Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
5. Disconnect fuel tube quick connector at vehicle piping side.
6. To remove the quick connector cap, hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube.
NOTE:
If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by
pulling.
CAUTION:
● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
SFE562A
● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
● Prevent acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the tube during removal or installation.
● Do not remove the remaining retainer on the tube
● When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one.
● To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials entering, cover the ends of the
fuel tubes with plastic bags or something similar.
7. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose, the coolant
hoses from the electric throttle control actuator, the swirl control
vacuum lines, the fuel injectors electrical connectors, and the
PCV hose.
CAUTION:
● Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material.
PBIC0163E
8. Disconnect the electric throttle control actuator electrical connectors.
9. Remove the cowl top grille and the windshield wiper assembly.
Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
10. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket.
11. Remove the vacuum tank from the back of the intake manifold collector.
12. Remove the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator by loosening the four bolts
in a diagonal pattern.
CAUTION:
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator.
Revision: March 2005
EM-130
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[VQ35DE]
13. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, and remove the intake
manifold collector with power tool.
14. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the
intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector O-rings and use new
O-rings for installation.
A
EM
C
WBIA0285E
D
15. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, and remove the intake
manifold with power tool.
E
F
G
WBIA0043E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
H
Surface Distortion
●
Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of both the intake manifold and the intake manifold collector.
I
Standard
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
J
K
WBIA0052E
INSTALLATION
L
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Follow the procedures below for specific tightening sequences
and procedures.
●
Install intake manifold bolts in two stages in the numerical order
as shown.
M
Stage 1
Stage 2
: 5- 10 N·m (0.5 - 1.0 kg-m, 44 - 86 in-lb)
: 26 - 31 N·m (2.7 - 3.2 kg-m, 20 - 23 ft-lb)
SEM950F
Revision: March 2005
EM-131
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[VQ35DE]
●
Seat the fuel injectors into the intake manifold with new O-rings.
Tighten the fuel rail bolts as shown, in two stages:
Stage 1
Stage 2
: 9.3 - 10.8 N·m (0.95 - 1.1 kg-m, 83 - 95 in-lb)
: 20.6 - 26.5 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb)
WBIA0167E
●
Install the intake manifold collector bolts in the numerical order
as shown.
Intake manifold
collector bolts
: 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb
SEM713G
●
Tighten the bolts of the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator assembly
equally and diagonally to specification.
Intake manifold collector pipe bolts
: 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb)
NOTE:
After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows:
1. Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
2. Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
●
Install the quick connector as follows:
–
Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector and that
there is no damage.
–
Align the center to insert the quick connector straight onto the fuel tube.
–
Insert the fuel tube until a click is heard.
–
Install the quick connector cap on the quick connector joint.
Align the arrow mark on the quick connector cap to the upper
side.
–
Install the fuel hose into the hose clamp.
PBIC0662E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows:
1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
Revision: March 2005
EM-132
2005 Altima
INTAKE MANIFOLD
[VQ35DE]
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight.
A
CAUTION:
Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot.
● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC- EM
711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after
finishing repairs. Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-133
2005 Altima
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
[VQ35DE]
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
PFP:14004
EBS00J5U
WBIA0267E
1.
Exhaust manifold (RH bank)
Exhaust manifold (LH bank)
3.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2)
4.
Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 5.
2)
Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank
1)
6.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1)
7.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (front)
(bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (front)
(bank 2)
Revision: March 2005
2.
8.
EM-134
2005 Altima
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
[VQ35DE]
REMOVAL
A
WARNING:
●
Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down.
●
When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up
EM
slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to EM-220, "REMOVAL" .
1. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool.
2. Remove the engine undercover.
C
3. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields.
4. Remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
D
6. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .
7. Remove the RH and LH three way catalyst support bolts in the
order as shown.
E
F
G
PBIC1174E
8.
a.
b.
Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2).
Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle
clamp.
Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool.
Tool numbers
: KV10114400 (J-38365)
:
—
(J-44626)
WBIA0288E
EM-135
I
J
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors.
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
9. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst heat shields with power tool.
10. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts.
11. Remove the exhaust manifolds. Loosen the exhaust manifold
nuts in the order as shown.
Revision: March 2005
H
2005 Altima
K
L
M
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
[VQ35DE]
WBIA0289E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
●
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces.
Limit
: 0.15mm (0.006 in)
PBIC1173E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
Exhaust manifold
nuts
: 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.3 kg-m,
21 - 24 lb-ft)
CAUTION:
● When using the heated oxygen sensor wrench, tighten to
the middle of specified torque range, because the length
of the Tool may increase the actual tightness. Do not
tighten to the maximum specified torque range.
Tool numbers
●
WBIA0277E
Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using the oxygen sensor thread cleaner tool,
and apply anti-seize lubricant.
Tool numbers
●
: KV10114400 (J-38365)
:
—
(J-44626)
: J-43897-18
: J-43897-12
Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or
heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage.
WBIA0278E
Revision: March 2005
EM-136
2005 Altima
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
[VQ35DE]
●
Install the RH and LH three way catalyst support bolts in the
order as shown.
Three way catalyst
support bolts
A
: 19 - 25 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m,
14 - 18 ft-lb)
EM
C
PBIC1174E
●
Exhaust manifold
heat shield bolts
●
D
Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts.
: 5.1 - 6.5 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m,
46 - 57 in-lb)
E
Install the three way catalyst heat shield bolts.
Three way catalyst
heat shield bolts
: 6.7 - 9.8 N·m (0.69 - 0.99 kg-m,
60 - 86 in-lb)
F
G
H
I
J
LBIA0346E
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-137
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[VQ35DE]
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Removal and Installation
PFP:11110
EBS00J5V
WBIA0593E
1.
Gasket
2.
Upper oil pan
3.
O-ring
4.
Oil pressure switch (non SE-R) / Oil
pressure sensor (SE-R)
5.
Relief valve
6.
Oil cooler
7.
Oil cooler connection
8.
Oil filter
9.
Gasket
10. Oil strainer
11. Gasket
12. Drain plug
13. Lower oil pan
14. Rear plate cover
15.
16.
Heated oxygen sensor (bank 2) harness clamp
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (4
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (5
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (5
17.
18.
A/T & M/T)
A/T)
A/T) shield
19. Oil pan baffle
REMOVAL
WARNING:
●
You should not remove the oil pan until the exhaust system and cooling system have completely
cooled off.
●
When removing the front and rear engine through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for
safety. For engine slingers, refer to step 37 in EM-220, "REMOVAL" .
CAUTION:
When removing the upper oil pan from the engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Be careful not to damage sensor edges or signal plate teeth.
1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-4, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" .
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
3. Remove the oil dipstick.
4. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT"MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE
COOLANT" .
5. Remove the engine undercover.
Revision: March 2005
EM-138
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[VQ35DE]
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Remove the RH inner fender splash shield.
A
Remove the A/C drive belt. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" .
Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove coolant pipe bolts.
EM
Remove the A/C compressor with piping attached, and position it out of the way securely with wire.
CAUTION:
Do not pull on or crimp the A/C lines and hoses.
C
Disconnect the coolant lines from the engine oil cooler and plug them to prevent coolant loss.
Remove the oil filter and engine oil cooler from the upper oil pan.
Remove the oil pressure switch/sensor, and the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the upper oil pan.
D
Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the heated oxygen sensors and air flow ratio (A/F) sensors and remove the two catalytic con- E
vertors from the exhaust manifolds using power tool. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the rear plate cover from the upper oil pan.
F
G
H
SEM717G
I
18. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as
shown. Remove the lower oil pan.
J
K
L
WBIA0258E
a.
M
Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J37228)
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the
lower oil pan from the upper oil pan.
●
●
b.
WBIA0566E
Revision: March 2005
EM-139
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[VQ35DE]
19. Remove the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts.
SEM469G
20. Remove the upper oil pan.
a. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, using power tool.
LBIA0358E
b.
c.
Insert an appropriate size tool into the notch (1) of the upper oil
pan as shown.
Pry off the upper oil pan by moving the tool up and down (2) as
shown.
SEM155F
21. Remove the O-ring seals from the bottom of the cylinder block
and oil pump housing, use new O-rings for installation.
WBIA0327E
Revision: March 2005
EM-140
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[VQ35DE]
22. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket.
23. Remove the oil strainer.
A
EM
C
WBIA0328E
D
24. If re-installing the original oil pan, remove the old sealant from
the mating surfaces using a scraper.
● Also remove the old sealant from mating surface of the cylinder block.
● Remove the old sealant from the bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off the old sealant.
E
F
G
MEM108A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
H
Clean oil strainer if any object is attached.
INSTALLATION
I
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
1. Install oil strainer tighten bolt to specified torque. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
J
2.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the front
cover gasket and the rear oil seal retainer gasket as shown.
Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS
AND SEALANTS" .
K
L
M
SEM964E
3.
Install the front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket as
shown.
WBIA0328E
Revision: March 2005
EM-141
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[VQ35DE]
4.
Apply a bead of sealant to the cylinder block mating surface of
the upper oil pan to a limited portion as shown.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
● Be sure the sealant is applied to a limited portion as shown,
and the sealant is 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) or 4.5 - 5.5
mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide.
● Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
SEM185FA
SEM159F
5.
Install new O-rings on the cylinder block and oil pump body.
WBIA0327E
6.
Install the upper oil pan.
Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown.
●
Upper oil pan
bolts
●
: 19.0 - 25.0 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m,
14 -18 ft-lb)
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
LBIA0359E
7.
Install the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. Refer to EM-222,
"INSTALLATION" .
SEM469G
Revision: March 2005
EM-142
2005 Altima
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[VQ35DE]
8.
Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the lower oil pan.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
● Be sure the sealant is 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide.
● Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant.
A
EM
C
SEM159F
9.
D
Install the lower oil pan. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order
as shown.
Lower oil pan
bolts
●
E
: 7.2 - 10.8 N·m (0.74 - 1.1 kg-m,
64 - 95 in-lb)
Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
F
G
WBIA0261E
H
10. Install rear plate cover.
Rear plate cover
bolt
: 6.37 - 7.45 N·m (0.65 - 0.75 kg-m,
57 - 65 in-lb)
I
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
J
SEM717G
K
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
Start the engine and check for leaks. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Inspect the engine oil level. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" .
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-143
2005 Altima
IGNITION COIL
[VQ35DE]
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation
PFP:22448
EBS00J5W
WBIA0264E
1.
Ignition coil
4.
Rocker cover (left bank)
2.
Spark plug
3.
Rocker cover (right bank)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the engine cover with power tool.
Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner assembly and air
intake tubes. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly and the front cowl panel. Refer to EI-19,
"Removal and Installation" .
Remove the intake manifold collector, gasket, and throttle body. Refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the six ignition coils.
CAUTION:
Do not shock it.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-144
2005 Altima
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
[VQ35DE]
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Removal and Installation
PFP:22401
A
EBS00J5X
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0264E
1.
Ignition coil
4.
Rocker cover (left bank)
2.
Spark plug
3.
J
Rocker cover (right bank)
REMOVAL
K
1.
2.
3.
L
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the engine cover, with power tool.
Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner assembly and air
intake tubes. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly and the front cowl panel. Refer to EI-19,
"Removal and Installation" .
Remove the intake manifold collector, gasket, and throttle body. Refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the six ignition coils.
Remove the six spark plugs with a suitable tool.
● If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for
maximum performance. Refer to MA-26, "Changing Spark
Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)" .
SEM294A
Revision: March 2005
EM-145
2005 Altima
M
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
[VQ35DE]
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions.
The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
●
Frequent engine starts
●
Low ambient temperatures
The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as:
●
Extended highway driving
●
Frequent high engine revolution
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
SMA773C
If plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time
: less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi)
: less than 20 seconds
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Gap (nominal)
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
SMA806CA
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-146
2005 Altima
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[VQ35DE]
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
PFP:16600
A
EBS00J5Y
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WBIA0263E
K
1.
O-ring
2.
Fuel injector
3.
Fuel tube assembly
4.
Insulator
5.
Fuel damper
6.
Fuel damper
CAUTION:
●
Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as specified to do so.
●
Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown.
L
REMOVAL
M
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the engine cover using power tool.
Release the fuel pressure.
Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor, and air intake tube as an assembly.
Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
WARNING:
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot.
Disconnect fuel tube quick connector at vehicle piping side.
Refer to step 5 of EM-130, "REMOVAL" .
Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose, the coolant hoses from the electric throttle control
actuator, the swirl control vacuum lines, the fuel injectors electrical connectors, and the PCV hose.
CAUTION:
● Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material.
Disconnect the electric throttle control actuator electrical connector and coolant hoses.
Revision: March 2005
EM-147
2005 Altima
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[VQ35DE]
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Remove the cowl top grille and the windshield wiper assembly.
Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the power steering hose bracket.
Remove the vacuum tank from the back of the intake manifold collector.
Remove the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator, by loosening the four bolts
in a diagonal pattern.
CAUTION:
Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator.
Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, and remove the intake
manifold collector using power tool.
Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the
intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector O-rings and use new
O-rings for installation.
WBIA0285E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install the fuel rails with fuel injectors attached.
NOTE:
● Carefully install new O-rings, including the one used with the
fuel damper.
● Lubricate O-rings by lightly coating with new engine oil.
● Be careful not to damage the O-rings and surfaces for O-ring
sealing surfaces. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
● Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
● Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with
cutouts of clips after installation.
● Position clips in grooves on the fuel injectors.
SEF703X
● Align the protrusions of the fuel tube assembly with those of
the fuel injectors.
● After properly inserting the fuel injectors onto the fuel tube assembly, check that the fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors, and the flanges of the fuel tube assembly are fully
engaged with the clips.
Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts as shown, in two steps:
1st step
2nd step
: 9.3 - 10.8 N·m (0.95 - 1.1 kg-m,
6.2 - 7.9 ft-lb)
: 20.6 - 26.5 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m,
16 - 19 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector
and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
●
WBIA0255E
Revision: March 2005
EM-148
2005 Altima
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[VQ35DE]
3.
Install the intake manifold collector bolts in the numerical order
as shown.
Intake manifold
collector bolts
A
: 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m,
13 - 15 ft-lb
EM
C
SEM713G
4.
Tighten the bolts of the intake manifold collector pipe and electric throttle control actuator assembly diagonally to specification.
Intake manifold collector pipe bolts
5.
6.
7.
: 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 - 15 ft-lb)
D
E
After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator.
● Perform "Throttle Control Closed Position Learning" when the harness connector of the electric throttle
control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
● Perform "Idle Air Volume Learning" when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Attach the quick connector. Refer to EM-131, "INSTALLATION" .
Installation of remaining components is in the reverse of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
F
G
H
Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections as follows:
1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel
leaks at connections.
2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight.
CAUTION:
Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot.
● Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC711, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
● If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after
finishing repairs. Refer to EC-712, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-149
2005 Altima
ROCKER COVER
[VQ35DE]
ROCKER COVER
Removal and Installation
PFP:13264
EBS00J5Z
WBIA0222E
1.
Rocker cover (left bank)
2.
PCV valve
3.
Rocker cover (right bank)
4.
Rocker cover gasket (right bank)
5.
Rocker cover (left bank)
6.
Oil filler cap
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the engine cover, using power tool.
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner assembly and air
intake tubes. Refer to EM-120, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly and the front cowl panel. Refer to WW-27,
"Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" .
Remove the intake manifold collector using power tool. Remove gasket and the electric throttle control
actuator. Refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the six ignition coils. Refer to EM-144, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the two intake valve timing control solenoid valves and gaskets. Refer to EC-1065, "INTAKE
VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-150
2005 Altima
ROCKER COVER
[VQ35DE]
7.
Remove RH and LH rocker covers from cylinder head.
● Follow the loosening sequence for each side rocker cover
bolts as shown.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
LBIA0078E
INSTALLATION
1.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
● Apply sealant to the areas on the front corners. Refer to EM163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" .
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
● Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two stages and in the
numerical order as shown.
H
I
J
Rocker cover bolts
Stage 1
: 0.96 - 2.96 N·m (0.10 - 0.30 kg-m,
9 - 26 in-lb)
Stage 2
: 7.33 - 9.33 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m,
65 - 82 in-lb)
K
L
M
WBIA0039E
Revision: March 2005
EM-151
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
Removal and Installation
PFP:13599
EBS00J60
LBIA0371E
Revision: March 2005
EM-152
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
1.
Timing chain tensioner
2.
Internal chain guide
3.
Timing chain tensioner
4.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
5.
Timing chain (secondary)
6.
Timing chain (primary)
7.
Camshaft sprocket (INT)
8.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
9.
Timing chain (secondary)
10. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
11. Slack guide
12. Crankshaft sprocket
13. Timing chain tensioner
14. IVT control valve cover - right
15. Chain tensioner cover
16. RH engine mounting bracket
17. Water hose clamp
18. Water pump cover
19. IVT control valve cover - left
20. Front oil seal
21. Crankshaft pulley
22. Idler pulley
23. Idler pulley bracket
24. Front timing chain case
25. Timing tension guide
26. Collared O-ring
27. Seal ring
A
EM
C
NOTE:
●
This section describes procedures for removal/installation procedure of the front timing chain case and
timing chain related parts without removing the oil pan (upper) from the vehicle.
●
When oil pan (upper) needs to be removed or installed, or when rear timing chain case is removed or
installed, remove oil pans (upper and lower) first. Then remove front timing chain case, timing chain
related parts, and rear timing chain case in this order, and install in reverse order of removal. Refer to EM161, "TIMING CHAIN" .
●
Refer to EM-161, "TIMING CHAIN" for component parts location.
D
E
F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove lower and upper oil pans. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove engine cover using power tool.
Remove the upper air cleaner case, mass air flow sensor and air
cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM120, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the engine coolant reservoir. Refer to CO-30, "Removal
and Installation" .
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0339E
5.
6.
Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the IPDM E/R and position aside. Remove the bracket. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
7. Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-4, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" .
8. Remove the engine undercover.
9. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield.
10. Remove the drive belts and idler pulley. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" .
11. Recover the A/C system R134a and remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ATC-103, "Evacuating System
and Charging Refrigerant" .
12. Remove engine oil cooler pipe bolts.
Revision: March 2005
EM-153
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
13. Remove the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank with lines attached and position them aside. Refer
to PS-20, "Removal and Installation"
14. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" .
15. Disconnect the engine harness and position aside.
16. Remove the A/C low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-112, "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose" or MTC-98, "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC).
17. Support the engine and remove the RH engine mounting insulator, mount and bracket. Refer to EM-219,
"Removal and Installation" .
18. Remove the chain tensioner cover and water pump cover, using
Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
PBIC0846E
19. Remove the IVT control covers, right and left. Loosen the IVT
control cover bolts in the order as shown.
NOTE:
The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the
intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight
out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket.
20. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
21. Remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-122,
"Removal and Installation" .
WBIA0260E
22. Remove the six ignition coils.
NOTE:
Note locations for installation.
23. Remove the six spark plugs.
WBIA0347E
Revision: March 2005
EM-154
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
24. If necessary, remove the rocker covers. Loosen the rocker covers bolts in the order as shown.
NOTE:
Necessary only when removing secondary timing chains.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
LBIA0078E
25. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves.
● Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation.
H
I
J
WBIA0169E
26. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved
line without color) with timing indicator.
K
L
M
SEM918G
b.
Check that intake and exhaust camshaft lobes
on No. 1 cylinder (right bank of engine) are located as shown.
● If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as
shown.
SEM418G
Revision: March 2005
EM-155
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
27. Lock the drive plate (A/T), flywheel (M/T) attached to the starter
bolt hole using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool.
SEM485GA
SEM541G
28. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt using Tool and locate bolt seating
surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
Tool number
: KV10109300
WBIA0386E
b.
Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to
remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION:
Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
EMQ0477D
29. Remove the front timing chain case.
a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
WBIA0290E
Revision: March 2005
EM-156
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
b.
c.
Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the
front timing chain case as shown.
Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown.
● Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool.
CAUTION:
● Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool.
● After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or
warp under a load.
A
EM
C
SEM156F
D
30. Remove the water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from the front timing chain case using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
E
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
● Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front cover.
●
F
G
H
SEM829E
32. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from
the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
I
J
K
L
SEM428G
M
INSTALLATION
1.
Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up
to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length.
PBIC1101E
Revision: March 2005
EM-157
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
2.
Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply
new engine oil to the oil seal edges.
NOTE:
Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
SEM715A
a.
Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the
face with front timing chain case using suitable drift.
CAUTION:
Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil
seal.
NOTE:
Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not
inverted.
PBIC0790E
3.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
● Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
PBIC1133E
4.
Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case.
5.
Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
Revision: March 2005
EM-158
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
Bolt position Bolt diameter
1, 2
: 8 mm (0.31 in)
3 – 22
: 6 mm (0.24 in)
6.
A
Bolt position Tightening specification
1, 2
: 28.5 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
3 – 22
: 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
7.
a.
EM
Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
● Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as
shown.
C
SEM730G
D
Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH
sides).
E
F
G
KBIA1315E
b.
c.
H
Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
I
J
SEM437G
●
●
Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation
groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes
to install the IVT control covers.
Tighten the intake valve timing control cover bolts in the order
as shown.
Intake valve timing
control cover bolts
L
M
: 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
SEM728G
Revision: March 2005
EM-159
K
2005 Altima
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
[VQ35DE]
8.
Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover and the
chain tensioner cover.
Water pump cover bolts
Chain tensioner cover
bolts
●
: 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb)
: 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb)
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
SEM744GA
9.
Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
● Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine
oil.
● Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening.
Step 1
Step 2
: 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb)
: 60° - 65° degrees clockwise
SEM531G
SEM963E
10. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns
smoothly.
11. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-160
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
TIMING CHAIN
Components
PFP:13028
A
EBS00J61
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0170E
Revision: March 2005
EM-161
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
1.
Timing chain tensioner
2.
Internal chain guide
4.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
5.
Timing chain (secondary)
6.
Timing chain (primary)
7.
Camshaft sprocket (INT)
8.
Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
9.
Timing chain (secondary)
10. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
11. Slack guide
3.
Timing chain tensioner
12. Crankshaft sprocket
13. Timing chain tensioner
14. IVT control valve cover - right
15. Chain tensioner cover
16. RH engine mounting bracket
17. Water hose clamp
18. Water pump cover
19. IVT control valve cover - left
20. Front oil seal
21. Crankshaft pulley
22. Idler pulley
23. Idler pulley bracket
24. Front timing chain case
25. Rear timing chain case
26. Water drain plug
27. Tension guide
28. O-ring
Revision: March 2005
EM-162
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET
●
●
A
Refer to EM-110, "LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE" .
Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant.
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0171E
CAUTION:
●
After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will
strike the pistons.
Revision: March 2005
EM-163
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
●
●
●
●
●
●
When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting
surfaces with new engine oil.
Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley.
Before disconnecting fuel hose, release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE" .
Before removing the upper oil pan, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
Be careful not to damage sensor edges.
Do not spill engine oil or coolant on drive belts.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
EBS00J62
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the battery.
Drain the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Remove engine cover with power tool.
Remove the intake air duct with the air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor.
Remove the engine coolant reservoir.
Disconnect the fuel rail quick connector at the vehicle piping side. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the cowl top grille and the windshield wiper assembly. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the front RH wheel and tire with power tool.
Remove the engine undercovers with power tool.
Remove the inner fender splash shield with power tool.
Remove the drive belts and idler pulley.
Recover the A/C system R134a and remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ATC-103, "REFRIGERANT
LINES" .
Dismount the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank. Tie them down with wire to reposition them out
of the way.
Remove the lower and upper oil pans. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the A/C high pressure line. Refer to ATC-103, "REFRIGERANT LINES" .
Remove the alternator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the engine harness and set aside.
Support the engine and remove the RH engine mount and bracket.
Remove the IVT control covers, right and left. Loosen the bolts
in the numerical order as shown.
NOTE:
The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the
intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight
out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket.
Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
SEM423G
23. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
Revision: March 2005
EM-164
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
a.
Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved
line without color) with timing indicator.
A
EM
C
SEM727G
D
b.
Check that intake and exhaust cam nose on No. 1 cylinder
(engine front side of right) are located as shown.
● If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as
shown.
E
F
G
SEM418G
24. Set the ring gear stopper using the bolt hole.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear, when setting the stopper.
H
I
J
SEM541G
K
L
M
SEM485GA
25. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Set the ring gear stopper using the bolt hole.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear when setting the stopper.
SEM541G
Revision: March 2005
EM-165
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
SEM485GA
b.
Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt using pulley holder and locate bolt
seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
PBIC0885E
c.
Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to
remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION:
Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
EMQ0477D
26. Remove the front timing chain case.
a. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
WBIA0290E
b.
c.
Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the
front timing chain case as shown.
Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown.
● Use seal cutter or an equivalent tool to cut liquid gasket for
removal.
CAUTION:
● Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool.
● After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or
warp under a load.
SEM156F
Revision: March 2005
EM-166
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose.
Disconnect the electric throttle control actuator.
Disconnect the coolant hoses at the electric throttle control actuator.
Disconnect the PCV hose.
Disconnect the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid vacuum hose.
A
EM
32. Remove the intake manifold collector. Loosen the bolts and nuts
in the numerical order as shown.
C
D
E
WBIA0285E
33. Remove the six ignition coils.
34. Remove the six spark plugs.
35. Remove the engine oil dipstick.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
WBIA0048E
36. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves.
● Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation.
WBIA0169E
Revision: March 2005
EM-167
2005 Altima
M
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
37. Remove the rocker covers. Loosen the bolts in the numerical
order as shown.
LBIA0078E
38. Place paint marks on the timing chain and sprockets to indicate
the correct position of the components for installation.
39. Remove the internal chain guide.
SEM740G
40. Remove the timing chain tensioner and slack side chain guide.
Revision: March 2005
EM-168
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
a.
Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure with
lever).
A
EM
C
SEM732G
D
b.
Insert stopper pin into tensioner body hole to hold lever, and
keep the tab released. An Allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is
used for a stopper pin as an example.
c. Insert plunger into tensioner body by pressing the slack side
chain guide.
d. Keep the slack side chain guide pressed and hold it by pushing
the stopper pin through the lever hole and body hole.
e. Remove the bolts and remove the timing chain tensioner.
41. Remove primary timing chain and crankshaft sprocket.
CAUTION:
After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and
camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons.
E
F
G
SEM733G
H
42. Attach a suitable stopper pin to the right and left camshaft chain
tensioners (for secondary timing chains).
I
J
K
SEM923G
L
43. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts.
● Apply paint to the timing chain and camshaft sprockets for
alignment during installation.
● Secure the hexagonal portion of the camshaft using a wrench
to loosen the bolts.
M
WBIA0172E
Revision: March 2005
EM-169
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
44. Remove the secondary timing chains with camshaft sprockets.
a. Rotate camshaft slightly, and slacken timing chain of timing
chain tensioner -side.
b. Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between
timing chain and chain tensioner plunger. Remove cam sprocket
and secondary timing chain with timing chain removed from
guide groove.
CAUTION:
Chain tensioner plunger can move, while stopper pin is
inserted in tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner
when timing chain is removed. Use caution during removal.
● Intake camshaft sprocket is two-for-one structure of primary
and secondary sprockets.
● Handle the intake sprockets as an assembly.
CAUTION:
● Avoid impact or dropping the intake sprockets.
● Do not disassemble the intake sprockets (never loosen
bolts A and B as shown).
SEM922G
SEM734G
45. Remove the chain tension guide.
46. Remove the rear timing chain case.
CAUTION:
● Do not remove the plate metal cover for the oil passage.
● After removing the chain case, do not apply any load to
the case that might bend it.
KBIA1307E
a.
b.
Loosen and remove the rear timing chain case bolts in the order
as shown.
Cut the sealant with an appropriate tool and remove the rear
timing chain case.
WBIA0078E
47. Remove O-rings to cylinder head and cylinder block.
Revision: March 2005
EM-170
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
48. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from
the front and rear timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
A
EM
C
SEM428G
D
49. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and
bolts.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces.
E
F
G
SEM161F
H
50. Use a scraper to remove all the old Silicone RTV Sealant from
the water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and IVT control
covers.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.
I
J
K
WBIA0173E
51. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front cover.
L
M
SEM829E
Inspection
EBS00J63
Check for cracks and any excessive wear of the timing chain. Replace the timing chain as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
EM-171
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
Installation
EBS00J64
NOTE:
The figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, the components installed.
WBIA0280E
1.
a.
1.
Internal chain guide
2.
Camshaft sprocket (intake)
3.
Mating mark (copper link)
4.
Mating mark (punched)
5.
Secondary timing chain tensioner
6.
Mating mark (gold link)
7.
Secondary timing chain
8.
Camshaft sprocket (exhaust)
9.
Tensioner guide
10. Water pump
11. Crankshaft sprocket
12. Mating mark (notched)
13. Primary timing chain
14. Slack guide
15. Primary timing chain tensioner
16. Mating mark (back side)
17. Crankshaft key
Install rear timing chain case as follows:
Install O-rings on cylinder block.
PBIC0788E
b.
Install O-rings on cylinder head.
Revision: March 2005
EM-172
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
A
EM
C
SEM447G
2.
3.
a.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" .
Align the rear timing chain case and water pump assembly with
the dowel pins (RH and LH) on the cylinder block and install the
case. Make sure the O-rings stay in place during installation.
Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown. There are two
bolt lengths used. Follow the chart below for proper bolt length
specifications.
Bolt position
1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
4, 5, 11 - 26
b.
Bolt length
20 mm (0.79 in)
16 mm (0.63 in)
After all bolts are initially tightened, retighten them to the specification in the numerical order as shown.
Rear timing chain case bolts
D
E
F
G
SEM735G
H
: 12 - 13 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 -10 ft-lb)
I
4.
5.
6.
Install the timing chain tension guide.
Position the crankshaft so No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the
compression stroke.
● Make sure that the dowel pin hole, dowel pin and crankshaft
key are located as shown.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side): at cylinder head upper
face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side): at cylinder head upper
face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key: at cylinder head side of RH bank.
CAUTION:
Hole on small diameter side must be used for intake camshaft sprocket dowel pin. Do not misidentify (ignore big
diameter side).
J
K
L
KBIA1073E
M
Install the secondary timing chains and camshaft sprockets.
CAUTION:
Matching marks between the timing chain and sprockets
slip easily. Confirm all matching mark positions repeatedly
during the installation process.
● Push the sleeve of the secondary chain tensioner and keep it
pressed in with a stopper pin.
SEM430G
Revision: March 2005
EM-173
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
a.
b.
Align the matching marks on the secondary timing chain (gold
link) with the ones on the intake and exhaust sprockets
(stamped), and install them.
● Matching marks for the intake sprocket are on the back side
of the secondary sprocket.
● There are two types of matching marks, round and oval types.
They should be used for the RH and LH banks, respectively.
RH bank: use round type.
LH bank: use oval type.
Align the dowel pin and pin hole on the camshaft with the groove
and dowel pin on the sprocket, and install them.
● On the intake side, align the pin hole on the small diameter
side of the camshaft front end with the dowel pin on the back
side of the camshaft sprocket, and install them.
● On the exhaust side, align the dowel pin on the camshaft front
end with the pin groove on the camshaft sprocket, and install
them.
● Bolts for the camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next
step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of the dowel pins.
PBIC0886E
●
It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating
marks during and after installation. To make the matching
easier, make a mating mark on the sprocket teeth in advance
with paint.
SEM811G
7.
After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts.
● Secure the camshaft using a wrench at the hexagonal portion
to tighten the bolts.
WBIA0172E
8.
Pull the stopper pins out from the secondary timing chain tensioners.
SEM923G
Revision: March 2005
EM-174
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
9.
Install the crankshaft sprocket on the crankshaft.
● Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face
the front of the engine.
A
EM
C
SEM929E
10. Install the primary timing chain.
● Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on
camshaft sprocket is aligned with the copper link on the timing
chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft
sprocket is aligned with the orange one on the timing chain,
as shown.
● When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing
chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft using a
wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating
marks.
● During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating
mark alignments of the secondary timing chains.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WBIA0279E
K
11. Install the internal chain guide.
L
M
SEM740G
Revision: March 2005
EM-175
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
12. Install the slack guide.
● Do not overtighten the slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap
to exist under the bolt seats when the bolts are tightened to
specification.
SEM741G
13. Install the timing chain tensioner for the slack guide.
● When installing the chain tensioner, push in the sleeve and
keep it pressed in with the stopper pin.
● Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the
back and the mounting surfaces of the chain tensioner.
● After installation, pull out the stopper pin while pressing the
slack guide.
14. Reconfirm that the matching marks on the sprockets and the
timing chain have not slipped out of alignment.
SEM733G
15. Install new O-rings on the rear timing chain case.
SEM435G
16. Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a
suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges.
● Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
Suitable drift
Outer diameter
Inner diameter
: 59 mm (2.32 in)
: 49 mm (1.93 in)
CAUTION:
Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil
seal.
SEM715A
Revision: March 2005
EM-176
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
●
●
Using a suitable drift, press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush
with timing chain case end face.
Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and
seal lip is not inverted.
A
EM
C
PBIC0790E
D
17. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case.
Refer to EM-163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" .
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
● Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
E
F
18. Install the rear case pin into dowel pin hole on front timing chain case.
19. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in order as shown.
G
Bolt position
1, 2
: 25.5 - 31.4 N·m (2.6 - 3.2 kg-m,
18.8 - 23.1 ft-lb)
3 - 22
: 11.8 - 13.7 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m,
8.7 - 10.1 ft-lb)
H
I
SEM730G
20. After installing the front timing chain case, check the surface
height difference between the following parts on the oil pan mating surface.
● If not within specification, repeat the installation procedure.
J
K
L
M
SEM746G
Front timing chain case to rear timing
chain case
Oil pump to cylinder block
Rear timing chain case to cylinder block
Revision: March 2005
: (–0.14) - 0.14 mm [(–0.0055) - 0.0055 in]
: (–0.36) - (–0.10) mm [(–0.0142) - (–0.0039) in]
: (–0.24) - 0.14 mm [(–0.0094) - 0.0055 in]
EM-177
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
21. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH
sides).
KBIA1315E
b.
c.
Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers.
Use Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
SEM437G
●
●
Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation
groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes
to install the IVT control covers.
Tighten in the numerical order as shown.
SEM728G
22. Install the water pump cover and the chain tensioner cover.
Apply Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
SEM744GA
Revision: March 2005
EM-178
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
23. Install the RH and LH rocker covers.
Rocker cover tightening procedure:
● Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two stages in the numerical order as shown.
Stage 1
Stage 2
A
EM
: 0.96 - 2.96 N·m (0.1 - 0.3 kg-m, 9 - 26 in-lb)
: 7.33 - 9.33 N·m (0.75 - 0.95 kg-m, 65 - 82 in-lb)
C
SEM748G
D
E
F
G
SEM749G
24. Install the IVT control solenoid valve bank 1 and bank 2.
IVT control
solenoid valve
bolts
H
: 10 - 12 N·m (1.0 - 1.3 kg-m,
87 - 112 in-lb)
I
25. Install the engine oil dipstick.
J
WBIA0169E
K
26. Install the six spark plugs to their original positions.
Spark plugs (6)
: 20 - 29 N·m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m,
14 - 22 ft-lb)
L
27. Install the six ignition coils to their original positions.
Ignition coils (6)
M
: 6.37 - 7.54 N·m (0.65 - 0.76 kg-m,
57 - 66 in-lb)
WBIA0048E
Revision: March 2005
EM-179
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
28. Install the intake manifold collector. Tighten the bolts and nuts in
numerical order as shown.
Intake manifold
collector bolts
: 18 - 21 N·m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-lb,
13 - 15 ft-lb)
29. Connect the EVAP purge volume control solenoid hose.
30. Connect the PCV hose.
31. Connect the coolant hoses to the electric throttle control actuator.
32. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose.
33. Connect the electric throttle control actuator harness electrical
connector.
SEM713G
34. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two stages.
● Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new
engine oil.
● Apply a paint mark for the second stage of angle tightening.
Stage 1
Stage 2
: 39 - 49 N·m (4.0 - 5.0 kg-m, 29 - 36 ft-lb)
: 60° - 65° degrees clockwise
SEM531G
SEM963E
35. Remove the ring gear stopper.
SEM541G
Revision: March 2005
EM-180
2005 Altima
TIMING CHAIN
[VQ35DE]
A
EM
C
SEM485GA
36. Install the starter motor.
Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
37. Install the RH engine mount and bracket.
D
Engine mount to frame bolts (2)
Engine mount bracket to front cover bolts (2)
Engine mount bracket to front cover nut (1)
Engine mount to bracket nuts (2)
: 66 - 74 N·m (6.7 - 7.6 kg-m, 49 - 54 ft-lb)
: 79 - 90 N·m (8.0 - 9.2 kg-m, 58 - 66 ft-lb)
: 10 - 15 N·m (1.0 - 1.6 kg-m, 87 - 138 in-lb)
: 49 - 58 N·m (5.0 - 6.0 kg-m, 37 - 43 ft-lb)
38. Reposition and reconnect the engine harness.
39. Install the alternator.
Refer to SC-29, "Removal and Installation" .
40. Install the upper and lower oil pans.
Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
41. Install the power steering pump.
Refer to PS-20, "Removal and Installation" .
42. Install the A/C compressor and recharge the system.
Refer to ATC-108, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models" .
43. Install the idler pulley and the drive belts.
Refer to EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts" .
44. Install the inner fender splash shield and the engine undercovers.
45. Install the RH wheel and tire.
Refer to WT-4, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" .
46. Install the windshield wiper assembly and the cowl top grille.
Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
47. Install the fuel hose quick connector to the fuel tube at the vehicle piping side.
Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" .
48. Install the engine coolant reservoir.
49. Install the intake air duct with the air cleaner case lid and mass air flow sensor.
50. Install engine cover.
51. Refill the engine with oil and coolant.
Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes for the Silicone RTV Sealant to set before filling the engine with fluids to
avoid leaks.
52. Install the battery.
53. Activate the fuel system. Check for any leaks when the system is repressurized and correct as necessary.
54. Start the engine and check all systems for leaks or improper operation. Correct as necessary.
● After starting engine, keep idling for three minutes. Then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no
load to purge air from the high-pressure oil chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may
produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter
of concern.
Revision: March 2005
EM-181
2005 Altima
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
PFP:13001
EBS00J65
WBIA0094E
1.
Oil filler cap
2.
Rocker cover (LH)
3.
Camshaft bracket (LH)
4.
Camshaft (INT)
5.
PCV valve
6.
Cylinder head
7.
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
8.
Spark plug
9.
Valve
10. Valve spring seat
11. Valve spring
13. Valve collet
14. Valve lifter
15. Camshaft (EXH)
16. Tensioner sleeve
17. Tensioner spring
18. Chain tensioner
19.
20. PCV hose
21. Oil catcher
IVT control solenoid valve
12. Valve spring retainer
CAUTION:
Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation.
Revision: March 2005
EM-182
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" .
Remove the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" .
If necessary, remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH
and LH bank) from cylinder head back side.
CAUTION:
● Handle carefully to avoid dropping an shocks.
● Do not disassemble.
● Do not allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at
sensor tip.
● Do not place sensors in a location where they are
exposed to magnetism.
EM
C
D
KBIA1046E
4.
Remove the IVT control solenoid valves.
● Discard the IVT control solenoid valve gaskets and use new
gaskets for installation.
E
F
G
H
WBIA0169E
5.
I
Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft brackets and the camshafts.
● Mark the camshafts, camshaft brackets, and bolts so they are
placed in the same position and direction for installation.
● Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in
the numerical order as shown.
J
K
SEM856E
L
M
SEM857E
6.
Remove valve lifters.
NOTE:
Identify installation positions to ensure proper installation.
Revision: March 2005
EM-183
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
7.
Remove secondary timing chain tensioner from cylinder head
● Remove secondary tensioner with its stopper pin attached.
NOTE:
Stopper pin was attached when secondary timing chain was
removed.
SEM444G
INSTALLATION
1.
Before installation, remove any old Silicone RTV Sealant from
component mating surfaces using a scraper.
● Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt holes and
threads.
● Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces.
SEM161F
2.
Before installing the front cam bracket, remove the old Silicone
RTV Sealant from the mating surface using a scraper.
● Do not scratch or damage the mating surface.
SEM892E
3.
Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke.
● The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder
center line as shown.
SEM532G
Revision: March 2005
EM-184
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
4.
Install camshaft chain tensioners on both sides of cylinder head.
Camshaft chain
tensioner bolts
A
: 7 - 10 N·m (0.7 - 1.0 kg-m,
62 - 89 in-lb)
EM
C
SEM444G
D
5.
6.
Install valve lifters.
NOTE:
Install them in original positions.
Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets.
● Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange.
E
F
G
H
SEM652F
●
I
Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present on the new camshafts components for proper placement and direction of the
components.
J
Paint marks
Bank
RH
LH
●
INT/EXH
ID mark
Drill mark
INT
RE
EXH
M1
M2
Yes
Yes
No
RE
No
No
Yes
INT
LH
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
LH
No
No
Yes
K
SEM653F
Position the camshafts:
RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock.
LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock.
M
KBIA1072E
Revision: March 2005
EM-185
L
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
7.
Before installing camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 camshaft bracket.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer
to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
SEM446G
●
●
Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant.
Refer to EM-110, "LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE" .
PBIC0915E
●
●
Install camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown.
If checking and adjusting any part of valve assembly or
camshaft, check valve clearance according to the reference data. Refer to EM-191, "Valve Clearance" .
Valve clearance (cold) Intake
Valve clearance (cold) Exhaust
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm
(0.010 - 0.013 in)
: 0.29 - 0.37 mm
(0.011 - 0.015 in)
SEM564G
Revision: March 2005
EM-186
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
●
Tighten the camshaft brackets in the three steps, in numerical order as shown.
1
1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Tighten No.s 7 to 10, then
tighten 1 to 6 in order as
shown.
2
5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Tighten in numerical order
as shown.
9.02 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.20
kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 in-lb)
3
A
EM
C
Tighten No. 1 -6 in the
numerical order as shown.
D
SEM885EA
E
F
G
SEM886EA
8.
Measure difference in levels between front end faces of No. 1
camshaft bracket and cylinder head.
Standard
●
H
I
: – 0.14 (– 0.0055 in)
If measurement is outside the specified range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket.
J
K
EMQ0044D
L
9.
Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets.
IVT control solenoid valve bolts
: 10 - 12 N·m (1.0 - 1.3 kg-m,
87 - 112 in-lb)
M
WBIA0169E
10. If necessary, install camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank.)
11. Install the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" .
12. Install the timing chains. Refer to EM-172, "Installation" .
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Visual Check
Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Replace if necessary.
Revision: March 2005
EM-187
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
Camshaft Runout
1.
2.
3.
Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown.
Set dial gauges vertically to No. 3 journal as shown.
Turn camshaft in one direction slowly by hand, measure the
camshaft runout on the dial gauges.
● Runout is the largest indicator reading after one full revolution.
Camshaft Runout
Standard
Limit
4.
: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
PBIC0929E
If actual runout exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Lobe Height
1.
2.
Measure camshaft cam lobe height as shown. Refer to EM-251,
"CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING" .
If wear has reduced the lobe height below specifications,
replace the camshaft.
SEM549A
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal
●
Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal as shown.
Standard outer
diameter, No.1
Standard outer
diameter, No.2, 3, 4
: 25.935 - 25.955 mm
(1.0211 - 1.0218 in)
: 23.445 - 23.465 mm
(0.9230 - 0.9238 in)
SEM012A
Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket
1. Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with specified torque.
2. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter "A" of camshaft bearing.
Standard inner diameter
No.1
Standard inner diameter
No.2, 3, 4
: 26.000 - 26.021 mm
(1.0236 - 1.0244 in)
: 23.500 - 23.521 mm
(0.9252 - 0.9260 in)
SEM862E
Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance
(Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal)
Revision: March 2005
EM-188
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
Standard
No.1
Standard
No.2, 3, 4
Limit
●
: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in)
A
: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 in)
EM
: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
When out of the specified range, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTICE:
Inner diameter of camshaft bracket is manufactured together with cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head assembly.
D
Camshaft End Play
1.
2.
Install the camshaft in the cylinder head.
Install dial gauge in thrust direction on front end of camshaft.
Measure end play when camshaft is moved forward/backward
(in direction to axis) as shown.
Standard
Limit
●
●
E
: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in)
: 0.24 mm (0.0094 in)
F
If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and
measure again.
If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder
head.
G
SEM864E
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
1.
2.
3.
Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown.
Install camshaft sprocket on camshaft.
Measure camshaft sprocket runout.
Runout
4.
C
H
I
J
: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
If sprocket runout exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
K
PBIC0930E
L
Valve Lifter
●
Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or
cracks, replace as necessary.
M
KBIA0182E
Revision: March 2005
EM-189
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
Valve Lifter Clearance
Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter
●
Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Refer to EM-248,
"Valve Lifter" .
●
If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter.
JEM798G
Valve Lifter Bore Diameter
●
Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore
of cylinder head. Refer to EM-248, "Valve Lifter" .
●
If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly.
SEM867E
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance
●
(Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) – (outer diameter of valve lifter) Refer to EM-248,
"Valve Lifter" .
●
If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly.
Inspection after Installation
EBS00M8E
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE
CAUTION:
●
Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT II
and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to.
●
Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil.
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-20, "OIL LEVEL" .
2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while
checking.
a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors if practical.
3. Remove IVT control solenoid valve.
4. Crank engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out
from IVT control cover oil hole. End cranking after checking.
WARNING:
Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.).
CAUTION:
● Engine oil may squirt from IVT control solenoid valve
installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to prevent engine oil from splashing on worker, engine components and vehicle.
KBIA2686E
Revision: March 2005
EM-190
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belts or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil.
A
Clean oil groove between oil strainer and IVT control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from
IVT control cover oil hole.
Remove components between IVT control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check EM
each oil groove for clogging.
● Clean oil groove if necessary.
C
After inspection, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
●
5.
6.
7.
Valve Clearance
EBS00J66
D
CHECKING
Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or
replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is
unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running.
1. Remove the air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses,
wires, harnesses, and connectors.
2. Remove the intake manifold collectors.
3. Remove the ignition coils and spark plugs.
4. Remove the rocker covers.
●
E
F
G
SEM713A
5.
H
Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
● Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
I
J
K
SEM727G
●
L
Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and
valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one
full revolution (360°) and align as shown.
M
SEM418G
Revision: March 2005
EM-191
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
6.
Check only the valves as shown.
Crank Position
Valve No. 1
Valve No. 2
Valve No. 3
Valve No. 6
No. 1 TDC
Intake
Exhaust
Exhaust
Intake
●
●
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the
valve lifter and camshaft.
Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of
specification. They will be used later to determine the required
replacement lifter size.
Valve Clearance for Checking (cold)
Intake
Exhaust
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
: 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
SEM893E
SEM139D
KBIA0185E
7.
8.
Turn crankshaft 240°.
Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
Revision: March 2005
EM-192
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
9.
Check only those valves as shown.
Crank Position
Valve No. 2
Valve No. 3
Valve No. 4
Valve No. 5
No. 3 TDC
Intake
Intake
Exhaust
Exhaust
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
SEM894E
10. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above.
11. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke.
12. Check only those valves as shown.
H
Crank Position
Valve No. 1
Valve No. 4
Valve No. 5
Valve No. 6
No. 5 TDC
Exhaust
Intake
Intake
Exhaust
I
J
K
L
M
SEM958E
13. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following components. If the valve clearances are
out of specification, adjust the valve clearances.
● Intake manifold collectors
● Rocker covers
● All spark plugs
● All ignition coils
Revision: March 2005
EM-193
2005 Altima
CAMSHAFT
[VQ35DE]
VALVE ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
NOTE:
●
Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not
used).
●
The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances.
1. Remove the camshaft.
2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a
micrometer, as shown.
SEM754G
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Use the equation below to calculate the replacement valve lifter
thickness.
Valve lifter thickness calculation equation: t = t1 + (C1 - C2)
t = thickness of the replacement lifter
t1 = thickness of the removed lifter
C1 = measured valve clearance
C2 = standard valve clearance
● The thickness of the new valve lifter can be identified by the
stamp mark on the reverse side (inside the lifter).
● Available thickness of the valve lifter (factory setting):
SEM755G
7.88 - 8.36 mm (0.3102 - 0.3291 in), in 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
increments, in 25 sizes (intake / exhaust). Refer to EM-248,
"Valve Lifter" .
Value lifter thickness:
Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 in)
Install the selected replacement valve lifter.
Install the camshaft.
Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand.
Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification.
After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within
specification.
Valve Clearance
Cold
Hot* (reference data)
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in)
0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in)
0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in)
* Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Revision: March 2005
EM-194
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[VQ35DE]
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal
PFP:00100
A
EBS00MXS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-183, "REMOVAL" .
Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-183, "REMOVAL" .
Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring
using Tool.
CAUTION:
When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
Tool numbers
●
EM
C
: KV10116200 (J-26336-B)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
: KV10109230 ( — )
D
E
Compress valve spring using Tool attachment, adapter.
Remove valve collet with magnet hand.
WBIA0578E
F
4.
Remove valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
G
H
I
WBIA0489E
5.
Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent valve from dropping
into cylinder.
CAUTION:
When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front cover with the timing chain.
J
K
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
Press in valve oil seal to height "H" using Tool to specified
height.
Tool number
:
—
L
(J-39386)
M
NOTE:
Dimension "H": height measured before valve spring seat installation.
Intake and exhaust
3.
: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
WBIA0490E
EBS00J68
REMOVAL
1.
2.
a.
Remove the following parts:
● Engine under cover
● Drive belts. Refer to EM-119, "DRIVE BELTS" .
● Radiator fan. Refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" .
Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-195
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[VQ35DE]
b.
Set the ring gear stopper using the bolt hole.
Tool number
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
CAUTION:
Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth
behind the ring gear when setting the stopper.
SEM541G
SEM485GA
c.
Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt using pulley holder and locate bolt
seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position.
PBIC0885E
d.
Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to
remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION:
Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
EMQ0477D
3.
Remove front oil seal from front cover.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front cover or crankshaft.
SEM829E
Revision: March 2005
EM-196
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[VQ35DE]
INSTALLATION
1.
Suitable drift
Outer diameter
Inner diameter
EM
: 59 mm (2.32 in)
: 49 mm (1.93 in)
C
CAUTION:
Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil
seal.
2.
A
Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it flush with front
of mounting surface using a suitable tool.
● Install new oil seal in the direction as shown.
SEM715A
Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine
oil.
● Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening.
E
●
Step 1
Step 2
D
F
: 39 - 49 N·m (4.0 - 5.0 kg-m, 29 - 36 ft-lb)
: 60° - 65° degrees clockwise
G
SEM531G
H
I
J
SEM963E
3.
Remove Tool attached to the bolt hole.
Tool number
K
L
: KV10117700 (J-44716)
M
WBIA0270E
WBIA0271E
Revision: March 2005
EM-197
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[VQ35DE]
4.
Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
EBS00J69
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the transaxle. Refer to MT-81, "Removal and Installation" (M/T), AT-273, "REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" (RE4F04B), or AT-624, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" (RE5F22A).
Remove flywheel (M/T) or drive plate (A/T).
Remove rear oil seal with a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.
PBIC2932E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply new engine oil to new rear oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
Install rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
SEM715A
●
Press in rear oil seal to the position as shown.
SBIA0281E
●
Install new rear oil seal using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(J-47128)
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder
block.
● Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.
● Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip.
LBIA0454E
3.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
EM-198
2005 Altima
OIL SEAL
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
● When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed corA
rectly during re-assembly.
● Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of
drivetrain components.
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-199
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:11041
EBS00J6A
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected.
Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove all six spark plugs.
Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" .
Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder.
Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake
flow.
Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication.
Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7).
● Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified
engine speed.
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/rpm
9.
a.
b.
●
●
●
–
–
Standard
Minimum
Difference limit between
cylinders
1,275 (13.0, 185)/300
981 (10.0, 142)/300
98 (1.0, 14)/300
SEM387C
If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes.
Retest compression (steps 5 - 8).
If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If
so, replace piston rings after checking piston.
If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the
valve and/or valve seat. Refer to EM-247, "VALVE" . If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged
excessively, replace as necessary.
If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other:
The cylinder head gasket may be leaking.
Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
EM-200
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
Removal and Installation
EBS00J6B
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
WBIA0215E
1.
Oil filler cap
2.
Oil catcher
3.
Rocker cover
4.
PCV hose
5.
IVT control solenoid valve
6.
PCV valve
7.
Tensioner sleeve
8.
Spring
9.
Chain tensioner
M
10. Valve
11. Cylinder head
12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
13. Spark plug
14. Valve spring seat
15. Valve spring
16. Valve spring retainer
17. Valve collet
18. Valve lifter
19.
Camshaft (EXH)
20. Camshaft (INT)
21. Camshaft bracket
22.
Spark plug tube
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" .
Remove the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-201
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
3.
4.
Remove the intake manifold using power tool.
● Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
Remove the coolant outlet housing.
WBIA0043E
5.
Remove rear timing chain case bolts using power tool.
● Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
SEM442G
6.
Remove rear timing chain case using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
SEM279G
7.
Remove the O-rings from the front of the cylinder heads.
● Discard the O-rings and use new O-rings for installation.
SEM447G
Revision: March 2005
EM-202
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
8.
Remove the O-rings from the cylinder block.
● Discard the O-rings and use new O-rings for installation.
A
EM
C
SEM534G
D
9.
Remove the IVT control valves.
● Discard the IVT control valve gaskets and use new gaskets
for installation.
E
F
G
WBIA0169E
H
10. Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts and the camshaft
brackets.
● Mark the camshaft brackets so they are placed in the same
position and direction for installation.
● Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in
the numerical order as shown.
I
J
K
SEM856E
L
M
SEM857E
11. Remove the RH and LH cylinder head bolts, with power tool.
● The bolts should be loosened gradually in three stages.
● Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
SEM859E
Revision: March 2005
EM-203
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
SEM860E
12. Remove cylinder heads and gaskets.
● Discard the cylinder head gaskets and use new gaskets for
installation.
SEM863E
INSTALLATION
1.
Before installing the rear timing chain case, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from mating surface using a scraper.
● Also remove old sealant from mating surface of cylinder
block.
SEM891E
●
Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt hole and
thread.
SEM161F
Revision: March 2005
EM-204
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
2.
Before installing the front cam bracket, remove the old RTV Silicone Sealant from the mating surface using a scraper.
● Do not scratch the mating surface.
A
EM
C
SEM892E
D
3.
Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke.
● The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder
center line as shown.
E
F
G
SEM532G
4.
H
Install new gaskets on the cylinder heads.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately or valves
will strike piston heads.
I
J
K
SEM445G
5.
Inspect the cylinder head bolts before installing the cylinder heads.
CAUTION:
Cylinder head bolts are tightened by degree rotation tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1
and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones.
Limit (d1 - d2)
●
M
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new
engine oil.
SEM957E
Revision: March 2005
EM-205
L
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
6.
Install the cylinder heads on the cylinder block. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in the five stages in the numerical order as
shown.
SEM879EA
●
Tightening procedure:
Cylinder head bolts
Step a : 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb)
Step b :Loosen in the reverse order of tightening
Step c : 32.9 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)
Step d : 90° degrees rotation clockwise
Step e : 90° degrees rotation clockwise
SEM877EA
SEM878EA
7.
Install camshaft chain tensioners on both sides of cylinder head.
Camshaft chain
tensioner bolts
: 7 - 10 N·m (0.7 - 1.0 kg-m,
62 - 89 in-lb)
SEM444G
Revision: March 2005
EM-206
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
8.
Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets.
● Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket
mounting flange.
A
EM
C
SEM652F
D
●
Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present on the new camshaft components for proper placement.
Bank
RH
LH
●
INT/EXH
ID mark
Drill mark
E
Paint marks
M1
M2
INT
RE
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
RE
No
No
Yes
INT
LH
Yes
Yes
No
EXH
LH
No
No
Yes
F
G
SEM653F
Position the camshafts:
RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock
LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock.
H
I
J
KBIA1072E
9.
Before installing camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 journal head.
● Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
● Refer to EM-163, "POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET" .
L
M
SEM446G
Revision: March 2005
EM-207
K
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
●
●
Install camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown.
If any part of valve assembly or camshaft is replaced, check
and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to EM-191, "Valve
Clearance" .
Valve clearance (cold)
Intake
Valve clearance (cold)
Exhaust
●
: 0.26 - 0.34 mm
(0.010 - 0.013 in)
: 0.29 - 0.37 mm
(0.011 - 0.015 in)
Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the camshaft
bracket bolts with new engine oil before installation.
SEM564G
10. Tighten the camshaft brackets in the following three steps in the numerical order as shown.
1
1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb)
Tighten No.s 7 to 10, then
tighten 1 to 6 in order as
shown.
2
5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
Tighten in numerical order
as shown.
3
9.02 - 11.8 N·m (0.92 - 1.20
kg-m, 79.9 - 104.2 in-lb)
Tighten No. 1 -6 in the
numerical order as shown.
SEM885EA
SEM886EA
11. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets.
IVT control
solenoid valve
bolts
: 10 - 12 N·m (1.0 - 1.3 kg-m,
87 - 112 in-lb)
WBIA0169E
Revision: March 2005
EM-208
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
12. Install the new O-rings on the cylinder block.
A
EM
C
SEM534G
D
13. Install the new O-rings on the cylinder head.
E
F
G
SEM447G
14. Apply sealant to the specified portion of the rear timing chain case. Refer to EM-110, "LIQUID GASKET
APPLICATION PROCEDURE" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-209
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
●
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
SEM411G
●
Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant.
Revision: March 2005
EM-210
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
15. Align rear timing chain case with dowel pins, then install on cylinder head and block.
16. Tighten rear chain case bolts in two stages.
a. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
b. Retighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
17. Install the coolant outlet housing.
A
EM
C
D
E
F
G
SEM448G
18. Install the intake manifold with a new gasket.
● Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
Step 1
Step 2
H
: 5 - 10 N·m (0.5 - 1.0 kg-m, 44 - 86 in-lb)
: 26 - 31 N·m (2.7 - 3.2 kg-m, 20 - 23 ft-lb)
I
J
SEM950F
19. Install the fuel rail and injectors. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation" .
20. Install the timing chains. Refer to EM-172, "Installation" .
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-211
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
Disassembly and Assembly
EBS00J6C
WBIA0216E
1.
Cylinder head (right bank)
2.
Spark plug
3.
Valve lifter
4.
Valve collet
5.
Valve spring retainer
6.
Valve spring
7.
Valve oil seal
8.
Valve guide
9.
Valve seat (INT)
10. Valve (INT)
11. Valve (EXH)
12. Valve seat (EXH)
13. Cylinder head (left bank)
14. Intake manifold
15. Valve spring seat
16. Spark plug tube
Revision: March 2005
EM-212
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
●
When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting A
surfaces with new engine oil.
●
Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surface when installing cylinder head, camshaft
sprocket, crankshaft pulley, and camshaft bracket.
EM
●
Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
C
Remove spark plug.
Remove valve lifter.
● Identify installation positions, and store them without mixing them up.
Remove valve collet.
● Compress valve spring and remove valve collet with magnet
hand using Tool.
CAUTION:
When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
Tool numbers
D
E
: KV10109220 ( —
)
: KV10116200 (J-26336-A)
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
F
G
WBIA0578E
4.
5.
6.
Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat.
Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve.
● Identify installation positions, and store them without mixing them up.
Remove valve oil seals using Tool.
Tool number
H
I
: KV10107902 (J-38959)
J
K
WBIA0489E
7.
8.
9.
If valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-217, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
If valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-215, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" .
Remove spark plug tube, as necessary.
● Using pair of pliers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head.
CAUTION:
● Take care not to damage cylinder head.
● Once removed, spark plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused. Do not remove it unless
absolutely necessary.
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
When valve guide is removed, install it. Refer to EM-215, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" .
When valve seat is removed, install it. Refer to EM-217, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-213
2005 Altima
L
M
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
3.
Install valve oil seals using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(J-39386)
Height "H' (Without valve spring seat installed)
Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
4.
5.
6.
Install valve spring seat.
Install valves.
● Install it in the original position.
NOTE:
Larger diameter valves are for intake side.
WBIA0490E
Install valve spring (uneven pitch type).
● Install narrow pitch end (paint mark) to cylinder head side
(valve spring seat side).
● Intake side and exhaust side valve springs are different.
Install them referring to the following paint mark collar.
Paint mark collar
Intake
: Blue
Exhaust
: White
SEM085D
7.
8.
Install valve spring retainer.
Install valve collet.
● Compress valve spring with valve spring compressor, attachment and adapter using Tool. Install valve collet with magnet
hand.
CAUTION:
When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
● Tap valve stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to check its installed condition.
WBIA0578E
9.
Install valve lifter.
● Install it in the original position.
10. Install spark plug tube.
● Press-fit spark plug tube as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to cylinder head mounting hole.
b. Apply sealant to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in) from edge of spark plug tube press-fit side.
Use Genuine High Strength Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
c. Press-fit spark plug tube so that its height “H” is as specified in
the figure using suitable drift.
Standard press-fit height “H”
: 38.1 - 39.1 mm (1.500 - 1.539 in)
CAUTION:
When press-fitting, take care not to deform spark plug
tube.
● After press-fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto
cylinder-head upper face.
11. Install spark plug.
●
Revision: March 2005
EM-214
PBIC2638E
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
Inspection After Disassembly
EBS00J6D
A
CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
Clean the surface of the cylinder head. Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of
cylinder head surface.
Check along six positions as shown.
EM
Head surface distortion
Limit
Standard
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
: Less than 0.03 mm
(0.0012 in)
C
If beyond the specified limit, resurface or replace it.
The limit for cylinder head resurfacing is determined by the cylinder block resurfacing.
Resurfacing Limit
Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”.
Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”.
The maximum limit
: A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
D
SEM861E
F
After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates freely by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head
must be replaced.
Nominal cylinder head height
E
: 126.3 - 126.5 mm (4.972 - 4.980 in)
G
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
1.
H
Measure valve deflection as shown. (Valve and valve guide
mostly wear in this direction.)
Valve deflection limit (dial gauge reading)
Intake
: 0.24 mm (0.0094 in)
Exhaust
: 0.28 mm (0.0110 in)
I
J
SEM178F
2.
a.
b.
If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance.
Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter.
Check that clearance is within specification.
Valve to valve guide clearance standard
Intake
: 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in)
Exhaust
: 0.040 - 0.073 mm (0.0016 - 0.0029 in)
Valve to valve guide clearance limit
Intake
: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Exhaust
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
c.
L
M
SEM938C
If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide.
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide.
Revision: March 2005
EM-215
K
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
1.
To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C
(230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
SEM008A
2.
Drive out the valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2.2 US
ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool.
SEM931C
3.
Ream cylinder head valve guide hole.
Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts),
intake and exhaust
: 10.175 - 10.196 mm
(0.4006 - 0.4014 in)
SEM932C
4.
Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking
in heated oil and press new valve guide from camshaft side into
the cylinder head to the dimensions as shown.
Projection "L"
: 12.6 - 12.8 mm (0.496 - 0.504 in)
SEM950E
Revision: March 2005
EM-216
2005 Altima
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
5.
Using a valve guide reamer, apply a reamer finish to the valve
guide.
Intake and exhaust
finished size
A
: 6.000 - 6.018 mm
(0.2362 - 0.2369 in)
EM
C
SEM932C
D
VALVE SEAT CONTACT
●
●
●
●
After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves
are within specifications, perform this procedure.
Apply prussian blue onto contacting surface of valve seat to
check the condition of the valve contact on the surface.
Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference.
If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has N.G conditions even after the re-check,
replace valve seat.
E
F
G
SBIA0322E
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
H
Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue
beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder head. Set
the machine depth stop to ensure this.
Ream cylinder head recess for service valve seat.
Oversize
Intake
Exhaust
I
: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
: 38.500 - 38.516 mm
(1.5157 - 1.5164 in)
: 32.700 - 32.716 mm
(1.2874 - 1.2880 in)
J
K
SEM795A
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.
Heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.
Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom.
Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool to the specified dimensions. Refer to EM-247, "VALVE" .
After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound.
Check valve seating condition.
Seat face angle “α”
Contacting width “W” for intake
Contacting width “W” for exhaust
: 45° 15' - 45° 45'
degrees/minutes
: 1.09 - 1.31 mm
(0.0429 - 0.0516 in)
: 1.29 - 1.51 mm
(0.0508 - 0.0594 in)
SEM892B
Revision: March 2005
EM-217
2005 Altima
L
M
CYLINDER HEAD
[VQ35DE]
8.
Use a depth gauge to measure the distance between the mounting surface of the cylinder head spring seat and the valve stem
end. If the distance is shorter than specified, repeat step 5 to
adjust it. If it is longer, replace the valve seat with a new one.
Valve seat resurface limit “L”
intake
Valve seat resurface limit “L”
exhaust
: 41.07 - 41.67 mm
(1.6169 - 1.6405 in)
: 41.00 - 41.60 mm
(1.6142 - 1.6378 in)
SEM621F
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
Set try square along the side of valve spring and rotate the spring.
Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of spring and
try square.
Out-of-square limit
: Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
PBIC0080E
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD
Check valve spring pressure at specified spring height.
Standard
Limit
: 166 - 188 N (16.9 - 19.2 kg, 37.3 = 42.3 lb) at
height 37.0 mm (1.457 in)
: 373 - 418 N (38.0 - 42.6 kg, 83.9 - 94.0 lb) at
height 27.2 mm (1.071 in)
If it is not within specifications, replace the spring.
SEM113
Revision: March 2005
EM-218
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[VQ35DE]
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:10001
A
EBS00J6E
EM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0220E
1.
LH transaxle mounting insulator (A/
T)
Revision: March 2005
2.
LH transaxle mounting bracket (M/T) 3.
EM-219
LH transaxle mounting bracket (M/T)
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[VQ35DE]
4.
RH engine mounting insulator
7.
Front engine mounting insulator
(electrically controlled with automatic
transaxle)
5.
Rear engine mounting insulator
6.
(electrically controlled with automatic
transaxle)
Front suspension member
WARNING:
●
Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
●
For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in
the NISSAN Parts Catalog.
CAUTION:
●
Do not start working until exhaust system and coolant are cool.
●
If items or work required are not covered by the engine main body section, refer to the applicable
sections.
●
Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-40, "LIFTING POINT" .
●
In removing the drive shafts, be careful not to damage any transaxle grease seals.
●
Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
●
Do not damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
Remove the engine cover, and the engine under cover using power tool.
Drain engine oil. MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil"
Drain coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Remove the following parts:
Remove hood assembly. Refer to BL-13, "Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly" .
Remove front tower bar using power tools.
Remove battery and tray using power tools.
Remove air inlet duct.
Remove air intake duct and air cleaner case assembly with mass air flow sensor.
Remove power brake booster vacuum hose.
Remove drive belts.
Remove radiator assembly, coolant reservoir, and system hoses. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" .
14. Remove windshield wiper assembly. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
15. Disconnect engine room harness from the engine side and set it aside. Disconnect engine harness
ground connections.
16. Disconnect heater hoses.
17. Remove the front wheel and tires.
18. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
19. Discharge and recover the R134a refrigerant. Refer to ATC-103, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure"
.
20. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools.
21. Disconnect fuel hose quick connection at vehicle piping side. Refer to EM-147, "Removal and Installation"
.
22. Disconnect the transaxle shift controls.
23. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
24. Remove the front exhaust tube using power tools. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
25. Disconnect reservoir tank for the power steering from engine compartment bracket and position it aside.
26. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-220
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[VQ35DE]
27. Disconnect the power steering pump, without disconnecting the piping, from the engine and move it aside
and secure with wire.
A
28. Position a suitable transmission jack under the engine and transaxle assembly.
29. Install engine slingers into front of left bank cylinder head and
rear of right bank cylinder head.
EM
C
D
SEM807G
E
F
G
H
SEM808G
30. For additional safety, secure the engine in position with a hoist.
31. Disconnect the LH transaxle mount and the RH engine mount.
32. Carefully lower the engine and transaxle assembly with the
transmission jack, avoiding interference with the vehicle body.
CAUTION:
● Before and during this procedure, always check if any
harnesses are left connected.
● Avoid any damage to, or any oil/grease smearing or spills
onto the engine mounting insulators.
33. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS).
34. Separate the engine and transaxle and mount the engine on a
suitable engine stand.
Revision: March 2005
EM-221
I
J
K
L
SEM471G
2005 Altima
M
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[VQ35DE]
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LBIA0086E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level.
Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points.
Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid,
fuel and exhaust gas.
Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to
specified level, if necessary.
Summary of the inspection items:
Revision: March 2005
EM-222
2005 Altima
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[VQ35DE]
Before starting engine
Engine running
After engine stopped
Engine coolant
Item
Level
Leakage
Level
Engine oil
Level
Leakage
Level
Working fluid
Level
Leakage
Level
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
—
Leakage
—
Fuel
Exhaust gas
A
EM
C
*Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-223
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
CYLINDER BLOCK
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:11010
EBS00J6F
WBIA0217E
1.
Rear oil seal retainer
2.
Cylinder block
3.
Knock sensor
4.
Upper main bearing
5.
Lower main bearing
6.
Water drain plug (LH side)
7.
Water drain plug (RH side)
8.
Water drain plug (water pump side)
9.
Main bearing cap
10. Main bearing beam
11. Crankshaft
12. Pilot bushing or pilot converter
13. Flywheel with signal plate (M/T)
14. Drive plate with signal plate (A/T)
15. Flywheel reinforcement
16. Drive plate reinforcement
17. Oil ring set
18. Piston pin
19. Connecting rod bearing
20. Connecting rod
21. Piston
22. Top ring
23. Second ring
24. Cylinder block heater (Canada only)
25. Oil jet
26. Key
Revision: March 2005
EM-224
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
CAUTION:
●
Apply new engine oil to parts as marked in illustrations before installation.
A
●
Place removed parts such as bearings and bearing caps in their proper order and direction.
●
When installing the connecting rod nuts, and main bearing cap bolts, apply new engine oil to the
threads and mating surfaces
EM
●
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal plate teeth on the drive plate.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C
Remove the engine assembly. Refer to EM-219, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" .
Install the engine on the engine stand.
Remove the knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle sensor avoiding shocking it.
Drain the engine of all coolant and oil.
Remove the oil pan. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" .
Remove the cylinder head. Refer to EM-201, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove drive plate. Fix crankshaft with a ring gear stopper, and remove bolts.
● Loosen bolts in diagonal order.
CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble drive plate.
● Never place the drive plate with signal late facing down.
● When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or
scratch it.
● Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from
becoming magnetized.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEM760G
9.
Remove pilot bushing (M/T) or converter (A/T) using Tool.
Tool number
K
: ST16610001 (J-23907)
L
M
SEM005G
10. Cut away liquid gasket and remove rear oil seal retainer using
Tool. Refer to EM-110, "REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING" .
Tool number
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage mounting surface.
● If rear oil seal retainer is removed, replace it with a new
one.
NOTE:
Rear oil seal and retainer form a single part and are handled as
an assembly.
●
Revision: March 2005
EM-225
SEM830E
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
11. Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies.
a. Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod
to be removed onto the bottom dead center.
b. Remove the connecting rod cap.
c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out to the cylinder head side.
● Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly,
check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-253,
"CONNECTING ROD" .
PBIC0086E
12. Remove the connecting rod bearings.
CAUTION:
● When removing the connecting rod side bearings, note the installation position. Keep them in
the correct order.
13. Remove the piston rings from the piston.
● Use a piston ring expander.
CAUTION:
● When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damage the piston. Do not expand the rings excessively.
● Be careful to mark the rings if they are to be reused so
they are installed in their original position.
●
Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side
clearance. Refer to EM-234, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" .
PBIC0087E
14. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows.
a. Using a snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring.
PBIC0088E
b.
Heat the pistons to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F).
SEM965A
Revision: March 2005
EM-226
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
c.
Push out the piston pin with a suitable tool, with an outer diameter approximately 20 mm (0.8 in).
A
EM
C
EMM0072D
D
15. Remove the rear oil seal retainer from the cylinder block.
● Insert a screwdriver or similar tool between the rear end of the crankshaft counter weight and rear oil
seal retainer, and separate the liquid gasket to remove.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
NOTE:
When replacing the rear oil seal during on-vehicle service, it is necessary to remove the oil pan. Refer to
EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
16. Loosen the bolts in the numerical order as shown and remove
the main bearing beam, bearing caps and crankshaft.
● Before loosening the main bearing cap bolts, measure the
crankshaft side clearance.
Refer to EM-239, "CRANKSHAFT" .
E
F
G
H
I
SEM842E
17. Remove the oil jets.
18. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder
block and main bearing caps.
● When removing them, note the direction and position. Keep
them in the correct order for installation.
J
K
L
M
PBIC0898E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Blow out the coolant and oil passages and cylinder bore to remove any foreign materials.
CAUTION:
Use goggles to protect your eyes.
Apply liquid gasket and install each plug into the cylinder block.
● Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-227
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
3.
Install the oil jets.
● Insert the oil jet dowel pin into the cylinder block dowel pin
hole, and tighten the bolts.
PBIC0898E
4.
a.
b.
5.
Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings.
Remove dust, dirt, and oil on the bearing mating surfaces of the
cylinder block and the main bearing cap.
Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 journal housing on the cylinder block and the main bearing cap.
● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside).
● Install bearing with a projection on one end on cylinder block
and bearing with a projection at center on cap. Align each projection with mating notch.
PBIC0807E
Set the upper main bearings in their proper positions on the cylinder block.
● Confirm the correct main bearings are used. Refer to EM-237,
"PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" .
SEM175F
6.
Instructions for the re-use of the main bearing cap bolts.
● A plastic zone tightening method is used for tightening the
main bearing cap bolts. Measure d1 and d2 as shown.
● For d2, select the minimum diameter in the measuring area.
● If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace
the bolts for assembly.
Limit (d1 - d2)
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
SEM177F
Revision: March 2005
EM-228
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
7.
After installing the crankshaft, lower main bearings, main bearing caps, main bearing beam, and bearing cap bolts. Tighten the
bearing cap bolts in the numerical order as shown.
A
EM
C
SEM851E
D
a.
Make sure that the front marks on the main bearing beam faces
the front of the engine.
b. Prior to tightening all the bearing cap bolts, place the bearing
beam in its proper position by shifting the crankshaft in the axial
position.
c. After tightening the bearing cap bolts, make sure the crankshaft
turns smoothly.
d. Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new
engine oil.
e. Tighten the bolts in two stages:
CAUTION:
Measure the tighten angle in stage 2 with an angle wrench. Do
not measure visually.
Stage 1
Stage 2
: 32 - 38 N·m (3.3 - 3.9 kg-m, 24 - 28 ft-lb)
: 90° - 95° degrees clockwise
Tool number
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
E
F
G
SEM456G
H
I
J
PBIC0096E
8.
Measure crankshaft end play.
● If beyond the limit, replace the bearing with a new one.
Standard
Limit
L
: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
: 0.30 mm (0.0118 in)
M
SEM852E
Revision: March 2005
EM-229
K
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
9.
Install the rear oil seal retainer.
● Apply sealant to rear oil seal retainer as shown.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer
to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
Rear oil seal retainer
bolts
: 8.2 - 9.3 N·m (0.83 - 0.95 kg-m,
72 - 82 in-lb)
PBIC0922E
10. Install the piston to the connecting rod.
a. Using suitable snap ring pliers, install the snap ring into the pingroove of the piston rear side.
● Insert it fully into groove to install.
PBIC0099E
b.
Install the piston to the connecting rod.
● Heat the piston until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand
without excess force [approx. 60° - 70°C (140° to 158°F)].
From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston
and through the connecting rod.
SEM965A
●
Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the
oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown.
SEM838F
Revision: March 2005
EM-230
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
c.
Install the snap ring into the front of the piston pin-groove.
● After installing, check that the connecting rod pivots smoothly
on the pin.
A
EM
C
PBIC0088E
D
11. Using a piston ring expander, install the piston rings.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage the piston.
● When the piston rings are not replaced, remount the
rings in their original positions.
● When replacing the piston rings, those without punchmarks can be mounted either side up.
● Position each ring with the gap as shown, referring to the piston front mark.
● Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. If the ring is not stamped it can face in
either direction.
E
F
G
SEM757G
H
I
J
K
PBIC0808E
12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the
connecting rod cap.
● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil
to the bearing surface (crankshaft side). Do not apply oil to
the back surface (connecting rod and cap side), but thoroughly clean it.
● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing protrusion
with the notch of the connecting rod to install.
● Check that the oil holes on the connecting rod and on the corresponding bearing are aligned.
L
M
PBIC0101E
Revision: March 2005
EM-231
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly into the corresponding cylinder.
● Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting
rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center.
● Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and
crankshaft pin.
● Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install.
● Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine, using a suitable tool.
PBIC0102E
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin and cylinder wall, resulting from an interference of the
connecting rod big end.
14. Install the connecting rod cap.
● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting
rod with those on the cylinder cap for installation.
● Install the piston connecting rod assembly and cap so that the
front mark on the cap and piston are facing the front of the
engine.
● Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces with new engine
oil.
SEM457G
15. Check the connecting rod cap bolts before reusing, then install
in their original position in the connecting rod. The bolts should
screw in smoothly by hand.
● Measure the outer diameter of the connecting rod cap bolt as
shown.
Outer diameter "d" of the connecting rod bolt
Standard
: 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in)
Limit
: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in)
SEM538G
16. Tighten the connecting rod nuts in two stages:
Stage 1
Stage 2
: 19 - 21 N·m (1.9 - 2.1 kg-m, 14 - 15 ft-lb)
: 90° - 95° degrees clockwise
CAUTION:
Always use either an angle wrench or protractor. Avoid
tightening based on visual check alone.
Tool number
●
●
●
: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting
rod bolts and nuts.
SEM953E
After tightening the nuts, make sure that the crankshaft
rotates smoothly.
Check the connecting rod side clearance. If beyond the limit, replace the connecting rod and/or crankshaft.
Connecting rod side clearance:
Standard
: 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in)
Limit
: 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
Revision: March 2005
EM-232
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
17. Install the knock sensor.
● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder
block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor.
● Install the knock sensor with the connector facing the rear of
the engine.
● Do not tighten the bolts while holding the connector.
● Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other
parts.
CAUTION:
If any impact by dropping occurs to the knock sensor,
replace it with new one.
Knock sensor bolt
A
EM
C
PBIC0810E
D
: 16 - 26 N·m (1.6 - 2.7 kg-m,
12 - 20 in-lb)
E
18. Install the pilot bushing (M/T) or converter (A/T) as shown.
F
G
H
SEM163B
I
19. Install the flywheel (M/T), if equipped.
● When installing flywheel to crankshaft, be sure to correctly
align crankshaft side dowel pin and flywheel side dowel pin
hole.
Flywheel bolts
J
: 83 - 93 N·m (8.5 - 95 kg-m,
61 - 69 ft-lb)
K
L
SEM916G
M
20. Install the drive plate (A/T), if equipped.
● Install the drive plate and reinforce plate in the direction as
shown.
● Align dowel pins of crankshaft rear and drive plate with pin
holes of each part.
● Secure the crankshaft using a ring gear stopper.
● Tighten the drive plate bolts in one or two steps.
Drive plate bolts
: 83 - 93 N·m (8.5 - 95 kg-m,
61 - 69 ft-lb)
PBIC0910E
21.
22.
23.
24.
Install the cylinder head. Refer to EM-201, "Removal and Installation" .
Install the timing chain. Refer to EM-172, "Installation" .
Install the oil pan. Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the engine from the stand and install the engine assembly into the vehicle. Refer to EM-219,
"Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-233
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
25. Assembly of the remaining parts is in the reverse order of disassembly.
26. Fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
CAUTION:
Wait at least 30 minutes for the sealant to set-up before filling the engine with fluids and running it.
Inspection
EBS00J6G
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
Inner Diameter of Piston Pin Hole
●
Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole "dp".
Standard diameter "dp"
Grade No. 0 : 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in)
Grade No. 1 : 21.999 - 22.005 mm (0.8661 - 0.8663 in)
AEM023
Outer Diameter of Piston Pin
●
Measure outer diameter of piston pin "Dp".
Standard diameter "Dp"
Grade No. 0 : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
Grade No. 1 : 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 - 0.8662 in)
AEM024
Piston and Piston Pin Interference Fit
Standard Interference Fit = "Dp" – "dp"
Standard
●
: 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) - 0.006 mm (0.0002
in) = - 0.0004 mm (-0.0001 in)
If clearance is exceeds specification, replace either or both of
piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with
reference to specification of each part.
SEM838F
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
●
Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove
with feeler gauge.
Standard Side Clearance
Top ring
: 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 in)
2nd ring
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
Oil ring
: 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 in)
Maximum Limit
Top ring
Revision: March 2005
: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
SEM024AA
EM-234
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
2nd ring
Oil ring
●
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
:—
A
If out of specification, replace piston ring assembly. If clearance exceeds maximum limit with new rings,
replace piston
EM
PISTON RING END GAP
●
Insert piston ring until it is in the middle of the cylinder bore and
measure the end gap.
Standard
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Limit:
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
●
C
: 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in)
: 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130 - 0.0189 in)
: 0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.0079 - 0.0197 in)
D
E
: 0.54 mm (0.0213 in)
: 0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
: 0.95 mm (0.0374 in)
SEM599A
F
If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring.
G
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
Bend
Torsion
: Limit 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100
mm (3.94 in) length
: Limit 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm
(3.94 in) length
H
I
J
SEM038F
●
K
If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
L
M
SEM003F
Revision: March 2005
EM-235
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END)
●
Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing
installed. After tightening the connecting rod nut to the specified
torque, measure the connecting rod bearing housing big end
inner diameter using an inside micrometer.
Standard
: 55.000 - 55.013 mm (2.1654 - 2.1659 in)
PBIC0119E
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)
Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End)
●
Measure inner diameter of piston pin bushing.
Standard
Grade No. 0
: 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 - 0.8664 in)
Grade No. 1
: 22.006 - 22.012 mm (0.8664 - 0.8666 in)
PBIC0120E
Outer Diameter of Piston Pin
●
Measure outer diameter of piston pin.
Standard
Grade No. 0
: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in)
Grade No. 1
: 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 -0.8662 in)
PBIC0117E
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)
(Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin)
Standard
Limit
●
●
: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.007 in)
: 0.030 - mm (0.0012 in)
If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly.
If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the Table
for Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding
to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used.
Refer to EM-237, "PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-236
SEM457G
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
Factory installed parts grading:
●
Service parts apply only to grade 0.
A
Unit: mm (in)
Grade
0
1
Connecting rod small end
inner diameter
22.000 - 22.006
(0.8661 - 0.8664)
22.006 - 22.012
(0.8664 - 0.8666)
Piston pin outer diameter
21.989 - 21.995
(0.8657 - 0.8659)
21.995 - 22. 001
(0.8659 - 0.8662)
Piston pin hole diameter
21.993 - 21.999
(0.8659 - 0.8661)
21.999 - 22.005
(0.8661 - 0.8663)
EM
C
SEM838F
D
CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION
Using a scraper, remove any old gasket material on the cylinder
block surface, and remove any oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow gasket flakes to enter the oil or coolant passages.
Measure the distortion on the block upper face at different points
in six directions.
●
●
Distortion limit
E
F
G
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
SEM123C
If out of specification, resurface the cylinder block. The allowable amount of resurfacing is dependent on the amount of any
cylinder head resurfacing. The resurfacing limit is [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] + [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] = 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
●
Cylinder block height
I
: 214.95 - 215.05 mm
(8.4626 - 8.4665 in)
INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING
J
Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed,
and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main
bearing housing.
●
●
Standard
K
: 63.993 - 64.017 mm (2.5194 - 2.5203 in)
If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly.
NOTE:
These components cannot be replaced as a single unit, because
they were processed together.
●
L
M
SEM845E
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
1.
Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper. The X axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine.
Cylinder bore inner diameter
Grade No.
H
Standard inner diameter
No. 1
95.500 - 95.510 mm (3.7598 - 3.7602 in)
No. 2
95.510 - 95.520 mm (3.7602 - 3.7606 in)
No. 3
95.520 - 95.530 mm (3.7606 - 3.7610 in)
Wear limit
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
SEM843E
Revision: March 2005
EM-237
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
If it exceeds the limit, rebore all cylinders. Replace cylinder block
if necessary.
Out-of-round (Difference between X
and Y)
Taper (Difference
between A and C)
: limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
: limit 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
SEM321AA
2.
Check for scratches and seizure. If seizure is found, hone it.
● If both cylinder block and piston are replaced with new
ones, select piston of the same grade number punched
on cylinder block rear position. These numbers are
punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
SEM756G
3.
Measure piston skirt diameter.
Piston diameter “A”
Measuring point “a”
(Distance from the top)
: Refer to EM-252, "PISTON, PISTON RING AND
PISTON PIN" .
: 41.0 mm (1.61 in)
SEM258C
4.
Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification.
Piston-to-bore
clearance at “B”
●
: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in)
The piston-to-bore clearance is measured at the "B" level in
the cylinder as shown.
SEM321AA
5.
6.
Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder wear.
Oversize pistons are available for service.
Refer to EM-252, "PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN" .
Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”.
Rebored size calculation
where,
D
A
Revision: March 2005
:D=A+B−C
: Bored diameter
: Piston diameter as measured
EM-238
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
B
C
: Piston-to-bore clearance
: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
A
7.
Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted
after boring.
EM
8. Cut cylinder bores.
● When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
● Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameC
ter at a time.
9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance.
10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.
D
● Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
CRANKSHAFT
1.
2.
E
Check the crankshaft main and pin journals for scoring, wear, or
cracks.
Measure the journals for taper and out-of-round.
Standard
Out-of-round (X Y)
Taper (A - B)
F
: 0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
G
: 0.002 mm (0.0001 in)
H
SEM316A
3.
a.
b.
c.
Measure crankshaft runout.
Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on
the both ends of the crankshaft.
Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal.
While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer
on the dial gauge.
Runout limit (total indicator
reading)
I
J
K
: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
SEM346D
L
BEARING CLEARANCE
●
Use either of the following two methods, however method "A" gives more reliable results and so is the preferred method.
Method A (Using Bore Gauge and Micrometer)
Main Bearing
1. Set the main bearings in their proper positions on the cylinder
block and the main bearing cap.
2. Install the main bearing caps and bearing beam to the cylinder
block. Tighten all bolts in the numerical order as specified. Refer
to EM-224, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
SEM175F
Revision: March 2005
EM-239
2005 Altima
M
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
3.
Measure the inner diameters "A" of each main bearing as
shown.
SEM845E
4.
5.
Measure the outer diameters "Dm" of each crankshaft main journal as shown.
Calculate the main bearing clearance.
Main bearing clearance = "A" - "Dm"
Standard
Limit
●
●
●
: 0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 in)
: 0.065 mm (0.0026 in)
If it exceeds the limit, replace the bearing.
If clearance cannot be adjusted using any standard bearing
grade, grind crankshaft journal and use an undersized bearing.
AEM033
When grinding the crankshaft journal, confirm that the "L"
dimension in the fillet role is more than the specified limit.
"L"
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
SEM964
6.
a.
If the crankshaft or the cylinder block is replaced with a new one, select thickness of the main bearings as
follows:
The grade number of each cylinder block main journal is
punched on the respective cylinder block. These numbers are
punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. If measured diameter is out of the grade punched, decide suitable grade from
available main bearings.
SEM756G
Revision: March 2005
EM-240
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
b.
The grade number of each crankshaft main journal is punched
on the crankshaft end. These numbers are punched in either
Arabic or Roman numerals. If measured diameter is out of grade
punched, decide the suitable grade from available main bearings.
A
EM
C
SEM452G
D
c.
Select the main bearing suitable thickness according to the following table:
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PBIC0814E
Connecting Rod Bearing (Big End)
1.
2.
Install the connecting rod bearing to the connecting rod and cap.
Install the connecting rod cap to the connecting rod. Tighten to specification. Refer to EM-224, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
Revision: March 2005
EM-241
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
3.
Measure the inner diameter "C" of each connecting rod (big end)
as shown.
AEM027
4.
5.
Measure the outer diameter "Dp" of each crankshaft pin journal.
Calculate the connecting rod bearing clearance.
Connecting rod bearing clearance = C - Dp
Standard
Limit
6.
7.
8.
: 0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 in)
: 0.070 mm (0.0028 in)
If the calculated clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace
the bearings.
If the clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any
bearing, grind the crankshaft journal and use undersized bearings.
AEM034
If the crankshaft is replaced with a new one, select the connecting rod bearings according to the following table:
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Number (Identification
Color)
Crankshaft pin journal grade
number
Connecting rod bearing grade
number
0
0 (black)
1
1 (brown)
2
2 (green)
These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
SEM452G
Method B (Using Plastigage)
●
●
●
●
Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of
each bearing completely.
Cut a Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and
place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes.
Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap,
and tighten the connecting rod nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never rotate the crankshaft.
Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the
scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width.
SEM142
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is same as that described in "Method A
(Using Bore Gauge and Micrometer)".
Revision: March 2005
EM-242
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT (A/T)
A
Runout (Total Indicator Reading):
Drive plate (A/T)
torque converter surface
Ring gear
: less than 0.35mm (.0138 in)
EM
: less than 0.5mm ((.0197 in)
CAUTION:
●
The signal plate is built into the drive assembly. Be careful
not to damage the signal plate, particularly the teeth.
●
Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or
cracks.
●
Keep any magnetized objects away from the signal plate, particularly the teeth.
C
SEM849EB
D
E
F
G
H
SEM760G
FLYWHEEL RUNOUT (M/T)
I
NOTE:
●
This inspection is for double mass flywheel only.
●
Do not disassemble the double mass flywheel.
J
Flywheel Deflection
●
●
Measure the deflection of the flywheel contact surface to the
clutch with a dial gauge.
Measure the runout at 210 mm (8.27 in) diameter.
Limit
●
●
K
: 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less under no load
L
When measured value exceeds the limit, replace the flywheel
with a new one.
Measure axial displacement at 250mm (9.84 in) diameter.
Limit
: 1.3mm (.051 in) or less under 100N
(22.48 lb) force
M
SBIA0287E
Movement Around in Rotation Direction
Check the movement amount with the following procedure:
1. Install a bolt to clutch cover mounting hole and place a torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel
center line.
● Tighten the bolt at a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) to keep it from loosening.
2. Put a mating mark on the circumference of the two flywheel masses without applying any load (measurement standard points).
3. Apply a force of 9.8 N·m (1 kg-m, 87 in-lb) in each direction, and mark the movement amount on the mass
on the transaxle side.
Revision: March 2005
EM-243
2005 Altima
CYLINDER BLOCK
[VQ35DE]
4.
Measure dimensions of movement amounts A and B on the circumference of the flywheel on the transaxle side.
Flywheel movement
in rotation direction
●
: 20.22 mm (0.796 in) or
less
When the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the
flywheel.
WBIA0224E
OIL JET
●
●
●
Check nozzle for deformation and damage.
Blow compressed air from nozzle, and check for clogs.
If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet.
OIL JET RELIEF VALVE
●
●
Using a clean plastic stick, press check valve in oil jet relief
valve. Make sure that valve moves smoothly with proper reaction force.
If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet relief valve.
EMU0468D
Revision: March 2005
EM-244
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
PFP:00100
A
EBS00J6H
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
3
cm
Bore and stroke
(in3
V-6
EM
3,498 (213.45)
)
mm (in)
95.5 x 81.4 (3.76 x 3.205)
Valve arrangement
C
DOHC
Firing order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Compression
Number of piston rings
2
Oil
D
1
Number of main bearings
4
Compression ratio
E
10.0:1
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/300 rpm
Standard
1,275 (13.0, 185)
Minimum
981 (10.0, 142)
Differential limit
between cylinders
F
98 (1.0, 14)
G
H
Cylinder number
I
J
SEM713A
K
L
Valve timing (IVTC - OFF)
M
PBIC0187E
Unit: degree
a
b
c
d
e
f
240°
238°
- 6°
64°
8°
52°
Revision: March 2005
EM-245
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
DRIVE BELT
LBIA0076E
Deflection adjustment
Unit: mm (in)
Used belt
Alternator and
air conditioning
compressor
Power steering
pump
After adjustment
7 (0.28)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
11 (0.43)
7.3 - 8
(0.29 - 0.30)
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Used belt
New belt
Limit
Applied pushing
force
Tension adjustment*
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
6.5 - 7.2
(0.26 - 0.28)
196 (20, 44)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
98 (10, 22)
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Surface distortion
Limit
Intake manifold collector
0.1 (0.004)
Intake manifold
0.1 (0.004)
Exhaust manifold
0.3 (0.012)
SPARK PLUG
Make
Type
NGK
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
Gap (nominal)
Revision: March 2005
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
EM-246
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
CYLINDER HEAD
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
D
PBIC0924E
Head surface distortion
Normal cylinder head height "H"
Standard
Limit
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
0.1 (0.004)
—
126.3 - 126.5 (4.972 - 4.980)
E
F
VALVE
Valve Dimensions
Unit: mm (in)
G
H
I
J
SEM188
Intake
Valve head diameter “D”
Valve length “L”
Valve stem diameter “d”
37.0 - 37.3 (1.4567 - 1.4685)
Exhaust
K
31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240)
Intake
96.46 (3.7976)
Exhaust
9681 (3.8114)
L
Intake
5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354)
Exhaust
5.945 - 5.960 (0.2341 - 0.2346)
M
Intake
Valve seat angle “α”
Valve margin “T”
45°15′ - 45°45′
Exhaust
Intake
1.15 - 1.45 (0.0453 - 0.0571)
Exhaust
1.45 - 1.75 (0.0571 - 0.0689)
Valve margin “T” limit
More than 0.5 (0.020)
Valve stem end surface grinding limit
Less than 0.2 (0.008)
Valve Clearance
Unit: mm (in)
Cold
Hot* (reference data)
Intake
0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013)
0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
Exhaust
0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015)
0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017)
*: Approximately 80°C (176°F)
Revision: March 2005
EM-247
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Valve Spring
Free height
Pressure
mm (in)
46.52 (1.8315)
N (kg, lb) at height mm (in)
Out-of-square
Standard
184 - 208 (18.8 - 21.2, 41.4 - 46.8) at 37.0 (1.457)
Limit
407 - 459 (41.5 - 46.8, 91.5 - 103.2) at 28.2 (1.110)
mm (in)
Less than 2.0 (0.079)
Valve Lifter
Unit: mm (in)
Valve lifter outer diameter
33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381)
Lifter lifter bore diameter
34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392)
Clearance between lifter and lifter guide
0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015)
SEM758G
Identification Mark
Thickness mm (in)
788C
7.88 (0.3102)
790C
7.90 (0.3110)
792C
7.92 (0.3118)
794C
7.94 (0.3126)
796C
7.96 (0.3134)
798C
7.98 (0.3142)
800C
8.00 (0.3150)
802C
8.02 (03.157)
804C
8.04 (0.3165)
806C
8.06 (0.3173)
808C
8.08 (0.3181)
810C
8.10 (0.3189)
812C
8.12 (0.3197)
814C
8.14 (0.3205)
816C
8.16 (0.3213)
818C
8.18 (0.3220)
820C
8.20 (0.3228)
822C
8.22 (0.3236)
824C
8.24 (0.3244)
826C
8.26 (0.3252)
828C
8.28 (0.3260)
830C
8.30 (0.3268)
832C
8.32 (0.3276)
834C
8.34 (0.3283)
836C
8.36 (0.3291)
Revision: March 2005
EM-248
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Valve Guide
Unit: mm (in)
A
EM
C
D
SEM950E
Valve guide
Outer diameter
Valve guide
Inner diameter (Finished size)
Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter
Standard
Service
10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950)
10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029)
6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369)
9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935)
Interference fit of valve guide
Valve to valve guide clearance
Valve deflection
E
10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014)
F
0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023)
Standard
Limit
Intake
0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021)
0.08 (0.0031)
Exhaust
0.040 - 0.073 (0.0016 - 0.0029)
0.1 (0.004)
Intake
—
0.24 (0.0094)
Exhaust
—
0.28 (0.0110)
Projection length “L”
G
12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504)
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-249
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Valve Seat
Unit: mm (in)
SEM021EB
SEM621F
Cylinder head seat recess diameter
(D)
Valve seat interference fit
Valve seat outer diameter (d)
Standard
Service
Intake
38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967)
38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164)
Exhaust
32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683)
32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880)
Intake
0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044)
Exhaust
0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038)
Intake
38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005)
38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202)
Exhaust
32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715)
32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912)
Intake
5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236)
5.05 - 5.15 (0.1988 - 0.2028)
Exhaust
5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236)
4.95 - 5.05 (0.1949 - 0.1988)
Height (h)
Depth (H)
Depth (L)
Revision: March 2005
5.9 - 6.1 (0.232 - 0.240)
Intake
41.07 - 41.67 (1.6169 - 1.6405)
Exhaust
41.00 - 41.60 (1.6142 - 1.6378)
EM-250
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
Unit: mm (in)
Camshaft journal to bearing clearance
Standard
Limit
No. 1
0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034)
No. 2, 3, 4
0.035 - 0.076 (0.0014 - 0.0030)
0.15 (0.0059)
Inner diameter of camshaft bearing
No. 1
26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244)
No. 2, 3, 4
23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260)
Outer diameter of camshaft journal
No. 1
25.935 - 25.955 (1.0211 - 1.0218)
No. 2, 3, 4
23.445 - 23.465 (0.9230 - 0.9238)
—
Camshaft runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.02 (0.0008)
0.05 (0.0020)
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*]
Less than 0.15 (0.0059)
—
0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074)
0.24 (0.0094)
Camshaft end play
A
EM
C
—
D
E
F
*: Total indicator reading
G
H
I
J
SEM671
Cam lobe height “A”
Intake and exhaust
44.465 - 44.655 (1.7506 - 1.7581)
Wear limit of cam lobe height
0.2 (0.008)
K
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)
L
M
SEM022EA
Standard
Surface distortion
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
Limit
0.10 (0.0039)
Standard
Cylinder bore
Inner diameter
Grade No. 1
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602)
Grade No. 2
95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 - 3.7606)
Grade No. 3
95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 - 3.7610)
Wear limit
0.20 (0.0079)
Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y)
Revision: March 2005
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
EM-251
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Taper (Difference between A and C)
Main journal inner
diameter grade
(Without bearing)
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
Difference in
inner diameter
between cylinders
Standard
Less than 0.015 (0.0006)
63.993 - 63.994 (2.5194 - 2.5194)
63.994 - 63.995 (2.5194 - 2.5195)
63.995 - 63.996 (2.5195 - 2.5195)
63.996 - 63.997 (2.5195 - 2.5196)
63.997 - 63.998 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
63.998 - 63.999 (2.5196 - 2.5196)
63.999 - 64.000 (2.5196 - 2.5197)
64.000 - 64.001 (2.5197 - 2.5197)
64.001 - 64.002 (2.5197 - 2.5198)
64.002 - 64.003 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
64.003 - 64.004 (2.5198 - 2.5198)
64.004 - 64.005 (2.5198 - 2.5199)
64.005 - 64.006 (2.5199 - 2.5199)
64.006 - 64.007 (2.5199 - 2.5200)
64.007 - 64.008 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
64.008 - 64.009 (2.5200 - 2.5200)
64.009 - 64.010 (2.5200 - 2.5201)
64.010 - 64.011 (2.5201 - 2.5201)
64.011 - 64.012 (2.5201 - 2.5202)
64.012 - 64.013 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
64.013 - 64.014 (2.5202 - 2.5202)
64.014 - 64.015 (2.5202 - 2.5203)
64.015 - 64.016 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
64.016 - 64.017 (2.5203 - 2.5203)
Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN
Available Piston
Unit: mm (in)
SEM882E
Piston skirt diameter “A”
Standard
Grade No. 1
95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 - 3.7594)
Grade No. 2
95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 - 3.7598)
Grade No. 3
95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602)
0.20 (0.0079) oversize (Service)
95.680 - 95.710 (3.7669 - 3.7681)
“a” dimension
Piston pin hole diameter
41.0 (1.614)
Grade No. 0
21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661)
Grade No. 1
21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663)
Piston-to-bore clearance to cylinder block
Revision: March 2005
0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012)
EM-252
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Piston Ring
Unit: mm (in)
Side clearance
End gap
Standard
Limit
Top
0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031)
0.11 (0.0043)
2nd
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
0.1 (0.004)
Oil ring
0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053)
—
Top
0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130)
0.54 (0.0213)
2nd
0.33 - 0.48 (0.0130 - 0.0189)
0.80 (0.0315)
Oil (rail ring)
0.20 - 0.50 (0.0079 - 0.0197)
0.95 (0.0374)
A
EM
C
D
Piston Pin
Unit: mm (in)
Piston pin outer diameter
Grade No. 0
21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659)
Grade No. 1
21.995 - 22.001 (0.8659 - 0.8662)
Interference fit of piston pin to piston
Piston pin to connecting rod bushing oil
clearance
E
0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002)
Standard
0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007)
Limit
F
0.030 (0.0012)
*: Values measured at ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F)
G
CONNECTING ROD
Unit: mm (in)
Center distance
144.15 - 144.25 (5.6752 - 5.6791)
Bend [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)]
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
Connecting rod small end inner diameter
Piston pin bushing inner diameter*
I
23.980 - 24.000 (0.9441 - 0.9449)
Grade No. 0
22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664)
Grade No. 1
22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666)
Connecting rod big end inner diameter
J
55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659)
Standard
Side clearance
H
0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Limit
K
0.40 (0.0157)
*: After installing in connecting rod
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EM-253
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
CRANKSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
SEM645
Main journal dia. “Dm” grade
Pin journal dia. “Dp”
SEM715
Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W
Grade No. X
Grade No. Y
Grade No. 4
Grade No. 7
59.975 - 59.974 (2.3612 - 2.3612)
59.974 - 59.973 (2.3612 - 2.3611)
59.973 - 59.972 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
59.972 - 59.971 (2.3611 - 2.3611)
59.971 - 59.970 (2.3611 - 2.3610)
59.970 - 59.969 (2.3610 - 2.3610)
59.969 - 59.968 (2.3610 - 2.3609)
59.968 - 59.967 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
59.967 - 59.966 (2.3609 - 2.3609)
59.966 - 59.965 (2.3609 - 2.3608)
59.965 - 59.964 (2.3608 - 2.3608)
59.964 - 59.963 (2.3608 - 2.3607)
59.963 - 59.962 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
59.962 - 59.961 (2.3607 - 2.3607)
59.961 - 59.960 (2.3607 - 2.3606)
59.960 - 59.959 (2.3606 - 2.3606)
59.959 - 59.958 (2.3606 - 2.3605)
59.958 - 59.957 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
59.957 - 59.956 (2.3605 - 2.3605)
59.956 - 59.955 (2.3605 - 2.3604)
59.955 - 59.954 (2.3604 - 2.3604)
59.954 - 59.953 (2.3604 - 2.3603)
59.953 - 59.952 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
59.952 - 59.951 (2.3603 - 2.3603)
Grade No. 0
51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462)
Grade No. 1
51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460)
Grade No. 2
51.956 - 51.962 (2.0445 - 2.0457)
Center distance “r”
40.36 - 40.44 (1.5890 - 1.5921)
Out-of-round (Difference
between X and Y)
Standard
Less than 0.002 (0.0001)
Taper (Difference between A
and B)
Standard
Less than 0.002 (0.0001)
Runout [TIR*]
Limit
Less than 0.10 (0.0039)
Standard
End play
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Limit
0.30 (0.0118)
*: Total indicator reading
Revision: March 2005
EM-254
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING
A
EM
C
D
SEM175F
Grade number
01
12
23
34
45
56
67
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Width “W”
mm (in)
Identification color
(UPR/LWR)
0
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
Black
1
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
Brown
2
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
Green
3
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
Yellow
4
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
Blue
5
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
Pink
6
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
Purple
7
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
White
UPP
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
LWR
2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789)
UPR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
LWR
2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790)
UPR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
LWR
2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791)
UPR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
LWR
2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792)
UPR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
LWR
2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793)
UPR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
LWR
2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794)
UPR
2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797)
LWR
2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796)
Remarks
E
F
Grade is the same for
upper and lower bearings.
H
Brown/Black
I
19.9 - 20.1
(0.783 - 0.791)
Green/Brown
J
Yellow/Green
Blue/Yellow
Grade is different for
upper and lower bearings.
L
Purple/Pink
M
White/Purple
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843)
Main journal diameter “Dm”
Grind so that bearing clearance is the
specified value.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Grade number
Thickness “T”
mm (in)
Identification color (mark)
0
1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592)
Black
1
1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593)
Brown
2
1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594)
Green
Revision: March 2005
K
Pink/Blue
Undersize
0.25 (0.0098)
G
EM-255
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
0.25 (0.0098)
1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643)
Crank pin journal diameter “Dp”
Grind so that bearing clearance is the
specified value.
MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
Unit: mm (in)
Drive plate deflection [TIR]* - on torque converter mount surface
Drive plate deflection [TIR]* - on ring gear
Less than 0.35 (0.0138)
0.5 (0.0197)
Flywheel runout [TIR]* limit
Less than 0.45 (0.0177)
Flywheel axial displacement limit measured at 250mm (9.84 in)
Less than 1.3 (0.051) or less under 100N (22.48
lb) force.
*: Total indicator reading
BEARING CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Main bearing clearance
Connecting rod bearing clearance
0.035 - 0.045 (0.0014 - 0.0018)*
Limit
0.065 (0.0026)
Standard
0.034 - 0.059 (0.0013 - 0.0023)*
Limit
0.070 (0.0028)
*: Actual clearance
Revision: March 2005
EM-256
2005 Altima
B ENGINE
SECTION
EX
EXHAUST SYSTEM
A
EX
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Special Service Tool ................................................. 2
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE) ................................. 3
Checking Exhaust System ....................................... 3
Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
Inspection After Installation ...................................... 5
EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE) .................................. 6
Checking Exhaust System ........................................ 6
Removal and Installation .......................................... 7
Inspection After Installation ...................................... 8
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EX-1
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EBS00J8J
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors:
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
S-NT636
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00J8K
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use
with anti-seize lubricant shown below):
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia oxygen sensor
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania oxygen sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads
AEM489
Power tool
Loosening nuts and bolts
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
EX-2
2005 Altima
EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)
EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)
Checking Exhaust System
PFP:20100
A
EBS00J8L
Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting components for
incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, or deterioration.
EX
C
D
SMA211A
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EX-3
2005 Altima
EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)
Removal and Installation
EBS00J8M
WBIA0209E
1.
Rear muffler
2.
Rear muffler bracket (ground strap)
3.
Center exhaust tube
4.
Center exhaust tube hanger
5.
Exhaust manifold
6.
Front exhaust tube
7.
Front exhaust tube spring
8.
Front exhaust tube hanger
9.
Seal bearing
10.
Gasket
Revision: March 2005
EX-4
2005 Altima
EXHAUST SYSTEM (QR25DE)
CAUTION:
●
Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat A
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
●
Perform the procedure with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot
just after the engine is turned off.
EX
●
Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edges.
●
If the insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the insulator, clean and inspect the insulator.
C
●
When installing the insulator avoid large gaps or interference between the insulator and each
exhaust pipe.
●
Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid D
exhaust gas leaks.
●
Temporarily tighten the exhaust manifold side mounting nuts and the vehicle side mounting bolts.
Check each part for any interference, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification.
E
●
When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or excessive extension in up/down and
right/left directions.
●
Tighten the mounting bolts without causing interference with the flange.
F
●
Insert the seal bearing in the direction as shown. Tighten
the mounting bolt with the big end of the spring facing the
flange as shown.
G
H
I
WBIA0210E
Inspection After Installation
●
●
EBS00J8N
With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and abnormal noise.
Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
EX-5
2005 Altima
EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE)
EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE)
Checking Exhaust System
PFP:20100
EBS00J8O
Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting components for
incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, or deterioration.
SMA211A
Revision: March 2005
EX-6
2005 Altima
EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE)
Removal and Installation
EBS00J8P
A
EX
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WBIA0588E
1.
RH rear muffler
2.
LH rear muffler
3.
RH rear muffler bracket with ground strap
4.
LH rear muffler bracket
5.
Center exhaust tube hanger
6.
Center exhaust tube
7.
Front exhaust tube
8.
Front exhaust tube hanger
9.
LH exhaust manifold
10. RH exhaust manifold
Revision: March 2005
11. Gasket
EX-7
2005 Altima
EXHAUST SYSTEM (VQ35DE)
CAUTION:
●
Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
●
Perform the procedures with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot
just after the engine is turned off.
●
Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edge.
●
Always replace the exhaust gaskets with new ones for installation.
●
If any insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the insulator, clean and inspect them.
●
When installing the insulator avoid large gaps or interference between the insulator and the
exhaust pipe.
●
Remove any deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to
avoid exhaust gas leakage.
●
Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the mounting bolts on the
vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts
and bolts to specification.
●
When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or any over extension in up/down and right/
left directions.
Inspection After Installation
●
●
EBS00J8Q
With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and unusual noises.
Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration.
Revision: March 2005
EX-8
2005 Altima
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
FAX
FRONT AXLE
A
B
C
FAX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ................................... 5
On-vehicle Service ................................................... 5
FRONT WHEEL BEARING ................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ............................................. 11
Removal and Installation ........................................ 11
REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 15
DISSASSEMBLY ................................................. 16
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 18
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 19
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 24
Drive Shaft .............................................................. 24
Wheel Bearing (Front) ............................................ 24
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FAX-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
PFP:00001
EDS001D3
CAUTION:
●
When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition*
with tires on ground.
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated
positions.
●
After installing removed suspension parts, check the wheel alignment.
●
Do not jack up at lower links.
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft.
●
Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
●
Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
●
Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service
location.
●
Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean
cover must be placed over parts.
●
Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
●
Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by
blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Revision: March 2005
FAX-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS001D4
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
HT72520000
(J25730-A)
Ball joint remover
Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball
joint
a: 33 mm (1.30 in)
b: 50 mm (1.97 in)
r: R11.5 mm (0.453 in)
C
NT546
KV38106700
(J34296)
KV38106800
(J34297)
Differential side oil seal protector
FAX
E
Installing drive shaft
LH: KV38106700 (J34296)
RH: KV38106800 (J34297)
F
G
NT147
KV40107500
( — )
Drive shaft attachment
H
Removing drive shaft (VQ35DE)
I
ZZA1230D
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001D5
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
J
K
L
PBIC0190E
M
Revision: March 2005
FAX-3
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EDS001D6
Symptom
WHEEL HUB
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart.
Refer to WHEEL HUB in this chart.
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WHEEL HUB
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
STEERING
FAX-6
Wheel bearing damage
—
×
Parts interference
Shake
FAX-6
×
DRIVE SHAFT
DRIVE SHAFT
Improper installation, looseness
×
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
—
FAX-18
Joint sliding resistance
Noise, Vibration
Reference page
Imbalance
—
Excessive joint angle
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: March 2005
FAX-4
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
On-vehicle Service
PFP:40202
A
EDS001D7
Check front axle and front suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage.
●
Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play.
●
Make sure that cotter pin is inserted.
●
Retighten all axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
B
C
FAX
SMA525A
E
FRONT WHEEL BEARING
●
●
Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly.
Check axial end play.
Axial end play
F
: 0.07 mm (0.0030 in) or less
G
If out of specification or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly,
replace wheel bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and
Installation" .
H
LDIA0001E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FAX-5
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Removal and Installation
EDS001D8
LDIA0002E
1.
Drive shaft
2.
Sensor rotor (if equipped)
3.
Snap ring
4.
Steering knuckle
5.
ABS wheel sensor (if equipped)
6.
Baffle plate
7.
Wheel bearing assembly
8.
Hub bolt
9.
Wheel hub
10.
Wheel bearing lock nut
11.
Cotter pin
12.
Wheel nut
13.
Disc rotor
Revision: March 2005
FAX-6
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
REMOVAL
A
CAUTION:
Before removing the front axle assembly, remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Then
move it away from the front axle assembly area.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the ABS wheel sensor becoming inoper- B
ative.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
2. Remove the engine undercover.
C
3. Remove the front ABS wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-42, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Before removing the front axle assembly, remove the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly, then FAX
position it aside. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor or sensor wires, rendering it
inoperative.
4. Remove the cotter pin, then the wheel bearing lock nut using power tool.
E
5. Remove brake caliper assembly and rotor using power tool.
● The brake hose does not need to be disconnected from brake
caliper. In this case, suspend caliper assembly aside with
F
wire.
CAUTION:
● Do not stretch or twist brake hose.
G
● Do not depress brake pedal, or brake caliper piston will
pop out.
H
SFA701
6.
Separate tie rod from knuckle using Tool.
Tool number
I
: HT72520000 (J25730-A)
CAUTION:
Install stud nut on stud bolt to prevent damage to stud bolt.
J
K
WGIA0101E
7.
Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it. If it is hard
to remove, use a suitable puller.
CAUTION:
Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them
when removing drive shaft.
M
LDIA0004E
Revision: March 2005
FAX-7
L
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
8.
Remove lower strut mounting bolts.
AFA047
9. Loosen lower ball joint nut.
10. Separate knuckle from lower ball joint stud using Tool.
Tool number
: HT72520000 (J25730-A)
11. Remove lower ball joint nut, then knuckle from transverse link.
WDIA0092E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Wheel Hub
●
Check wheel hub for cracks by a magnetic exploration or dyeing test, and replace if cracked.
Knuckle
●
Check for deformity, cracks (by magnetic exploration or dyeing test) and damage on steering knuckle,
replace if necessary.
Snap Ring
●
Check for wear and damage on snap ring, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten to specification. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and
Installation" .
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001D9
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
●
When removing wheel hub or wheel bearing from knuckle, replace wheel bearing assembly (outer
race, inner races and grease seals) with a new one.
●
When replacing wheel bearing, replace complete wheel bearing assembly (inner races and outer
race).
1. Press out wheel hub from knuckle using suitable tool.
AFA130
Revision: March 2005
FAX-8
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
2.
Remove snap rings.
A
B
C
LDIA0005E
3.
FAX
Press out wheel bearing from knuckle using suitable tool.
E
F
G
SFA496A
H
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Install inner snap ring into groove of knuckle.
Press new wheel bearing assembly into knuckle until it contacts
snap ring.
Maximum load P
I
: 50 kN (5.1 ton, 5.6 US ton,
5.02 Imp ton)
3.
CAUTION:
● Do not press inner race of wheel bearing assembly.
● Do not apply oil or grease to mating surfaces of wheel
bearing outer race and knuckle.
Install outer snap ring into groove of knuckle.
4.
Press wheel hub into knuckle.
J
K
SFA655A
L
Maximum load P
5.
: 50 kN (5.1 ton, 5.6 US ton,
5.02 Imp ton)
M
Check bearing operation.
SFA658A
Revision: March 2005
FAX-9
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
a.
Add load P with press.
Load P
: 35-50 kN (3.6 - 5.1 ton, 3.9 - 5.6 US ton,
3.51 - 5.02 Imp ton)
SFA659A
b.
c.
Spin knuckle several turns in both directions.
Make sure that wheel bearings operate smoothly.
SFA182A
Revision: March 2005
FAX-10
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Removal and Installation
PFP:39100
A
EDS001DA
B
C
FAX
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
WDIA0292E
1.
LH drive shaft
2.
RH drive shaft
3.
Center support bracket
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the wheel and tire.
Remove the cotter pin and wheel bearing lock nut using power tool.
NOTE:
Brake caliper does not need to be disconnected.
CAUTION:
Do not twist or stretch brake hose when moving components.
Remove the engine undercover.
Revision: March 2005
FAX-11
2005 Altima
M
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
4.
Loosen the lower ball joint nut and separate the lower ball joint
transverse link using Tool.
Tool number
: HT72520000 (J25730-A)
WDIA0092E
5.
Disconnect the connecting rod from the strut.
SFA796B
6.
Separate drive shaft from knuckle by lightly tapping it. If it is hard to remove, use a puller.
CAUTION:
Cover boots with shop towel so as not to damage them when removing drive shaft.
7.
Remove support bearing bolts using power tool, and pull righthand drive shaft from transaxle using suitable tool as shown.
SFA989
8.
Remove lefthand drive shaft from transaxle.
— For QR25DE M/T models —
● Pry off drive shaft from transaxle using a suitable tool as
shown.
SFA991
Revision: March 2005
FAX-12
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
— For QR25DE A/T models —
● Insert screwdriver into transaxle opening for right drive shaft
and strike with a hammer.
● Be careful not to damage pinion mate shaft and side gear.
A
B
C
FAX
E
F
G
SFA730
H
— For VQ35DE models —
● Remove drive shaft from transaxle using Tool and drive shaft
puller or suitable tool.
– Set Tool and a drive shaft puller or suitable tool between drive
shaft (slide joint side) and transaxle as shown, then remove
drive shaft.
Tool number
: KV40107500 (
—
I
J
)
K
WDIA0098E
L
9.
Remove oil seal from transaxle case.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
M
Check for halting movement or a noticeable rattle by moving a
joint part vertically, horizontally and to axial direction.
Check for crack damage and grease leak of boot.
SFA108A
INSTALLATION
Transaxle Side
1.
Drive a new oil seal into transaxle case. Refer to MT-76, "SIDE OIL SEAL" or AT-268, "Differential Side
Oil Seal Replacement" .
Revision: March 2005
FAX-13
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
2.
Set Tool along the inner circumference of oil seal.
Tool number
: KV38106800 (J34297)
WDIA0094E
3.
4.
Install a new circlip on the drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Always use a new circlip for installation.
Insert drive shaft into transaxle. Be sure to properly align the
serrations and then withdraw Tool.
Tool number
5.
6.
7.
: KV38106800 (J34296)
Push drive shaft, then press-fit circular clip on the drive shaft
into circlip groove of side gear.
After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by
hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the
side gear.
Install remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
WDIA0095E
Wheel Side
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install drive shaft into knuckle.
Tighten support bearing bolts. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Tighten upper knuckle nut and wheel bearing lock nut. Refer to FAX-6, "Removal and Installation" .
Install a new cotter pin to secure the wheel bearing lock nut.
CAUTION:
Always use a new cotter pin for installation.
Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
Revision: March 2005
FAX-14
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001DB
A
B
C
FAX
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WDIA0106E
1.
Dust shield
2.
Sensor rotor (if equipped)
3.
Joint assembly
4.
Boot
5.
Boot band
6.
Circlip
7.
Drive shaft
8.
Dynamic damper
9.
Dynamic damper band
10.
Boot
11.
Boot band
12. Spider assembly
13.
Snap ring
14.
Slide joint assembly
15. Dust shield
17.
Ball
18. Inner race
16. Circlip
Revision: March 2005
FAX-15
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
19.
Cage
20.
Slide joint housing with extension
shaft
21. Snap ring
22.
Dust shield
23.
Support bearing
24. Support bearing retainer
25.
Center support bracket
26.
Snap ring
27. Dust shield
28.
Differential side oil seal
DISSASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side (BJ type)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove boot bands.
Put matching marks on slide joint housing and inner race, before separating joint assembly.
Remove stopper ring with a screwdriver, and pull out slide joint
housing.
Put matching marks on inner race and drive shaft.
SFA476
5.
6.
Remove snap ring, then remove ball cage, inner race and balls
as a unit.
Draw out boot.
Cover drive shaft serrations with tape so as not to damage the
boot.
SFA514A
Transaxle Side (SFJ type)
1.
2.
3.
Remove boot bands.
Put matching marks on slide joint housing and drive shaft before
separating joint assembly.
Put matching marks on spider assembly and drive shaft.
SFA963
Revision: March 2005
FAX-16
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
4.
5.
Remove snap ring, then remove spider assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble spider assembly.
Draw out boot.
CAUTION:
Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to
the boot.
A
B
C
SFA612
FAX
Wheel Side
CAUTION:
The joint on the wheel side cannot be disassembled.
1. Before separating joint assembly, put matching marks on drive shaft and joint assembly.
2. Separate joint assembly using suitable tool.
Be careful not to damage threads on drive shaft.
3. Remove boot bands.
4. Draw out boot.
E
F
G
H
SFA092A
Support Bearing
1.
I
Remove dust shield.
J
K
L
SFA442B
2.
M
Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
SFA692
Revision: March 2005
FAX-17
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
3.
Press support bearing assembly off drive shaft.
SFA693
4.
Separate support bearing from retainer using suitable tool.
SFA617
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent, and dry with compressed air. Check parts for evidence of deformation or other damage.
Shaft
Replace drive shaft if it is twisted or cracked.
Boot and Boot Band
Check boot for fatigue, cracks or wear. Replace boot with new boot bands.
Joint Assembly (Transaxle side)
●
●
●
●
●
Check spider assembly for needle bearing and washer damage. Replace if necessary. (SFJ type)
Check roller surfaces for scratches, wear or other damage. Replace if necessary. (SFJ type)
Replace any parts of double offset joint which show signs of scorching, rust, wear or excessive play. (BJ
type)
Check serration for deformation. Replace if necessary.
Check slide joint housing for any damage. Replace if necessary.
Joint Assembly (Wheel side)
Replace joint assembly if it is deformed or damaged.
Housing (Slide joint)
●
●
●
Check for damage or abnormal wear on ball rolling surface.
Check for wear on shaft bolts.
Check for deformity on boot install part.
Ball cage
●
Check for damage or abnormality on sliding surface.
Steel ball
●
Check for damage or abnormal wear.
Inner race
●
●
Check for damage or abnormality on ball rolling surface.
Check for damage on serration part.
Revision: March 2005
FAX-18
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Support Bearing
A
Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
●
After drive shaft has been assembled, ensure that it moves smoothly over its entire range without
binding.
●
Use Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent after every overhaul.
B
C
Transaxle Side (BJ type)
1.
Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Cover drive shaft serration with tape so as not to damage
boot during installation.
FAX
E
F
SFA800
2.
3.
4.
Grease capacity
5.
G
Install ball cage, inner race and balls as a unit, making sure the
marks which were made during disassembly are properly
aligned.
Install new snap ring.
Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease.
H
I
: 115 – 135 g (4.06 – 4.76 oz)
Install slide joint housing, then install new snap ring.
J
SFA514A
6.
Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft
groove.
Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is
“L2”.
Length “L2”
K
L
: 95.1 – 97.9 mm (3.74 – 3.85 in)
M
SFA149A
7.
Lock new larger and smaller boot bands securely with a suitable
tool.
SFA395
Revision: March 2005
FAX-19
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Transaxle Side (SFJ type)
1.
Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to
boot during installation.
SFA800
2.
3.
Install spider assembly securely, making sure the marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned.
Install new snap ring.
SFA023A
4.
Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease.
Grease capacity
: 180 – 200 g (6.35 – 7.05 oz)
5.
Install slide joint housing.
6.
Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is
“L2”.
Length “L2”
: 96.9 – 99.7 mm (3.81 – 3.93 in)
Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft
groove.
SFA993
Revision: March 2005
FAX-20
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
7.
Lock new larger and smaller boot bands securely with a suitable
tool.
A
B
C
SFA395
FAX
●
Install snap ring.
E
F
G
SFA444B
●
Wheel Side
1.
2.
H
Install new dust shield.
I
Press in sensor rotor to joint sub-assembly using suitable drift, if equipped.
CAUTION:
Always install a new sensor rotor.
Install boot and new small boot band on drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Cover drive shaft serration with tape so as not to damage
boot during installation.
J
K
L
M
SFA800
3.
Set joint assembly onto drive shaft by lightly tapping it.
Install joint assembly securely, ensuring marks which were
made during disassembly are properly aligned.
CAUTION:
Make sure circlip engages inside joint assembly and the
drive shaft does not pull out.
SFA942A
Revision: March 2005
FAX-21
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
4.
Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease.
Grease capacity
QR25DE
VQ35DE
5.
: 115 – 135 g (4.06 – 4.76 oz)
: 145 – 165 g (5.11 – 5.82 oz)
Make sure that boot is properly installed on the drive shaft
groove.
Set boot so that it does not swell and deform when its length is
“L1”.
Length “L1”
QR25DE
VQ35DE
: 114.3 – 117.1 mm (4.50 – 4.61 in)
: 126.7 – 129.9 mm (4.99 – 5.11 in)
SFA592B
6.
Lock new larger and smaller boot bands securely using suitable
tool.
RAC1133D
7.
Measure criped area of boot bands after installation.
CAUTION:
Secure boot band so that dimemsion "M" meets specification as shown.
Dimension "M"
: 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.39 – 0.157)
DSF0047D
Dynamic Damper
1.
2.
Use new damper bands when installing.
Install dynamic damper from stationary-joint side while holding it
securely.
Unit: mm (in)
Applied model
RH
LH
Engine
QR25DE
VQ35DE
QR25DE
VQ35DE
"A"
207 - 213
(8.1 - 8.4)
—
207 - 213
(8.1 - 8.4)
207 - 213
(8.1 - 8.4)
“B”
50 (2.0)
—
50 (2.0)
50 (2.0)
SFA313B
Revision: March 2005
FAX-22
2005 Altima
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Support Bearing
●
A
Press bearing into retainer using suitable tool.
B
C
SFA618
●
Press drive shaft into bearing using suitable tool.
FAX
E
F
G
SFA694
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FAX-23
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Drive Shaft
Applied model
Capacity
g (oz)
Transaxle side “L2 ”
mm (in)
VQ35DE
NISSAN Genuine Grease or equivalent
Wheel
side (BJ
type)
115 - 135 (4.06 - 4.76)
Wheel
side (SFJ
type)
180 - 200 (6.35 - 7.05)
Wheel
side
Boot length
EDS001DC
QR25DE
Quality
Grease
PFP:00030
Wheel side “L1 ”
115 - 135 (4.06 - 4.76)
145 - 165 (5.11 - 5.82)
96.9 - 99.7 (3.81 - 3.93)
95.1 - 97.9 mm (3.74 - 3.85 in)
114.3 - 117.1 (4.50 - 4.61)
126.7 - 129.9 (4.99 - 5.11)
SFA961AA
SFA962A
Wheel Bearing (Front)
EDS001DD
Wheel bearing axial end play limit
0.07 mm (0.0030 in) or less
Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque
Revision: March 2005
236 - 313 N·m (24 - 31 kg-m, 174 - 230 ft-lb)
FAX-24
2005 Altima
B ENGINE
SECTION
FL
FUEL SYSTEM
A
FL
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 2
Special Service Tools ............................................... 2
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................... 3
Checking Fuel Lines ................................................. 3
General Precautions ................................................ 3
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................................... 5
Removal and Installation For All Models Except
PZEV ........................................................................ 5
REMOVAL ............................................................. 5
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .................. 8
Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only..... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 11
FUEL TANK .............................................................. 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 16
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 17
Standard and Limit .................................................. 17
QR25DE .............................................................. 17
VQ35DE .............................................................. 17
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FL-1
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EBS00J8B
The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV991J0090
(J-46214)
Fuel tank lock ring wrench
Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring
LBIA0353E
Commercial Service Tools
EBS00J8C
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
FL-2
2005 Altima
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
Checking Fuel Lines
PFP:17503
A
EBS00J8D
Inspect fuel lines, filler cap and tank for improper attachment, leaks,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts as necessary.
FL
C
D
SMA803A
E
General Precautions
EBS00J8E
WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following.
●
Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the work area.
F
Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and have a CO2 fire extinguisher.
●
Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work
area.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
–
Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in
safe area.
–
Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE"
(QR25DE), EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (VQ35DE).
–
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
●
Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones.
●
Do not kink or twist tubes when they are being installed.
●
Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp
end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end.
Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber
hose clamps.
Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts.
●
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MMA104A
Revision: March 2005
FL-3
2005 Altima
FUEL SYSTEM
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure
the quick connectors are secure.
Check that the connector and resin tube do not contact any
adjacent parts.
a) Apply fuel pressure to the fuel system by turning the
ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine). Then
check for fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections.
b) Start the engine and rev the engine, then check for fuel
leaks at the fuel tube connections.
After installing the tubes, run the engine and check for fuel
leaks at the connections.
Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement.
If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to
EC-37, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" (QR25DE), EC651, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" (VQ35DE).
For servicing “On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery
(ORVR)” parts, refer to EC-44, "ON BOARD REFUELING
VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)"
(QR25DE), EC-660, "ON
BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)"
(VQ35DE).
PBIC0199E
Revision: March 2005
FL-4
2005 Altima
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation For All Models Except PZEV
PFP:17042
A
EBS00J8F
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0448E
1.
Lock ring
4.
Fuel tank
2.
Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly
3.
J
Ring seal
K
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system.
Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" .
1. Unscrew the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank.
2. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE),
EC-714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (VQ35DE).
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
4. Remove the rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Turn the four retainers 90° in a clockwise direction and remove
the fuel pump inspection hole cover.
LBIA0337E
Revision: March 2005
FL-5
2005 Altima
L
M
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
6.
Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump
assembly electrical connector, EVAP hose quick connector, and
the fuel feed hose quick connector from the fuel level sensor
unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
LBIA0338E
Remove the quick connector as follows:
● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
tube.
● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
CAUTION:
● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
SFE562A
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal.
● Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor,
fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
● When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace
the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer).
● To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags or something similar.
PBIC0163E
7.
Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: KV991J0090 (J-46214)
CAUTION:
Discard the lock ring, do not reuse the lock ring.
● Discard the ring seal, do not reuse the ring seal.
●
WBIA0284E
Revision: March 2005
FL-6
2005 Altima
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
8.
Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not bend the float arm during removal.
● Discard the ring seal, do not reuse the ring seal.
A
FL
C
LBIA0339E
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Inspect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump for any defects and foreign materials. Replace as necessary.
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle as shown.
Use a new ring seal.
F
G
H
LBIA0338E
●
–
–
●
–
Connect the quick connector as follows:
Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector
straight into the tube until a click is heard.
After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure
by performing the following checks:
Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.
I
J
K
L
PBIC1653E
M
Revision: March 2005
FL-7
2005 Altima
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
–
Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
quick connector.
PBIC0199E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to apply fuel pressure to the fuel system, then
check the connections for fuel leaks.
2. Start the engine and let it idle and check for fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.
Removal and Installation For PZEV Models Only
EBS00J8G
WBIA0525E
Revision: March 2005
FL-8
2005 Altima
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
1.
Lock ring
4.
Fuel tank
2.
Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly
3.
Ring seal
A
REMOVAL
FL
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system.
Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" .
1. Unscrew the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank.
2. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
4. Remove the rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Turn the four retainers 90° in a clockwise direction and remove
the fuel pump inspection hole cover.
C
D
E
F
G
LBIA0337E
6.
H
Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump
assembly electrical connector, EVAP hose quick connector, and
the fuel feed hose quick connector from the fuel level sensor
unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
I
J
K
WBIA0522E
Remove the quick connector as follows:
● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
tube.
● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
CAUTION:
● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
SFE562A
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal.
● Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor,
fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
● When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace
the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer).
Revision: March 2005
FL-9
2005 Altima
L
M
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
●
To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags or something similar.
PBIC0163E
7.
Remove the six screws and remove the lock ring as shown.
WBIA0523E
8.
Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION:
● Do not bend the float arm during removal.
● Discard the ring seal, do not reuse the ring seal.
LBIA0339E
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Inspect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump for any defects and foreign materials. Replace as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly with the positioning pegs seated in the fuel tank (and the
quick connector pointing to the front) as shown. Use a new ring
seal.
LBIA0402E
Revision: March 2005
FL-10
2005 Altima
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
●
–
–
●
–
Connect the quick connector as follows:
Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector
straight into the tube until a click is heard.
After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure
by performing the following checks:
Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.
A
FL
C
PBIC1653E
D
–
Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
quick connector.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PBIC0199E
K
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to apply fuel pressure to the fuel system, then
check the connections for fuel leaks.
2. Start the engine and let it idle and check for fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FL-11
2005 Altima
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
Removal and Installation
PFP:17202
EBS00J8H
All Except PZEV Models
WBIA0449E
1.
Fuel filler cap
2.
Grommet
3.
Fuel filler tube
4.
Fuel tank
5.
Fuel filler hose
6.
Fuel tank protector
7.
Fuel tank mounting straps
8.
Ring seal
9.
Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel
pump assembly
10.
Lock ring
Revision: March 2005
FL-12
2005 Altima
FUEL TANK
PZEV Models Only
A
FL
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0450E
1.
Lock ring
2.
Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and
fuel pump assembly
3.
Ring seal
4.
Fuel tank
5.
Fuel filler hose
6.
Fuel tank mounting straps
7.
Fuel tank protector
8.
Fuel filler tube
9.
Grommet
10.
Fuel filler cap
J
K
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system.
Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" .
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. Check the fuel level with the vehicle on a level surface. If the fuel
gauge indicates more than the level as shown (7/8 full), drain
the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates a level at
or below as shown (7/8 full).
● In case the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure.
a. Insert fuel tubing of less than 25mm (0.98in) diameter into the
fuel filler tube through the fuel filler opening to drain fuel from the
fuel filler tube.
b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler tube.
SBIA0393E
c. Insert fuel tubing into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to
drain fuel from the fuel tank.
● As a guide, the fuel level reaches or is less than the level on the fuel gauge as shown, when approximately 10 (2 5/8 US gal, 2 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel is drained from a full fuel tank.
3. Open the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank.
4. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, Refer to EC-95, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (QR25DE), EC714, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" (VQ35DE).
Revision: March 2005
I
FL-13
2005 Altima
L
M
FUEL TANK
5.
6.
Remove rear seat bottom. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the fuel pump inspection hole cover.
LBIA0337E
7.
Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, EVAP hose quick
connector, and fuel feed hose quick connector.
● For non-PZEV models.
LBIA0338E
●
For PZEV models.
WBIA0522E
a.
Disconnect the quick connectors as follows:
● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the
tube.
● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
CAUTION:
● The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
● Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
SFE562A
● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
● Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
● Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal.
● Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor,
fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
● When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace
the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer).
Revision: March 2005
FL-14
2005 Altima
FUEL TANK
●
To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags or something similar.
A
FL
C
PBIC0163E
D
8. Remove the center exhaust tube, with muffler(s). Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
9. Disconnect the fuel filler hose and the recirculation hose at the fuel tank side.
10. Disconnect the three parking brake cable mounting brackets on each cable and position the cables out of
the way. Refer to PB-2, "Removal and Installation" .
11. Remove the fuel tank protector.
12. Disconnect the fuel tank mounting straps while supporting the fuel tank.
13. Remove the fuel tank.
14. If replacing the fuel tank, remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly to transfer to the
new fuel tank.
E
F
G
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal paying attention to the following.
●
Before tightening the fuel tank mounting straps, temporarily install the filler hose and the recirculation
hose. Tighten all fuel tank mounting strap bolts to specification, then tighten the hose clamps.
●
Connect the quick connector as follows:
–
Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
–
Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector
straight into the tube until a click is heard.
–
After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure
by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are
securely connected.
SFE562A
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FL-15
2005 Altima
FUEL TANK
●
Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
quick connector.
PBIC0199E
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
1.
2.
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
Turn the ignition switch ON (without starting the engine). Then check the connections for fuel leaks by
applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping.
Run the engine and check for fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections.
Revision: March 2005
FL-16
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
PFP:00030
A
EBS00J8I
QR25DE
Unit:
Fuel tank capacity
(US gal, Imp gal)
75.6 (20, 16 5/8)
FL
VQ35DE
Unit:
Fuel tank capacity
(US gal, Imp gal)
C
75.6 (20, 16 5/8)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FL-17
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: March 2005
FL-18
2005 Altima
E SUSPENSION
SECTION
FSU
FRONT SUSPENSION
A
B
C
D
FSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 5
Components ............................................................. 5
On-vehicle Service ................................................... 6
FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS ............................. 6
Front Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6
DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 6
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6
CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ...................................................................... 7
TOE-IN .................................................................. 7
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ................. 9
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
Disassembly ............................................................. 9
Inspection ............................................................... 10
Revision: March 2005
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ....................... 10
MOUNTING INSULATOR AND RUBBER PARTS... 10
STRUT BEARING ............................................... 10
COIL SPRING ..................................................... 10
Assembly ................................................................ 10
STABILIZER BAR ..................................................... 11
Removal and Installation ........................................ 11
REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 11
Inspection ............................................................... 12
TRANSVERSE LINK ................................................. 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 14
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ............................. 15
Removal and Installation ........................................ 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 18
General Specifications (Front) ................................ 18
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ....................... 18
Lower Ball Joint ...................................................... 18
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ................................. 19
FSU-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
●
●
●
PFP:00001
EES0016W
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with
tires on ground.
Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
Lock nuts are unreusable parts; always use new ones.
When replacing, do not wipe the oil off the new lock nut before tightening.
Revision: March 2005
FSU-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EES0016X
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
HT72520000
(J25730-A)
Ball joint remover
Removing outer tie-rod end and lower ball
joint
C
D
NT146
KV101J0010
(J-47242)
Engine support table
FSU
Front suspension member removal
F
G
WBIA0658E
Commercial Service Tools
EES0016Y
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
H
I
J
PBIC0190E
Attachment wheel alignment
Measuring wheel alignment
a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
d: 56 mm (2.20 in)
e: 12 mm (0.47 in)
K
L
NT148
Spring compressor
Removing and installing coil spring
NT717
Revision: March 2005
FSU-3
2005 Altima
M
FSU-10
Bushing or mounting
deterioration
Parts interference
Noise
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
Shudder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
Revision: March 2005
×
FSU-5
FSU-6
FSU-12
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Incorrect wheel alignment
Stabilizer bar fatigue
DRIVE SHAFT
AXLE
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
STEERING
×
Suspension looseness
×
FSU-10
×
Spring fatigue
—
FSU-10
Shock absorber deformation,
damage or deflection
Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
FSU-5
Reference page
Improper installation, looseness
Symptom
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
FSU-4
×
×
PFP:00003
EES0016Z
Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×: Applicable
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Components
PFP:54010
A
EES00170
B
C
D
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WEIA0148E
1.
Gasket
2.
Shock absorber mounting insulator
and bearing assembly
3.
Shock absorber bushing
4.
Upper rubber seat and spring
upper seat
5.
Dust cover
6.
Lower rubber seat
7.
Coil spring
8.
Shock absorber
9.
Front suspension member
10. Cup
11. Member pin stay
13. Cotter pin
14. Transverse link
15. Connecting rod
16. Stabilizer bar
17. Driveshaft
⇐
Revision: March 2005
FSU-5
12. Wheel hub and steering knuckle
assembly
Front
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
On-vehicle Service
EES00171
FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS
Check the front axle and front suspension parts for any excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage.
●
Raise the vehicle on a hoist and shake each front wheel to
check for excessive play.
●
Make sure that the cotter pin is inserted in the lower ball joint.
●
Retighten all of the axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the
specified torque.
Tightening torques
: Refer to FSU-5, "Components" .
SMA525A
●
●
Check the strut for any oil leakage or other damage.
Check the suspension ball joint for grease leakage and the ball
joint dust cover for any cracks or other damage.
If the ball joint dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace the
transverse link.
SFA392B
●
–
–
Measure the wheelarch height “Hf” and “Hr” from the top of the
wheelarch to the ground.
For proper measurement of the vehicle height, the vehicle must
be unladen*, parked on a level surface, and tires checked for
proper inflation and wear (the tread wear indicators must not be
showing).
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand
tools and mats in designated positions.
Bounce the vehicle up and down several times before measuring the height.
SFA818A
Standard height
–
: Refer to FSU-19, "Wheelarch
Height (Unladen*)" .
The wheelarch height is not adjustable. If the height is out of specification, check for worn springs or suspension parts.
Front Wheel Alignment
EES00172
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection with the vehicle
Unladen*.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
●
●
Check the tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check the wheel runout.
Wheel runout
●
●
: Refer to FSU-10, "Inspection" .
Check the front wheel bearings for looseness.
Check the front suspension for looseness.
Revision: March 2005
FSU-6
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
●
●
●
Check the steering linkage for looseness.
Check that the front struts work properly.
Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to FSU-6, "FRONT SUSPENSION
PARTS" .
A
B
CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION
NOTE:
Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted.
1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the
right and left wheels using suitable commercialy available
attachment tool and alignment gauge.
C
D
Camber, caster and
kingpin inclination
2.
: Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel
Alignment (Unladen*1)" .
FSU
If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension parts. Replace any damaged
or worn out parts.
F
SRA096A
TOE-IN
G
WARNING:
●
Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
●
Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires
at the hub center height as shown. These marks are measuring
points.
H
I
J
K
AFA050
4.
5.
6.
Measure the distance “A” on the rear side of the front tires as
shown.
Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180°
degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION:
If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2
turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never
push the vehicle backward.
Measure the distance “B” on the front side of the front tires at the
same marks as shown.
Total toe-in
Revision: March 2005
: Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" .
FSU-7
L
M
SFA234AC
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
7.
a.
b.
Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tierods.
Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts.
Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length “L”
c.
: Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear
and Linkage" .
Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque.
Lock nut
: Refer to PS-13, "Removal and
Installation" .
SFA486A
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1.
2.
Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the
vehicle forward until the front wheels rest on the turning radius
gauge as shown.
Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure the
turning angles “A” and “B” as shown.
Wheel turning angle
(full turn)
: Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel
Alignment (Unladen*1)" .
SFA439BA
Revision: March 2005
FSU-8
2005 Altima
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
PFP:56210
A
EES00173
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Disconnect the ABS sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front strut.
Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool.
Support the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly with a suitable wire.
Remove the strut lower bolts and nuts using power tool.
Remove the three upper strut mounting nuts using power tool.
CAUTION:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle.
Remove the strut assembly.
B
C
D
FSU
F
SFA956A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Front
Wheel Alignment" .
●
When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown.
●
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification using power tool. Refer
to FSU-5, "Components" .
WARNING:
● Always replace the strut lower mounting nuts.
● When installing strut to steering knuckle, be sure to hold
bolts when tightening nuts.
●
Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
G
H
I
J
K
WSU003
Disassembly
1.
2.
EES00174
Set the strut in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston
rod lock nut as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time.
Compress the spring using commercial service tool so that the
shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand.
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are
firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must
be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the
spring.
Revision: March 2005
FSU-9
L
M
SSU002
2005 Altima
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
3.
Remove the strut rod lock nut.
SSU003
Inspection
EES00175
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
●
●
●
Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
Check strut rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
MOUNTING INSULATOR AND RUBBER PARTS
Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and
replace if necessary.
STRUT BEARING
Check the strut bearing for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary.
COIL SPRING
Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Assembly
1.
EES00176
When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as
shown.
SFA508A
2.
Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer
side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points.
NOTE:
LH side shown, RH side similar.
SFA564B
Revision: March 2005
FSU-10
2005 Altima
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER BAR
Removal and Installation
PFP:54611
A
EES00177
B
C
D
FSU
F
WEIA0147E
1.
Stabilizer bar
2.
Bracket
4.
Connecting rod
⇐
Front
3.
Bushing
G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H
Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER" .
Support suspension member using suitable jack support.
Disconnect the connecting rod end at the stabilizer bar using
power tool.
● Prevent the stabilizer connecting rod from turning by inserting
a hex wrench into the end of the ball stud, then remove nut.
Remove the two stabilizer bar clamps from the front suspension
member using power tool.
Remove the front stabilizer bar.
● Remove the two stabilizer bushings as necessary.
I
J
K
SFA796B
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing stabilizer, make sure that the clamps are facing
in the correct direction as shown.
M
WEIA0073E
Revision: March 2005
FSU-11
L
2005 Altima
STABILIZER BAR
●
●
Make sure that slit in bushing is in the position as shown.
Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the bushing using a silicone lubricant.
SFA604B
Inspection
●
●
●
EES00178
Check the stabilizer bar for deformation or cracks and replace if
necessary.
Check the bushings for deterioration or cracks. Replace if necessary.
Check that the ball joint can rotate in all directions. If movement
is not smooth and free, replace stabilizer bar connecting rod.
ARA027
Revision: March 2005
FSU-12
2005 Altima
TRANSVERSE LINK
TRANSVERSE LINK
Removal and Installation
PFP:54500
A
EES00179
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove the lower ball joint cotter pin and remove the lower ball joint nut using power tool.
CAUTION:
Discard the cotter pin and use a new cotter pin for installation.
Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle using
Tool as shown.
Tool number
B
C
: HT72520000 (J25730-A)
D
FSU
F
WEIA0103E
4.
5.
6.
Remove the member stay pin nut and two bolts using power tool, and remove the member stay pin.
Remove the two transverse link pivot bolts using power tool.
Remove the transverse link bolt and remove the transverse link from the front suspension member.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Visual Check
●
●
G
H
Check the transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation. Replace it if necessary.
Check the bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace the transverse link if necessary.
I
Lower Ball Joint
●
●
●
●
Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the transverse link assembly if any of the following exists:
Lower ball joint stud is worn.
Lower ball joint is hard to swing.
Lower ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
J
K
Swinging Force
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball
joint is properly broken in.
Swinging force “A” (measuring from cotter pin
hole of ball stud)
: 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f,
1.8 - 12.3 lb-f)
M
SFA858A
Turning Force
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball
joint is properly broken in.
Revision: March 2005
FSU-13
L
2005 Altima
TRANSVERSE LINK
Turning torque “B”
: 0.49 - 3.43 N·m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm,
4.3 - 30.4 in-lb)
SFA858A
Vertical End Play
Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE:
Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball
joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play “C”
: 0 mm (0 in)
SFA858A
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Tighten the transverse link mounting bolts to specified torque. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . During
installation, the final tightening must be done with the vehicle in unladen* condition and the tires on the
ground.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
CAUTION:
Discard the old cotter pin and use a new cotter pin for installation of the lower ball joint nut.
●
Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
●
After installation, check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" .
Revision: March 2005
FSU-14
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
Removal and Installation
PFP:54401
A
EES0017A
B
C
D
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
WEIA0105E
1.
Front engine mount
2.
Rear engine mount
3.
Member pin stay, RH
4.
Member pin stay, LH
5.
Front suspension member
6.
Cup
7.
LH transaxle mounting insulator (VQ35DE)
K
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wheels and tires using power tool.
Remove engine cover and undercover.
For vehicles equipped with the VQ35DE engine, install the
engine slingers into the front of the left cylinder head, and the
right rear cylinder head as shown. Then support the engine from
the engine slingers using suitable tool.
M
SEM807G
Revision: March 2005
FSU-15
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
SEM808G
4.
5.
Remove the splash shields.
For vehicles equipped with the VQ35DE engine, remove the two
LH transaxle mounting insulator bolts.
WEIA0106E
6.
7.
Remove the lower ball joint cotter pin and remove the lower ball joint nut using power tool.
CAUTION:
Discard the cotter pin and use a new cotter pin for installation.
Disconnect the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle using
Tool as shown.
Tool number
: HT2520000 (J25730-A)
WEIA0103E
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove the front exhaust tube using power tool. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the power steering line bracket from the front suspension member.
Remove the mounting bolts on the lower side of the steering gear.
Disconnect the front and rear engine mount electrical connectors, if equipped.
12. Disconnect the connecting rod from the front strut using power
tool.
SFA796B
Revision: March 2005
FSU-16
2005 Altima
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
13. Set Tool under the front suspension member, then remove the mounting nuts from the front suspension
member using power tool.
Tool number
A
: KV101J0010 (J-47242)
14. Remove the mounting bolts from the front suspension member pin stay on the vehicle body side using
power tool.
15. Remove the through bolts from the front and rear engine mounts.
16. Lower the suspension member slowly.
● If necessary, remove the exhaust hanger bracket from the front suspension member.
● If necessary, remove the front and rear engine mounts.
● If necessary, remove the transverse link.
B
C
D
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FSU
●
For vehicles equipped with the VQ35DE engine, tighten the two LH transaxle mounting insulator bolts to
specification.
●
Install the stabilizer bar bushings and clamps in the specified orientation. Refer to FSU-11, "INSTALLAF
TION" .
●
Tighten the stabilizer bar and connecting rod nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-11, "Removal
and Installation" .
G
●
Tighten the steering gear mounting bolts to specification. Refer to PS-13, "Removal and Installation" .
●
Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-5, "Rotation" .
●
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" .
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FSU-17
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications (Front)
Suspension type
PFP:00030
EES0017B
Independent MacPherson strut
Shock absorber type
Double-acting hydraulic
Stabilizer bar
Standard equipment
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
EES0017C
Tire size
215/60R16
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
−1°00′ (−1.00°)
Nominal
−0°15′ (−0.25°)
Maximum
45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
2°05′ (2.08°)
Nominal
2°50′ (2.83°)
Maximum
3°35′ (3.58°)
Left and right difference
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Angle (left, right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Wheel turning angle
Full turn*2
Inside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Outside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
225/45R18
0°30′ (0.50°)
Left and right difference
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
215/55R17
45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
13°50′ (13.83°)
Nominal
14°35′ (14.58°)
Maximum
15°20′ (15.33°)
Minimum
−0.5 (−0.02)
Nominal
0.5 (0.02)
Maximum
1.5 (0.06)
Minimum
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
Nominal
0° 2′ (0.03°)
Maximum
0° 8′ (0.13°)
Minimum
34°30′ (34.5°)
32°00′ (32.0°)
32°00′ (32.0°)
Nominal
38°00′ (38.0°)
35°30′ (35.5°)
35°30′ (35.5°)
Maximum
39°00′ (39.0°)
36°30′ (36.5°)
36°30′ (36.5°)
Nominal
30°30′ (30.5°)
29°00′ (29.0°)
29°00′ (29.0°)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with
engine idle.
Lower Ball Joint
Swinging force “A”
(Measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud)
Turning torque “B”
Vertical end play “C”
EES0017D
7.8 - 54.9 (0.8 - 5.6, 1.8 - 12.3)
N (kg-f, lb-f)
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
0.49 - 3.43 (5.0 - 35.0, 4.3 - 30.4)
mm (in)
Revision: March 2005
0 (0)
FSU-18
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
EES0017E
A
B
C
SFA818A
Engine
QR25DE
Model
All
SL
VQ35DE
SE
SE-R
Tire size
215/60R16
215/60R16
215/55R17
225/45R18
Front (Hf) mm (in)
722 (28.43)
717 (28.23)
721 (28.39)
721 (28.39)
Rear (Hr) mm (in)
695 (27.36)
696 (27.40)
698 (27.48)
695 (27.36)
D
FSU
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
FSU-19
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: March 2005
FSU-20
2005 Altima
QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
Edition: February 2004
Revision: March 2005
Publication No. SM5E-1L31U2
A GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
General Information
B ENGINE
EM
Engine Mechanical
LU
Engine Lubrication System
CO
Engine Cooling System
EC
Engine Control System
FL
Fuel System
EX
Exhaust System
ACC
Accelerator Control System
TRANSMISSION/
TRANSAXLE
CL
Clutch
MT
Manual Transaxle
AT
Automatic Transaxle
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
FAX
Front Axle
RAX
Rear Axle
FSU
Front Suspension
RSU
Rear Suspension
WT
Road Wheels & Tires
BR
Brake System
PB
Parking Brake System
BRC
Brake Control System
C
E SUSPENSION
F BRAKES
G STEERING
PS
Power Steering System
H RESTRAINTS
SB
Seat Belts
SRS
I
BODY
J AIR CONDITIONER
K ELECTRICAL
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
BL
Body, Lock & Security System
GW
Glasses, Window System & Mirrors
RF
Roof
EI
Exterior & Interior
IP
Instrument Panel
SE
Seat
ATC
Automatic Air Conditioner
MTC
Manual Air Conditioner
SC
Starting & Charging System
LT
Lighting System
DI
Driver Information System
WW
Wiper, Washer & Horn
BCS
Body Control System
LAN
LAN System
AV
ACS
Audio Visual & Telephone System
Auto Cruise Control System
PG
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
L MAINTENANCE
MA
Maintenance
M INDEX
IDX
Alphabetical Index
© 2005 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of Nissan North America, Inc., Gardena, California.
-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the
2005 NISSAN ALTIMA.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information
at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of
the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a
manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician
and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service
procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal
safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service
method selected.
-2
PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER!
Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals.
Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals.
Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to:
Nissan North America, Inc.
Technical Service Information
39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200
Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331
FAX: (248) 488-3910
SERVICE MANUAL:
Model:
Year:
PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ):
Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail:
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
Page number(s)
Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
If no, what page number(s)?
Please describe the issue or problem in detail:
Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Please comment:
What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or
repairing customer vehicles?
DATE:
DEALER:
CITY:
YOUR NAME:
DEALER NO.:
STATE/PROV./COUNTRY:
POSITION:
ADDRESS:
ZIP/POSTAL CODE:
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR
ENGINE)
2005
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR ENGINE)
PFP:00000
Engine Tune-Up Data
ELS0012S
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
cm
Bore and stroke
3
In-line 4
2,488 (151.82)
(cu in)
mm (in)
89.0 x 100 (3.50 x 3.94)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Number of piston rings
Compression
2
Oil
1
Compression ratio
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm
9.5:1
Standard
1,250 (12.8, 181.3)
Minimum
1,060 (10.8, 153.7)
Differential limit between cylinders
100 (1.0, 14)
Idle speed rpm
No-load *1, A/T (in P or N position), M/T (in neutral position)
700 ± 50
Ignition timing
(BTDC at idle speed)
15° ± 5°
Radiator cap relief pressure
Standard
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Limit
Cooling system leakage testing pressure
78 – 98 (0.8 – 1.0, 11 – 14)
59 (0.6, 9)
157 (1.6, 23)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
*1: Under the following conditions:
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Electric load: OFF (lights, heater fan, and rear window defogger)
●
Steering wheel: kept in straight-ahead position
Drive Belt Deflection and Tension
Tension of drive belts
Auto adjustment by auto-tensioner
Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped)
Make
Type
Plug gap (nominal)
NGK
Standard
PLFR5A-11
Hot
PLFR4A-11
Cold
PLFR6A-11
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR
ENGINE)
2005
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
ELS001FB
SFA234AC
Tire size
215/60R16
Model
Base / S
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
−1°00′ (−1.00°)
Nominal
−0°15′ (−0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
2°05′ (2.08°)
Nominal
2°50′ (2.83°)
Maximum
3°35′ (3.58°)
Left and right difference
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Angle (left, right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Wheel turning angle
Full turn*2
Inside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Outside
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
0°30′ (0.50°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
13°50′ (13.83°)
Nominal
14°35′ (14.58°)
Maximum
15°20′ (15.33°)
Minimum
−0.5 (−0.02)
Nominal
0.5 (0.02)
Maximum
1.5 (0.06)
Minimum
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
Nominal
0° 2′ (0.03°)
Maximum
0° 8′ (0.13°)
Minimum
34°30′ (34.5°)
Nominal
38°00′ (38.0°)
Maximum
39°00′ (39.0°)
Nominal
30°30′ (30.5°)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: With power steering, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 - 147 N (10 - 15 kg, 22 - 33 lb) with engine at idle.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR
ENGINE)
2005
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
ELS001FC
SFA234AC
Tire size
215/60R16
Model
Base / S
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Total toe-in
Distance difference
between RH and LH side
mm (in)
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
−0° 04′ (−0.07°)
Nominal
−0° 34′ (−0.57°)
Maximum
−0° 64′ (−1.07°)
Minimum
2.4 (0.09)
Nominal
3.9 (0.15)
Maximum
5.4 (0.21)
Minimum
−2 (−0.08)
Nominal
0 (0)
Maximum
2 (0.08)
Minimum
0° 6′ (0.10°)
Nominal
0° 10′ (0.17°)
Maximum
0° 14′ (0.23°)
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Brake
ELS0012V
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Front brake
CLZ25VD disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
57.2 (2.25)
Pad Length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Brake model
Rear brake
125.6 × 46 × 11 (4.94 × 1.81 × 0.43)
296 × 24 (11.7 × 0.94)
AD9V disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
34.9 (1.3740)
Pad Length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.31)
292 × 9 (11.5 × 0.35)
Master cylinder
Cylinder bore diameter
Control valve
Screw in type
30 × 0.4 (1.18 × 0.02)
Booster model
M215T
Brake booster
Recommended brake fluid
Diaphragm diameter
23.81 (15/16)
Primary
230 (9.06)
Secondary
205 (8.07)
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 16)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 2.5L, QR
ENGINE)
2005
Disc Brake - Repair Limits
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Pad wear limit
Rotor repair limit
CLZ25VD (Front)
AD9V (Rear)
2.0 (0.079)
1.5 (0.059)
Maximum runout
0.07 (0.0028)
0.07 (0.0028)
Minimum thickness
22.0 (0.866)
8.0 (0.31)
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation
(at least 8 positions)
0.015 (0.0006)
Brake Pedal
Unit: mm (in)
WFIA0022E
Free height “H”*
M/T
164.1 - 174.1 (6.46 - 6.85)
A/T
173.1 - 183.1 (6.81 - 7.21)
Clearance “C1 or C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or
ASCD switch
0.74 - 1.96 (0.0291 - 0.0772)
*: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad
Refill Capacities
ELS0012W
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Liter
Fuel
US measure
Imp measure
75.6
20 gal
16 5/8 gal
With oil filter change
4.2
4 1/2 qt
3 3/4 qt
Without oil filter change
4.0
4 1/4 qt
3 1/2 qt
4.6
4 7/8 qt
4 qt
7.6
2 gal
1 5/8 gal
Manual transaxle fluid (MTF)
2.2
2 3/8 qt
2 qt
Automatic transaxle (4A/T) fluid (ATF)
9.2
9 3/4 qt
8 1/8 qt
Engine oil
Drain and refill
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Cooling system
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricant
With reservoir
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
0.50 ± 0.025 kg
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
5.03 fl oz
5.01 fl oz
150 m
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ
ENGINE)
2005
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ ENGINE)
PFP:00000
Engine Tune-Up Data
ELS0012X
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
cm
Bore and stroke
3
V-6
3
3,498 (213.45)
(in )
mm (in)
95.5 x 81.4 (3.76 x 3.205)
Valve arrangement
DOHC
Firing order
Number of piston rings
1-2-3-4-5-6
Compression
2
Oil
1
Number of main bearings
4
Compression ratio
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) / 250 rpm
10.0:1
Standard
1,275 (13.0, 185)
Minimum
981 (10.0, 142)
Differential limit between cylinders
Idle speed rpm
No-load*1, A/T (in P or N position), M/T (in neutral position)
98 (1.0, 14)
A/T
675 ± 50
M/T
625 ± 50
Ignition timing
(BTDC at idle speed)
15° ± 5°
Radiator cap relief pressure
Standard
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Limit
Cooling system leakage testing pressure
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
*1: Under the following conditions:
●
Air conditioner switch: OFF
●
Electric load: OFF (lights, heater fan and rear window defogger)
●
Steering wheel: kept in straight-ahead position
78 - 98 (0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14)
59 (0.6, 9)
157 (1.6, 23)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ
ENGINE)
2005
Drive Belt Deflection and Tension
LBIA0076E
Deflection adjustment
Unit: mm (in)
Used belt
Alternator and
air conditioning
compressor
Power steering
pump
Applied pushing
force
Limit
After adjustment
7 (0.28)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
11 (0.43)
7.3 - 8
(0.29 - 0.30)
98 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
New belt
Tension adjustment*
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Used belt
New belt
Limit
After adjustment
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
294 (30, 66)
730 - 818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
6.5 - 7.2
(0.26 - 0.28)
196 (20, 44)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
Spark Plugs (Double Platinum Tipped)
Make
NGK
Standard
Type
Gap (nominal)
PLFR5A-11
Hot
PLFR4A-11
Cold
PLFR6A-11
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ
ENGINE)
2005
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
ELS001FG
SFA234AC
Tire size
Model
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
215/60R16
215/55R17
225/45R18
SL
SE
SE-R
Minimum
−1°00′ (−1.00°)
Nominal
−0°15′ (−0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
2°05′ (2.08°)
Nominal
2°50′ (2.83°)
Maximum
3°35′ (3.58°)
Left and right difference
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Angle (left, right)
Degree minute (Decimal
degree)
Wheel turning angle
Full turn*2
Inside
Degree minute (Decimal
degree)
Outside
Degree minute (Decimal
degree)
0°30′ (0.50°)
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
0° 45′ (0.75°) or less
Minimum
13°50′ (13.83°)
Nominal
14°35′ (14.58°)
Maximum
15°20′ (15.33°)
Minimum
−0.5 (−0.02)
Nominal
0.5 (0.02)
Maximum
1.5 (0.06)
Minimum
−0° 4′ (−0.07°)
Nominal
0° 2′ (0.03°)
Maximum
0° 8′ (0.13°)
Minimum
34°30′ (34.5°)
32°00′ (32.0°)
32°00′ (32.0°)
Nominal
38°00′ (38.0°)
35°30′ (35.5°)
35°30′ (35.5°)
Maximum
39°00′ (39.0°)
36°30′ (36.5°)
36°30′ (36.5°)
Nominal
30°30′ (30.5°)
29°00′ (29.0°)
29°00′ (29.0°)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
*2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) with
engine idle.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ
ENGINE)
2005
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
ELS001FH
SFA234AC
215/60R16 (SL)
215/55R17 (SE)
Tire size
Model
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Total toe-in
Distance difference
between RH and LH side
mm (in)
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
225/45R18
SL / SE
SE-R
Minimum
−0° 2′ (−0.03°)
−0° 13′ (−0.22°)
Nominal
−0° 32′ (−0.53°)
−0° 43′ (−0.72°)
Maximum
−1° 2′ (−1.03°)
−1° 13′ (−1.22°)
Minimum
2.4 (0.09)
2.3 (0.09)
Nominal
3.9 (0.15)
3.8 (0.15)
Maximum
5.4 (0.21)
5.3 (0.21)
−2 (−0.08)
Minimum
Nominal
0 (0)
Maximum
2 (0.08)
Minimum
0° 6′ (0.10°)
Nominal
0° 10′ (0.17°)
Maximum
0° 14′ (0.23°)
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Brake
ELS001FI
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
CLZ25VD disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake
57.2 (2.25)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Brake model
125.6 × 46 × 11 (4.94 × 1.81 ×
0.43)
111.0 × 62.5 × 9.5 (4.37 × 2.46
× 0.37)
296 × 24 (11.7 × 0.94)
320 × 28 (12.6 × 1.10)
AD9V disc brake
Cylinder bore diameter
Rear brake
CLZ25VE disc brake
34.9 (1.3740)
Pad
Length × width × thickness
89.1 × 39.5 × 10 (3.508 × 1.555 × 0.31)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
292 × 9 (11.5 × 0.35)
Master cylinder
Cylinder bore diameter
Control valve
Screw in type
30 × 0.4 (1.18 × 0.02)
Booster model
M215T
Brake booster
Diaphragm diameter
Recommended brake fluid
23.81 (15/16)
Primary
230 (9.06)
Secondary
205 (8.07)
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent
DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: ALTIMA (EQUIPPED WITH 3.5L, VQ
ENGINE)
2005
Disc Brake - Repair Limits
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Pad wear limit
Rotor repair limit
CLZ25VD
CLZ25VE
AD9V
2.0 (0.079)
2.0 (0.079)
1.5 (0.059)
Maximum runout
0.07 (0.0028)
0.07 (0.0028)
0.07 (0.0028)
Minimum thickness
22.0 (0.866)
26.0 (1.02)
8.0 (0.31)
Minimum thickness
Maximum thickness variation
(at least 8 positions)
0.015 (0.0006)
Brake Pedal
Unit: mm (in)
WFIA0022E
Free height “H”*
M/T
164.1 - 174.1 (6.46 - 6.85)
A/T
173.1 - 183.1 (6.81 - 7.21)
Clearance “C1 or C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or
ASCD switch
0.74 - 1.96 (0.0291 - 0.0772)
*: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad.
Refill Capacities
ELS00131
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Liter
Fuel
US measure
Imp measure
75.6
20 gal
16 5/8 gal
With oil filter change
4.2
4 1/2 qt
3 3/4 qt
Without oil filter change
4.0
4 1/4 qt
3 1/2 qt
4.6
4 7/8 qt
4 qt
8.2
2 1/8 gal
1 3/4 gal
Manual transaxle fluid (MTF)
2.2
2 3/8 qt
2 qt
Automatic transaxle (5A/T) fluid (ATF)
7.3
7 3/4 qt
6 3/8 qt
Engine oil
Drain and refill
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Cooling system
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricant
With reservoir
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
0.50 ± 0.025 kg
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
5.03 fl oz
5.01 fl oz
150 m
A GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION
GI
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Description ............................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI
VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If
Equipped) ................................................................. 3
General Precautions ................................................ 4
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst ......................... 5
Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline
Recommended) ........................................................ 5
Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or
Engine Control System ............................................ 6
Precautions for Hoses .............................................. 6
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 6
HOSE CLAMPING ................................................ 6
Precautions for Engine Oils ...................................... 7
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ............. 7
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ................................................................... 7
Precautions for Air Conditioning ............................... 7
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................... 8
Description ............................................................... 8
Terms ....................................................................... 8
Units ......................................................................... 8
Contents ................................................................... 8
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ..... 9
How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses ............................ 9
DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 9
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ............................................... 10
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR
NUMBER INDICATION ....................................... 10
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES ............................... 12
How to Read Wiring Diagrams ............................... 14
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS ................................... 14
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - ......... 15
Revision: March 2005
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 16
Abbreviations .......................................................... 21
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ......................................................................... 23
How to Check Terminal ........................................... 23
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT ............ 23
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS ...................... 23
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical
Incident ................................................................... 26
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 26
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS ........................ 26
CIRCUIT INSPECTION ....................................... 29
Control Units and Electrical Parts ........................... 34
PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 34
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM .......................... 36
Description .............................................................. 36
Function and System Application ........................... 36
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement ............ 37
Checking Equipment .............................................. 38
CONSULT-II Start Procedure .................................. 38
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ......... 39
LIFTING POINT ......................................................... 40
Special Service Tools ............................................. 40
Garage Jack and Safety Stand ............................... 41
2-pole Lift ................................................................ 42
Board-on Lift ........................................................... 42
TOW TRUCK TOWING ............................................. 43
Tow Truck Towing ................................................... 43
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 43
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ... 44
Tightening Torque Table ......................................... 44
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS ............................................................... 45
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants... 45
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ............................ 46
Model Variation (Early production) ......................... 46
Model Variation (Late production) ........................... 47
Identification Number .............................................. 48
Identification Plate .................................................. 49
Engine Serial Number ............................................ 50
GI-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Automatic Transaxle Number ................................. 50
Manual Transaxle Number ..................................... 50
Dimensions ............................................................. 50
Wheels & Tires ....................................................... 51
Revision: March 2005
TERMINOLOGY ........................................................52
SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................52
GI-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Description
PFP:00001
GI
EAS0018O
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
B
EAS0018P
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS) (If Equipped)
EAS001QJ
NVIS/IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS/IVIS
(NATS).
Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS/IVIS (NATS) registered.
The security indicator is located on the instrument panel. The indicator blinks when the immobilizer system is
functioning.
Therefore, NVIS/IVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
●
When NVIS/IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition switch is in
"ON" position.
This lighting up indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning, so prompt service is required.
●
When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of
other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS/IVIS (NATS)
software is necessary.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS/IVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NVIS/IVIS (NATS).
Therefore, CONSULT-II NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software (program card and operation manual) must be kept
strictly confidential to maintain the integrity of the anti-theft function.
●
When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of
other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key identification.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. A maximum of four or five key IDs can be registered into NVIS/IVIS (NATS).
●
When failing to start the engine first time using the key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS), start as follows.
1. Leave the ignition key in "ON" position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition key to "OFF" or "LOCK" position and wait approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while keeping the key separate from any others on key-chain.
Revision: March 2005
GI-3
2005 Altima
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions
●
EAS0018Q
Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without
proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any
inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be
sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
SGI285
●
●
Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After
jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety
stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working
on the vehicle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop
them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
SGI231
●
●
Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.
SEF289H
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
To prevent serious burns:
Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in
an appropriate manner.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
SGI233
prior to inspection or assembly.
Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new
ones.
Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
Revision: March 2005
GI-4
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
●
Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.
Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs.
When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leaks.
GI
B
C
PBIC0190E
●
Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.
D
E
F
G
SGI234
H
WARNING:
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections.
I
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst
J
EAS0018R
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To
prevent this, follow the instructions.
●
Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
●
When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when
necessary.
●
Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to
the catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three
way catalyst.
Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)
EAS001IC
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91).
For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN/INFINITI recommend the use of unleaded premium gasoline with
an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel
other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could
also affect the warranty coverage validity.
Revision: March 2005
GI-5
2005 Altima
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System
●
●
●
EAS0018T
Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for
the multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to
injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air
flow sensor.
SGI787
Precautions for Hoses
EAS0018U
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
●
To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose
with tapered tool or screwdriver.
SMA019D
●
To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with
hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up
against hose stopper.)
SMA020D
HOSE CLAMPING
●
●
If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original
position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is
a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber
hose at that position.
Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
SMA021D
Revision: March 2005
GI-6
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
●
After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction
of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around.
GI
B
C
SMA022D
D
Precautions for Engine Oils
EAS0018V
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
E
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
F
G
H
I
J
K
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal
facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources.
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Precautions for Air Conditioning
EAS0018W
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
ATC/MTC section “HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure”, “REFRIGERANT LINES” for specific instructions.
Revision: March 2005
GI-7
2005 Altima
L
M
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Description
PFP:00008
EAS0018X
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”.
Terms
●
EAS0018Y
The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal
injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information.
Standard value:Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value:The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment.
Units
●
EAS0018Z
The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit),
and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
“Example”
Outer Socket Lock Nut
: 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
Contents
EAS001QT
●
ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and
page you are searching for.
●
A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g.
) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find
the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab.
THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks
of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations.
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.
●
●
●
●
Revision: March 2005
GI-8
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions
EAS001QU
The following sample explains the ralationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in
the text and the service procedures.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SAIA0519E
How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses
EAS00192
DESCRIPTION
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the
“Work Flow”.
2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each
section for identification/location of components and harness connectors.
4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a
sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG
section for identification of harness connectors.
5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure
that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were.
Revision: March 2005
K
GI-9
2005 Altima
L
M
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SAIA0256E
1.
2.
Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group.
The meaning of are as follows:
a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V
b. Voltage
: Approximately 0V → Less than 1V
3.
4.
Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem,
familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below.
Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown
in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Revision: March 2005
GI-10
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration
●
●
●
GI
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness
wire color.
Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors.
B
C
D
E
F
G
AGI070
H
TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text
I
J
K
L
M
SGI144A
Revision: March 2005
GI-11
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
SAIA0750E
Revision: March 2005
GI-12
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SAIA0751E
Revision: March 2005
GI-13
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
EAS00193
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
●
Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed
by a single line and followed by the direction mark.
●
Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed
by a double line and followed by the direction mark.
●
Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
SAIA0257E
●
Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
SGI363
Revision: March 2005
GI-14
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL ●
GI
For detail, refer to following “DESCRIPTION”.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SGI091A
Revision: March 2005
GI-15
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Optional Splice
SGI942
DESCRIPTION
Number
Item
1
Power condition
2
Fusible link
3
Fusible link/fuse location
4
Fuse
5
6
Current rating
Connectors
Description
●
This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated).
●
The double line shows that this is a fusible link.
●
The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
●
This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.
●
The single line shows that this is a fuse.
●
The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out.
●
This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.
●
This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male.
●
The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors.
●
Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION).
7
Optional splice
●
The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
8
Splice
●
The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle.
9
Page crossing
●
This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page.
●
The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page.
10
Common connector
●
The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector.
11
Option abbreviation
●
This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application.
12
Relay
●
This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY.
13
Connectors
●
This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut.
Revision: March 2005
GI-16
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Number
Item
Description
●
14
Wire color
GI
This shows a code for the color of the wire.
BR = Brown
OR or O = Orange
P = Pink
PU or V (Violet) = Purple
GY or GR = Gray
SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
L = Blue
Y = Yellow
LG = Light Green
B
C
When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown
below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
15
Option description
16
Switch
17
Assembly parts
18
Cell code
19
20
●
This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
●
This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
●
Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly.
●
This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page
number.
●
Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically
downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow.
●
A double arrow “
cuit operation.
●
This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and
system).
●
This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code.
D
E
F
G
Current flow arrow
System branch
” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on cir-
21
Page crossing
●
The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages.
22
Shielded line
●
The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
23
Component box in
wave line
●
This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by
wave line) within the system.
24
Component name
●
This shows the name of a component.
●
This shows the connector number.
●
The letter shows which harness the connector is located in.
●
Example: M : main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main
Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in
locating connectors.
●
The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the
grounded connector.
●
This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to
"Ground Distribution" in PG section.
●
This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page.
●
Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component.
●
This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes,
Number 14 of this chart.
●
This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section.
The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out.
●
This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors
(J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details.
25
Connector number
26
Ground (GND)
27
Ground (GND)
28
Connector views
29
Common component
30
Connector color
31
Fusible link and fuse
box
32
Reference area
Revision: March 2005
GI-17
H
I
J
K
L
2005 Altima
M
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Harness Indication
●
●
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness
(connector) wire color.
Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
AGI070
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition.
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
●
ignition switch is “OFF”,
●
doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
●
pedals are not depressed, and
●
parking brake is released.
SGI860
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
Revision: March 2005
GI-18
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
●
●
A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable
line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for
DTC” is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with
the on board diagnostic system.
A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in
which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board
diagnostic system.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
SGI862-B
Multiple Switch
H
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
●
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-19
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
●
The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
SGI875
Revision: March 2005
GI-20
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Reference Area
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the GI
end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram,
these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SGI092A
Abbreviations
EAS00194
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
A/C
Air Conditioner
A/T
Automatic Transaxle/Transmission
ATF
Automatic Transmission Fluid
D1
Drive range 1st gear
D2
Drive range 2nd gear
Revision: March 2005
GI-21
2005 Altima
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
D3
Drive range 3rd gear
D4
Drive range 4th gear
FR, RR
Front, Rear
LH, RH
Left-Hand, Right-Hand
M/T
Manual Transaxle/Transmission
OD
Overdrive
P/S
Power Steering
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
SDS
Service Data and Specifications
SST
Special Service Tools
2WD
2-Wheel Drive
22
2nd range 2nd gear
21
2nd range 1st gear
12
1st range 2nd gear
11
1st range 1st gear
Revision: March 2005
GI-22
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
PFP:00000
GI
EAS00195
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors
and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/
INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
C
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (NISSAN)
(J38751-95INF)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (INFINITI)
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD and terminal repair
kit
(J42992-2000UPD)
OBD-II Connector Kit Update
B
Description
D
E
F
G
WAIA0004E
WAIA0005E
H
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during
circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator
clip.
I
J
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
●
If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector,
remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
●
Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage
to the seal between wire and connector may result.
K
L
M
SGI841
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
●
There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each
terminal with the “T” pin through the notch.
Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal
into female terminal.
SEL265V
Revision: March 2005
GI-23
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
●
Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make
contact space for probing.
SEL266V
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin.
Do not bend terminal.
SEL267V
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.
SEL270V
3.
While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male
terminal into the female terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with
your hands.
SEL271V
Revision: March 2005
GI-24
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
4.
While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not.
GI
B
C
SEL272V
D
●
If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
E
F
G
SEL273V
Waterproof Connector Inspection
H
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
I
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
●
Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing,
the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
●
The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the
rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
J
K
L
SEL275V
M
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is
installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector.
An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
SEL330V
Revision: March 2005
GI-25
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
EAS00196
WORK FLOW
SGI838
STEP
DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
STEP 1
STEP 2
WHAT
Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).
WHEN
Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
WHERE
Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
HOW
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
STEP 3
●
Power Supply Routing
●
System Operation Descriptions
●
Applicable Service Manual Sections
●
Check for any Service Bulletins
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
STEP 4
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness
Layouts.
STEP 5
Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
STEP 6
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
●
Vehicle vibration
●
Heat sensitive
Revision: March 2005
GI-26
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Freezing
GI
●
Water intrusion
●
Electrical load
●
Cold or hot start up
B
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the
problem.
●
Vehicle Vibration
C
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
SGI839
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
●
Connectors not fully seated.
●
Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
●
Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
●
Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
●
Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
Revision: March 2005
GI-27
2005 Altima
L
M
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or
pinching.
Heat Sensitive
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs
while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
SGI842
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing
somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside
overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of
those electrical components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
replace the component.
SGI843
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
SGI844
Electrical Load
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog
lamps) turned on.
SGI845
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.
Revision: March 2005
GI-28
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
GI
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN
C
A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
D
There are two types of shorts.
SHORT
B
●
SHORT CIRCUIT
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
change.
●
SHORT TO GROUND
When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
E
NOTE:
Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal.
F
Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
G
H
I
J
SGI846-A
K
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start
with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
●
Disconnect the battery negative cable.
●
Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
●
Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
●
Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an
over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
●
Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
●
Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or
infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
Revision: March 2005
GI-29
2005 Altima
L
M
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
●
Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
●
With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
●
Close SW1 and probe at relay.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
●
Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
●
Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
SGI847-A
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
●
Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
●
Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the
fuse.
●
Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known
good ground.
●
With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
●
Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good
ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
●
Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and
a known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
●
Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
●
Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse
terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground).
●
With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
●
With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check
for voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
Revision: March 2005
GI-30
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
GI
●
With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
B
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
●
Remove the ground bolt or screw.
●
Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
●
Clean as required to assure good contact.
●
Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
●
Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
●
If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SGI853
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will
give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire
is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked
up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
●
Undersized wiring (single strand example)
●
Corrosion on switch contacts
●
Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD
Revision: March 2005
GI-31
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
●
Operate the circuit.
●
The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
●
SGI974
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in
“Computer Controlled Systems”).
Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire
gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
SAIA0258E
Revision: March 2005
GI-32
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Control Unit Circuit Test
GI
System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.
B
C
D
MGI034A
E
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Pin
No.
1
Item
Switch
2
Lamp
Voltage
value [V]
Condition
In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] *
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Approx. 0
Approx. 0
F
G
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
*:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
H
I
J
K
MGI035A
L
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Pin
No.
Item
1
Lamp
2
Switch
Condition
Voltage
value [V]
In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] *
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)
Switch OFF
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Switch ON
Approx. 0
Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)
Switch OFF
Approx. 5
Approx. 5
The voltage value is based on the body ground.
*:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does
not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp.
Revision: March 2005
GI-33
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Control Units and Electrical Parts
EAS00197
PRECAUTIONS
●
●
●
●
●
Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and
functions of the component parts.
Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
SAIA0251E
●
Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent
or damaged, and then correctly connect it.
When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
SAIA0252E
●
For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the
direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then
remove the connector.
SAIA0253E
●
For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to
the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push
the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
SAIA0254E
Revision: March 2005
GI-34
2005 Altima
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
●
●
●
●
●
Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or
hitting it.
Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to
rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it.
If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in
the vehicle.
Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the
upper and lower covers.
GI
B
C
SAIA0255E
D
●
●
When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit
from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use
the specified check adapter.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF348N
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-35
2005 Altima
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
●
●
PFP:00000
EAS001QS
CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the
vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various
kinds of diagnostic tests.
Refer to “CONSULT-II Operator's Manual” for more information.
Function and System Application
ENGINE
TRANSMISSION (A/T)
ABS
AIR BAG
BCM
IPDM E/R
NVIS (NATS)*1
NVIS (NATS BCM OR S/ENT)*1
EAS00199
Work support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some
devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on CONSULT-II.
x
x
-
-
x
-
-
-
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased
quickly.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Trouble diagnostic record
Current self-diagnostic results and all trouble diagnostic records previously stored can be read.
-
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
x
x
x
-
-
x
-
-
Data monitor
(spec)
Data monitor specification can be read.
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CAN diagnosis support
monitor
The communication condition of CAN communication
line can be read.
x
x
x
-
x
x
-
-
Active test
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives
some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
some parameters in a specified range.
x
x
x
-
-
x
-
-
Function test
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU
with either “OK” or “NG”. For engines, more practical
tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators
are available.
x
x
x
x
-
-
-
-
DTC & SRT
confirmation
The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the
self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTC work
support
The operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble
Codes can be selected.
x
x*2
-
-
-
-
-
-
ECM/ECU
part number
ECM/ECU part number can be read.
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
ECU discriminated No.
Classification number of a replacement ECU can be
read to prevent an incorrect ECU from being
installed.
-
-
-
x
-
-
-
-
Configuration
ECM checks its own NATS communication interface.
-
-
-
-
x
-
-
-
Pin read*1
This mode shows the BCM-specific 5-digit code.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
x
Control unit
All registered ignition key IDs in NATS components
can be initialized and new IDs can be registered.
-
-
-
-
-
-
x
-
Diagnostic
test mode
initialization*1
Function
x: Applicable
*1: NVIS (NATS) [NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (Nissan Anti-Theft System)]
*2: 4-speed A/T
Revision: March 2005
GI-36
2005 Altima
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
EAS0019A
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following:
WARNING:
Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-37
2005 Altima
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Checking Equipment
EAS0019B
When ordering the following equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
Tool name
Description
NISSAN CONSULT-II (J-44200)
1. CONSULT-II unit (Tester internal soft: Resident version 3.3.0) and accessories.
2. Program cards UED04D-1 and AEN04A-1 (For
NATS) or later. To confirm the best combination of
these software, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
3. CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
4. "CONSULT-II Pigtail" cable.
SAIA0363E
CAUTION:
●
Previous CONSULT-II “I” and “Y” DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because
their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
●
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
●
If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters “FAIL SAFE
MODE” which will “LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT” and /or “COOLING FAN ROTATING” when CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
●
The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card.
CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure.
●
Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned off before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
EAS0019C
NOTE:
Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
PAIA0070E
2.
If necessary, turn on the ignition switch.
3.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” or “System Shortcut”
(e.g.: ENGINE) on the screen.
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
GI-38
2005 Altima
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
EAS001QA
GI
B
C
SGI125A
Symptom
CONSULT-II cannot access
any system.
CONSULT-II cannot access
individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.)
D
Check item
●
CONSULT-II DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4). For detailed circuit, refer to EC-623, "Wiring Diagram" (4-cylinder) or EC-1346, "Wiring Diagram" (6-cylinder).
●
CONSULT-II DLC cable and CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
●
CONSULT-II program card (Check the appropriate CONSULT-II program card for the system.
Refer to "Checking Equipment".)
●
Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.)
●
Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-II DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system.)
●
Open or short circuit in CAN, K or L communication line. Refer to LAN-4, "Precautions When Using
CONSULT-II" .
NOTE:
The preceding schematic is an example and may not be a true representation of the vehicle. The actual DDL1
circuits (CAN lines) from DLC pins 6 and 14, the DDL2 circuit (K-line) from DLC pin 7, and the L-line from DLC
pin 9 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one
system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-39
2005 Altima
LIFTING POINT
LIFTING POINT
Special Service Tools
PFP:00000
EAS0019E
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
LM4086-0200
( - )
Board on attachment
S-NT001
LM4519-0000
( - )
Safety stand attachment
S-NT002
CAUTION:
●
Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
●
Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent.
●
Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle,
suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or
equivalent.
●
Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.
Revision: March 2005
GI-40
2005 Altima
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
EAS0019F
WARNING:
●
Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes,
tubes, etc. under the vehicle.
●
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
●
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
●
Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in
center line of wheels.
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WAIA0035E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-41
2005 Altima
LIFTING POINT
2-pole Lift
EAS0019G
WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of
the vehicle are well balanced.
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and
sill spoiler.
LAIA0018E
Board-on Lift
EAS0019H
CAUTION:
Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
●
The board-on lift attachment (LM4086-0200) set at front end
of vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the
front door opening.
●
Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
AGI016
Revision: March 2005
GI-42
2005 Altima
TOW TRUCK TOWING
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
PFP:00000
GI
EAS0019I
CAUTION:
●
Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
●
Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on
the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving
(front) wheels off the ground as illustrated.
CAUTION:
●
Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle
with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the
ground.
●
When towing manual transaxle models with the front
wheels on the ground (if a towing dolly is not used), turn
the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering
wheel in the straight-ahead position with a rope or similar
device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position.
This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism.
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
SGI986
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
EAS0019J
Front
●
Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
●
Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only
the towing hook.
●
The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a
stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or
rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
●
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Rear
LAIA0025E
●
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
●
Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.
●
Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an
angle.
●
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.
Revision: March 2005
GI-43
J
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
Tightening Torque Table
Grade
4T
Bolt size
M6
6.0
M8
8.0
M10
M12
7T
10.0
12.0
EAS0019K
Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Pitch
mm
Hexagon head bolt
N·m
kg-m
Hexagon flange bolt
ft-lb
in-lb
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
1.0
5.1
0.52
3.8
45.1
6.1
0.62
4.5
53.8
1.25
13
1.3
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
1.0
13
1.3
9
—
16
1.6
12
—
1.5
25
2.5
18
—
29
3.0
22
—
1.25
25
2.6
19
—
30
3.1
22
—
1.75
42
4.3
31
—
51
5.2
38
—
1.25
46
4.7
34
—
56
5.7
41
—
M14
14.0
1.5
74
7.5
54
—
88
9.0
65
—
M6
6.0
1.0
8.4
0.86
6.2
74.6
10
1.0
7
87
M8
8.0
1.25
21
2.1
15
—
25
2.5
18
—
1.0
22
2.2
16
—
26
2.7
20
—
1.5
41
4.2
30
—
48
4.9
35
—
1.25
43
4.4
32
—
51
5.2
38
—
1.75
71
7.2
52
—
84
8.6
62
—
1.25
77
7.9
57
—
92
9.4
68
—
M10
M12
9T
Bolt diameter *
mm
PFP:00000
10.0
12.0
M14
14.0
1.5
127
13.0
94
—
147
15.0
108
—
M6
6.0
1.0
12
1.2
9
—
15
1.5
11
—
M8
8.0
1.25
29
3.0
22
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.0
31
3.2
23
—
37
3.8
27
—
1.5
59
6.0
43
—
70
7.1
51
—
1.25
62
6.3
46
—
74
7.5
54
—
1.75
98
10.0
72
—
118
12.0
87
—
1.25
108
11.0
80
—
137
14.0
101
—
1.5
177
18.0
130
—
206
21.0
152
—
M10
M12
M14
10.0
12.0
14.0
*: Nominal diameter
1. Special parts are excluded.
2. This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head.
MGI044A
Revision: March 2005
GI-44
2005 Altima
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants
PFP:00000
GI
EAS0019L
Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.
Product Description
1
2
3
Purpose
999MP-AM000P
99998-50505
Permatex 81844
Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
For metal-to-metal flange
sealing.
Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015
inch) gap and provide
instant sealing for most
powertrain applications.
999MP-AM001P
99998-50503
Permatex 51813 and
51817
High Performance
Thread Sealant
Provides instant sealing on
any threaded straight or
parallel threaded fitting.
(Thread sealant only, no
locking ability.)
999MP-AM002P
999MP-AM002P
Permatex 56521
Medium Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Blue)
Revision: March 2005
C
D
99998-50506
(Ultra Grey)
Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond
1207,1215, 1216,
1217F and 1217G;
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007
F
Do not use on plastic.
999MP-AM003P
(Ultra Grey)
Silicone RTV
High Temperature,
High Strength Thread
Locking Sealant (Red)
B
E
Threadlocker
Threadlocker (service tool
removable)
G
H
I
Gasket Maker for Maxima/
Quest 5-speed automatic
transmission
(RE5F22A)
6
Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos.
Used to permanently
remount rear view mirrors
to windows.
Gasket Maker
5
Nissan Canada Part
No. (Canada)
Rear View Mirror
Adhesive
●
4
Nissan North America
Part No. (USA)
–
–
Three Bond 1281B
or exact equivalent
in its quality
J
999MP-AM004P
999MP-AM005P
GI-45
999MP-AM004P
Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
1307N, 1335,
1335B, 1363B,
1377C, 1386B, D&E
and 1388
999MP-AM005P
Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240,
24283 and 09178;
Three Bond 1322,
1322N, 1324 D&N,
1333D, 1361C,
1364D, 1370C and
1374
2005 Altima
K
L
M
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Model Variation (Early production)
Body
Engine
PFP:00010
EAS0019M
Grade
California
Canada
M/T
BDBALAF-EUA
BDBALAF-EVA
—
Base (Special
Fleet only)
A/T
BDBALBA-EUA
BDBALBA-EVA
—
M/T
S
A/T
BDBALBF-EUA
BDBALBF-EVA
BDBALBF-ENA
BDBALCF-EUA
BDBALCF-EVA
BDBALCF-ENA
BDBALBA-EUA
BDBALBA-EVA
BDBALBA-ENA
BDBALCA-EUA
BDBALCA-EVA
BDBALCA-ENA
BDBALDA-EUA
BDBALDA-EVA
BDBALDA-ENA
SL
A/T
S
A/T
—
BLJALBN-ENA
M/T
BLJALCF-EUA
BLJALCF-ENA
A/T
BLJALCN-EUA
BLJALCN-ENA
SE
VQ35DE
Federal
Base
QR25DE
Sedan
Destination
Transmission
SL
SE-R
A/T
BLJALDN-EUA
BLJALDN-ENA
M/T
BLJALEY-EUA
BLJALEY-ENA
A/T
BLJALEN-EUA
BLJALEN-ENA
Prefix and suffix designations:
Position
Character
1
B
Qualifier
Body type
2
3
Definition
B: 4-Door
DB: QR25DE
DB
Engine
LJ: VQ35DE
4
A
Axle
A: 2WD
5
L
Drive
L: LH
A: 2.5 Base
B: S
6
A
Grade
C: Convenience
D: SL
E: SE-R
A: 4 A/T
F: 5 M/T
7
F
Transmission
N: 5 A/T
Y: 6 M/T
8
9
L31
Model
L31: Altima
E
Intake
E: EGI
10
11
N: Canada
12
U
Zone
U: Federal
V: California
13
A
Revision: March 2005
Equipment
A: Standard
GI-46
2005 Altima
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Position
Character
Qualifier
Definition
GI
14
15
16
XXXXX
Option Codes
Option Codes
B
17
18
C
Model Variation (Late production)
EAS001QD
Destination
Body
Engine
Grade
Transmission
M/T
S
QR25DE
A/T
Sedan
SL
A/T
S
A/T
SE
VQ35DE
SL
SE-R
USA
California
Canada
—
BDBALBF-EVA
BDBALBF-ENA
—
BDBALCF-EVA
BDBALCF-ENA
—
BDBALBA-EVA
BDBALBA-ENA
—
BDBALCA-EVA
BDBALCA-EVA
BDBALDA-EUA
BDBALDA-EVA
BDBALDA-ENA
—
BLJALBN-ENA
M/T
BLJALCF-EUA
BLJALCF-ENA
A/T
BLJALCN-EUA
BLJALCN-ENA
A/T
BLJALDN-EUA
BLJALDN-ENA
M/T
BLJALEY-EUA
BLJALEY-ENA
A/T
BLJALEN-EUA
BLJALEN-ENA
Prefix and suffix designations:
Position
Character
1
B
2
DB
D
E
F
G
H
I
Qualifier
Body type
Engine
3
Definition
B: 4-Door
J
DB: QR25DE
LJ: VQ35DE
4
A
Axle
A: 2WD
5
L
Drive
L: LH
K
A: 2.5 Base
L
B: S
6
A
Grade
C: Convenience
D: SL
M
E: SE-R
A: 4 A/T
7
F
Transmission
F: 5 M/T
N: 5 A/T
Y: 6 M/T
8
9
L31
Model
L31: Altima
E
Intake
E: EGI
10
11
N: Canada
12
U
Zone
U: Federal
13
A
Equipment
A: Standard
V: California
Revision: March 2005
GI-47
2005 Altima
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Position
Character
Qualifier
Definition
14
15
16
XXXXX
Option Codes
Option Codes
17
18
Identification Number
EAS001QE
LAIA0020E
Revision: March 2005
GI-48
2005 Altima
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Number Arrangement
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WAIA0083E
Identification Plate
I
EAS001QF
J
K
L
M
LAIA0027E
Revision: March 2005
GI-49
2005 Altima
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Engine Serial Number
EAS001QG
LAIA0024E
LAIA0026E
Automatic Transaxle Number
EAS001QH
AGI072
Manual Transaxle Number
EAS001QI
SGI334
Dimensions
EAS0019N
Unit:mm (in)
Overall length
4,884.4 (192.3), SE-R 4889.5 (192.5)
Overall width
1,788 (70.4)
Overall height
1,471 (57.9), SE-R 1458 (57.4)
Front tread
1,549 (61.0)
Revision: March 2005
GI-50
2005 Altima
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Rear tread
1,554 (61.2)
Wheelbase
2,799 (110.2)
GI
Wheels & Tires
EAS0019O
Conventional
B
Spare
Road wheel/offset mm (in)
16 X 6.5 Steel/40 (1.57)
16 X 6.5 Cast Aluminum/40 (1.57
17 X 7JJ Cast Aluminum/45 (1.77)
18 X 8JJ Forged Aluminum/45 (1.77)
16 X 4t
C
Tire size
215/60R16
215/55R17
225/45R18
T135/70R16
T135/90R16 (when equipped with TCS)
T155/80R17
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-51
2005 Altima
TERMINOLOGY
TERMINOLOGY
SAE J1930 Terminology List
PFP:00011
EAS0019P
All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new
terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart.
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Air cleaner
ACL
Air cleaner
Barometric pressure
BARO
***
Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD
BAROS-BCDD
BCDD
Camshaft position
CMP
***
Camshaft position sensor
CMPS
Crank angle sensor
Canister
***
Canister
Carburetor
CARB
Carburetor
Charge air cooler
CAC
Intercooler
Closed loop
CL
Closed loop
Closed throttle position switch
CTP switch
Idle switch
Clutch pedal position switch
CPP switch
Clutch switch
Continuous fuel injection system
CFI system
***
Continuous trap oxidizer system
CTOX system
***
Crankshaft position
CKP
***
Crankshaft position sensor
CKPS
***
Data link connector
DLC
***
Data link connector for CONSULT-II
DLC for CONSULT-II
Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-II
Diagnostic test mode
DTM
Diagnostic mode
Diagnostic test mode selector
DTM selector
Diagnostic mode selector
Diagnostic test mode I
DTM I
Mode I
Diagnostic test mode II
DTM II
Mode II
Diagnostic trouble code
DTC
Malfunction code
Direct fuel injection system
DFI system
***
Distributor ignition system
DI system
Ignition timing control
Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater
EFE-mixture heater
Mixture heater
Early fuel evaporation system
EFE system
Mixture heater control
Electrically erasable programmable read
only memory
EEPROM
***
Electronic ignition system
EI system
Ignition timing control
Engine control
EC
***
Engine control module
ECM
ECCS control unit
Engine coolant temperature
ECT
Engine temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ECTS
Engine temperature sensor
Engine modification
EM
***
Engine speed
RPM
Engine speed
Erasable programmable read only memory
EPROM
***
Evaporative emission canister
EVAP canister
Canister
Evaporative emission system
EVAP system
Canister control solenoid valve
Exhaust gas recirculation valve
EGR valve
EGR valve
Revision: March 2005
GI-52
2005 Altima
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
GI
Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT
valve
EGRC-BPT valve
BPT valve
Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid
valve
EGRC-solenoid valve
EGR control solenoid valve
EGRT sensor
Exhaust gas temperature sensor
C
Flash electrically erasable programmable
read only memory
FEEPROM
***
D
Flash erasable programmable read only
memory
FEPROM
***
Flexible fuel sensor
FFS
***
Flexible fuel system
FF system
***
Fuel pressure regulator
***
Pressure regulator
Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid
valve
***
PRVR control solenoid valve
Fuel trim
FT
***
Heated Oxygen sensor
HO2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Idle air control system
IAC system
Idle speed control
Idle air control valve-air regulator
IACV-air regulator
Air regulator
Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control
valve
IACV-AAC valve
Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve
Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
FICD solenoid valve
Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve
IACV-idle up control solenoid valve
Idle up control solenoid valve
Idle speed control-FI pot
ISC-FI pot
FI pot
Idle speed control system
ISC system
***
Ignition control
IC
***
Ignition control module
ICM
***
Indirect fuel injection system
IFI system
***
Intake air
IA
Air
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor
B
EGR temperature sensor
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Intake air temperature sensor
IAT sensor
Air temperature sensor
Knock
***
Detonation
Knock sensor
KS
Detonation sensor
Malfunction indicator lamp
MIL
Check engine light
Manifold absolute pressure
MAP
***
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
MAPS
***
Manifold differential pressure
MDP
***
Manifold differential pressure sensor
MDPS
***
Manifold surface temperature
MST
***
Manifold surface temperature sensor
MSTS
***
Manifold vacuum zone
MVZ
***
Manifold vacuum zone sensor
MVZS
***
Mass air flow sensor
MAFS
Air flow meter
Mixture control solenoid valve
MC solenoid valve
Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve
Multiport fuel injection System
MFI system
Fuel injection control
Revision: March 2005
GI-53
M
2005 Altima
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Nonvolatile random access memory
NVRAM
***
On board diagnostic system
OBD system
Self-diagnosis
Open loop
OL
Open loop
Oxidation catalyst
OC
Catalyst
Oxidation catalytic converter system
OC system
***
Oxygen sensor
O2S
Exhaust gas sensor
Park position switch
***
Park switch
Park/neutral position switch
PNP switch
Park/neutral switch
Inhibitor switch
Neutral position switch
Periodic trap oxidizer system
PTOX system
***
Positive crankcase ventilation
PCV
Positive crankcase ventilation
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
PCV valve
PCV valve
Powertrain control module
PCM
***
Programmable read only memory
PROM
***
Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve
PAIRC solenoid valve
AIV control solenoid valve
Pulsed secondary air injection system
PAIR system
Air induction valve (AIV) control
Pulsed secondary air injection valve
PAIR valve
Air induction valve
Random access memory
RAM
***
Read only memory
ROM
***
Scan tool
ST
***
Secondary air injection pump
AIR pump
***
Secondary air injection system
AIR system
***
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
SFI system
Sequential fuel injection
Service reminder indicator
SRI
***
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
***
Simultaneous fuel injection
Smoke puff limiter system
SPL system
***
Supercharger
SC
***
Supercharger bypass
SCB
***
System readiness test
SRT
***
Thermal vacuum valve
TVV
Thermal vacuum valve
Three way catalyst
TWC
Catalyst
Three way catalytic converter system
TWC system
***
Three way + oxidation catalyst
TWC + OC
Catalyst
Three way + oxidation catalytic converter
system
TWC + OC system
***
Throttle body
TB
Throttle chamber
SPI body
Throttle body fuel injection system
TBI system
Fuel injection control
Throttle position
TP
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
TPS
Throttle sensor
Throttle position switch
TP switch
Throttle switch
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
TCC solenoid valve
Lock-up cancel solenoid
Lock-up solenoid
Revision: March 2005
GI-54
2005 Altima
TERMINOLOGY
NEW ACRONYM /
ABBREVIATION
NEW TERM
OLD TERM
Transmission control module
TCM
A/T control unit
Turbocharger
TC
Turbocharger
Vehicle speed sensor
VSS
Vehicle speed sensor
Volume air flow sensor
VAFS
Air flow meter
Warm up oxidation catalyst
WU-OC
Catalyst
Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system
WU-OC system
***
Warm up three way catalyst
WU-TWC
Catalyst
Warm up three way catalytic converter system
WU-TWC system
***
Wide open throttle position switch
WOTP switch
Full switch
GI
B
C
D
E
***: Not applicable
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GI-55
2005 Altima
TERMINOLOGY
Revision: March 2005
GI-56
2005 Altima
I BODY
SECTION
GW
GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Handling for Adhesive and Primer ........................... 3
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9
WINDSHIELD GLASS ...............................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING ............... 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM .................................... 15
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 15
System Description ................................................ 15
AUTO OPERATION ............................................ 15
Revision: March 2005
POWER WINDOW LOCK ................................... 15
DELAYED POWER OPERATION ....................... 15
ANTI-PINCH DETECTION FUNCTION ............... 16
Schematic (With Left Front Only Power Window
Anti-pinch System) ................................................. 17
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left Front
Only Power Window Anti-pinch System) ................ 18
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch ......................... 22
Schematic (With Left and Right Front Power Window Anti-pinch System) .......................................... 23
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left and Right
Front Power Window Anti-pinch System) ............... 24
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch ......................... 28
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 29
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 30
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 31
Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Driver side) ....... 31
Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Passenger side
with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) ........................................................................ 33
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............. 34
Removal and Installation ........................................ 34
FRONT DOOR GLASS ....................................... 34
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ................ 35
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER
INSTALLATION ................................................... 36
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............... 37
Removal and Installation ........................................ 37
REAR DOOR GLASS .......................................... 37
INSTALLATION ................................................... 38
REAR DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ................... 38
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 39
INSTALLATION ................................................... 39
FITTING INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION... 39
INSIDE MIRROR ....................................................... 40
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — ................................. 40
Removal and Installation ........................................ 41
INSIDE MIRROR ................................................. 41
GW-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .................................. 42
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 42
System Description ................................................. 42
CAN Communication System Description .............. 43
Wiring Diagram — DEF — ..................................... 44
Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — ................................ 45
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 47
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 47
Work Flow ............................................................... 47
Preliminary Check .................................................. 47
FUSE CHECK ..................................................... 47
CONSULT–II Function (BCM) ................................. 48
CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE .................................................................. 48
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 49
Revision: March 2005
ACTIVE TEST ......................................................49
Trouble Diagnosis ...................................................50
Filament Check .......................................................53
Filament Repair .......................................................54
REPAIR EQUIPMENT .........................................54
REPAIRING PROCEDURE .................................54
DOOR MIRROR .........................................................56
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — ..............................56
Removal and Installation .........................................57
REMOVAL ............................................................57
INSTALLATION ....................................................57
Door Mirror Glass ....................................................57
REMOVAL ............................................................57
INSTALLATION ....................................................57
GW-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EIS003KH
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Handling for Adhesive and Primer
B
C
D
E
F
EIS003KI
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after G
the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
●
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
●
Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder.
H
●
Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is
found, do not use it.
●
If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with GW
soap.
●
When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual.
J
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution
EIS003KJ
●
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GW-3
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EIS003KK
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
Repairing the cause of noise
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tool
EIS003KL
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
(
—
)
Suction Lifter
Holding door glass
LIIA1991E
Revision: March 2005
GW-4
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS0048A
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
GW
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
J
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
K
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: March 2005
GW-5
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
●
Revision: March 2005
GW-6
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
A
B
C
D
E
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS0048B
F
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
H
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
GW
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
J
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
L
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
M
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: March 2005
GW-7
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: March 2005
GW-8
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS0048C
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0276E
Revision: March 2005
GW-9
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT844
Revision: March 2005
GW-10
2005 Altima
WINDSHIELD GLASS
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Removal and Installation
PFP:72712
A
EIS003KP
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0011E
G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Partially remove the headlining (front edge). Refer to EI-36, "HEADLINING" .
H
Remove the front wiper arms. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" .
3. Remove drip molding. Refer to EI-26, "DRIP MOLDING" .
GW
4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
After removing moldings, remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
J
●
If a windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
K
CAUTION:
When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
L
NOTE:
●
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
●
Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
M
PIIA0186E
INSTALLATION
●
●
●
Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
Revision: March 2005
GW-11
2005 Altima
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
●
Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
●
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
●
Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
●
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
●
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
●
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
●
Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
●
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperature and lower humidity.
●
LIIA0012E
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Revision: March 2005
GW-12
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
Removal and Installation
PFP:79712
A
EIS003KQ
B
C
D
E
F
LIIA0013E
G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the rear of the headliner. Refer to EI-36, "HEADLINING" .
Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER" .
Remove the connectors and grounds for the rear window defogger and printed antenna.
●
After removing moldings, remove glass using piano wire or
power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
●
If a windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the
glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety
glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
●
When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
●
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
●
Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
H
GW
J
K
SBF034B
M
INSTALLATION
Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
●
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
●
The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
●
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
●
Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
●
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
●
Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
●
Revision: March 2005
GW-13
L
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
●
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
●
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
●
Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
●
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperature and lower humidity.
●
LIIA0014E
Revision: March 2005
GW-14
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:25401
A
EIS003KR
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
LIIA1461E
K
System Description
EIS003KS
Power is supplied at all times
●
through BCM terminal 69
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5 (16).
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 68
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (17),
●
to front power window switch RH terminal 2 (13),
●
to rear power window switch LH and RH terminal 5.
( ): with left and right front power window anti-pinch system.
L
M
AUTO OPERATION
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver (driver and passenger) to open or close the window without holding the window switch in the down or up position.
POWER WINDOW LOCK
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver's window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the sub-switches in the main power window and
door lock/unlock switch is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating.
DELAYED POWER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, power windows will still operate for approximately 45
seconds unless either of the front doors is opened.
Revision: March 2005
GW-15
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
ANTI-PINCH DETECTION FUNCTION
During raising operation of driver or passenger power window (if equipped), if door control module detects that
foreign object is pinched, power window lowers approximately 150 mm (5.91 in).
NOTE:
Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to power window, it
may lower.
Operation conditions
●
●
●
Driver and passenger door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (when the
limit switch is ON).
During automatic operation when ignition switch is turned ON.
During automatic or manual operation when ignition switch is other than ON position (when the timer
operates).
Revision: March 2005
GW-16
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Schematic (With Left Front Only Power Window Anti-pinch System)
EIS003KT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0400E
Revision: March 2005
GW-17
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left Front Only Power Window Anti-pinch
System)
EIS003KU
WIWA0978E
Revision: March 2005
GW-18
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0402E
Revision: March 2005
GW-19
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0979E
Revision: March 2005
GW-20
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0404E
Revision: March 2005
GW-21
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch
EIS003KV
With left front only power window anti-pinch system.
Wire Color
1
L/W
Front power window LH
DOWN signal
DOWN operation.
0 → Battery voltage
2
L/R
Front power window LH UP
signal
UP operation.
0 → Battery voltage
3
Y
Front power window RH
DOWN signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch front power
window RH DOWN operation.
0 → Battery voltage
4
G
Front power window RH UP
signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch front power
window RH UP operation.
0 → Battery voltage
5
W/R
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
7
G/R
Encoder power supply
—
5 – Battery voltage
8
W/B
Limit switch encoder ground
—
0
9
G/W
Item
Limit switch signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminal
Driver door window is between
fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON).
0
Driver door window is between
just before fully-closed position
and fully-closed position (OFF).
5
10
R/Y
Rear power window RH UP
signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window RH UP operation.
0 → Battery voltage
11
Y/B
Rear power window RH
DOWN signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window RH DOWN operation.
0 → Battery voltage
12
W/L
RAP signal
14
V
Rear power window LH UP
signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window LH UP operation.
Battery voltage
15
L
Rear power window LH
DOWN signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window LH DOWN operation.
Battery voltage
16
G/Y
Encoder pulse signal
Power window motor operation.
Power window UNLOCK
signal
Power window lock switch in
UNLOCK position
Battery voltage
Power window LOCK signal
Power window lock switch in
LOCK position
Battery voltage
—
0
—
Battery voltage
OCC3383D
17
P
18
BR
19
B
Revision: March 2005
Ground
GW-22
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Schematic (With Left and Right Front Power Window Anti-pinch System)
EIS003KW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0405E
Revision: March 2005
GW-23
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (With Left and Right Front Power Window Antipinch System)
EIS003KX
WIWA0980E
Revision: March 2005
GW-24
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0407E
Revision: March 2005
GW-25
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
WIWA0981E
Revision: March 2005
GW-26
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0409E
Revision: March 2005
GW-27
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock
Switch
EIS003KY
With left and right front power window anti-pinch system.
Wire Color
1
L
Rear power window LH
DOWN signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window LH DOWN operation.
Battery voltage
2
V
Rear power window motor
LH UP signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window LH UP operation.
Battery voltage
4
P/L
Front door lock assembly
LH (key cylinder switch)
lock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Locked)
5→0
5
W/L
Front door lock assembly
LH (key cylinder switch)
unlock signal
Key position
(Neutral → Unlocked)
5→0
6
Y/B
Rear power window RH
DOWN signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window RH DOWN operation.
0 → Battery voltage
7
R/Y
Rear power window RH UP
signal
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch rear power
window RH UP operation.
0 → Battery voltage
8
9
W/G
G/W
11
B
12
G/Y
Item
Power window lock
Limit switch signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminal
Power window lock switch
UNLOCK operation
Battery voltage
Power window lock switch
LOCK operation
Battery voltage
Driver door window is between
fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON).
0
Driver door window is between
just before fully-closed position
and fully-closed position (OFF).
5
—
0
Ground
Encoder pulse signal
Power window motor operation.
OCC3383D
13
G/R
Encoder power supply
—
14
Y/G
Power window serial link
—
5 → Battery voltage
OCC3383D
15
W/B
Limit switch encoder ground
—
0
16
W/R
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
17
W/L
RAP signal
—
Battery voltage
Revision: March 2005
GW-28
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Item
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminal
Wire Color
Condition
18
L/W
Front power window motor
LH DOWN signal
DOWN operation.
0 → Battery voltage
19
L/R
Front power window motor
LH UP signal
UP operation.
0 → Battery voltage
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
A
B
EIS003KZ
C
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
D
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
E
F
G
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II
CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON.
H
GW
J
K
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
L
M
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
GW-29
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3.
Touch "BCM".
BCIA0030E
4.
Touch "RETAINED PWR".
LIIA0163E
5.
Select diagnosis mode.
"ACTIVE TEST" is available for the power window.
BCIA0031E
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
Description
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM (body control module) to power window system and power sunroof system (if equipped). Those systems can be operated when
turning on "RETAINED PWR" on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF.
RETAINED PWR
Revision: March 2005
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position.
"RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition
switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-II
might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when
ignition switch is OFF.
GW-30
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS003L0
A
Symptom
None of the power windows can be
operated using any switch.
Driver side power window cannot be
operated but other windows can be
operated.
Possible cause
1. Power source Battery or RAP
1. Power source Battery or RAP
2. Front power window LH circuit
3. Front power window motor LH
and regulator
4. Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
Repair order
1. Check the following
–
Check harness between BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock switch for open or short.
–
Check harness between BCM and power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH and rear power window
switch LH and RH for open or short.
B
C
1. Check harness between BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock switch for open or short.
2. Check harness between main power window and door
lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH
for open or short circuit.
D
3. Check front power window motor LH and regulator.
E
4. Check main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
One or more power windows except
driver's side window cannot be
operated.
1. Power source RAP
2. Power window switches
1. Check harness between BCM and power window subswitches for open or short circuit.
3. Power window motors and regulators
2. Check front power window switch RH and rear power
window switch LH and RH.
4. Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
3. Check power window motors and regulators.
5. Power window circuit
F
G
4. Check main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
5. Check harnesses between power window and door
lock/unlock switch RH, rear power window switch LH
and RH and power window motors for open/short circuit.
H
GW
Power windows except driver's side
window cannot be operated using
main power window and door lock/
unlock switch but can be operated
by power window sub-switch.
1. Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
1. Check main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
Driver side power window automatic
operation does not function properly.
1. Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
1. Check main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
2. Encoder and limit switch
2. Check encoder and limit switch. Refer to GW-31,
"Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Driver side)" .
Passenger side power window
automatic operation does not function properly.
1. Power window and door lock/
unlock switch RH
1. Check front power widow switch RH.
L
2. Check encoder and limit switch. Refer to GW-33,
"Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Passenger side
with left and right front power window anti-pinch system)" .
M
J
2. Encoder and limit switch
Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Driver side)
K
EIS003L1
1. CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM
Check the following.
●
Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc.
●
Worn or deformed glass molding.
●
Door sash tilted too far inward or outward.
●
Door window regulator.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism.
Revision: March 2005
GW-31
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
D7
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Terminal
9 (G/W)
Ground
Driver door window is
between fully-open and
just before fully-closed
position (ON)
0
Driver door window is
between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF)
5
LIIA1582E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window
motor LH.
● OK: Replace front power window motor LH.
● NG: Replace or repair harness.
3. CHECK ENCODER
Measure voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 16 (12) and
ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic closing operation.
Terminals
(+)
D7
16 (G/Y),
12 (G/Y)
Condition
Voltage
(–)
Ground
Front power
window motor
LH operation.
OCC3383D
( ): with left and right front power window anti-pinch system
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock
switch.
NG
>> Replace front power window motor LH.
LIIA1583E
Revision: March 2005
GW-32
2005 Altima
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Encoder and Limit Switch Check (Passenger side with left and right front power
window anti-pinch system)
EIS003L2
A
1. CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM
B
Check the following.
●
Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc.
●
Worn or deformed glass molding.
●
Door sash tilted too far inward or outward.
●
Door window regulator.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism.
C
D
2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16 and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
D105
(–)
G
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
F
Terminal
16 (G/W)
Ground
H
Passenger door window is
between fully-open and
just before fully-closed
position (ON)
0
Passenger door window is
between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF)
5
GW
LIIA1584E
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness between main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window
motor RH.
● OK: Replace front power window motor RH.
● NG: Replace or repair harness.
K
L
3. CHECK ENCODER
M
Measure voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 19 and ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic closing operation.
Terminals
(+)
D105
19 (G/Y)
Condition
Voltage
(–)
Ground
Front power
window motor
RH operation.
OCC3383D
LIIA1585E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH.
NG
>> Replace front power window motor RH.
Revision: March 2005
GW-33
2005 Altima
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:80300
EIS003L3
WIIA0709E
1
Door glass
4
Module assembly
2
Door glass run
3
Regulator assembly
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the door speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" .
Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness.
Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door glass
until the door glass bolts can be seen.
Remove the door glass bolts.
SIIA0264E
Revision: March 2005
GW-34
2005 Altima
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
5.
While holding the door glass, raise it at the rear end to pull the
door glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door.
A
B
C
SIIA0286J
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to GW-36, "Fitting Inspection and Setting After Installation"
.
E
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the door speaker. Refer to AV-57, "Removal and Installation for Door Speaker" .
Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be
seen.
3.
Remove the door glass bolts.
F
G
H
GW
J
SIIA0264E
4.
Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in
place with a suitable tool.
K
L
M
PIIB1811E
5.
6.
Remove the module assembly bolts and the module assembly.
Disconnect the harness connector for the module assembly, and
disconnect the harness clip from the back.
SIIA0287E
Revision: March 2005
GW-35
2005 Altima
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
●
Excessive cable wear.
●
Regulator channel deformation.
●
Apply grease for each sliding part. Apply grease at the application points indicated by the arrows as shown.
SIIA0297J
Disassembly
Remove the regulator motor and guide rail from the module assembly.
SIIA0298E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to GW-36, "Fitting Inspection and Setting After Installation"
.
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Fitting
●
●
Check that the door glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
Lower the door glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to
the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the door glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator
bolts, guide rail bolts, and door glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
●
Removal and installation of the regulator.
●
Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
●
Removal and installation of the door glass.
●
Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door
glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to
the original position, and then raise the door glass to the top
position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the
glass to the top position.
SIIA0347E
Revision: March 2005
GW-36
2005 Altima
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:82300
A
EIS003L4
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
WIIA0710E
1
Partition glass
2
Door glass run
3
Door glass
4
Regulator assembly
5
Frame assembly
6
Partition sash
J
REAR DOOR GLASS
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Rear Door" .
Remove the plastic vapor barrier, being careful not to tear/damage it.
Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness.
Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen.
Remove the door glass bolts.
SIIA0290E
6.
Remove the door glass.
Revision: March 2005
GW-37
2005 Altima
L
M
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
7.
Remove the partition sash from the glass run.
● Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to
remove the sash.
LIIA0027E
8.
Remove the partition glass from the inside of the panel.
LIIA0028E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to GW-39, "Fitting Inspection After Installation" .
REAR DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Rear Door" .
Remove the plastic vapor barrier, being careful not to tear/damage it.
Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness.
Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door glass until the bolts can be seen.
Remove the door glass bolts.
SIIA0290E
6.
Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in
place with a suitable tool.
PIIB1817E
Revision: March 2005
GW-38
2005 Altima
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
7.
8.
Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the
panel.
Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly.
A
B
C
SIIA0291E
D
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace it.
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body
grease.
●
Wire wear
●
Regulator deformation
●
Grease condition for each sliding part
E
F
G
SIIA0294J
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal Refer to GW-39, "Fitting Inspection After Installation" .
GW
FITTING INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
●
●
Check that the door glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
Lower the door glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance
to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the door glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and door glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the door glass position.
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GW-39
2005 Altima
INSIDE MIRROR
INSIDE MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR —
PFP:96321
EIS003L5
WIWA0429E
Revision: March 2005
GW-40
2005 Altima
INSIDE MIRROR
Removal and Installation
EIS003L6
INSIDE MIRROR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Remove inside mirror finisher (if equipped).
Slide the mirror upward to remove.
Disconnect the connector (if equipped).
C
D
E
F
G
SIIA0828E
1.
Inside mirror
2.
H
Inside mirror finisher (if equipped)
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GW-41
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:25350
EIS003L7
LIIA2131E
System Description
EIS003L8
The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM and rear window defogger relay is controlled by IPDM
E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). The rear window defogger operates for approximately
15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
●
to rear window defogger relay terminal 3
●
through 20A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R),
●
to rear window defogger relay terminal 6
●
through 20A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R), and
●
to BCM terminal 70
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box).
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 38
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to rear window defogger relay terminal 1, and
Ground is supplied
●
to terminal 67 of the BCM
●
through body grounds F14, M57 and M61, and
Revision: March 2005
GW-42
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
to rear window defogger terminal –
●
through body ground B202.
BCM is connected to IPDM E/R as DATA LINE (CAN-H and CAN-L).
When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 9
●
through terminal 22 of the front air control.
BCM outputs rear window defogger switch signal to IPDM E/R via DATA LINE (CAN H line and CAN L line).
Ground is then supplied to terminal 2 of the rear window defogger relay through IPDM E/R terminal 52.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
●
through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay
●
to the rear window defogger, and
●
to terminal 23 of the front air control.
The rear window defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
●
CAN Communication System Description
A
B
C
D
E
F
EIS003L9
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GW-43
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF —
EIS003LA
WIWA1939E
Revision: March 2005
GW-44
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR —
EIS003LB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
LIWA0413E
Revision: March 2005
GW-45
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
WIWA0983E
Revision: March 2005
GW-46
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
EIS003LC
A
Terminal
Wire Color
9
GY
Item
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger switch is ON.
0
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
5
Ignition switch (ON or START position)
Battery voltage
38
R
Ignition switch (ON or START)
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
67
B
70
W/B
B
Rear window defogger switch
signal
C
Ground
—
0
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
D
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
EIS003LD
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Rear window defogger power
supply
—
Battery voltage
L
Rear window defogger power
supply
—
Battery voltage
48
L
CAN-H
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
—
—
Terminal
Wire Color
5
W
6
52
G/R
Item
Rear window defogger relay
control signal
F
5.
6.
G
H
Rear window defogger switch is ON.
0
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
Battery voltage
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
EIS003LE
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-42, "System Description" .
Perform the preliminary check. Refer to GW-47, "Preliminary Check" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-50,
"Trouble Diagnosis" .
Does rear window defogger operate normally? OK: GO TO 6, NG: GO TO 4
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EIS003LF
GW
J
K
L
FUSE CHECK
1. FUSE INSPECTION
●
M
Check if any of the following fuses for BCM and IPDM E/R are blown.
COMPONENT PARTS
BCM
IPDM E/R
TERMINAL NO. (SIGNAL)
AMPERE
FUSE NO.
38 (Ignition power supply)
10A
1
70 (Battery power supply)
50A
f
5 (Battery power supply)
20A
37
6 (Battery power supply)
20A
32
NOTE:
Refer to GW-42, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse, refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
GW-47
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT–II Function (BCM)
EIS003LG
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
Content
Changes setting of each function.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ECU PART NUMBER
BCM part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT–II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT–II and CONSULTII CONVERTER to the data link connector on vehicle, and turn
ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
GW-48
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
4.
Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
A
B
C
LIIA0153E
D
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "REAR DEFOGGER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors only the specified item.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
If "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the item desired to monitor. If "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all items are monitored.
During monitoring, touching "COPY" will print the monitored item status.
E
F
G
H
Display Item List
Monitor item "OPERATION"
GW
Content
REAR DEF SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ON/OFF" status determined with the rear window defogger switch position.
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ON/OFF" status determined with the ignition switch position.
J
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
Touch "REAR DEFOGGER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation.
During the operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation.
L
Display Item List
Test item
REAR DEFOGGER
Revision: March 2005
M
Content
Touching "ON" sends a drive signal to activate the rear window defogger.
GW-49
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnosis
EIS003LH
Rear window defogger does not activate.
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK
●
●
●
With CONSULT–II
Select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
Select “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
CONSULT-II display code
Diagnosis item
INITIAL DIAG
TRANSMIT DIAG
U1000
ECM
IPDM E/R
METER/M&A
Contents displayed
No malfunction>> GO TO 2.
Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitored items, go to “CAN System”. Refer
to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
2. REAR DEFOGGER OPERATES INSPECTION BY ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT–II
●
Check operation with "REAR DEFOGGER" in the ACTIVE TEST. Refer to GW-49, "ACTIVE TEST" .
Does rear window defogger operate properly?
LIIA0154E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
3. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION INSPECTION BY DATA MONITOR
With CONSULT–II
Check operation with "REAR DEF SW" in the DATA MONITOR". Refer to GW-49, "DATA MONITOR" .
Does rear window defogger switch operate properly?
●
WIIA0111E
Revision: March 2005
GW-50
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 4.
A
4. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH HARNESS CONTINUITY INSPECTION
B
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 9 and front air control harness connector
M50 terminal 22 and between BCM connector terminal 9 and ground.
C
Terminals
(+)
Connector
M18
(–)
Continuity
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
9 (GY)
M50
22 (GY)
9 (GY)
D
Yes
Ground
E
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front air control.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
F
LIIA1411E
5. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
●
●
G
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger relay harness
connector B4 terminal 1 and ground.
H
Terminals
(+)
Voltage
(–)
Connector
Terminal
B4
1 (G)
Ground
GW
Battery voltage
J
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0157E
K
6. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INSPECTION
●
●
Remove rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
L
Terminal
(+)
(–)
Terminal
Terminal
3
5
6
7
Condition
M
Continuity
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 to 2
Yes
No current supply
No
12V direct current supply
between terminals 1 to 2
Yes
No current supply
No
SEC202B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
Revision: March 2005
GW-51
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
7. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FILAMENT CHECK
Check rear window defogger filament. Refer to GW-53, "Filament Check" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair rear window defogger filament. Refer to GW-54, "Filament Repair" .
8. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND HARNESS INSPECTION
Check continuity between rear window defogger connector B201 terminal – and body harness.
Terminals
(+)
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
B201
– (B)
(–)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA0158E
9. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS INSPECTION
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay harness connector B4 terminal 5 and 7 and rear window defogger condenser,
and between rear window defogger relay harness connector B4 terminal 5 and 7 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
5 (R)
B21
+ (R)
5 (R)
B4
Continuity
7 (R)
7 (R)
Ground
B21
+ (R)
Ground
Yes
No
LIIA1463E
Yes
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
GW-52
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
10. IPDM E/R HARNESS INSPECTION
A
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E119 terminal 6 and 5 and rear window defogger relay connector B4 terminal 3
and 6, and IPDM E/R harness connector E119 terminal 6, 5 and
body ground.
B
Terminals
(+)
(–)
C
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E119
5 (W)
B4
6 (W)
E119
5 (W)
E119
6 (L)
E119
6 (L)
Ground
B4
No
3 (L)
Ground
Yes
D
LIIA1241E
Yes
E
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Filament Check
1.
F
EIS003LI
G
When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe.Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.
H
GW
SEL122R
2.
Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
J
K
L
M
SEL263
Revision: March 2005
GW-53
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
3.
4.
If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery
voltage.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
SEL265
Filament Repair
EIS003LJ
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
●
●
●
●
●
●
Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent)
Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
Drawing pen
Heat gun
Alcohol
Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
PIIA0215E
4.
After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
Revision: March 2005
GW-54
2005 Altima
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
5.
Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area
for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
A
B
C
SEL013D
D
E
F
G
H
GW
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
GW-55
2005 Altima
DOOR MIRROR
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —
PFP:96301
EIS003LK
WIWA0984E
Revision: March 2005
GW-56
2005 Altima
DOOR MIRROR
Removal and Installation
EIS003LL
A
B
C
D
E
F
WIIA0706E
1.
Mirror glass and holder
2.
Mirror assembly
3.
G
Mirror body
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the mirror bodies.
1. Remove the front door sash cover. Refer to EI-30, "Front Door" .
2. Remove the door mirror harness connector.
3. Remove the door mirror nuts and the door mirror assembly.
H
GW
INSTALLATION
J
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Door Mirror Glass
EIS003LM
REMOVAL
K
1.
2.
3.
L
4.
Set mirror assembly mirror glass upward.
Apply protective tape to mirror housing.
Insert a screwdriver as shown and remove mirror glass by pushing up two hooks.
Disconnect two electrical connectors from mirror holder.
M
WIIA0160E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set mirror holder bracket and mirror assembly in the horizontal
position.
Connect two electrical connectors to the back of the mirror
holder.
Heat lower hooks with a hair dryer to prevent breaking the
hooks.
Align upper hooks to bracket.
Align lower hooks to bracket and push lower part of mirror glass
down into bracket until you hear a click. Ensure that mirror glass
is secure in door mirror.
Revision: March 2005
GW-57
WIIA0159E
2005 Altima
DOOR MIRROR
Revision: March 2005
GW-58
2005 Altima
M
INDEX
SECTION
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
IDX
IDX-1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Numerics
2nd brake ......................................................... AT-652
2nd coast brake ............................................... AT-652
2nd coast brake hub ........................................ AT-658
3METER - Wiring diagram .................................. DI-21
A
A/C - Wiring diagram ........................ ATC-33, MTC-33
A/C compressor clutch removal and installation .. ATC108, MTC-94
A/C compressor mounting . ATC-107, ATC-108, MTC93, MTC-94
A/C compressor precaution .............. ATC-10, MTC-10
A/C compressor special service tool . ATC-13, MTC-13
A/C diagnostic work flow (auto A/C) ................ ATC-28
A/C diagnostic work flow (manual A/C) .......... MTC-28
A/C evaporator .............................. ATC-114, MTC-100
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system identification .... ATC-6,
MTC-6
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ....... ATC-4,
MTC-4
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ATC103, MTC-89
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service tools .. ATC-13,
MTC-13
A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution ...
ATC-10, MTC-10
A/C lubricant (R134a) ....................... ATC-19, MTC-19
A/C lubrication oil .............................. ATC-19, MTC-19
A/C operational check ....................... ATC-39, MTC-40
A/C performance chart ...................... ATC-70, MTC-67
A/C service data specification ........................ ATC-120
A/C symptom chart (auto A/C) ......................... ATC-28
A/C symptom chart (manual A/C) ................... MTC-28
A/C trouble diagnoses (auto A/C) .................... ATC-28
A/C trouble diagnoses (manual A/C) .............. MTC-28
A/C, A - Wiring diagram ................................... ATC-33
A/C, M - Wiring diagram .................. MTC-33, MTC-35
A/F - Wiring diagram ... EC-445, EC-450, EC-455, EC462, EC-470, EC-476, EC-485
A/FH - Wiring diagram ..................................... EC-374
A/T - Wiring diagram .......................................... AT-19
A/T fluid checking .............................. AT-396, AT-435
A/T fluid replacement ....................................... AT-396
A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-111, AT-476, AT-481
A/T IND - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-42
A/T indicator ........................................................ DI-42
A/T self-diagnoses AT-44, AT-54, AT-55, AT-456, AT461
A/T shift lock system .......................... AT-258, AT-614
A/T shift lock system - Wiring diagram AT-259, AT-615
A/T trouble diagnoses ...................................... AT-425
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 1ST ............. AT-128, AT-497
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 2ND ............ AT-133, AT-501
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 3RD ............ AT-138, AT-507
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 4TH ............ AT-143, AT-513
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 5TH .......................... AT-518
A/T Wiring diagram AT - BA/FTS ..................... AT-194
A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN ............ AT-190, AT-465
A/T Wiring diagram AT - ENG SS .................... AT-123
A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTS ............. AT-113, AT-477
A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTSP ........................ AT-482
A/T Wiring diagram AT - LPSV ........................ AT-163
A/T Wiring diagram AT - MAIN ........................ AT-102
A/T Wiring diagram AT - MMSW ...................... AT-580
A/T Wiring diagram AT - NONDTC .................. AT-211
A/T Wiring diagram AT - OVRCSV .................. AT-185
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/A ......................... AT-526
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/B ......................... AT-561
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/C ......................... AT-570
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PC/CS ...................... AT-575
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PNP/SW ..... AT-107, AT-472
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PWR/IN .................... AT-586
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SFTFNC ................... AT-566
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/A ......... AT-169, AT-531
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/B ......... AT-174, AT-536
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/C ....................... AT-541
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/CS .................... AT-546
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/D ....................... AT-551
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/E ....................... AT-556
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCCSIG ...... AT-155, AT-523
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCV .......................... AT-150
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TPS .......................... AT-180
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TRSC ........................ AT-487
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSS A/T .................... AT-119
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSATC ................... AT-491
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSMTR .... AT-201, AT-204
ABS - Wiring diagram ..................................... BRC-13
ABS (anti-lock brake system) ............................ BRC-5
Accelerator control system ................................ ACC-2
Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor EC-542, EC549, EC-564, EC-1258, EC-1265, EC-1279
Accelerator pedal released position learning .. EC-711
Active damper suspension system - Wiring diagram ....
FSU-4
AF1B1-Wiring diagram . EC-1134, EC-1142, EC-1150,
EC-1159, EC-1169, EC-1178, EC-1190
AF1B2-Wiring diagram . EC-1136, EC-1144, EC-1152,
EC-1161, EC-1171, EC-1180, EC-1192
AF1HB1-Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1047
AF1HB2-Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1049
Aiming adjustment ............................................. LT-28
Air bag ............................................................... SRS-3
Air bag precautions ............................................... GI-3
Air bleeding (hydraulic clutch)Air bleeding (hydraulic
clutch) .................................................................. CL-7
Air bleeding for brake systemAir bleeding for brake system ...................................................................... BR-8
Air cleaner and air duct ....................... EM-17, EM-120
Air cleaner filter replacement ................ MA-18, MA-25
Air conditioner - Wiring diagram ....... ATC-33, MTC-33
Air conditioner cut control ............................... EC-647
Air flow meter - See Mass air flow sensor EC-178, EC187, EC-806, EC-815
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 .. EC-443, EC-448, EC-453, EC460, EC-467, EC-473, EC-482, EC-1132, EC-1140, EC-
IDX-2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
1148, EC-1157, EC-1166, EC-1175, EC-1187
Air fuel ratio sensor 1 heater ........... EC-373, EC-1045
Ambient sensor ............................................... ATC-88
Angular tightening application .............. EM-6, EM-110
Anti-lock brake system - See ABS .................... BRC-5
Anti-lock brake system - Wiring diagram ......... BRC-13
APPS1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-544, EC-1260
APPS2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-551, EC-1267
APPS3 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-566, EC-1281
ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ................ EC-513, EC-1229
ASC/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-506, EC-1222
ASCBOF - Wiring diagram .............. EC-612, EC-1334
ASCD .................................................. EC-34, EC-648
ASCD (automatic speed control device) ........... ACS-2
ASCIND - Wiring diagram ............... EC-621, EC-1344
Audio ................................................................... AV-6
AUDIO - Wiring diagram ......................... AV-7, AV-13
Auto air conditioner - Wiring diagram .............. ATC-33
Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror ........... GW-40, GW-41
Automatic amplifier ATC-37, ATC-41, MTC-38, MTC-42
Automatic transaxle number .............................. GI-46
Automatic transmission fluid replacement ......... MA-31
AV and NAVI control unit .................................. AV-65
AV communication line ...................................... AV-88
B
B/COMP - Wiring diagram ................................... DI-63
B5 brake ........................................................... AT-660
Back door trim ..................................................... EI-30
BACK/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-98
Back-up lamp switch (M/T)Back-up lamp switch ... MT13, MT-77
Basic inspection .................................. EC-75, EC-693
Battery ................................................................. SC-4
Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester SC-6, SC-13,
SC-23
Baulk ring (M/T) ..................................... MT-21, MT-85
BCM (Body control module) .............................. BCS-3
Block heater ....................................... EM-75, EM-224
Blower motor ....... ATC-55, ATC-93, MTC-53, MTC-79
Blower unit ....................................... ATC-92, MTC-78
Board-on lift ........................................................ GI-40
Body alignment ................................................ BL-140
Body component parts ..................................... BL-129
Body construction ............................................. BL-139
Body exterior paint color .................................. BL-128
Body repair ....................................................... BL-128
Body sealing ..................................................... BL-136
Brake boosterBrake booster ............................. BR-15
Brake control valve (Proportioning valve)Brake control
valve (Proportioning valve) ................................ BR-39
Brake fluid changeBrake fluid change ................. BR-8
Brake fluid level ................................................. MA-34
Brake fluid level and line checkBrake fluid level and line
check ................................................................... BR-8
Brake hydraulic lineBake hydraulic line ............... BR-9
Brake inspection ................................................ MA-35
Brake lines and cables inspection ..................... MA-34
Brake master cylinderBrake master cylinder ..... BR-12
Brake pedalBrake pedal ...................................... BR-6
Brake switch .................................... EC-537, EC-1253
BRK/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-538, EC-1254
Bulb specifications ............................................ LT-144
Bumper, front ....................................................... EI-14
Bumper, rear ........................................................ EI-16
C
A
B
C
Cabin air filter ...................... ATC-94, MTC-80, MA-28
Camshaft ............................................ EM-37, EM-182
D
Camshaft inspection .............. EM-39, EM-44, EM-187
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) .. EC-280, EC-928
CAN - Wiring diagram EC-167, EC-791, LAN-34, LANE
51, LAN-70, LAN-91, LAN-115, LAN-136, LAN-160,
LAN-186, LAN-212, LAN-239
CAN (Controller Area Network) ....................... LAN-21
F
CAN communication .... EC-166, EC-790, AT-188, AT416, AT-464, BRC-7, BRC-50, LAN-21
Canister-See EVAP canister ............... EC-40, EC-656
CHARGE - Wiring diagram ................................ SC-22
G
Charging system ................................................ SC-21
Chassis and body maintenance ........................ MA-28
Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 1 ........ MA-9
H
Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 2 ...... MA-11
CHIME - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-47
CIGAR - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-32
I
Cigarette lighter ............................................... WW-32
Circuit breaker ................................................... PG-65
Clearance lamp ................................................ LT-100
J
Closed loop control ................ EC-30, EC-420, EC-644
Clutch coverClutch cover ................................... CL-18
Clutch discClutch disc ....................................... CL-18
Clutch fluid level ................................................ MA-28
K
Clutch master cylinderClutch master cylinder ..... CL-8
Clutch operating cylinderClutch operating cylinder CL11
L
Clutch pedalClutch pedal ..................................... CL-5
Clutch release mechanismClutch release mechanism .
CL-14
Coil spring (front) ............................................... FSU-9 IDX
Coil spring (rear)Coil spring .............................. RSU-9
Collision diagnosis ........................................... SRS-57
Combination lamp, front, removal and installation .. LT30
Combination lamp, rear, removal and installation LT-97
Combination meter ..................................... DI-4, DI-18
Combination meter removal and installation - See Instrument panel .......................................................... DI-18
Combination switch ............................................ LT-89
COMM - Wiring diagram .................................... AV-88
Component Location (auto A/C) ...................... ATC-29
Component Location (manual A/C) ................ MTC-29
Compressor clutch removal and installation . ATC-108,
MTC-94
Compressor mounting .. ATC-107, ATC-108, MTC-93,
MTC-94
Compressor precaution .................... ATC-10, MTC-10
IDX-3
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Compressor special service tool ....... ATC-13, MTC-13
Condenser ...................................... ATC-113, MTC-99
Connector inspection .......................................... GI-23
Console box - See Instrument panel .................. IP-10
CONSULT for ABS ......................................... BRC-16
CONSULT for engine ....................................... EC-128
CONSULT for TCS ......................................... BRC-59
CONSULT general information ........................... GI-36
CONSULT-II for engine ................................... EC-750
Control units (terminal arrangement) ................. PG-69
Controller Area Network (CAN) ....................... LAN-21
Converter housing installation ......................... AT-369
COOL/F - Wiring diagram ................ EC-425, EC-1115
Coolant mixture ratio ......................................... MA-14
Coolant replacement ......................................... MA-15
Coolant replacementVQ35DE .......................... MA-22
Cooling circuit (engine) ..................................... CO-26
Cooling fan motor ............................ EC-432, EC-1122
Cooling unit (A/C evaporator) ATC-95, ATC-114, MTC81, MTC-100
Corrosion protection ........................................ BL-133
Coupling sleeve (M/T) ........................... MT-21, MT-85
Crankcase ventilation system - See Positive crankcase
ventilation ............................................. EC-50, EC-665
Crankshaft ........................................................ EM-76
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ..... EC-273, EC-921
Crash zone sensor .......................................... SRS-52
Cylinder block ..................................... EM-75, EM-224
Cylinder block boring ........................................ EM-94
Cylinder head ...................................... EM-59, EM-200
Cylinder head bolt tightening .......................... EM-206
D
Data link connector .......................................... EC-623
Daytime light system ........................................... LT-33
Daytime running light - See Daytime light system .. LT33
DEF - Wiring diagram ....................................... GW-44
Diagnosis sensor unit ..................................... SRS-55
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD system EC-15,
EC-56, EC-627, EC-669
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart
EC-105, EC-722
Differential gear (FF A/T) ................................. AT-665
Differential gear (FF M/T) .................................. MT-24
Dimensions ......................................................... GI-46
Display Control Unit ......................................... AV-156
Display Unit ...................................................... AV-156
DLC - Wiring diagram ...................................... EC-623
Door glass ........................................... GW-34, GW-37
Door glass Fitting Adjustment(Front) ................ GW-36
Door mirror ........................................................ GW-57
Door trim ............................................................. EI-30
Door, front ............................................. BL-72, GW-34
Door, rear .............................................. BL-72, GW-37
Drive belt ........................................................... EM-15
Drive belt inspectionQR25DE ........................... MA-15
Drive belt inspectionVQ35DE ........................... MA-22
Drive shaft (front) ............................................ FAX-11
Driver air bag .................................................. SRS-43
Dropping resistor (A/T) ..................................... AT-161
DTC work support ............................. EC-138, EC-761
DTRL - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-38
Duct and grilles .............................. ATC-101, MTC-87
E
ECM input/output signal .................................. EC-120
ECM power supply EC-159, EC-378, EC-783, EC-1053
ECM/PW - Wiring diagram .............. EC-379, EC-1054
ECTS - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-201, EC-828
EGR function ................................... EC-937, EC-1199
EGR temperature sensor ................................ EC-952
EGR volume control valve .............................. EC-945
EGR/TS - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-955
EGRC1 - Wiring diagram ................ EC-941, EC-1203
EGVC/V - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-947
Electric sunroof .................................................. RF-10
Electric throttle control actuator EC-386, EC-388, EC399, EC-1066, EC-1068
Electrical diagnoses ............................................ GI-23
Electrical load signal circuit ............. EC-610, EC-1332
Electronic ignition (EI) system ............. EC-31, EC-645
EMNT - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-1323
Engine control circuit diagram ........... EC-118, EC-738
Engine control component parts location ........ EC-112
Engine control module (ECM) ......... EC-370, EC-1042
Engine control system diagram and chart . EC-28, EC642
Engine coolant .................................................. CO-28
Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) .. EC-199,
EC-211, EC-826, EC-838
Engine fail-safe system ..................... EC-107, EC-724
Engine mounting control (Front) ................... EC-1322
Engine oil ........................................................... LU-20
Engine oil filter replacementQR25DE ... MA-19, MA-26
Engine oil precautions .................................. GI-3, GI-7
Engine oil replacementQR25DE ........... MA-18, MA-25
Engine removal ................................... EM-71, EM-219
Engine serial number .......................................... GI-46
ETC1 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-389, EC-1069
ETC2 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-396, EC-1076
ETC3 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-400, EC-1080
EVAP canister ..................................... EC-40, EC-656
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ....
EC-306, EC-491, EC-977, EC-1206
EVAP canister vent control valve EC-312, EC-498, EC984, EC-1214
EVAP control system (small leak) diagnosis .. EC-298,
EC-335, EC-343, EC-969, EC-1008
EVAP control system pressure sensor ... EC-319, EC322, EC-328, EC-991, EC-994, EC-1000
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring diagnosis .
EC-292, EC-964
EVAP vapor lines inspection ................. MA-21, MA-27
Evaporative emission (EVAP) system EC-37, EC-651
Evaporator ................................... ATC-114, MTC-100
IDX-4
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Exhaust manifold ............................................. EM-134
Exhaust system ......................................... EX-3, EX-6
Exhaust system inspection ............ EX-3, EX-6, MA-28
Expansion valve ........................... ATC-115, MTC-101
F
F/PUMP - Wiring diagram ............... EC-599, EC-1317
Fan control amp. ............................ ATC-100, MTC-86
Final drive (FF M/T) ........................................... MT-24
Flow charts ......................................................... GI-26
Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) .. AT-111, AT-476, AT481
Fluids ................................................................. MA-12
Fluorescent leak detector ............. ATC-116, MTC-102
Flywheel (clutch)Flywheel (clutch) ..................... CL-18
Foot lamp ......................................................... LT-115
Fork rod (M/T) ....................................... MT-23, MT-87
Freeze frame data ............................... EC-57, EC-674
Front bumper ....................................................... EI-14
Front combination lamp removal and installation LT-30
Front disc brakeFront disc brake ........... BR-19, BR-25
Front door ............................................. BL-72, GW-34
Front Door Trim ................................................... EI-30
Front passenger air bag .................................. SRS-47
Front seat .......................................................... SE-15
Front seat belt ..................................................... SB-4
Front seat belt pre-tensioner .... SB-2, SRS-3, SRS-54
FTTS - Wiring diagram EC-248, EC-252, EC-892, EC896
FUEL - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-235, EC-242
Fuel cut control (at no load high engine speed) EC-32,
EC-646
Fuel gauge ............................................................ DI-4
Fuel injection system ......................... EC-233, EC-240
Fuel injection system (Bank 1) .......... EC-868, EC-879
Fuel injection system (Bank 2) .......... EC-868, EC-879
Fuel injector and fuel tube .................. EM-32, EM-147
Fuel level sensor EC-353, EC-355, EC-357, EC-1025,
EC-1027, EC-1029
Fuel line inspection ..................... FL-3, MA-17, MA-24
Fuel precautions .......................................... GI-3, GI-5
Fuel pressure check ............................ EC-95, EC-714
Fuel pressure release ......................... EC-95, EC-714
Fuel pump ....................................... EC-598, EC-1316
Fuel system .......................................................... FL-3
Fuel systemCommercial Service Tools ................ FL-2
Fuel systemPREPARATION ................................ FL-2
Fuel systemSpecial Service Tools ....................... FL-2
Fuel tank temperature sensor ... EC-246, EC-251, EC890, EC-895
Fuel tank vacuum relief valve .............. EC-40, EC-656
FUELB1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-870, EC-881
FUELB2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-871, EC-882
Fuse ...................................................... PG-65, PG-73
Fuse block ......................................................... PG-72
Fusible link ............................................ PG-65, PG-73
G
Garage jack and safety stand ............................. GI-40
Gear components (M/T) ....................... MT-21, MT-85
Generic scan tool (GST) .................... EC-140, EC-763
Glass ........................ GW-11, GW-13, GW-34, GW-37
Glove box lamp ................................................. LT-143
GPS antenna ..................................................... AV-64
Grease ............................................................... MA-12
Ground distribution ............................................ PG-28
H
A
B
C
D
H/LAMP - Wiring diagram ..................................... LT-9
H/MIRROR - Wiring diagram ............................ GW-45
E
Handling precautions for plastics ...................... BL-151
Harness connector ............................................ PG-66
Harness connector inspection ............................ GI-23
F
Harness layout ................................................... PG-39
Hazard warning lamp .......................................... LT-72
Headlamp ............................................................. LT-6
Headlamp removal and installation .................... LT-30
G
Heated oxygen sensor 2 ..... EC-219, EC-225, EC-404,
EC-412
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) .... EC-846, EC-856,
H
EC-1084, EC-1096
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) .... EC-846, EC-856,
EC-1084, EC-1096
I
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ...................... EC-173
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) ........ EC-797
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) ........ EC-797
Heated seat ....................................................... SE-12
J
Heater and cooling unit (Heater core) ATC-95, ATC-96,
MTC-81, MTC-82
Heater unit (heater core) .. ATC-95, ATC-96, MTC-81,
K
MTC-82
Height (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-46
HFC134a (R134a) system identification ATC-6, MTC-6
L
HFC134a (R134a) system precaution .. ATC-4, MTC-4
HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ATC-103,
MTC-89
HFC134a (R134a) system service tools ATC-13, MTC- IDX
13
HFC134a system service equipment precaution . ATC10, MTC-10
HO2S2 - Wiring diagram .... EC-221, EC-228, EC-407,
EC-415
HO2S2H - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-175
Homelink universal transceiver ......................... BL-126
Horn ................................................................. WW-36
HORN - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-36
How to erase DTC for OBD system ................... EC-65
HSEAT - Wiring diagram ................................... SE-13
I
IATS - Wiring diagram ....................... EC-196, EC-823
Identification plate ............................................... GI-46
Idle air volume learning ....................... EC-93, EC-712
IDX-5
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Idle mixture ratio .................................. EC-81, EC-700
Idle speed .............................................. EC-75, EC-81
Idle speed control (ISC) ... EC-361, EC-363, EC-1033,
EC-1035
Ignition coil ........... EM-29, EM-144, EC-572, EC-1287
Ignition control system ..................... EC-572, EC-1287
Ignition key hole illumination ............................. LT-134
Ignition timing ......................................... EC-75, EC-81
IGNSYS - Wiring diagram ................ EC-573, EC-1288
ILL - Wiring diagram ......................................... LT-139
Illumination ........................................................ LT-135
Illumination control ............................................ LT-143
In vehicle sensor .............................................. ATC-89
In-cabin Microfilter ............... ATC-94, MTC-80, MA-28
INJECT - Wiring diagram ................. EC-593, EC-1309
Injector ............................................. EC-592, EC-1308
Input shaft (FF M/T) .............................. MT-21, MT-85
Instrument panel ................................................. IP-10
Intake air temperature sensor ... EC-194, EC-214, EC822, EC-841
Intake door motor ATC-54, ATC-97, MTC-52, MTC-83
Intake manifold ................................... EM-19, EM-129
Intake sensor ...... ATC-84, ATC-91, MTC-73, MTC-77
Intake valve timing control ............................... EC-169
Intake valve timing control (Bank 1) ................. EC-793
Intake valve timing control (Bank 2) ................. EC-793
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ....... EC-382
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 1) EC1057
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 2) EC1057
Integrated homelink transmitter ....................... BL-126
Integrated homelink transmitter - See Homelink universal tranceiver ................................................... BL-126
Interior ................................................................. EI-32
Interior lamp ...................................................... LT-115
Interior lamp on-off control ................................ LT-115
IPDM (Intelligent power distribution module engine
room) ................................................................. PG-15
IVC - Wiring diagram ....................................... EC-383
IVCB1 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-1058
IVCB2 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-1060
IVIS (Infiniti vehicle immobilizer system) precautions ...
GI-3
J
Jacking points ..................................................... GI-40
Junction box (J/B) .............................................. PG-72
K
Key illumination ................................................. LT-115
Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system
BL-46
Knock sensor (KS) ............................. EC-269, EC-916
KS - Wiring diagram ........................... EC-270, EC-917
L
LAN system circuit ........................... ATC-42, MTC-44
Length (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-46
License lamp .................................................... LT-100
Lifting points ........................................................ GI-40
Line pressure solenoid valve ........................... AT-161
Line pressure test (A/T) ....................... AT-71, AT-437
Liquid gasket application EM-6, EM-110, LU-2, LU-15,
CO-3, CO-21
Location of electrical units ................................. PG-62
Lubricant (R134a) A/C ..................... ATC-19, MTC-19
Lubricants ......................................................... MA-12
Lubrication circuit (engine) ................................. LU-18
Lubrication oil A/C ............................ ATC-19, MTC-19
Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood latches ...... MA-37
Luggage compartment trim ................................. EI-37
M
M/T major overhaul ............................... MT-24, MT-88
M/T oil replacementM/T oil replacement MT-11, MT-75
M/T removal and installationM/T removal and installation
MT-17
MAFS - Wiring diagram EC-181, EC-189, EC-809, EC817
Magnet clutch ................................. ATC-108, MTC-94
MAIN - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-159, EC-783
Mainshaft (M/T) ..................................... MT-21, MT-85
Maintenance ....................................................... MA-5
Maintenance (engine)QR25DE ......................... MA-15
Maintenance (engine)VQ35DE ......................... MA-22
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ......... EC-67, EC-685
Manual air conditioner - Wiring diagram ......... MTC-33
Manual transaxle number ................................... GI-46
Manual transmission oil replacement ................ MA-29
Map lamp ......................................................... LT-115
Mass air flow sensor (MAFS) .... EC-178, EC-187, EC806, EC-815
Master cylinder (brake)Master cylinder (brake) BR-12
Master cylinder (clutch)Master cylinder (clutch) ... CL-8
METER - Wiring diagram ...................................... DI-9
MIL data link connectors circuit ..................... EC-1346
MIL/DL - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-1346
Mirror, door ...................................................... GW-57
Mirror, out side ................................................. GW-57
Misfire ............................................... EC-262, EC-906
Mode door motor .............................. ATC-98, MTC-84
Model variation .................................................... GI-46
Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system ... EC-29, EC-643
Multiport fuel injection precautions ............... GI-3, GI-6
Multi-remote control system ............................... BL-46
Multi-remote control system - See Remote keyless entry
system ................................................................ BL-16
N
NATS - Wiring diagram .................................... BL-110
NAVI - Wiring diagram ....................................... AV-81
IDX-6
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
NAVI Control Unit ............................................ AV-156
NVH troubleshooting (BR)NVH troubleshooting (BR) ..
BR-5
NVH troubleshooting (CL)NVH troubleshooting (CL) ...
CL-4
NVH troubleshooting (EM) ................. EM-13, EM-117
NVH troubleshooting (FA) ................................. FAX-4
NVH troubleshooting (RA) ................................. RAX-4
NVH troubleshooting (RSU)NVH Troubleshooting (RSU)
RSU-4
NVH troubleshooting (ST) ................................... PS-4
NVH troubleshooting (WT)NVH troubleshooting (WT) .
WT-2
NVIS (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system) precautions
GI-3
O
O2H2B1 - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-799
O2H2B2 - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-801
O2S2B1 - Wiring diagram EC-848, EC-859, EC-1087,
EC-1099
O2S2B2 - Wiring diagram EC-850, EC-861, EC-1089,
EC-1101
Oil change (capacity)QR25DE .......................... MA-12
Oil change (capacity)VQ35DE .......................... MA-13
Oil filter ............................................................... LU-23
Oil pan (engine) ................................................. EM-26
Oil pressure (engine) ............................................ LU-8
Oil pump (A/T) .................................................. AT-652
Oil pump (engine) ................................... LU-11, LU-24
Oil seal replacement (engine) ............ EM-56, EM-195
On board diagnostic system ............................ EC-668
One-way clutch No.1 ........................................ AT-658
One-way clutch outer race sub assembly ........ AT-658
Operating cylinder (clutch)Operating cylinder (clutch) .
CL-11
ORVR (On-board Refueling Vapor Recovery) . EC-44,
EC-660
Out side mirror ................................................. GW-57
Overdrive control switch ................................... AT-252
Overheat ......................................... EC-421, EC-1111
Overrun clutch solenoid valve .......................... AT-183
P
Park/Neutral position switch ............ EC-524, EC-1240
Park/neutral position switch (A/T) ...... AT-105, AT-471
Park/neutral position switch (M/T)Park/neutral position
switch (M/T) ........................................... MT-13, MT-77
Parking brake controlParking brake control ........ PB-2
Parking drum brakeParking drum brake ............. PB-5
Parking lamp .................................................... LT-100
PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) ... EC-50, EC-665
Periodic maintenance .......................................... MA-7
Personal lamp .................................................. LT-115
PGC/V - Wiring diagram EC-308, EC-493, EC-979, EC1208
PHASE - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-282
PHSB1 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-930
PHSB2 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-932
Piston ring inspection ...................................... EM-234
Piston to bore clearance .................................... EM-94
PNP/SW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-526, EC-1242
POS - Wiring diagram ........................ EC-275, EC-923
POWER - Wiring diagram .................................... PG-6
Power door lock .................................................. BL-16
Power seat ......................................................... SE-10
Power steering fluid level ................................... MA-36
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor ........... EC-365
Power supply routing ........................................... PG-4
Power window .................................................. GW-15
PRE/SE - Wiring diagram ... EC-324, EC-330, EC-996,
EC-1002
Precautions (General) ................................. GI-3, GI-4
Precautions in repairing high strength steel ..... BL-154
Pressure control solenoid valve A ................... AT-525
Pressure control solenoid valve B ................... AT-560
Pressure control solenoid valve C ................... AT-569
Pressure test (A/T) ............................... AT-71, AT-437
PS/SEN - Wiring diagram ................ EC-366, EC-1038
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
R
Radiator ............................................................. CO-30
Radio - See Audio ............................................... AV-6
Rear bumper ........................................................ EI-16
Rear combination lamp removal and installation LT-97
Rear disc brakeRear disc brake ........................ BR-32
Rear door .............................................. BL-72, GW-37
Rear seat ........................................................... SE-22
Rear seat belt ...................................................... SB-5
Rear suspensionRear suspension .................... RSU-5
Rear window ..................................................... GW-13
Rear window defogger ...................................... GW-42
Refrigerant connection precaution ........ ATC-6, MTC-6
Refrigerant discharging evacuating charging ATC-103,
MTC-89
Refrigerant general precaution ............. ATC-5, MTC-5
Refrigerant lines ............................. ATC-103, MTC-89
Refrigerant pressure sensor . EC-605, EC-1327, ATC113, MTC-99
Remote keyless entry system ................. BL-16, BL-46
Removal and installation (A/T) ........................ AT-624
Reverse idler shaft (M/T) ...................... MT-21, MT-85
Reverse main gear (M/T) ...................... MT-21, MT-85
Revolution sensor (A/T) ...................... AT-117, AT-490
Road wheel size ................................................. GI-46
Rocker cover ...................................... EM-35, EM-150
Room lamp ......................................... LT-115, LT-133
Room lamp - See Interior lamp ......................... LT-115
ROOM/L - Wiring diagram .................. LT-120, LT-123
RP/SEN - Wiring diagram ................ EC-606, EC-1328
S
SAE J1930 terminology list ................................. GI-52
SAE J1979 - Service $01 - 09 ............. EC-53, EC-668
IDX-7
H
I
J
K
L
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
SEAT - Wiring diagram ...................................... SE-10
Seat belt inspection ................................ SB-6, MA-38
Seat belt, front ..................................................... SB-4
Seat belt, rear ...................................................... SB-5
Seat, front .......................................................... SE-15
Seat, rear ........................................................... SE-22
SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ............... EC-439, EC-1128
SHIFT - Wiring diagram ..................... AT-259, AT-615
Shift control components (M/T) ............. MT-23, MT-87
Shift control components (M/T)Shift control components
(M/T) ..................................................... MT-14, MT-78
Shift fork (M/T) ...................................... MT-23, MT-87
Shift lock system ................................ AT-258, AT-614
Shift schedule .................................... AT-376, AT-444
Shift solenoid valve A (A/T) ............... AT-167, AT-530
Shift solenoid valve B (A/T) ............... AT-172, AT-535
Shift solenoid valve C (A/T) ............................. AT-540
Shift solenoid valve D (A/T) ............................. AT-550
Shift solenoid valve E (A/T) ............................. AT-555
Shock absorber (front) ..................................... FSU-10
Shock absorber (rear)Shock absorber (rear) .... RSU-8
Side air bag (satellite) sensor ......................... SRS-53
Side curtain air bag ......................................... SRS-50
Side trim .............................................................. EI-32
Spare tire size ..................................................... GI-46
Spark plug ....................................................... EM-145
Spark plug replacementQR25DE ......... MA-19, MA-26
Specification value ............................. EC-148, EC-772
Speedometer ........................................................ DI-4
Spiral cable ..................................................... SRS-45
Spot lamp .......................................................... LT-133
SROOF - Wiring diagram ................................... RF-12
SRS - See Supplemental Restraint System ..... SRS-5
SRS - Wiring diagram ..................................... SRS-13
SRS Trouble diagnoses .................................... SRS-9
Stabilizer bar (front) ......................................... FSU-11
Stall test (A/T) ...................................... AT-68, AT-435
Standardized relay ............................................. PG-70
START - Wiring diagram .................................... SC-10
Starting system .................................................... SC-9
Steering gear and linkage inspection ................ MA-35
Steering knuckle ................................................ FAX-6
Step lamp .......................................................... LT-115
Stop lamp switch .............................. EC-537, EC-1253
STOP/L - Wiring diagram .................................... LT-95
Strut (front) ......................................................... FSU-9
Sun roof, electric ................................................ RF-10
Sunload sensor ................................................ ATC-90
Sunroof .............................................................. RF-24
Supplemental Restraint System ....................... SRS-5
Symbols and abbreviations ........................ GI-8, GI-21
Symptom matrix chart ........................ EC-108, EC-725
Synchronizer (M/T) ............................... MT-21, MT-85
System readiness test (SRT) code ...... EC-58, EC-674
TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-103
TCM circuit diagram ............................. AT-19, AT-434
TCM inspection table ........................... AT-99, AT-453
TCS - Wiring diagram ..................................... BRC-56
TCS (traction control system) ......................... BRC-47
TCS actuator .................................... BRC-49, BRC-89
TCS component parts and connector location BRC-54
TCS control unit ............................... BRC-49, BRC-89
TCS self-diagnosis ........................... BRC-59, BRC-65
TCS system components ................................ BRC-48
TCS wheel sensors .......................... BRC-54, BRC-87
Thermostat ........................................................ CO-16
Three way catalyst .......................................... EM-134
Three way catalyst function ............................ EC-287
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) .............. EC-959
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) .............. EC-959
Three way catalyst precautions ................... GI-3, GI-5
Throttle control motor .................................... EC-1079
Throttle control motor relay ............. EC-394, EC-1074
Throttle position sensor (TPS) .. EC-204, EC-255, EC434, EC-436, EC-557, EC-831, EC-899, EC-1123, EC1125, EC-1272
Throttle position switch .................................... AT-252
Tightening torque of standard bolts .................... GI-44
Time lag test .................................................... AT-436
Timing chain ........................................ EM-48, EM-161
Tire rotation ....................................................... MA-34
Tire size .............................................................. GI-46
Torque converter installation AT-274, AT-369, AT-625
Torque convertor clutch solenoid valve ... AT-148, AT522
Tow truck towing ................................................. GI-43
Towing point ........................................................ GI-43
TPS1 - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-257, EC-901
TPS2 - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-206, EC-833
TPS3 - Wiring diagram .................... EC-559, EC-1274
Traction control system - See TCS ................. BRC-47
Traction control system - Wiring diagram ....... BRC-56
Transaxle case cover ....................................... AT-660
Transaxle serial number ..................................... GI-46
Transmission case (M/T) ...................... MT-20, MT-84
TRANSMT - Wiring diagram ............................ BL-126
Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions) ............................... GI-46
Trim ..................................................................... EI-32
Triple meter ......................................................... DI-19
Trouble diagnoses ................................................ GI-9
Trunk lid trim ....................................................... EI-37
Trunk room trim ................................................... EI-37
Turbine revolution sensor ................................ AT-486
TURN - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-76
Turn signal lamp ................................................ LT-72
Two trip detection logic ....................... EC-53, EC-668
Two-pole lift ......................................................... GI-40
V
T
Tachometer ........................................................... DI-4
Tail lamp ........................................................... LT-100
Vacuum hose (brake system)Vacuum hose (brake system) ................................................................... BR-17
Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) .. EC-117, EC-
IDX-8
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
736
Valve clearance .................................. EM-45, EM-191
Valve guide ........................................ EM-66, EM-215
Valve seat .......................................... EM-68, EM-217
Valve spring ....................................... EM-69, EM-218
Variable induction air control system (VIAS) .. EC-532,
EC-583, EC-1248, EC-1300
Vehicle identification number ............................. GI-46
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .......... GI-43
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) ........... EC-359, EC-1031
VENT/V - Wiring diagram ... EC-314, EC-500, EC-986,
EC-1216
VIAS - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-585, EC-1302
VIAS/V - Wiring diagram ................. EC-533, EC-1249
VIN registration ................................... EC-92, EC-711
Viscosity number (SAE) .................................... MA-14
W
A
B
C
D
E
F
W/ANT - Wiring diagram ................................... AV-60
WARN - Wiring diagram ...................................... DI-34
Warning chime .................................................... DI-45
Warning lamps .................................................... DI-30
Water pump ....................................................... CO-37
Water temperature gauge ..................................... DI-4
Wheel alignment (rear)Wheel alignment (rear) . RSU-6
Wheel balance .................................................. MA-32
Wheel bearing (front axle) ................................. FAX-5
Wheel bearing (rear) ......................................... RAX-5
Wheel hub (front) .................................. FAX-5, FAX-6
Wheel hub (rear) ............................................... RAX-5
Wheel sensors (ABS) ......................... BRC-7, BRC-42
Wheel sensors (TCS) ....................... BRC-50, BRC-87
Wheel size .......................................................... GI-46
Wheelarch heightWheelarch height . FSU-19, RSU-13
Wheelbase (Dimensions) ................................... GI-46
Width (Dimensions) ............................................ GI-46
WINDOW - Wiring diagram .............................. GW-18
Window antenna ............................................... AV-59
Window, door ...................................... GW-34, GW-37
Window, rear .................................................... GW-13
Windshield ........................................................ GW-11
WIPER - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-8
Wiper and washer ............................................. WW-4
Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list .......................... PG-59
Wiring diagrams ........................................ GI-8, GI-14
IDX-9
G
H
I
J
K
L
IDX
I BODY
SECTION
IP
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ......................... 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 11
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 15
CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 15
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
IP-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS003N1
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Revision: March 2005
IP-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EIS003N2
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
E
F
SBT839
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
IP
SBT840
Commercial Service Tools
EIS003N3
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
J
K
L
M
SIIA0995E
Power Tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0191E
Revision: March 2005
IP-3
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS003N4
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
–
Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
–
Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
–
Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
–
Knock — (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
–
Tick — (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
–
Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
–
Buzz — (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: March 2005
IP-4
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1. Close a door.
2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3. Rev the engine.
4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
F
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
G
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool H
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
IP
● Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners
can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
● Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
J
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
● Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing
K
the noise.
● Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
● Looking for loose components and contact marks.
L
Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25
mm (0.59 x 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
●
Revision: March 2005
IP-5
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50
mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS0058V
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Revision: March 2005
IP-6
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
A
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
B
C
D
E
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
F
G
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of H
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
IP
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
J
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: March 2005
IP-7
2005 Altima
K
L
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS0058W
LIWA0276E
Revision: March 2005
IP-8
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: March 2005
IP-9
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:68200
EIS003N7
WIIA0696E
Revision: March 2005
IP-10
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
1.
Steering member assembly
2.
Bolt cap
3.
Instrument stay driver
4.
Instrument stay LH
5.
Lower knee protector LH
6.
Cluster lid A
7.
Instrument mask LH
A
8.
Instrument panel assembly
9.
Side ventilator grille LH
10. Combination meter
11.
Instrument lower cover LH
12.
Fuse block cover
13. M/T finisher
14.
Center console side finisher RH
15.
A/T finisher
16. Center console mask
17.
Console body front
18.
Console body rear
19. Center ventilator grille LH
20.
Cluster lid D (without NAVI)
21.
Cluster lid D (with SE-R)
22. Storage bin
23.
Center ventilator grille RH
24.
Cluster lid D (with NAVI)
25. Audio/display assembly
26.
Steering column cover lower
27.
Steering column cover upper
B
28. Key cylinder escutcheon
29.
Front air control
30.
Cluster lid C
31. Passenger front air bag bracket
screw
32.
Glove box assembly
33.
Glove box striker
36.
Instrument mask RH
34. Side ventilator grille RH
35.
Passenger front air bag
37. Instrument stay RH
38.
Instrument member bracket RH
C
D
E
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Work Steps
F
When removing instrument panel and pad, combination meter, console assembly, or steering member take
steps in the order shown by the numbers below.
Parts
Instrument panel
and pad
Combination meter
Steering member
Console assembly
Negative battery cable
1
1
1
Cluster lid C
2
2
2
Fuse block cover
3
3
3
Instrument lower cover LH
4
4
4
Lower knee protector LH
5
5
Steering column covers
6
6
Cluster lid A
7
1
7
Combination meter
8
2
8
Front air control
9
9
Cluster lid D
10
10
A/T finisher or M/T finisher
11
11
6
Console body rear
12
12
7
Console body front
13
13
8
Glove box assembly
14
14
Audio/display assembly
15
15
Front passenger air bag bracket screw
16
16
Instrument mask RH
17
17
Instrument mask LH
18
18
Front pillar finishers LH/RH
19
19
Instrument panel assembly
20
20
Bolt cap
21
Steering member
22
IP-11
H
IP
J
5
K
L
M
Number indicates step in removal procedures
Revision: March 2005
G
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Cluster Lid C
Pull lid toward rear of vehicle to release clips.
●
Disconnect electrical connectors if equipped.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LIIA1404E
Cluster Lid D
1.
2.
3.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid C" .
Remove front air control.
● Remove screws using power tool.
Remove cluster lid D.
LIIA1405E
Pull lid toward rear of vehicle to release clips.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Instrument Lower Cover LH
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid C" .
Remove fuse box cover.
LIIA0093E
Revision: March 2005
IP-12
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
3.
Remove screws using power tool, and instrument lower cover
LH.
● Pull toward rear of vehicle to release clips.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A
B
C
LIIA0095E
D
Cluster Lid A
Pull up to release clips and remove cluster lid A.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
LIIA1406E
H
Combination Meter
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid A" .
Remove screws from combination meter using power tool.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
● Remove combination meter.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
IP
J
K
L
LIIA1407E
A/T Finisher
M
1.
2.
Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Pull up to release clips and remove A/T finisher.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LIIA1409E
Revision: March 2005
IP-13
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
M/T Finisher
1.
Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument
Lower Cover LH" .
2. Pull up to release clips and remove M/T finisher.
● Disconnect electrical connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LIIA1410E
Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box
WIIA0273E
1.
Glove box housing
4.
Damper clip
7.
Glove box striker
2.
Glove box lamp
3.
Glove box damper
5.
Trunk cancel switch harness
6.
Trunk cancel switch
8.
Glove box pin
9.
Glove box latch
10. Glove box door
1.
2.
Remove screws from glove box striker and glove box using power tool.
Remove screws and remove glove box housing and glove box door.
● Remove glove box lamp and harness from glove box housing.
● Disconnect harness and remove trunk cancel switch.
3. Remove damper clip from glove box door.
4. Remove glove box pins and remove glove box door from glove box housing.
5. Remove screws and remove glove box latch.
6. Remove screws and remove glove box damper.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
IP-14
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS003N8
A
CENTER CONSOLE
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
IP
J
K
L
M
LIIA1402E
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
A/T finisher
2.
M/T finisher
3.
Center console side finisher RH
4.
Console mask
5.
Console body front
6.
Console body rear
7.
Console bracket front
8.
Console bracket rear
9.
Rear console finisher
10.
Power point assembly
11.
Power point cover
12.
Cup holder assembly
13.
Cup holder insert
14. Bin mat
15.
Console lid assembly
16.
Storage tray
Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Work Steps" .
Remove rear console finisher.
Remove cup holder insert.
Remove cup holder assembly.
Revision: March 2005
IP-15
2005 Altima
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
5. Remove storage tray and bin mat.
6. Remove console lid assembly.
7. Remove console bracket rear.
8. Remove console bracket front.
9. Remove power point assembly.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: March 2005
IP-16
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
LAN
LAN SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
CAN
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ..................... 4
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ......... 4
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 4
CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 4
Precautions For Harness Repair .............................. 5
CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW .................... 6
When Displaying CAN Communication System
Errors ....................................................................... 6
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ....................... 6
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED
EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ........ 6
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART ............... 7
Diagnosis Procedure ................................................ 8
SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO
USE SPECIFICATION TABLE) ............................. 8
ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II ............ 9
HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE .............. 10
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor ........................... 16
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” SCREEN FOR ECM ............................... 16
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” SCREEN FOR TCM ............................... 17
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” SCREEN FOR BCM ............................... 18
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) ................... 18
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R ....................... 19
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL
UNIT .................................................................... 20
Revision: March 2005
CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................... 21
System Description ................................................. 21
CAN Communication Unit ....................................... 21
TYPE1/TYPE2 ..................................................... 21
TYPE3/TYPE4 ..................................................... 23
TYPE5/TYPE6 ..................................................... 25
TYPE7/TYPE9 ..................................................... 27
TYPE8/TYPE10 ................................................... 29
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) ........................................... 32
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 32
Schematic ............................................................... 33
Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 34
CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 37
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 38
ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 43
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 43
BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 44
Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 44
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 45
CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 45
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) ........................................... 49
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 49
Schematic ............................................................... 50
Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 51
CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 54
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 56
ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 62
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ......................... 62
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 63
BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 63
Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 64
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 64
CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 65
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) ........................................... 68
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 68
Schematic ............................................................... 69
Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 70
CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 73
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 74
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
LAN-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ......... 81
ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 82
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ......................... 82
BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 83
Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 83
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ..................................................................... 84
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 84
CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 85
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................... 88
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) ........................................... 89
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 89
Schematic ............................................................... 90
Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 91
CHECK SHEET ...................................................... 94
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 96
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 104
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 105
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 106
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 106
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 107
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 107
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 108
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 108
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 109
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 112
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) ......................................... 113
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 113
Schematic ............................................................. 114
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 115
CHECK SHEET .................................................... 118
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 119
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 126
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 127
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 127
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 128
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 128
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 129
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 129
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 130
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 133
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) ......................................... 134
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 134
Schematic ............................................................. 135
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 136
CHECK SHEET .................................................... 139
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 141
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 149
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 150
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 150
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 151
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 151
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 152
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 152
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 153
Revision: March 2005
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 154
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 157
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) .......................................... 158
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.158
Schematic ............................................................. 159
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 160
CHECK SHEET .................................................... 163
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 165
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 174
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 175
ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 176
TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 176
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 177
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 177
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 178
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check .................................................................... 178
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 179
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 180
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 183
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) .......................................... 184
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.184
Schematic ............................................................. 185
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 186
CHECK SHEET .................................................... 189
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 191
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 200
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 201
ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 202
TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 202
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 203
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 203
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 204
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check .................................................................... 204
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 205
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 206
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 209
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) .......................................... 210
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.210
Schematic ............................................................. 211
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 212
CHECK SHEET .................................................... 215
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 217
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 227
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ....... 228
ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 229
TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 229
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 230
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 230
BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 231
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 231
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
LAN-2
2005 Altima
Check ................................................................... 232
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 232
CAN Communication Circuit Check ..................... 233
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 236
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) ....................................... 237
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 237
Schematic ............................................................ 238
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ....................................... 239
CHECK SHEET .................................................... 242
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 244
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector ................................................................... 254
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ...... 255
ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 256
TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 256
Display Control Unit Circuit Check ....................... 257
Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 257
BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 258
Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 258
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Check ................................................................... 259
IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 259
CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 260
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 263
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
UKS001OF
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
UKS001R6
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1.
–
–
2.
–
–
3.
4.
5.
Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
If YES, GO TO 2.
If NO, GO TO 5.
Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis
results?
If YES, GO TO 3.
If NO, GO TO 4.
Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results.
Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
UKS001OG
CAN SYSTEM
●
●
●
Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement terminals.
Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less.
Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect negative battery terminal before checking the circuit.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-4
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]
Precautions For Harness Repair
UKS001OH
A
CAN SYSTEM
●
Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted
line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in)]
B
C
D
PKIA0306E
●
E
Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts.
(The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics
of twisted line will be lost.)
F
G
H
PKIA0307E
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-5
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors
PFP:00004
UKS001YO
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
●
●
●
CAN communication line is open. (CAN H, CAN L, or both)
CAN communication line is shorted. (Ground, between CAN lines, or other harnesses)
The areas related to CAN communication of unit is malfunctioning.
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
●
●
●
Removal and installation of parts : When the units that perform CAN communication or the sensors
related to CAN communication are removed and installed, malfunction may be detected (or DTC other
than CAN communication may be detected).
Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may be stopped at such time.
Low voltage : If the voltage decreases because of battery discharge when IGN is ON, malfunction may be
detected by self-diagnosis according to the units.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-6
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB0596E
●
●
●
●
●
Step 1 : Refer to LAN-8, "SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE)" .
Step 2 : Refer to LAN-9, "ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II" .
Step 3 : Refer to LAN-10, "HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE" .
Step 4 : Refer to LAN-11, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced" .
Step 5 : Check and repair according to system diagnosis.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-7
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
Diagnosis Procedure
UKS001YP
SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE)
Determine CAN system type from the equipment of the vehicle to select applicable check sheet.
SKIB0597E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-8
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II
Attach the data acquired by CONSULT-II on the check sheet determined according to CAN system type.(For
display control unit, transfer the data from the LCD monitor screen of the vehicle to the CAN diagnosis support
monitor check sheet AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" .)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
SKIB0598E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-9
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE
SKIB0616E
1.
2.
Unit names displayed on CONSULT-II
“No indication” : Put a check mark to it if the unit name described in step 1 is not displayed on “SELECT
SYSTEM” screen of CONSULT-II. (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II via CAN communication line)
“–” : Column not used (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II excluding CAN communication line)
3. “NG” : Display “NG” when malfunction is detected in the initial diagnosis of the diagnosed unit. Replace
the unit if “NG” is displayed.
“–” : Column not used (Initial diagnosis is not performed.)
4. “UNKWN” : Display “UNKWN” when the diagnosed unit does not transmit the data normally. Put a check
mark to it if “UNKWN” is displayed on CONSULT-II.
5. “UNKWN” : Display “UNKWN” when the diagnosed unit does not receive the data normally. Put a check
mark to it if “UNKWN” is displayed on CONSULT-II.
“–” : Column not used (It is not necessary for CAN communication trouble diagnosis.)
NOTE:
CAN communication diagnosis checks if CAN communication works normally. (Contents of data are not diagnosed.)
●
Refer to LAN-11, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced" when the
initial conditions are reproduced.
●
Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced" when
the initial conditions are not reproduced.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-10
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SKIB0617E
1.
2.
3.
I
Put a check mark to “No indication” if some of unit names listed on the column of diagnosis system selection screen of a check sheet table are not displayed on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen attached to the check
sheet.
J
NOTE:
Put a check mark to “No indication” of IPDM E/R because IPDM E/R is not displayed on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
LAN
Confirm the unit name that “UNKWN” is displayed from the copy of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen
of “ENGINE” attached to the check sheet, and then put a check mark to the check sheet table.
NOTE:
L
In “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen, “UNKWN” is displayed on “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “ICC”, “IPDM E/R”
and “AWD/4WD/e4WD”. But put a check mark to “VDC/TCS/ABS” and “IPDM E/R” because “UNKWN” is
listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table.
M
Confirm the unit name that “UNKWN” is displayed on the copy of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen
of “TRANSMISSION” as well as “ENGINE”. And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table.
NOTE:
● For “TRANSMISSION”, “UNKWN” is displayed on “VDC/TCS/ABS”. Put a check mark to it.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-11
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
SKIB0618E
4.
Display control unit reads the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B) AV-131, "CAN Communication Line Check" transferred from the LCD monitor screen(A). The transferred CAN diagnosis support
monitor check sheet is copied to the Check sheet, and conversed according to the Display control unit
Translation Sheet. And then put a check mark to the check sheet table.
NOTE:
In the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B), check marks are put to “CAN CIRC 4”, “CAN CIRC
6”, “CAN CIRC 7”, “CAN CIRC 8” and “CAN CIRC 9”. But, in the column of the check sheet table indication in Display control unit Translation Sheet (C), “IPDM E/R” is listed only for “CAN CIRC 7”. Therefore,
put a check mark to “IPDM E/R” because “UNKWN” is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the
check sheet table.
SKIB0619E
5.
Confirm the unit name that “UNKWN” is displayed on the copy of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” screen
of “BCM” and “ABS” as well as “ENGINE”. And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-12
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
NOTE:
● For “BCM”, “UNKWN” is displayed on “IPDM E/R”. Put a check mark to it.
● For “ABS”, “UNKWN” is displayed on “ECM” and “TCM”. Put a check mark to it.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
SKIB0620E
NOTE:
There is a check mark in VDC/TCS/ABS of “A/T” in “The arranged results of CAN diagnosis support monitor”
sheet. Also, there is a mark of “–” both in VDC/TCS/ABS of “A/T” in the check sheet results (example). Therefore, neglect a check mark both in VDC/TCS/ABS of “A/T” in “The arranged results of CAN diagnosis support
monitor” sheet.
6. Perform system diagnosis for possible causes identified.
7. Perform diagnosis again after inspection and repair. Make sure that repair is completely performed, and
then end the procedure.
Start CAN system trouble diagnosis if this procedure can be confirmed. LAN-21, "CAN Communication Unit"
Revision: March 2005
LAN-13
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced
SKIB0621E
1.
See “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of all units attached to the check sheet. If “CAN COMM CIRCUIT”, “CAN
COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” or “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]” is displayed, put a check mark to the applicable column of self-diagnostic results of the check sheet table.
NOTE:
● For “ENGINE”, “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]” are displayed. Put a check mark to it.
● For “BCM”, “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
● For “ABS”, “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
● For “IPDM E/R”, “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-14
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
SKIB0622E
J
NOTE:
There is a case that some of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” and “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” are not needed for
diagnosis. In the case, “UNKWN” and “CAN COMM CIRCUIT(U1000)” in “Check sheet results (example)” LAN
change to “–”. Then, ignore check marks on the Check sheet table.
2. For the selected possible causes, it is expected that malfunctions have been found in the past.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-15
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
UKS001YQ
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ECM
SKIB0591E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
ENGINE
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
Present
INITIAL DIAG
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
TCM
Make sure of normal reception from TCM.
OK/UNKWN
VDC/TCS/ABS
Make sure of normal reception from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
OK/UNKWN
METER/M&A
Make sure of normal reception from combination meter.
OK/UNKWN
ICC
ICC is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
BCM/SEC
Make sure of normal reception from BCM.
OK/UNKWN
IPDM E/R
Make sure of normal reception from IPDM E/R.
OK/UNKWN
AWD/4WD/e4WD
AWD/4WD/e4WD is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
EPS
EPS is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-16
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR TCM
4A/T models
A
B
C
SKIB0628E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
A/T
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
D
Present
E
INITIAL DIAG
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
ECM
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN
VDC/TCS/ABS
VDC/TCS/ABS is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
METER/M&A
Make sure of normal reception from combination meter.
OK/UNKWN
ICC/e4WD
ICC/e4WD is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
F
G
Display Results (Present)
H
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
I
5A/T models
J
LAN
L
SKIB0592E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
TRANSMISSION
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
Present
INITIAL DIAG
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
ECM
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN
VDC/TCS/ABS
Make sure of normal reception from ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
OK/UNKWN
METER/M&A
Make sure of normal reception from combination meter.
OK/UNKWN
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-17
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN
FOR BCM
SKIB0593E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
BCM
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
Present
INITIAL DIAG
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
ECM
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN
IPDM E/R
Make sure of normal reception from IPDM E/R.
OK/UNKWN
METER/M&A
Make sure of normal reception from combination meter.
OK/UNKWN
I-KEY
I-KEY is not diagnosed.
OK
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
ABS models
PKIA8949E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
ABS
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
Present
INITIAL DIAG
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
ECM
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-18
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
TCS models
A
B
C
SKIB0594E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
ABS
D
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
Present
INITIAL DIAG
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
ECM
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN
TCM
Make sure of normal reception from TCM.
OK/UNKWN
E
F
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
G
H
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN
FOR IPDM E/R
I
J
SKIB0595E
“SELECT SYSTEM”
screen
IPDM E/R
“CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR” screen
Description
Present
TRANSMIT DIAG
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN/–
ECM
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN/–
BCM/SEC
Make sure of normal reception from BCM.
OK/UNKWN/–
Past
L
OK/0/1~39/–
M
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
●
– : There is no received unit or the unit is not in the condition that reception diagnosis is performed
Display Results (Past)
●
OK : Normal
●
0 : There is malfunction now.
●
1 ~ 39 : Displays when it is normal at present and finds malfunction in the past. It increases like 0→1→2...38→39 after returning to
the normal condition whenever IGN OFF→ON. If it is over 39, it is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnostic results are erased. It returns to
0 when malfunction is detected again in the process.
●
– : Undiagnosed
Revision: March 2005
LAN-19
LAN
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
[CAN]
DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN
FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
SKIB0645E
Unit name
Display control unit
Diagnosis item
Description
“CAN DIAG
SUPPORT
MONITOR”
screen
CAN COMM
Make sure that microcomputer in ECU works normally.
OK/NG
CAN CIRC 1
Make sure of normal transmission.
OK/UNKWN
CAN CIRC 2
Make sure of normal reception from BCM.
OK/UNKWN
CAN CIRC 3
Make sure of normal reception from ECM.
OK/UNKWN
CAN CIRC 4
CAN CIRC 4 is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
CAN CIRC 5
Make sure of normal reception from combination meter.
OK/UNKWN
CAN CIRC 6
CAN CIRC 6 is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
CAN CIRC 7
Make sure of normal reception from IPDM E/R.
OK/UNKWN
CAN CIRC 8
CAN CIRC 8 is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
CAN CIRC 9
CAN CIRC 9 is not diagnosed.
UNKWN
Error counter
(Reference)
0/1~50
Display Results (Present)
●
OK : Normal
●
NG : Malfunction
●
UNKWN : The diagnosed unit does not transmit or receive the applicable data normally.
●
– : There is no received unit or the unit is not in the condition that reception diagnosis is performed.
Display Results : Error Counter (Reference)
●
0 : It is normal now.
●
1 ~ 50 : Displays when it finds malfunction in the past even if it is normal or there is a malfunction at present. Also, displays when
diagnosis is not performed. It increase like 0→1→2...49→50 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF→ON. If it is
over 50, it is fixed to 50 until the self-diagnostic results are erased. Keep this condition until resetting it.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-20
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
A
UKS001OC
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
Body type
D
Sedan
Axle
2WD
QR25DE
E
VQ35DE
Transmission
Brake control
C
UKS001OE
Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table.
Engine
B
QR25DE
VQ35DE
4A/T
5A/T
M/T
No
ABS
ABS
No ABS
ABS
×
TCS
×
ABS
×
ABS
TCS
×
ABS
TCS
×
×
CAN system type
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
9
10
CAN system trouble diagnosis
LAN-37
LAN
-49
LAN
-32
LAN
-54
LAN
-73
LAN
-94
LAN
-118
LAN
-134
LAN
-113
LAN
-139
LAN
-163
LAN
-189
LAN
-215
LAN
-242
Navigation system
×
No ABS
F
G
H
×: Applicable
Vehicles equipped with TCS can be identified by the presence of a
TCS ON/OFF switch.
I
J
LAN
SKIB0626E
L
TYPE1/TYPE2
System diagram
●
Type1
M
SKIB0535E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-21
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
●
Type2
SKIB0536E
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Combination
meter
ECM
Display control
unit*
Engine speed signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
T
R
Signals
Fuel consumption monitor signal
BCM
IPDM E/R
R
R
T
A/C switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor signal
R
T
A/C compressor request signal
T
R
Blower fan switch signal
R
Cooling fan motor operation signal
R
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
T
T
R
Position lights request
T
Low beam request
T
Low beam status
T
T
R
R
T
R
R
T
Front fog light request
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
R
High beam request
High beam status
R
R
R
T
Oil pressure switch signal
R
T
Sleep request1
T
Sleep request2
T
Seat belt buckle switch signal
R
T
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
Buzzer output signal
T
R
Trunk switch signal
T
R
Wiper stop position signal
R
T
Rear window defogger switch signal
T
R
R
T
Door switch signal
Rear window defogger control signal
Revision: March 2005
R
R
R
LAN-22
R
R
R
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
Display control
unit*
BCM
Combination
meter
IPDM E/R
Hood switch signal
R
T
Theft warning horn status signal
R
T
Distance to empty signal
R
T
Fuel level low warning signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
A
B
C
D
E
NOTE:
*:Navigation system only
F
TYPE3/TYPE4
System diagram
●
TYPE3
G
H
I
J
LAN
SKIB0537E
●
L
TYPE4
M
SKIB0538E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-23
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Combination
meter
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
R
R
ECM
Display control unit*
Engine speed signal
T
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
T
R
Signals
Fuel consumption monitor signal
BCM
R
IPDM E/R
T
A/C switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor signal
R
T
A/C compressor request signal
T
R
Cooling fan motor operation signal
R
T
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
R
Position lights request
T
Low beam request
T
Low beam status
R
T
T
R
R
R
T
Front fog light request
T
R
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
High beam request
High beam status
R
R
R
R
Oil pressure switch signal
T
T
R
T
Sleep request1
T
Sleep request2
T
Seat belt buckle switch signal
R
T
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
Buzzer output signal
T
R
Trunk switch signal
T
R
Wiper stop position signal
R
T
Door switch signal
R
Rear window defogger switch signal
R
R
R
T
R
R
T
Hood switch signal
R
T
Theft warning horn status signal
R
T
Rear window defogger control signal
R
R
Distance to empty signal
R
T
Fuel level low warning signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
Blower fan switch signal
R
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
NOTE:
*:Navigation system only
Revision: March 2005
LAN-24
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE5/TYPE6
System diagram
●
A
TYPE5
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB0539E
●
TYPE6
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB0540E
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ECM
TCM
Display control unit*
BCM
R
Combination
meter
Engine speed signal
T
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
T
R
Fuel consumption monitor signal
R
R
T
A/T check indicator lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
A/C switch signal
R
IPDM E/R
T
A/C compressor signal
R
T
A/C compressor request signal
T
R
Blower fan switch signal
R
Cooling fan motor operation signal
R
Revision: March 2005
T
T
LAN-25
2005 Altima
M
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
BCM
Combination
meter
IPDM E/R
Position lights request
T
R
R
Low beam request
T
Signals
Cooling fan speed request signal
Low beam status
ECM
TCM
Display control unit*
T
R
R
T
High beam request
High beam status
T
R
R
R
T
Front fog light request
Vehicle speed signal
R
T
R
R
R
Oil pressure switch signal
R
T
R
T
Sleep request1
T
Sleep request2
T
Seat belt buckle switch signal
R
T
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
Buzzer output signal
T
R
Trunk switch signal
T
R
Wiper stop position signal
R
T
Rear window defogger switch signal
T
R
R
T
Hood switch signal
R
T
Theft warning horn status signal
R
T
Door switch signal
Rear window defogger control signal
R
R
R
R
R
Distance to empty signal
R
T
Fuel level low warning signal
R
T
R
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
3rd position switch signal
R
Closed throttle position signal
T
R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
R
Stop lamp switch signal
Engine and A/T integrated control
signal
R
T
R
R
T
T
T
A/T self-diagnosis signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
NOTE:
*:Navigation system only
Revision: March 2005
LAN-26
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
TYPE7/TYPE9
System diagram
●
A
TYPE7
B
C
D
E
F
SKIB0541E
●
TYPE9
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB0542E
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
ECM
TCM
Display
control
unit*
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Signals
BCM
Combination meter
R
R
R
T
A/T warning lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
R
A/C switch signal
R
A/C compressor signal
R
Revision: March 2005
IPDM E/R
R
T
Fuel consumption monitor signal
ABS operation signal
ABS actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
T
T
T
LAN-27
2005 Altima
M
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Display
control
unit*
BCM
Combination meter
ABS actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
IPDM E/R
A/C compressor request signal
T
R
Cooling fan motor operation signal
R
T
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
R
Position lights request
T
Low beam request
T
Low beam status
R
T
T
R
R
R
T
Front fog light request
T
R
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
High beam request
High beam status
R
R
R
R
R
Oil pressure switch signal
T
R
Sleep request1
T
Sleep request2
T
Seat belt buckle switch signal
T
T
R
R
R
T
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
Buzzer output signal
T
R
Trunk switch signal
T
R
Wiper stop position signal
R
T
Rear window defogger switch signal
T
R
R
T
Door switch signal
Rear window defogger control signal
R
R
R
R
Hood switch signal
R
T
Theft warning horn status signal
R
T
Distance to empty signal
R
T
Fuel level low warning signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
T
R
Horn chirp signal
T
R
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request signal
T
R
T
R
Manual mode indicator signal
Electric throttle control signal
T
Stop lamp switch signal
R
R
T
Blower fan switch signal
R
A/T self-diagnostic signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
Revision: March 2005
T
LAN-28
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
NOTE:
*:Navigation system only
A
TYPE8/TYPE10
System diagram
●
B
TYPE8
C
D
E
F
G
SKIB0541E
●
TYPE10
H
I
J
LAN
L
SKIB0542E
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
ECM
TCM
Display
control
unit*
Engine speed signal
T
R
R
Engine coolant temperature signal
T
R
Accelerator pedal position signal
T
Signals
Fuel consumption monitor signal
BCM
Combination meter
ABS actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
T
A/T warning lamp signal
T
R
A/T position indicator signal
T
R
Revision: March 2005
IPDM E/R
LAN-29
R
2005 Altima
M
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
ABS operation signal
TCM
Display
control
unit*
BCM
Combination meter
R
ABS actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
IPDM E/R
T
A/C switch signal
R
T
A/C compressor signal
R
T
A/C compressor request signal
T
R
Cooling fan motor operation signal
R
T
Cooling fan speed request signal
T
R
Position lights request
T
Low beam request
Low beam status
T
R
T
T
R
R
R
T
Front fog light request
T
R
R
Vehicle speed signal
R
R
High beam request
High beam status
R
R
R
R
R
Oil pressure switch signal
T
T
R
T
Sleep request1
T
Sleep request2
T
Seat belt buckle switch signal
R
T
T
R
Turn indicator signal
T
R
Buzzer output signal
T
R
Trunk switch signal
T
R
Wiper stop position signal
R
T
Rear window defogger switch signal
T
R
R
T
Hood switch signal
R
T
Theft warning horn status signal
R
T
Door switch signal
Rear window defogger control signal
R
R
R
R
R
Distance to empty signal
R
T
Fuel level low warning signal
R
T
Theft warning horn request signal
Horn chirp signal
ASCD operation signal
T
R
ASCD OD cancel request signal
T
R
Manual mode indicator signal
Electric throttle control signal
Stop lamp switch signal
Blower fan switch signal
T
R
T
R
T
T
R
R
R
T
R
T
A/T self-diagnosis signal
R
T
Output shaft revolution signal
R
T
Turbine revolution signal
R
T
Fuel level sensor signal
R
T
ASCD SET lamp signal
T
R
Revision: March 2005
R
LAN-30
2005 Altima
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Display
control
unit*
BCM
Combination meter
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
T
R
Malfunction indicator lamp signal
T
R
ABS actuator and
electric unit
(control
unit)
A
IPDM E/R
B
C
NOTE:
*:Navigation system only
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-31
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
UKS001YE
BKIA0023E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-32
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001YF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0118E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-33
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001YG
BKWA0119E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-34
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0120E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-35
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
BKWA0121E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-36
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RW
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8886E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-37
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-43, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8943E
PKIA9032E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-38
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 2
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-43, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8944E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9033E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-39
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-44, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8971E
PKIA9034E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-40
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-44, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8972E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9035E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-41
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-45, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIA8973E
PKIA9036E
Case 6
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-45, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIA8974E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-42
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001YH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
connector side and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
F
G
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector.
H
I
SKIB0567E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001YI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIA6868E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-43
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001YJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001YK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-44
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001YL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
connector side and harness side).
–
IPDM E/R connector
–
Harness connector E28
–
Harness connector M7
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
F
G
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector.
H
I
SKIA6873E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001YM
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
L
–
ECM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
M
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-45
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
SKIA6865E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
SKIB0571E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
Revision: March 2005
LAN-46
SKIA6868E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
B
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
C
D
SKIA6874E
E
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
G
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
I
SKIA6873E
J
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
LAN
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
M
SKIA6879E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-47
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
[CAN]
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-48
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
A
UKS001Y3
B
C
D
E
F
BKIA0025E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-49
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001Y4
BKWA0114E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-50
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001Y5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0115E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-51
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
BKWA0116E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-52
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0117E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-53
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RV
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
PKIA8887E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-54
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
PKIA8897E
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-55
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-62, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8901E
PKIA9037E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-56
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 2
A
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-62, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8902E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9038E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-57
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-63, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIA8903E
PKIA9039E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-58
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-63, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8904E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9040E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-59
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-64, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIA8905E
PKIA9041E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-60
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-64, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8906E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9042E
J
Case 7
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-65, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
LAN
L
M
PKIA8907E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-61
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001Y6
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
connector side and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector.
SKIB0567E
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001Y7
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and display
control unit.
SKIA6884E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-62
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001Y8
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
F
G
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
H
UKS001Y9
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and J
harness side).
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-63
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001YA
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001YB
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
connector side and harness side).
–
IPDM E/R connector
–
Harness connector E28
–
Harness connector M7
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector.
SKIA6873E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-64
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001YC
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
C
D
E
F
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
2.
G
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
H
: Continuity should not exist.
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
J
LAN
SKIA6865E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
L
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
SKIB0571E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-65
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
Display control unit connector
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display
control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
SKIA6868E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
SKIA6874E
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
SKIA6873E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-66
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
[CAN]
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
B
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
C
D
SKIA6879E
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
E
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
F
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
G
108 - 132
H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
I
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
J
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
LAN
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
L
UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
10.
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-67
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
UKS001XR
BKIA0024E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-68
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001XS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0110E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-69
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001XT
BKWA0111E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-70
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0112E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-71
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
BKWA0113E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-72
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RU
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8888E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-73
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” , replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN-81,
"Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" .
PKIA8976E
PKIA9043E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-74
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 2
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-82, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8977E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9044E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-75
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-82, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIA8978E
PKIA9045E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-76
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-83, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8979E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9046E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-77
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-83, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIA8980E
PKIA9047E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-78
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-84, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
PKIA8981E
E
F
G
H
I
J
PKIA9048E
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-79
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-84, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIA8982E
PKIA9049E
Case 8
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-85, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIA8983E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-80
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-88, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
PKIA8984E
E
Case 10
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-88, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" .
F
G
H
I
PKIA8985E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit)
UKS001XU
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
L
–
Harness connector M7
–
Harness connector E28
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M7.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P).
6 (L) - 10 (L)
14 (P) - 9 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0565E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-81
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10
(L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P).
10 (L) - 30 (L)
9 (P) - 29 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0566E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001XV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
connector side and harness side).
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector.
SKIB0567E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001XW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-82
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001XX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
I
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
LAN
L
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001XY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-83
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001XZ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P).
30 (L) - 29 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
SKIB0570E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001Y0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-84
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
B
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
C
D
SKIA6873E
E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001Y1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
2.
H
I
J
L
M
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
SKIA6865E
Revision: March 2005
G
LAN
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
F
LAN-85
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
SKIB0571E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
SKIA6868E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
Revision: March 2005
LAN-86
SKIA6874E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
B
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM
E/R
C
D
SKIA6873E
E
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
F
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
G
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R
H
I
SKIA6879E
J
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
LAN
L
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
M
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-87
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)
[CAN]
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001Y2
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: March 2005
LAN-88
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
A
UKS001VN
B
C
D
E
F
BKIA0026E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-89
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001VO
BKWA0106E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-90
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001VP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0107E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-91
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
BKWA0108E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-92
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0109E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-93
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RT
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
PKIA8889E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-94
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
PKIA8898E
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-95
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN104, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" .
PKIA8909E
PKIA9050E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-96
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 2
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-105, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8910E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9051E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-97
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIA8911E
PKIA9052E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-98
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8912E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9053E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-99
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8913E
PKIA9054E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-100
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8914E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9055E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-101
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIA8915E
PKIA9056E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-102
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8916E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9057E
L
Case 9
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-109, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
M
PKIA8917E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-103
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-112, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA8918E
Case 11
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-112, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA8919E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit)
UKS001VQ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M7
–
Harness connector E28
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-104
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect harness connector M7.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P).
6 (L) - 10 (L)
14 (P) - 9 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
SKIB0565E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10
(L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P).
10 (L) - 30 (L)
9 (P) - 29 (P)
F
G
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
SKIB0566E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001VR
J
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
connector side and harness side).
L
–
ECM connector
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-105
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and data link connector.
SKIB0567E
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001VS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and display
control unit.
SKIA6884E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001VT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-106
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001VU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
I
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
LAN
L
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001VV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-107
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001VW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P).
30 (L) - 29 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
SKIB0570E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001VX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-108
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
B
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
C
D
SKIA6873E
E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001VY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
H
I
J
LAN
M
: Continuity should not exist.
SKIA6865E
LAN-109
G
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
Revision: March 2005
F
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
F59.
SKIB0571E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
Display control unit connector
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display
control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
SKIA6868E
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
Revision: March 2005
LAN-110
SKIA6874E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
B
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM
E/R
C
D
SKIA6873E
E
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
F
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
G
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R
H
I
SKIA6879E
J
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
LAN
L
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
M
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-111
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)
[CAN]
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001VZ
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: March 2005
LAN-112
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
A
UKS001VB
B
C
D
E
F
BKIA0027E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-113
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001VC
BKWA0098E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-114
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001VD
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0099E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-115
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
BKWA0100E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-116
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0101E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-117
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RS
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
PKIA8890E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-118
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-126, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
B
C
D
E
PKIA8986E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9058E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-119
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-127, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8987E
PKIA9059E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-120
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 3
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-127, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8988E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9060E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-121
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-128, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIA8989E
PKIA9061E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-122
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-128, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8990E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9062E
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-123
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-129, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIA8991E
PKIA9063E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-124
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-129, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
PKIA8992E
E
F
G
H
I
PKIA9064E
J
Case 8
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-130, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
LAN
L
M
PKIA8993E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-125
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-133, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA8994E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001VE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L), 6 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22
(P).
5 (L) - 23 (L)
6 (P) - 22 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0623E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L),
22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
23 (L) - 6 (L)
22 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0564E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-126
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001VF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
ECM.
G
H
SKIB0567E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001VG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
L
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (P).
5 (L) - 6 (P)
M
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
TCM.
SKIB0624E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-127
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001VH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001VI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-128
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001VJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
D
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
C
E
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
F
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
G
H
SKIB0569E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001VK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
I
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
LAN
–
IPDM E/R connector
–
Harness connector E28
–
Harness connector M7
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
M
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector.
SKIA6873E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-129
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001VL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
TCM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
TCM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
SKIA6865E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
Revision: March 2005
LAN-130
SKIB0571E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
A
Disconnect following connectors.
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
C
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
D
E
SKIA6868E
G
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
F
H
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
I
J
SKIA6874E
LAN
L
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
SKIA6873E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-131
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
SKIA6879E
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
TCM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-132
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)
[CAN]
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001VM
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-133
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
UKS001T6
BKIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-134
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001T7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0094E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-135
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001T8
BKWA0095E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-136
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0096E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-137
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
BKWA0097E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-138
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RR
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8891E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-139
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
PKIA8899E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-140
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-149, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
PKIA8920E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9065E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-141
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-150, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8921E
PKIA9066E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-142
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 3
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-150, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8922E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9067E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-143
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-151, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIA8923E
PKIA9068E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-144
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-151, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8924E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9069E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-145
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-152, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8925E
PKIA9070E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-146
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-152, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8926E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9071E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-147
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-153, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIA8927E
PKIA9072E
Case 9
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-154, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIA8928E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-148
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-157, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8929E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001T9
G
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L), 6 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22
(P).
5 (L) - 23 (L)
6 (P) - 22 (P)
J
LAN
M
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
SKIB0623E
LAN-149
I
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
Revision: March 2005
H
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L),
22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
23 (L) - 6 (L)
22 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0564E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001TA
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
ECM.
SKIB0567E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001TB
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-150
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (P).
5 (L) - 6 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
TCM.
C
D
SKIB0624E
E
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001TC
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and display
control unit.
LAN
L
SKIA6884E
M
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001TD
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-151
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001TE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001TF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-152
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
SKIB0569E
E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001TG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
–
IPDM E/R connector
–
Harness connector E28
–
Harness connector M7
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
I
LAN
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and data link connector.
M
SKIA6873E
Revision: March 2005
G
J
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
F
LAN-153
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001TH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
TCM
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
TCM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
SKIA6865E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
Revision: March 2005
LAN-154
SKIB0571E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
A
Disconnect following connectors.
Display control unit connector
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
C
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display
control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
D
E
F
SKIA6868E
G
H
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
I
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
J
LAN
SKIA6874E
M
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
SKIA6873E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-155
L
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
SKIA6879E
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-156
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)
[CAN]
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
A
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
TCM
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
B
C
D
E
F
G
UKS001TI
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-157
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
UKS001SS
BKIA0028E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-158
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001ST
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0331E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-159
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001SU
BKWA0087E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-160
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0088E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-161
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
BKWA0089E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-162
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RQ
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8892E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-163
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
PKIA8900E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-164
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-174, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
PKIA8995E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9073E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-165
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN175, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" .
PKIA8996E
PKIA9074E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-166
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 3
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-176, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8997E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9075E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-167
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-176, "TCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8998E
PKIA9076E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-168
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-177, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8999E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9077E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-169
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-177, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA9000E
PKIA9078E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-170
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-178, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9001E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9079E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-171
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-178, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIA9002E
PKIA9080E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-172
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-179, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9003E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9081E
L
Case 10
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-180, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
M
PKIA9004E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-173
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-183, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA9005E
Case 12
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-183, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA9006E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001SV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-174
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22
(P).
3 (L) - 23 (L)
4 (P) - 22 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
SKIB0563E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L),
22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
23 (L) - 6 (L)
22 (P) - 14 (P)
F
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
SKIB0564E
I
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit)
UKS001SW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
J
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
L
–
Harness connector M7
–
Harness connector E28
OK or NG
M
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M7.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P).
6 (L) - 10 (L)
14 (P) - 9 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0565E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-175
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10
(L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P).
10 (L) - 30 (L)
9 (P) - 29 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0566E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001SX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
ECM.
SKIB0567E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001SY
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-176
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
TCM.
C
D
SKIB0568E
E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001SZ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
F
G
H
I
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
LAN
L
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001T0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-177
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001T1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001T2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-178
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P).
30 (L) - 29 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
C
D
SKIB0570E
E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001T3
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
LAN
L
SKIA6873E
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-179
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001T4
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
TCM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
TCM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
SKIA6865E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
Revision: March 2005
LAN-180
SKIB0571E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
A
Disconnect following connectors.
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
C
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
D
E
SKIA6868E
G
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
F
H
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
I
J
SKIA6874E
LAN
L
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM
E/R
Revision: March 2005
LAN-181
SKIA6873E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R
SKIA6879E
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-182
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)
[CAN]
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
A
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
TCM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
B
C
D
E
F
G
UKS001T5
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-183
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
UKS001SE
BKIA0028E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-184
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001SF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0331E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-185
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001SG
BKWA0192E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-186
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0193E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-187
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
BKWA0194E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-188
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RP
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8893E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-189
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
PKIA8900E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-190
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-200, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
PKIA9007E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9073E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-191
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN201, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" .
PKIA9008E
PKIA9074E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-192
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 3
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9009E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9075E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-193
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "TCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA9010E
PKIA9076E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-194
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9011E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9077E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-195
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA9012E
PKIA9078E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-196
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9013E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9079E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-197
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIA9014E
PKIA9080E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-198
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 9
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-205, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9015E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9081E
L
Case 10
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-206, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
M
PKIA9016E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-199
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
Case 11
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-209, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA9017E
Case 12
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-209, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA9018E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001SH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-200
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22
(P).
3 (L) - 23 (L)
4 (P) - 22 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
SKIB0563E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L),
22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
23 (L) - 6 (L)
22 (P) - 14 (P)
F
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
SKIB0564E
I
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit)
UKS001SI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
J
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
L
–
Harness connector M7
–
Harness connector E28
OK or NG
M
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M7.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P).
6 (L) - 10 (L)
14 (P) - 9 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0565E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-201
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10
(L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P).
10 (L) - 30 (L)
9 (P) - 29 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0566E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001SJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
ECM.
SKIB0567E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001SK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-202
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
TCM.
C
D
SKIB0568E
E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001SL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
F
G
H
I
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
LAN
L
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001SM
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-203
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001SN
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001SO
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-204
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P).
30 (L) - 29 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
C
D
SKIB0570E
E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001SP
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
LAN
L
SKIA6873E
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-205
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001SQ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
TCM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
TCM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
SKIA6865E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
Revision: March 2005
LAN-206
SKIB0571E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
A
Disconnect following connectors.
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
C
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
D
E
SKIA6868E
G
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
F
H
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
I
J
SKIA6874E
LAN
L
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
M
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM
E/R
Revision: March 2005
LAN-207
SKIA6873E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R
SKIA6879E
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-208
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)
[CAN]
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
A
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
TCM
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
B
C
D
E
F
G
UKS001SR
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-209
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
UKS001SD
BKIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-210
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001RY
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0082E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-211
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001RZ
BKWA0083E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-212
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0084E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-213
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
BKWA0085E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-214
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RO
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8894E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-215
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
PKIA8900E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-216
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
A
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-227, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
PKIA9019E
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA9082E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-217
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN228, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" .
PKIA9020E
PKIA9083E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-218
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 3
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "ECM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9021E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9084E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-219
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 4
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "TCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA9022E
PKIA9085E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-220
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 5
A
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9023E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9086E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-221
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 6
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
PKIA9024E
PKIA9087E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-222
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 7
A
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "BCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9025E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9088E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-223
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 8
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
PKIA9026E
PKIA9089E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-224
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9027E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9090E
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-225
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 10
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
PKIA9028E
PKIA9091E
Case 11
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-233, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
PKIA9029E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-226
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-236, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA9030E
Case 13
G
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-236, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9031E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001S0
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-227
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22
(P).
3 (L) - 23 (L)
4 (P) - 22 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0563E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L),
22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
23 (L) - 6 (L)
22 (P) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0564E
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit)
UKS001S1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector M7
–
Harness connector E28
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M7.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P).
6 (L) - 10 (L)
14 (P) - 9 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0565E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-228
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10
(L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P).
10 (L) - 30 (L)
9 (P) - 29 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
SKIB0566E
E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001S2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
ECM.
LAN
L
SKIB0567E
M
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001S3
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-229
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
TCM.
SKIB0568E
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001S4
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and display
control unit.
SKIA6884E
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001S5
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-230
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
A
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001S6
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
E
F
G
H
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
I
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
LAN
L
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001S7
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-231
2005 Altima
M
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIB0569E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
UKS001S8
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P).
30 (L) - 29 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
SKIB0570E
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001S9
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-232
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
B
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
C
D
SKIA6873E
E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001SA
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side, G
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
TCM
H
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
I
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
J
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
LAN
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
1.
2.
3.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
L
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
TCM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
Revision: March 2005
M
LAN-233
SKIA6865E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
SKIB0571E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
Display control unit connector
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display
control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
Revision: March 2005
LAN-234
SKIA6868E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
B
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
C
D
SKIA6874E
E
F
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
H
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM
E/R
I
J
SKIA6873E
LAN
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
L
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R
Revision: March 2005
LAN-235
M
SKIA6879E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)
[CAN]
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
TCM
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001SB
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: March 2005
LAN-236
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:23710
A
UKS001SC
B
C
D
E
F
BKIA0030E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-237
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Schematic
UKS001R8
BKWA0082E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-238
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Wiring Diagram - CAN -
UKS001R9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0195E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-239
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
BKWA0196E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-240
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
BKWA0197E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-241
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
UKS001RA
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
PKIA8895E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-242
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
M
PKIA8900E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-243
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on “NG” on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)”, replace the control unit.
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-254, "Circuit Check Between TCM and
Data Link Connector" .
PKIA8930E
PKIA9082E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-244
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 2
Check harness between data link connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN255, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)" .
A
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8931E
G
H
I
J
LAN
L
PKIA9083E
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-245
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 3
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-256, "ECM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8932E
PKIA9084E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-246
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-256, "TCM Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8933E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9085E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-247
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 5
Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-257, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" .
PKIA8934E
PKIA9086E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-248
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 6
A
Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-257, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8935E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9087E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-249
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 7
Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-258, "BCM Circuit Check" .
PKIA8936E
PKIA9088E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-250
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 8
A
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-258, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8937E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9089E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-251
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 9
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-259, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Check" .
PKIA8938E
PKIA9090E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-252
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 10
A
Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-259, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" .
B
C
D
E
F
PKIA8939E
G
H
I
J
LAN
PKIA9091E
L
Case 11
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-260, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" .
M
PKIA8940E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-253
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Case 12
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-263, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA8941E
Case 13
Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-263, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay
Circuit Check" .
PKIA8942E
Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector
UKS001RB
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
–
Harness connector F59
–
Harness connector M71
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-254
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F59.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector F59 terminals 23 (L), 22
(P).
3 (L) - 23 (L)
4 (P) - 22 (P)
B
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
D
SKIB0563E
E
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector M71 terminals 23 (L),
22 (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P).
23 (L) - 6 (L)
22 (P) - 14 (P)
F
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
H
SKIB0564E
I
Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit)
UKS001RC
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
J
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
LAN
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
L
–
Harness connector M7
–
Harness connector E28
OK or NG
M
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect harness connector M7.
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L), 14 (P) and harness connector M7 terminals 10 (L), 9 (P).
6 (L) - 10 (L)
14 (P) - 9 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0565E
Revision: March 2005
LAN-255
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check continuity between harness connector E28 terminals 10
(L), 9 (P) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L), 29 (P).
10 (L) - 30 (L)
9 (P) - 29 (P)
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0566E
ECM Circuit Check
UKS001RD
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.
Check resistance between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
ECM.
SKIB0567E
TCM Circuit Check
UKS001RE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-256
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector F56 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P).
3 (L) - 4 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector F59 and
TCM.
C
D
SKIB0568E
E
Display Control Unit Circuit Check
UKS001RI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect display control unit connector.
Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P).
25 (L) - 26 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display control unit.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and display
control unit.
LAN
L
SKIA6884E
M
Data Link Connector Circuit Check
UKS001RF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-257
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L)
and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-6, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
SKIA6868E
BCM Circuit Check
UKS001RH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P).
39 (L) - 40 (P)
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and BCM.
SKIA6869E
Combination Meter Circuit Check
UKS001RG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-258
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (P).
26 (L) - 27 (P)
B
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
C
D
SKIB0569E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check
E
UKS001RJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
G
H
I
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (P).
30 (L) - 29 (P)
F
J
: Approx. 54 - 66Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
LAN
L
SKIB0570E
M
IPDM E/R Circuit Check
UKS001RK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LAN-259
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Approx. 108 - 132Ω
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG
>> Repair harness between harness connector E28 and
IPDM E/R.
SKIA6873E
CAN Communication Circuit Check
UKS001RL
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, and harness side).
–
ECM
–
TCM
–
Display control unit
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
–
IPDM E/R
–
Between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
2.
Disconnect following connectors.
ECM connector
TCM connector
Harness connector F59
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P).
94 (L) - 86 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
Revision: March 2005
LAN-260
SKIA6865E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F54 terminals 94
(L), 86 (P) and ground.
94 (L) - Ground
86 (P) - Ground
B
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between ECM and harness connector F59
● Harness between TCM and harness connector F59
C
D
SKIB0571E
4. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
–
–
–
–
2.
E
Disconnect following connectors.
Display control unit connector
BCM connector
Combination meter connector
Harness connector M7
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6
(L) and 14 (P).
6 (L) - 14 (P)
F
G
H
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display
control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
I
J
SKIA6868E
LAN
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LAN-261
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
5. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L),
14 (P) and ground.
6 (L) - Ground
14 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between data link connector and harness
connector M71
● Harness between data link connector and Display control unit
● Harness between data link connector and BCM
● Harness between data link connector and combination meter
● Harness between data link connector and harness connector M7
SKIA6874E
6. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121
terminals 48 (L) and 49 (P).
48 (L) - 49 (P)
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM
E/R
SKIA6873E
7. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminals 48 (L), 49 (P) and ground.
48 (L) - Ground
49 (P) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check the following harnesses. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
● Harness between harness connector E28 and ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Harness between harness connector E28 and IPDM E/R
Revision: March 2005
LAN-262
SKIA6879E
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
8. ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle.
Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
IPDM E/R
48 - 49
B
Resistance value (Ω)
(Approx.)
C
108 - 132
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or IPDM E/R.
LKIA0037E
E
9. CHECK SYMPTOM
1. Full in described symptoms on the column “Symptom” in the check sheet.
2. Connect all connectors, and then make sure that the symptom is reproduced.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Refer to LAN-14, "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced"
.
10. UNIT REPRODUCIBILITY INSPECTION
F
G
H
Perform the following procedure for each unit, and then perform reproducibility test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
I
2. Disconnect battery cable at negative terminal.
3. Disconnect the unit connector.
J
4. Connect battery cable at negative terminal.
5. Make sure that the symptom filled in the “Symptom” of the check sheet is reproduced. (Do not confuse it
with the symptom related to removed unit.)
LAN
6. Make sure that the same symptom is reproduced.
–
TCM
–
Display control unit
L
–
BCM
–
Combination meter
–
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
M
–
ECM
–
IPDM E/R
Inspection results
Reproduced>>Install removed unit, and then check the other unit.
Not reproduced>>Replace removed unit.
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check
UKS001RM
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
●
IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-25, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" .
●
Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-12, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START" .
Revision: March 2005
LAN-263
2005 Altima
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)
[CAN]
Revision: March 2005
LAN-264
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
LT
LIGHTING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
General precautions for service operations ............. 4
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4
HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ............................................ 6
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6
System Description .................................................. 6
OUTLINE ............................................................... 6
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL .............................. 7
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................... 7
XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED) .................. 7
CAN Communication System Description ................ 8
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — ................................. 9
HALOGEN ............................................................. 9
XENON ................................................................11
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 13
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ..... 14
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 14
Preliminary Check .................................................. 14
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 14
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 16
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 16
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 17
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 17
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 18
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 18
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 19
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 19
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ..... 20
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....... 22
High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate ... 23
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 23
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ...... 25
Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF ................................ 26
One Xenon Headlamp Does Not Illuminate At Full
Brightness .............................................................. 27
One Xenon Headlamp Flickers .............................. 27
Revision: March 2005
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 28
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM ........................... 28
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 29
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
(XENON) ............................................................. 29
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
(HALOGEN) ........................................................ 29
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM... 30
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP ............................ 30
Removal and Installation ........................................ 30
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 31
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 31
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 32
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT
SYSTEM - .................................................................. 33
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 33
System Description ................................................. 33
HEADLAMP OPERATION ................................... 34
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ............................. 35
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................. 35
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION ........................... 35
XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED) ................. 35
OPERATION ........................................................ 35
CAN Communication System Description .............. 36
Schematic ............................................................... 37
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — ................................... 38
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 41
Preliminary Check .................................................. 41
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 41
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 42
Removal and Installation of Daytime Light Control
Unit ......................................................................... 43
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM ............................................. 44
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 44
System Description ................................................. 44
OUTLINE ............................................................. 44
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ............................. 45
SHUT OFF DELAY .............................................. 45
CAN Communication System Description .............. 45
Major Components and Functions .......................... 45
LT-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L — ................................ 46
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 48
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 49
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 50
Preliminary Check .................................................. 50
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS ....................... 50
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 50
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 50
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 52
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 52
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 53
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 53
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 54
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) .......................... 55
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 55
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 56
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 56
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 57
Lighting Switch Inspection ...................................... 57
Auto Light Sensor System Inspection ..................... 58
FRONT FOG LAMP .................................................. 60
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 60
System Description ................................................. 60
OUTLINE ............................................................. 60
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ............................. 61
CAN Communication System Description .............. 61
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — .................................. 62
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 63
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 64
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 64
Preliminary Check .................................................. 65
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 65
CONSULT-II Function ............................................. 66
Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 66
Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ... 67
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 68
ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS ............................. 68
SE-R MODELS .................................................... 68
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 70
ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS ............................. 70
SE-R MODELS .................................................... 70
Removal and Installation ........................................ 70
ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS ............................. 70
SE-R MODELS .................................................... 71
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS... 72
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 72
System Description ................................................. 72
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION ............................... 72
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION ............................. 73
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................... 74
CAN Communication System Description .............. 74
Schematic ............................................................... 75
Wiring Diagram — TURN — ................................... 76
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 79
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 80
Preliminary Check .................................................. 81
Revision: March 2005
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .....................................................................81
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................82
CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................82
DATA MONITOR .................................................83
ACTIVE TEST ......................................................83
Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ......................83
Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn
Signal Lamps Operate ............................................85
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate .......86
Bulb Replacement ...................................................86
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP .............................86
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP ...............................86
Removal and Installation .........................................86
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP .............................86
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP ...............................86
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................87
HAZARD SWITCH .....................................................88
Removal and Installation .........................................88
COMBINATION SWITCH ..........................................89
Wiring Diagram — COMBSW — ............................89
Combination Switch Reading Function ...................90
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................90
CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................90
DATA MONITOR ..................................................91
Combination Switch Inspection ...............................92
Removal and Installation .........................................94
Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................94
STOP LAMP ..............................................................95
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — ................................95
Bulb Replacement for High-mounted Stop Lamp ...97
WITH REAR AIR SPOILER .................................97
WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER ..........................97
Bulb Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp .....97
REMOVAL ............................................................97
INSTALLATION ....................................................97
Removal and Installation for High-mounted Stop
Lamp .......................................................................97
WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-SE-R .......................97
WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-EXCEPT SE-R ........97
WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER ..........................97
Removal and Installation for Rear Combination
Lamp .......................................................................97
REMOVAL ............................................................97
INSTALLATION ....................................................97
BACK-UP LAMP .......................................................98
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — ................................98
Bulb Replacement ...................................................99
Removal and Installation .........................................99
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS .... 100
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.100
System Description ............................................... 100
OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH ............... 100
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ........................... 101
CAN Communication System Description ............ 101
Schematic ............................................................. 102
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — ................................. 103
LT-2
2005 Altima
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ........... 106
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ... 107
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis .............. 107
Preliminary Check ................................................ 108
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................. 108
CONSULT-II Functions ......................................... 109
Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not
Illuminate .............................................................. 109
Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn
OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) ............................113
Bulb Replacement .................................................114
LICENSE PLATE LAMP .....................................114
FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP .......114
TAIL LAMP .........................................................114
Removal and Installation .......................................114
LICENSE PLATE LAMP .....................................114
FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP .......114
REAR COMBINATION LAMP ............................114
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP .........................................115
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..115
System Description ...............................................115
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND .....................115
SWITCH OPERATION .......................................116
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION ...................117
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL..118
Schematic .............................................................119
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — ................................. 120
Models With Vanity Lamps ................................... 123
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ........... 124
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis .............. 125
Preliminary Check ................................................ 125
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ........................................... 125
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ............................... 126
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................. 126
WORK SUPPORT ............................................. 127
DATA MONITOR ............................................... 127
ACTIVE TEST ................................................... 128
Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate ... 129
Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not
Operate ................................................................. 130
All Step Lamps Do Not Operate ........................... 132
All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate ............. 133
Bulb Replacement ................................................ 133
ROOM OR SPOT LAMP ................................... 133
STEP LAMP ...................................................... 133
VANITY MIRROR LAMP ................................... 133
TRUNK ROOM LAMP ....................................... 133
Removal and Installation ...................................... 134
ROOM LAMP .................................................... 134
IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP .... 134
STEP LAMP ...................................................... 134
TRUNK ROOM LAMP ....................................... 134
ILLUMINATION ....................................................... 135
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 135
System Description ............................................... 135
ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING
SWITCH ............................................................ 136
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL ........................... 137
CAN Communication System Description ............ 137
Schematic ............................................................. 138
Wiring Diagram — ILL — ...................................... 139
Removal and Installation ...................................... 143
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH ................ 143
GLOVE BOX LAMP ........................................... 143
BULB SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 144
Headlamp ............................................................. 144
Exterior Lamp ....................................................... 144
Interior Lamp/Illumination ..................................... 144
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS008LD
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
General precautions for service operations
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EKS008LE
Never work with wet hands.
The xenon headlamp system includes a high voltage generating
part. Be sure to disconnect battery negative cable (negative terminal) or power fuse before removing, installing, or touching the
xenon headlamp (including lamp bulb).
Turn the lighting switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector.
When turning the xenon headlamp on and while it is illuminated,
never touch the harness, bulb, and socket of the headlamp.
When checking the headlamp on/off operation, check it on vehiPKIA0183E
cle and with the power connected to the vehicle-side connector.
Do not touch the headlamp bulb glass surface with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it. Do not
touch the headlamp bulb just after the headlamp is turned off, because it is very hot.
Install the xenon headlamp bulb socket correctly. If it is installed
improperly, high-voltage leak or corona discharge may occur
that can melt the bulb, connector, and housing. Do not illuminate
the xenon headlamp bulb out of the headlamp housing. Doing
so can cause fire and harm your eyes.
When the bulb has burned out, wrap it in a thick vinyl bag and
discard. Do not break the bulb.
Leaving the bulb removed from the headlamp housing for a long
period of time can deteriorate the performance of the lens and
reflector (dirt, clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it
EL-3422D
on hand when replacing the bulb.
When adjusting the headlamp aiming, turn the aiming adjustment screw only in the tightening direction. (If it is necessary to loosen the screw, first fully loosen the
screw, and then turn it in the tightening direction.)
Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner or gasoline) to clean lamps and to remove old sealant.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EKS008LF
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
Revision: March 2005
LT-4
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-5
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26010
EKS008LG
WKIA4084E
System Description
EKS008LH
Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2ND position, the BCM (body control module) receives input
requesting the headlamps (and tail lamps) to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high and headlamp low relay coils. When energized,
these relays direct power to the respective headlamps, which then illuminate.
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
●
to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
Revision: March 2005
LT-6
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
●
●
to BCM terminal 67
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
A
Low Beam Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This
input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 20
●
to headlamp RH terminal 1, and
●
through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 30
●
to headlamp LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to headlamp RH terminal 2
●
to headlamp LH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate.
B
C
D
E
F
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation
G
With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator. H
The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 27
I
●
to headlamp RH terminal 1, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 28
J
●
to headlamp LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
LT
●
to headlamp RH terminal 2
●
to headlamp LH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
L
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON) and the ignition switch is turned from
ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps
are turned off.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
Refer to LT-44, "System Description" for auto light operation.
XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED)
The low beam headlamps may be equipped with xenon type bulbs. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament.
Instead, they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a
mixture of xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to added lighting power, electronic
control of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color.
Following are some of the advantages of the xenon type headlamp.
●
The light produced by the headlamps is a white color comparable to sunlight that is easy on the eyes.
●
Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination.
Revision: March 2005
LT-7
2005 Altima
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
●
●
The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to which the human eye is most sensitive. This means that even in the rain, more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle for added visibility.
Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008LI
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-8
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —
EKS008LJ
A
HALOGEN
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1360E
Revision: March 2005
LT-9
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
WKWA1361E
Revision: March 2005
LT-10
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
XENON
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1301E
Revision: March 2005
LT-11
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
WKWA1362E
Revision: March 2005
LT-12
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS008LK
A
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
L
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
B
C
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
D
SKIA5291E
E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
F
SKIA5292E
G
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
H
SKIA5291E
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC)
I
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5292E
ACC
—
LT
Battery voltage
L
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
M
SKIA5291E
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: March 2005
LT-13
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
G/B
Combination switch output 2
36
G/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS008LL
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
20
R/Y
27
L/W
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Headlamp low (RH)
ON
Headlamp high (RH)
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
0V
G
Headlamp high (LH)
ON
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
28
ON
Battery voltage
0V
L
Headlamp low (LH)
ON
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
30
ON
Battery voltage
48
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008LM
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-6, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-14, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do the headlamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EKS008LN
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Revision: March 2005
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ACC or ON position
6
Ignition switch ON or START position
1
LT-14
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
A
36
IPDM E/R
38
Battery
40
B
45
Refer to LT-9, "Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
C
D
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
E
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
G
Terminal
(Wire color)
OFF
ACC
ON
11 (PU)
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M18
38 (R)
M20
F
Ground
70 (W/B)
H
I
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
J
LT
WKIA2044E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
M
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
Revision: March 2005
LIIA0915E
LT-15
L
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008LO
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
LKIA0070E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LT-16
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST
ITEM" screen.
A
B
C
PKIA5226E
D
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of light switch judged from lighting switch signal.
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Tail light relay output
Revision: March 2005
G
H
Contents
IGN ON SW
Test item
F
I
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
TAIL LAMP
Description
Allows tail light relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option.
LT-17
2005 Altima
J
LT
L
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Test item
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
Headlamp relay output
Front fog lamp relay output
Description
HEAD LAMP
Allows headlamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option.
FR FOG LAMP
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option.
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
EKS008LP
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LT-18
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG
MODE" screen.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
F
ALL SIGNALS
All items will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitor the predetermined item.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select any item for monitoring.
3.
4.
5.
E
G
Touch "START".
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are
monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
H
I
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Display or
unit
TAIL&CLR REQ
Headlamp low beam
request
Headlamp high beam
request
Item name
Parking, license plate
and tail lamps request
Front fog lamps request
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
LT
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch "START".
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test item
Tail lamp relay output
Revision: March 2005
J
CONSULT-II screen display
TAIL LAMP
Description
Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at
your option
LT-19
2005 Altima
L
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Test item
CONSULT-II screen display
Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output
LAMPS
Front fog lamp relay (FOG)
output
Description
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation
(OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Head lamp high beam repeats ON-OFF
every 1 second).
Allows fog lamp relay (FOG) to operate by switching operation ONOFF at your option
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
EKS008LQ
1. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch “HI” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure HI beam headlamps operate.
HI beam headlamps should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SKIA5774E
2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis.
Displayed results of self-diagnosis
NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED>> GO TO 3.
CAN COMMUNICATION OR CAN SYSTEM>> Inspect the BCM
CAN communications system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN
COMMUNICATION" .
OPEN DETECT 1 - 5>> Inspect combination switch system. Refer
to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
LKIA0073E
3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select “BCM” on CONSULT-II. With “HEAD LAMP” data monitor,
make sure “HI BEAM SW” turns ON-OFF linked with operation of
lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
HIGH position
: HI BEAM SW ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and
Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-20
SKIA4193E
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect headlamp RH and LH (high) connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “IPDM E/R” on CONSULT-II, and select “ACTIVE TEST”
on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Select “LAMPS” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “HI” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When headlamp high beam is operating, check voltage between
headlamp RH and LH (high) harness connector terminals and
ground.
B
C
D
WKIA1252E
E
Headlamp (high)
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
RH
E110
1 (L/W)
LH
E11
1 (G)
F
Ground
Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
H
5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and headlamp RH and LH (high) harness connector terminals.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
J
B
Terminal
(wire color)
Headlamp (high)
connector
Terminal
(wire color)
27 (L/W)
RH
E110
1 (L/W)
28 (G)
LH
E11
1 (G)
LT
Continuity
Yes
WKIA4025E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
M
6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
Check continuity between headlamp RH (high) harness connector E110 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
2 (B) - Ground
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between headlamp LH (high) harness connector E11 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
2 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LT-21
L
WKIA1050E
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
EKS008LR
1. BULB INSPECTION
Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM" .
2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect inoperative headlamp (high) connector.
Turn the high beam headlamps ON.
Check voltage between inoperative headlamp (high) connector
terminal and ground.
Headlamp (high)
(+)
Connector
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E110
1 (L/W)
LH
E11
1 (G)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
WKIA1252E
3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
Turn the high beam headlamps OFF.
Check continuity between inoperative headlamp (high) connector terminal and ground.
Headlamp (high)
Connector
RH
E110
LH
E11
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
2 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp (high) connector for damage or poor
connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground.
Revision: March 2005
LT-22
WKIA1050E
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS
1.
2.
A
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and headlamp connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and inoperative headlamp harness connector terminals.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
B
B
Terminal
(wire color)
Headlamp (high)
connector
Terminal
(wire color)
27 (L/W)
RH
E110
1 (L/W)
28 (G)
LH
E11
1 (G)
Continuity
C
Yes
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
WKIA4025E
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair
as necessary.
E
High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate
F
EKS008LS
1. BULB INSPECTION
G
Inspect CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
H
EKS008LT
1. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
Select “IPDM E/R” on CONSULT-II, and select “ACTIVE TEST”
on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Select “LAMPS” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “LO” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure low beam headlamps operate.
J
LT
Low beam headlamps should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
L
SKIA5774E
2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
M
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis.
Displayed results of self-diagnosis
NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED>> GO TO 3.
CAN COMMUNICATION OR CAN SYSTEM>> Inspect the BCM
CAN communications system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN
COMMUNICATION" .
OPEN DETECT 1 - 5>> Inspect combination switch system. Refer
to LT-90, "Combination Switch Reading Function" .
HEAD LAMP 1 SW or HEAD LAMP 2 SW>> Replace combination
switch. Refer to LT-94, "Removal and Installation" .
LKIA0073E
Revision: March 2005
LT-23
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select “BCM” on CONSULT-II. With “HEAD LAMP” data monitor,
make sure “HEAD LAMP SW 1” and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
2ND position
: HEAD LAMP SW 1 ON
: HEAD LAMP SW 2 ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace combination switch. Refer to LT-94, "Removal
and Installation" .
SKIA4194E
4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect headlamp RH and LH (low) connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “IPDM E/R” on CONSULT-II, and select “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Select “LAMPS” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen.
Touch “LO” on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When headlamp low beam is operating, check voltage between
headlamp RH and LH (low) harness connector terminals and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
Headlamp (low)
connector
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
1 (R/Y)
LH
E13
1 (L)
WKIA4027E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and headlamp RH and LH (low) harness connector terminals.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
B
Terminal
(Wire color)
Headlamp (low)
connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
20 (R/Y)
RH
E107
1 (R/Y)
30 (L)
LH
E13
1 (L)
Continuity
Yes
WKIA4029E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LT-24
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between headlamp RH and LH (low) harness
connector terminals and ground.
B
Terminals
Headlamp (low)
connector
RH
E107
LH
E13
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
2 (B)
Ground
C
Yes
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
WKIA4030E
E
EKS008LU
1. BULB INSPECTION
Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-29, "HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (HALOGEN)" .
F
G
H
2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP
1.
2.
3.
I
Disconnect inoperative headlamp (low) connector.
Turn the low beam headlamps ON.
Check voltage between inoperative headlamp (low) connector
terminal and ground.
J
Terminals
(+)
Headlamp (low)
connector
RH
LH
E107
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
LT
Terminal
L
1 (R/Y)
E13
1 (L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
WKIA4027E
LT-25
2005 Altima
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND
1.
2.
Turn the low beam headlamps OFF.
Check continuity between inoperative headlamp (low) connector
terminal and ground.
Terminals
Headlamp (low)
connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E107
LH
E13
2 (B)
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check headlamp (low) and IPDM E/R connector. Repair
as necessary.
NG
>> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground.
WKIA4030E
4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal
and inoperative headlamp (low) harness connector terminal.
A
IPDM E/R
connector
E122
B
Terminal
(Wire color)
Headlamp (low)
connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
20 (R/Y)
RH
E107
1 (R/Y)
30 (L)
LH
E13
1 (L)
Continuity
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
WKIA4029E
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair
as necessary.
Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF
EKS008LV
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Select “BCM" on CONSULT-II. With “HEAD LAMP” data monitor,
make sure “HEAD LAMP SW 1” and “HEAD LAMP SW 2” turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
OFF position
: HEAD LAMP SW 1 OFF
: HEAD LAMP SW 2 OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SKIA5200E
2. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH
Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-90, "Combination Switch Reading Function" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-94, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-26
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
3. CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN BCM AND IPDM E/R
A
Select “BCM” on CONSULT-II and perform self-diagnosis for BCM.
Display of self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
D
SKIA1039E
One Xenon Headlamp Does Not Illuminate At Full Brightness
EKS008LW
1. COMPONENT INSPECTION
Check the inoperative headlamp subharness for open or short circuits.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-29, "Bulb Replacement" . Check operation of headlamp. If
headlamp still does not illuminate at full brightness, replace ballast and check operation. Refer to
LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . If headlamp still does not illuminate at full brightness,
replace ignitor. Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
NG
>> Replace headlamp subharness.
E
F
G
H
One Xenon Headlamp Flickers
EKS008LX
1. CHECK SYSTEM OPERATION
I
Turn the low beam headlamps ON and check operation.
NOTE:
Xenon headlamps may flicker momentarily when the headlamps are turned ON. This is normal and does not
indicate a fault. Diagnosis of flickering headlamps should only be performed if the headlamps continue to J
flicker for more than 3 seconds after turning headlamps ON.
OK or NG
LT
OK
>> System is operating correctly.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. COMPONENT INSPECTION
L
Check the inoperative headlamp subharness for open or short circuits.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ballast. Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Check operation of headlamp. If
headlamp still flickers, replace igniter and check operation. If headlamp still flickers, replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-29, "Bulb Replacement" .
NG
>> Replace headlamp subharness.
Revision: March 2005
LT-27
2005 Altima
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Aiming Adjustment
EKS008LY
LKIA0054E
For details, refer to the regulations in your state.
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following.
1. Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
2. Place vehicle on flat surface.
3. Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level and fuel tank full.
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
1.
2.
Turn headlamp low beam on.
Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.
Revision: March 2005
LT-28
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
●
First loosen the adjusting screw all the way and then make adjustment by tightening the screw.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
LKIA0068E
If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming.
Use the aiming chart shown in the figure.
●
Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart.
Adjust headlamps accordingly.
Bulb Replacement
EKS008LZ
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (XENON)
1. Remove headlamp assembly. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Turn the plastic cap counterclockwise to unlock it from the headlamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Unlock the retaining spring and remove the bulb from the headlamp.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Confirm headlamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-28, "Aiming Adjustment" .
CAUTION:
After installing a headlamp bulb, be sure to install the plastic cap securely to ensure watertightness.
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM (HALOGEN)
1.
For LH side, remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-17,
"AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
For RH side, remove washer tank inlet and position coolant reservoir aside.
2. Turn the plastic cap counterclockwise to unlock it from the headlamp.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Unlock the retaining spring and remove the bulb from the headlamp.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing a headlamp bulb, be sure to install the plastic cap securely to ensure watertightness.
Revision: March 2005
LT-29
2005 Altima
I
J
LT
L
M
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM
1.
For LH side, remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-17,
"AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
1.
For LH side, remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or EM-17,
"AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it.
3. Pull the bulb to remove it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing a headlamp bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness.
Removal and Installation
EKS008M0
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front fascia. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER" .
Ensure lighting switch is OFF.
Disconnect the negative battery cable (xenon only).
Remove the headlamp mounting bolts.
Pull the headlamp toward the front of the vehicle, disconnect
connectors and remove from vehicle.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Headlamp mounting bolts:
: 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)
Confirm headlamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-28, "Aiming
Adjustment" .
LKIA0053E
Revision: March 2005
LT-30
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Disassembly and Assembly
EKS008M1
A
DISASSEMBLY
Xenon
B
C
D
E
F
G
WKIA1980E
1.
Ignitor
2.
Halogen bulb (high beam)
3. Headlamp assembly
4.
Ballast
5.
Xenon bulb (low beam)
6. Plastic cap
7.
Turn/park bulb socket
8.
Turn/park bulb
H
I
Halogen
J
LT
L
M
WKIA1981E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
Turn/park bulb
2.
Halogen bulb (high beam)
4.
Halogen bulb (low beam)
5.
Turn/park bulb socket
3. Headlamp assembly
Turn the low beam plastic cap counterclockwise to unlock and remove it.
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove it (xenon).
Disconnect the electrical connectors from the bulb terminals (halogen).
Unlock the retaining springs and remove the low beam bulb.
Release the ignitor and remove from the plastic cap (xenon).
Turn the high beam lamp socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove it.
Revision: March 2005
LT-31
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
7.
8.
Turn the front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Remove the front turn signal lamp bulb from its socket.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
●
After installing the xenon bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket and plastic cap securely to
ensure watertightness.
Revision: March 2005
LT-32
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26010
A
EKS008M2
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKIA4085E
System Description
EKS008M3
The headlamp system for Canada vehicles is equipped with a daytime light control unit that activates the high
beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is
applied before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate
once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking
brake is applied.
Battery saver system is controlled by the BCM (body control module).
Power is supplied at all times
●
to headlamp high relay located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
Revision: March 2005
LT-33
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 3, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 9, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
to daytime light control unit terminals 13, 14 and 16
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
HEADLAMP OPERATION
Low Beam Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This
input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing
unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 20
●
to RH headlamp terminal 1, and
●
through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 30
●
to LH headlamp terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to RH headlamp terminal 2
●
to LH headlamp terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation
With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator.
The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 27
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 4
●
through daytime light control unit terminal 7
●
to RH headlamp terminal 1, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 28
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 5
●
through daytime light control unit terminal 6
●
to LH headlamp terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to RH headlamp terminal 2
Revision: March 2005
LT-34
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM to daytime light control unit terminal 9
●
through daytime light control unit terminal 14
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to LH headlamp terminal 2
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 10
●
through daytime light control unit terminal 13
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate.
●
A
B
C
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
With the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON) and the ignition switch is turned from
ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps
are turned off.
D
E
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION
F
For auto light operation, refer to LT-44, "System Description" .
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION
With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is
G
supplied
●
through daytime light control unit terminal 7
●
to RH headlamp terminal 1
H
●
through RH headlamp terminal 2
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 9, and
●
through daytime light control unit terminal 6
I
●
to LH headlamp terminal 1
●
through LH headlamp terminal 2
J
●
to daytime light control unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied
●
to daytime light control unit terminals 13, 14 and 16
LT
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination.
XENON HEADLAMP (IF EQUIPPED)
L
The low beam headlamps may be equipped with xenon type bulbs. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament.
Instead, they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a
mixture of xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to added lighting power, electronic
control of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color.
Following are some of the advantages of the xenon type headlamp.
●
The light produced by the headlamps is a white color comparable to sunlight that is easy on the eyes.
●
Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination.
●
The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to which the human eye is most sensitive. This means that even in the rain, more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle for added visibility.
●
Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load.
OPERATION
After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the "OFF" or 1ST position, the headlamp high beam automatically turns on. Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light systems.
Revision: March 2005
LT-35
2005 Altima
M
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Engine
With engine stopped
OFF
Lighting switch
With engine running
1ST
2ND
OFF
1ST
2ND
Hi
Lo
P
Hi
Lo
P
Hi
Lo
P
Hi
Lo
P
Hi
Lo
P
Hi
Lo
P
High beam
–
–
–
–
–
×
×
–
×
●*
●*
×
●*
●*
×
×
–
×
Low beam
–
–
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
–
–
×
–
–
×
×
×
×
Tail lamp
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
×
×
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
×
×
License and instrument illumination lamp
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
×
×
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
×
×
Headlamp
●
Hi: "HIGH BEAM" position
●
Lo: "LOW BEAM" position
●
P: "FLASH TO PASS" position
●
×: Lamp "ON"
●
–: Lamp "OFF"
●
●: Lamp dims. (Added functions)
●
*: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime lights will operate.
When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled, the daytime lights will not operate.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008M4
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-36
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Schematic
EKS008M5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1364E
Revision: March 2005
LT-37
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — DTRL —
EKS008M6
WKWA1365E
Revision: March 2005
LT-38
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2971E
Revision: March 2005
LT-39
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
WKWA1367E
Revision: March 2005
LT-40
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008M7
A
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-33, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-41, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the daytime light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
B
C
EKS008M8
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
D
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
Confirm BCM configuration for "DTRL" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-14, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO Trouble Diagnosis. Refer to LT-42, "Trouble Diagnosis" .
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "DTRL" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-41
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis
EKS008M9
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Item
1
BR/Y
Generator
Condition
When turning ignition switch to "ON"
When engine is running
When turning ignition switch to "START"
3
BR
G
Start signal
Power source
5
6
L/W
G
L
LH HI fuse
RH HI fuse
LH HI beam
When turning ignition switch to "OFF"
Less than 1V
When turning ignition switch to "ON"
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to "START"
Battery voltage
RH HI beam
Battery voltage
When lighting switch is turned to "FLASH TO PASS" position with ignition switch "ON" position
Battery voltage
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI
BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position
Battery voltage
When lighting switch is turned to "FLASH TO PASS" position with ignition switch "ON" position
Battery voltage
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI
BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position
Battery voltage
When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation)
When turning lighting switch to the 2ND position with "HI
BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position
G
RH HI beam
(ground)
When turning lighting switch to the 2ND position with "HI
BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position
Y/G
LH HI beam
(ground)
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Less than 1V
When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
10
Half battery voltage
When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
9
Less than 1V
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI
BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position
When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with "HI
BEAM" or "FLASH TO PASS" position
Y
Battery voltage
Less than 1V
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
7
Less than 1V
When turning ignition switch to "ON" from "START"
When turning ignition switch to "OFF"
4
Less than 1V
Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to "OFF"
2
Voltage
(Approx.)
Half battery voltage
Less than 1V
When releasing parking brake with engine running and turning lighting switch to "OFF" (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
13
B
Ground (LH HI)
14
B
Ground (RH HI)
—
—
16
B
Ground
—
—
Revision: March 2005
—
Less than 1V
LT-42
—
2005 Altima
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Item
17
G
Parking brake switch
Condition
When parking brake is released
When parking brake is set
Removal and Installation of Daytime Light Control Unit
Voltage
(Approx.)
A
Battery voltage
Less than 1V
B
EKS008MA
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
3. Remove screw.
4. Disconnect harness connectors.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
C
D
E
F
WKIA2558E
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-43
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28491
EKS008MB
WKIA4086E
System Description
EKS008MC
This system automatically turns the parking lamps and the headlamps on and off in accordance with ambient
light.
Timing for when the lamps turn on/off can be selected using four modes.
OUTLINE
The auto light control system uses an optical sensor that detects the brightness of outside light.
When the lighting switch is in AUTO position, it automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps (and fog lamps, if equipped) in accordance with the ambient light. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four
steps. For the details of the setting, refer to LT-50, "SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS" .
When the lighting switch is in "AUTO" position, power is supplied
●
through BCM (body control module) terminal 17
●
to auto light sensor terminal 1.
When lighting switch is in "AUTO" position, ground is supplied
●
to auto light sensor terminal 3
●
through BCM terminal 18.
When ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START" position and when outside brightness is darker than prescribed level, input is supplied
●
through auto light sensor terminal 2
●
to BCM terminal 14.
The headlamps will then illuminate. For a description of headlamp operation, refer to LT-6, "System Description" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-44
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the AUTO position, and the ignition switch is turned from
ON or ACC to OFF, and one of the doors is opened, the battery saver feature is activated.
Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps
are turned off.
A
B
SHUT OFF DELAY
When the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF while the auto light system is activated and the headlamps
are illuminated, the shut off delay feature is activated. Under this condition, the BCM no longer receives a voltage signal at terminal 38 and this starts the auto light shut off delay timer. The shut off delay timer is active
until one of the doors is opened or the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If one of the
doors is opened, the shut off delay feature is deactivated and the battery saver control feature is activated. If
the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, the headlamps are turned off.
C
CAN Communication System Description
E
EKS008MD
D
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Major Components and Functions
EKS008ME
Components
F
Functions
●
BCM
Turns on/off circuits of tail light and headlamp according to signals from light sensor, lighting switch
(AUTO), front door switch LH, ignition switch (ON, OFF), and vehicle signal from combination
meter.
Auto light sensor
●
Converts ambient light (lux) to voltage and sends it to BCM. (Detects light from 50 to 1,300 lux)
Combination meter
●
Sends vehicle signal to BCM via CAN communication line.
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-45
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —
EKS008MF
WKWA1303E
Revision: March 2005
LT-46
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1368E
Revision: March 2005
LT-47
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS008MG
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
L
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC)
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
ACC
—
12
P/L
Front door switch RH signal
OFF
Front door
switch RH
13
R/W
Rear door switch RH signal
OFF
Rear door
switch RH
14
W/R
Auto light sensor signal
ON
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF
(closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF
(closed)
Battery voltage
When auto light sensor is
illuminated
3.1 V or moreNote
When auto light sensor is
not illuminated
0.6 V or less
17
R
Auto light sensor power supply
ON
—
5V
18
P
Sensor ground
ON
—
0V
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: March 2005
LT-48
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Terminal
No.
Measuring condition
Wire
color
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
B
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
C
SKIA5292E
D
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
E
SKIA5291E
35
G/B
G/W
G
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
36
Combination switch output 1
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
47
SB
Front door switch LH signal
OFF
Front door
switch LH
48
R/B
Rear door switch LH signal
OFF
Rear door
switch LH
67
B
70
W/B
F
Combination switch output 2
I
ON (open)
0V
OFF
(closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF
(closed)
Battery voltage
J
LT
Ground
ON
—
0V
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
L
NOTE:
Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy standard.
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS008MH
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
0V
R/Y
Headlamp low (RH)
ON
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
20
ON
Battery voltage
0V
L/W
Headlamp high (RH)
ON
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
27
ON
Battery voltage
0V
G
Headlamp high (LH)
ON
Lighting switch
HIGH or PASS
position
OFF
28
ON
Battery voltage
Revision: March 2005
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
LT-49
H
Reference value
(Approx.)
2005 Altima
M
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Measuring condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
30
L
Headlamp low (LH)
ON
48
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Lighting switch
2ND position
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008MI
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-44, "System Description" .
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-50, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to LT-57, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart
by Symptom" .
Does the auto light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
EKS008MJ
SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS
●
Sensitivity of auto light system can be adjusted using CONSULT-II. Refer to LT-53, "WORK SUPPORT" .
CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION
Confirm BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-14, "READ CONFIGURATION
PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-50, "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG
>> Change BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" .
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ACC or ON position
6
Ignition switch ON or START position
1
36
38
IPDM E/R
Battery
40
45
Refer to LT-46, "Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-50
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
C
Terminal
(Wire color)
OFF
ACC
ON
11 (PU)
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M18
38 (R)
M20
B
Ground
70 (W/B)
D
E
F
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link.
G
WKIA2044E
H
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
I
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
J
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
LT
LIIA0915E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-51
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008MK
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
LKIA0070E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LT-52
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST
ITEM" screen.
A
B
C
PKIA5226E
D
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item setting to be changed on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
Touch "START".
Touch the item setting desired.
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
Touch "END".
F
G
H
Work Support Setting Item
Work Support item
Description
Mode
On
BATTERY SAVER SET
Function is not enabled, battery saver operation cannot
be changed.
CUSTOM A/LIGHT
SETTING
ILL DELAY SET
Sensitivity of auto light can
be selected and set from four
modes.
The timer that turns off the
headlamps (and fog lamps, if
turned on) after the last door
is closed can be selected
and set from 8 modes.
Off
Setting status
I
Function is not enabled, battery saver operation cannot be
changed.
J
Mode1
Factory setting
Mode 2
More sensitive setting compared to factory setting (The
time required for lamp light-up is shorter than "Normal").
Mode 3
Less sensitive setting compared to factory setting (The time
required for lamp light-up is longer than "Normal").
Mode 4
Less sensitive setting compared to Mode 3 (The time
required for lamp light-up is longer than Mode 3).
Mode 1
45 seconds (Factory setting)
Mode 2
0 seconds (immediate shutoff)
Mode 3
30 seconds
Mode 4
60 seconds
Mode 5
90 seconds
Mode 6
120 seconds
Mode 7
150 seconds
Mode 8
180 seconds
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
Revision: March 2005
LT-53
L
M
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
LT
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the signals will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
“ON/OFF”
Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of light switch judged from lighting switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position:
ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from
lighting switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the passenger door as judged from the passenger door switch signal. (Door
is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF”
Displays status of the rear door RH as judged from the rear door switch RH signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-RL
“ON/OFF"
Displays status of the rear door LH as judged from the rear door switch LH signal. (Door is
open: ON/Door is closed: OFF)
OPTICAL SENSOR
[0 - 5V]
Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)" judged from auto light
sensor signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Headlamp relay output
Revision: March 2005
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
HEAD LAMP
Description
Allows headlamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF at your option.
LT-54
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
EKS008ML
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
B
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
C
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
D
E
F
G
BBIA0002E
2.
H
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
I
J
LT
BCIA0029E
L
3.
Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LT-55
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG
MODE" screen.
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
All items will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitor the predetermined item.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Select any item for monitoring.
3.
4.
5.
Touch "START".
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are
monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Display or
unit
TAIL&CLR REQ
Headlamp low beam
request
Headlamp high beam
request
Item name
Parking, license plate
and tail lamps request
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
×
×
×
Signal status input from BCM
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch "START".
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test item
Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output
Front fog lamp relay output
Revision: March 2005
CONSULT-II screen display
LAMPS
Description
Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation
(OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Headlamp high beam repeats ON-OFF
every 1 second).
Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at
your option.
LT-56
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
EKS008MM
A
Trouble phenomenon
●
●
●
Malfunction system and reference
Parking lamps and headlamps will not illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.)
Parking lamps and headlamp will not go out when outside of
the vehicle becomes light. (Lighting switch 1st position and
2nd position operate normally.)
Headlamps go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light,
but parking lamps stay on.
Parking lamps illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes
dark, but headlamps stay off. (Lighting switch 1st position and
2nd position operate normally.)
Auto light adjustment system will not operate. (Lighting switch
AUTO, 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.)
Auto light adjustment system will not operate.
Shut off delay feature will not operate.
●
Refer to LT-53, "WORK SUPPORT" .
●
Refer to LT-57, "Lighting Switch Inspection" .
●
Refer to LT-58, "Auto Light Sensor System Inspection" .
B
C
If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
D
●
Refer to LT-53, "WORK SUPPORT" .
●
Refer to LT-58, "Auto Light Sensor System Inspection" .
If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
●
E
Refer to LT-58, "Auto Light Sensor System Inspection" .
If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
F
●
CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to LAN-21,
"CAN COMMUNICATION" .
●
CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to LAN-21,
"CAN COMMUNICATION" .
●
Refer to BL-30, "Door Switch Check" .
If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
Lighting Switch Inspection
I
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "AUTO LIGHT SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation
of lighting switch.
J
: AUTO LIGHT SW ON
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-92, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
Revision: March 2005
H
EKS008MN
1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
When lighting switch is in
AUTO position
G
LT-57
LT
L
SKIA4196E
2005 Altima
M
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Auto Light Sensor System Inspection
EKS008MO
1. OUTPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" in CONSULT-II. Using "OPTICAL SENSOR" data from
"DATA MONITOR", check difference in the voltage when the auto
light sensor is illuminated and not illuminated.
Light sensor illuminated
Light sensor not illuminated
: 3.1V or more
: 0.6V or less
NOTE:
If the auto light sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured
value may not satisfy the standard.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
WKIA0486E
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY INSPECTION
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM and auto light sensor connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
17 (R) and auto light sensor harness connector M15 terminal 1
(R).
17 (R) - 1 (R)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
17 (R) and ground.
17 (R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2049E
3. OUTPUT CIRCUIT CONTINUITY INSPECTION
1.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
14 (W/R) and auto light sensor harness connector M15 terminal
2 (W/R).
14 (W/R) - 2 (W/R)
2.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
14 (W/R) and ground.
14 (W/R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
WKIA2050E
LT-58
2005 Altima
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
4. GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY INSPECTION
1.
18 (P) - 3 (P)
2.
A
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
18 (P) and auto light sensor harness connector M15 terminal 3
(P).
B
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
18 (P) and ground.
18 (P) - Ground
C
: Continuity should not exist.
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2051E
E
5. SENSOR VOLTAGE INSPECTION
1.
2.
Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
17 (R) and ground.
17 (R) - Ground
F
: Should be approx. 5V.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the auto light sensor.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
H
I
SKIA5894E
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-59
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
FRONT FOG LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26150
EKS00A85
WKIA4087E
System Description
EKS008MP
Control of the fog lamps is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). The lighting switch must be in the AUTO position (with auto light system) or headlamps position (LOW beam is ON) for
front fog lamp operation. When the lighting switch is placed in the fog lamp position, the BCM (body control
module) receives input requesting the fog lamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R
(intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central
processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the front fog lamp relay coil. When energized, this relay directs
power to the front fog lamps.
OUTLINE
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to front fog lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
Revision: March 2005
LT-60
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
FOG LAMP OPERATION
The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch can only be in AUTO position (with
auto light system) or headlamps position (low beam is ON) and the fog lamp switch must be ON for fog lamp
operation.
With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, the CPU of the IPDM E/R grounds the coil side of the fog lamp
relay. The fog lamp relay then directs power
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 37
●
to front fog lamp LH terminal 1, and
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 36
●
to front fog lamp RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to front fog lamp LH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to front fog lamp RH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
With power and grounds supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate.
A
B
C
D
E
F
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the fog lamp switch is ON and the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF, or if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position when the fog lamp switch is turned ON, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the fog lamps (and headlamps) remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination
switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed,
then the fog lamps (and headlamps) are turned off.
CAN Communication System Description
G
H
EKS008MQ
I
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-61
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —
EKS008MR
WKWA1369E
Revision: March 2005
LT-62
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS008MS
A
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
L
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
B
C
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
D
SKIA5291E
E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
F
SKIA5292E
G
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
H
SKIA5291E
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC)
I
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5292E
ACC
—
LT
Battery voltage
L
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
M
SKIA5291E
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: March 2005
LT-63
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
G/B
Combination switch output 2
36
G/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
ON
Reference value
(Approx.)
Operation or condition
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS008MT
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Signal name
36
W/R
Front fog
lamp (RH)
ON
Front fog
lamp (LH)
ON
37
W/R
Ignition
switch
Reference value
(Approx.)
Operation or condition
Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position
or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and
the front fog lamp switch must be ON
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position
or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and
the front fog lamp switch must be ON
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
48
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008MU
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-60, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-65, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do the front fog lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
LT-64
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
Preliminary Check
EKS008MV
A
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
B
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ACC or ON position
6
Ignition switch ON or START position
1
Battery
43
BCM
IPDM E/R
C
D
Refer to LT-62, "Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
E
F
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
G
H
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
OFF
ACC
ON
I
11 (PU)
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
J
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M18
38 (R)
M20
Ground
70 (W/B)
LT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link.
L
M
WKIA2044E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
Revision: March 2005
LIIA0915E
LT-65
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
CONSULT-II Function
EKS008MW
Refer to LT-16, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Refer to LT-18, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)
EKS008MX
1. FOG LAMP ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "FOG" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Make sure fog lamps operate.
Fog lamps should operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SKIA5774E
2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis.
Displayed results of self-diagnosis
NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED>> GO TO 3.
CAN COMMUNICATION OR CAN SYSTEM>> Inspect the BCM
CAN communications system. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN
COMMUNICATION" .
OPEN DETECT 1 - 5>> Inspect combination switch system. Refer
to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
LKIA0073E
3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "FR FOG SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of
lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
FOG position
: FR FOG SW ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and
Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-66
SKIA5897E
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
4. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
A
Start auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" . When front
fog lamp relay is operating, check voltage between left/right front fog
lamp connector terminals and ground.
B
Terminals
(+)
Front fog lamp
connector
RH
E101
LH
E2
Voltage
(Approx.)
C
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
1 (W/R)
Ground
Battery voltage
D
WKIA4033E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check front fog lamp bulbs and replace as necessary.
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side)
E
EKS008MY
1. BULB INSPECTION
Inspect bulb of lamp which does not illuminate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace lamp bulb. Refer to LT-70, "Bulb Replacement" .
F
G
H
2. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND FRONT FOG LAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative front fog lamp connector.
Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM
E/R and harness connector terminal of front fog lamps.
A
IPDM E/R
Connector
E124
I
J
B
Terminal
(wire color)
Front fog lamp
Connector
36 (W/R)
RH
E101
37 (W/R)
LH
E2
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
1 (W/R)
Yes
LT
OK or NG
OK
>> Check ground circuit. If OK, replace IPDM E/R. Refer to
WKIA4034E
PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . If NG,
repair harness or connector.
NG
>> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and front fog lamps.
Revision: March 2005
LT-67
2005 Altima
L
M
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
EKS008MZ
ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming
adjustment, make sure of the following.
●
Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
●
Place vehicle on level ground.
●
See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting screw.
WKIA1065E
1.
2.
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown.
Turn front fog lamps ON.
MEL327G
3.
●
Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge
of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of
the fog lamp centers as shown.
When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps
and opposite fog lamp.
MEL328G
SE-R MODELS
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming
adjustment, make sure of the following.
●
Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
Revision: March 2005
LT-68
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
Place vehicle on level ground.
●
See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and
tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting screw.
●
A
B
C
D
LKIA0598E
E
1.
2.
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown.
Turn front fog lamps ON.
F
G
H
MEL327G
3.
●
Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge
of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of
the fog lamp centers as shown.
When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps
and opposite fog lamp.
I
J
LT
L
M
MEL328G
Revision: March 2005
LT-69
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
Bulb Replacement
EKS008N0
ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS
Removal
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
CAUTION:
●
Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
●
Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may
affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
1. Position the front fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
WKIA1066E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SE-R MODELS
Removal
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
CAUTION:
●
Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
●
Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may
affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
1. Remove the engine undercover using power tools.
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
LKIA0599E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation
EKS008N1
ALL EXCEPT SE-R MODELS
Removal
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
Revision: March 2005
LT-70
2005 Altima
FRONT FOG LAMP
CAUTION:
●
Do not leave fog lamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
entering the fog lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly just before replacement bulb is installed.
●
Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the
glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance.
1. Remove inner splash shield.
2. Position the fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
4. Remove bolt from top of fog lamp.
5. Remove fog lamp.
A
B
C
D
E
F
WKIA1067E
G
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Confirm fog lamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-68, "Aiming Adjustment" .
H
SE-R MODELS
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the engine under cover using power tools.
Disconnect electrical connector.
Remove the fog lamp bolts from top and bottom of fog lamp.
Remove fog lamp.
I
J
LT
L
LKIA0600E
M
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Confirm fog lamp aiming adjustment. Refer to LT-68, "Aiming Adjustment" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-71
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26120
EKS00A86
WKIA4088E
System Description
EKS008N2
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM (body control module) terminal 38, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 22.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
LH Turn
When the turn signal switch (combination switch) is moved to the L position, the BCM receives input requesting the left turn signals to flash. The BCM then supplies power
Revision: March 2005
LT-72
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
●
to rear turn signal lamp LH (part of the rear combination lamp LH) terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 5
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed
by the CPU (central processing unit) of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the left turn
signal indicator lamp.
With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
●
A
B
C
D
RH Turn
When the turn signal switch (combination switch) is moved to the R position, the BCM receives input requesting the right turn signals to flash. The BCM then supplies power
●
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
●
to rear turn signal lamp RH (part of the rear combination lamp RH) terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 5
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed
by the CPU of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the right turn signal indicator lamp.
With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
F
G
H
I
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 21.
Ground is supplied
●
to hazard switch terminal 3
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
When the hazard switch is depressed, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 29
●
through hazard lamp switch terminal 2.
The BCM then supplies power
●
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
●
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
●
to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
●
to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2
●
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 5
●
to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 5
Revision: March 2005
E
LT-73
J
LT
L
M
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
through grounds B7 and B19.
The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed
by the CPU of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the left and right turn signal indicator
lamps.
With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps.
●
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 21.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination meter terminals 23, 25 and 28
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
When the remote keyless entry system is triggered by input from the keyfob, the BCM supplies power
●
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
●
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
●
to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
●
to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2
●
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to rear turn signal lamp LH terminal 5
●
to rear turn signal lamp RH terminal 5
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
The BCM sends a signal to combination meter across the CAN communication lines. This input is processed
by the CPU of the combination meter, which in turn supplies ground to the left and right turn signal indicator
lamps.
With power and ground supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps when keyfob is
used to activate the remote keyless entry system.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008N3
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-74
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
EKS008N4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1370E
Revision: March 2005
LT-75
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN —
EKS008N5
WKWA1537E
Revision: March 2005
LT-76
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1538E
Revision: March 2005
LT-77
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
WKWA2972E
Revision: March 2005
LT-78
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS008N6
A
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
L
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
B
C
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
D
SKIA5291E
E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
F
SKIA5292E
G
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
H
SKIA5291E
I
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC)
ACC
29
G/R
Hazard switch signal
OFF
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
J
SKIA5292E
—
Hazard
switch
LT
Battery voltage
ON
0V
OFF
5V
L
M
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
Revision: March 2005
LT-79
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
34
G/R
Measuring condition
Signal name
Combination switch output 3
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
35
36
G/B
G/W
Combination switch output 2
Combination switch output 1
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
60
G/B
Flasher output (left)
ON
Combination switch
Turn left ON
SKIA3009J
61
G/Y
67
B
70
W/B
Combination switch
Flasher output (right)
ON
Turn right ON
Ground
ON
—
0V
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
SKIA3009J
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EKS008N7
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-72, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-81, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do the turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
LT-80
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Preliminary Check
EKS008N8
A
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
B
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ACC or ON
6
Ignition switch ON or START position
1
BCM
C
Refer to LT-76, "Wiring Diagram — TURN —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
D
E
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
G
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
11 (PU)
M20
ACC
ON
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
I
38 (W/L)
M18
OFF
H
Ground
70 (W/B)
J
LT
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link.
L
WKIA2044E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
Revision: March 2005
LIIA0915E
LT-81
2005 Altima
M
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008N9
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
LKIA0070E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LT-82
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST
ITEM" screen.
A
B
C
LKIA0283E
D
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
E
F
G
H
I
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
HAZARD SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Hazard ON (ON)/Hazard OFF (OFF)" status, determined from hazard switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
J
LT
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
L
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Description
FLASHER (RH)
Turn signal lamp (right) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
FLASHER (LH)
Turn signal lamp (left) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate
EKS008NA
1. BULB INSPECTION
Check each turn signal lamp bulb to make sure correct bulbs are installed. Refer to LT-144, "Exterior Lamp" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" or LT-97, "Bulb Replacement for
Rear Combination Lamp" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-83
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
2. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out BCM self-diagnosis.
Displayed results of self-diagnosis
Diagnosis system 1 - 5>> Combination switch system malfunction.
Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
No malfunction detected>> GO TO 3.
LKIA0073E
3. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND BCM
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, check
that "TURN SIGNAL R" and "TURN SIGNAL L" turn ON-OFF
according to operation of turn signal switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-87, "Removal and
Installation" .
LKIA0083E
4. INSPECTION 1 BETWEEN BCM AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "FLASHER" active test.
2. Check that "FLASHER RH" and "FLASHER LH" operate.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 5.
SKIA6190E
5. INSPECTION 2 BETWEEN BCM AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and all turn signal lamp connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminals
and ground.
BCM
Connector
LH
RH
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
60 (G/B)
M20
61 (G/Y)
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and InstallaWKIA2053E
tion of BCM" .
NG
>> Check for short circuit in harnesses between BCM and each turn signal and repair as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
LT-84
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamps Operate
EKS008NB
1. CHECK BULB
A
Make sure bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-144, "Exterior Lamp" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" or LT-97, "Bulb
Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp" .
B
C
2. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
D
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make
sure "HAZARD SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of hazard
switch.
When hazard switch is in
ON position
E
: HAZARD SW ON
F
G
SKIA4500E
H
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminal 29 (G/R)
and ground.
I
BCM
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
29 (G/R)
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Hazard switch is ON
0V
Hazard switch is OFF
5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
J
LT
SKIA5911E
L
3. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and hazard switch connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
29 (G/R) and hazard switch harness connector M203 terminal 2
(G/R).
29 (G/R) - 2 (G/R)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
SKIA5912E
LT-85
2005 Altima
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
4. CHECK GROUND
Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector M203
terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
SKIA5913E
5. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH
Check continuity of hazard switch.
Hazard switch
Condition
Terminal
1
2
Continuity
Hazard switch is ON
Yes
Hazard switch is OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps does not work after
setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal
and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace hazard switch. Refer to LT-88, "Removal and
Installation" .
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate
SKIA5914E
EKS008NC
1. CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION
Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
NG
>> Repair as necessary.
Bulb Replacement
EKS008ND
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" .
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-114, "TAIL LAMP" .
Removal and Installation
EKS008NE
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Refer to LT-114, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-86
2005 Altima
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
PFP:25540
A
EKS008NF
1.
Remove the steering column cover. Refer to PS-9, "STEERING
COLUMN"
2. Pinch tabs and slide out lighting and turn signal switch (combination switch).
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
C
D
LKIA0013E
Switch Circuit Inspection
EKS008NG
E
Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-87
2005 Altima
HAZARD SWITCH
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
PFP:25290
EKS008NH
1. Remove front air control finisher. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
2. Remove A/T or M/T finisher. Refer to IP-13, "A/T Finisher" or IP-14, "M/T Finisher" .
3. Remove screws and remove hazard switch from finisher.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA1983E
Revision: March 2005
LT-88
2005 Altima
COMBINATION SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —
PFP:25567
A
EKS008NI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1379E
Revision: March 2005
LT-89
2005 Altima
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Reading Function
EKS008NJ
Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008NK
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
LT-90
2005 Altima
COMBINATION SWITCH
4.
Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
A
B
C
LKIA0283E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
D
E
F
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the signals will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Contents
TURN SIGNAL R
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Turn Right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
TURN SIGNAL L
“ON/OFF”
Displays "Turn Left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
HI BEAM SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Headlamp switch 1 (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting
switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
PASSING SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting
switch signal.
AUTO LIGHT SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Auto light switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
FR FOG SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front fog lamp switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal.
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal.
Revision: March 2005
H
I
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
INT VOLUME
G
[1 - 7]
Displays intermittent operation knob setting (1 - 7), determined from wiper switch signal.
LT-91
2005 Altima
J
LT
L
M
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Inspection
EKS008NL
1. SYSTEM CHECK
Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs.
System 1
System 2
System 3
System 4
System 5
—
FR WASHER
FR WIPER LO
TURN LH
TURN RH
FR WIPER HI
—
FR WIPER INT
PASSING
HEAD LAMP1
INT VOLUME 1
—
—
HEAD LAMP2
HI BEAM
—
INT VOLUME 3
AUTO LIGHT
—
TAIL LAMP
INT VOLUME 2
—
—
FR FOG
—
>> GO TO 2.
2. SYSTEM CHECK
With CONSULT-II
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT
TEST ITEM" screen.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR".
3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.
Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that
"FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3,
to which the auto light switch belongs, turn ON-OFF normally.
SKIA7075E
Without CONSULT-II
Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.
Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER
INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally.
Check results
Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.>>Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Refer
to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" (for lighting switch) or WW-30, "Removal and Installation of
Wiper and Washer Switch" .
Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally.>>GO TO 3.
Revision: March 2005
LT-92
2005 Altima
COMBINATION SWITCH
3. HARNESS INSPECTION
1.
2.
Suspect
system
BCM
2
3
M18
4
5
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
Input 1
6 (R/W)
10 (R/W)
Output 1
36 (G/W)
13 (G/W)
Input 2
5 (R/B)
15 (R/B)
Output 2
35 (G/B)
12 (G/B)
Input 3
4 (R/G)
Continuity
C
D
E
5 (R/G)
M28
Output 3
34 (G/R)
16 (G/R)
Input 4
3 (R/Y)
6 (R/Y)
Output 4
33 (G/Y)
11 (G/Y)
Input 5
2 (L)
7 (L)
Output 5
32 (L/W)
14 (L/W)
Yes
WKIA2054E
F
G
Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system
and ground.
Suspect
system
H
BCM
Connector
1
2
3
B
Combination switch
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
1
3.
A
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals.
M18
4
5
Continuity
Terminal (Wire color)
Input 1
6 (R/W)
Output 1
36 (G/W)
Input 2
5 (R/B)
Output 2
35 (G/B)
Input 3
4 (R/G)
Output 3
34 (G/R)
Input 4
3 (R/Y)
Output 4
33 (G/Y)
Input 5
2 (L)
Output 5
32 (L/W)
I
J
Ground
No
LT
L
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit.
Revision: March 2005
LT-93
2005 Altima
COMBINATION SWITCH
4. BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF.
Set wiper dial to position 4.
Connect BCM and combination switch connectors, and check
combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system.
Combination switch
Suspect system
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal (Wire color)
1
Input 1
10 (R/W)
2
Input 2
15 (R/B)
3
Input 3
5 (R/G)
4
M28
Input 4
6 (R/Y)
5
Input 5
7 (L)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WKIA2055E
5. COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection.
Procedure
1
Replace
lighting
switch.
2
Confirm
check
results.
3
OK
NG
Inspection End
Replace wiper
switch.
4
Confirm
check
results.
5
OK
Inspection End
NG
Replace switch
base.
6
Confirm
check
results.
7
OK
Inspection End
NG
Confirm symptom
again.
>> Inspection End.
Removal and Installation
EKS008NM
For details, refer to LT-87, "Removal and Installation" .
Switch Circuit Inspection
EKS008NN
For details, refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-94
2005 Altima
STOP LAMP
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —
PFP:26550
A
EKS008NO
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1539E
Revision: March 2005
LT-95
2005 Altima
STOP LAMP
WKWA1372E
Revision: March 2005
LT-96
2005 Altima
STOP LAMP
Bulb Replacement for High-mounted Stop Lamp
EKS008NP
A
WITH REAR AIR SPOILER
When this vehicle is equipped with a rear air spoiler, the high-mounted stop lamp uses an LED circuit board
instead of a bulb. The LED circuit board is not serviceable and must be replaced as an assembly.
B
WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove high-mounted stop lamp assembly. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for High-mounted
Stop Lamp" .
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove from lamp assembly.
Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from socket.
C
D
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
Bulb Replacement for Rear Combination Lamp
EKS008NQ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" .
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove from combination lamp assembly.
Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from bulb socket.
INSTALLATION
F
G
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation for High-mounted Stop Lamp
EKS008NR
WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-SE-R
H
The high-mounted stop lamp is part of the rear air spoiler. Refer to EI-24, "REAR AIR SPOILER" .
WITH REAR AIR SPOILER-EXCEPT SE-R
I
For rear air spoiler removal and installation procedures, refer to EI-24, "Removal and Installation" .
WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
J
Slide high-mounted stop lamp assembly rearward on parcel
shelf to give clearance to front tabs.
Lift front of lamp assembly up and bring forward to give clearance to rear tabs.
Disconnect connector, and remove from vehicle.
LT
L
M
LKIA0063E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp
EKS008NS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Displace trunk room trim as needed. Refer to EI-37, "Removal and Installation" .
From trunk, remove nuts securing rear combination lamp assembly.
Disconnect connectors and remove assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear combination lamp mounting nut:
: 2.5 - 3.7 N·m (0.25 - 0.38 kg-m, 22 - 33 in-lb)
Revision: March 2005
LT-97
2005 Altima
BACK-UP LAMP
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —
PFP:26550
EKS008NT
WKWA1373E
Revision: March 2005
LT-98
2005 Altima
BACK-UP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
EKS008NU
1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" .
2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove.
3. Pull bulb from socket to remove.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation
A
B
EKS008NV
The back-up lamp is part of the rear combination lamp assembly. For removal and installation, refer to LT-97,
"Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" .
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-99
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26550
EKS00A88
WKIA4089E
System Description
EKS008NW
Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting
switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control
module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN
communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil.
When energized, this relay directs power to the parking, license plate, and tail lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1st or 2nd position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives
input signal requesting the parking, license plate, and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communiRevision: March 2005
LT-100
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
cated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp
relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power
●
through terminal 22 of the IPDM E/R
●
to front combination lamp LH terminal 1
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 1
●
to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2
●
to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2
●
to license lamp LH terminal +
●
to license lamp RH terminal +.
Ground is supplied
●
to front combination lamp LH terminal 2
●
to front combination lamp RH terminal 2
●
through grounds E15 and E24, and
●
to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5
●
to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5
●
to license lamp LH terminal –
●
to license lamp RH terminal –
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
With power and ground supplied, the parking, license and tail lamps illuminate.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position and the ignition switch is turned
from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the parking, license plate, and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the
combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is
changed, then the parking, license plate and tail lamps are turned off.
CAN Communication System Description
H
I
EKS008NX
J
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-101
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Schematic
EKS008NY
WKWA2973E
Revision: March 2005
LT-102
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —
EKS008NZ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1317E
Revision: March 2005
LT-103
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
WKWA0193E
Revision: March 2005
LT-104
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1374E
Revision: March 2005
LT-105
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS008O0
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
2
L
Signal name
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
11
PU
Ignition switch (ACC)
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
ACC
ON
—
Battery voltage
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
ON
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: March 2005
LT-106
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
35
G/B
Combination switch output 2
36
G/W
Combination switch output 1
Signal name
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference value
(Approx.)
A
B
Lighting, turn, wiper OFF
Wiper dial position 4
ON
C
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
67
B
Ground
ON
—
0V
70
W/B
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
D
E
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS008O1
F
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Signal name
22
R/L
Parking, license, and tail
lamp
ON
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Lighting switch
1ST position
Reference value
(Approx.)
OFF
0V
ON
Battery voltage
48
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
H
I
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G
EKS008O2
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-100, "System Description" .
Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-108, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Do the parking, license plate and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-107
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Preliminary Check
EKS008O3
CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK
Check for blown fuses or fusible link.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
f
Ignition switch ACC or ON
6
Ignition switch ON or START position
1
Battery
41
BCM
IPDM E/R
Refer to LT-103, "Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
Connector
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
OFF
ACC
ON
38 (W/L)
0V
0V
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M18
11 (PU)
M20
Ground
70 (W/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse or fusible link.
WKIA2044E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and
ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check ground circuit harness.
Revision: March 2005
LIIA0915E
LT-108
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
CONSULT-II Functions
EKS008O4
A
Refer to LT-16, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Refer to LT-18, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA).
Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate
EKS008O5
1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor,
make sure "LIGHT SW 1ST" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of
lighting switch.
When lighting switch is in
1ST position
C
D
: LIGHT SW 1ST ON
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to LT-92, "Combination Switch Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-92, "Combination
Switch Inspection" .
B
E
F
SKIA5956E
G
2. ACTIVE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST"
on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
4. Make sure parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamp
operation.
H
I
J
Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamp
should operate.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" .
2. Make sure parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps operate.
LT
SKIA5957E
L
Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamp
should operate.
M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: March 2005
LT-109
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
3. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
2.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Make sure "TAIL&CLR REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in
1ST position.
When lighting switch is in
1ST position
: TAIL&CLR REQ ON
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-110
SKIA5958E
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp, license plate lamp and rear combination lamp connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
1.
2.
Without CONSULT-II
Start auto active test. Refer to PG-21, "Auto Active Test" .
When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
(+)
RH
E109
LH
E12
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
1 (R/L)
Ground
Battery voltage
B33
LH
B31
+ (R/L)
I
J
(–)
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E
H
License plate lamp
Connector
D
G
WKIA4037E
(+)
C
F
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
B
Voltage
(Approx.)
LT
Ground
Battery voltage
L
WKIA1076E
M
Terminals
(+)
Rear combination
lamp connector
RH
B36
LH
B35
Terminal
(Wire color)
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
2 (R/L)
Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: March 2005
WKIA4038E
LT-111
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
5. CHECK PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
front combination lamp harness connector.
A
B
IPDM E/R
connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
E122
22 (R/L)
Front combination
lamp connector
RH
E109
LH
E12
Terminal
(Wire color)
Continuity
1 (R/L)
Yes
WKIA4039E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
license plate lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
E122
22 (R/L)
License plate lamp
Connector
RH
B33
LH
B31
Terminal
(Wire color)
Continuity
+ (R/L)
Yes
WKIA1078E
5.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and
rear combination lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
E122
22 (R/L)
Rear combination lamp
Connector
RH
B36
LH
B35
Terminal
(Wire color)
Continuity
2 (R/L)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LT-112
WKIA1258E
2005 Altima
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
6. CHECK GROUND
1.
A
Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground.
B
Terminals
Front combination
lamp connector
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
RH
E109
2 (B/W)
LH
E12
2 (B)
C
Ground
Yes
D
WKIA4040E
2.
Check continuity between license lamp plate harness connector
and ground.
E
License plate lamp
Connector
RH
B33
LH
B31
Terminal
(Wire color)
– (B)
Ground
Continuity
F
Yes
G
WKIA1080E
3.
Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
H
I
Rear combination lamp
Connector
RH
B36
LH
B35
Continuity
Terminal
(Wire color)
5 (B)
J
Ground
Yes
LT
OK or NG
OK
>> Check bulbs.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1259E
L
Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)
EKS008O6
1. CHECK IPDM E/R
1.
Turn ignition switch ON. Turn the combination switch (lighting switch) to the OFF position. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
2. Verify that the parking, license plate, and tail lamps turn on and off after approximately 10 minutes.
OK or NG
OK
>> Ignition relay malfunction. Refer to PG-16, "Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction" .
NG
>> Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
LT-113
2005 Altima
M
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Bulb Replacement
EKS008O7
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
1. Position trunk lid finisher aside.
2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove.
3. Pull bulb to remove from socket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
WKIA3384E
FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP
For bulb replacement, refer to LT-86, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP" .
TAIL LAMP
1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for Rear Combination Lamp" .
2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove.
3. Pull bulb to remove from socket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation
EKS008O8
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
1.
Remove the license plate finisher. Refer to EI-23, "Removal and
Installation" .
2. Disconnect the license plate lamp connector.
3. Remove the license plate lamp mounting screw and remove the
license plate lamp from the vehicle.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
License plate lamp mounting screw:
: 1.3 - 1.8 N·m (0.13 - 0.18 kg-m, 11 - 16 in-lb)
PKIA0059E
FRONT TURN SIGNAL (PARKING) LAMP
For front turn signal (parking) lamp removal and installation procedures, refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
For rear combination lamp removal and installation procedures, refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation for
Rear Combination Lamp" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-114
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:26410
A
EKS008O9
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
WKIA3163E
System Description
EKS008OA
When room lamp switch is in DOOR position, room lamp ON/OFF is controlled by timer according to signals
from switches including key switch and key lock solenoid, front dor switch LH, unlock signal from keyfob (with
remote keyless entry system), door lock/unlock switch, front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), and
ignition switch.
When room lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room lamp turns OFF, there is
a gradual dimming over 1 second.
The room lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module).
Room lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-II.
Ignition keyhole illumination turns ON when driver door is opened (door switch ON) or key is removed from
key cylinder. Illumination turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON or by room lamp timer.
Step lamp turns ON when driver door, passenger or rear doors are opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF
when driver, passenger and rear doors are closed (all door switches OFF).
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Revision: March 2005
LT-115
2005 Altima
M
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3
●
to BCM terminal 57, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
When the key is inserted in ignition switch, power is supplied
●
through the key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 47
●
through case ground of front door switch LH.
When the passenger side door is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 12
●
through case ground of front door switch RH.
When the rear door LH is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 48
●
through case ground of rear door switch LH.
When the rear door RH is opened, ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 13
●
through case ground of rear door switch RH.
The BCM also receives a ground signal when
●
the driver or passenger side door is unlocked with the lock/unlock switch
●
the doors are unlocked with keyfob (with remote keyless entry system)
●
the driver side door is unlocked with key (key cylinder unlock signal).
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by BCM, ground is supplied
●
to interior room lamp terminal 2
●
through BCM terminal 63, and
●
to trunk room lamp terminal –
●
through BCM terminal 49, and
●
to step lamp RH and LH terminal –
●
through BCM terminal 62, and
●
to ignition keyhole illumination lamp terminal +
●
through BCM terminal 1.
With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate.
●
SWITCH OPERATION
When driver door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied
●
to ignition keyhole illumination terminal +
●
through BCM terminal 1.
And power is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 56
●
to ignition keyhole illumination terminal –.
When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied
●
to front step lamp LH and RH terminal –
Revision: March 2005
LT-116
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
through BCM terminal 62.
And power is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 56
●
to step lamp LH and RH terminal +.
When spot lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied
●
to spot lamp terminal –
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
And power is supplied
●
through BCM terminal 56
●
to spot lamp terminal +.
When vanity mirror lamp (driver side and passenger side) is ON, ground is supplied
●
to vanity mirror lamp (driver side and passenger side) terminal 2
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
And power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to vanity mirror lamp (driver side and passenger side) terminal 1.
When trunk room lamp is ON, ground is supplied
●
to trunk room lamp terminal –
●
through BCM terminal 49.
And power is supplied
●
from BCM terminal 56
●
to trunk room lamp terminal +.
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION
I
When interior room lamp switch is in DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs
timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room lamp ON/OFF.
Power is supplied
J
●
through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3.
Key is removed from ignition key cylinder (key switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37.
LT
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 22 (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system) or terminals 7, 8, 45 and 46
(with left front only power window anti-pinch system)
L
●
through main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH
and front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch).
At the time that driver or passenger door is opened, BCM detects that door is unlocked. It determines that inteM
rior room lamp timer operation conditions are met and turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds.
When key is in ignition key cylinder (key switch ON), power is supplied
●
through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4
●
to BCM terminal 37.
When key is removed from key switch (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM
detects that key has been removed, determines that interior room lamp timer conditions are met and turns the
interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds.
When driver door opens → closes and the key is not inserted in the key switch (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door open) → 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior
room lamp operation are met and turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds.
Timer control is canceled under the following conditions.
●
Driver door is locked [when locked with keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, or front
door lock assembly (key cylinder switch)]
●
Driver door is opened (driver door switch turns ON)
●
Ignition switch ON.
Revision: March 2005
LT-117
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
If interior lamp is left ON, it will not be turned out even when door is closed.
BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned OFF.
BCM controls interior lamps listed below:
●
Step lamp
●
Spot lamp
●
Trunk room lamp
●
Interior room lamp
●
Ignition keyhole illumination lamp
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when
●
signal received from keyfob or main power window and door lock/unlock switch, or front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked
●
door is opened or closed
●
key is removed from or inserted in ignition key cylinder.
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
Revision: March 2005
LT-118
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Schematic
EKS008OB
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1393E
Revision: March 2005
LT-119
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —
EKS008OC
WKWA1319E
Revision: March 2005
LT-120
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1394E
Revision: March 2005
LT-121
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
WKWA1395E
Revision: March 2005
LT-122
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Models With Vanity Lamps
EKS009Y8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA2974E
Revision: March 2005
LT-123
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
Terminal
No.
1
7
8
12
13
22
Measuring condition
Wire
color
Signal name
Ignition
switch
R/Y
Ignition keyhole illumination signal
OFF
W/L
P/L
P/L
R/W
Y/G
EKS008OD
Front door key cylinder switch LH
(unlock)
OFF
Front door key cylinder switch LH
(lock)
OFF
Front door switch RH signal
OFF
Rear door switch RH signal
Power window switch serial link
OFF
—
Operation or condition
Door is locked. (SW OFF)
Reference value
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Door is unlocked. (SW ON)
0V
OFF (neutral position)
5V
ON (unlocked position)
0V
OFF (neutral position)
5V
ON (locked position)
0V
Front door
switch RH
Rear door
switch RH
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
When ignition switch ON or power
window timer operates
PIIA2344J
37
B/R
Key-in switch detection signal
OFF
Vehicle key is removed.
0V
Vehicle key is inserted.
Battery voltage
38
R
Ignition power supply
ON
—
Battery voltage
39
L
CAN-H
—
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
—
—
—
42
PU/W
45
46
BR
P
Trunk lamp switch signal
Lock switch signal
Unlock switch signal
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
OFF (neutral position)
Battery voltage
ON (locked position)
0V
OFF (neutral position)
Battery voltage
ON (unlocked position)
0V
Trunk lid
Door lock
and unlock
switch
Door lock
and unlock
switch
47
SB
Front door switch LH signal
OFF
Front door
switch LH
48
R/B
Rear door switch LH signal
OFF
Rear door
switch LH
49
PU
Trunk room lamp signal
OFF
56
P/B
Battery saver output signal
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
ON (open)
0V
OFF (closed)
Battery voltage
Trunk lid is open (ON)
57
W
62
R/W
OFF
Trunk lid is closed (OFF)
30 minutes after ignition switch is
turned to OFF
0V
Battery voltage
0V
ON
—
Battery voltage
Battery power supply (fuse)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
Step lamp signal
OFF
Any door is open (ON)
All doors are closed (OFF)
Revision: March 2005
LT-124
0V
Battery voltage
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Terminal
No.
Measuring condition
Wire
color
63
Ignition
switch
Signal name
R
Interior room lamp output signal
67
B
70
W/B
OFF
Operation or condition
Interior room
lamp switch:
DOOR position
Any door
switch
B
ON
(open)
0V
OFF
(closed)
Battery voltage
Ground
ON
—
0V
Battery power supply (fusible link)
OFF
—
Battery voltage
C
D
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Reference value
(Approx.)
EKS008OE
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-115, "System Description" .
Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-125, "Preliminary Check" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
E
F
EKS008OF
G
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
H
Check for blown BCM fuses or fusible link.
Unit
Power source
Battery
BCM
Fuse or fusible link No.
I
f
21
Ignition switch ON or START position
1
J
Refer to LT-120, "Wiring Diagram — INT/L —" .
OK or NG
LT
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
L
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2.
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM connector terminals and ground.
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
OFF
ON
M18
38 (R)
0V
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
M20
M
57 (W)
70 (W/B)
Ground
WKIA1478E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse.
Revision: March 2005
LT-125
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector terminal and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M19
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Check harness ground circuit.
LIIA0915E
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008OG
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
LKIA0070E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
Revision: March 2005
LT-126
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
3.
Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
A
B
C
BCIA0030E
D
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST
ITEM" screen.
E
F
G
PKIA5226E
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
I
Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON", "ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET" or "ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET" on
"SELECT WORK ITEM" screen.
J
Touch "START".
Touch "CHANGE SETT".
The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed.
LT
Touch "END".
Display Item List
Item
Description
CONSULT-II
The 30 seconds glowing function the interior room lamps and the
ignition keyhole illumination can be selected when front door LH is
released (unlocked).
ON/OFF
ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET
The time in order to escalate illumination can be adjusted when the
interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned
on.
MODE 1 - 7
ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET
The time in order to diminish illumination can be adjusted when the
interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned
off.
MODE 1 - 7
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
M
Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF".
MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Time (sec.)
0.5
1
2
3
4
5
0
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
Revision: March 2005
LT-127
L
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual signal.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal.
KEY ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Key inserted (ON)/key removed (OFF)" status judged from the key switch signal.
DOOR SW-DR
"ON/OFF"
Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open:
ON/Door is closed: OFF)
DOOR SW-AS
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from passenger door switch
signal.
DOOR SW-RR
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch RH
signal.
DOOR SW-RL
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch LH
signal.
BACK DOOR SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from back door switch signal.
KEY CYL LK-SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door locked (ON)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver door.
KEY CYL UN-SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver
door.
CDL LOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door locked (ON)/Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection
switch in driver door.
CDL UNLOCK SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in passenger door.
KEYLESS LOCK
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Locked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lock signal.
KEYLESS UNLOCK
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Unlocked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from unlock signal.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item.
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Description
INT LAMP
Interior room lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations.
IGN ILLUM
Ignition keyhole illumination can be operated by ON-OFF operation.
STEP LAMP TEST
LUGGAGE LAMP TEST
Revision: March 2005
Step lamp can be operated by ON-OFF operation.
Trunk room lamp can be operated by ON-OFF operation.
LT-128
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate
EKS008OH
1. CHECK EACH SWITCH
A
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make
sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with
switch operation. Refer to LT-128, "Display Item List" for switches
and their functions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
B
C
D
SKIA5930E
E
2. ACTIVE TEST
1.
2.
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "INT LAMP" active test.
When room lamp switch is in "DOOR" position, use active test to
make sure room lamp operates.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
F
G
H
LKIA0092E
I
3. CHECK ROOM LAMP INPUT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between room lamp harness connector R8 terminal 1 (P/B) and ground.
1 (P/B) - Ground
J
LT
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
L
WKIA2062E
4. CHECK ROOM LAMP
1.
2.
Disconnect room lamp connector.
Check continuity between room lamp terminals.
Room lamp
Condition
Continuity
Room lamp switch is DOOR
Yes
Room lamp switch is OFF
No
Terminal
1
2
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace room lamp. Refer to LT-133, "ROOM OR SPOT
LAMP" .
Revision: March 2005
LT-129
WKIA2063E
2005 Altima
M
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
5. CHECK ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (P/B) and room lamp harness connector R8 terminal 1 (P/B).
56 (P/B) - 1 (P/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if interior lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2064E
6. CHECK ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and room lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
63 (R) and room lamp harness connector R8 terminal 2 (R).
63 (R) - 2 (R)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if interior lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA2065E
Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not Operate
EKS008OI
1. CHECK EACH SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make
sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with
switch operation. Refer to LT-128, "Display Item List" for switches
and their functions.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
SKIA5930E
2. ACTIVE TEST
1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "INT LAMP".
2. Select "IGN ILLUM" active test to make sure lamp operates.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SKIA3992E
Revision: March 2005
LT-130
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
3. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION INPUT
A
Check voltage between ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal + (P/B) and ground.
+ (P/B) - Ground
B
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
C
D
WKIA1909E
4. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION BULB
1.
2.
E
Disconnect ignition keyhole illumination connector.
Check continuity between ignition keyhole illumination terminals
+ and –.
+ - –
F
: Continuity should exist.
G
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace ignition keyhole illumination bulb. Refer to LT134, "IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP" .
H
WKIA1910E
5. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
J
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal
1 (R/Y) and ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25
terminal – (R/Y).
– (R/Y) - 1 (R/Y)
LT
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not
work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
WKIA1911E
M
6. CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and ignition keyhole illumination
connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (P/B) and ignition keyhole illumination harness connector
M25 terminal + (P/B).
+ (P/B) - 56 (P/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not
work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-20,
"Removal and Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LT-131
WKIA1912E
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
All Step Lamps Do Not Operate
EKS008OJ
1. CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make
sure switches listed below turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation.
Switch name
CONSULT screen
Front door switch LH
DOOR SW-DR
Front door switch RH
DOOR SW-AS
Rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RR
Rear door switch LH
DOOR SW-RL
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Inspect malfunctioning switch system.
SKIA5930E
2. CHECK STEP LAMP INPUT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between front step lamp LH harness connector
D11 terminal + (P/B) and ground.
+ (P/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
LKIA0306E
3. CHECK STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
62 (R/W) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal – (R/W).
– (R/W) - 62 (R/W)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WKIA1484E
4. CHECK STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector and step lamp LH connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (P/B) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal
+ (P/B).
+ (P/B) - 56 (P/B)
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting
the connector again. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
LT-132
WKIA1485E
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate
EKS008OK
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
1.
2.
3.
B
All interior room lamps switch are OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal
56 (P/B) and ground.
56 (P/B) - Ground
C
: Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Repair harness or connector. In a case of making a
short circuit, be sure to disconnect battery negative
cable after repairing harness, and then reconnect.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
Bulb Replacement
D
WKIA1486E
E
EKS008OL
ROOM OR SPOT LAMP
F
1. Insert a thin screwdriver in the notch and carefully remove the lens.
2. Remove the bulb.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
STEP LAMP
1. Carefully remove lamp assembly from door finisher.
2. Remove the bulb.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
H
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
I
1.
Insert a thin screwdriver in the notch and carefully remove the
lens.
2. Remove the bulb.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J
LT
L
PKIA0188E
TRUNK ROOM LAMP
M
1. Unfold tab A and open the lens.
2. Remove the bulb.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LKIA0066E
Revision: March 2005
LT-133
2005 Altima
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Removal and Installation
EKS008OM
ROOM LAMP
1. Carefully remove the lens.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the room lamp.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Room lamp mounting screw:
: 2.5 - 3.4 N·m (0.25 - 0.35 kg-m, 22 - 30 in-lb)
IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
1. Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LKIA0065E
STEP LAMP
1. Carefully remove lamp assembly from door finisher.
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TRUNK ROOM LAMP
1.
2.
Unfold tab A and open the lens.
Remove the trunk room lamp while pressing tab B in the direction of the arrow.
3. Disconnect the trunk room lamp connector.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LKIA0066E
Revision: March 2005
LT-134
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
ILLUMINATION
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:27545
A
EKS00A87
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
WKIA4090E
System Description
EKS008ON
Control of the illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination
switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated)
the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input is
communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power to the illumination lamps, which then illuminate.
Power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Revision: March 2005
LT-135
2005 Altima
M
ILLUMINATION
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 6, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 11.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives
input requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the
CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil which, when energized,
directs power
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 22
●
to illumination control switch terminal 1
●
to combination meter terminal 31
●
to A/T device terminal 15 (with A/T)
●
to TCS ON/OFF switch terminal 3 (with TCS)
●
to audio unit terminal 8
●
to hazard switch terminal 3
●
to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 1 (with heated seats)
●
to front air control terminal 12
●
to AV switch terminal 3 (with NAVI)
●
to glove box lamp terminal +.
With the ignition switch in ON or START, power is also supplied
●
through BCM terminal 68
●
to rear power window switch LH terminal 5
●
to rear power window switch RH terminal 5
●
to front power window switch RH terminal 5 (with left front only power window anti-pinch system) or terminal 13 (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system)
●
to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (with left front only power window antipinch system) or terminal 17 (with left and right front power window anti-pinch system).
Ground is supplied
●
to illumination control switch terminal 3
●
to glove box lamp terminal –
●
to combination meter terminal 24
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61, and
●
to rear power window switch RH terminal 8
●
through ground B117, and
●
to rear power window switch LH terminal 8
●
through grounds B7 and B19.
The main power window and door lock/unlock switch and the front power window switch RH illumination circuits are case grounded.
Controlled ground is supplied
●
through illumination control switch terminal 2
●
to combination meter terminal 32
●
to A/T device terminal 16 (with A/T)
●
to TCS ON/OFF switch terminal 4 (with TCS)
●
to audio unit terminal 7
●
to hazard switch terminal 4
●
to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 2 (with heated seats)
●
to front air control terminal 11
Revision: March 2005
LT-136
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
to AV switch terminal 4 (with NAVI).
With power and ground supplied, illumination lamps illuminate.
●
A
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated)
and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated.
Under this condition, the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 30 minutes unless the combination switch
(lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the
illumination lamps are turned off after a 30 second delay.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) after
illumination lamps have been turned off by the battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008OO
B
C
D
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-137
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
EKS008OP
WKWA1375E
Revision: March 2005
LT-138
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —
EKS008OQ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1321E
Revision: March 2005
LT-139
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
WKWA1839E
Revision: March 2005
LT-140
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
WKWA1840E
Revision: March 2005
LT-141
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
WKWA1324E
Revision: March 2005
LT-142
2005 Altima
ILLUMINATION
Removal and Installation
EKS008OR
A
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
1.
2.
Remove driver lower instrument panel. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Carefully release the illumination control switch retaining tabs
and remove the unit from the driver lower instrument panel.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
C
D
WKIA1984E
E
GLOVE BOX LAMP
1.
Through the passenger air bag connector access in the top of the glove box, remove bulb socket by turning counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb from the socket to remove.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
J
LT
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LT-143
2005 Altima
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
PFP:26297
EKS008OS
Item
Wattage (W)*
Low (halogen)
55 (H1)
Low (xenon)
35 (D2R)
High
60W (HB3)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Exterior Lamp
EKS008OT
Item
Front combination lamp
Wattage (W)*
Turn signal lamp/parking lamp
Stop/Tail lamp
Rear combination lamp
27/8 (amber)
27/8
Turn signal lamp
27
Back-up lamp
13
Side marker lamp
5
Fog lamp
55 (H11)
License plate lamp
5
High-mounted stop lamp (parcel shelf mount)
18
High-mounted stop lamp (rear air spoiler mount)
*
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Interior Lamp/Illumination
EKS008OU
Item
Wattage (W)*
Glove box lamp
3.4
Ignition keyhole illumination lamp
0.74*
Spot lamp
10
Room lamp
8
Step lamp
3.8
Trunk room lamp
3.4
Vanity mirror lamp
1.4*
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
LT-144
2005 Altima
B ENGINE
SECTION
LU
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A
LU
C
D
E
CONTENTS
QR25DE
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................ 5
Lubrication Circuit .................................................... 5
System Drawing ....................................................... 6
ENGINE OIL ............................................................... 7
Inspection ................................................................. 7
OIL LEVEL ............................................................ 7
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE ................................ 7
OIL LEAKAGE ....................................................... 7
OIL PRESSURE CHECK ...................................... 8
Changing Engine Oil ................................................ 8
OIL FILTER ............................................................... 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
OIL PUMP ..................................................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................11
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................11
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................11
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 13
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 14
Oil Pressure ........................................................... 14
Oil Pump ................................................................ 14
Regulator Valve ...................................................... 14
Oil Capacity ............................................................ 14
PREPARATION ......................................................... 16
Special Service Tools ............................................. 16
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 16
LUBRICATION SYSTEM .......................................... 18
Lubrication Circuit ................................................... 18
System Drawing ..................................................... 19
ENGINE OIL .............................................................. 20
Inspection ............................................................... 20
OIL LEVEL .......................................................... 20
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE .............................. 20
OIL LEAKAGE ..................................................... 20
OIL PRESSURE CHECK .................................... 21
Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 21
OIL FILTER ............................................................... 23
Removal and Installation ........................................ 23
REMOVAL ........................................................... 23
INSTALLATION ................................................... 23
OIL PUMP ................................................................. 24
Removal and Installation ........................................ 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 24
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 24
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 26
OIL COOLER ............................................................ 27
Removal and Installation ........................................ 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 28
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 29
Oil Pressure ............................................................ 29
Regulator Valve ...................................................... 29
Oil Pump ................................................................. 29
Oil Capacity ............................................................ 29
VQ35DE
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 15
Precautions for Liquid Gasket ................................ 15
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ........ 15
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE... 15
Revision: March 2005
LU-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
[QR25DE]
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
PFP:00001
EBS00M6W
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket sealing.
Tool number
●
●
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as
shown.
In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to
lightly tap the parts, to remove it.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
WBIA0566E
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper.
● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign materials.
PBIC0003E
3.
Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions.
● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove.
WBIA0567E
As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of service manual.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation.
● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
Revision: March 2005
LU-2
SEM159F
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EBS00J6J
The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
ST25051001
(J-25695-1)
Oil pressure gauge
Measuring oil pressure
Maximum measuring range:
2,452 kPa (25 kg/cm2 , 356 psi)
LU
C
D
S-NT050
ST25052000
(J-25695-2)
Hose
E
Adapting oil pressure gauge to cylinder block
F
G
S-NT559
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench
Removing and installing oil filter
H
I
S-NT772
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
J
K
S-NT046
WS39930000
(—)
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
L
M
S-NT052
Commercial Service Tools
Revision: March 2005
EBS00J6K
LU-3
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[QR25DE]
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Deep socket
Removing and installing oil pressure sensor
Deep socket 26 mm, 3/8 drive
NT818
Revision: March 2005
LU-4
2005 Altima
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
[QR25DE]
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication Circuit
PFP:15010
A
EBS00J6L
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WBIA0138E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-5
2005 Altima
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
[QR25DE]
System Drawing
EBS00J6M
WBIA0139E
Revision: March 2005
LU-6
2005 Altima
ENGINE OIL
[QR25DE]
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
PFP:KLA92
A
EBS00J6N
OIL LEVEL
●
●
●
Before starting the engine, check the oil level. If the engine is
already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking.
Check that the oil level is within the range on the dipstick.
If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
LU
C
D
PBIC0249E
E
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
●
●
Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or
replace damaged parts.
OIL LEAKAGE
F
G
Check for oil leakage around the following areas:
●
Oil pan
●
Oil pan drain plug
●
Oil pressure sensor
●
Oil filter
●
IVTC cover
●
Front cover
●
Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
●
Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
●
Crankshaft oil seal
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-7
2005 Altima
ENGINE OIL
[QR25DE]
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
●
For M/T models, put the gearshift lever in the Neutral "N" position. For A/T models, put the selector lever in the Park “P” position.
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" .
2. Remove undercover using power tool.
3. Disconnect oil pressure sensor harness connector at oil pressure sensor, and remove oil pressure sensor.
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock oil pressure sensor.
4.
5.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load, using
Tool
Tool numbers : ST25051001 (J-25695-1)
: ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
NOTE:
When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure
becomes high.
WBIA0571E
Engine oil pressure [Oil temperature 80 °C (176 °F)]
Engine speed (rpm)
Idle speed
Engine pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
6.
a.
b.
Approx. 98 (1.0, 14) or more
6,000
Approx. 294 (3.0, 43) or more
Approx. 392 (4.0, 57) or more
If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks.
After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows:
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine.
Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Oil pressure sensor torque
c.
2,000
: 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine.
Changing Engine Oil
EBS00J6O
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot.
●
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer: try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Make sure vehicle is on level surface, then warm up engine.
2. Check for oil leakage from engine components.
3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap.
5. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil.
Oil specification and viscosity
● Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Oil capacity (Approximate):
With oil filter change
4.2
(4 1/2 qt.)
Without oil filter change
4.0
(4 1/4 qt.)
4.6
(4 7/8 qt.)
Drain and refill
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Revision: March 2005
LU-8
2005 Altima
ENGINE OIL
[QR25DE]
CAUTION:
● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install using a new washer.
Oil pan drain plug
A
: 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for LU
reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the
engine.
Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
C
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the oil level using the dipstick.
●
6.
7.
8.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-9
2005 Altima
OIL FILTER
[QR25DE]
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
PFP:15208
EBS00J6P
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
●
Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil
are hot.
●
The oil filter has a built in pressure relief valve. Use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent
●
When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil
leakage or spillage.
●
Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
●
Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
WBIA0589E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Clean off any foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal surface of the new oil filter.
SMA010
3.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification below.
Oil filter
: 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
SMA229B
4.
5.
After warming up the engine, check for oil leaks.
Check oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to LU-7,
"ENGINE OIL" .
ALC094
Revision: March 2005
LU-10
2005 Altima
OIL PUMP
[QR25DE]
OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
●
PFP:15010
A
EBS00J6Q
Remove the front cover. Refer to EM-48, "TIMING CHAIN" .
LU
Disassembly and Assembly
EBS00J6R
C
D
E
F
G
KBIA0153E
1.
Front cover
2.
Outer rotor
3.
Inner rotor
4.
Oil pump cover
5.
Regulator valve
6.
Spring
7.
Regulator plug
H
I
CAUTION:
Before installation, apply new engine oil to the parts as instructed in the figure above.
J
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove the oil pump cover.
Remove inner rotor and outer rotor from front cover.
After removing regulator plug, remove regulator spring and regulator valve.
K
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
L
Measure the clearance of the oil pump parts.
●
Measure clearance with feeler gauge.
●
Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1).
M
Standard
●
: 0.114 - 0.179 mm (0.0045 - 0.0070 in)
Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2).
Standard
: Below 0.220 mm (0.0087 in)
SLC932A
Revision: March 2005
LU-11
2005 Altima
OIL PUMP
[QR25DE]
●
●
Measure clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge.
Side clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body (position
3).
Standard
●
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
Side clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position
4).
Standard
: 0.060 - 0.110 mm (0.0024 - 0.0043 in)
PBIC0252E
●
1.
Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body
as follows:
Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor
(Position 5).
PBIC0253E
2.
Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside
micrometer (Position 6).
(Clearance) = (Inner diameter of oil pump body) – (Outer diameter of inner rotor).
Standard
: 0.035 - 0.070 mm (0.0014 - 0.0028 in)
PBIC0254E
●
Regulator valve clearance:
(Clearance) = D1(Valve hole diameter) – D2 (Outer diameter of
valve)
Standard
: 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in)
CAUTION:
Coat regulator valve with engine oil.
Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own
weight.
KBIA0043E
Revision: March 2005
LU-12
2005 Altima
OIL PUMP
[QR25DE]
ASSEMBLY
●
●
A
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Install the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks on
the oil pump cover side.
LU
C
PBIC0255E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-13
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR25DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Oil Pressure
PFP:00030
EBS00J6S
Engine speed
rpm
Approximate discharge pressure
Idle speed
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
2,000
294 (3.0, 43)
6,000
392 (4.0, 57)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Oil Pump
EBS00J6T
Unit: mm (in)
Body to outer rotor radial clearance
0.114 - 0.179 (0.0045 - 0.0070)
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance
Below 0.220 (0.0087)
Body to inner rotor axial clearance
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Body to outer rotor axial clearance
0.060 - 0.110 (0.0024 - 0.0043)
Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance
0.035 - 0.070 (0.0014 - 0.0028)
Regulator Valve
EBS00J6U
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance
0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
Oil Capacity
EBS00J6V
Unit:
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
Approximately 4.2 (4 1/2, 3 3/4)
Without oil filter change
Approximately 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2)
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Revision: March 2005
(US qt, IMP qt)
Approximately 4.6 (4 7/8, 4)
LU-14
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[VQ35DE]
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Liquid Gasket
PFP:00001
A
EBS00M6X
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
●
After removing nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface, using Tool and remove old liquid gasket seal- LU
ing.
Tool number
●
●
: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
Tap Tool to insert it, and then slide it by tapping on the side as
shown.
In areas where Tool is difficult to use, use plastic hammer to
lightly tap the parts, to remove it.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason suitable tool such as screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
C
D
E
WBIA0566E
F
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface, Using scraper.
● Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering
moisture, grease and foreign materials.
G
H
I
PBIC0003E
J
3.
Attach liquid gasket tube to Tool.
Tool number
4.
: WS39930000 (
—
)
K
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .
Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions.
● If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove.
L
M
WBIA0567E
As for the bolt holes, normally apply liquid gasket inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Make sure to read the text of service manual.
● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
● If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
● Do not retighten nuts or bolts after the installation.
● After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
●
Revision: March 2005
LU-15
SEM159F
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
EBS00J6X
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST25051001
(J-25695-1)
Oil pressure gauge
Measuring oil pressure
Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25
kg-cm2 , 356 psi)
NT050
ST25052000
(J-25695-2)
Hose
Adapting oil pressure gauge to upper oil pan
S-NT559
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench
Removing and installing oil filter
S-NT772
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain
case
S-NT046
WS39930000
(
—
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
)
NT052
Commercial Service Tool
Revision: March 2005
EBS00J6Y
LU-16
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[VQ35DE]
Tool name
Description
Deep socket
Removing and installing oil pressure switch
Deep socket 26 mm, 3/8 drive
A
LU
C
NT818
Power tools
Loosening nuts and bolts
D
E
PBIC0190E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-17
2005 Altima
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication Circuit
PFP:15010
EBS00J6Z
WBIA0140E
Revision: March 2005
LU-18
2005 Altima
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
[VQ35DE]
System Drawing
EBS00J70
A
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
WBIA0141E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-19
2005 Altima
ENGINE OIL
[VQ35DE]
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
PFP:KLA92
EBS00J71
OIL LEVEL
NOTE:
●
Before starting the engine, check the oil level. If the engine is
already started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking.
●
Check that the oil level is within the range as indicated on the
dipstick.
●
If it is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
JMA122D
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
●
●
Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or
replace damaged parts.
OIL LEAKAGE
Check for oil leakage around the following areas:
●
Oil pan
●
Oil pan drain plug
●
Oil pressure sensor
●
Oil filter
●
Oil cooler
●
IVTC cover
●
Intake valve timing control cover
●
Front cover
●
Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
●
Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
●
Crank oil seal (front and rear)
Revision: March 2005
LU-20
2005 Altima
ENGINE OIL
[VQ35DE]
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
A
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
●
For M/T models, put the gearshift lever in the Neutral "N" position. For A/T models, put the selecLU
tor lever in the Park “P” position.
1. Check the oil level.
2. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector.
C
3. Remove oil pressure sensor.
4.
5.
6.
Install the pressure gauge.
Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load, using
Tool
D
E
Tool numbers : ST25051001 (J-25695-1)
: ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
Engine speed
rpm
Approximate discharge pressure
Idle speed
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
2,000
7.
a.
b.
F
WBIA0571E
G
294 (3.0, 43)
If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks.
After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows:
Remove the old sealant adhering to switch and engine.
Apply thread sealant and tighten the oil pressure switch to specification.
Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED
CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
H
I
J
Oil pressure switch : 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Changing Engine Oil
EBS00J72
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot.
●
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Make sure vehicle is on level surface, then warm up engine.
2. Check for oil leakage from engine components.
3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap.
5. Drain engine oil.
6. Install drain plug and refill with new engine oil.
● Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Oil capacity (Approximate):
With oil filter change
Approximately 4.0
(4 1/4 qt.)
Without oil filter change
Approximately 3.7
(3 7/8 qt.)
Approximately 5.0
(5 1/4 qt.)
Drain and refill
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
CAUTION:
● Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug
Revision: March 2005
: 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
LU-21
2005 Altima
K
L
M
ENGINE OIL
[VQ35DE]
The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only.
● Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check oil level.
●
7.
8.
9.
Revision: March 2005
LU-22
2005 Altima
OIL FILTER
[VQ35DE]
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
PFP:15208
A
EBS00J73
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the oil filter using Tool as shown.
Tool number
LU
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
●
The oil filter is provided with a relief valve.
Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
●
Be careful not to get burned, the engine oil may be hot.
●
When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil
leakage or spillage.
●
Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
●
Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and
the vehicle.
C
D
WBIA0590E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
E
F
Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter.
G
H
I
SMA010
J
3.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn, or tighten to specification.
Oil filter
K
: 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
L
M
SMA229B
4.
5.
After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leakage.
Check oil level and add engine oil. Refer to LU-20, "ENGINE OIL" .
Revision: March 2005
LU-23
2005 Altima
OIL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
PFP:15010
EBS00J74
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-164, "Removal" .
Remove oil pump assembly.
INSTALLATION
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly
EBS00J75
WBIA0064E
●
●
Disassemble as shown.
Assembly is in the reverse order of Disassembly. When assembling the oil pump, apply engine oil
to the rotors.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Clearance of Oil Pump Parts
●
Measure clearance with feeler gauge.
Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1)
Standard
: 0.114 - 0.200 mm (0.0045 - 0.0079 in)
Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2)
Standard
: Below 0.180 mm (0.0071 in)
SLC932A
Revision: March 2005
LU-24
2005 Altima
OIL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
●
Measure clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge.
Side clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body (position
3).
Standard
A
: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
LU
Side clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position
4).
Standard
: 0.050 - 0.110 mm (0.0020 - 0.0043 in)
C
SLC933A
D
●
1.
2.
Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as follows.
Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor
(position A).
Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside
micrometer (position B).
(clearance 5) = (inner diameter of oil pump body B) – (outer
diameter of inner rotor A)
Standard
E
F
: 0.045 - 0.091 mm (0.0018 - 0.0036 in)
G
SLC934AB
H
Regulator Valve
1.
2.
Visually inspect components for wear and damage.
Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and valve
spring.
3. Coat regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls smoothly
into the valve hole by its own weight.
If damaged, replace regulator valve set or oil pump body.
I
J
K
SLC251B
Regulator Valve Clearance
L
(Clearance 6) = D (Valve hole diameter) – E (Outer diameter of
valve)
Standard
M
: 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in)
If it exceeds the standard, replace the oil pump body.
CAUTION:
Coat regulator valve with engine oil.
Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own
weight.
SLC935AA
Revision: March 2005
LU-25
2005 Altima
OIL PUMP
[VQ35DE]
ASSEMBLY
●
●
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Assemble the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks
on the oil pump cover side.
SLC324B
Revision: March 2005
LU-26
2005 Altima
OIL COOLER
[VQ35DE]
OIL COOLER
Removal and Installation
PFP:21305
A
EBS00J76
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
LBIA0348E
1.
Oil filter
4.
Oil inlet hose
5.
Oil cooler
6.
O-ring
7.
Oil pan
8.
Oil outlet pipe
9.
Relief valve
10. Drain plug
2.
Oil cooler bolt
11. Copper gasket
3.
Oil inlet pipe
12. Water connector
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-25, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
● Do not spill coolant on the drive belt.
Remove the oil filter and the oil cooler.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
2.
Check oil cooler for cracks.
Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly.
Revision: March 2005
LU-27
2005 Altima
M
OIL COOLER
[VQ35DE]
Oil Pressure Relief Valve
Inspect oil pressure relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it.
INSTALLATION
●
●
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
When installing the oil cooler, align the oil cooler stopper with the stopper of the oil pan.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Start engine and check there are no leaks of engine oil or coolant.
Revision: March 2005
LU-28
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Oil Pressure
PFP:00100
A
EBS00J77
Engine speed
rpm
Approximate discharge pressure
Idle speed
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
2,000
LU
294 (3.0, 43)
C
Regulator Valve
EBS00J78
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance
D
0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
Oil Pump
EBS00J79
Unit: mm (in)
Body to outer rotor radial clearance
Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance
Below 0.18 (0.0071)
Body to inner rotor axial clearance
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Body to outer rotor axial clearance
0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043)
Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance
0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
Oil Capacity
F
G
EBS00J7A
Unit:
Drain and refill
E
0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079)
With oil filter change
Approximately 4.2 (4 1/4, 3 3/4)
Without oil filter change
Approximately 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2)
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
(US qt, Imp qt)
H
I
Approximately 4.6 (4 7/8, 4)
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
LU-29
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[VQ35DE]
Revision: March 2005
LU-30
2005 Altima
L MAINTENANCE
SECTION
MA
MAINTENANCE
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ....................................... 5
Explanation of General Maintenance ....................... 5
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 7
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ....................... 7
SCHEDULE 1 ........................................................... 7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 7
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............... 9
SCHEDULE 2 ......................................................... 10
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 10
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ..............11
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 12
Fluids and Lubricants ............................................. 12
QR25DE .............................................................. 12
VQ35DE .............................................................. 13
SAE Viscosity Number ........................................... 14
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL .................................... 14
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO ..... 14
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE) ........ 15
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 15
Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 15
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 15
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ........................ 16
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 17
Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 17
Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 18
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 18
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER .......... 18
Changing Engine Oil .............................................. 18
Changing Oil Filter ................................................. 19
Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type) ... 19
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 21
Revision: March 2005
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE) ......... 22
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 22
Changing Engine Coolant ....................................... 22
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT .......................... 22
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 23
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 24
Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 24
Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 25
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 25
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER ................... 25
Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 25
Changing Oil Filter .................................................. 26
Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type) ... 26
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 27
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ................... 28
Changing In-cabin Microfilter .................................. 28
Checking Exhaust System ...................................... 28
Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks ................. 28
Checking M/T Oil .................................................... 28
Changing M/T Oil .................................................... 29
DRAINING ........................................................... 29
FILLING ............................................................... 29
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 30
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 31
Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type) ............. 32
REMOVAL ........................................................... 32
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ..................... 32
Tire Rotation ........................................................... 34
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks .................. 34
Checking Brake Lines and Cables ......................... 34
Checking Disc Brake .............................................. 35
ROTOR ................................................................ 35
CALIPER ............................................................. 35
PAD ..................................................................... 35
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ..................... 35
STEERING GEAR ............................................... 35
STEERING LINKAGE ......................................... 35
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines .............. 36
Axle and Suspension Parts .................................... 36
Drive Shaft .............................................................. 37
MA-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch ............ 37
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors
Revision: March 2005
and Adjusters ..........................................................38
MA-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
ELS0014S
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
Revision: March 2005
MA-3
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
ELS0014T
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter cap wrench
Removing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
NT375
KV991J0010
(J-23688)
Engine coolant refractometer
Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in
engine coolant
WBIA0539E
KV991J0070
(J-45695)
Coolant Refill Tool
Refilling engine cooling system
LMA053
Commercial Service Tool
ELS0014U
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Belt tension gauge
(BT-3373-F)
Checking drive belt tension
AMA126
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plugs
S-NT047
Power Tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
MA-4
2005 Altima
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Explanation of General Maintenance
PFP:00000
A
ELS0014V
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform
checks and inspections themselves or have their NISSAN dealers do them.
B
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Tires
Wheel nuts
Check the pressure including the spare, at least once a month and always prior
to a long distance trip with a gauge. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
C
Reference page
WT-6, "Tire"
When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any
loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.
WT-5, "Rotation"
Windshield
Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.
GW-11, "WINDSHIELD
GLASS"
Tire rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
Wheel alignment and
balance
If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel
balancing may be needed.
Windshield wiper
blades
Doors and engine
hood
Lamps
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
E
WT-5, "Rotation"
F
FSU-6, "Front Wheel
Alignment" and MA-32,
"Balancing Wheels
(Bonding Weight Type)"
G
—
H
Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the trunk
lid and back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening
when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
GI-45, "Recommended
Chemical Products and
Sealants"
Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and
other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp aim. Clean the headlamps on a regular basis.
LT-28, "Aiming Adjustment"
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the
vehicle, etc.
Item
Reference page
Warning lamps and
chimes
Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and
washer
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not
streak.
—
Windshield defroster
Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient
quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
—
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering
condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Seats
Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to
make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every
position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the
latches lock securely for folding-down rear seatbacks.
Seat belts
Clutch pedal
Revision: March 2005
DI-30, "WARNING
LAMPS", DI-45, "WARNING CHIME"
PS-7, "STEERING
WHEEL"
—
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and
retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the
belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
MA-38
Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has proper free play.
CL-6, "On-vehicle
Inspection and Adjustment"
MA-5
D
2005 Altima
I
J
K
MA
M
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Item
Reference page
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
—
Brakes
Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
—
Brake pedal and
booster
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance
under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to
keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL"
and BR-15, "BRAKE
BOOSTER"
Parking brake
Check that the lever has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held
securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied.
PB-3, "Inspection"
Automatic transaxle
“Park” mechanism
Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly and
smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the
selector lever in the “P” position without applying any brakes.
—
UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Item
Reference page
Windshield washer
fluid
Engine coolant level
Radiator and hoses
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that
may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation,
deterioration or loose connections.
Brake and clutch fluid
levels
Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoirs.
Battery
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
—
MA-16 QR25DE or
MA-23 VQ35DE
—
MA-34 (brakes), MA-28
(clutch)
—
Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
MA-15 QR25DE or
MA-22 VQ35DE
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine.
MA-18 QR25DE or
MA-25 VQ35DE
Power steering fluid
level and lines
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
MA-36
Automatic transaxle
fluid level
Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the
engine idling.
MA-30
Exhaust system
Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate
the trouble and correct it.
MA-28
The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around
the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt
can easily accumulate.
—
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle
has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is
normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for
the cause and correct it immediately.
—
Engine drive belts
Underbody
Fluid leaks
Revision: March 2005
MA-6
2005 Altima
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance
PFP:00026
A
ELS0014W
Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in
which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic
maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include
one or more of the following driving conditions:
Schedule 1
●
Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
●
Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures
remaining below freezing.
●
Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
●
Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
●
Driving in dusty conditions.
●
Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads.
●
Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.
Emission Control System Maintenance
MA-7
C
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
D
MA-9
E
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in
Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits.
Schedule 2
F
Emission Control System Maintenance
MA-10
Chassis and Body
Maintenance
MA-11
SCHEDULE 1
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
H
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Air cleaner filter
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
Engine oil
Revision: March 2005
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
NOTE (1)
NOTE (2)
MA18(QR25DE)
or MA-25
(VQ35DE)
[R]
Fuel lines
Engine coolant
30
(48)
24
MA15(QR25DE)
or
MA-22
(VQ35DE)
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel filter
G
ELS0014X
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Drive belts
B
I*
MA-21
(QR25DE) or
MA-27
(VQ35DE)
I*
MA17(QR25DE)
or MA-24
(VQ35DE)
NOTE (3)
—
NOTE (4)
MA15(QR25DE)
or MA-22
(VQ35DE)
R
R
R
MA-7
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
(QR25DE) or
(VQ35DE)
2005 Altima
I
J
K
MA
M
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Engine oil filter (Use part No.
15208 9E000 (for QR25DE
engine), 15208 65F01 (for
VQ35DE engine) or equivalent.)
3.75
(6)
3
R
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
7.50
(12)
6
R
R
15
(24)
12
R
18.75
(30)
15
R
22.5
(36)
18
R
26.25
(42)
21
R
30
(48)
24
R
MA-19
(QR25DE) or
MA-26
(VQ35DE)
EM-100,
"Valve Clearance"
(QR25DE) or
EM-247,
"Valve Clearance"
(VQ35DE)
NOTE (5)
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
MA-19
(QR25DE) or
MA-26
(VQ35DE)
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
11.25
(18)
9
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
I*
MA-15
(QR25DE) or
MA-22
(VQ35DE)
[R]
MA-18
(QR25DE) or
MA-25
(VQ35DE)
EVAP vapor lines
I*
MA-21
(QR25DE) or
MA-27
(VQ35DE)
Fuel lines
I*
MA-17
(QR25DE) or
MA-24
(VQ35DE)
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Fuel filter
Engine coolant
Engine oil
Engine oil filter (Use part No.
15208-9E000 (for QR25DE
engine), 15208 65F01 (for
VQ35DE engine) or equivalent.
Revision: March 2005
NOTE (1)
NOTE (2)
NOTE (3)
—
NOTE (4)
R*
MA-15
(QR25DE) or
MA-22
(VQ35DE)
R
MA-18
(QR25DE) or
MA-25
(VQ35DE)
R
MA-19
(QR25DE) or
MA-26
(VQ35DE)
R
R
R
R
MA-8
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2005 Altima
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
MA-19
(QR25DE) or
MA-26
(VQ35DE)
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
EM-100,
"Valve Clearance"
(QR25DE) or
EM-247,
"Valve Clearance"
(VQ35DE)
NOTE (5)
NOTE:
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading of QR25DE engine reaches the maximum limit.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to the FL section.
(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
Brake lines & cables
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
30
(48)
24
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
I
MA-34
I
MA-35
I
MA-31 (A/T)
or
MA-29 (M/T)
I
MA-35, MA36
I
Brake pads & rotors
I
Automatic transaxle fluid &
manual transaxle gear oil
I
NOTE (1)
I
Steering gear & linkage,
axle & suspension parts
I
Tire rotation
I
I
I
NOTE (2)
MA-34
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
MA-28
Front drive shaft boot
I
I
I
I
MA-37
R
MA-28
In-cabin microfilter
R
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of
miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes
first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
Brake lines & cables
I
Revision: March 2005
I
NOTE (1)
Steering gear & linkage,
axle & suspension parts
Tire rotation
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
I
Brake pads & rotors
Automatic transaxle fluid &
manual transaxle gear oil
45
(72)
36
I
I
I
I
NOTE (2)
I
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content
Title
I
MA-34
I
MA-35
I
MA-31 (A/T) or
MA-29 (M/T)
I
MA-35, MA-36
MA-34
MA-9
2005 Altima
I
J
K
MA
M
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of
miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes
first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
Exhaust system
I
Front drive shaft boots
I
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
In-cabin microfilter
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
I
I
I
I
56.25
(90)
45
R
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content
Title
I
MA-28
I
MA-37
R
MA-28
NOTE:
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(2) Refer to MA-5, "GENERAL MAINTENANCE" .
SCHEDULE 2
ELS0014Y
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
Drive belts
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
Engine oil filter (Use part No.
15208-9E000 (for QR25DE
engine), 15208 65F01 (for
VQ35DE engine) or equivalent.
Revision: March 2005
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
I*
Fuel lines
Engine oil
37.5
(60)
30
[R]
EVAP vapor lines
Engine coolant
30
(48)
24
NOTE (1)
Air cleaner filter
Fuel filter
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
I*
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content
Title
I*
MA-15
(QR25DE) or
MA-22
(VQ35DE)
[R]
MA-18
(QR25DE) or
MA-25
(VQ35DE)
I*
MA-21
(QR25DE) or
MA-27
(VQ35DE)
I*
MA-17
(QR25DE) or
MA-24
(VQ35DE)
NOTE (2)
—
NOTE (3)
R*
MA-15
(QR25DE) or
MA-22
(VQ35DE)
R
MA-18
(QR25DE) or
MA-25
(VQ35DE)
R
MA-19
(QR225DE) or
MA-26
(VQ35DE)
R
R
R
R
MA-10
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2005 Altima
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section - Page
or - Content
Title
MA-19
(QR25DE) or
MA-26
(VQ35DE)
Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km).
EM-100, "CYLINDER HEAD"
(QR25DE) or
EM-247, "CYLINDER HEAD"
(VQ35DE)
NOTE (4)
NOTE:
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading of QR25DE engine reaches the maximum limit.
(2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to FL section.
(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.
(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever
comes first.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference Section - Page or Content Title
Brake lines & cables
I
I
I
I
MA-34
Brake pads & rotors
I
I
I
I
MA-35
Automatic transaxle fluid & manual
transaxle gear oil
I
I
I
I
MA-30 (A/T) or
MA-28 (M/T)
I
MA-35, MA-36
Steering gear & linkage, axle &
suspension parts
Tire rotation
I
NOTE (1)
I
J
K
MA-34
Exhaust system
I
I
MA-28
Front drive shaft boots
I
I
I
I
MA-37
In-cabin microfilter
R
R
R
R
MA-28
NOTE:
(1) Refer to MA-5, "GENERAL MAINTENANCE" .
Revision: March 2005
H
MA-11
2005 Altima
MA
M
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fluids and Lubricants
PFP:00000
ELS0014Z
QR25DE
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
Liter
US measure
Imp measure
75.6
20 gal
16 5/8 gal
With oil filter
change
4.2
4 1/2 qt
3 3/4 qt
Without oil filter
change
4.0
4 1/4 qt
3 1/2 qt
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
4.6
4 7/8 qt
4 qt
Cooling system
7.6
2 gal
1 5/8 gal
Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill
With reservoir
Manual transaxle fluid (MTF)
2.2
2 3/8 qt
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)
●
API Certification Mark *1
●
API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or
SL, Energy Conserving *1
●
ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, or GFIII *1
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze / Coolant or equivalent
2 qt
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE
75W-85
Automatic transaxle (4A/T) fluid
(ATF)
9.2
9 3/4 qt
8 1/8 qt
Genuine NISSAN Matic “D” ATF
(Continental US and Alaska) or
Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *2
Power steering fluid (PSF)
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *3
Brake and clutch fluids
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent
DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Brake grease
—
—
—
PBC (poly butyl cuprysil)
Brake pad plate grease
—
—
—
Molykote AS880N grease
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Windshield washer fluid
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Windshield
Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Anti-freeze or equivalent
0.50 ± 0.025 kg
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
5.03 fl oz
5.01 fl oz
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricant
150 m
HFC-134a (R-134a) *5
NISSAN A/C System Lubricant
Type DH-PS or equivalent *5
*1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”.
*2: DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN
dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DexronTM III / Mercon
Transmission Fluid.
TM
Automatic
*3: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
*4: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer.
*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”.
Revision: March 2005
MA-12
2005 Altima
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
VQ35DE
Liter
Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill
A
Capacity (Approximate)
Description
US measure
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Imp measure
75.6
20 gal
16 5/8 gal
With oil filter
change
4.2
4 1/2 qt
3 3/4 qt
Without oil filter
change
4.0
4 1/4 qt
Unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91),
or for improved performance an
octane rating of 91 AKI (RON 96)
B
●
API Certification Mark *1
C
●
API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API Grade SJ or
SL, Energy Conserving *1
D
●
ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, or GFIII *1
3 1/2 qt
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
4.6
4 7/8 qt
4 qt
Cooling system
8.2
2 1/8 gal
1 3/4 gal
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant or equivalent
E
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi
75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity
SAE 75W-85
F
G
With reservoir
Manual transaxle fluid (MTF)
2.2
2 3/8 qt
2 qt
Automatic transaxle (5A/T) fluid
(ATF)
7.3
7 3/4 qt
6 3/8 qt
Genuine NISSAN Matic “K” ATF *2
Power steering fluid (PSF)
1.0
2 1/8 pt
1 3/4 pt
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *3
Brake and clutch fluids
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid*4 or equivalent
DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)
Brake grease
—
—
—
PBC (poly butyl cuprysil)
Brake pad plate grease
—
—
—
Molykote AS880N grease
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Genuine NISSAN Windshield
Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Anti-freeze or equivalent
Windshield washer fluid
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricant
—
—
—
0.50 ± 0.025 kg
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
1.10 ± 0.055 lb
5.03 fl oz
5.01 fl oz
150 m
HFC-134a (R-134a) *5
*3: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III / MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
*4: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer.
*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”.
MA-13
I
J
K
NISSAN A/C System Lubricant
Type DH-PS or equivalent *5
*1: For further details, see “SAE Viscosity Number”.
*2: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic “K” ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.
Revision: March 2005
H
2005 Altima
MA
M
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
SAE Viscosity Number
ELS00150
GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE
10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient
temperature is above -18°C (0°F).
Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy.
MMA117AA
ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant
solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system
additives are not necessary.
Protection for outside temperature down to:
°C
°F
-35°
-30°
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze /
Coolant or equivalent
Demineralized water or distilled water
50%
50%
CAUTION:
●
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze /
Coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized
water or distilled water.
●
Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Revision: March 2005
MA-14
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
Checking Drive Belts
PFP:10001
A
ELS00151
B
C
D
E
F
SBIA0234E
WARNING:
Be sure to perform engine maintenance when the engine is stopped.
NOTE:
On vehicles not equipped with A/C, there is an idler pulley in the position for the drive belt routing.
●
Remove the under cover using power tool, when inspecting the power steering pump belt.
●
Make sure that the indicator (single line notch) of each automatic tensioner is within the allowable working
range (between the three line notches).
NOTE:
● Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator when the engine is cold.
● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be “A”.
●
Visually check the entire belt for wear, damage or cracks.
●
If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to EM-15,
"Removal and Installation" .
●
Belt tension adjustment is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner.
Changing Engine Coolant
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
Remove the engine undercover using power tool.
Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and
remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required
when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only).
● Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts.
LBIA0063E
Revision: March 2005
H
I
J
K
MA
ELS00152
WARNING:
●
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
●
Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn
to release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove.
1.
2.
G
MA-15
2005 Altima
M
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
3.
4.
5.
Follow this step for heater core removal/replacement only. Disconnect the upper heater hose at the
engine side and apply moderate air pressure [103.46 kPa (15 psi, 1.055 kg/cm2 ) maximum air pressure]
into the hose for 30 seconds to blow the excess coolant out of the heater core.
When draining all of the coolant in the system, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, then clean
the reservoir tank before installation.
When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine
removal or repair, open the drain plug on the cylinder block.
KBIA0163E
6.
Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-17, "FLUSHING COOLING
SYSTEM" .
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
1.
Install the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total
system drain or for engine removal or repair.
● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND
SEALANTS" .
Radiator drain plug
Cylinder block drain plug
2.
3.
4.
If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.
Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number
5.
: KV991J0070 (J-45695)
Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is
placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed
position.
● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or
equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water.
Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO".
Engine coolant capacity
(with reservoir tank)
6.
: Refer to CO-11, "Removal and Installation" .
: Refer to EM-71, "Removal and Installation" .
: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids
and Lubricants" .
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure
: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 ,
80 - 120 psi)
LLIA0058E
Revision: March 2005
MA-16
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
7.
8.
CAUTION:
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer.
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is
full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 - 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)
A
B
C
Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
D
E
LLIA0057E
9.
When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then
open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling
system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into
the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
F
G
H
I
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J
Fill the radiator from the filler cap above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank, with water and reinstall the filler cap above the radiator upper hose.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
K
Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
MA
Drain the water.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
Checking Fuel Lines
ELS00153
Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improperly attached hoses,
leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace any damaged parts.
SMA803A
Revision: March 2005
MA-17
2005 Altima
M
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
Changing Air Cleaner Filter
ELS00154
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between specified replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" .
LLIA0016E
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and raise the air cleaner case (upper).
Remove the air cleaner filter.
Install a new air cleaner filter.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Changing Engine Oil
ELS00155
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
●
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. The vehicle must be level on the hoist.
2. Warm up the engine, and check for oil leaks from the engine.
3. Stop the engine and wait at least 10 minutes.
4. Remove the drain plug and oil filler cap.
LLIA0011E
5.
6.
Drain the engine oil.
Install the drain plug and refill the engine with new engine oil.
● Oil specification and capacity. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Oil pan drain plug
7.
8.
: Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install it with a new washer.
● The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use the specifications for reference only.
● Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for any oil leaks.
Stop the engine and wait at least 10 minutes.
Revision: March 2005
MA-18
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
9.
Check the oil level.
A
B
C
PBIC0249E
D
Changing Oil Filter
1.
ELS00156
Remove the oil filter using Tool as shown.
Tool number
E
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
● The oil filter contains an internal relief valve.
Use a genuine NISSAN oil filter.
● Be careful not to get burned as the engine and engine oil
are hot.
● When removing the oil filter, position a shop cloth to
absorb any oil leakage or spillage.
● Do not allow the engine oil to spill on the drive belts.
● Completely wipe off any oil that spills on the engine or on the vehicle.
2.
F
G
KBIA0303E
H
Clean the oil filter mounting surface on the cylinder block.
● Coat the oil filter rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil as
shown.
I
J
K
SMA010
3.
MA
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the engine block
installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn, or
tighten to specification.
Oil filter
M
: Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation"
.
SMA229B
4.
5.
Check the oil level and add engine oil as necessary.
After warming up the engine, check for engine for oil leaks, correct as necessary.
Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)
1.
ELS00157
Remove the engine cover using power tool.
Revision: March 2005
MA-19
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
2.
Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
LLIA0013E
3.
4.
Remove the spark plugs. Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" .
Install the new spark plugs, check that the gap is within specification before installing. The gap is not
adjustable, replace the spark plug as necessary.
Spark plug
Gap (nominal)
: Refer to EM-30, "Removal and Installation" .
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Spark Plug Types
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
●
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
Use the standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions.
The hot type spark plug is suitable (when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug) under conditions such as:
frequent engine starts
low ambient temperatures
The cold type spark plug is suitable (when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark
plug) under conditions such as:
extended highway driving
frequent high engine revolution
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plug electrode.
SMA673B
●
If the spark plug electrode is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time
Revision: March 2005
: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi)
: Less than 20 seconds
MA-20
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)
●
Checking and adjusting the spark plug gap is not required
between change intervals, replace the spark plug as necessary.
A
B
C
SMA806CA
D
5.
Install the ignition coils.
Ignition coil bolt
: Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" .
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines
1.
2.
E
ELS00158
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging and sticking.
F
G
H
I
J
K
MA
M
Revision: March 2005
MA-21
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
Checking Drive Belts
PFP:10001
ELS00159
LBIA0076E
WARNING:
Inspect and check drive belts with the engine off.
1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one.
2. Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway between pulleys.
3. Rotate the crankshaft pulley two times then check the drive belt tension using Tool.
Tool number
:
—
(BT-3373-F)
NOTE:
Inspect the drive belt deflection and tension when the engine is cold.
● Adjust if the belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications.
●
Belt Deflection and Tension
Deflection adjustment
Tension adjustment*
Used belt
Description
After adjustment
Alternator,
Air conditioner compressor oil pump
7.0 (0.28)
4.2 - 4.6
(0.17 - 0.18)
Power steering oil
pump
11.0 (0.43)
7.3 - 8.0
(0.29 - 0.31)
Unit: N (kg, lb)
Used belt
New belt
Limit
Applied pushing
force
Unit: mm (in)
After adjustment
New belt
Limit
3.7 - 4.1
(0.15 - 0.16)
294 (30, 66)
730 -818
(74.5 - 83.5,
164 - 184)
838 - 926
(85.5 - 94.5,
188 - 208)
6.5 - 7.2
0.26 - 0.28)
196 (20, 44)
495 - 583
(50.5 - 59.5,
111 - 131)
603 - 691
(61.5 - 70.5,
135.6 - 155.4)
98 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
—
*: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt.
Changing Engine Coolant
ELS0015A
WARNING:
●
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
●
Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn
to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
1.
Remove engine undercover, using power tools.
Revision: March 2005
MA-22
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove
the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial
cooling system drain.
If removing the heater core, remove the upper heater hose from
the engine coolant outlet and apply moderate air pressure of 15
psi (103.46 kPa, 1.055 kg-cm2 ) maximum for 30 seconds into
the hose to blow out excess coolant from the core.
For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank
and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before
installation.
LBIA0063E
● Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts.
When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair), remove the
cylinder block front drain plug and the cylinder block RH drain plug.
Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
● If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-24, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" .
A
B
C
D
E
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
1.
Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained completely, install the reservoir tank and
the cylinder block drain plugs.
● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread
Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
Radiator drain plug
Cylinder block front drain plug
Cylinder block RH drain plug
2.
3.
4.
Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is
placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed
position.
● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water.
Refer to MA-14, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
7.
K
M
: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids
and Lubricants" .
: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 ,
80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION:
LLIA0058E
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air
dryer.
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is
full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Revision: March 2005
J
MA
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure
I
: KV991J0070 (J-45695)
Engine coolant capacity
(with reservoir tank)
6.
G
H
If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.
Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number
5.
: Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" .
: Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" .
: Refer to EM-219, "Removal and Installation" .
F
MA-23
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
8.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 - 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)
Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
LLIA0057E
9.
When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then
open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling
system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into
the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and
reinstall radiator filler cap.
Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
Drain the water from the system. Refer to MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
Checking Fuel Lines
ELS0015B
Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improper hose attachment,
leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts.
SMA803A
Revision: March 2005
MA-24
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
Changing Air Cleaner Filter
ELS0015C
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE
A
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between
replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE"
.
B
C
D
LLIA0016E
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
Changing Engine Oil
Oil pan drain plug
F
ELS0015D
WARNING:
●
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
●
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may
cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap
or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Position the vehicle so it is level on the hoist.
2. Warm up the engine, and check for oil leaks from the engine.
3. Stop the engine and wait at least 10 minutes.
4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap.
5. Drain the engine oil.
6. Install the oil drain plug and refill the engine with new engine oil.
Oil Specification and Capacity
● Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
7.
8.
9.
E
Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and lift up the air cleaner case (upper).
Remove the air cleaner filter.
Install a new air cleaner filter.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
SMA096D
K
MA
: Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
● Be sure to clean the drain plug and install using a new washer.
● The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
● Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
Warm up the engine and check the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks.
Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes.
Check engine oil level.
SMA954C
Revision: March 2005
MA-25
2005 Altima
M
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
Changing Oil Filter
1.
ELS0015E
Remove the oil filter using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION:
The oil filter is provided with a relief valve.
Use genuine NISSAN oil filter.
● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine
oil are hot.
● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any oil
leakage or spillage.
● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
● Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
●
2.
SMA097D
Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block.
● Coat rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil.
SMA010
3.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the engine block
installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn, or
tighten to specification.
Oil filter
: Refer to EM-138, "Removal and Installation"
.
SMA229B
4.
5.
Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary.
After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks, correct as necessary.
Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ELS0015F
Remove the engine cover using power tool.
Remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-130, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-144, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the spark plugs. Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" .
Install the new spark plugs. Check the gap before installing the new spark, the gap is not adjustable,
replace the spark plug as necessary.
Spark plug
Gap (nominal)
: Refer to EM-145, "Removal and Installation" .
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Spark Plug Types
Standard type
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
●
Use the standard type spark plugs for normal driving conditions.
Revision: March 2005
MA-26
2005 Altima
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
frequent engine starts
low ambient temperatures
The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as:
extended highway driving
frequent high engine revolution
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning the spark plug tip.
A
B
C
D
E
F
SMA673B
●
G
If the spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure : Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi)
Cleaning time
: Less than 20 seconds
●
H
Checking and adjusting the spark plug gap is not required
between change intervals, replace the spark plug as necessary.
I
J
K
SMA806CA
6.
MA
Install the ignition coils.
Ignition coil bolt
: Refer to EM-144, "Removal and Installation" .
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines
1.
2.
ELS0015G
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, and sticking.
Revision: March 2005
MA-27
2005 Altima
M
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Changing In-cabin Microfilter
PFP:00100
ELS0015H
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the glove box pins. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Press in the sides of the glove box door to release the glove box door from the glove box housing.
Disconnect the glove box damper cord to remove the glove box door.
Disengage the two filter cover tabs to remove the filter cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit.
Install the new in-cabin microfilter into the blower unit.
CAUTION:
● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow in the correct orientation.
● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow side of the filter
facing the rear of the vehicle.
7. Install the filter cover on the blower unit.
LJIA0013E
8. Connect the glove box damper cord to the glove box door.
9. Press in the sides of the glove box door to install the glove box
door into the glove box housing.
10. Install the glove box pins.
Checking Exhaust System
ELS0015I
Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and exhaust mounts for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, chafing, or deterioration.
SMA211A
Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks
ELS0015J
If the clutch fluid level is extremely low or below the “MIN” level in the
reservoir, check the clutch system for leaks.
SMA449C
Checking M/T Oil
1.
2.
ELS0015K
Check for any oil leaks.
Remove the speedometer pinion gear.
Revision: March 2005
MA-28
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
3.
Measure the oil level using a suitable gauge as shown. Check
that the oil level is at specification “L”. Add oil as necessary
through the opening for the speedometer pinion gear.
Oil level “L”
A
: 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in)
B
CAUTION:
Never start the engine while checking the oil level.
C
SMT512C
D
4.
Install a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, and install the speedometer pinion gear in the transaxle case.
Speedometer pinion gear bolt
: Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
(RS5F51A), MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
(RS6F51A).
F
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Changing M/T Oil
ELS0015L
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle.
Stop the engine. Drain the oil by removing the drain plug.
Install a new gasket on the drain plug and install the drain plug in the transaxle case.
Drain plug
E
G
H
: Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
(RS5F51A), MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
(RS6F51A).
I
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the gasket.
J
FILLING
1.
Remove the speedometer pinion gear and fill the transaxle with new gear oil through the opening for the
speedometer pinion gear.
Oil grade and capacity
2.
: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
MA
Check the oil level using a suitable gauge as shown. Check that
the oil level is at specification “L”. Add oil as necessary through
the opening for the speedometer pinion gear.
Oil level “L”
: 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in)
M
CAUTION:
Never start the engine while checking the oil level.
SMT512C
3.
Install a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, and install the speedometer pinion gear in to the
transaxle case.
Speedometer pinion gear bolt
: Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
(RS5F51A), MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
(RS6F51A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Revision: March 2005
K
MA-29
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking A/T Fluid
1.
2.
3.
ELS0015M
Warm up the engine.
Check for any transaxle fluid leaks.
Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the “COLD” range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
4 A/T temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 50° C (86° – 122° F)
HOT
: 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F)
5 A/T temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
WLIA0013E
WLIA0014E
a.
b.
c.
Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake.
Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector
lever in the “P” park position.
Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
CAUTION:
Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an
accurate reading on the gauge.
WLIA0008E
LLIA0065E
d.
e.
f.
Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper.
Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go.
Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of the
range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then re-insert the A/T
fluid level gauge.
Revision: March 2005
MA-30
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
4.
5.
CAUTION:
● Do not overfill the transaxle.
● Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper,
this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while
driving.
Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds.
Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the “HOT”
range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION:
Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an
accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in
position while driving.
A
B
C
D
E
WLIA0013E
F
4 A/T temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 50° C (86° – 122° F)
HOT
: 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F)
5 A/T temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
G
H
I
WLIA0014E
6.
●
●
Check the fluid for the following conditions:
If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the AT section
for checking the operation of the transaxle. Flush the AT fluid
cooling system after repairing the transaxle.
If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or
bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a
cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to
the transaxle. Refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" (QR25DE) CO-30,
"RADIATOR" (VQ35DE).
J
K
MA
SMA853B
Changing A/T Fluid
1.
ELS0015N
Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature “HOT”.
4 A/T temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 50° C (86° – 122° F)
HOT
: 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F)
5 A/T temperature range
COLD
: 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F)
HOT
: 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F)
2.
3.
Stop the engine.
Remove the engine undercover.
Revision: March 2005
MA-31
2005 Altima
M
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
4.
Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain
plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer.
Drain plug
4 A/T
: Refer to AT-273, "REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" .
5 A/T
: Refer to AT-624, "REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION" .
WLIA0009E
LLIA0066E
5.
Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill the transaxle.
Fluid grade and capacity
6.
7.
: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes.
Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-30, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If the fluid is still contaminated,
repeat step 2 through 5.
Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)
ELS0015O
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
Use a releasing agent to remove the double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
● After removing the double-faced adhesive tape, wipe off any traces of the releasing agent from
the road wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
If a tire balance machine has an adhesion balance weight mode setting and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust in the drive-in weight mode suitable for the road wheels.
1. Set the road wheel on the wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
Revision: March 2005
MA-32
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
2.
a.
b.
When the inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the
wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6
to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the
outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value, then install it at the designated outer position of, or at the
designated angle position on the road wheel.
Outer balance weight calculation:
Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = outer balance weight
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) outer
balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
SMA054D
NOTE:
The selected balance weight value must be the closest balance weight available to the calculated balance
weight value.
Example:
37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz)
CAUTION:
● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the road wheel.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Install the balance weight in the position as shown.
When installing the balance weight to the road wheels, set it into
the grooved area on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown,
so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
● Always use genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with
new ones.
● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight.
H
I
J
K
MA
M
SMA055D
c.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
SMA056D
3.
Start the wheel balancer.
Revision: March 2005
MA-33
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
4.
5.
Install the drive-in balance weight on the inner side of the road wheel in the wheel balancer indication
position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights in one position (angle).
Start the wheel balancer. Make sure that the inner and outer residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz)
each or less.
● If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat the installation procedures.
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Unbalance)
Dynamic (at rim flange)
Maximum allowable unbalance
Static
10 g (0.35 oz)
Tire Rotation
●
●
●
5 g (0.18 oz) (one side)
ELS0015P
Do not include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires.
After rotating the tires as shown, adjust the tire pressure to specification.
Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven the
first 1,000 km (600 miles). Also retighten the wheel nuts after a
flat tire repair, or any type of service where the wheels have
been removed and installed.
Wheel nut
: 98.1 - 117 N·m (10 - 12 kg-m, 73 - 86 ft-lb)
SMA829C
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks
●
●
●
ELS0015Q
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank. It should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir tank.
If the brake fluid level is extremely low or below the “MIN” level,
check the brake system for leaks.
Release the parking brake lever and check that the brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check the brake system for leaks.
LFIA0096E
Checking Brake Lines and Cables
ELS0015R
Check the brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper
attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, and damage.
Repair or replace parts as necessary.
SBR389C
Revision: March 2005
MA-34
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Disc Brake
ELS0015S
ROTOR
A
Check the rotor condition and thickness using a suitable tool as
shown. Resurface or replace the rotor as necessary. Refer to BR-40,
"Disc Brake" .
B
C
D
SMA260A
CALIPER
E
Check the caliper for leakage.
F
G
H
SMA922A
PAD
I
Check the brake pads for damage or wear as shown. Refer to BR40, "Disc Brake" .
J
K
BRA0010D
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage
ELS0015T
STEERING GEAR
●
●
●
M
Check the gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and
power steering fluid leaks.
Check the power steering hose connections for leaks.
Check the steering column for looseness.
WGIA0004E
STEERING LINKAGE
Check the ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage.
Revision: March 2005
MA
MA-35
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines
ELS0015U
Check the power steering fluid level in the reservoir tank with the
engine off.
Use the “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° 176°F) or the “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° 86°F).
CAUTION:
●
Do not overfill the power steering reservoir tank.
LGIA0021E
●
●
●
Use the specified power steering fluid. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Check the power steering hoses for improper attachment, leaks,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
Check the steering rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating an internal leak.
WGIA0004E
Axle and Suspension Parts
ELS0015V
Check the front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive
play, cracks, wear, or other damage.
●
Shake each wheel as shown to check for excessive play.
●
Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise.
SMA525A
●
Check the strut mount nuts for looseness.
SMA614
Revision: March 2005
MA-36
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
●
Check the axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
A
B
C
LLIA0019E
D
●
●
Check the struts for oil leakage or other damage.
Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint
dust cover for cracks or other damage.
E
F
G
SFA392B
Drive Shaft
●
ELS0015W
H
Check the boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and
grease leakage as shown.
I
J
K
SFA108A
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch
ELS0015X
MA
M
LLIA0017E
Revision: March 2005
MA-37
2005 Altima
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters
ELS0015Y
LLIA0022E
Revision: March 2005
MA-38
2005 Altima
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
SECTION
MT
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
A
B
MT
D
E
CONTENTS
RS5F51A
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Caution ..................................................................... 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Special Service Tools ............................................... 5
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 8
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 8
DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 9
Cross-sectional View ................................................ 9
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER .................... 10
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER ...................... 10
REVERSE GEAR ................................................ 10
M/T OIL ......................................................................11
Replacement ...........................................................11
DRAINING ............................................................11
FILLING ................................................................11
Checking .................................................................11
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ..........................11
SIDE OIL SEAL ........................................................ 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
POSITION SWITCH .................................................. 13
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
Checking ................................................................ 13
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH .................................. 13
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ............... 13
CONTROL LINKAGE ............................................... 14
Removal and Installation ........................................ 14
Cable Adjustment ................................................... 15
AIR BREATHER HOSE ............................................ 16
Removal and Installation ........................................ 16
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................ 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 17
REMOVAL ........................................................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 19
Component Parts ................................................... 20
CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS ............. 20
Revision: March 2005
GEAR COMPONENTS ....................................... 21
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ..................... 23
FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS ........................... 24
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 24
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 24
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 28
Adjustment .............................................................. 34
INPUT SHAFT END PLAY .................................. 34
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ...... 35
MAINSHAFT END PLAY ..................................... 36
REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY .................. 37
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS .................................... 39
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 39
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 39
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 40
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 42
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS ....................................... 47
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 47
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 47
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 48
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 51
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS .................. 56
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 56
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 56
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 56
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 57
FINAL DRIVE ............................................................ 58
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 58
PRE-INSPECTION .............................................. 58
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 58
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 59
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 59
SHIFT CONTROL ..................................................... 62
Inspection ............................................................... 62
SHIFT FORK ....................................................... 62
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 63
General Specifications ............................................ 63
TRANSAXLE ....................................................... 63
FINAL GEAR ....................................................... 64
Gear End Play ........................................................ 64
MT-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Baulk Ring Clearance ............................................. 64
Available Snap Rings .............................................. 65
INPUT SHAFT SPACER ..................................... 65
5TH MAIN GEAR ................................................. 65
Available C-Rings ................................................... 65
MAINSHAFT C-RING .......................................... 65
Available Thrust Washer ......................................... 65
INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER ..................... 65
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER
... 66
Available Adjusting Shims ...................................... 66
MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM ........................ 66
INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING
SHIM .................................................................... 66
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING
SHIM .................................................................... 67
REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIMS ... 67
Available Differential Side Bearing Preload and
Adjusting Shims ...................................................... 67
BEARING PRELOAD .......................................... 67
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING
SHIMS ................................................................. 67
RS6F51A
PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 68
Caution ................................................................... 68
PREPARATION ......................................................... 69
Special Service Tools ............................................. 69
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 71
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 72
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 72
DESCRIPTION .......................................................... 73
Cross-sectional View .............................................. 73
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER .................... 74
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER ....................... 74
REVERSE GEAR ................................................ 74
M/T OIL ...................................................................... 75
Replacement .......................................................... 75
DRAINING ........................................................... 75
FILLING ............................................................... 75
Checking ................................................................. 75
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 75
SIDE OIL SEAL ......................................................... 76
Removal and Installation ........................................ 76
REMOVAL ........................................................... 76
INSTALLATION .................................................... 76
POSITION SWITCH .................................................. 77
Checking ................................................................. 77
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ................................... 77
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ................ 77
CONTROL LINKAGE ................................................ 78
Removal and Installation of Control Device and
Cable ...................................................................... 78
AIR BREATHER HOSE ............................................. 80
Removal and Installation ........................................ 80
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ........................................ 81
Removal and Installation ........................................ 81
Revision: March 2005
REMOVAL ............................................................81
INSTALLATION ....................................................83
Component Parts ....................................................84
CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS ..............84
GEAR COMPONENTS ........................................85
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS .....................87
FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS ............................88
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................88
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................88
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................92
Adjustment ..............................................................99
INPUT SHAFT END PLAY ...................................99
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ..... 100
MAINSHAFT END PLAY .................................... 101
REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY ................ 102
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS ................................... 104
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 104
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 104
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 105
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 107
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS ..................................... 112
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 112
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 112
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 113
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 115
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS ................ 121
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 121
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 121
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 121
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 122
FINAL DRIVE .......................................................... 123
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 123
PRE-INSPECTION ............................................ 123
DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 123
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 124
ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 124
SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 127
Inspection .............................................................. 127
SHIFT FORK ...................................................... 127
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 128
General Specifications .......................................... 128
TRANSAXLE ...................................................... 128
FINAL GEAR ...................................................... 129
Gear End Play ....................................................... 129
Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear ............ 129
4TH, 5TH, 6TH & REVERSE BAULK RING ...... 129
1ST, 2ND AND 3RD BAULK RING .................... 130
Available Snap Rings ............................................ 130
6TH BUSHING ................................................... 130
Available C-rings ................................................... 130
MAINSHAFT C-RING ........................................ 130
Available Thrust Washers ..................................... 131
INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER ................... 131
Available Adjusting Shims ..................................... 131
MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM ....................... 131
INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING
SHIM .................................................................. 131
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING
SHIM .................................................................. 132
MT-2
2005 Altima
REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM ... 132
6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM ............... 132
Available Shims .................................................... 132
BEARING PRELOAD ........................................ 132
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING
SHIM(S) ............................................................. 132
A
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RS5F51A]
PRECAUTIONS
Caution
●
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
ECS0093X
Do not reuse transaxle oil, properly dispose of it after it has been drained out.
Check the oil level or replace the oil only with the vehicle parked on level ground.
During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt.
Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If mating marks are required, be
certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied.
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, use it.
Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
Revision: March 2005
MT-4
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RS5F51A]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
ECS0093Y
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV381054S0
(J-34286)
Puller
●
Removing side bearing outer race
●
Removing mainshaft front bearing
MT
D
ZZA0601D
ST35321000
( — )
Drift
ZZA1000D
ST30720000
(J-25405)
Drift
E
●
Installing input shaft oil seal
●
Installing reverse main gear
●
Installing 1st bushing
●
Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
●
Installing 2nd bushing
●
Installing 3rd main gear
F
G
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
●
Installing differential oil seal
●
Installing differential side bearing outer race
●
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
●
Installing differential side bearing
H
I
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
ZZA0811D
ST33200000
(J-26082)
Drift
●
Installing mainshaft front bearing
●
Installing 4th main gear
●
Installing 5th main gear
K
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
L
ZZA1002D
ST33061000
(J-8107-2)
Drift
●
Installing bore plug
●
Removing differential side bearing
M
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
ZZA1000D
ST33052000
( — )
Drift
●
Installing welch plug
●
Removing input shaft rear bearing
●
Removing input shaft bearing spacer and
5th stopper
●
Removing 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th
input gear, 4th gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd input gear
●
Installing input shaft front bearing
●
Removing mainshaft rear bearing
●
Removing 4th main gear and 5th main gear
ZZA1023D
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
Revision: March 2005
MT-5
J
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RS5F51A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV40105020
( — )
Drift
ZZA1133D
KV40105710
( — )
Press stand
ZZA1058D
ST38220000
( — )
Press stand
●
Removing 5th input gear and synchronizer
hub
●
Removing 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear,
2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub, 1st
main gear, reverse main gear and 1st bushing
a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 15 mm (0.59 in).
●
Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub
●
Installing 4th bushing
●
Installing 5th bushing
●
Installing 5th synchronizer hub
●
Installing 2nd bushing
●
Installing 3rd main gear
a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in).
●
Installing reverse main gear
●
Installing 1st bushing
●
Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in).
ZZA1058D
ST30032000
(J-26010-01)
Drift
●
Installing 5th stopper and input shaft bearing spacer
●
Installing input shaft front bearing
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
ZZA0978D
ST30901000
(J-26010-01)
Drift
ZZA0978D
ST30031000
(J-22912-01)
Puller
●
Installing input shaft rear bearing
●
Installing 4th main gear
●
Installing 5th main gear
●
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia.
Measuring wear of 1st and 2nd baulk ring
ZZA0537D
KV40101630
(J-35870)
Drift
Installing reverse main gear
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
ZZA1003D
Revision: March 2005
MT-6
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RS5F51A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
A
Description
KV38102510
( — )
Drift
●
Installing 1st bushing
●
Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
●
Installing differential side bearing
B
a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
MT
ZZA0838D
—
(J-39713)
Preload adapter
Checking differential side gear end play
D
E
NT087
F
Commercial Service Tools
ECS0093Z
Tool name
Description
Puller
Removing each bearing gear and bushing
G
H
I
ZZB0823D
Puller
Removing each bearing gear and bushing
J
K
NT077
Pin punch
Removing and installing each retaining pin
Tip diameter: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia.
L
M
ZZA0815D
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: March 2005
MT-7
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[RS5F51A]
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
ECS00940
Jumps out of gear
Revision: March 2005
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
MT-8
MT-62
1
Insert Spring (Damaged)
1
2
MT-40
Hard to shift or will not shift
2
Baulk Ring (Worn or damaged)
MT-40
Check Plug Return Spring and Check Ball (Worn or damaged)
1
MT-40
MT-14
Shift Control Linkage (Worn)
3
Bearing (Worn or damaged)
MT-11
O-Ring (Worn or damaged)
Oil leakage
MT-40
MT-11
Oil Seal (Worn or damaged)
2
MT-62
MT-11
Gasket (Damaged)
1
Gear (Worn or damaged)
Symptoms
(Wrong oil)
Noise
(Oil level is low.)
Suspected Parts
(Possible cause)
Shift Fork (Worn)
MA-28, "Checking M/T Oil"
(Oil level is high.)
Reference page
GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS"
MA-28, "Checking M/T Oil"
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
2
3
3
2005 Altima
DESCRIPTION
[RS5F51A]
DESCRIPTION
Cross-sectional View
PFP:00000
A
ECS00941
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0342E
Revision: March 2005
MT-9
2005 Altima
DESCRIPTION
[RS5F51A]
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Double-cone synchronizer is adopted for 1st and 3rd gears to reduce operating force of the shift lever.
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Triple cone synchronizer is adopted for 2nd gear to reduce operating force of the shift lever.
PCIB0774E
REVERSE GEAR
See figure for description of reverse gear components.
SCIA0751E
Revision: March 2005
MT-10
2005 Altima
M/T OIL
[RS5F51A]
M/T OIL
Replacement
PFP:KLD20
A
ECS00942
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle oil.
Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and drain oil.
Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it in transaxle case.
Drain plug
B
: 30 - 39 N·m (3.1 - 4.0 kg-m, 23 - 28 ft-lb)
MT
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
D
FILLING
1.
Remove speedometer pinion gear. Fill the transaxle with new oil.
Oil grade and capacity
2.
E
: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in transaxle case.
Speedometer pinion gear
F
: 4.9 - 6.8 N·m (0.5 - 0.7 kg-m, 43 - 61 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
G
Checking
ECS00943
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL
●
●
●
H
Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle.
Remove speedometer pinion gear.
Measure oil level using suitable gauge as shown, and check if
"L" is within the specifications.
Oil level “L”
I
: 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in)
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
J
K
SMT512C
●
L
Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in transaxle case.
Speedometer pinion gear
: 4.9 - 6.8 N·m (0.5 - 0.7 kg-m, 43 - 61 in-lb)
M
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Revision: March 2005
MT-11
2005 Altima
SIDE OIL SEAL
[RS5F51A]
SIDE OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:32113
ECS00944
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the drive shaft from the transaxle case. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the transaxle case surface when
removing the oil seal.
WCIA0023E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Using Tool, drive the oil seal straight in until it protrudes from the
transaxle case end equal to dimension “A” as shown.
Dimension “A”
Tool number
: Within 0.5 mm (0.02 in) flush with
case.
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
● Before installing oil seals, apply multi-purpose grease to
oil seal lips.
● Do not reuse oil seals.
●
SCIA1010E
Check the transaxle oil level after installation. Refer to MT-11, "Checking" .
Revision: March 2005
MT-12
2005 Altima
POSITION SWITCH
[RS5F51A]
POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
PFP:32005
A
ECS00945
Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" .
B
Checking
ECS00946
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
●
Check continuity.
MT
Gear position
Continuity
Reverse
Yes
Except reverse
No
D
E
SCIA0708E
F
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
●
Check continuity.
Gear position
Continuity
Neutral
Yes
Except neutral
No
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-13
2005 Altima
CONTROL LINKAGE
[RS5F51A]
CONTROL LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
PFP:34103
ECS00947
WCIA0203E
1.
Snap pin
2.
Washer
3.
Cable
4.
Manual lever
5.
Shift cable
6.
Lock plate
7.
Control device assembly
8.
Lock plate
9.
Select cable
10. Shift cable
Revision: March 2005
11. Control lever knob
MT-14
12. Control lever
2005 Altima
CONTROL LINKAGE
[RS5F51A]
13. Control device assembly
14. Cover plate
15. Select cable
16. Floor pan
17. Control lever
18. Shift cable
19. Washer
20. Clutch housing
21. Cable mounting bracket
22. Select cable
23. Shift cable
24. Lock plate
A
B
25. Lock plate
CAUTION:
●
Note that the select side lock plate for securing the control cable is different from the one on the
MT
shift side.
●
After assembly, make sure selector lever automatically returns to Neutral when it is moved to 1st,
2nd, or Reverse.
D
Cable Adjustment
ECS00948
NOTE:
After installation of the select cable, the cable must be adjusted for proper operation. This adjustment is performed before installing the interior console and shift boot.
1. Slide clip “B” from under clip “A” as shown.
E
F
G
H
LCIA0303E
I
2.
3.
Shift the control lever to the neutral position.
CAUTION:
Do not move the control lever when adjusting the cables.
Push clip “A” into the cable end case until it snaps into place as
shown.
J
K
L
M
LCIA0304E
4.
Slide clip “B” back over clip “A” until it snaps into place and holds
clip “A” in place as shown.
LCIA0305E
Revision: March 2005
MT-15
2005 Altima
AIR BREATHER HOSE
[RS5F51A]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation
PFP:31098
ECS00949
Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation information.
QR25DE Engine
LCIA0033E
VQ35DE Engine
LCIA0034E
CAUTION:
●
Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
twisting when installing it.
●
Be sure to insert hose into the transaxle tube until overlap area reaches the spool.
Revision: March 2005
MT-16
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:32010
A
ECS0094A
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
WCIA0194E
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-120,
"Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE).
Remove the battery tray and battery.
Remove air breather hose from the transaxle.
Remove the clutch operating cylinder and position it aside without disconnecting the hydraulic lines. Refer
to CL-11, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not depress clutch pedal during removal procedure.
Remove the two shift cables from the transaxle. Refer to MT-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect and remove the harnesses for the back-up lamp switch and ground straps.
Remove the starter motor using power tool. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
Raise vehicle and remove the engine undercover and splash shields using power tool.
Drain the gear oil from the transaxle. Refer to MT-11, "Replacement" .
Disconnect and remove the harnesses for:
● Vehicle speed sensor
● PNP switch
● Crankshaft position sensor
Remove the bolt and heated oxygen sensor harness clamp bracket, then remove the crankshaft position
sensor.
Remove the exhaust front tube using power tool. Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or
EX-7, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE).
Remove the drive shafts using power tool. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
MT-17
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
14. Lower vehicle, then install a suitable engine slinger on the front
of the left bank cylinder head, and on the rear of the right bank
cylinder head as shown.
SEM807G
SEM808G
15. Support the engine using an engine support fixture or suitable
tool.
16. Remove the five upper bolts that mount the transaxle to the
engine using power tool.
17. Disconnect the LH transaxle mounting insulator using power
tool.
18. Raise vehicle, then remove front suspension member, LH
engine insulator, and LH engine mount bracket. Refer to EM-71,
"Removal and Installation" (QR25DE), EM-219, "Removal and
Installation" (VQ35DE).
19. Place a suitable jack support under the transaxle.
CAUTION:
When setting the jack, be careful not to bring it into contact with the switches.
20. Remove the five lower bolts that mount the transaxle to the engine using power tool.
21. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle.
Revision: March 2005
MT-18
MTD0062D
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing the transaxle to the engine, use the specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence
shown below:
B
CAUTION:
When installing the transaxle, do not allow the transaxle input shaft to make contact with the
clutch cover.
MT
QR engine models:
Bolt No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bolt
length
“ ” mm
(in)
40
(1.57)
82
(3.2
3)
47
(1.8
5)
47
(1.8
5)
52
(2.0
5)
40
(1.5
7)
40
(1.5
7)
40
(1.5
7)
30
(1.1
8)
30
(1.1
8)
Tightening
torque
N·m (kgm, ft-lb)
30 - 40
(3.1 - 4.1,
22 - 29)
D
E
70 - 80
(7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59)
30 - 40
(3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29)
F
G
H
I
LCIA0036E
J
VQ engine models:
Bolt No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
K
Bolt
length
“ ” mm
(in)
52
(2.05
)
113
(4.4
5)
113
(4.4
5)
52
(2.0
5)
52
(2.0
5)
52
(2.0
5)
40
(1.5
7)
40
(1.5
7)
40
(1.5
7)
40
(1.5
7)
L
Tightening
torque
N·m (kgm, ft-lb)
●
70 - 80 (7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59)
M
30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29)
After installation, check oil level, and look for leaks and loose
mechanisms.
LCIA0037E
Revision: March 2005
MT-19
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
Component Parts
ECS0094B
CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS
WCIA0430E
1.
Differential oil seal
2.
Ball pin
3.
Washer
4.
Back-up lamp switch
5.
Oil gutter
6.
Baffle plate
7.
Transaxle case
8.
Filler plug
9.
Gasket
10. Welch plug
11. Bore plug
12. Drain plug
13. Gasket
14. Differential oil seal
15. Park/Neutral position switch
16. Air breather tube
17. Input shaft oil seal
18. Oil channel
19. Magnet
20. Clutch housing
21. Speedometer pinion gear
22. O-ring
Revision: March 2005
MT-20
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
GEAR COMPONENTS
A
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
WCIA0431E
1.
Input shaft front bearing
2.
Input shaft
3.
Needle bearing
4.
3rd input gear
5.
3rd inner baulk ring
6.
3rd gear synchronizer cone
7.
3rd outer baulk ring
8.
Spread spring
9.
3rd and 4th synchronizer hub
10.
3rd and 4th shifting insert
11. 4th baulk ring
12. 3rd and 4th coupling sleeve
13.
Bushing
14. Needle bearing
15. 4th input gear
16.
Thrust washer
17. Bushing
18. Needle bearing
19.
5th input gear
20. 5th baulk ring
21. 5th shifting insert
22.
5th synchronizer hub
23. 5th coupling sleeve
24. 5th stopper
25.
Input shaft bearing spacer
26. Snap ring
27. Input shaft rear bearing
28.
Oil channel
29. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim
30. Lock pin
L
Reverse idler shaft
32. Thrust needle bearing
33. Needle bearing
34.
Reverse idler gear (front)
35. Reverse baulk ring
36. Reverse coupling sleeve
37.
Insert spring
38. Reverse idler gear (rear)
3rd gear synchronizer cone
39. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim
3rd outer baulk ring
MT-21
J
K
31.
Revision: March 2005
I
2005 Altima
M
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
SCIA0386E
1.
Mainshaft front bearing
2.
Mainshaft bearing retainer
3.
Mainshaft
4.
Reverse main gear
5.
1st main gear
6.
Bushing
7.
Needle bearing
8.
1st inner baulk ring
9.
1st gear synchronizer cone
10.
1st outer baulk ring
11.
Spread spring
12. 1st & 2nd shifting insert
13.
1st & 2nd synchronizer hub
14.
2nd outer baulk ring
15. 2nd gear synchronizer cone
16.
2nd inner baulk ring
17.
1st & 2nd coupling sleeve
18. Bushing
19.
Needle bearing
20.
2nd main gear
21. 3rd main gear
22.
3rd & 4th mainshaft spacer
23.
4th main adjusting shim
24. 4th main gear
25.
5th main gear
26.
Snap ring
27. Mainshaft rear bearing
28.
Mainshaft C-ring
29.
C-ring holder
30. Snap ring
31.
Snap ring
32.
Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim
Revision: March 2005
MT-22
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS
A
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0260E
1.
Stopper ring
2.
5th & reverse bracket
3.
4.
Shifter cap
5.
Reverse shift fork
6.
Reverse lever assembly
Reverse fork rod
7.
Check plug
8.
Check spring
9.
Shift check sleeve
10. Check ball
11.
3rd & 4th fork rod
12.
5th and reverse fork rod
13. 5th shift fork
14.
Retaining pin
15.
Stopper bolt
16. Shift check
17.
Control rod assembly
18.
O-ring
19. 1st and 2nd fork rod
20.
Interlock pin
21.
1st and 2nd bracket
22. 1st and 2nd shift fork
23.
3rd and 4th shift fork
24.
3rd and 4th bracket
Revision: March 2005
MT-23
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS
WCIA0208E
1.
Differential side bearing outer race
2.
Differential side bearing
3.
Speedometer drive gear
4.
Differential case
5.
Final gear
6.
Differential side bearing
7.
Differential side bearing outer race
8.
Differential side bearing adjusting shim
9.
Pinion mate shaft
10. Side gear
11. Side gear thrust washer
13. Pinion mate gear washer
14. Retaining pin
Disassembly and Assembly
12. Pinion mate gear
ECS0094C
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove drain plug and filler plug.
Remove park/neutral position switch and back-up lamp switch.
SCIA0389E
3.
After removing shift check and stopper bolt, remove control assembly.
Revision: March 2005
MT-24
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
4.
Remove check plugs (3 pieces), check springs (3 pieces), check
balls (3 pieces) and shift check sleeve (1 piece).
A
B
MT
SCIA0396E
D
5.
Remove transaxle case bolts.
E
F
G
SCIA0983E
6.
Remove the bore plug.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
7. While spreading the snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing located at bore plug hole, remove transaxle case.
8. Remove the oil gutter and baffle plate.
9. Remove snap ring, mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim and input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim from
transaxle case.
10. Remove differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case
side) and then adjust shim.
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0270E
11. Remove welch plug.
SCIA0402E
Revision: March 2005
MT-25
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
12. Remove differential oil seal.
SCIA0397E
13. Remove magnet from clutch housing.
14. With shift lever in 5th position, remove bracket bolts from
reverse lever assembly. Lift reverse lever assembly to remove.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose shifter cap.
SCIA0390E
15. Pull out reverse fork rod then remove reverse shift fork.
16. Shift 3rd & 4th fork rod to 3rd position. Remove retaining pin of
5th shift fork using pin punch.
SCIA0391E
17. Remove stopper rings for 5th & reverse bracket.
SCIA0392E
18. Pull out 5th & reverse fork rod and remove 5th shift fork and 5th & reverse bracket.
19. Remove check balls (2 pieces) and interlock pin.
Revision: March 2005
MT-26
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
20. Remove retaining pin of 3rd & 4th bracket using pin punch.
A
B
MT
SCIA0393E
D
21.
22.
23.
24.
Remove stopper rings for 3rd & 4th shift fork.
Pull out 3rd & 4th fork rod and remove 3rd & 4th shift fork and bracket.
Remove shift check sleeve from clutch housing.
Remove retaining pin of 1st & 2nd shift fork using pin punch.
E
F
G
H
SCIA0394E
25.
26.
27.
28.
a.
Pull out 1st & 2nd with bracket.
Remove 1st & 2nd shift fork.
Remove retaining pin of 1st & 2nd bracket using pin punch and separate 1st & 2nd fork rod and bracket.
Remove gear components from clutch housing in the following
procedure.
While tapping input shaft with plastic hammer, remove input
shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly and reverse idler gear
assembly as a set.
CAUTION:
Always withdraw mainshaft straight out. Failure to do so
can damage resin oil channel on clutch housing side.
SCIA0395E
b. Remove final drive assembly.
29. Remove the mainshaft bearing retainer and then the mainshaft
front bearing.
Tool number
:KV381054S0 (J-34286)
WCIA0271E
30. Remove the oil channel on the mainshaft side.
31. Remove the differential oil seal (clutch housing side).
Revision: March 2005
MT-27
2005 Altima
I
J
K
L
M
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
32. Remove differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing
side).
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
WCIA0272E
33. Remove input shaft oil seal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage clutch housing.
SCIA0398E
ASSEMBLY
1.
Using a drift, install a new input shaft oil seal from the clutch
housing end of side to the depth of 1.8 - 2.8 mm (0.071 - 0.110
in).
CAUTION:
Oil seals are not reusable.
SCIA1022E
2.
Using a drift, install a new differential oil seal.
CAUTION:
Oil seals are not reusable.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
WCIA0273E
3.
Install oil channel on mainshaft side as shown.
CAUTION:
Use the correct orientation for installation as shown.
SCIA0986E
Revision: March 2005
MT-28
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
4.
Using a drift, install mainshaft front bearing.
CAUTION:
Use the correct orientation for installation as shown.
Tool number
A
: ST33200000 (J-26082)
B
MT
WCIA0274E
5.
Install bearing retainer.
CAUTION:
Install with the punched surface facing up.
D
E
F
G
SCIA0400E
6.
Install differential side bearing outer race.
Tool number
H
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
I
J
WCIA0275E
7.
K
Install final drive assembly into clutch housing.
L
M
SCIA0888E
8.
Install input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse
idler gear assembly into clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to damage input shaft oil seal.
SCIA0395E
Revision: March 2005
MT-29
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
9.
Install 1st-2nd fork rod bracket onto 1st-2nd fork rod, and then
install retaining pin.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them.
SCIA0889E
10. Install 1st-2nd fork rod and 1st-2nd shift fork, and then install
retaining pin.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them.
SCIA0394E
11. Install shift check sleeve.
12. Install 3rd-4th bracket, 3rd-4th shift fork, and 3rd-4th fork rod
with interlock pin.
SCIA0393E
13. Install stopper ring onto 3rd-4th shift fork.
CAUTION:
Stopper rings are not reusable. Never reuse them.
14. Install retaining pin onto 3rd-4th bracket.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them.
15. Install 2 check balls.
16. Install 5th-reverse bracket, 5th shift fork, and 5th-reverse fork
rod.
SCIA0392E
17. Install stopper ring onto 5th-reverse bracket.
Revision: March 2005
MT-30
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
CAUTION:
Stopper rings are not reusable. Never reuse them.
18. Install retaining pin onto 5th shift fork.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable. Never reuse them.
A
B
MT
D
SCIA0391E
19. Install reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod.
20. Install reverse lever assembly following procedures below.
a. Install shifter cap onto reverse lever assembly cam, and then install them onto reverse shift fork.
CAUTION:
Do not drop shifter cap.
b. While lifting reverse shift fork, align cam with 5th-reverse
bracket.
E
F
G
H
I
SCIA0890E
J
c.
Tighten mounting bolts to specified torque, and then install
reverse lever assembly.
Bracket bolts
: 11.8 – 15.6 N·m (1.2 – 1.5 kg-m,
9 – 11 ft-lb)
K
L
M
SCIA0390E
21. Install the magnet onto clutch housing.
22. Install the selected input shaft adjusting shim onto the input shaft.
● For selection of adjusting shims, refer to MT-66, "Available Adjusting Shims" .
23. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and differential side bearing outer race. For selection adjusting shim, refer to MT-35, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD" .
24. Install baffle plate and oil gutter.
25. Install transaxle case using the following procedure:
a. Install selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into transaxle case.
● For selection of adjusting shims, refer to MT-66, "Available Adjusting Shims" .
b. Temporarily install a new snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing into transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the snap ring.
Revision: March 2005
MT-31
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
c.
Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent to mating surfaces of
transaxle case and clutch housing. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to
application and mounting surfaces.
SCIA0891E
d.
With snap ring of mainshaft rear bearing temporarily installed,
place transaxle case over clutch housing.
SCIA0892E
e.
Through bore plug mounting hole, with snap ring stretched, lift
up mainshaft assembly from the control assembly mounting
hole.
SCIA0893E
f.
Securely install snap ring onto mainshaft rear bearing.
Revision: March 2005
MT-32
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
g.
Tighten the bolts “A” and the new bolts “B”.
Bolt “A”
Bolt “B”
A
: 50.0 - 53.9 N·m (5.1 - 5.4 kg-m, 37 - 39 ft-lb)
: 63.0 - 66.9 N·m (6.5 - 6.8 kg-m, 47 - 49 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Always replace bolts “B” because they are self-sealing
bolts.
B
MT
SCIA1064E
D
h.
Apply gear oil to the O-ring and install it to the control assembly. Then install control assembly to transaxle
case. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to MT-23, "SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
i. Install shift check and a new stopper bolt.
CAUTION:
Shift check and stopper bolt are not reusable.
26. Using Tool, install a new bore plug as shown.
CAUTION:
Bore plugs are not reusable.
Tool number
E
F
G
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
H
I
WCIA0276E
J
27. Using Tool, install a welch plug as shown.
Tool number
: ST33052000 ( —
)
K
L
M
WCIA0277E
28. Install 1 shift check sleeve, 3 check balls, 3 check springs, and 3
check ball plugs.
CAUTION:
Check ball plugs are not reusable. Never reuse them.
SCIA0396E
Revision: March 2005
MT-33
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
29. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent to threads of Park/
Neutral position switch and Back-up lamp switch, then install
them into transaxle case. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED
CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
SCIA0895E
30. Install gaskets onto drain plug and filler plug, then install them into transaxle case.
CAUTION:
● Gaskets are not reusable. Never reuse them.
● After oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specified torque. Refer to MT-20, "CASE AND HOUSING
COMPONENTS" .
Adjustment
ECS0094D
INPUT SHAFT END PLAY
●
●
When adjusting input shaft end play, select adjusting shim for
input shaft bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance
between transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing.
Calculate dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the
following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for input
shaft rear bearing.
End play
: 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Dimension “O” = (“O1 ” - “O2 ”) – End play
“O”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
: Distance between transaxle case end face
“O1 ”
and mounting face of adjusting shim
: Distance between clutch housing case end
“O2 ”
face and end face of input shaft rear bearing
SCIA1006E
Adjusting Shim
Shim thickness
Part number
Shim thickness
Part number
Shim thickness
Part number
0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
0.44 mm (0.0173 in)
0.48 mm (0.0189 in)
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.64 mm (0.0252 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.72 mm (0.0283 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
32225 8H500
32225 8H501
32225 8H502
32225 8H503
32225 8H504
32225 8H505
32225 8H506
32225 8H507
32225 8H508
32225 8H509
32225 8H510
32225 8H511
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
0.96 mm (0.0378 in)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in)
1.04 mm (0.0409 in)
1.08 mm (0.0425 in)
1.12 mm (0.0441 in)
1.16 mm (0.0457 in)
1.20 mm (0.0472 in)
1.24 mm (0.0488 in)
1.28 mm (0.0504 in)
1.32 mm (0.0520 in)
32225 8H512
32225 8H513
32225 8H514
32225 8H515
32225 8H516
32225 8H517
32225 8H518
32225 8H519
32225 8H520
32225 8H521
32225 8H522
32225 8H523
1.36 mm (0.0535 in)
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
1.44 mm (0.0567 in)
1.48 mm (0.0583 in)
1.52 mm (0.0598 in)
1.56 mm (0.0614 in)
1.60 mm (0.0630 in)
1.64 mm (0.0646 in)
1.68 mm (0.0661 in)
1.72 mm (0.0677 in)
32225 8H524
32225 8H560
32225 8H561
32225 8H562
32225 8H563
32225 8H564
32225 8H565
32225 8H566
32225 8H567
32225 8H568
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
Revision: March 2005
MT-34
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
1.
Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension
“O1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim as shown.
A
B
MT
SCIA1002E
D
2.
Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension
“O2 ” between clutch housing case end face and end face of
input shaft rear bearing as shown.
E
F
G
SCIA1004E
3.
Install selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto input shaft.
H
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
●
●
When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim,
measure clearance “L” between transaxle case and differential
side bearing outer race.
Calculate dimension “L” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the
following procedure to satisfy specification of preload for differential side bearing.
Preload
: 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in)
Dimension “L” = (“L1 ” - “L2 ”) + Preload
“L”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
“L1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim
“L2 ” : Distance between differential side bearing
and clutch housing end face
I
J
K
SCIA0896E
L
M
Adjusting Shim
Shim thickness
Part number
0.48 mm (0.0189 in)
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.64 mm (0.0252 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.72 mm (0.0283 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
31438 80X00
31438 80X01
31438 80X02
31438 80X03
31438 80X04
31438 80X05
31438 80X06
31438 80X07
31438 80X08
31438 80X09
31438 80X10
31438 80X11
CAUTION:
Up to 2 adjusting shims can be selected.
Revision: March 2005
MT-35
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
1.
Using depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension
“L1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim as shown.
SCIA1078E
2.
3.
Install outer race onto differential side bearing on final gear side. Holding lightly the outer race horizontally
by hand, rotate final gear five times or more (for smooth movement of bearing roller).
Using depth micrometer and straightedge, measure dimension
“L2 ” between differential side bearing outer race and clutch
housing end face as shown.
SCIA1079E
4.
Install selected adjusting shim and then differential side bearing
outer race using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
WCIA0278E
MAINSHAFT END PLAY
●
●
When adjusting mainshaft end play, select adjusting shim for
mainshaft rear bearing. To select adjusting shim, measure clearance “M” between transaxle case and mainshaft rear bearing.
Calculate dimension “P” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the
following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for mainshaft rear bearing.
End play
: 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Dimension “P” = “M” – End play
“P” : Thickness of adjusting shim
“M” : Distance between mainshaft rear bearing
and transaxle case
Revision: March 2005
MT-36
SCIA0904E
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
Adjusting Shim
Shim thickness
Part number
0.44 mm (0.0173 in)
0.48 mm (0.0189 in)
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.64 mm (0.0252 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.72 mm (0.0283 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
0.96 mm (0.0378 in)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in)
1.04 mm (0.0409 in)
1.08 mm (0.0425 in)
32238 8H510
32238 8H511
32238 8H512
32238 8H513
32238 8H514
32238 8H515
32238 8H516
32238 8H517
32238 8H518
32238 8H519
32238 8H520
32238 8H521
32238 8H522
32238 8H523
32238 8H524
32238 8H560
32238 8H561
A
B
MT
D
E
F
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install mainshaft assembly to clutch housing.
Install snap ring to transaxle case.
Install transaxle case to clutch housing, and temporarily assemble them with the bolts. Install temporarily
snap ring to mainshaft rear bearing.
Install dial gauge to snap ring access hole, and expand snap
ring. Lift mainshaft assembly through control assembly installation hole, and push it against transaxle case. This state shall be
defined as base. Moving distance of mainshaft assembly, with
snap ring fit on main bearing, becomes “M”.
G
H
I
J
K
SCIA1017E
REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY
●
●
L
When adjusting reverse idler gear end play, select adjusting
shim for reverse idler gear. To select adjusting shim, measure
clearance between transaxle case and reverse idler gear.
Calculate dimension “Q” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the
following procedure to satisfy specification of end play for
reverse idler gear.
End play
: 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in)
Dimension “Q” = (“Q1 ” - “Q2 ”) – End play
“Q”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
“Q1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim
“Q2 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end
face and end face of reverse idler gear
Revision: March 2005
MT-37
M
SCIA1007E
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS5F51A]
Adjusting Shim
Shim thickness
mm (in)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.84 (0.0724)
1.88 (0.0740)
1.92 (0.0756)
1.96 (0.0772)
2.00 (0.0787)
2.04 (0.0803)
2.08 (0.0819)
2.12 (0.0835)
2.16 (0.0850)
2.20 (0.0866)
Part number
Shim thickness
32237 8H800
32237 8H801
32237 8H802
32237 8H803
32237 8H804
32237 8H805
32237 8H806
32237 8H807
32237 8H808
32237 8H809
32237 8H810
32237 8H811
mm (in)
2.24 (0.0882)
2.28 (0.0898)
2.32 (0.0913)
2.36 (0.0929)
2.40 (0.0945)
2.44 (0.0961)
2.48 (0.0976)
2.52 (0.0992)
2.56 (0.1008)
2.60 (0.1024)
2.64 (0.1039)
Part number
32237 8H812
32237 8H813
32237 8H814
32237 8H815
32237 8H816
32237 8H817
32237 8H818
32237 8H819
32237 8H820
32237 8H821
32237 8H822
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
1.
Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension
“Q1 ” between transaxle case end face and mounting face of
adjusting shim as shown.
SCIA1003E
2.
Using depth micrometer and straight edge, measure dimension
“Q2 ” between clutch housing case end face and end face of
reverse idler gear as shown.
SCIA1005E
3.
Install selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto reverse idler gear.
Revision: March 2005
MT-38
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:32200
A
ECS0094E
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Before disassembling, measure end play for 3rd, 4th, and 5th
input gears.
B
End play standard value
3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in)
4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
CAUTION:
If measurement is outside the standard range, disassemble
to check contact surfaces of gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust
with snap ring at assembly.
2.
3.
MT
D
SCIA0914E
Remove oil channel.
Remove input shaft rear bearing.
Tool number
E
F
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
G
H
WCIA0279E
4.
I
Remove the snap ring.
J
K
L
SCIA0916E
5.
M
Remove input shaft bearing spacer and 5th stopper simultaneously.
Tool number
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
WCIA0280E
Revision: March 2005
MT-39
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
6.
Remove 5th input gear and synchronizer hub assembly simultaneously.
Tool number
A: KV40105020 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
WCIA0281E
7.
8.
Remove 5th needle bearing.
Remove 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th needle
bearing, 4th gear bushing, 4th baulk ring, 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub assembly, 3rd gear synchronizer assembly, and 3rd input
gear simultaneously.
Tool number
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
WCIA0282E
9. Remove 3rd needle bearing.
10. Remove input shaft front bearing.
SCIA0920E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Input Shaft and Gears
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, etc. of shaft
●
Excessive wear, damage, peeling, etc. of gears
LCIA0306E
Revision: March 2005
MT-40
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
Synchronizer
A
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and excessive wear of contact surfaces of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert.
●
Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly.
B
MT
SMT387A
●
If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of
baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it.
D
E
F
G
SMT867D
H
Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (4th and 5th)
Press baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it with a
new one.
Clearance
Standard value
4th
5th
Limit value
I
J
: 0.8 - 1.45 mm (0.035 - 0.057 in)
: 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.037 - 0.055 in)
: 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
K
SMT140
Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer (3rd)
L
Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of outer
baulk ring, synchronizer cone, inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring determine the clearances “A” and “B” as an assembly. Replace the
outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring as an
assembly if either of the clearances “A” or “B” exceed the limit
value.
M
SCIA0950E
Revision: March 2005
MT-41
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
●
Measure clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally opposite
using a dial indicator, and calculate average value.
Tool number
Clearance “A”
Standard value
Limit value
A: ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
: 0.6 – 0.8 mm (0.024 – 0.031 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
WCIA0283E
●
Measure clearance “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite
using a feeler gauge, and calculate average value.
Clearance “B”
Standard value
Limit value
: 0.6 – 1.1 mm (0.024 – 0.043 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
SCIA1084E
Bearing
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and rough rotation of bearing
MTF0041D
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Install 3rd needle bearing.
Install 3rd input gear and 3rd gear synchronizer assembly.
Install spread spring, shifting insert and 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
CAUTION:
● Be careful with orientation of synchronizer hub.
● Do not reuse the 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
SCIA0921E
Revision: March 2005
MT-42
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
●
Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve.
A
B
MT
SCIA0993E
D
●
Be sure not to hook ends of 2 spread springs (front and
back have two each) on same shifting insert.
E
F
G
SCIA1083E
4.
Install 3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly.
Tool number
H
: KV40105710 ( — )
CAUTION:
Align grooves of shifting insert and 3rd baulk ring.
I
J
WCIA0284E
5.
K
Install 4th bushing.
Tool number
: KV40105710 ( — )
L
M
WCIA0285E
6.
7.
Install 4th baulk ring.
Install 4th input gear and 4th needle bearing.
Revision: March 2005
MT-43
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
8.
Select thrust washer so that dimension “C2 ” satisfies standard
below. Then install it onto input shaft.
Standard for dimension “C2 ”
: 154.7 - 154.8 mm
(6.091 - 6.094 in)
SCIA0925E
Thrust Washer
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
3.84 mm (0.1512 in)
3.90 mm (0.1535 in)
3.96 mm (0.1559 in)
32347 8H500
32347 8H501
32347 8H502
4.02 mm (0.1583 in)
4.08 mm (0.1606 in)
4.14 mm (0.1630 in)
32347 8H503
32347 8H504
32347 8H505
CAUTION:
Only one thrust washer can be selected.
9.
Install 5th bushing.
Tool number
: KV40105710 ( — )
WCIA0286E
10. Install 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear.
11. Install 5th baulk ring.
12. Install spread spring, shifting insert and 5th synchronizer hub onto 5th coupling sleeve.
CAUTION:
● Be careful with orientation of synchronizer hub and shifting insert.
SCIA0927E
Revision: March 2005
MT-44
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
●
Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve.
A
B
MT
SCIA0994E
D
●
Be sure not to hook ends of 2 spread springs (front and
back have two each) on same shifting insert.
E
F
G
SCIA1083E
13. Install 5th synchronizer hub assembly.
Tool number
H
: KV40105710 ( — )
CAUTION:
Align grooves of 5th shifting insert and 5th baulk ring.
I
J
WCIA0287E
K
14. Install 5th stopper and then input shaft bearing spacer.
Tool number
: ST30032000 (J-26010-01)
L
M
WCIA0288E
15. Install snap ring onto input shaft, and check that end play (gap
between snap ring and groove) of input shaft bearing spacer
satisfies standard.
End play standard value
●
: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
If measurement is outside the standard range, select snap
ring.
SCIA0930E
Revision: March 2005
MT-45
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
Snap Rings
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
1.71 mm (0.0673 in)
1.76 mm (0.0693 in)
1.81 mm (0.0713 in)
1.86 mm (0.0732 in)
1.91 mm (0.0752 in)
1.96 mm (0.0772 in)
32204 8H510
32204 8H511
32204 8H512
32204 8H513
32204 8H514
32204 8H515
2.01 mm (0.0791 in)
2.06 mm (0.0811 in)
2.11 mm (0.0831 in)
2.16 mm (0.0850 in)
2.21 mm (0.0871 in)
2.26 mm (0.0890 in)
32204 8H516
32204 8H517
32204 8H518
32204 8H519
32204 8H520
32204 8H521
16. Install input shaft rear bearing.
Tool number
: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing
the input gear side.
WCIA0289E
17. Install input shaft front bearing.
Tool number
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: ST30032000 (J-26010-01)
WCIA0290E
18. Install oil channel onto input shaft.
19. Check end play of 3rd, 4th, and 5th input gears.
End play standard value
3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in)
4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
SCIA0914E
Revision: March 2005
MT-46
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:32241
A
ECS0094F
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Before disassembling, measure end play of 1st and 2nd main
gears.
B
End play standard value
1st gear
: 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
2nd gear
: 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
MT
CAUTION:
If measurement is outside the standard range, disassemble
to check contact surfaces of gear, shaft, and hub. Adjust
with snap ring at assembly.
D
SCIA0933E
2.
3.
Remove the snap ring.
Remove C-ring holder, and then mainshaft C-ring.
E
F
G
H
SCIA0934E
I
4.
Remove mainshaft rear bearing.
Tool number
A: Commercial service tool
B: Commercial service tool
C: ST33052000 ( — )
J
K
L
WCIA0291E
5.
Remove the snap ring.
M
SCIA0936E
Revision: March 2005
MT-47
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
6.
Remove 4th main gear and 5th main gear simultaneously.
Tool number
7.
8.
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
Remove adjusting shim.
Remove 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
WCIA0292E
9.
Remove 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd needle bearing, 2nd
bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly, 1st main gear,
reverse main gear, 1st needle bearing, and 1st bushing simultaneously.
Tool number
: KV40105020 ( — )
WCIA0293E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Mainshaft and Gears
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other nonstandard conditions of the shaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard conditions of the gears.
LCIA0307E
Synchronizer
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert.
●
Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly.
SMT387A
Revision: March 2005
MT-48
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
●
If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of
baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it.
A
B
MT
SMT867D
D
Baulk Ring Clearance for Double Cone Synchronizer (1st)
Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of outer
baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring determine the clearances “A” and “B” as an assembly. Replace the
outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring as an
assembly if either of the clearances “A” or “B” exceed the limit
value.
E
F
G
SCIA0950E
●
H
Using a dial gauge, measure clearance “A” at 2 or more points
diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value.
Tool number
Clearance “A”
Standard value
Limit value
: ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
I
: 0.6 - 0.8 mm (0.024 - 0.031 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
J
K
WCIA0283E
●
Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance “B” at 2 or more points
diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value.
Clearance “B”
Standard value
Limit value
L
: 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
M
SCIA1084E
Revision: March 2005
MT-49
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
Baulk Ring Clearance for Triple Cone Synchronizer (2nd)
Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of outer
baulk ring, synchronizer cone, inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring determine the clearances “A”, “B” and ”C” as an assembly. Replace
the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring as
an assembly if any of the clearances “A”, “B” and “C” exceed
the limit value.
PCIB0603E
●
Measure clearance “A” at two points or more on the opposite
side using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward
clutch gear taper cone, then calculate the average.
Clearance “A”
Standard value
Limit value
: 0.6 - 1.2 mm (0.024 - 0.047 in)
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
PCIB0808E
●
Measure clearance “B” at two points or more on the opposite
side using a feeler gauge, then calculate the average.
Clearance “B”
Standard value
Limit value
: 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
PCIB0605E
●
Measure clearance “C” at two points or more on the opposite
side using a feeler gauge when pressing baulk ring toward
clutch gear taper cone, then calculate the average.
Clearance “C”
Standard value
Limit value
: 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
PCIB0809E
Revision: March 2005
MT-50
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
Bearing
A
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and rough rotation of bearing
B
MT
MTF0041D
D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install reverse main gear.
Tool number
E
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV40101630 (J-35870)
C: ST38220000 ( — )
F
G
WCIA0294E
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of reverse main gear.
H
I
J
K
SCIA0992E
2.
Install 1st bushing.
Tool number
3.
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV38102510 ( — )
C: ST38220000 ( — )
M
Install needle bearing, and then 1st main gear.
WCIA0295E
4.
L
Install spread spring, shifting insert and 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.
Revision: March 2005
MT-51
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
CAUTION:
● Be careful with orientation of synchronizer hub.
SCIA0921E
●
Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve.
SCIA0989E
●
Be sure not to hook ends of 2 spread springs (front and
back have two each) on same shifting insert.
SCIA1083E
5.
Install 1st gear synchronizer assembly onto mainshaft, and synchronizer hub assembly onto mainshaft.
Tool number
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV38102510 ( — )
C: ST38220000 ( — )
CAUTION:
Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
on 2nd gear-side must have been removed.
● Be careful with orientation of coupling sleeve.
●
WCIA0296E
Revision: March 2005
MT-52
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
6.
Install 2nd bushing.
Tool number
7.
8.
A
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV40105710 ( — )
Install outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
on 2nd gear-side.
Install 2nd needle bearing and 2nd gear.
B
MT
WCIA0297E
D
9.
Install 3rd main gear.
Tool number
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV40105710 ( — )
E
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of 3rd main gear.
10. Install 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
F
G
WCIA0298E
11. Select suitable adjusting shim so that dimension “C1 ” satisfies
standard value below, and install it onto mainshaft.
Standard for dimension “C1 ”
H
: 173.85 - 173.95 mm
(6.844 - 6.848 in)
I
J
K
L
M
SCIA0944E
Adjusting Shim
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
32238 8H500
32238 8H501
32238 8H502
32238 8H503
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in)
1.08 mm (0.0425 in)
32238 8H504
32238 8H505
32238 8H506
32238 8H507
CAUTION:
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
Revision: March 2005
MT-53
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
12. Install 4th main gear.
Tool number
A: ST33200000 (J-26082)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of 4th main gear.
WCIA0299E
13. Install 5th main gear.
Tool number
A: ST33200000 (J-26082)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Be careful with orientation of 5th main gear.
WCIA0300E
14. Install snap ring onto mainshaft, and check that end play of 5th
main gear satisfies standard value.
End play standard value
●
: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
If measurement is outside the standard range, reselect snap
ring.
SCIA0947E
Snap Rings
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
1.90 mm (0.0748 in)
1.95 mm (0.0768 in)
2.00 mm (0.0787 in)
32204 8H500
32204 8H501
32204 8H502
32204 8H503
2.05 mm (0.0807 in)
2.10 mm (0.0827 in)
2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in)
32204 8H504
32204 8H505
32204 8H506
32204 8H507
15. Install mainshaft rear bearing.
Tool number
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
WCIA0301E
Revision: March 2005
MT-54
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
16. Install C-ring onto mainshaft, and check that end play of mainshaft rear bearing satisfies standard value.
End play standard value
●
A
: 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
If measurement is outside the standard range, reselect C-ring.
B
MT
SCIA0949E
D
C-ring
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
2.535 mm (0.0998 in)
2.565 mm (0.1010 in)
2.595 mm (0.1022 in)
2.625 mm (0.1033 in)
2.655 mm (0.1045 in)
2.685 mm (0.1057 in)
2.715 mm (0.1069 in)
2.745 mm (0.1081 in)
2.775 mm (0.1093 in)
2.805 mm (0.1104 in)
32348 8H800
32348 8H801
32348 8H802
32348 8H803
32348 8H804
32348 8H805
32348 8H806
32348 8H807
32348 8H808
32348 8H809
2.835 mm (0.1116 in)
2.865 mm (0.1128 in)
2.895 mm (0.1140 in)
2.925 mm (0.1152 in)
2.955 mm (0.1163 in)
2.985 mm (0.1175 in)
3.015 mm (0.1187 in)
3.045 mm (0.1199 in)
3.075 mm (0.1211 in)
32348 8H810
32348 8H811
32348 8H812
32348 8H813
32348 8H814
32348 8H815
32348 8H816
32348 8H817
32348 8H818
17. Fit the C-ring holder, and install the snap ring.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA0934E
K
18. Check the end play of the 1st and 2nd main gears.
L
End play standard value
1st gear
: 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
2nd gear
: 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
M
SCIA0933E
Revision: March 2005
MT-55
2005 Altima
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:32281
ECS0094G
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove reverse idler gear adjusting shim.
Remove reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve and insert spring simultaneously.
Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.
Remove thrust needle bearing.
Remove reverse baulk ring.
Remove reverse idler gear (front).
Remove reverse idler gear needle bearing.
Remove thrust needle bearing.
Pull off locking pin from reverse idler shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Reverse Idler Shaft and Gears
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, bending, and other nonstandard conditions of the shaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage, peeling, and other non-standard conditions of the gears.
SCIA0953E
Synchronizer
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and unusual wear on contact surfaces of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert spring.
●
Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly.
SMT637A
●
If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on cam face of
baulk ring or working face of insert, replace it.
SMT867D
Revision: March 2005
MT-56
2005 Altima
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS5F51A]
Baulk Ring Clearance
●
A
Press baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance between
baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit, replace it
with a new one.
Clearance
Standard
Limit value
B
: 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in)
: 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
MT
SMT140
D
Bearing
Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and rough rotation of bearing.
E
ASSEMBLY
F
Paying attention to following work, assemble in reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
●
Be careful with orientation of insert spring.
G
H
I
SCIA0954E
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-57
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS5F51A]
FINAL DRIVE
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:38411
ECS0094H
PRE-INSPECTION
Check the clearance between side gear and differential case using
Tool and a dial indicator as follows:
Tool number
:
—
(J-39713)
WCIA0261E
1.
2.
3.
Clean final drive assembly sufficiently to prevent side gear thrust washer, differential case, side gear, and
other parts from sticking by gear oil.
Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward.
Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gear. Move
side gear up and down, and measure the clearance.
Clearance between side gear and
differential case
: 0.1 - 0.2 mm
(0.004 - 0.008 in)
CAUTION:
There should be no resistance with the gears rotating freely.
SMT611A
4.
5.
If not within specification, adjust the clearance by changing thrust washer thickness.
Turn differential case upside down, and measure the clearance between side gear and differential case on
the other side in the same way.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove mounting bolts. Then, separate the final gear from differential case.
Remove speedometer drive gear.
Remove the differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using
the pullers and Tool as shown.
Tool number
A: Commercial service tool
B: Commercial service tool
C: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
WCIA0302E
Revision: March 2005
MT-58
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS5F51A]
4.
Remove the differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using
the pullers and Tool as shown.
Tool number
A
A: Commercial service tool
B: Commercial service tool
C: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
B
MT
WCIA0303E
5.
D
Pull out the lock pin and pinion mate shaft using a pin punch.
E
F
G
SCIA0908E
6.
Rotate pinion mate gears, and remove pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers, side gears, and
side gear thrust washers from the differential case.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case
●
H
I
Check side gears, side gear thrust washers, pinion mate shaft,
pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers and differential
case. If necessary, replace with a new one.
J
K
L
MTK0135D
Bearing
M
Check for bearing damage and rough rotation. If necessary,
replace with a new one.
CAUTION:
When replacing tapered roller bearing, replace outer and inner
races as a set.
●
SPD715
ASSEMBLY
1.
Apply gear oil to sliding area of differential case, each gear, and thrust washer.
Revision: March 2005
MT-59
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS5F51A]
2.
Install side gear thrust washers and side gears into differential
case.
SMT839
3.
4.
While rotating pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears, aligning them diagonally, install them
into differential case.
Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to damage pinion mate thrust washers.
MTK0132D
5.
Measure end play of side gears using the procedure below, then
select a side gear thrust washer.
Tool number
a.
b.
:
—
(J-39713)
Upright the differential case so that its side gear to be measured
face upward.
Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gears.
WCIA0261E
c.
Move side gears up and down to measure end play, and select
thrust washer so that it satisfies standard.
End play standard
: 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
CAUTION:
There should be no resistance with the gears rotating
freely.
● Place differential case upside down. Be sure to measure
end play for opposite side-gears likewise.
●
SMT611A
Thrust washer
Thickness
Part number
0.75 mm (0.0295 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.85 mm (0.0335 in)
0.90 mm (0.0354 in)
0.95 mm (0.0374 in)
38424 81X00
38424 81X01
38424 81X02
38424 81X03
38424 81X04
CAUTION:
Only one thrust washer can be selected.
Revision: March 2005
MT-60
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS5F51A]
6.
Drive a new lock pin into the pinion mate shaft using suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the lock pin.
A
B
MT
SCIA0908E
D
7.
Install differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using Tools
as shown.
Tool number
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: KV38102510 ( — )
E
F
G
WCIA0304E
8.
Align and install speedometer drive gear onto differential case.
H
I
J
SMT842D
9.
K
Install differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using Tools
as shown.
Tool number
L
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: KV38102510 ( — )
M
WCIA0305E
10. Install differential gear into differential case, and tighten final
gear bolts.
Final gear bolts
: Refer to MT-24, "FINAL DRIVE
COMPONENTS" .
SCIA0912E
Revision: March 2005
MT-61
2005 Altima
SHIFT CONTROL
[RS5F51A]
SHIFT CONTROL
Inspection
PFP:32982
ECS0094I
Check contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage,
bending, etc. If necessary, replace parts.
●
SCIA0913E
SHIFT FORK
Check if the width of shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling
sleeve) is within allowable specification below.
●
Item
One-side wear specification
Sliding width of new part
1st & 2nd
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
7.80 - 7.93 mm
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
3rd & 4th
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
7.80 - 7.93 mm
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
5th
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
6.10 - 6.23 mm
(0.2402 - 0.2453 in)
Reverse
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
12.80 - 12.93 mm
(0.5039 - 0.5091 in)
Revision: March 2005
MT-62
SMT801D
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS5F51A]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
A
ECS0094J
TRANSAXLE
Engine
QR25DE
VQ35DE
Transaxle model
B
RS5F51A
Model code number
9J506
9J504
Number of speed
MT
5
Synchromesh type
Warner
D
Shift pattern
E
SCIA0821E
Gear ratio
1st
3.416
3.153
2nd
1.944
1.842
3rd
1.258
4th
0.947
5th
0.772
Reverse
Number of teeth
Input gear
3.002
1st
12
13
2nd
18
19
31
4th
38
5th
44
Reverse
Main gear
Reverse idler gear
G
3.252
3rd
12
H
I
J
13
1st
41
2nd
35
3rd
39
4th
36
5th
34
Reverse
38
Front
37
Rear
38
Oil capacity (Reference)
F
2.2
K
L
M
(2-3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt)
Oil level
49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in)
Oil type
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85
or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85
Remarks
Reverse synchronizer
Installed
Double cone synchronizer
1st & 3rd
Triple cone synchronizer
Revision: March 2005
2nd
MT-63
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS5F51A]
FINAL GEAR
Engine
QR25DE
Transaxle model
VQ35DE
RS5F51A
Model code number
9J506
9J504
Final gear ratio
4.133
3.812
Final gear/Pinion
62/15
61/16
Side gear/Pinion mate gear
14/10
14/10
Number of teeth
Triple cone synchronizer
2nd
Gear End Play
ECS0094K
Unit: mm (in)
Gear
End play
1st main gear
0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
2nd main gear
0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
3rd input gear
0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122)
4th input gear
0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
5th input gear
0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
Baulk Ring Clearance
ECS0094L
Unit: mm (in)
Measurement point
1st and 3rd
(Double-cone synchronizer)
Standard
●
Clearance between synchronizer cone and inner baulk ring
end face “A”
●
Clearance between outer baulk
ring paul and synchronizer cone
“B”
Limit Value
A: 0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031)
B: 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043)
0.2 (0.008)
0.2 (0.008)
A: 0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047)
B: 0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043)
C: 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
0.3 (0.012)
0.2 (0.008)
0.3 (0.012)
4th
0.8 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.057)
0.7 (0.028)
5th
0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055)
0.7 (0.028)
Reverse
0.95 - 1.4 (0.037 - 0.055)
0.7 (0.028)
PCIB0249E
2nd
(Triple-cone synchronizer)
●
Clearance between synchronizer cone and clutch gear end
face “A”
●
Clearance between outer baulk
ring paul and synchronizer cone
“B”
●
Clearance between inner baulk
ring and clutch gear end face “C”
PCIB0772E
Revision: March 2005
MT-64
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS5F51A]
Available Snap Rings
ECS0094M
A
INPUT SHAFT SPACER
End play
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
1.71 (0.0673)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.81 (0.0713)
1.86 (0.0732)
1.91 (0.0752)
1.96 (0.0772)
Part number*
Thickness
32204 8H510
32204 8H511
32204 8H512
32204 8H513
32204 8H514
32204 8H515
mm (in)
2.01 (0.0791)
2.06 (0.0811)
2.11 (0.0831)
2.16 (0.0850)
2.21 (0.0871)
2.26 (0.0890)
Part number*
B
32204 8H516
32204 8H517
32204 8H518
32204 8H519
32204 8H520
32204 8H521
MT
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
D
5TH MAIN GEAR
End play
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
1.85 (0.0728)
1.90 (0.0748)
1.95 (0.0768)
2.00 (0.0787)
Part number*
Thickness
32204 8H500
32204 8H501
32204 8H502
32204 8H503
mm (in)
2.05 (0.0807)
2.10 (0.0827)
2.15 (0.0846)
2.20 (0.0866)
E
Part number*
32204 8H504
32204 8H505
32204 8H506
32204 8H507
F
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
G
Available C-Rings
ECS0094N
MAINSHAFT C-RING
End play
H
0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
2.535 (0.0998)
2.565 (0.1010)
2.595 (0.1022)
2.625 (0.1033)
2.655 (0.1045)
2.685 (0.1057)
2.715 (0.1069)
2.745 (0.1081)
2.775 (0.1093)
2.805 (0.1104)
Part number*
Thickness
32348 8H800
32348 8H801
32348 8H802
32348 8H803
32348 8H804
32348 8H805
32348 8H806
32348 8H807
32348 8H808
32348 8H809
mm (in)
2.835 (0.1116)
2.865 (0.1128)
2.895 (0.1140)
2.925 (0.1152)
2.955 (0.1163)
2.985 (0.1175)
3.015 (0.1187)
3.045 (0.1199)
3.075 (0.1211)
Part number*
32348 8H810
32348 8H811
32348 8H812
32348 8H813
32348 8H814
32348 8H815
32348 8H816
32348 8H817
32348 8H818
I
J
K
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Available Thrust Washer
ECS0094O
L
INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER
M
SCIA1008E
Standard length “C2”
Thickness
mm (in)
3.84 (0.1512)
3.90 (0.1535)
3.96 (0.1559)
154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094in)
Part number*
Thickness
32347 8H500
32347 8H501
32347 8H502
mm (in)
4.02 (0.1583)
4.08 (0.1606)
4.14 (0.1630)
Part number*
32347 8H503
32347 8H504
32347 8H505
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
MT-65
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS5F51A]
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHER
Allowable clearance between side gear and differential case with
washer
Thickness
0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
mm (in)
Part number*
0.75 (0.0295)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.85 (0.0335)
0.90 (0.0354)
0.95 (0.0374)
38424 81X00
38424 81X01
38424 81X02
38424 81X03
38424 81X04
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Available Adjusting Shims
ECS0094P
MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM
SCIA1009E
Standard length “C1”
Thickness
173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848in)
mm (in)
Part number*
0.52 (0.0205)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.76 (0.0299)
Thickness
32238 8H500
32238 8H501
32238 8H502
32238 8H503
mm (in)
Part number*
0.84 (0.0331)
0.92 (0.0362)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.08 (0.0425)
32238 8H504
32238 8H505
32238 8H506
32238 8H507
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM
End play
Thickness
0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
mm (in)
0.40 (0.0157)
0.44 (0.0173)
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
Part number*
32225 8H500
32225 8H501
32225 8H502
32225 8H503
32225 8H504
32225 8H505
32225 8H506
32225 8H507
32225 8H508
32225 8H509
32225 8H510
32225 8H511
Thickness
mm (in)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.96 (0.0378)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.08 (0.0425)
1.12 (0.0441)
1.16 (0.0457)
1.20 (0.0472)
1.24 (0.0488)
1.28 (0.0504)
1.32 (0.0520)
Part number*
32225 8H512
32225 8H513
32225 8H514
32225 8H515
32225 8H516
32225 8H517
32225 8H518
32225 8H519
32225 8H520
32225 8H521
32225 8H522
32225 8H523
Thickness
mm (in)
1.36 (0.0535)
1.40 (0.0551)
1.44 (0.0567)
1.48 (0.0583)
1.52 (0.0598)
1.56 (0.0614)
1.60 (0.0630)
1.64 (0.0646)
1.68 (0.0661)
1.72 (0.0677)
Part number*
32225 8H524
32225 8H560
32225 8H561
32225 8H562
32225 8H563
32225 8H564
32225 8H565
32225 8H566
32225 8H567
32225 8H568
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
MT-66
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS5F51A]
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM
End play
A
0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
0.44 (0.0173)
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
Part number*
Thickness
32238 8H510
32238 8H511
32238 8H512
32238 8H513
32238 8H514
32238 8H515
32238 8H516
32238 8H517
32238 8H518
mm (in)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.96 (0.0378)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.08 (0.0425)
Part number*
32238 8H519
32238 8H520
32238 8H521
32238 8H522
32238 8H523
32238 8H524
32238 8H560
32238 8H561
B
MT
D
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIMS
End play
E
0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.84 (0.0724)
1.88 (0.0740)
1.92 (0.0756)
1.96 (0.0772)
2.00 (0.0787)
2.04 (0.0803)
2.08 (0.0819)
2.12 (0.0835)
2.16 (0.0850)
2.20 (0.0866)
Part number*
Thickness
32237 8H800
32237 8H801
32237 8H802
32237 8H803
32237 8H804
32237 8H805
32237 8H806
32237 8H807
32237 8H808
32237 8H809
32237 8H810
32237 8H811
mm (in)
2.24 (0.0882)
2.28 (0.0898)
2.32 (0.0913)
2.36 (0.0929)
2.40 (0.0945)
2.44 (0.0961)
2.48 (0.0976)
2.52 (0.0992)
2.56 (0.1008)
2.60 (0.1024)
2.64 (0.1039)
Part number*
F
32237 8H812
32237 8H813
32237 8H814
32237 8H815
32237 8H816
32237 8H817
32237 8H818
32237 8H819
32237 8H820
32237 8H821
32237 8H822
G
H
I
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Available Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shims
ECS0094Q
BEARING PRELOAD
Differential side bearing preload: L*
J
0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083)
K
*: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness.
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS
Thickness
mm (in)
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
Part number*
Thickness
31438 80X00
31438 80X01
31438 80X02
31438 80X03
31438 80X04
31438 80X05
mm (in)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
Part number*
L
31438 80X06
31438 80X07
31438 80X08
31438 80X09
31438 80X10
31438 80X11
M
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
MT-67
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
[RS6F51A]
PRECAUTIONS
Caution
●
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
ECS0094R
Do not reuse transaxle oil.
Drain, fill and check transaxle oil with the vehicle on level ground.
During removal and installation, keep inside of transaxle clean of dust and dirt.
Check for the correct installation orientation prior to removal or disassembly. If mating marks are required,
be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to.
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally and from inside to outside
as applicable. If a tightening sequence is specified, follow it.
Be careful not to damage the sliding surfaces and mating surfaces of parts.
Revision: March 2005
MT-68
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RS6F51A]
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
ECS0094S
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV381054S0
(J-34286)
Puller
Removing side bearing outer race
Removing mainshaft front bearing
MT
D
ZZA0601D
ST35321000
( — )
Drift
ZZA1000D
ST30720000
(J-25405)
Drift
E
Installing input shaft oil seal
Installing reverse main gear
Installing 1st bushing
Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
Installing 2nd bushing
Installing 3rd main gear
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
Installing differential oil seal
Installing differential side bearing outer race
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
Installing differential side bearing
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
F
G
H
I
ZZA0811D
ST33200000
(J-26082)
Drift
Installing mainshaft front bearing
Installing 6th bushing
Installing 4th main gear
Installing 5th main gear
Installing 6th main gear
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
J
K
ZZA1002D
ST33061000
(J-8107-2)
Drift
Installing bore plug
Removing differential side bearing
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
L
M
ZZA1000D
ST33052000
( — )
Drift
ZZA1023D
Revision: March 2005
MT-69
Installing welch plug
Removing input shaft rear bearing
Removing 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th gear bushing, 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd input gear
Installing input shaft front bearing
Removing 6th input gear and 6th bushing
Removing mainshaft rear bearing
Removing 4th main gear and 5th main gear
Removing 6th main gear
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RS6F51A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV40105020
( — )
Drift
ZZA1133D
Removing 5th input gear and synchronizer
hub
Removing 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd
bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer hub, 1st main
gear, reverse main gear and 1st bushing
a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 15 mm (0.59 in)
ZZA1058D
Installing 3rd-4th synchronizer hub
Installing 4th bushing
Installing 5th bushing
Installing 5th-6th synchronizer hub
Installing 2nd bushing
Installing 3rd main gear
a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in)
KV40105710
( — )
Press stand
ST38220000
( — )
Press stand
Installing reverse main gear
Installing 1st bushing
Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
a: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in)
ZZA1058D
Installing input shaft front bearing
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
c: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
ST30032000
(J-26010-01)
Drift
ZZA0978D
ST30901000
(J-26010-01)
Drift
ZZA0978D
ST30031000
(J-22912-01)
Puller
Installing input shaft rear bearing
Installing 4th main gear
Installing 5th main gear
Installing 6th main gear
Installing mainshaft rear bearing
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia.
Measuring wear of 1st and 2nd baulk ring
ZZA0537D
KV40101630
(J-35870)
Drift
Installing reverse main gear
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
ZZA1003D
Revision: March 2005
MT-70
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
[RS6F51A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
A
Description
KV38102510
(J-35870)
Drift
Installing 1st bushing
Installing 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
Installing differential side bearing
a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
B
MT
ZZA0838D
—
(J-39713)
Drift
Measuring end play of side gear
D
E
NT087
F
Commercial Service Tools
ECS0094T
G
Tool name
Description
Puller
Removing each bearing gear and bushing
H
I
ZZB0823D
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
J
K
PBIC0190E
Puller
Removing each bearing gear and bushing
L
M
NT077
Pin punch
Removing and installing each retaining pin
Tip: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia.
ZZA0815D
Revision: March 2005
MT-71
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[RS6F51A]
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
ECS0094U
3
1
Hard to shift or will not shift
1
1
Jumps out of gear
Revision: March 2005
2
MT-84
MT-88
Bearing (worn or damaged)
3
3
2
2
1
MT-72
Shift fork (worn)
O-Ring (worn or damaged)
Oil seal (worn or damaged)
Gasket (damaged)
2
3
Insert spring, shifting insert (damaged)
Oil leakage
3
Baulk ring (worn or damaged)
Symptom
Gear (worn or damaged)
Noise
Check plug return spring and check ball (worn or damaged)
MT-78
MT-75
(oil level is high)
2
Suspected parts (possible cause)
Control device and cable (worn)
MT-75
(wrong oil)
1
MT-76
MT-75
Reference page
(oil level is low)
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
2
3
3
2005 Altima
DESCRIPTION
[RS6F51A]
DESCRIPTION
Cross-sectional View
PFP:00000
A
ECS0094V
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCIA0263E
Revision: March 2005
MT-73
2005 Altima
DESCRIPTION
[RS6F51A]
1.
Input shaft rear bearing
4.
5th input gear
5.
4th input gear
6.
3rd & 4th synchronizer
7.
3rd input gear
8.
Reverse idler gear (rear)
9.
Reverse synchronizer
10. Reverse idler gear (front)
2.
6th input gear
11. Reverse idler shaft
3.
5th & 6th synchronizer
12. Clutch housing
13. Input shaft front bearing
14. Input shaft
15. Mainshaft
16. Mainshaft front bearing
17. Differential side bearing (front)
18. Final gear
19. Differential case
20. Differential side bearing (rear)
21. Reverse main gear
22. 1st main gear
23. 1st & 2nd synchronizer
24. 2nd main gear
25. 3rd main gear
26. 4th main gear
27. 5th main gear
28. 6th main gear
29. Mainshaft rear bearing
DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
The 3rd gear is equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce
the operating force of the shift lever as shown.
WCIA0407E
TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
The 1st and 2nd gears are equipped with a triple-cone synchronizer
to reduce the operating force of the control lever as shown.
WCIA0204E
REVERSE GEAR
Description of reverse gear components is as shown.
SCIA0751E
Revision: March 2005
MT-74
2005 Altima
M/T OIL
[RS6F51A]
M/T OIL
Replacement
PFP:KLD20
A
ECS0094W
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transaxle oil.
Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and drain oil.
Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it in the transaxle case.
Drain plug
B
: 34.5 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
MT
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
D
FILLING
1.
Remove speedometer pinion gear. Fill transaxle with new oil.
2.
E
: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Oil grade and capacity
After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in transaxle case.
Speedometer pinion gear
F
: 5.6 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
G
Checking
ECS0094X
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL
●
●
●
H
Check that oil is not leaking from transaxle.
Remove speedometer pinion gear.
Measure oil level using suitable gauge as shown, and check if
"L" is within the specifications.
Oil level “L”
I
: 49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in)
CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
J
K
SMT512C
●
L
Set a new O-ring on the speedometer pinion gear, then install it in the transaxle case.
Speedometer pinion
gear
: 5.6 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 50 in-lb)
M
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
Revision: March 2005
MT-75
2005 Altima
SIDE OIL SEAL
[RS6F51A]
SIDE OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
PFP:32113
ECS0094Y
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the drive shaft from the transaxle case. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the oil seal with a slotted screwdriver as shown.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the transaxle case surface when
removing the oil seal.
WCIA0023E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Using Tool, drive the oil seal straight in until it protrudes from the
transaxle case end equal to dimension “A” as shown.
Dimension “A”
Tool number
: Within 0.5 mm (0.02 in) or flush with
the case.
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
● Before installing oil seal, apply multi-purpose grease to
oil seal lips.
● Do not reuse oil seal.
●
SCIA1010E
Check the transaxle oil level after installation. Refer to MA-28, "Checking M/T Oil" .
Revision: March 2005
MT-76
2005 Altima
POSITION SWITCH
[RS6F51A]
POSITION SWITCH
Checking
PFP:32005
A
ECS0094Z
NOTE:
For removal and installation of the switches. Refer to MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" .
B
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
●
Check continuity.
MT
Gear position
Continuity
Reverse
Yes
Except reverse
No
D
E
SCIA0708E
F
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
●
Check continuity.
Gear position
Continuity
Neutral
Yes
Except neutral
No
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-77
2005 Altima
CONTROL LINKAGE
[RS6F51A]
CONTROL LINKAGE
Removal and Installation of Control Device and Cable
PFP:34103
ECS00950
WCIA0203E
1.
Snap pin
2.
Washer
3.
Cable
4.
Manual lever
5.
Shift cable
6.
Lock plate
7.
Control device assembly
8.
Lock plate
9.
Select cable
10. Shift cable
Revision: March 2005
11. Control lever knob
MT-78
12. Control lever
2005 Altima
CONTROL LINKAGE
[RS6F51A]
13. Control device assembly
14. Cover
15. Select cable
16. Floor
17. Pin
18. Shift cable
19. Washer
20. Clutch housing
21. Cable mounting bracket
22. Select cable
23. Shift cable
24. Lock plate
A
B
25. Lock plate
CAUTION:
●
Note that the select side lock plate for securing the control cable is different from the one on the
MT
shift side.
●
After assembly, make sure selector lever automatically returns to Neutral when it is moved to 1st,
2nd, or Reverse.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-79
2005 Altima
AIR BREATHER HOSE
[RS6F51A]
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation
PFP:31098
ECS00951
LCIA0034E
CAUTION:
●
Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
winding when installing it.
●
Insert the air breather hose into the transaxle tube until the overlap area reaches the spool.
Revision: March 2005
MT-80
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:32010
A
ECS00952
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
WCIA0194E
REMOVAL
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Remove the battery tray and battery.
Remove air breather hose from the transaxle.
Remove the clutch operating cylinder and position it aside without disconnecting the hydraulic lines. Refer
to CL-11, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Do not depress clutch pedal during removal procedure.
Remove the two shift cables from the transaxle. Refer to MT-14, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect and remove the harnesses for the back-up lamp switch and ground straps.
Remove the starter motor using power tool. Refer to SC-17, "Removal and Installation" .
Raise vehicle and remove the engine undercover and splash shields using power tool.
Drain the gear oil from the transaxle. Refer to MT-11, "Replacement" .
Disconnect and remove the harnesses for:
● Vehicle speed sensor
● PNP switch
● Crankshaft position sensor
Remove the bolt and heated oxygen sensor harness clamp bracket, then remove the crankshaft position
sensor.
Remove the exhaust front tube using power tool. Refer to EX-7, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the drive shafts using power tool. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
MT-81
2005 Altima
L
M
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
14. Lower vehicle, then install suitable engine slinger on the front of
the left bank cylinder head, and the rear of the right bank cylinder head as shown.
SEM807G
SEM808G
15. Support the engine using an engine support fixture or suitable
tool.
16. Remove the five upper bolts that mount the transaxle to the
engine using power tool.
17. Disconnect the LH transaxle mounting insulator using power
tool.
18. Raise vehicle, then remove front suspension member, LH
engine insulator, and LH engine mount bracket. Refer to EM220, "REMOVAL" .
19. Place a suitable jack support under the transaxle.
CAUTION:
When setting the jack, be careful not to bring it into contact with the switches.
20. Remove the five lower bolts that mount the transaxle to the engine using power tool.
21. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle.
Revision: March 2005
MT-82
MTD0062D
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
When installing the transaxle to the engine, use the specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence
shown below:
CAUTION:
When installing the transaxle, do not allow the transaxle input shaft to make contact with the
clutch cover.
A
B
MT
Bolt No.
Bolt length “
mm (in)
”
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
40
(1.57)
82
(3.23)
47
(1.85)
47
(1.85)
52
(2.05)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
30
(1.18)
30
(1.18)
30 - 40
(3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29)
70 - 80
(7.1 - 8.1, 52 - 59)
D
30 - 40
(3.1 - 4.1, 22 - 29)
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
LCIA0036E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-83
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
Component Parts
ECS00953
CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS
WCIA0432E
1.
Differential oil seal
2.
Ball pin
3.
Washer
4.
Back-up lamp switch
5.
Oil gutter
6.
Baffle plate
7.
Transaxle case
8.
Filler plug
9.
Gasket
10. Welch plug
11. Bore plug
12. Drain plug
13. Gasket
14. Differential oil seal
15. Park/Neutral position switch
16. Air breather tube
17. Input shaft oil seal
18. Oil channel
19. Magnet
20. Clutch housing
21. Speedometer pinion gear
22. O-ring
Revision: March 2005
MT-84
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
GEAR COMPONENTS
A
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
WCIA0433E
1.
Input shaft front bearing
2.
Input shaft
3.
Needle bearing
4.
3rd input gear
5.
3rd inner baulk ring
6.
3rd gear synchronizer cone
7.
3rd outer baulk ring
8.
Spread spring
9.
3rd & 4th synchronizer hub
10. 3rd & 4th shifting insert
11. 4th baulk ring
12. 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve
13. Bushing
14. Needle bearing
15. 4th input gear
I
J
K
16. Thrust washer
17. Bushing
19. 5th input gear
20. 5th baulk ring
21. 5th & 6th shifting insert
22. 5th & 6th synchronizer hub
23. 5th & 6th coupling sleeve
24. Baulk ring
25. 6th input gear
26. Needle bearing
27. Bushing
28. Snap ring
29. Input shaft rear bearing
30. Oil channel
31. Input shaft rear bearing adjusting
shim
32. Retaining pin
33. Reverse idler shaft
34. Thrust bearing
35. Needle bearing
36. Reverse idler gear (Front)
37. Reverse baulk ring
38. Reverse coupling sleeve
39. Insert spring
40. Reverse idler gear (Rear)
41. Reverse idler gear adjusting shim
Revision: March 2005
18. Needle bearing
MT-85
L
M
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
SCIA0957E
1.
Mainshaft front bearing
2.
Mainshaft bearing retainer
3.
Mainshaft
4.
Reverse main gear
5.
1st main gear
6.
Bushing
7.
Needle bearing
8.
1st inner baulk ring
9.
1st gear synchronizer cone
10. 1st outer baulk ring
11.
Spread spring
12.
1st & 2nd shifting insert
13. 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub
14.
2nd outer baulk ring
15.
2nd gear synchronizer cone
16. 2nd inner baulk ring
17.
1st & 2nd coupling sleeve
18.
Bushing
19. Needle bearing
20.
2nd main gear
21.
3rd main gear
22. 3rd & 4th mainshaft spacer
23.
4th main adjusting shim
24.
4th main gear
25. 5th main gear
26.
6th main gear
27.
Mainshaft rear bearing
28. Mainshaft C-ring
29.
C-ring holder
30.
Snap ring
31. Snap ring
32.
Mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim
33.
5th & 6th mainshaft spacer
34. 6th main adjusting shim
Revision: March 2005
MT-86
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS
A
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WCIA0412E
1.
Reverse shift fork
2.
Shifter cap
3.
Reverse fork rod
4.
Reverse lever assembly
5.
5th & 6th bracket
6.
5th & 6th fork rod
7.
5th & 6th shift fork
8.
Retaining pin
9.
3rd & 4th bracket
10. 3rd & 4th shift fork
11. 3rd & 4th fork rod
12. 1st & 2nd shift fork
13. 1st & 2nd bracket
14. 1st & 2nd fork rod
15. Shift check sleeve
16. Inter lock pin
17. Check ball
18. Shift check sleeve
19. Check spring
20. Check plug
21. Control assembly
22. O-ring
23. Shift check
24. Stopper bolt
25. Stopper ring
26. Reverse bracket fork rod
27. Reverse bracket
Revision: March 2005
MT-87
K
L
M
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
FINAL DRIVE COMPONENTS
WCIA0268E
1.
Differential side bearing outer
race
4.
Differential case
7.
Differential side bearing outer
race
10. Side gear
13. Pinion mate thrust washer
2.
Differential side bearing
3.
Speedometer drive gear
5.
Final gear
6.
Differential side bearing
8.
Differential side bearing adjusting shim
9.
Pinion mate shaft
11.
Side gear thrust washer
12. Pinion mate gear
14.
Lock pin
Disassembly and Assembly
ECS00954
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove the drain plug and filler plug.
Remove the park/neutral position switch and back-up lamp
switch.
After removing the shift check and stopper bolt, remove the control assembly.
SCIA0389E
Revision: March 2005
MT-88
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
4.
Remove the 2 check ball plugs, 2 check springs, 2 check balls
as shown. Discard the check ball plugs.
CAUTION:
Check ball plugs are not reusable.
A
B
MT
LCIA0302E
D
5.
Remove the transaxle case fixing bolts as shown.
E
F
G
SCIA0983E
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the bore plug.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage transaxle case.
While spreading the snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing located at bore plug hole, remove the transaxle case.
Remove the oil gutter and baffle plate.
Remove the snap ring, mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim, and input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim
from the transaxle case.
10. Remove the differential side bearing outer race (transaxle case
side) using Tool as shown, and then remove the adjusting shim.
Tool number
H
I
J
K
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
L
M
WCIA0270E
11. Remove the welch plug with a suitable punch and hammer as
shown.
SCIA0402E
Revision: March 2005
MT-89
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
12. Remove the differential oil seal with a suitable tool as shown.
SCIA0397E
13. Remove the magnet from the clutch housing.
14. Remove the reverse check ball plug, reverse check spring, reverse shift check sleeve, and check ball.
Discard the check ball.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the check ball plug.
● Do not drop the check ball.
15. With the shift lever in 5th position, remove the bracket bolts from
the reverse lever assembly as shown. Lift the reverse lever
assembly to remove.
CAUTION:
Retain the shifter cap for installation.
SCIA0960E
16. Pull out the reverse fork rod then remove the reverse shift fork.
17. Remove the retaining pin of the reverse bracket.
SCIA0961E
18. Pull out the reverse lever and the reverse bracket fork rod.
19. Remove the check ball (2 pieces) and the interlock pin.
20. Shift the 3rd-4th fork rod to the 3rd position. Remove the retaining pin of the 5th-6th shift fork using a pin punch.
SCIA0962E
Revision: March 2005
MT-90
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
21. Remove the stopper rings for the 5th-6th bracket.
A
B
MT
SCIA0963E
D
22.
23.
24.
25.
Pull out the 5th-6th fork rod and remove the 5th-6th shift fork and the 5th-6th bracket.
Remove the check balls (2 pieces) and interlock pin.
Remove the retaining pin of 3rd-4th bracket using pin punch.
Remove the stopper rings for 3rd-4th shift fork.
E
F
G
SCIA0393E
26. Pull out the 3rd-4th fork rod and remove 3rd-4th shift fork and bracket.
27. Remove the shift check sleeve from the clutch housing.
28. Remove the retaining pin of 1st-2nd shift fork using a suitable
pin punch.
H
I
J
K
L
SCIA0394E
29. Pull out the 1st-2nd fork rod with bracket.
30. Remove the 1st-2nd shift fork.
31. Remove the retaining pin of 1st-2nd bracket using a suitable pin punch and separate the fork rod and
bracket.
32. Remove the gear components from the clutch housing.
a. While tapping the input shaft with a plastic hammer, remove the
input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and reverse idler
gear assembly as a set.
CAUTION:
Always withdraw the mainshaft straight out. Failure to do
so can damage the resin oil channel on the clutch housing
side.
b. Remove the final drive assembly.
SCIA0964E
Revision: March 2005
MT-91
2005 Altima
M
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
33. Remove the bearing retainer and then the mainshaft front bearing as shown.
34. Remove the oil channel on the mainshaft side.
SCIA0400E
35. Remove the differential oil seal (clutch housing side).
36. Remove the differential side bearing outer race (clutch housing
side) using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
WCIA0272E
37. Remove the input shaft oil seal using a suitable tool as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the clutch housing sealing surface.
SCIA0398E
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install a new input shaft oil seal from the clutch housing end of
the side, to the depth of 1.8 - 2.8 mm (0.071 - 0.110 in) using
Tool as shown.
Tool number
: ST35321000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Oil seals are not reusable.
SCIA1022E
Revision: March 2005
MT-92
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
2.
Install a new differential oil seal using Tool as shown.
Tool number
A
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION:
Oil seals are not reusable.
B
MT
WCIA0273E
D
3.
Install the oil channel on the mainshaft side as shown.
CAUTION:
Position the oil channel with the orientation as shown, for
installation.
E
F
G
SCIA0986E
4.
Install the mainshaft front bearing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
H
: ST33200000 (J-26082)
CAUTION:
Position the mainshaft front bearing with the orientation as
shown, for installation.
I
J
WCIA0274E
5.
Install the mainshaft front bearing retainer.
CAUTION:
Install the bearing retainer with the punched surface facing
up.
Retainer bolt
L
: 6.27 - 8.33 N·m (0.64 - 0.84 kg-m,
56 - 73 in-lb)
M
SCIA0400E
6.
Install the differential side bearing outer race using Tool as
shown.
Tool number
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
WCIA0275E
Revision: March 2005
MT-93
K
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
7.
Install the final drive assembly into the clutch housing.
SCIA0888E
8.
Install the input shaft assembly, mainshaft assembly, and
reverse idler gear assembly into the clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the input shaft oil seal.
SCIA0964E
9.
Install the 1st-2nd fork rod bracket onto the 1st-2nd fork rod, and
then install a new retaining pin as shown.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable.
SCIA0889E
10. Install the 1st-2nd fork rod and the 1st-2nd shift fork, and then
install a new retaining pin.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable.
SCIA0394E
11. Install the shift check sleeve.
12. Install the 3rd-4th bracket, 3rd-4th shift fork, and 3rd-4th fork rod with the interlock pin.
Revision: March 2005
MT-94
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
13. Install the new stopper rings onto the 3rd-4th shift fork.
CAUTION:
Stopper rings are not reusable.
14. Install a new retaining pin onto the 3rd-4th bracket.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable.
A
B
MT
SCIA0393E
D
15. Install the 2 check balls.
16. Install the 5th-6th bracket, 5th-6th shift fork, and 5th-6th fork rod.
17. Install new stopper rings onto the 5th-6th bracket with interlock
pin.
CAUTION:
Stopper rings are not reusable.
E
F
G
SCIA0963E
18. Install a new retaining pin onto the 5th-6th shift fork.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable.
H
I
J
K
SCIA0962E
19. Install the two check balls.
20. Install the 5th-6th check ball, 5th-6th shift check sleeve, 5th-6th check spring, and the 5th-6th check ball
plug.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the check ball plug.
● Do not drop the check ball.
21. Install the reverse bracket fork rod and reverse lever bracket.
22. Install a new retaining pin onto the reverse bracket.
CAUTION:
Retaining pins are not reusable.
SCIA0961E
23. Install the reverse shift fork and reverse fork rod.
Revision: March 2005
MT-95
2005 Altima
L
M
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
24. Install the reverse lever assembly using the following steps:
a. Install the shifter cap onto the reverse lever assembly cam, and then install them onto the reverse shift
fork.
CAUTION:
Do not drop the shifter cap.
b. While lifting the reverse shift fork, align the cam with the reverse
bracket.
SCIA0965E
c.
Tighten the bracket bolts to specification, and install the reverse
lever assembly.
Bracket bolts
: 13.7 N·m (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
SCIA0960E
25. Install the check ball, reverse shift check sleeve, reverse check spring, and the reverse check ball plug.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse the check ball plug.
● Do not drop the check ball.
26. Install the magnet onto the clutch housing.
27. Install the selected input shaft adjusting shim onto the input shaft. Refer to MT-99, "INPUT SHAFT END
PLAY" .
28. Install selected differential side bearing adjusting shim and differential side bearing outer race. Refer to
MT-100, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD" .
29. Install the baffle plate and oil gutter.
30. Install the transaxle case using the following steps:
a. Install the selected mainshaft rear bearing adjusting shim into the transaxle case. Refer to MT-101,
"MAINSHAFT END PLAY" .
b. Temporarily install the snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing into the transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the snap ring.
c. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces of the transaxle case and
clutch housing as shown. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
CAUTION:
Remove any old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces.
Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering
to the sealant application and mounting surfaces.
SCIA0891E
Revision: March 2005
MT-96
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
d.
Using a snap ring of the mainshaft rear bearing temporarily,
install the transaxle case over the clutch housing as shown.
A
B
MT
SCIA0892E
D
e.
f.
Through the bore plug mounting hole, with the snap ring
stretched, lift up the mainshaft assembly from the control
assembly mounting hole.
Securely install the snap ring onto the mainshaft rear bearing as
shown.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SCIA0893E
g.
: 52.0 N-m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
: 65.0 N-m (6.6 kg-m, 48 ft-lb)
L
CAUTION:
Always replace the “B” bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
M
“A” Bolt
“B” Bolt
SCIA1064E
h.
i.
K
Tighten the “A” bolts (gold) and new “B” bolts (black) to specification.
Apply gear oil to the O-ring and install it to the control assembly. Then install control assembly to transaxle
case. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to MT-87, "SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Install a new shift check and a new stopper bolt.
CAUTION:
Shift check and stopper bolt are not reusable.
Revision: March 2005
MT-97
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
31. Install a new bore plug using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
CAUTION:
Bore plugs are not reusable.
WCIA0276E
32. Install the new welch plug using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: ST33052000 (
—
)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the welch plug.
WCIA0277E
33. Install the 2 check balls, 2 check springs, and the 2 new check
ball plugs.
CAUTION:
Check ball plugs are not reusable.
LCIA0302E
34. Apply sealant to the threads of the park/neutral position switch
and back-up lamp switch. Then install them into the transaxle
case. Refer to MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS"
. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45,
"RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS"
.
SCIA0895E
35. Install new gaskets onto the drain plug and filler plug, and then install them into the transaxle case.
CAUTION:
● Gaskets are not reusable.
● After oil is filled, tighten filler plug to specification. Refer to MT-84, "CASE AND HOUSING COMPONENTS" .
Revision: March 2005
MT-98
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
Adjustment
ECS00955
A
INPUT SHAFT END PLAY
●
●
When adjusting the input shaft end play, select the adjusting
shim for the input shaft bearing. To select the correct thickness
for the adjusting shim, measure the clearance between the transaxle case and input shaft rear bearing.
Calculate the dimension “O” (thickness of adjusting shim) using
the following steps to adjust the input shaft rear bearing for the
specified end play.
B
MT
D
SCIA1001E
E
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
End play
: 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Dimension “O” = (O1 - O2 ) – End play
“O”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
“O1” : Distance between transaxle case end face and mounting face of adjusting shim
“O2” : Distance between clutch housing case end face and end face of input shaft rear
bearing
Shim thickness
Part number
Shim thickness
Part number
Shim thickness
Part number
0.40 mm (0.0157 in)
0.44 mm (0.0173 in)
0.48 mm (0.0189 in)
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.64 mm (0.0252 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.72 mm (0.0283 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
32225 8H500
32225 8H501
32225 8H502
32225 8H503
32225 8H504
32225 8H505
32225 8H506
32225 8H507
32225 8H508
32225 8H509
32225 8H510
32225 8H511
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
0.96 mm (0.0378 in)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in)
1.04 mm (0.0409 in)
1.08 mm (0.0425 in)
1.12 mm (0.0441 in)
1.16 mm (0.0457 in)
1.20 mm (0.0472 in)
1.24 mm (0.0488 in)
1.28 mm (0.0504 in)
1.32 mm (0.0520 in)
32225 8H512
32225 8H513
32225 8H514
32225 8H515
32225 8H516
32225 8H517
32225 8H518
32225 8H519
32225 8H520
32225 8H521
32225 8H522
32225 8H523
1.36 mm (0.0535 in)
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
1.44 mm (0.0567 in)
1.48 mm (0.0583 in)
1.52 mm (0.0598 in)
1.56 mm (0.0614 in)
1.60 mm (0.0630 in)
1.64 mm (0.0646 in)
32225 8H524
32225 8H560
32225 8H561
32225 8H562
32225 8H563
32225 8H564
32225 8H565
32225 8H566
J
K
M
SCIA1002E
MT-99
I
L
Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the
dimension “O1” between the transaxle case end face and
mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown.
Revision: March 2005
G
H
Adjusting Shims
1.
F
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
2.
Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the
dimension “O2 ” between the clutch housing case end face and
end face of the input shaft rear bearing as shown.
SCIA1004E
3.
Install the selected input shaft rear bearing adjusting shim onto the input shaft.
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
●
●
When adjusting differential side bearing preload, select adjusting shim for differential side bearing. To select adjusting shim,
measure clearance “L” between transaxle case and differential
side bearing outer race.
Calculate dimension “L” (thickness of adjusting shim) using the
following procedure to meet specification of preload for differential side bearing.
Preload
: 0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in)
Dimension “L” = (“L1 ” - “L2 ”) + Preload
“L”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
“L1” : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim
“L2” : Distance between differential side bearing
and clutch housing end face
SCIA0896E
CAUTION:
Up to only 2 adjusting shims can be selected.
Adjusting Shim
1.
Shim thickness
Part number
0.48 mm (0.0189 in)
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.64 mm (0.0252 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.72 mm (0.0283 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
31438 80X00
31438 80X01
31438 80X02
31438 80X03
31438 80X04
31438 80X05
31438 80X06
31438 80X07
31438 80X08
31438 80X09
31438 80X10
31438 80X11
Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the
dimension “L1 ” between the transaxle case end face and
mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown.
SCIA1078E
Revision: March 2005
MT-100
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
2.
3.
Install the outer race onto the differential side bearing on the final gear side. Holding the outer race horizontally by hand, rotate the final gear five times or more (for smooth movement of the bearing roller).
Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the
dimension “L2 ” between the differential side bearing outer race
and clutch housing end face as shown.
A
B
MT
D
SCIA1079E
4.
Install the selected adjusting shim and then the differential side
bearing outer race using Tool as shown.
Tool number
E
: ST30720000 (J-25405)
F
G
WCIA0278E
H
MAINSHAFT END PLAY
●
●
When adjusting the mainshaft end play, select the adjusting
shim for the mainshaft rear bearing. To select the adjusting
shim, measure clearance “M” between the transaxle case and
mainshaft rear bearing.
Calculate the dimension “P” (thickness of adjusting shim) using
the following procedure to meet specification of end play for
mainshaft rear bearing.
End play
: 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Dimension “P” = “M” – End play
“P”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
“M”
: Distance between mainshaft rear bearing
and transaxle case
I
J
K
SCIA0904E
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
Revision: March 2005
L
M
MT-101
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
Adjusting Shim
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shim thickness
Part number
0.44 mm (0.0173 in)
0.48 mm (0.0189 in)
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.64 mm (0.0252 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.72 mm (0.0283 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
0.96 mm (0.0378 in)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in)
1.04 mm (0.0409 in)
1.08 mm (0.0425 in)
32238 8H510
32238 8H511
32238 8H512
32238 8H513
32238 8H514
32238 8H515
32238 8H516
32238 8H517
32238 8H518
32238 8H519
32238 8H520
32238 8H521
32238 8H522
32238 8H523
32238 8H524
32238 8H560
32238 8H561
Install the mainshaft assembly to the clutch housing.
Install the snap ring to the transaxle case.
Install the transaxle case to clutch housing, and temporarily assemble them with bolts. Temporarily install
the snap ring to the mainshaft rear bearing.
Install the dial gauge to the snap ring access hole, and expand
the snap ring as shown. Lift the mainshaft assembly through the
control assembly installation hole, and push it against the transaxle case. This state shall be defined as base. Moving the distance of the mainshaft assembly, with the snap ring installed on
the main bearing, becomes “M”.
SCIA1017E
REVERSE IDLER GEAR END PLAY
●
●
When adjusting the reverse idler gear end play, select the
adjusting shim for the reverse idler gear. To select the correct
thickness of adjusting shim, measure the clearance between the
transaxle case and reverse idler gear.
Calculate the dimension “Q” (thickness of adjusting shim) using
the following steps to adjust the end play of the reverse idler
gear to specification.
End play
: 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in)
Dimension “Q” = (“Q1 ” - “Q2 ”) – End play
“Q”
: Thickness of adjusting shim
“Q1 ” : Distance between transaxle case end face
and mounting face of adjusting shim
“Q2 ” : Distance between clutch housing case end
face and end face of reverse idler gear
SCIA1007E
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
Revision: March 2005
MT-102
2005 Altima
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[RS6F51A]
Adjusting Shim
Shim thickness
mm (in)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.84 (0.0724)
1.88 (0.0740)
1.92 (0.0756)
1.96 (0.0772)
2.00 (0.0787)
2.04 (0.0803)
2.08 (0.0819)
2.12 (0.0835)
2.16 (0.0850)
2.20 (0.0866)
1.
Part number
Shim thickness
32237 8H800
32237 8H801
32237 8H802
32237 8H803
32237 8H804
32237 8H805
32237 8H806
32237 8H807
32237 8H808
32237 8H809
32237 8H810
32237 8H811
mm (in)
2.24 (0.0882)
2.28 (0.0898)
2.32 (0.0913)
2.36 (0.0929)
2.40 (0.0945)
2.44 (0.0961)
2.48 (0.0976)
2.52 (0.0992)
2.56 (0.1008)
2.60 (0.1024)
2.64 (0.1039)
A
Part number
32237 8H812
32237 8H813
32237 8H814
32237 8H815
32237 8H816
32237 8H817
32237 8H818
32237 8H819
32237 8H820
32237 8H821
32237 8H822
B
MT
D
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
E
Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the
dimension “Q1 ” between the transaxle case end face and the
mounting face of the adjusting shim as shown.
F
G
H
SCIA1003E
2.
I
Using a depth micrometer and straight edge, measure the
dimension “Q2 ” between the clutch housing case end face and
the end face of reverse idler gear as shown.
J
K
SCIA1005E
3.
L
Install the selected reverse idler gear adjusting shim onto the reverse idler gear.
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-103
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:32200
ECS00BT6
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Before disassembling, measure the end play for the 3rd, 4th,
5th, and 6th input gears.
End play standard values
3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in)
4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
6th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
CAUTION:
If the measurement is outside the standard value, disassemble to check the contact surfaces of the gear, shaft, and
hub. Adjust using the correct size snap ring for assembly.
2.
3.
Remove the oil channel.
Remove the input shaft rear bearing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
4.
SCIA0966E
A: Commercial service tool
B: ST33052000 ( — )
Remove the snap ring.
WCIA0306E
5.
Remove the 6th input gear, 6th bushing, and 6th needle bearing
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
6.
A: Commercial service tool
B: ST33052000 ( — )
Remove the 6th baulk ring, 5th-6th coupling sleeve, and shifting
insert.
WCIA0307E
7.
Remove the 5th input gear and synchronizer hub assembly
simultaneously using Tool as shown.
Tool number
8.
A: KV40105020 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
Remove the 5th needle bearing.
WCIA0281E
Revision: March 2005
MT-104
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
9.
Remove the 5th bushing, thrust washer, 4th input gear, 4th needle bearing, 4th bushing, 4th baulk ring, 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub assembly, 3rd baulk ring, and 3rd input gear simultaneously
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
A
B
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
10. Remove the 3rd needle bearing.
MT
WCIA0282E
D
11. Remove the input shaft front bearing using Tool as shown.
E
F
G
SCIA0920E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Input Shaft and Gear
H
Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, or bending of the input
shaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage, or peeling of the input gears.
I
J
K
SMT636A
Synchronizer
L
Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and excessive wear of the contact surfaces of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert.
●
Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as
shown.
M
SMT387A
Revision: March 2005
MT-105
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
●
If any cracks, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam
face of baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown, replace
it.
SMT867D
Baulk Ring Clearance for Single Cone Synchronizer (4th, 5th and 6th)
●
Press the baulk ring against cone, and measure clearance
between baulk ring and cone. If measurement is below limit,
replace it with a new one.
Clearance - standard
4th
: 0.9 - 1.45 mm (0.035 - 0.0571 in)
5th and 6th : 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in)
Limit
: 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
SMT140
Baulk Ring Clearance for Double-cone Synchronizer (3rd)
●
Follow the instructions below and inspect the clearance of the
outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring.
CAUTION:
Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
act as a set to control the clearances “A” and “B”. If the
measurement exceeds the service limit value, replace all of
them as a set.
SMT138E
1.
Using a dial gauge and Tool, measure clearance “A” at two or
more points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value.
Tool number
Clearance “A”
Standard
Limit value
: ST30031000 (J-22912-01)
: 0.6 - 0.8 mm (0.024 - 0.031 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
WCIA0283E
Revision: March 2005
MT-106
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
2.
Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance “B” at two or more
points diagonally opposite, and calculate mean value as shown.
Clearance “B”
Standard
Limit value
A
: 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in)
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
B
MT
SCIA1084E
D
Bearing
Check the item listed. If necessary, replace it with a new one.
●
Damage and rough rotation of the bearing as shown.
E
F
G
MTF0041D
ASSEMBLY
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Install the 3rd needle bearing.
Install the 3rd input gear and 3rd baulk ring.
Install the spread spring, shifting insert, and a new 3rd-4th synchronizer hub onto the 3rd-4th coupling
sleeve.
CAUTION:
● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub
as shown.
● Do not reuse the 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
J
K
L
SCIA0921E
●
Install with the orientation of the coupling sleeve as
shown.
SCIA0993E
Revision: March 2005
MT-107
2005 Altima
M
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
●
Do not hook the ends of the two spread springs (front
and back have two each) on the same shifting insert.
SCIA1083E
4.
Install the 3rd-4th synchronizer assembly using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: KV40105710 ( — )
CAUTION:
Align grooves of the shifting insert and 3rd baulk ring.
WCIA0284E
5.
Install the 4th bushing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
6.
7.
: KV40105710 ( — )
Install the 4th baulk ring.
Install the 4th input gear and 4th needle bearing.
WCIA0285E
8.
Measure the dimension "C2 " as shown. Select a suitable thrust
washer so that dimension "C2 " satisfies the standard dimension
specification. Then install the thrust washer onto the input shaft.
Standard for dimension "C2"
: 154.7 - 154.8 mm
(6.091 - 6.094 in)
CAUTION:
Only 1 thrust washer can be selected.
SCIA0925E
Revision: March 2005
MT-108
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
Thrust Washer
9.
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
3.84 mm (0.1512 in)
3.90 mm (0.1535 in)
3.96 mm (0.1559 in)
32347 8H500
32347 8H501
32347 8H502
4.02 mm (0.1583 in)
4.08 mm (0.1606 in)
4.14 mm (0.1630 in)
32347 8H503
32347 8H504
32347 8H505
A
B
Install the 5th bushing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
MT
: KV40105710 ( — )
10. Install the 5th needle bearing and 5th input gear.
11. Install the 5th baulk ring.
D
E
WCIA0286E
F
12. Install the synchronizer assembly onto a new 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
CAUTION:
● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub
as shown.
● Do not reuse the 5th-6th synchronizer hub.
G
H
I
SCIA0921E
●
Do not to hook the ends of the 2 spread springs (front
and back have two each) on the same shifting insert.
J
K
L
SCIA1083E
M
13. Install the 5th-6th synchronizer hub assembly using Tool as
shown.
Tool number
: KV40105710 ( — )
CAUTION:
Align the grooves of the 5th-6th shifting insert and the 5th6th baulk ring.
WCIA0287E
Revision: March 2005
MT-109
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
14. Install the needle bearing, 6th input gear and then 6th bushing
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: ST33200000 (J-26082)
WCIA0309E
15. Install the snap ring onto the input shaft, and measure to check
that end play (gap between snap ring and groove) of the 6th
bushing is within specification.
End play standard value
●
: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
If the measurement is outside the standard value, select the
appropriate size snap ring.
SCIA0970E
Snap Rings
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
1.76 mm (0.0693 in)
1.81 mm (0.0713 in)
1.86 mm (0.0732 in)
1.91 mm (0.0752 in)
1.96 mm (0.0772 in)
32204 8H511
32204 8H512
32204 8H513
32204 8H514
32204 8H515
2.01 mm (0.0791 in)
2.06 mm (0.0811 in)
2.11 mm (0.0831 in)
2.16 mm (0.0850 in)
2.21 mm (0.0871 in)
32204 8H516
32204 8H517
32204 8H518
32204 8H519
32204 8H520
16. Install the input shaft rear bearing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Install input shaft rear bearing with its brown surface facing
the input gear side.
WCIA0310E
17. Install the input shaft front bearing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: ST30032000 (J-26010-01)
18. Install the oil channel onto the input shaft.
WCIA0311E
Revision: March 2005
MT-110
2005 Altima
INPUT SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
19. Check the end play of the 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th input gears as
shown.
A
End play standard values
3rd gear : 0.18 - 0.31 mm (0.0071 - 0.0122 in)
4th gear : 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
5th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
6th gear : 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
B
MT
SCIA0966E
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-111
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:32241
ECS00BT7
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Before disassembling, measure the end play of the 1st and 2nd
main gears as shown.
End play standard values
1st gear
: 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
2nd gear
: 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
CAUTION:
If the measurement is outside the standard value, disassemble to check the contact surfaces of the gear, shaft, and
hub. Adjust with the snap ring at assembly.
SCIA0973E
2.
3.
Remove the snap ring.
Remove the C-ring holder, and then mainshaft C-ring as shown.
SCIA0974E
4.
Remove the mainshaft rear bearing, adjust shim, and 6th main
gear using Tool as shown.
Tool number
5.
A: Commercial service tool
B: ST33052000 ( — )
Remove the 5th-6th mainshaft spacer.
WCIA0312E
6.
Remove the 4th main gear and 5th main gear simultaneously
using Tool as shown.
Tool number
7.
8.
A: ST33052000 ( — )
B: Commercial service tool
Remove the adjusting shim.
Remove the 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
WCIA0292E
Revision: March 2005
MT-112
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
9.
Remove the 3rd main gear, 2nd main gear, 2nd gear needle
bearing, 2nd bushing, 1st-2nd synchronizer assembly, 1st main
gear, reverse main gear, 1st gear needle bearing, and 1st bushing simultaneously using Tool as shown.
Tool number
: KV40105020 (
—
A
B
)
MT
WCIA0293E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Mainshaft and Gears
D
Check the items listed as shown. If necessary, replace them with
new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear, and bending of the mainshaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage and peeling of the mainshaft gears.
E
F
G
SMT640A
H
Synchronizer
Check the items listed as shown. If necessary, replace them with
new ones.
●
Damage, excessive wear on contact surfaces of the coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and shifting insert.
●
Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as
shown.
I
J
K
SMT387A
L
●
If any cracks, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam
face of baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown, replace
it.
M
SMT867D
Revision: March 2005
MT-113
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
Triple Cone Synchronizer (1st and 2nd)
●
1.
Check the clearance of the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone,
and inner baulk ring of the 1st and 2nd triple cone synchronizers, using the following procedure.
CAUTION:
The outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk
ring operate as a set to control the clearances “A”, “B”, and
“C”. If the measured clearances exceed the service limit
value, replace the components as a set.
NOTE:
To calculate the mean value of two or more measured values,
add the highest and lowest measured values and divide by two.
WCIA0195E
Press the baulk ring on to the clutch gear taper cone by hand,
then measure the clearance “A” at two or more points diagonally
opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value.
Clearance “A”
Standard
: 0.6 - 1.2 mm (0.024 - 0.047 in)
Limit
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
LCIA0298E
2.
Measure clearances “B” at two or more points diagonally opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value.
Clearance “B”
Standard
: 0.6 - 1.1 mm (0.024 - 0.043 in)
Limit
: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
SCIA1084E
3.
Press the baulk ring on to the clutch gear taper cone by hand,
then measure the clearance “C” at two or more points diagonally
opposite with a feeler gauge, and then calculate the mean value.
Clearance “C”
Standard
: 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
Limit
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
LCIA0300E
Revision: March 2005
MT-114
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
Bearing
A
Check the item listed. If necessary, replace it with a new one.
●
Damage and rough rotation of the bearing as shown.
B
MT
MTF0041D
D
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install the reverse main gear using Tools as shown.
Tool number
E
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV40101630 (J-35870)
C: ST38220000 ( — )
F
G
WCIA0294E
CAUTION:
Install with the orientation of reverse main gear as shown.
H
I
J
K
SCIA0992E
2.
Install the 1st bushing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
3.
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV38102510 (J-35870)
C: ST38220000 ( — )
M
Install the needle bearing, and then the 1st main gear.
WCIA0295E
4.
L
Install the spread spring, shifting insert, and a new 1st-2nd synchronizer hub onto the 1st-2nd coupling
sleeve.
Revision: March 2005
MT-115
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
CAUTION:
● Install with the orientation of the new synchronizer hub
as shown.
● Do not reuse 1st-2nd synchronizer hub
SCIA0921E
●
Install with the orientation of coupling sleeve as shown.
SCIA0989E
●
Do not hook the ends of the two spread springs (front
and back have two each) on the same shifting insert.
SCIA1083E
5.
Install the 1st gear synchronizer assembly onto the mainshaft,
and the synchronizer hub assembly onto the mainshaft using
Tool as shown.
Tool number
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV38102510 (J-35870)
C: ST38220000 ( — )
CAUTION:
Outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk ring
on the 2nd gear-side must have been removed.
● Install the coupling sleeve with the proper orientation.
●
Revision: March 2005
MT-116
WCIA0296E
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
6.
Install the 2nd bushing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
7.
8.
A
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV40105710 ( — )
Install the outer baulk ring, synchronizer cone, and inner baulk
ring on 2nd gear-side.
Install the 2nd needle bearing and 2nd gear.
B
MT
WCIA0297E
D
9.
Install the 3rd main gear.
Tool number
A: ST35321000 ( — )
B: KV40105710 ( — )
E
CAUTION:
Install the 3rd main gear with the orientation as shown.
10. Install the 3rd-4th mainshaft spacer.
F
G
WCIA0298E
11. Measure the dimension "C1" . Select a suitable adjusting shim
so that the dimension "C1 " satisfies the standard dimension
specification, and install it onto the mainshaft.
Standard for
dimension "C1"
H
: 173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848 in)
I
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
J
K
L
M
SCIA0944E
Adjusting Shim
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
0.68 mm (0.0268 in)
0.76 mm (0.0299 in)
32238 8H500
32238 8H501
32238 8H502
32238 8H503
0.84 mm (0.0331 in)
0.92 mm (0.0362 in)
1.00 mm (0.0394 in)
1.08 mm (0.0425 in)
32238 8H504
32238 8H505
32238 8H506
32238 8H507
Revision: March 2005
MT-117
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
12. Install the 4th main gear with the specified orientation, using
Tool as shown.
Tool number
A: ST33200000 (J-26082)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Install the 4th main gear with the orientation as shown.
WCIA0299E
13. Install the 5th main gear with the specified orientation, using
Tool as shown.
Tool number
A: ST33200000 (J-26082)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
CAUTION:
Install the 5th main gear with the orientation as shown.
14. Install the 5th-6th mainshaft spacer.
WCIA0300E
15. Install the 6th main gear using Tool as shown.
Tool number
A: ST33200000 (J-26082)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
WCIA0313E
16. Select the 6th main adjusting shim and then install it onto the mainshaft.
● Calculate thickness “S” of 6th main adjusting shim by procedure below so that end play dimension between 6th main
gear and mainshaft rear bearing becomes the dimension
specified.
End play
: 0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Dimension "S" = ("S1 " - "S2 ") - End play
"S"
: Thickness of adjusting shim
"S1" : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to
mainshaft rear bearing press-fit end face
"S2" : Dimension from mainshaft standard face to
6th main gear end face
CAUTION:
Only 1 adjusting shim can be selected.
SCIA0995E
Revision: March 2005
MT-118
2005 Altima
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
Adjusting Shim
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
0.88 mm (0.0346 in)
0.96 mm (0.0378 in)
1.04 mm (0.0409 in)
1.12 mm (0.0441 in)
32237 8H560
32237 8H561
32237 8H562
32237 8H563
1.20 mm (0.0472 in)
1.28 mm (0.0504 in)
1.36 mm (0.0535 in)
32237 8H564
32237 8H565
32237 8H566
a. Using a height gauge, measure the dimension “S1 ” and “S2 ” as shown.
b. Install the selected 6th main adjusting shim to the mainshaft.
17. Install the mainshaft rear bearing using Tool as shown.
Tool number
A
B
MT
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01)
D
E
F
WCIA0314E
18. Install the C-ring onto the mainshaft, and check that the end play
of mainshaft rear bearing meets specifications.
End play standard value
●
G
: 0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
H
If the measurement is outside the specified standard value,
reselect a new C-ring.
I
SCIA0979E
J
C-Ring
Thickness
Part number
Thickness
Part number
2.535 mm (0.0998 in)
2.565 mm (0.1010 in)
2.595 mm (0.1022 in)
2.625 mm (0.1033 in)
2.655 mm (0.1045 in)
2.685 mm (0.1057 in)
2.715 mm (0.1069 in)
2.745 mm (0.1081 in)
2.775 mm (0.1093 in)
2.805 mm (0.1104 in)
32348 8H800
32348 8H801
32348 8H802
32348 8H803
32348 8H804
32348 8H805
32348 8H806
32348 8H807
32348 8H808
32348 8H809
2.835 mm (0.1116 in)
2.865 mm (0.1128 in)
2.895 mm (0.1140 in)
2.925 mm (0.1152 in)
2.955 mm (0.1163 in)
2.985 mm (0.1175 in)
3.015 mm (0.1187 in)
3.045 mm (0.1199 in)
3.075 mm (0.1211 in)
32348 8H810
32348 8H811
32348 8H812
32348 8H813
32348 8H814
32348 8H815
32348 8H816
32348 8H817
32348 8H818
19. Fit the C-ring holder, and install the snap ring as shown.
SCIA0974E
Revision: March 2005
MT-119
2005 Altima
K
L
M
MAINSHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
20. Check the end play of the 1st and 2nd main gears as shown.
End play standard values
1st gear
: 0.20 - 0.30 mm (0.0079 - 0.0118 in)
2nd gear
: 0.06 - 0.16 mm (0.0024 - 0.0063 in)
SCIA0973E
Revision: March 2005
MT-120
2005 Altima
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:32281
A
ECS00BT8
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the reverse idler gear adjusting shim.
Remove the reverse idler gear (rear), reverse coupling sleeve and insert spring simultaneously.
Remove the reverse idler gear needle bearing.
Remove the thrust needle bearing.
Remove the reverse baulk ring.
Remove the reverse idler gear (front).
Remove the reverse idler gear needle bearing.
Remove the thrust needle bearing.
Pull off the locking pin from the reverse idler shaft.
B
MT
D
E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Reverse Idler Shaft and Gears
Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear and bending of the reverse
idler shaft.
●
Excessive wear, damage and peeling, of the reverse idler gears.
F
G
H
SCIA0953E
I
Synchronizer
Check the items listed. If necessary, replace them with new ones.
●
Damage and excessive wear on contact surfaces of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and insert spring.
●
Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub must move smoothly as
shown.
J
K
L
SMT637A
●
If any crack, damage, or excessive wear is found on the cam
face of the baulk ring or working face of the insert as shown,
replace it.
SMT867D
Revision: March 2005
MT-121
2005 Altima
M
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT AND GEARS
[RS6F51A]
Baulk ring clearance
●
Press the baulk ring against the cone, and measure the clearance between the baulk ring and cone as shown. If the measurement is below the specified limit, replace it with a new one.
Baulk ring to gear clearance
Standard
: 0.95 - 1.4 mm (0.0374 - 0.055 in)
Limit value : 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
SMT140
Bearing
Check the item listed. If necessary, replace it with a new one.
●
Damage and rough rotation of the bearing.
MTF0041D
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
●
Install the insert spring with the orientation as shown.
SCIA0954E
Revision: March 2005
MT-122
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS6F51A]
FINAL DRIVE
Disassembly and Assembly
PFP:38411
A
ECS00BT9
PRE-INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Clean final drive assembly sufficiently to prevent side gear thrust washer, differential case, side gear, and
B
other parts from sticking by gear oil.
Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward.
Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gears using
MT
Tool as shown.
Tool number
:
—
(J-39713)
D
E
WCIA0261E
4.
F
Move side gears up and down, and measure the clearance as
shown.
Clearance between side gear and
differential case
G
: 0.1 - 0.2 mm
(0.004 - 0.008 in)
CAUTION:
There must be no resistance and the gears must rotate
freely.
H
I
SMT611A
5.
6.
If the clearance measured is not within specification, adjust the clearance by changing the thrust washer
thickness.
Turn the differential case upside down, and measure the clearance between the side gear and differential
case on the other side to the same specifications, adjust using a thrust washer as necessary.
J
K
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove the mounting bolts and then separate the final gear from the differential case.
Remove speedometer drive gear.
Remove the differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using
tool and puller as shown.
Tool number
L
M
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
WCIA0302E
Revision: March 2005
MT-123
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS6F51A]
4.
Remove the differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using
tool and puller as shown.
Tool number
: ST33061000 (J-8107-2)
WCIA0303E
5.
Using a pin punch, pull out lock pin and pinion mate shaft as
shown.
SCIA0908E
6.
Rotate pinion mate gears, and remove pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers, side gears, and
side gear thrust washers from differential case.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case
Check side gears, side gear thrust washers, pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gears, pinion mate thrust washers and differential case as
shown. If necessary, replace with new parts.
MTK0135D
Bearing
Check for bearing damage and rough rotation as shown. If necessary, replace with new parts.
CAUTION:
When replacing the tapered roller bearing, replace the outer and
inner races as a set.
SPD715
ASSEMBLY
1.
Apply gear oil to sliding area of differential case, each gear, and thrust washer.
Revision: March 2005
MT-124
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS6F51A]
2.
Install side gear thrust washers and side gears into differential
case as shown.
A
B
MT
SMT839
D
3.
While rotating pinion mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears, and aligning them diagonally, install
them into differential case.
4.
Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case as shown.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to damage pinion mate thrust washers.
E
F
G
H
MTK0132D
5.
a.
b.
Measure end play of side gears, using the procedure below.
Then select side gear thrust washer.
Upright the differential case so that the side gear to be measured faces upward.
Place final drive adapter and dial indicator onto side gears using
tool as shown.
Tool number
:
—
I
J
(J-39713)
K
WCIA0261E
L
c.
Move side gears up and down to measure end play, and select
thrust washer so that it meets specification.
End play standard value
: 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
M
CAUTION:
● There must be no resistance and the gears must rotate
freely.
● Place differential case upside down. Measure the end
play for opposite side-gears using the same procedure.
● Only one thrust washer can be selected.
SMT611A
Thrust washers
Thickness
Part number
0.75 mm (0.0295 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
0.85 mm (0.0335 in)
0.90 mm (0.0354 in)
0.95 mm (0.0374 in)
38424 81X00
38424 81X01
38424 81X02
38424 81X03
38424 81X04
Revision: March 2005
MT-125
2005 Altima
FINAL DRIVE
[RS6F51A]
6.
Drive a new lock pin into the pinion mate shaft using a pin punch
as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the lock pin.
SCIA0908E
7.
Install differential side bearing (transaxle case side) using Tool
as shown.
Tool number
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: KV38102510 (J-35870)
WCIA0304E
8.
Align and install the speedometer drive gear onto the differential
case as shown.
SMT842D
9.
Install differential side bearing (clutch housing side) using Tool
as shown.
Tool number
A: ST30720000 (J-25405)
B: KV38102510 (J-35870)
WCIA0305E
10. Install the final gear into the differential case, and tighten the
final gear bolts to specification.
Final gear bolts
: 122.5 - 137.5 N·m (13 - 14 kg-m,
91 - 101 ft-lb)
SCIA0912E
Revision: March 2005
MT-126
2005 Altima
SHIFT CONTROL
[RS6F51A]
SHIFT CONTROL
Inspection
●
PFP:32982
A
ECS0095A
Check the contact surfaces and sliding area for wear, damage,
or bending as shown. If necessary, replace the parts.
B
MT
D
E
F
G
H
SCIA0913E
SHIFT FORK
●
Check if the width of the shift fork hook (sliding area with coupling sleeve) is within specification, as shown.
I
J
K
SMT801D
L
Shift Fork
Item
One-side wear specification
Sliding width of new part
1st & 2nd
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
7.80 - 7.93 mm
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
3rd & 4th
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
7.80 - 7.93 mm
(0.3071 - 0.3122 in)
5th & 6th
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
6.10 - 6.23 mm
(0.2402 - 0.2453 in)
Reverse
0.2 mm (0.008 in)
12.80 - 12.93 mm
(0.5039 - 0.5091 in)
Revision: March 2005
MT-127
2005 Altima
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS6F51A]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00030
ECS0095B
TRANSAXLE
Engine
VQ35DE
Transaxle model
RS6F51A
Model code number
7Y466
Number of speeds
6
Synchromesh type
Warner
Shift pattern
SCIA0955E
Gear ratio
Number of teeth
1st
3.153
2nd
1.944
3rd
1.392
4th
1.055
5th
0.809
6th
0.630
Reverse
3.002
Input gear
Main gear
Reverse idler gear
1st
13
2nd
18
3rd
28
4th
36
5th
42
6th
46
Reverse
13
1st
41
2nd
35
3rd
39
4th
38
5th
34
6th
29
Reverse
38
Front
37
Rear
38
Oil capacity (Reference)
2.2
(2 3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt)
Oil Level
49 - 55 mm (1.93 - 2.17 in)
Oil type
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85
Remarks
Reverse synchronizer
Installed
Double cone synchronizer
3rd
Triple cone synchronizer
Revision: March 2005
1st and 2nd
MT-128
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS6F51A]
FINAL GEAR
A
Engine
VQ35DE
Transaxle model
RS6F51A
Model code number
7Y466
Final gear ratio
4.133
Number of teeth
Final gear/Pinion
B
62/15
Side gear/Pinion mate gear
MT
—
Gear End Play
ECS0095C
Unit: mm (in)
Gear
D
End play
1st main gear
0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
2nd main gear
0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
3rd input gear
0.18 - 0.31 (0.0071 - 0.0122)
4th input gear
0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118)
5th input gear
0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
6th input gear
0.06 - 0.16 (0.0024 - 0.0063)
E
F
G
Clearance Between Baulk Ring and Gear
ECS0095D
4TH, 5TH, 6TH & REVERSE BAULK RING
Unit: mm (in)
Baulk ring
Standard
Wear limit
4th
0.9 - 1.45 (0.035 - 0.0571)
0.7 (0.028)
5th
0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055)
0.7 (0.028)
6th
0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055)
0.7 (0.028)
Reverse
0.95 - 1.4 (0.0374 - 0.055)
0.7 (0.028)
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MT-129
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS6F51A]
1ST, 2ND AND 3RD BAULK RING
Unit: mm (in)
1st, 2nd and 3rd Double Baulk Ring
SMT138E
1st and 2nd Triple Baulk Ring
WCIA0195E
Dimension
Standard
Wear limit
Double baulk ring
Triple baulk ring
Double baulk ring
Triple baulk ring
A
0.6 - 0.8 (0.024 - 0.031)
0.6 - 1.2 (0.024 - 0.047)
0.2 (0.008)
0.3 (0.012)
B
0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043)
0.6 - 1.1 (0.024 - 0.043)
0.2 (0.008)
0.2 (0.008)
C
—
0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
—
0.3 (0.012)
Available Snap Rings
ECS0095E
6TH BUSHING
End play
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.81 (0.0713)
1.86 (0.0732)
1.91 (0.0752)
1.96 (0.0772)
Part number*
Thickness
32204 8H511
32204 8H512
32204 8H513
32204 8H514
32204 8H515
mm (in)
2.01 (0.0791)
2.06 (0.0811)
2.11 (0.0831)
2.16 (0.0850)
2.21 (0.0871)
Part number*
32204 8H516
32204 8H517
32204 8H518
32204 8H519
32204 8H520
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Available C-rings
ECS0095F
MAINSHAFT C-RING
End play
Thickness
0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
mm (in)
2.535 (0.0998)
2.565 (0.1010)
2.595 (0.1022)
2.625 (0.1033)
2.655 (0.1045)
2.685 (0.1057)
2.715 (0.1069)
2.745 (0.1081)
2.775 (0.1093)
2.805 (0.1104)
Part number*
Thickness
32348 8H800
32348 8H801
32348 8H802
32348 8H803
32348 8H804
32348 8H805
32348 8H806
32348 8H807
32348 8H808
32348 8H809
mm (in)
2.835 (0.1116)
2.865 (0.1128)
2.895 (0.1140)
2.925 (0.1152)
2.955 (0.1163)
2.985 (0.1175)
3.015 (0.1187)
3.045 (0.1199)
3.075 (0.1211)
Part number*
32348 8H810
32348 8H811
32348 8H812
32348 8H813
32348 8H814
32348 8H815
32348 8H816
32348 8H817
32348 8H818
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
MT-130
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS6F51A]
Available Thrust Washers
ECS0095G
A
INPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER
B
MT
D
SCIA1008E
Standard length “C2”
Thickness
154.7 - 154.8 mm (6.091 - 6.094in)
mm (in)
Part number*
3.84 (0.1512)
3.90 (0.1535)
3.96 (0.1559)
Thickness
32347 8H500
32347 8H501
32347 8H502
mm (in)
E
Part number*
4.02 (0.1583)
4.08 (0.1606)
4.14 (0.1630)
32347 8H503
32347 8H504
32347 8H505
F
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
G
Available Adjusting Shims
ECS0095H
MAINSHAFT ADJUSTING SHIM
H
I
J
K
SCIA1009E
Standard length “C1”
Thickness
173.85 - 173.95 mm (6.844 - 6.848in)
mm (in)
Part number*
0.52 (0.0205)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.76 (0.0299)
Thickness
32238 8H500
32238 8H501
32238 8H502
32238 8H503
mm (in)
Part number*
0.84 (0.0331)
0.92 (0.0362)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.08 (0.0425)
32238 8H504
32238 8H505
32238 8H506
32238 8H507
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
INPUT SHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM
End play
0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Thickness mm (in)
Part number*
0.40 (0.0157)
0.44 (0.0173)
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
32225 8H500
32225 8H501
32225 8H502
32225 8H503
32225 8H504
32225 8H505
32225 8H506
32225 8H507
32225 8H508
32225 8H509
32225 8H510
32225 8H511
Revision: March 2005
Thickness
mm (in)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.96 (0.0378)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.08 (0.0425)
1.12 (0.0441)
1.16 (0.0457)
1.20 (0.0472)
1.24 (0.0488)
1.28 (0.0504)
1.32 (0.0520)
Part number*
32225 8H512
32225 8H513
32225 8H514
32225 8H515
32225 8H516
32225 8H517
32225 8H518
32225 8H519
32225 8H520
32225 8H521
32225 8H522
32225 8H523
MT-131
Thickness
mm (in)
1.36 (0.0535)
1.40 (0.0551)
1.44 (0.0567)
1.48 (0.0583)
1.52 (0.0598)
1.56 (0.0614)
1.60 (0.0630)
1.64 (0.0646)
Part number*
32225 8H524
32225 8H560
32225 8H561
32225 8H562
32225 8H563
32225 8H564
32225 8H565
32225 8H566
2005 Altima
L
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RS6F51A]
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
MAINSHAFT REAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM
End play
0 - 0.06 mm (0 - 0.0024 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
0.44 (0.0173)
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
Part number*
Thickness
32238 8H510
32238 8H511
32238 8H512
32238 8H513
32238 8H514
32238 8H515
32238 8H516
32238 8H517
32238 8H518
mm (in)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.96 (0.0378)
1.00 (0.0394)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.08 (0.0425)
Part number*
32238 8H519
32238 8H520
32238 8H521
32238 8H522
32238 8H523
32238 8H524
32238 8H560
32238 8H561
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
REVERSE IDLER GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM
End play
0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.0016 - 0.0039 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.84 (0.0724)
1.88 (0.0740)
1.92 (0.0756)
1.96 (0.0772)
2.00 (0.0787)
2.04 (0.0803)
2.08 (0.0819)
2.12 (0.0835)
2.16 (0.0850)
2.20 (0.0866)
Part number*
Thickness
32237 8H800
32237 8H801
32237 8H802
32237 8H803
32237 8H804
32237 8H805
32237 8H806
32237 8H807
32237 8H808
32237 8H809
32237 8H810
32237 8H811
mm (in)
2.24 (0.0882)
2.28 (0.0898)
2.32 (0.0913)
2.36 (0.0929)
2.40 (0.0945)
2.44 (0.0961)
2.48 (0.0976)
2.52 (0.0992)
2.56 (0.1008)
2.60 (0.1024)
2.64 (0.1039)
Part number*
32237 8H812
32237 8H813
32237 8H814
32237 8H815
32237 8H816
32237 8H817
32237 8H818
32237 8H819
32237 8H820
32237 8H821
32237 8H822
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
6TH MAIN GEAR ADJUSTING SHIM
End play
0 - 0.1 mm (0 - 0.004 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.96 (0.0378)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.12 (0.0441)
Part number*
Thickness
32237 8H560
32237 8H561
32237 8H562
32237 8H563
mm (in)
1.20 (0.0472)
1.28 (0.0504)
1.36 (0.0535)
Part number*
32237 8H564
32237 8H565
32237 8H566
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Available Shims
ECS0095I
— Differential Side Bearing Preload and Adjusting Shim —
BEARING PRELOAD
Differential side bearing preload: L*
0.15 - 0.21 mm (0.0059 - 0.0083 in)
*: Install shims which are “deflection of differential case” + “L” in thickness.
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM(S)
End play
0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
Thickness
mm (in)
0.48 (0.0189)
0.52 (0.0205)
0.56 (0.0220)
0.60 (0.0236)
0.64 (0.0252)
0.68 (0.0268)
Part number*
Thickness
31438 80X00
31438 80X01
31438 80X02
31438 80X03
31438 80X04
31438 80X05
mm (in)
0.72 (0.0283)
0.76 (0.0299)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.84 (0.0331)
0.88 (0.0346)
0.92 (0.0362)
Part number*
31438 80X06
31438 80X07
31438 80X08
31438 80X09
31438 80X10
31438 80X11
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Revision: March 2005
MT-132
2005 Altima
J AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
MTC
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4
Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 4
General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 5
A/C Identification Label ............................................ 6
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 6
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT
CONNECTION ...................................................... 6
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7
Precautions for Servicing Compressor ................... 10
Precautions for Service Equipment ........................ 10
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT ............ 10
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ...................... 10
VACUUM PUMP ..................................................11
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .....................................11
SERVICE HOSES ................................................11
SERVICE COUPLERS ........................................ 12
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE ...................... 12
CHARGING CYLINDER ...................................... 12
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 12
PREPARATION ......................................................... 13
Special Service Tools ............................................. 13
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 13
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 16
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 17
Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 17
REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 17
Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 17
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............. 17
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE .............................. 17
Component Layout ................................................. 18
LUBRICANT ............................................................. 19
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 19
LUBRICANT ........................................................ 19
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 19
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 21
Revision: March 2005
Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System ...... 21
System Construction .............................................. 21
OPERATION ....................................................... 21
TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION
ORDER ............................................................... 22
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL ................................. 22
FAN SPEED CONTROL ..................................... 23
INTAKE DOOR CONTROL ................................. 23
MODE DOOR CONTROL ................................... 23
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 23
Overview of Control system .................................... 23
Control Operation ................................................... 24
AIR CONDITIONER (A/C) SWITCH .................... 25
TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ............................................... 25
FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH ..................................... 25
RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH ..................... 25
DEFROSTER SWITCH ....................................... 25
MODE DIAL ......................................................... 25
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 25
Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 26
System Description ................................................. 27
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 27
CAN Communication System Description .............. 27
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 28
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 28
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 28
SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 28
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 29
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 29
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 31
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 32
Wiring Diagram — HEATER — .............................. 33
Wiring Diagram — A/C,M — ................................... 35
Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value... 38
INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL .......... 38
FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ................................... 38
FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE ... 38
MTC-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Operational Check .................................................. 40
CONDITIONS: ..................................................... 40
PROCEDURE: ..................................................... 40
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control ........................................................................... 42
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 42
LAN System Circuit ................................................ 44
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 44
Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 47
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 47
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 48
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 48
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 48
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 49
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 49
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 50
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 50
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 50
Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 51
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 51
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 52
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 52
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 52
Blower Motor Circuit ............................................... 53
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 53
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 54
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 54
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 54
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 58
Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 59
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 59
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 60
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 60
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 62
Insufficient Cooling ................................................. 64
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 64
PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS .................... 65
PERFORMANCE CHART ................................... 67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL
PRESSURE ......................................................... 67
Insufficient Heating ................................................. 71
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 71
Noise ...................................................................... 72
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 72
Intake Sensor Circuit .............................................. 73
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 73
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 73
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 76
Removal and Installation ........................................ 76
FRONT AIR CONTROL ....................................... 76
INTAKE SENSOR ..................................................... 77
Removal and Installation ........................................ 77
REMOVAL ........................................................... 77
INSTALLATION .................................................... 77
BLOWER UNIT ......................................................... 78
Removal and Installation ........................................ 78
REMOVAL ........................................................... 78
INSTALLATION .................................................... 78
Revision: March 2005
BLOWER MOTOR .....................................................79
Removal and Installation .........................................79
REMOVAL ............................................................79
INSTALLATION ....................................................79
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................80
Removal and Installation .........................................80
FUNCTION ..........................................................80
REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................80
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................80
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .................81
Removal and Installation .........................................81
REMOVAL ............................................................81
INSTALLATION ....................................................81
HEATER CORE .........................................................82
Removal and Installation .........................................82
REMOVAL ............................................................82
INSTALLATION ....................................................82
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ............................................83
Removal and Installation .........................................83
REMOVAL ............................................................83
INSTALLATION ....................................................83
MODE DOOR MOTOR ..............................................84
Removal and Installation .........................................84
REMOVAL ............................................................84
INSTALLATION ....................................................84
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ...........................................85
Removal and Installation .........................................85
REMOVAL ............................................................85
INSTALLATION ....................................................85
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER .....................................86
Removal and Installation .........................................86
REMOVAL ............................................................86
INSTALLATION ....................................................86
DUCTS AND GRILLES .............................................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
REMOVAL ............................................................87
INSTALLATION ....................................................88
REFRIGERANT LINES .............................................89
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ..................89
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................89
Components ............................................................91
Removal and Installation for Compressor —
QR25DE Models .....................................................93
REMOVAL ............................................................93
INSTALLATION ....................................................93
Removal and Installation for Compressor —
VQ35DE Models .....................................................94
REMOVAL ............................................................94
INSTALLATION ....................................................94
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch ...94
REMOVAL ............................................................94
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................96
INSTALLATION ....................................................96
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................97
BREAK-IN OPERATION ......................................97
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible
Hose ........................................................................98
REMOVAL ............................................................98
MTC-2
2005 Altima
INSTALLATION ................................................... 98
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible
Hose ....................................................................... 98
REMOVAL ........................................................... 98
INSTALLATION ................................................... 98
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe ... 98
REMOVAL ........................................................... 98
INSTALLATION ................................................... 98
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor .................................................................... 99
REMOVAL ........................................................... 99
INSTALLATION ................................................... 99
Removal and Installation for Condenser ................ 99
REMOVAL ........................................................... 99
INSTALLATION ................................................. 100
Removal and Installation for Evaporator .............. 100
REMOVAL ......................................................... 100
INSTALLATION ................................................. 101
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve ...... 101
REMOVAL ......................................................... 101
INSTALLATION ................................................. 102
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 102
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Leak Detector ....................................................... 102
Dye Injection ......................................................... 102
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 103
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK
DETECTOR ....................................................... 103
CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 104
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 106
Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ................ 106
COMPRESSOR ................................................ 106
LUBRICANT ...................................................... 106
REFRIGERANT ................................................. 106
ENGINE IDLING SPEED .................................. 106
BELT TENSION ................................................. 106
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-3
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EJS002RO
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
EJS002RP
WARNING:
●
CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants
are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To
determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant
Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier.
●
Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
●
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed:
–
When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
–
When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
–
Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
–
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a)
recycling equipment], If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming
service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
–
Do not allow A/C lubricant to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
Contaminated Refrigerant
EJS002RQ
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
●
Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
●
Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply.
●
Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may
have occurred.
●
If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility
Revision: March 2005
MTC-4
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
●
does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In
addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN
Customer Affairs for further assistance.
General Refrigerant Precautions
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
B
EJS002RR
WARNING:
●
Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
●
Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or
air conditioning system.
●
Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
●
Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
●
Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
●
Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
●
Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
●
Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
●
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
EJS002RS
The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet
I
(UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
MTC
A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal
should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a K
future service.
Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period
L
of time cannot be removed .
Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
M
Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure
occurs.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-5
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
A/C Identification Label
EJS002RT
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this green identification label on the underside of hood.
WJIA0713E
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection
EJS002RU
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations.
●
Expansion valve to cooling unit
●
Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit)
●
Refrigerant pressure sensor
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
●
●
The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of
the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing
characteristics.
The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections.
SHA815E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-6
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A
QR25DE
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0981E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-7
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
VQ35DE
WJIA0982E
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or
around, the connection.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-8
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
O-ring
size
Part number*
D
New
8
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
Former
10
J2476 89956
9.25 (0.3642)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
Former
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.091)
New
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
92195 AH300
21.8 (0.858)
2.4 (0.094)
New
12
Former
New
SHA814E
A
Connection type
16
19
Former
New
24
mm (in)
W
mm (in)
B
C
D
E
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
WARNING:
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is F
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
G
●
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber.
●
When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
H
●
After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
●
When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
I
connection.
●
Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
MTC
●
Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
●
Always replace used O-rings.
●
When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not K
to apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Lubricant name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent
Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
L
●
O-ring must be closely attached to grooved portion of tube.
●
When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
●
Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that M
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-9
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
●
After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
RHA861F
Precautions for Servicing Compressor
●
●
●
●
●
●
EJS002RV
Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" .
Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both
directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is
installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour.
After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal
operation. [Gap between clutch disc and pulley is 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)]
Precautions for Service Equipment
EJS002RW
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any
refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-10
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
VACUUM PUMP
A
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into
the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off
after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the
hose-to-pump connection, as follows.
●
Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of
the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the
pump.
●
For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate
the hose from the pump.
●
If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose
from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is
open and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
B
C
D
E
F
G
RHA270D
H
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Be certain that the gauge face indicates R-134a or 134a. Make sure
the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service
hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant.
I
MTC
K
SHA533D
SERVICE HOSES
L
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite the manifold gauge.
M
RHA272D
Revision: March 2005
MTC-11
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
SERVICE COUPLERS
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE
Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified
lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME.
RHA274D
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EJS002RX
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
Revision: March 2005
MTC-12
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EJS003GJ
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
B
—
(J-38873-A)
Drive plate installer
Installing pulley and drive plate
C
D
E
WJIA0367E
KV99233130
(J-29884)
Pulley puller
Removing pulley
F
G
LHA172
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment
EJS003GK
H
Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its lubricant.
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubriI
cant.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
MTC
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will
occur and compressor failure will result.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
( — )
Refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
●
K
large container 1/2 in -16 ACME
S-NT196
KLH00-PAGS0
( — )
Genuine NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS
Type: Poly alkaline glycol oil (PAG),
type DH-PS
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) vane
rotary compressors (NISSAN only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp
fl oz)
S-NT197
K991J0130
(ACR2005-NI)
ACR A/C Service Center
Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
WJIA0293E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-13
2005 Altima
L
M
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector
Power supply:
●
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
AHA281A
—
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety
goggles
(J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447) qty. 24
HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant
dye
(J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner
Power supply:
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
ZHA200H
—
(J-42220)
Fluorescent dye leak detector
Power supply: DC 12V (Battery terminal)
For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system.
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles
SHA438F
—
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a)
PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after
charging system with dye.)
SHA439F
—
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle
For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent
leak detection dye into A/C system.
SHA440F
—
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills.
SHA441F
Revision: March 2005
MTC-14
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses
and couplers)
Identification:
A
●
The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size: Thread size
●
1/2 in -16 ACME
B
C
D
RJIA0196E
Service hoses
●
(J-39500-72B)
High side hose
●
(J-39500-72R)
Low side hose
●
(J-39500-72Y)
Utility hose
S-NT201
(J-39500-20A)
High side coupler
●
(J-39500-24A)
Low side coupler
●
Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
●
High side hose: Red with black stripe
●
Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
●
1/2 in -16 ACME
F
G
Hose fitting to service hose:
Service couplers
●
E
Hose color:
●
M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.
H
I
S-NT202
—
(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)
Capacity:
●
Air displacement: 4 CFM
●
Micron rating: 20 microns
●
Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size: Thread size
●
1/2 in -16 ACME
MTC
K
S-NT203
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-15
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
EJS003GL
Tool number
Tool name
Description
J-41810-NI
Refrigerant identifier equipment
HFC 134a (R-134a)
Checking refrigerant purity and system
contamination
RJIA0197E
Power tool
Removing bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
J-44614
Clutch disc holding tool
Holding clutch disc for removal and installation
WHA230
Revision: March 2005
MTC-16
2005 Altima
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Refrigerant Cycle
PFP:KA990
A
EJS002S1
REFRIGERANT FLOW
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil is
controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case.
Refrigerant System Protection
EJS002S2
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the ECM.
The ECM then signals the BCM (via CAN communication lines) to cease suppling power to the A/C relay
which disengages and stops the compressor. This occurs when pressure on the high pressure side (as
detected by refrigerant pressure sensor) is over approximately 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below
approximately 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2 , 17.4 psi).
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
B
C
D
E
F
The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor.
When the refrigerant pressure in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 3,727 kPa (38 kg/cm2
, 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the
atmosphere.
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
LJIA0015E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-17
2005 Altima
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Component Layout
EJS002S3
WJIA0979E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-18
2005 Altima
LUBRICANT
LUBRICANT
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
PFP:KLG00
A
EJS002S4
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain
the specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
●
Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
●
Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
B
C
LUBRICANT
Lubricant type
Part number
D
: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent
: KLH00-PAGS0
E
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation.
Start the engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
●
Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
●
A/C switch: On
●
Blower speed: Max. position
●
Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
●
Intake position: Recirculation (
)
●
Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the following table.
F
G
H
I
Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system.
MTC
Amount of Lubricant to be Added
Lubricant to be added to system
Part replaced
m
Amount of lubricant
(US fl oz, Imp fl oz)
K
Remarks
Evaporator
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Condenser
75 (2.5, 2.6)
—
Liquid tank
5 (0.2, 0.2)
Add if compressor is not replaced.
30 (1.0, 1.1)
Large leak
—
Small leak *1
In case of refrigerant leak
●
*1:
L
M
If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed.
Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/
recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" .
Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" .
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into
the recovery/recycling equipment.
Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the
amount of lubricant drained.
Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-19
2005 Altima
LUBRICANT
7.
8.
9.
Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this
lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant
to “new” compressor through the suction port opening.
If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant
at this time.
CAUTION:
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor and
not the liquid tank.
RHA065DD
Revision: March 2005
MTC-20
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Overview Air Conditioner LAN Control System
PFP:27500
A
EJS002S5
The LAN (local area network) system consists of front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and
mode door motor.
A configuration of these components is shown in the diagram below.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0876E
System Construction
EJS002S6
F
A small network is constructed between the front air control, air mix door motor, intake door motor, and mode
door motor. The front air control and motors are connected by data transmission lines and motor power supply
G
lines. The LAN network is built through the ground circuits of the two motors.
Addresses, motor opening angle signals, motor stop signals and error checking messages are all transmitted
through the data transmission lines connecting the front air control and each motor.
The following functions are contained in LCUs built into the air mix door motor, intake door motor, and the H
mode door motor.
●
Address
●
Motor opening angle signals
I
●
Data transmission
●
Motor stop and drive decision
MTC
●
Opening angle sensor (PBR function)
●
Comparison
●
Decision (front air control indicated value and motor opening angle comparison)
K
L
M
WJIA0877E
OPERATION
The front air control receives signals from its various dials and switches. The front air control then sends air
mix door, mode door and intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU
and intake door motor LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subse-
Revision: March 2005
MTC-21
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
quently, HOT/COLD, DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection
data is returned to the front air control.
WJIA0878E
TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER
Front air control data is transmitted consecutively to each of the door motors following the form shown in figure
below.
Start: Initial compulsory signal sent to each of the door motors.
Address: Data sent from the front air control is selected according to data-based decisions made by the air mix
door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor.
If the addresses are identical, the opening angle data and error check signals are received by the door motor
LCUs. The LCUs then make the appropriate error decision. If the opening angle data is normal, door control
begins.
If an error exists, the received data is rejected and corrected data received. Finally, door control is based upon
the corrected opening angle data.
Opening angle: Data that shows the indicated door opening angle of each door motor.
Error check: Procedure by which sent and received data is checked for errors. Error data is then compiled.
The error check prevents corrupted data from being used by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and
intake door motor. Error data can be related to the following problems.
●
Abnormal electrical frequency
●
Poor electrical connections
●
Interference from other signal transmission lines
●
Signal level fluctuation
Stop signal: At the end of each transmission, a stop operation, in-operation, or internal problem message is
delivered to the front air control. This completes one data transmission and control cycle.
WJIA0882E
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL
The air mix door is controlled by the front air control based on input from the temperature dial setting.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-22
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
FAN SPEED CONTROL
A
Blower speed is controlled by the front air control based on the position of the fan dial.
With the fan dial set to any position except OFF, the blower will begin to operate.
INTAKE DOOR CONTROL
The intake door is controlled by the front air control based on input from the recirculation switch setting, and
the MAX A/C switch setting.
MODE DOOR CONTROL
B
C
The mode door is controlled by the front air control based on input from the mode dial setting.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA0904E
The ECM controls compressor operation using input signals from the throttle position sensor and front air con- MTC
trol.
Overview of Control system
EJS002S7
K
The control system consists of an input sensor, switches, the front air control and outputs.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-23
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
The relationship of these components is shown in the diagram below:
WJIA0905E
Control Operation
EJS002S8
WJIA0906E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-24
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONER (A/C) SWITCH
The air conditioner switch controls the A/C system. When the switch is pressed with the fan ON, the compressor will turn ON. The indicator lamp will also illuminate.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
A
TEMPERATURE DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
B
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
FAN DIAL/OFF SWITCH
C
Manually controls the blower speed.
In the off position, the compressor and blower are OFF, the intake door is set to the outside air position, and
the air mode doors are set to the foot (80% foot and 20% defrost) position.
D
RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH
OFF position: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
ON position: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
E
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Positions the air mode doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
The compressor remains ON until the ignition is turned OFF.
F
MODE DIAL
Controls the air discharge through control of mode door, also controls MAX A/C function.
G
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
This switch turns the rear window defogger ON and OFF.
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-25
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Discharge Air Flow
EJS002S9
WJIA1185E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-26
2005 Altima
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
System Description
EJS002SA
A
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
B
C
D
E
F
RHA044GA
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0907E
CAN Communication System Description
EJS002SB
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-27
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00004
EJS002SC
WORK FLOW
SHA900E
*1: MTC-40
SYMPTOM TABLE
Reference
Page
Symptom
●
A/C system does not come on.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C system.
MTC-42
●
Air outlet does not change.
●
Mode door motor does not operate normally.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. (LAN)
MTC-47
●
Discharge air temperature does not
change.
●
Air mix door motor does not operate normally.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. (LAN)
MTC-49
●
Intake door does not change.
●
Intake door motor does not operate normally.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. (LAN)
MTC-51
●
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor.
MTC-53
●
Magnet clutch does not engage.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
MTC-59
●
Insufficient cooling.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
MTC-64
●
Insufficient heating.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
MTC-71
●
Noise.
●
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
MTC-72
Revision: March 2005
MTC-28
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EJS002SD
A
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
QR25DE Models
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0136E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-29
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
VQ35DE Model
WJIA0137E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-30
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1559E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-31
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram
EJS002SE
WJWA0137E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-32
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — HEATER —
EJS002SF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJWA0138E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-33
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0275E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-34
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — A/C,M —
EJS003GP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJWA0140E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-35
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJWA0177E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-36
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJWA0142E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-37
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value
EJS002SG
INSPECTION OF FRONT AIR CONTROL
●
Measure voltage between each terminal and body ground by following “FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE”. MTC38, "FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE"
WJIA0909E
FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
WJIA0020E
FRONT AIR CONTROL INSPECTION TABLE
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Item
1
G
Power supply for IGN
2
Y/R
Power supply for BAT
3
B
Ground
4
G/Y
Compressor ON signal
Ignition
switch
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
—
12
12
—
—
0
ON
0
OFF
5
Compressor
5
L/R
Power supply for mode door
motor, intake door motor, and
air mix door motor
—
12
11
R/Y
Light (-)
—
0
12
R/L
Light (+)
15
L/B
A/C LAN signal
17
L/Y
Fan control AMP. control signal
Lighting
switch
L/W
Blower motor feed back
19
L/W
Fan ON signal
20
W/L
Revision: March 2005
0
12
—
2.5 - 3
High
9.- 10
Low
7.0 - 10.0
ON
0
OFF
5
Fan
Power supply for IGN
—
MTC-38
5.5
Any speed except high
Fan speed
18
OFF
1st position
12
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal No.
Wire
color
Item
Ignition
switch
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
22
GY
Rear defrost ON signal
24
B/Y
Sensor ground
—
0
25
R/W
Intake sensor
—
0-5
30
B
AC PD cut
Condition
Defroster
switch
—
ON
0
OFF
5
—
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-39
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operational Check
EJS002SH
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
CONDITIONS:
●
Engine running and at normal operating temperature.
PROCEDURE:
1. Check Blower
1.
2.
Turn fan dial clockwise, blower should operate on low speed.
Continue turning fan dial clockwise, and continue checking
blower speeds until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on HI speed.
If NG, go to MTC-53, "Blower Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA0911E
2. Check Discharge Air
1.
Turn mode switch clockwise five positions.
WJIA0912E
2.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table.
Refer to MTC-26, "Discharge Air Flow" .
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (audio or visual
inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when the DEF
is selected.
Intake door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to MTC-47, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
WJIA0910E
3. Check Recirculation
1.
Press REC
Revision: March 2005
switch.
MTC-40
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Recirculation indicator should illuminate.
2. Press REC
switch a second time.
Recirculation indicator should turn off.
3. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound change slightly).
If NG, go to MTC-51, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" .
If OK, continue with next check.
A
B
4. Check Temperature Decrease
C
1. Turn the temperature dial fully counterclockwise.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to MTC-64, "Insufficient Cooling" .
If OK, continue with next check.
D
E
F
WJIA0913E
5. Check Temperature Increase
1. Turn the temperature dial fully clockwise.
2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to MTC-71, "Insufficient Heating" .
If OK, continue with next check.
G
H
I
WJIA0914E
MTC
6. Check Air Conditioner Switch
1.
2.
Turn fan dial to the desired position and push the air conditioner
switch (if equipped) to turn ON the air conditioner.
Confirm that the A/C indicator lamp illuminates and that the
compressor clutch engages (audio or visual inspection).
K
L
If NG, go to MTC-42, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air
Control" , then if necessary, MTC-59, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" .
If all operational checks are OK (symptom can not be duplicated), go
to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving condition
environment. If symptom appears, refer to MTC-28, "SYMPTOM
TABLE" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-41
M
WJIA0915E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control
EJS002SI
SYMPTOM:
●
A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA0916E
*1: MTC-42
*2: MTC-40
*3: MTC-42
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
FRONT AIR CONTROL
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes
information sent from intake sensor, temperature dial, and various
switches needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door
motor, mode door motor, intake door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
WJIA0917E
POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL (PTC)
The PTC is built into the front air control.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM:
●
A/C system does not come on.
WJIA0793E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-42
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Disconnect front air control connector M49.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminals 1 (G), 2 (Y/R), and 20 (W/L), and ground.
C
Terminals
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(-)
Connector - Terminal
Wire colors
M49-1
G
M49-2
Y/R
M49-20
W/L
D
Body ground
12V
E
WJIA1192E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [Nos. 12 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11,
located in the fuse block (J/B)].
● If fuses are OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary.
● If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as
necessary.
F
G
H
2. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front air control connector M49 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
MTC
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
M49-3
Continuity
(-)
K
Wire colors
B
Body ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> ● Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT
AIR CONTROL" .
● Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-43
L
WJIA1186E
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
LAN System Circuit
EJS002SJ
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor do not operate normally.
WJIA0883E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR MOTORS
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal
5 (L/R) and ground.
Terminals
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector
Wire color
M49-5
L/R
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR
CONTROL" .
WJIA1187E
2. CHECK SIGNAL FOR DOOR MOTORS
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 15
(L/B) and ground.
Terminals
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
5.5V
(+)
Connector
Wire color
M49-15
L/B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR
CONTROL" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-44
WJIA1196E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MOTOR
A
Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 1
(L/R) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground, and between intake door motor connector
M58 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground.
B
Terminals
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Door motors
Connector
wire colors
Mode
M40-1
L/R
Air mix
M39-1
L/R
Intake
M58-1
L/R
C
D
WJIA0038E
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
F
4. CHECK SIGNAL FOR MOTOR
Check voltage between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 3
(L/B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector M39 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground, and between intake door motor connector
M58 terminal 3 (L/B) and ground.
G
H
Terminals
(+)
Door motors
(-)
Connectors
wire colors
Mode
M40-3
L/B
Air mix
M39-3
L/B
Intake
M58-3
L/B
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body
ground
5.5V
I
WJIA1188E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
K
5. CHECK MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door motor connectors.
Check continuity between mode door motor connector M40 terminal 2 (B) and ground, between air mix door motor connector
M39 terminal 2 (B) and ground, and between intake door motor
connector M58 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
M
Terminals
Door motors
(+)
(-)
Connector
wire colors
Mode
M40-2
B
Air mix
M39-2
B
Intake
M58-2
B
Continuity
Body ground
Yes
WJIA0884E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
MTC
MTC-45
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK MOTOR OPERATION
Disconnect and reconnect the motor connectors and confirm the motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Returns to normal operation.)
● Motor connector contacts dirty or damaged
NG
>> (Does not operate normally.)
● GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
1.
2.
Disconnect the intake door motor connector.
Reconnect the mode door motor connector and air mix door motor connector, confirm the mode door
motor and air mix door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor operate normally.)
● Replace the intake door motor. refer to ATC-97, "Removal and Installation"
NG
>> (Mode door motor and air mix door motor do not operate normally.)
● GO TO 8.
8. CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
1.
2.
Disconnect mode door motor connector.
Reconnect the intake door motor connector, confirm the air mix door motor and intake door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor operate normally.)
● Replace mode door motor. Refer toATC-98, "Removal and Installation"
NG
>> (Air mix door motor and intake door motor do not operate normally.)
● GO TO 9.
9. CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR AND MODE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
1. Disconnect air mix door motor connector.
2. Reconnect mode door motor connector, confirm the intake door motor and mode door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Intake door motor and mode door motor operate normally.)
● Replace air mix door motor. refer to MTC-85, "Removal and Installation"
NG
>> (Intake door motor and mode door motor do not operate normally.)
● Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-46
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Mode Door Motor Circuit
EJS002SK
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Air outlet does not change.
●
Mode door motor does not operate normally.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0919E
*1
MTC-26, "Discharge Air Flow"
*4
MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
Revision: March 2005
*2
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
MTC-47
*3
MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Mode door motor (LCU)
System Operation
The front air control receives signals from its various dials and switches. The front air control then sends air
mix door, mode door and intake door motor opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door
motor LCU and intake door motor LCU.
The mode door motor reads their respective signals according to the address signal. Opening angle indication
signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCU's
in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT
or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is returned to the front air control.
WJIA0920E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It
rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the front air
control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode
door.
WJIA0042E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor and/or air mix door motor does not operate normally.
Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-48
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
EJS002SL
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Discharge air temperature does not change.
●
Air mix door motor does not operate.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1644E
*1
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*4
MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL"
Revision: March 2005
*2
MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit"
MTC-49
*3
MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Air mix door motor (LCU)
System Operation
The front air control receives signals from its various dials and switches. The front air control then sends air
mix door, mode door and intake door motor opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door
motor LCU and intake door motor LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the front air control and each of the motor position sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new
selection data is returned to the front air control.
WJIA0922E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motor
The air mix door motor is attached to the heater and cooling unit. It
rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set
by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a
shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air
control by PBR built-in air mix door motor.
WJIA0044E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Discharge air temperature does not change.
Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-50
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Door Motor Circuit
EJS002SM
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Intake door does not change.
●
Intake door motor does not operate normally.
B
INSPECTION FLOW
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1645E
*1
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*4
MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL"
Revision: March 2005
*2
MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit"
MTC-51
*3
MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Intake door motor
System Operation
The intake door control determines intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the front air control is set to DEFROST, or OFF, the front air
control sets the intake door at the fresh position.
WJIA0924E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that
air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is
conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Door position is
then fed back to the front air control by PBR built-in air mix door
motor.
WJIA0047E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Intake door motor does not operate normally.
Perform diagnostic procedure for LAN system circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-52
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Blower Motor Circuit
EJS002SN
A
SYMPTOM:
●
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1647E
*1
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*2
MTC-53, "Blower Motor Circuit"
*4
MTC-76, "FRONT AIR CONTROL"
*5
MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
Revision: March 2005
MTC-53
*3
MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Fan speed control system components are:
●
Front air control
●
Blower motor
●
Fan control amplifier
System Operation
WJIA0926E
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Fan Control Amplifier
The fan control amplifier is located on the cooling unit. The fan control amp. receives a gate voltage from the front air control to
smoothly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 5 to the 12V
range (approx.).
WJIA0049E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Blower motor is malfunctioning.
WJIA0846E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-54
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Disconnect fan control amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 3 (L/W) and ground.
C
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M64-3
L/W
D
WJIA0855E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
E
2. CHECK FAN FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
G
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 18 (L/W) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-18
L/W
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary.
H
I
WJIA1190E
MTC
3. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
Terminal
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M64-1
B
Continuity
Body ground
M
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Reconnect fan control amp. harness connector and GO
TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
L
MTC-55
WJIA0856E
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn fan dial to any position except OFF or AUTO.
Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 2 L/Y and ground.
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M64-2
L/Y
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace fan control amp.
2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
WJIA0847E
5. CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP. CIRCUIT BETWEEN FAN CONTROL AMP. AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control and fan control amp. harness connectors.
Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector
M64 terminal 2 (L/Y) and front air control harness connector
M49 terminal 17 (L/Y).
4.
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M64-2
L/Y
M49-17
L/Y
Yes
WJIA0848E
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-56
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
A
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49
terminal 2 (Y/R) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-2
Y/R
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "Removal
and Installation" .
2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal.
NG
>> ● Check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace an necessary.
B
C
D
WJIA1197E
E
F
7. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition OFF.
Disconnect blower motor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between blower motor harness connector M62
terminal 1 (W/L) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M62-1
W/L
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and
11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
● If OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness.
Repair or replace as necessary.
● If OK, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-57
H
I
MTC
K
WJIA0056E
L
M
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between blower motor harness connector M62
terminal 2 (L/W) and fan control amp. harness connector M64
terminal 3 (L/W).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M62-2
L/W
M64-3
L/W
Continuity
Yes
WJIA0857E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check blower motor. Refer to MTC-58, "Blower Motor" .
1. If NG, replace blower motor.
2. Confirm that blower motor operation is normal.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
●
Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
WJIA0059E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-58
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Magnet Clutch Circuit
EJS002SO
A
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0927E
*1
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*2
MTC-59, "Magnet Clutch Circuit"
*3
MTC-62, "Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor"
*4
MTC-73, "Intake Sensor Circuit"
*5
MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit"
*6
MTC-28, "SYMPTOM TABLE"
Revision: March 2005
MTC-59
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Front air control controls compressor operation by intake sensor signal and signal from ECM.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
WJIA0854E
1. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY IN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E124 and compressor connector.
Check continuity between compressor harness connector F3
terminal 1 (Y/B) and IPDM E/R harness connector E124 terminal 33 (Y/B).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
F3-1
Y/B
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
E124-33
Y/B
Yes
WJIA0722E
If OK, check harness for short to ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-60
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR
1.
2.
3.
A
Reconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors.
Start engine and press A/C switch.
Check voltage between compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B) and ground.
Terminal
C
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
D
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
F3-1
Y/B
B
WJIA1193E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check magnet clutch coil.
1. If NG, replace magnet clutch. Refer to MTC-94, "Removal and Installation for Compressor
Clutch" .
2. If OK, check compressor mounting points for looseness or corrosion and repair as necessary.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUSE IN IPDM E/R
E
F
G
Check 10A fuse [No. 33 located at the IPDM E/R].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace fuse and check IPDM E/R for short circuit. Replace if necessary.
H
4. CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
I
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector M18 and front air control connector M49.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 27 (G/Y), 28 (L/W) and front air control connector M49 terminals 4 (G/Y), 19 (L/W).
Terminals
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M18-27
G/Y
M49-4
G/Y
M18-28
L/W
M49-19
L/W
MTC
Continuity
K
Yes
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
WJIA1201E
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70
(W) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
F54-70
W
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
12V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> 1. Repair harness or connector.
2. Confirm that magnet clutch operation is normal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-61
WJIA0748E
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to MTC-62, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to MTC-99, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant
Pressure Sensor"
7. CHECK COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL
Check voltage between front air control connector M49 terminal 4
(G/Y) and ground, with A/C compressor ON and with A/C compressor OFF.
Terminal
(+)
(-)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M49-4
G/Y
Body ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Compressor ON:
0V
Compressor OFF:
5V
WJIA0859E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> ● When compressor is ON and voltage is not approx. 0V, Replace front air control. Refer to MTC76, "Removal and Installation" .
● When compressor is OFF and voltage is not approx. 5V, BCM is malfunctioning.
8. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
Check CAN communication circuits between BCM to ECM and between ECM to IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-21,
"CAN COMMUNICATION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> ECM malfunctioning.
NG
>> Repair or replace component based on the result of diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the condenser.
●
Refer to MTC-17, "Refrigerant pressure sensor" .
BBIA0027E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-62
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
●
Make sure that the A/C refrigerant pressure and the sensor output voltage are within the specified range as shown in the A/C
operating condition figure.
A
B
C
SHA315F
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-63
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Cooling
EJS002SP
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
WJIA1194E
*1
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*2
MTC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *3
MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART"
*4
EC-1327, "Component Description"
(VQ) EC-421, "Description" (QR)
*5
MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant"
MTC-65, "PERFORMANCE TEST
ANALYSIS"
*7
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR)
EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts"
(VQ)
Revision: March 2005
MTC-64
*6
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE TEST ANALYSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0198E
*1
MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *2
*4
MTC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit"
Revision: March 2005
MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" *3
MTC-65
MTC-67, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WJIA0749E
*1
MTC-96, "INSTALLATION"
*4
MTC-79, "Removal and Installation"
Revision: March 2005
*2
MTC-53, "Blower Motor Circuit"
MTC-66
*3
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR)
EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts"
(VQ)
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
A
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Door windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode switch
B
C
(Ventilation) set
Intake switch
D
(Recirculation) set
Max. speed set
(blower) speed
Engine speed
E
Idle speed
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading
F
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator
°C (°F)
Air temperature
°C (°F)
50 - 60
60 - 70
25 (77)
10.0 - 12.3 (50 - 54)
30 (86)
13.2 - 15.3 (56 - 60)
35 (95)
17.2 - 21.0 (63 - 70)
25 (77)
12.3 - 14.9 (54 - 59)
30 (86)
15.3 - 19.3 (60 - 67)
35 (95)
21.0 - 24.4 (70 - 76)
G
H
I
MTC
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
50 - 70
Air temperature
°C (°F)
High-pressure (Discharge side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
30 (86)
1,220 - 1,500
(12.44 - 15.30, 176.9 - 217.5)
240 - 295
(2.45 - 3.01, 34.8 - 42.8)
35 (95)
1,360 - 1,690
(13.87 - 17.24, 197.2 - 245.1)
275 - 335
(2.81 - 3.42, 39.9 - 48.6)
40 (104)
1,500 - 1,830
(12.44 - 18.67, 176.9 - 265.4)
310 - 375
(3.16 - 3.83, 45.0 - 54.4)
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABNORMAL PRESSURE
Whenever system's high and/or low side pressure is abnormal, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker
above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (normal) pressure range. Since the standard (normal) pressure differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure
Table above.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-67
K
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Pressure is reduced soon after
water is splashed on condenser.
Excessive refrigerant charge in
refrigeration cycle
Air suction by cooling fan is
insufficient.
Insufficient condenser cooling
performance
↓
1. Condenser fins are clogged.
Corrective action
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
●
Clean condenser.
●
Check and repair cooling fan
as necessary.
2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan
●
Both high and low-pressure
sides are too high.
●
Low-pressure pipe is not
cold.
When compressor is stopped
high-pressure value quickly
drops by approximately 196
kPa (2 kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It
then decreases gradually
thereafter.
Engine tends to overheat.
AC359A
●
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas
near the evaporator outlet.
●
Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
Poor heat exchange in condenser
(After compressor operation
stops, high pressure decreases
too slowly.)
↓
Air in refrigeration cycle
Evacuate repeatedly and
recharge system.
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair each engine
cooling system.
●
Excessive liquid refrigerant
on low-pressure side
●
Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
●
Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification.
Replace expansion valve.
↓
1. Improper thermal valve
installation
2. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High-pressure side is too high and
low-pressure side is too low.
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts
located between compressor
and condenser are clogged or
crushed.
●
Check and repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
AC360A
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
AC356A
Revision: March 2005
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High and low-pressure sides
become equal soon after compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
pickings
Replace compressor.
No temperature difference
between high and low-pressure sides
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
↓
Damaged inside compressor
pickings.
Replace compressor.
MTC-68
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
●
There is a big temperature
difference between receiver
drier outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
●
Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted.
●
Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
●
●
Both high- and low-pressure sides
are too low.
Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
Probable cause
Liquid tank inside is slightly
clogged.
Corrective action
●
Replace desiccant assembly.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
AC353A
There is a big temperature difference between expansion
valve inlet and outlet while the
valve itself is frosted.
B
C
D
High-pressure pipe located
between receiver drier and
expansion valve is clogged.
●
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
Temperature difference
occurs somewhere in highpressure side
Expansion valve and liquid
tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
A
Low refrigerant charge
↓
Leaking fittings or components
Expansion valve closes a little
compared with the specification.
↓
1. Improper expansion valve
adjustment
Check refrigerant for leaks.
Refer to Checking Refrigerant
Leaks, MTC-102, "Checking
for Refrigerant Leaks" and
MTC-103, "Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector" .
E
F
G
H
●
●
2. Malfunctioning thermal
valve
Remove foreign particles by
using compressed air.
I
Check lubricant for contamination.
MTC
3. Outlet and inlet may be
clogged.
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas near
the evaporator outlet.
Air flow volume is not enough
or is too low.
Low-pressure pipe is clogged
or crushed.
●
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
●
Check thermo control amp.
and intake sensor operation.
●
Replace compressor.
Evaporator is frozen.
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side sometimes
becomes negative.
Refrigerant cycle
●
●
Air conditioning system
does not function and does
not cyclically cool the compartment air.
The system constantly functions for a certain period of
time after compressor is
stopped and restarted.
Probable cause
Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically.
↓
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
↓
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
Corrective action
●
Drain water from refrigerant
or replace refrigerant.
●
Replace desiccant assembly.
AC354A
Revision: March 2005
MTC-69
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
Leave the system at rest until
no frost is present. Start it
again to check whether or not
the problem is caused by
water or foreign particles.
●
If water is the cause, initially
cooling is okay. Then the
water freezes causing a
blockage. Drain water from
refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
●
If due to foreign particles,
remove expansion valve
and remove the particles
with dry and compressed air
(not shop air).
●
If either of the above methods cannot correct the problem, replace expansion
valve.
●
Replace desiccant assembly.
●
Check lubricant for contamination.
Low-pressure side becomes negative.
Liquid tank or front/rear side of
expansion valve's pipe is
frosted or dewed.
High-pressure side is closed
and refrigerant does not flow.
↓
Expansion valve or liquid tank
is frosted.
AC362A
Revision: March 2005
MTC-70
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Heating
EJS002SQ
A
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA1646E
*1
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*4
MTC-49, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *5
*7
MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant"
Revision: March 2005
*2
MA-22, "Changing Engine Coolant"
*3
CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND THER- *6
MOSTAT HOUSING"
MTC-71
CO-9, "CHECKING RADIATOR
CAP"
MTC-44, "LAN System Circuit"
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Noise
EJS002SR
SYMPTOM: Noise
INSPECTION FLOW
SHA331F
Revision: March 2005
MTC-72
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*1
MTC-94, "Removal and Installation
for Compressor Clutch"
*2
MTC-97, "INSPECTION AFTER
INSTALLATION"
*4
MTC-40, "Operational Check"
*5
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR)
EM-119, "Checking Drive Belts"
(VQ)
Intake Sensor Circuit
*3
MTC-19, "LUBRICANT"
A
B
EJS002SS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
C
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the
table below.
Temperature °C (°F)
Resistance kΩ
-15 (5)
12.34
-10 (14)
9.62
-5 (23)
7.56
0 (32)
6.00
5 (41)
4.80
10 (50)
3.87
15 (59)
3.15
20 (68)
2.57
25 (77)
2.12
30 (86)
1.76
35 (95)
1.47
40 (104)
1.23
45 (113)
1.04
D
E
F
WJIA0091E
G
H
I
MTC
If NG, replace intake sensor.
K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted.
L
M
WJIA0870E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-73
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND BODY GROUND
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect intake sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between intake sensor connector M33 terminal 1
(R/W) and ground.
Terminal
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Body ground
5V
(+)
Connector - Terminal
Wire color
M33-1
R/W
WJIA0092E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 24 (B/Y) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal
2 (B/Y).
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M50-24
B/Y
M33-2
B/Y
Yes
WJIA0873E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR
Refer to MTC-73, "Intake Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-76, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> 1. Replace intake sensor.
2. Confirm system operation.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-74
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector M50.
Check continuity between front air control connector M50 terminal 25 (R/W) and intake sensor harness connector M33 terminal
1 (R/W).
A
B
C
Terminals
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Wire color
Connector Terminal
Wire color
M33-1
R/W
M50-25
R/W
Yes
D
WJIA0874E
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace front air control, Refer to MTC-76, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Confirm system operation.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-75
2005 Altima
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:27500
EJS002ST
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove the two screws and remove the front air control.
WJIA0763E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-76
2005 Altima
INTAKE SENSOR
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27723
A
EJS002SU
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the evaporator. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and
Installation for Evaporator" .
Remove the intake sensor clip and then the sensor.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface.
B
C
D
WJIA0100E
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-77
2005 Altima
BLOWER UNIT
BLOWER UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:27200
EJS002SV
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Remove the ECM.
Disconnect the blower motor, intake door motor and fan control amplifier connector.
Remove the two bolts and one screw from the blower unit, then
remove it.
WJIA0101E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-78
2005 Altima
BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27226
A
EJS002SW
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "Removal and Installation" .
Release the eight tabs attaching blower motor to blower unit
case and then remove it.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WJIA0104E
I
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-79
2005 Altima
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
PFP:27277
EJS002SX
FUNCTION
Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean at either recirculation or fresh mode by installing in-cabin microfilter into blower unit.
LJIA0012E
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replace in-cabin microfilter.
Refer to MA-7, "SCHEDULE 1" and MA-10, "SCHEDULE 2" .
Caution label is fixed inside the glove box.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the glove box pins. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Press in the sides of the glove box door to release the glove box door from the glove box housing.
Disconnect the glove box damper cord to remove the glove box door.
Disengage the two filter cover tabs to remove the filter cover.
Remove the in-cabin microfilter from the blower unit.
Install the new in-cabin microfilter into the blower unit.
CAUTION:
● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow in the correct orientation.
● Insert the new filter with the “UP” arrow side of the filter
facing the rear of the vehicle.
7. Install the filter cover on the blower unit.
LJIA0013E
8. Connect the glove box damper cord to the glove box door.
9. Press in the sides of the glove box door to install the glove box
door into the glove box housing.
10. Install the glove box pins.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-80
2005 Altima
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
PFP:27110
A
EJS002SY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Drain the engine coolant from the cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT"
(QR25DE) or MA-22, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE).
Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-28, "REMOVAL" .
Remove the fasteners and the cowl top. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core pipes.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid entry of contaminants.
Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the evaporator. Refer to MTC-89, "REFRIGERANT LINES" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid entry of contaminants.
Remove the steering member. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the air mix door motor connector.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
WJIA0110E
10. Disconnect the mode door motor connector.
11. Remove the heater and cooling unit.
K
L
M
WJIA0200E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Fill the radiator with the specified water and coolant mixture. Refer to MA-16, "REFILLING ENGINE
COOLANT" (QR25DE) or MA-23, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" (VQ35DE).
●
Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-81
2005 Altima
HEATER CORE
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
PFP:27140
EJS002SZ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the heater and cooling unit. Refer to MTC-81, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the heater core pipe support screws and then remove
it.
WJIA0185E
3.
Remove the heater core cover screws and then remove it.
WJIA0127E
4.
Remove the heater core.
WJIA0186E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-82
2005 Altima
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27730
A
EJS002T0
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the screws and then the intake door motor from the
blower unit.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0105E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-83
2005 Altima
MODE DOOR MOTOR
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27731
EJS002T1
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect the mode door motor connector.
Remove the mode door motor screws and then remove the
mode door motor.
WJIA0200E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-84
2005 Altima
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:27732
A
EJS002T2
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the driver lower instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Disconnect the air mix door motor connector.
Remove the air mix door motor screws and then remove the air
mix door motor.
B
C
D
E
WJIA0110E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-85
2005 Altima
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER
Removal and Installation
PFP:27761
EJS004O2
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Disconnect the fan control amplifier connector.
Remove the screws from the fan control amplifier and then
remove the fan control amplifier.
WJIA0111E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-86
2005 Altima
DUCTS AND GRILLES
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
PFP:27860
A
EJS002T4
Ventilator Duct, Defroster Nozzle, Defroster Ducts, and Grilles
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA0983E
1.
Center defroster nozzle
2.
Side defroster duct LH
3.
Side ventilator grille LH
4.
Center ventilator grille LH
5.
Cluster lid D
6.
Center ventilator grille RH
7.
Side ventilator grille RH
8.
Instrument panel
9.
Ventilator duct
10. Side defroster duct CENTER
MTC
K
11. Side defroster duct RH
REMOVAL
Center Ventilator Grille RH, LH
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Cluster Lid D" .
Remove the two center ventilator grille screws.
Release the two tabs and then remove the center ventilator
grille.
LJIA0149E
Side Ventilator Grille LH
1.
Remove the instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Cover LH" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-87
2005 Altima
DUCTS AND GRILLES
2.
Remove the side ventilator grille LH.
LJIA0150E
Side Ventilator Grille RH
1.
2.
Remove the instrument lower cover RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and
Glove Box" .
Remove side ventilator grille RH.
LJIA0151E
Floor Duct
1.
2.
Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-35, "FLOOR TRIM" .
Release the foam tape and slide the floor duct rearward to release it from the clips.
WJIA0115E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-88
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
PFP:92600
A
EJS002T5
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING:
Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and
throat. Remove the HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment) or J2201 (R-134a recovery equipment). If
an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional
health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
Discharging Refrigerant
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
WJIA0614E
MTC
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
K
L
M
WJIA0615E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-89
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Discharging, Evacuating, and Recharging the A/C System
WJIA0530E
*1
MTC-19, "CHECKING AND
ADJUSTING"
*3
MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks"
*2
MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks"
*4
MTC-65, "PERFORMANCE TEST
ANALYSIS"
Revision: March 2005
MTC-90
*5
MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant"
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Components
EJS002T6
A
QR25DE Models
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
WJIA0981E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-91
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
VQ35DE Models
WJIA0982E
NOTE:
Refer to MTC-6, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-92
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models
EJS002T7
A
B
C
D
E
F
WJIA0182E
REMOVAL
G
1.
2.
3.
4.
H
5.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer toMTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect the compressor connector.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of
any contaminants.
Remove the compressor bolts, then remove the compressor using power tools.
I
MTC
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new
ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation.
●
After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Compressor bolts
High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts
Revision: March 2005
: 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
MTC-93
2005 Altima
K
L
M
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models
EJS002T8
WJIA0117E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" .
Remove the coolant pipe bracket bolt using power tools.
Remove the compressor mounting stud.
Disconnect the compressor connector.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of any
contaminants.
Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools, and then remove the compressor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Compressor (rear side) bolt
Compressor (front side) bolt
Compressor (front side) nut
High and low-pressure flexible hose bolts
: 56.9 - 65.7 N·m (5.8 - 6.8 kg-m, 42 - 48 ft-lb)
: 28.4 - 33.3 N·m (2.9 - 3.4 kg-m, 21 - 24 ft-lb)
: 59.8 - 69.6 N·m (6.1 - 7.0 kg-m, 45 - 51 ft-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with new
ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them for installation.
●
After charging the A/C refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
EJS002T9
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the compressor. Refer to MTC-93, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — QR25DE Models" (QR25DE), MTC-94, "Removal and Installation for Compressor — VQ35DE Models" (VQ35DE).
Revision: March 2005
MTC-94
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
2.
Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using
Tool.
Tool number
3.
A
: (J-44614)
Remove the clutch disc.
B
C
WHA228
D
4.
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
E
F
G
RHA072C
5.
Remove the pulley assembly using Tool.
● Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small
adapter on the end of the compressor shaft and the center of
the puller on the small adapter as shown.
Tool number
H
I
: KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION:
To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller
claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove.
MTC
WJIA1017E
6.
7.
Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
K
L
M
WHA212
Revision: March 2005
MTC-95
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
8.
Remove the three magnet coil screws and remove the magnet
coil.
WHA183
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive
grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned
with a suitable solvent before installation.
Coil
Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION:
Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the
compressor front head.
Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
WHA213
3.
Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then
install the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
Tool number
:
—
(J-38873-A)
WJIA1016E
4.
Install the clutch disc on the drive shaft, together with the original
shim(s). Press the clutch disc down using the drive plate
installer.
WHA184
Revision: March 2005
MTC-96
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
5.
Install the center bolt using Tool.
Center bolt
Tool number
●
A
: 12 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb).
: (J-44614)
After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the
pulley rotates smoothly.
B
C
WHA229
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
D
Check the clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
E
: 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting
spacer and recheck the clearance.
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
WHA194
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-97
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS002TA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor.
Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-91, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of
contaminants.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Low-pressure flexible hose (evaporator side) bolt
Low-pressure flexible hose (compressor side) bolt
Low-pressure flexible hose (in-line connection) bolt
: 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m,
26 - 52 in-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m,
69 - 173 in-lb)
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m,
69 - 173 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring on the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it
for installation.
●
After recharging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant
Leaks" .
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS002TB
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-91, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the hose with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of
contaminants.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
High-pressure flexible hose bolt
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply A/C lubricant to it
for installation.
●
After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks"
.
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
EJS002TC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Reposition the engine coolant reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Reposition the power steering reservoir out of the way without disconnecting the hose.
Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to MTC-91, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-98
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
High-pressure pipe (evaporator side) bolt : 2.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.29 - 0.60 kg-m, 26 - 52 in-lb)
High-pressure pipe (condenser side) bolt : 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
A
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
●
After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks"
.
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
B
C
EJS002TD
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and
remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the condenser fins.
D
E
F
G
WJIA0123E
INSTALLATION
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
: 9.8 - 11.7 N·m (1.0 - 1.2 kg-m, 7.3 - 8.6 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
Removal and Installation for Condenser
EJS002TE
I
MTC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe and hose with suitable
material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of contaminants.
Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
Remove the front fascia. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER" .
K
L
M
WJIA0124E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-99
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
6.
7.
Remove the mounting nuts from condenser mounting brackets.
Remove the condenser.
WJIA0125E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
High-pressure flexible hose and pipe bolt
Condenser nuts
: 7.8 - 19.6 N·m (0.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 69 - 173 in-lb)
: 5.0 - 6.79 N·m (0.51 - 0.69 kg-m, 45 - 60 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply A/C lubricant to them after installing them.
●
When charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to MTC-102, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" .
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
EJS003GN
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER
AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
NOTE:
The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access
the expansion valve.
Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the expansion valve.
Remove the center console side finisher RH. Refer to IP-15,
"Center Console" .
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument
Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
Remove the ECM.
● Disconnect the ECM connector.
● Remove the wire harness from the ECM mounting bracket.
● Remove the two ECM mounting bracket nuts and disconnect
WJIA0128E
the ground wire.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to MTC-78, "BLOWER UNIT" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-100
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
10. Remove the heater core cover.
A
B
C
WJIA0127E
D
11. Remove the evaporator cover.
E
F
G
WJIA0188E
12. Remove the evaporator.
● Remove the thermo control amplifier.
● Remove the intake sensor.
CAUTION:
● Mark the mounting position of the intake sensor and
thermo control amplifier.
H
I
MTC
WJIA0190E
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve mounting bolts
L
: 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
M
EJS003GO
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Evacuate and recover the A/C system refrigerant. Refer to MTC-89, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" .
Disconnect the air cleaner to electronic throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-17, "AIR CLEANER
AND AIR DUCT" (QR25DE), EM-120, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (VQ35DE).
NOTE:
The tube is located between the air cleaner assembly and the intake manifold and is removed to access
the expansion valve.
Disconnect the A/C pipe from the expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Revision: March 2005
MTC-101
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
4.
Remove the expansion valve.
WJIA0128E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve mounting bolts
: 2.9 - 5.0 N·m (0.29 - 0.51 kg-m, 26 - 44 in-lb)
CAUTION:
●
Replace the O-rings with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
EJS002TH
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant
leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow
extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent
dye leak detector.
If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all
system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected
leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component.
CAUTION:
Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve
the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector
EJS002TI
1.
Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area
without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or TXV) leak.
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or
cloth, with the UV lamp for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent
future misdiagnosis.
4. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant
leak detector.
NOTE:
Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield
washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be
checked are clean.
Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings
and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
EJS002TJ
NOTE:
This procedure is only necessary when recharging the A/C system or when the compressor has seized and
has been replaced.
1.
Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi).
Revision: March 2005
MTC-102
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459).
CAUTION:
If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system
connection and proceed with the service procedures.
Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side service valve.
Start the engine and switch the A/C ON and fan ON.
While the A/C is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye
through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool (J-41459), refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the low-pressure service valve.
Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system lubricant. Depending
on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from a few minutes to a few
days for the dye to penetrate the leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
EJS002TK
A
B
C
D
E
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LEAK DETECTOR
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument
is calibrated and set properly per the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance.
F
G
H
AHA281A
1.
Position the leak detector probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in)
away from the point to be checked.
I
MTC
K
L
SHA707EA
2.
M
When testing, circle each fitting completely with the leak detector probe.
SHA706E
Revision: March 2005
MTC-103
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
3.
Move the leak detector probe along the component at approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in)/sec.
SHA708EA
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette
smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the
leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn engine OFF.
2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service ports.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
c.
Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above 16°C (61°F). If less
than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant.
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa
(3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) pressure.
Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low side (evaporator drain hose to the compressor shaft seal). Refer to MTC-91, "Components" . Clean the component
to be checked and move the leak detector probe completely around the connection/component.
Perform a leak check for the following areas:
● Compressor
● High and low-pressure hose fittings, relief valve and shaft seal.
● Liquid tank
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● Service valves
NOTE:
● Check that all the service valve caps are secure on the service valves (to prevent leaks).
● After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from the valves to prevent any false readings by the leak detector.
● Cooling unit (evaporator)
NOTE:
● With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace
in the cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain
hose.
● Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with
water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected
leak, then repeat check as outlined above.
Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components.
If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10.
Start engine.
Set the front air control as follows;
A/C switch: ON
Mode: face
Intake position: Recirculation
Revision: March 2005
MTC-104
2005 Altima
REFRIGERANT LINES
d.
e.
9.
10.
Temperature: MAX cold
Fan speed: High
Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4
through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping
the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The
pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after
refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure
side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are
more easily detected when pressure is high.
A
B
C
D
SHA839E
11. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the A/C system, check the recovery/recycling
equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the
refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity.
12. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the supply tank using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant
identifier equipment.
13. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the A/C system using the recovery/recycling equipment and the refrigerant identifier equipment.
14. Discharge the A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or
component as necessary.
15. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm there are no refrigerant leaks.
16. Conduct the A/C performance test to ensure that the system works properly. Refer to MTC-67, "PERFORMANCE CHART" .
E
F
G
H
I
MTC
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
MTC-105
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
PFP:00030
EJS002TL
COMPRESSOR
Model
CALSONIC KANSEI
Type
DKS-17D
Displacement
175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3 ) / revolution
Cylinder bore × stroke
30.5 mm (1.201 in) x 21.4 mm (0.84 in)
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V
LUBRICANT
Model
CALSONIC KANSEI (type DKS-17D)
Name
NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or
equivalent
Part number
KLH00-PAGS0
Total in system
150 m
Compressor (service part) charging amount
Refer to MTC-19, "Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement" .
Capacity
(5.03 US fl oz, 5.3 lmp fl oz)
REFRIGERANT
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
0.50 ± 0.025 kg (1.10 ± 0.055 lb)
ENGINE IDLING SPEED
Refer to EC-80, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (QR25DE) or EC-698, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" (VQ35DE).
BELT TENSION
Refer to MA-15, "ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR25DE ENGINE)"
(VQ35DE ENGINE)" .
Revision: March 2005
MTC-106
or MA-22, "ENGINE MAINTENANCE
2005 Altima
F BRAKES
SECTION
PB
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................... 2
Removal and Installation .......................................... 2
REMOVAL ............................................................. 2
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3
Inspection ................................................................. 3
Adjustment ............................................................... 3
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ........................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 5
REMOVAL ............................................................. 5
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 5
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5
SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .................... 6
Drum and Lining Break-in ......................................... 6
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 7
Parking Brake Control .............................................. 7
Parking Drum Brake ................................................. 7
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PB-1
2005 Altima
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
PFP:36010
EFS0046L
WFIA0274E
1.
Control lever
4.
Grommet
2.
Adjusting nut
3.
Front cable
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove center console. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" .
Remove console floor duct. Refer to ATC-101, "Removal and Installation" (Automatic A/C), MTC-87,
"Removal and Installation" (Manual A/C).
Disconnect warning lamp connector.
Remove all parking brake cable mounting nuts and bolts, loosen
and remove adjusting nut.
LFIA0092E
5.
Remove the rear brake rotor. Refer to BR-34, "Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
PB-2
2005 Altima
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
6.
7.
Remove the lock plate mounting bolt.
Remove the pin, then the parking brake cable.
A
B
C
D
E
PB
G
LFIA0093E
INSTALLATION
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Adjust the parking brake cable. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse adjusting nut.
Inspection
●
●
●
●
●
EFS0046M
Check control lever for wear or other damage. Replace if necessary.
Check wires for discontinuity or deterioration. Replace if necessary.
Check warning lamp and switch. Replace if necessary.
Check parts at each connecting portion and, if found deformed or damaged, replace.
Check if the control lever stroke is within specification. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" .
Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
I
Revision: March 2005
K
EFS0046N
Fully engage the control lever.
Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut and fully release
the control lever.
Adjust clearance of the rear parking brake shoes. Refer to PB6, "SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT" .
Depress the brake pedal fully more than five times.
Make sure that no drag exists while rotating the rear wheels.
Operate control lever 10 times or more with a full stroke [216
mm (8.5 in)].
Adjust control lever by turning adjusting nut.
Pull control lever with specified amount of force. Check control
lever stroke and ensure smooth operation.
Lever stroke (number of notches)
Force
J
M
LFIA0094E
:7-8
: 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)
PB-3
L
2005 Altima
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
9.
After adjustment, check the following.
● There is no drag when control lever is being released. If drag exists, perform the following.
– Remove the rear disc rotor, refer to BR-20, "Removal and
Installation" . Verify the toggle lever returns to stopper when
the parking brake lever is released.
LFIA0095E
–
–
If toggle lever does not return to stopper, loosen adjusting nut.
Install rear disc rotor and adjust shoe clearance. Refer to PB6, "SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT" .
LFIA0094E
Revision: March 2005
PB-4
2005 Altima
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Removal and Installation
PFP:44060
A
EFS0046O
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
1. Remove wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake rotor with the parking brake lever completely disengaged. If the brake rotor cannot be
removed, remove as follows:
a. Secure the brake rotor with the wheel nut and remove the
adjuster hole plug.
b. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and
rotate the star wheel on the adjuster assembly in the direction as
shown to retract the parking brake shoes.
3. Remove the parking brake shoe springs.
4. Remove the parking brake shoes and adjuster.
WFIA0018E
B
C
D
E
PB
G
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
●
Visually inspect the lining for abnormal wear, damage and peeling.
Using a micrometer, measure the thickness "A" of the lining.
Standard lining thickness
Lining wear limit "A"
●
H
: 3.2 mm (0.126 in)
: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
I
Visually inspect the inside of the drum for abnormal wear, damage and cracks. Using a pair of vernier calipers, measure the
inside diameter of the drum.
Standard inner diameter
Maximum inner diameter
J
: 172 mm (6.77 in)
: 173 mm (6.81 in)
SBR021A
CAUTION:
If necessary, remove the parking brake shoe and check as follows.
●
Check the shoe sliding surface for abnormal wear and damage.
●
Check the anchor pin for abnormal wear and corrosion.
●
Check the return springs for sagging.
●
Check the adjuster for rough operation.
L
M
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Apply brake grease to the contact areas shown. Refer to MA-12,
"RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
WFIA0019E
Revision: March 2005
PB-5
K
2005 Altima
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
●
Install the parking brake shoe springs as shown.
LFIA0090E
●
●
The orientation of the adjuster is different from LH to RH brakes.
Assemble the adjuster so that the threaded part is expanded
when rotating it in the direction as shown. Completely retract the
adjuster to assemble. When disassembling the adjuster, apply
brake grease to the threads.
After installing parking brake shoes and rotor, adjust the parking
brake. Refer to PB-6, "SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT" .
WFIA0021E
SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure the parking brake control lever is fully released and parking brake cable adjusting nut is loosened.
Remove the adjuster hole plug on the rotor. Using a screwdriver,
turn the adjuster in the direction as shown until the rotor is
locked. After locking, turn the adjuster in the opposite direction 5
or 6 notches.
Rotate the rotor to make sure that there is no drag. Install the
adjuster hole plug.
After adjusting the clearance of the rear shoes, adjust the parking brake cable. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" .
● After replacing the shoes or the brake rotor or if the parking
brake does not function well, carry out the break-in procedure.
WFIA0286E
Refer to PB-6, "Drum and Lining Break-in" .
Drum and Lining Break-in
EFS0046P
CAUTION:
Do not carry out the break-in procedure excessively. Doing so may cause uneven or premature wear
of the brake shoe lining.
When new parking brake shoes or brake rotors are installed or when parking brake performance is poor, perform the following break-in procedure.
1. Drive the unloaded vehicle on a safe, level and dry road.
2. Pull the parking brake control lever with a force of 147 N (15 kg, 33 lb).
3. While pulling the lever, continue to drive the vehicle forward 100 meters (328 ft) at approximately 35 km/h
(22 MPH).
4. Allow the parking brake to cool down for approximately five minutes.
5. Release the parking brake control lever and drive the vehicle under normal conditions for two minutes to
cool down the parking brake.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 three times and repeat just step 5 once more.
7. After performing the break-in procedure, check the stroke of the parking brake control lever. If it is out of
specification, adjust again. Refer to PB-3, "Adjustment" .
Revision: March 2005
PB-6
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Brake Control
Control type
PFP:00030
A
EFS0046Q
Hand lever
Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)]
7-8
Number of notches when warning lamp switch comes on
1
B
Parking Drum Brake
EFS0046R
Type
Brake lining
Drum (disc)
C
DS17HF
Standard thickness (new)
3.2 mm (0.126 in)
Wear limit thickness
1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Standard inner diameter (new)
172 mm (6.77 in)
Wear limit of inner diameter
173 mm (6.81 in)
D
E
PB
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PB-7
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: March 2005
PB-8
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
PG
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ...................... 4
Schematic ................................................................ 4
Wiring Diagram — POWER — ................................. 6
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW.
IN ANY POSITION ................................................ 6
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION
SW. IN ACC OR ON ............................................ 10
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW.
IN ON ...................................................................11
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW.
IN ON AND/OR START ....................................... 12
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ...................................... 15
System Description ................................................ 15
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R ........... 15
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL ......... 15
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL ........................... 16
CAN Communication System Description .............. 16
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction ... 16
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 17
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ...................... 17
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS .......................... 18
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 18
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 20
Auto Active Test ..................................................... 21
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 21
OPERATION PROCEDURE ............................... 21
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE ... 21
Schematic .............................................................. 23
IPDM E/R TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT ............ 24
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection .......... 25
Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) ........ 26
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R ................... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 27
Revision: March 2005
GROUND CIRCUIT ................................................... 28
Ground Distribution ................................................. 28
MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 28
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 30
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE) ........ 32
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE) ........ 34
BODY HARNESS ................................................ 36
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS ..................................... 37
HARNESS ................................................................. 39
Harness Layout ...................................................... 39
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT ................. 39
OUTLINE ............................................................. 40
MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 41
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) .............. 43
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) ............. 46
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE) ........ 48
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE) ........ 50
BODY HARNESS ................................................ 52
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS ..................................... 54
ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 56
FRONT DOOR LH HARNESS ............................ 57
FRONT DOOR RH HARNESS ............................ 57
REAR DOOR LH HARNESS ............................... 58
REAR DOOR RH HARNESS .............................. 58
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) ...................... 59
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ............................ 62
Electrical Units Location ......................................... 62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 62
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 63
Fuse ........................................................................ 65
Fusible Link ............................................................ 65
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) ............................. 65
HARNESS CONNECTOR ......................................... 66
Description .............................................................. 66
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING
TYPE) .................................................................. 66
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING
TYPE) .................................................................. 67
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT
SRS COMPONENT TYPE) ................................. 68
PG-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
ELECTRICAL UNITS ................................................ 69
Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 69
STANDARDIZED RELAY .......................................... 70
Description .............................................................. 70
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND
Revision: March 2005
MIXED TYPE RELAYS ........................................70
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ..................70
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) .......................72
Terminal Arrangement .............................................72
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX ..............................73
Terminal Arrangement .............................................73
PG-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EKS008UA
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
EKS008UB
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT"
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
H
I
J
PG
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PG-3
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Schematic
PFP:24110
EKS008UC
For detailed ground distribution, refer to PG-28, "Ground Distribution" .
WKWA3028E
Revision: March 2005
PG-4
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA3029E
Revision: March 2005
PG-5
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — POWER —
EKS008UD
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
WKWA1465E
Revision: March 2005
PG-6
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA1466E
Revision: March 2005
PG-7
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
WKWA1844E
Revision: March 2005
PG-8
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA1468E
Revision: March 2005
PG-9
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON
WKWA2110E
Revision: March 2005
PG-10
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA1470E
Revision: March 2005
PG-11
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START
WKWA3030E
Revision: March 2005
PG-12
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA3031E
Revision: March 2005
PG-13
2005 Altima
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
WKWA3032E
Revision: March 2005
PG-14
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
PFP:284B7
System Description
A
EKS008UE
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block
which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits.
●
IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil
pressure switch signal reception, etc.
●
It controls operation of each electrical component via BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION:
None of the IPDM E/R-integrated relays can be individually removed.
●
B
C
D
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
E
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps:
●
Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
F
●
Parking lamps
●
Tail lamps
●
Front fog lamps
G
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Rear window defogger relay control
H
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger
relay.
4. A/C compressor control
I
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor magnetic
clutch).
5. Cooling fan control
J
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays.
6. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
PG
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN
H-line), it is possible to transmit maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can
transmit and receive data, and read necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
● When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control.
After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
● Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
Controlled system
Headlamp
Tail and parking lamps
Cooling fan
Fail-safe mode
●
With the ignition switch ON, the headlamp (low) is ON.
●
With the ignition switch OFF, the headlamp (low) is OFF.
●
With the ignition switch ON, the tail and parking lamps are ON.
●
With the ignition switch OFF, the tail and parking lamps are OFF.
●
With the ignition switch ON, the cooling fan HI operates.
●
With the ignition switch OFF, the cooling fan stops.
Front wiper
Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper LO and HI remains in the same status it
was in just before fail−safe control was initiated.
Rear window defogger
Rear window defogger relay OFF
A/C compressor
A/C compressor OFF
Front fog lamps
Front fog lamp relay OFF
Revision: March 2005
PG-15
2005 Altima
L
M
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
● CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
● Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
● When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
● Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
● All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
● IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
● CAN communication is stopped.
● When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status.
● When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008UF
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
●
●
EKS008UG
When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM
E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal
received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Ignition switch signal
Ignition relay status
Tail lamp relay
ON
ON
—
OFF
OFF
—
ON
OFF
—
OFF
ON
ON (10 minutes)
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
Revision: March 2005
PG-16
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
EKS008UH
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Inspection Item, Diagnosis Mode
Description
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
The IPDM E/R performs diagnosis of CAN communication and self-diagnosis.
DATA MONITOR
The input/output data of the IPDM E/R is displayed in real time.
ACTIVE TEST
The IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to electronic components to check their operation.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
B
C
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
D
E
F
G
H
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
I
J
PG
BCIA0029E
L
3.
Touch “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen.
● If “IPDM E/R” is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM"
screen, then refer to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector
(DLC) Circuit" .
M
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
PG-17
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the “SELECT DIAG
MODE” screen.
BCIA0031E
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen.
Self-diagnosis results are displayed.
WKIA1264E
Display Item List
Display items
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
TIME
CONSULT-II
display code
Malfunction detection
—
—
●
CAN COMM CIRC
U1000
●
If CAN communication reception/transmission
data has a malfunction, or if any of the control
units fail, data reception/transmission cannot be
confirmed.
When the data in CAN communication is not
received before the specified time.
Possible
causes
CRNT
PAST
—
—
—
Any of items
listed below
have errors:
X
X
●
TRANSMIT
DIAG
●
ECM
●
BCM/SEC
NOTE:
The details for display of the period are as follows:
●
CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
●
PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECT FROM MENU” on the “DATA MONITOR” screen.
ALL SIGNALS
All signals will be monitored.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitors the predetermined item(s).
SELECT FROM MENU
Selects and monitors individual signal(s).
3.
4.
Touch “START”.
Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU".
Revision: March 2005
PG-18
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
5.
Touch “RECORD” while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch “STOP”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PG-19
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
All Signals, Main Signals, Select From Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Item name
Display or unit
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECT
FROM MENU
Description
Motor fan request
MOTOR FAN
REQ
1/2/3/4
X
X
X
Signal status input from ECM
Compressor
request
AC COMP REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from ECM
Tail & clear
request
TAIL & CLR REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
H/L LO request
HL LO REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
H/L HI request
HL HI REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
FR fog request
FR FOG REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
FR wiper request
FR WIP REQ
STOP/1LO/LO/HI
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Wiper auto stop
WIP AUTO
STOP
ACT P/STOP P
X
X
X
Output status of IPDM E/R
Wiper protection
WIP PROT
OFF/LS/HS/Block
X
X
X
Control status of IPDM E/R
Starter request
ST RLY REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
Status of input signal NOTE
Ignition relay
status
IGN RLY
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Ignition relay status monitored
with IPDM E/R
Rear defogger
request
RR DEF REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Oil pressure
switch
OIL P SW
OPEN/CLOSE
X
X
Signal status input from IPDM
E/R
Hood switch
HOOD SW
OFF
X
Theft warning
horn request
THFT HRN REQ
ON/OFF
X
X
Signal status input from BCM
Horn chirp
HORN CHIRP
ON/OFF
X
X
Output status of IPDM E/R
Signal status input from IPDM
E/R (function is not enabled)
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is in ACC position,
display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG-MODE” screen.
Touch item to be tested, and check operation.
Touch “START”.
Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Test name
CONSULT-II screen display
Description
Tail lamp output
TAIL LAMP
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the tail lamp relay can be operated.
Rear defogger output
REAR DEFOGGER
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the rear defogger relay can be operated.
Front wiper (HI, LO) output
FRONT WIPER
With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON), the front wiper relay
(Lo, Hi) can be operated.
Cooling fan output
MOTOR FAN
With a certain operation (1, 2, 3, 4), the cooling fan can be operated.
Lamp (HI, LO, FOG) output
LAMPS
With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON, FOG ON), the lamp
relay (Lo, Hi, Fog) can be operated.
Horn output
HORN
With a certain ON-OFF operation, the horn relay can be operated.
Revision: March 2005
PG-20
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Auto Active Test
EKS008UI
A
DESCRIPTION
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to
the following systems:
Rear window defogger
Front wipers
Tail and parking lamps
Front fog lamps
Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
Cooling fan
B
C
D
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by
wiper operation).
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition
switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF.
When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform BL-30, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
●
E
F
G
H
I
J
When auto active test mode is actuated, the following eight steps are repeated three times.
PG
L
M
WKIA4104E
Concept of Auto Active Test
●
●
IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication
between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
If any of systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed
using auto active test.
Revision: March 2005
PG-21
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Symptom
Inspection contents
Possible cause
YES
Rear window defogger
does not operate.
Perform auto active
test. Does rear window defogger operate?
NO
YES
Any of front wipers, tail
and parking lamps, front
fog lamps, and headlamps (Hi, Lo) do not
operate.
Perform auto active
test. Does system in
question operate?
NO
YES
A/C compressor does
not operate.
Perform auto active
test. Does magnetic
clutch operate?
NO
YES
Cooling fan does not
operate.
Oil pressure warning
lamp does not operate.
Perform auto active
test. Does cooling fan
operate?
Perform auto active
test. Does oil pressure warning lamp
blink?
NO
YES
NO
Revision: March 2005
●
BCM signal input circuit
●
Rear window defogger relay
●
Open circuit of rear window defogger
●
IPDM E/R malfunction
●
Harness or connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and rear window
defogger
●
BCM signal input system
●
Lamp/wiper motor malfunction
●
Lamp/wiper motor ground circuit malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and system in
question
●
IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
●
BCM signal input circuit
●
CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM.
●
CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
Magnetic clutch malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and magnetic
clutch
●
IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
●
ECM signal input circuit
●
CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R
●
Cooling fan motor malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and cooling fan
motor
●
IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction
●
Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and oil pressure
switch
●
Oil pressure switch malfunction
●
IPDM E/R
●
CAN communication signal between BCM and Combination Meter
●
Combination meter
PG-22
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Schematic
EKS008UJ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKWA1575E
Revision: March 2005
PG-23
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT
WKIA1609E
Revision: March 2005
PG-24
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
EKS00FPL
1. FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION
A
Check that the following fusible links are not blown.
Terminal No.
Signal name
Fusible link No.
1, 2
Battery power
a, b, d
B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace fusible link.
C
2. POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION
D
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and
ground.
E
Terminals
F
(+)
Voltage (Approx.)
(-)
IPDM E/R connector
Terminal
E120
1, 2
Ground
G
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness.
WKIA4017E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
I
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and
ground.
A
H
J
B
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
IPDM E/R: E121
60
IPDM E/R: E124
38
Continuity
PG
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair or replace ground circuit harness of IPDM E/R.
L
WKIA4105E
M
Revision: March 2005
PG-25
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
EKS008UL
CAUTION:
If a CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on which control unit(s) carry out CAN communication.
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect CONSULT-II and select "IPDM E/R" on the Diagnosis System Selection screen.
Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the diagnosis mode selection screen.
Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
CONSULT-II Display
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
TIME
CONSULT-II
display code
CRNT
PAST
—
—
—
Details of diagnosis result
No malfunction
Any of items listed below have errors:
CAN COMM CIRC
U1000
X
X
●
TRANSMIT DIAG
●
ECM
●
BCM/SEC
NOTE:
The Details for Display for the Period are as follows:
●
CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
●
PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed
NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.>>INSPECTION END.
CAN COMM CIRC>>Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
PG-26
2005 Altima
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
EKS008UM
REMOVAL
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove 2 bolts and position coolant reservoir aside.
Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
C
D
WKIA0120E
E
F
G
H
WKIA0121E
5.
6.
Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and then remove the IPDM E/
R.
I
J
PG
WKIA0122E
L
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
M
Revision: March 2005
PG-27
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
Ground Distribution
PFP:24080
EKS008UN
MAIN HARNESS
WKIA4106E
Revision: March 2005
PG-28
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3144E
Revision: March 2005
PG-29
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
WKIA2754E
Revision: March 2005
PG-30
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2755E
Revision: March 2005
PG-31
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE)
WKIA2756E
Revision: March 2005
PG-32
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2757E
Revision: March 2005
PG-33
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE)
WKIA3347E
Revision: March 2005
PG-34
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA2759E
Revision: March 2005
PG-35
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
BODY HARNESS
WKIA3145E
Revision: March 2005
PG-36
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3146E
Revision: March 2005
PG-37
2005 Altima
GROUND CIRCUIT
WKIA2762E
Revision: March 2005
PG-38
2005 Altima
HARNESS
HARNESS
Harness Layout
PFP:24010
A
EKS008UO
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the drawings:
●
Main Harness and Console Sub-harness
●
Engine Room Harness LH (Engine Compartment)
●
Engine Room Harness RH (Engine Compartment)
●
Engine Control Harness and Engine Control Sub-Harness
(QR25DE)
●
Engine Control Harness, Engine Control Sub-harness-1, Engine
Control Sub-Harness-2, and Enigne Control Sub-harness-3
(VQ35DE)
●
Body Harness
●
Body No. 2 Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
B
C
D
SEL252V
E
F
G
H
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated below.
Water proof type
Connector type
●
Cavity: 4 or Less
●
Relay connector
●
Cavity: From 5 to 8
●
Cavity: 9 or More
●
Ground terminal etc.
Male
I
Standard type
Female
Male
Female
J
PG
L
—
M
Revision: March 2005
PG-39
2005 Altima
HARNESS
OUTLINE
WKIA2734E
Revision: March 2005
PG-40
2005 Altima
HARNESS
MAIN HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4107E
Revision: March 2005
PG-41
2005 Altima
HARNESS
WKIA4108E
Revision: March 2005
PG-42
2005 Altima
HARNESS
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4109E
Refer to PG-46, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness.
Revision: March 2005
PG-43
2005 Altima
HARNESS
WKIA2738E
Revision: March 2005
PG-44
2005 Altima
HARNESS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4110E
Revision: March 2005
PG-45
2005 Altima
HARNESS
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)
WKIA2740E
Refer to PG-43, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness.
Revision: March 2005
PG-46
2005 Altima
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3356E
Revision: March 2005
PG-47
2005 Altima
HARNESS
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (QR25DE)
WKIA4111E
Revision: March 2005
PG-48
2005 Altima
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4112E
Revision: March 2005
PG-49
2005 Altima
HARNESS
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS (VQ35DE)
WKIA4113E
Revision: March 2005
PG-50
2005 Altima
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4114E
Revision: March 2005
PG-51
2005 Altima
HARNESS
BODY HARNESS
WKIA4115E
Revision: March 2005
PG-52
2005 Altima
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3362E
Revision: March 2005
PG-53
2005 Altima
HARNESS
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS
WKIA3149E
Revision: March 2005
PG-54
2005 Altima
HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4116E
Revision: March 2005
PG-55
2005 Altima
HARNESS
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
WKIA2748E
Revision: March 2005
PG-56
2005 Altima
HARNESS
FRONT DOOR LH HARNESS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WKIA4117E
I
FRONT DOOR RH HARNESS
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4118E
Revision: March 2005
PG-57
2005 Altima
HARNESS
REAR DOOR LH HARNESS
WKIA0095E
REAR DOOR RH HARNESS
WKIA0096E
Revision: March 2005
PG-58
2005 Altima
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
EKS008UP
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring
diagram.
Code
Section
AT
A/T 1st Signal
2NDSIG
AT
A/T 2nd Signal
3METER
DI
Triple Meter
3RDSIG
AT
A/T 3rd Signal
4THSIG
AT
A/T 4th Signal
5THSIG
AT
A/T 5th Signal
A/C,A
ATC
Auto Air Conditioner
A/C,M
MTC
Manual Air Conditioner
A/F
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
AF/FH
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
AF1B1
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 1
AF1B2
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 2
AF1HB1
EC
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 1
AF1HB2
EC
ABS
BRC
C
D
E
F
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 2
G
Anti-Lock Brake System
APPS1
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
APPS2
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
APPS3
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
ASCBOF
EC
ASCD Brake Switch
ASC/BS
EC
ASCD Brake Switch
ASCIND
EC
ASCD Indicator
ASC/SW
EC
ASCD Steering Switch
AT/IND
DI
A/T Indicator Lamp
AUDIO
AV
Audio
AUTO/L
LT
Auto Light System
B/COMP
DI
Board Computer
BA/FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and TCM Power Supply
BACK/L
LT
Back-up Lamp
BRK/SW
EC
Brake Switch
CAN
AT
CAN Communication Line
CAN
EC
CAN Communication Line
CAN
LAN
CAN System
CHARGE
SC
Charging System
COMBSW
LT
Combination Switch
COMM
AV
Audio Visual Communication System
CHIME
DI
Warning Chime
CIGAR
WW
Cigarette Lighter
COOL/F
EC
Cooling Fan Control
D/LOCK
BL
Power Door Lock
DEF
GW
Rear Window Defogger
DTRL
LT
Headlamp - With Daytime Light System
ECM/PW
EC
ECM Power Supply for Back-Up
ECTS
EC
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
ENGSS
AT
Engine Speed Signal
EGRC1
EC
EGR Function
EGR/TS
EC
EGR Temperature Sensor
EGVC/V
EC
EGR Volume Control Valve
Revision: March 2005
B
Wiring Diagram Name
1STSIG
A
PG-59
H
I
J
PG
L
M
2005 Altima
HARNESS
EMNT
EC
Engine Mount
ETC1
EC
Electric Throttle Control Function
ETC2
EC
Throttle Control Motor Relay
ETC3
EC
Throttle Control Motor
F/FOG
LT
Front Fog Lamp
F/PUMP
EC
Fuel Pump
FLS1
EC
Fuel Level Sensor Function (SLOSH)
FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
FTSP
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor Failure
FTTS
EC
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
FUEL
EC
Fuel Injection System Function
FUELB1
EC
Fuel Injection System Function (Bank 1)
FUELB2
EC
Fuel Injection System Function (Bank 2)
H/LAMP
LT
Headlamp
H/MIRR
GW
Door Mirror with Heated Mirror
HEATER
MTC
Heater System
HO2S2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear)
HO2S2H
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Heater
HORN
WW
Horn
HSEAT
SE
Heated Seat
I/MIRR
GW
Inside Mirror (Auto-Anti Dazzling Mirror)
IATS
EC
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
IGNSYS
EC
Ignition System
ILL
LT
Illumination
INJECT
EC
Injector
INT/L
LT
Spot, Vanity Mirror and Trunk Room Lamps
IVC
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
IVCB1
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 1
IVCB2
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 2
KEYLES
BL
Remote Keyless Entry System
KS
EC
Knock Sensor
LPSV
AT
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
MAFS
EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor
MAIN
AT
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
MAIN
EC
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
METER
DI
Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp., Oil and Fuel Gauges
MIL/DL
EC
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MIRROR
GW
Door Mirror
MMSW
AT
Manual Mode Switch
NATS
BL
Nissan Anti-Theft System
NAVI
AV
Navigation System
NONDTC
AT
Non-detective Items
O2H2B1
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Heater Bank 1
O2H2B2
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Heater Bank 2
O2S2B1
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Bank 1
O2S2B2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) Bank 2
OVRCSV
AT
Over Run Clutch Solenoid Valve
PC/A
AT
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
PC/B
AT
Shift Pressure Solenoid Valve
PC/C
AT
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Failure
PC/CS
AT
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
P/SCKT
WW
Revision: March 2005
Power Socket
PG-60
2005 Altima
HARNESS
PGC/V
EC
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve
PHASE
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
PHSB1
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1)
PHSB2
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2)
PNP/SW
AT
Park/Neutral Position Switch
PNP/SW
EC
Park/Neutral Position Switch
POS
EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (POS)
POWER
PG
Power Supply Routing
PRE/SE
EC
EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor
PS/SEN
EC
Power Steering Oil Pressure Sensor
PWR/IN
AT
TCM Ignition Power
RP/SEN
EC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
SEAT
SE
Power Seat
SEN/PW
EC
Sensor Power Supply
SFTFNC
AT
Unusual Shifting
SHIFT
AT
A/T Shift Lock System
SROOF
RF
Sunroof
SRS
SRS
B
C
D
E
F
Supplemental Restraint System
SSV/A
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve A
SSV/B
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve B
SSV/C
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve C
SSV/CS
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve Failure
SSV/D
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve D
SSV/E
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve E
START
SC
Starting System
STOP/L
LT
Stop Lamp
TLID
BL
Trunk Lid Opener
TAIL/L
LT
Parking, License and Tail Lamps
TCCSIG
AT
A/T TCC Signal (Lock Up)
TCS
BRC
TCV
AT
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
TPS
AT
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS1
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS2
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS3
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TRNSCV
BL
HOMELINK® Universal Transceiver
TRSA/T
AT
Turbine Revolution Sensor
TRSC
AT
Turbine Revolution Sensor
G
H
I
J
Traction Control System
TURN
LT
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps
VEHSEC
BL
Vehicle Security System
VENT/V
EC
EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve
VIAS
EC
Variable Air Induction Control System
VIAS/V
EC
Variable Air Induction Control System Valve
VSSA/T
AT
Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)
VSSATC
AT
Revolution Sensor
VSSMTR
AT
Vehicle Speed Sensor Meter
W/ANT
AV
Audio Antenna
WARN
DI
Warning Lamps
WINDOW
GW
Power Window
WIPER
WW
Front Wiper and Washer
Revision: March 2005
A
PG-61
PG
L
M
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PFP:25230
EKS008UQ
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WKIA4119E
Revision: March 2005
PG-62
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4120E
Revision: March 2005
PG-63
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
WKIA2765E
Revision: March 2005
PG-64
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Fuse
●
●
●
●
EKS008UR
A
If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before
installing new fuse.
Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not
used for a long period of time.
B
C
D
CEL083
Fusible Link
EKS008US
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by
feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
●
If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
●
Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:
Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl
or rubber parts.
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
E
F
G
H
WKIA0123E
EKS008UT
I
For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20
seconds.
A circuit breaker is used for the following systems:
●
Power seat
●
Power windows
●
Power door locks
●
Remote keyless entry system
J
PG
L
SBF284E
M
Revision: March 2005
PG-65
2005 Altima
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
PFP:B4341
EKS008UU
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
●
The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
●
SEL769DA
Revision: March 2005
PG-66
2005 Altima
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
●
The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
●
The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below.
CAUTION:
●
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
●
Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
●
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
AEL299C
Revision: March 2005
PG-67
2005 Altima
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
●
Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
●
Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked,
the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION:
●
Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors
from SRS components.
●
WHIA0103E
Revision: March 2005
PG-68
2005 Altima
ELECTRICAL UNITS
ELECTRICAL UNITS
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:23710
A
EKS008UV
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA3348E
Revision: March 2005
PG-69
2005 Altima
STANDARDIZED RELAY
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
PFP:25230
EKS008UW
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
SEL881H
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
SEL882H
1M
1 Make
2M
2 Make
1T
1 Transfer
1M·1B
1 Make 1 Break
Revision: March 2005
PG-70
2005 Altima
STANDARDIZED RELAY
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA0253E
Revision: March 2005
PG-71
2005 Altima
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:24350
EKS008UX
WKIA4121E
Revision: March 2005
PG-72
2005 Altima
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:24381
A
EKS008UY
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PG
L
M
WKIA4122E
Revision: March 2005
PG-73
2005 Altima
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Revision: March 2005
PG-74
2005 Altima
G STEERING
SECTION
PS
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions for Steering System .............................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
POWER STEERING FLUID ........................................ 5
Checking Fluid Level ................................................ 5
Checking Fluid Leakage ........................................... 5
Bleeding Hydraulic System ...................................... 6
STEERING WHEEL .................................................... 7
On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 7
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY ................ 7
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL .......................................................... 7
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE .................................................................. 7
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
STEERING COLUMN ................................................. 9
Removal and installation .......................................... 9
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 10
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................11
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ............ 12
On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 12
Revision: March 2005
CHECKING STEERING GEAR ........................... 12
CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE ..................... 12
CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT ....... 12
CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE .................. 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 16
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 16
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 16
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 17
Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force ......................... 18
DECREASE ......................................................... 18
INCREASE .......................................................... 19
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ............................... 20
On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 20
CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .................... 20
Removal and Installation ........................................ 20
REMOVAL ........................................................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 20
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 21
PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION .................... 21
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 22
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22
Inspection After Disassembly ................................. 24
HYDRAULIC LINE .................................................... 25
Removal and Installation ........................................ 25
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 26
General Specifications ............................................ 26
Steering Wheel ....................................................... 26
Steering Column ..................................................... 26
Power Steering ....................................................... 26
Steering Gear and Linkage ..................................... 27
PS-1
2005 Altima
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EGS000QL
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Steering System
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
EGS000QM
Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might
interfere with their operation.
Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable
solvent.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic
parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease.
Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated.
Revision: March 2005
PS-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EGS000QN
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV48102500
(J33914)
Pressure gauge adapter
B
Measuring oil pressure
C
D
S-NT542
ST27180001
(J25726-A)
Steering wheel puller
E
Removing steering wheel
F
S-NT544
HT72520000
(J25730-A)
Ball joint remover
PS
Removing ball joint
a: 33 mm (1.30 in)
b: 60 mm (2.36 in)
r: 9 mm (0.35 in) radius
H
I
S-NT546
KV48103500
(J26357 and J26357-10)
Pressure gauge
Measuring oil pressure
J
K
S-NT547
Commercial Service Tool
EGS000QO
Tool number
Description
Oil pump attachment
Disassembling and assembling oil pump
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT774
Spring gauge
Measuring steering wheel turning force or
rack sliding force
LST025
Revision: March 2005
PS-3
2005 Altima
L
M
Symptom
Shimmy
Judder
Revision: March 2005
EM-15, "Checking Drive Belts"
PS-20, "On-Vehicle Service"
Steering gear rack sliding force
Drive belt looseness
Improper steering wheel
Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever
Mounting rubber deterioration
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PS-4
×
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WHEEL HUB
SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
BRAKES
PS-12, "CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE"
Steering linkage looseness
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
PS-10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL"
Improper installation or looseness of steering column
DRIVE SHAFT
PS-10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL"
Steering column deformation or damage
PS-12, "CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT"
PS-10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL"
PS-18, "Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force"
PS-7, "CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY"
Steering wheel play
×
PS-5, "Checking Fluid Leakage"
×
Steering gear fluid leakage
×
FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY"
×
Tie-rod ball joint end play
×
FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY"
×
Tie-rod ball joint rotating torque
×
FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY"
Vibration
Tie-rod ball joint swinging force
Shake
PS-5, "POWER STEERING FLUID"
Noise
Air in hydraulic system
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
PS-5, "POWER STEERING FLUID"
Reference page
Fluid level
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EGS000QP
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
PFP:KLF20
A
EGS000QQ
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank.
Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° to 80°C (122° to
176°F).
Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° to 30°C (32° to 86° F).
CAUTION:
●
Do not overfill.
●
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
B
C
D
LGIA0021E
E
Checking Fluid Leakage
EGS000QR
Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
WGIA0103E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° to 80°C (140° to 176°F).
Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times.
Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds.
If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten.
Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
If fluid leakage from power steering pump is noticed, check the power steering pump. Refer to PS-16,
"INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY" .
Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating a steering gear leak.
Revision: March 2005
PS-5
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING FLUID
Bleeding Hydraulic System
1.
2.
EGS000QS
Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground.
Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent, into the steering fluid
reservoir tank to the specified level. Then quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until the fluid level no
longer decreases.
LGIA0021E
3.
Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following symptoms:
● Air bubbles in reservoir tank
● Clicking noise in oil pump
● Excessive buzzing in oil pump
If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump.
This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not
affect the performance or durability of the system.
Revision: March 2005
PS-6
2005 Altima
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:48430
A
EGS000QT
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY
●
With wheels in a straight-ahead position, check steering wheel
play.
Steering wheel play
●
: 35 mm (1.38 in) or less
If it is not within specification, check the following for looseness
or worn components.
Steering gear assembly
Steering column
Front suspension and axle
Check steering system for looseness while moving the steering
wheel in all directions.
Axial end play
B
C
D
WGIA0034E
: 0 mm (0 in)
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL
Pre-checking
●
●
E
F
Make sure that wheel alignment is correct. Refer to FSU-18, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" .
Verify that the steering gear is centered before removing the steering wheel.
PS
Checking
1.
2.
3.
Check that the steering wheel is in neutral position when driving
straight ahead.
If it is not in neutral position, remove the steering wheel and reinstall it correctly.
If the neutral position is between two teeth, loosen tie-rod lock
nuts. Turn the tie-rods by the same amount in opposite directions on both left and right sides.
H
I
J
WGIA0036E
K
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake.
Start engine.
Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. Make sure the fluid temperature is
approximately 60° to 80°C (140° to 176°F).
Tires need to be inflated to normal pressure.
Check steering wheel turning force when steering wheel has
been turned 360° from the neutral position.
Steering wheel turning
force
5.
6.
7.
: 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less
If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, check rack
sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING
FORCE" .
If rack sliding force is not within specifications, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-18, "Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force" .
If rack sliding force is OK, inspect steering column. Refer to PS10, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" .
Revision: March 2005
PS-7
WGIA0035E
2005 Altima
L
M
STEERING WHEEL
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1.
2.
Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning
angle. Refer to FSU-18, "General Specifications (Front)" .
If it is not within specifications, check rack stroke. Refer to PS27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" .
SMA127
Removal and Installation
EGS000QU
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Remove the driver air bag module.
Refer to SRS-43, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the steering wheel center nut.
Remove the steering wheel with the Tool.
Tool number
5.
: ST27180001 (J25726-A)
Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be
rotated out of position.
WGIA0097E
INSTALLATION
1.
●
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make
sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral
position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right
end position and ending with the knob at the top.
LGIA0004E
CAUTION:
The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position.
Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel
beyond the limited number of turns. (The spiral cable can be turned up to 2.5 turns from the neutral
position to both the right and left.)
Steering wheel center nut
Revision: March 2005
: 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb)
PS-8
2005 Altima
STEERING COLUMN
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and installation
PFP:48810
A
EGS000QV
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
WGIA0099E
1.
Driver air bag module
2.
Steering wheel
3.
Spiral cable
4.
Steering wheel side cover
5.
Wiper/washer switch
6.
Headlamp switch
7.
Upper and lower column covers
8.
Ignition switch
9.
Upper joint
Revision: March 2005
PS-9
2005 Altima
STEERING COLUMN
10. Steering column (manual tilt/telescope type)
11. Lower joint and shaft assembly
12. Cowl panel
13. Hole cover
14. Shaft lower cover
15. Lower knee protector
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
The rotation of the spiral cable (SRS air bag component part) is limited. If the steering gear must
be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column
while the steering gear is removed.
●
Remove the steering wheel before disconnecting the coupling joint to avoid damaging the spiral
cable.
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. If necessary, remove the steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Remove the instrument column cover and lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT
PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
4. Remove the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "Combination Meter" .
5. Remove the cluster lid and center console assembly. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
6. Remove the instrument panel screws from the LH side of the instrument panel to allow the ignition switch
to clear the instrument panel during removal.
7. Remove lower knee protector.
8. Disconnect the following:
● Headlamp switch
● Wiper switch
● Spiral cable
● Key switch and key lock solenoid
● NATS antenna amplifier
● Illumination lamp
● Ignition switch
● Column harness clips, position aside
9. Remove the shaft lower cover.
10. Remove the pinch bolt.
11. Remove the steering column nuts and steering column.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
●
1.
2.
●
When the steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows:
Check the column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose
grease. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
Check the column tube for deformation or breakage. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary.
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard during a turn, check the length (L) of the column.
On models equipped with telescopic feature, make sure the column is in the forward most position before measuring.
If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Steering column length (L)
●
●
●
●
: 496 mm (19.53 in)
Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary.
Check for wear around the seal edges, replace as necessary.
Check for corrosion or pitting around the seal sliding area.
Replace the seal and shaft in case of seal edge wear or damage.
Revision: March 2005
PS-10
LGIA0020E
2005 Altima
STEERING COLUMN
●
After installing the steering column, check the tilt mechanism for
proper operation.
Tilt mechanism range
A
: 3° per notch at 7 steps
CAUTION:
Do not exert any load or impact in the axial direction immediately before or after column removal.
●
After installation check for smooth steering wheel rotation,
without any catches or noise.
●
Replace the column if it is depleted of grease, worn, damWGIA0026E
aged, or if any scratches or coating separation are present
on the shaft seal area.
●
The nut on the upper joint may not be reused.
●
During lower joint detachment, insert a tool into the yoke groove to prevent gouging damage.
●
A washer must be used on all fastener bolts.
●
B
C
D
E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
F
CAUTION:
When installing the steering column, finger-tighten all of the lower bracket and joint retaining bolts;
then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column.
PS
NOTE:
Align slit of the coupling joint with projection on dust cover. Insert the
joint until surface A contacts surface B.
H
●
After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves
smoothly. Ensure the number of turns are the same from the
straight-forward position to left and right locks. Be sure that the
I
steering wheel is in a neutral position when driving straight
ahead.
J
SST491C
Disassembly and Assembly
●
●
●
EGS000QW
Remove the tamper resistant self-shear type screws with a drill or other appropriate tool.
Disconnect key interlock cable.
Install new tamper resistant self-shear type screws.
K
L
M
WGIA0009E
Revision: March 2005
PS-11
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:49001
EGS000QX
CHECKING STEERING GEAR
●
●
●
●
Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and fluid leakage. Refer to PS-5, "Checking Fluid
Leakage" .
Check connection with steering column for looseness.
Prior to removing the steering gear from the vehicle, check rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" .
If rack sliding force is not within specification, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-18, "Adjustment for
Rack Sliding Force" .
CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE
●
Check ball joint, and other component parts for looseness, wear, and damage.
CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT
1.
Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface.
● Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg, 11 lb) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement.
Turn off ignition key while checking.
Movement of gear housing
2.
: ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less
If movement exceeds the limit, replace or repair as necessary.
CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from the gear.
Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature.
Pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm
(±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack sliding force is within specification.
Average rack sliding
force
Maximum force
deviation
4.
: 210.7 - 298.9 N (21.49 30.49 kg-f, 47.37 - 67.19 lb-f)
: 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
Check sliding force outside the above range at rack speed 40
mm (1.57 in)/s.
SST090B
Rack sliding force
Maximum
: Not more than 294 N (30 kg-f,
66 lb-f)
Maximum devia: 147 N (15 kg-f, 33 lb-f)
tion
Revision: March 2005
PS-12
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
EGS000QY
A
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
K
L
M
WGIA0108E
1.
Outer tie-rod end
2.
Cotter pin
3.
Steering gear front insulator
(QG25DE)
4.
Suspension member
5.
Steering gear rear insulator
(QG25DE)
6.
Steering gear insulator (VQ35DE)
7.
Power steering gear and linkage
assembly
Revision: March 2005
PS-13
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
The rotation of the driver air bag spiral cable is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set
the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed.
●
Remove the steering wheel and spiral cable before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable.
1. Remove the two front tires using power tool.
2. Disconnect the outer tie-rod ends using Tool.
Tool number
: HT72520000 (J25730-A)
WGIA0101E
3.
Remove the lower joint pinch bolt.
LGIA0002E
4.
Disconnect the power steering high and low pressure lines from the steering gear.
5.
Remove the two power steering gear mounting bolts.
● Remove steering gear insulators to gain access.
● Do not remove the steering gear mounting bracket from the
gear housing.
Remove the power steering gear and linkage assembly.
6.
WGIA0043E
Revision: March 2005
PS-14
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
INSTALLATION
A
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Install pipe connector.
●
Use the specified tightening torque when installing the highpressure and low-pressure pipe connections. Excessive tightening will damage threads of connection or O-ring.
B
C
D
WGIA0008E
E
●
●
The O-ring in low-pressure pipe connector is larger than that in high-pressure connector. Take care to
install the proper O-ring.
Initially, tighten nut on tie-rod outer socket and knuckle arm to
specification. Then tighten further to align nut groove with first
pin hole so that the cotter pin can be installed.
Outer tie-rod grooved nut
F
PS
: 29 - 39 N·m (3 - 4 kg-m,
22 - 29 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N·m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb).
H
SST824A
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PS-15
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Disassembly and Assembly
EGS000QZ
WGIA0010E
1.
Steering gear
2.
Gear housing fluid tube
3.
Boot clamp
4
Dust boot
5.
Boot band
6.
Tie-rod inner socket
7.
Inner tie-rod
8.
Outer tie-rod
9.
Cotter pin
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise.
1. Remove the outer tie-rod sockets.
2. Remove the inner tie-rod sockets and boots.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Blow dry with compressed air.
Revision: March 2005
PS-16
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Boot
●
●
Check condition of boot. If cracked, replace it.
Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating steering gear leak, replace the gear.
Gear
●
A
B
Thoroughly examine steering gear. If damaged, cracked, leaking, or worn, replace it.
Inner and outer tie-rods
●
●
●
●
C
Check ball joints for swinging force:
Tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force A. Refer to PS27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" .
Check ball joint for rotating torque:
Tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque B. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" .
Check ball joints for axial end play:
Tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play C. Refer to PS27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" .
Check condition of dust cover. If cracked, replace outer tie-rod.
D
E
F
SST468C
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
PS
Install the inner tie-rods.
Install the outer tie-rods to the specified length and tighten the
outer socket lock nut. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" .
Use Genuine High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking
Sealant (Red) or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED
CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
Outer socket lock nut
H
I
: 37 - 46 N·m (3.8 - 4.7 kg-m,
27 - 34 ft-lb)
J
SST113C
3.
K
Measure rack stroke. Refer to PS-27, "Steering Gear and Linkage" .
L
M
SST086BA
4.
Before installing boot, coat the contact surfaces between boot
and tie-rod with grease.
SST967A
Revision: March 2005
PS-17
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
5.
Install the boot clamps and crimp securely.
AST139
Adjustment for Rack Sliding Force
EGS000R0
DECREASE
Decrease rack sliding force as follows:
1. Loosen adjusting screw two rotations counter clockwise.
CAUTION:
● Do not remove adjusting screw.
● Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations.
2. Tighten adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding
force is within specification.
Average rack sliding force
Maximum force
deviation
: 210.7 - 298.9 N (21.49 - 30.49 kg-f,
47.37 - 67.19 lb-f)
: 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
NOTE:
Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is
less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb).
LGIA0018E
3.
4.
5.
Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" .
If rack sliding force is out of specification, adjust rack sliding force again.
If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification, replace steering gear. Refer to PS-13,
"Removal and Installation" .
Revision: March 2005
PS-18
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
INCREASE
A
Increase rack sliding force as follows:
1. Tighten adjusting screw until it is flush with housing surface.
CAUTION:
● Do not remove adjusting screw.
● Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is
removed or loosened more than two rotations.
B
C
D
LGIA0019E
2.
E
Loosen adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding
force is within specification.
Average rack sliding force
Maximum force
deviation
: 210.7 - 298.9 N (21.49 - 30.49 kg-f,
47.37 - 67.19 lb-f)
: 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f)
F
PS
NOTE:
Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is
less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb).
LGIA0018E
3.
4.
5.
Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-12, "CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE" .
If rack sliding force is out of specification, adjust rack sliding force again.
If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification, replace steering gear.
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PS-19
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
On-Vehicle Service
PFP:49110
EGS000R1
CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure.
1. Set Tools. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to PS-6,
"Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
Tool numbers : KV48102500 (J33914), KV48103500
(J26357 and J26357-10)
2.
3.
Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60 to 80°C (140
to 176°F).
WARNING:
Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine
WGIA0105E
is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in oil
pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature
abnormally.
Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds.
Oil pump maximum standard pressure : 8,000 - 8,800 kPa (82 - 90 kg/cm, 1,160 - 1,276 psi)
If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK.
If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow
control valve. Refer to PS-20, "On-Vehicle Service" .
If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and
check pressure again.
CAUTION:
Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds.
● If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to PS-13,
"Removal and Installation" .
● If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to PS-20,
"Removal and Installation" .
After checking hydraulic system, remove Tools and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out
of system. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
●
●
4.
5.
Removal and Installation
EGS000R2
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen adjust screw and oil pump bolt, then remove belt.
Remove oil pump union bolts and hose.
Remove oil pump bracket bolts.
Remove oil pump.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Adjust belt tension.
Refer to MA-15, "Checking Drive Belts" (QR25DE), MA-22, "Checking Drive Belts" (VQ35DE).
●
Bleed air after installation.
Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
Revision: March 2005
PS-20
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Disassembly and Assembly
EGS000R3
A
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
WGIA0122E
1.
Pulley
2.
Snap ring
3.
Drive shaft
4.
Oil seal
5.
Suction pipe
6.
O-ring
7.
Spring
8.
Flow control valve
9.
O-ring
10. Connector
11. Washer
12. Joint
13. Connector bolt
14. Pump case
15. O-ring
16. O-ring
17. Front side plate
18. Vane
19. Rotor
20. Pin
21. Cam ring
22. Gasket
23. Rear cover
24. Mounting bracket
K
L
M
25. Oil pump bracket
PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION
Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found.
●
Oil leak from any point shown in the figure
●
Deformed or damaged pulley
●
Poor performance
SST984A
Revision: March 2005
PS-21
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
●
Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited. Never disassemble parts other than those
specified.
●
Disassemble in as clean a place as possible.
●
Clean your hands before disassembly.
●
Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels.
●
Follow the procedures and cautions in the Service Manual.
●
When disassembling and reassembling, do not let foreign matter enter or contact the parts.
1.
Remove snap ring, then draw drive shaft out using press.
Be careful not to drop drive shaft.
SST010B
2.
Remove oil seal using a flat blade screwdriver as shown.
Be careful not to damage front housing.
SST034A
3.
Remove connector and flow control valve with spring.
Be careful not to drop flow control valve.
SST036A
4.
Inspect all of the power steering oil pump components, and repair or replace as necessary. Refer to PS16, "INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY" .
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly, noting the following instructions.
●
Install new O-rings and make sure they are properly installed.
Revision: March 2005
PS-22
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
●
●
●
Install new oil seal using a drift, and make sure oil seal direction
is as shown.
Cam ring, rotor and vanes must be replaced as a set if necessary.
Coat each part with Genuine NISSAN PSF when assembling.
A
B
C
SST038A
D
●
Pay attention to the direction of rotor.
E
F
PS
WST031
●
H
When assembling vanes to rotor, rounded surfaces of vanes
must face cam ring side.
I
J
K
SST843A
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PS-23
2005 Altima
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
●
Insert pin 2 into pin groove 1 of front housing and front side
plate. Then install cam ring 3 as shown.
Cam ring
: D1 is less than D2
WST035
Inspection After Disassembly
●
●
●
EGS000R4
If pulley is cracked or deformed, replace it.
If an oil leak is found around pulley shaft oil seal, replace the seal.
If the pulley or pulley shaft is deformed or worn, replace it.
Revision: March 2005
PS-24
2005 Altima
HYDRAULIC LINE
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
PFP:49721
A
EGS000R5
Refer to the illustration for hydraulic line routing. Remove any components to access lines.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to kink or bend lines.
B
C
D
E
F
PS
H
I
J
WGIA0123E
1.
Power steering fluid reservoir
2.
Power steering oil cooler
3.
Power steering gear
4.
Power steering pressure switch
(QR25DE)
5.
Power steering pressure switch
(VQ35DE)
6.
Power steering oil pump
7.
Washer
8.
Tube
9.
Hose
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
PS-25
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PFP:00100
EGS000R6
Power steering
Steering model
QR25DE
VQ35DE
Steering gear type
PR26AD
Steering overall gear ratio
16.1 : 1
Turns of steering wheel (Lock to lock)
2.8
Steering column type
2.6 (SE, SE-R), 2.8 (S, SL)
Collapsible, tilt, non-motorized telescoping
Steering Wheel
EGS000R7
Steering wheel axial play mm (in)
Steering wheel play
0 (0)
mm (in)
Movement of gear housing
35 (1.38) or less
±2 (±0.08) or less
mm (in)
Steering Column
EGS000R8
Applied model
Steering column length “L”
All
mm (in)*
496 (19.53)
LGIA0020E
*: On models equipped with telescopic feature, make sure the column is in the forward most position before measuring.
Power Steering
EGS000R9
Applied model
All
Steering gear type
PR26AD
Pump type
F40
Steering wheel turning force
(Measured at one full turn from the neutral position) N (kg-f, lb-f)
39 (4, 9) or less
Fluid capacity (Approximate)
1.0 (2 1/8, 1 3/4)
Oil pump maximum pressure
Revision: March 2005
(US pt., Imp pt.)
8,000 - 8,800
(82 - 90, 1,160 - 1,276)
kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
PS-26
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Gear and Linkage
EGS000RA
A
Applied model
All
Steering gear type
PR26AD
Swinging force at cotter pin hole: “A”
f, lb-f)
Tie-rod outer ball joint
Rotating torque: “B”
Axial end play: “C”
Swinging force*: “A”
Tie-rod inner ball joint
Axial end play: “C”
N (kg-
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
6.47 - 64.63 (0.66 - 6.59, 1.46 - 14.53)
0.29 - 2.94 (3.0 - 30.0, 2.6 - 26.0)
mm (in)
C
0.4 (0.016) or less
N (kg-f, lb-f)
B
5.69 - 45.60 (0.58 - 4.65, 1.28 - 10.25)
mm (in)
0.2 (0.008) or less
D
*: Measuring point: 172 mm
(6.77 in)
E
F
PS
SST468C
Tie-rod standard length “L”
mm (in)
208.8 (8.220)
H
I
J
K
SGIA0167E
Initial tightening torque
Retainer adjustment
Adjusting screw
Retightening torque after loosening
(kg-cm, in-lb)
L
0.2 (2, 1.7)
4.9 - 5.9 (50 - 60, 43 - 52)
M
degree
60° - 80°
Range within ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) from the
neutral position at rack speed of 3.5 mm
(0.138 in)/s
Except for the above range
Revision: March 2005
4.9 - 5.9 (50 - 60, 43 - 52)
N·m
Tightening torque after gear has
settled N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
Returning angle
Rack sliding force N (kg-f, lbf)
Under normal operating oil
pressure
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
PS-27
Average force
210.7 - 298.9 (21.49 30.49, 47.37 - 67.19)
Maximum force deviation
98 (10, 22)
Maximum sliding force
294 (30, 66)
Maximum force deviation
147 (15, 33)
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Rack stroke “S”
16 inch tire: 69.5 mm (2.74 in)
17 inch tire: 66.5 mm (2.62 in)
mm (in)
SST086BA
Revision: March 2005
PS-28
2005 Altima
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
RAX
REAR AXLE
A
B
C
RAX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
WHEEL HUB .............................................................. 5
On-vehicle Service ................................................... 5
REAR WHEEL BEARING ..................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
REMOVAL ............................................................. 6
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 8
Wheel Bearing (Rear) ............................................... 8
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RAX-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
●
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
EDS001DE
When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be
carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground.
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack,
hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake
tubes.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel
alignment.
Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link.
Always torque brake lines when installing.
Revision: March 2005
RAX-2
SBR686C
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS001DF
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
ST15310000
(
—
Drift
B
Install ABS sensor rotor
a: 84 mm (3.31 in) dia.
b: 96 mm (3.78 in) dia.
c: 8 mm (0.31 in)
d: 20 mm (0.79 in)
)
C
RAX
NT607
E
Commercial Service Tools
EDS001DG
Tool name
Description
GG94310000
1 Flare nut crowfoot
2 Torque wrench
Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
F
G
NT360
Drift
H
Install ABS sensor rotor
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
I
J
NT371
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
K
L
PBIC0190E
M
Revision: March 2005
RAX-3
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EDS001DH
RAX-6
RAX-6
RAX-5
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Improper installation, looseness
Parts interference
Wheel bearing damage
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
Noise
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
Judder
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
Reference page
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
REAR AXLE
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: March 2005
RAX-4
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB
WHEEL HUB
On-vehicle Service
PFP:43202
A
EDS001DI
Check axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear or damage.
●
Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play.
B
C
RAX
SMA525A
E
REAR WHEEL BEARING
●
Check axial end play.
Axial end play
●
●
F
: 0.1 mm (0.0040 in) or less
Check that wheel hub bearings operate smoothly.
Replace wheel bearing assembly if there is axial end play or
wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Refer to RAX-5, "Onvehicle Service" .
G
H
LDIA0009E
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RAX-5
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB
Removal and Installation
EDS001DJ
WDIA0026E
1.
Knuckle
2.
Baffle plate
3.
Wheel hub assembly
4.
Brake rotor
5.
Wheel nut
6.
Anchor block
7.
ABS sensor
8.
Parking brake cable
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Wheel hub assembly does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted,
replace the wheel hub assembly.
●
A growling noise is emitted from the wheel hub assembly while driving.
●
The wheel hub assembly drags or turns roughly.
1. Remove the rear wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove the brake caliper assembly using power tool.
● The brake hose does not need to be disconnected from the brake caliper.
● Suspend the brake caliper assembly using wire, do not stretch the brake hose.
● Do not depress the brake pedal, or the caliper piston will pop out.
● Do not twist the brake hose.
3. Remove the brake rotor.
Revision: March 2005
RAX-6
2005 Altima
WHEEL HUB
4.
5.
Remove the rear ABS sensor, then move it away from the wheel hub assembly.
CAUTION:
Failure to remove the ABS sensor may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor being
inoperative.
Remove the wheel hub assembly from knuckle.
A
B
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for any deformity, cracks, or damage on the wheel hub assembly, replace if necessary.
C
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Check that the wheel bearings operate smoothly.
●
Check that the wheel hub bearing axial end play is within specification.
Axial end play
RAX
E
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less
F
G
LDIA0009E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RAX-7
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing (Rear)
Wheel bearing axial end play
Revision: March 2005
PFP:00030
EDS001DK
0.1 mm (0.0040 in) or less
RAX-8
2005 Altima
I BODY
SECTION
RF
ROOF
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special service tool .................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 6
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 8
SUNROOF ................................................................ 10
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 10
System Description ................................................ 10
OUTLINE ............................................................. 10
OPERATION ....................................................... 10
Revision: March 2005
RF-1
RETAINED POWER OPERATION ...................... 11
ONE TOUCH SLIDE/TILT OPERATION .............. 11
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE ....................... 11
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION ........ 11
CAN Communication System Description .............. 11
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — ................................ 12
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 13
Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor
Assembly ................................................................ 13
Work Flow ............................................................... 13
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 14
CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 14
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 15
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 15
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 15
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 15
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 16
Sunroof Switch System Check ............................... 17
Sunroof Switch Power Supply Circuit Check .......... 18
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check .......................................................... 19
Door Switch Check ................................................. 21
Link and Wire Assembly ......................................... 23
Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 23
GAP ADJUSTMENT (A-A, C-C) .......................... 23
GAP ADJUSTMENT (B-B) .................................. 23
HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT .............. 24
Removal and Installation ........................................ 24
SUNROOF UNIT ................................................. 26
GLASS LID .......................................................... 26
SUNSHADE ........................................................ 27
SUNROOF MOTOR ............................................ 27
2005 Altima
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS003LN
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions
EIS003LO
Disconnect both battery cables in advance.
●
Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance.
●
Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.
●
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may
get in the way with cloth.
●
When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape.
●
Keep removed parts protected with cloth.
●
If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.
●
If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.
●
Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.
●
After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.
●
Remove stains in the following way.
Water-soluble stains:
Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain
with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely.
Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.
●
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.
●
Revision: March 2005
RF-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special service tool
PFP:00002
A
EIS003LP
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and
Rattle Kit
E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
SIIA0994E
RF
Commercial Service Tool
EIS003LQ
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
J
Description
Engine ear
(J-39565)
Locating the noise
K
L
SIIA0995E
M
Revision: March 2005
RF-3
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS003LR
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions. Hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: March 2005
RF-4
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle "twist".
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
F
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
RF
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Each item can be ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)
76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)
76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
L
●
Revision: March 2005
RF-5
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll.
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS0048D
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
Revision: March 2005
RF-6
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the RF
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
J
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- K
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
L
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: March 2005
RF-7
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS003LT
WIIA0288E
Revision: March 2005
RF-8
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: March 2005
RF-9
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:91210
EIS003LU
LIIA1403E
System Description
EIS003LV
OUTLINE
Electric sunroof system consists of
●
Sunroof switch
●
Sunroof motor assembly
●
Front door switches
●
BCM (body control module)
BCM supplies power to the sunroof motor and sunroof switch. Sunroof operation depends on sunroof switch
condition.
OPERATION
Power supplied at all times
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through BCM terminal 69
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 11.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
TILT UP OPERATION
When the tilt switch is operated for tilt up, power is supplied
●
to sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof switch terminal 6
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 6
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
Then, the sunroof will tilt up.
Revision: March 2005
RF-10
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
TILT DOWN OPERATION
A
When the tilt switch is operated for tilt down, power is supplied
●
to sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof switch terminal 4
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 6
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
Then, the sunroof will tilt down.
B
C
D
SLIDE OPEN OPERATION
When the switch is operated for slide open, power is supplied
●
to sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof switch terminal 1
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 10.
Ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 6
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
Then, the sunroof will slide open.
E
F
G
SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION
When the switch is operated for slide close, power is supplied
●
to sunroof switch terminal 2
●
through sunroof switch terminal 3
●
through sunroof motor assembly terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
●
to sunroof motor assembly terminal 6
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
Then, the sunroof will slide closed.
H
RF
J
RETAINED POWER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to RF-14, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" .
K
L
ONE TOUCH SLIDE/TILT OPERATION
To fully slide the sunroof open, press and release the sunroof slide switch to the slide open position. To fully tilt
the sunroof up, press and release the sunroof tilt switch to the tilt up position.
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE
If the battery is disconnected or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the slide switch will
become inoperable and the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from
any sunroof position, push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (UP) position until the sunroof is in the
fully vented (tilt up) position. The sunroof should now operate normally.
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION
The CPU (central processing unit) monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fully-closed
or other) by the signals from the sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following sliding close operations, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until it reaches full open position.
●
automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position
●
automatic close operation during retained power operation.
CAN Communication System Description
EIS003LW
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
RF-11
2005 Altima
M
SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
EIS003LX
LIWA0368E
Revision: March 2005
RF-12
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EIS003LY
A
Terminal
Wire Color
12
P/L
38
R
47
SB
67
B
68
W/L
Item
Front door switch RH signal
Ignition power supply
Front door switch LH signal
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
ON (Open)
0
OFF (Closed)
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON or START
Battery voltage
ON (Open)
0
OFF (Closed)
Battery voltage
Ground
RAP signal
B
C
—
0
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
D
Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is
turned OFF
Battery voltage
When front door LH or RH is open while
retained power is operating
0
E
69
W/R
Power window power supply
—
Battery voltage
70
W/B
BAT power supply
—
Battery voltage
Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor Assembly
Terminal
Wire Color
1
L/R
Item
Condition
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
TILT UP position
Sunroof switch TILT UP signal
Other than above
2
OR
Sunroof switch TILT DOWN signal
5
6
10
P
W/L
B
Y
Sunroof switch CLOSE signal
RAP signal
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in
TILT DOWN position
Sunroof switch OPEN signal
W/R
4.
5.
Battery voltage
0
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is
turned OFF
Battery voltage
When front door LH or RH is open while
retained power is operating
0
—
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch
OPEN position
BAT power supply
0
—
Battery voltage
EIS003M0
RF-13
RF
J
K
M
Battery voltage
Check the symptom and customer's requests.
Understand the outline of system. Refer to RF-10, "System Description" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction.
Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
Does sunroof system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3.
Inspection End.
Revision: March 2005
H
L
0
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
Battery voltage
Other than above
Other than above
11
Battery voltage
0
Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch
CLOSE position
Ground
G
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
0
Other than above
3
EIS003LZ
F
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EIS003M1
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Description
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM".
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
RF-14
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
4.
Touch "RETAINED PWR" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
A
B
C
LIIA0163E
D
5.
Select diagnosis mode. "DATA MONITOR", "ACTIVE TEST" and
"WORK SUPPORT" are available.
E
F
G
BCIA0031E
WORK SUPPORT
Work item
H
Description
RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s
power supply period between two steps.
RETAINED PWR SET
●
MODE 1 (45 sec.) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.)
RF
ACTIVE TEST
Description
J
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM to power window system, power
sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED PWR" on
CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF.
K
Test item
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position. "RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen
when ignition switch ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained
power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or
"OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF.
RETAINED PWR
M
DATA MONITOR
Monitored item
Description
IGN ON SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
Symptom
Sunroof does not operate.
Revision: March 2005
L
EIS003M2
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
Refer to page
1. Sunroof motor assembly power supply and
ground circuit check
RF-19
2. Sunroof switch system check
RF-17
3. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
RF-16
4. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-27
RF-15
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
Symptom
Retained power operation does not operate properly.
Motor does not stop at the sunroof fully-open or fully-closed
position.
Sunroof does not do the interruption detection.
Diagnostic procedure and repair order
Refer to page
1. Check the retained power operation mode setting
RF-15
2. BCM power supply and ground circuit check
RF-16
3. Door switch check
RF-21
4. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-27
1. Memory reset procedure
RF-11
2. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-27
1. Replace sunroof motor assembly
RF-27
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS003M3
1. CHECK FUSE
Check the following BCM fuse and fusible link.
Component Parts
BCM
Terminal No. (SIGNAL)
Ampere
No.
Location
38 (IGN power supply)
10A
1
Fuse block (J/B)
70 (BAT power supply)
50A
f
Fuse and fusible link box
NOTE:
Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM connectors M18 and M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
M18
M20
(–)
38 (R)
70 (W/B)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch ON
Ground
Igniting switch OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0229E
3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and
ground.
Connector
M20
Terminals (Wire color)
67 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
WIIA0230E
Revision: March 2005
RF-16
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
Sunroof Switch System Check
EIS003M4
1. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY INPUT SIGNAL
A
1.
2.
3.
B
Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R5
terminals 1, 2, 3, 10 and ground.
C
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Sunroof switch in TILT
UP position
Battery voltage
(–)
1 (L/R)
Other than above
R5
10 (Y)
E
Battery voltage
LIIA1408E
Ground
3 (P)
0
Sunroof switch in TILT
DOWN position
2 (O/R)
D
Other than above
0
Sunroof switch in
CLOSE position
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
Sunroof switch in
OPEN position
Battery voltage
Other than above
0
F
G
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace sunroof motor. Refer to RF-27, "SUNROOF MOTOR" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
RF
2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector and sunroof switch connector.
Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector
R5 terminals 1, 2, 3, 10 and sunroof switch connector R4 terminals 1, 3, 4, 6.
1 (L/R) - 6 (L/R)
2 (O) - 4 (O)
3 (P) - 3 (P)
10 (Y) - 1 (Y)
K
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between sunroof motor
assembly and sunroof switch.
Revision: March 2005
J
RF-17
L
M
LIIA1412E
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
3. CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH
Operate sunroof slide switch and check continuity of the sunroof switch as follows.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
1 (Y)
3 (P)
R4
2 (W/R)
4 (OR)
6 (L/R)
Condition
Continuity
Sunroof switch in OPEN
position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in
CLOSE position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in TILT
DOWN position
Yes
Other than above
No
Sunroof switch in TILT
UP position
Yes
Other than above
No
LIIA1413E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Replace sunroof switch.
Sunroof Switch Power Supply Circuit Check
EIS003M5
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the sunroof switch connector.
Check voltage between sunroof switch connector R4 terminal 2
and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
R4
2 (W/R)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Ground
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after
ignition switch is turned
OFF
Battery voltage
When front door LH or
RH is open while retained
power is operating
0
LIIA1414E
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof switch power supply circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
RF-18
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
2. CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
69 (W/R) - 2 (W/R)
4.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and
sunroof switch connector R4 terminal 2.
B
: Continuity should exist.
C
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69
and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
D
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof switch power supply circuit is OK. Further
inspection is necessary. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof switch.
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
LIIA1415E
F
EIS003M6
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the sunroof motor assembly connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminal 5 (W/L), 11 (W/R) and ground.
Connector
Terminals (Wire color)
(+)
5 (W/L)
R5
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
Within 45 seconds after
ignition switch is turned
OFF
Battery voltage
H
RF
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
(–)
Ground
E
J
K
When front door LH or
RH is open while retained
power is operating
0
LIIA1416E
11 (W/R)
Ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
M
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminal 6 (B) and ground.
6 (B) - Ground
: Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to
RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
LIIA1418E
Revision: March 2005
RF-19
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69
and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0425E
4. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/
L), 69 (W/R) and sunroof motor assembly connector R5 terminal
5 (W/L), 11 (W/R).
68 (W/L) - 5 (W/L)
69 (W/R) - 11 (W/R)
4.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/
L), 69 (W/R) and ground.
68 (W/L) - Ground
69 (W/R) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
: Continuity should not exist.
LIIA1417E
OK or NG
OK
>> Sunroof motor assembly power supply circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to
RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly.
Revision: March 2005
RF-20
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
Door Switch Check
EIS003M7
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
A
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR" and "DOOR SW-AS") in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
B
Monitor item
Condition
Door open
: ON
Door closed
: OFF
Door open
: ON
Door closed
: OFF
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
C
D
E
PIIA2464E
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
Item
Connector
Terminals (Wire
color)
(+)
RH
M18
Condition
M19
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
H
(–)
12 (P/L)
Ground
LH
G
47 (SB)
Door OPEN
(switch closed)
0
Door CLOSED
(switch open)
Battery
voltage
Door OPEN
(switch closed)
0
Door CLOSED
(switch open)
Battery
voltage
RF
J
WIIA0234E
K
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switches are OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RF-21
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect front door switches and BCM.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH)
or B108 (RH) terminal 2 and BCM connectors M18, M19 terminals 12, 47.
Front door LH
2 (SB) - 47 (SB)
Front door RH
2 (P/L) - 12 (P/L)
3.
: Continuity should exist.
: Continuity should exist.
Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH)
or B108 (RH) terminal 2 (SB or P/L) and ground.
2 (SB or P/L) - Ground
: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof
motor assembly.
WIIA0626E
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check continuity between each door switch terminal 2 and body ground part of door switch.
Terminal
2
Body ground part
of door switch
Condition
Continuity
Door switch pushed
No
Door switch released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
WIIA0289E
4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 12, M19 terminal 47 and ground.
12 (P/L) - Ground
47 (SB) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and Installation of BCM" .
WIIA0234E
Revision: March 2005
RF-22
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
Link and Wire Assembly
EIS003M8
NOTE:
Before replacing a suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of noise being experienced.
1. Check link to determine if coating film has peeled off to such an extent that substrate is visible. Check also
to determine if link is the source of noise. If it is, replace it.
2. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of grease has been applied to wire or rail groove. If not,
add grease as required.
3. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, replace wire.
Fitting Adjustment
A
B
C
EIS003M9
D
E
F
G
H
RF
WIIA0101E
GAP ADJUSTMENT (A-A, C-C)
J
1. Open sunshade assembly.
2. Tilt glass lid up then remove side trim.
3. Loosen glass lid securing bolts, then tilt glass lid down.
4. Manually adjust glass lid from outside of vehicle so gap is within specifications and snug securing bolts.
5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times using sunroof switch to ensure smooth operation.
6. Tilt glass lid up and tighten bolts.
NOTE:
First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid to prevent lid from moving while tightening
other bolts.
Glass lid assembly
mounting bolts
: 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
GAP ADJUSTMENT (B-B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" .
Loosen sunroof assembly front end, side rail, and front and rear bracket attaching bolts.
Carefully slide sunroof assembly side to side until gap is within specifications and snug securing bolts.
Tilt glass lid up and down several times using sunroof switch to ensure smooth operation.
Tighten sunroof assembly front end, side rail, and front and rear bracket attaching bolts.
Sunroof assembly mounting bolts
Sunroof assembly front : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m,
end bolts
46 - 57 in-lb)
Sunroof assembly side : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m,
rail bolts
46 - 57 in-lb)
Revision: March 2005
RF-23
2005 Altima
K
L
M
SUNROOF
Sunroof assembly front
bracket bolts
Sunroof assembly rear
bracket bolts
: 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m,
46 - 57 in-lb)
: 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m,
46 - 57 in-lb)
HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
Tilt glass lid up and down.
Check height difference between roof panel and glass lid and compare to "A - A" as shown.
WIIA0103E
3.
●
●
●
If necessary, adjust height difference by using the following procedure.
Loosen glass lid securing bolts.
Manually raise/lower glass lid until height difference is within specification.
Tighten glass lid securing bolts.
Glass lid assembly
mounting bolts
: 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
Removal and Installation
EIS003MA
After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and lid alignment.
●
Handle glass lid with care so not to cause damage.
●
For easier installation, mark each point before removal.
CAUTION:
●
Always work with a helper.
●
Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly. Then, after removal, do not move the motor
assembly.
●
Revision: March 2005
RF-24
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
●
After installing the sunroof and glass lid, check gap adjustment to ensure there is no malfunction.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RF
J
K
L
M
WIIA0037E
1. Glass lid assembly
2. Sunshade assembly
3. Drain channel assembly
4. Sunroof assembly
5. Sunroof bracket
6. Drain hose connecting area
7. Sunroof motor
8. Sunroof switch bracket
9. Side trim
Revision: March 2005
RF-25
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
SUNROOF UNIT
Removal
CAUTION:
●
Always work with a helper.
●
When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage.
●
After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, be sure to check gap adjustment to ensure there is
no malfunction.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Disconnect drain hoses.
3. Close glass lid.
4. Remove sunroof switch bracket.
5. Disconnect sunroof motor harness electrical connector.
CAUTION:
●
Before removing sunroof motor, make sure that sunroof is fully closed.
●
After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor as a single unit.
6. Remove bolts on the front end and side rails.
7. Remove front sunroof bracket bolts.
8. Remove rear sunroof bracket bolts and remove sunroof unit from roof panel.
●
Remove sunroof unit through the passenger compartment while being careful not to damage the seats
and trim.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts on the rear sunroof brackets.
Bring sunroof unit into passenger compartment and place the rear end of the rail onto the rear sunroof
brackets.
Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts on the front end.
Tighten the installation point bolts diagonally excluding the installation point of the sunroof bracket around
the roof opening.
Tighten the bolts on the front sunroof bracket at the vehicle side and then at the rail side.
Tighten the bolts on the rear sunroof bracket at the vehicle side and then at the rail side.
Sunroof assembly mounting bolts
Sunroof assembly front : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb)
end bolts
Sunroof assembly side : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb)
rail bolts
Sunroof assembly front : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb)
bracket bolts
Sunroof assembly rear : 5.1 - 6.47 N·m (0.52 - 0.66 kg-m, 46 - 57 in-lb)
bracket bolts
7.
8.
9.
Install sunroof motor switch bracket.
Connect drain hoses.
Install headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" .
GLASS LID
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open sunroof shade.
Ensure glass lid is closed.
Carefully pry away trim to access glass lid securing bolts.
Remove bolts securing glass lid assembly to sunroof assembly.
Installation
1.
Position glass lid to sunroof assembly.
Revision: March 2005
RF-26
2005 Altima
SUNROOF
2.
Tighten glass lid assembly bolts to specification. (First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on
glass lid to prevent lid from moving while tightening other bolts.)
Glass lid assembly
mounting bolts
3.
4.
A
: 3.0 - 5.0 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
B
Position and push trim into place.
After installation, perform fitting adjustment.
C
SUNSHADE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION:
Before removing or installing the sunshade, be sure to remove the sunroof unit from the vehicle.
1. Remove glass lid. Refer to RF-26, "GLASS LID" .
2. Carefully pry sunshade from sunroof frame.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SUNROOF MOTOR
Removal
D
E
F
1. Position sunroof assembly in full open position.
2. Remove map lamp for access to sunroof motor.
3. Remove sunroof motor mounting screws.
4. Disconnect harness connector to remove sunroof motor.
CAUTION:
●
When removing the sunroof motor, be sure that the sunroof
is in the fully open position.
●
Never run the removed motor as a single unit.
G
H
RF
WIIA0038E
J
Installation
1.
Move the motor laterally little by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof
unit and the mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the motor with screws.
Sunroof motor mounting
screws
: 2.0 - 2.6 N·m (0.20 - 0.27 kg-m,
17 - 23 in-lb)
L
CAUTION:
Before installing the motor, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully
closed position.
Remainder of installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
RF-27
K
2005 Altima
M
SUNROOF
Revision: March 2005
RF-28
2005 Altima
E SUSPENSION
SECTION
RSU
REAR SUSPENSION
A
B
C
D
RSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ............................................... 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ............................. 5
Components ............................................................. 5
On-vehicle Service ................................................... 6
Rear Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6
CAMBER ............................................................... 6
TOE-IN .................................................................. 7
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ....................... 8
SHOCK ABSORBER ............................................ 8
SUSPENSION ARM .............................................. 9
RADIUS ROD ........................................................ 9
FRONT LOWER LINK ........................................... 9
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ............. 9
STABILIZER BAR ................................................ 10
Inspection ............................................................... 10
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ....................... 10
SUSPENSION ARM ............................................ 10
RADIUS ROD ...................................................... 11
FRONT LOWER LINK ......................................... 11
UPPER AND LOWER RUBBER SEATS ............. 11
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ........... 11
STABILIZER BAR ................................................ 11
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 12
General Specifications (Rear) ................................ 12
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ......................... 12
Ball Joint ................................................................. 12
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ................................. 13
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RSU-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions
●
●
●
●
PFP:00001
EES0017F
When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition*
with tires on ground.
Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
* Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment.
Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link.
Lock nuts are not reusable parts, always use new ones.
When replacing, do not wipe the oil off of the new lock nut before tightening.
Revision: March 2005
RSU-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EES0017G
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
HT72520000
(J-25730-A)
Ball joint remover
B
Removing upper ball joint
C
D
NT146
RSU
Commercial Service Tools
EES0017H
Tool name
Description
Power tool
F
Loosening bolts and nuts
G
PBIC0190E
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RSU-3
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EES0017I
Symptom
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
STEERING
×
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Shudder
BRAKES
×
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
×
ROAD WHEEL
×
×
WT-2, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
×
TIRES
×
Shimmy
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
Vibration
AXLE
×
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
×
DRIVE SHAFT
×
RSU-10
×
Stabilizer bar fatigue
Shake
RSU-6
×
Incorrect wheel alignment
×
RSU-5
RSU-5
Parts interference
×
Suspension looseness
RSU-11
Bushing or mounting
×
Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
RSU-11
RSU-8
Shock absorber deformation,
damage or deflection
Noise
Reference page
Spring fatigue
RSU-5
Improper installation, looseness
Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: March 2005
RSU-4
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Components
PFP:55020
A
EES0017J
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WEIA0100E
Revision: March 2005
RSU-5
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
1.
Cap
2.
Washer
3.
Bushing
4.
Distance tube
5.
Shock absorber mount bracket
6.
Bound bumper cover
7.
Bound bumper
8.
Shock absorber
9.
Suspension arm
10. Connecting rod mount bracket
11.
Connecting rod
12.
Upper rubber seat
13. Coil spring
14. Lower rubber seat
15.
Knuckle
16. Rear lower link
17. Front lower link
18.
Radius rod
19. Member stay
20. Member stay
21.
Stabilizer bar clamp
22. Bushing
23. Stabilizer bar
24.
Stabilizer bar clamp
25. Bushing
26. Member stopper
27.
Rear suspension member
On-vehicle Service
●
●
●
●
●
●
EES0017K
Check the suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or damage. Shake each rear wheel to check
for excessive play.
Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Make sure that the cotter pin is installed.
Check the shock absorber for oil leakage or other damage.
Check the wheelarch height. Refer to RSU-13, "Wheelarch
Height (Unladen*)" .
Check the suspension ball joint for grease leakage and the ball
joint dust cover for cracks or other damage.
SMA113
Rear Wheel Alignment
EES0017L
Before checking the rear wheel alignment, make a preliminary inspection.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check the tires for wear and for improper inflation.
Check the wheels for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Remove the wheel and check the wheel
runout. Refer to WT-3, "Inspection" .
Check the rear wheel bearings for looseness.
Check the rear suspension for looseness.
Check that the rear shock absorbers work properly.
Check the wheelarch height in the unladen condition. Refer to RSU-13, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)" .
CAMBER
●
Measure the camber of both the right and left wheels using a suitable alignment gauge and adjust using
the following procedure.
Camber
●
: Refer to RSU-12, "Rear Wheel Alignment
(Unladen*)" .
If the camber is not within specification, adjust the camber by
turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction.
SFA948A
Revision: March 2005
RSU-6
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
1.
Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate.
NOTE:
Camber changes about 5° with each graduation of the adjusting
bolt.
A
B
C
LEIA0008E
D
RSU
F
G
LEIA0009E
2.
Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to the specified torque.
Adjusting bolt nuts
H
: Refer to RSU-5, "Components" .
TOE-IN
Measure the toe-in using the following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or
worn rear suspension parts before adjusting.
WARNING:
●
Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
●
Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture.
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at
the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point.
I
J
K
L
M
SFA614B
4.
5.
6.
Measure distance “A” (rear side).
Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180°
degrees (1/2 a turn).
● If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 a
turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning.
Never push vehicle backward.
Measure distance “B” (front side).
Total toe-in
: Refer to RSU-12, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)" .
SFA234AC
Revision: March 2005
RSU-7
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
7.
Adjust toe-in by turning adjusting bolt.
NOTE:
Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [One side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt.
LEIA0008E
LEIA0009E
8.
Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to the specified torque.
Adjusting bolt nuts
: Refer to RSU-5, "Components" .
Removal and Installation
EES0017M
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Removal
CAUTION:
Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Remove the center exhaust tube with muffler(s). Refer to EX-4, "Removal and Installation" (QR25DE) or
EX-7, "Removal and Installation" (VQ35DE).
2. Remove the brake caliper assembly and reposition aside, without disconnecting the hydraulic hose, using
power tools. Refer to BR-20, "Removal and Installation" .
● Leave the brake hydraulic hose connected to the brake caliper.
● Do not depress the brake pedal, or the caliper piston will pop out.
● Do not pull or twist the brake hydraulic hose.
3. Disconnect the parking brake wire front end. Refer to PB-2, "Removal and Installation" .
4. Remove the rear ABS wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-42, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Set a suitable jack to support the rear suspension assembly.
6. Remove the upper shock absorber nuts using power tools.
7. Remove the suspension member nuts and member stay bolts using power tools.
8. Use the jack to support and lower the rear suspension assembly for removal.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-2, "Precautions" .
●
Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" .
SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the wheel and tire using power tools.
Set a suitable jack on the rear lower link to remove the lower shock absorber nut and bolt using power
tools.
Remove the suitable jack from the rear lower link.
Revision: March 2005
RSU-8
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
4.
5.
Remove the upper shock absorber nut and bolt using power tools.
Remove the shock absorber.
A
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
SUSPENSION ARM
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C
Remove the rear suspension assembly. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the connecting rod bracket from the suspension arm using power tools.
Remove the two suspension arm bolts and nuts from the suspension member side of the suspension arm
D
using power tools.
Remove the ball joint cotter pin and lock nut using power tools.
● Discard the cotter pin, use a new cotter pin for installation.
RSU
Remove the suspension arm from the knuckle using Tool.
Tool number
: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION:
● Do not damage ball joint when removing.
● While using Tool, temporarily tighten the nut so as not to damage screw threads.
F
G
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Discard the cotter pin, use a new cotter pin for installation.
●
Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" .
RADIUS ROD
Removal
1.
2.
I
Remove the rear suspension assembly. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the radius rod using power tools.
J
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" .
FRONT LOWER LINK
Removal
1.
2.
M
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for installation.
●
Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" .
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
Removal
Loosen the rear lower link bolt and nut from the suspension member side.
Support the rear lower link by placing a suitable jack under the knuckle.
Revision: March 2005
RSU-9
K
L
Remove the front lower link nut and bolt from the knuckle side
and the adjusting bolt and nut from the suspension member side
using power tools.
● Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for
installation.
Remove the front lower link.
LEIA0008E
1.
2.
H
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the suspension member side using power tool.
● Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for
installation.
Slowly lower the jack to lower the rear lower link and coil spring.
Remove the upper rubber seat, coil spring, and lower rubber
seat from the rear lower link.
Remove rear lower link bolt and nut from the suspension member side using power tool.
Remove the rear lower link.
LEIA0009E
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
●
Do not reuse the adjusting nut, use a new adjusting nut for installation.
●
Check that the projecting part inside the upper rubber seat and
the bracket flange are attached as shown.
●
Check that the projection part outside the upper rubber seat is
directed toward the front of the vehicle.
●
Position the hollow of the lower rubber seat with the groove part
of the rear lower link.
●
Install the coil spring so that the side with the two paint markers
is directed toward the lower side.
●
Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer
to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment" .
LEIA0011E
STABILIZER BAR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the stabilizer bar from connecting rod, using power tools.
Remove the stabilizer bar clamps and bushings using power tools.
Remove the stabilizer bar.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection
EES0017N
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
●
●
●
Check for smooth operation through a full stroke for both compression and extension.
Check for oil leakage on the welded or gland packing portions.
Check the shock absorber piston rod for cracks, deformation, or other damage and replace if necessary.
SUSPENSION ARM
●
●
Check the suspension arm for damage, cracks, deformation and replace if necessary.
Check the rubber bushings for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace suspension arm if necessary.
Revision: March 2005
RSU-10
2005 Altima
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
●
–
–
–
Check the ball joint. Replace the suspension arm assembly if
any of the following conditions exist: swinging force, turning
force, and vertical end play. Replace suspension arm if it is not
within specifications.
Ball stud is worn.
Joint is hard to swing.
Check if the swinging force “A”, turning force “B”, or vertical end
play “C” is out of specification.
NOTE:
Before checking specifications, turn the ball joint at least 10 revolutions so the ball joint is properly broken in.
Swinging force “A”
Turning force “B”
Vertical end play “C”
A
B
C
SFA858A
D
: Refer to RSU-12, "Ball Joint" .
: Refer to RSU-12, "Ball Joint" .
: Refer to RSU-12, "Ball Joint" .
RSU
RADIUS ROD
●
●
Check the radius rod for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
After installing the radius rod, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear
Wheel Alignment" .
G
FRONT LOWER LINK
●
Check the front lower link for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
UPPER AND LOWER RUBBER SEATS
●
H
Check the upper and lower rubber seats for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary.
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
●
Check the rear lower link and coil spring for any deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary.
STABILIZER BAR
●
●
F
I
J
Check the stabilizer bar and clamps for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
Check the rubber bushings for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary.
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RSU-11
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications (Rear)
PFP:00030
EES0017O
Suspension type
Multi-link independent suspension
Shock absorber type
Double-acting hydraulic
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
EES0017P
SFA234AC
Tire size
215/60R16 (SL)
215/55R17 (SE)
215/60R16
225/45R18
Engine
QR25DE
Model
Base / S
SL / SE
SE-R
Minimum
−0° 04′ (−0.07°)
−0° 2' (−0.03°)
−0° 13′ (−0.22°)
Nominal
−0° 34′ (−0.57°)
−0° 32′ (−0.53°)
−0° 43′ (−0.72°)
Maximum
−0° 64′ (−1.07°)
−1° 2′ (−1.03°)
−1° 13′ (−1.22°)
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Distance (A − B)
mm (in)
Total toe-in
Distance difference
between RH and LH side
mm (in)
Angle (left plus right)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
VQ35DE
Minimum
2.4 (0.09)
2.3 (0.09)
Nominal
3.9 (0.15)
3.8 (0.15)
Maximum
5.4 (0.21)
5.3 (0.21)
Minimum
−2 (−0.08)
Nominal
0 (0)
Maximum
2 (0.08)
Minimum
0° 6′ (0.10°)
Nominal
0° 10′ (0.17°)
Maximum
0° 14′ (0.23°)
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Ball Joint
EES0017Q
SFA858A
Swinging force “A”
(Measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud)
Turning torque “B”
Vertical end play “C”
7.8 - 54.9 (0.8 - 5.6, 1.8 - 12.3)
N (kg-f, lb-f)
N·m (kg-cm, in-lb)
0.49 - 3.43 (5.0 - 35.0, 4.3 - 30.4)
mm (in)
Revision: March 2005
0 (0)
RSU-12
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
EES001C1
A
B
C
D
SFA818A
Engine
QR25DE
VQ35DE
Model
Base / S
SL
SE
SE-R
Tire size
215/60R16
215/60R16
215/55R17
225/45R18
Front (Hf) mm (in)
722 (28.43)
717 (28.23)
722 (28.43)
721 (28.39)
Rear (Hr) mm (in)
695 (27.36)
696 (27.40)
701 (27.60)
695 (27.36)
RSU
F
*: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
RSU-13
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: March 2005
RSU-14
2005 Altima
H RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SB
SEAT BELTS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precaution for Seat Belt Service .............................. 2
AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 3
SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 4
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt ............. 4
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ............ 4
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR..... 4
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE .................... 5
INSTALLTION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE .............. 5
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt ............. 5
REMOVAL ............................................................. 5
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5
Seat Belt Inspection .................................................. 6
AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 6
PRELIMINARY CHECKS ...................................... 6
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE
CHECK .................................................................. 7
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE
CHECK .................................................................. 7
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR
CHILDREN) SYSTEM ................................................. 9
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ............. 10
Removal and Installation ........................................ 10
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SB-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EHS000ZV
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precaution for Seat Belt Service
EHS000ZW
CAUTION:
●
Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the
battery ground cable and wait at least 3 minutes.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
●
After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
●
Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly.
●
Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
●
Never oil tongue and buckle.
●
If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
assembly.
●
If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
●
When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
Revision: March 2005
SB-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
●
The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
●
The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
●
The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
●
Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
●
The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SB-3
2005 Altima
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt
PFP:86884
EHS000ZX
LHIA0001E
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the adjuster cover on the seat belt anchor.
NOTE:
Insert a screwdriver wound with cloth into the slot of the release
button to disengage the tab and remove the release button.
Remove the anchor bolt. If equipped, disconnect belt tension
sensor.
Slide up outer anchor cover, and remove the anchor bolt.
Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to EI-32,
"Removal and Installation" .
LHIA0002E
5.
6.
Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner retractor screw and anchor
bolt, and then remove the seat belt retractor.
WHIA0058E
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
SB-4
2005 Altima
SEAT BELTS
REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
1.
2.
3.
A
Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-15, "Components" .
Remove the screws, and remove the inner seat cushion finisher.
Remove the anchor bolt, and remove the buckle.
● Disconnect electrical connector.
B
C
D
LHIA0004E
E
INSTALLTION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt
EHS000ZY
F
G
SB
I
J
K
LHIA0005E
L
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the rear seat. Refer to SE-22, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the outer anchor and floor anchor bolt.
Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove seat belt retractor mounting screw and anchor bolt, and remove the seat belt assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: March 2005
SB-5
2005 Altima
M
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection
EHS000ZZ
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
●
The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
●
The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
●
The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
●
Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
●
The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should
sound for about seven seconds.
Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should
stop.
If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning
lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels
freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and
holds securely.
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built
up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does
not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET”
and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt though-anchor:
1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening.
3. Pass a thin wire though the though-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean
cloth.
5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the though-anchor belt opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly.
7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
Revision: March 2005
SB-6
2005 Altima
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
A
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop)
the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a
specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to
fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly.
B
C
D
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending
further.
E
ALR Function Stationary Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is
in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
F
G
SB
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop.
The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock.
Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
I
J
K
L
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.
Remove the seat belt retractor assembly.
Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting
the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration.
Revision: March 2005
SB-7
2005 Altima
M
SEAT BELTS
WHIA0005E
15 degrees or less tilt
27 degrees or more tilt
: Belt can be pulled out.
: Belt locks and cannot be pulled out.
If NG, replace the retractor assembly.
Revision: March 2005
SB-8
2005 Altima
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
PFP:75466
A
EHS00100
NOTE:
The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SB-9
2005 Altima
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
PFP:88000
EHS00101
NOTE:
The top tether strap child restraint is not serviceable.
Revision: March 2005
SB-10
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
SC
STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
BATTERY .................................................................... 4
How to Handle Battery ............................................. 4
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ............................................................... 4
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL .................... 4
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ............................... 5
CHARGING THE BATTERY ................................. 6
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester .......................................................... 6
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART .................. 8
STARTING SYSTEM .................................................. 9
System Description .................................................. 9
M/T MODELS ........................................................ 9
A/T MODELS ........................................................ 9
CAN Communication System Description ................ 9
Wiring Diagram — START — ................................. 10
M/T MODELS ...................................................... 10
4 A/T MODEL .......................................................11
5 A/T MODEL ...................................................... 12
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ........................................................ 13
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 13
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 14
Revision: March 2005
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 15
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 16
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING
VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE ......................................................... 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 17
M/T MODELS ...................................................... 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 17
4-SPEED A/T MODELS ...................................... 17
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
5-SPEED A/T MODELS ...................................... 18
Pinion/Clutch Check ............................................... 20
CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 21
System Description ................................................. 21
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — ............................. 22
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging
System Tester ......................................................... 23
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 24
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 25
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 26
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 27
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 28
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR .............................. 29
Removal and Installation ........................................ 29
QR25DE .............................................................. 29
VQ35DE .............................................................. 29
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 31
Battery .................................................................... 31
Starter ..................................................................... 31
Generator ............................................................... 31
SC-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EKS008KU
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
EKS008KV
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Revision: March 2005
SC-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EKS008KW
Tool number
Tool name
Description
B
J-44373 Model 620
Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester
C
D
SEL403X
E
F
Commercial Service Tools
EKS008KX
Tool number
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
G
H
I
PBIC0190E
J
SC
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SC-3
2005 Altima
BATTERY
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
PFP:AYBGL
EKS008KY
CAUTION:
●
If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
●
After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
●
Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging
a battery.
●
The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept
clean and dry.
●
The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
●
At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance”
and “maintenance-free”.
MEL040F
●
When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of
time, disconnect the negative battery terminal.
MEL041F
●
Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a
close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.
MEL042F
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
WARNING:
Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Revision: March 2005
SC-4
2005 Altima
BATTERY
Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
●
●
A
B
C
MEL043F
D
Sulphation
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltage
and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of
charging sulphated batteries.
A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test.
E
F
G
SEL709E
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK
1.
2.
H
Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading
according to electrolyte temperature.
I
J
SC
MEL042FA
Hydrometer Temperature Correction
L
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
71 (160)
0.032
66 (150)
0.028
60 (140)
0.024
54 (130)
0.020
49 (120)
0.016
43 (110)
0.012
38 (100)
0.008
32 (90)
0.004
27 (80)
0
21 (70)
−0.004
16 (60)
−0.008
10 (50)
−0.012
4 (40)
−0.016
−1 (30)
−0.020
−7 (20)
−0.024
Revision: March 2005
SC-5
M
2005 Altima
BATTERY
Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F)
Add to specific gravity reading
−12 (10)
−0.028
−18 (0)
−0.032
Corrected specific gravity
Approximate charge condition
1.260 - 1.280
Fully charged
1.230 - 1.250
3/4 charged
1.200 - 1.220
1/2 charged
1.170 - 1.190
1/4 charged
1.140 - 1.160
Almost discharged
1.110 - 1.130
Completely discharged
CHARGING THE BATTERY
CAUTION:
●
Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery.
●
Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
●
When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the
charger first, as this may cause a spark.
●
If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 60°C (140°F), stop charging. Always charge battery
at a temperature below 60°C (140°F).
Charging Rates
Amps
Time
50
1 hour
25
2 hours
10
5 hours
5
10 hours
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
NOTE:
The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps
indicated above refer to initial charge rate.
●
If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than .050, the battery should be
replaced.
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
EKS008KZ
CAUTION:
When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection.
NOTE:
●
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.
●
If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to
remove the surface charge.
●
If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C
(32°F). Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to
make the selection.
Revision: March 2005
SC-6
2005 Altima
BATTERY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair
as necessary.
Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends
with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
NOTE:
The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends
and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean
the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the
test.
Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal.
The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys,
select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER”
key.
A
B
C
SEL404X
D
E
F
G
SEL405X
5.
6.
7.
Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top
case of the battery to be tested.
NOTE:
The battery type and rating will have either of the following.
CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.)
JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard.
Battery is stamped with a number such as:
80D26L: 80 (rank of output), D (physical size-depth), 26 (width
in cm). The last character L (post configuration) is not input into
the tester.
The tester requires the rating for the battery be entered exactly
as it is written or stamped on the battery. Do not attempt a CCA
conversion for JIS stamped batteries. JIS must be input directly.
Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating.
NOTE:
The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA or JIS.
Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-8, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
ITEM CHART" .
I
J
SC
SEL406X
L
M
SEL407X
Revision: March 2005
SC-7
H
2005 Altima
BATTERY
8.
9.
Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
NOTE:
● If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the
battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press
the “ENTER” button to make the selection.
● When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently
been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”.
SEL576X
● If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE
& RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER
CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”.
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
Service procedure
GOOD BATTERY
Battery is OK. Refer to SC-13, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System
Tester" .
REPLACE BATTERY
Replace battery.
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery
test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
BAD CELL-REPLACE
Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester
to confirm repair.
GOOD-RECHARGE
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester.
Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.)
Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair.
CHARGE & RETEST
Revision: March 2005
NOTE:
If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER
CHARGE”.
SC-8
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:23300
A
EKS008L0
M/T MODELS
Power is supplied at all times:
●
through 40A fusible link (letter m , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to ignition switch terminal B.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied:
●
from ignition switch terminal ST
●
to intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R) terminal 4.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
●
through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 53.
When the clutch pedal is depressed, ground is supplied to IPDM E/R terminal 50 through the clutch interlock
switch and body grounds E15 and E24.
Provided that the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the
IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied:
●
from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R
●
to terminal S of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates.
In the event that the CAN communication line fails between the IPDM E/R and the BCM, the IPDM E/R will
default to a starter relay request ON signal as long as the ignition switch remains in the START or ON position.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A/T MODELS
Power is supplied at all times:
I
●
through 40A fusible link (letter m , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to ignition switch terminal B.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied:
J
●
from ignition switch terminal ST
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 4.
SC
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
●
through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to park/neutral (PNP) switch terminal 1 (with 4 A/T) or terminal 5 (with 5 A/T).
L
With the selector lever in P or N position, power is supplied:
●
through PNP switch terminal 2 (with 4 A/T) or terminal 1 (with 5 A/T)
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 53.
M
Provided the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the IPDM
E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied:
●
from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R
●
to terminal S of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates.
In the event that the CAN communication line fails between the IPDM E/R and the BCM, the IPDM E/R will
default to a starter relay request ON signal as long as the ignition switch remains in the START or ON position.
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008L1
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
Revision: March 2005
SC-9
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — START —
EKS008L2
M/T MODELS
WKWA2905E
Revision: March 2005
SC-10
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
4 A/T MODEL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
WKWA2159E
Revision: March 2005
SC-11
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
5 A/T MODEL
WKWA2160E
Revision: March 2005
SC-12
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
EKS008L3
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system
tester. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/
Charging System Tester" .
3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test.
A
B
C
D
E
SEL408X
4.
Start the engine.
F
G
H
SEL409X
5.
Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-13,
"DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" .
NOTE:
● If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start,
perform engine diagnosis.
● For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION” incidents, refer to SC-16, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" .
I
J
SC
L
SEL410X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
M
Diagnostic item
Service procedure
CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-14, "WORK FLOW" .
CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW
Go to “WORK FLOW”, SC-14, "WORK FLOW" .
CHARGE BATTERY
Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble
Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" .
REPLACE BATTERY
Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery
test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-6, "Trouble Diagnoses
with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
Revision: March 2005
SC-13
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
WORK FLOW
WKIA3559E
*1
SC-13
*4
SC-16
Revision: March 2005
*2
SC-15
*3
SC-14
SC-16
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check Starter Motor Circuit
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO STARTER MOTOR
B
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check that the starter motor connector F27 terminal B (B/R) connection is clean and tight.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B
(B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
C
D
Battery voltage should
exist.
E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter
motor for open circuit.
F
WKIA0137E
G
2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
Turn the ignition switch to START.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B
(B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
I
: Less than 0.5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter
motor for poor continuity.
J
SC
WKIA0138E
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
M
Turn the ignition switch to START.
Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative
terminal using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Starter motor ground circuit is OK. Further inspection is
necessary. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Check for poor continuity between the starter motor
case and battery negative terminal.
WKIA0139E
Revision: March 2005
SC-15
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check Magnetic Switch Circuit
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MAGNETIC SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter motor connector F28.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S
(B/W) and ground using a digital circuit tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 40A fusible link (letter m , located in fuse and fusible
link box)
● Starter relay [within the intelligent power distribution
module engine room (IPDM E/R)]
● Harness for open or short
WKIA1549E
2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON MAGNETIC SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Connect starter motor connector F28.
Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S
(B/W) and battery positive terminal using a digital tester.
Ignition switch in
START.
: Less than 1V
OK or NG
OK
>> Magnetic switch circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-14, "WORK FLOW" .
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the magnetic
switch for poor continuity.
WKIA1550E
Revision: March 2005
SC-16
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Voltage V
Engine coolant temperature
QR25DE
VQ35DE
−30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F)
8.7
8.4
−19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F)
9.2
8.9
−9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F)
9.6
9.3
More than 1°C (More than 34°F)
10.0
9.7
B
C
Removal and Installation
EKS008L4
M/T MODELS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the air cleaner cover and the air cleaner to intake manifold collector duct.
Remove the harness protector from the starter motor engine
room harness.
Disconnect the starter motor harness connectors.
Remove the two starter motor bolts, using power tools.
Remove the starter motor.
D
E
F
G
WKWA0065E
H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
I
J
SC
WKIA0394E
Removal and Installation
4-SPEED A/T MODELS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
M
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the air cleaner case (upper) and the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube.
Remove the harness protector from the starter engine room harness.
Disconnect the starter harness connectors.
Revision: March 2005
L
EKS00C2R
SC-17
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
5.
6.
Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools.
Remove the starter.
WKIA2058E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation
EKS00C2Q
5-SPEED A/T MODELS
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the starter insulator.
WKIA0400E
3.
4.
Remove the harness bracket and harness protector from the starter engine room harness.
Disconnect the starter harness connectors.
Revision: March 2005
SC-18
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
5.
6.
Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools.
Remove the starter.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
WKIA0397E
INSTALLATION
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
I
J
SC
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SC-19
2005 Altima
STARTING SYSTEM
Pinion/Clutch Check
1.
2.
3.
EKS008L5
Inspect pinion assembly teeth.
● Replace pinion assembly if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of ring gear teeth.)
Inspect planetary gears/planetary gear teeth.
● Replace planetary gears/planet gears if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of pinion
shaft/drive shaft gear teeth.)
Check to see if pinion assembly locks in one direction and rotates smoothly in the opposite direction.
● If it locks or rotates in both directions, or if unusual resistance is evident, replace.
Revision: March 2005
SC-20
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:23100
A
EKS008L6
The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal B through:
●
120A fusible link (letter a , located in the fusible link box).
Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal S through:
●
10A fuse (No. 26, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is
controlled by the IC regulator at terminal S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the
120A fusible link.
The generator is grounded to the engine block.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
●
through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
to combination meter terminal 22 for the charge warning lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal 14 of the combination meter through terminal L of the generator. With power
and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off.
If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a fault is indicated.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SC-21
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —
EKS008L7
WKWA1355E
Revision: March 2005
SC-22
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
EKS008L8
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system.
2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/
Charging system tester.
3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test.
4. Start engine.
A
B
C
D
E
SEL417X
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed.
Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about
5 seconds, then return the engine to idle.
Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to
continue.
NOTE:
● If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display.
● Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting,
particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect
this without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected.
The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the
DIODE/RIPPLE check.
When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads.
● Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster.
● Headlamp high beam
● Rear window defogger
NOTE:
Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads.
F
G
H
SEL418X
J
SC
L
SEL419X
Press “ENTER” to continue.
SEL420X
Revision: March 2005
SC-23
I
2005 Altima
M
CHARGING SYSTEM
10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about
5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in
engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue.
NOTE:
If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not
detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press
“ENTER” to restart the test.
SEL421X
11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-24,
"DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" .
SEL422X
12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the
test output code on the repair order.
13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results.
SEL577X
DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART
Diagnostic item
CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL
Service procedure
Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result.
NO CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" .
LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" .
HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE
Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" .
DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL
Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result.
EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED
Replace the generator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging
system tester to confirm repair.
DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED
Go to SC-25, "WORK FLOW" .
Revision: March 2005
SC-24
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
WORK FLOW
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
SC
L
M
WKIA4022E
Revision: March 2005
SC-25
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit
1. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT CONNECTION
Check to see if terminal "L" is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal "L" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
2. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect F1 connector from generator.
Apply ground to connector F1 terminal L (BR/Y) with the ignition
switch in the ON position.
CHARGE lamp should light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Confirm repair by performing
complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)]
● CHARGE lamp
● Harness for open or short between combination
meter and fuse
● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator
Revision: March 2005
SC-26
WKIA0142E
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
Check Battery Circuit
A
1. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION
B
Check to see if terminal "B" is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal "B" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
C
D
2. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B (B/R) and
ground using a digital circuit tester.
E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 120A fusible link (letter a , located in fusible link box)
● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link
F
G
WKIA0143E
H
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B (B/R) and
battery positive terminal using a digital tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm
I
: Less than 0.2V
J
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and
Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete
Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
SC
WKIA0144E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SC-27
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Check Voltage Regulator Circuit
1. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT CONNECTION
Check to see if terminal "S" is clean and tight.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal "S" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging
system test.
2. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S (Y/B) and
ground using a digital circuit tester.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following.
● 10A fuse (No. 26, located in fuse and fusible link box)
● Harness for open or short between generator and
fuse
WKIA0145E
3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S (Y/B) and
battery positive terminal using a digital tester.
With engine running
at idle and warm.
: Less than 0.2V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-29, "Removal and
Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete
Battery/Starting/Charging system test.
NG
>> Check harness between the battery and the generator
for poor continuity.
Revision: March 2005
SC-28
WKIA0146E
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following
symptoms occur while generator is operating:
●
Excessive voltage is produced.
●
No voltage is produced.
Removal and Installation
A
B
EKS008L9
QR25DE
Removal
C
1.
2.
3.
D
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove the engine cover.
Remove the front/right-side engine undercover, using power
tools.
Remove the drive belt.
Disconnect the generator harness connector.
Disconnect the engine ground wire from top mount.
Remove the generator upper and lower mounting bolts, using
power tools.
Set the generator aside and remove the generator top mount.
Slide the generator out and remove.
E
F
LKWA0051E
G
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
H
I
J
LKWA0052E
VQ35DE
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
L
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Remove radiator, refer CO-30, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove front/right-side engine undercover.
Remove the drive belt, refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove idler pulley.
Remove the generator adjustable top mount, using power tools.
Remove the generator lower mount bolt and nuts, using power tools.
Remove the generator lower front bracket bolt, using power tools.
Disconnect the generator harness connectors.
Slide the generator out and remove.
Revision: March 2005
SC-29
SC
M
2005 Altima
CHARGING SYSTEM
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
LKWA0070E
Revision: March 2005
SC-30
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Battery
PFP:00030
A
EKS008LA
Type
GR.24F (BCI)
Capacity (20 HR) minimum
Cold cranking current
(For reference value)
V-AH
B
12-63
A
550 @ -18°C (0°F)
C
Starter
EKS008LB
QR25DE
Application
Manufacturer
VQ35DE
M/T model
A/T model
M/T model
A/T model
Mitsubishi
M001T87181ZC
Mitsubishi
M001T68781ZC
Mitsubishi
M000T87281ZC
Mitsubishi
M000T87181ZC
Type
Reduction gear type
System voltage
E
12V
Terminal voltage
No-load
D
11V
Current
90A Max.
Revolution
2,750 rpm Min.
Minimum diameter of commutator
Minimum length of brush
Brush spring tension
F
2,800 rpm Min.
G
28.8 mm
5.5mm
7.0 mm
15.0-20.4 N
(1.53-2.08 kg,
3.37-4.59 lb)
18.3-24.8 N (1.87-2.53 kg, 4.11-5.58 lb)
Clearance between pinion front edge and
pinion stopper
H
0.5-2.0 mm
I
Generator
EKS008LC
Application
Type
QR25DE
VQ35DE
LR1110-721
LR1110-726
HITACHI
J
SC
Nominal rating
12V-110A
Ground polarity
Negative
Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied)
1100 rpm
L
More than 35A/1,300 rpm
More than 91A/2,500 rpm
More than 110A/5,000 rpm
M
Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied)
Regulated output voltage
14.1 - 14.7V
Minimum length of brush
6 mm (0.236 in)
Brush spring pressure
1.000 - 3.432 N (0.102 - 0.350 kg, 0.225 - 0.772 lbs)
Slip ring minimum outer diameter
26.0 mm (1.024 in)
Rotor (Field coil) resistance
Revision: March 2005
2.31 ohms
SC-31
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Revision: March 2005
SC-32
2005 Altima
I BODY
SECTION
SE
SEAT
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2
Precautions for Work ................................................ 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
POWER SEAT ........................................................... 10
Wiring Diagram — SEAT — ................................... 10
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 11
HEATED SEAT .......................................................... 12
Description .............................................................. 12
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — ................................. 13
FRONT SEAT ............................................................ 15
Components ........................................................... 15
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
REMOVAL ........................................................... 18
INSTALLATION ................................................... 18
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 18
SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD ............................... 18
SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD ....................... 20
REAR SEAT .............................................................. 22
Removal and Installation ........................................ 22
REMOVAL ........................................................... 22
INSTALLATION ................................................... 22
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 22
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SE-1
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
EIS003N9
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Precautions for Work
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
●
EIS003NA
When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them.
Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one.
Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally.
Follow the steps below to clean components.
Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the
fouled area.
Then rub with a soft and dry cloth.
Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe
the fouled area.
Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub
with a soft and dry cloth.
Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline.
For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
Revision: March 2005
SE-2
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
A
EIS003NB
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
B
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
C
Locating the noise
D
SIIA0993E
—
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit
E
F
Repairing the cause of noise
G
H
SIIA0994E
SE
Commercial Service Tool
EIS003NC
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
J
Description
(J-39565)
Engine ear
Locating the noise
K
L
SIIA0995E
M
Revision: March 2005
SE-3
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS00480
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to SE-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
●
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
●
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
●
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
●
Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
●
Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
●
Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
●
Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
●
Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
●
Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
●
Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
●
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
●
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
Revision: March 2005
SE-4
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
●
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
●
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
A
B
C
D
E
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
F
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.
●
●
●
●
●
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
SE
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to SE-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
●
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
–
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
–
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN
Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25
mm (0.59×0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick,
50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
L
●
Revision: March 2005
SE-5
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in)
FELT CLOTH TAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following
materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS00481
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
Revision: March 2005
SE-6
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
A
B
C
D
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
E
F
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
SEATS
G
H
SE
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
K
L
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: March 2005
SE-7
2005 Altima
M
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS00482
LIWA0276E
Revision: March 2005
SE-8
2005 Altima
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
SBT844
Revision: March 2005
SE-9
2005 Altima
POWER SEAT
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —
PFP:87016
EIS003NG
LIWA0464E
Revision: March 2005
SE-10
2005 Altima
POWER SEAT
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EIS003NH
A
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
—
0
W/R
Battery power supply
—
Battery voltage
W/B
Battery power supply (Fusible
link)
—
Battery voltage
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
67
B
69
70
ITEM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SE-11
2005 Altima
HEATED SEAT
HEATED SEAT
Description
●
●
●
PFP:87335
EIS003NI
When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit.
To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated.
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim.
WIIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
SE-12
2005 Altima
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —
EIS003NJ
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIWA0418E
Revision: March 2005
SE-13
2005 Altima
HEATED SEAT
WIWA0419E
Revision: March 2005
SE-14
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
FRONT SEAT
Components
PFP:87000
A
EIS003NK
Driver Seat
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0701E
1.
Seatback board
2.
Seatback frame
3.
4.
Headrest assembly
5.
Headrest holder (free)
6.
Headrest holder (locked)
7.
Seatback pad
8.
Seatback heating element
9.
Seatback trim
Revision: March 2005
SE-15
Seatback silk film bag
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
10. Seatback assembly (if equipped
with side air bags)
11.
Lumbar support lever
12. Seat cushion trim
13. Seat cushion heating element
14.
Seat cushion pad
15. Seat cushion silk film bag
16. Seat cushion frame
17.
Seat belt buckle assembly
18. Power seat cushion front finisher
19. Power seat cushion inner finisher
20.
Driver seat power frame assembly
21. Power seat switch
22. Power seat switch escutcheon
23.
Power seat cushion outer finisher
24. Driver seat wire harness
25. Manual seat cushion inner finisher
26.
Driver seat manual frame
27. Manual seatback recliner lever
28. Manual seat cushion outer finisher
29
Seat cushion adjusting knobs
Revision: March 2005
SE-16
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
Passenger Seat
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
WIIA0400E
1.
Seatback board
2.
Seatback frame
3.
Headrest
4.
Headrest holder (free)
5.
Headrest holder (locked)
6.
Seatback pad
7.
Seatback trim
8.
Seatback heating element
9.
Seat cushion trim
10. Seat cushion pad
11.
Seat cushion heating element
12.
Silk film bag
13. Seat cushion frame
14. Seat cushion inner finisher
15.
Passenger seat frame assembly
Revision: March 2005
SE-17
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
16. Seat cushion front finisher
17. Seat cushion outer finisher
18.
Seatback recline handle
19. Silk film bag
20. Seat cushion assembly (if equipped
with Occupant Classification System)
21.
Seatback assembly (if equipped with
side air bags)
Removal and Installation
EIS007MS
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and
wait and least 3 minutes.
●
When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy.
●
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while installing the seat. Always handle it with
care.
●
After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced.
●
Some front seats are equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect
the Occupant Classification System calibration.
●
Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly if equipped with Occupant Classification
System.
NOTE:
When removing or installing the seat trim, handle it carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage.
1. Slide the seat until the four body mounting bolts are visible and a tool can be inserted.
NOTE:
When disassembling the driver seat after removal, set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position.
2. Disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
3. Remove the harness connector for the side air bag module.
4. Remove the four body mounting bolts and the seat belt anchor bolt.
To remove the seat belt anchor bolt, refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
5. Remove the power seat harness connector and vehicle harness fixing clip from the vehicle.
NOTE:
When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect the parts from damage where they may interfere
with other parts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Be sure to insert the rear end tab of the rear leg cover under the rail.
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS003NL
SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD
Disassembly
NOTE:
●
Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags.
●
Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position.
1. Remove the seatback finisher from the back of the seatback.
a. Bend both top corners inward (one at a time) to release the top
hooks.
b. Shift the seatback finisher to the Left and Right to release the
middle hooks.
c. Separate the trim clips from the seatback frame to remove the
seatback finisher.
LIIA1556E
Revision: March 2005
SE-18
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the headrest.
Remove the harness connectors for the reclining motor and lumbar support motor (driver seat only).
Pull out the harness connector for the side air bag from the seat cushion (driver seat only).
Remove the reclining device mounting bolts (2 for each side) on the seatback frame, and remove the
seatback assembly (driver seat only).
NOTE:
When assembling the seatback frame, make sure that the reclining device is locked on both sides, and be
sure to temporarily tighten the bolts, then finish tightening them.
From the back of the seatback, press the headrest holder tabs at
the base of the stay pipe to disengage. Then pull the headrest
holder up to remove.
NOTE:
Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/
rear and right/left).
A
B
C
D
E
F
LRS023
7.
G
Remove the snap ring and the lumbar support lever knob.
H
SE
J
PIIA1156E
8.
Remove the retainer.
K
L
M
SIIA0113E
9.
Remove the seat heater harness connector. After removing the seatback trim and pad, remove the hog
ring to separate the trim from the pad and the seatback heater unit.
Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: March 2005
SE-19
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD
Disassembly
CAUTION:
●
Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control
module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this
will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration.
●
Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly.
●
When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage.
●
During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in.
Do not add additional clips.
●
The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to SRS-57, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
1. Remove the power seat switch knob (or recline knob on manual seat).
2. Remove the front seat cushion finisher (inner).
LIIA0285E
3.
4.
Remove the three power seat switch assembly screws (or lift knobs on manual seats).
Remove four bolts retaining the seat cushion assembly, remove
seat cushion assembly.
SIIA0503E
5.
6.
Remove the retainer on the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater.
On seats not equipped with Occupant Classification System, after removing the seat cushion trim and
pad, remove the hog rings to separate the trim from the pad and seat cushion heater unit.
Revision: March 2005
SE-20
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT
Assembly
A
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
●
Tighten the LH seat cushion to frame bolts in the order as
shown.
●
⇐: Vehicle front
B
C
D
WIIA0704E
E
F
G
H
SE
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SE-21
2005 Altima
REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT
Removal and Installation
PFP:88300
EIS003NM
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove the rear seat cushion trim and pad.
● Pull the lock at the front bottom of the seat cushion forward (1
for each side), and pull the seat cushion upward to release
the wire from the plastic hook, then pull the seat cushion forward to remove.
Remove the seat belt webbing from the guides.
Fold seatbacks forward.
Remove covers.
Remove bolts
Lock seatbacks in upright position.
Remove the seatback hinge anchor bolts and nut.
Remove the seatback assembly.
SIIA0511E
INSTALLATION
●
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly
EIS003NN
WIIA0401E
1.
Rear seat side bolster assembly
2.
Passenger seatback trim and pad
3.
Driver seatback trim and pad
4.
Rear seatback hinge assembly
5.
Rear seat cushion trim and pad
6.
Rear seat armrest
7.
Seatback latch cover
Revision: March 2005
SE-22
2005 Altima
REAR SEAT
Center Seatback Assembly
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
WIIA0277E
1.
Passenger seatback trim and pad
2.
Rear seat armrest
4.
Rubber mat
5.
Clips
3.
SE
Cup holder bracket
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SE-23
2005 Altima
REAR SEAT
Revision: March 2005
SE-24
2005 Altima
H RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SRS
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER” Service ..................................... 3
Occupant Classification System Precaution ............ 3
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ....... 5
SRS Configuration ................................................... 5
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ..... 6
Front Side Air Bag .................................................... 6
Side Curtain Air Bag ................................................. 6
Occupant Classification System ............................... 6
Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ........... 8
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 9
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction ............................... 9
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ....................................... 9
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR ............... 9
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 10
SRS Components Parts Location ............................11
Schematic .............................................................. 12
Wiring Diagram — SRS — ..................................... 13
CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG) ........................... 19
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
WITH CONSULT-II .............................................. 19
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 19
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) .................................................................. 20
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE... 20
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 20
SRS Operation Check ............................................ 20
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 20
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II ..................... 23
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 23
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 28
Revision: March 2005
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED
FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) .............. 30
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 30
Trouble diagnosis without CONSULT-II. ................. 36
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 36
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART ........... 37
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does
Not Turn Off ............................................................ 41
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 41
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does
Not Turn On ............................................................ 42
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 ........................... 42
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE .................................... 43
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43
REMOVAL ........................................................... 43
INSTALLATION ................................................... 44
SPIRAL CABLE ........................................................ 45
Removal and Installation ........................................ 45
REMOVAL ........................................................... 45
INSTALLATION ................................................... 46
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .............. 47
Removal and Installation ........................................ 47
REMOVAL ........................................................... 47
INSTALLATION ................................................... 47
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION .................. 48
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ........................ 50
Removal and Installation ........................................ 50
REMOVAL ........................................................... 50
INSTALLATION ................................................... 51
CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................................... 52
Removal and Installation ........................................ 52
REMOVAL ........................................................... 52
INSTALLATION ................................................... 52
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ................... 53
Removal and Installation ........................................ 53
REMOVAL ........................................................... 53
INSTALLATION ................................................... 53
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................... 54
Removal and Installation ........................................ 54
SRS-1
2005 Altima
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..................................... 55
Removal and Installation ........................................ 55
REMOVAL ........................................................... 55
INSTALLATION .................................................... 55
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. ................................. 55
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ 56
Removal and Installation ........................................ 56
Revision: March 2005
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ..........................................57
For Frontal Collision ................................................57
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) ...................................................................57
For Side Collision ....................................................58
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) ......58
SRS-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EHS00102
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
B
C
D
E
F
G
Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service
EHS00103
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
SRS
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
I
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or J
rust before installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to
K
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad
side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing
L
down.
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
M
Occupant Classification System Precaution
EHS0013F
Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly.
Trouble Diagnosis Precaution
EHS00104
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section
●
PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" in PG section
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section
●
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section
Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-3
2005 Altima
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
PFP:00002
EHS00105
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
—
(J-44615)
Air bag lock master key set
Removing and installing air bag lock
LRS191
Revision: March 2005
SRS-4
2005 Altima
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SRS Configuration
PFP:28556
A
EHS00106
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
WHIA0272E
J
The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit activates while the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module and front passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision.
SRS configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows;
SRS configuration
Frontal collision
Left side collision
Right side collision
Driver air bag module
×
—
—
Front passenger air bag module
×
—
—
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
×
—
—
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
×
—
—
Front LH side air bag module (if equipped)
—
×
—
Front RH side air bag module (if equipped)
—
—
×
LH side curtain air bag module (if equipped)
—
×
—
RH side curtain air bag module (if equipped)
—
—
×
Revision: March 2005
SRS-5
2005 Altima
K
L
M
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for
both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates
simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal
collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level
occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is
immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are
securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and
the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the
load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt
web tension while maintaining force.
Front Side Air Bag
EHS00107
SRS444
EHS00108
Front side air bag is built-in type.
The front seatbacks with built-in type side air bag have the labels as
shown.
WHIA0008E
Side Curtain Air Bag
EHS00109
The side curtain air bags have the labels as shown.
WHIA0041E
Occupant Classification System
EHS0013G
The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if
child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the
occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension
sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on
classification of the passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the
passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sen-
Revision: March 2005
SRS-6
2005 Altima
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
sor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will
turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator.
A
B
C
D
WHIA0187E
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-7
2005 Altima
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors
EHS0010A
The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors.
●
Driver air bag module
●
Front passenger air bag module
●
LH side curtain air bag module
●
RH side curtain air bag module
●
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
●
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector
to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with
the connector housing.
WHIA0103E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-8
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnoses Introduction
PFP:00004
A
EHS0010B
CAUTION:
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors.
●
Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged,
replace it with a new one.
●
Keep ground portion clean.
B
C
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
D
The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II.
The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows:
E
User mode
Diagnosis mode
Display type
“AIR BAG” warning lamp
X
X
ON-OFF operation
CONSULT-II
—
X
Monitoring
F
G
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the sympSRS
toms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Information From Customer
WHAT..... Vehicle model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
I
J
Preliminary Check
Check that the following parts are in good order.
●
Battery (Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery" .)
●
Fuse (Refer to SRS-12, "Schematic" .)
●
System component-to-harness connections
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-9
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
SHIA0175E
*1: SRS-9
*2: SRS-20
*3: SRS-30
*4: SRS-30
Revision: March 2005
SRS-10
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Components Parts Location
EHS0010C
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
WHIA0273E
1.
Driver air bag module
2.
Spiral cable
3.
Front passenger air bag off indicator
(if equipped)
4.
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
5.
LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
(if equipped)
6.
Crash zone sensor
7.
Occupant classification system sen- 8.
sor
(if equipped)
Belt tension sensor
(if equipped)
9.
Occupant classification system control
unit
(if equipped)
10. Air bag warning lamp
11. Side curtain air bag modules
(if equipped)
12. Front LH seatbelt pre-tensioner
13. Seat belt buckle switches
14. Front RH seatbelt pre-tensioner
15. RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
(if equipped)
16. Front side air bag modules
(if equipped)
17. Front passenger air bag module
Revision: March 2005
SRS-11
2005 Altima
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Schematic
EHS0010D
WHWA0173E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-12
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram — SRS —
EHS0010E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
WHWA0174E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-13
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHWA0100E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-14
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
WHWA0095E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-15
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHWA0096E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-16
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
WHWA0099E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-17
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHWA0175E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-18
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)
EHS0013H
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
AIR BAG diagnostic mode
Description
A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis
mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs.
B
SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The
stored results will remain until memory erasing is executed.
C
SELF-DIAG [PAST]
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle
model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on
the CONSULT-II screen, as shown. When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the
part number for the compatibility. After installation,
replacement with a correct unit can be checked by
confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-II screen.
For NISSAN MODEL L31, the air bag diagnosis
sensor unit discriminated numbers assigned
are F617 (for models without side air bags) and
F618 (for models with side air bags).
D
E
F
G
ARS366
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II
From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
SRS
After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis
mode.
I
J
K
L
SRS803
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode
M
To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
SRS804
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
●
“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
Revision: March 2005
SRS-19
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
●
●
A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time.
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-II screen by touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-II and
select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”
mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the
system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely.
“TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased.
SRS701
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
●
●
EHS0010G
The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis
mode”.
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
SHIA0183E
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis
mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
SRS Operation Check
EHS0010H
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp-User Mode
1.
Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-20
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2.
Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the
examples.
A
B
C
BF-1845D
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-21
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Warning lamp examples
“AIR BAG” warning lamp operation-User mode-
SRS condition
●
No malfunction is detected.
●
No further action is necessary.
●
The system is malfunctioning and
need to be repaired as indicated.
●
Air bag is deployed.
●
Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed.
●
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
●
Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning.
●
SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is
malfunctioning.
●
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
●
Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning.
Reference item
—
SHIA0011E
Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE 2" or SRS-36,
"DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" .
SHIA0012E
Go to SRS-57, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
Go to SRS-41, "Trouble Diagnoses:
“AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn Off" .
SHIA0013E
Go to SRS-42, "Trouble Diagnoses:
“AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn On" .
SHIA0014E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-22
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnoses with CONSULT-II
EHS0010I
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected
in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the
data link connector.
B
C
D
E
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
G
SRS
I
BCIA0029E
5.
J
Touch “AIR BAG”.
K
L
M
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]".
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-23
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7.
Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]".
WHIA0151E
If no malfunction is detected on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]" even
though malfunction is detected in "SRS Operation Check", refer to
SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" , to diagnose the following cases:
●
Self-diagnostic result "SELF-DIAG [PAST]" (previously stored in
the memory) might not be erased after repair.
●
The SRS system malfunctions intermittently.
SRS701
CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]")
Diagnostic item
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode.
●
Low battery voltage (Less than
9V)
●
Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
●
Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased
after repair.
●
Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" .
●
●
Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" .
NO DTC IS DETECTED
●
No malfunction is detected.
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1049] or [B1054]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral
cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050] or [B1055]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051] or [B1056]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1052] or [B1057]
●
Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.
Revision: March 2005
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
Explanation
—
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace driver air bag module.
4. Replace the spiral cable.
5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.
SRS-24
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1065] or [B1070]
●
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1066] or [B1071]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067] or [B1072]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1068] or [B1073]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to
each other.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
Crash zone sensor
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
A
Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1033] or [B1034]
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
B
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front passenger air bag
module.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
C
D
E
F
3. Replace the crash zone sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
G
5. Replace the related harness.
Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1134]
●
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1135]
●
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
●
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1137]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1129]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1130]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1132]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
●
LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module).
I
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
J
K
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
SRS-25
L
3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module).
5. Replace the related harness.
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1118] or [B1119]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
Revision: March 2005
SRS
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
●
RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1113] or [B1114]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
[B1086]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1087]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
●
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
[B1089]
●
The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
[B1081]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1082]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
[B1084]
●
The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1150]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1151]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
●
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1153]
●
Revision: March 2005
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
SRS-26
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1145]
●
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1146]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
●
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1148]
●
The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
●
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
B
C
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
●
Occupant classification system is malfunctioning.
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
[B1022]
A
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
5. Replace the related harness.
CONTROL UNIT
[B1XXX]
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1017], [B1020] or [B1021]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
D
E
F
G
SRS
I
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1018]
●
Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning.
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
BELT TENSION SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1019]
K
L
3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly.
4. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[B1023]
3. Replace front passenger air bag off
indicator.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is
eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still
observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
Revision: March 2005
J
SRS-27
2005 Altima
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
Final checking after repairing SRS by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected
in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
BBIA0002E
4.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
BCIA0030E
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”.
BCIA0031E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-28
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7.
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”,
repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 8.
If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the
malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely.
A
B
C
SRS701
D
8.
Touch “ERASE”.
NOTE:
Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction
(“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”).
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not
erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the
operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired
completely.
E
F
G
WHIA0152E
9.
Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II to “SELECT DIAG MODE”
screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
SRS
I
J
BCIA0031E
10. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
11. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode.
12. Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II.
13. Go to SRS-20, "Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR
BAG” Warning Lamp-User Mode" .
L
M
SRS702
Revision: March 2005
SRS-29
K
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)
Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record
1. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING
Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" .
No
>> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased
after repair. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
Inspecting SRS intermittent malfunction by using CONSULT-II — Diagnosis mode
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected
in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector.
BBIA0002E
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch “AIR BAG”.
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-30
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6.
Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
A
B
C
BCIA0031E
D
7.
If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to
step 10.
E
F
G
WHIA0152E
If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch
“BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”.
SRS
I
J
SRS702
8.
Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
NOTE:
With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed.
K
L
M
BCIA0031E
9. Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”.
10. Touch “PRINT”.
11. Compare diagnostic codes to SRS-32, "CONSULT-II Diagnostic
Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG
RECORD")" .
12. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM”
appears.
13. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II, and both battery cables.
WHIA0153E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-31
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
14. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”,
that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the
Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component.
15. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking.
CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD")
Diagnostic item
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
User mode.
●
Low battery voltage (Less than
9V)
●
Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
●
Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG
[PAST]” (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased
after repair.
●
Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" .
●
●
Intermittent malfunction has been
detected in the past.
Go to SRS-30, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" .
NO DTC IS DETECTED
●
No malfunction is detected.
—
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1049] or [B1054]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral
cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1050] or [B1055]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1051] or [B1056]
●
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1052] or [B1057]
●
Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
[B1065] or [B1070]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
[B1066] or [B1071]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
[B1067] or [B1072]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
[B1068] or [B1073]
●
Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to
each other.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
Crash zone sensor
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace driver air bag module.
4. Replace the spiral cable.
5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1033] or [B1034]
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
[B1035]
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front passenger air bag
module.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the crash zone sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-32
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1134]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1135]
●
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1136]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1137]
●
Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1129]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1130]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1131]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1132]
●
Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.
●
LH side air bag (satellite) sensor
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some
power supply circuit.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module).
B
C
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
D
E
F
3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module).
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
G
5. Replace the related harness.
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1118] or [B1119]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1120]
SRS
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
I
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
●
RH side air bag (satellite) sensor
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1113] or [B1114]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
[B1115]
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
[B1086]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1087]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1088]
●
The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
[B1089]
●
The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
Revision: March 2005
A
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
SRS-33
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
[B1081]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1082]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
some power supply circuit.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1083]
●
The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to
ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
[B1084]
●
The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are
shorted to each other.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
[B1150]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1151]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1152]
●
The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
[B1153]
●
The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
[B1145]
●
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open.
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
[B1146]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
[B1147]
●
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
[B1148]
●
The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are
shorted to each other.
●
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connections.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace LH side curtain air bag
module.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
some power supply circuits.
The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace RH side curtain air bag
module.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
CONTROL UNIT
[B1XXX]
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1017], [B1020] or [B1021]
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
●
Occupant classification system is malfunctioning.
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
[B1022]
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
3. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
5. Replace the related harness.
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1018]
Revision: March 2005
●
Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning.
SRS-34
1. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
Explanation
●
Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
BELT TENSION SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
[B1019]
A
3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly.
B
C
4. Replace RH front seat cushion/
occupant classification system control unit assembly.
●
Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning.
1. Visually check the wiring harness
connection.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible
damage.
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[B1023]
D
E
3. Replace front passenger air bag off
indicator.
4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
F
5. Replace the related harness.
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-35
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble diagnosis without CONSULT-II.
EHS0010J
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using "AIR BAG" warning lamp—Diagnosis mode
NOTE:
SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second.
3. Wait more than 3 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two times.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
SRS is now in Diagnosis mode.
"AIR BAG" warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:
Revision: March 2005
SRS-36
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART
A
B
C
SHIA0026E
D
E
F
G
WHIA0260E
SRS
I
J
K
WHIA0198E
L
M
WHIA0261E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-37
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHIA0200E
WHIA0262E
WHIA0263E
WHIA0203E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-38
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
B
C
WHIA0204E
D
E
F
G
WHIA0264E
SRS
I
J
K
WHIA0265E
L
M
WHIA0266E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-39
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WHIA0267E
WHIA0211E
WHIA0212E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-40
2005 Altima
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off
EHS0010K
A
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6
1. CHECK TO SEE IF ANY AIR BAG MODULES ARE DEPLOYED
B
Are any air bag modules deployed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Refer to SRS-57, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE
D
Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
E
3. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN
F
Replace “AIR BAG” fuse and turn ignition switch ON.
Does the “AIR BAG” fuse blow again?
Yes
>> Repair harness.
No
>> Inspection End.
G
SRS
4. CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-II?
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Visually check the wiring harness connection of diagnosis sensor unit. If the harness connection
check result is OK, replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-55, "Removal and Installation" .
J
K
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION
Is harness connection between warning lamp and air bag diagnosis sensor unit OK?
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-55, "Removal and Installation" .
NG
>> Connect “AIR BAG” warning lamp and air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector properly. If “AIR
BAG” warning lamp still does not go off, replace harness.
Revision: March 2005
I
SRS-41
2005 Altima
L
M
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnoses: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On
EHS0010L
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
1. CHECK “METER” FUSE
Check the 10A meter fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK “METER” FUSE AGAIN
Replace 10A meter fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON.
Does the meter fuse blow again?
Yes
>> Repair harness.
No
>> Inspection End.
3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINATION METER
Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connectors and turn ignition switch ON.
Does "AIR BAG" warning lamp turn on?
Yes
>> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-55, "Removal and Installation" .
No
>> Check the ground circuit of “AIR BAG” warning lamp.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-42
2005 Altima
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:K8510
A
EHS0010M
B
C
D
E
F
LHIA0051E
1.
Driver air bag module
2.
G
Steering wheel
SRS
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a
driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced.
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove the side lids.
2. Remove the left and right side bolts.
I
J
K
L
M
LHIA0074E
3.
4.
Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel.
Disconnect the air bag harness connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors" .
CAUTION:
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
●
Revision: March 2005
SRS-43
2005 Altima
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
●
●
●
●
●
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air
bag module or harness connectors.
Do not disassemble air bag module.
Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
PHIA0291E
●
●
Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
air bag module.
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
●
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
Revision: March 2005
SRS-44
2005 Altima
SPIRAL CABLE
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
PFP:25554
A
EHS0010N
B
C
D
E
F
WHIA0109E
1.
Steering wheel
2.
Lighting and turn signal switch
3.
Wiper and washer switch
4.
Spiral cable
5.
Driver air bag module connector
6.
Column cover upper
7.
Column assembly
8.
Column cover lower
9.
Screw (Do not remove)
G
SRS
10. Screw
I
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-43, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Set the steering wheel to the neutral position.
3. Remove the column cover upper and lower.
4. Disconnect the horn connector.
CAUTION:
Do not tap or bump the steering wheel.
5. Remove steering wheel with steering wheel puller. Be careful
not to over-tighten puller on steering wheel.
PHIA0100E
6.
Remove the spiral cable screws and remove the spiral cable.
CAUTION:
● Do not disassemble spiral cable.
● Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-45
2005 Altima
J
K
L
M
SPIRAL CABLE
7.
Remove the horn switch connector and the spiral cable connector.
CAUTION:
With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable
may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited
number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
SHIA0193E
INSTALLATION
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
CAUTION:
●
The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the
cable is not installed in the correct position.
●
With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap
by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of
turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise
about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
PHIA0275E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-46
2005 Altima
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:K8515
A
EHS0010O
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors.
Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger
air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Refer to
SRS-48, "WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION" for wiring harness modification procedure.
B
C
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module con- D
nectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least E
3 minutes.
●
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Instrument Lower Cover RH and Glove Box" .
F
2. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember.
3. Disconnect the air bag module electrical connectors.
G
● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
SRS
4. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer
to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
5. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove air
I
bag module from the instrument panel assembly.
WHIA0110E
CAUTION:
●
When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front
of air bag module.
●
Always place front passenger air bag module with caution
label side facing upward.
●
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air
bag module or harness connectors.
●
Do not disassemble air bag module.
●
Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
●
Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
●
●
●
J
K
L
M
WHIA0111E
Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
air bag module.
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
SBF814E
INSTALLATION
Original Passenger Air Bag Module
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-47
2005 Altima
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
CAUTION:
●
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
●
Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module
1.
Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument
panel pad assembly.
WHIA0110E
2.
3.
Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air
bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket.
CAUTION:
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
●
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors.
Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger
air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module.
NOTE:
The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger
air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle
that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is
not required.
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
●
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors.
2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors.
3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-48
2005 Altima
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
4.
Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used
vehicle wiring harness.
A
B
C
LHIA0017E
D
5.
Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink
tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in
the heat shrink tubing.
E
F
G
WHIA0062E
SRS
6.
7.
8.
Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire.
Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness.
Locate the front passenger air bag service replacement connector that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to
access the yellow service replacement connector and remove
the dust cover from the connector.
9. Connect service connector to passenger air bag module.
10. Clip to service connector clpping point as shown.
I
J
K
WHIA0156E
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-49
2005 Altima
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
PFP:985P0
EHS0010Q
LHIA0076E
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect side curtain air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
●
Always work from the side of the side curtain air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove three rearmost side curtain air bag inflator fixing bolts, and unhook the side curtain air bag inflator.
3. Disconnect side curtain air bag connector.
● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors" .
4. Unclip wiring harness from side curtain air bag module bracket.
5. Remove side curtain air bag module fixing bolts and remove the side curtain air bag module.
CAUTION:
Always place the side curtain air bag module with the warning label facing upward.
●
Do not attempt to disassemble side curtain air bag module.
●
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air
bag module connector.
●
WHIA0022E
Revision: March 2005
SRS-50
2005 Altima
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
●
●
●
Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped
or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
side curtain air bag module.
A
B
C
SBF814E
D
INSTALLATION
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
●
For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" .
CAUTION:
●
Always work from the side of the side curtain air bag module.
●
After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
E
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-51
2005 Altima
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:98531
EHS0010R
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove crash zone sensor connector.
3. Remove crash zone sensor fixing nuts.
LHIA0077E
CAUTION:
Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
●
Do not attempt to disassemble crash zone sensor.
●
INSTALLATION
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Check crash zone sensor for proper installation.
●
After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
Revision: March 2005
SRS-52
2005 Altima
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
PFP:98830
A
EHS0010S
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-4, "Removal and
Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor fixing nuts.
3. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector.
B
C
D
E
WHIA0149E
F
CAUTION:
Do not use old nuts; replace with new ones.
G
●
Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
●
Do not attempt to disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
SRS
●
Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
●
INSTALLATION
I
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
CAUTION:
●
Check side air bag (satellite) sensor for proper installation.
●
After replacement of side air bag (satellite) sensor, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-53
2005 Altima
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Removal and Installation
PFP:86884
EHS0010T
For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
Revision: March 2005
SRS-54
2005 Altima
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:28556
A
EHS0010U
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
●
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
1. Disconnect each harness connector for the air bag module and
seat belt pre-tensioner.
2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL
ASSEMBLY" .
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connectors.
4. Remove special hex bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
●
Do not use old bolts. Replace with new ones.
●
Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of
deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible
LHIA0078E
signs of damage, replace with new one.
●
Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
B
C
D
E
F
G
INSTALLATION
Installation should be performed in the reverse procedure of removal.
NOTE:
SRS
The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "⇐" pointing toward the front of the
vehicle for proper operation.
CAUTION:
I
●
Check the diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation.
●
After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is
detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
J
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the
vehicle as equipped. Refer to SRS-19, "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)" .
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-55
2005 Altima
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:98852
EHS0013I
The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an integral
part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to SE-15, "Components" to
remove the seat, and SE-20, "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-56
2005 Altima
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
PFP:00015
A
EHS0013J
Check the SRS components using the following table.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part
Air bag module
(driver and front passenger air bag module)
SRS is activated
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
B
C
SRS is NOT activated
1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with
the wheel.
3. Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the
instrument panel.
D
E
4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
5. If damaged—REPLACE. Install air bag modules with new fasteners.
Crash zone sensor
REPLACE the crash
zone sensor and
bracket with new fasteners.
1. Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals
for deformities, and harness for binding.
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone
sensor and bracket.
F
G
3. Install the crash zone sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
REPLACE
Install seat belt pretensioner with new
fasteners.
5. If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.
SRS
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and
harness for binding.
I
2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3. Check retractor for smooth operation.
4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
J
5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
6. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners.
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
K
1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.
2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Steering wheel
L
1. Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
2. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
M
3. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall.
6. If damaged—REPLACE.
Spiral cable
REPLACE the spiral
cable.
1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall.
5. If damaged—REPLACE.
Occupant classification system (Passenger seat)
1. Remove passenger seat.
2. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
3. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
4. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
6. If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-57
2005 Altima
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Part
Harness and connectors
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
2. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness.
1. Visually check instrument panel for damage.
Instrument panel
REPLACE the instrument panel assembly.
2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.
3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel.
For Side Collision
EHS0013K
Check the SRS components using the following table.
●
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" .
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION)
Part
(LH or RH) side curtain air bag module
SRS is activated
Replace the side curtain air bag module.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
SRS is NOT activated
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on
the collision side.
2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module.
3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module.
4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners.
Front (LH or RH) side
air bag module
REPLACE front seatback assembly.
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on
the collision side.
2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly.
(LH or RH) side air
bag (satellite) sensor
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE the side
air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision
side with new fasteners.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness
connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with
new fasteners.
1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag
(satellite) sensor.
3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners.
2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly.
If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly,
–
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
–
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors
for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
6. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
Revision: March 2005
SRS-58
2005 Altima
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Part
Seat (with front side
air bag)
SRS is activated
REPLACE front seatback assembly.
SRS is NOT activated
A
1. Visually check the seat on the collision side.
2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
deformities.
B
–
Harness, connectors and terminals
–
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front
seat)
C
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front
seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Center inner pillar
D
1. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
2. If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar.
Trim/headlining
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
E
2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
F
G
SRS
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
SRS-59
2005 Altima
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Revision: March 2005
SRS-60
2005 Altima
E SUSPENSION
SECTION
WT
ROAD WHEELS & TIRES
A
B
C
D
WT
CONTENTS
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 2
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 2
WHEEL ....................................................................... 3
Inspection ................................................................. 3
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY ................................. 4
Balancing Wheels .................................................... 4
REMOVAL ............................................................. 4
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 4
Rotation .................................................................... 5
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 6
Road Wheel .............................................................. 6
Tire ........................................................................... 6
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WT-1
2005 Altima
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
EES0017S
PS-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
STEERING
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
Shimmy, judder
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
×
TIRES
×
Refer to TIRES in this chart.
BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart",
RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
BRAKE
FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart",
FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart"
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart.
MT-8
DIFFERENTIAL (Transaxle)
ROAD WHEEL
WT-6
×
—
×
Non-uniformity
×
—
×
×
Deformation or damage
×
×
WT-5
×
Uneven tire wear
×
WT-6
×
Incorrect tire pressure
×
WT-4
×
Imbalance
×
WT-3
ROAD
WHEEL
×
Out-of-round
Symptom
×
×
×
Vibration
TIRES
×
×
×
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
×
×
Noise
Reference page
Incorrect tire size
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×: Applicable
Revision: March 2005
WT-2
2005 Altima
WHEEL
WHEEL
Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
A
EES0017T
Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If
deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance
machine.
Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration.
Wheel runout (Dial
indicator value):
3.
4.
PFP:40300
B
C
Refer to WT-6, "Road
Wheel" .
Check front wheel bearings for looseness.
Check front suspension for looseness.
D
SFA975B
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WT-3
2005 Altima
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
Balancing Wheels
PFP:40300
EES0017U
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal procedures.
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
● After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the
wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
●
1.
2.
a.
b.
If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with
a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the
mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz.) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz.) = 40 g (1.41 oz.) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value.
Example:
37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz.)
37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz.)
SMA054D
Install balance weight in the position shown.
When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved
area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance
weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
● Always use genuine Nissan adhesion balance weights.
● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with
new ones.
● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight.
SMA055D
Revision: March 2005
WT-4
2005 Altima
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY
c.
3.
4.
5.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz.),
install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as
shown.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
Start wheel balancer again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual
unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz.) each or below.
● If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz.), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance):
Maximum allowable
unbalance
Dynamic (At rim flange)
Static
●
●
B
C
SMA056D
D
WT
5 g (0.18 oz.) (one side)
10 g (0.35 oz.)
Rotation
●
A
F
EES0017V
Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" .
Do not include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires.
CAUTION:
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. Refer to WT-6,
"Tire" .
G
H
I
J
SMA829C
K
Tightening torque of wheel nut
: 98.1 - 117 N·m (10 - 12 kg-m, 73 - 86 ft-lb)
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WT-5
2005 Altima
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
Wheel type
Maximum radial
runout limit
Allowable quantity of
residual unbalance
PFP:00030
EES0017W
Steel
Aluminum
Inside
Outside
Lateral mm (in)
0.3 (0.012) or less
1.0 (0.039) or less
0.9 (0.035) or less
Radial mm (in)
0.3 (0.012) or less
0.8 (0.031) or less
0.4 (0.016) or less
Dynamic
(On the ear part)
Less than 5 g (0.18 oz.) (per side)
Static (On the ear part)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz.)
Tire
EES0017X
Unit: kPa
(kg/cm2
, psi)
Air pressure
Tire size
Conventional tire
Spare tire
—
420 (4.2, 60)
200 (2.04, 29)
—
Front
230 (2.35, 33)
—
Rear
210 (2.14, 30)
—
240 (2.45, 35)
—
T135/70R16
T135/90R16 (when equipped with TCS)
T155/80R17
P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P225/45R18
Revision: March 2005
WT-6
2005 Altima
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
WW
WIPER, WASHER & HORN
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .................. 4
Components Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................... 4
System Description .................................................. 4
LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION ...................... 5
HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION ........................... 5
INTERMITTENT OPERATION .............................. 5
AUTO STOP OPERATION .................................... 6
WASHER OPERATION ......................................... 6
MIST OPERATION ................................................ 6
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION ......................................... 6
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION..... 6
CAN Communication System Description ................ 7
Wiring Diagram — WIPER — .................................. 8
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 10
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ......11
Work Flow ...............................................................11
Preliminary Inspection .............................................11
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT ..............................................11
CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 13
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 13
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 14
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 14
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 15
CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 15
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 16
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 16
Trouble Diagnosis .................................................. 17
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 17
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT .................................................................. 20
ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................................................... 22
ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE... 22
Revision: March 2005
ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................................................... 24
FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION
SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED... 24
WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT
WASHER OPERATES ........................................ 25
FRONT WIPERS OPERATE FOR 10 SECONDS,
STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER
REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES,
THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE ......................... 25
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms,
Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location ............... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 27
Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage .......................................................................... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .................................... 29
Washer Tube Layout .............................................. 29
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer
Switch ..................................................................... 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 30
Removal and Installation of Washer Tank .............. 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 30
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............. 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ............................................. 32
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — ................................. 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 33
REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION ................................................... 33
POWER SOCKET ..................................................... 34
Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT — ................................ 34
Removal and Installation ........................................ 35
HORN ........................................................................ 36
WW-1
2005 Altima
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Wiring Diagram — HORN — .................................. 36
Removal and Installation ........................................ 37
REMOVAL (HORN HIGH) ................................... 37
INSTALLATION (HORN HIGH) ............................ 37
REMOVAL (HORN LOW) .................................... 37
INSTALLATION (HORN LOW) ............................ 37
Revision: March 2005
WW-2
2005 Altima
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTION
PFP:00011
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
A
EKS008QF
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
B
C
D
E
F
G
EKS008QG
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
●
Refer to GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-3
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Components Parts and Harness Connector Location
PFP:28810
EKS008QH
WKIA3155E
System Description
EKS008QI
Both front wiper relays are located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room)
●
Wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals. Terminal combination status is read by BCM (body control module)
●
BCM controls front wiper LO, HI, and INT (intermittent) operation
●
IPDM E/R operates the wiper motor according to CAN communication signals from the BCM.
Power is supplied at all times
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
●
to BCM terminal 70, and
●
through 20A fuse (No. 39, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
to front wiper relay, located in the IPDM E/R.
With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied at all times
●
through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
●
Revision: March 2005
WW-4
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
to BCM terminal 38, and
●
to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
●
through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 44
●
to front washer motor terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
●
to BCM terminal 67 and
●
to combination switch terminal 9
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61, and
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 and
●
to front wiper motor terminal E
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
●
A
B
C
D
E
LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and the front wiper switch is turned to low position,
the BCM detects a low speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
BCM then sends front wiper (low) request signal over CAN communication lines
●
from BCM terminals 39 and 40
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (low) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay.
With the front wiper relay energized, power is supplied
●
through front wiper relay
●
to front wiper HI relay
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 21
●
to front wiper motor terminal L.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION
F
G
H
I
J
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and the front wiper switch is turned to high position,
the BCM detects a high speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
BCM then sends front wiper (high) request signal over CAN communication lines
WW
●
from BCM terminals 39 and 40
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (high) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper and
L
the front wiper HI relays.
With the front wiper and the front wiper HI relays energized, power is supplied
●
through front wiper relay
M
●
to front wiper HI relay
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 31
●
to front wiper motor terminal H.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
INTERMITTENT OPERATION
Wiper intermittent operation delay interval is determined from the combination of the intermittent wiper dial
position inputs and vehicle speed. During each intermittent operation delay interval, the BCM sends a front
wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R to operate the wipers.
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position and the front wiper switch is turned to intermittent position, the BCM detects a front wiper (intermittent) ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function.
BCM then sends front wiper (intermittent) request signal over CAN communication lines
●
from BCM terminals 39 and 40
●
to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49.
When BCM determines that combination switch status is front wiper intermittent ON, it performs the following
operations.
●
BCM detects ON/OFF status of intermittent wiper dial position
Revision: March 2005
WW-5
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
BCM calculates operation interval from wiper dial position and vehicle speed signal received through CAN
communications
●
BCM sends front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R at calculated operation interval.
When IPDM E/R receives front wiper request signal (INT), it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay.
It then sends auto-stop signal to BCM and conducts intermittent front wiper motor operation.
●
AUTO STOP OPERATION
When the wiper arms are not located at the base of the windshield and the wiper switch is turned OFF, the
wiper motor will continue to operate until the wiper arms reach windshield base. When wiper arms reach base
of windshield, front wiper motor terminals E and P are connected.
Ground is supplied
●
to IPDM E/R terminal 32
●
through front wiper motor terminal P
●
through front wiper motor terminal E
●
through grounds E15 and E24.
The IPDM E/R sends auto stop operation signal to BCM through CAN communication lines.
When BCM receives auto stop operation signal, BCM sends wiper stop signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication lines. The IPDM E/R then de-energizes the front wiper relay.
Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
WASHER OPERATION
When wiper switch is in front wiper washer position, BCM detects front wiper washer signal by BCM wiper
switch reading function. Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
●
through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R)
●
through IPDM E/R terminal 44
●
to front washer motor terminal 1.
When front wiper switch is turned to washer position, ground is supplied
●
to front washer motor terminal 2
●
through combination switch terminal 3
●
through combination switch terminal 9
●
through grounds F14, M57 and M61.
With ground supplied, the front washer motor is operated.
When BCM detects that front washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, BCM uses CAN communication and sends wiper request signal to IPDM E/R for low speed operation of wipers.
When BCM detects that washer switch is OFF, low speed operation cycles approximately 3 times and then
stops.
MIST OPERATION
When the wiper switch is temporarily placed in the mist position, wiper low speed operation cycles once and
then stops.
For additional information about wiper operation under this condition, refer to WW-5, "LOW SPEED WIPER
OPERATION" .
If the switch is held in the mist position, low speed operation continues.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
BCM includes fail-safe function to prevent malfunction of electrical components controlled by CAN communications if a malfunction in CAN communications occurs.
BCM uses CAN communications to stop output of electrical components it controls.
Until ignition switch is turned off, front wiper remains in same status as just before fail-safe control was initiated. (If wiper was in low speed operation just before fail-safe, it continues low speed operation until ignition
switch is turned OFF.)
When fail-safe status is initiated, BCM remains in standby until normal signals are received.
When normal signals are received, fail-safe status is canceled.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
Revision: March 2005
WW-6
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
EKS008QJ
A
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-7
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —
EKS008QK
WKWA2908E
Revision: March 2005
WW-8
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
WKWA1348E
Revision: March 2005
WW-9
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Values for BCM
EKS008QL
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Signal name
2
L
Combination switch input 5
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation or condition
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
Reference Value (V)
(Approx.)
SKIA5291E
3
R/Y
Combination switch input 4
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
4
R/G
Combination switch input 3
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
5
R/B
Combination switch input 2
6
R/W
Combination switch input 1
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
32
L/W
Combination switch output 5
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
33
G/Y
Combination switch output 4
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5292E
34
G/R
Combination switch output 3
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
SKIA5291E
Revision: March 2005
WW-10
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Signal name
35
G/B
Combination switch output 2
36
G/W
Combination switch output 1
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
Reference Value (V)
(Approx.)
A
B
ON
●
Light switch and wiper switch OFF
●
Wiper dial position 4
C
SKIA5292E
38
R
Ignition switch (ON)
ON
—
Battery
39
L
CAN-H
ON
—
—
40
P
CAN-L
ON
—
—
67
B
Ground
—
—
0
70
W/B
OFF
—
Battery
Battery power
D
E
Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R
EKS008QM
F
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
21
L
31
32
Signal name
Low speed signal
L/B
High speed signal
L/Y
38
B
44
R/W
48
Wiper auto stop signal
Ignition
switch
ON
ON
Operation or condition
Wiper switch
Wiper switch
ON
Reference value (V)
(Approx.)
OFF
0
LO
Battery
OFF
0
HI
Battery
Wiper operating
Battery
Wiper stopped
0
H
I
J
Ground
—
—
0
Front washer motor power
ON
—
Battery
L
CAN-H
ON
—
—
49
P
CAN-L
ON
—
—
60
B
Ground
—
—
0
WW
L
Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G
EKS008QN
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.
Understand the system description, refer to WW-4, "System Description" .
Perform preliminary inspection, refer to WW-11, "Preliminary Inspection" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does wiper function operate normally? If it operates normally, GO TO 6. If not, GO TO 4.
Inspection End.
Preliminary Inspection
M
EKS008QO
INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Inspection procedure
1. CHECK FUSE
Check if wiper or washer fuse is blown.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Front washer motor
Ignition ON or START
47
Front wiper relay
Battery
39
Revision: March 2005
WW-11
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Unit
BCM
Power source
Fuse No.
Ignition ON or START
1
Battery
f
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of blown fuse before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" .
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and
ground.
BCM
Ignition switch position
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
M18
38 (R)
M20
70 (W/B)
Ground
OFF
ON
0V
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between BCM and fuse.
WKIA1434E
3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM)
Check for continuity between the following terminals on BCM connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
M20
67 (B)
Ground
Ignition switch
condition
Continuity
OFF
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Inspection End.
NG
>> Repair/replace BCM ground circuit.
Revision: March 2005
WKIA1435E
WW-12
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Function (BCM)
EKS008QP
A
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
BCM diagnostic
test item
Diagnostic mode
Description
B
WORK SUPPORT
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Inspection by part
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
ECU PART NUMBER
CONFIGURATION
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM
for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are
received from the BCM and received data is displayed.
C
Displays BCM input/output data in real time.
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
Displays BCM self-diagnosis results.
D
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
BCM part number can be read.
E
Performs BCM configuration read/write functions.
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0002E
2.
J
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
WW
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
WW-13
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST
ITEM" screen.
LKIA0183E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Monitor item name
"OPERATION OR UNIT"
Contents
IGN ON SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch
signal.
IGN SW CAN
"ON/OFF"
Displays "IGN switch ON (ON)/Other OFF or ACC (OFF)" status as judged from CAN communications.
FR WIPER HI
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER LOW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WIPER INT
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
FR WASHER SW
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal.
(1 - 7)
Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal.
INT VOLUME
FR WIPER STOP
"ON/OFF"
Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto-stop signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
"0.0 km/h"
Displays vehicle speed as received from CAN communication.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s).
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Front wiper HI output
Revision: March 2005
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
FR WIPER (HI)
Description
Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
WW-14
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Test item
Display on CONSULT-II
screen
Description
Front wiper LO output
FR WIPER (LO)
Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
Front wiper INT output
FR WIPER (INT)
Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation.
CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)
A
B
EKS008QQ
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
C
Description
Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results.
Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
D
E
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the
ignition switch ON.
F
G
H
I
BBIA0002E
J
2.
Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
WW
L
M
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, go to GI-39, "Consult-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
Revision: March 2005
WW-15
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
4.
Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG
MODE" screen.
BCIA0031E
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR
ITEM" screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the items.
MAIN SIGNALS
Monitors predetermined items.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects and monitors the individual item selected.
4.
5.
6.
Touch "START".
When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items will be
monitored.
Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording,
touch "STOP".
All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu
Monitor item selection
CONSULT-II
screen display
Display or unit
ALL
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Description
FR WIP REQ
STOP/1LO/LO/HI
x
x
x
Signal status input from BCM.
Wiper auto stop
WIP AUTO STOP
ACT P/STOP P
x
x
x
Output status of IPDM E/R.
Wiper protection
WIP PROT
OFF/LS/HS/BLOCK
x
x
x
Control status of IPDM E/R.
Item name
Front wiper
request
NOTE:
Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s).
During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Test item
Front wiper (HI, LO) output
Revision: March 2005
CONSULT-II
screen display
FRONT WIPER
Description
With a certain operation (OFF, HI, LO) front wiper relays can be operated.
WW-16
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS008QR
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
A
CAUTION:
During IPDM E/R fail-safe control, front wipers may not operate. Refer to PG-15, "CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL" to make sure that it is not in fail-safe status.
B
Inspection Procedure
1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS
C
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
1.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-21,
"Auto Active Test" .
2. Confirm front wiper operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
E
F
SKIA3486E
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-17
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminals and
front wiper motor connector terminals.
IPDM E/R
Front wiper motor
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
Connector
31 (L/B)
E122
21 (L)
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
H (L/B)
E23
32 (L/Y)
L (L)
Yes
P (L/Y)
WKIA1564E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminals and
ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
31 (L/B)
E122
21 (L)
Ground
No
32 (L/Y)
LKIA0383E
5.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminals and
ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E121
60 (B)
E124
38 (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
WKIA1021E
6.
Check continuity between front wiper motor connector terminal
E and ground.
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E23
E (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper
motor and ground.
Revision: March 2005
WW-18
WKIA0234E
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
A
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
1.
1.
B
Without CONSULT-II
Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-21,
"Auto Active Test" .
C
D
SKIA3486E
E
When front wiper relay, and front wiper HI relay are operating, check
voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground.
F
IPDM E/R
(+)
Connector
(–)
Voltage
(Approx.)
G
Terminal (wire color)
21 (L)
E122
Condition
31 (L/B)
32 (L/Y)
Ground
Stopped
0
LO operation
Battery voltage
Stopped
0
HI operation
Battery voltage
LO operation
Battery voltage
Stopped
0
H
WKIA0404E
I
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the front wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and
Linkage" .
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER INT", "FR WIPER LOW" and "FR WIPER HI" turn
ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION
SWITCH READING FUNCTION" .
WW-19
WW
L
M
WKIA1018E
Revision: March 2005
J
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
5. BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out self-diagnosis of BCM.
Displayed self-diagnosis results
NO DTC>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check CAN communication line of BCM.
GO TO LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
SKIA1039E
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT
Inspection Procedure
1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that
"WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to
wiper operation.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SKIA5301E
Revision: March 2005
WW-20
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R AND FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector and front wiper
motor connector.
IPDM E/R
B
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E122
32 (L/Y)
C
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E23
P (L/Y)
Yes
D
WKIA1566E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and
ground.
E
F
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
E122
32 (L/Y)
Continuity
G
Ground
No
H
LKIA0321E
I
5.
Check continuity between front wiper motor connector terminal
E and ground.
J
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
E23
E (B)
Continuity
Ground
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> ● Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
● Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper
motor and ground.
Revision: March 2005
WW-21
WW
L
WKIA0234E
M
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
3. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION
While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure
voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground.
IPDM E/R
(+)
Connector
E122
(–)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Wiper operating
Battery
voltage
Wiper stopped
0V
Terminal
(wire color)
32 (L/Y)
Ground
WKIA0407E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" .
ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPERATE
Inspection Procedure
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER LOW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of
wiper switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE
Inspection Procedure
1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS
With CONSULT-II
1. Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-21,
"Auto Active Test" .
2. Confirm front wiper operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: March 2005
WW-22
SKIA3486E
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and
front wiper motor connector terminal.
IPDM E/R
B
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E122
31 (L/B)
C
Continuity
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E23
H (L/B)
Yes
D
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness
between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
WKIA1568E
3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION
E
F
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
3. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen.
1.
G
H
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-21,
"Auto Active Test" .
I
SKIA3486E
When front wiper HI relay is operating, check voltage between IPDM
E/R terminal 31 (L/B) and terminals 38 (B), 60 (B).
J
WW
IPDM E/R
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E122
31 (L/B)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E124
38 (B)
E121
60 (B)
Voltage
(Approx.)
L
Battery
voltage
M
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal
and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" .
NG
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
Revision: March 2005
WW-23
WKIA0409E
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER HI" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper
switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE
Inspection Procedure
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper
switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED
Inspection Procedure
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "INT VOLUME" changes in order from 1 to 7 according to operation of the intermittent switch dial position.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
WKIA1018E
Revision: March 2005
WW-24
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT WASHER OPERATES
Inspection Procedure
A
1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION
B
Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check
that "FR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of
front washer switch.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-20, "Removal and
Installation of BCM" .
NG
>> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-30, "Removal and
Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
C
D
WKIA1018E
FRONT WIPERS OPERATE FOR 10 SECONDS, STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER
REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES, THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE
CAUTION:
●
When auto stop signal has not varied for 10 seconds or longer while IPDM E/R is operating front
wipers, IPDM E/R considers front wipers locked and stops wiper output, which causes this symptom.
●
This status can be checked by using IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR". Under this condition, "WIP
PROT" reads "BLOCK".
E
F
G
H
Inspection Procedure
1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR
I
With CONSULT-II
Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that
"WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to
wiper operation.
Without CONSULT-II
GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and
Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
J
WW
L
SKIA5301E
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-25
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and
front wiper motor connector terminal.
IPDM E/R
Front wiper motor
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
Continuity
Connector
E122
32 (L/Y)
E23
P (L/Y)
Yes
WKIA1566E
4.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector terminal and
ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
E122
32 (L/Y)
Continuity
Ground
No
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect connectors. GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
LKIA0321E
3. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION
While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure
voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground.
IPDM E/R
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
E122
32 (L/Y)
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
Wiper operating
Battery
voltage
Wiper stopped
0V
Ground
WKIA0407E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" .
NG
>> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" .
Revision: March 2005
WW-26
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop
Location
EKS008QS
A
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Operate wiper motor and stop it at the auto stop position.
Remove the wiper arm caps and mounting nuts and remove wiper arms from vehicle.
B
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop).
Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before
tightening nut.
Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it "OFF".
Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance "L1" and "L2".
Clearance "L1"
Clearance "L2"
●
●
C
D
E
: 24.5 - 39.5 mm (0.965 - 1.555 in)
: 32.5 - 47.5 mm (1.280 - 1.870 in)
SEL543TA
Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness.
Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper
arm nuts
F
G
: 19.7 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 174 in-lb)
H
I
SEL024J
Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage
EKS008QT
J
WW
L
M
WKIA0988E
1.
Wiper link
4.
Front wiper motor
Revision: March 2005
2.
Wiper link
3.
WW-27
Wiper frame
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operate the wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop).
Remove wiper arms from the vehicle. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms,
Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" .
Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect wiper motor connector.
Remove bracket and wiper frame, link and motor assembly.
Remove wiper motor from wiper frame and link assembly.
WKIA0067E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
●
Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
●
Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper
switch OFF (auto stop).
2. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
3. Install wiper motor to bracket and wiper frame and link assembly, and install assembly to the vehicle.
Wiper motor assembly bolts
4.
5.
6.
: 4.5 N·m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb)
Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper
switch OFF (auto stop).
Install cowl top cover. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .
Install wiper arms. Refer to WW-27, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper
Arms Stop Location" .
Revision: March 2005
WW-28
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
EKS008QU
A
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown.
●
±10°
Adjustable range:
B
C
D
SEL241P
*1
350 mm (13.78 in)
*5
135 mm (5.31 in)
*2
190 mm (7.48 in)
*6
230 mm (9.06 in)
*3
320 mm (12.60 in)
*7
275 mm (10.83 in)
*4
135 mm (5.31 in)
*8
440 mm (17.32 in)
E
F
G
SEL544T
Washer Tube Layout
H
EKS008QV
I
J
WW
L
M
WKIA0069E
Revision: March 2005
WW-29
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
EKS008QW
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT
PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
Remove wiper washer switch connector.
Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch
away from steering column to remove.
WKIA0071E
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation of Washer Tank
EKS008QX
REMOVAL
1.
Pull out washer tank inlet.
WKIA0072E
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove front washer motor connector and washer fluid level
sensor connector (if equipped).
Remove washer tank screws.
Remove washer hose and remove the washer tank from the
vehicle.
WKIA0073E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer tank inlet and check for water leaks.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Washer tank installation screws
Tightening torque
: 4.5 N·m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb)
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor
EKS008QY
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove front washer motor connector and hose.
Revision: March 2005
WW-30
2005 Altima
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
3.
Pull out front washer motor in the direction of the arrow as
shown and remove the washer motor from the washer tank.
A
B
C
WKIA0282E
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing front washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-31
2005 Altima
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —
PFP:35330
EKS008QZ
WKWA2970E
Revision: March 2005
WW-32
2005 Altima
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Removal and Installation
EKS008R0
A
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the A/T finisher (A/T models) or M/T finisher (M/T models). Refer to IP-13, "A/T Finisher" or
IP-14, "M/T Finisher".
Remove console box finisher. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" .
Remove socket.
Press out ring from the back of console box finisher.
B
C
D
E
WKIA0075E
INSTALLATION
F
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-33
2005 Altima
POWER SOCKET
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —
PFP:253A2
EKS008R1
WKWA1358E
Revision: March 2005
WW-34
2005 Altima
POWER SOCKET
Removal and Installation
EKS008R2
A
1. Remove the console finisher. Refer to IP-15, "Center Console" .
2. Disconnect power socket connector.
3. Remove socket from the console.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
B
C
D
WKIA0076E
E
F
G
H
I
J
WW
L
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-35
2005 Altima
HORN
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —
PFP:25610
EKS008R3
WKWA1359E
Revision: March 2005
WW-36
2005 Altima
HORN
Removal and Installation
EKS008R4
A
REMOVAL (HORN HIGH)
1.
2.
3.
Remove right headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect horn connector.
Remove horn bolt, then remove the horn.
B
C
D
WKIA0077E
INSTALLATION (HORN HIGH)
1.
Horn bolt
2.
3.
E
Install the horn and tighten horn bolt to specified torque.
: 17 N·m (1.7 kg-m, 12.3 ft-lb)
F
Connect the horn connector.
Install right headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
REMOVAL (HORN LOW)
1.
2.
3.
G
Remove left headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect horn connector.
Remove horn bolt, then remove the horn.
H
I
J
WKIA0078E
INSTALLATION (HORN LOW)
1.
Horn bolt
2.
3.
WW
Install the horn and tighten horn bolt to specified torque.
: 17 N·m (1.7 kg-m, 12.3 ft-lb)
L
Connect the horn connector.
Install left headlamp. Refer to LT-30, "Removal and Installation" .
M
Revision: March 2005
WW-37
2005 Altima
HORN
Revision: March 2005
WW-38
2005 Altima